Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 571

PART 571—FEDERAL MOTOR 571.135 Standard No. 135; Passenger brake systems. VEHICLE SAFETY STANDARDS 571.138 [Reserved] 571.139 Standard No. 139; New pneumatic Subpart A—General for light vehicles. 571.201 Standard No. 201; Occupant protec- Sec. tion in interior impact. 571.1 Scope. 571.202 Standard No. 202; Head restraints. 571.3 Definitions. 571.203 Standard No. 203; Impact protection 571.4 Explanation of usage. for the driver from the steering control 571.5 Matter incorporated by reference. system. 571.7 Applicability. 571.204 Standard No. 204; Steering control 571.8 Effective date. rearward displacement. 571.9 Separability. 571.205 Standard No. 205; Glazing materials. 571.206 Standard No. 206; Door locks and Subpart B—Federal Motor Vehicle Safety door retention components. Standards 571.207 Standard No. 207; Seating systems. 571.208 Standard No. 208; Occupant crash 571.101 Standard No. 101; Controls and dis- protection. plays. 571.208a Optional test procedures for vehi- 571.102 Standard No. 102; Transmission shift lever sequence, starter interlock, and cles manufactured between January 27, transmission braking effect. 2004 and August 31, 2004. 571.103 Standard No. 103; 571.209 Standard No. 209; Seat belt assem- defrosting and defogging systems. blies. 571.104 Standard No. 104; Windshield wiping 571.210 Standard No. 210; Seat belt assembly and washing systems. anchorages. 571.105 Standard No. 105; Hydraulic and 571.211 [Reserved] electric brake systems. 571.212 Standard No. 212; Windshield mount- 571.106 Standard No. 106; Brake hoses. ing. 571.107 [Reserved] 571.213 Standard No. 213; Child restraint 571.108 Standard No. 108; Lamps, reflective systems. devices, and associated equipment. 571.214 Standard No. 214; Side impact pro- 571.109 Standard No. 109; New pneumatic tection. tires. 571.215 [Reserved] 571.110 Standard No. 110; selection and 571.216 Standard No. 216; Roof crush resist- rims. ance. 571.111 Standard No. 111; Rearview mirrors. 571.217 Standard No. 217; Bus emergency 571.112 [Reserved] exits and window retention and release. 571.113 Standard No. 113; latch system. 571.218 Standard No. 218; Motorcycle hel- 571.114 Standard No. 114; Theft protection. mets. 571.115 [Reserved] 571.219 Standard No. 219; Windshield zone 571.116 Standard No. 116; Motor vehicle intrusion. brake fluids. 571.220 Standard No. 220; School bus roll- 571.117 Standard No. 117; Retreaded pneu- over protection. matic tires. 571.221 Standard No. 221; School bus body 571.118 Standard No. 118; Power-operated joint strength. window, partition, and roof panel sys- 571.222 Standard No. 222; School bus pas- tems. senger seating and crash protection. 571.119 Standard No. 119; New pneumatic 571.223 Standard No. 223; Rear impact tires for vehicles other than passenger guards. . 571.224 Standard No. 224; Rear impact pro- 571.120 Standard No. 120; Tire selection and tection. rims for motor vehicles other than pas- 571.225 Standard No. 225; Child restraint an- senger cars. chorage systems. 571.121 Standard No. 121; Air brake systems. 571.301 Standard No. 301; Fuel system integ- 571.122 Standard No. 122; Motorcycle brake rity. systems. 571.302 Standard No. 302; Flammability of 571.123 Standard No. 123; Motorcycle con- interior materials. trols and displays. 571.303 Standard No. 303; Fuel system integ- 571.124 Standard No. 124; Accelerator con- rity of compressed natural gas vehicles. trol systems. 571.304 Standard No. 304; Compressed nat- 571.125 Standard No. 125; Warning devices. ural gas fuel container integrity. 571.126–571.128 [Reserved] 571.305 Standard No. 305; Electric-powered 571.129 Standard No. 129; New non-pneu- vehicles: electrolyte spillage and elec- matic tires for passenger cars. trical shock protection. 571.131 Standard No. 131; School bus pedes- 571.401 Standard No. 401; Internal re- trian safety devices. lease.

189

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00189 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.1 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

571.403 Standard No. 403; Platform lift sys- sition is likely to be used as a seating tems for motor vehicles. position while the vehicle is in motion, 571.404 Standard No. 404; Platform lift in- except for auxiliary seating accom- stallations in motor vehicles. 571.500 Standard No. 500; Low–speed vehi- modations such as temporary or fold- cles. ing jump seats. Any bench or split- AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 322, 30111, 30115, 30166 bench seat in a passenger car, truck or and 30177; delegation of authority at 49 CFR multipurpose passenger vehicle with a 1.50. GVWR less than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 EDITORIAL NOTE: Nomenclature changes to pounds), having greater than 127 centi- part 571 appear at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, 2004. meters (50 inches) of hip room (meas- ured in accordance with SAE Standard Subpart A—General J1100(a)) shall have not less than three designated seating positions, unless the § 571.1 Scope. seat design or vehicle design is such This part contains the Federal Motor that the center position cannot be used Vehicle Safety Standards for motor ve- for seating. For the sole purpose of de- hicles and motor vehicle equipment es- termining the classification of any ve- tablished under section 103 of the Na- hicle sold or introduced into interstate tional Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safe- commerce for purposes that include ty Act of 1966 (80 Stat. 718). carrying students to and from school [33 FR 19703, Dec. 25, 1968. Redesignated at 35 or related events, any location in such FR 5118, Mar. 26, 1970] vehicle intended for securement of an occupied wheelchair during vehicle op- § 571.3 Definitions. eration shall be regarded as four des- (a) Statutory definitions. All terms de- ignated seating positions. fined in section 102 of the Act are used Driver means the occupant of a motor in their statutory meaning. vehicle seated immediately behind the (b) Other definitions. As used in this steering control system. chapter— Emergency brake means a mechanism Act means the National Traffic and designed to stop a motor vehicle after Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966 (80 a failure of the service brake system. Stat. 718). 5th percentile adult female means a Approved, unless used with reference person possessing the dimensions and to another person, means approved by weight of the 5th percentile adult fe- the Secretary. male specified for the total age group Boat trailer means a trailer designed with cradle-type mountings to trans- in Public Health Service Publication port a boat and configured to permit No. 1000, Series 11, No. 8, ‘‘Weight, launching of the boat from the rear of Height, and Selected Body Dimensions the trailer. of Adults.’’ Bus means a motor vehicle with mo- Firefighting vehicle means a vehicle tive power, except a trailer, designed designed exclusively for the purpose of for carrying more than 10 persons. fighting fires. Curb weight means the weight of a Fixed collision barrier means a flat, motor vehicle with standard equip- vertical, unyielding surface with the ment; maximum capacity of engine following characteristics: fuel, oil, and coolant; and, if so (1) The surface is sufficiently large equipped, air conditioning and addi- that when struck by a tested vehicle, tional weight optional engine. no portion of the vehicle projects or Designated seating capacity means the passes beyond the surface. number of designated seating positions (2) The approach is a horizontal sur- provided. face that is large enough for the vehi- Designated seating position means any plan view location capable of accom- cle to attain a stable attitude during modating a person at least as large as its approach to the barrier, and that a 5th percentile adult female, if the does not restrict vehicle motion during overall seat configuration and design impact. and vehicle design is such that the po-

190

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00190 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.3

(3) When struck by a vehicle, the sur- which results from a 5–inch forward ad- face and its supporting structure ab- justment of the seat or 0.75 inch; and sorb no significant portion of the vehi- (2) For seats that are not adjustable cle’s kinetic energy, so that a perform- fore and aft, at the seating reference ance requirement described in terms of point. impact with a fixed collision barrier (b) With the pivot point to ‘‘top-of- must be met no matter how small an head’’ dimension at each value allowed amount of energy is absorbed by the by the device and the interior dimen- barrier. sions of the vehicle, determine all con- Forward control means a configura- tact points above the lower windshield tion in which more than half of the en- glass line and forward of the seating gine length is rearward of the foremost reference point. point of the windshield base and the (c) With the head form at each con- steering wheel hub is in the forward tact point, and with the device in a quarter of the vehicle length. vertical position if no contact points Full trailer means a trailer, except a exists for a particular adjusted length, pole trailer, that is equipped with two pivot the measuring device forward and or more axles that support the entire downward through all arcs in vertical weight of the trailer. planes to 90° each side of the vertical Gross axle weight rating or GAWR longitudinal plane through the seating means the value specified by the vehi- reference point, until the head form cle manufacturer as the load-carrying contacts an interior surface or until it capacity of a single axle system, as is tangent to a horizontal plane 1 inch measured at the tire-ground interfaces. above the seating reference point, Gross combination weight rating or whichever occurs first. GCWR means the value specified by the Interior compartment door means any manufacturer as the loaded weight of a door in the interior of the vehicle in- combination vehicle. stalled by the manufacturer as a cover Gross vehicle weight rating or GVWR for storage space normally used for means the value specified by the manu- personal effects. facturer as the loaded weight of a sin- gle vehicle. Longitudinal or longitudinally means parallel to the longitudinal centerline H point means the mechanically hinged hip point of a manikin which of the vehicle. simulates the actual pivot center of Low-speed vehicle means a 4-wheeled the human torso and thigh, described motor vehicle, other than a truck, in SAE Recommended Practice J826, whose speed attainable in 1.6 km (1 ‘‘Manikins for Use in Defining Vehicle mile) is more than 32 kilometers per Seating Accommodations,’’ November hour (20 miles per hour) and not more 1962. than 40 kilometers per hour (25 miles Head impact area means all nonglazed per hour) on a paved level surface. surfaces of the interior of a vehicle Motorcycle means a motor vehicle that are statically contactable by a 6.5- with motive power having a seat or inch diameter spherical head form of a saddle for the use of the rider and de- measuring device having a pivot point signed to travel on not more than three to ‘‘top-of-head’’ dimension infinitely wheels in contact with the ground. adjustable from 29 to 33 inches in ac- Motor-driven cycle means a motor- cordance with the following procedure, cycle with a motor that produces 5- or its graphic equivalent: brake horsepower or less. (a) At each designated seating posi- Multifunction school activity bus tion, place the pivot point of the meas- (MFSAB) means a school bus whose uring device— purposes do not include transporting (1) For seats that are adjustable fore students to and from home or school and aft, at— bus stops. (i) The seating reference point; and Multipurpose passenger vehicle means (ii) A point 5 inches horizontally for- a motor vehicle with motive power, ex- ward of the seating reference point and cept a low-speed vehicle or trailer, de- vertically above the seating reference signed to carry 10 persons or less which point an amount equal to the rise is constructed either on a truck

191

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00191 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.3 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

or with special features for occasional for purposes that include carrying stu- off-road operation. dents to and from school or related Open-body type vehicle means a vehi- events, but does not include a bus de- cle having no occupant compartment signed and sold for operation as a com- top or an occupant compartment top mon carrier in urban transportation. that can be installed or removed by the Seating reference point (SgRP) means user at his convenience. the unique design H-point, as defined in Outboard designated seating position SAE J1100 (June 1984), which: means a designated seating position (a) Establishes the rearmost normal where a longitudinal vertical plane design driving or riding position of tangent to the outboard side of the each designated seating position, which seat cushion is less than 12 inches from includes consideration of all modes of the innermost point on the inside sur- adjustment, horizontal, vertical, and face of the vehicle at a height between tilt, in a vehicle; the design H-point and the shoulder (b) Has X, Y, and Z coordinates, as reference point (as shown in fig. 1 of defined in SAE J1100 (June 1984), estab- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard lished relative to the designed vehicle No. 210) and longitudinally between the structure; front and rear edges of the seat cush- (c) Simulates the position of the ion. pivot center of the human torso and Overall vehicle width means the nomi- thigh; and nal design dimension of the widest part (d) Is the reference point employed to of the vehicle, exclusive of signal position the two-dimensional drafting lamps, marker lamps, outside rearview template with the 95th percentile leg mirrors, flexible extensions, and described in SAE J826 (May 1987), or, if mud flaps, determined with doors and the drafting template with the 95th windows closed and the wheels in the percentile leg cannot be positioned in straight-ahead position. the seating position, is located with Parking brake means a mechanism de- the seat in its most rearward adjust- signed to prevent the movement of a ment position. stationary motor vehicle. Semitrailer means a trailer, except a Passenger car means a motor vehicle pole trailer, so constructed that a sub- with motive power, except a low-speed stantial part of its weight rests upon or vehicle, multipurpose passenger vehi- is carried by another motor vehicle. cle, motorcycle, or trailer, designed for Service brake means the primary carrying 10 persons or less. mechanism designed to stop a motor Pelvic impact area means that area of vehicle. the door or body side panel adjacent to Speed attainable in 1 mile means the any outboard designated seating posi- speed attainable by accelerating at tion which is bounded by horizontal maximum rate from a standing start planes 7 inches above and 4 inches for 1 mile, on a level surface. below the seating reference point and Speed attainable in 2 miles means the vertical transverse planes 8 inches for- speed attainable by accelerating at ward and 2 inches rearward of the seat- maximum rate from a standing start ing reference point. for 2 miles, on a level surface. Pole trailer means a motor vehicle Torso line means the line connecting without motive power designed to be the ‘‘H’’ point and the shoulder ref- drawn by another motor vehicle and erence point as defined in SAE Rec- attached to the towing vehicle by ommended Practice J787g, ‘‘Motor Ve- means of a reach or pole, or by being hicle Seat Belt Anchorage,’’ September boomed or otherwise secured to the 1966. towing vehicle, for transporting long or Trailer means a motor vehicle with or irregularly shaped loads such as poles, without motive power, designed for pipes, or structural members capable carrying persons or property and for generally of sustaining themselves as being drawn by another motor vehicle. beams between the supporting connec- Trailer converter dolly means a trailer tions. chassis equipped with one or more School bus means a bus that is sold, axles, a lower half of a fifth wheel and or introduced in interstate commerce, a drawbar.

192

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00192 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.5

Truck means a motor vehicle with Motor home means a multi-purpose vehicle motive power, except a trailer, de- with motive power that is designed to pro- signed primarily for the transportation vide temporary residential accommodations, of property or special purpose equip- as evidenced by the presence of at least four of the following facilities: Cooking; refrig- ment. eration or ice box; self-contained toilet; Truck tractor means a truck designed heating and/or air conditioning; a potable primarily for drawing other motor ve- water supply system including a faucet and a hicles and not so constructed as to sink; and a separate 110–125 volt electrical carry a load other than a part of the power supply and/or an LP gas supply. weight of the vehicle and the load so drawn. * * * * * Unloaded vehicle weight means the weight of a vehicle with maximum ca- § 571.4 Explanation of usage. pacity of all fluids necessary for oper- The word any, used in connection ation of the vehicle, but without cargo, with a range of values or set of items occupants, or accessories that are ordi- in the requirements, conditions, and narily removed from the vehicle when procedures of the standards or regula- they are not in use. tions in this chapter, means generally 95th percentile adult male means a per- the totality of the items or values, any son possessing the dimensions and one of which may be selected by the weight of the 95th percentile adult Administration for testing, except male specified in Public Health Service where clearly specified otherwise. Publication No. 1000, Series 11, No. 8, ‘‘Weight, Height, and Selected Body Di- Examples: ‘‘The vehicle shall meet the re- mensions of Adults.’’ quirements of S4.1 when tested at any point Vehicle fuel tank capacity means the between 18 and 22 inches above the ground.’’ tank’s unusable capacity (i.e., the vol- This means that the vehicle must be capable of meeting the specified requirements at ume of fuel left at the bottom of the every point between 18 and 22 inches above tank when the vehicle’s fuel pump can the ground. The test in question for a given no longer draw fuel from the tank) plus vehicle may call for a single test (a single its usable capacity (i.e., the volume of impact, for example), but the vehicle must fuel that can be pumped into the tank meet the requirement at whatever point the through the filler pipe with the vehicle Administration selects, within the specified on a level surface and with the unus- range. able capacity already in the tank). The ‘‘Each tire shall be capable of meeting the term does not include the vapor vol- requirements of this standard when mounted on any rim specified by the manufacturer as ume of the tank (i.e., the space above suitable for use with that tire.’’ This means the fuel tank filler neck) nor the vol- that, where the manufacturer specifies more ume of the fuel tank filler neck. than one rim as suitable for use with a tire, the tire must meet the requirements with [33 FR 19703, Dec. 25, 1968. Redesignated at 35 whatever rim the Administration selects FR 5118, Mar. 26, 1970] from the specified group. EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- ‘‘Any one of the items listed below may, at tations affecting § 571.3, see the List of CFR the option of the manufacturer, be sub- Sections Affected, which appears in the stituted for the hardware specified in S4.1.’’ Finding Aids section of the printed volume Here the wording clearly indicates that the and on GPO Access. selection of items is at the manufacturer’s option. EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 67 FR 79439, Dec. 27, 2002, § 571.3(b) was amended by adding the [36 FR 2511, Feb. 5, 1971] definition of ‘‘motor home’’, effective Dec. 27, 2004. For the convenience of the user, the § 571.5 Matter incorporated by ref- added text is set forth as follows: erence. § 571.3 Definitions (a) Incorporation. There are hereby in- corporated, by reference, into this part, * * * * * all materials referred to in any stand- ard in subpart B of this part that are (b) *** not set forth in full in the standard. These materials are thereby made part * * * * * of this regulation. The Director of the

193

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00193 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.5 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Federal Register has approved the ma- (6) Test methods of the Illuminating En- terials incorporated by reference. For gineering Society of North America (IES). materials subject to change, only the They are published by the Illuminating specific version approved by the Direc- Engineering Society of North America. tor of the Federal Register and speci- Information and copies may be ob- fied in the standard are incorporated. A tained by writing to: IES, 120 Wall St., notice of any change in these materials 7th Floor, New York, NY 10005. will be published in the FEDERAL REG- (7) Standards of Suppliers of Advanced ISTER. As a convenience to the reader, Composite Materials Association the materials incorporated by ref- (SACMA). They are published by Sup- erence are listed in the Finding Aid pliers of Advanced Composite Mate- Table found at the end of this volume rials Association. Information and cop- of the Code of Federal Regulations. (b) Availability. The materials incor- ies may be obtained by writing to: Sup- porated by reference, other than acts of pliers of Advanced Composite Mate- Congress and matter published else- rials Association, 1600 Wilson Blvd., where in the FEDERAL REGISTER, are Suite 1008, Arlington, VA 22209. available as follows: (8) Standards of the American Society of (1) Standards of the Society of Auto- Mechanical Engineers (ASME). They are motive Engineers (SAE). They are pub- published by the American Society of lished by the Society of Automotive Mechanical Engineers. Information and Engineers, Inc. Information and copies copies may be obtained by writing to: may be obtained by writing to: Society ASME, 22 Law Drive, P.O. Box 2900, of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Fairfield, NJ 07007–2900. Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, (9) Regulations of the United Nations Pennsylvania 15096. Economic Commission for Europe (ECE). (2) Standards of the American Society They are published by the United Na- for Testing and Materials (ASTM). They tions. Information and copies may be are published by the American Society obtained by writing to: United Nations, for Testing and Materials. Information Conference Services Division, Distribu- and copies may be obtained by writing tion and Sales Section, Office C.115–1, to: ASTM International, 100 Barr Har- Palais des Nations, CH–1211, Geneva 10, bor Drive, PO Box C700, West Switzerland. Copies of Regulations also Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959. are available on the ECE internet web (3) Standards of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). They are site: www.unece.org/trans/main/wp29/ published by the American National wp29regs.html. Standards Institute. Information and (10) Child Restraint Systems Seat As- copies may be obtained by writing to: sembly Drawing Package. Copies may be RESNA, 1700 North Moore St., Suite obtained by contacting: Leet- 1540, Arlington, VA 22209–1903. Melbrook, 18810 Woodfield Road, Gai- (4) Data on the Weight Height and Se- thersburg, MD, 20879, telephone (301) lected Body Dimensions of Adults. They 670–0090. are published by the National Center (11) All of the above materials, as for Health Statistics, Centers for Dis- well as any other materials incor- ease Control (CDC). Information and porated by reference, are available for copies may be obtained on the CDC web inspection and copying at the Office of site at http://www.cdc.gov/nchs or by Vehicle Safety Standards, National writing to National Division for Health Highway Traffic Safety Administra- Statistics, Division of Data Services, tion, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash- Hyattsville, MD 20782–2003. ington, DC 20590. The materials are (5) Test Methods of the American Asso- also available for inspection and copy- ciation of Textile Chemists and Colorists ing at the National Archives and (AATCC). They are published by the Records Administration (NARA). For American Association of Textile Chem- information on the availability of this ists and Colorists. Information and copies may be obtained by writing to: material at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or AATCC, 1 Davis Dr., P.O. Box 12215, Re- go to: http://www.archives.gov/ search Triangle Park, NC 27709. federallregister/

194

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00194 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.101

codeloflfederallregulations/ (2) That is owned or leased by the ibrllocations.html. user of the reassembled vehicle. [33 FR 19704, Dec. 25, 1968. Redesignated at 35 [33 FR 19703, Dec. 25, 1968. Redesignated at 35 FR 5118, Mar. 26, 1970, and amended at 35 FR FR 5118, Mar. 26, 1970, and amended at 36 FR 5120, Mar. 26, 1970; 36 FR 1148, Jan. 23, 1971; 41 7855, Apr. 27, 1971; 38 FR 12808, May 16, 1973; FR 52880, Dec. 2, 1976; 41 FR 56812, Dec. 30, 40 FR 49341, Oct. 22, 1975; 41 FR 27074, July 1, 1976; 47 FR 7254, Feb. 18, 1982; 48 FR 30141, 1976] June 30, 1983; 54 FR 20083, May 9, 1989; 59 FR 49021, Sept. 26, 1994; 60 FR 37843, July 24, 1995; § 571.8 Effective date. 64 FR 45898, Aug. 23, 1999; 67 FR 77193, Dec. 17, 2002; 68 FR 37654, June 24, 2003] Notwithstanding the effective date provisions of the motor vehicle safety § 571.7 Applicability. standards in this part, the effective (a) General. Except as provided in date of any standard or amendment of paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, a standard issued after September 1, each standard set forth in subpart B of 1971, to which firefighting vehicles this part applies according to its terms must conform shall be, with respect to to all motor vehicles or items of motor such vehicles, either 2 years after the vehicle equipment the manufacture of date on which such standard or amend- which is completed on or after the ef- ment is published in the rules and reg- fective date of the standard. ulations section of the FEDERAL REG- (b) [Reserved] ISTER, or the effective date specified in (c) Military vehicles. No standard ap- the notice, whichever is later, except plies to a vehicle or item of equipment as such standard or amendment may manufactured for, and sold directly to, otherwise specifically provide with re- the Armed Forces of the United States spect to firefighting vehicles. in conformity with contractual speci- [36 FR 13927, July 28, 1971] fications. (d) Export. No standard applies to a § 571.9 Separability. vehicle or item of equipment in the cir- cumstances provided in section If any standard established in this 108(b)(5) of the Act (15 U.S.C. 1397 part or its application to any person or (b)(5)). circumstance is held invalid, the re- (e) Combining new and used compo- mainder of the part and the application nents. When a new cab is used in the as- of that standard to other persons or sembly of a truck, the truck will be circumstances is not affected thereby. considered newly manufactured for [33 FR 19705, Dec. 25, 1968. Redesignated at 35 purposes of paragraph (a) of this sec- FR 5118, Mar. 26, 1970] tion, the application of the require- ments of this chapter, and the Act, un- Subpart B—Federal Motor Vehicle less the engine, transmission, and drive axle(s) (as a minimum) of the assem- Safety Standards bled vehicle are not new, and at least two of these components were taken SOURCE: 36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, unless from the same vehicle. otherwise noted. (f) Combining new and used components in trailer manufacture. When new mate- § 571.101 Standard No. 101; Controls rials are used in the assembly of a and displays. trailer, the trailer will be considered S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- newly manufactured for purposes of quirements for the location, identifica- paragraph (a) of this section, the appli- tion, and illumination of motor vehicle cation of the requirements of this controls and displays. chapter, and the Act, unless, at a min- S2. Purpose. The purpose of this imum, the trailer running gear assem- standard is to ensure the accessibility bly (axle(s), wheels, braking and sus- and visibility of motor vehicle controls pension) is not new, and was taken and displays and to facilitate their se- from an existing trailer— lection under daylight and nighttime (1) Whose identity is continued in the conditions, in order to reduce the safe- reassembled vehicle with respect to the ty hazards caused by the diversion of Vehicle Identification Number; and the driver’s attention from the driving

195

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00195 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.101 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

task, and by mistakes in selecting con- (c) Clutch. trols. (d) Highbeam. S3. Application. This standard applies (e) Windshield washer. to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- (f) Windshield wiper. senger vehicles, trucks, and buses. DISPLAYS S4. Definitions. (a) Speedometer. Telltale means a display that indi- (b) Turn signal. cates the actuation of a device, a cor- (c) Gear position. rect or defective functioning or condi- (d) Brake failure warning. tion, or a failure to function. (e) Fuel. Gauge means a display that is listed (f) Engine coolant temperature. in S5.1 or in Table 2 and is not a tell- (g) Oil. tale. (h) Highbeam. S5 Requirements. Each passenger (i) Electrical charge. car, multipurpose passenger vehicle, S5.2 Identification. truck and bus manufactured with any S5.2.1 Vehicle controls shall be iden- control listed in S5.1 or in column 1 of tified as follows: Table 1, and each passenger car, multi- (a) Except as specified in S5.2.1(b), purpose passenger vehicle and truck or any hand-operated control listed in col- bus less than 4,536 kg. GVWR with any umn 1 of Table 1 that has a symbol des- display listed in S5.1 or in column 1 of ignated for it in column 3 of that table Table 2, shall meet the requirements of shall be identified by either the symbol this standard for the location, identi- designated in column 3 (or symbol sub- fication, and illumination of such con- stantially similar in form to that trol or display. shown in column 3) or the word or ab- S5.1 Location. Under the conditions of breviation shown in column 2 of that S6, each of the following controls that table. Any such control for which no is furnished shall be operable by the symbol is shown in Table 1 shall be driver and each of the following dis- identified by the word or abbreviation plays that is furnished shall be visible shown in column 2. Words or symbols to the driver. Under the conditions of in addition to the required symbol, S6, telltales are considered visible word or abbreviation may be used at when activated. the manufacturer’s discretion for the purpose of clarity. Any such control for HAND-OPERATED CONTROLS which column 2 of Table 1 and/or col- (a) Steering wheel. umn 3 of Table 1 specifies ‘‘Mfr. Option’’ (b) Horn. shall be identified by the manufactur- (c) Ignition. er’s choice of a symbol, word or abbre- (d) . viation, as indicated by that specifica- (e) Taillamp. tion in column 2 and/or column 3. The (f) Turn signal. (g) Illumination intensity. identification shall be placed on or ad- (h) Windshield wiper. jacent to the control. The identifica- (i) Windshield washer. tion shall, under the conditions of S6, (j) Manual transmission shift lever, except be visible to the driver and, except as transfer case. provided in S5.2.1.1, S5.2.1.2, and (k) Windshield defrosting and defogging S5.2.1.3, appear to the driver percep- system. tually upright. (l) Rear window defrosting and defogging system. (b) S5.2.1(a) does not apply to a turn (m) Manual choke. signal control which is operated in a (n) Driver’s sun visor. plane essentially parallel to the face (o) Automatic vehicle speed system. plane of the steering wheel in its nor- (p) Highbeam. mal driving position and which is lo- (q) Hazard warning signal. cated on the left side of the steering (r) Clearance lamps. column so that it is the control on that (s) Hand throttle. (t) Identification lamps. side of the column nearest to the steer- ing wheel face plane. FOOT-OPERATED CONTROLS S5.2.1.1 The identification of the fol- (a) Service brake. lowing need not appear to the driver (b) Accelerator. perceptually upright:

196

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00196 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.101

(a) A master lighting switch or in conjunction with a gauge need not headlamp and tail lamp control that be identified. The identification re- adjusts control and display illumina- quired or permitted by this section tion by means of rotation, or any other shall be placed on or adjacent to the rotating control that does not have an display that it identifies. The identi- off position. fication of any display shall, under the (b) A horn control. conditions of S6, be visible to the driv- S5.2.1.2 The identification of a ro- er and appear to the driver percep- tating control other than one described tually upright. by S5.2.1.1 shall appear to the driver S5.3 Illumination. perceptually upright when the control S5.3.1 Except for foot-operated con- is in the off position. trols or hand-operated controls mount- S5.2.1.3 The identification of an ed upon the floor, floor console, or automatic vehicle speed control lo- steering column, or in the windshield cated on the steering wheel, including header area, the identification required the steering wheel hub and spokes, by S5.2.1 or S5.2.2 of any control listed need not appear to the driver percep- in column 1 of Table 1 and accompanied tually upright except when the vehicle, by the word ‘‘yes’’ in the corresponding aligned to the manufacturer’s speci- space in column 4 shall be capable of fications, has its wheels positioned for being illuminated whenever the head- the vehicle to travel in a straight for- lights are activated. However, control ward direction. identification for a heating and air- S5.2.2 Identification shall be pro- conditioning system need not be illu- vided for each function of any auto- minated if the system does not direct matic vehicle speed system control and air directly upon windshield. If a gauge any heating and air conditioning sys- is listed in column 1 of Table 2 and ac- tem control, and for the extreme posi- companied by the word ‘‘yes’’ in column tions of any such control that regu- 5, then the gauge and its identification lates a function over a quantitative required by S5.2.3 shall be illuminated range. If this identification is not spec- whenever the ignition switch and/or ified in Table 1 or 2, it shall be in word the are activated. Controls, or symbol form unless color coding is gauges, and their identifications need used. If color coding is used to identify not be illuminated when the headlamps the extreme positions of a temperature are being flashed. A telltale shall not control, the hot extreme shall be iden- emit light except when identifying the tified by the color red and the cold ex- malfunction or vehicle condition for treme by the color blue. whose indication it is designed or dur- Example 1. A slide lever controls the tem- ing a bulb check upon vehicle starting. perature of the air in the vehicle heating S5.3.2. Each telltale shall be of the system over a continuous range, from no color shown in column 2 of Table 2. The heat to maximum heat. Since the control identification of each telltale shall be regulates a single function over a quan- titative range, only the extreme positions re- in a color that contrasts with the back- quire identification. ground. Example 2. A switch has three positions, for S5.3.3 (a) Means shall be provided for heat, defrost, and air conditioning. Since making controls, gauges, and the iden- each position regulates a different function, tification of those items visible to the each position must be identified. driver under all driving conditions. S5.2.3 Any display located within (b) The means for providing the re- the passenger compartment and listed quired visibility— in column 1 of Table 2 that has a sym- (1) Shall be adjustable to provide at bol designated in column 4 of that least two levels of brightness, one of table shall be identified by either the which is barely discernible to a driver symbol designated in column 4 (or sym- who has adapted to dark ambient road- bol substantially similar in form to way conditions. that shown in column 4) or the word or (2) May be operable manually or abbreviation shown in column 3. Addi- automatically, and tional words or symbols may be used at (3) May have levels of brightness at the manufacturer’s discretion for the which those items and identification purpose of clarity. Any telltales used are not visible.

197

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00197 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.101 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(c) If the level of brightness is ad- ment does not apply to buses that are justed by automatic means to a point normally operated with the passenger where those items or their identifica- compartment illuminated. tion are not visible to the driver, a S5.4 A common space may be used means shall be provided to enable the to display messages from any sources, driver to restore visibility. subject to the following requirements: S5.3.4 (a) Means shall be provided (a) The telltales for the brake, high that are capable of making telltales beam, and turn signal, and the safety and their identification visible to the belt telltale required by S4.5.3.3 of driver under all driving conditions. Standard No. 208 may not be shown on (b) The means for providing the re- the common space. quired visibility may be adjustable (b) Except as provided in S5.4(e), the manually or automatically, except telltales listed in Table 2 shall be dis- that the telltales and identification for played at the initiation of any under- brakes, highbeams, turn signals, and lying condition. safety belts may not be adjustable (c) When the underlying condition ex- under any driving condition to a level ists for actuation of two or more mes- that is invisible. sages, the messages shall be either— S5.3.5 Any source of illumination within the passenger compartment (1) Repeated automatically in se- which is forward of a transverse quence, or vertical plane 110 mm rearward of the (2) Indicated by visible means and ca- manikin ‘‘H’’ point with the driver’s pable of being selected by the driver for seat in its rearmost driving position, viewing. which is not used for the controls and (d) Messages may be cancellable displays regulated by this standard, automatically or by the driver. which is not a telltale, and which is ca- (e) The safety belt telltale must be pable of being illuminated while the displayed and visible during the time vehicle is in motion, shall have either specified in S7.3 of Standard No. 208. (1) light intensity which is manually or S6. Conditions. The driver is re- automatically adjustable to provide at strained by the crash protection equip- least two levels of brightness, (2) a sin- ment installed in accordance with the gle intensity that is barely discernible requirements of § 571.208 of this part to a driver who has adapted to dark (Standard No. 208), adjusted in accord- ambient roadway conditions, or (3) a ance with the manufacturer’s instruc- means of being turned off. This require- tions.

198

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00198 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.101

199

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00199 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER24SE98.032 § 571.101 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

200

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00200 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER20NO03.000 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.101

[43 FR 27542, June 26, 1978, as amended at 44 FR 55583, Sept. 27, 1979; 45 FR 71804, Oct. 30, 1980; 47 FR 2998, Jan. 21, 1982; 49 FR 30196, July 27, 1984; 50 FR 23431, June 4, 1985; 52 FR 3247, Feb. 3, 1987; 52 FR 7157, Mar. 9, 1987; 52 FR 19874, May 28, 1987; 52 FR 33417, Sept. 3, 1987; 56 FR 51848, Oct. 16, 1991; 60 FR 63977, Dec. 13, 1995; 62 FR 32542, 32543, June 16, 1997; 63 FR 28926, May 27, 1998; 63 FR 50997, Sept. 24, 1998; 65 FR 30916, May 15, 2000; 65 FR 30916, May 15, 2000; 67 FR 38743, June 5, 2002; 68 FR 65406, Nov. 20, 2003]

201

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00201 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER20NO03.001 § 571.102 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

§ 571.102 Standard No. 102; Trans- tion, identification of shift lever posi- mission shift lever sequence, starter tions, including the positions in rela- interlock, and transmission braking tion to each other and the position se- effect. lected, shall be displayed in view of the S1. Purpose and scope. This standard driver whenever the ignition is in a po- specifies the requirements for the sition in which the engine is capable of transmission shift lever sequence, a operation. starter interlock, and for a braking ef- S3.1.4.3 Such information need not fect of automatic transmissions, to re- be displayed when the ignition is in a duce the likelihood of shifting errors, position that is used only to start the starter engagement with vehicle in vehicle. drive position, and to provide supple- S3.1.4.4 Effective September 23, 1991, mental braking at speeds below 40 kilo- all of the information required to be meters per hour. displayed by S3.1.4.1 or S3.1.4.2 shall be S2. Application. This standard applies displayed in view of the driver in a sin- to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- gle location. At the option of the man- senger vehicles, trucks, and buses. ufacturer, redundant displays pro- S3. Requirements. viding some or all of the information S3.1 Automatic transmissions. may be provided. S3.1.1 Location of transmission shift S3.2 Manual transmissions. Identi- lever positions on passenger cars. A neu- fication of the shift lever pattern of tral position shall be located between manual transmissions, except three forward drive and reverse drive posi- forward speed manual transmissions tions. If a steering-column-mounted having the standard ‘‘H’’ pattern, shall transmission shift lever is used, move- be displayed in view of the driver at all ment from neutral position to forward times when a driver is present in the drive position shall be clockwise. If the driver’s seating position. transmission shift lever sequence in- cludes a park position, it shall be lo- [36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 54 cated at the end, adjacent to the re- FR 29045, July 11, 1989; 56 FR 12471, Mar. 26, verse drive position. 1991; 60 FR 13642, March 14, 1995] S3.1.2 Transmission braking effect. In § 571.103 Standard No. 103; Windshield vehicles having more than one forward defrosting and defogging systems. transmission gear ratio, one forward drive position shall provide a greater S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- degree of engine braking than the high- quirements for windshield defrosting est speed transmission ratio at vehicle and defogging systems. speeds below 40 kilometers per hour. S2. Application. This standard applies S3.1.3 Starter interlock. The engine to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- starter shall be inoperative when the senger vehicles, trucks, and buses. transmission shift lever is in a forward S3. Definitions. Road load means the or reverse drive position. power output required to move a given S3.1.4 Identification of shift lever posi- motor vehicle at curb weight plus 180 tions. kilograms on level, clean, dry, smooth S3.1.4.1 Except as specified in portland cement concrete pavement (or S3.1.4.3, if the transmission shift lever other surface with equivalent coeffi- sequence includes a park position, cient of surface friction) at a specified identification of shift lever positions, speed through still air at 20 degrees including the positions in relation to Celsius, and standard barometric pres- each other and the position selected, sure (101.3 kilopascals) and includes shall be displayed in view of the driver driveline friction, rolling friction, and whenever any of the following condi- air resistance. tions exist: S4. Requirements. (a) Except as pro- (a) The ignition is in a position where vided in paragraph (b) of this section, the transmission can be shifted. each passenger car shall meet the re- (b) The transmission is not in park. quirements specified in S4.1, S4.2, and S3.1.4.2 Except as specified in S4.3, and each multipurpose passenger S3.1.4.3, if the transmission shift lever vehicle, truck, and bus shall meet the sequence does not include a park posi- requirements specified in § 4.1.

202

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00202 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.104

(b) Each passenger car, multipurpose fied in paragraph (a) of this section is passenger vehicle, truck, and bus man- not used), ufactured for sale in the nonconti- (1) For a passenger car equipped with nental United States may, at the op- a heating system other than a heat ex- tion of the manufacturer, have a wind- changer type that uses the engine’s shield defogging system which operates coolant as a means to supply the heat either by applying heat to the wind- to the heat exchanger, the procedure shield or by dehumidifying the air in- shall be that specified by the vehicle’s side the passenger compartment of the manufacturer for cold weather start- vehicle, in lieu of meeting the require- ing, except that connection to a power ments specified by paragraph (a) of this or heat source external to the vehicle section. is not permitted. S4.1 Each vehicle shall have a wind- (2) For all other passenger cars, ei- shield defrosting and defogging system. ther— S4.2 Each passenger car windshield (i) The engine speed shall not exceed defrosting and defogging system shall 1,500 r.p.m. in neutral gear; or meet the requirements of section 3 of (ii) The engine speed and load shall SAE Recommended Practice J902, not exceed the speed and load at 40 kil- ‘‘Passenger Car Windshield Defrosting ometers per hour in the manufacturer’s Systems,’’ August 1964, when tested in recommended gear with road load; accordance with S4.3, except that ‘‘the (c) A room air change of 90 times per critical area’’ specified in paragraph 3.1 hour is not required; of SAE Recommended Practice J902 (d) The windshield wipers may be shall be that established as Area C in used during the test if they are oper- accordance with Motor Vehicle Safety ated without manual assist; Standard No. 104, Windshield Wiping ‘‘ (e) One or two windows may be open and Washing Systems, and the entire ’’ ‘‘ a total of 25 millimeters; windshield’’ specified in paragraph 3.3 (f) The defroster blower may be of SAE Recommended Practice J902 turned on at any time; and shall be that established as Area A in accordance with § 571.104. (g) The wind velocity is at any level from 0 to 3 kilometers per hour. S4.3 Demonstration procedure. The passenger car windshield defrosting (h) The test chamber temperature and defogging system shall be tested in and the wind velocity shall be meas- accordance with the portions of para- ured, after the engine has been started, graphs 4.1 through 4.4.7 of SAE Rec- at the forwardmost point of the vehicle ommended Practice J902, August 1964, or a point 914 millimeters from the or SAE Recommended Practice J902a, base of the windshield, whichever is March 1967, applicable to that system, farther forward, at a level halfway be- except that— tween the top and bottom of the wind- (a) During the first 5 minutes of the shield on the vehicle centerline. test: [36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 40 (1) For a passenger car equipped with FR 12992, Mar. 24, 1975; 40 FR 32336, Aug. 1, a heating system other than a heat ex- 1975; 50 FR 48775, Nov. 27, 1985; 59 FR 11006, changer type that uses the engine’s Mar. 9, 1994; 60 FR 13642, Mar. 14, 1995] coolant as a means to supply the heat to the heat exchanger, the warm-up § 571.104 Standard No. 104; Windshield wiping and washing systems. procedure is that specified by the vehi- cle’s manufacturer for cold weather S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- starting, except that connection to a quirements for windshield wiping and power or heat source external to the washing systems. vehicle is not permitted. S2. Application. This standard applies (2) For all other passenger cars, the to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- warm-up procedure may be that rec- senger vehicles, trucks, and buses. ommended by the vehicle’s manufac- S3. Definitions. The term seating ref- turer for cold weather starting. erence point is substituted for the terms (b) During the last 35 minutes of the manikin H point, manikin H point with test period (or the entire test period if seat in rearmost position and H point the 5-minute warm-up procedure speci- wherever any of these terms appear in

203

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00203 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.104 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

any SAE Standard or SAE Rec- shield wiping system that meets the re- ommended Practice referred to in this quirements of S4.1.1. standard. S4.1.1 Frequency. Daylight opening means the maximum S4.1.1.1 Each windshield wiping sys- unobstructed opening through the glaz- tem shall have at least two frequencies ing surface, as defined in paragraph or speeds. 2.3.12 of section E, Ground Vehicle S4.1.1.2 One frequency or speed shall Practice, SAE Aerospace-Automotive be at least 45 cycles per minute regard- Drawing Standards, September 1963. less of engine load and engine speed. Glazing surface reference line means S4.1.1.3 Regardless of engine speed the line resulting from the intersection and engine load, the highest and one of the glazing surface and a horizontal lower frequency or speed shall differ by plane 635 millimeters above the seating at least 15 cycles per minute. Such reference point, as shown in Figure 1 of SAE Recommended Practice J903a, lower frequency or speed shall be at ‘‘Passenger Car Windshield Wiper Sys- least 20 cycles per minute regardless of tems,’’ May 1966. engine speed and engine load. Overall width means the maximum S4.1.1.4 Compliance with subpara- overall body width dimension ‘‘W116’’, graphs S4.1.1.2 and S4.1.1.3 may be dem- as defined in section E, Ground Vehicle onstrated by testing under the condi- Practice, SAE Aerospace-Automotive tions specified in sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 Drawing Standards, September 1963. of SAE Recommended Practice J903a, Plan view reference line means— May 1966. (a) For vehicles with bench-type S4.1.2 Wiped area. When tested wet seats, a line parallel to the vehicle lon- in accordance with SAE Recommended gitudinal centerline outboard of the Practice J903a, May 1966, each pas- steering wheel centerline 0.15 times the senger car windshield wiping system difference between one-half of the shall wipe the percentage of Areas A, shoulder room dimension and the steer- B, and C of the windshield (established ing wheel centerline-to-car-centerline in accordance with S4.1.2.1) that (1) is dimension as shown in Figure 2 of SAE specified in column 2 of the applicable Recommended Practice J903a, May table following subparagraph S4.1.2.1 1966; or and (2) is within the area bounded by a (b) For vehicles with individual-type perimeter line on the glazing surface 25 seats, either— millimeters from the edge of the day- (i) A line parallel to the vehicle lon- light opening. gitudinal centerline which passes S4.1.2.1 Areas A, B, and C shall be through the center of the driver’s des- established as shown in Figures 1 and 2 ignated seating position; or of SAE Recommended Practice J903a, (ii) A line parallel to the vehicle lon- May 1966, using the angles specified in gitudinal centerline located so that the Columns 3 through 6 of Table I, II, III, geometric center of the 95 percent eye or IV, as applicable. range contour is positioned on the lon- gitudinal centerline of the driver’s des- TABLE I—PASSENGER CARS OF LESS THAN ignated seating position. 1520 MILLIMETERS IN OVERALL WIDTH Shoulder room dimension means the front shoulder room dimension ‘‘W3’’ as Col- Angles in degrees umn defined in section E, Ground Vehicle 2— Practice, SAE Aerospace-Automotive Column 1— Min- Col- Col- Col- Col- Drawing Standards, September 1963. Area imum umn umn umn umn percent 3—Left 4— 5—Up 6— 95 percent eye range contour means the to be Right Down wiped 95th percentile tangential cutoff speci- fied in SAE Recommended Practice A ...... 80 16 49 7 5 J941, ‘‘Passenger Car Driver’s Eye B ...... 94 13 46 4 3 Range,’’ November 1965. C ...... 99 7 15 3 1 S4. Requirements. S4.1 Windshield wiping system. Each vehicle shall have a power-driven wind-

204

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00204 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.105

TABLE II—PASSENGER CARS OF 1520 OR MORE 1965, except that the reference to ‘‘the BUT LESS THAN 1630 MILLIMETERS IN OVER- effective wipe pattern defined in SAE ALL WIDTH J903, paragraph 3.1.2’’ in paragraph 3.1 of SAE Recommended Practice J942 Col- Angles in degrees umn shall be deleted and ‘‘the pattern de- 2— signed by the manufacturer for the Column 1— Min- Col- Col- Area imum Col- umn Col- umn windshield wiping system on the exte- percent umn 4— umn 6— rior surface of the windshield glazing’’ to be 3—Left Right 5—Up Down wiped shall be inserted in lieu thereof.

A ...... 80 17 51 8 5 [36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 58 B ...... 94 13 49 4 3 FR 13023, Mar. 9, 1993; 60 FR 13643, Mar. 14, C ...... 99 7 15 3 1 1995; 63 FR 51000, Sept. 24, 1998]

§ 571.105 Standard No. 105; Hydraulic TABLE III—PASSENGER CARS OF 1630 OR and electric brake systems. MORE BUT LESS THAN 1730 MILLIMETERS IN OVERALL WIDTH S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- quirements for hydraulic and electric Col- Angles in degrees service brake systems, and associated umn 2— parking brake systems. Column 1— Min- Col- Col- S2. Purpose. The purpose of this Area imum Col- umn Col- umn percent umn 4— umn 6— standard is to insure safe braking per- to be 3—Left Right 5—Up Down formance under normal and emergency wiped conditions. A ...... 80 17 53 9 5 S3. Application. This standard ap- B ...... 94 14 51 5 3 plies to hydraulically-braked vehicles C ...... 99 8 15 4 1 with a GVWR greater than 3,500 kilo- grams (7,716 pounds). This standard ap- TABLE IV—PASSENGER CARS OF 1730 OR plies to hydraulically-braked passenger MORE MILLIMETERS IN OVERALL WIDTH cars manufactured before September 1, Col- Angles in degrees 2000, and to hydraulically-braked mul- umn tipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks 2— Column 1— Min- Col- Col- and buses with a GVWR of 3,500 kilo- Area imum Col- umn Col- umn grams or less that are manufactured percent umn 4— umn 6— to be 3—Left Right 5—Up Down before September 1, 2002. At the option wiped of the manufacturer, hydraulically- braked passenger cars manufactured A ...... 80 18 56 10 5 B ...... 94 14 53 5 3 before September 1, 2000, and hydrau- C ...... 99 10 15 5 1 lically-braked multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks and buses with a S4.2 Windshield washing system. GVWR of 3,500 kilograms (7,716 pounds) S4.2.1 Each passenger car shall have or less manufactured before September a windshield washing system that 1, 2002, may meet the requirements of meets the requirements of SAE Rec- Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard ommended Practice J942, ‘‘Passenger No. 135, Light Vehicle Brake Systems Car Windshield Washer Systems,’’ No- instead of this standard. vember 1965, except that the reference S4. Definitions. to ‘‘the effective wipe pattern defined Antilock brake system or ABS means a in SAE J903, paragraph 3.1.2’’ in para- portion of a service brake system that graph 3.1 of SAE Recommended Prac- automatically controls the degree of tice J942 shall be deleted and ‘‘the areas rotational wheel slip during braking established in accordance with sub- by: paragraph S4.1.2.1 of Motor Vehicle (1) Sensing the rate of angular rota- Safety Standard No. 104’’ shall be in- tion of the wheels; serted in lieu thereof. (2) Transmitting signals regarding S4.2.2 Each multipurpose passenger the rate of wheel angular rotation to vehicle truck, and bus shall have a one or more controlling devices which windshield washing system that meets interpret those signals and generate re- the requirements of SAE Rec- sponsive controlling output signals; ommended Practice J942, November and

205

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00205 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.105 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(3) Transmitting those controlling brake power assist unit, or a brake signals to one or more modulators power unit. which adjust brake actuating forces in Indirectly Controlled Wheel means a response to those signals. wheel at which the degree of rotational Backup system means a portion of a wheel slip is not sensed, but at which service brake system, such as a pump, the modulator of an antilock braking that automatically supplies energy, in system adjusts its brake actuating the event of a primary brake power forces in response to signals from one source failure. or more sensed wheels. Brake power assist unit means a device Initial brake temperature means the installed in a hydraulic brake system average temperature of the service that reduces the operator effort re- brakes on the hottest axle of the vehi- quired to actuate the system, and that cle 0.2 mi before any brake application. if inoperative does not prevent the op- Lightly loaded vehicle weight means: erator from braking the vehicle by a (a) For vehicles with a GVWR of continued application of muscular 10,000 lbs. or less, unloaded vehicle force on the service brake control. weight plus 400 lbs. (including driver Brake power unit means a device in- and instrumentation); stalled in a brake system that provides (b) For vehicles with a GVWR greater the energy required to actuate the than 10,000 lbs., unloaded vehicle brakes, either directly or indirectly weight plus 500 lbs. (including driver through an auxiliary device, with the and instrumentation). operator action consisting only of mod- Maximum drive-through speed means ulating the energy application level. the highest possible constant speed at Directly Controlled Wheel means a which the vehicle can be driven wheel for which the degree of rota- through 200 feet of a 500-foot radius tional wheel slip is sensed, either at curve arc without leaving the 12-foot that wheel or on the axle shaft for that lane. wheel and corresponding signals are Motor home means a motor vehicle transmitted to one or more modulators with motive power that is designed to that adjust the brake actuating forces provide temporary residential accom- at that wheel. Each modulator may modations, as evidenced by the pres- also adjust the brake actuating forces ence of at least four of the following fa- at other wheels that are on the same cilities: cooking; refrigeration or ice axle or in the same axle set in response box; self-contained toilet; heating and/ to the same signal or signals. or air conditioning; a potable water Electric vehicle or EV means a motor supply system including a faucet and a vehicle that is powered by an electric sink; and a separate 110–125 volt elec- motor drawing current from recharge- tric power supply and/or an LP gas sup- able storage batteries, fuel cells, or ply. other portable sources of electrical Parking mechanism means a compo- current, and which may include a non- nent or subsystem of the drive train electrical source of power designed to that locks the drive train when the charge batteries and components there- transmission control is placed in a of. parking or other gear position and the Electrically-actuated service brakes ignition key is removed. means service brakes that utilize elec- Peak friction coefficient or PFC means trical energy to actuate the foundation the ratio of the maximum value of brakes. braking test wheel longitudinal force Full brake application means a brake to the simultaneous vertical force oc- application in which the force on the curring prior to wheel lockup, as the brake pedal reaches 150 pounds within braking torque is progressively in- 0.3 seconds from the point of applica- creased. tion of force to the brake control. Pressure component means a brake Hydraulic brake system means a sys- system component that contains the tem that uses hydraulic fluid as a me- brake system fluid and controls or dium for transmitting force from a senses the fluid pressure. service brake control to the service Regenerative braking system or RBS brake, and that may incorporate a means an electrical energy system that

206

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00206 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.105

is installed in an EV for recovering or car and each multipurpose passenger dissipating kinetic energy, and which vehicle, truck, and bus with a GVWR of uses the propulsion motor(s) as a re- 10,000 pounds or less must be capable of tarder for partial braking of the EV meeting the requirements of S5.1.1 while returning electrical energy to through S5.1.6 under the conditions the propulsion batteries or dissipating prescribed in S6, when tested according electrical energy. to the procedures and in the sequence Skid number means the frictional re- set forth in S7. Each school bus with a sistance of a pavement measured in ac- GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds must cordance with American Society for be capable of meeting the requirements Testing and Materials (ASTM) Method of S5.1.1 through S5.1.5, and S5.1.7 E–274–70 (as revised July, 1974) at 40 under the conditions specified in S6, mph, omitting water delivery as speci- when tested according to the proce- fied in paragraphs 7.1 and 7.2 of that dures and in the sequence set forth in method. S7. Each multipurpose passenger vehi- Snub means the braking deceleration cle, truck and bus (other than a school of a vehicle from a higher reference bus) with a GVWR greater than 10,000 speed to a lower reference speed that is pounds must be capable of meeting the greater than zero. requirements of S5.1.1, S5.1.2, S5.1.3, Spike stop means a stop resulting and S5.1.7 under the conditions speci- from the application of 200 lbs of force fied in S6, when tested according to the on the service brake control in 0.08 s. procedures and in the sequence set Split service brake system means a forth in S7. Except as noted in S5.1.1.2 brake system consisting of two or more and S5.1.1.4, if a vehicle is incapable of subsystems actuated by a single con- attaining a speed specified in S5.1.1, trol, designed so that a single failure in S5.1.2, S5.1.3, or S5.1.6, its service any subsystem (such as a leakage-type brakes must be capable of stopping the failure of a pressure component of a vehicle from the multiple of 5 mph that hydraulic subsystem except structural is 4 to 8 mph less than the speed attain- failure of a housing that is common to able in 2 miles, within distances that two or more subsystems, or an elec- do not exceed the corresponding dis- trical failure in an electric subsystem) tances specified in Table II. If a vehicle does not impair the operation of any is incapable of attaining a speed speci- other subsystem. fied in S5.1.4 in the time or distance in- Stopping distance means the distance terval set forth, it must be tested at traveled by a vehicle from the point of the highest speed attainable in the application of force to the brake con- time or distance interval specified. trol to the point at which the vehicle S5.1.1 Stopping distance. (a) The serv- reaches a full stop. ice brakes shall be capable of stopping Tandem axle means a group of two or each vehicle with a GVWR of less than more axles placed in close arrangement 8,000 pounds, and each school bus with one behind the other with the center a GVWR between 8,000 pounds and lines of adjacent axles not more than 72 10,000 pounds in four effectiveness tests inches apart. within the distances and from the Variable proportioning brake system speeds specified in S5.1.1.1, S5.1.1.2, means a system that automatically ad- S5.1.1.3, and S5.1.1.4. justs the braking force at the axles to (b) The service brakes shall be capa- compensate for vehicle static axle ble of stopping each vehicle with a loading and/or dynamic weight transfer GVWR of between 8,000 pounds and between axles during deceleration. 10,000 pounds, other than a school bus, Wheel lockup means 100 percent wheel in three effectiveness tests within the slip. distances and from the speeds specified S5. Requirements. in S5.1.1.1, S5.1.1.2, and S5.1.1.4. S5.1 Service brake systems. Each vehi- (c) The service brakes shall be capa- cle must be equipped with a service ble of stopping each vehicle with a brake system acting on all wheels. GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds in Wear of the service brake must be com- two effectiveness tests within the dis- pensated for by means of a system of tances and from the speeds specified in automatic adjustment. Each passenger S5.1.1.2 and S5.1.1.3. Each school bus

207

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00207 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.105 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

with a GVWR greater than 10,000 cated below, within the corresponding pounds manufactured after January 12, distance specified in column I of table 1996 and before March 1, 1999 and which II. is equipped with an antilock brake sys- Required tem may comply with paragraph Speed attainable in 2 miles (mph) to stop S5.1.1.2 and S5.5.1 rather than the first from (mph) effectiveness test, as specified in S5.1.1.1. Each school bus with a GVWR Not less than 99 but less than 104 ...... 95 104 or more ...... 100 greater than 10,000 pounds manufac- tured on or after March 1, 1999 shall be capable of meeting the requirements of For an EV, the speed attainable in 2 S5.1.1 through S5.1.5, under the condi- miles is determined with the propul- tions prescribed in S6, when tested ac- sion batteries at a state of charge of cording to the procedures and in the se- not less than 95 percent at the begin- quence set forth in S7. ning of the run. S5.1.1.1 In the first (preburnished) S5.1.2 Partial failure. effectiveness test, the vehicle shall be S5.1.2.1 In vehicles manufactured capable of stopping from 30 mph and 60 with a split service brake system, in mph within the corresponding dis- the event of a rupture or leakage type tances specified in column I of table II. of failure in a single subsystem, other S5.1.1.2 In the second effectiveness than a structural failure of a housing test, each vehicle with a GVWR of that is common to two or more sub- 10,000 pounds or less and each school systems, the remaining portion(s) of bus with a GVWR greater than 10,000 the service brake system shall con- pounds shall be capable of stopping tinue to operate and shall be capable of from 30 mph and 60 mph, and each vehi- stopping a vehicle from 60 mph within cle with a GVWR greater than 10,000 the corresponding distance specified in pounds (other than a school bus) shall column IV of table II. be capable of stopping from 60 mph, S5.1.2.2 In vehicles not manufac- within the corresponding distances tured with a split service brake sys- specified in Column II of Table II. If tem, in the event of any one rupture or the speed attainable in 2 miles is not leakage type of failure in any compo- less than 84 mph, a passenger car or nent of the service brake system the other vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 vehicle shall, by operation of the serv- pounds or less shall also be capable of ice brake control, be capable of stop- stopping from 80 mph within the cor- ping 10 times consecutively from 60 responding distances specified in Col- mph within the corresponding distance umn II of Table II. specified in column IV of table II. S5.1.1.3 In the third effectiveness test S5.1.2.3 For a vehicle manufactured the vehicle shall be capable of stopping with a service brake system in which at lightly loaded vehicle weight from 60 the brake signal is transmitted elec- mph within the corresponding distance trically between the brake pedal and specified in column III of table II. some or all of the foundation brakes, S5.1.1.4 In the fourth effectiveness regardless of the means of actuation of test, a vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 the foundation brakes, the vehicle pounds or less shall be capable of stop- shall be capable of stopping from 60 ping from 30 and 60 mph within the cor- mph within the corresponding distance responding distances specified in col- specified in Column IV of Table II with umn I of table II. If the speed attain- any single failure in any circuit that able in 2 miles is not less than 84 mph, electrically transmits the brake signal, a passenger car, or other vehicle with a and with all other systems intact. GVWR of 10,000 lbs., or less, shall also S5.1.2.4 For an EV manufactured with be capable of stopping from 80 mph a service brake system that incor- within the corresponding distance spec- porates RBS, the vehicle shall be capa- ified in column I of table II. ble of stopping from 60 mph within the If the speed attainable in 2 miles is corresponding distance specified in Col- not less than 99 mph, a passenger car umn IV of Table II with any single fail- shall, in addition, be capable of stop- ure in the RBS, and with all other sys- ping from the applicable speed indi- tems intact.

208

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00208 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.105

S5.1.3 Inoperative brake power assist as applicable, when the inoperative unit or brake power unit. A vehicle unit is depleted of all reserve capacity. equipped with one or more brake power S5.1.3.4 Brake power assist and brake assist units shall meet the require- power units. The service brakes of a ve- ments of either S5.1.3.1, S5.1.3.2, or hicle equipped with one or more brake S5.1.3.4 (chosen at the option of the power assist units or brake power units manufacturer), and a vehicle equipped with a backup system, with one brake with one or more brake power units power assist unit or brake power unit shall meet the requirements of either inoperative and depleted of all reserve S5.1.3.1, S5.1.3.3, or S5.1.3.4 (chosen at capability and with only the backup the option of the manufacturer). system operating in the failed sub- S5.1.3.1 The service brakes on a ve- system, shall be capable of stopping hicle equipped with one or more brake the vehicle from 60 mph in 15 consecu- power assist units or brake power tive stops at an average deceleration units, with one such unit inoperative for each stop that is not lower than 12 and depleted of all reserve capability, fpsps (equivalent stopping distance 323 shall be capable of stopping a vehicle feet). from 60 mph within the corresponding S5.1.3.5 Electric brakes. Each vehicle distance specified in column IV of table with electrically-actuated service II. brakes (brake power unit) shall comply S5.1.3.2 Brake power assist units. The with the requirements of S5.1.3.1 with service brakes on a vehicle equipped any single electrical failure in the elec- with one or more brake power assist trically-actuated service brakes and all units, with one such unit inoperative, other systems intact. shall be capable of stopping a vehicle S5.1.4 Fade and recovery. The service from 60 mph: brakes shall be capable of stopping (a) In six consecutive stops at an av- each vehicle in two fade and recovery erage deceleration for each stop that is tests as specified below. not lower than that specified in column I of table III, when the inoperative unit S5.1.4.1 The control force used for is not initially depleted of all reserve the baseline check stops or snubs shall capability; and be not less than 10 pounds, nor more (b) In a final stop, at an average de- than 60 pounds, except that the control celeration that is not lower than 7 force for a vehicle with a GVWR of FPSPS for passenger cars (equivalent 10,000 pounds or more may be between stopping distance 554 feet) or 6 FPSPS 10 pounds and 90 pounds. for vehicles other than passenger cars S5.1.4.2 (a) Each vehicle with GVWR (equivalent stopping distance 646 feet), of 10,000 lbs or less shall be capable of as applicable, when the inoperative making 5 fade stops (10 fade stops on unit is depleted of all reserve capacity. the second test) from 60 mph at a decel- S5.1.3.3 Brake power units. The serv- eration not lower than 15 fpsps for each ice brakes of a vehicle equipped with stop, followed by 5 fade stops at the one or more brake power units with an maximum deceleration attainable from accumulator-type reserve system, with 5 to 15 fpsps. any one failure in any one unit shall be (b) Each vehicle with a GVWR great- capable of stopping the vehicle from 60 er than 10,000 pounds shall be capable mph— of making 10 fade snubs (20 fade snubs (a) In 10 consecutive stops at an aver- on the second test) from 40 mph to 20 age deceleration for each stop that is mph at 10 fpsps for each snub. not lower than that specified in column S5.1.4.3 (a) Each vehicle with a II of table III, when the unit is not ini- GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less shall be tially depleted of all reserve capability; capable of making five recovery stops and from 30 mph at 10 fpsps for each stop, (b) In a final stop, at an average de- with a control force application that celeration that is not lower than 7 falls within the following maximum FPSPS for passenger cars (equivalent and minimum limits: stopping distance 554 feet) or 6 FPSPS (1) A maximum for the first four re- for vehicles other than passenger cars covery stops of 150 pounds, and for the (equivalent stopping distance 646 feet), fifth stop, of 20 pounds more than the

209

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00209 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.105 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

average control force for the baseline tember 1, 1976, shall be not more than check; and plus 60 pounds of the average control (2) A minimum of— force for the baseline check (but in no (A) The average control force for the case more than 110 pounds). baseline check minus 10 pounds, or (2) A minimum of— (B) The average control force for the (A) The average control force for the baseline check times 0.60, baseline check minus 10 pounds, or whichever is lower (but in no case (B) The average control force for the lower than 5 pounds). baseline check times 0.60, (b) Each vehicle with a GVWR of whichever is lower (but in no case more than 10,000 pounds shall be capa- lower than 5 pounds). ble of making five recovery snubs from (b) After being driven for 2 minutes 40 mph to 20 mph at 10 fpsps for each at a speed of 5 mph in any combination snub, with a control force application of forward and reverse directions that falls within the following max- through a trough having a water depth imum and minimum limits: of 6 inches, each vehicle with a GVWR (1) A maximum for the first four re- of more than 10,000 pounds shall be ca- covery snubs of 150 pounds, and for the pable of making five recovery stops fifth snub, of 20 pounds more than the from 30 mph at 10 fpsps for each stop average control force for the baseline with a control force application that check (but in no case more than 100 falls within the following maximum pounds); and and minimum limits: (2) A minimum of— (1) A maximum for the first four re- (A) The average control force for the covery stops of 150 pounds, and for the baseline check minus 10 pounds, or fifth stop, of 60 pounds more than the (B) The average control force for the average control force for the baseline baseline check times 0.60, check (but in no case more than 110 whichever is lower (but in no case pounds); and lower than 5 pounds). (2) A minimum of— S5.1.5 Water recovery. The service (A) The average control force for the brakes shall be capable of stopping baseline check minus 10 pounds, or each vehicle in a water recovery test, (B) The average control force for the as specified below. baseline check times 0.60, S5.1.5.1 The control force used for whichever is lower (but in no case the baseline check stops or snubs shall lower than 5 pounds). be not less than 10 pounds, nor more S5.1.6 Spike stops. Each vehicle with than 60 pounds, except that the control a GVWR of 10,000 lbs. or less shall be force for a vehicle with a GVWR of capable of making 10 spike stops from 10,000 pounds or more may be between 30 mph, followed by 6 effectiveness 10 and 90 pounds. (check) stops from 60 mph, at least one S5.1.5.2(a) After being driven for 2 of which shall be within a cor- minutes at a speed of 5 mph in any responding stopping distance specified combination of forward and reverse di- in column I of table II. rections through a trough having a S5.1.7 Stability and control during water dept of 6 inches, each vehicle braking. When stopped four consecu- with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less tive times under the conditions speci- shall be capable of making five recov- fied in S6, each vehicle with a GVWR ery stops from 30 mph at ten fpsps for greater than 10,000 pounds manufac- each stop with a control force applica- tured on or after July 1, 2005 and each tion that falls within the following vehicle with a GVWR greater than maximum and minimum limits: 10,000 pounds manufactured in two or (1) A maximum for the first four re- more stages on or after July 1, 2006 covery stops of 150 pounds, and for the shall stop from 30 mph or 75 percent of fifth stop, of 45 pounds more than the the maximum drive-through speed, average control force for the baseline whichever is less, at least three times check (but in no case more than 90 within the 12-foot lane, without any pounds, except that the maximum con- part of the vehicle leaving the road- trol force for the fifth stop in the case way. Stop the vehicle with the vehicle of a vehicle manufactured before Sep- at its lightly loaded vehicle weight, or

210

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00210 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.105

at the manufacturer’s option, at its vehicle stationary for 5 minutes, in lightly loaded vehicle weight plus not both forward and reverse directions, on more than an additional 1000 pounds a 20 percent grade. for a roll bar structure on the vehicle. S5.2.2.3 With the parking mecha- S5.2 Parking brake system. Each vehi- nism engaged and the parking brake cle with a GVWR of 10,000 lbs. or less not engaged, the parking mechanism and each school bus with a GVWR shall not disengage or fracture in a greater than 10,000 lbs., shall be manu- manner permitting vehicle movement, factured with a parking brake system when the vehicle is impacted at each of a friction type with a solely mechan- end, on a level surface, by a barrier ical means to retain engagement, moving at 21⁄2 mph. which shall under the conditions of S6., S5.2.3. The parking brake system on when tested according to the proce- a multipurpose passenger vehicle, dures specified in S7., meet the require- truck and bus (other than a school bus) ments specified in S5.2.1, S5.2.2, or with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less S5.2.3 as appropriate, with the system and a school bus with a GVWR greater engaged— than 10,000 pounds shall be capable of (a) In the case of a vehicle with a holding the vehicle stationary for 5 GVWR of 10,000 lbs. or less, with a force minutes, in both forward and reverse applied to the control not to exceed 125 directions, on a 20 percent grade. pounds for a foot-operated system and S5.3 Brake system indicator lamp. 90 pounds for a hand-operated system; Each vehicle shall have a brake system and indicator lamp or lamps, mounted in (b) In the case of a school bus with a front of and in clear view of the driver, GVWR greater than 10,000 lbs. with a which meet the requirements of S5.3.1 force applied to the control not to ex- through S5.3.5. A vehicle with a GVWR ceed 150 pounds for a foot-operated sys- of 10,000 pounds or less may have a sin- tem and 125 pounds for a hand-operated gle common indicator lamp. A vehicle system. with a GVWR of greater than 10,000 S5.2.1. Except as provided in § 5.2.2, pounds may have an indicator lamp the parking brake system on a pas- which is common for gross loss of pres- senger car and on a school bus with a sure, drop in the level of brake fluid, or GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less shall be application of the parking brake, but capable of holding the vehicle sta- shall have a separate indicator lamp tionary (to the limit of traction on the for antilock brake system malfunction. braked wheels) for 5 minutes in both a However, the options provided in forward and reverse direction on a 30 S5.3.1(a) shall not apply to a vehicle percent grade. manufactured without a split service S5.2.2 A vehicle of a type described brake system; such a vehicle shall, to in S5.2.1 at the option of the manufac- meet the requirements of S5.3.1(a), be turer may meet the requirements of equipped with a malfunction indicator S5.2.2.1, S5.2.2.2, and S5.2.2.3 instead of that activates under the conditions the requirements of S5.2.1 if: specified in S5.3.1(a)(4). This warning (a) The vehicle has a transmission or indicator shall, instead of meeting the transmission control which incor- requirements of S5.3.2 through S5.3.5, porates a parking mechanism, and activate (while the vehicle remains ca- (b) The parking mechanism must be pable of meeting the requirements of engaged before the ignition key can be S5.1.2.2 and the ignition switch is in removed. the ‘‘on’’ position) a continuous or S5.2.2.1 The vehicle’s parking brake intermittent audible signal and a flash- and parking mechanism, when both are ing warning light, displaying the words engaged, shall be capable of holding ‘‘STOP-BRAKE FAILURE’’ in block the vehicle stationary (to the limit of capital letters not less than one-quar- traction of the braked wheels) for 5 ter of an inch in height. minutes, in both forward and reverse S5.3.1 An indicator lamp shall be ac- directions, on a 30 percent grade. tivated when the ignition (start) S5.2.2.2 The vehicle’s parking brake, switch is in the ‘‘on’’ (‘‘run’’) position with the parking mechanism not en- and whenever any of the conditions (a) gaged, shall be capable of holding the or (b), (c), (d), (e), (f), and (g) occur:

211

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00211 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.105 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(a) A gross loss of pressure (such as switch is in a position between ‘‘on’’ caused by rupture of a brake line but (run) and ‘‘start’’ that is designated by not by a structural failure of a housing the manufacturer as a check position. that is common to two or more sub- (b) The indicator lamps need not be systems) due to one of the following activated when a starter interlock is in conditions (chosen at the option of the operation. manufacturer): S5.3.3 (a) Each indicator lamp acti- (1) Before or upon application of a vated due to a condition specified in differential pressure of not more than S5.3.1 shall remain activated as long as 225 lb/in2 between the active and failed the malfunction exists, whenever the brake system measured at a master ignition (start) switch is in the ‘‘on’’ cylinder outlet or a slave cylinder out- (run) position, whether or not the en- let. gine is running. (2) Before or upon application of 50 (b) For vehicles manufactured on and pounds of control force upon a fully after September 1, 1999 with GVWRs manual service brake. greater than 10,000 lbs, each message (3) Before or upon application of 25 about the existence of a malfunction, pounds of control force upon a service as described in S5.3.1(c), shall be stored brake with a brake power assist unit. in the antilock brake system after the (4) When the supply pressure in a ignition switch is turned to the ‘‘off’’ brake power unit drops to a level not position and the indicator lamp shall less than one-half of the normal system be automatically reactivated when the pressure. ignition switch is again turned to the (b) A drop in the level of brake fluid ‘‘on’’ position. The indicator lamp shall in any master cylinder reservoir com- also be activated as a check of lamp partment to less than the rec- function whenever the ignition is ommended safe level specified by the turned to the on (run) position. The manufacturer or to one-fourth of the ‘‘ ’’ indicator lamp shall be deactivated at fluid capacity of that reservoir com- the end of the check of lamp function partment, whichever is greater. (c) A malfunction that affects the unless there is a malfunction or a mes- generation or transmission of response sage about a malfunction that existed or control signals in an antilock brake when the key switch was last turned to system, or a total functional electrical the ‘‘off’’ position. failure in a variable proportioning S5.3.4 When an indicator lamp is ac- brake system. tivated it may be steady burning or (d) Application of the parking brake. flashing. (e) For a vehicle with electrically-ac- S5.3.5 (a) Each indicator lamp shall tuated service brakes, failure of the display word, words or abbreviation, in source of electric power to the brakes, accordance with the requirements of or diminution of state of charge of the Standard No. 101 (49 CFR 571.101) and/or batteries to less than a level specified this section, which shall have letters by the manufacturer for the purpose of not less than 1⁄8-inch high and be leg- warning a driver of degraded brake per- ible to the driver in daylight when formance. lighted. Words in addition to those re- (f) For a vehicle with electric trans- quired by Standard No. 101 and/or this mission of the service brake control section and symbols may be provided signal, failure of a brake control cir- for purposes of clarity. cuit. (b) If a single common indicator is (g) For an EV with RBS that is part used, the lamp shall display the word of the service brake system, failure of ‘‘Brake’’. The letters and background of the RBS. a single common indicator shall be of S5.3.2 (a) Except as provided in para- contrasting colors, one of which is red. graph (b) of this section, all indicator (c)(1) If separate indicators are used lamps shall be activated as a check of for one or more of the conditions de- lamp function either when the ignition scribed in S5.3.1(a) through S5.3.1(g) of (start) switch is turned to the ‘‘on’’ this standard, the indicator display (run) position when the engine is not shall include the word ‘‘Brake’’ and ap- running, or when the ignition (start) propriate additional labeling, except as

212

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00212 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.105

provided in (c)(1) (A) through (D) of ard. Reservoirs shall have completely this paragraph. separate compartments for each sub- (A) If a separate indicator lamp is system except that in reservoir sys- provided for gross loss of pressure, the tems utilizing a portion of the res- words ‘‘Brake Pressure’’ shall be used ervoir for a common supply to two or for S5.3.1(a). more subsystems, individual partial (B) If a separate indicator lamp is compartments shall each have a min- provided for low brake fluid, the words imum volume of fluid equal to at least ‘‘Brake Fluid’’ shall be used for the volume displaced by the master S5.3.1(b), except for vehicles using hy- cylinder piston servicing the sub- draulic system mineral oil. system, during a full stroke of the pis- (C) If a separate indicator lamp is ton. Each brake power unit reservoir provided for an anti-lock system, the servicing only the brake system shall single word ‘‘Antilock’’ or ‘‘Anti-lock’’, have a minimum capacity equivalent or the abbreviation ‘‘ABS’’, may be used to the fluid displacement required to for S5.3.1(c). charge the system piston(s) or accumu- (D) If a separate indicator lamp is lator(s) to normal operating pressure provided for application of the parking plus the displacement resulting when brake, the single word ‘‘Park’’ may be all the wheel cylinders or caliper pis- used for S5.3.1(d). tons serviced by the reservoir or accu- (E) If a separate indicator is used for mulator(s) move from a new lining the regenerative brake system, the fully retracted position (as adjusted symbol ‘‘RBS’’ may be used. RBS failure initially to the manufacturer’s rec- may also be indicated by a lamp dis- ommended setting) to a fully worn, playing the symbol ‘‘ABS/RBS.’’ fully applied position. (2) Except for a separate indicator S5.4.3 Reservoir labeling—Each vehicle lamp for an anti-lock system, a regen- equipped with hydraulic brakes shall erative system, or an indicator for both have a brake fluid warning statement anti-lock and regenerative system, the that reads as follows, in letters at least letters and background of each sepa- one-eighth of an inch high: ‘‘WARNING, rate indicator lamp shall be of con- Clean filler cap before removing. Use trasting colors, one of which is red. only lll fluid from a sealed con- The letters and background of a sepa- tainer.’’ (Inserting the recommended rate lamp for an anti-lock system, a re- type of brake fluid as specified in 49 generative system, or a lamp dis- CFR 571.116, e.g., ‘‘DOT 3’’). The let- playing both an anti-lock and a regen- tering shall be— erative system shall be of contrasting (a) Permanently affixed, engraved, or colors, one of which is yellow. embossed; S5.4 Reservoirs. (b) Located so as to be visible by di- S5.4.1 Master cylinder reservoirs. A rect view, either on or within 4 inches master cylinder shall have a reservoir of the brake fluid reservoir filler plug compartment for each service brake or cap; and subsystem serviced by the master cyl- (c) Of a color that contrasts with its inder. Loss of fluid from one compart- background, if it is not engraved or ment shall not result in a complete embossed. loss of brake fluid from another com- S5.5 Antilock and variable propor- partment. tioning brake systems. S5.4.2 Reservoir capacity. Reservoirs, S5.5.1 Each vehicle with a GVWR whether for master cylinders or other greater than 10,000 pounds, except for type systems, shall have a total min- any vehicle with a speed attainable in imum capacity equivalent to the fluid 2 miles of not more than 33 mph, shall displacement resulting when all the be equipped with an antilock brake wheel cylinders or caliper pistons serv- system that directly controls the iced by the reservoirs move from a new wheels of at least one front axle and lining, fully retracted position (as ad- the wheels of at least one rear axle of justed initially to the manufacturer’s the vehicle. On each vehicle with a recommended setting) to a fully worn, GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds but fully applied position, as determined in not greater than 19,500 pounds and accordance with S7.18(c) of this stand- motor homes with a GVWR greater

213

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00213 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.105 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

than 10,000 pounds but not greater than S7.7, S7.8, and S7.9, the vehicle is load- 22,500 pounds manufactured before ed to its GVWR such that the weight March 1, 2001, the antilock brake sys- on each axle as measured at the tire- tem may also directly control the ground interface is in proportion to its wheels of the rear drive axle by means GAWR, except that each fuel tank is of a single sensor in the driveline. filled to any level from 100 percent of Wheels on other axles of the vehicle capacity (corresponding to full GVWR) may be indirectly controlled by the to 75 percent. However, if the weight on antilock brake system. any axle of a vehicle at lightly loaded S5.5.2 In the event of any failure vehicle weight exceeds the axle’s pro- (structural or functional) in an portional share of the gross vehicle antilock or variable proportioning weight rating, the load required to brake system, the vehicle shall be ca- reach GVWR is placed so that the pable of meeting the stopping distance weight on that axle remains the same requirements specified in S5.1.2 for as a lightly loaded vehicle weight. service brake system partial failure. S6.1.2 For the applicable tests speci- For an EV that is equipped with both fied in S7.5(a), S7.7, S7.8, and S7.9, vehi- ABS and RBS that is part of the serv- cle weight is lightly loaded vehicle ice brake system, the ABS must con- weight, with the added weight distrib- trol the RBS. uted in the front passenger seat area in S5.6 Brake system integrity. Each ve- passenger cars, multipurpose passenger hicle shall be capable of completing all vehicles, and trucks, and in the area performance requirements of S5 with- adjacent to the driver’s seat in buses. out— S6.2 Electric vehicles and electric (a) Detachment or fracture of any brakes. component of the braking system, such S6.2.1 The state of charge of the pro- as brake springs and brake shoe or disc pulsion batteries is determined in ac- pad facing, other than minor cracks cordance with SAE Recommended that do not impair attachment of the Practice J227a, Electric Vehicle Test Pro- friction facing. All mechanical compo- cedure, February 1976. The applicable nents of the braking system shall be sections of J227a are 3.2.1 through 3.2.4, intact and functional. Friction facing 3.3.1 through 3.3.2.2, 3.4.1 and 3.4.2, 4.2.1, tearout (complete detachment of lin- 5.2, 5.2.1, and 5.3. ing) shall not exceed 10 percent of the S6.2.2 At the beginning of the first ef- lining on any single frictional element. fectiveness test specified in S7.3, and at (b) Any visible brake fluid or lubri- the beginning of each burnishing proce- cant on the friction surface of the dure, each EV’s propulsion battery is brake, or leakage at the master cyl- at the maximum state of charge rec- inder or brake power unit reservoir ommended by the manufacturer, as cover, seal and filler openings. stated in the vehicle operator’s manual S6 Test conditions. The performance or on a label that is permanently at- requirements of S5 shall be met under tached to the vehicle, or, if the manu- the following conditions. Where a facturer has made no recommendation, range of conditions is specified, the ve- at a state of charge of not less than 95 hicle shall be capable of meeting the percent. If a battery is replaced rather requirements at all points within the than recharged, the replacement bat- range. Compliance of vehicles manufac- tery is to be charged and measured for tured in two or more stages may, at state of charge in accordance with the option of the final-stage manufac- these procedures. During each burnish turer, be demonstrated to comply with procedure, each propulsion battery is this standard by adherence to the in- restored to the recommended state of structions of the incomplete manufac- charge or a state of charge of not less turer provided with the vehicle in ac- than 95 percent after each increment of cordance with § 568.4(a)(7)(ii) and § 568.5 40 burnish stops until each burnish pro- of title 49 of the Code of Federal Regu- cedure is complete. The batteries may lations. be charged at a more frequent interval S6.1 Vehicle weight. if, during a particular 40-stop incre- S6.1.1 Other than tests specified at ment, the EV is incapable of achieving lightly loaded vehicle weight in S7.5(a), the initial burnish test speed. During

214

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00214 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.105

each burnish procedure, the propulsion neutral gear that automatically dis- batteries may be charged by an exter- ables the RBS, the test procedures nal means or replaced by batteries that which are designated to be conducted are charged to the state of charge rec- in gear may be conducted in neutral. ommended by the manufacturer or a S6.2.5 For tests conducted ‘‘in neu- state of charge of not less than 95 per- tral,’’ the operator of an EV with no cent. For EVs having a manual control ‘‘neutral’’ position (or other means such for setting the level of regenerative as a clutch for disconnecting the drive braking, the manual control, at the be- train from the propulsion motor(s)) ginning of each burnish procedure, is does not apply any electromotive force set to provide maximum regenerative to the propulsion motor(s). Any elec- braking throughout the burnish. tromotive force that is applied to the S6.2.3 At the beginning of each per- propulsion motor(s) automatically re- formance test in the test sequence mains in effect unless otherwise speci- (S7,3, S7.5, S7.7 through S7.11, and S7.13 fied by the test procedure. through S7.19 of this standard), unless S6.2.6 A vehicle equipped with elec- otherwise specified, each propulsion trically-actuated service brakes also battery of an EV is at the maximum performs the following test series. Con- state of charge recommended by the duct 10 stopping tests from a speed of manufacturer, as stated in the vehicle 100 kph or the maximum vehicle speed, operator’s manual or on a label that is whichever is less. At least two of the 10 permanently attached to the vehicle, stopping distances must be less than or or, if the manufacturer has made no equal to 70 meters. The vehicle is load- recommendation, at a state of charge ed to GVWR for these tests and the of not less than 95 percent. If batteries transmission is in the neutral position are replaced rather than recharged, when the service brake control is actu- each replacement battery shall be ated and throughout the remainder of charged and measured for state of the test. The battery or batteries pro- charge in accordance with these proce- viding power to those electrically-actu- dures. No further charging of any pro- ated brakes, at the beginning of each pulsion battery occurs during any of test, shall be in a depleted state of the performance tests in the test se- quence of this standard. If the propul- charge for conditions (a), (b), or (c) of sion batteries are depleted during a this paragraph as appropriate. An aux- test sequence such that the vehicle iliary means may be used to accelerate reaches automatic shut-down, will not an EV to test speed. accelerate, or the low state of charge (a) For an EV equipped with elec- warning lamp is illuminated, the vehi- trically-actuated service brakes deriv- cle is to be accelerated to brake test ing power from the propulsion bat- speed by auxiliary means. teries, and with automatic shut-down S6.2.4 (a) For an EV equipped with capability of the propulsion motor(s), RBS, the RBS is considered to be part the propulsion batteries are at not of the service brake system if it is more than five percent above the EV automatically controlled by an appli- actual automatic shut-down critical cation of the service brake control, if value. The critical value is determined there is no means provided for the driv- by measuring the state-of-charge of er to disconnect or otherwise deacti- each propulsion battery at the instant vate it, and if it is activated in all that automatic shut-down occurs and transmission positions, including neu- averaging the states-of-charge re- tral. The RBS is operational during all corded. burnishes and all tests, except for the (b) For an EV equipped with elec- test of a failed RBS. trically-actuated service brakes deriv- (b) For an EV equipped with an RBS ing power from the propulsion bat- that is not part of the service brake teries, and with no automatic shut- system, the RBS is operational and set down capability of the propulsion to produce the maximum regenerative motor(s), the propulsion batteries are braking effect during the burnishes, at an average of not more than five and is disabled during the test proce- percent above the actual state of dures. If the vehicle is equipped with a charge at which the brake failure

215

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00215 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.105 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

warning signal, required by S5.3.1(e) of S6.9.2(a) For vehicles with a GVWR this standard, is illuminated. greater than 10,000 pounds, road tests (c) For a vehicle which has an auxil- (excluding stability and control during iary battery (or batteries) that pro- braking tests) are conducted on a 12- vides electrical energy to operate the foot-wide, level roadway, having a peak electrically-actuated service brakes, friction coefficient of 0.9 when meas- the auxiliary battery(batteries) is (are) ured using an American Society for at (at an average of) not more than five Testing and Materials (ASTM) E 1136 percent above the actual state of standard reference test tire, in accord- charge at which the brake failure ance with ASTM Method E 1337–90, at a warning signal, required by S5.3.1(e) of speed of 40 mph, without water deliv- this standard, is illuminated. ery. Burnish stops are conducted on S6.3 Tire inflation pressure. Tire in- any surface. The parking brake test flation pressure is the pressure rec- surface is clean, dry, smooth, Portland ommended by the vehicle manufac- cement concrete. turer for the GVWR of the vehicle. S6.9.2(b) For vehicles with a GVWR S6.4 Transmission selector control. For greater than 10,000 pounds, stability S7.3, S7.5, S7.8, S7.15, S7.17, S7.11.1.2, and control during braking tests are S7.11.2.2, S7.11.3.2, and as required for conducted on a 500-foot-radius curved S7.13, the transmission selector control roadway with a wet level surface hav- is in neutral for all decelerations. For ing a peak friction coefficient of 0.5 all other tests during all decelerations, when measured on a straight or curved the transmission selector is in the con- section of the curved roadway using an trol position, other than overdrive, rec- American Society for Testing and Ma- ommended by the manufacturer for terials (ASTM) E1136 standard ref- driving on a level surface at the appli- erence tire, in accordance with ASTM cable test speed. To avoid engine stall Method E1337–90, at a speed of 40 mph, during tests required to be run in gear with water delivery. a manual transmission may be shifted S6.10 Vehicle position and wheel lock- to neutral (or the clutch disengaged) up restrictions. The vehicle is aligned in when the vehicle speed decreases to 20 the center of the roadway at the start mph. of each brake application. Stops, other S6.5 Engine. Engine idle speed and than spike stops, are made without any ignition timing settings are according part of the vehicle leaving the road- to the manufacturer’s recommenda- way. tions. If the vehicle is equipped with an S6.10.1 For vehicles with a GVWR of adjustable engine speed governor, it is 10,000 pounds or less, stops are made adjusted according to the manufactur- with wheel lockup permitted only as er’s recommendation. follows: S6.6 Vehicle openings. All vehicle (a) At vehicle speeds above 10 mph, openings (doors, windows, hood, trunk, there may be controlled wheel lockup convertible top, cargo doors, etc.) are on an antilock-equipped axle, and lock- closed except as required for instru- up of not more than one wheel per ve- mentation purposes. hicle, uncontrolled by an antilock sys- S6.7 Ambient temperature. The ambi- tem. (Dual wheels on one side of an ent temperature is any temperature be- axle are considered a single wheel.) tween 32 °F. and 100 °F. (b) At vehicle speeds of 10 mph or S6.8 Wind velocity. The wind velocity less, any wheel may lock up for any du- is zero. ration. S6.9 Road surface. (c) Unlimited wheel lockup is allowed S6.9.1 For vehicles with a GVWR of during spike stops (but not spike check 10,000 pounds or less, road tests are stops), partial failure stops, and inoper- conducted on a 12-foot-wide, level road- ative brake power or power assist unit way, having a skid number of 81. Bur- stops. nish stops are conducted on any sur- S6.10.2 For vehicles with a GVWR face. The parking brake test surface is greater than 10,000 pounds, stops are clean, dry, smooth, Portland cement made with wheel lockup permitted concrete. only as follows:

216

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00216 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.105

(a) At vehicle speeds above 20 mph, different option for the vehicle. Each any wheel on a nonsteerable axle other manufacturer shall, upon request from than the two rearmost nonliftable, the National Highway Traffic Safety nonsteerable axles may lock up for any Administration, provide information duration. The wheels on the two rear- regarding which of the compliance op- most nonliftable, nonsteerable axles tions it has selected for a particular ve- may lock up according to (b). hicle or make/model. (b) At vehicle speeds above 20 mph, S7. Test procedure and sequence. one wheel on any axle or two wheels on Each vehicle shall be capable of meet- any tandem may lock up for any dura- ing all the applicable requirements of tion. S5 when tested according to the proce- (c) At vehicle speeds above 20 mph, dures and sequence set forth below, any wheel not permitted to lock in (a) without replacing any brake system or (b) may lock up repeatedly, with part or making any adjustments to the each lockup occurring for a duration of brake system other than as permitted one second or less. in the burnish and reburnish proce- (d) At vehicle speeds of 20 mph or dures and in S7.9 and S7.10. (For vehi- less, any wheel may lock up for any du- cles only having to meet the require- ration. ments of S5.1.1, S5.1.2, S5.1.3, and S5.1.7 (e) Unlimited wheel lockup is allowed in section S5.1, the applicable test pro- during partial failure stops, and inoper- cedures and sequence are S7.1, S7.2, ative brake power or power assist S7.4, S7.5(b), S7.5(a), S7.8, S7.9, S7.10, stops. and S7.18. However, at the option of the S6.11 Thermocouples. The brake tem- manufacturer, the following test proce- perature is measured by plug-type dure and sequence may be conducted: thermocouples installed in the approxi- S7.1, S7.2, S7.3, S7.4, S7.5(b), S7.6, S7.7, mate center of the facing length and S7.5(a), S7.8, S7.9, S7.10, and S7.18. The width of the most heavily loaded shoe choice of this option must not be con- or disc pad, one per brake, as shown in strued as adding to the requirements figure 1. A second thermocouple may specified in S5.1.2 and S5.1.3.) Auto- be installed at the beginning of the test matic adjusters must remain activated sequence if the lining wear is expected at all times. A vehicle shall be deemed to reach a point causing the first ther- to comply with the stopping distance mocouple to contact the metal rubbing requirements of S5.1 if at least one of surface of a drum or rotor. For the stops at each speed and load speci- centergrooved shoes or pads, fied in each of S7.3, S7.5(b), S7.8, S7.9, thermocouples are installed within S7.10, S7.15 and S7.17 (check stops) is one-eighth of an inch to one-quarter made within a stopping distance that inch of the groove and as close to the does not exceed the corresponding dis- center as possible. tance specified in Table II. When the S6.12 Initial brake temperature. Un- transmission selector control is re- less otherwise specified the brake tem- quired to be in neutral for a decelera- perature is 150 °F. to 200 °F. tion, a stop or snub must be obtained S6.13 Control forces. Unless other- wise specified, the force applied to a by the following procedures: brake control is not less than 15 lb and (a) Exceed the test speed by 4 to 8 not more than 150 lb. mph; S6.14 Special drive conditions. A ve- (b) Close the throttle and coast in hicle with a GVWR greater than 10,000 gear to approximately 2 mph above the pounds equipped with an interlocking test speed; axle system or a front wheel drive sys- (c) Shift to neutral; and tem that is engaged and disengaged by (d) When the test speed is reached, the driver is tested with the system apply the service brakes. disengaged. S7.1 Brake warming. If the initial S6.15 Selection of compliance op- brake temperature for the first stop in tions. Where manufacturer options are a test procedure (other than S7.7 and specified, the manufacturer shall select S7.16) has not been reached, heat the the option by the time it certifies the brakes to the initial brake temperature vehicle and may not thereafter select a by making not more than 10 snubs

217

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00217 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.105 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

from not more than 40 to 10 mph, at a during the burnish procedure, in ac- deceleration not greater than 10 fpsps. cordance with the manufacturer’s rec- S7.2 Pretest instrumentation check. ommendations, after 125, 250, and 375 Conduct a general check of instrumen- snubs. tation by making not more than 10 S7.4.2.2 Brake adjustment—post bur- stops from a speed of not more than 30 nish. After burnishing, adjust the mph, or 10 snubs from a speed of not brakes in accordance with the manu- more than 40 to 10 mph, at a decelera- facturer’s published recommendations. tion of not more than 10 fpsps. If in- S7.5 (a) Stability and control during strument repair, replacement, or ad- braking (vehicles with a GVWR greater justment is necessary, make not more than 10,000 pounds). Make four stops in than 10 additional stops or snubs after the lightly-loaded weight condition such repair, replacement, or adjust- specified in S5.1.7. Use a full brake ap- ment. plication for the duration of the stop, S7.3 Service brake system—first (preburnish) effectiveness test. Make six with the clutch pedal depressed or the stops from 30 mph. Then make six transmission selector control in the stops from 60 mph. neutral position, for the duration of S7.4 Service brake system—burnish each stop. procedure. (b) Service brake system—second ef- S7.4.1 Vehicles with GVWR of 10,000 lb fectiveness test. For vehicles with a or less. GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, or any S7.4.1.1 Burnish. Burnish the brakes school bus, make six stops from 30 by making 200 stops from 40 mph at 12 mph. Then, for any vehicle, make six fpsps (the 150 lb control force limit stops from 60 mph. Then, for a vehicle does not apply here). The interval from with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, the start of one service brake applica- make four stops from 80 mph if the tion to the start of the next shall be ei- speed attainable in 2 miles is not less ther the time necessary to reduce the than 84 mph. initial brake temperature to between S7.6 First reburnish. Repeat S7.4, ex- 230 °F. and 270 °F., or the distance of 1 cept make 35 burnish stops or snubs. In mile, whichever occurs first. Accel- the case of vehicles burnished in ac- erate to 40 mph after each stop and cordance with S7.4.2.1(a) of this sec- maintain that speed until making the tion, reburnish the vehicle by making next stop. 35 snubs from 60 to 20 mph, but if the S7.4.1.2 Brake adjustment—post bur- hottest brake temperature reaches 500 nish. After burnishing, adjust the °F ±50 °F, make the remainder of the brakes in accordance with the manu- brake applications from the highest facturer’s published recommendations. snub condition listed in Table IV that S7.4.2 Vehicles with GVWR greater than will maintain the hottest brake tem- 10,000 pounds. perature at 500 °F ±50 °F. If at a snub S7.4.2.1 Burnish. Vehicles are bur- condition of 40 to 20 mph, the tempera- nished according to the following pro- ture of the hottest brake exceeds 550 cedures. Make 500 snubs between 40 ° mph and 20 mph at a deceleration rate F, make the remainder of the 35 brake of 10 f.p.s.p.s. Except where an adjust- applications from the snub condition ment is specified, after each brake ap- without regard to brake temperature. plication accelerate to 40 mph and S7.7 Parking brake test. The parking maintain that speed until making the brake tests for any vehicle on different next brake application at a point 1 grades, in different directions, and for mile from the initial point of the pre- different loads may be conducted in vious brake application. If the vehicle any order. The force required for actu- cannot attain a speed of 40 mph in 1 ation of a hand-operated brake system mph, continue to accelerate until the shall be measured at the center of the vehicle reaches 40 mph or until the ve- hand grip area or at a distance of 11⁄2 hicle has traveled 1.5 miles from the inches from the end of the actuation initial point of the previous brake ap- lever, as illustrated in Figure II. plication, whichever occurs first. The S7.7.1 Test procedure for requirements brakes shall be adjusted three times of S5.2.1.

218

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00218 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.105

S7.7.1.1 Condition the parking brake peat the same test procedure with the friction elements so that the tempera- vehicle orientation in the opposite di- ture at the beginning of the test is at rection on the specified grade. any level not more than 150 °F. (when S7.7.1.6 Check the operation of the the temperature of components on both parking brake application indicator re- ends of an axle are averaged). quired by S5.3.1(d). S7.7.1.2 Drive the vehicle, loaded to S7.7.2 Test procedure for requirements GVWR, onto the specified grade with of S5.2.2 (a) Check that transmission the longitudinal axis of the vehicle in must be placed in park position to re- the direction of the slope of the grade, lease key; stop the vehicle and hold it stationary (b) Test as in S7.7.1, except in addi- by application of the service brake con- tion place the transmission control to trol, and place the transmission in neu- engage the parking mechanism; and tral. (c) Test as in S7.7.1 except on a 20 S7.7.1.3 With the vehicle held sta- percent grade, with the parking mecha- tionary by means of the service brake nism not engaged. control, apply the parking brake by a S7.7.3 Lightly loaded vehicle. Repeat single application of the force specified S7.7.1 or S7.7.2 as applicable except in (a), (b), or (c) of this paragraph, ex- with the vehicle at lightly loaded vehi- cept that a series of applications to cle weight. achieve the specified force may be S7.7.4 Non-service brake type parking made in the case of a parking brake brake systems. For vehicles with park- system design that does not allow the ing brake systems not utilizing the application of the specified force in a service brake friction elements, bur- single application: nish the friction elements of such sys- (a) In the case of a passenger car or tems prior to parking brake tests ac- other vehicle with a GVWR of 10,000 cording to the manufacturer’s pub- lbs. or less, not more than 125 pounds lished recommendations as furnished for a foot-operated system, and not to the purchaser. If no recommenda- more than 90 pounds for a hand-oper- tions are furnished, run the vehicle in ated system; and an unburnished condition. (b) In the case of a school bus with a S7.8 Service brake system—lightly GVWR greater than 10,000 lbs. not more loaded vehicle (third effectiveness) test. than 150 pounds for a foot-operated sys- Make six stops from 60 mph with vehi- tem, and not more than 125 pounds for cle at lightly loaded vehicle weight. a hand-operated system. (This test is not applicable to a vehicle (c) For a vehicle using an elec- which both has a GVWR of not less trically-activated parking brake, apply than 8,000 pounds and not greater than the parking brake by activating the 10,000 pounds and is not a school bus.) parking brake control. S7.9 Service brake system test—partial S7.7.1.4 Following the application of failure. the parking brake in accordance with S7.9.1 With the vehicle at lightly S7.7.1.3, release all force on the service loaded vehicle weight, alter the service brake control and commence the meas- brake system to produce any one rup- urement of time if the vehicle remains ture or leakage type of failure, other stationary. If the vehicle does not re- than a structural failure of a housing main stationary, reapplication of the that is common to two or more sub- service brake to hold the vehicle sta- systems. Determine the control force, tionary, with reapplication of a force pressure level, or fluid level (as appro- to the parking brake control at the priate for the indicator being tested) level specified in S7.7.1.3 (a) or (b) as necessary to activate the brake system appropriate for the vehicle being tested indicator lamp. Make four stops if the (without release of the ratcheting or vehicle is equipped with a split service other holding mechanism of the park- brake system, or 10 stops if the vehicle ing brake) may be used twice to attain is not so equipped, each from 60 mph, a stationary position. by a continuous application of the S7.7.1.5 Following observation of the service brake control. Restore the serv- vehicle in a stationary condition for ice brake system to normal at comple- the specified time in one direction, re- tion of this test.

219

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00219 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.105 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S7.9.2 Repeat S7.9.1 for each of the vided, by disconnecting the relevant other subsystems. power supply. Exhaust any residual S7.9.3 Repeat S7.9.1 and S7.9.2 with brake power reserve capability of the vehicle at GVWR. Restore the service disconnected system. On vehicles with brake system to normal at completion brake power units, disconnect the pri- of this test. mary source of power. Make four stops, S7.9.4 (For vehicles with antilock each from 60 mph by a continuous ap- and/or variable proportioning brake plication of the service brake control. systems.) With vehicle at GVWR, dis- Restore the system to normal at com- connect functional power source, or pletion of this test. For vehicles otherwise render antilock system inop- equipped with more than one brake erative. Disconnect variable propor- power unit or brake power assist unit, tioning brake system. Make four stops, conduct tests of each in turn. each from 60 mph. If more than one S7.10.2 Optional Procedures. On vehi- antilock or variable proportioning cles with brake power assist units, the brake subsystem is provided, dis- unit is charged to maximum prior to connect or render one subsystem inop- start of test. (Engine may be run up in erative and run as above. Restore sys- speed, then throttle closed quickly to tem to normal at completion of this attain maximum charge on vacuum as- test. Repeat for each subsystem pro- sist units.) Brake power units shall vided. also be charged to maximum accumu- Determine whether the brake system lator pressure prior to start of test. No indicator lamp is activated when the recharging is allowed after start of electrical power source to the antilock test. or variable proportioning unit is dis- (a) (For vehicles with brake power as- connected. sist units.) Disconnect the primary S7.9.5 For a vehicle in which the source of power. Make six stops each brake signal is transmitted electrically from 60 mph, to achieve the average de- between the brake pedal and some or celeration for each stop as specified in all of the foundation brakes, regardless table III. Apply the brake control as of the means of actuation of the foun- quickly as possible. Maintain control dation brakes, the tests in S7.9.1 force until vehicle has stopped. through S7.9.3 of this standard are con- At the completion of the stops speci- ducted by inducing any single failure fied above, deplete the system of any in any circuit that electrically trans- residual brake power reserve capa- mits the brake signal, and all other bility. Make one stop from 60 mph at systems intact. Determine whether the an average deceleration of not lower brake system indicator lamp is acti- than 7 fpsps for passenger cars (equiva- vated when the failure is induced. lent stopping distance 554 feet), or 6 S7.9.6 For an EV with RBS that is fpsps for vehicles other than passenger part of the service brake system, the cars (equivalent stopping distance 646 tests specified in S7.9.1 through S7.9.3 feet) and determine whether the con- are conducted with the RBS discon- trol force exceeds 150 pounds. nected and all other systems intact. (b) (For vehicles with brake power Determine whether the brake system units with accumulator type systems.) indicator lamp is activated when the Test as in S7.10.2(a), except make 10 RBS is disconnected. stops instead of 6 and, at the comple- S7.10 Service brake system—inoper- tion of the 10 stops, deplete the failed ative brake power unit or brake power as- element of the brake power unit of any sist unit test. (For vehicles equipped residual brake power reserve capability with brake power unit or brake power before making the final stop. assist unit.) (c) (For vehicles with brake power as- S7.10.1 Regular procedure. (This test sist or brake power units with backup need not be run if the option in S7.10.2 systems.) If the brake power or brake is selected.) On vehicles with brake power assist unit operates in conjunc- power assist units, render the brake tion with a backup system and the power assist unit inoperative, or one of backup system is activated automati- the brake power assist unit subsystems cally in the event of a primary power if two or more subsystems are pro- failure, the backup system is operative

220

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00220 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.105

during this test. Disconnect the pri- Leave an interval of 0.4 mi between the mary source of power of one sub- start of brake applications. Accelerate system. Make 15 stops, each from 60 immediately to the initial test speed mph, with the backup system activated after each stop. Drive 1 mi at 30 mph for the failed subsystem, to achieve an after the last fade stop, and imme- average deceleration of 12 fpsps for diately follow the recovery procedure each stop. specified in S7.11.3.1. (d) Restore systems to normal at S7.11.2.2 Vehicles with GVWR greater completion of these tests. For vehicles than 10,000 lb. With transmission in equipped with more than one neutral (or declutched) make 10 snubs brakepower assist or brakepower unit, from 40 to 20 mph at 10 fpsps for each conduct tests of each in turn. snub. Establish an initial brake tem- S7.10.3 Electric brakes. perature before the first brake applica- (a) For vehicles with electrically-ac- tion of 130 °F. to 150 °F. Initial brake tuated service brakes, the tests in temperatures before brake application S7.10.1 or S7.10.2 are conducted with for subsequent snubs are those occur- any single electrical failure in the elec- ring in the time intervals specified tric brake system instead of the brake below. Attain the required deceleration power or brake power assist systems, within 1 s and maintain it for the re- and all other systems intact. mainder of the snubbing time. Leave (b) For EVs with RBS that is part of an interval of 30 s between snubs (start the service brake system, the tests in of brake application to start of brake S7.10.1 or S7.10.2 are conducted with application). Accelerate immediately the RBS discontinued and all other to the initial test speed after each systems intact. snub. Drive for 1.5 mi at 40 mph after S7.11 Service brake system—first fade the last snub and immediately follow and recovery test. the recovery procedure specified in S7.11.1 Baseline check stops or snubs. S7.11.3.2. S7.11.1.1 Vehicles with GVWR of 10,000 S7.11.3 Recovery stops or snubs. lb or less. Make three stops from 30 mph at 10 fpsps for each stop. Control force S7.11.3.1 Vehicles with GVWR of 10,000 readings may be terminated when vehi- lb or less. Make five stops from 30 mph cle speed falls to 5 mph. Average the at 10 fpsps for each stop. Control force maximum brake control force required readings may be terminated when vehi- for the three stops. cle speed falls to 5 mph. Allow a brak- S7.11.1.2 Vehicles with GVWR greater ing distance interval of 1 mi. Imme- than 10,000 pounds. With transmission diately after each stop accelerate at in neutral (or declutched), make three maximum rate to 30 mph and maintain snubs from 40 to 20 mph at 10 fpsps for that speed until making the next stop. each snub. Average the maximum Record the maximum control force for brake control force required for the each stop. three snubs. S7.11.3.2 Vehicles with GVWR greater S7.11.2 Fade stops or snubs. than 10,000 lb. With transmission in S7.11.2.1 Vehicles with GVWR of 10,000 neutral (or declutched) make five pounds or less. Make 5 stops from 60 snubs from 40 to 20 mph at 10 fpsps for mph at 15 fpsps followed by 5 stops at each snub. After each snub, accelerate the maximum attainable deceleration at maximum rate to 40 mph and main- between 5 and 15 fpsps for each stop. tain that speed until making the next Establish an initial brake temperature brake application at a point 1.5 mi before the first brake application of from the point of the previous brake 130° to 150 °F. Initial brake tempera- application. Record the maximum con- tures before brake applications for sub- trol force for each snub. sequent stops are those occurring at S7.12 Service brake system—second re- the distance intervals. Attain the re- burnish. Repeat S7.6. quired deceleration within 1 second S7.13 Service brake system—second and, as a minimum, maintain it for the fade and recovery test. Repeat S7.11 ex- remainder of the stopping time. Con- cept in S7.11.2 run 15 fade stops or 20 trol force readings may be terminated snubs instead of 10. when vehicle speed falls to 5 mph. S7.14 Third reburnish. Repeat S7.6.

221

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00221 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.105 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S7.15 Service brake system—fourth ef- (b) The friction surface of the brake, fectiveness test. Repeat S7.5. Then (for the master cylinder or brake power passenger cars) make four stops from unit reservoir cover and seal and filler either 95 mph if the speed attainable in openings, for leakage of brake fluid or 2 mi is 99 to (but not including) 104 lubricant. mph, or 100 mph if the speed attainable (c) The master cylinder or brake in 2 mi is 104 mph or greater. power unit reservoir for compliance S7.16 Service brake system—water re- with the volume and labeling require- covery test. ments of S5.4.2 and S5.4.3. In deter- S7.16.1 Baseline check stop. Make mining the fully applied worn condi- three stops from 30 mph at 10 fpsps for tion assume that the lining is worn to: each stop. Control force readings may (1) Rivet or bolt heads on riveted or be terminated when vehicle speed falls bolted linings, or (2) within one thirty- to 5 mph. Average the maximum brake seconds of an inch of shoe or pad control force required for the three mounting surface on bonded linings, or stops. (3) the limit recommended by the man- S7.16.2 Wet brake recovery stops. With ufacturer, whichever is larger relative the brakes fully released at all times, to the total possible shoe or pad move- drive the vehicle for 2 min at a speed of ment. Drums or rotors are assumed to 5 mph in any combination of forward be at nominal design drum diameter or and reverse directions, through a rotor thickness. Linings are assumed trough having a water depth of 6 in. adjusted for normal operating clear- After leaving the trough, immediately ance in the released position. accelerate at a maximum rate to 30 (d) The brake system indicator mph without a brake application. Im- light(s), for compliance with operation mediately upon reaching that speed in various key positions, lens color, la- make five stops, each from 30 mph at 10 beling, and location, in accordance fpsps for each stop. After each stop (ex- with S5.3. cept the last), accelerate the vehicle S7.19 Moving barrier test. (Only for immediately at a maximum rate to a vehicles that have been tested accord- speed of 30 mph and begin the next ing to S7.7.2.) Load the vehicle to stop. GVWR, release parking brake, and S7.17 Spike stops. Make 10 successive place the transmission selector control spike stops from 30 mph with the trans- to engage the parking mechanism. mission in neutral, with no reverse With a moving barrier as described in stops. Make spike stops by applying a paragraph 3.3 of SAE recommended control force of 200 lb while recording practice J972 ‘‘Moving Barrier Collision control force versus time. Maintain Tests,’’ November 1966, impact the vehi- control force until vehicle has stopped. cle from the front at 21⁄2 mph. Keep the At completion of 10 spike stops, make longitudinal axis of the barrier parallel six effectiveness stops from 60 mph. with the longitudinal axis of the vehi- S7.18 Final inspection. Inspect— cle. Repeat the test, impacting the ve- (a) The service brake system for de- hicle from the rear. tachment or fracture of any compo- NOTE: The vehicle used for this test need nents, such as brake springs and brake not be the same vehicle that has been used shoes or disc pad facing. for the braking tests.

222

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00222 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.105

FIGURE 1—TYPICAL PLUG THERMOCOUPLE INSTALLATIONS

NOTE: The second thermocouple shall be cumferentially of the thermocouple installed installed at .080 inch depth within 1 inch cir- at .040 inch depth.

TABLE I.—BRAKE TEST PROCEDURE SEQUENCE AND REQUIREMENTS

Test load Sequence Test procedure Requirements Light GVWR

1. Instrumentation check ...... S7.2 2. First (preburnish) effectiveness test ...... X S7.3 ...... S5.1.1.1 3. Burnish procedure ...... X S7.4 4. Second effectiveness test ...... X S7.5(b) ...... S5.1.1.2 5. First reburnish ...... X S7.6 ......

223

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00223 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.004 EC01AU91.005 § 571.105 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

TABLE I.—BRAKE TEST PROCEDURE SEQUENCE AND REQUIREMENTS—Continued

Test load Sequence Test procedure Requirements Light GVWR

6. Parking brake ...... X X S7.7 ...... S5.2 7. Stability and control during braking (braking-in-a- X ...... S7.5(a) ...... S5.1.7 curve test). 8. Third effectiveness (lightly loaded vehicle) ...... X ...... S7.8 ...... S5.1.1.3 9. Partial failure ...... X X S7.9 ...... S5.1.2 10. Inoperative brake power and power assist units ...... X S7.10 ...... S5.1.3 11. First fade and recovery ...... X S7.11 ...... S5.1.4 12. Second reburnish ...... X S7.12 13. Second fade and recovery ...... X S7.13 ...... S5.1.4 14. Third reburnish ...... X S7.14 15. Fourth effectiveness ...... X S7.15 ...... S5.1.1.4 16. Water recovery ...... X S7.16 ...... S5.1.5 17. Spike stops ...... X S7.17 ...... S5.1.6 18. Final inspection ...... S7.18 ...... S5.6 19. Moving barrier test ...... X S7.19 ...... S5.2.2.3

TABLE III—INOPERATIVE BRAKE POWER ASSIST AND BRAKE POWER UNITS

Average deceleration, FPSPS Equivalent stopping distance, feet Column 1—brake Column 2—brake Column 3—brake Column 4—brake Stop No. power assist power unit power assist power unit (b) and (b) and (b) and (b) and (a) (c) (a) (c) (a) (c) (a) (c)

1 ...... 16.0 14.0 16.0 13.0 242 277 242 298 2 ...... 12.0 12.0 13.0 11.0 323 323 298 352 3 ...... 10.0 10.0 12.0 10.0 388 388 323 388 4 ...... 9.0 8.5 11.0 9.5 431 456 352 409 5 ...... 8.0 7.5 10.0 9.0 484 517 388 431 6 ...... 7.5 6.7 9.5 8.5 517 580 409 456 7 ...... 1 7.0 1 6.0 9.0 8.0 554 646 431 484 8 ...... NA NA 8.5 7.5 NA NA 456 517 9 ...... NA NA 8.0 7.0 NA NA 484 554 10 ...... NA NA 7.5 6.5 NA NA 517 596 11 ...... NA NA 1 7.0 1 6.0 NA NA 554 646

1 Depleted. (a) Passenger cars; (b) vehicles other than passenger cars with GVWR of 10,000 lbs or less; (c) vehicles with GVWR greater than 10,000 lbs; NA=Not applicable.

224

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00224 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER07SE99.007 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.106

[41 FR 29696, July 19, 1976; 41 FR 32221, Aug. 2, 1976, as amended at 41 FR 36026, 36027, Aug. 26, 1976; 43 FR 9606, Mar. 9, 1978; 46 FR 64, Jan. 2, 1981; 46 FR 21180, Apr. 9, 1981; 47 FR 61893, Dec. 21, 1981; 48 FR 39941, Sept. 2, 1983; 49 FR 30199, July 27, 1984; 52 FR 19874, May 28, 1987; 53 FR 8200, Mar. 14, 1988; 54 FR 22905, May 30, 1989; 54 FR 40082, Sept. 29, 1989; 57 FR 47800, Oct. 20, 1992; 58 FR 45461, Aug. 30, 1993; 60 FR 6434, Feb. 2, 1995; 60 FR 13256 and 13303, Mar. 10, 1995; 61 FR 19562, May 2, 1996; 62 FR 46917, Sept. 5, 1997; 62 FR 51069, Sept. 30, 1997; 64 FR 9449, Feb. 26, 1999; 64 FR 48564, Sept. 7, 1999; 65 FR 6331, Feb. 9, 2000; 68 FR 47495, Aug. 11, 2003]

EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 67 FR 79439, Dec. 27, 2002, § 571.105 was amended by removing the definition of motor home in S4, Definitions, effective Dec. 27, 2004.

§ 571.106 Standard No. 106; Brake Free length means the linear measure- hoses. ment of hose exposed between the end fittings of a hose assembly in a S1. Scope. This standard specifies la- straight position. beling and performance requirements Permanently attached end fitting for motor vehicle brake hose, brake means an end fitting that is attached hose assemblies, and brake hose end by deformation of the fitting about the fittings. hose by crimping or swaging, or an end S2. Purpose. The purpose of this fitting that is attached by use of a sac- standard is to reduce deaths and inju- rificial sleeve or ferrule that requires ries occurring as a result of brake sys- replacement each time a hose assembly tem failure from pressure or vacuum is rebuilt. loss due to hose or hose assembly rup- Rupture means any failure that re- ture. sults in separation of a brake hose S3. Application. This standard applies from its end fitting or in leakage. to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- Vacuum tubing connector means a senger vehicles, trucks, buses, trailers, flexible conduit of vacuum that (i) con- and motorcycles, and to hydraulic, air, nects metal tubing to metal tubing in and vacuum brake hose, brake hose as- a brake system, (ii) is attached without semblies, and brake hose end fittings end fittings, and (iii) when installed, for use in those vehicles. has an unsupported length less than S4. Definitions. the total length of those portions that Armor means protective material in- cover the metal tubing. stalled on a brake hose to increase the S5. Requirements—hydraulic brake resistance of the hose or hose assembly hose, brake hose assemblies, and brake to abrasion or impact damage. hose end fittings. S5.1 Construction. (a) Each hydraulic Brake hose means a flexible conduit, brake hose assembly shall have perma- other than a vacuum tubing connector, nently attached brake hose end fittings manufactured for use in a brake sys- which are attached by deformation of tem to transmit or contain the fluid the fitting about the hose by crimping pressure or vacuum used to apply force or swaging. to a vehicle’s brakes. For hose, a di- (b) Each hydraulic brake hose assem- 1 mensional description such as ‘‘ ⁄4-inch bly that is equipped with a permanent hose’’ refers to the nominal inside di- supplemental support integrally at- ameter. For tubing, a dimensional de- tached to the assembly and is manufac- 1 scription such as ‘‘ ⁄4-in tubing’’ refers tured as a replacement for use on a ve- to the nominal outside diameter. hicle not equipped, as an integral part Brake hose assembly means a brake of the vehicle’s original design, with a hose, with or without armor, equipped means of attaching the support to the with end fittings for use in a brake sys- vehicle shall be equipped with a brack- tem, but does not include an air or vac- et that is integrally attached to the uum assembly prepared by the owner supplemental support and that adapts or operator of a used vehicle, by his the vehicle to properly accept this type employee, or by a repair facility, for of brake hose assembly. installation in that used vehicle. S5.2 Labeling. Brake hose end fitting means a cou- S5.2.1 Each hydraulic brake hose, ex- pler, other than a clamp, designed for cept hose sold as part of a motor vehi- attachment to the end of a brake hose. cle, shall have at least two clearly

225

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00225 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.106 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

identifiable stripes of at least one-six- bly and is manufactured as a replace- teenth of an inch in width, placed on ment assembly for a vehicle equipped, opposite sides of the brake hose par- as an integral part of the vehicle’s allel to its longitudinal axis. One stripe original design, with a means of at- may be interrupted by the information taching the support to the vehicle shall required by S5.2.2, and the other stripe be sold in a package that is marked or may be interrupted by additional infor- labeled as follows: ‘‘FOR USE ON [insert mation at the manufacturer’s option. Manufacturer, Model Name] ONLY’’; However, hydraulic brake hose manu- (b) Each hydraulic brake hose assem- factured for use only in an assembly bly that is equipped with a permanent whose end fittings prevent its installa- supplemental support integrally at- tion in a twisted orientation in either tached to the assembly and is manufac- side of the vehicle, need not meet the tured as a replacement for use on a ve- requirements of S5.2.1. hicle not equipped, as an integral part S5.2.2 Each hydraulic brake hose of the vehicle’s original design, with a shall be labeled, or cut from bulk hose means of attaching the support to the that is labeled, at intervals of not more vehicle shall comply with paragraphs than 6 inches, measured from the end (a) (1) and (2) of this section: of one legend to the beginning of the (1) Be sold in a package that is next, in block capital letters and nu- marked or labeled as follows: ‘‘FOR merals at least one-eighth of an inch USE ONLY WITH A SUPPLEMENTAL high, with the information listed in SUPPORT.’’ paragraphs (a) through (e) of this sec- (2) Be accompanied by clear, detailed tion. The information need not be instructions explaining the proper in- present on hose that is sold as part of stallation of the brake hose and the a brake hose assembly or a motor vehi- supplemental support bracket to the cle. vehicle and the consequences of not at- (a) The symbol DOT, constituting a taching the supplemental support certification by the hose manufacturer bracket to the vehicle. The instruc- that the hose conforms to all applica- ble motor vehicle safety standards. tions shall be printed on or included in (b) A designation that identifies the the package specified in paragraph manufacturer of the hose, which shall (a)(1) of this section. be filed in writing with: Office of Crash S5.2.4 Each hydraulic brake hose as- Avoidance Standards, Vehicle Dynam- sembly, except those sold as part of a ics Division, National Highway Traffic motor vehicle, shall be labeled by Safety Administration, 400 Seventh means of a band around the brake hose Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. The assembly as specified in this paragraph marking may consist of a designation or, at the option of the manufacturer, other than block capital letters re- by means of labeling as specified in quired by S5.2.2. S5.2.4.1. The band may at the manufac- (c) The month, day, and year, or the turer’s option be attached so as to month and year, of manufacture, ex- move freely along the length of the as- pressed in numerals. For example, 10/1/ sembly, as long as it is retained by the 96 means October 1, 1996. end fittings. The band shall be etched, (d) The nominal inside diameter of embossed, or stamped in block capital the hose expressed in inches or frac- letters, numerals or symbols at least tions of inches, or in millimeters fol- one-eighth of an inch high, with the lowed by the abbreviation ‘‘mm.’’ following information: (e) Either ‘‘HR’’ to indicate that the (a) The symbol DOT constituting cer- hose is regular expansion hydraulic tification by the hose assembler that hose or ‘‘HL’’ to indicate that the hose the hose assembly conforms to all ap- is low expansion hydraulic hose. plicable motor vehicle safety stand- S5.2.3 Package labeling for brake hose ards. assemblies designed to be used with a sup- (b) A designation that identifies the plemental support. (a) Each hydraulic manufacturer of the hose assembly, brake hose assembly that is equipped which shall be filed in writing with: Of- with a permanent supplemental sup- fice of Crash Avoidance Standards, Ve- port integrally attached to the assem- hicle Dynamics Division, National

226

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00226 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.106

Highway Traffic Safety Administra- S5.3.3 Whip resistance. A hydraulic tion, 400 Seventh Street SW., Wash- brake hose assembly shall not rupture ington, DC 20590. The designation may when run continuously on a flexing consist of block capital letters, numer- machine for 35 hours (S6.3). als or a symbol. S5.3.4 Tensile strength. A hydraulic S5.2.4.1 At least one end fitting of a brake hose assembly shall withstand a hydraulic brake hose assembly shall be pull of 325 pounds without separation etched, stamped or embossed with a of the hose from its end fittings (S6.4). designation at least one-sixteenth of an S5.3.5 Water absorption and burst inch high that identifies the manufac- strength. A hydraulic brake hose assem- turer of the hose assembly and is filed bly, after immersion in water for 70 in accordance with S5.2.4(b). hours (S6.5), shall withstand water S5.3 Test requirements. A hydraulic pressure of 4,000 psi for 2 minutes, and brake hose assembly or appropriate then shall not rupture at less than 5,000 part thereof shall be capable of meet- psi (S6.2). ing any of the requirements set forth S5.3.6 Water absorption and tensile under this heading, when tested under strength. A hydraulic brake hose assem- the conditions of S11 and the applicable bly, after immersion in water for 70 procedures of S6. However, a particular hours (S6.5), shall withstand a pull of hose assembly or appropriate part 325 pounds without separation of the thereof need not meet further require- hose from its end fittings (S6.4). ments after having been subjected to S5.3.7 Water absorption and whip re- and having met the constriction re- sistance. A hydraulic brake hose assem- quirement (S5.3.1) and any one of the bly, after immersion in water for 70 requirements specified in S5.3.2 hours (S6.5), shall not rupture when through S5.3.11. run continuously on a flexing machine for 35 hours (S6.3). S5.3.1 Constriction. Except for that S.5.3.8 Low-temperature resistance. A part of an end fitting which does not hydraulic brake hose conditioned at contain hose, every inside diameter of minus 40 °F. for 70 hours shall not show any section of a hydraulic brake hose cracks visible without magnification assembly shall be not less than 64 per- when bent around a cylinder as speci- cent of the nominal inside diameter of fied in S6.6. (S6.6) the brake hose. S5.3.9 Brake fluid compatibility, con- S5.3.2 Expansion and burst strength. striction, and burst strength. Except for The maximum expansion of a hydraulic brake hose assemblies designed for use brake hose assembly at 1,000 psi and with mineral or petroleum-based brake 1,500 psi shall not exceed the values fluids, a hydraulic brake hose assembly specified in Table I (S6.1). The hydrau- shall meet the constriction require- lic brake hose assembly shall then ment of S5.3.1 after having been sub- withstand water pressure of 4,000 psi jected to a temperature of 200 °F for 70 for 2 minutes without rupture, and hours while filled with SAE RM–66–04 shall not rupture at less than 5,000 psi Compatibility Fluid, as described in (S6.2). appendix B of SAE Standard J1703 JAN 1995, ‘‘Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid.’’ It TABLE 1—MAXIMUM EXPANSION OF FREE shall then withstand water pressure of LENGTH BRAKE HOSE, CC/FT. 4,000 psi for 2 minutes and thereafter Test Pressure shall not rupture at less than 5,000 psi (S6.2). (SAE RM–66–03 Compatibility Hydraulic brake 1,000 psi 1,500 psi Fluid, as described in appendix A of hose, inside di- Regular Regular SAE Standard J1703 NOV83, ‘‘Motor Ve- ameter expan- Low ex- expan- Low ex- sion pansion sion pansion hicle Brake Fluid,’’ November 1983, may hose hose hose hose be used in place of SAE RM–66–04 until January 1, 1995.) 1⁄8 inch or 3 mm or less...... 0.66 0.33 0.79 0.42 S5.3.10 Ozone resistance. A hydraulic 3⁄16 inch or 4 to 5 brake hose shall not show cracks visi- mm ...... 86 .55 1.02 .72 ble under 7-power magnification after 1⁄4 inch or 6 mm exposure to ozone for 70 hours at 104 °F. or more ...... 1.04 .82 1.30 1.17 (S6.8).

227

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00227 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.106 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S5.3.11 End fitting corrosion resist- S6.1.3 Calculation of expansion at ance. After 24 hours of exposure to salt 1,000 and 1,500 psi. (a) Adjust the fluid spray, a hydraulic brake hose end fit- level in the burette to zero. ting shall show no base metal corrosion (b) Close the valve to the burette, on the end fitting surface except where apply pressure at the rate of 15,000 psi crimping or the application of labeling per minute, and seal 1,000 psi in the information has caused displacement hose (1,500 psi in second series). of the protective coating. (S6.9) (c) After 3 seconds open the valve to S6. Test procedures—Hydraulic brake the burette for 10 seconds and allow the hose, brake hose assemblies, and brake fluid in the expanded hose to rise into hose end fittings. the burette. S6.1. Expansion test. (d) Repeat the procedure in steps (b) S6.1.1 Apparatus. Utilize a test appa- and (c) twice. Measure the amount of ratus (as shown in Figure 1) which con- test fluid which has accumulated in the sists of: burette as a result of the three applica- (a) Source for required fluid pressure; tions of pressure. (e) Calculate the volumetric expan- (b) Test fluid of water without any sion per foot by dividing the total ac- additives and free of gases; cumulated test fluid by 3 and further (c) Reservoir for test fluid; dividing by the free length of the hose (d) Pressure gauges; in feet. (e) Brake hose end fittings in which S6.2 Burst strength test. (a) Connect to mount the hose vertically; and the brake hose to a pressure system (f) Graduate burette with 0.05 cc in- and fill it completely with water, al- crements. lowing all gases to escape. (b) Apply water pressure of 4,000 psi at a rate of 15,000 psi per minute. (c) After 2 minutes at 4,000 psi, in- crease the pressure at the rate of 15,000 psi per minute until the pressure ex- ceeds 5,000 psi. S6.3 Whip resistance test. S6.3.1 Apparatus. Utilize test appa- ratus that is dynamically balanced and includes: (a) A movable header consisting of a horizontal bar equipped with capped end fittings and mounted through bear- ings at each end to points 4 inches from the center of two vertically rotating disks whose edges are in the same vertical plane; (b) An adjustable stationary header parallel to the movable header in the same horizontal plane as the centers of the disks, and fitted with open end fit- tings; (c) An elapsed time indicator; and FIG. 1—EXPANSION TEST APPARATUS (d) A source of water pressure con- S6.1.2 Preparation. (a) Measure the nected to the open end fittings. free length of the hose assembly. S6.3.2 Preparation. (a) Except for the (b) Mount the hose so that it is in a supplemental support specified in vertical straight position without ten- S6.3.2(d), remove all external append- sion when pressure is applied. ages including, but not limited to, hose (c) Fill the hose with test fluid and armor, chafing collars, mounting bleed all gases from the system. brackets, date band and spring guards. (d) Close the valve to the burette and (b) Measure the hose free length. apply 1,500 psi for 10 seconds; then re- (c) Mount the hose in the whip test lease pressure. machine, introducing slack as specified

228

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00228 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.006 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.106

in Table II for the size hose tested, (a) Remove 11⁄8 inches of hose cover, measuring the projected length par- if any, from the center of the hose as- allel to the axis of the rotating disks. semblies without injury to any rein- The manufacturer may, at his option, forcing material or elongation of the adapt the fitting attachment points to hose assemblies. permit mounting hose assemblies (b) Measure the free length of the equipped with angled or other special hose assemblies. fittings in the same orientation as hose S.6.5.2 Immersion and sequence test- assemblies equipped with straight fit- ing. (a) Immerse the hose assemblies in tings. distilled water for 70 hours. (d) In the case of a brake hose assem- (b) Thirty minutes after removal bly equipped with a permanent supple- mental support integrally attached to from water, conduct tests S6.2, S6.3, the assembly, the assembly may be and S6.4, using a different hose for each mounted using the supplemental sup- sequence. port and associated means of simu- S6.6 Low temperature resistance test. lating its attachment to the vehicle. S6.6.1 Preparation. (a) Remove hose Mount the supplemental support in the armor, if any, and condition a hose in same vertical and horizontal planes as a straight position in air at minus 40 the stationary header end of the whip °F. for 70 hours. test fixture described in S6.3.1(b). (b) Condition a cylinder in air at Mount or attach the supplemental sup- minus 40 °F for 70 hours, using a cyl- port so that it is positioned in accord- inder of 21⁄2 inches diameter for test of ance with the recommendation of the hose less than 1⁄8 inch or 3 mm 3 inches assembly manufacturer for attaching for tests of 1⁄8 inch or 3mm hose, 31⁄2 the supplemental support on a vehicle. inches for tests of 3⁄16 and 1⁄4 inch hose or of 4 to 6 mm hose, and 4 inches for TABLE II—HOSE LENGTHS tests of hose greater than 1⁄4 inch or 6 Slack, inches mm in diameter.

Free length between end fittings, 1 S6.6.2 Flexibility testing. Bend the inches ⁄8 inch or More than 3 mm hose 1⁄8 inch or conditioned hose 180 degrees around or less 3 mm hose the conditioned cylinder at a steady 8 to 151⁄2, inclusive ...... 1.750 ...... rate in a period of 3 to 5 seconds. Ex- 10 to 151⁄2, inclusive ...... 1,000 amine without magnification for Over 151⁄2 to 19 inclusive ...... 1.250 ...... Over 19 to 24, inclusive ...... 0.750 ...... cracks. S6.7 Brake fluid compatibility test. S6.3.3 Operation. (a) Apply 235 psi S6.7.1 Preparation. (a) Attach a hose water pressure and bleed all gases from assembly below a 1-pint reservoir filled the system. with 100 ml. of SAE RM–66–04 Compat- (b) Drive the movable head at 800 ibility Fluid as shown in Figure 2. rpm. (SAE RM–66–03 Compatibility Fluid, as S6.4 Tensile strength test. Utilize a described in appendix A of SAE Stand- tension testing machine conforming to ard J1703 NOV83, ‘‘Motor Vehicle Brake the requirements of the methods of Fluid,’’ November 1983, may be used in Verification of Testing Machines (1964 place of SAE RM–66–04 until January 1, American Society for Testing and Ma- 1995.) terials, Designation E4), and provided (b) Fill the hose assembly with brake with a recording device to give the total pull in pounds. fluid, seal the lower end, and place the S6.4.1 Preparation. Mount the hose test assembly in an oven in a vertical assembly to ensure straight, evenly position. distributed machine pull. S6.4.2 Operation. Apply tension at a rate of 1 inch per minute travel of the moving head until separation occurs. S6.5 Water absorption sequence tests. S6.5.1 Preparation. Prepare three hose assemblies as follows:

229

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00229 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.106 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

ozone per 100 million parts of air by volume. (c) Examine the hose for cracks under 7-power magnification, ignoring areas immediately adjacent to or with- in the area covered by binding. S6.9 End fitting corrosion resistance test. Utilize the apparatus described in ASTM B117–64, ‘‘Salt Spray (Fog) Test- ing’’. S6.9.1 Construction. Construct the salt spray chamber so that: (a) The construction material does not affect the corrosiveness of the fog. (b) The hose assembly is supported or suspended 30° from the vertical and parallel to the principal direction of the horizontal flow of fog through the chamber. (c) The hose assembly does not con- tact any metallic material or any ma- terial capable of acting as a wick. (d) Condensation which falls from the assembly does not return to the solu- tion reservoir for respraying. (e) Condensation from any source S6.7.2 Oven treatment. (a) Condition does not fall on the brake hose assem- the hose assembly at 200 °F. for 70 blies or the solution collectors. hours. (f) Spray from the nozzles is not di- (b) Cool the hose assembly at room rected onto the hose assembly. temperature for 30 minutes. S6.9.2 Preparation. (a) Plug each end (c) Drain the brake hose assembly, of the hose assembly. immediately determine that every in- (b) Mix a salt solution five parts by side diameter of any section of the hose weight of sodium chloride to 95 parts of assembly, except for that part of an distilled water, using sodium chloride end fitting which does not contain substantially free of nickel and copper, hose, is not less than 64 percent of the and containing on a dry basis not more nominal inside diameter of the hose, than 0.1 percent of sodium iodide and and conduct the test specified in S6.2. not more than 0.3 percent total impuri- S6.8 Ozone resistance test. Utilize a ties. Ensure that the solution is free of cylinder with a diameter eight times suspended solids before the solution is the nominal outside diameter of the atomized. brake hose excluding armor. (c) After atomization at 95 °F. ensure S6.8.1 Preparation. After removing that the collected solution is in the PH any armor, bind a hydraulic brake hose range of 6.5 to 7.2. Make the PH meas- 360° around the cylinder. In the case of urements at 77 °F. hose shorter than the circumference of (d) Maintain a compressed air supply the cylinder, bend the hose so that as to the nozzle or nozzles free of oil and much of its length as possible is in con- dirt and between 10 and 25 psi. tact. S6.9.3 Operation. Subject the brake S6.8.2 Exposure to ozone. (a) Condi- hose assembly to the salt spray con- tion the hose on the cylinder in air at tinuously for 24 hours. room temperature for 24 hours. (a) Regulate the mixture so that each (b) Immediately thereafter, condition collector will collect from 1 to 2 ml. of the hose on the cylinder for 70 hours in solution per hour for each 80 square an exposure chamber having an ambi- centimeters of horizontal collecting ent air temperature of 104 °F. during area. the test and containing air mixed with (b) Maintain exposure zone tempera- ozone in the proportion of 50 parts of ture at 95 °F.

230

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00230 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.007 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.106

(c) Upon completion, remove the salt manently attached brake hose end fit- deposit from the surface of the hoses tings or reusable brake hose end fit- by washing gently or dipping in clean tings. Each air brake hose constructed running water not warmer than 100 °F. of synthetic or natural elastomeric and then drying immediately. rubber intended for use with reusable S7. Requirements—Air brake hose, end fittings shall conform to the di- brake hose assemblies, and brake hose end mensional requirements specified in fittings. Table III. S7.1 Construction. Each air brake hose assembly shall be equipped with per-

TABLE III—AIR BRAKE HOSE DIMENSIONS FOR REUSABLE ASSEMBLIES

Type I outside diameter, Type II outside diameter, Inside diameter inches inches Size, inches tolerance, inches Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum

3⁄16 ...... +0.026 0.472 0.510 0.500 0.539 ¥0.000 1⁄4 ...... +0.031 0.535 0.573 0.562 0.602 ¥0.000 5⁄16 ...... +0.031 0.598 0.636 0.656 0.695 ¥0.000 3⁄8 ...... ±0.023 0.719 0.781 0.719 0.781 13⁄32 ...... +0.031 0.714 0.760 0.742 0.789 ¥0.000 1⁄2 ...... +0.039 0.808 0.854 0.898 0.945 ¥0.000 5⁄8 ...... +0.042 0.933 0.979 1.054 1.101 ¥0.000 1⁄2 special ...... ±.031 .844 .906 .844 .906

S7.2 Labeling pressed in numerals. For example, 10/1/ S7.2.1 Hose. Each air brake hose shall 96 means October 1, 1996. be labeled, or cut from bulk hose that (d) The nominal inside diameter of is labeled, at intervals of not more the hose expressed in inches or frac- than 6 inches, measured from the end tions of inches or in millimeters, or the of one legend to the beginning of the nominal outside diameter of plastic next, in block capital letters and nu- tubing expressed in inches or fractions merals at least one-eighth of an inch of inches or in millimeters followed by high, with the information listed in the letters OD. The abbreviation ‘‘mm’’ paragraphs (a) through (e) of this sec- shall follow hose sizes that are ex- tion. The information need not be pressed in millimeters. (Examples of 1 1 1 present on hose that is sold as part of inside diameter: ⁄8, ⁄2 ( ⁄2SP in the case 1 a brake hose assembly or a motor vehi- of ⁄2 inch special air brake hose), 4 mm, 1 cle. 6 mm. Examples of outside diameter: ⁄4 OD, 12 mm OD.) (a) The symbol DOT, constituting a (e) The letter ‘‘A’’ shall indicate in- certification by the hose manufacturer tended use in air brake systems. In the that the hose conforms to all applica- case of a hose constructed of synthetic ble motor vehicle safety standards. or natural elastomeric rubber intended (b) A designation that identifies the for use in a reusable assembly, ‘‘AI’’ or manufacturer of the hose, which shall ‘‘AII’’ shall indicate Type I or Type II be filed in writing with: Office of Crash dimensional characteristics of the hose Avoidance Standards, Vehicle Dynam- as described in Table III. ics Division, National Highway Traffic S7.2.2 End fittings. Except for an end Safety Administration, 400 Seventh fitting that is attached by deformation Street SW., Washington, DC 20590. The of the fitting about a hose by crimping designation may consist of block cap- or swaging, at least one component of ital letters, numerals, or a symbol. each air brake hose fitting shall be (c) The month, day, and year, or the etched, embossed, or stamped in block month and year, of manufacture, ex- capital letters and numerals at least

231

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00231 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.106 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

one-sixteenth of an inch high with the applicable motor vehicle safety stand- following information: ards. (a) The symbol DOT, constituting a (b) A designation that identifies the certification by the manufacturer of manufacturer of the hose assembly, that component that the component which shall be filed in writing with: Of- conforms to all applicable motor vehi- fice of Crash Avoidance Standards, Ve- cle safety standards. hicle Dynamics Division, National (b) A designation that identifies the Highway Traffic Safety Administra- manufacturer of that component of the tion, 400 Seventh Street SW., Wash- fitting, which shall be filed in writing ington, DC 20590. The designation may with: Office of Crash Avoidance Stand- consist of block capital letters, numer- ards, Vehicle Dynamics Division, Na- als or a symbol. tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- S7.2.3.1 At least one end fitting of istration, 400 Seventh Street SW., an air brake hose assembly made with Washington, DC 20590. The designation end fittings that are attached by may consist of block capital letters, crimping or swaging shall be etched, numerals, or a symbol. stamped or embossed with a designa- tion at least one-sixteenth of an inch (c) The letter ‘‘A’’ shall indicate in- tended use in air brake systems. In the high that identifies the manufacturer case of an end fitting intended for use of the hose assembly and is filed in ac- cordance with S7.2.3(b). in a reusable assembly with brake hose S7.3 Test requirements. Each air brake subject to Table III, ‘‘AI’’ or ‘‘AII’’ shall hose assembly or appropriate part indicate use with Type I or Type II thereof shall be capable of meeting any hose, respectively. of the requirements set forth under (d) The nominal inside diameter of this heading, when tested under the the hose to which the fitting is prop- conditions of S11 and the applicable erly attached expressed in inches or procedures of S8. However, a particular fractions of inches or in millimeters, or hose assembly or appropriate part the outside diameter of the plastic tub- thereof need not meet further require- ing to which the fitting is properly at- ments after having met the constric- tached expressed in inches or fractions tion requirement (S7.3.1) and then hav- of inches or in millimeters followed by ing been subjected to any one of the re- the letters OD (See examples in quirements specified in S7.3.2 through S7.2.1(d)). The abbreviations ‘‘mm’’ shall S7.3.13. follow hose sizes that are expressed in S7.3.1 Construction. Except for that millimeters. part of an end fitting which does not S7.2.3 Assemblies. Each air brake hose contain hose, every inside diameter of assembly made with end fittings that any section of an air brake hose assem- are attached by crimping or swaging, bly shall be not less than 66 percent of except those sold as part of a motor ve- the nominal inside diameter of the hicle, shall be labeled by means of a brake hose. band around the brake hose assembly S7.3.2 High temperature resistance. An as specified in this paragraph or, at the air brake hose shall not show external option of the manufacturer, by means or internal cracks, charring, or disinte- of labeling as specified in S7.2.3.1. The gration visible without magnification band may at the manufacturer’s option when straightened after being bent for be attached so as to move freely along 70 hours at 212 °F. over a cylinder hav- the length of the assembly, as long as ing the radius specified in Table IV for it is retained by the end fittings. The the size of hose tested (S8.1). band shall be etched, embossed, or S7.3.3 Low temperature resistance. stamped in block capital letters, nu- The outer cover of an air brake hose merals or symbols at least one-eighth shall not show cracks visible without of an inch high, with the following in- magnification as a result of condi- formation: tioning at minus 40 °F. for 70 hours (a) The symbol DOT, constituting when bent around a cylinder having certification by the hose assembler the radius specified in Table IV for the that the hose assembly conforms to all size of hose tested (S8.2).

232

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00232 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.106

TABLE IV—AIR BRAKE HOSE DIAMETERS AND TEST CYLINDER RADII

Nominal hose diameter, in.* ...... 1⁄8 3⁄16 1⁄4 5⁄16 3⁄8, 13⁄32 7⁄16, 1⁄2 5⁄8 mm.* ...... 3 4, 5 6 8 10 12 16 Radius of test cylinder in inches ...... 11⁄2 2 21⁄2 3 31⁄2 4 41⁄2 *These sizes are listed to provide test values for brake hoses manufactured in these sizes. They do not represent conversions.

S7.3.4 Oil resistance. After immer- diameter, or 325 pounds if it is larger sion in ASTM No. 3 oil for 70 hours at than 1⁄2 inch or 12 mm in nominal inter- 212 °F. the volume of a specimen pre- nal diameter (S8.9). pared from the inner tube and cover of S7.3.11 Water absorption and tensile an air brake hose shall not increase strength. After immersion in distilled more than 100 percent (S8.3). water for 70 hours (S8.10), an air brake S7.3.5 Ozone resistance. The outer hose assembly (other than a coiled tube cover of an air brake hose shall not assembly which meets the require- show cracks visible under 7-power mag- ments of § 393.45 of this title) designed nification after exposure to ozone for 70 for use between frame and axle or be- hours at 104 °F. (S8.4). tween a towed and a towing vehicle S7.3.6 Length change. An airbrake hose (other than a coiled nylon tube for shall withstand without separation of use in an assembly that meets the re- the hose from its end fittings a pull of 1 quirements of § 393.45 of this title) shall 250 pounds if it is ⁄4 inch or 6 mm or not contract in length more than 7 per- less in nominal internal diameter, or a cent nor elongate more than 5 percent pull of 325 pounds if it is larger than 1⁄4 when subjected to air pressure of 200 inch or 6 mm in nominal internal di- psi (S8.5). ameter. After immersion in distilled S7.3.7 Adhesion. Except for hose re- water for 70 hours (S8.10), an air brake inforced by wire, an airbrake hose shall hose assembly designed for use in any withstand a tensile force of 8 pounds other application shall withstand with- per inch of length before separation of out separation of the hose from its end adjacent layers (S8.6). fitting a pull of 50 pounds if it is 1⁄4 inch S7.3.8 Air pressure. An air brake hose or 6 mm or less in nominal internal di- assembly shall contain air pressure of ameter, 150 pounds if it is 3⁄8 inch or 1⁄2 200 psi for 5 minutes without loss of inch or 10 to 12 mm in nominal internal more than 5 psi (S8.7). diameter, or 325 pounds if it is larger S7.3.9 Burst strength. An air brake than 1⁄2 inch or 12 mm in nominal inter- hose assembly shall not rupture when nal diameter (S8.9). exposed to hydrostatic pressure of 800 S7.3.12 Zinc chloride resistance. The psi (S8.8). outer cover of an air brake hose shall S7.3.10 Tensile strength. An air brake not show cracks visible under 7-power hose assembly (other than a coiled magnification after immersion in a 50 nylon tube assembly which meets the percent zinc chloride aqueous solution requirements of § 393.45 of this title) de- for 200 hours (S8.11). signed for use between frame and axle or between a towed and a towing vehi- S7.3.13 End fitting corrosion resist- cle shall withstand, without separation ance. After 24 hours of exposure to salt of the hose from its end fittings, a pull spray, air brake hose end fittings shall show no base metal corrosion on the of 250 pounds if it is 1⁄4 inch or less or 6 mm or less in nominal internal di- end fitting surface except where crimp- ameter, or a pull of 325 pounds if it is ing or the application of labeling infor- mation causes a displacement of the larger than 1⁄4 inch or 6 mm in nominal internal diameter. An air brake hose protective coating. assembly designed for use in any other S8. Test procedures—Air brake hose, application shall withstand, without brake hose assemblies, and brake hose end separation of the hose from its end fit- fittings. ting, a pull of 50 pounds if it is 1⁄4 inch S8.1 High temperature resistance test. or 6 mm or less in nominal internal di- (a) Utilize a cylinder having the radius ameter, 150 pounds if it is 3⁄8 or 1⁄2 inch indicated in Table IV for the size of or 10 mm to 12 mm in nominal internal hose tested.

233

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00233 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.106 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(b) Bind the hose around the cylinder sition, and apply air pressure of 10 psi and condition it in an air oven for 70 thereto. hours at 212 °F. (b) Measure the hose to determine (c) Cool the hose to room tempera- original free length. ture, remove it from the cylinder and (c) Without releasing the 10 psi, raise straighten it. the air pressure to the test hose to 200 (d) Without magnification, examine psi. the hose externally and cut the hose (d) Measure the hose under 200 psi to lengthwise and examine the inner tube. determine final free length. An elon- S8.2 Low temperature resistance test. gation or contraction is an increase or (a) Utilize a cylinder having the radius decrease, respectively, in the final free indicated in Table IV for the size of length from the original free length of hose tested. the hose. (b) Condition the cylinder and the S8.6 Adhesion test. brake hose, in a straight position, in a S8.6.1 Apparatus. A tension testing cold box at minus 40 °F. for 70 hours. machine that is power-driven and that (c) With the hose and cylinder at applies a constant rate of extension is minus 40 °F., bend the hose 180 degrees used for measuring the force required around the cylinder at a steady rate in to separate the layers of the test speci- a period of 3 to 5 seconds. men. The apparatus is constructed so S8.3 Oil resistance test. Utilize three that: test specimens and average the results. (a) The recording head includes a S8.3.1 Preparation. Fashion a test freely rotating form with an outside di- specimen by cutting a rectangular ameter substantially the same as the block 2 inches long and not less than inside diameter of the hose specimen to one-third of an inch in width, having a be placed on it. thickness of not more than one-six- (b) The freely rotating form is teenth inch, from the brake hose and mounted so that its axis of rotation is buff the specimen on both faces to en- in the plane of the ply being separated sure smooth surfaces. from the specimen and so that the ap- S8.3.2 Measurement. (a) Weigh each plied force is perpendicular to the tan- specimen to the nearest milligram in gent of the specimen circumference at air (W1) and in distilled water (W2) at the line of separation. room temperature. If wetting is nec- (c) The rate of travel of the power-ac- essary to remove air bubbles, dip the tuated grip is a uniform one inch per specimen in acetone and thoroughly minute and the capacity of the ma- rinse it with distilled water. chine is such that maximum applied (b) Immerse each specimen in ASTM tension during the test is not more No. 3 oil for 70 hours at 212 °F. and then than 85 percent nor less than 15 percent cool in ASTM No. 3 oil at room tem- of the machine’s rated capacity. perature for 30 to 60 minutes. (d) The machine produces a chart (c) Dip the specimen quickly in ace- with separation as one coordinate and tone and blot it lightly with filter applied tension as the other. paper. S8.6.2 Preparation. (a) Cut a test specimen of 1 inch or more in length (d) Weigh each specimen in a tared from the hose to be tested and cut the weighing bottle (W3) and in distilled layer to be tested of that test specimen water (W4) within five minutes of re- longitudinally along its entire length moval from the cooling liquid. to the level of contact with the adja- (e) Calculate the percentage increase cent layer. in volume follows: (b) Peel the layer to be tested from Percent of increase= the adjacent layer to create a flap large enough to permit attachment of [(W ¥W )¥(W ¥W )]/(W ¥W )×100 3 4 1 2 1 2 the power-actuated clamp of the appa- S8.4 Ozone resistance test. Conduct ratus. the test specified in S6.8 using air (c) Mount the test specimen on the brake hose. freely rotating form with the separated S8.5 Length change test. (a) Position layer attached to the power-actuated a test hose in a straight, horizontal po- clamp.

234

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00234 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.106

S8.6.3 [Reserved] S9.1.1 Hose. Each vacuum brake hose S8.6.4 Calculations. (a) The adhesion shall be labeled, or cut from bulk hose value shall be the minimum force re- that is labeled, at intervals of not more corded on the chart excluding that por- than 6 inches, measured from the end tion of the chart which corresponds to of one legend to the beginning of the the initial and final 20 percent portion next, in block capital letters and nu- along the displacement axis. merals at least one-eighth of an inch (b) Express the force in pounds per high, with the information listed in inch of length. paragraphs (a) through (e) of this sec- S8.7 Air pressure test. (a) Connect the tion. The information need not be air brake hose assembly to a source of present on hose that is sold as part of air pressure. a brake hose assembly or a motor vehi- (b) Apply 200 psi air pressure to the cle. (a) The symbol DOT, constituting a hose and seal the hose from the source certification by the hose manufacturer of air pressure. that the hose conforms to all applica- (c) After 5 minutes, determine the air ble motor vehicle safety standards. pressure remaining in the test speci- (b) A designation that identifies the men. manufacturer of the hose, which shall S8.8 Burst strength test. (a) Utilize an be filed in writing with: Office of Crash air brake hose assembly. Avoidance Standards, Vehicle Dynam- (b) Fill the hose assembly with ics Division, National Highway Traffic water, allowing all gases to escape. Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Apply water pressure at a uniform rate Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. The of increase of approximately 1,000 psi designation may consist of block cap- per minute until the hose ruptures. ital letters, numerals or a symbol. S8.9 Tensile strength test. Utilize a (c) The month, day, and year, or the tension testing machine conforming to month and year, of manufacture, ex- the requirements of the Methods of pressed in numerals. For example, 10/1/ Verification of Testing Machines (1964 96 means October 1, 1996. American Society for Testing and Ma- (d) The nominal inside diameter of terials, Designation E4), and provided the hose expressed in inches or frac- with a recording device to register tions of inches or in millimeters, or the total pull in pounds. nominal outside diameter of plastic (a) Attach an air brake hose assem- tubing expressed in inches or fractions bly to the testing machine to permit of inches or in millimeters followed by straight, even, machine-pull on the the letters OD. The abbreviation ‘‘mm’’ hose. shall follow hose sizes that are ex- (b) Apply tension at a rate of 1 inch pressed in millimeters. (Example of in- per minute travel of the moving head side diameter: 7⁄32, 1⁄4, 4 mm. Example of until separation occurs. outside diameter: 1⁄4 OD, 12 mm OD.) S8.10 Water Absorption and tensile (e) The letters ‘‘VL’’ or ‘‘VH’’ shall in- strength test. Immerse an air brake hose dicate that the component is a light- assembly in distilled water at room duty vacuum brake hose or heavy-duty temperature for 70 hours. Thirty min- vacuum brake hose, respectively. utes after removal from the water, con- S9.1.2 End fittings. Except for an end duct the test specified in S8.9. fitting that is attached by heat strik- S8.11 Zinc chloride resistance test. Im- ing or by interference fit with plastic merse an air brake hose in a 50 percent vacuum hose or that is attached by de- zinc chloride aqueous solution at room formation of the fitting about a hose temperature for 200 hours. Remove it by crimping or swaging, at least one from the solution and examine it under component of each vacuum brake hose 7-power magnification for cracks. fitting shall be etched, embossed, or S8.12 End fitting corrosion resistance stamped in block capital letters and test. Conduct the test specified in S6.9 numerals at least one-sixteenth of an using an air brake hose assembly. inch high with the following informa- S9. Requirements—vacuum brake hose, tion: brake hose assemblies, and brake hose end (a) The symbol DOT, constituting a fittings. certification by the manufacturer of S9.1 Labeling. that component that the component

235

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00235 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.106 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

conforms to all applicable motor vehi- Highway Traffic Safety Administra- cle safety standards. tion, 400 Seventh Street SW., Wash- (b) A designation that identifies the ington, DC 20590. The designation may manufacturer of that component of the consist of block capital letters, numer- fitting, which shall be filed in writing als or a symbol. with: Office of Crash Avoidance Stand- S9.1.3.1 At least one end fitting of a ards, Vehicle Dynamics Division, Na- vacuum brake hose assembly made tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- with end fittings that are attached by istration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., crimping or swaging, or of a plastic Washington, DC 20590. The designation tubing assembly made with end fittings may consist of block capital letters, that are attached by heat shrinking or numerals or a symbol. dimensional interference fit shall be (c) The letters ‘‘VL’’ or ‘‘VH’’ shall in- dicate that the end fitting is intended etched, stamped or embossed with a for use in a light-duty or heavy-duty designation at least one-sixteenth of an vacuum brake system, respectively. inch high that identifies the manufac- (d) The nominal inside diameter of turer of the hose assembly and is filed the hose to which the fitting is prop- in accordance with S9.1.3(b). erly attached expressed in inches or S9.2 Test requirements. Each vacuum fractions of inches or in millimeters, or brake hose assembly or appropriate the outside diameter of the plastic tub- part thereof shall be capable of meet- ing to which the fitting is properly at- ing any of the requirements set forth tached expressed in inches or fraction under this heading, when tested under of inches or in millimeters followed by the conditions of S11. and the applica- the letter OD (See examples in ble procedures of S10. However, a par- S9.1.1(d)). The abbreviation ‘‘mm’’ shall ticular hose assembly or appropriate follow hose sizes that are expressed in part thereof need not meet further re- millimeters. quirements after having met the con- S9.1.3 Assemblies. Each vacuum brake struction requirement (S9.2.1) and then hose assembly made with end fittings having been subjected to any one of the that are attached by crimping or requirements specified in S9.2.2 swaging and each plastic tube assembly through S9.2.11. made with end fittings that are at- S9.2.1 Constriction. Except for that tached by heat shrinking or dimen- part of an end fitting which does not sional interference fit, except those sold as part of a motor vehicle, shall be contain hose, every inside diameter of labeled by means of a band around the any section of a vacuum brake hose as- brake hose assembly as specified in sembly shall be not less than 75 percent this paragraph or, at the option of the of the nominal inside diameter of the manufacturer, by means of labeling as hose if for heavy duty, or 70 percent of specified in S9.1.3.1. The band may at the nominal inside diameter of the the manufacturer’s option be attached hose if for light duty. so as to move freely along the length of S9.2.2 High temperature resistance. A the assembly, as long as it is retained vacuum brake hose shall not show ex- by the end fittings. The band shall be ternal or internal cracks, charring, or etched, embossed, or stamped in block disintegration visible without mag- capital letters, numerals or symbols at nification when straightened after least one-eighth of an inch high, with being bent for 70 hours at 212 °F. over the following information: a cylinder having the radius specified (a) The symbol DOT, constituting in Table V for the size of hose tested certification by the hose assembler (S10.1). that the hose assembly conforms to all S9.2.3 Low temperature resistance. A applicable motor vehicle safety stand- vacuum brake hose shall not show ards. cracks visible without magnification (b) A designation that identifies the after conditioning at minus 40 °F. for 70 manufacturer of the hose assembly, which shall be filed in writing with: Of- hours when bent around a cylinder hav- fice of Crash Avoidance Standards, Ve- ing the radius specified in Table V for hicle Dynamics Division, National the size hose tested (S10.2).

236

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00236 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.106

S9.2.4 Ozone resistance. A vacuum hose under internal vacuum of 26 brake hose shall not show cracks visi- inches of Hg. for five minutes shall not ble under 7-power magnification after exceed one-sixteenth of an inch (S10.5). exposure to ozone for 70 hours (S10.3). S9.2.7 Bend. The collapse of the out- S9.2.5 Burst strength. A vacuum side diameter of a vacuum brake hose brake hose shall not rupture under hy- at the middle point of the test length drostatic pressure of 350 psi (S10.4). when bent until the ends touch shall S9.2.6 Vacuum. The collapse of the not exceed the values given in Table V outside diameter of a vacuum brake for the size of hose tested (S10.6).

TABLE V—VACUUM BRAKE HOSE TEST REQUIREMENTS

Hose inside diameter* High temperature resist- Low temperature resist- Bend ance ance Maximum Deformation—col- Hose collapse of lapsed inside di- Inches Millimeters Hose Radius of Hose Radius of length, outside di- ameter (dimension length, cylinder, length, cylinder, inches ameter, D), inches inches inches inches inches inches

7⁄32 5 8 11⁄2 171⁄2 3 7 11⁄64 3⁄64 1⁄4 6 9 11⁄2 171⁄2 3 8 3⁄32 1⁄16 9⁄32 ...... 9 13⁄4 19 31⁄2 9 12⁄64 4⁄64 11⁄32 8 9 13⁄4 19 31⁄2 11 13⁄64 5⁄64 3⁄8 10 10 13⁄4 19 31⁄2 12 5⁄32 3⁄32 7⁄16 ...... 11 2 201⁄2 4 14 17⁄64 5⁄64 15⁄32 ...... 11 2 201⁄2 4 14 17⁄64 5⁄64 1⁄2 12 11 2 201⁄2 4 16 7⁄32 1⁄8 5⁄8 16 12 21⁄4 22 41⁄2 22 7⁄32 5⁄32 3⁄4 ...... 14 21⁄2 24 5 28 7⁄32 3⁄16 1 ...... 16 31⁄4 281⁄2 61⁄2 36 9⁄32 1⁄4 *These sizes are listed to provide test values for brake hoses manufactured in these sizes. They do not represent conversions.

S9.2.8 Swell. Following exposure to case of lightduty hose the first applica- Reference Fuel A, every inside diame- tion of force shall not exceed a peak ter of any section of a vacuum brake value of 50 pounds, and the fifth appli- hose shall not be less than 75 percent of cation of force shall reach a peak value the nominal inside of the hose if for of at least 20 pounds (S10.9). heavy duty, or 70 percent of the nomi- S9.2.11 End fitting corrosion resist- nal inside diameter of the hose if for ance. After 24 hours of exposure to salt light duty. The vacuum brake hose spray, vacuum brake hose end fittings shall show no leakage and there shall shall show no base metal corrosion of be no separation of the inner tube from the end fitting surface except where the fabric reinforcement of the hose in crimping or the application of labeling a vacuum test of 26 inches of Hg for 10 information has caused displacement minutes (S10.7). of the protective coating. S9.2.9 Except for hose re- Adhesion. S10. Test procedures—Vacuum brake inforced by wire, a vacuum brake hose hose, brake hose assemblies, and brake shall withstand a force of 8 pounds per hose end fittings. inch of length before separation of ad- jacent layers (S10.8). S10.1 High temperature resistance test. Conduct the test specified in S8.1 using S9.2.10 Deformation. A vacuum brake hose shall return to 90 percent of its vacuum brake hose with the cylinder original outside diameter within 60 sec- radius specified in Table V for the size onds after five applications of force as of hose tested. specified in S10.9, except that a wire-re- S10.2 Low temperature resistance test. inforced hose need only return to 85 Conduct the test specified in S8.2 using percent of its original outside diame- vacuum brake hose with the cylinder ter. In the case of heavy-duty hose the radius specified in Table V for the size first application of force shall not ex- of hose tested. ceed a peak value of 70 pounds, and the S10.3 Ozone resistance test. Conduct fifth application of force shall reach a the test specified in S6.8 using vacuum peak value of at least 40 pounds. In the brake hose.

237

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00237 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.106 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S10.4 Burst strength test. Conduct the the hose for heavy-duty hose and 70 test specified in S8.8 using vacuum percent of the nominal inside diameter brake hose. of the hose for light-duty hose. S10.5 Vacuum test. Utilize a 12-inch (d) Subject the hose specimen to a vacuum brake hose assembly sealed at vacuum of 26 inches of Hg for 10 min- one end. (a) Measure the hose outside utes. diameter. S10.8 Adhesion test. Conduct the test (b) Attach the hose to a source of specified in S8.6 using vacuum brake vacuum and subject it to a vacuum of hose. 26 inches of Hg for 5 minutes. S10.9 Deformation test. Table VI (c) Measure the hose to determine specifies the test specimen dimensions. the minimum outside diameter while S10.9.1 Apparatus. Utilize a compres- the hose is still subject to vacuum. sion device, equipped to measure force S10.6 Bend test. (a) Bend a vacuum of at least 100 pounds, and feeler gages brake hose, of the length prescribed in of sufficient length to be passed com- Table V, in the direction of its normal pletely through the test specimen. curvature until the ends just touch as S10.9.2 Operation. (a) Position the shown in Figure 3. test specimen longitudinally in the (b) Measure the outside diameter of compression device with the fabric laps the specimen at point A before and not in the line of the applied pressure. after bending. (c) The difference between the two TABLE VI—DIMENSIONS OF TEST SPECIMEN AND measurements is the collapse of the FEELER GAGE FOR DEFORMATION TEST hose outside diameter on bending. Hose inside Specimen dimen- Feeler gage di- diameter* sions (see fig. 4) mensions Thick- In. Mm. Depth Length Width ness (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch)

7⁄32 5 3⁄64 1 1⁄8 3⁄64 1⁄4 6 1⁄16 1 1⁄8 1⁄16 9⁄32 ...... 1⁄16 1 1⁄8 1⁄16 11⁄32 8 5⁄64 1 3⁄16 5⁄64 3⁄8 10 3⁄32 1 3⁄16 3⁄32 7⁄16 ...... 5⁄64 1 1⁄4 5⁄64 15⁄32 ...... 5⁄64 1 1⁄4 5⁄64 1⁄2 12 1⁄8 1 1⁄4 1⁄8 5⁄8 16 5⁄32 1 1⁄4 5⁄32 3⁄4 ...... 3⁄16 1 1⁄4 3⁄16 1 ...... 1⁄4 1 1⁄4 1⁄4 *These sizes are listed to provide test values for brake hoses manufactured in these sizes. They do not represent conversions. (b) Apply gradually increasing force to the test specimen to compress its in- side diameter to that specified in Table FIG. 3—BEND TEST OF VACUUM BRAKE HOSE. VI (dimension D of figure 4) for the size S10.7 Swell test. (a) Fill a specimen of hose tested. of vacuum brake hose 12 inches long with Reference Fuel A as described in the Method of Test for Change in Prop- erties of Elastomeric Vulcanizers Re- sulting From Immersion in Liquids (1964 American Society for Testing and Materials, designation D471). (b) Maintain reference fuel in the FIG. 4—DEFORMED SPECIMEN OF VACUUM hose under atmospheric pressure at BRAKE HOSE room temperature for 48 hours. (c) After 5 seconds release the force (c) Remove fuel and determine that and record the peak load applied. every inside diameter of any section of (d) Repeat the procedure four times the brake hose is not less than 75 per- permitting a 10-second recovery period cent of the nominal inside diameter of between load applications.

238

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00238 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.008 EC01AU91.009 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

S10.10 End fitting corrosion resistance dinal axis of the vehicle and tangent to test. Conduct the test specified in S6.9 the forwardmost aiming pad on the using a vacuum brake hose assembly. headlamp. S11. Test conditions. Each hose as- Axis of reference means the char- sembly or appropriate part thereof acteristic axis of the lamp for use as shall be able to meet the requirements the direction of reference (H = 0°, V = of S5., S7., and S9. under the following 0°) for angles of field for photometric conditions. measurements and for installing the S11.1 The temperature of the testing lamp on the vehicle. room is 75 °F. Beam contributor means an indivisible S11.2 Except for S6.6, S8.2, and S10.2, optical assembly including a lens, re- the test samples are stabilized at test flector, and light source, that is part of room temperature prior to testing. an integral beam headlighting system S11.3 The brake hoses and brake and contributes only a portion of a hose assemblies are at least 24 hours headlamp beam. old, and unused. Cargo lamp is a lamp that is mounted [38 FR 31303, Nov. 13, 1973] on a multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, or bus for the purpose of pro- EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- tations affecting § 571.106, see the List of CFR viding illumination to load or unload Sections Affected, which appears in the cargo. Finding Aids section of the printed volume Cutoff means a generally horizontal, and on GPO Access. visual/optical aiming cue in the lower beam that marks a separation between § 571.107 [Reserved] areas of higher and lower luminance. § 571.108 Standard No. 108; Lamps, re- Direct reading indicator means a de- flective devices, and associated vice that is mounted in its entirety on equipment. a headlamp or headlamp aiming or S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- headlamp mounting equipment, is part quirements for original and replace- of a VHAD, and provides information ment lamps, reflective devices, and as- about headlamp aim in an analog or sociated equipment. digital format. S2. Purpose. The purpose of this Effective light-emitting surface means standard is to reduce traffic accidents that portion of a lamp that directs and deaths and injuries resulting from light to the photometric test pattern, traffic accidents, by providing ade- and does not include transparent quate illumination of the roadway, and lenses, mounting hole bosses, reflex re- by enhancing the conspicuity of motor flector area, beads or rims that may vehicles on the public roads so that glow or produce small areas of in- their presence is perceived and their creased intensity as a result of uncon- signals understood, both in daylight trolled light from an area of 1/2 degree and in darkness or other conditions of radius around a test point. reduced visibility. Effective projected luminous lens area S3. Application. This standard ap- means the area of the orthogonal pro- plies to: jection of the effective light-emitting (a) Passenger cars, multipurpose pas- surface of a lamp on a plane perpen- senger vehicles, trucks, buses, trailers dicular to a defined direction relative (except pole trailers and trailer con- to the axis of reference. Unless other- verter dollies), and motorcycles; wise specified, the direction is coinci- (b) Retroreflective sheeting and re- dent with the axis of reference. flex reflectors manufactured to con- Filament means that part of the light form to S5.7 of this standard; and source or light emitting element(s), (c) Lamps, reflective devices, and as- such as a resistive element, the excited sociated equipment for replacement of portion of a specific mixture of gases like equipment on vehicles to which under pressure, or any part of other en- this standard applies. ergy conversion sources, that generates S4. Definitions. radiant energy which can be seen. Aiming Reference Plane means a plane Flash means a cycle of activation and which is perpendicular to the longitu- deactivation of a lamp by automatic

239

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00239 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

means continuing until stopped either requirements of Appendix A or Appen- automatically or manually. dix B of part 564 Replaceable Light Fully opened means the position of Source Information of this Chapter. the headlamp concealment device in Vehicle headlamp aiming device or which the headlamp is in the design VHAD means motor vehicle equipment, open operating position. installed either on a vehicle or Headlamp concealment device means a headlamp, which is used for deter- device, with its operating system and mining the horizontal or vertical aim, components, that provides conceal- or both the vertical and horizontal aim ment of the headlamp when it is not in of the headlamp. use, including a movable headlamp Visually/optically aimable headlamp cover and a headlamp that displaces for means a headlamp which is designed to concealment purposes. be visually/optically aimable in accord- Headlamp test fixture means a device ance with the requirements of para- designed to support a headlamp or graph S7.8.5.3 of this standard. headlamp assembly in the test position S5. Requirements. specified in the laboratory tests and S5.1 Required motor vehicle lighting whose mounting hardware and compo- equipment. nents are those necessary to operate S5.1.1 Except as provided in suc- the headlamp as installed in a motor ceeding paragraphs of this S5.1.1, each vehicle. vehicle shall be equipped with at least Integral beam headlamp means a the number of lamps, reflective de- headlamp (other than a standardized vices, and associated equipment speci- sealed beam headlamp designed to con- fied in Tables I and III and S7, as appli- form to paragraph S7.3 or a replaceable cable. Required equipment shall be de- bulb headlamp designed to conform to signed to conform to the SAE Stand- paragraph S7.5) comprising an integral ards or Recommended Practices ref- and indivisible optical assembly in- erenced in those tables. Table I applies cluding lens, reflector, and light to multipurpose passenger vehicles, source, except that a headlamp con- trucks, trailers, and buses, 80 or more forming to paragraph S7.8.5.2 or para- inches in overall width. Table III ap- graph S7.8.5.3 may have a lens designed plies to passenger cars and motorcycles to be replaceable. and to multipurpose passenger vehi- Multiple compartment lamp means a cles, trucks, trailers, and buses, less device which gives its indication by than 80 inches in overall width. two or more separately lighted areas S5.1.1.1 A truck tractor need not be which are joined by one or more com- equipped with turn signal lamps mon parts, such as a housing or lens. mounted on the rear if the turn signal Multiple lamp arrangement means an lamps at or near the front are so con- array of two or more separate lamps on structed (double-faced) and so located each side of the vehicle which operate that they meet the requirements for together to give a signal. double-faced turn signals specified in Remote reading indicator means a de- SAE Standard J588e, Turn Signal vice that is not mounted in its entirety Lamps, September 1970. on a headlamp or headlamp aiming or S5.1.1.2 A truck tractor need not be headlamp mounting equipment, but equipped with any rear side marker de- otherwise meets the definition of a di- vices, rear clearance lamps, and rear rect reading indicator. identification lamps. Replaceable bulb headlamp means a S5.1.1.3 Intermediate side marker headlamp comprising a bonded lens and devices are not required on vehicles reflector assembly and one or two re- less than 30 feet in overall length. placeable headlamp light sources, ex- S5.1.1.4 Reflective material con- cept that a headlamp conforming to forming to Federal Specification L–S– paragraph S7.8.5.2 or paragraph S7.8.5.3 300, Sheeting and Tape, Reflective; Non- may have a lens designed to be replace- exposed Lens, Adhesive Backing, Sep- able. tember 7, 1965, may be used for side re- Replaceable light source means an as- flex reflectors if this material as used sembly of a capsule, base, and termi- on the vehicle, meets the performance nals that is designed to conform to the standards in either Table I or Table IA

240

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00240 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

of SAE Standard J594f, Reflex Reflec- Standards applicable to such lamps ref- tors, January 1977. erenced in Tables I and III. S5.1.1.5 The turn signal operating S5.1.1.11 A stop lamp that is not op- unit on each passenger car, and multi- tically combined, as defined by SAE In- purpose passenger vehicle, truck, and formation Report J387 Terminology— bus less than 80 inches in overall width Motor Vehicle Lighting NOV87, with a shall be self-canceling by steering turn signal lamp, shall remain acti- wheel rotation and capable of cancella- vated when the turn signal lamp is tion by a manually operated control. flashing. S5.1.1.6 Instead of the photometric S5.1.1.12 On a motor vehicle, except values specified in Table 1 of SAE a passenger car, whose overall width is Standards J222 December 1970, or J585e 2032 mm. (80 inches) or more, measure- September 1977, a parking lamp or tail ments of the effective projected lumi- lamp, respectively, shall meet the min- nous lens area, and of the photometrics imum percentage specified in Figure 1a of a multiple compartment stop lamp of the corresponding minimum allow- and a multiple compartment turn sig- able value specified in Figure 1b. The nal lamp, shall be made for the entire maximum candlepower output of a lamp and not for the individual com- parking lamp shall not exceed that pre- partments. scribed in Figure 1b, or of a taillamp, S5.1.1.13 Each passenger car, and that prescribed in Figure 1b at H or each multipurpose passenger vehicle, above. If the sum of the percentages of truck, and bus of less than 80 inches the minimum candlepower measured at overall width, shall be equipped with a the test points is not less than that turn signal operating unit designed to specified for each group listed in Fig- complete a durability test of 100,000 cy- ure 1c, a parking lamp or taillamp is cles. not required to meet the minimum photometric value at each test point S5.1.1.14 A trailer that is less than specified in SAE Standards J222 or 30 inches in overall width may be J585e respectively. equipped with only one taillamp, stop S5.1.1.7 A motorcycle turn signal lamp, and rear reflex reflector, which lamp need meet only one-half of the shall be located at or near its vertical minimum photometric values specified centerline. in Table 1 and Table 3 of SAE J588 S5.1.1.15 A trailer that is less than 6 NOV84 Turn Signal Lamps. feet in overall length, including the S5.1.1.8 For each motor vehicle less trailer tongue, need not be equipped than 30 feet in overall length, the pho- with front side marker lamps and front tometric minimum candlepower re- side reflex reflectors. quirements for side marker lamps spec- S5.1.1.16 A lamp designed to use a ified in SAE Standard J592e Clearance, type of bulb that has not been assigned Side Marker, and Identification Lamps, a mean spherical candlepower rating July 1972, may be met for all inboard by its manufacturer and is not listed in test points at a distance of 15 feet from SAE Standard J573d, Lamp Bulbs and the vehicle and on a vertical plane that Sealed Units, December 1968, shall meet is perpendicular to the longitudinal the applicable requirements of this axis of the vehicle and located midway standard when used with any bulb of between the front and rear side marker the type specified by the lamp manu- lamps. facturer, operated at the bulb’s design S5.1.1.9 A boat trailer whose overall voltage. A lamp that contains a sealed- width is 80 inches or more need not be in bulb shall meet these requirements equipped with both front and rear with the bulb operated at the bulb’s de- clearance lamps provided an amber (to sign voltage. front) and red (to rear) clearance lamp S5.1.1.17 Except for a lamp having a is located at or near the midpoint on sealed-in bulb, a lamp shall meet the each side so as to indicate its extreme applicable requirements of this stand- width. ard when tested with a bulb whose fila- S5.1.1.10 Multiple license plate ment is positioned within ±.010 inch of lamps and backup lamps may be used the nominal design position specified to fufill the requirements of the SAE in SAE Standard J573d, Lamp Bulbs and

241

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00241 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Sealed Units, December 1968, or speci- of each compartment or lamp shall be fied by the bulb manufacturer. at least 22 square centimeters, provided S5.1.1.18 A backup lamp is not re- the combined area is at least 50 square quired to meet the minimum photo- centimeters (73⁄4 square inches). metric values at each test point speci- S5.1.1.27 (a) Except as provided in fied in Table I of SAE Standard J593c, paragraph (b) of this section, each pas- Backup Lamps, February 1968, if the senger car manufactured on or after sum of the candlepower measured at September 1, 1985, and each multipur- the test points within each group listed pose passenger vehicle, truck, and bus, in Figure 2 is not less than the group whose overall width is less than 80 totals specified in that figure. inches, whose GVWR is 10,000 pounds or S5.1.1.19 Each variable load turn sig- less, manufactured on or after Sep- nal flasher shall comply with voltage tember 1, 1993, shall be equipped with a drop and durability requirements of high-mounted stop lamp which: SAE Standard J590b, Turn Signal Flash- (1) Shall have an effective projected ers, October 1965 with the maximum de- luminous lens area not less than 2903 sign load connected, and shall comply square mm. (41⁄2 square inches). with starting time, flash rate, and per- (2) Shall meet the visibility require- cent current ‘‘on’’ time requirements of ments specified in S5.3.2(c). J590b both with the minimum and with (3) Shall have the minimum photo- the maximum design load connected. metric values in the amount and loca- S5.1.1.20 The lowest voltage drop for tion listed in Figure 10. turn signal flashers and hazard warn- (4) Need not meet the requirements ing signal flashers measured between of paragraphs 3.1.6 Moisture Test, 3.1.7 the input and load terminals shall not Dust Test, and 3.1.8 Corrosion Test of exceed 0.8 volt. SAE Recommended Practice J186a, S5.1.1.21 A motor-driven cycle whose Supplemental High-Mounted Stop and speed attainable in 1 mile is 30 mph or Rear Turn Signal Lamps, September less need not be equipped with turn sig- 1977, if it is mounted inside the vehicle. nal lamps. (5) Shall provide access for conven- S5.1.1.22 A motor-driven cycle whose ient replacement of the bulb without speed attainable in 1 mile is 30 mph or the use of special tools. less may be equipped with a stop lamp (b) Each multipurpose passenger ve- whose effective projected luminous hicle, truck and bus whose overall lens area is not less than 31⁄2 square width is less than 80 inches, whose inches and whose photometric output GVWR is 10,000 pounds or less, whose for the groups of test points specified vertical centerline, when the vehicle is in Figure 1 is at least one-half of the viewed from the rear, is not located on minimum values set forth in that fig- a fixed body panel but separates one or ure. two movable body sections, such as S5.1.1.23-24 [Reserved] doors, which lacks sufficient space to S5.1.1.25 Each turn signal lamp on a install a single high-mounted stop motorcycle shall have an effective pro- lamp on the centerline above such body jected luminous lens area of not less sections, and which is manufactured on than 2258 square mm. (31⁄2 square or after September 1, 1993, shall have inches). two high-mounted stop lamps which: S5.1.1.26 On a motor vehicle whose (1) Are identical in size and shape and overall width is less than 80 inches: have an effective projected luminous (a) The effective projected luminous lens area not less than 1452 square mm. lens area of a single compartment stop (21⁄4 square inches) each. lamp, and a single compartment rear (2) Shall meet the visibility require- turn signal lamp, shall be not less than ments specified in S5.3.2(d). 50 square centimeters (73⁄4 square (3) Together have the minimum pho- inches). tometric values specified in paragraph (b) If a multiple compartment lamp (a)(3) of this S5.1.1.27. or multiple lamps are used to meet the (4) Shall provide access for conven- photometric requirements for stop ient replacement of the bulbs without lamps and rear turn signal lamps, the special tools. effective projected luminous lens area S5.1.1.28 [Reserved]

242

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00242 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

S5.1.1.29 A trailer equipped with a that, on each side, the minimum unin- conspicuity treatment in conformance terrupted area of exposed surface is not with paragraph S5.7 of this standard less than 3225 sq. mm. The samples are need not be equipped with the reflex re- placed for two hours in a circulating flectors required by Table I of this air oven at 79 ±3 degrees C. standard if the conspicuity material is (g) All outdoor exposure tests shall placed at the locations of the reflex re- be 3 years in duration, whether the ma- flectors required by Table I. terial is exposed or protected. Acceler- S5.1.2 Plastic materials used for op- ated weathering procedures are not tical parts such as lenses and reflectors permitted. shall conform to SAE Recommended S5.1.3 No additional lamp, reflective Practice J576 JUL91, except that: device or other motor vehicle equip- (a) Plastic lenses (other than those ment shall be installed that impairs incorporating reflex reflectors) used for the effectiveness of lighting equipment inner lenses or those covered by an- required by this standard. other material and not exposed di- 5.1.4 Except for multifunction rectly to sunlight shall meet the re- school activity buses, each school bus quirements of paragraphs 3.3 and 4.2 of shall be equipped with a system of ei- SAE J576 JUL91 when covered by the ther: outer lens or other material; (a) Four red signal lamps designed to (b) After the outdoor exposure test, conform to SAE Standard J887, School the haze and loss of surface luster of Bus Red Signal Lamps, July 1964, and in- plastic materials (other than those in- stalled in accordance with that stand- corporating reflex reflectors) used for ard; or outer lenses shall not be greater than 30 percent haze as measured by ASTM (b) Four red signal lamps designed to conform to SAE Standard J887, D 1003–92, Haze and Luminous Transmit- School July 1964, and tance of Transparent Plastic; Bus Red Signal Lamps, (c) After the outdoor exposure test, four amber signal lamps designed to plastic materials used for reflex reflec- conform to that standard, except for their color, and except that their can- tors and for lenses used in front of re- 1 flex reflectors shall not show surface dlepower shall be at least 2 ⁄2 times deterioration, crazing, dimensional that specified for red signal lamps. changes, color bleeding, delamination, Both red and amber lamps shall be in- loss of surface luster, or haze that ex- stalled in accordance with SAE Stand- ceeds 7 percent as measured under ard J887, except that: ASTM D 1003–92. (i) Each amber signal lamp shall be (d) The thickness of the test speci- located near each red signal lamp, at mens specified in paragraph 3.2.2 of the same level, but closer to the SAE J576 JUL91 may vary by as much vertical centerline of the bus; and as ±0.25 mm. (ii) The system shall be wired so that (e) After exposure to the heat test as the amber signal lamps are activated specified in subparagraph (f) of this only by manual or foot operation, and paragraph, and after cooling to room if activated, are automatically deacti- ambient temperature, a test specimen vated and the red signal lamps auto- shall show no change in shape and gen- matically activated when the bus en- eral appearance discernable to the trance door is opened. naked eye when compared with an un- S5.1.5 The color in all lamps, reflec- exposed specimen. The trichromatic tive devices, and associated equipment coefficients of the samples shall con- to which this standard applies shall form to the requirements of SAE J578c, comply with SAE Standard J578c, Color Color Specification for Electric Signal Specification for Electric Signal Lighting Lighting Devices, February 1977. Devices, February 1977. (f) Two samples of each thickness of S5.2 Other requirements. each plastic material are used in the S5.2.1 The words ‘‘it is recommended heat test. Each sample is supported at that,’’ ‘‘recommendations,’’ or ‘‘should the bottom, with at least 51 mm. of the be’’ appearing in any SAE Standard or sample above the support, in the Recommended Practice referenced or vertical position in such a manner subreferenced in this standard shall be

243

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00243 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

read as setting forth mandatory re- S5.3.1.7 On a motor vehicle on which quirements, except that the aiming the front turn signal lamp is less than pads on the lens face and the black 100 mm from the lighted edge of a area surrounding the signal lamp rec- lower beam headlamp, as measured ommended in SAE Standard J887, from the optical center of the turn sig- School Bus Red Signal Lamps, July 1964, nal lamp, the multiplier applied to ob- are not required. tain the required minimum luminous S5.2.2 The words ‘‘Type 1 (53⁄4″),’’ intensities shall be 2.5. ‘‘Type 2 (53⁄4″),’’ ‘‘Type 2 (7″),’’ ‘‘Type 1A,’’ S5.3.1.8 (a) Each high-mounted stop ‘‘Type 2A,’’ and ‘‘Type 2B’’ appearing in lamp installed in or on a vehicle sub- any SAE Standard or Recommended ject to S5.1.1.27(a) shall be located as Practice referenced or subreferenced in follows: this standard shall also be read as set- (1) With its center at any place on ting forth requirements respectively the vertical centerline of the vehicle, for the following types of headlamps: including the glazing, as the vehicle is 1C1, 2C1, 2D1, 1A1, 2A1, and 2B1. viewed from the rear. S5.3 Location of required equipment. (2) If the lamp is mounted below the Except as provided in paragraphs rear window, no portion of the lens S5.3.2, S5.7, and S7, each lamp, reflec- shall be lower than 6 inches below the tive device, and item of associated rear window on convertibles, or 3 equipment shall be securely mounted inches on other passenger cars. on a rigid part of the vehicle other (3) If the lamp is mounted inside the than glazing that is not designed to be removed except for repair, in accord- vehicle, means shall be provided to ance with the requirements of Table I minimize reflections from the light of and Table III, as applicable, and in the the lamp upon the rear window glazing location specified in Table II (multi- that might be visible to the driver purpose passenger vehicles, trucks, when viewed directly, or indirectly in trailers, and buses 80 or more inches in the rearview mirror. overall width) or Table IV (all pas- (b) The high-mounted stop lamps in- senger cars, and motorcycles, and mul- stalled in or on a vehicle subject to tipurpose passenger vehicles, truck, S5.1.1.27(b) shall be located at the same trailers and buses less than 80 inches in height, with one vertical edge of each overall width), as applicable. lamp on the vertical edge of the body S5.3.1 [Reserved] section nearest the vertical centerline. S5.3.1.1 [Reserved] S5.3.2 Except as provided in S5.3.2.1 S5.3.1.1.1 [Reserved] through S5.3.2.4 and in paragraphs S5.7 S5.3.1.2 On a truck tractor, the red and S7, each vehicle must conform to rear reflex reflectors may be mounted the following requirements: on the back of the cab, at a minimum (a) Each lamp and reflective device height not less than 4 inches above the must be installed in a location where it height of the rear tires. complies with all applicable photo- S5.3.1.3 On a trailer, the amber front metric requirements and visibility re- side reflex reflectors and amber front quirements, with all obstructions (e.g., side marker lamps may be located as mirrors, snow plows, wrecker booms, far forward as practicable exclusive of backhoes, and winches) installed on the the trailer tongue. vehicle. S5.3.1.4 When the rear identification (b) A manufacturer must certify com- lamps are mounted at the extreme pliance of each lamp to one of the fol- height of a vehicle, rear clearance lowing visibility requirement options, lamps need not meet the requirement and it may not thereafter choose a dif- of Table II that they be located as close ferent option for that vehicle: as practicable to the top of the vehicle. (1) When a vehicle is equipped with S5.3.1.5 [Reserved] any lamp listed in Figure 19 of this S5.3.1.6 On a truck tractor, clear- standard, each such lamp must provide ance lamps mounted on the cab may be not less than 12.5 square centimeters of located to indicate the width of the unobstructed effective projected lumi- cab, rather than the overall width of nous lens area in any direction the vehicle. throughout the pattern defined by the

244

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00244 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

corner points specified in Figure 19 for above the road surface as measured to each such lamp; or the lamp axis of reference, the vertical (2) When a vehicle is equipped with test point angles located below the hor- any lamp listed in Figure 20 of this izontal plane subject to photometric standard, each such lamp must provide and visibility requirements of this a luminous intensity not less than that standard may be reduced to 5 degrees. specified in Figure 20 in any direction S5.3.2.4 As an alternative to throughout the pattern defined by the S5.3.2(b), each passenger car and mo- corner points specified in Figure 20 for torcycle, and each multipurpose pas- each such lamp. The luminous inten- senger vehicle, truck, trailer and bus sity must be measured in accordance that is of less than 2032 mm overall with the photometry test requirements width, that are manufactured on or be- of the applicable SAE Standards and fore September 1, 2011, and each multi- Recommended Practices incorporated purpose passenger vehicle, truck, trail- by reference or subreference in this er and bus of 2032 mm or more overall standard. width that is manufactured on or be- (c) A high mounted stop lamp must fore September 1, 2014, must have each have a signal visible to the rear lamp located so that it meets the visi- through a horizontal angle from 45 de- bility requirements specified in any ap- grees to the left to 45 degrees to the plicable SAE Standard or Rec- right of the longitudinal axis of the ve- ommended Practice. hicle. S5.4 Equipment combinations. Two or (d) High mounted stop lamps required more lamps, reflective devices, or to comply with S5.1.1.27(b) must to- items of associated equipment may be gether have a signal to the rear as combined if the requirements for each specified in S5.3.2(c). lamp, reflective device, and item of as- (e) Backup lamps must be mounted sociated equipment are met, with the on the rear so that the optical center following exceptions: of at least one lamp is visible from any (a) No high-mounted stop lamp shall eye point elevation from at least 1828 be combined with any other lamp or re- mm (6 ft) to 610 mm (2 ft) above the flective device, other than with a cargo horizontal plane on which the vehicle lamp. is standing; and from any position in (b) No high-mounted stop lamp shall the area, rearward of a vertical plane be combined optically, as defined by perpendicular to the longitudinal axis SAE Information Report J387 Termi- of the vehicle, 914 mm (3 ft) to the rear nology—Motor Vehicle Lighting NOV87, of the vehicle and extending 914 mm (3 with any cargo lamp. ft) beyond each side of the vehicle. (c) No clearance lamp shall be com- S5.3.2.1 Clearance lamps may be lo- bined optically, as defined by SAE In- cated at a location other than on the formation Report J387 Terminology— front and rear if necessary to indicate Motor Vehicle Lighting NOV87, with any the overall width of a vehicle, or for taillamp. protection from damage during normal S5.5 Special wiring requirements. operation of the vehicle, and at such a S.5.5.1 Each vehicle shall have a location they need not meet the photo- means of switching between lower and metric output at any test point that is upper beams that conforms to SAE 45 degrees inboard. Recommended Practice J564a Headlamp S5.3.2.2 If any required lamp or re- Beam Switching, April 1964 or to SAE flective device is obstructed by motor Recommended Practice J565b, Semi- vehicle equipment (e.g., mirrors, snow Automatic Headlamp Beam Switching De- plows, wrecker booms, backhoes, vices, February 1969. Except as provided winches, etc.), and cannot meet re- in S5.5.8, the lower and upper beams quirements of S5.3.2, the vehicle must shall not be energized simultaneously be equipped with an additional lamp or except momentarily for temporary sig- device of the same type which meet all nalling purposes or during switching applicable requirements of this stand- between beams. ard, including S5.3.2. S5.5.2 Each vehicle shall have a S5.3.2.3 For signal lamps and reflec- means for indicating to the driver tive devices mounted less than 750 mm when the upper beams of the

245

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00245 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

headlamps are on that conforms to the lamps marked ‘‘U’’ or ‘‘UF’’ are acti- SAE Recommended Practice J564a, vated. On a motor vehicle equipped April 1964, except that the signal color with an Integral Beam headlighting need not be red. system meeting the photometric re- S5.5.3 The taillamps on each vehicle quirements of paragraph S7.4(a)(1)(ii), shall be activated when the headlamps the lower beam headlamps shall be are activated in a steady-burning state, wired to remain permanently activated but need not be activated if the when the upper beam headlamps are headlamps are activated at less than activated. On a motor vehicle equipped full intensity as permitted by para- with a headlighting system designed to graph S5.5.11(a). conform to the requirements of Figure S5.5.4 The stop lamps on each vehi- 17–1 or Figure 17–2, a lower beam light cle shall be activated upon application source may be wired to remain acti- of the service brakes. The high-mount- vated when an upper beam light source ed stop lamp on each vehicle shall be is activated if the lower beam light activated only upon application of the source contributes to compliance of the service brakes. headlighting system with the upper S5.5.5 The vehicular hazard warning beam requirements of Figure 17–1 or signal operating unit on each vehicle Figure 17–2. shall operate independently of the igni- S5.5.9 Except as provided in section tion or equivalent switch, and when ac- S5.5.8, the wiring harness or connector tivated, shall cause to flash simulta- assembly of each headlamp system neously sufficient turn signal lamps to shall be designed so that only those meet, as a minimum, the turn signal light sources intended for meeting lamp photometric requirements of this lower beam photometrics are energized standard. when the beam selector switch is in the S5.5.6 Each vehicle equipped with a lower beam position, and that only turn signal operating unit shall also those light sources intended for meet- have an illuminated pilot indicator. ing upper beam photometrics are ener- Failure of one or more turn signal gized when the beam selector switch is lamps to operate shall be indicated in in the upper beam position. accordance with SAE Standard J588e, S5.5.10 The wiring requirements for Turn Signal Lamps, September 1970, ex- lighting equipment in use are: cept when a variable-load turn signal (a) Turn signal lamps, hazard warn- flasher is used on a truck, bus, or mul- ing signal lamps, and school bus warn- tipurpose passenger vehicle 80 or more ing lamps shall be wired to flash; inches in overall width, on a truck that (b) Headlamps and side marker lamps is capable of accommodating a slide-in may be wired to flash for signaling pur- camper, or on any vehicle equipped to poses; tow trailers. (c) A motorcycle headlamp may be S5.5.7 On each passenger car and wired to allow either its upper beam or motorcycle, and on each multipurpose its lower beam, but not both, to modu- passenger vehicle, truck, and bus of late from a higher intensity to a lower less than 80 inches overall width: intensity in accordance with section (a) When the parking lamps are acti- S5.6; vated, the taillamps, license plate (d) All other lamps shall be wired to lamps, and side marker lamps shall be steady-burning. also be activated; and S5.5.11(a) Any pair of lamps on the (b) When the headlamps are activated front of a passenger car, multipurpose in a steady-burning state, the tail passenger vehicle, truck, or bus, lamps, parking lamps, license plate whether or not required by this stand- lamps and side marker lamps shall also ard, other than parking lamps or fog be activated. lamps, may be wired to be automati- S5.5.8 On a motor vehicle equipped cally activated, as determined by the with a headlighting system designed to manufacturer of the vehicle, in a conform to the photometric require- steady burning state as daytime run- ments of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2, the ning lamps (DRLs) and to be automati- lamps marked ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘LF’’ may be wired cally deactivated when the headlamp to remain permanently activated when control is in any ‘‘on’’ position, and as 246

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00246 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

otherwise determined by the manufac- (5) If optically combined with a turn turer of the vehicle, provided that each signal lamp, is automatically deacti- such lamp: vated as a DRL when the turn signal (1) Has a luminous intensity not less lamp or hazard warning lamp is acti- than 500 candela at test point H–V, nor vated, and automatically reactivated more than 3,000 candela at any location as a DRL when the turn signal lamp or in the beam, when tested in accordance hazard warning lamp is deactivated. with Section S11 of this standard, un- (b) Any pair of lamps that are not re- less it is: quired by this standard and are not op- (i) A lower beam headlamp intended tically combined with any lamps that to operate as a DRL at full voltage, or are required by this standard, and at a voltage lower than used to operate which are used as DRLs to fulfill the it as a lower beam headlamp; or specifications of S5.5.11(a), shall be (ii) An upper beam headlamp in- mounted at the same height, which tended to operate as a DRL, whose lu- shall be not more than 1.067 m above minous intensity at test point H–V is the road surface measured from the not more than 7,000 candela, and which center of the lamp on the vehicle at is mounted not higher than 864 mm curb weight, and shall be symmetri- above the road surface as measured cally disposed about the vertical cen- from the center of the lamp with the terline of the vehicle. vehicle at curb weight; S5.6 [Reserved] (2) Is permanently marked DRL on ‘‘ ’’ S5.7 Conspicuity Systems. Each trail- its lens in letters not less than 3 mm er of 80 or more inches overall width, high, unless it is optically combined and with a GVWR over 10,000 lbs., man- with a headlamp; ufactured on or after December 1, 1993, (3) Is designed to provide the same except a trailer designed exclusively color as the other lamp in the pair, and for living or office use, and each truck that is one of the following colors as tractor manufactured on or after July defined in SAE Standard J578 MAY88: 1, 1997, shall be equipped with either White, white to yellow, white to selec- tive yellow, selective yellow, or yellow; retroreflective sheeting that meets the (4) If not optically combined with a requirements of S5.7.1, reflex reflectors turn signal lamp, is located so that the that meet the requirements of S5.7.2, distance from its lighted edge to the or a combination of retroreflective optical center of the nearest turn sig- sheeting and reflex reflectors that nal lamp is not less than 100 mm, un- meet the requirement of S5.7.3. less: S5.7.1 Retroreflective sheeting. Each (i) The luminous intensity of the trailer or truck tractor to which S5.7 DRL is not more than 2,600 candela at applies that does not conform to S5.7.2 any location in the beam and the turn or S5.7.3 shall be equipped with signal meets the requirements of retroreflective sheeting that conforms S5.3.1.7; or to the requirements specified in S5.7.1.1 (ii) (For a passenger car, multipur- through S5.7.1.5. pose passenger vehicle, truck, or bus S5.7.1.1 Construction. Retroreflective that is manufactured before October 1, sheeting shall consist of a smooth, flat, 1995, and which uses an upper beam transparent exterior film with headlamp as a DRL as specified in retroreflective elements embedded or paragraph S5.5.11(a)(1)(ii)) the lumi- suspended beneath the film so as to nous intensity of the DRL is greater form a non-exposed retroreflective op- than 2,600 candela at any location in tical system. the beam and the turn signal lamp S5.7.1.2 Performance requirements. meets the requirements of S5.3.1.7; or Retroreflective sheeting shall meet the (iii) The DRL is optically combined requirements of ASTM D 4956–90, with a lower beam headlamp and the Standard Specification for Retroreflective turn signal lamp meets the require- Sheeting for Traffic Control, for Type V ments of S5.3.1.7; or Sheeting, except for the photometric (iv) The DRL is deactivated when the requirements, and shall meet the min- turn signal or hazard warning signal imum photometric performance re- lamp is activated. quirements specified in Figure 29.

247

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00247 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S5.7.1.3 Sheeting pattern, dimensions, form trailers without bulkheads, and and relative coefficients of retroreflection. Element 3 is not required for trailers (a) Retroreflective sheeting shall be without underride protection devices: applied in a pattern of alternating (a) Element 1: A strip of sheeting, as white and red color segments to the horizontal as practicable, in alter- sides and rear of each trailer, and to nating colors across the full width of the rear of each truck tractor, and in the trailer, as close to the extreme white to the upper rear corners of each edges as practicable, and as close as trailer and truck tractor, in the loca- practicable to not less than 375 mm and tions specified in S5.7.1.4, and Figures not more than 1525 mm above the road 30–1 through 30–4, or Figure 31, as ap- surface at the stripe centerline with propriate. the trailer at curb weight. (b) Except for a segment that is (b) Element 2: Two pairs of white trimmed to clear obstructions, or strips of sheeting, each pair consisting lengthened to provide red sheeting near of strips 300 mm long of grade DOT-C2, red lamps, each white or red segment DOT-C3, or DOT-C4, applied hori- shall have a length of 300 mm ±150 mm. zontally and vertically to the right and (c) Neither white nor red sheeting left upper contours of the body, as shall represent more than two thirds of viewed from the rear, as close to the the aggregate of any continuous strip top of the trailer and as far apart as marking the width of a trailer, or any practicable. If the perimeter of the continuous or broken strip marking its body, as viewed from the rear, is other length. than rectangular, the strips may be ap- (d) Retroreflective sheeting shall plied along the perimeter, as close as have a width of not less than 50 mm practicable to the uppermost and out- (Grade DOT-C2), 75 mm (Grade DOT- ermost areas of the rear of the body on C3), or 100 mm (Grade DOT-C4). the left and right sides. (e) The coefficients for (c) Element 3: A strip of sheeting in retroreflection of each segment of red alternating colors across the full width or white sheeting shall be not less than of the horizontal member of the rear the minimum values specified in Fig- underride protection device. Grade ure 29 of this standard for grades DOT– DOT-C2 material not less than 38 mm C2, DOT–C3, and DOT–C4. wide may be used. S5.7.1.4 Location. (a) Retroreflective S5.7.1.4.2 Side of trailers. sheeting shall be applied to each trail- Retroreflective sheeting shall be ap- er and truck tractor as specified below, plied to each side of a trailer as fol- but need not be applied to discontin- lows: uous surfaces such as outside ribs, (a) A strip of sheeting, as horizontal stake post pickets on platform trailers, as practicable, in alternating colors, and external protruding beams, or to originating and terminating as close to items of equipment such as door hinges the front and rear as practicable, as and lamp bodies on trailers and body close as practicable to not less than 375 joints, stiffening beads, drip rails and mm and not more than 1525 mm above rolled surfaces on truck tractors. the road surface at the stripe center- (b) The edge of white sheeting shall line with the trailer at curb weight, ex- not be located closer than 75 mm to the cept that at the location chosen the edge of the luminous lens area of any strip shall not be obscured in whole or red or amber lamp that is required by in part by other motor vehicle equip- this standard. ment or trailer cargo. The strip need (c) The edge of red sheeting shall not not be continuous as long as not less be located closer than 75 mm to the than half of the length of the trailer is edge of the luminous lens area of any covered and the spaces are distributed amber lamp that is required by this as evenly as practicable. standard. (b) If necessary to clear rivet heads S5.7.1.4.1 Rear of trailers. or other similar obstructions, grade Retroreflective sheeting shall be ap- DOT–C2 retroreflective sheeting may plied to the rear of each trailer as fol- be separated into two 25 mm wide lows, except that Element 2 is not re- strips of the same length and color, quired for container chassis or for plat- separated by a space of not more than

248

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00248 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

25 mm, and used in place of the the material may be attached to the retroreflective sheeting that would edge of the window itself. otherwise be applied. S5.7.1.5 Certification. The letters S5.7.1.4.3 Rear of truck tractors. DOT–C2, DOT–C3, or DOT–C4, as appro- Retroreflective sheeting shall be ap- priate, constituting a certification that plied to the rear of each truck tractor the retroreflective sheeting conforms as follows: to the requirements of S5.7.1.2, shall (a) Element 1: Two strips of sheeting appear at least once on the exposed in alternating colors, each not less surface of each white or red segment of than 600 mm long, located as close as retroreflective sheeting, and at least practicable to the edges of the rear once every 300 mm on retroreflective fenders, mudflaps, or the mudflap sup- sheeting that is white only. The char- port brackets, to mark the width of the acters shall be not less than 3 mm truck tractor. The strips shall be high, and shall be permanently mounted as horizontal as practicable, stamped, etched, molded, or printed in in a vertical plane facing the rear, on indelible ink. the rear fenders, on the mudflap sup- S5.7.2 Reflex Reflectors. Each trailer port brackets, on plates attached to or truck tractor to which S5.7 applies the mudflap support brackets, or on that does not conform to S5.7.1 or the mudflaps. Strips on mudflaps shall S5.7.3 shall be equipped with reflex re- be mounted not lower than 300 mm flectors in accordance with this sec- below the upper horizontal edge of the tion. mudflap. If the vehicle is certified with S5.7.2.1 (a) Each reflex reflector temporary mudflap support brackets, shall conform to SAE Standard J594f, the strips shall be mounted on the Reflex Reflectors, January 1977. mudflaps or on plates transferable to (b) Each red reflex reflector shall permanent mudflap support brackets. also provide, at an observation angle of For a truck tractor without mudflaps, 0.2 degree, not less than 300 the strips may be mounted outboard of millicandelas/lux at any light entrance the frame on brackets behind the rear angle between 30 degrees left and 30 de- axle or on brackets ahead of the rear grees right, including an entrance axle and above the top of the tires at angle of 0 degree, and not less than 75 unladen vehicle height, or they may be millicandelas/lux at any light entrance mounted directly or indirectly to the angle between 45 degrees left and 45 de- back of the cab as close to the outer grees right. edges as practicable, above the top of (c) Each white reflex reflector shall the tires, and not more than 1525 mm also provide at an observation angle of above the road surface at unladen vehi- 0.2 degree, not less than 1250 cle height. If the strips are mounted on millicandelas/lux at any light entrance the back of the cab, no more than 25 angle between 30 degrees left and 30 de- percent of their cumulative area may grees right, including an entrance be obscured by vehicle equipment as angle of 0 degree, and not less than 300 determined in a rear orthogonal view. millicandelas/lux at any light entrance (b) Element 2: Two pairs of white angle between 45 degrees left and 45 de- strips of sheeting, each pair consisting grees right. of strips 300 mm long, applied as hori- (d) A white reflex reflector com- zontally and vertically as practicable, plying with S5.7.2.1(a) and (c) when to the right and left upper contours of tested in a horizontal orientation may the cab, as close to the top of the cab be installed in all orientations speci- and as far apart as practicable. No fied for rear upper locations in more than 25 percent of their cumu- S5.7.1.4.1(b) or S5.7.1.4.3(b) if, when lative area may be obscured by vehicle tested in a vertical orientation, it pro- equipment as determined in a rear or- vides an observation angle of 0.2 degree thogonal view. If one pair must be relo- not less than 1680 millicandelas/lux at a cated to avoid obscuration by vehicle light entrance angle of 0 degree, not equipment, the other pair may be relo- less than 1120 millicandelas/lux at any cated in order to be mounted symmet- light entrance angle from 10 degrees rically. If the rear window is so large down to 10 degrees up, and not less as to occupy all the practicable space, than 560 millicandelas/lux at any light

249

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00249 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

entrance angle from 20 degrees right to marked ‘‘1’’ and ‘‘2’’ rather than ‘‘1C1’’ 20 degrees left. and ‘‘2C1’’ respectively. A Type D re- S5.7.2.2 Reflex reflectors shall be in- placement headlamp designed to con- stalled and located as specified below: form to S7.3.2(a) through (c) and (a) In the same locations and in the S7.3.5(b) of this standard may be same length in which retroreflective marked ‘‘TOP’’ or ‘‘2’’ rather than ‘‘2D1’’. sheeting is required by S5.7.1.4 to be S5.8.3 (a) Each stop lamp manufac- applied in alternating colors, reflex re- tured to replace a stop lamp that was flectors shall be installed in a repet- designed to conform to SAE Standard itive pattern of two or three white re- J586b, Stop Lamps, June 1966, may also flex reflectors alternating with two or be designed to conform to J586b. It three red reflex reflectors, with the shall meet the photometric minimum center of each reflector not more than candlepower requirements for Class A 100 mm from the center of each adja- red turn signal lamps specified in SAE cent reflector. Standard J575d, Test for Motor Vehicle (b) In the same locations and in the Lighting Devices and Components, Au- same length in which white gust 1967. Each such lamp manufac- retroreflective sheeting is required by tured for use on a passenger car and on S5.7.1.4 to be installed, white reflex re- a multipurpose passenger vehicle, flectors shall be installed, with the truck, trailer or bus less than 2032 mm. center of each white reflex reflector (80 inches) in overall width shall have not more than 100 mm from the center an effective projected luminous lens of each adjacent reflector. area not less than 2258 square mm. (31⁄2 S5.7.2.3 Certification. The exposed square inches). If multiple compart- surface of each reflex reflector shall be ment lamps or multiple lamps are marked with the letters DOT–C which used, the effective projected luminous constitutes a certification that the re- lens area of each compartment or lamp flector conforms to all applicable re- shall be not less than 2258 square mm. quirements of § 571.108 of this part. The (31⁄2 square inches); however, the photo- certification shall be not less than 3 metric requirements may be met by a mm high, and permanently stamped, combination of compartments or etched, molded or printed in indelible lamps. ink. (b) Each stop lamp manufactured to S5.7.3 Combination of sheeting and re- replace a stop lamp that was designed flectors. Each trailer or truck tractor to to conform to SAE Standard J586c, which S5.7 applies that does not con- Stop Lamps, August 1970, may also be form to S5.7.1 or S5.7.2, shall be designed to conform to J586c. equipped with retroreflective materials S5.8.4 (a) Each turn signal lamp that meet the requirements of S5.7.1 manufactured to replace a turn signal except that reflex reflectors that meet lamp that was designed to conform to the requirements of S5.7.2.1, and that SAE Standard J588d, Turn Signal are installed in accordance with Lamps, June 1966, may also be designed S5.7.2.2, may be used instead of any to conform to J588d, and shall meet the corresponding element of photometric minimum candlepower re- retroreflective sheeting located as re- quirements for Class A turn signal quired by S5.7.1.4. lamps specified in SAE Standard J575d, S5.8 Replacement Equipment. Tests for Motor Vehicle Lighting Devices S5.8.1 Except as provided below, and Components, August 1967. Each such each lamp, reflective device, or item of lamp manufactured for use on a pas- associated equipment manufactured to senger car and on a multipurpose pas- replace any lamp, reflective device, or senger vehicle, truck, trailer or bus item of associated equipment on any less than 80 inches in overall width vehicle to which this standard applies, shall have an effective projected lumi- shall be designed to conform to this nous area not less than 31⁄2 square standard. inches. If multiple compartment lamps S5.8.2 A Type C replacement or multiple lamps are used, the effec- headlamp designed to conform to the tive projected luminous area of each requirements of paragraph S7.3.2(a) compartment or lamp shall be not less through (d) of this standard may be than 31⁄2 square inches; however, the

250

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00250 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

photometric requirements may be met shall constitute a certification that it by a combination of compartments or conforms to applicable Federal motor lamps. Each such lamp manufactured vehicle safety standards. for use on a multipurpose passenger ve- S5.8.11 A replacement lens for a re- hicle, truck, trailer or bus 80 inches or placeable bulb headlamp or an integral more in overall width shall have an ef- beam headlamp that is not required to fective projected luminous area not have a bonded lens shall be provided less than 12 square inches. with a replacement seal in a package (b) Each turn signal lamp manufac- that includes instructions for the re- tured to replace a turn signal lamp moval and replacement of the lens, the that was designed to conform to SAE cleaning of the reflector, and the seal- Standard J588e, Turn Signal Lamps, ing of the replacement lens to the re- September 1970, may also be designed flector assembly. to conform to SAE Standard J588e. S6. Subreferenced SAE Standards and S5.8.5 Note 6 of Table 1 of SAE Recommended Practices Standard J588e does not apply. S6.1 SAE Standards and Rec- S5.8.6. Instead of the photometric ommended Practices subreferenced by values specified in SAE Standards the SAE Standards and Recommended J586c and J588e, a stop lamp manufac- Practices included in Tables I and III tured to replace a stop lamp designed and paragraphs S5.1.4 and S5.5.1 are to conform to SAE Standard J586c, or a those published in the 1970 edition of turn signal lamp manufactured to re- the SAE Handbook, except that the place a turn signal lamp designed to SAE standard referred to as ‘‘J575’’ is conform to SAE Standard J588e, shall J575e, Tests for Motor Vehicle Lighting meet the minimum percentage speci- Devices and Components, August 1970, fied in Figure 1a of the corresponding for stoplamps designed to conform to minimum allowable value specified in SAE Standards J586c, J586 FEB84, and Figure 1b. The maximum candlepower J1398 MAY85; for taillamps designed to output of each such stop lamp or turn conform to SAE Standards J585d and signal lamp shall not exceed that pre- scribed in Figure 1b. If the sum of the J585e; for turn signal lamps designed to percentages of the minimum candle- conform to SAE Standards J588e, J588 power measured at the test points is NOV84, and J1395 APR85; and for high- not less than that specified for each mounted stoplamps designed to con- group listed in Figure 1c, a stop lamp form to SAE Recommended Practice or turn signal lamp is not required to J186a. The reference in J585e to J256 meet the minimum photometric value does not apply. For headlamps other at each test point specified in SAE than motorcycle headlamps, unless Standards J586c and J588e, respec- otherwise specified in this standard, tively. the version of SAE Standard J575 is S5.8.7 Note 6 of Table 1 in SAE DEC88, and the version of SAE Stand- Standard J588e, Turn Signal Lamps, ard J602 is OCT80.The definition of ‘‘op- September 1970, does not apply. tically combined’’ in SAE Information S5.8.8 Each taillamp manufactured Report J387 Terminology—Motor Vehicle to replace a taillamp designed to con- Lighting NOV87, applies to that term as form to SAE Standard J585d, Tail used in J586c and J588e. Lamps, August 1970, may also be de- S6.2 Requirements of SAE Stand- signed to conform to J585d. ards incorporated by reference in this S5.8.9 Each turn signal lamp manu- standard, other than J576b and J576c, factured to replace a turn signal lamp do not include test for warpage of de- (on a motorcycle) that was designed to vices with plastic lenses. conform to SAE Standard J588d, Turn S6.3 The term ‘‘functional lighted Signal Lamps, June 1966, may also be lens area’’ in any SAE Standard or Rec- designed to conform to J588d. ommended Practice incorporated by S5.8.10 Unless otherwise specified in reference or by subreference in this this standard, each lamp, reflective de- standard, has the same meaning as the vice, or item of associated equipment term ‘‘effective projected luminous lens to which paragraph S5.8.1 applies may area.’’ be labeled with the symbol DOT, which S7. Headlighting requirements.

251

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00251 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S7.1 Each passenger car, multipur- with the manufacturer and the part or pose passenger vehicle, truck, and bus trade number of the headlamp for manufactured on or after September 1, which it is intended, and with the 1994, shall be equipped with a name and/or trademark of the lens headlighting system designed to con- manufacturer or importer that is reg- form to the requirements of S7.3, S7.4, istered with the U.S. Patent and Trade- S7.5, or S7.6. mark Office. Nothing in this paragraph S7.2(a) The lens of each original and shall be construed to authorize the replacement equipment headlamp, and marking of any such name and/or of each original equipment and replace- trademark by one who is not the ment equipment beam contributor owner, unless the owner has consented shall be marked with the symbol ‘‘DOT’’ to it. either horizontally or vertically which S7.3 Sealed beam headlighting system. shall constitute the certification re- A sealed beam headlighting system quired by 49 U.S.C. 30115. shall be designed to meet the require- (b) The lens of each headlamp and of ments of one of the following subpara- each beam contributor manufactured graphs of S7.3.2 through S7.3.9. In ref- on or after December 1, 1989, to which erences to Figures in SAE J1383 APR85 paragraph (a) of this section applies for headlamp dimensional require- shall be marked with the name and/or ments, only those dimensions marked trademark registered with the U.S. ‘‘I’’ for interchangeability are applica- Patent and Trademark Office of the ble. manufacturer of such headlamp or S7.3.1 The lens of each sealed beam beam contributor, or its importer, or headlamp designed to conform to S7.3.2 any manufacturer of a vehicle equipped through S7.3.6 shall be marked accord- with such headlamp or beam contrib- ing to paragraph 5.4.3 through 5.4.5 of utor. Nothing in this paragraph shall SAE Standard J1383 APR85 Performance be construed to authorize the marking Requirements for Motor Vehicle of any such name and/or trademark by Headlamps. one who is not the owner, unless the S7.3.2 Type A headlighting system. A owner has consented to it. Type A headlighting system consists of (c) Each headlamp and beam contrib- two Type 1A1 and two Type 2A1 utor to which paragraph (a) of this sec- headlamps and associated hardware, tion applies shall be marked with its which are designed to conform to the voltage and with its part or trade num- following requirements: ber. (a) SAE Standard J1383 APR85 Per- (d) Unless stated otherwise, a toler- formance Requirements for Motor Vehicle ance of ±1⁄4 degree is permitted during Headlamps, with the following excep- photometric performance tests for any tions: headlamp or beam contributor, and the (1) Paragraphs 1, 2.1.2, 2.8.2, 3, 4.1.1, test points 10U–90U shall be measured 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.4, 4.6, 4.8 through 4.18, 5.1.1, from the normally exposed surface of 5.1.3, 5.1.5, 5.1.7 through 5.1.16, 5.2.2, the lens face. The term ‘aiming plane’ 5.3.5, 5.4.1, 5.4.2, and 6 through 6.4 do means ‘aiming reference plane’ or an not apply. appropriate vertical plane defined by (2) In paragraph 5.3.2, the words ‘‘and the manufacturer as required in S7.7.1. retaining rings’’ are omitted. (e) Each replacement headlamp lens (3) In paragraphs 4.5.2 and 5.1.6, the with seal, provided in accordance with words ‘‘Figure 28–1 or 28–2 of Motor Ve- S5.8.11, when installed according to the hicle Safety Standard No. 108’’ are sub- lens manufacturer’s instructions on an stituted for ‘‘Table 3.’’ integral beam or replaceable bulb (b) SAE Standard J580 DEC86 Sealed headlamp, shall not cause the Beam Headlamp Assembly (except para- headlamp to fail to comply with any of graphs 3, 4.1.1, 5.1.1.1, 5.1.2.3, and the the requirements of this standard. second sentence of 5.1.6); in 5.2.1, delete Each replacement headlamp lens shall the words ‘‘and retaining rings;’’ the be marked with the symbol ‘‘DOT’’, ei- correct reference is SAE J1383 Figures ther horizontally or vertically, to con- 6, 9, 12 and 14. stitute certification. Each replacement (c) After a vibration test conducted headlamp lens shall also be marked in accordance with paragraph S8.8,

252

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00252 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

there shall be no evidence of loose or S7.3.7 Type F headlighting system. A broken parts, other than filaments, Type F headlighting system consists of visible without magnification. two Type UF and two Type LF (d) The maximum wattage at 12.8 headlamps and associated hardware, volts (design voltage): Single filament which are designed to conform to the headlamp, 55 watts on the upper beam; following requirements: dual filament headlamp, 43 watts on (a) Figures 11, 12, 13, and 14 as appro- the upper beam and 65 watts on the priate. lower beam. (b) The photometric requirements of S7.3.3 Type B headlighting system. A Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 of this stand- Type B headlighting system consists of ard. A reaim tolerance of ±1⁄4 degree is two Type 2B1 headlamps and associated allowed for any test point on the Type hardware, which are designed to con- LF lamp when tested alone, but is not form to the following requirements: allowed on the Type UF lamp when (a) The requirements of paragraph tested alone. For the test point 10U– S7.3.2 (a) through (c), except that the 90U, measurement shall be from the words ‘‘Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2’’ are normally exposed surface of the lens substituted for ‘‘Table 3’’ in paragraph face. S7.3.2(a)(3). (c) SAE Standard J1383 APR85 Per- (b) The maximum wattage at 12.8 formance Requirements for Motor Vehicle volts (design voltage): 70 watts on the Headlamps, Sections 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 4.1, upper beam and 60 watts on the lower 4.1.4, and 5.1.4. beam. (d) When tested in accordance with S7.3.4 Type C headlighting system. A section (c), the mounted assembly (ei- Type C headlighting system consists of ther Type UF or Type LF headlamps, two Type 1C1 and two Type 2C1 respective mounting ring, aiming ring, headlamps and associated hardware, and aim adjustment mechanism) shall which are designed to conform to the be designed to conform to the require- requirements of paragraph S7.3.2 (a) ments of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 for through (d), except that the words upper or lower beams respectively Figure 28–1 or Figure 28–2 are sub- ‘‘ ’’ without reaim when any conforming stituted for Table 3 in paragraph ‘‘ ’’ Type UF or LF headlamp is tested and S7.3.2(a)(3). replaced by another conforming S7.3.5 Type D headlighting system. (a) headlamp of the same Type. A Type D headlighting system consists of two Type 2D1 headlamps and associ- (e) SAE J580 DEC86 Sealed Beam ated hardware, which are designed to Headlamp Assembly with the following conform to the requirements of para- exceptions: graph S7.3.2 (a) through (c), except that (1) Section 2.2 Mounting Ring reads: the words ‘‘Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–1’’ ‘‘the adjustable ring upon which the are substituted for ‘‘Table 3’’ in para- sealed beam unit is mounted and which graph S7.3.2(a)(3). forces the sealed beam unit to seat (b) The maximum wattage at 12.8 against the aiming ring when assem- volts (design voltage): 65 watts on bled into a sealed beam assembly.’’ upper beam, and 55 watts on lower (2) The definition ‘‘2.3 Aiming Ring’’ beam. reads: ‘‘The clamping ring that retains S7.3.6 Type E headlighting system. (a) the sealed beam unit against the A Type E headlighting system consists mounting ring, and that provides an of two Type 2E1 headlamps and associ- interface between the unit’s aiming/ ated hardware, which are designed to seating pads and the headlamp aimer conform to the requirements of para- adapter (locating plate).’’ graph S7.3.2 (a) through (c), except that (3) Section 4.1.1 Vibration Test does the words ‘‘Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–1’’ not apply. are substituted for ‘‘Table 3’’ in para- (4) Sections 5.1.1.1 and 5.1.2.3 do not graph S7.3.2(a)(3). apply. (b) The maximum wattage at 12.8 (5) Section 5.1.2.1 reads: ‘‘When the volts (design voltage): 70 watts on headlamp assembly is tested in the lab- upper beam, and 60 watts on lower oratory, a minimum aiming adjust- beam. ment of ±2.5 degrees shall be provided

253

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00253 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

in the horizontal plane and ±4 degrees 2G1 headlamps each of which is de- in the vertical plane.’’ signed to conform to the following re- (6) Section 5.1.2.2 concludes: quirements: ‘‘* * * through an angle of ±2.5 degrees (a) Figures 18 and 21. and ±4 degrees respectively.’’ (b) SAE Standard J1383 APR85 Per- (7) Section 5.1.6 is retitled ‘‘Retaining formance Requirements for Motor Vehicle Ring/Aiming Ring Tests’’. The phrase Headlamps (except paragraphs 1, 2.1.2, ‘‘92×150 mm***0.340 in (8.6 mm)’’ is 2.8.2,3, 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.4, 4.6, 4.8 added at the end of the table for flange through 4.18, 5.1.1, 5.1.3, 5.1.5 through thickness. The sentence beginning ‘‘The 5.1.16, 5.2.2, 5.3.5 through 6.4). In para- fastening means’’ is deleted. graph 5.3.2 the words ‘‘and retaining (8) Figures 2, 3, and 4 do not apply, rings’’ are omitted. In paragraph 4.5.2, and the reference to them in section 4.5 the words ‘‘either Figure 28–1, or Figure is replaced by ‘‘Figure 16, Deflectom- 28–2’’ are substituted for ‘‘Table 3’’. eter, of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety (c) SAE Standard J580 DEC86 Sealed Standard No. 108.’’ Beam Headlamp Assembly, with the fol- (f) A lens for a Type F headlamp in- lowing exceptions: corporating an upper beam shall be la- (1) Sections 2.2, 2.3, 4.1.1, 5.1.1.1, beled ‘‘UF.’’ A lens for a Type F 5.1.2.3, 5.1.6, and 5.2.1. headlamp incorporating a lower beam (2) Section 4.5 reads: ‘‘Torque Deflec- shall be labeled ‘‘LF’’. The face of let- tion Test. The headlamp assembly to be ters, numbers, or other symbols molded tested shall be mounted in the designed on the surface of the lens shall not be vehicle position and set at nominal raised more than 0.020 in (0.5 mm), and aim (0.0). A special adapter (Figure 22) shall be placed no closer to the geo- for the deflectometer (Figure 16) shall metric center of the lens than 1.375 in. be clamped onto the headlamp assem- (35 mm). The marking shall be molded bly. A torque of 20 in.-lbs (2.25 N–m) in the lens and shall be not less than 1⁄4 shall be applied to the headlamp as- in. (6.35 mm) in size. sembly through the deflectometer, and (g) The maximum wattage at 12.8 a reading on the thumb wheel shall be volts (design voltage): 70 watts on the taken. The torque shall be removed and upper beam and 60 watts on the lower a second reading on the thumb wheel beam. shall be taken.’’ (h) Type F headlamps may be mount- (d) After a vibration test conducted ed on common or parallel seating and in accordance with paragraph S8.8, aiming planes to permit simultaneous there shall be no evidence of loose or aiming of both headlamps provided broken parts, other than filaments, that when tested with any conforming visible without magnification. Type UF and LF headlamps according (e) The maximum wattage at 12.8 to Section S10: volts (design voltage) for the 1G1 and (1) The assembly (consisting of the 2G1 upper beam is 55 watts and 43 watts Type UF and LF headlamps, mounting respectively; for the 2G1 lower beam, 65 rings, the aiming/seating rings, and watts. aim adjustment mechanism) shall be (f) A lens for a Type G headlamp in- designed to conform to the test points corporating only part of an upper beam of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2. shall be labeled ‘‘1G1.’’ A lens for a Type (2) There shall be no provision for ad- G headlamp incorporating both part of justment between the common or par- an upper beam and a lower beam shall allel aiming and seating planes of the be labeled ‘‘2G1.’’ The face of letters, two lamps. numbers, or other symbols molded on (i) After a vibration test conducted in the surface of the lens shall not be accordance with paragraph S8.8, the raised more than 0.020 in. (0.5 mm.), Type F system shall show no evidence and shall be placed no closer to the of loose or broken parts, other than geometric center of the lens than 1.375 filaments, visible without magnifica- in. (35 mm). The marking shall be tion. molded in the lens and shall be not less S7.3.8 Type G headlighting system. A than 1⁄4 in. (6.35 mm) in size. Type G headlamp system consists of S7.3.9 Type H headlighting system. A two Type 1G1 headlamps and two Type Type H headlamp system consisting of

254

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00254 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

two Type 2H1 headlamps and associ- expression: conforming test point value ated hardware, which are designed to = 2 (Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 test conform to the following requirements: point value)/total number of lower or (a) Paragraphs S7.3.8 (a) through (d) upper beam contributors for the vehi- except that in paragraph S7.3.8(b), the cle, as appropriate. The system shall be words ‘‘Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2’’ are designed to use the Vehicle Headlamp substituted for ‘‘Table 3.’’ Aiming Device (VHAD) as specified in (b) The maximum wattage at 12.8 paragraph S7.8.5.2. volts (design voltage): 70 watts on the (b) The lower and upper beams shall upper beam and 60 watts on the lower be provided only as follows where each beam. headlamp contains two light sources: (c) A lens for a Type H headlamp in- (1) The lower beam shall be provided corporating both an upper beam and a either by the most outboard light lower beam shall be labeled ‘‘2H1.’’ The source (or the uppermost if arranged face of letters, numbers, or other sym- vertically), or by all light sources. bols molded on the surface of the lens (2) The upper beam shall be provided shall not be raised more than 0.020 in. either by the most inboard light source (0.5 mm), and shall be placed no closer (or the lowermost if arranged to the geometric center of the lens vertically), or by all light sources. than 1.375 in. (35 mm). The marking (c) The lower and upper beams shall shall be molded in the lens and shall be be provided only as follows where each not less than 1⁄4 in. (6.35 mm) in size. headlamp contains a single light S7.4 Integral Beam Headlighting Sys- source: tem. An integral beam headlighting (1) The lower beam shall be provided system shall be designed to conform to by the most outboard headlamps (or the following requirements: the uppermost if arranged vertically), (a) The system shall provide in total and the lens of each such headlamp not more than two upper beams and shall be permanently marked with the two lower beams of the performance letter ‘‘L.’’ described in one of the following: (2) The upper beam shall be provided (1) In a four-headlamp system, each by the most inboard headlamps (or low- upper beam headlamp and each lower ermost if arranged vertically), and the beam headlamp shall be designed to lens of each such headlamp shall be conform to the photometrics of one of permanently marked with the letter the following: ‘‘U.’’ (i) Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2; or (d) A headlamp or beam contributor (ii) Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2, except designed to meet paragraphs (a)(1) or that the upper beam test value at 2.5 (a)(3) of this section and S7.8.5.1 may be D–V and 2.5D–12R and 12L, shall apply mounted in an assembly to permit si- to the lower beam headlamp and not to multaneous aiming of the beam(s) con- the upper beam headlamp, and the tributors, provided that with any com- upper beam test point value at 1.5D–9R plying contributor the assembly com- and 9L shall be 1000; or plete with all lamps meets the appro- (iii) Figure 28–1 or Figure 28–2. priate photometric requirements when (2) In a two-headlamp system, each tested in accordance with S10. headlamp shall be designed to conform (e) Each integral beam headlamp sys- to the photometrics of one of the fol- tem shall be designed to conform to the lowing: applicable photometric performance re- (i) Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2; or quirements in paragraph (a) of this sec- (ii) Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2. tion when tested in accordance with (3) In a system in which there is more sections 4.1 and 4.1.4 of SAE Standard than one beam contributor providing a J1383 APR85 with any headlamps in- lower beam, and/or more than one tended for use in such system. The beam contributor providing an upper term ‘‘aiming plane’’ means ‘‘aiming ref- beam, each beam contributor in the erence plane,’’ or an appropriate system shall be designed to meet only vertical plane defined by the manufac- the photometric performance require- turer as required in paragraph S7.8.1. ments of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 (f) The system shall be aimable in ac- based upon the following mathematical cordance with the requirements of

255

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00255 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

paragraph S7.8. A system that incor- paragraph S8.10.2, there shall be no evi- porates any headlamp or beam contrib- dence of corrosion or rust visible with- utor that does not have a VHAD as an out magnification on any part of the integral and indivisible part of the headlamp reflector that receives light headlamp or beam contributor shall be from a headlamp light source, on any designed so that the appropriate metal light or heat shield assembly, or photometrics are met when any cor- on a metal reflector of any other lamp rectly aimed and photometrically con- not sealed from the headlamp reflector. forming headlamp or beam contributor Loss of adhesion of any applied coating is removed from its mounting and aim- shall not occur more than 0.l25 in. (3.2 ing mechanism, and is replaced with- mm) from any sharp edge on the inside out reaim by any conforming headlamp or outside. Corrosion may occur on ter- or beam contributor of the same type. minals only if the current produced (g) A headlamp with a glass lens need during the test of paragraph S8.4(c) is not meet the abrasion resistance test not less than 9.7 amperes. (S8.2). A headlamp with a nonreplace- (4) After a dust test conducted in ac- able glass lens need not meet the chem- cordance with paragraph S8.5, the ical resistance test (S8.3). A headlamp headlamp shall meet the photometric with a glass lens and a non-plastic re- requirements applicable to the flector need not meet the internal heat headlamp system under test. test of paragraph S8.6.2. A headlamp of (5) The headlamp shall first meet the sealed design as verified in paragraph requirements of subparagraph (i) and S8.9 (sealing) need not meet the corro- then those of subparagraph (ii). sion (S8.4), dust (S8.5), or humidity (i) After a temperature cycle test (S8.7) tests; however, the headlamp conducted in accordance with para- shall meet the requirements of para- graph S8.6.1, the headlamp shall show graphs 4.1, 4.1.2, 4.4 and 5.1.4 for corro- no evidence of delamination, fractures, sion and connector of SAE Standard entry of moisture or deterioration of J580 DEC86 Sealed Beam Headlamp As- bonding material, color bleeding, warp- sembly. An integral beam headlamp age or deformation visible without may incorporate light sources that are magnification or lens warpage greater replaceable and are used for purposes than .118 in. (3 mm) when measured other than headlighting. parallel to the optical axis at the point (h) When tested according to any of of intersection of the axis of each light the procedures indicated in subpara- source with the exterior surface of the graphs (1) through (7) each headlamp or lens, and it shall meet the photometric beam contributor shall meet the appro- requirements applicable to the priate requirement: headlamp system under test. (1) After an abrasion test conducted (ii) After an internal heat test con- in accordance with paragraph S8.2, the ducted in accordance with paragraph headlamp shall meet the photometric S8.6.2, there shall be no lens warpage requirements applicable to the greater than .118 in. (3 mm) when meas- headlamp system under test. ured parallel to the optical axis at the (2) After the chemical resistance point of intersection of the axis of each tests of paragraphs S8.3 and S8.10.1, the light source with the exterior surface headlamp shall have no surface dete- of the lens, and it shall meet the photo- rioration, coating delamination, frac- metric requirements applicable to the tures, deterioration of bonding or seal- headlamp system under test. ing materials, color bleeding or color (6) After a humidity test conducted pickup visible without magnification, in accordance with paragraph S8.7, the and the headlamp shall meet the pho- inside of the headlamp shall show no tometric requirements applicable to evidence of delamination or moisture, the headlamp system under test. fogging or condensation visible without (3) After a corrosion test conducted magnification. in accordance with paragraph S8.4, (7) After a vibration test conducted there shall be no evidence of external in accordance with paragraph S8.8, or internal corrosion or rust visible there shall be no evidence of loose or without magnification. After a corro- broken parts, other than filaments, sion test conducted in accordance with visible without magnification.

256

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00256 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

(i) An integral beam headlamp may (ii) The upper beam shall be provided incorporate replaceable light sources in one of the following ways: that are used for purposes other than (A) By the inboard light source (or headlighting. the lower one if arranged vertically) S7.5 Replaceable bulb headlamp sys- designed to conform to: tem. Each replaceable bulb headlamp (1) The upper beam requirements of system shall be designed to conform to Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2, or Figure 17– the following requirements: 1 or Figure 17–2 if the light sources in (a) The system shall provide only two the headlamp system are any combina- lower beams and two upper beams and tion of dual filament replaceable light shall incorporate not more than two sources that include Type HB2, or replaceable light sources in each (2) The upper beam requirements of headlamp. figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2 if the light (b) The photometrics as specified in sources are type HB2, or any combina- subparagraphs (c) through (e) of this tion of replaceable light sources that paragraph (depicted in Figure 26), using include Type HB2; or any light source of the Type intended (B) By both light sources in the for use in such system. headlamp, designed to conform to the (c) The test requirements of sections upper beam requirements specified 4.1, 4.1.4, and performance require- above. ments of section 5.1.4 of SAE J1383 (3) The lower and upper beams of a APR85, using the photometric require- headlamp system consisting of four ments specified in subparagraphs (d) lamps, each containing a single re- and (e) of this paragraph. placeable light source, shall be pro- (d) For a headlamp equipped with vided as follows: dual filament replaceable light sources, the following requirements apply: (i) The lower beam shall be provided (1) Headlamps designed to conform to by the outboard lamp (or the upper one the external aiming requirements of if arranged vertically), designed to con- S7.8.5.1 shall have no mechanism that form to: allows adjustment of an individual (A) The lower beam requirements of light source, or, if there are two light Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2, or Figure 15– sources, independent adjustments of 1 or Figure 15–2 if the light sources in each reflector. the headlamp system are any combina- (2) The lower and upper beams of a tion of dual filament light sources headlamp system consisting of two other than Type HB2; or lamps, each containing either one or (B) The lower beam requirements of two replaceable light sources, shall be Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 if the light provided as follows: sources are Type HB2, or dual filament (i) The lower beam shall be provided light sources other than Type HB1 and in one of the following ways: HB5. The lens of each such headlamp (A) By the outboard light source (or shall be marked with the letter ‘‘L’’. upper one if arranged vertically) de- (ii) The upper beam shall be provided signed to conform to: by the inboard lamp (or the lower one (1) The lower beam requirements of if arranged vertically), designed to con- Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2, or Figure 17– form to: 1 or Figure 17–2, if the light sources in (A) The upper beam requirements of the headlamp system are any combina- Figure 27–1 or Figure 27–2, of Figure 15– tion of dual filament replaceable light 1 or Figure 15–2 if the light sources in sources other than Type HB2; or the headlamp system are any combina- (2) The lower beam requirements of tion of dual filament light sources Figure 17–1 or Figure17–2 if the light other than Type HB2; or sources are Type HB2, or any dual fila- (B) The upper beam requirements of ment replaceable light sources that in- Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 if the light clude Type HB2; or sources are Type HB2, or dual filament (B) By both light sources in the light sources other tha Type HB1 and headlamp, designed to conform to the Type HB5. The lens of each such lower beam requirements specified headlamp shall be marked with the let- above. ter ‘‘u’’. 257

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00257 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(e) The following requirements apply of each headlamp shall be permanently to a headlamp system equipped with marked with the letter ‘‘U’’. any combination of replaceable light (f) Each lens reflector unit manufac- sources except those specified in para- tured as replacement equipment shall graph (d) of this section: be designed to conform to the require- (1) Headlamps designed to conform to ments of subparagraphs (d) and (e) of the external aim requirements of this paragraph when any replaceable S7.8.5.1 shall have no mechanism that light source appropriate for such unit allows adjustment of an individual is inserted in it. light source, or, if there are two re- (g) The lens of each replaceable bulb placeable light sources, independent headlamp shall bear permanent mark- adjustment of each reflector. ing in front of each replaceable light (2) The lower and upper beams of a source with which it is equipped that headlamp system consisting of two states the HB Type, if the light source lamps, each containing a combination is designed to conform to subpara- of two replaceable light sources (other graphs (a) through (e) of paragraph than those combinations specified in S7.7, or the bulb marking/ designation subparagraph (d) of this paragraph) provided in compliance with Section shall be provided only as follows: VIII of appendix A of part 564, if the (i) The lower beam shall be provided light source is designed to conform to in one of the following ways: subparagraph (g) of paragraph S.7.7 No (A) By the outboard light source (or marking need be provided if the only the uppermost if arranged vertically) replaceable light source in the designed to conform to the lower beam headlamp is Type HB1. requirements of Figure 17–1 or Figure (h) The system shall be aimable in 17–2; or accordance with paragraph S7.8. (B) By both light sources, designed to (i) Each headlamp shall meet the re- conform to the lower beam require- quirements of paragraphs S7.4(g) and ments of Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2. (h), except that the sentence in para- (ii) The upper beam shall be provided graph (g) to verify sealing according to in one of the following ways: section S8.9 Sealing does not apply. (A) By the inboard light source (or (j) A replaceable bulb headlighting the lower one if arranged vertically) system may incorporate replaceable designed to conform to the upper beam light sources that are used for purposes requirements of Figure 17–1 or Figure other than headlighting. 17–2; or S7.6 Combination Headlighting Sys- (B) By both light sources, designed to tem. A combination headlighting sys- conform to the upper beam require- tem shall be comprised of either two ments of Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2. headlamps designed to conform to the (3) The lower and upper beams of a requirements of S7.6.2, or any combina- headlamp system consisting of four tion of four headlamps designed to con- lamps, using any combination of re- form to the requirements of S7.3.7, placeable light sources except those S7.4, or S7.5 of this standard. specified in subparagraph (d) of this S7.6.1 A combination headlighting paragraph, each lamp containing only system shall provide in total not more a single replaceable light source, shall than two upper beams and two lower be provided only as follows: beams. When installed on a motor vehi- (i) The lower beam shall be produced cle, the headlamps (or parts thereof) by the outboard lamp (or upper one if that provide the lower beam shall be of arranged vertically), designed to con- the same type, and provide a symmet- form to the lower beam requirements rical effective projected luminous lens of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2. The lens area when illuminated. of each headlamp shall be permanently S7.6.2 In a combination headlighting marked with the letter ‘‘L’’. system consisting of two headlamps, (ii) The upper beam shall be produced each headlamp shall be designed to by the inboard lamp (or lower one of conform to Figure 17–1 or Figure 17–2 arranged vertically), designed to con- and shall be a combination of two dif- form to the upper beam requirements ferent headlamps chosen from the fol- of Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2. The lens lowing types: a Type F headlamp, an

258

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00258 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

integral beam headlamp, and a replace- descent Filament Lamps (April 1980); able bulb headlamp. shall be made with the black cap in- S7.6.2.1 That part of the headlamp stalled on Type HB1, Type HB2, Type which contains an integral beam HB4, and Type HB5, and on any other headlamp, or beam contributors used replaceable light source so designed; in place of a single headlamp, shall be and shall be made with the electrical designed to conform to the require- conductor and light source base ments of S7.4 (c) through (h) of this shrouded with an opaque white cover, standard. except for the portion normally located S7.6.2.2 That part of the headlamp within the interior of the lamp hous- which contains a replaceable bulb ing. The measurement of luminous flux headlamp shall be designed to conform for the Types HB3 and HB4 shall be to the requirements of S7.5 of this made with the base covered with a standard. white cover as shown in the drawings S7.6.3 In a combination headlighting for Types HB3 and HB4 filed in Docket system consisting of four headlamps, No. NHTSA 98–3397. (The white cover is each headlamp shall be designed to used to eliminate the likelihood of in- conform to Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2, correct lumen measurement that will or if an integral beam headlamp in occur should the reflectance of the which there is more than one beam light source base and electrical con- contributor, designed to conform to nector be low). Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2 in the man- (c) The capsule, lead wires and/or ter- ner required by S7.4(a)(3) of this stand- minals, and seal on each Type HB1, ard. Type HB3, Type HB4, and Type HB5 S7.7 Replaceable light sources. Each light source, and on any other replace- replaceable light source shall be de- signed to conform to the dimensions able light source which uses a seal, and electrical specifications furnished shall be installed in a pressure chamber with respect to it pursuant to part 564 as shown in Figure 25 so as to provide of this chapter, and shall conform to an airtight seal. The diameter of the the following requirements: aperture in Figure 25 on a replaceable (a) If other than an HB Type, the light source (other than an HB Type) light source shall be marked with the shall be that dimension furnished for bulb marking designation specified for such light source in compliance with it in compliance with Appendix A or Appendix A or Appendix B of part 564 of Appendix B of part 564 of this chapter. this chapter. An airtight seal exists The base of each HB Type shall be when no air bubbles appear on the low marked with its HB Type designation. pressure (connector) side after the Each replaceable light source shall also light source has been immersed in be marked with the symbol DOT and water for one minute while inserted in with a name or trademark in accord- a cylindrical aperture specified for the ance with paragraph S7.2. light source, and subjected to an air (b) The measurement of maximum pressure of 70kPa (10 P.S.I.G.) on the power and luminous flux that is sub- glass capsule side. mitted in compliance with Appendix A (d) The measurement of maximum or Appendix B of part 564 of this chap- power and luminous flux that is sub- ter shall be made in accordance with mitted in compliance with section VII this paragraph. The filament or dis- of Appendix A of part 564 of this chap- charge arc shall be seasoned before ter, or section IV of Appendix B of part measurement of either. Measurement 564 of this chapter, shall be made with shall be made with the direct current the direct current test voltage regu- test voltage regulated within one quar- lated within one quarter of one per- ter of one percent. The test voltage cent. The test voltage shall be 12.8v. shall be 12.8v. The measurement of lu- The measurement of luminous flux minous flux shall be in accordance with shall be in accordance with the Illu- the Illuminating Engineering Society minating Engineering Society of North of North America, LM–45, IES Approved America, LM 45; IES Approved Method Method for Electrical and Photometric for Electrical and Photometric Measure- Measurements of General Service Incan- ments of General Service Incandescent

259

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00259 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Filament Lamps (April 1980). The fila- filed in Appendix B of part 564 of this ment of a replaceable light source shall chapter; be seasoned before such measurement. (5) A warning that ballast output The white covers are used to eliminate voltage presents the potential for se- the likelihood of incorrect lumens vere electrical shock that could lead to measurement that will occur should permanent injury or death; the reflectance of the light source base (6) Ballast output power in watts and and electrical connector be low. output voltage in rms volts AC or DC; (1) For a light source with a resistive and element type filament, seasoning of (7) The symbol ‘DOT’.’’ the light source shall be made in ac- (f) For light sources that use excited cordance with section 2.9 of SAE gas mixtures as a filament or discharge Standard J1383 APR85 Performance Re- arc, the ‘‘rated laboratory life’’ shall be quirements for Motor Vehicle Headlamps. determined in accordance with sections The measurement of luminous flux 4.3 and 4.9 of SAE Recommended Prac- shall be made with the black cap in- tice J2009 FEB93 Forward Discharge stalled on Type HB1, Type HB2, Type Lighting Systems. HB4, and Type HB5 light sources, and on any other replaceable light source (g) After the force deflection test so designed, and shall be made with the conducted in accordance with S9, the electrical conductor and light source permanent deflection of the glass enve- base shrouded with an opaque white lope shall not exceed 0.13 mm in the di- colored cover, except for the portion rection of the applied force. normally located within the interior of S7.8 Aimability Performance Require- the lamp housing. The measurement of ments. luminous flux for Type HB3 and Type S7.8.1 (a) Each headlamp or beam HB4 shall be made with the base cov- contributor that is not visually/opti- ered with the white cover shown in the cally aimable in accordance with drawings for Types HB3 and HB4 filed S7.8.5.3 of this standard shall be in Docket No. NHTSA 98–3397. equipped with fiducial marks, aiming (2) For a light source using excited pads, or similar references of sufficient gas mixtures as a filament or discharge detail and accuracy, for determination arc, seasoning of the light source sys- of an appropriate vehicle plane to be tem, including any ballast required for used with the photometric procedures its operation, shall be made in accord- of SAE J1383 APR85 for correct align- ance with section 4.0 of SAE Rec- ment with the photometer axis when ommended Practice J2009 FEB93 Dis- being tested for photometric compli- charge Forward Lighting Systems. With ance, and to serve for the aiming ref- the test voltage applied to the ballast erence when the headlamp or beam input terminals, the measurement of contributor is installed on a motor ve- luminous flux shall be made with the hicle. The fiducial marks, aiming pads, black cap installed, if so designed, and or similar references are protrusions, shall be made with an opaque white bubble vials, holes, indentations, colored cover, except for the portion ridges, scribed lines, or other readily normally located within the interior of identifiable marks established and de- the lamp housing. scribed by the vehicle or headlamp (e) If a ballast is required for oper- manufacturer. ation, each ballast shall bear the fol- (b) Each motor vehicle manufactured lowing permanent markings: on and after September 1, 1998, shall be (1) Name or logo of ballast manufac- equipped with headlamps or beam con- turer; tributors which have a mark or mark- (2) Ballast part number or unique ings that are visible from the front of identification; the headlamp when installed on the ve- (3) Part number or other unique iden- hicle to identify the optical axis of the tification of the light source for which headlamp to assure proper horizontal the ballast is designed; and vertical alignment of the aiming (4) Rated laboratory life of the light screen or optical aiming equipment. source/ballast combination, if the in- The manufacturer is free to choose the formation for the light source has been design of the mark or markings. The

260

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00260 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

mark or markings may be on the inte- (d) Be exempted from S7.8.4 if it is rior or exterior of the lens or indicated visually/optically aimable and has by a mark or central structure on the fixed horizontal aim. interior or exterior of the headlamp. S7.8.3 When a headlamp system is (c) Each headlamp that is visually/ tested in a laboratory, the range of its optically aimable in accordance with vertical aim shall not be less than ±4 S7.8.5.3 of this standard shall be degrees from the nominal correct aim marked in accordance with S7.8.5.3(f). position for the intended vehicle appli- S7.8.2 Except as provided in this cation. When installed on a motor vehi- paragraph, each headlamp shall be in- cle, the range of vertical aim shall be not less than the full range of pitch of stalled on a motor vehicle with a the vehicle on which the headlamp sys- mounting and aiming mechanism that tem is installed. The installed range of allows aim inspection and adjustment static pitch angle shall as a minimum of both vertical and horizontal aim, be determined from unloaded vehicle and is accessible for those purposes weight to gross vehicle weight rating, without removal of any vehicle parts, and incorporate pitch angle effects except for protective covers removable from maximum trailer or trunk load- without the use of tools. ings, the full range of tire intermix S7.8.2.1 (a) When installed on the ve- sizes and suspensions recommended hicle, adjustment of one aim axis and/or installed by the vehicle manu- through its full on-vehicle range shall facturer, and the anticipated effects of not cause the aim of the other axis to variable passenger loading. The deviate more than ±0.76 degree. vertical aim adjustment mechanism (b) If the performance specified in shall be continuously adjustable over paragraph (a) of this section is not the full range. achievable, the requirements of S7.8.4 When a headlamp system is S7.8.5.2(b)(3) apply, except that if the tested in a laboratory, the range of its aiming mechanism is not a VHAD, the horizontal aim shall be not less that +/ requirements specific to VHADs are -2.5 degrees from the nominal correct not applicable, and the instruction aim position for the intended vehicle shall be specific to the aiming mecha- application. nism installed. S7.8.5 When activated in a steady- (c) A visually/optically aimable burning state, headlamps shall not headlamp that has a lower beam shall have any styling ornament or other not have a horizontal adjustment feature, such as a translucent cover or mechanism unless such mechanism grill, in front of the lens. Headlamp meets the requirements of paragraph wipers may be used in front of the lens S7.8.5.2 of this standard. provided that the headlamp system is S7.8.2.2 If the headlamp is aimed by designed to conform with all applicable moving the reflector relative to the photometric requirements with the wiper stopped in any position in front lens and headlamp housing, or vice of the lens. When a headlamp system is versa, it shall: installed on a motor vehicle, it shall be (a) Allow movement of the headlamp aimable with at least one of the fol- system, when tested in the laboratory, lowing: An externally applied aiming to be not less than the full range of device, as specified in S7.8.5.1; an on-ve- pitch on the vehicle on which the hicle headlamp aiming device installed headlamp system is installed and for by the vehicle or lamp manufacturer, the horizontal aim range limits of as specified in S7.8.5.2; or by visual/op- S7.8.4, tical means, as specified in S7.8.5.3. (b) Conform with the photometrics S7.8.5.1 External aiming. Each applicable to it with the lens at any po- headlamp system that is capable of sition relative to the reflector within being mechanically aimed by exter- the range limits as specified in nally applied headlamp aiming devices S7.8.2.2(a), shall be mechanically aimable using (c) Be exempted from the aim range the equipment specified in SAE Stand- limits for testing in a laboratory in ard J602 OCT80 Headlamp Aiming Device S7.8.3, and for Mechanically Aimable Sealed Beam

261

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00261 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Headlamp Units without the removal of (c) Each headlamp system mounting any ornamental trim rings, covers, and aiming mechanism shall be sub- wipers or other vehicle parts. jected to a salt spray (fog) test in ac- (a) The aim of the headlamps in each cordance with ASTM B117–73 Method of headlamp system, other than a Salt Spray (Fog) Testing for a period of headlamp system designed to conform 50 hours, consisting of two successive to section S7.3, that is designed to use 25-hour periods of 24 hours exposure such external aiming devices, shall not followed by 1 hour of drying. At the deviate more than 0.30 degree when a end of 50 hours, the headlamp system downward torque of 20 lb.-in. (2.25 N–m) shall be capable of meeting any of the is removed from the headlamp in its applicable requirements of paragraph design operating position. The down- S7.8. ward force used to create the torque (d) Each headlamp system which is shall be applied parallel to the aiming designed to use the Headlamp Aiming reference plane, through the aiming Device Locating Plates with adjustable pads, and displaced forward using a legs for the 100 × 165 mm unit and the lever arm such that the force is applied 142 × 200 mm unit, and which has ad- on an axis that is perpendicular to the justable length legs, shall meet the re- aiming reference plane and originates quirements of subparagraphs (1) and (2) at the center of the aiming pad pattern below. (see Figures 4–1 and 4–3). For (1) The lens shall have three aiming headlamps using the aiming pad loca- pads which meet the requirements of tions of Group 1, the distance between Figure 4, Dimensional Specifications for the point of application of force and Location of Aiming Pads on Replaceable the aiming reference plane shall be not Bulb Headlamp Units. The aiming pads less than 6.625 in. (168.3 mm) plus the need not be centered at the geometric distance from the aiming reference center of the lens, or on the optical plane to the secondary plane, if used axis. Except as provided in subpara- (see section S7.8.5.1(d)(1)). For graph (2), a whole number, which rep- headlamps using the aiming pad loca- resents the distance in tenths of an tions of Group II, the distance between inch (i.e. 0.3 inch=3) from the aiming the point of application of force and reference plane to the respective aim- the aiming reference plane shall be not ing pads which are not in contact with less than 6.609 in. (167.9 mm) plus the that plane, shall be inscribed adjacent distance from the aiming reference to each respective aiming pad on the plane to the secondary plane, if used. lens. The height of these numbers shall For headlamps using the nonadjustable be not less than .157 inch (4 mm). If Headlamp Aiming Device Locating there is interference between the plane Plates for the 146 mm diameter, the 176 and the area of the lens between the mm diameter, and the 92×150 mm aiming pads, the whole number rep- sealed beam units, the distance be- resents the distance to a secondary tween the point of application of force plane. The secondary plane shall be lo- and the aiming plane shall, respec- cated parallel to the aiming reference tively, be not less than 6.984 in. (177.4 plane and as close to the lens as pos- mm), 6.937 in. (176.2 mm), and 7.625 in sible without causing interference. (193.7 mm). Each headlamp system that (2) If the most forward aiming pad is is designed to conform to paragraph the lower inboard aiming pad, then the S7.5 and that is designed to use such dimensions may be placed anywhere on external aiming devices, and which is the lens. The dimension for the out- manufactured on or after September 1, board aiming pad (Dimension F in Fig- 1990, shall comply with this paragraph. ure 4) shall be followed by the letter (b) When a headlamp is installed on a ‘‘H’’ and the dimension for the center motor vehicle, its aim in any direction aiming pad shall be followed by the let- shall not change by more than 0.30 de- ter ‘‘V.’’ The dimensions shall be ex- gree nor shall the lamp recede more pressed in tenths of an inch. than 0.1 in. (2.5 mm.) after being sub- (e) Each headlamp may be designed jected to an inward force of 50 pounds to use the nonadjustable Headlamp (222 newtons) applied evenly to the lens Aiming Device Locating Plate for the parallel to the mechanical axis. 100×165 mm unit, the 142×200 mm unit,

262

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00262 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

the 146 mm diameter unit, or the 178 the horizontal that would affect the mm diameter unit of SAE J602, or the correct positioning of the headlamp for 92×150 mm Type F unit, and incor- vertical aim. porate lens-mounted aiming pads as (vi) The graduations shall be legible specified for those units in Figures 10, under an illumination level not greater 13, 5, or 7 respectively in SAE J1383 than 30 foot candles, measured at the APR85, or Figure 11 of this standard for top of the graduation, by an observer the Type F unit. If so designed, no ad- having 20/20 vision (Snellen), and shall ditional lens marking is necessary to permit aim adjustment to within 0.19 designate the type of plate or dimen- degree (1 in. at 25 ft.). sions. (2) Horizontal aim. The VHAD shall S7.8.5.2 On-vehicle aiming. Each include references and scales relative headlamp system that is capable of to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle being aimed by equipment installed on necessary to assure correct horizontal the vehicle shall include a Vehicle aim for photometry and aiming pur- Headlamp Aiming Device (VHAD) that poses. An ‘‘O’’ mark shall be used to in- conforms to the following require- dicate alignment of the headlamps rel- ments: ative to the longitudinal axis of the ve- (a) Aim. The VHAD shall provide for hicle. In addition, an equal number of headlamp aim inspection and adjust- graduations from the ‘‘O’’ position rep- ment in both the vertical and hori- resenting equal angular changes in the zontal axes. axis relative to the vehicle axis shall (1) Vertical aim. The VHAD shall in- be provided. clude the necessary references and (i) Each graduation shall represent a scales relative to the horizontal plane change in the horizontal position of the to assure correct vertical aim for pho- mechanical axis not greater than 0.38 tometry and aiming purposes. An off- degree (2 in. at 25 ft.) to provide for vehicle measurement of the angle of variations in aim at least 0.76 degree (4 the plane of the ground is permitted. In in. at 25 ft.) to the left and right of the addition, an equal number of gradua- longitudinal axis of the vehicle, and tions from the ‘‘O’’ position rep- shall have an accuracy relative to the resenting angular changes in the axis zero mark of less than 0.1 degree. in the upward and downward directions (ii) The VHAD shall be marked to in- shall be provided. dicate headlamp aim movement in the (i) Each graduation shall represent a left and right directions. change in the vertical position of the (iii) The graduations shall be legible mechanical axis not larger than 0.19 de- under an illumination level not greater gree (1 in. at 25 ft.) to provide for vari- than 30 foot candles, measured at the ations in aim at least 1.2 degrees above top of the graduation, by an observer and below the horizontal, and have an having 20/20 vision (Snellen), and shall accuracy relative to the zero mark of permit aim adjustment to within 0.38 less than 0.1 degree. degree (2 in. at 25 ft.). (ii) The VHAD shall be marked to in- (iv) The horizontal indicator shall dicate headlamp aim movement in the perform through a minimum range of upward and downward directions. ±0.76 degree (4 in. at 25 ft.); however, (iii) Each graduation shall indicate a the indicator itself shall be capable of linear movement of the scale indicator recalibration over a movement of ±2.5 of not less than 0.05 in. (1.27 mm) if a degrees relative to the longitudinal direct reading analog indicator is used. axis of the vehicle to accommodate any If a remote reading indicator is pro- adjustment necessary for recalibrating vided, it shall represent the actual aim the indicator after vehicle repair from movement in a clear, understandable accident damage. format. (b) Aiming instructions. (1) The in- (iv) The vertical indicator shall per- structions for properly aiming the form through a minimum range of ±1.2 headlighting system using the VHAD degrees. shall be provided on a label perma- (v) Means shall be provided in the nently affixed to the vehicle adjacent VHAD for compensating for deviations to the VHAD, or in the vehicle opera- in floor slope less than 1.2 degrees from tor’s manual. The instructions shall

263

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00263 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

advise that the headlighting system is mounted headlamp assembly shall be properly aimed if the appropriate designed to conform to the photo- vertical plane (as defined by the vehi- metric requirements appropriate for cle manufacturer) is perpendicular to the headlamp system under test. both the longitudinal axis of the vehi- (2) When tested in accordance with cle, and a horizontal plane when the subsection (1) of this section, with any vehicle is on a horizontal surface, and replacement headlamp unit(s) or light the VHAD is set at ‘‘O’’ vertical and ‘‘O’’ sources intended for use in the system horizontal. under test, the VHAD and headlamp (2) Should a remote indicator or a re- system shall be designed to conform to mote indicator and adjuster be pro- the photometric performance require- vided, the instructions shall be placed ments appropriate for the system in the operator’s manual, and may also under test. be placed on a label adjacent to the (3) The same VHAD and associated VHAD. headlamp(s) (or headlamp assembly) (3) Should the mechanism not meet shall be rigidly mounted in a headlamp the requirements of S7.8.2.1, on each test fixture and comply with the fol- motor vehicle manufactured on or after lowing laboratory test procedures: September 1, 1990, a cautionary label (i) Each graduation on the horizontal shall be placed adjacent to the mecha- and vertical aim scales shall be nism stating the caution and including checked and any variation from the either the reason for the caution or the correct aim shall not exceed ±0.2 de- corrective action necessary. Each such gree, and ±0.1 degree respectively. label shall also refer the reader to the (ii) With the aiming plane horizontal vehicle operator’s manual for complete and vertical and with the scale on the instructions. Each such vehicle shall be device set at 0, the aimer shall be ad- equipped with an operator’s manual justed before each of the following containing the complete instructions tests to assure that the indicators are appropriate for the mechanism in- centered at 0. stalled. (A) The VHAD and an unlighted (c) Each headlamp equipped with a headlamp assembly shall be stabilized VHAD that is manufactured for use on at 20 ±5 degrees F (¥7 ±3 degrees C) in motor vehicles manufactured on or a circulating air environmental test after September 1, 1998, shall be manu- chamber. After a period of 30 minutes, factured with its calibration perma- when measured at that soak tempera- nently fixed by its manufacturer. Cali- ture, the variation from correct hori- bration in this case means the process zontal of vertical aim shall not exceed of accurately aligning the geometry of ±0.2 degree, and ±0.1 degree, respec- the VHAD devices with the beam pat- tively. tern for the purposes of compliance (B) The VHAD, and the headlamp as- with the standard. sembly with its highest wattage fila- (d) Testing the VHAD. ment (or combination of filaments in- (1) The headlamp assembly (the tended to be used simultaneously) en- headlamp(s), and the VHAD(s)) shall be ergized at its design voltage, shall then mounted on a level goniometer, aligned be stabilized at 100 ±5 degrees F (38 ±3 to a photometer located not less than degrees C) in a circulating air environ- 60 ft. (18.3 m) from the VHAD assembly. mental test chamber. After a period of The assembly shall be mechanically 30 minutes, when measured at that aimed using the VHAD in accordance soak temperature, the variation from with the manufacturer’s instructions correct horizontal and vertical aim as provided with the vehicle on which shall not exceed ±0.2 degree, and ±0.1 the VHAD is intended to be used. A 1⁄4 degree, respectively. degree reaim is permitted in any direc- (C) The VHAD and an unlighted tion at any test point to allow for vari- headlamp assembly shall then be ations in readings between labora- placed in a circulating air environ- tories. The test shall be conducted in mental test chamber and exposed to a accordance with the procedures of temperature of 140 ±5 degrees F (60 ±3 paragraphs 4.1 and 4.1.4 of SAE J1383 degrees C) for 24 hours, followed by a APR85. Under these conditions the temperature of ¥40 ±5 degrees F (¥40

264

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00264 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

±3 degrees C) for 24 hours and then per- the headlamp is intended. The fixture, mitted to return to room temperature, with the headlamp installed shall be after which the VHAD and headlamp attached to the goniometer table in assembly shall show no damage which such a way that the fixture alignment would impair its ability to perform as axes are coincident with the goniom- specified herein. The variation from eter axes. The headlamp shall be ener- correct horizontal or vertical aim shall gized at the specified test voltage. not exceed ±0.2 degree, and ±0.1 degree, (ii) The headlamp beam pattern shall respectively. be aimed with the cutoff at the H-H (D) The VHAD and headlamp assem- axis. There shall be no adjustment, bly shall then be tested according to shimming, or modification of the hori- the corrosion test procedure of para- zontal axis of the headlamp or test fix- graph S7.8.5.1(c). ture, unless the headlamp is equipped (E) The VHAD and headlamp assem- with a VHAD. In this case the VHAD bly shall then be tested for photo- shall be adjusted to zero. metric compliance as specified in para- (iii) A vertical scan of the beam pat- graphs S7.8.5.2(c)(1) and (2). tern shall be conducted for a headlamp S7.8.5.3 Visual/optical aiming. Each with a left side gradient by aligning visually/optically aimable headlamp the goniometer on a vertical line at 2.5 shall be designed to conform to the fol- degrees L and scanning from 1.5 de- lowing requirements: grees U to 1.5 degrees D. For a (a) Vertical aim, lower beam. Each headlamp with a right side gradient, a lower beam headlamp shall have a cut- vertical scan of the beam pattern shall off in the beam pattern. It may be ei- be conducted by aligning the goniom- ther on the left side or the right side of eter on a vertical line at 2.0 degrees R the optical axis, but once chosen for a and scanning from 1.5 degrees U to 1.5 particular headlamp system’s design, degrees D. the side chosen for the cutoff shall not (iv) Determine the maximum gra- be changed for any headlamps intended dient within the range of the scan by to be used as replacements for those using the formula: G = log E(a)-log system’s headlamps. E(a+0.1), where ‘‘G’’ is the gradient, ‘‘E’’ (1) Vertical position of cutoff. The is illumination and ‘‘a’’ is vertical angu- headlamp shall be aimed vertically so lar position. The maximum value of that the cutoff is on the left side, at 0.4 the gradient ‘‘G’’ determines the degree down from the H–H line, or on vertical angular location of the cutoff. the right side, at the H–H line. Perform vertical scans at 1.0 degree L (2) Vertical gradient. The gradient of and R of the measurement point of the the cutoff measured at either 2.5 de- maximum gradient to determine the grees L or 2.0 degrees R shall be not inclination. less than 0.13 based on the procedure of (b) Horizontal aim, lower beam. There S7.8.5.3, paragraph (a)(5). shall be no adjustment of horizontal (3) Horizontal position of the cutoff. aim unless the headlamp is equipped The width shall be not less than two with a horizontal VHAD. If the degrees, with not less than two degrees headlamp has a VHAD, it shall be set of its actual width centered at either to zero. 2.5 degrees L, or 2.0 degrees R. (c) Vertical aim, upper beam. (1) If the (4) Maximum inclination of cutoff. The upper beam is combined in a headlamp vertical location of the highest gra- with a lower beam, the vertical aim of dient at the ends of the minimum the upper beam shall not be changed width shall be within ±0.2 degree of the from the aim set using the procedures vertical location of the maximum gra- of paragraphs S7.8.5.3(a) and (b) used dient measured at the appropriate for the lower beam. vertical line (at either 2.5 degrees L for (2) If the upper beam is not combined a left side cutoff, or 2.0 degrees R for a in a headlamp with a lower beam, the right side cutoff.) vertical aim of the upper beam shall be (5) Measuring the cutoff parameter. (i) adjusted so that the maximum beam The headlamp shall be mounted on a intensity is located on the H-H axis. fixture which simulates its actual de- (d) Horizontal aim, upper beam. (1) If sign location on any vehicle for which the upper beam is combined in a

265

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00265 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

headlamp with a lower beam, the hori- headlamp when installed on the vehi- zontal aim of the upper beam shall not cle, to assure proper horizontal and be changed from the aim set using the vertical alignment of the aiming procedures of paragraphs S7.8.5.3 (a) screen or optical aiming equipment and (b) used for the lower beam. with the headlamp being aimed. The (2) If the upper beam is not combined manufacturer is free to choose the de- in a headlamp with the lower beam and sign of the mark or markings. The has fixed horizontal aim or has a hori- mark or markings may be on the inte- zontal VHAD, then the headlamp shall rior or exterior of the lens or indicated be mounted on a fixture which simu- by a mark or central structure on the lates its actual design location on any interior or exterior of the headlamp. vehicle for which the headlamp is in- (2) Visual/optical aimability identifica- tended. The fixture, with the headlamp tion marks. (i) The lens of a lower beam installed shall be attached to the goni- headlamp shall be marked ‘‘VOL’’ if the ometer table in such a way that the headlamp is intended to be visually/op- fixture alignment axes are coincident tically aimed using the left side of the with the goniometer axes. The lower beam pattern. headlamp shall be energized at 12.8 (ii) The lens of a lower beam ± 0.20 mV. There shall be no adjust- headlamp shall be marked ‘‘VOR’’ if the ment, shimming, or modification of the headlamp is intended to be visually/op- horizontal axis of the headlamp or test tically aimed using the right side of fixture, unless the headlamp is the lower beam pattern. equipped with a VHAD. In this case the (iii) The lens of each sealed beam or VHAD shall be adjusted to zero. integral beam headlamp shall be (3) If the upper beam is not combined marked ‘‘VOR’’ if the headlamp is of a in a headlamp with a lower beam, and type that was manufactured before it does not have a VHAD, the hori- May 1, 1997, and if such headlamp type zontal aim of the upper beam shall be has been redesigned since then to be adjusted so that the maximium beam visually/optically aimable. intensity is located on the V-V axis. (iv) The lens of a headlamp that is (e) Photometric Requirements and solely an upper beam headlamp and in- Measurement. (1) Instead of being de- signed to conform to the photometric tended to be visually/optically aimed requirements of Figures 15–1, 17–1, 27–1 using the upper beam shall be marked or 28–1, a visually/optically aimable ‘‘VO’’. headlamp shall be designed to conform (v) Each letter used in marking ac- to the requirements of Figures 15–2, 17– cording to this paragraph shall be not 2, 27–2 or 28–2 when tested in accord- less than 3 mm. high. ance with paragraph (2) and SAE J575 S7.9 Motorcycles. Each motorcycle DEC88, with the distance from the pho- shall be equipped with a headlighting tometer to the headlamp no less than system designed to conform to the fol- 18.3 m. lowing requirements. (2) If the lower beam has a left side S7.9.1 A motorcycle manufactured cutoff, reaim the headlamp vertically before September 1, 2000, may be to place the maximum gradient found equipped with— in paragraph S7.8.5.3 at 0.4 degree (a) A headlighting system designed to below the H-H line. For a headlamp conform to SAE Standard J584 Motor- with a lower beam right side cutoff, cycle Headlamps April 1964, or to SAE place the maximum gradient found in Standard J584 April 1964 with the pho- paragraph S7.8.5.3 at the H–H line. For tometric specifications of Figure 32 an upper beam, the headlamp would al- and the upper beam aimability speci- ready be aimed at the end of the proce- fications of paragraph S7.9.3; or dure found in paragraph S7.8.5.3. A 0.25 (b) One half of any headlighting sys- degree reaim is permitted in any direc- tem specified in S7.1 through S7.6 tion at any test point. which provides both a full upper beam (f) Marking—(1) Headlamp optical axis and full lower beam. Where more than mark. There shall be a mark or mark- one lamp must be used, the lamps shall ings identifying the optical axis of the be mounted vertically, with the lower headlamp visible from the front of the beam as high as practicable.

266

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00266 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

S7.9.2 A motorcycle manufactured face in testing downward pointing sen- on or after September 1, 2000, shall be sors. equipped with— (g) When tested in accordance with (a) A headlighting system designed to the test profile shown in Figure 9, the conform to SAE Standard J584 Motor- voltage drop across the modulator cycle Headlamps April 1964 with the pho- when the lamp is on at all test condi- tometric specifications of Figure 32 tions for 12 volt systems and 6 volt sys- and the upper beam aimability speci- tems shall not be greater than .45 volt. fications of paragraph S7.9.3; or The modulator shall meet all the provi- (b) A headlighting system that con- sions of the standard after completion forms to S7.9.1(b). of the test profile shown in Figure 9. S7.9.3 The upper beam of a multiple (h) Means shall be provided so that beam headlamp designed to conform to both the lower and upper beam func- the photometric requirements of Fig- tion at design voltage when the ure 32 shall be aimed photoelectrically headlamp control switch is in either during the photometric test in the the lower or upper beam position when manner prescribed in SAE Standard the modulator is off. J584 OCT93 Motorcycle Headlamps. S7.9.4.2(a) Each motorcycle S7.9.4 Motorcycle headlamp modula- headlamp modulator not intended as tion system. original equipment, or its container, S7.9.4.1 A headlamp on a motorcycle shall be labeled with the maximum may be wired to modulate either the wattage, and the minimum wattage ap- upper beam or the lower beam from its propriate for its use. Additionally, each maximum intensity to a lesser inten- such modulator shall comply with sity, provided that: S7.9.4.1 (a) through (g) when connected (a) The rate of modulation shall be to a headlamp of the maximum rated 240 ±40 cycles per minute. power and a headlamp of the minimum (b) The headlamp shall be operated at rated power, and shall provide means maximum power for 50 to 70 percent of so that the modulated beam functions each cycle. at design voltage when the modulator (c) The lowest intensity at any test is off. point shall be not less than 17 percent (b) Instructions, with a diagram, of the maximum intensity measured at shall be provided for mounting the the same point. light sensor including location on the (d) The modulator switch shall be motorcycle, distance above the road wired in the power lead of the beam surface, and orientation with respect filament being modulated and not in to the light. the ground side of the circuit. S7.9.5 Each replaceable bulb (e) Means shall be provided so that headlamp that is designed to meet the both the lower beam and upper beam photometric requirements of paragraph remain operable in the event of a mod- S7.9.1(a) or paragraph S7.9.2(a) and that ulator failure. is equipped with a light source other (f) The system shall include a sensor than a replaceable light source meet- mounted with the axis of its sensing ing the requirements of paragraph S7.7, element perpendicular to a horizontal shall have the word ‘‘motorcycle’’ per- plane. Headlamp modulation shall manently marked on the lens in char- cease whenever the level of light emit- acters not less than 0.114 in. (3 mm) in ted by a tungsten filament light oper- height. ating at 3000° Kelvin is either less than S7.9.6 A headlamp system shall be 270 lux (25 foot-candles) of direct light installed on a motorcycle in accord- for upward pointing sensors or less ance with the requirements of this than 60 lux (5.6 foot-candles) of re- paragraph. flected light for downward pointing S7.9.6.1 The headlamp system shall sensors. The light is measured by a sil- be located on the front of the motor- icon cell type light meter that is lo- cycle. cated at the sensor and pointing in the S7.9.6.2 (a) If the system consists of same direction as the sensor. A Kodak a single headlamp, it shall be mounted Gray Card (Kodak R–27) is placed at on the vertical centerline of the motor- ground level to simulate the road sur- cycle. If the headlamp contains more

267

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00267 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

than one light source, each light source S8.6.2, S8.7, and S8.10.1 and S8.10.2, if shall be mounted on the vertical cen- applicable. A 1⁄4 degree reaim is per- terline with the upper beam no higher mitted in any direction at any test than the lower beam, or horizontally point. disposed about the vertical centerline S8.2 Abrasion. (a) A headlamp shall and mounted at the same height. If the be mounted in the abrasion test fixture light sources are horizontally disposed in the manner indicated in Figure 5 about the vertical centerline, the dis- with the lens facing upward. tance between the closest edges of the (b) An abrading pad meeting the re- effective projected luminous lens area quirements in paragraphs (c)(1) in front of the light sources shall not through (c)(4) of this section shall be be greater than 200 mm (8 in.). cycled back and forth (1 cycle) for 11 (b) If the system consists of two cycles at 4 ±0.8 in. (10 cm ±2 cm) per headlamps, each of which provides both second over at least 80 percent of the an upper and lower beam, the lens surface, including all the area be- headlamps shall be mounted either at tween the upper and lower aiming pads, the same height and symmetrically but not including lens trim rings and disposed about the vertical centerline edges. or mounted on the vertical centerline. (c)(1) The abrading pad shall be not If the headlamps are horizontally dis- less than 1.0 ±.04 in. (2.5 cm ±.1 cm) posed about the vertical centerline, the wide, constructed of 0000 steel wool, distance between the closest edges of and rubber cemented to a rigid base their effective projected luminous lens shaped to the same vertical contour of areas shall not be greater than 200 mm the lens. The ‘‘grain’’ of the pad shall be (8 in.). perpendicular to the direction of mo- (c) If the system consists of two tion. headlamps, one of which provides an (2) The abrading pad support shall be upper beam and one of which provides equal in size to the pad and the center the lower beam, the headlamps shall be of the support surface shall be within located on the vertical centerline with ±.08 in. ( ±2 mm) of parallel to the lens the upper beam no higher than the surface. lower beam, or horizontally disposed (3) The density of the abrading pad about the vertical centerline and shall be such that when the pad is mounted at the same height. If the mounted to its support and is resting headlamps are horizontally disposed unweighted on the lens, the base of the about the vertical centerline, the dis- pad shall be no closer than .125 in. (3.2 tance between the closest edges of mm) to the lens at its closest point. their effective projected luminous lens (4) When mounted on its support and areas shall not be greater than 200 mm resting on the lens of the test (8 in.). headlamp, the abrading pad shall then S8 Tests and Procedures for Integral be weighted such that a pad pressure of Beam and Replaceable Bulb Headlighting 2.0 ±.15 psi (14 ±1 KPa) exists at the cen- Systems. When tested in accordance ter and perpendicular to the face of the with the following procedures, each in- lens. tegral beam headlamp shall meet the (d) A pivot shall be used if it is re- requirements of paragraph S7.4, and quired to follow the contour of the each replaceable bulb headlamp shall lens. meet the requirements of paragraph (e) Unused steel wool shall be used S7.5. Ballasts required to operate spe- for each test. cific gas mixture light sources shall be S8.3 Chemical resistance. (a) The en- included in the tests specified in para- tire exterior lens surface of the graphs S8.1 and S8.4 though S8.7. headlamp in the headlamp test fixture S8.1 Photometry. Each headlamp to and top surface of the lens-reflector which paragraph S8 applies shall be joint shall be wiped once to the left and tested according to paragraphs 4.1 and once to the right with a 6-inch square 4.1.4 of SAE Standard J1383 APR85 for soft cotton cloth (with pressure equally meeting the applicable photometric re- applied) which has been saturated once quirements, after each test specified in in a container with 2 ounces of a test paragraphs S8.2, S8.3, S8.5, S8.6.1, fluid as listed in paragraph (b). The

268

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00268 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

lamp shall be wiped within 5 seconds jected to a salt spray (fog) test in ac- after removal of the cloth from the test cordance with ASTM B117–73, Method of fluid. Salt Spray (Fog) Testing, for 240 hours, (b) The test fluids are: consisting of ten successive 24-hour pe- (1) ASTM Reference Fuel C, which is riods. During each period, the composed of Isooctane 50% volume and headlamp shall be mounted in the mid- Toluene 50% volume. Isooctane must dle of the chamber and exposed for 23 conform to A2.7 in Annex 2 of the hours to the salt spray. The spray shall Motor Fuels Section of the 1985 Annual not be activated during the 24th hour. Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 05.04, and The bulb shall be removed from the Toluene must conform to ASTM speci- headlamp and from the test chamber fication D362–84, Standard Specification during the one hour of salt spray deac- for Industrial Grade Toluene. ASTM Ref- tivation and reinserted for the start of erence Fuel C must be used as specified the next test period, at the end of the in: first and last three 23-hour periods of (i) Paragraph A2.3.2 and A2.3.3 of salt spray exposure, and at the end of Annex 2 to Motor Fuels, Section 1 in the any two of the fourth through seventh 1985 Annual Book of ASTM Standards; 23-hour periods of salt-spray exposure. and The test chamber shall be closed at all (ii) OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1910.106— times except for a maximum of 2 min- Handling Storage and Use of Flammable utes which is allowed for removal or re- Combustible Liquids. placement of a bulb during each period. (2) Tar remover (consisting by vol- After the ten periods, the lens reflector ume of 45% xylene and 55% petroleum unit without the bulb shall be im- base mineral spirits). mersed in deionized water for 5 min- (3) Power steering fluid (as specified utes, then secured and allowed to dry by the vehicle manufacturer for use in by natural convection only. the motor vehicle on which the (c) Using the voltage, resistance and headlamp is intended to be installed). pretest set up of paragraph (a) the cur- (4) consisting rent in each filament circuit shall be of 0.5% monoethanolamine with the re- measured after the test conducted in mainder 50% concentration of meth- paragraph (b). anol/distilled water by volume. S8.5 Dust. The headlamp, mounted (5) Antifreeze (50% concentration of on a headlamp test fixture, with all ethylene glycol/distilled water by vol- drain holes, breathing devices or other ume). designed openings in their normal oper- (c) After the headlamp has been ating positions, shall be positioned wiped with the test fluid, it shall be within a cubical box, with inside meas- stored in its designed operating atti- urements of 35.4 in. (900 mm) on each tude for 48 hours at a temperature of 73 side or larger if required for adequate °F ±7° (23 °C ±4°) and a relative humid- wall clearance, i.e., a distance of at ity of 30 ±10 percent. At the end of the least 5.9 in. (150 mm) between the 48-hour period, the headlamp shall be headlamp and any wall of the box. The wiped clean with a soft dry cotton box shall contain 9.9 lb. (4.5 kg) of fine cloth and visually inspected. powdered cement which conforms to S8.4 Corrosion. (a) A connector test the ASTM C150–77 specification for shall be performed on each filament Portland Cement. Every 15 minutes, circuit prior to the test in subpara- the cement shall be agitated by com- graph (b) according to Figure 1 and pressed air or fan blower(s) by pro- SAE Standard J580 DEC86. The power jecting blasts of air for a two-second source shall be set to provide 12. 8 volts period in a downward direction so that and the resistance shall be set to the cement is diffused as uniformly as produce 10 amperes. possible throughout the entire box. (b) The headlamp with connector at- This test shall be continued for five tached to the terminals, unfixtured and hours after which the exterior surfaces in its designed operating attitude with of the headlamp shall be wiped clean. all drain holes, breathing devices or S8.6 Temperature and internal heat other designed openings in their nor- test. A headlamp with one or more re- mal operating positions, shall be sub- placeable light sources shall be tested

269

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00269 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

according to paragraphs S8.6.1 and in an environmental chamber in a man- S8.6.2. Tests shall be made with all fila- ner similar to that indicated in Figure ments lighted at design voltage that 7 ‘‘Dirt/Ambient Test Setup.’’ The are intended to be used simultaneously headlamp shall be soaked for one hour in the headlamp and which in combina- at a temperature of 95 + 7 ¥0 degrees F tion draw the highest total wattage. (35 + 4 ¥0 degrees C) and then the lamp These include but are not limited to shall be energized according to para- filaments used for turn signal lamps, graph S8.6 for one hour in a still air fog lamps, parking lamps, and condition, allowing the temperature to headlamp lower beams lighted with rise from the soak temperature. upper beams when the wiring harness (c) The lamp shall be returned to a is so connected on the vehicle. If a turn room ambient temperature of 73 + 7 ¥0 signal is included in the headlamp as- degrees F (23 + 4 ¥0 degrees C) and a sembly, it shall be operated at 90 relative humidity of 30 ±10% and al- flashes a minute with a 75 ±2% current lowed to stabilize to the room ambient ‘‘on time.’’ If the lamp produces both temperature. The lens shall then be the upper and lower beam, it shall be cleaned. tested in both the upper beam mode S8.7 Humidity. (a) The test fixture and the lower beam mode under the consists of a horizontal steel plate to conditions above described, except for which three threaded steel or alu- a headlamp with a single Types HB1 or minum rods of 1⁄2 inch diameter are HB2 light source. screwed vertically behind the S8.6.1 Temperature cycle. A headlamp. The headlamp assembly is headlamp, mounted on a headlamp test clamped to the vertical rods, which are fixture, shall be subjected to 10 com- behind the headlamp. All attachments plete consecutive cycles having the to the headlamp assembly are made be- thermal cycle profile shown in Figure hind the lens and vents or openings, 6. During the hot cycle, the lamp, shall and are not within 2 inches laterally of be energized commencing at point ‘‘A’’ a vent inlet or outlet. of Figure 6 and de-energized at point (b) The mounted headlamp assembly ‘‘B.’’ Separate or single test chambers is oriented in its design operating posi- may be used to generate the environ- tion, and is placed in a controlled envi- ment of Figure 6. All drain holes, ronment at a temperature of 100+7¥0 breathing devices or other openings or degrees F (38+4¥0 degrees C) with a rel- vents of the headlamps shall be in their ative humidity of not less than 90 per- normal operating positions. cent. All drain holes, breathing de- S8.6.2 Internal Heat Test. (a) The vices, and other openings are in their headlamp lens surface that would nor- normal operation positions for all mally be exposed to road dirt shall be phases of the humidity test. The uniformly sprayed with any appro- headlamp shall be subjected to 24 con- priate mixture of dust and water or secutive 3-hour test cycles. In each other materials to reduce the photo- cycle, it shall be energized for 1 hour at metric output at the H–V test point of design voltage with the highest com- the upper beam (or the 1⁄2D–11⁄2R test bination of filament wattages that are point of the lower beam as appropriate) intended to be used, and then de-ener- to 25 ±2% of the output originally gized for 2 hours. If the headlamp in- measured in the photometric test con- corporates a turn signal, it shall flash ducted pursuant to paragraphs S7.4(i), at 90 flashes per minute with a 75±2 per- or S7.5 (a) through (e), as applicable. A cent current ‘‘on-time.’’ headlamp with a single Types HB1 or (c) Within 3 minutes after the com- HB2 light source shall be tested on the pletion of the 24th cycle, the air flow upper beam only. Such reduction shall test will begin. The following shall be determined under the same condi- occur: the mounted assembly shall be tions as that of the original photo- removed, placed in an insulating box metric measurement. and covered with foam material so that (b) After the photometric output of there is no visible air space around the the lamp has been reduced as specified assembly; the box shall be closed, in paragraph (a), the lamp and its taken to the air flow test chamber, and mounting hardware shall be mounted placed within it. Inside the chamber,

270

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00270 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

the assembly with respect to the air shall be of sufficient size to completely flow, shall be oriented in its design op- contain the test fixture base with no erating position. The assembly is posi- . The vibration shall be ap- tioned in the chamber so that the cen- plied in the vertical axis of the ter of the lens is in the center of the headlamp system as mounted on the opening of the air flow entry duct dur- vehicle. The filament shall not be ener- ing the test. The headlamp has at least gized. 3 inches clearance on all sides, and at S8.9 Sealing. An unfixtured headlamp least 4 inches to the entry and exit in its design mounting position shall be ducts at the closest points. If vent placed in water at a temperature of 176 tubes are used which extend below the ±5 degrees F (60 ±3 degrees C) for one lamp body, the 3 inches are measured hour. The headlamp shall be energized from the bottom of the vent tube or its in its highest wattage mode, with the protection. The temperature of the test voltage at 12.8 ±0.1 V. during im- chamber is 73+7¥0 degrees F (23+4¥0 mersion. The lamp shall then be de-en- degrees C) with a relative humidity of ergized and immediately submerged in 30+10¥0 percent. The headlamp is not its design mounting position into energized. water at 32 +5 ¥0 degrees F (0 +3 ¥0 de- (d) Before the test specified in para- grees C). The water shall be in a pres- graph (e) of this section, the uni- surized vessel, and the pressure shall be formity of the air flow in the empty increased to 10 psi (70 kPa), upon plac- test chamber at a plane 4 inches down- ing the lamp in the water. The lamp stream of the air entry duct shall have shall remain in the pressurized vessel been measured over a 4-inch square for a period of thirty minutes. This en- grid. The uniformity of air flow at each tire procedure shall be repeated for ± grid point is 10 percent of the average four cycles. Then the lamp shall be in- air flow specified in paragraph (e) of spected for any signs of water on its in- this section. terior. During the high temperature (e) The mounted assembly in the portion of the cycles, the lamp shall be chamber shall be exposed, for one hour, observed for signs of air escaping from ¥ to an average air flow of 330+0 30 ft/ its interior. If any water occurs on the min. as measured with an air velocity interior or air escapes, the lamp is not measuring probe having an accuracy of a sealed lamp. ±3 percent in the 330 ft/min range. The S8.10 Chemical and corrosion resist- average air flow is the average of the ance of reflectors of replaceable lens velocity recorded at six points around headlamps. the perimeter of the lens. The six points are determined as follows: At S8.10.1 Chemical resistance. (a) With the center of the lens, construct a hori- the headlamp in the headlamp test fix- zontal plane. The first two points are ture and the lens removed, the entire located in the plane, 1 inch outward surface of the reflector that receives from the intersection of the plane and light from a headlamp light source each edge of the lens. Then, trisect the shall be wiped once to the left and once distance between these two points and to the right with a 6-inch square soft construct longitudinal vertical planes cotton cloth (with pressure equally ap- at the two intermediate locations plied) which has been saturated once in formed by the trisection. The four re- a container with 2 ounces of one of the maining points are located in the test fluids listed in paragraph (b). The vertical planes, one inch above the top lamp shall be wiped within 5 seconds edge of the lens, and one inch below the after removal of the cloth from the test bottom edge of the lens. fluid. (f) After one hour, the headlamp is (b) The test fluids are: removed and inspected for moisture. (1) Tar remover (consisting by vol- S8.8 Vibration. A vibration test shall ume of 45% xylene and 55% petroleum be conducted in accordance with the base mineral spirits); procedures of SAE Standard J575e Tests (2) Mineral spirits; or for Motor Vehicle Lighting Devices and (3) Fluids other than water contained Components August 1970, and the fol- in the manufacturer’s instructions for lowing: the table on the adapter plate cleaning the reflector.

271

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00271 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(c) After the headlamp has been Type shall be the dimension provided wiped with the test fluid, it shall be in accordance with Appendix A of part stored in its designed operating atti- 564 of this chapter, section I.A.1 if the tude for 48 hours at a temperature of 73 light source has a lower beam filament, °F ±7° (23 °C ±4°) and a relative humid- or as specified in section I.B.1 if the ity of 30 ±10 percent. At the end of the light source has only an upper beam 48-hour period, the headlamp shall be filament. wiped clean with a soft dry cotton S10 Simultaneous Aim Photometry cloth and visually inspected. Tests—(a) Type F Headlamp Systems. The S8.10.2 Corrosion. (a) The headlamp assembly shall be located on a goniom- with the lens removed, unfixtured and eter placed not less than 60 feet (18.3m) in its designed operating attitude with from the photometer. The LF unit all drain holes, breathing devices or shall be aimed mechanically by cen- other designed openings in their nor- tering the unit on the photometer axis mal operating positions, shall be sub- and by aligning the aiming plane of the jected to a salt spray (fog) test in ac- lens perpendicular to the photometer cordance with ASTM B117–73, Method of axis. Then the assembly shall be moved Salt Spray (Fog) Testing, for 24 hours, in a plane parallel to the established while mounted in the middle of the aiming plane of the LF headlamp until chamber. the UF headlamp is centered on the (b) Afterwards, the headlamp shall be photometer axis. Photometry measure- stored in its designed operating atti- ments of the UF photometry unit shall tude for 48 hours at a temperature of 73 be completed using the aiming plane so °F ±7° (23 °C ±4°) and a relative humid- established, and the procedures of sec- ity of 30 ±10 percent and allowed to dry tion 4.1 and 4.1.4 Standard J1383 APR85, by natural convection only. At the end and Figure 15–1 or Figure 15–2. A reaim of the 48-hour period, the reflector tolerance of ±1⁄4 degree is permitted in shall be cleaned according to the in- any direction at any test point. structions supplied with the headlamp (b) Integral Beam Headlamp Systems. manufacturer’s replacement lens, and The assembly used for simultaneously inspected. The lens and seal shall then aiming more than one integral beam be attached according to these instruc- headlamp shall be placed on a test fix- tions and the headlamp tested for pho- ture on a goniometer located not less tometric performance. than 60 feet (18.3 m.) from the photom- S9. Deflection test for replaceable light eter. The assembly shall be aimed by sources. With the light source rigidly centering the geometric center of the mounted in a fixture in a manner indi- lower beam lens(es) on the photometer cated in Figure 8, a force 4.0 ±0.1 axis and by aligning the photometer pounds (17.8 ±0.4N) is applied at a dis- axis to be perpendicular to the aiming tance ‘‘A’’ from the reference plane per- reference plane or appropriate vertical pendicular to the longitudinal axis of plane defined by the manufacturer of the glass capsule and parallel to the any lower beam contributor. Photo- smallest dimension of the pressed glass metric compliance of the lower beam capsule seal. The force shall be applied shall be determined with all lower (using a rod with a hard rubber tip with beam contributors illuminated and in a minimum spherical radius of .039 in (1 accordance with sections 4.1 and 4.1.6 of mm)) radially to the surface of the SAE Standard J1383 APR85, and Figure glass capsule in four locations in a 15–1 or Figure 15–2. The assembly shall plane parallel to the reference plane then be moved in a plane parallel to and spaced at a distance ‘‘A’’ from that the established aiming plane of the plane. These force applications shall be lower beam until the assembly is lo- spaced 90 degrees apart starting at the cated with the geometric center of the point perpendicular to the smallest di- upper lens(es) on the photometer axis. mension of the pressed seal of the glass Photometric compliance for upper capsule. The bulb deflection shall be beam shall now be determined using measured at the glass capsule surface the figure and procedure specified for at 180 degrees opposite to the force ap- the lower beam. During photometric plication. Distance ‘‘A’’ for a replace- testing, a 1⁄4 degree reaim is permitted able light source other than an HB in any direction at any test point.

272

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00272 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

S11. Photometric Test. A lamp that is nent of the device, other than compo- wired in accordance with paragraph nents of the headlamp assembly. S5.5.11 of this standard, shall be tested S12.5 Except for cases of malfunc- for compliance with S5.5.11(a)(1) in ac- tion covered by S12.2, each headlamp cordance with the test method speci- concealment device shall, within an fied for photometric testing in SAE ambient temperature range of ¥20 °F. Standard J575 DEC88 when a test volt- to +120 °F., be capable of being fully age of 12.8V ±20 mV is applied to the opened in not more than 3 seconds input terminals of the lamp switch after the actuation of a driver-operated module or voltage-reducing equipment, control. whichever is closer to the electrical S12.6 As an alternative to complying source on the vehicle. The test distance with the requirements of S12.1 through from the lamp to the photometer shall S12.5, a vehicle with headlamps incor- be not less than 18.3 m, if the lamp is porating VHAD or visual/optical aim- optically combined with a headlamp, ing in accordance with paragraph S7 or is a separate lamp, and not less than may meet the requirements for Con- 3 m, if the lamp is optically combined cealable lamps in paragraph 5.14 of the with a lamp, other than a headlamp, following version of the Economic that is required by this standard. Commission for Europe Regulation 48 S12. Headlamp Concealment Devices. ‘‘Uniform Provisions Concerning the Approval of Vehicles With Regard to S12.1 While the headlamp is illumi- the Installation of Lighting and Light- nated, its fully opened headlamp con- Signalling Devices : E/ECE/324–E/ECE/ cealment device shall remain fully ’’ TRANS/505, Rev.1/Add.47/Rev.1/Corr.2, opened should any loss of power to or 26 February 1996 (page 17), in the within the headlamp concealment de- English language version. A copy of vice occur. paragraph 5.14 may be reviewed at the S12.2 Whenever any malfunction oc- DOT Docket Management Facility, curs in a component that controls or U.S. Department of Transportation, conducts power for the actuation of the Room PL–01, 400 Seventh Street, SW., concealment device, each closed Washington, D.C. 20590–0001. Copies of headlamp concealment device shall be E/ECE/324–E/ECE/TRANS/505, Rev.1/ capable of being fully opened by a Add.47/Rev.1/Corr.2, 26 February 1996 means not requiring the use of any may be obtained from the ECE internet tools. Thereafter, the headlamp con- site: cealment device must remain fully www.unece.org/trans/main/wp29/ opened until intentionally closed. wp29regs.html or by writing to: S12.3 Except for malfunctions cov- ered by S12.2, each headlamp conceal- United Nations, Conference Services ment device shall be capable of being Division, Distribution and Sales Sec- fully opened and the headlamps illumi- tion, Office C.115–1, Palais des Nations, nated by actuation of a single switch, CH–1211, Geneva 10, Switzerland. lever, or similar mechanism, including S12.7 Manufacturers of vehicles with a mechanism that is automatically ac- headlamps incorporating VHAD or vis- tuated by a change in ambient light ual/optical aiming shall elect to certify conditions. to S12.1 through S12.5 or to S12.6 prior to, or at the time of certification of the S12.4 Each headlamp concealment vehicle, pursuant to 49 CFR part 567. device shall be installed so that the The selection is irrevocable. headlamp may be mounted, aimed, and adjusted without removing any compo- FIGURES AND TABLES TO § 571.108

FIGURE 1A—REQUIRED PERCENTAGES OF MINIMUM CANDLEPOWER OF FIGURE 1B

Turn Test points (deg) signal Stop Parking Tail

10U, 10D ...... 5L, 5R ...... 20 20 20 20 5U, 5D ...... 20L, 20R ...... 12.5 12.5 10 15 10L, 10R ...... 37.5 37.5 20 40 V ...... 87.5 87.5 70 90 H ...... 10L, 10R ...... 50 50 35 40

273

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00273 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

FIGURE 1A—REQUIRED PERCENTAGES OF MINIMUM CANDLEPOWER OF FIGURE 1B—Continued

Turn Test points (deg) signal Stop Parking Tail

5L, 5R ...... 100 100 90 100 V ...... 100 100 100 100 Note—Minimum design candlepower requirements are determined by multiplying the percentages given in this Figure by the minimum allowable candlepower values in Figure 1b. The resulting values shall be truncated after one digit to the right of the decimal point.

FIGURE 1B—MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CANDLEPOWER VALUES

Lighted sections Lamp 1 2 3

Stop ...... 80/300 95/360 110 /420 Tail 1 ...... 2 /18 3.5/20 5.0 /25 Parking 2 ...... 4.0 /125 Red turn signal ...... 80 /300 95/360 110/420 Yellow turn signal rear ...... 130 /750 150/900 175/1050 Yellow turn signal front ...... 200/– 240– 275/– Yellow turn signal front 3 ...... 500/– 600/– 685 /– 1 Maximum at H or above. 2 The maximum candlepower value of 125 applies to all test points at H or above. The maximum allowable candlepower value below H is 250. 3 Values apply when the optical axis (filament center) of the front turn signal is at a spacing less than 4 in. (10 cm.) from the lighted edge of the headlamp unit providing the lower beam, or from the lighted edge of any additional lamp installed as original equipment and which supplements the lower beam.

FIGURE 1C—SUM OF THE PERCENTAGES OF GROUPED MINIMUM CANDLEPOWER

Turn Group and test points signal Stop Parking Tail

1 10U–5L, 5U–20L, 5D–20L, 10D–5L ...... 65 65 60 70 2 5U–10L, H–10L, 5D–10L ...... 125 125 75 120 3 H–5L, 5U–V, H–V, 5D–V, H–5R ...... 475 475 420 480 4 5U–10R, H–10R, 5D–10R ...... 125 125 75 120 5 10U–5R, 5U–20R, 5D–20R, 10D–5R ...... 65 65 60 70

FIGURE 2—MINIMUM LUMINOUS INTENSITY FIGURE 2—MINIMUM LUMINOUS INTENSITY RE- REQUIREMENTS FOR BACKUP LAMPS QUIREMENTS FOR BACKUP LAMPS—Continued

Total for Total for group, group, Group Test point, degrees candela Group Test point, degrees candela (see note (see note 1) 1)

1 1 45L–5U, 45L–H, 45L–5D ...... 45 6 1 45R–5U, 45R–H, 45R–5D ...... 45 2 1 30L–H, 30L–5D...... 50 1 When 2 lamps of the same or symmetrically opposite de- 3 10L–10U, 10L–5U, V–10U, V–5U, sign are used, the reading along the vertical axis and the 10R–10U, 10R–5U ...... 100 averages of the readings for the same angles left and right of 4 10L–H, 10L–5D, V–H, V–5D, 10R–H, vertical for 1 lamp shall be used to determine compliance with the requirements. If 2 lamps of differing designs are used, 10R–5D ...... 360 they shall be tested individually and the values added to de- 5 1 30R–H, 30R–5D...... 50 termine that the combined units meet twice the candela re- quirements. When only 1 backup lamp is used on the vehicle, it shall be tested to twice the candela requirements.

274

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00274 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

275

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00275 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.010 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

276

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00276 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.011 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

277

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00277 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.012 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

278

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00278 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.013 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

279

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00279 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.014 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

280

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00280 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.015 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

281

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00281 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.016 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

282

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00282 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.017 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

FIGURE 10—PHOTOMETRIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CENTER HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMPS

Minimum Minimum total for Individual test points intensity Zones (test points within zones, see note 2) zone (candela) (canadela)

10U–10L ...... 8 Zone I (5U–V, H–5L, H–V, H–5R, 5D–V) ...... 125 –V ...... 16 –10R ...... 8 5U–10L ...... 16 Zone II (5U–5R, 5U–10R, H–10R, 5D–10R, 5D–5R) ...... 98 –5L ...... 25 –V ...... 25 –5R ...... 25

283

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00283 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.018 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

FIGURE 10—PHOTOMETRIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CENTER HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMPS—Continued

Minimum Minimum total for Individual test points intensity Zones (test points within zones, see note 2) zone (candela) (canadela)

–10R ...... 16 5D–10L ...... 16 Zone III (5U–5L, 5U–10L, H–10L, 5D–10L, 5D–5L) ...... 98 –5L ...... 25 –V ...... 25 –5R ...... 25 –10R ...... 16 H–10L ...... 16 Zone IV (10U–10L, 10U–V, 10U–10R) ...... 32 –5L ...... 25 –V ...... 25 –5R ...... 25 –10R ...... 16 See Note 1 ...... 1 160

Note 1: The listed maximum shall not occur over any area larger than that generated by a 1⁄4 degree radius within an solid cone angle within the rectangle bounded by test points 10U–10L, 10U–10R, 5D–10L, and 5D–10R. Note 2: The measured values at each test point shall not be less than 60% of the value listed. 1 Maximum intensity (Candela).

284

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00284 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.019 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

285

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00285 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.020 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

286

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00286 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.021 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

287

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00287 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.022 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

288

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00288 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER10MR97.024 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

289

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00289 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER10MR97.025 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

290

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00290 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.024 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

291

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00291 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER10MR97.026 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

292

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00292 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER10MR97.027 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

293

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00293 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.025 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

294

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00294 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER11AU04.554 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

295

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00295 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER11AU04.555 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

296

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00296 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.026 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

297

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00297 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.027 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

298

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00298 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.028 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

299

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00299 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER10MR97.028 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

300

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00300 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER10MR97.029 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

301

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00301 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER10MR97.030 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

302

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00302 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER10MR97.031 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

303

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00303 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER10MR97.032 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

FIGURE 29—MINIMUM PHOTOMETRIC PERFORMANCE OF RETROFLECTIVE SHEETING IN CANDELA/LUX/ SQUARE METER

Observation angle Entrance angle 0.2 Degree 0.5 Degree Grade White Red White Red

¥4 degree ...... 250 60 65 15 DOT–C2 30 degree ...... 250 60 65 15 DOT–C2 45 degree ...... 60 15 15 4 DOT–C2 ¥4 degree ...... 165 40 43 10 DOT–C3 30 degree ...... 165 40 43 10 DOT–C3 45 degree ...... 40 10 10 3 DOT–C3 ¥4 degree ...... 125 30 33 8 DOT–C4 30 degree ...... 125 30 33 8 DOT–C4 45 degree ...... 30 8 8 2 DOT–C4

304

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00304 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

305

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00305 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.031 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

306

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00306 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.032 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

307

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00307 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.033 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

308

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00308 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.034 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

309

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00309 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER08AP97.019 § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

FIGURE 32—MOTORCYCLE AND MOTOR-DRIVEN CYCLE HEADLAMP PHOTOMETRIC REQUIREMENTS

Test Points (deg.) Motor-Driven Motorcycle Motor-Driven Cycle (can- Cycle with Single (candela) dela) Lamp System Up or Down Left or Right (candela)

Lower Beam

1.5U ...... 1R to R ...... 1400-MAX ...... 1400-MAX 1.5U ...... 1R to 3R ...... 1400-MAX. 1U ...... 1.5L to L ...... 700-MAX ...... 700-MAX ...... 700-MAX. 0.5U ...... 1.5L to L ...... 1000-MAX ...... 1000-MAX ...... 1000-MAX. 0.5U ...... 1R to 3R ...... 2700-MAX ...... 2700-MAX ...... 2700-MAX. 1.5D ...... 9L and 9R ...... 700-MIN 2D ...... 0.0R ...... 7000-MIN ...... 5000-MIN ...... 4000-MIN. 2D ...... 3L and 3R ...... 4000-MIN ...... 3000-MIN ...... 3000-MIN. 2D ...... 6L and 6R ...... 1500-MIN ...... 1500-MIN ...... 1500-MIN. 2D ...... 12L and 12R ...... 700-MIN 3D ...... 6L and 6R ...... 800-MIN ...... 800-MIN 4D ...... 0.0R ...... 2000-MIN ...... 2000-MIN ...... 1000-MIN. 4D ...... 4R ...... 12500-MAX ...... 12500-MAX ...... 12500-MAX.

Upper Beam

2U ...... 0.0R ...... 1000-MIN 1U ...... 3L and 3R ...... 2000-MIN ...... 2000-MIN. 0.0U ...... 0.0R ...... 12500-MIN ...... 10000-MIN. 0.5D ...... 0.0R ...... 20000-MIN ...... 20000-MIN. 0.5D ...... 3L and 3R ...... 10000-MIN ...... 5000-MIN. 0.5D ...... 6L and 6R ...... 3300-MIN ...... 2000-MIN. 0.5D ...... 9L and 9R ...... 1500-MIN 0.5D ...... 12L and 12R ...... 800-MIN 1D ...... 0.0R ...... 17500-MIN ...... 15000-MIN. 2D ...... 0.0R ...... 5000-MIN ...... 5000-MIN. 3D ...... 0.0R ...... 2500-MIN ...... 2500-MIN. 3D ...... 6L and 6R ...... 800-MIN. 3D ...... 9L and 9R ...... 1500-MIN 3D ...... 12L and 12R ...... 300-MIN 4D ...... 0.0R ...... 1500-MIN 4D ...... 0.0R ...... 7500-MAX ...... 7500-MAX. ANYWHERE ...... ANYWHERE ...... 75000-MAX ...... 75000-MAX.

TABLE I—REQUIRED MOTOR VEHICLE LIGHTING EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN HEADLAMPS Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles, Trucks, Trailers, and Buses, of 80 or More Inches Overall Width

Applicable SAE standard or Multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks, recommended practice (See Item and buses Trailers S5 for subreferenced SAE materials)

Taillamps ...... 2 red ...... 2 red ...... J585e, September 1977. Stoplamps ...... 2 red ...... 2 red ...... SAE J1398, May 1985. License plate lamp ...... 1 white ...... 1 white ...... J587 October 1981. Reflex reflectors ...... 4 red; 2 amber ...... 4 red; 2 amber ...... J594f, January 1977. Side marker lamps ...... 2 red; 2 amber ...... 2 red; 2 amber ...... J592e, July 1972. Backup lamp ...... 1 white ...... None ...... J593c, February 1968. Turn signal lamps ...... 2 red or amber; 2 amber ...... 2 red or amber ...... SAE J1395, April 1985. Turn signal operating unit 1 ...... None ...... J589, April 1964. Turn signal flasher ...... 1 ...... None ...... J590b, October 1965. Vehicular hazard warning 1 ...... None ...... J910, January 1966. signal operating unit. Vehicular hazard warning 1 ...... None ...... J945, February 1966. signal flasher.. Identification lamps ...... 3 amber; 3 red ...... 3 red ...... J592e, July 1972. Clearance lamps ...... 2 amber; 2 red ...... 2 amber, 2 red ...... J592e, July 1972. Intermediate side marker 2 amber ...... 2 amber ...... J592e, July 1972. lamps. Intermediate side reflex 2 amber ...... 2 amber ...... J594f, January 1977. reflectors. Conspicuity ...... See S5.7 ...... See S5.7 ...... See S5.7

310

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00310 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

TABLE II—LOCATION OF REQUIRED EQUIPMENT Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles, Trucks, Trailers, and Buses, of 80 or More Inches Overall Width

Location on— Height above road surface measured Item from center of item Multipurpose passenger vehicles, Trailers on vehicle at curb trucks, and buses weight

Headlamps ...... On the front, each headlamp providing Not required ...... Not less than 22 the upper beam, at the same height, inches (55.9 cm) 1 on each side of the vertical center- nor more than 54 line, each headlamp providing the inches (137.2 lower beam, at the same height, 1 on cm). each side of the vertical centerline, as far apart as practicable. See also S7. Taillamps ...... On the rear, 1 on each side of the On the rear, 1 on each side of the Not less than 15 vertical centerline, at the same vertical centerline, at the same inches, nor more height, and as far apart as practicable. height, and as far apart as practicable. than 72 inches. Stop lamps ...... do ...... do ...... Do. License plate lamp .. At rear license plate, to illuminate the At rear license plate, to illuminate the No requirement. plate from the top or sides. plate from the top or sides. Backup lamp ...... On the rear ...... Not required ...... Do. Turn signal lamps .... At or near the front—1 amber on each On the rear—1 red or amber on each Not less than 15 side of the vertical centerline, at the side of the vertical centerline, at the inches, nor more same height, and as far apart as same height, and as far apart as than 83 inches. practicable. practicable. On the rear—1 red or amber on each side of the vertical centerline, at the same height, and as far apart as practicable. Identification lamps .. On the front and rear—3 lamps, amber On the rear—3 lamps as close as prac- No requirement. in front, red in rear, as close as prac- ticable to the top of the vehicle at the ticable to the top of the vehicle, at the same height, as close as practicable same height, as close as practicable to the vertical centerline, with lamp to the vertical centerline, with lamp centers spaced not less than 6 inches centers spaced not less than 6 inches or more than 12 inches apart. or more than 12 inches apart. Alter- natively, the front lamps may be lo- cated as close as practicable to the top of the cab. Clearance lamps ..... On the front and rear—2 amber lamps On the front and rear—2 amber lamps Do. on front, 2 red lamps on rear, to indi- on front, 2 red lamps on rear, to indi- cate the overall width of the vehicle, cate the overall width of the vehicle, one on each side of the vertical cen- one on each side of the vertical cen- terline, at the same height, and as terline, at the same height, and as near the top as practicable . near the top thereof as prac- ticable 2, 3 4. Intermediate side On each side—1 amber lamp located at On each side—1 amber lamp located at Not less than 15 marker lamps. or near the midpoint between the or near the midpoint between the inches. front and rear side marker lamps. front and rear side marker lamps. Intermediate side re- On each side—1 amber located at or On each side—1 amber located at or Not less than 15 flex reflectors. near the midpoint between the front near the midpoint between the front inches nor more and rear side reflex reflectors. and rear side reflex reflectors. than 60 inches. Conspicuity ...... See S5.7 ...... See S5.7 ...... See S5.7 Reflex reflectors ...... On the rear—1 red on each side of the On the rear—1 red on each side of the Do. vertical centerline, as far apart as vertical centerline, as far apart as practicable, and at the same height . practicable, and at the same height. On each side—1 red as far to the rear On each side—1 red as far to the rear as practicable, and 1 amber as far to as practicable, and 1 amber as far to the front as practicable. the front as practicable. Side marker lamps ...... do ...... do ...... Not less than 15 inches, and on the rear of trailers not more than 60 inches.

311

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00311 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.108 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

TABLE III—REQUIRED MOTOR VEHICLE LIGHTING EQUIPMENT [All Passenger Cars and Motorcycles, and Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles, Trucks, Buses and Trailers of Less Than 80 (2032) Inches (mm) Overall Width]

Applicable SAE stand- Passenger cars, multipurpose ard or recommended Item passenger vehicles, trucks, and Trailers Motorcycles practice (See S5 for buses subreferenced SAE materials)

Headlamps ...... See S7 ...... None ...... See S7.9 ...... J566 January 1960. Taillamps ...... 2 red ...... 2 red ...... 1 red ...... J585e, September 1977. Stoplamps ...... 2 red ...... 2 red ...... 1 red ...... SAE J586, February 1984. High-mounted 1 red ...... Not required ...... Not required ...... J186a, September stoplamp. 1977. License plate 1 white ...... 1 white ...... 1 white ...... J587, October 1981. lamp. Parking lamps ...... 2 amber or white ...... None ...... None ...... J222, December 1970. Reflex reflectors .. 4 red; 2 amber ...... 4 red; 2 amber ...... 3 red; 2 amber ...... J594f, January 1977. Intermediate side 2 amber ...... 2 amber ...... None ...... J594f, January 1977. reflex reflectors. Intermediate side 2 amber ...... 2 amber ...... None ...... J592e, July 1972. marker lamps. Side marker 2 red; 2 amber ...... 2 red; 2 amber ...... None ...... J592e, July 1972. lamps. Backup lamp ...... 1 white ...... None ...... None ...... J593c, February 1968. Turn signal lamps 2 red or amber; 2 amber ...... 2 red or amber ...... 2 amber; 2 red or SAE J588, November amber. 1984. Turn signal oper- 1 ...... None ...... 1 ...... J589, April 1964. ating unit.3, 4. Turn signal flasher 1 ...... None ...... 1 ...... J590b, October 1965. Vehicular hazard 1 ...... None ...... None ...... J910, January 1966. warning signal operating unit. Vehicular hazard 1 ...... None ...... None ...... J945, February 1966. warning signal flasher.

TABLE IV—LOCATION OF REQUIRED EQUIPMENT [All Passenger Cars and Motorcycles, and Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles, Trucks, Trailers, and Buses of Less than 80 (2032) Inches (MM) Overall Width]

Location on— Height above road surface measured Item Passenger cars, multipurpose from center of item passenger vehicles, trucks, trail- Motorcycles on vehicle at curb ers, and buses weight

Headlamps ...... On the front, each headlamp pro- See S7.9 ...... Not less than 22 viding the lower beam, at the inches (55.9 cm) same height, 1 on each side of nor more than 54 the vertical centerline, each inches (137.2 cm). headlamp providing the upper beam, at the same height, 1 on each side of the vertical center- line, as far apart as practicable. See also S7. Taillamps ...... On the rear—1 on each side of On the rear—on the vertical centerline ex- Not less than 15 the vertical centerline, at the cept that if two are used, they shall be inches, nor more same height, and as far apart symmetrically disposed about the than 72 inches. as practicable . vertical centerline. Stoplamps ...... On the rear—1 on each side of On the rear—on the vertical centerline ex- Not less than 15 the vertical centerline, at the cept that if two are used, they shall be inches, nor more same height, and as far apart symmetrically disposed about the than 72 inches. as practicable. vertical centerline. High-mounted On the rear, on the vertical cen- Not required ...... See S5.3.1.8 for pas- stoplamp. terline [See S5.1.1.27, S5.3.1.8, senger cars. Not and Table III], effective Sep- less than 34 inches tember 1, 1985, for passenger for multipurpose cars only. passenger vehi- cles, trucks, and buses.

312

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00312 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.108

TABLE IV—LOCATION OF REQUIRED EQUIPMENT—Continued [All Passenger Cars and Motorcycles, and Multipurpose Passenger Vehicles, Trucks, Trailers, and Buses of Less than 80 (2032) Inches (MM) Overall Width]

Location on— Height above road surface measured Item Passenger cars, multipurpose from center of item passenger vehicles, trucks, trail- Motorcycles on vehicle at curb ers, and buses weight

License plate lamp .... At rear license plate, to illuminate At rear license plate ...... No requirement. the plate from the top or sides. Parking lamps ...... On the front—1 on each side of Not required ...... Not less than 15 the vertical centerline, at the inches, nor more same height, and as far apart than 72 inches. as practicable. Reflex reflectors ...... On the rear—1 red on each side On the rear—1 red on the vertical center- Not less than 15 of the vertical centerline, at the line except that, if two are used on the inches, nor more same height, and as far apart rear, they shall be symmetrically dis- than 60 inches. as practicable . posed about the vertical centerline. On each side—1 red as far to the On each side—1 red as far to the rear as rear as practicable, and 1 practicable, and 1 amber as far to the amber as far to the front as front as practicable. practicable . Backup lamp ...... On the rear ...... Not required ...... No requirement. Turn signal lamps ..... At or near the front—1 amber on At or near the front—1 amber on each side Not less than 15 each side of the vertical center- of the vertical centerline at the same inches, nor more line, at the same height, and as height, and having a minimum horizontal than 83 inches. far apart as practicable. separation distance (centerline of lamps) On the rear—1 red or amber on of 16 inches. Minimum edge to edge each side of the vertical center- separation distance between lamp and line, at the same height, and as headlamp is 4 inches. far apart as practicable. At or near the rear—1 red or amber on each side of the vertical centerline, at the same height and having a minimum horizontal separation distance (centerline to centerline of lamps) of 9 inches. Min- imum edge to edge separation distance between lamp and tail or stop lamp is 4– inches, when a single stop and taillamp is installed on the vertical centerline and the turn signal lamps are red.. Side marker lamps .... On each side—1 red as far to the Not required ...... Not less than 15 rear as practicable, and 1 inches. amber as far to the front as practicable. Intermediate side On each side—1 amber located at Not required ...... Not less than 15 marker lamps. or near the midpoint between inches. the front and rear side marker lamps. Intermediate side On each side—1 amber located at Not required ...... Not less than 15 marker reflectors. or near the midpoint between inches, nor more the front and rear side marker than 60 inches. reflectors.

NOTE: (1) The term overall width refers to the nominal design dimension of the widest part of the vehicle, exclusive of signal lamps, marker lamps, outside rearview mirrors, flexible fender extensions, and mud flaps, determine with doors and windows closed, and the wheels in the straight-ahead position. This supersedes the interpretation of the term ‘‘overall width’’ appearing in the FEDERAL REGISTER of March 1, 1967 (32 FR 3390). (2) Paragraph S3.1 and Tables I and III of § 571.108 as amended (32 FR 18033, Dec. 16, 1967), specify that certain lamp as- semblies shall conform to applicable SAE Standards. Each of these basically referenced standards subreferences both SAE Standard J575 (tests for motor vehicle lighting devices and components) which in turn references SAE Standard J573 on bulbs, and SAE Standard J567 on bulb sockets. (3) Paragraph C of SAE Standard J575 states in part: ‘‘Where special bulbs are specified, they should be submitted with the devices and the same or similar bulbs used in the tests and operated at their rated mean spherical candlepower.’’ The Adminis- trator has determined that this provision of SAE Standard J575 permits the use of special bulbs, including tubular-type bulbs, which do not conform to the detailed requirements of Table I of SAE Standard J573. It follows that the sockets for special bulbs need not conform to the detailed requirements of SAE Standard J567. These provisions for special bulbs in no way except the lamp assemblies from meeting all performance requirements specified in Federal Standard No. 108, including those specified in the basically referenced SAE Standards, and in the subreferenced SAE Standard J575.

[41 FR 35522, Aug. 23, 1976]

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting § 571.108, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

313

VerDate Aug<04>2004 02:28 Nov 09, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00313 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.109 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

§ 571.109 Standard No. 109; New pneu- Load rating means the maximum load matic tires. a tire is rated to carry for a given in- S1. Scope. This standard specifies tire flation pressure. dimensions and laboratory test re- Maximum permissible inflation pressure quirements for bead unseating resist- means the maximum cold inflation ance, strength, endurance, and high pressure to which a tire may be in- speed performance; defines tire load flated. ratings; and specifies labeling require- Maximum load rating means the load ments for passenger car tires. rating at the maximum permissible in- flation pressure for that tire. S2. Application. This standard applies to new pneumatic tires for use on pas- Open splice means any parting at any senger cars manufactured after 1948. junction of tread, sidewall, or However, it does not apply to any tire innerliner that extends to cord mate- that has been altered so as render im- rial. possible its use, or its repair for use, as Overall width means the linear dis- motor vehicle equipment. tance between the exteriors of the side- walls of an inflated tire, including ele- S3. Definitions. vations due to labeling, decorations, or Bead means that part of the tire protective bands or ribs. made of steel wires, wrapped or rein- Ply means a layer of rubber-coated forced by ply cords, that is shaped to parallel cords. fit the rim. Ply separation means a parting of rub- means a breakdown Bead separation ber compound between adjacent plies. of bond between components in the Pneumatic tire means a mechanical bead area. device made of rubber, chemicals, fab- Bias ply tire means a pneumatic tire ric and steel or other materials, which, in which the ply cords that extend to when mounted on an automotive the beads are laid at alternate angles wheel, provides the traction and con- ° substantially less than 90 to the cen- tains the gas or fluid that sustains the terline of the tread. load. Carcass means the tire structure, ex- Radial ply tire means a pneumatic cept tread and sidewall rubber. tire in which the ply cords which ex- Chunking means the breaking away tend to the beads are laid at substan- of pieces of the tread or sidewall. tially 90° to the centerline of the tread. Cord means the strands forming the Rim means a metal support for a tire plies in the tire. or a tire and tube assembly upon which Cord separation means cords parting the tire beads are seated. away from adjacent rubber compounds. Section width means the linear dis- Cracking means any parting within tance between the exteriors of the side- the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the walls of an inflated tire, excluding ele- tire extending to cord material. vations due to labeling, decoration, or CT means a pneumatic tire with an protective bands. inverted flange tire and rim system in Sidewall means that portion of a tire which the rim is designed with rim between the tread and the bead. flanges pointed radially inward and the Sidewall separation means the parting tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rubber compound from the cord of the rim in a manner that encloses material in the sidewall. the rim flanges inside the air cavity of Test rim means, with reference to a the tire. tire to be tested, any rim that is listed Groove means the space between two as appropriate for use with that tire in adjacent tread ribs. accordance with S4.4. For purposes of Innerliner means the layer(s) forming this section and § 571.110, each rim list- the inside surface of a tubeless tire ing shall include dimensional specifica- that contains the inflating medium tions and a diagram of the rim. within the tire. Tread means that portion of a tire Innerliner separation means the part- that comes into contact with the road. ing of the innerliner from cord mate- Tread rib means a tread section run- rial in the carcass. ning circumferentially around a tire.

314

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00314 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.109

Tread separation means pulling away (a) One tire for physical dimensions, of the tread from the tire carcass. resistance to bead unseating, and S4. Requirements. strength, in sequence; S4.1 Size and construction. Each tire (b) Another tire for tire endurance; shall be designed to fit each rim speci- and fied for its size designation in each ref- (c) A third tire for high speed per- erence cited in the definition of test rim formance. in S3. S4.2.2.2 Physical dimensions. The ac- S4.2 Performance requirements. tual section width and overall width S4.2.1 General. Each tire shall con- for each tire measured in accordance form to each of the following: with S5.1, shall not exceed the section width specified in a submission made (a) It shall meet the requirements by an individual manufacturer, pursu- specified in S4.2.2 for its tire size des- ant to S4.4.1(a) or in one of the publica- ignation, type, and maximum permis- tions described in S4.4.1(b) for its size sible inflation pressure. designation and type by more than: (b) Its maximum permissible infla- (a) (For tires with a maximum per- tion pressure shall be either 32, 36, 40, missible inflation pressure of 32, 36, or or 60 psi, or 240, 280, 300, 340, or 350 kPa. 40 psi) 7 percent, or For a CT tire, the maximum permis- (b) (For tires with a maximum per- sible inflation pressure shall be either missible inflation pressure of 240, 280, 290, 330, 350, or 390 kPa. 290, 300, 330, 350 or 390 kPa, or 60 psi) 7 (c) Its load rating shall be that speci- percent or 10 mm (0.4 inches), which- fied in a submission made by an indi- ever is larger. vidual manufacturer, pursuant to S4.2.2.3 Tubeless tire resistance to S4.4.1(a), or in one of the publications bead unseating. described in S4.4.1(b) for its size des- S4.2.2.3.1 When a tubeless tire that ignation, type and each appropriate in- has a maximum inflation pressure flation pressure. If the maximum load other than 420 kPa (60 psi) is tested in rating for a particular tire size is accordance with S5.2, the applied force shown in more than one of the publica- required to unseat the tire bead at the tions described in S4.4.1(b), each tire of point of contact shall be not less than: that size designation shall have a max- (a) 6,670 N (1,500 pounds) for tires imum load rating that is not less than with a designated section width of less the published maximum load rating, or than 160 mm (6 inches); if there are differing maximum load (b) 8,890 N (2,000 pounds) for tires ratings for the same tire size designa- with a designated section width of 160 tion, not less than the lowest published mm (6 inches) or more but less than 205 maximum load rating. mm (8 inches); (d) It shall incorporate a tread wear (c) 11,120 N (2,500 pounds) for tires indicator that will provide a visual in- with a designated section width of 205 dication that the tire has worn to a mm (8 inches) or more, using the sec- tread depth of 1.6 mm (1⁄16 inch). tion width specified in a submission (e) It shall, before being subjected to made by an individual manufacturer, either the endurance test procedure pursuant to S4.4.1(a), or in one of the specified in S5.4 or the high speed per- publications described in S4.4.1(b) for formance procedure specified in S5.5, the applicable tire size designation and exhibit no visual evidence of tread, type. sidewall, ply, cord, innerliner, or bead S4.2.2.3.2 When a tire that has a separation, chunking, broken cords, maximum inflation pressure of 420 kPa cracking, or open splices. (60 psi) is tested in accordance with (f) It shall meet the requirements of S5.2, the applied force required to un- S4.2.2.5 and S4.2.2.6 when tested on a seat the bead at the point of contact test wheel described in S5.4.2.1 either shall be not less than: alone or simultaneously with up to 5 (a) 6,670 N (1,500 pounds) for tires other tires. with a maximum load rating of less S4.2.2 Test requirements. than 399 kg (880 pounds); S4.2.2.1 Test sample. For each test (b) 8,890 N (2,000 pounds) for tires sample use: with a maximum load rating of 399 kg

315

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00315 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.109 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(880 pounds) or more but less than 635 structed by the flange or any rim des- kg (1,400 pounds); ignated for use with that tire in Stand- (c) 11,120 N (2,500 pounds) for tires ards Nos. 109 and 110 (Sec. 571.109 and with a maximum load rating of 635 kg Sec. 571.110 of this part). (1,400 pounds) or more, using the max- (a) One size designation, except that imum load rating marked on the side- equivalent inch and metric size des- wall of the tire. ignations may be used; S4.2.2.4 Tire strength. Each tire shall (b) Maximum permissible inflation meet the requirements for minimum pressure; breaking energy specified in Table 1 (c) Maximum load rating; when tested in accordance with S5.3. (d) The generic name of each cord S4.2.2.5 Tire endurance. When the material used in the plies (both side- tire has been subjected to the labora- wall and tread area) of the tire; tory endurance test specified in S5.4, (e) Actual number of plies in the side- using a test rim that undergoes no per- wall, and the actual number of plies in manent deformation and allows no loss the tread area if different; of air through the portion that it com- (f) The words ‘‘tubeless’’ or ‘‘tube type’’ prises of the tire-rim pressure chamber: as applicable; and (a) There shall be no visual evidence (g) The word ‘‘radial’’ if the tire is a of tread, sidewall, ply, cord, innerliner, radial ply tire. or bead separation, chunking, broken S4.3.1 Each tire shall be labeled cords, cracking, or open splices. with the symbol DOT in the manner (b) The tire pressure at the end of the specified in part 574 of this chapter, test shall be not less than the initial which shall constitute a certification pressures specified in S5.4.1.1. that the tire conforms to applicable S4.2.2.6 High speed performance. Federal motor vehicle safety stand- When the tire has been subjected to the ards. laboratory high speed performance test S4.3.2 Each tire shall be labeled specified in S5.5, using a test rim that with the name of the manufacturer, or undergoes no permanent deformation brand name and number assigned to and allows no loss of air through the the manufacturer in the manner speci- portion that it comprises of the tire- fied in part 574. rim pressure chamber, the tire shall S4.3.3 [Reserved] meet the requirements set forth in S4.3.4 If the maximum inflation S4.2.2.5 (a) and (b). pressure of a tire is 240, 280, 290, 300, S4.3 Labeling Requirements. Except as 330, 340, 350, or 390 kPa, then: provided in S4.3.1 and S4.3.2 of this (a) Each marking of that inflation standard, each tire, except for those pressure pursuant to S4.3(b) shall be certified to comply with S5.5 of followed in parenthesis by the equiva- § 571.139, shall have permanently mold- lent inflation pressure in psi, rounded ed into or onto both sidewalls, in let- to the next higher whole number; and ters and numerals not less than 0.078 (b) Each marking of the tire’s max- inches high, the information shown in imum load rating pursuant to S4.3(c) in paragraphs S4.3 (a) through (g) of this kilograms shall be followed in paren- standard. On at least one sidewall, the thesis by the equivalent load rating in information shall be positioned in an pounds, rounded to the nearest whole area between the maximum section number. width and bead of the tire, unless the S4.3.5 If the maximum inflation maximum section width of the tire pressure of a tire is 420 kPa (60 psi), the falls between the bead and one-fourth tire shall have permanently molded of the distance from the bead to the into or onto both sidewalls, in letters shoulder of the tire. For tires where and numerals not less than 12.7 mm (1⁄2 the maximum section width falls in inch), the words ‘‘Inflate to 420 kPa (60 that area, locate all required labeling psi)’’. On both sidewalls, the words shall between the bead and a point one-half be positioned in an area between the the distance from the bead to the tire shoulder and the bead of the tire. shoulder of the tire. However, in no However, in no case shall the words be case shall the information be posi- positioned on the tire so that they are tioned on the tire so that it is ob- obstructed by the flange of any rim

316

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00316 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.109

designated for use with that tire in this submission made by an individual man- standard or in Standard No. 110 ufacturer, pursuant to S4.4.1(a), or in (§ 571.110 of this part). one of the publications described in S4.4 Tire and rim matching informa- S4.4.1(b) for that tire size designation tion. and inflate it to the applicable pressure S4.4.1 Each manufacturer of tires specified in Table II. not certified to comply with S4 of (b) Condition it at ambient room § 571.139 shall ensure that a listing of temperature for at least 24 hours. the rims that may be used with each (c) Readjust pressure to that speci- tire that he produces is provided to the fied in (a). public. A listing compiled in accord- (d) Caliper the section width and ance with paragraph (a) of S4.4.1 of this overall width at six points approxi- standard need not include dimensional mately equally spaced around the tire specifications or diagram of a rim if circumference. the rim’s dimensional specifications (e) Record the average of these meas- and diagram are contained in each list- urements as the section width and ing published in accordance with para- overall width, respectively. graph (b) of S4.4.1 of this standard. The (f) Determine tire outer diameter by listing shall be in one of the following measuring the maximum circum- forms: ference of the tire and dividing this di- (a) Listed by manufacturer name or mension by pi (3.14). brand name in a document furnished to S5.2 Tubeless tire bead unseating re- dealers of the manufacturer’s tires, to sistance. any person upon request, and in dupli- S5.2.1 Preparation of tire-wheel assem- cate to the Docket Section, National bly. Highway Traffic Safety Administra- S5.2.1.1 Wash the tire, dry it at the tion, 400 Seventh Street SW., Wash- beads, and mount it without lubrica- ington, DC 20590; or tion or adhesives on a clean, painted (b) Contained in publications, current test rim. at the date of manufacture of the tire or any later date, of at least one of the S5.2.1.2 Inflate it to the applicable following organizations: pressure specified in Table II at ambi- ent room temperature. The Tire and Rim Association S5.2.1.3 Mount the wheel and tire in The European Tyre and Rim Technical a fixture shown in Figure 1, and force Organisation the bead unseating block shown in Fig- Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers’ Asso- ciation, Inc. ure 2 or Figure 2A against the tire side- Deutsche Industrie Norm wall as required by the geometry of the British Standards Institution fixture. However, in testing a tire that Scandinavian Tire and Rim Organization has an inflation pressure of 60 psi, only The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia use the bead unseating block described S4.4.2 Information contained in any in Figure 2A. publication specified in S4.4.1(b) of this S5.2.2 Test procedure. standard which lists general categories S5.2.2.1 Apply a load through the of tires and rims by size designation, block to the tire’s outer sidewall at the type of construction and/or intended distance specified in Figure 1 for the use, shall be considered to be manufac- applicable wheel size at a rate of 50 mm turer’s information pursuant to S4.4.1 (2 inches) per minute, with the load of this standard for the listed tires and arm substantially parallel to the tire rims, unless the publication itself or and rim assembly at the time of en- specific information provided accord- gagement. ing to S4.4.1(a) of this standard indi- S5.2.2.2 Increase the load until the cates otherwise. bead unseats or the applicable value S5. Test procedures. specified in S4.2.2.3 is reached. S5.1 Physical Dimensions. Determine S5.2.2.3 Repeat the test at least four tire physical dimensions under uniform places equally spaced around the tire ambient conditions as follows: circumference. (a) Mount the tire on a test rim hav- S5.3 Tire strength. ing the test rim width specified in a S5.3.1 Preparation of tire.

317

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00317 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.109 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S5.3.1.1 Mount the tire on a test rim S5.4.2.1 Mount the tire and wheel as- and inflate it to the applicable pressure sembly on a test axle and press it specified in Table II. against a flat-faced steel test wheel S5.3.1.2 Condition it at room tem- 1708 mm (67.23 inches) in diameter and perature for at least 3 hours; and at least as wide as the section width of S5.3.1.3 Readjust its pressure to that the tire to be tested or an approved specified in S5.3.1.1. equivalent test wheel, with the applica- S5.3.2 Test procedure. ble test load specified in the table in S5.3.2.1 Force a 19 mm (3⁄4 inch) di- S5.4.2.3 for the tire’s size designation, ameter cylindrical steel plunger with a type and maximum permissible infla- hemispherical end perpendicularly into tion pressure. the tread rib as near to the centerline S5.4.2.2 During the test, the air sur- as possible, avoiding penetration into rounding the test area shall be 38° ±3 °C the tread groove, at the rate of 50 mm (100° ±5 °F). (2 inches) per minute. S5.4.2.3 Conduct the test at 80 kilo- S5.3.2.2 Record the force and pene- meters per hour (km/h)(50 miles per tration at five test points equally hour) in accordance with the following spaced around the circumference of the schedule without pressure adjustment tire. If the tire fails to break before the or other interruptions: plunger is stopped by reaching the rim, The loads for the following periods record the force and penetration as the are the specified percentage of the rim is reached and use these values in maximum load rating marked on the S5.3.2.3. tire sidewall: S5.3.2.3 Compute the breaking en- Percent ergy for each test point by means of one of the two following formulas: 4 hours ...... 85 6 hours ...... 90 W=[(F×P)/2]×10×3 (joules) 24 hours ...... 100

Where S5.5.2 Break in the tire by running W=Energy, in joules; it for 2 hours at 80 km/h (50 mph). F=Force, Newtons; and S5.5.3 Allow to cool to 38° ±3 °C (100° P=Penetration, mm; or ±5 °F) and readjust the inflation pres- sure to the applicable pressure speci- W=[(F×P)/2] fied in Table II. Where S5.5.4 Without readjusting inflation pressure, test at 121 km/h (75 mph) for W=Energy, inch-pounds; 30 minutes, 129 km/h (80 mph) for 30 F=Force, pounds; and minutes, and 137 km/h (85 mph) for 30 P=Penetration, inches. minutes. S5.3.2.4 Determine the breaking en- S5.5.5 Immediately after running ergy value for the tire by computing the tire the required time, measure its the average of the five values obtained inflation pressure. Allow the tire to in accordance with S5.3.2.3. cool for one hour. Then deflate the tire, S5.4 Tire endurance. remove it from the test rim, and in- S5.4.1 Preparation of tire. spect it for the conditions specified in S5.4.1.1 Mount a new tire on a test S4.2.2.5(a). rim and inflate it to the applicable S6. Nonconforming tires. No tire that pressure specified in Table II. is designed for use on passenger cars S5.4.1.2 Condition the tire assembly and manufactured on or after October to 38° ±3 °C (100° ±5 °F) for at least three 1, 1972, but does not conform to all the hours. requirements of this standard, shall be S5.4.1.3 Readjust tire pressure to sold, offered for sale, introduced or de- that specified in S5.4.1.1 immediately livered for introduction into interstate before testing. commerce, or imported into the United S5.4.2 Test procedure. States, for any purpose.

318

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00318 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.109

FIGURES FOR STANDARD 109

Dimension ‘‘A’’ for tires with maximum inflation pressure Wheel sizes Other than Other than 60 psi 420 kPa 60 psi 420 kPa

19 ...... 13.00 in ...... 330 12.00 in ...... 305 18 ...... 12.50 in ...... 318 11.40 in ...... 290 17 ...... 12.00 in ...... 305 10.60 in ...... 269 16 ...... 11.50 in ...... 292 9.90 in ...... 251 15 ...... 11.00 in ...... 279 9.40 in ...... 239 14 ...... 10.50 in ...... 267 8.90 in ...... 226 13 ...... 10.00 in ...... 254 8.40 in ...... 213 12 ...... 9.50 in ...... 241 ...... 11 ...... 9.00 in ...... 229 ...... 10 ...... 8.50 in ...... 216 ...... 320 ...... 8.50 in ...... 216 ...... 340 ...... 9.00 in ...... 229 ...... 345 ...... 9.25 in ...... 235 ...... 365 ...... 9.75 in ...... 248 ...... 370 ...... 10.00 in ...... 254 ...... 390 ...... 11.00 in ...... 279 ...... 415 ...... 11.50 in ...... 292 ...... 4001 ...... 10.25 in ...... 260 ...... 4251 ...... 10.75 in ...... 273 ...... 4501 ...... 11.25 in ...... 286 ...... 4751 ...... 11.75 in ...... 298 ...... 5001 ...... 12.25 in ...... 311

1 For CT Tires only.

319

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00319 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.013 § 571.109 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

320

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00320 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.014 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.109

APPENDIX A—FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE requesting the addition of new tire sizes to SAFETY STANDARD NO. 109 the tables or the addition of tables for new tire constructions may, when the additions The following tables list tire sizes and tire requested are compatible with existent constructions with proper load and inflation groupings, or when adequate justification for values. The tables group tires of related con- new tables exists, submit five (5) copies of in- structions and load/inflation values. Persons formation and data supporting the request to

321

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00321 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.015 § 571.109 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

the Vehicle Dynamics Division, Office of 4. A statement as to whether the tire size Crash Avoidance Standards, National High- designation and load inflation schedule has way Traffic Safety Administration, 400 Sev- been coordinated with the Tire and Rim As- enth Street SW., Washington, DC 20590. sociation, the European Tyre and Rim Tech- The information should contain the fol- nical Organisation, the Japan Automobile lowing: Tire Manufacturers’ Association, Inc., the 1. The tire size designation, and a state- Deutsche Industrie Norm, the British Stand- ment either that the tire is an addition to a ards Institution, the Scandinavian Tire and category of tires listed in the tables or that Rim Organization, and the Tyre and Rim As- it is in a new category for which a table has sociation of Australia. not been deloped. 5. Copies of test data sheets showing test 2. The tire dimensions, including aspect conditions, results and conclusions obtained ratio, size factor, section width, overall for individual tests specified in § 571.109. width, and test rim size. 6. Justification for the additional tire 3. The load-inflation schedule of the tire. sizes.

TABLE I–A—FOR BIAS PLY TIRES WITH DESIGNATED SECTION WIDTH OF 152 MM (6 INCHES) AND ABOVE

Cord material 32 psi 36 psi 40 psi 240 kPa 280 kPa 300 kPa 340 kPa

Rayon: (in-lbs) ...... 1,650 2,574 3,300 1,650 3,300 1,650 3,300 (joules) ...... 186 291 373 186 373 186 373 Nylon or polyester: (in-lbs) ...... 2,600 3,900 5,200 2,600 5,200 2,600 5,200 (joules) ...... 294 441 588 294 588 294 588

TABLE I–B—FOR BIAS PLY TIRES WITH DESIGNATED SECTION WIDTH BELOW 152 MM (6 INCHES)

Cord material 32 psi 36 psi 40 psi 240 kPa 280 kPa 300 kPa 340 kPA

Rayon: (in-lbs) ...... 1,000 1,875 2,500 1,000 2,500 1,000 2,500 (joules) ...... 113 212 282 113 282 113 282 Nylon or polyester: (in-lbs) ...... 1,950 2,925 3,900 1,950 3,900 1,950 3,900 (joules) ...... 220 330 441 220 441 220 441

TABLE I–C—FOR RADIAL PLY TIRES

Maximum permissible inflation Tires other than CT tires CT tires Size designation psi kPa kPa 32 36 40 240 280 300 340 350 290 330 350 390

Below 160 mm: (in-lbs) ...... 1,950 2,925 3,900 1,950 3,900 1,950 3,900 1,950 1,950 3,900 1,950 3,900 (joules) ...... 220 330 441 220 441 220 441 220 220 441 220 441 160 mm or above: (in-lbs) ...... 2,600 3,900 5,200 2,600 5,200 2,600 5,200 2,600 2,600 5,200 2,600 5,200 (joules) ...... 294 441 588 294 588 294 588 294 294 588 294 588

TABLE I–D—FOR TIRES WITH 420 KPA (60 PSI) MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE INFLATION PRESSURE AND MAXIMUM LOAD RATING 399 KG (880 LB) AND ABOVE

Cord material Inch-pounds joules (J)

Rayon ...... 1,650 inch pounds 186 joules (J). Nylon or Polyester ...... 2,600 inch pounds 294 joules (J).

TABLE I–E—FOR TIRES WITH 420 KPA (60 PSI) MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE INFLATION PRESSURE AND MAXIMUM LOAD RATING BELOW 399 KG (880 LB)

Cord material Inch-pounds joules (J)

Rayon ...... 1,000 inch pounds 113 joules (J).

322

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00322 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.110

TABLE I–E—FOR TIRES WITH 420 KPA (60 PSI) MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE INFLATION PRESSURE AND MAXIMUM LOAD RATING BELOW 399 KG (880 LB)—Continued

Cord material Inch-pounds joules (J)

Nylon or Polyester ...... 1,950 inch pounds 220 joules (J).

TABLE II—TEST INFLATION PRESSURES [Maximum permissible inflation pressure to be used for the following test]

Tires other than CT tires CT tires Test type psi kPa kPa 32 36 40 60 240 280 300 340 350 290 300 350 390

Physical dimensions, bead un- seating, tire strength, and tire endurance ...... 24 28 32 52 180 220 180 220 180 230 270 230 270 High speed performance...... 30 34 38 58 220 260 220 260 220 270 310 270 310

[38 FR 30235, Nov. 1, 1973]

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting § 571.109, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

EFFECTIVE DATE NOTES: 1. At 67 FR 69623, pneumatic bias ply tires, and ST, FI, and 8– Nov. 18, 2002, § 571.109 was amended by revis- 12 rim diameter and below tires for use on ing S2, effective Sept. 1, 2003. At 68 FR 33655, passenger cars manufactured after 1948. How- June 5, 2003, the effective date was delayed ever, it does not apply to any tire that has until Sept. 1, 2004. At 69 FR 31306, June 3, been so altered so as to render impossible its 2004, the effective date was further delayed use, or its repair for use, as motor vehicle until Sept. 1, 2005. For the convenience of the equipment. user the revised text is set forth as follows:

§ 571.109 Standard No. 109; New pneumatic * * * * * tires. § 571.110 Standard No. 110; Tire selec- * * * * * tion and rims. S2. Application. This standard applies to S1. Purpose and scope. This standard new pneumatic tires for use on passenger specifies requirements for tire selec- cars manufactured after 1948. However, it tion to prevent tire overloading. does not apply to any tire that has been al- S2. Application. This standard applies tered so as to render impossible its use, or its repair for use, as motor vehicle equip- to passenger cars and to non-pneu- ment. In addition, S4.3 does not apply to matic assemblies for use on tires certified to comply with S5.5 of § 571.139 passenger cars. and S4.4. does not apply to tires certified to S3. Definitions. comply with S4 of § 571.139. Accessory weight means the combined weight (in excess of those standard * * * * * items which may be replaced) of auto- 2. At 68 FR 38147, June 26, 2003, § 571.109 was matic transmission, power steering, amended by revising the heading and S2, ef- power brakes, power windows, power fective June 1, 2007. For the convenience of seats, radio, and heater, to the extent the user, the revised and added text is set that these items are available as fac- forth as follows: tory-installed equipment (whether in- § 571.109 Standard No. 109—New Pneumatic stalled or not). Bias Ply and Certain Specialty Tires. Curb weight means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment * * * * * including the maximum capacity of S2. Application. This standard applies to fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so new pneumatic radial tires for use on pas- equipped, air conditioning and addi- senger cars manufactured before 1975, new tional weight optional engine.

323

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00323 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.110 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Maximum loaded vehicle weight means may be equipped with a non-pneumatic the sum of— spare tire assembly that complies with (a) Curb weight; § 571.129, New Non-Pneumatic Tires for (b) Accessory weight; Passenger Cars and S6 and S8 of this (c) Vehicle capacity weight; and standard. (d) Production options weight. (b) Passenger cars and non-pneu- Non-pneumatic rim is used as defined matic spare tires assemblies for use on in § 571.129. passenger cars shall comply with S4 Non-pneumatic spare tire assembly through S8 of this standard. means a non-pneumatic tire assembly (c) Motor vehicles with a gross vehi- intended for temporary use in place of cle weight rating (GVWR) or 10,000 one of the pneumatic tires and rims pounds or less, except for passenger that are fitted to a passenger car in cars, and the non-pneumatic spare tire compliance with the requirements of assemblies for use on those vehicles this standard. shall comply with S4.3, S4.3.1, S4.3.2, Non-pneumatic tire and non-pneumatic S4.3.3, S4.3.4, and S7.2(a) of this stand- tire assembly are used as defined in ard. § 571.129. S4.2 Tire load limits. Normal occupant weight means 68 kilo- S4.2.1 The vehicle maximum load on grams times the number of occupants the tire shall not be greater than the specified in the second column of Table applicable maximum load rating as I. marked on the sidewall of the tire. Occupant distribution means distribu- S4.2.2 The vehicle normal load on tion of occupants in a vehicle as speci- the tire shall not be greater than the fied in the third column of Table I. test load used in the high speed per- Production options weight means the formance test specified in S5.5 of combined weight of those installed reg- § 571.109 for that tire. ular production options weighing over S4.3 Placard. A placard, perma- 2.3 kilograms in excess of those stand- nently affixed to the glove compart- ard items which they replace, not pre- ment door or an equally accessible lo- viously considered in curb weight or cation, shall display the— accessory weight, including heavy duty (a) Vehicle capacity weight; brakes, ride levelers, , heavy duty battery, and special trim. (b) Designated seating capacity (ex- Rim is used as defined in § 571.109. pressed in terms of total number of oc- Vehicle capacity weight means the cupants and in terms of occupants for rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 each seat location); kilograms times the vehicle’s des- (c) Vehicle manufacturer’s rec- ignated seating capacity. ommended cold tire inflation pressure Vehicle maximum load on the tire for maximum loaded vehicle weight means that load on an individual tire and, subject to the limitations of that is determined by distributing to S4.3.1, for any other manufacturer- each axle its share of the maximum specified vehicle loading condition; loaded vehicle weight and dividing by (d) Vehicle manufacturer’s rec- two. ommended tire size designation; and Vehicle normal load on the tire means (e) For a vehicle equipped with a non- that load on an individual tire that is pneumatic spare tire assembly, the determined by distributing to each axle non-penumatic tire identification code its share of the curb weight, accessory with which that assembly is labeled weight, and normal occupant weight pursuant to the requirements of S4.3(a) (distributed in accordance with Table of § 571.129, New Non-Pneumatic Tires for I) and dividing by 2. Passenger Cars. Wheel center member is used as defined S4.3.1 No inflation pressure other in § 571.129. than the maximum permissible infla- S4. Requirements. tion pressure may be specified unless— S4.1 General. (a) Passenger cars shall (a) It is less than the maximum per- be equipped with tires that meet the missible inflation pressure; requirements of § 571.109, New Pneu- (b) The vehicle loading condition for matic Tires, except that passenger cars that pressure is specified; and

324

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00324 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.110

(c) The tire load rating specified in a material that is resistant to fade, heat, submission by an individual moisture and abrasion, and attached in manfacturer, pursuant to S4.4.1(a) of such a manner that it cannot be re- Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109, moved without destroying or defacing or contained in one of the publications the label on the non-pneumatic tire or described in S4.4.1(b) of Motor Vehicle tire assembly. The information speci- Safety Standard No. 109 for the tire fied in paragraphs S6 (a) and (b) shall size at that inflation pressure is not appear on both sides of the non-pneu- less than the vehicle load on the tire matic tire or tire assembly, except, in for that vehicle loading condition. the case of a non-pneumatic tire as- S4.4 Rims. sembly which has a particular side that S4.4.1 Requirements. Each rim shall: must always face outward when (a) Be constructed to the dimensions mounted on a vehicle, in which case of a rim that is listed pursuant to the the information specified in paragraphs definition of test rim in paragraph S3. of S6 (a) and (b) shall only be required on § 571.109 (Standard No. 109) for use with the outward facing side. The informa- the tire size designation with which tion shall be positioned on the tire or the vehicle is equipped. tire assembly such that it is not placed (b) In the event of rapid loss of infla- on the tread or the outermost edge of tion pressure with the vehicle traveling the tire and is not obstructed by any in a straight line at a speed of 97 kilo- portion of any non-pneumatic rim or meters per hour, retain the deflated wheel center member designated for tire until the vehicle can be stopped use with that tire in this standard or in with a controlled braking application. Standard No. 129. (a) FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY; TABLE I—OCCUPANT LOADING AND DISTRIBU- and TION FOR VEHICLE NORMAL LOAD FOR VAR- (b) MAXIMUM 80 KM/H (50 M.P.H.). IOUS DESIGNATED SEATING CAPACITIES S7. Requirements for Passenger Cars Equipped with Non-Pneumatic Spare Tire Vehicle Assemblies Designated seat- normal load, Occupant distribution in a S7.1 Vehicle Placarding Requirements. ing capacity, num- number normally loaded vehicle ber of occupants of occu- A placard, permanently affixed to the pants inside of the vehicle trunk or an equal- 2 through 4 2 2 in front. ly accessible location adjacent to the 5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat. non-pneumatic spare tire assembly, shall display the information set forth S5. Load Limits for Non-Pneumatic in S6 in block capitals and numerals Spare Tires. The highest vehicle max- not less than 6 millimeters high pre- imum load on the tire for the vehicle ceded by the words ‘‘IMPORTANT— shall not be greater than the load rat- USE OF SPARE TIRE’’ in letters not ing for the non-pneumatic spare tire. less than 9 millimeters high. S6 Labeling Requirements for Non- S7.2 Supplementary Information. The Pneumatic Spare Tires or Tire Assemblies. owner’s manual of the passenger car Each non-pneumatic tire or, in the case shall contain, in writing in the English of a non-pneumatic tire assembly in language and in not less than 10 point which the non-pneumatic tire is an in- type, the following information under tegral part of the assembly, each non- the heading ‘‘IMPORTANT—USE OF pneumatic tire assembly shall include, SPARE TIRE’’: in letters or numerals not less than 4 (a) A statement indicating the infor- millimeters high, the information spec- mation related to appropriate use for ified in paragraphs S6 (a) and (b). The the non-pneumatic spare tire including information shall be permanently at a minimum the information set molded, stamped, or otherwise perma- forth in S6 (a) and (b) and either the in- nently marked into or onto the non- formation set forth in S4.3(e) or a pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire statement that the information set assembly, or shall appear on a label forth in S4.3(e) is located on the vehicle that is permanently attached to the placard and on the non-pneumatic tire; tire or tire assembly. If a label is used, (b) An instruction to drive carefully it shall be subsurface printed, made of when the non-pneumatic spare tire is

325

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00325 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.110, Nt. 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

in use, and to install the proper pneu- S4.3 Placard. Each vehicle, except for an matic tire and rim at the first reason- incomplete vehicle, shall show the informa- able opportunity; and tion specified in S4.3 (a) through (g) on a (c) A statement that operation of the placard permanently affixed to the driver’s side B-. If the vehicle lacks a B-pillar passenger car is not recommended with on the driver’s side, the placard shall be per- more than one non-pneumatic spare manently affixed to the edge of the driver’s tire in use at the same time. side door. If the vehicle lacks a driver’s side S8. Non-Pneumatic Rims and Wheel B-pillar and either has a driver’s side door Center Members whose edge is too narrow to permit the S8.1 Non-Pneumatic Rim Require- affixing of the placard or lacks a driver’s side ments. Each non-pneumatic rim that is door, the placard shall be affixed to the in- part of a separable non-pneumatic ward facing surface of the vehicle next to the spare tire assembly shall be con- driver’s seating position. This information shall be in the English language and conform structed to the dimensions of a non- in color and format, not including the border pneumatic rim that is listed pursuant surrounding the entire placard, as specified to S4.4 of § 571.129 for use with the non- in the example set forth in Figure 1 in this pneumatic tire, designated by its non- standard. At the manufacturer’s option, the pneumatic tire identification code, information specified in S4.3 (c) and (d) may with which the vehicle is equipped. be shown, alternatively, on a tire inflation S8.2 Wheel Center Member Require- pressure label, and conform in color and for- ments. Each wheel center member that mat, not including the border surrounding is part of a separable non-pneumatic the entire label, as specified in the example set forth in Figure 2 in this standard. The spare tire assembly shall be con- label shall be permanently affixed and proxi- structed to the dimensions of a wheel mate to the placard required by this para- center member that is listed pursuant graph. The information specified in S4.3 (e) to S4.4 of § 571.129 for use with the non- shall be shown on both the vehicle placard pneumatic tire, designated by its non- and on the tire inflation pressure label (if pneumatic tire identification code, such a label is affixed to provide the infor- with which the vehicle is equipped. mation specified in S4.3 (c) and (d)) in the format and color scheme set forth in Figures [36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 37 1 and 2. FR 23727, Nov. 8, 1972; 40 FR 5530, Feb. 6, 1975; (a) Vehicle capacity weight expressed as 47 FR 36183, Aug. 19, 1982; 49 FR 38612, Oct. 1, ‘‘The combined weight of occupants and 1984; 55 FR 29589, July 20, 1990; 56 FR 19311, cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or Apr. 26, 1991; 60 FR 13643, Mar. 14, 1995; 68 FR XXX pounds’’; 37982, June 26, 2003] (b) Designated seated capacity (expressed in terms of total number of occupants and EFFECTIVE DATE NOTES: 1. At 67 FR 69623, Nov. 18, 2002, § 571.110 was amended by revis- number of occupants for each seat location); ing the heading and S2, S4.3, S4.3.1, and (c) Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended S7.2(a), by adding S4.3.2, S4.3.3, and S4.3.4, cold tire inflation pressure, subject to the and by adding Figure 1 and Figure 2 at the limitations of 4.3.4; end of § 571.110, effective Sept. 1, 2003. At 68 (d) Tire size designation, indicated by the FR 33655, June 5, 2003, the effective date was headings ‘‘original tire size’’ or ‘‘original size,’’ delayed until Sept. 1, 2004. At 69 FR 31306, for the tire installed as original equipment June 3, 2004, the effective date was further on the vehicle by the vehicle manufacturer; delayed until Sept. 1, 2005. For the conven- (e) On the vehicle placard, ‘‘Tire and Load- ience of the user, the added and revised text ing Information’’ and, on the tire inflation is set forth as follows: pressure label, ‘‘Tire Information’’; (f) ‘‘See Owner’s Manual for Additional In- § 571.110 Standard No. 110; Tire selection formation’’; and and rims for motor vehicles with a GVWR (g) For a vehicle equipped with a non-pneu- of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less. matic assembly, the tire identification code with which that assembly is labeled pursu- * * * * * ant to the requirements of S4.3(a) of 571.129, New Non-Pneumatic Tires for Passenger S2 Application. This standard applies to Cars. motor vehicles with a gross vehicle weight S4.3.1 Requirements for vehicles manufac- rating (GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or less, ex- tured in two or more stages. A placard or cept for motorcycles, and to non-pneumatic placard and label shall be affixed to the com- spare tire assemblies for use on those vehi- pleted vehicle by the final-stage manufac- cles. turer in accordance with S4.3 and with the vehicle capacity weight and seating designa- * * * * * tions as finally manufactured.

326

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00326 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.110, Nt.

S4.3.2 Requirements for altered vehicles. A GAWR: Front—1,299 kilograms (2,864 new placard or placard and label shall be af- pounds) with P265/70R16 tires, 16 × 8.0 rims at fixed, so as to obscure the original placard, 240 kPa (36 psi) cold single. to an altered vehicle that has previously GAWR: Rear—1,142 kilograms (2,864 been certified in accordance with § 567.4 or pounds) with P265/70R16 tires, 16 × 8.00 rims, § 567.5, other than by the addition, substi- at 245 kPa (36 psi) cold single. tution, or removal of readily attachable S4.3.4 No inflation pressure other than components such as mirrors or tire and rim the maximum permissible inflation pressure assemblies, or minor finishing operations may be shown on the placard and, if any, tire such as painting, or who alters the vehicle in inflation pressure label unless— such a manner that its stated weight ratings (a) It is less than the maximum permis- are not longer valid, before the first pur- sible inflation pressure; chase of the vehicle in good faith for pur- (b) It is appropriate for the load limits as poses other than resale, containing accurate calculated in accordance with S4.2; and information for the altered vehicle, in ac- (c) The tire load rating specified in a sub- cordance with S4.3. mission by an individual manufacturer, pur- S4.3.3 Additional labeling information for suant to S4.1.1(a) of § 571.139 or contained in vehicles other than passenger cars. Each vehi- one of the publications described in S4.1.1.(b) of § 571.139, for the tire size at that inflation cle shall show the size designation and, if ap- pressure is not less than the vehicle max- plicable, the type designation of rims (not imum load and the vehicle normal load. necessarily those on the vehicle) appropriate for the tire appropriate for use on that vehi- cle, including the tire installed as original * * * * * equipment on the vehicle by the vehicle S7.2 * * * manufacturer, after each GAWR listed on (a) A statement indicating the information the certification label required by § 567.4 or related to appropriate use for the non-pneu- § 567.5 of this chapter. This information shall matic spare tire including at a minimum the be in the English language, lettered in block information set forth in S6 (a) and (b) and ei- capitals and numerals not less than 2.4 milli- ther the information set forth in S4.3(g) or a meters high and in the following format: statement that the information set forth in S4.3(g) is located on the vehicle placard and Truck Example—Suitable Tire-Rim Choice on the non-pneumatic tire; GVWR: 2,441 kilograms (5381 pounds). * * * * *

327

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00327 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.110, Nt. 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

328

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00328 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER18NO02.002 ER18NO02.003 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.110, Nt.

2. At 68 FR 38147, June 26, 2003, § 571.110 was bly shall meet the requirements of S4.3(e), amended by revising S2, S4.1, S4.2.1, S4.2.2, and S5, and S7 of this standard. S4.4.1(a), and table 1 following S4.4.1(b), by adding S4.2.1.1, S4.2.1.2, S4.2.2.1, S4.2.2.2, S4.2.2.3, and S4.4.2 and by adding to S3 in al- * * * * * phabetical order, definitions for ‘‘Rim diame- S4.2.1 Tire load limits for passenger cars. ter,’’ ‘‘Rim size designation,’’ ‘‘Rim type des- S4.2.1.1 The vehicle maximum load on the ignation,’’ ‘‘Rim width,’’ and ‘‘Weather side,’’, tire shall not be greater than the applicable effective June 1, 2007. For the convenience of maximum load rating as marked on the side- the user, the revised and added text is set wall of the tire. forth as follows: S4.2.1.2 The vehicle normal load on the tire shall not be greater than 94 percent of § 571.110 Standard No. 110; Tire selection and rims for motor vehicles with a GVWR the load rating at the vehicle manufacturer’s of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less. recommended cold inflation pressure for that tire. S4.2.2 Tire load limits for multipurpose pas- * * * * * senger vehicles, trucks, buses, and trailers. S2. Application. This standard applies to S4.2.2.1 Except as provided in S4.2.2.2, the motor vehicles with a gross vehicle weight sum of the maximum load ratings of the rating (GVWR or 4,536 kilograms (10,000 tires fitted to an axle shall not be less than pounds) or less, except for motorcycles, and the GAWR of the axle system as specified on to non-pneumatic spare tire assemblies for the vehicle’s certification label required by those vehicles. 49 CFR part 567. If the certification label shows more than one GAWR for the axle sys- S3. Definitions tem, the sum shall be not less than the GAWR corresponding to the size designation * * * * * of the tires fitted to the axle. S4.2.2.2 When passenger car (P-metric) Rim diameter means nominal diameter of tires are installed on an MPV, truck, bus, or the bead seat. trailer, each tire’s load rating is reduced by Rim size designation means rim diameter dividing it by 1.10 before determining, under and width. S4.2.2.1, the sum of the maximum load rat- Rim type designation means the industry of ings of the tires fitted to an axle. manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code. S4.2.2.3 (a) For vehicles equipped with P- Rim width means nominal distance between metric tires, the vehicle normal load on the rim flanges. tire shall be no greater than the value of 94 percent of the derated load rating at the ve- hicle manufacturer’s recommended cold in- * * * * * flation pressure for that tire. Weather side means the surface area of the (b) For vehicles equipped with LT tires, the rim not covered by the inflated tire. vehicle normal load on the tire shall be no greater than 94 percent of the load rating at the vehicle manufacturer’s recommended * * * * * cold inflation pressure for that tire. S4.1. General. Vehicles shall be equipped with tires that meet the requirements of * * * * * § 571.139, New pneumatic tires for light vehi- cles, except that passenger cars may be S4.4.1 *** equipped with a non-pneumatic spare tire as- (a) Be constructed to the dimensions of a sembly that meets the requirements of rim that is listed by the manufacturer of the § 571.129, New non-pneumatic tires for pas- tires as suitable for use with those tires, in senger cars and S6 and S8 of this standard. accordance with S4 of § 571.139. Passenger cars equipped with such an assem- (b) * * *

TABLE I.—OCCUPANT LOADING AND DISTRIBUTION FOR VEHICLE NORMAL LOAD FOR VARIOUS DESIGNATED SEATING CAPACITIES

Designated seating capacity, number of Vehicle normal load, num- occupants ber of occupants Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 ...... 2 ...... 2 in front. 5 through 10 ...... 3 ...... 2 in front, 1 in second seat. 11 through 15 ...... 5 ...... 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat. 16 through 22 ...... 7 ...... 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat.

329

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00329 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.110, Nt. 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S4.4.2. Rim markings for vehicles other than ers and brand name owners utilizing that passenger cars. Each rim or, at the option of symbol and the name and address of the the manufacturer in the case of a single- trademark owner of that symbol, if any. The piece wheel, each wheel disc shall be marked notification shall describe in narrative form with the information listed in paragraphs (a) and in detail how the month, day, and year through (e) of this S4.4.2, in lettering not or the month and year are depicted by the less than 3 millimeters in height, impressed symbol. Such description shall include an ac- to a depth or, at the option of the manufac- tual size graphic depiction of the symbol, turer, embossed to a height of not less than showing and/or explaining the interrelation- 0.125 millimeters. The information listed in ship of the component parts of the symbol as paragraphs (a) through (c) of this S4.2.2 shall they will appear on the rim or single piece appear on the outward side. In the case of wheel disc, including dimensional specifica- rims of multi piece construction, the infor- tions, and where the symbol will be located mation listed in paragraphs (a) through (e) of on the rim or single piece wheel disc. The no- this S4.2.2 shall appear on the rim base and tification shall be received by NHTSA not the information listed in paragraphs (b) and less than 60 calendar days before the first use (d) of this S4.2.2 shall also appear on each of the symbol. The notification shall be other part of the rim. mailed to the Office of Vehicle Safety Com- (a) A designation that indicates the source pliance (NVS–222), National Highway Traffic of the rim’s published nominal dimensions, Safety Administration, 400 Seventh Street as follows: SW., Washington, DC 20590. All information (1) ‘‘T’’ indicates The Tire and Rim Associa- provided to NHTSA under this paragraph tion. will be placed in the public docket. (2) ‘‘E’’ indicates The European Tyre and (2) Each manufacturer of wheels shall pro- Rim Technical Organization. vide an explanation of its date of manufac- (3) ‘‘J’’ indicates Japan Automobile Tire ture symbol to any person upon request. Manufacturers’’ Association, Inc. (4) ‘‘L’’ indicates ABPA (Brazil), a.k.a. Associacao Latino Americana De Pneus E * * * * * Aros. 3. At 69 FR 31317, June 3, 2004, § 571.110 was (5) ‘‘F’’ indicates Tire and Rim Engineering amended by revising paragraph S4.3, adding Data Committee of South Africa (Tredco). paragraph S4.3.5, and revising Figures 1 and (6) ‘‘S’’ indicates Scandinavian Tire and 2 at the end of § 571.110, effective Sept. 1, 2005. Rim Organization (STRO). At 69 FR 51399, Aug. 19, 2004, the amendatory (7) ‘‘A’’ indicates The Tyre and Rim Asso- instruction to paragraph 2 was corrected to ciation of Australia. read ‘‘2. Section 571.110 is amended by revis- (8) ‘‘I’’ indicates Indian Tyre Technical Ad- ing paragraph S4.2.2, S4.3, S4.3.4(c), adding visory Committee (ITTAC). paragraph S4.3.5, and revising Figures 1 and (9) R indicates Argentine Institute of Ra- ‘‘ ’’ 2 at the end of § 571.110, to read as follows:’’. tionalization of Materials, a.k.a. Instituto For the convenience of the user, the cor- ´ Argentino de Racionalizacion de Materiales, rectly revised and added text is set forth fol- (ARAM). lows: (10) ‘‘N’’ indicates an independent listing pursuant to S4.1 of § 571.139 or S5.1(a) of § 571.110 Standard No. 110—Tire selection § 571.119. and rims for motor vehicles with a GVWR (b) The rim size designation, and in case of of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds) or less. multipiece rims, the rim type designation. For example: 20 x 5.50, or 20 x 5.5. * * * * * (c) The symbol DOT, constituting a certifi- cation by the manufacturer of the rim that S4.2.2 The vehicle normal load on the tire the rim complies with all applicable Federal shall not be greater than the test load used motor vehicle safety standards. in the high speed performance test specified (d) A designation that identifies the manu- in S5.5 of § 571.109, or S7.4 of § 571.119, as ap- facturer of the rim by name, trademark, or propriate, for that tire. symbol. (e) The month, day and year or the month * * * * * and year of manufacture, expressed either numerically or by use of a symbol, at the op- S4.3 Placard. Each vehicle, except for a tion of the manufacturer. For example: trailer or incomplete vehicle, shall show the ‘‘September 4, 2001’’ may be expressed numeri- information specified in S4.3 (a) through (g), cally as: ‘‘90401’’, ‘‘904, 01’’ or ‘‘01, 904’’; ‘‘Sep- and may show, at the manufacturer’s option, tember 2001’’ may be expressed as: ‘‘901’’, ‘‘9, the information specified in S4.3 (h) and (i), 01’’ or ‘‘01, 9’’. on a placard permanently affixed to the driv- (1) Any manufacturer that elects to ex- er’s side B-pillar. In each vehicle without a press the date of manufacture by means of a driver’s side B-pillar and with two doors on symbol shall notify NHTSA in writing of the the driver’s side of the vehicle opening in op- full names and addresses of all manufactur- posite directions, the placard shall be affixed

330

VerDate Aug<04>2004 02:28 Nov 09, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00330 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.110, Nt.

on the forward edge of the rear side door. If fication code with which that assembly is la- the above locations do not permit the beled pursuant to the requirements of S4.3(a) affixing of a placard that is legible, visible of 571.129, New Non-Pneumatic Tires for Pas- and prominent, the placard shall be perma- senger Cars; nently affixed to the rear edge of the driver’s (h) At the manufacturer’s option, a bar side door. If this location does not permit code or VIN located vertically on the right- the affixing of a placard that is legible, visi- hand edge of the placard and label; and ble and prominent, the placard shall be af- (i) As appropriate, the tire load identifica- fixed to the inward facing surface of the ve- tion ‘‘XL’’ or ‘‘reinforced.’’ hicle next to the driver’s seating position. This information shall be in the English lan- guage and conform in color and format, not * * * * * including the border surrounding the entire S4.3.4 (c) The tire load rating specified in a placard, as shown in the example set forth in submission by an individual manufacturer, Figure 1 in this standard. At the manufac- pursuant to S4.1.1(a) of § 571.139 or contained turer’s option, the information specified in in one of the publications described in S4.3 (c), (d), and, as appropriate, (h) and (i) S4.1.1(b) of § 571.139, for the tire size at that may be shown, alternatively to being shown inflation pressure is not less than the vehicle on the placard, on a tire inflation pressure maximum load and the vehicle normal load label which must conform in color and for- on the tire for those vehicle loading condi- mat, not including the border surrounding tions. the entire label, as shown in the example set forth in Figure 2 in this standard. The label shall be permanently affixed and proximate * * * * * to the placard required by this paragraph. S4.3.5 Requirements for trailers. Each trailer, The information specified in S4.3 (e) shall be except for an incomplete vehicle, must show shown on both the vehicle placard and on the the information specified in S4.3 (c) through tire inflation pressure label (if such a label is (g), and may show the information specified affixed to provide the information specified in S4.3 (h) and (i), on a placard permanently in S4.3 (c), (d), and, as appropriate, (h) and affixed proximate to the certification label (i)) may be shown in the format and color specified in 49 CFR part 567. Additionally, scheme set forth in Figures 1 and 2. each trailer must on its placard contain a (a) Vehicle capacity weight expressed as cargo capacity statement expressed as ‘‘The ‘‘The combined weight of occupants and weight of cargo should never exceed XXX cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or kilograms or XXX pounds’’ in the same loca- XXX pounds’’; tion on the placard specified for the ‘‘vehicle (b) Designated seated capacity (expressed capacity weight’’ statement required by this in terms of total number of occupants and standard. At the manufacturer’s option, the number of occupants for each front and rear information specified in S4.3 (c), (d), (h) and seat location); (i) may be shown, alternatively, on a tire in- (c) Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended flation pressure label, and conform in color cold tire inflation pressure for front, rear and format, not including the border sur- and spare tires, subject to the limitations of rounding the entire label, as specified in the S4.3.4; example set forth in Figure 2 in this stand- (d) Tire size designation, indicated by the ard. The label shall be permanently affixed headings ‘‘size’’ or ‘‘original tire size’’ or and proximate to the placard required by ‘‘original size,’’ and ‘‘spare tire’’ or ‘‘spare,’’ for this paragraph. The information specified in the tires installed at the time of the first S4.3 (e) shall be shown on both the vehicle purchase for purposes other than resale; placard and on the tire inflation pressure (e) On the vehicle placard, ‘‘Tire and Load- label (if such a label is affixed to provide the ing Information and, on the tire inflation information specified in S4.3 (c), (d), (h) and pressure label, ‘‘Tire Information’’; (i)) in the format and color scheme set forth (f) See Owner’s Manual for Additional In- ‘‘ in Figures 1 and 2. formation’’; (g) For a vehicle equipped with a non-pneu- matic spare tire assembly, the tire identi- * * * * *

331

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00331 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.110, Nt. 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

332

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00332 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER03JN04.004 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.111

§ 571.111 Standard No. 111; Rearview surface through which the angular mirrors. height and width of the image of an ob- S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- ject is equal to the angular height and quirements for the performance and lo- width of the object when viewed di- cation of rearview mirrors. rectly at the same distance except for S2. Purpose. The purpose of this flaws that do not exceed normal manu- standard is to reduce the number of facturing tolerances. For the purposes deaths and injuries that occur when of this regulation a prismatic day- the driver of a motor vehicle does not night adjustment rearview mirror one have a clear and reasonably unob- of whose positions provides unit mag- structed view to the rear. nification is considered a unit mag- S3. Application. This standard applies nification mirror. to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- S5. Requirements for passenger cars. senger vehicles, trucks, buses, S5.1 Inside rearview mirror. Each pas- schoolbuses and motorcycles. senger car shall have an inside rear- S4. Definitions. view mirror of unit magnification. Convex mirror means a mirror having S5.1.1 Field of view. Except as pro- a curved reflective surface whose shape vided in S5.3, the mirror shall provide a is the same as that of the exterior sur- field of view with an included hori- face of a section of a sphere. zontal angle measured from the pro- Effective mirror surface means the por- jected eye point of at least 20 degrees, tions of a mirror that reflect images, and a sufficient vertical angle to pro- excluding the mirror rim or mounting vide a view of a level road surface ex- brackets. tending to the horizon beginning at a Unit magnification mirror means a point not greater than 61 m to the rear plane or flat mirror with a reflective

333

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00333 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER03JN04.005 § 571.111 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

of the vehicle when the vehicle is occu- points or edges that could contribute pied by the driver and four passengers to pedestrian injury. or the designated occupant capacity, if S5.3 Outside rearview mirror pas- less, based on an average occupant senger’s side. Each passenger car whose weight of 68 kg. The line of sight may inside rearview mirror does not meet be partially obscured by seated occu- the field of view requirements of S5.1.1 pants or by head restraints. The loca- shall have an outside mirror of unit tion of the driver’s eye reference points magnification or a convex mirror in- shall be those established in Motor Ve- stalled on the passenger’s side. The hicle Safety Standard No. 104 (§ 571.104) mirror mounting shall provide a stable or a nominal location appropriate for support and be free of sharp points or any 95th percentile male driver. edges that could contribute to pedes- S5.1.2 Mounting. The mirror mount- trian injury. The mirror need not be ing shall provide a stable support for adjustable from the driver’s seat but the mirror, and shall provide for mirror shall be capable of adjustment by tilt- adjustment by tilting in both the hori- ing in both horizontal and vertical di- zontal and vertical directions. If the rections. mirror is in the head impact area, the S5.4 Convex mirror requirements. Each mounting shall deflect, collapse or motor vehicle using a convex mirror to break away without leaving sharp meet the requirements of S5.3 shall edges when the reflective surface of the comply with the following require- mirror is subjected to a force of 400 N ments: in any forward direction that is not S5.4.1 When each convex mirror is more than 45° from the forward longi- tested in accordance with the proce- tudinal direction. dures specified in S12. of this standard, S5.2 Outside rearview mirror—driver’s none of the radii of curvature readings side. shall deviate from the average radius S5.2.1 Field of view. Each passenger of curvature by more than plus or car shall have an outside mirror of unit minus 12.5 percent. magnification. The mirror shall pro- vide the driver a view of a level road S5.4.2 Each convex mirror shall surface extending to the horizon from a have permanently and indelibly line, perpendicular to a longitudinal marked at the lower edge of the mir- plane tangent to the driver’s side of the ror’s reflective surface, in letters not vehicle at the widest point, extending less than 4.8 mm nor more than 6.4 mm 2.4 m out from the tangent plane 10.7 m high the words ‘‘Objects in Mirror Are behind the driver’s eyes, with the seat Closer Than They Appear.’’ in the rearmost position. The line of S5.4.3 The average radius of cur- sight may be partially obscured by rear vature of each such mirror, as deter- body or fender contours. The location mined by using the procedure in S12., of the driver’s eye reference points shall be not less than 889 mm and not shall be those established in Motor Ve- more than 1,651 mm. hicle Safety Standard No. 104 (§ 571.104) S6. Requirements for multipurpose pas- or a nominal location appropriate for senger vehicles, trucks, and buses, other any 95th percentile male driver. than school buses, with GVWR of 4,536 kg S5.2.2 Mounting. The mirror mount- or less. ing shall provide a stable support for S6.1 Each multipurpose passenger the mirror, and neither the mirror nor vehicle, truck and bus, other than a the mounting shall protrude farther school bus, with a GVWR of 4,536 kg or than the widest part of the vehicle less shall have either— body except to the extent necessary to (a) Mirrors that conform to the re- produce a field of view meeting or ex- quirements of S5.; or ceeding the requirements of S5.2.1. The (b) Outside mirrors of unit mag- mirror shall not be obscured by the nification, each with not less than 126 unwiped portion of the windshield, and cm2 of reflective surface, installed with shall be adjustable by tilting in both stable supports on both sides of the ve- horizontal and vertical directions from hicle, located so as to provide the driv- the driver’s seated position. The mirror er a view to the rear along both sides of and mounting shall be free of sharp the vehicle, and adjustable in both the

334

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00334 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.111

horizontal and vertical directions to area of the ground which extends rear- view the rearward scene. ward from cylinder N to a point not S7. Requirements for multipurpose pas- less than 61 meters from the mirror senger vehicles and trucks with a GVWR surface. of more than 4,536 kg and less than 11,340 (2) For the mirror system on the left kg and buses, other than school buses, side of the bus, the entire top surface with a GVWR of more than 4,536 kg. of cylinder M in Figure 2, and that area S7.1 Each multipurpose passenger of the ground which extends rearward vehicle and truck with a GVWR of from cylinder M to a point not less more than 4,536 kg and less than 11,340 than 61 meters from the mirror surface. kg and each bus, other than a school S9.3(a) For each of the cylinders A bus, with a GVWR of more than 4,536 through P whose entire top surface is kg shall have outside mirrors of unit not directly visible from the driver’s magnification, each with not less than eye location, System B shall provide, 323 cm2 of reflective surface, installed at that location: with stable supports on both sides of (1) A view of the entire top surface of the vehicle. The mirrors shall be lo- that cylinder. cated so as to provide the driver a view (2) A view of the ground that overlaps to the rear along both sides of the vehi- with the view of the ground provided cle and shall be adjustable both in the by System A. horizontal and vertical directions to (b) Each mirror installed in compli- view the rearward scene. ance with S9.3(a) shall meet the fol- S8. Requirements for multipurpose pas- lowing requirements: senger vehicles and trucks with a GVWR (1) Each mirror shall have a projected of 11,340 kg or more. area of at least 258 cm2, as measured on S8.1 Each multipurpose passenger a plane at a right angle to the mirror’s vehicle and truck with a GVWR of axis. 11,340 kg or more shall have outside (2) Each mirror shall be located such mirrors of unit magnification, each that the distance from the center point with not less than 323 cm2 of reflective of the eye location of a 25th percentile surface, installed with stable supports adult female seated in the driver’s seat on both sides of the vehicle. The mir- to the center of the mirror shall be at rors shall be located so as to provide least 95 cm. the driver a view to the rear along both (3) Each mirror shall have no dis- sides of the vehicle and shall be adjust- continuities in the slope of the surface able both in the horizontal and vertical of the mirror. directions to view the rearward scene. (4) Each mirror shall be installed S9. Requirements for School Buses. with a stable support. When a school bus is tested in accord- (c) Each school bus which has a mir- ance with the procedures of S13, it ror installed in compliance with S9.3(a) shall meet the requirements of S9.1 that has an average radius of curvature through S9.4. of less than 889 mm, as determined S9.1 Outside Rearview Mirrors. Each under S12, shall have a label visible to school bus shall have two outside rear- the seated driver. The label shall be view mirror systems: System A and printed in a type face and color that System B. are clear and conspicuous. The label S9.2. System A shall be located with shall state the following: stable supports so that the portion of ‘‘USE CROSS VIEW MIRRORS TO the system on the bus’s left side, and VIEW PEDESTRIANS WHILE BUS IS the portion on its right side, each: STOPPED. DO NOT USE THESE MIR- (a) Includes at least one mirror of RORS TO VIEW TRAFFIC WHILE BUS unit magnification with not less than IS MOVING. IMAGES IN SUCH MIR- 323 cm2 of reflective surface; and RORS DO NOT ACCURATELY SHOW (b) Includes one or more mirrors ANOTHER VEHICLE’S LOCATION.’’ which together provide, at the driver’s S10. Requirements for motorcycles. eye location, a view of: S10.1 Each motorcycle shall have ei- (1) For the mirror system on the ther a mirror of unit magnification right side of the bus, the entire top sur- with not less than 8065 mm2 of reflec- face of cylinder N in Figure 2, and that tive surface, or a convex mirror with

335

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00335 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.111 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

not less than 6450 mm2 of reflective point. The spherometer has a dial indi- surface and an average radius of cur- cator with a scale that can be read ac- vature not less than 508 mm and not curately to .0025 mm, with the zero greater than 1524 mm, installed with a reading being a flat surface. stable support, and mounted so that S12.3 The 10 test positions on the the horizontal center of the reflective image display consist of two positions surface is at least 279 mm outward of at right angles to each other at each of the longitudinal centerline of the mo- five locations as shown in Figure 1. The torcycle. The mirror shall be adjust- locations are at the center of the mir- able by tilting in both the horizontal ror, at the left and right ends of a hori- and vertical directions. zontal line that bisects the mirror and S11. Mirror Construction. The average at the top and bottom ends of a reflectance of any mirror required by vertical line that bisects the mirror. this standard shall be determined in None of the readings are within a 6.4 accordance with SAE Recommended mm border on the edge of the image Practice J964, OCT84. All single reflec- display. tance mirrors shall have an average re- S12.4 At each position, the spherom- flectance of at least 35 percent. If a eter is held perpendicular to the convex mirror is capable of multiple reflec- mirror-surface and a record is made of tance levels, the minimum reflectance the reading on the dial indicator to the level in the day mode shall be at least nearest .0025 mm. 35 percent and the minimum reflec- S12.5 Convert the dial reading data tance level in the night mode shall be for each of the 10 test positions to ra- at least 4 percent. A multiple reflec- dius of curvature calculations using tance mirror shall either be equipped Table I. Consider the change as linear with a means for the driver to adjust the mirror to a reflectance level of at for dial readings that fall between two least 35 percent in the event of elec- numbers in Table I. trical failure, or achieve such reflec- S12.6 Calculate the average radius tance level automatically in the event of curvature by adding all 10 radius of of electrical failure. curvature calculations and dividing by S12. Determination of radius of cur- ten. vature. S12.7 Determine the numerical dif- S12.1 To determine the average ra- ference between the average radius of dius of curvature of a convex mirror, curvature and each of the 10 individual use a 3-point linear spherometer, which radius of curvature calculations deter- meets the requirements of S12.2, at the mined in S12.5. 10 test positions shown in Figure 1 and S12.8 Calculate the greatest per- record the readings for each position. centage deviation by dividing the S12.2 The 3-point linear spherometer greatest numerical difference deter- has two outer fixed legs 38 mm apart mined in S12.7 by the average radius of and one inner movable leg at the mid- curvature and multiply by 100.

336

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00336 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.111

TABLE I—CONVERSION TABLE FROM SPHEROM- TABLE I—CONVERSION TABLE FROM SPHEROM- ETER DIAL READING TO RADIUS OF CUR- ETER DIAL READING TO RADIUS OF CUR- VATURE VATURE—Continued

Radius of Radius of Radius of Radius of Dial reading curvature curvature Dial reading curvature curvature (Inches) (mm) (Inches) (mm)

.00330 ...... 85.2 2164.1 .00878 ...... 32.0 812.8 .00350 ...... 80.4 2042.92 .00906 ...... 31.0 787.4 .00374 ...... 75.2 1910.1 .00922 ...... 30.5 774.7 .00402 ...... 70.0 1778.0 .00938 ...... 30.0 762.0 .00416 ...... 67.6 1717.0 .00960 ...... 29.3 744.2 .00432 ...... 65.1 1653.5 .00980 ...... 28.7 729.0 .00450 ...... 62.5 1587.5 .01004 ...... 28.0 711.2 .00468 ...... 60.1 1526.5 .01022 ...... 27.5 698.5 .00476 ...... 59.1 1501.1 .01042 ...... 27.0 685.8 .00484 ...... 58.1 1475.7 .01060 ...... 26.5 673.1 .00492 ...... 57.2 1452.9 .01080 ...... 26.0 660.4 .00502 ...... 56.0 1422.4 .01110 ...... 25.3 642.6 .00512 ...... 54.9 1394.5 .01130 ...... 24.9 632.5 .00522 ...... 53.9 1369.1 .01170 ...... 24.0 609.6 .00536 ...... 52.5 1333.5 .01200 ...... 23.4 594.4 .00544 ...... 51.7 1313.2 .01240 ...... 22.7 576.6 .00554 ...... 50.8 1290.3 .01280 ...... 22.0 558.8 .00566 ...... 49.7 1262.4 .01310 ...... 21.5 546.1 .00580 ...... 48.5 1231.9 .01360 ...... 20.7 525.8 .00592 ...... 47.5 1206.5 .01400 ...... 20.1 510.5 .00606 ...... 46.4 1178.6 .01430 ...... 19.7 500.4 .00622 ...... 45.2 1148.1 .01480 ...... 19.0 482.6 .00636 ...... 44.2 1122.7 .01540 ...... 18.3 464.8 .00654 ...... 43.0 1092.2 .01570 ...... 17.9 454.7 .00668 ...... 42.1 1069.3 .01610 ...... 17.5 444.5 .00686 ...... 41.0 1041.4 .01650 ...... 17.1 434.3 .00694 ...... 40.5 1028.7 .01700 ...... 16.6 421.6 .00720 ...... 39.1 993.1 .01750 ...... 16.1 408.9 .00740 ...... 38.0 965.2 .01800 ...... 15.6 396.2 .00760 ...... 37.0 939.8 .01860 ...... 15.1 383.5 .00780 ...... 36.1 916.9 .01910 ...... 14.7 373.4 .00802 ...... 35.1 891.5 .01980 ...... 14.2 360.7 .00822 ...... 34.2 868.7 .02040 ...... 13.8 350.5 .00850 ...... 33.1 840.7 .02100 ...... 13.4 340.4

337

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00337 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER24SE98.034 § 571.111 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

TABLE I—CONVERSION TABLE FROM SPHEROM- (c) Place cylinders A, D, and G so ETER DIAL READING TO RADIUS OF CUR- that their centers are in a longitudinal VATURE—Continued vertical plane that is tangent to the most outboard edge of the left side of Radius of Radius of Dial reading curvature curvature the bus’s front . (Inches) (mm) (d) Place cylinders C, F, and I so that their centers are in a longitudinal .02160 ...... 13.0 330.2 .02250 ...... 12.5 317.5 vertical plane that is tangent to the .02340 ...... 12.0 304.8 most outboard edge of the right side of .02450 ...... 11.5 292.1 the bus’s front bumper. .02560 ...... 11.0 279.4 (e) Place cylinder J so that its center .02680 ...... 10.5 266.7 is in a longitudinal vertical plane 0.3048 .02810 ...... 10.0 254.0 .02960 ...... 9.5 241.3 meters (1 foot) to the left of the longi- .03130 ...... 9.0 228.6 tudinal vertical plane passing through .03310 ...... 8.5 215.9 the centers of cylinders A, D, and G, and is in the transverse vertical plane S13. School bus mirror test procedures. that passes through the centerline of The requirements of S9.1 through S9.4 the bus’s front axle. shall be met when the vehicle is tested (f) Place cylinder K so that its center in accordance with the following condi- is in a longitudinal vertical plane 0.3048 tions. meters (1 foot) to the right of the lon- S13.1 The cylinders shall be a color gitudinal vertical plane passing which provides a high contrast with through the centers of cylinders C, F, the surface on which the bus is parked. and I, and is in the transverse vertical S13.2 The cylinders are 0.3048 m high plane that passes through the center- and 0.3048 m in diameter, except for line of the bus’s front axle. cylinder P which is 0.9144 m high and (g) Place cylinders L, M, N, O, and P 0.3048 m in diameter. so that their centers are in the trans- S13.3 Place cylinders at locations as verse vertical plane that passes specified in S13.3(a) through S13.3(g) through the centerline of the bus’s rear and illustrated in Figure 2. Measure axle. Place cylinder L so that its cen- the distances shown in Figure 2 from a ter is in a longitudinal vertical plane cylinder to another object from the that is 1.8288 meters (6 feet) to the left center of the cylinder as viewed from of the longitudinal vertical plane tan- above. gent to the bus’s most outboard left (a) Place cylinders G, H, and I so that surface (excluding the mirror system). they are tangent to a transverse Place cylinder M so that its center is vertical plane tangent to the forward- in a longitudinal vertical plane that is most surface of the bus’s front bumper. 0.3048 meters (1 foot) to the left of the Place cylinders D, E, F so that their longitudinal vertical plane tangent to centers are located in a transverse the left side of the bus. Place cylinder vertical plane that is 1.8288 meters (6 N so that its center is in a longitudinal feet) forward of a transverse vertical vertical plane that is 0.3048 meters (1 plane passing through the centers of foot) to the right of the longitudinal cylinders G, H, and I. Place cylinders vertical plane tangent to the right side A, B, and C so that their centers are lo- of the bus. Place cylinder O so that its cated in a transverse vertical plane center is in a longitudinal vertical that is 3.6576 meters (12 feet) forward of plane that is 1.8288 meters (6 feet) to the transverse vertical plane passing the right of the longitudinal vertical through the centers of cylinders G, H, plane tangent to the right side of the and I. bus. Place cylinder P so that its center (b) Place cylinders B, E, and H so is in a longitudinal vertical plane that that their centers are in a longitudinal is 3.6576 meters (12 feet) to the right of vertical plane that passes through the the longitudinal vertical plane tangent bus’s longitudinal centerline. to the right side of the bus.

338

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00338 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.111

339

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00339 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.002 § 571.111 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S13.4 The driver’s eye location is ion and the seat back at the longitu- the eye location of a 25th percentile dinal centerline of the seat. adult female, when seated in the driv- (b) Adjust the driver’s seat to the er’s seat as follows: midway point between the forward- (a) The center point of the driver’s most and rear-most positions, and if eye location is the point located 68.58 separately adjustable in the vertical centimeters (27 inches) vertically direction, adjust to the lowest position. above the intersection of the seat cush- If an adjustment position does not

340

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00340 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.041 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.111

exist at the midway point, use the clos- (6 inch) radius parallel to and forward est adjustment position to the rear of of the center point (see figure 3). With the midpoint. If a seat back is adjust- the camera at any single location on or able, adjust the seat back angle to the within that semicircle look through manufacturer’s nominal design riding the camera and the windows of the bus position in accordance with the manu- and determine whether the entire top facturer’s recommendations. surface of each cylinder is directly visi- S13.5 Adjustable mirrors are ad- ble. justed before the test in accordance S13.7 For each cylinder whose entire with the manufacturer’s recommenda- top surface is determined under para- tions. Such mirrors are not moved or graph 13.4 of this section not to be di- readjusted at any time during the test. rectly visible at the driver’s eye loca- 13.6 Place a 35 mm or larger format tion, camera, or video camera, so that its (a) Place a comparison chart (see fig- image plane is located at the center ure 4) above the mirror that provides point of the driver’s eye location or at the fullest view of the cylinder in situ- any single point within a semicircular ations where a cylinder is partially area established by a 15.24 centimeter visible through more than one mirror.

The width of the bars in Figure 4 in- minutes of arc are derived from the fol- dicating three minutes of arc and nine lowing formula: For 3 minutes of arc:

341

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00341 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.042 § 571.112 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

X=D×0.000873, S4.1 Each hood must be provided Where: with a hood latch system. X=the width of a line, in the unit of meas- S4.2 A front opening hood which, in urement D, representing 3 minutes of arc; any open position, partially or com- D=distance from center point of driver’s eye pletely obstructs a driver’s forward location to the center of the mirror’s sur- view through the windshield must be face; and provided with a second latch position 0.000873=tangent of 3 minutes of arc. on the hood latch system or with a sec- For 9 minutes of arc: ond hood latch system. X=D×0.002618, Where: § 571.114 Standard No. 114; Theft pro- X=the width of a line, in the unit of meas- tection. urement D, representing 9 minutes of arc; S1. Purpose and Scope. This standard D=distance from center point of driver’s eye specifies requirements primarily for location to the center of the mirror’s sur- face; and theft protection to reduce the inci- 0.002618=tangent of 9 minutes of arc. dence of crashes resulting from unau- thorized operation of a motor vehicle. (b) Photograph each cylinder through It also specifies requirements to reduce the mirror(s) that provides a view of the incidence of crashes resulting from the cylinder. Photograph each cylinder the rollaway of parked vehicles with with the camera located so that the automatic transmissions as a result of view through its film or image plane is children moving the shift mechanism located at any single location within out of the ‘‘park’’ position. the semicircle established under 13.4, S2. Application. This standard applies [POINT A,B,C, OR D] ensuring that the to passenger cars, and to trucks and image of the mirror and comparison multipurpose passenger vehicles hav- chart fill the camera’s view finder to ing a GVWR of 4536 kilograms or less. the extent possible. However, it does not apply to walk-in 13.8 Make all observations and take van-type vehicles. all photographs with the service/entry door in the closed position and the stop S3. Definitions. signal arm(s) in the fully retracted po- Combination means one of the specifi- sition. cally planned and constructed vari- ations of a locking system which, when [41 FR 36025, Aug. 26, 1976, as amended at 41 properly actuated, permits operation of FR 56813, Dec. 30, 1976; 47 FR 38700, Sept. 2, the locking system. 1982; 48 FR 38844, Aug. 26, 1983; 48 FR 40262, Sept. 6, 1983; 56 FR 58516, Nov. 20, 1991; 57 FR Key includes any other device de- 57015, Dec. 2, 1992; 58 FR 60402, Nov. 16, 1993; signed and constructed to provide a 60 FR 15692, Mar. 27, 1995; 63 FR 28929-28931, method for operating a locking system May 27, 1998; 63 FR 51000, Sept. 24, 1998; 69 FR which is designed and constructed to be 18497, Apr. 8, 2004] operated by that device. Vehicle type refers to passenger car, § 571.112 [Reserved] truck, or multipurpose passenger vehicle, § 571.113 Standard No. 113; Hood latch as those terms are defined in 49 CFR system. 571.3. S1. Purpose and scope. This standard S4. Requirements. establishes the requirement for pro- S4.1 Each truck and multipurpose viding a hood latch system or hood passenger vehicle having a GVWR of latch systems. 4536 kilograms or less and each pas- S2. Application. This standard applies senger car shall meet the requirements to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- of S4.2, S4.3, S4.4, and S4.5. However, senger vehicles, trucks, and buses. open-body type vehicles that are manu- S3. Definitions. Hood means any exte- factured for operation without doors rior movable body panel forward of the and that either have no doors or have windshield that is used to cover an en- doors that are designed to be easily at- gine, luggage, storage, or battery com- tached to and removed from the vehi- partment. cle by the vehicle owner are not re- S4. Requirements. quired to comply with S4.5.

342

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00342 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.114

S4.2 Each vehicle shall have a key- prevent the vehicle’s steering or for- locking system which, whenever the ward self-mobility or both. key is removed, prevents: S4.4. For each vehicle type manufac- (a) The normal activation of the ve- tured by a manufacturer, the number hicle’s engine or motor; and of different combinations of the key- (b) Either steering or forward self- locking systems required by S4.2 shall mobility of the vehicle or both. be at least 1,000, or a number equal to S4.2.1 (a) Except as provided in the number of vehicles of that type S4.2.2 (a) and (b), the key-locking sys- manufactured by such manufacturer, tem required by S4.2 in each vehicle whichever is less. The same combina- which has an automatic transmission tions may be used for more than one with a ‘‘park’’ position shall, when test- vehicle type. ed under the procedures in S5.2, pre- S4.5. A warning to the driver shall be vent removal of the key unless the activated whenever the key required by transmission or transmission shift S4.2 has been left in the locking system lever is locked in ‘‘park’’ or becomes and the driver’s door is opened. The locked in ‘‘park’’ as the direct result of warning to the driver need not oper- removing the key. ate— (b) Each vehicle shall not move more (a) After the key has been manually than 150 mm on a 10 percent grade withdrawn to a position from which it when the transmission or transmission may not be turned; shift lever is locked in ‘‘park.’’ (b) When the key-locking system is S4.2.2 (a) Notwithstanding S4.2.1, in the ‘‘on’’ or ‘‘start’’ position; or provided that steering is prevented (c) After the key has been inserted in upon the key’s removal, each vehicle the locking system and before it has specified therein may permit key re- been turned. moval when electrical failure of this S5. Compliance Test Procedure for vehi- system (including battery discharge) cles with automatic transmissions. occurs or may have a device which, S5.1 Test Conditions. (a) The vehicle when activated, permits key removal. shall be tested at curb weight plus 91 The means for activating any such de- kg (including the driver). vice shall be covered by a non-trans- (b) Except where specified otherwise, parent surface which, when installed, the test surface shall be level. prevents sight of and activation of the S5.2 Test procedure. (a) Move the device. The covering surface shall be transmission shift lever to any position removable only by use of a screwdriver where it will remain without assist- or other tool. ance, including a position between the (b) Notwithstanding S4.2.1, each vehi- detent positions, except for the ‘‘park’’ cle specified therein may have a device position. Try to remove the key from which, when activated, permits moving each possible key position in each such the transmission shift lever from shift position. ‘‘park’’ after the removal of the key. (b) Drive the vehicle forward up a 10 The device shall either be operable: percent grade and stop it with the serv- (1) By the key, as defined in S3; or ice brakes. Apply the parking brake (if (2) By another means, provided that present). Move the shift mechanism to steering is prevented when the key is the ‘‘park’’ position. Note the vehicle removed from the ignition, and pro- position. Release the parking brake. vided that the means for activating the Release the service brakes. Remove the device is covered by a non-transparent key. Verify that the transmission shift surface which, when installed, prevents lever or transmission is locked in sight of and activation of the device. ‘‘park.’’ Verify that the vehicle, at rest, The covering surface shall be remov- has moved no more than 150 mm from able only by use of a screwdriver or the position noted prior to release of other tool. the brakes. S4.3 Except when an automatic [46 FR 32253, June 22, 1981, as amended at 56 transmission vehicle is in ‘‘park,’’ the FR 12468, Mar. 26, 1991; 57 FR 2043, Jan. 17, means for deactivating the vehicle’s 1992; 60 FR 13644, Mar. 14, 1995; 60 FR 30011, engine or motor shall not activate any June 7, 1995; 60 FR 41028, Aug. 11, 1995; 62 FR device installed pursuant to S4.2(b) to 2978, Jan. 21, 1997]

343

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00343 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.115 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

§ 571.115 [Reserved] A silicone base brake fluid (SBBF) is a brake fluid which consists of not less § 571.116 Standard No. 116; Motor ve- than 70 percent by weight of a diorgano hicle brake fluids. polysiloxane. S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- Sloughing means degradation of a quirements for fluids for use in hydrau- brake cup as evidenced by the presence lic brake systems of motor vehicles, of carbon black loosely held on the containers for these fluids, and labeling brake cup surface, such that a visible of the containers. black streak is produced when the cup, S2. Purpose. The purpose of this with a 500 ±10 gram deadweight on it, is standard is to reduce failures in the hy- drawn base down over a sheet of white draulic braking systems of motor vehi- bond paper placed on a firm flat sur- cles which may occur because of the face. manufacture or use of improper or con- Stickiness means a condition on the taminated fluid. surface of a brake cup such that fibers S3. Application. This standard applies will be pulled from a wad of U.S.P. ab- to all fluid for use in hydraulic brake sorbent cotton when it is drawn across systems of motor vehicles. In addition, the surface. S5.3 applies to passenger cars, multi- S5. Requirements. This section speci- purpose passenger vehicles, trucks, fies performance requirements for DOT buses, trailers, and motorcycles. 3, DOT 4 and DOT 5 brake fluids; re- S4. Definitions. quirements for brake fluid certifi- Blister means a cavity or sac on the cation; and requirements for container surface of a brake cup. sealing, labeling and color coding for Brake fluid means a liquid designed brake fluids and hydraulic system min- for use in a motor vehicle hydraulic eral oils. Where a range of tolerances is brake system in which it will contact specified, the brake fluid shall meet elastomeric components made of sty- the requirements at all points within rene and butadiene rubber (SBR), the range. ethylene and propylene rubber (EPR), S5.1 Brake fluid. When tested in ac- polychloroprene (CR) brake hose inner cordance with S6, brake fluids shall tube stock or natural rubber (NR). meet the following requirements: Chipping means a condition in which S5.1.1 Equilibrium reflux boiling point small pieces are missing from the outer (ERBP). When brake fluid is tested ac- surface of a brake cup. cording to S6.1, the ERBP shall not be Duplicate samples means two samples less than the following value for the of brake fluid taken from a single grade indicated: packaged lot and tested simulta- (a) DOT 3: 205 °C. (401 °F.). neously. (b) DOT 4: 230 °C. (446 °F.). Hydraulic system mineral oil means a (c) DOT 5: 260 °C. (500 °F.). mineral-oil-based fluid designed for use S5.1.2 Wet ERBP. When brake fluid in motor vehicle hydraulic brake sys- is tested according to S6.2, the wet tems in which the fluid is not in con- ERBP shall not be less than the fol- tact with components made of SBR, lowing value for the grade indicated: EPR or NR. (a) DOT 3: 140 °C. (284 °F.). Packager means any person who fills (b) DOT 4: 155 °C. (311 °F.). containers with brake fluid that are (c) DOT 5: 1 180 °C. (356 °F.). subsequently distributed for retail sale. S5.1.3. Kinematic viscosities. When Packaged lot is that quantity of brake brake fluid is tested according to S6.3, fluid shipped by the manufacturer to the kinematic viscosities in square the packager in a single container, or millimeters per second at stated tem- that quantity of brake fluid manufac- peratures shall be neither less than 1.5 tured by a single plant run of 24 hours mm2/s at 100 °C. (212 °F.) nor more than or less, through the same processing the following maximum value for the equipment and with no change in in- grade indicated: gredients. (a) DOT 3: 1,500 mm2/s at minus 40 °C. Scuffing means a visible erosion of a (minus 40 °F.). portion of the outer surface of a brake (b) DOT 4: 1,800 mm2/s at minus 40 °C. cup. (minus 40 °F.).

344

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00344 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.116

(c) DOT 5: 900 mm2/s at minus 40 °C. (h) The hardness of the cup shall not (minus 40 °F.). decrease by more than 15 International S5.1.4 pH value. When brake fluid, Rubber Hardness Degrees (IRHD); and except DOT 5 SBBF, is tested according (i) The base diameter of the cups to S6.4, the pH value shall not be less shall not increase by more than 1.4 than 7.0 nor more than 11.5. mm. (0.055 inch). S5.1.5 Brake fluid stability. S5.1.7 Fluidity and appearance at low S5.1.5.1 High-temperature stability. temperature. When brake fluid is tested When brake fluid is tested according to according to S6.7, at the storage tem- S6.5.3 the ERBP shall not change by perature and for the storage times more than 3 °C. (5.4 °F.) plus 0.05° for given in Table II— each degree that the ERBP of the fluid (a) The fluid shall show no sludging, exceeds 225 °C. (437 °F.). sedimentation, crystallization, or S5.1.5.2 Chemical stability. When stratification; brake fluid, except DOT 5 SBBF, is (b) Upon inversion of the sample bot- tested according to S6.5.4, the change tle, the time required for the air bubble in temperature of the refluxing fluid to travel to the top of the fluid shall ° ° mixture shall not exceed 3.0 C (5.4 F.) not exceed the bubble flow times shown ° plus 0.05 for each degree that the in Table II; and ° ERBP of the fluid exceeds 225 C (437 (c) On warming to room temperature, ° F.). the fluid shall resume the appearance S5.1.6 Corrosion. When brake fluid is and fluidity that it had before chilling. tested according to S6.6— (a) The metal test strips shall not TABLE II—FLUIDITY AND APPEARANCE AT LOW show weight changes exceeding the TEMPERATURES limits stated in Table I. Storage Maximum TABLE I bubble Storage temperature time flow time (hours) (seconds) Maximum permissible ± ° ± weight Minus 40 2 C. (minus 40 3.6 Test strip material change, °F.) ...... 144 ±4.0 10 mg./sq. Minus 50 ±2 °C. (minus 58 ±3.6 cm. of sur- °F.) ...... 6 ±0.2 35 face

Steel, tinned iron, cast iron ...... 0.2 S5.1.8 Evaporation. When brake fluid Aluminum ...... 1 is tested according to S6.8— Brass, copper ...... 4 (a) The loss by evaporation shall not (b) Excluding the area of contact (13 exceed 80 percent by weight; ±1 mm. (1⁄2 ±1⁄32 inch) measured from the (b) The residue from the brake fluid bolt hole end of the test strip), the after evaporation shall contain no pre- metal test strips shall not show pitting cipitate that remains gritty or abra- or etching to an extent discernible sive when rubbed with the fingertip; without magnification; and (c) The water-wet brake fluid at the (c) The residue shall have a pour end of the test shall show no jelling at point below minus 5 °C. (+23 °F.). 23 ±5 °C (73.4 ±9 °F.); S5.1.9 Water tolerance. (a) At low tem- (d) No crystalline deposit shall form perature. When brake fluid is tested ac- and adhere to either the glass jar walls cording to S6.9.3(a)— or the surface of the metal strips; (1) The fluid shall show no sludging, (e) At the end of the test, sedimenta- sedimentation, crystallization, or tion of the water-wet brake fluid shall stratification; not exceed 0.10 percent by volume; (2) Upon inversion of the centrifuge (f) The pH value of water-wet brake tube, the air bubble shall travel to the fluid, except DOT 5 SBBF, at the end of top of the fluid in not more than 10 sec- the test shall not be less than 7.0 nor onds; more than 11.5; (3) If cloudiness has developed, the (g) The cups at the end of the test wet fluid shall regain its original clar- shall show no disintegration, as evi- ity and fluidity when warmed to room denced by blisters or sloughing; temperature; and

345

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00345 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.116 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(b) At 60 °C. (140 °F.). When brake (b) The change in diameter of any fluid is tested according to S6.9.3(b)— cylinder or piston shall not exceed 0.13 (1) The fluid shall show no stratifica- mm. (0.005 inch); tion; and (c) The average decrease in hardness (2) Sedimentation shall not exceed of seven of the eight cups tested (six 0.15 percent by volume after wheel cylinder and one master cylinder centrifuging. primary) shall not exceed 15 IRHD. Not S5.1.10 Compatibility. more than one of the seven cups shall (a) At low temperature. When brake have a decrease in hardness greater fluid is tested according to S6.10.3(a), than 17 IRHD; the test specimen shall show no (d) None of the eight cups shall be in sludging, sedimentation, or crystalliza- an unsatisfactory operating condition tion. In addition, fluids, except DOT 5 as evidenced by stickiness, scuffing, SBBF, shall show no stratification. blisters, cracking, chipping, or other (b) At 60 °C. (140 °F.). When brake change in shape from its original ap- fluid is tested according to S6.10.3(b)— pearance; (1) Sedimentation shall not exceed (e) None of the eight cups shall show 0.05 percent by volume after an increase in base diameter greater centrifuging; and than 0.90 mm (0.035 inch); (2) Fluids, except DOT 5 SBBF, shall (f) The average lip diameter set of show no stratification. the eight cups shall not be greater than S5.1.11 Resistance to oxidation. When 65 percent. brake fluid is tested according to (g) During any period of 24,000 S6.11— strokes, the volume loss of fluid shall (a) The metal test strips outside the not exceed 36 milliliters; areas in contact with the tinfoil shall (h) The cylinder pistons shall not not show pitting or etching to an ex- freeze or function improperly through- tent discernible without magnification; out the test; (b) No more than a trace of gum shall (i) The total loss of fluid during the be deposited on the test strips outside 100 strokes at the end of the test shall the areas in contact with the tinfoil; not exceed 36 milliliters; (c) The aluminum strips shall not (j) The fluid at the end of the test change in weight by more than 0.05 shall show no formation of gels; mg./sq. cm.; and (k) At the end of the test the amount (d) The cast iron strips shall not of sediment shall not exceed 1.5 percent change in weight by more than 0.3 mg./ by volume; and sq. cm. (l) Brake cylinders shall be free of de- S5.1.12 Effects on cups. When brake posits that are abrasive or that cannot cups are subjected to brake fluid in ac- be removed when rubbed moderately cordance with S6.12— with a nonabrasive cloth wetted with (a) The increase in the diameter of ethanol. S5.1.14 Brake fluid and the base of the cups shall be not less Fluid color. hydraulic system mineral oil shall be than 0.15 mm. (0.006 inch) or more than of the color indicated: 1.40 mm. (0.055 inch); (b) The decrease in hardness of the DOT 3, DOT 4, and DOT 5.1 non-SBBF—color- cups shall be not more than 10 IRHD at less to amber. 70 °C. (158 °F.) or more than 15 IRHD at DOT 5 SBBF—purple. 120 °C. (248 °F.), and there shall be no Hydraulic system mineral oil—green. increase in hardness of the cups; and S5.2 Packaging and labeling require- (c) The cups shall show no disintegra- ments for motor vehicle brake fluids. tion as evidenced by stickiness, blis- S5.2.1 Container sealing. Each brake ters, or sloughing. fluid or hydraulic system mineral oil S5.1.13 Stroking properties. When container with a capacity of 177 mL or brake fluid is tested according to more shall be provided with a reseal- S6.13— able closure that has an inner seal im- (a) Metal parts of the test system pervious to the packaged brake fluid. shall show no pitting or etching to an The container closure shall include a extent discernible without magnifica- tamper-proof feature that will either tion; be destroyed or substantially altered

346

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00346 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.116

when the container closure is initially (1) FOLLOW VEHICLE MANUFAC- opened. TURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS S5.2.2 Certification, marking, and la- WHEN ADDING BRAKE FLUID. beling. (2) KEEP BRAKE FLUID CLEAN S5.2.2.1 Each manufacturer of a DOT AND DRY. Contamination with dirt, grade brake fluid shall furnish to each water, petroleum products or other ma- packager, distributor, or dealer to terials may result in brake failure or whom he delivers brake fluid, the fol- costly repairs. lowing information: (3) STORE BRAKE FLUID ONLY IN (a) A serial number identifying the ITS ORIGINAL CONTAINER. KEEP production lot and the date of manu- CONTAINER CLEAN AND TIGHTLY facture of the brake fluid. CLOSED TO PREVENT ABSORPTION (b) The grade (DOT 3, DOT 4, DOT 5) OF MOISTURE. of the brake fluid. If DOT 5 grade brake (4) CAUTION: DO NOT REFILL CON- fluid , it shall be further distinguished TAINER, AND DO NOT USE FOR as ‘‘DOT 5 SILICONE BASE’’ or ‘‘DOT OTHER LIQUIDS. (Not required for 5.1 NON-SILICONE BASE.’’ containers with a capacity in excess of (c) The minimum wet boiling point in 19 L.) Fahrenheit of the brake fluid. S5.2.2.3 Each packager of hydraulic (d) Certification that the brake fluid system mineral oil shall furnish the in- formation specified in paragraphs (a) conforms to § 571.116. through (e) of this S5.2.2.3 by clearly S5.2.2.2 Each packager of brake fluid marking it on each brake fluid con- shall furnish the information specified tainer or on a label (labels) perma- in paragraphs (a) through (g) of this nently affixed to the container, in any S5.2.2.2 by clearly marking it on each location except a removable part such brake fluid container or on a label (la- as a lid. After being subjected to the bels) permanently affixed to the con- operations and conditions specified in tainer, in any location except a remov- S6.14, the information required by this able part such as a lid. After being sub- section shall be legible to an observer jected to the operations and conditions having corrected visual acuity of 20/40 specified in S6.14, the information re- (Snellen ratio) at a distance of 305 mm quired by this section shall be legible and any label affixed to the container to an observer having corrected visual in compliance with this section shall acuity of 20/40 (Snellen ratio) at a dis- not be removable without its being de- tance of 305 mm, and any label affixed stroyed or defaced. to the container in compliance with (a) The name of the packager of the this section shall not be removable hydraulic system mineral oil, which without its being destroyed or defaced. may be in code form. (a) Certification that the brake fluid (b) The name and complete mailing conforms to § 571.116. address of the distributor. (b) The name of the packager of the (c) A serial number identifying the brake fluid, which may be in code form. packaged lot and date of packaging. (c) The name and complete mailing (d) Designation of the contents as address of the distributor. ‘‘HYDRAULIC SYSTEM MINERAL (d) A serial number identifying the OIL’’ in capital letters at least 3 mm packaged lot and date of packaging. high. (e) Designation of the contents as (e) The following safety warnings in ‘‘DOT—MOTOR VEHICLE BRAKE capital and lower case letters as indi- FLUID’’ (Fill in DOT 3, DOT 4, DOT 5 cated: SILICONE BASE, or DOT 5.1 NON-SIL- (1) FOLLOW VEHICLE MANUFAC- ICONE BASE as applicable). TURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS (f) The minimum wet boiling point in WHEN ADDING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Fahrenheit of the DOT brake fluid in MINERAL OIL. the container. (2) Hydraulic System Mineral Oil is (g) The following safety warnings in NOT COMPATIBLE with the rubber capital and lower case letters as indi- components of brake systems designed cated: for use with DOT brake fluids.

347

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00347 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.116 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(3) KEEP HYDRAULIC SYSTEM end of which has a 19⁄38 standard-taper, MINERAL OIL CLEAN. Contamination drip-tip, male ground-glass joint; with dust or other materials may re- (c) Boiling stones. Three clean, unused sult in brake failure or costly repair. silicon carbide grains (approximately 2 (4) CAUTION: STORE HYDRAULIC mm. (0.08 inch) in diameter, grit No. 8); SYSTEM MINERAL OIL ONLY IN ITS (d) Thermometer. Standardized cali- ORIGINAL CONTAINER. KEEP CON- brated partial immersion (76 mm.), TAINER CLEAN AND TIGHTLY solid stem, thermometers conforming CLOSED. DO NOT REFILL CON- to the requirements for an ASTM 2C or TAINER OR USE OTHER LIQUIDS. 2F, and an ASTM 3C or 3F thermom- (The last sentence is not required for eter; and containers with a capacity in excess of (e) Heat source. Variable 19 L.) autotransformer-controlled heating S5.2.2.4 If a container for brake fluid mantle designed to fit the flask, or an or hydraulic system mineral oil is not electric heater with rheostat heat con- normally visible but designed to be trol. protected by an outer container or car- ton during use, the outer container or carton rather than the inner container shall meet the labeling requirements of S5.2.2.2 or S5.2.2.3, as appropriate. S5.3 Motor vehicle requirement. Each passenger car, multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, bus, trailer, and motor- cycle that has a hydraulic brake sys- tem shall be equipped with fluid that has been manufactured and packaged in conformity with the requirements of this standard. S6. Test procedures. S6.1 Equilibrium reflux boiling point. Determine the ERBP of a brake fluid by running duplicate samples accord- ing to the following procedure and averaging the results. S6.1.1 Summary of procedure. Sixty milliliters (ml.) of brake fluid are boiled under specified equilibrium con- ditions (reflux) at atmospheric pressure in a 100-ml. flask. The average tem- perature of the boiling fluid at the end of the reflux period, corrected for vari- ations in barometric pressure if nec- essary, is the ERBP. S6.1.2 Apparatus. (See Figure 1) The test apparatus shall consist of— (a) Flask. (See Figure 2) A 100-ml. round-bottom, short-neck heat-resist- FIG. 1—BOILING POINT TEST APPARATUS ant glass flask having a neck with a 19⁄38 standard taper, female ground- glass joint and a side-entering tube, with an outside diameter of 10 millime- ters (mm.), which centers the ther- mometer bulb in the flask 6.5 mm. from the bottom; (b) Condenser. A water-cooled, reflux, glass-tube type, condenser having a jacket 200 mm. in length, the bottom

348

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00348 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.043 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.116

second. The reflux rate shall not exceed 5 drops per second at any time. Imme- diately adjust the heating rate to ob- tain an equilibrium reflux rate of 1 to 2 drops per second over the next 5 ±2 minutes. Maintain this rate for an ad- ditional 2 minutes, taking four tem- perature readings at 30–second inter- vals. Record the average of these as the observed ERBP. If no reflux is evident when the fluid temperature reaches 260 °C (500 °F), discontinue heating and re- port ERBP as in excess of 260 °C (500 °F). S6.1.5 Calculation. (a) Thermometer inaccuracy. Correct the observed ERBP by applying any correction factor ob- tained in standardizing the thermom- eter. (b) Variation from standard barometric pressure. Apply the factor shown in FIG. 2—DETAIL OF 100 ML SHORT-NECK FLASK Table III to calculate the barometric S6.1.3 Preparation of apparatus. (a) pressure correction to the ERBP. Thoroughly clean and dry all glass- ware. TABLE III—CORRECTION FOR BAROMETRIC (b) Insert thermometer through the PRESSURE side tube until the tip of the bulb is 6.5 Correction per 1 mm mm. (1⁄4 inch) from the bottom center Observed ERBP corrected for difference in pressure a of the flask. Seal with a short piece of thermometer inaccuracy °C. ( °F.) natural rubber, EPDM, SBR, or butyl tubing. 100 °C. (212 °F.) to 190 °C. (374 (c) Place 60 ±1 ml. of brake fluid and °F.) ...... 0.039 (0.07) ° ° the silicon carbide grains into the Over 190 C. (374 F.) ...... 0.04 (0.08) flask. a To be added in case barometric pressure is below 760 mm.; to be subtracted in case barometric pressure is above (d) Attach the flask to the condenser. 670 mm. When using a heating mantle, place the mantle under the flask and support it (c) If the two corrected observed with a ring-clamp and laboratory-type ERBP’s agree within 2 °C. (4 °C. for stand, holding the entire assembly in brake fluids having an ERBP over 230 place by a clamp. When using a rheo- °C./446 °F.) average the duplicate runs stat-controlled heater, center a stand- as the ERBP; otherwise, repeat the en- ard porcelain or hard asbestos refrac- tire test, averaging the four corrected tory, having a diameter opening 32 to observed values to determine the origi- 38 mm., over the heating element and nal ERBP. mount the flask so that direct heat is S6.2 Wet ERBP. Determine the wet applied only through the opening in ERBP of a brake fluid by running du- the refractory. Place the assembly in plicate samples according to the fol- an area free from drafts or other types lowing procedure. of sudden temperature changes. Con- S6.2.1. Summary of procedure. A 350 nect the cooling water inlet and outlet ml. sample of the brake fluid is hu- tubes to the condenser. Turn on the midified under controlled conditions; cooling water. The water supply tem- 350 ml. of SAE triethylene glycol perature shall not exceed 28 °C. (82.4 monomethyl ether, brake fluid grade, °F.) and the temperature rise through referee material (TEGME) as described the condenser shall not exceed 2 °C. (3.6 in appendix E of SAE Standard J1703 °F.). Nov. 83, ‘‘Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid,’’ S6.1.4 Procedure. Apply heat to the November 1983, is used to establish the flask so that within 10 ±2 minutes the end point for humidification. After hu- fluid is refluxing in excess of 1 drop per midification, the water content and

349

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00349 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.044 § 571.116 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

ERBP of the brake fluid are deter- cate specimens of the SAE TEGME ref- mined. eree material (350 ±5 ml. of TEGME in S6.2.2 Apparatus for humidification. each jar). The water content of the (See Figure 3). SAE TEGME fluid is adjusted to 0.50 Test apparatus shall consist of— ±0.05 percent by weight at the start of (a) Glass jars. Four SAE RM–49 corro- the test in accordance with S7.2. Place sion test jars or equivalent screwtop, one sample each of the test brake fluid straight-sided, round glass jars each and the prepared TEGME sample into having a capacity of about 475 ml. and the same desiccator. Repeat for the approximate inner dimensions of 100 second sample of test brake fluid and mm. in height by 75 mm. in diameter, TEGME in a second desiccator. Place with matching lids having new, clean the desiccators in the 50 °C. (122 °F.) inserts providing water-vapor-proof controlled oven and replace desiccator seals; covers. At intervals, during oven hu- (b) Desiccator and cover. Two bowl- midification, remove the rubber stop- form glass desiccators, 250-mm. inside pers in the tops of desiccators. Using a diameter, having matching tubulated long needled hypodermic syringe, take covers fitted with No. 8 rubber stop- a sample of not more than 2 ml. from pers; and each TEGME sample and determine its (c) Desiccator plate. Two 230-mm. di- water content. Remove no more than ameter, perforated porcelain desiccator 10 ml. of fluid from each SAE TEGME plates, without feet, glazed on one side. sample during the humidification pro- S6.2.3 Reagents and materials. (a) Dis- cedure. When the water content of the tilled water, see S7.1. SAE fluid reaches 3.70 ±0.05 percent by (b) SAE TEGME referee material. weight (average of the duplicates). re- S6.2.4 Preparation of apparatus. Lu- move the two test fluid specimens from bricate the ground-glass joint of the their desiccators and promptly cap desiccator. Pour 450 ±10 ml. of distilled each jar tightly. Allow the sealed jars water into each desiccator and insert to cool for 60 to 90 minutes at 23° ±5 °C. perforated porcelain desiccator plates. (73.4° ±9 °F.). Measure the water con- Place the desiccators in an oven with tents of the test fluid specimens in ac- temperature controlled at 50 ±1 °C. (122 cordance with S7.2 and determine their ±1.8 °F.) throughout the humidification ERBP’s in accordance with S6.1. If the procedure. two ERBPs agree within 4 °C. (8 °F.), S6.2.5 Procedure. Pour 350 ±5 ml. of average them to determine the wet brake fluid into an open corrosion test ERBP; otherwise repeat and average jar. Prepare in the same manner a du- the four individual ERBPs as the wet plicate test fluid sample and two dupli- ERBP of the brake fluid.

350

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00350 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.116

S6.3 Kinematic viscosities. Determine (a) Viscometers. Calibrated glass cap- the kinematic viscosity of a brake illary-type viscometers, ASTM D2515– fluid in mm2/s by the following proce- 66, ‘‘Standard Specification for Kine- dure. Run duplicate samples at each of matic Glass Viscometers,’’ measuring the specified temperatures, making viscosity within the precision limits of two timed runs on each sample. S6.4.7. Use suspended level viscometers S6.3.1 Summary of the procedure. The for viscosity measurements at low tem- time is measured for a fixed volume of peratures. Use Cannon-Fenske Routine the brake fluid to flow through a cali- or other modified Ostwald viscometers brated glass capillary viscometer under at ambient temperatures and above. an accurately reproducible head and at (b) Viscometer holders and frames. a closely controlled temperature. The Mount a viscometer in the constant- kinematic viscosity is then calculated temperature bath so that the mounting from the measured flow time and the tube is held within 1° of the vertical. calibration constant of the viscometer. (c) Viscometer bath. A transparent liq- S6.3.2 Apparatus. uid bath of sufficient depth such that

351

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00351 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.045 § 571.116 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

at no time during the measurement thermometers. Outside this range, the will any portion of the sample in the variation shall not exceed 0.03 °C. (0.05 viscometer be less than 2 cm. below the °F.). surface or less than 2 cm. above the (d) Thermometers. Liquid-in-Glass bottom. The bath shall be cylindrical Kinematic Viscosity Test Thermom- in shape, with turbulent agitation suf- eters, covering the range of test tem- ficient to meet the temperature con- peratures indicated in Table IV and trol requirements. For measurements conforming to ASTM E1–68, ‘‘Specifica- within 15° to 100 °C. (60° to 212 °F.) the tions for ASTM Thermometers,’’ and in temperature of the bath medium shall the IP requirements for IP Standard not vary by more than 0.01 °C. (0.02 °F.) over the length of the viscometers, or Thermometers. Standardize before use between the positions of the (see S6.3.3(b)). Use two standardized viscometers, or at the locations of the thermometers in the bath.

TABLE IV—KINEMATIC VISCOSITY THERMOMETERS

Temperature range For tests at Subdivisions Thermometer number °C. °F. °C. °F. °C. °F. ASTM IP

Minus 55.3 to minus 52.5 .. Minus 67.5 to minus 62.5 Minus 55 .. Minus 67 .. 0.05 0.1 74 F 69 F. or C. Minus 41.4 to minus 38.6 .. Minus 42.5 to minus 37.5 Minus 40 .. Minus 40 .. 0.05 0.1 73 F 68 F. or C. 98.6 to 101.4 ...... 207.5 to 212.5 ...... 100 ...... 212 ...... 0.05 0.1 30 F 32 F. or C.

(e) Timing device. Stop watch or other sion.’’ The ice point of standardized timing device graduated in divisions thermometers shall be determined be- representing not more than 0.2 second, fore use and the official corrections with an accuracy of at least ±0.05 per- shall be adjusted to conform to the cent when tested over intervals of 15 changes in ice points. (See ASTM E77– minutes. Electrical timing devices may 66, ‘‘Verification and Calibration of Liq- be used when the current frequency is uid-in-Glass Thermometers.’’) controlled to an accuracy of 0.01 per- (c) Timers. Time signals are broadcast cent or better. by the National Bureau of Standards, S6.3.3 Standardization. Station WWV, Washington, DC at 2.5, 5, (a) Viscometers. Use viscometers cali- 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, and 35 Mc/sec (MHz). brated in accordance with appendix 1 of Time signals are also broadcast by Sta- ASTM D445–65, ‘‘Viscosity of Trans- tion CHU from Ottawa, Canada, at parent and Opaque Liquids (Kinematic 3.330, 7.335, and 14.670 Mc/sec, and Sta- and Dynamic Viscosities).’’ The calibra- tion MSF at Rugby, United Kingdom, tion constant, C, is dependent upon the at 2.5, 5, and 10 Mc/sec. gravitational acceleration at the place S6.3.4 Procedure. (a) Set and main- of calibration. This must, therefore, be tain the bath at the appropriate test supplied by the standardization labora- temperature (see S5.1.3) within the lim- tory together with the instrument con- its specified in S6.3.2(c). Apply the nec- stant. Where the acceleration of grav- essary corrections, if any, to all ther- ity, g, in the two locations differs by mometer readings. more than 0.1 percent, correct the cali- (b) Select a clean, dry, calibrated vis- bration constant as follows: cometer giving a flow time not less C2=(g2/g1)×C1 than its specified minimum, or 200 sec- onds, whichever is the greater. where the subscripts 1 and 2 indicate (c) Charge the viscometer in the respectively the standardization lab- manner used when the instrument was oratory and the testing laboratory. calibrated. Do not filter or dry the (b) Thermometers. Check liquid-in- brake fluid, but protect it from con- glass thermometers to the nearest 0.01 tamination by dirt and moisture dur- °C. (0.02 °F.) by direct comparison with ing filling and measurements. a standardized thermometer. Kine- (1) Charge the suspended level matic Viscosity Test Thermometers viscometers by tilting about 30° from shall be standardized at ‘‘total immer- the vertical and pouring sufficient 352

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00352 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.116

brake fluid through the fill tube into water and acetone, and dry with clean the lower reservoir so that when the dry air. viscometer is returned to vertical posi- (b) Between successive samples rinse tion the meniscus is between the fill the viscometer with ethanol marks. For measurements below 0 °C. (isopropanol when testing DOT 5 fluids) (32 °F.), before placing the filled vis- followed by an acetone or ether rinse. cometer into the constant temperature Pass a slow stream of filtered dry air bath, draw the sample into the working through the viscometer until the last capillary and timing bulb and insert trace of solvent is removed. small rubber stoppers to suspend the S6.3.6 Calculation. (a) The following fluid in this position, to prevent accu- viscometers have a fixed volume mulation of water condensate on the charged at ambient temperature, and walls of the critical portions of the vis- as a consequence C varies with test cometer. Alternatively, fit loosely temperature: Cannon-Fenske Routine, packed drying tubes into the open ends Pinkevitch, Cannon-Manning Semi- of the viscometer to prevent water con- Micro, and Cannon Fenske Opaque. To densation, but do not restrict the flow calculate C at test temperatures other of the sample under test by the pres- than the calibration temperature for sures created in the instrument. these viscometers, see ASTM D2515–66, (2) If a Cannon-Fenske Routine vis- ‘‘Kinematic Glass Viscometers’’ or fol- cometer is used, charge by inverting low instructions given on the manufac- and immersing the smaller arm into turer’s certificate of calibration. the brake fluid and applying vacuum to (b) Average the four timed runs on the larger arm. Fill the tube to the the duplicate samples to determine the upper timing mark, and return the vis- kinematic viscosities. cometer to an upright position. S6.3.7 Precision (at 95 percent con- (d) Mount the viscometer in the bath fidence level). in a true vertical position (see (a) Repeatability. If results on dupli- S6.3.2(b)). cate samples by the same operator dif- (e) The viscometer shall remain in fer by more than 1 percent of their the bath until it reaches the test tem- mean, repeat the tests. perature. S6.4 pH value. Determine the pH (f) At temperatures below 0 °C. (32 value of a brake fluid by running one °F.) conduct an untimed preliminary sample according to the following pro- run by allowing the brake fluid to cedure. drain through the capillary into the S6.4.1 Summary of the procedure. lower reservoir after the test tempera- Brake fluid is diluted with an equal ture has been established. volume of an ethanol-water solution. (g) Adjust the head level of the brake The pH of the resultant mixture is fluid to a position in the capillary arm measured with a prescribed pH meter about 5 mm. above the first timing assembly at 23 °C. (73.4 °F.). mark. S6.4.2 Apparatus. The pH assembly (h) With brake fluid flowing freely consists of the pH meter, glass elec- measure to within 0.2 second the time trode, and calomel electrode, as speci- required for the meniscus to pass from fied in Appendices A1.1, A1.2, and A1.3 the first timing mark to the second. If of ASTM D 1121–67, ‘‘Standard Method this flow time is less than the min- of Test for Reserve Alkalinity of En- imum specified for the viscometer, or gine Antifreezes and Antirusts.’’ The 200 seconds, whichever is greater, re- glass electrode is a full range type (pH peat using a viscometer with a cap- 0–14), with low sodium error. illary of smaller diameter. S6.4.3 Reagents. Reagent grade (i) Repeat S6.3.4 (g) and (h). If the chemicals conforming to the specifica- two timed runs do not agree within 0.2 tions of the Committee on Analytical percent, reject and repeat using a fresh Reagents of the American Chemical sample of brake fluid. Society. S6.3.5 Cleaning the viscometers. (a) (a) Distilled water. Distilled water Periodically clean the instrument with (S7.1) shall be boiled for about 15 min- chromic acid to remove organic depos- utes to remove carbon dioxide, and pro- its. Rinse thoroughly with distilled tected with a soda-lime tube or its

353

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00353 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.116 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

equivalent while cooling and in stor- (a) Maintenance of electrodes. Clean age. (Take precautions to prevent con- the glass electrode before using by im- tamination by the materials used for mersing in cold chromic-acid cleaning protection against carbon dioxide.) The solution. Drain the calomel electrode pH of the boiled distilled water shall be and fill with KCl electrolyte, keeping between 6.2 and 7.2 at 25 °C. (77 °F.). level above that of the mixture at all (b) Standard buffer solutions. Prepare times. When not in use, immerse the buffer solutions for calibrating the pH lower halves of the electrodes in dis- meter and electrode pair from salts tilled water, and do not immerse in the sold specifically for use, either singly mixture for any appreciable period of or in combination, as pH standards. time between determinations. Dry salts for 1 hour at 110 °C. (230 °F.) (b) Preparation of electrodes. Condition before use except for borax which shall new glass electrodes and those that be used as the decahydrate. Store solu- have been stored dry as recommended tions with pH less than 9.5 in bottles of by the manufacturer. Before and after chemically resistant glass or poly- using, wipe the glass electrode thor- ethylene. Store the alkaline phosphate oughly with a clean cloth, or a soft ab- solution in a glass bottle coated inside sorbent tissue, and rinse with distilled with paraffin. Do not use a standard water. Before each pH determination, with an age exceeding three months. soak the prepared electrode in distilled (1) Potassium hydrogen phthalate water for at least 2 minutes. Imme- buffer solution (0.05 M, pH=4.01 at 25 °C. diately before use, remove any excess (77 °F.)). Dissolve 10.21 g. of potassium water from the tips of the electrode. hydrogen phthalate (KHC8 H4 O4) in dis- S6.4.5 Standardization of the pH as- tilled water. Dilute to 1 liter. sembly and testing of the electrodes. (a) (2) Neutral phosphate buffer solution Immediately before use, standardize (0.025 M with respect to each phosphate the pH assembly with a standard buffer salt, pH=6.86 at 25 °C. (77 °F.)). Dissolve solution. Then use a second standard 3.40 g. of potassium dihydrogen phos- buffer solution to check the linearity phate (KH2 PO4) and 3.55 g. of anhy- of the response of the electrodes at dif- drous disodium hydrogen phosphate ferent pH values, and to detect a faulty (Na2 HPO4) in distilled water. glass electrode or incorrect tempera- (3) Borax buffer solution (0.01 M, ture compensation. The two buffer so- pH=9.18 at 25 °C. (77 °F.)). Dissolve 3.81 lutions bracket the anticipated pH g. of disodium tetraborate decahydrate value of the test brake fluid. (Na2 B4 O7°10H2 O) in distilled water, (b) Allow instrument to warm up, and dilute to 1 liter. Stopper the bottle and adjust according to the manufac- except when actually in use. turer’s instructions. Immerse the tips (4) Alkaline phosphate buffer solu- of the electrodes in a standard buffer tion (0.01 M trisodium phosphate, solution and allow the temperature of pH=11.72 at 25 °C. (77 °F.)). Dissolve 1.42 the buffer solution and the electrodes g. of anhydrous disodium hydrogen to equalize. Set the temperature knob phosphate (Na2 HPO4) in 100 ml. of a 0.1 at the temperature of the buffer solu- M carbonate-free solution of sodium tion. Adjust the standardization or hydroxide. Dilute to 1 liter with dis- asymmetry potential control until the tilled water. meter registers a scale reading, in pH (5) Potassium chloride electrolyte. units, equal to the known pH of the Prepare a saturated solution of potas- standardizing buffer solution. sium chloride (KCl) in distilled water. (c) Rinse the electrodes with distilled (c) Ethanol-water mixture. To 80 parts water and remove excess water from by volume of ethanol (S7.3) add 20 parts the tips. Immerse the electrodes in a by volume of distilled water. Adjust second standard buffer solution. The the pH of the mixture to 7 ±0.1 using 0.1 reading of the meter shall agree with N sodium hydroxide (NaOH) solution. If the known pH of the second standard more than 4 ml. of NaOH solution per buffer solution within ±0.05 unit with- liter of mixture is required for neutral- out changing the setting of the stand- ization, discard the mixture. ardization of asymmetry potential con- S6.4.4 Preparation of electrode system. trol.

354

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00354 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.116

(d) A faulty electrode is indicated by 1995, ‘‘Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid.’’ failure to obtain a correct value for the (SAE RM–66–03 Compatibility Fluid as pH of the second standard buffer solu- described in appendix A of SAE Stand- tion after the meter has been standard- ard J1703 Nov83, ‘‘Motor Vehicle Brake ized with the first. Fluid,’’ November 1983, may be used in S6.4.6 Procedure. To 50 ±1 ml. of the place of SAE RM–66–04 until January 1, test brake fluid add 50 ±1 ml. of the 1995.) ethanol-water (S6.4.3(c)) and mix thor- S6.5.4.2 Procedure. (a) Mix 30 ±1 ml. oughly. Immerse the electrodes in the of the brake fluid with 30 ±1 ml. of SAE mixture. Allow the system to come to RM–66–04 Compatibility Fluid in a boil- equilibrium, readjust the temperature ing point flask (S6.1.2(a)). Determine compensation if necessary, and take the initial ERBP of the mixture by ap- the pH reading. plying heat to the flask so that the S6.5 Fluid stability. Evaluate the fluid is refluxing in 10 ±2 minutes at a heat and chemical stability of a brake rate in excess of 1 drop per second, but fluid by the following procedure, run- not more than 5 drops per second. Note ning duplicate samples for each test the maximum fluid temperature ob- and averaging the results. served during the first minute after the S6.5.1 Summary of the procedure. The fluid begins refluxing at a rate in ex- degradation of the brake fluid at ele- cess of 1 drop per second. Over the next vated temperature, alone or in a mix- 15 ±1 minutes, adjust and maintain the ture with a reference fluid, is evaluated reflux rate at 1 to 2 drops per second. by determining the change in boiling Maintain this rate for an additional 2 point after a period of heating under minutes, recording the average value of reflux conditions. four temperature readings taken at 30 S6.5.2 Apparatus. Use the apparatus second intervals as the final ERBP. and preparation specified in S6.1.2 and (b) Thermometer and barometric cor- S6.1.3. rections are not required. S6.5.3 High temperature stability. S6.5.4.3 Calculation. The difference S6.5.3.1 Procedure. (a) Heat a new 60 between the initial ERBP and the final ±1 ml. sample of the brake fluid to 185° average temperature is the change in ±2 °C. (365° ±3.6 °F.). Hold at this tem- temperature of the refluxing mixture. perature for 120 ±5 minutes. Bring to a Average the results of the duplicates to reflux rate in excess of 1 drop per sec- the nearest 0.5 °C (1.0 °F). ond within 5 minutes. The reflux rate S6.6 Corrosion. Evaluate the corro- should not exceed 5 drops per second at siveness of a brake fluid by running du- any time. Over the next 5 ±2 minutes plicate samples according to the fol- adjust the heating rate to obtain an lowing procedure. equilibrium reflux rate of 1 to 2 drops S6.6.1 Summary of the procedure. Six per second. Maintain this rate for an specified metal corrosion test strips additional 2 minutes, taking four tem- are polished, cleaned, and weighed, perature readings at 30–second inter- then assembled as described. Assembly vals. Average these as the observed is placed on a standard wheel cylinder ERBP. If no reflux is evident when the cup in a corrosion test jar, immersed in fluid temperature reaches 260 °C. (500 the water-wet brake fluid, capped and °F), discontinue heating and report placed in an oven at 100 °C. (212 °F.) for ERBP as in excess of 260 °C. (500 °F.). 120 hours. Upon removal and cooling, S6.5.3.2 Calculation. Correct the ob- the strips, fluid, and cups are examined served ERBP for thermometer and bar- and tested. ometric pressure factors according to S6.6.2 Equipment. (a) Balance. An an- S6.1.5 (a) and (b). Average the corrected alytical balance having a minimum ca- ERBP’s of the duplicate samples. The pacity of 50 grams and capable of difference between this average and the weighing to the nearest 0.1 mg. original ERBP obtained in S6.1 is the (b) Desiccators. Desiccators con- change in ERBP of the fluid. taining silica gel or other suitable des- S6.5.4 Chemical stability. iccant. S6.5.4.1 Materials. SAE RM–66–04 (c) Oven. Gravity convection oven ca- Compatibility Fluid as described in ap- pable of maintaining the desired set pendix B of SAE Standard J1703 JAN point within 2 °C. (3.6 °F.).

355

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00355 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.116 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(d) Micrometer. A machinist’s mi- (isopropanol when testing DOT 5 SBBF crometer 25 to 50 mm. (1 to 2 inches) fluids); dry the strips and assembly capacity, or an optical comparator, ca- hardware with a clean lint free cloth or pable of measuring the diameter of the use filtered compressed air and place SBR wheel cylinder (WC) cups to the the strips and hardware in a desiccator nearest 0.02 mm. (0.001 inch). containing silica gel or other suitable S6.6.3 Materials. (a) Corrosion test desiccant and maintained at 23° ±5 °C. strips. Two sets of strips from each of (73.4° ±9 °F.), for at least 1 hour. Handle the metals listed in appendix C of SAE the strips with forceps after polishing. Standard J1703b. Each strip shall be ap- Weigh and record the weight of each proximately 8 cm. long, 1.3 cm. wide, strip to the nearest 0.1 mg. Assemble not more than 0.6 cm. thick, and have the strips on a clean dry machine a surface area of 25 ±5 sq. cm. and a screw, with matching plain nut, in the hole 4 to 5 mm. (0.16 to 0.20 inch) in di- order of tinned iron, steel, aluminum, ameter on the centerline about 6 mm. cast iron, brass, and copper. Bend the from one end. The hole shall be clean strips, other than the cast iron, so that and free from burrs. Tinned iron strips there is a separation of 3 ±1⁄2 mm. (1⁄8 shall be unused. Other strips, if used, ±1⁄64 inch) between adjacent strips for a shall not be employed if they cannot be distance of about 5 cm. (2 inches) from polished to a high finish. the free end of the strips. (See Figure (b) SBR cups. Two unused standard 4.) Tighten the screw on each test strip SAE SBR wheel cylinder (WC) cups, as assembly so that the strips are in elec- specified in S7.6. trolytic contact, and can be lifted by (c) Corrosion test jars and lids. Two either of the outer strips (tinned iron screw-top straight-sided round glass or copper) without any of the strips jars, each having a capacity of approxi- moving relative to the others when mately 475 ml. and inner dimensions of held horizontally. Immerse the strip approximately 100 mm. in height and 75 assemblies in 90 percent ethyl alcohol. mm. in diameter, and a tinned steel lid Dry with dried filtered compressed air, (no insert or organic coating) vented then desiccate at least 1 hour before with a hole 0.8 ±0.1 mm. (0.031 ±0.004 use. inch) in diameter (No. 68 drill). (d) Machine screws and nuts. Clean, rust and oil-free, uncoated mild steel round or fillister head machine screws, size 6 or 8–32 UNC–Class 2A, five- eighths or three-fourths inch long (or equivalent metric sizes), and matching uncoated nuts. (e) Supplies for polishing strips. Water- proof silicon carbide paper, grit No. 320 A; grade 00 steel wool, lint-free polishing cloth. (f) Distilled water as specified in S7.1. (g) Ethanol as specified in S7.3. (h) Isopropanol as specified in S7.7. S6.6.4 Preparation. (a) Corrosion test strips. Except for the tinned iron strips, abrade corrosion test strips on all surface areas with sil- icon carbide paper wet with ethanol FIG. 4—CORROSION STRIP ASSEMBLY (isopropanol when testing DOT 5 SBBF (b) SBR WC cups. Measure the base fluids) until all surface scratches, cuts diameters of the two standard SBR and pits are removed. Use a new piece cups, using an optical comparator or of paper for each different type of micrometer, to the nearest 0.02 mm. metal. Polish the strips with the 00 (0.001 inch) along the centerline of the grade steel wool. Wash all strips, in- SAE and rubber-type identifications cluding the tinned iron and the assem- and at right angles to this centerline. bly hardware, with ethanol Take the measurements at least 0.4

356

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00356 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.046 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.116

mm. (0.015 inch) above the bottom edge Measure the base diameter and hard- and parallel to the base of the cup. Dis- ness of each cup within 15 minutes card any cup if the two measured diam- after removal from the mixture. Exam- eters differ by more than 0.08 mm. ine the mixture for gelling. Agitate the (0.003 inch). Average the two readings mixture to suspend and uniformly dis- on each cup. Determine the hardness of perse sediment. From each jar, transfer the cups according to S7.4. a 100 ml. portion of the mixture to an S6.6.5 Procedure. Rinse the cups in ASTM cone-shaped centrifuge tube. De- ethanol (isopropanol when testing DOT termine the percent sediment after 5 SBBF fluids) for not more than 30 centrifuging as described in S7.5. Meas- seconds and wipe dry with a clean lint- ure the pH value of the corrosion text free cloth. Place one cup with lip edge fluid according to S6.4.6. Measure the facing up, in each jar. Insert a metal pH value of the test mixture according strip assembly inside each cup with the to S6.4.6. fastened end down and the free end ex- tending upward. (See Figure 5.) When testing brake fluids, except DOT 5 SBBF, mix 760 ml. of brake fluid with 40 ml. of distilled water. When testing DOT 5 SBBF’s, humidify 800 ml. of brake fluid in accordance with S6.2, eliminating determination of the ERBP. Using this water-wet mixture, cover each strip assembly to a min- imum depth of 10 mm. above the tops of the strips. Tighten the lids and place the jars for 120 ±2 hours in an oven maintained at 100° ±2 °C. (212° ±3.6 °F.). Allow the jars to cool at 23° ±5 °C. (73.4° ±9 °F.) for 60 to 90 minutes. Imme- diately remove the strips from the jars using forceps, agitating the strip as- sembly in the fluid to remove loose ad- hering sediment. Examine the test strips and jars for adhering crystalline deposits. Disassemble the metal strips, FIG. 5—CORROSION TEST APPARATUS and remove adhering fluid by flushing S6.6.6 Calculation. (a) Measure the with water; clean each strip by wiping area of each type of test strip to the with a clean cloth wetted with ethanol nearest square centimeter. Divide the (isopropanol when testing DOT 5 average change in mass for each type fluids). Examine the strips for evidence by the area of that type. of corrosion and pitting. Disregard (b) Note other data and evaluations staining or discoloration. Place the indicating compliance with S5.1.6. In strips in a desiccator containing silica the event of a marginal pass on inspec- gel or other suitable desiccant, main- tion by attributes, or of a failure in one tained at 23° ±5 °C. (73.4° ±9 °F.), for at of the duplicates, run another set of least 1 hour. Weigh each strip to the duplicate samples. Both repeat samples nearest 0.1 mg. Determine the change shall meet all requirements of S5.1.6. in weight of each metal strip. Average S6.7 Fluidity and appearance at low the results for the two strips of each temperatures. Determine the fluidity type of metal. Immediately following and appearance of a sample of brake the cooling period, remove the cups fluid at each of two selected tempera- from the jars with forceps. Remove tures by the following procedure. loose adhering sediment by agitation of S6.7.1 Summary of procedure. Brake the cups in the mixture. Rinse the cups fluid is chilled to expected minimum in ethanol (isopropanol when testing exposure temperatures and observed DOT 5 fluids) and air-dry. Examine the for clarity, gellation, sediment, separa- cups for evidence of sloughing, blisters, tion of components, excessive viscosity and other forms of disintegration. or thixotropy.

357

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00357 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.047 § 571.116 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S6.7.2 Apparatus. (a) Oil sample bot- (c) Balance. A balance having a ca- tle. Two clear flint glass 4–ounce bot- pacity of at least 100 grams, capable of tles made especially for sampling oil weighing to the nearest 0.01 gram, and and other liquids, with a capacity of suitable for weighing the petri dishes. approximately 125 ml., an outside di- (d) Oil sample bottle. A glass sample ameter of 37 ±0.05 mm. and an overall bottle as described in S6.7.2(a). height of 165 ±2.5 mm. (e) Cold chamber. Air bath cold cham- (b) Cold chamber. An air bath cold ber capable of maintaining an oil sam- chamber capable of maintaining stor- ple bottle at minus 5° ±1 °C. (23° ±2 °F.). age temperatures down to minus 55 °C. (f) Timing device. A timing device as (minus 67 °F.) with an accuracy of ±2 described in S6.3.2(e). °C. (3.6 °F.). S6.8.3 Procedure. Obtain the tare (c) Timing device. A timing device in weight of each of the four covered petri accordance with S6.3.2(e). dishes to the nearest 0.01 gram. Place S6.7.3 Procedure. (a) Place 100 ±1 ml. 25 ±1 ml. of brake fluid in each dish, re- of brake fluid at room temperature in place proper covers and reweigh. Deter- an oil sample bottle. Stopper the bottle mine the weight of each brake fluid with an unused cork and place in the test specimen by the difference. Place cold chamber at the higher storage the four dishes, each inside its inverted temperature specified in Table II cover, in the oven at 100° ±2 °C. (212° ±4 (S5.1.7(c)). After 144 ±4 hours remove °F.) for 46 ±2 hours. (Note: Do not si- the bottle from the chamber, quickly multaneously heat more than one fluid wipe it with a clean, lint-free cloth, in the same oven.) Remove the dishes saturated with ethanol (isopropanol from the oven, allow to cool to 23° ±5 when testing DOT 5 fluids) or acetone. °C. (73.4° ±9 °F.), and weigh. Return to Examine the fluid for evidence of the oven for an additional 24 ±2 hours. sludging, sedimentation, crystalliza- If at the end of 72 ±4 hours the average tion, or stratification. Invert the bottle loss by evaporation is less than 60 per- and determine the number of seconds cent, discontinue the evaporation pro- required for the air bubble to travel to cedure and proceed with examination the top of the fluid. Let sample warm of the residue. Otherwise, continue this to room temperature and examine. procedure either until equilibrium is (b) Repeat S6.7.3(a), substituting the reached as evidenced by an incre- lower cold chamber temperature speci- mental mass loss of less than 0.25 gram fied in Table II, and a storage period of ± in 24 hours on all individual dishes or 6 hours 12 minutes. for a maximum of 7 days. During the NOTE: Test specimens from either storage heating and weighing operation, if it is temperature may be used for the other only necessary to remove the dishes from after warming up to room temperature. the oven for a period of longer than 1 S6.8 Evaporation. The evaporation hour, the dishes shall be stored in a residue, and pour point of the evapo- desiccator as soon as cooled to room ration residue of brake fluid, are deter- temperature. Calculate the percentage mined by the following procedure. Four of fluid evaporated from each dish. Ex- replicate samples are run. amine the residue in the dishes at the S6.8.1 Summary of the procedure. The end of 1 hour at 23° ±5 °C. (73.4° ±9 °F.). volatile diluent portion of a brake fluid Rub any sediment with the fingertip to is evaporated in an oven at 100 °C. (212 determine grittiness or abrasiveness. °F.). The nonvolatile lubricant portion Combine the residues from all four (evaporation residue) is measured and dishes in a 118 mL (4-ounce) oil-sample examined for grittiness; the residues bottle and store vertically in a cold are then combined and checked to as- chamber at minus 5° ±1 °C. (23° ±5 °F.) sure fluidity at minus 5 °C. (23 °F.). for 60 ±10 minutes. Quickly remove the S6.8.2 Apparatus. bottle and place in the horizontal posi- (a) Petri dishes. Four covered glass tion. The residue must flow at least 5 petri dishes approximately 100 mm. in mm (0.2 inch) along the tube within 5 diameter and 15 mm. in height. seconds. (b) Oven. A top-vented gravity-con- S6.8.4 Calculation. The average of vection oven capable of maintaining a the percentage evaporated from all temperature of 100° ±2 °C. (212° ±3.6 °F.). four dishes is the loss by evaporation.

358

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00358 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.116

S6.9 Water tolerance. Evaluate the S6.10 Compatibility. The compat- water tolerance characteristics of a ibility of a brake fluid with other brake fluid by running one test speci- brake fluids shall be evaluated by run- men according to the following proce- ning one test sample according to the dure. following procedure. S6.9.1 Summary of the procedure. S6.10.1 Summary of the procedure. Brake fluid, except DOT 5 SBBF, is Brake fluid is mixed with an equal diluted with 3.5 percent water (DOT 5 volume of SAE RM–66–04 Compatibility SBBF is humidified), then stored at Fluid, then tested in the same way as minus 40 °C. (minus 40 °F.) for 120 for water tolerance (S6.9) except that hours. The cold, water-wet fluid is first the bubble flow time is not measured. examined for clarity, stratification, This test is an indication of the com- and sedimentation, then placed in an patibility of the test fluid with other oven at 60 °C. (140 °F.) for 24 hours. On motor vehicle brake fluids at both high removal, it is again examined for strat- and low temperatures. ification, and the volume percent of S6.10.2 Apparatus and materials. sediment determined by centrifuging. (a) Centrifuge tube. See S7.5.1(a). S6.9.2 Apparatus. (b) Centrifuge. See S7.5.1(b). (a) Centrifuge tube. See S7.5.1(a). (c) Cold Chamber. See S6.7.2(b) (b) Centrifuge. See S7.5.1(b). (d) Oven. See S6.9.2(d) (c) Cold chamber. See S6.7.2(b). (e) SAE RM–66–04 Compatibility Fluid. (d) Oven. Gravity or forced convec- As described in appendix B of SAE tion oven. Standard J1703 JAN 1995 ‘‘Motor Vehi- (e) Timing device. See S6.3.2(e). cle Brake Fluid.’’ (SAE RM–66–03 Com- S6.9.3 Procedure. patibility Fluid as described in appen- (a) At low temperature. Humidify 100 dix A of SAE Standard J1703 NOV83, ±1 ml. of DOT 5 SBBF brake fluid in ac- ‘‘Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid,’’ Novem- cordance with S6.2 eliminating deter- ber 1983, may be used in place of SAE mination of the ERBP. When testing RM–66–04 until January 1, 1995.) brake fluids except DOT 5 SBBF, mix S6.10.3 Procedure. 3.5 ±0.1 ml. of distilled water with 100 ±1 (a) At low temperature. ml. of the brake fluid; pour into a cen- Mix 50 ±0.5 mL of brake fluid with 50 trifuge tube. Stopper the tube with a ±0.5 mL of SAE RM–66–04 Compatibility clean cork and place in the cold cham- Fluid. Pour this mixture into a cen- ber maintained at minus 40 ±2 °C. trifuge tube and stopper with a clean (minus 40 ±3.6 °F.). After 120 hours ±2 dry cork. Place tube in the cold cham- hours remove the tube, quickly wipe ber maintained at minus 40° ±2 °C. with clean lint-free cloth saturated (minus 40° ±4 °F). After 24 ±2 hours, re- with ethanol or acetone and examine move tube, quickly wipe with a clean the fluid for evidence of sludging, sedi- lint-free cloth saturated with ethanol mentation, crystallization, or strati- (isopropanol when testing DOT 5 fluids) fication. Invert the tube and determine or acetone. Examine the test specimen the number of seconds required for the for evidence of slugging, sedimenta- air bubble to travel to the top of the tion, or crystallization. Test fluids, ex- fluid. (The air bubble is considered to cept DOT 5 SBBF, shall be examined have reached the top of the fluid when for stratification. the top of the bubble reaches the 2 ml. S6.11 Resistance to oxidation. The graduation of the centrifuge tube.) If stability of a brake fluid under the wet fluid has become cloudy, warm oxidative conditions shall be evaluated to 23 ±5 °C. (73.4 ±9 °F.) and note appear- by running duplicate samples accord- ance and fluidity. ing to the following procedure. (b) At 60 °C. (140 °F.). Place tube and S6.11.1 Summary of procedure. brake fluid from S6.9.3(a) in an oven Brake fluids, except DOT 5 SBBF, are maintained at 60° ±2 °C. (140° ±3.6 °F.) activated with a mixture of approxi- for 24 ±2 hours. Remove the tube and mately 0.2 percent benzoyl peroxide immediately examine the contents for and 5 percent water. DOT 5 SBBF is hu- evidence of stratification. Determine midified in accordance with S6.2 elimi- the percent sediment by centrifuging nating determination of the ERBP, and as described in S7.5. then approximately 0.2 percent benzoyl

359

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00359 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.116 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

peroxide is added. A corrosion test DOT 5 SBBF, add 0.060 ±.002 grams of strip assembly consisting of cast iron benzoyl peroxide, and 1.50 ±0.05 ml. of and an aluminum strip separated by distilled water. For DOT 5 SBBF, use tinfoil squares at each end is then rest- test fluid humidified in accordance ed on a piece of SBR WC cup positioned with S6.2, and add only the benzoyl so that the test strip is half immersed peroxide. Stopper the tube loosely with in the fluid and oven aged at 70 °C. (158 a clean dry cork, shake, and place in an °F.) for 168 hours. At the end of this pe- oven for 2 hours at 70° ±2 °C. (158° ±3.6 riod, the metal strips are examined for °F.). Shake every 15 minutes to effect pitting, etching, and loss of mass. solution of the peroxide, but do not wet S6.11.2 Equipment. cork. Remove the tube from the oven (a) Balance. See S6.6.2(a). and allow to cool to 23° ±5 °C. (73.4° ±9 (b) Desiccators. See S6.6.2(b). °F.) Begin testing according to para- (c) Oven. See S6.6.2(c). graph S6.11.5 not later than 24 hours (d) Three glass test tubes approxi- after removal of tube from oven. mately 22 mm. outside diameter by 175 S6.11.5 Procedure. Place a one-eighth mm. in length. SBR cup section in the bottom of each S6.11.3 Reagents and materials. tube. Add 10 ml. of prepared test mix- (a) Benzoyl peroxide, reagent grade, 96 ture to each test tube. Place a metal- percent. (Benzoyl peroxide that is strip assembly in each, the end of the brownish, or dusty, or has less than 90 strip without the screw resting on the percent purity, must be discarded.) Re- rubber, and the solution covering about agent strength may be evaluated by one-half the length of the strips. Stop- ASTM E298–68, Standard Methods for ‘‘ per the tubes with clean dry corks and Assay of Organic Peroxides. ’’ store upright for 70 ±2 hours at 23° ±5 (b) Corrosion test strips. Two sets of °C. (73.4° ±9 °F.). Loosen the corks and cast iron and aluminum metal test place the tubes for 168 ±2 hours in an strips as described in appendix C of oven maintained at 70° ±2 °C. (158° ±3.6 SAE Standard J1703b. °F.). Afterwards remove and dis- (c) Tinfoil. Four unused pieces of tin- assemble strips. Examine the strips foil approximately 12 mm. (1⁄2 inch) and note any gum deposits. Wipe the square and between 0.02 and 0.06 mm. (0.0008 and 0.0024 inch) in thickness. strips with a clean cloth wet with eth- The foil shall be at least 99.9 percent anol (isopropanol when testing DOT 5 tin and contain not more than 0.025 fluids) and note any pitting, etching or percent lead. roughening of surface disregarding (d) SBR cups. Two unused, approxi- stain or discoloration. Place the strips mately one-eighth sections of a stand- in a desiccator over silica gel or other ° ± ° ° ± ard SAE SBR WC cup (as described in suitable desiccant, at 23 5 C. (73.4 9 ° S7.6). F.) for at least 1 hour. Again weigh (e) Machine screw and nut. Two clean each strip to the nearest 0.1 mg. oil-free, No. 6 or 8–32×3⁄8¥ or 1⁄2–inch S6.11.6 Calculation. Determine corro- long (or equivalent metric size), round sion loss by dividing the change in or fillister head, uncoated mild steel mass of each metal strip by the total machine screws, with matching plain surface area of each strip measured in nuts. square millimeters (mm2), to the near- S6.11.4 Preparation. est square millimeter (mm2). Average (a) Corrosion test strips. Prepare two the results for the two strips of each sets of aluminum and cast iron test type of metal, rounding to the nearest strips according to S6.6.4(a) except for 0.05 mg. per 100 square millimeter assembly. Weigh each strip to the near- (mm2). If only one of the duplicates est 0.1 mg. and assemble a strip of each fails for any reason, run a second set of metal on a machine screw, separating duplicate samples. Both repeat samples the strips at each end with a piece of shall meet all requirements of S5.1.11. tinfoil. Tighten the nut enough to hold S6.12 Effect on SBR cups. The effects both pieces of foil firmly in place. of a brake fluid in swelling, softening, (b) Test mixture.Place 30 ±1 ml. of the and otherwise affecting standard SBR brake fluid under test in a 22 by 175 WC cups shall be evaluated by the fol- mm. test tube. For all fluids except lowing procedure.

360

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00360 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.116

S6.12.1 Summary of the procedure. values for each pair is the change in Four standard SAE SBR WC cups are hardness. measured and their hardnesses deter- (c) Note disintegration as evidenced mined. The cups, two to a jar, are im- by stickiness, blisters, or sloughing. mersed in the test brake fluid. One jar S6.13 Stroking properties. Evaluate is heated for 70 hours at 70 °C. (158 °F), the lubricating properties, component and the other for 70 hours at 120 °C (248 compatibility, resistance to leakage, °F). Afterwards, the cups are washed, and related qualities of a brake fluid by examined for disintegration, remeas- running one sample according to the ured and their hardnesses redeter- following procedures. mined. S6.13.1 Summary of the procedure. S6.12.2 Equipment and supplies. Brake fluid is stroked under controlled (a) Oven. See S6.6.2(c). conditions at an elevated temperature (b) Glass jars and lids. Two screw-top, in a simulated motor vehicle hydraulic straight-sided round glass jars, each braking system consisting of three having a capacity of approximately 250 slave wheel cylinders and an actuating ml. and inner dimensions of approxi- master cylinder connected by steel tub- mately 125 mm. in height and 50 mm. ing. Referee standard parts are used. in diameter, and a tinned steel lid (no All parts are carefully cleaned, exam- insert or organic coating). ined, and certain measurements made (c) SBR cups. See S7.6. immediately prior to assembly for test. S6.12.3 Preparation. Measure the During the test, temperature, rate of base diameters of the SBR cups as de- pressure rise, maximum pressure, and scribed in S6.6.4(b), and the hardness of rate of stroking are specified and con- each as described in S7.4. trolled. The system is examined peri- S6.12.4 Procedure. Wash the cups in odically during stroking to assure that 90 percent ethanol (isopropanol when excessive leakage of fluid is not occur- testing DOT 5 fluids) (see S7.3), for not ring. Afterwards, the system is torn longer than 30 seconds and quickly dry down. Metal parts and SBR cups are with a clean, lint-free cloth. Using for- examined and remeasured. The brake ceps, place two cups into each of the fluid and any resultant sludge and de- two jars; add 75 ml. of brake fluid to bris are collected, examined, and test- each jar and cap tightly. Place one jar ed. in an oven held at 70° ±2 °C. (158 ±3.6 S6.13.2 Apparatus and equipment. °F.) for 70 ±2 hours. Place the other jar Either the drum and shoe type of in an oven held at 120° ±2 °C. (248° ±3.6 stroking apparatus (see Figure 1 of °F.) for 70 ±2 hours. Allow each jar to SAE Standard J1703b) except using cool for 60 to 90 minutes at 23° ±5 °C. only three sets of drum and shoe as- (73.4° ±9 °F.). Remove cups, wash with semblies, or the stroking fixture type ethanol (isopropanol when testing DOT apparatus as shown in Figure 2 of SAE 5 fluids) for not longer than 30 seconds, J1703Nov83, with the components ar- and quickly dry. Examine the cups for ranged as shown in Figure 1 of SAE disintegration as evidenced by sticki- J1703Nov83. The following components ness, blisters, or sloughing. Measure are required. the base diameter and hardness of each (a) Brake assemblies. With the drum cup within 15 minutes after removal and shoe apparatus: three drum and from the fluid. shoe assembly units (SAE RM–29a) con- S6.12.5 Calculation. (a) Calculate the sisting of three forward brake shoes change in base diameter for each cup. and three reverse brake shoes with lin- If the two values, at each temperature, ings and three front wheel brake drum do not differ by more than 0.10 mm. assemblies with assembly component (0.004 inch) average them to the nearest parts. With stroking fixture type appa- 0.02 mm. (0.001 inch). If the two values ratus: three fixture units including ap- differ by more than 0.10 mm., repeat propriate adapter mounting plates to the test at the appropriate tempera- hold brake wheel cylinder assemblies. ture and average the four values as the (b) Braking pressure actuation mecha- change in base diameter. nism. An actuating mechanism for ap- (b) Calculate the change in hardness plying a force to the master cylinder for each cup. The average of the two pushrod without side thrust. The

361

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00361 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.116 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

amount of force applied by the actu- (a) Standard SBR brake cups. Six ating mechanism shall be adjustable standard SAE SBR wheel cylinder test and capable of applying sufficient cups, one primary MC test cup, and one thrust to the master cylinder to create secondary MC test cup, all as described a pressure of at least 6895 kPa (1,000 in S7.6, for each test. p.s.i.) in the simulated brake system. A (b) Steel tubing. Double wall steel tub- hydraulic gage or pressure recorder, ing meeting SAE specification J527. A having a range of at least 0 to 6895 kPa complete replacement of tubing is es- (0 to 1,000 p.s.i), shall be installed be- sential when visual inspection indi- tween the master cylinder and the cates any corrosion or deposits on brake assemblies and shall be provided inner surface of tubing. Tubing from with a shutoff valve and with a bleed- master cylinder to one wheel cylinder ing valve for removing air from the shall be replaced for each test (min- connecting tubing. The actuating imum length .9 m.) Uniformity in tub- mechanism shall be designed to permit ing size is required between master cyl- adjustable stroking rates of approxi- inder and wheel cylinder. The standard mately 1,000 strokes per hour. Use a master cylinder has two outlets for mechanical or electrical counter to tubing, both of which must be used. record the total number of strokes. S6.13.4 Preparation of test apparatus. (c) Heated air bath cabinet. An insu- (a) Wheel cylinder assemblies. Use un- lated cabinet or oven having sufficient used wheel cylinder assemblies. Dis- capacity to house the three mounted assemble cylinders and discard cups. brake assemblies or stroking fixture Clean all metal parts with ethanol assemblies, master cylinder, and nec- (isopropanol when testing DOT 5 essary connections. A thermostatically fluids). Inspect the working surfaces of controlled heating system is required all metal parts for scoring, galling, or to maintain a temperature of 70° ±5 °C pitting and cylinder bore roughness, (158° ±9 °F) or 120° ±5 °C (248° ±9 °F). and discard all defective parts. Remove Heaters shall be shielded to prevent di- any stains on cylinder walls with cro- rect radiation to wheel or master cyl- cus cloth and ethanol (isopropanol inder. when testing DOT 5 fluids). If stains cannot be removed, discard the cyl- (d) Master cylinder (MC) assembly (SAE inder. Measure the internal diameter of RM–15a). One cast iron housing hydrau- each cylinder at a location approxi- lic brake system cylinder having a di- mately 19 mm. (0.75 inch) from each ameter of approximately 28 mm. (11⁄8 end of the cylinder bore, taking meas- inch) and fitted for a filler cap and urements in line with the hydraulic standpipe (see S6.13.2(e)). The MC pis- inlet opening and at right angles to ton shall be made from SAE CA360 this centerline. Discard the cylinder if copperbase alloy (half hard). A new MC any of these four readings exceeds the assembly is required for each test. maximum or minimum limits of 28.66 (e) Filler cap and standpipe. MC filler to 28.60 mm. (1.128 to 1.126 inch). Meas- cap provided with a glass or uncoated ure the outside diameter of each piston steel standpipe. Standpipe must pro- at two points approximately 90° apart. vide adequate volume for thermal ex- Discard any piston if either reading ex- pansion, yet permit measurement and ceeds the maximum or minimum limits adjustment of the fluid level in the sys- of 28.55 to 28.52 mm. (1.124 to 1.123 inch). tem to ±3 ml. Cap and standpipe may Select parts to insure that the clear- be cleaned and reused. ance between each piston and mating (f) Wheel cylinder (WC) assemblies (SAE cylinder is within 0.08 to 0.13 mm. (0.003 RM–14a). Three unused cast iron hous- to 0.005 inch). Use unused SBR cups. To ing straight bore hydraulic brake WC remove dirt and debris, rinse the cups assemblies having diameters of ap- in 90 percent ethyl alcohol for not more proximately 28 mm (11⁄8 inch) for each than 30 seconds and wipe dry with a test. Pistons shall be made from clean lint-free cloth. Discard any cups unanodized SAE AA 2024 aluminum showing defects such as cuts, molding alloy. flaws, or blisters. Measure the lip and (g) Micrometer. Same as S6.6.2(d). base diameters of all cups with an opti- S6.13.3 Materials. cal comparator or micrometer to the

362

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00362 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.116

nearest 0.02 mm. (0.001 inch) along the Manually stroke the master cylinder to centerline of the SAE and rubber-type insure that it operates easily. Install identifications and at right angles to the master cylinder in the simulated this centerline. Determine base diame- brake system. ter measurements at least 0.4 mm. (c) Assembly and adjustment of test ap- (0.015 inch) above the bottom edge and paratus. parallel to the base of the cup. Discard (1) When using a shoe and drum type any cup if the two measured lip or base apparatus, adjust the brake shoe toe diameters differ by more than 0.08 mm. clearances to 1.0 ±0.1 mm (0.040 ±0.004 (0.003 inch). Average the lip and base inch). Fill the system with brake fluid, diameters of each cup. Determine the bleeding all wheel cylinders and the hardness of all cups according to S7.4. pressure gage to remove entrapped air. Dip the rubber and metal parts of Operate the actuator manually to wheel cylinders, except housing and apply a pressure greater than the re- rubber boots, in the fluid to be tested quired operating pressure and inspect and install them in accordance with the system for leaks. Adjust the actu- the manufacturer’s instructions. Manu- ator and/or pressure relief valve to ob- ally stroke the cylinders to insure that tain a pressure of 6895 kPa ±345 kPa they operate easily. Install cylinders in (1,000 ±50 p.s.i.). A smooth pressure the simulated brake system. stroke pattern is required when using a (b) Master cylinder assembly. Use an shoe and drum type apparatus. The unused master cylinder and unused pressure is relatively low during the standard SBR primary and secondary first part of the stroke and then builds MC cups which have been inspected, up smoothly to the maximum stroking measured and cleaned in the manner pressure at the end of the stroke, to specified in S6.13.4(a), omitting hard- permit the primary cup to pass the ness of the secondary MC cup. How- compensating hole at a relatively low ever, prior to determining the lip and pressure. Using stroking fixtures, ad- base diameters of the secondary cup, just the actuator and/or pressure relief dip the cup in test brake fluid, assem- valve to obtain a pressure of 6895 kPa ble on the MC piston, and maintain the ±345 kPa (1,000 ±50 p.s.i.). assembly in a vertical position at 23° ±5 (2) Adjust the stroking rate to 1,000 °C. (73.4° ±9 °F.) for at least 12 hours. ±100 strokes per hour. Record the fluid Inspect the relief and supply ports of level in the master cylinder standpipe. the master cylinder; discard the cyl- S6.13.5 Procedure. Operate the sys- inder if ports have burrs or wire edges. tem for 16,000 ±1,000 cycles at 23° ±5 °C. Measure the internal diameter of the (73.4° ±9 °F.). Repair any leakage, read- cylinder at two locations (approxi- just the brake shoe clearances, and add mately midway between the relief and fluid to the master cylinder standpipe supply ports and approximately 19 mm. to bring to the level originally re- (0.75 inch) beyond the relief port to- corded, if necessary. Start the test ward the bottom or discharge end of again and raise the temperature of the the bore), taking measurements at cabinet within 6 ±2 hours to 120° ±5 °C. each location on the vertical and hori- (248° ±9 °F.). During the test observe op- zontal centerline of the bore. Discard eration of wheel cylinders for improper the cylinder if any reading exceeds the functioning and record the amount of maximum or minimum limits of 28.65 fluid required to replenish any loss, at to 28.57 mm. (1.128 to 1.125 inch). Meas- intervals of 24,000 strokes. Stop the ure the outside diameter of each end of test at the end of 85,000 total recorded the master cylinder piston at two strokes. These totals shall include the points approximately 90° apart. Discard number of strokes during operation at the piston if any of these four readings 23° ±5 °C. (73.4° ±9 °F.) and the number exceed the maximum or minimum lim- of strokes required to bring the system its of 28.55 to 28.52 mm. (1.124 to 1.123 to the operating temperature. Allow inch). Dip the rubber and metal parts equipment to cool to room tempera- of the master cylinder, except the ture. Examine the wheel cylinders for housing and push rod-boot assembly, in leakage. Stroke the assembly an addi- the brake fluid and install in accord- tional 100 strokes, examine wheel cyl- ance with manufacturer’s instructions. inders for leakage and record volume

363

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00363 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.116 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

loss of fluid. Within 16 hours after stop- well as the individual values (see ping the test, remove the master and S5.1.13(c)). wheel cylinders from the system, re- (c) Calculate the increases in base di- taining the fluid in the cylinders by ameters of the eight cups (see immediately capping or plugging the S5.1.13(e)). ports. Disassemble the cylinders, col- (d) Calculate the lip diameter inter- lecting the fluid from the master cyl- ference set for each of the eight cups inder and wheel cylinders in a glass jar. by the following formula and average When collecting the stroked fluid, re- the eight values (see S5.1.13(f)). move all residue which has deposited [(D1¥D2)/(D1¥D3)]×100=percentage Lip on rubber and metal internal parts by Diameter Interference Set rinsing and agitating such parts in the where: stroked fluid and using a soft brush to D1=Original lip diameter. assure that all loose adhering sediment D =Final lip diameter. is collected. Clean SBR cups in ethanol 2 D3=Original cylinder bore diameter. (isopropanol when testing DOT 5 fluids) and dry. Inspect the cups for sticki- S6.14 Container information. Each con- ness, scuffing, blistering, cracking, tainer with information marked di- chipping, and change in shape from rectly on the container surface or on a original appearance. Within 1 hour label (labels) affixed to the container after disassembly, measure the lip and pursuant to S5.2.2.2 or S5.2.2.3 is sub- base diameters of each cylinder cup by jected to the following procedure: (a) If the container has a label affixed the procedures specified in S6.13.4 (a) to it, make a single vertical cut all the and (b) with the exception that lip or way through the label with the con- base diameters of cups may now differ tainer in the vertical position. by more than 0.08 mm. (0.003 inch). De- (b) Immerse the container in the termine the hardness of each cup ac- same brake fluid or hydraulic system cording to S7.4. Note any sludge or gel mineral oil contained therein for 15 present in the test fluid. Within 1 hour minutes at room temperature (23 ±5 °C; after draining the cylinders, agitate 73.4 ±9 °F). the fluid in a glass jar to suspend and (c) Within 5 minutes after removing uniformly disperse sediment and trans- the container from the fluid or oil, re- fer a 100 ml. portion of this fluid to a move excess liquid from the surface of centrifuge tube and determine percent the container by wiping with a clean sediment as described in S7.5. Allow dry cloth. the tube and fluid to stand for 24 hours, S7. Auxiliary test methods and reagent recentrifuge and record any additional standards. sediment recovered. Inspect cylinder S7.1 Distilled water. Nonreferee rea- parts, note any gumming or any pit- gent water as specified in ASTM D1193– ting on pistons and cylinder walls. Dis- 70, ‘‘Standard Specifications for Rea- regard staining or discoloration. Rub gent Water,’’ or water of equal purity. any deposits adhering to cylinder walls S7.2 Water content of motor vehicle with a clean soft cloth wetted with eth- brake fluids. Use analytical methods anol (isopropanol when testing DOT 5 based on ASTM D1123–59, ‘‘Standard fluids) to determine abrasiveness and Method of Test for Water in Con- removability. Clean cylinder parts in centrated Engine Antifreezes by the Io- ethanol (isopropanol when testing DOT dine Reagent Method,’’ for determining 5 fluids) and dry. Measure and record the water content of brake fluids, or diameters of pistons and cylinders ac- other methods of analysis yielding cording to S6.13.4(a) and (b). Repeat the comparable results. To be acceptable test if mechanical failure occurs that for use, such other method must meas- may affect the evaluation of the brake ure the weight of water added to sam- fluid. ples of the SAE RM–66–04 and TEGME S6.13.6 Calculation. (a) Calculate the Compatibility Fluids within ±15 per- changes in diameters of cylinders and cent of the water added for additions pistons (see S5.1.13(b)). up to 0.8 percent by weight, and within (b) Calculate the average decrease in ±5 percent of the water added for addi- hardness of the seven cups tested, as tions greater than 0.8 percent by

364

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00364 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.116

weight. The SAE RM–66–04 Compat- tions shall be numbered as shown in ibility Fluid used to prepare the sam- Figure 6, and shall be clear and dis- ples must have an original ERBP of not tinct. Scale-error tolerances and small- less than 205 °C (401 °F) when tested in est graduations between various cali- accordance with S6.1. The SAE TEGME bration marks are given in Table V and fluid used to prepare the samples must apply to calibrations made with air- have an original ERBP of not less than free water at 20 °C. (68 °F.). 240 °C (464 °F) when tested in accord- ance with S6.1. S7.3 Ethanol. 95 percent (190 proof) ethyl alcohol, USP or ACS, or Formula 3–A Specially Denatured Alcohol of the same concentration (as specified at 27 CFR 21.35). For pretest washings of equipment, use approximately 90 per- cent ethyl alcohol, obtained by adding 5 parts of distilled water to 95 parts of ethanol. S7.4 Measuring the hardness of SBR brake cups. Hardness measurements on SBR wheel cylinder cups and master cylinder primary cups shall be made by using the following apparatus and the following procedure. S7.4.1 Apparatus. (a) Anvil. A rubber anvil having a flat circular top 20 ±1 mm. (13⁄16 ±1⁄16 inch) in diameter, a thickness of at least 9 mm. (3⁄8 inch) and a hardness within 5 IRHDs of the SBR test cup. (b) Hardness tester. A hardness tester meeting the requirements for the standard instrument as described in ASTM D1415–68, ‘‘Standard Method of Test for International Hardness of Vul- canized Natural and Synthetic Rub- bers,’’ and graduated directly in IRHD TABLE V—CALIBRATION TOLERANCES FOR 8- units. INCH CENTRIFUGE TUBE S7.4.2 Procedure. Make hardness ° ± ° ° ± ° Volume measurements at 23 2 C. (73.4 4 F.). Range, ml Subdivi- tolerance, Equilibrate the tester and anvils at sion, ml ml this temperature prior to use. Center 0 to 0.1 ...... 0.05 ±0.02 brake cups lip side down on an anvil of Above 0.1 to 0.3 ...... 0.05 ±0.03 appropriate hardness. Following the Above 0.3 to 0.5 ...... 0.05 ±0.05 manufacturer’s operating instructions Above 0.5 to 1 ...... 0.10 ±0.05 Above 1 to 2 ...... 0.10 ±0.10 for the hardness tester, make one Above 2 to 3 ...... 0.20 ±0.10 measurement at each of four points 6 Above 3 to 5 ...... 0.5 ±0.20 mm from the center of the cup and Above 5 to 10 ...... 1. ±0.50 Above 10 to 25 ...... 5. ±1.00 spaced 90° apart. Average the four val- Above 25 to 100 ...... 25. ±1.00 ues, and round off to the nearest IRHD. S7.5 Sediment by centrifuging. The (b) Centrifuge. A centrifuge capable of amount of sediment in the test fluid whirling two or more filled centrifuge shall be determined by the following tubes at a speed which can be con- procedure. trolled to give a relative centrifugal S7.5.1 Apparatus. force (r.c.f.) between 600 and 700 at the (a) Centrifuge tube. Cone-shaped cen- tip of the tubes. The revolving head, trifuge tubes conforming to the dimen- trunnion rings, and trunnion cups, in- sions given in Figure 6, and made of cluding the rubber cushion, shall with- thoroughly annealed glass. The gradua- stand the maximum centrifugal force

365

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00365 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.048 § 571.117 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

capable of being delivered by the power FORMULATION OF RUBBER COMPOUND— source. The trunnion cups and cushions Continued shall firmly support the tubes when the Parts by centrifuge is in motion. Calculate the Ingredient weight speed of the rotating head using this equation: Zinc oxide (NBS 370) ...... 5 Sulfur (NBS 371) ...... 0.25 r.p.m. = 265[√25.4×r.c.f./d] Stearic Acid (NBS 372) ...... 1 n-tertiary butyl-2-benzothiazole sulfenamide Where: (NBS 384) ...... 1 r.c.f. = Relative centrifugal force, and Symmetrical dibetanaphthyl-p-phenylenediamine 1.5 d = Diameter of swing, in millimeters, meas- Dicumyl peroxide (40 percent on precipitated b ured between tips of opposing tubes when CaCO3) ...... 4.5 in rotating position. Total ...... 153.25 Table VI shows the relationship be- a Philprene 1503 has been found suitable. tween diameter, swing, relative cen- b Use only within 90 days of manufacture and store at tem- trifugal force (r.c.f.), and revolutions perature below 27 °C. (80 °F.). NOTE: The ingredients labeled (NBS) must have properties per minute. identical with those supplied by the National Bureau of Standards. TABLE VI—ROTATION SPEEDS FOR CENTRIFUGES OF VARIOUS DIAMETERS Compounding, vulcanization, physical properties, size of the finished cups, a r.p.m. at r.p.m. at Diameter of swing in millimeters 600 r.c.f 700 r.c.f. and other details shall be as specified in appendix B of SAE J1703b. The cups 483 ...... 1490 1610 shall be used in testing brake fluids ei- 508 ...... 1450 1570 533 ...... 1420 1530 ther within 6 months from date of man- 559 ...... 1390 1500 ufacture when stored at room tempera- ° ° a Measured in millimeters between tips of opposite tubes ture below 30 C. (86 F.) or within 36 when in rotating position. months from date of manufacture when S7.5.2 Procedure. Balance the corked stored at temperatures below minus 15 ° ° centrifuge tubes with their respective C. (+5 F.). After removal of cups from trunnion cups in pairs by weight on a refrigeration they shall be conditioned scale, according to the centrifuge man- base down on a flat surface for at least ufacturer’s instructions, and place 12 hours at room temperature in order them on opposite sides of the cen- to allow cups to reach their true con- trifuge head. Use a dummy assembly figuration before measurement. when one sample is tested. Then whirl S7.7 Isopropanol. ACS or reagent them for 10 minutes, at a rate suffi- grade. cient to produce a r.c.f. between 600 [36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971] and 700 at the tips of the whirling tubes. Repeat until the volume of sedi- EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- tations affecting § 571.116, see the List of Sec- ment in each tube remains constant for tions Affected, which appears in the Finding three consecutive readings. Aids section of the printed volume and on S7.5.3 Calculation. Read the volume GPO Access. of the solid sediment at the bottom of the centrifuge tube and report the per- § 571.117 Standard No. 117; Retreaded cent sediment by volume. Where rep- pneumatic tires. licate determinations are specified, re- S1. Scope. This standard specifies per- port the average value. formance, labeling, and certification S7.6 Standard styrene-butadiene rub- requirements for retreaded pneumatic ber (SBR) brake cups. SBR brake cups passenger car tires. for testing motor vehicle brake fluids S2. Purpose. The purpose of this shall be manufactured using the fol- standard is to require retreaded pneu- lowing formulation: matic passenger car tires to meet safe- ty criteria similar to those for new FORMULATION OF RUBBER COMPOUND pneumatic passenger car tires. S3. Application. This standard applies Ingredient Parts by weight to retreaded pneumatic tires for use on SBR type 1503 a ...... 100 passenger cars manufactured after 1948. Oil furnace black (NBS 378) ...... 40 S4. Definitions.

366

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00366 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.117

S4.1 Casing means a used tire to S5.2.2 No retreaded tire shall be which additional tread may be at- manufactured with a casing— tached for the purpose of retreading. (a) From which a belt or ply, or part Retreaded means manufactured by a thereof, is removed during processing; process in which a tread is attached to or a casing. (b) On which a belt or ply, or part S4.2 All terms defined in §§ 571.109 thereof, is added or replaced during and 571.110 are used as defined therein. processing. S5. Requirements. S5.2.3 Each retreaded tire shall be S5.1 Retreaded tires. manufactured with a casing that bears, S5.1.1 Except as specified in S5.1.3, permanently molded at the time of its each retreaded tire, when mounted on a original manufacture into or onto the test rim of the width specified for the tire sidewall, each of the following: tire’s size designation in appendix A of (a) The symbol DOT; § 571.109 shall comply with the fol- (b) The size of the tire; and lowing requirements of § 571.109: (c) The actual number of plies or ply (a) S4.1 (Size and construction). rating. S5.2.4 [Reserved] (b) S4.2.1 (General). S6. Certification and labeling. (c) S4.2.2.3 (Tubeless tire resistance S6.1 Each manufacturer of a to bead unseating). retreaded tire shall certify that its (d) S4.2.2.4 (Tire strength). product complies with this standard S5.1.2 Except as specified in S5.1.3, pursuant to Section 30115 of Title 49, each retreaded tire, when mounted on a United States Code, by labeling the test rim of the width specified for the tire with the symbol DOT in the loca- tire’s size designation in appendix A of tion specified in section 574.5 of this § 571.109, shall comply with the require- chapter. ments of S4.2.2.2 of § 571.109, except that S6.2 [Reserved] the tire’s section width shall not be S6.3 Each retreaded tire shall bear more than 110 percent of the section permanent labeling through molding, width specified, and the tire’s size fac- branding, or other method that will tor shall be at least 97 percent of the produce a permanent label, or through size factor specified, in appendix A of the retention of the original casing la- § 571.109 for the tire’s size designation. beling, in at least one location on the S5.1.3 Each retreaded tire shall be tire sidewall, in letters and numbers capable of meeting the requirements of not less than 2 mm (0.078 inch) high, S5.1.1 and S5.1.2 when mounted on any consisting of the following informa- rim in accordance with those sections. tion: S5.1.4 No retreaded tire shall have a (a) The tire’s size designation; size designation, recommended max- (b) The tire’s maximum permissible imum load rating, or maximum per- inflation pressure, either as it appears missible inflation pressure that is on the casing or as set forth in Table 1; greater than that originally specified (c) The tire’s maximum load, either on the casing pursuant to S4.3 of as it appears on the casing or as set § 571.109, or specified for the casing in forth in Table 1; Table I. (d) The actual number of plies in or S5.2 Casings. the ply rating of the tire sidewall and, S5.2.1 No retreaded tire shall be if different, the actual number of plies manufactured with a casing— in or the ply rating of the tread area; (a) On which bead wire or cord fabric (e) The generic name of each cord is exposed before processing. material used in the plies of both side- (b) On which any cord fabric is ex- wall and the tread area of the tire; posed during processing, except that (f) The word ‘‘tubeless’’ if the tire is a cord fabric that is located at a splice, tubeless tire, or the words ‘‘tube-type’’ i.e., where two or more segments of the if the tire is a tube-type tire; same ply overlap, or cord fabric that is (g) If the tire is of bias/belted con- part of the belt material, may be ex- struction, the words ‘‘bias/belted;’’ posed but shall not be penetrated or re- (h) If the tire is of radial construc- moved to any extent whatsoever. tion, the word ‘‘radial.’’ 367

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00367 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.117 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

The information shall either be re- manufacture of the tire, or may be la- tained from the casing used in the beled onto the tire during the retread- ing process.

368

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00368 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.117 tion Pressure Maximum Infla- Maximum load tion Pressure Maximum Infla- 36 250 2010 912 40 275 40 912 2010 250 36 0 36 250 1490 676 40 275 676 40 1490 275 676 40 250 1490 0 36 250 0 36 275 830 40 1830 250 5 36 275 630 40 1390 275 676 40 250 1490 9 36 250 0 36 275 830 40 1830 275 912 40 250 2010 5 36 250 7 36 99 36 250 1140 517 40 275 517 40 1140 275 590 40 250 1300 275 99 36 653 40 250 1440 275 58 36 576 40 250 1270 275 17 36 630 40 250 1390 275 44 36 698 40 250 1540 275 94 36 767 40 250 1690 275 58 36 830 40 250 1830 275 26 36 907 40 250 2000 275 85 36 953 40 250 2100 275 57 36 501 40 250 1105 275 03 36 544 40 250 1200 275 72 36 630 40 250 1390 275 13 36 712 40 250 1570 275 99 36 767 40 250 1690 275 71 36 826 40 250 1820 275 21 36 830 40 250 1830 275 80 36 894 40 250 1970 275 85 36 907 40 250 2000 275 44 36 953 40 250 2100 275 57 36 975 40 275 250 2150 1012 40 98 36 250 2230 21 36 250 53 36 275 771 40 1700 250 30 36 275 771 40 1700 250 30 36 13 36 250 1200 544 40 275 40 544 1200 250 13 36 275 40 717 1580 250 76 36 275 40 953 275 2100 40 1012 250 2230 98 36 250 89 36 275 40 717 1580 250 76 36 275 40 953 2100 275 40 975 275 250 2150 40 1012 98 36 250 2230 275 21 36 40 544 250 1200 53 36 250 13 36 1070 36 250 2500 1134 40 275 40 1134 2500 250 1070 36 Maximum load

LIES tion Pressure I—P Maximum Infla- ABLE T 2ply–4ply (4 ply rating) 4 ply (6 rating) 4 ply (8 rating) lb kg psi kPa lb kg psi kPa lb kg psi kPa psi lb kg kPa psi lb kg kPa psi lb kg Maximum load Tire Size 6.00–13 ...... 6.50–13 ...... 7.00–131080 4 1010 458 ...... 32 220 6.45–141230 5 1150 552 ...... 32 220 6.95–141360 6 1270 576 ...... 32 220 7.35–141200 5 1120 508 ...... 32 220 7.75–141310 5 1230 558 ...... 32 220 8.25–141450 6 1360 617 ...... 32 220 8.55–141600 7 1500 680 ...... 32 220 8.85–141730 7 1620 735 ...... 32 220 5.60–151890 8 1770 803 ...... 32 220 5.90–151990 9 1860 844 ...... 32 220 6.85–151040 4 0970 440 ...... 32 220 7.35–151130 5 1050 476 ...... 32 220 7.75–151320 5 1230 558 ...... 32 220 8.15–151480 6 1390 630 ...... 32 220 8.25–151590 7 1490 676 ...... 32 220 8.45–151720 7 1610 730 ...... 32 220 8.55–151730 7 1620 735 ...... 32 220 8.85–151860 8 1740 789 ...... 32 220 9.00–151890 8 1770 803 ...... 32 220 9.15–151980 8 1860 844 ...... 32 220 8.90–152030 7 1900 862 ...... 32 220 A70–13 ...... 2100 9 1970 894 32 220 D70–13 2210 1002 ...... D70–141130 5 1060 481 32 ...... 32 220 220 2360 E70–14 ...... 1320 599 1410 64 32 220 F70–14 ...... 1320 599 1410 64 32 220 G70–141490 6 1400 635 ...... 32 220 H70–141610 7 1500 680 ...... 32 220 J70–14 1620 735 1730 78 ...... 32 220 L70–14 ...... 857 1890 177 803 C70–151980 8 1860 844 32 220 ...... 32 220 D70–159 2180 1970 894 ...... 32 220 E70–15 ...... 1230 558 1320 59 32 220 F70–15 ...... 1320 599 1410 64 32 220 G70–151490 6 1400 635 ...... 32 220 H70–151610 7 1500 680 ......

369

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00369 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.117 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition) tion Pressure Maximum Infla- 935 424 40 275 Maximum load 36 250 1190 540 40 275 36 250 tion Pressure Maximum Infla- 36 250 975 442 40 275 442 40 975 250 36 36 250 1075 488 40 275 40 488 1075 250 36 9 36 250 1140 517 40 275 517 40 1140 275 552 40 250 1150 275 9 36 517 40 250 1140 275 2 36 621 40 250 1370 275 9 36 576 40 250 1270 275 4 36 630 40 250 1390 275 4 36 698 40 250 1540 4 36 250 8 36 62 36 250 1350 612 40 275 40 612 1350 275 40 685 250 1510 62 36 250 30 36 275 40 826 1820 275 40 907 250 2000 62 36 250 35 36 Maximum load —Continued tion Pressure Maximum Infla- LIES I—P 2ply–4ply (4 ply rating) 4 ply (6 rating) 4 ply (8 rating) ABLE T lb kg psi kPa lb kg psi kPa lb kg psi kPa psi lb kg kPa psi lb kg kPa psi lb kg Maximum load Tire Size Radial. ’’ R ‘‘ ...... 865 392 905 411 32 220 36 250 1 Dash Radial—Not an 1 175–13 ...... 185–13 ...... 155R135 1240 1150 552 ...... 32 220 155R146 1390 1270 576 ...... 32 220 155R14 ...... 460 1015 950 431 165R13 32 220 1010 458 1080 49 ...... 32 220 165R14 1015 460 1085 49 ...... 32 220 165R15 1010 458 1080 49 ...... 32 220 175R14 1120 508 1200 54 ...... 32 220 185R14 1130 513 1200 54 ...... 32 220 185/70R13 1230 558 1310 59 ...... 32 220 145–14 1360 617 1450 65 32 220 145–15 1090 494 1140 517 ...... 32 220 195–15 ...... 205–15 ...... 895 406 940 426 32 220 7 1680 1550 703 32 220 8 1840 1770 803 32 220

370

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00370 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.118

[37 FR 5952, Mar. 23, 1972, as amended at 37 FR 11775, June 14, 1972; 38 FR 2982, Jan. 31, 1973; 38 FR 6999, Mar. 15, 1973; 38 FR 9688, Apr. 19, 1973; 39 FR 1443, Jan. 9, 1974; 39 FR 3553, Jan. 28, 1974; 39 FR 36016, Oct. 7, 1974; 39 FR 39884, Nov. 12, 1974; 61 FR 29494, June 11, 1996; 63 FR 28920, May 27, 1998]

EDITORIAL NOTE: For an interpretation of § 571.117, see 38 FR 10940, May 3, 1973.

EFFECTIVE DATE NOTES: 1. At 67 FR 69627, and before September 1, 2006, the number of Nov. 18, 2002, § 571.117 was amended by revis- tires complying with S6.3 of this standard ing S6.3 (including removing Table 1 and the must be equal to not less than 40% of the re- undesignated paragraph following S6.3(h)) treader’s production during that period. and adding S7, S7.1, S7.2, and S7.3, effective S7.2. Tires retreaded on or after September 1, Sept. 1, 2003. At 68 FR 33655, June 5, 2003, the 2006 and before September 1, 2007. For tires effective date was delayed until Sept. 1, 2004. manufactured on or after September 1, 2006 At 69 FR 31306, June 3, 2004, the effective and before September 1, 2007, the number of date was further delayed until Sept. 1, 2005. tires complying with S6.3 of this standard For the convenience of the user, the revised must be equal to not less than 70% of the re- text is set forth as follows: treader’s production during that period. S7.3. Tires retreaded on or after September 1, § 571.117 Standard No. 117; Retreaded pneu- 2007. Each tire must comply with S6.3 of this matic tires. standard.

* * * * * § 571.118 Standard No. 118; Power-op- S6.3 Labeling. Each retreaded tire shall erated window, partition, and roof comply, according to the phase-in schedule panel systems. specified in S7 of this standard, with the re- S1. Purpose and scope. This standard quirements of S5.5. of § 571.139. specifies requirements for power oper- S7. Phase-In Schedule for labeling ated window, partition, and roof panel S7.1 Tires retreaded on or after September 1, systems to minimize the likelihood of 2004 and before September 1, 2005. For tires manufactured on or after September 1, 2004 death or injury from their accidental and before September 1, 2005, the number of operation. tires complying with S6.3 of this standard S2. Application. This standard applies must be equal to not less than 40% of the re- to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- treader’s production during that period. senger vehicles, and trucks with a S7.2 Tires retreaded on or after September 1, gross vehicle weight rating of 4536 kilo- 2005 and before September 1, 2006. For tires grams or less. The standard’s require- manufactured on or after September 1, 2005 ments for power-operated roof panel and before September 1, 2006, the number of tires complying with S6.3 of this standard systems need not be met for vehicles must be equal to not less than 70% of the re- manufactured before September 1, 1993. treader’s production during that period. S3. Definition. ‘‘Power operated roof S7.3 Tires retreaded on or after September 1, panel systems’’ mean moveable panels 2006. Each tire must comply with S6.3 of this in the vehicle roof which close by vehi- standard. cle supplied power either by a sliding 2. At 69 FR 31319, June 3, 2004, § 571.117 was or hinged motion, and do not include amended by revising paragraphs S6.3, S7.1, S7.2 and S7.3, effective Sept. 1, 2005. For the convertible top systems. convenience of the user, the revised text is S4. Operating requirements. Except as set forth as follows: provided in S5, power operated window, partition, or roof panel systems may be § 571.117 Standard No. 117; Retreaded pneu- closed only in the following cir- matic tires. cumstances: (a) When the key that controls acti- * * * * * vation of the vehicle’s engine is in the S6.3. Labeling. Each retreaded tire shall ‘‘ON’’, ‘‘START’’, or ‘‘ACCESSORY’’ posi- comply, according to the phase-in schedule tion; specified in S7 of this standard, with the re- (b) By muscular force unassisted by quirements of S5.5 and S5.5.1 of § 571.139. vehicle supplied power; (c) Upon continuous activation by a * * * * * locking system on the exterior of the S7.1. Tires retreaded on or after September 1, vehicle; 2005 and before September 1, 2006. For tires (d) Upon continuous activation of a manufactured on or after September 1, 2005 remote actuation device, provided that

371

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00371 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.118 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

the remote actuation device shall be exerting a squeezing force of 100 new- incapable of closing the , tons or more on, a semi-rigid cylin- partition or roof panel from a distance drical rod from 4 mm to 200 mm in di- of more than 6 meters from the vehicle; ameter that has the force-deflection (e) During the interval between the ratio described in S5(c), and that is time the locking device which controls placed through the window, partition the activation of the vehicle’s engine is or roof panel system opening at any lo- turned off and the opening of either of cation, in the manner described in a two-door vehicle’s doors or, in the S5(b); and case of a vehicle with more than two (2) Upon such reversal, the window, doors, the opening of either of its front partition or roof panel system must doors; open to one of the following positions, (f) If the window, partition, or roof at the manufacturer’s option: panel is in a static position before (i) A position that is at least as open starting to close and in that position as the position at the time closing was creates an opening so small that a 4 initiated; mm diameter semi-rigid cylindrical rod (ii) A position that is not less than cannot be placed through the opening 125 millimeters more open than the po- at any location around its edge in the sition at the time the window reversed manner described in S5(b); or direction; or (g) Upon continuous activation of a (iii) A position that permits a semi- remote actuation device, provided that rigid cylindrical rod that is 200 mm in the remote actuation device shall be diameter to be placed through the incapable of closing the power window, opening at the same contact point(s) as partition or roof panel if the device and the rod described in S5(a)(1). the vehicle are separated by an opaque (b) The test rod is placed through the surface and provided that the remote window, partition or roof panel opening actuation device shall be incapable of from the inside of the vehicle such that closing the power window, partition or the cylindrical surface of the rod con- roof panel from a distance of more than tacts any part of the structure with 11 meters from the vehicle. which the window, partition or roof S5. (a) Notwithstanding S4, a power panel mates. Typical placements of operated window, partition or roof test rods are illustrated in Figure 1. panel system may close if it meets the (c) The force-deflection ratio of the following requirements— test rod is at least 65 N/mm for a rod 25 (1) While closing, the window, parti- mm or smaller in diameter, and at tion or roof panel system must reverse least 20 N/mm for a rod larger than 25 direction before contacting, or before mm in diameter.

372

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00372 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.118

[56 FR 15294, Apr. 16, 1991, as amended at 57 FR 23963, June 5, 1992; 57 FR 28012, June 23, 1992; 58 FR 16785, Mar. 31, 1993; 60 FR 13644, Mar. 14, 1995]

EFFECTIVE DATE NOTES: 1. At 69 FR 55531, ience of the user, the revised and added text Sept. 15, 2004, § 571.118 was amended by revis- is set forth as follows: ing paragraph S2 and by adding paragraph S6, effective Nov. 15, 2004. For the conven-

373

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00373 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.050 § 571.118 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

§ 571.118 Standard No. 118; Power-operated 571.118 Standard No. 118; Power-operated window, partition, and roof panel sys- window, partition, and roof panel sys- tems. tems.

* * * * * * * * * * S2. Application. This standard applies to S3. Definitions. passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehi- cles, and trucks with a gross vehicle weight * * * * * rating of 4,536 kilograms or less. This stand- ard’s requirements for actuation devices, as ‘‘Infrared reflectance’’ means the ratio of provided in S6, need not be met for vehicles the intensity of infrared light reflected and manufactured before October 1, 2008. scattered by a flat sample of the test rod ma- terial to the intensity of infrared light re- flected and scattered by a mirror that re- * * * * * flects 99.99 percent of the infrared radiation incident on its surface as measured by the S6. Actuation Devices. apparatus show in Figure 2. (a) Any actuation device that is mounted in the occupant compartment of a vehicle and can be used to close a power-operated * * * * * window, partition, or roof panel, shall not S5. Automatic reversal systems. A power-op- cause such window, partition, or roof panel erated window, partition, or roof panel sys- to begin to close from any open position tem that is capable of closing or of being when tested in accordance with paragraphs closed under any circumstances other than (b) and (c) of S6. those specified in S4 shall meet the require- (b)(1) Using a hemisphere with a smooth, ments of S5.1, S5.2, and, if applicable, S5.3. rigid spherical surface and a radius of 20 mm S5.1. While closing, the power-operated ± 1 mm, place the spherical surface of the window, partition, or roof panel shall stop hemisphere against any portion of the actu- and reverse direction either before con- ation device. tacting a test rod with properties described (2) Apply a force not to exceed 135 Newtons in S8.2 or S8.3, or before exerting a squeezing (30 lbs.) to the geometric center of and per- force of 100 newtons (N) or more on a semi- pendicular (± 3 degrees) to the flat face of the rigid cylindrical test rod with the properties hemisphere. described in S8.1, when such test rod is (3) While this force level is being applied, placed through the window, partition, or roof the plane of the flat face of the hemisphere panel opening at any location in the manner may be at any angle. described in the applicable test under S7. (c) For actuation devices that cannot be S5.2. Upon reversal, the power-operated contacted by the hemisphere specified in window, partition, or roof panel system must open to one of the following positions, at the S6(b)(1) prior to the application of force, manufacturer’s option: apply a force up to the level specified in (a) A position that is at least as open as S6(b)(2) at any angle in an attempt to make the position at the time closing was initi- contact with the actuation device. The hemi- ated; sphere is directionally applied in such a (b) A position that is not less than 125 mil- manner that, if unimpeded, it would make limeters (mm) more open than the position contact with the actuation device. at the time the window reversed direction; or (d) The requirement in S6(a) does not apply (c) A position that permits a semi-rigid cy- to either— lindrical rod that is 200 mm in diameter to (1) Actuation devices that are mounted in be placed through the opening at the same a vehicle’s roof, headliner, or overhead con- location as the rod described in S7.1 or sole and that can close a window, partition, S7.2(b). or roof panel only by continuous rather than S5.3. If a vehicle uses proximity detection momentary switch actuation, or by infrared reflection to stop and reverse a (2) Actuation devices for closing power-op- power-operated window, partition, or roof erated windows, partitions, and roof panels panel, the infrared source shall project infra- that comply with S5 of this standard. red light at a wavelength of not less than 850 2. At 69 FR 55544, Sept. 15, 2004, § 571.118, nm and not more than 1050 nm. The system was amended in S3, by revising the heading shall meet the requirements in S5.1 and S5.2 and adding a definition for ‘‘infrared reflec- in all ambient light conditions from total tance’’ in alphabetical order; by revising S5; darkness to 64,500 lux (6,000 foot candles) in- and by adding new paragraphs S5.1, S5.2, candescent light intensity. S5.3, S7, S7.1, S7.2, S8, S8.1, S8.2, S8.3, S9, Figure 2 and Figure 3, effective Sept. 1, 2005. * * * * * For the convenience of the user, the revised and added text, is set forth as follows: S7. Test procedures.

374

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00374 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.118

S7.1. Test procedure for testing power-oper- S8. Test rods. ated window, partition, or roof panel systems S8.1. Rods for testing systems designed to de- designed to detect obstructions by physical con- tect obstructions by physical contact: tact or by light beam interruption: Place the (a) Each test rod is of cylindrical shape test rod of the type specified in S8.1 or S8.2, with any diameter in the range from 4 mm to as appropriate, through the window, parti- 200 mm and is of sufficient length that it can tion, or roof panel opening from the inside of be hand-held during the test specified in S7 the vehicle such that the cylindrical surface with only the test rod making any contact of the rod contacts any part of the structure with any part of the window, partition, or with which the window, partition, or roof roof panel or mating surfaces of the window, panel mates. Typical placements of test rods partition, or roof panel. are illustrated in Figure 1. Attempt to close (b) Each test rod has a force-deflection the power window, partition, or roof panel by ratio of not less than 65 N/mm for rods 25 mm operating the actuation device provided in or smaller in diameter, and not less than 20 the vehicle for that purpose. N/mm for rods larger than 25 mm in diame- S7.2. Test procedure for testing power-oper- ter. ated window, partition, or roof panel systems S8.2. Rods for testing systems designed to de- designed to detect the proximity of obstructions tect obstructions by light beam interruption: using infrared reflectance: (a) Place the vehicle under incandescent Each test rod has the shape and dimensions lighting that projects 64,500 lux (6,000 foot specified in S8.1 and is, in addition, opaque candles) onto the infrared sensor. The light to infrared, visible, and ultraviolet light. is projected onto the infrared sensor by aim- S8.3. Rods for testing systems designed to de- ing the optical axis of a light source outside tect the proximity of obstructions using infrared the vehicle as perpendicular as possible to reflection: the lens of the infrared sensor. The intensity (a) Each rod is constructed so that its sur- of light is measured perpendicular to the face has an infrared reflectance of not more plane of the lens of the infrared sensor, as than 1.0 percent when measured by the appa- close as possible to the center of the lens of ratus in Figure 2, in accordance with the the infrared sensor. procedure in S9. (b) Place a test rod of the type specified in (b) Each rod has the shape and dimensions S8.3 in the window, partition, or roof panel specified in Figure 3. opening, with the window, partition, or roof S9. Procedure for measuring infrared reflec- panel in any position. While keeping the rod tance of test rod surface material. stationary, attempt to close the window, (a) The infrared reflectance of the rod sur- partition, or roof panel by operating the ac- face material is measured using a flat sam- tuation device provided in the vehicle for ple and an infrared light source and sensor that purpose. Remove the test rod. Fully operating at a wavelength of 950 ± 100 nm. open the window, partition, or roof panel, (b) The intensity of incident infrared light and then begin to close it. While the window, is determined using a reference mirror of partition, or roof panel is closing, move a nominally 100 percent reflectance mounted test rod so that it approaches and ultimately in place of the sample in the test apparatus extends through (if necessary) the window, in Figure 2. partition, or roof panel opening, or its frame, (c) Infrared reflectance measurements of in any orientation from the interior of the each sample of test rod surface material and vehicle. For power partitions that have occu- of the reference mirror are corrected to re- pant compartment space on both sides of the move the contribution of infrared light re- partition, move the test rod into the parti- flected and scattered by the sample holder tion opening from either side of the parti- and other parts of the apparatus before com- tion. putation of the infrared reflectance ratio. (c) Repeat the steps in S7.2(a) and (b) with other ambient light conditions within the range specified in S5.3. * * * * *

375

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00375 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.118 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

376

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00376 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER15SE04.020 ER15SE04.021 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.119

§ 571.119 Standard No. 119; New pneu- this standard. The listing shall be in matic tires for vehicles other than one of the following forms: passenger cars. (a) Listed by manufacturer name or S1. Scope. This standard establishes brand name in a document furnished to performance and marking require- dealers of the manufacturer’s tires, to ments for tires for use on multipurpose any person upon request, and in dupli- passenger vehicles, trucks, buses, trail- cate to: Docket Section, National ers, and motorcycles. Highway Traffic Safety Administra- S2. Purpose. The purpose of this tion, 400 Seventh Street SW., Wash- standard is to provide safe operational ington, DC 20590; or performance levels for tires used on (b) Contained in publications, current motor vehicles other than passenger at the date of manufacture of the tire cars, and to place sufficient informa- or any later date, of at least one of the tion on the tires to permit their proper following organizations: selection and use. S3. Application. This standard applies The Tire and Rim Association The European Tyre and Rim Technical to new pneumatic tires designed for Organisation highway use on multipurpose passenger Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers’ Asso- vehicles, trucks, buses, trailers, and ciation, Inc. motorcycles manufactured after 1948. Deutsche Industrie Norm S4. Definitions. All terms defined in British Standards Institution the Act and the rules and standards Scandinavian Tire and Rim Organization issued under its authority are used as The Tyre and Rim Association of Australia defined therein. Light truck tire means a tire des- S5.2 Information contained in a pub- ignated by its manuafacturer as pri- lication specified in S5.1(b) which lists marily intended for use on lightweight general categories of tires and rims by trucks or multipurpose passenger vehi- size designation, type of construction, cles. and/or intended use, shall be considered Model rim assembly means a test de- to be manufacturer’s information pur- vice that (a) includes a rim which con- suant to S5.1 for the listed tires, unless forms to the published dimensions of a the publication itself or specific infor- commercially available rim, (b) in- mation provided according to S5.1(a) cludes an air valve assembly when used indicates otherwise. for testing tubeless tires or an S6. Requirements. Each tire shall be innertube and flap (as required) when capable of meeting any of the applica- used for testing tubetype tires, and (c) ble requirements set forth below, when undergoes no permanent rim deforma- mounted on a model rim assembly cor- tion and allows no loss of air through responding to any rim designated by the portion that it comprises of the the tire manufacturer for use with the tire-rim pressure chamber when a tire tire in accordance with S5. However, a is properly mounted on the assembly particular tire need not meet further and subjected to the requirements of requirements after having been sub- this standard. jected to and met the endurance test S5. Tire and rim matching information. (S6.1), strength test (S6.2), or high S5.1 Each manufacturer of tires speed performance test (S6.3). shall ensure that a listing of the rims S6.1 Endurance. that may be used with each tire that S6.1.1 Prior to testing in accordance he produces is provided to the public. with the procedures of S7.2, a tire shall For purposes of this section each rim exhibit no visual evidence of tread, listing shall include dimensional speci- sidewall, ply, cord, innerliner, or bead fications and a diagram of the rim. separation, chunking, broken cords, However a listing compiled in accord- cracking, or open splices. ance with paragraph (a) of this section S6.1.2 When tested in accordance need not include dimensional specifica- with the procedures of S7.2: tions or a diagram of a rim if the rim’s (a) There shall be no visual evidence dimensional specifications and diagram of tread, sidewall, ply, cord, innerliner, are contained in each listing published or bead separation, chunking, broken in accordance with paragraph (b) of cords, cracking, or open splices.

377

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00377 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.119 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(b) The tire pressure at the end of the than 0.25mm (0.010 inch) in the case of test shall be not less than the initial motorcycle tires. The tire identifica- pressure specified in S7.2(a). tion and the DOT symbol labeling shall S6.2 Strength. When tested in ac- comply with part 574 of this chapter. cordance with the procedures of S7.3 a Markings may appear on only one side- tire’s average breaking energy value wall and the entire sidewall area may shall be not less than the value speci- be used in the case of motorcycle tires fied in Table II for that tire’s size and and recreational, boat, baggage, and load range. special trailer tires. S6.3 High speed performance. When (a) The symbol DOT, which shall con- tested in accordance with the proce- stitute a certification that the tire dures of S7.3, a tire shall meet the re- conforms to applicable Federal motor quirements set forth in S6.1.1 and vehicle safety standards. This symbol S6.1.2(a) and (b). However, this require- may be marked on only one sidewall. ment applies only to motorcycle tires (b) The tire identification number re- and to non-speed-restricted tires of quired by part 574 of this chapter. This nominal rim diameter code 14.5 or less number may be marked on only one marked load range A, B, C, or D. sidewall. S6.4 Treadwear indicators. Except as (c) The tire size designation as listed specified in this paragraph, each tire in the documents and publications des- shall have at least six treadwear indi- ignated in S5.1. cators spaced approximately equally (d) The maximum load rating and around the circumference of the tire corresponding inflation pressure of the that enable a person inspecting the tire tire, shown as follows: to determine visually whether the tire (Mark on tires rated for single and dual has worn to a tread depth of 1.6 mm load): Max load single llkg (lllb) at (one-sixteenth of an inch). Tires with a llkPa (llpsi) cold. Max load dual llkg rim diameter code of 12 or smaller (lllb) at llkPa (llpsi) cold. shall have at least three such (Mark on tires rated only for single load): Max load llkg (lllb) at llkPa (llpsi) treadwear indicators. Motorcycle tires cold. shall have at least three such indica- tors which permit visual determination (e) The speed restriction of the tire, that the tire has worn to a tread depth if 88 km/h (55 mph) or less, shown as of 0.8 mm (one-thirty-second of an follows: inch). Max speed llkm/h (llmph). S6.5 Tire markings. Except as speci- (f) The actual number of plies and the fied in this paragraph, each tire shall composition of the ply cord material in be marked on each sidewall with the the sidewall and, if different, in the information specified in paragraphs (a) tread area; through (j) of this section. The mark- (g) The words ‘‘tubeless’’ or ‘‘tube ings shall be placed between the max- type’’ as applicable. imum section width (exclusive of side- (h) The word ‘‘regroovable’’ if the tire wall decorations or curb ribs) and the is designed for regrooving. bead on at least one sidewall, unless (i) The word ‘‘radial’’ if a radial tire. the maximum section width of the tire (j) The letter designating the tire is located in an area which is not more load range. than one-fourth of the distance from S6.6 Maximum load rating. If the the bead to the shoulder of the tire. If maximum load rating for a particular the maximum section width falls with- tire size is shown in one or more of the in that area, the markings shall appear publications described in S5.1(b), each between the bead and a point one-half tire of that size designation shall have the distance from the bead to the a maximum load rating that is not less shoulder of the tire, on at least one than the published maximum load rat- sidewall. The markings shall be in let- ing, or if there are differing published ters and numerals not less than 2 mm ratings for the same tire size designa- (0.078 inch) high and raised above or tion, not less than the lowest published sunk below the tire surface not less maximum load rating for the size des- that 0.4 mm (0.015 inch), except that ignation. the marking depth shall be not less S7. Test procedures.

378

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00378 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.119

S7.1 General conditions. (c) Force a cylindrical steel plunger, S7.1.1 The tests are performed using with a hemispherical end and of the di- an appropriate new tube, tube valve ameter specified in Table I for the tire and flap assembly (as required) that al- size, perpendicularly into a raised lows no loss of air for testing of tube- tread element as near as possible to the type tires under S7.2, S7.3, and S7.4, centerline of the tread, at a rate of 50 and tubeless tires under S7.3. mm (2 inches) per minute, until the S7.1.2 The tire must be capable of tire breaks or the plunger is stopped by meeting the requirements of S7.2 and the rim. S7.4 when conditioned to a temperature (d) Record the force and the distance of 35 °C (95 °F) for 3 hours before the of penetration just before the tire test is conducted, and with an ambient breaks, or if it fails to break, just be- temperature maintained at 35 °C (95 °F) fore the plunger is stopped by the rim. during all phases of testing. The tire (e) Repeat the plunger application at ° must be capable of meeting the re- 72 intervals around the circumference quirements of S7.3 when conditioned at of the tire, until five measurements are a temperature of 21 °C (70 °F) for 3 made. However, in the case of tires of hours before the test is conducted. 12 inch rim diameter code or smaller, repeat the plunger application at 120° S7.2 Endurance. (a) Mount the tire intervals around the circumference of on a model rim assembly and inflate it the tire, until three measurements are to the inflation pressure corresponding made. to the maximum load rating marked on (f) Compute the breaking energy for the tire. Use a single maximum load each test point by one of the two fol- value when the tire is marked with lowing formulas: both single and dual maximum load. (1) W = [(F × P)/2] × 10¥3 (joules) (b) After conditioning the tire-rim assembly in accordance with S7.1.2, ad- Where: just the tire pressure to that specified W = Breaking energy (in joules) (kJ) in (a) immediately before mounting the F = Force in newtons (N) and P = Penetration in millimeters (mm), or; tire rim assembly. (c) Mount the tire-rim assembly on (2) W = (FP/2) an axle and press it against a flat-faced Where: steel test wheel that is 1708 mm (67.23 W = Breaking energy in inch-pounds, inches) in diameter and at least as wide F = Force in pounds, as the tread of the tire. P = Penetration in inches. (d) Apply the test load and rotate the (g) Determine the average breaking test wheel as indicated in Table III for energy value for the tire by computing the type of tire tested conducting each the average of the values obtained in successive phase of the test without accordance with paragraph (f). interruption. S7.4 High speed performance. (a) Per- (e) Immediately after running the form steps (a) through (c) of S7.2. tire the required time, measure the tire (b) Apply a force of 88 percent of the inflation pressure. Remove the tire maximum load rating marked on the from the model rim assembly, and in- tire (use single maximum load value spect the tire. when the tire is marked with both sin- S7.3 Strength. (a) Mount the tire on gle and dual maximum loads), and ro- a model rim assembly and inflate it to tate the test wheel at 250 rpm for 2 the pressure corresponding to the max- hours. imum load, or maximum dual load (c) Remove the load, allow the tire to where there is both a single and dual cool to 35 °C (95 °F), and then adjust load marked on the tire. If the tire is the pressure to that marked on the tire tubeless, a tube may be inserted to pre- for single tire use. vent loss of air during the test in the (d) Reapply the same load, and with- event of puncture. out interruption or readjustment of in- (b) After conditioning the tire-rim flation pressure, rotate the test wheel assembly in accordance with S7.1.2, ad- at 375 rpm for 30 minutes, then at 400 just the tire pressure to that specified rpm for 30 minutes, and then at 425 rpm in (a). for 30 minutes.

379

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00379 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.119 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(e) Immediately after running the from the model rim assembly, and in- tire the required time, measure the tire spect the tire. inflation pressure. Remove the tire

TABLE I—STRENGTH TEST PLUNGER DIAMETER

Plunger diameter (mm) (inches)

Tire type: Light truck ...... 19.05 3⁄4 Motorcycle ...... 5⁄16 Tires for 12 rim diameter code or smaller rims except motorcycle ...... 19.05 3⁄4 Tires other than the above types: Tubeless: 17.5 diameter code or smaller rims ...... 19.05 3⁄4 Larger than 17.5 rim diameter code rims: Load range F or less ...... 31.75 11⁄4 Load range over F ...... 38.10 11⁄2 Tube type: Load range F or less ...... 31.75 11⁄4 Load range over F ...... 38.10 11⁄2

380

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00380 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.119 lbs inch- J ″ 2 ⁄ 1 lbs 1 inch- ...... 38.10 J )) LBS - lbs inch- INCH ( J ...... OUNDS ...... ″ 4 900 734 6,500 ...... 6,500 ...... 900 734 ...... ⁄ -P 1 lbs 1 inch- NCH 12,500 15,800 971 ...... 1,412 12,500 8,600 ...... I Tube type Tubeless Tube type Tubeless type type Tubeless Tube Tube AND 31.75 J (J) ″ 4 ⁄ lbs 3 inch- OULES 1 6,300 ...... 1 6,300 ...... 15,000 20,200 1,694 2,282 8 ...... 6,800 ...... 2,598 23,000 2,090 18,500 (J rim tubeless rim diameter ...... 3,220 28,500 ...... 3,389 30,000 ...... Light truck 17.5 code or smaller ...... 2,824 25,000 2,203 19,500 ...... 3,050 27,000 ...... 19.05 J NERGY ″ E 4 ⁄ lbs 3 inch- er rim size REAKING B 19.05 J ter code or small- ″ 16 ⁄ lbs TATIC 5 inch- S Motorcycle 7.94 J INIMUM II—M ABLE T Load range All 12 rim diame- Tire characteristic Plunger diameter (mm and inches) : For rayon cord tires, applicable energy values are 60 percent of those in table. OTE *J measurements are rounded down to the nearest whole number. N A ...... B ...... C ...... 2,000 16 150 D . 67 600 225 ...... 33 E ...... 300 F 45 135 1,200 ...... 400 293 2,600 G ...... 203 1,800 ...... 361 3,200 H ...... 271 2,400 ...... 768 6,800 514 4,550 J ...... 338 3,000 576 5,100 ...... 892 7, 576 5,100 1,412 L ...... 406 3,600 ...... 644 5,700 1,785 ...... M ...... N ...... 71 ...... 76 ......

381

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00381 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.119, Nt. 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

TABLE III—ENDURANCE TEST SCHEDULE

Test load: Percent of maximum load rating Total best Description Load range Test wheel revolutions speed (r/m) III—24 (thousands) I—7 hours II—16 hours hours

Speed restricted service: 88 km/h (55 mph) ...... 80 km/h (50 mph) ...... All ...... 125 66 84 101 352.0 C, D ...... 150 75 97 114 432.0 56 km/h (35 mph) ...... E, F, G, H, J, L ...... 100 66 84 101 282.5 Motorcycle ...... All ...... 75 66 84 101 211.0 All other ...... All ...... 250 1 100 2 108 117 510.0 A, B, C, D ...... 250 75 2 97 114 ...... E ...... 200 70 88 106 546.0 F ...... 200 66 84 101 564.0 G ...... 175 66 84 101 493.5 H, J, L, N ...... 150 66 84 101 423.5 1 4 hr., for tire sizes subject to high speed requirements (S6.3). 2 6 hr., for tire sizes subject to high speed requirements (S6.3)

(Secs. 113, 201, 80 Stat. 718 (15 U.S.C. 1402, 1421); secs. 103, 112, 119, 201, 203, Pub. L. 89–563, 80 Stat. 718 (15 U.S.C. 1392, 1401, 1421, 1423); delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50) [38 FR 31301, Nov. 13, 1973, as amended at 39 FR 4087, Feb. 1, 1974; 39 FR 5192, Feb. 11, 1974; 39 FR 12105, Apr. 3, 1974; 39 FR 19481, June 3, 1974; 40 FR 5530, Feb. 6, 1975; 43 FR 30542, July 17, 1978; 43 FR 50441, Oct. 30, 1978; 48 FR 25209, June 6, 1983; 50 FR 10773, Mar. 18, 1985; 54 FR 38386, Sept. 18, 1989; 61 FR 29494, June 11, 1996; 63 FR 28921, May 27, 1998]

EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 68 FR 38148, June than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 pounds), trailers, 26, 2003, § 571.119 was amended by revising its and motorcycles manufactured after 1948. heading, S1, S2, S3, and tables I, II, and III, effective June 1, 2007. For the convenience of * * * * * the user, the revised text is set forth as fol- lows: TABLE I.—STRENGTH TEST PLUNGER DIAMETER § 571.119 Standard No. 119; New pneumatic tires for motor vehicles with a GVWR of Plunger diameter more than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 (mm) (inches) pounds) and motorcycles. S1. Scope. This standard establishes per- Tire type: 3 formance and marking requirements for Light truck ...... 19.05 ⁄4 5 ″ tires for use on motor vehicles with a GVWR Motorcycle ...... ⁄16 Tires for 12-inch or smaller rims, of more than 10,000 pounds and motorcycles. except motorcycle ...... 19.05 3⁄4 S2. Purpose. The purpose of this standard is Tires other than above types: to provide safe operational performance lev- Tubeless: els for tires used on motor vehicles with a 17.5-inch or smaller rims ...... 19.05 3⁄4 GVWR of more than 10,000 pounds, trailers, Larger than 17.5-inch rims: and motorcycles, and to place sufficient in- Load range F ...... 31.75 11⁄4 formation on the tires to permit their proper Load range over F ...... 38.10 11⁄2 selection and use. Tube type: 1 S3. Application. This standard applies to Load range F ...... 31.75 1 ⁄4 1 new pneumatic tires designed for highway Load range over F ...... 38.10 1 ⁄2 use on motor vehicles with a GVWR of more

382

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00382 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.119, Nt. lbs Inche- J ’’ 2 ...... ⁄ 1 38.10 J 1 lbs Inche- ...... 2,282 20,200 1,694 15,000 ...... 2,598 23,000 2.090 18,500 J

...... 3,220 28,500 ...... 2,824 25,000 2,203 19,500 ...... 3,050 27,000 ...... 3,389 30,000 ...... ″ NERGY 4 ⁄ E 1 Tube type Tubeless Tube type Tubeless REAKING B 31.75 J 1 ″ TATIC 4 ⁄ 3 S tubeless INIMUM smaller rim rim diameter or Light truck 17.5 19.05 J [Joules (J)) and Inch-Pounds (inch-lbs)] II.—M ″ 4 ⁄ 3 ABLE T ameter code or smaller rim size 19.05 J ’’ 16 ⁄ 5 Motorcycle Load range All 12 rim di- (mm and inches) 7.94J Plunger diameter Tire characteristic A ...... B ...... C...... 16 150 D...... 33 300 E...... 45 400 F ...... G ...... H ...... J ...... L ...... 406 3,600 ...... M ...... 644 5,700 ...... 1,785 15,800 N...... 1,412 12,500 ...... 711 6,300 ...... 768 6,800 ......

383

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00383 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.120 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

TABLE III.—ENDURANCE TEST SCHEDULE

Test load: Percent of maximum Total best Test load rating revolu- Description Load range wheel tions speed I—7 II— III— (thou- (r/m) hours 16 hours 24 hours sands)

Speed restricted service: 88 km/h (55 mph) ...... F, G, H, J, L, M, N ... 125 66 84 101 352.0 80 km/h (50 mph) ...... F, G, H, J, L ...... 100 66 84 101 282.5 56 km/h (35 mph) ...... All ...... 75 66 84 101 211.0 Motorcycle ...... All ...... 250 1 100 2 108 117 510.0 All other ...... F ...... 200 66 84 101 564.0 G ...... 175 66 84 101 493.5 H, J, L, N ...... 150 66 84 101 423.5 1 4 hr. for tire sizes subject to high speed requirements (S6.3). 2 6 hr. for tire sizes subject to high speed requirements (S6.3).

§ 571.120 Standard No. 120; Tire selec- S5.1.1 Except as specified in S5.1.3, tion and rims for motor vehicles each vehicle equipped with pneumatic other than passenger cars. tires for highway service shall be S1. Scope. This standard specifies tire equipped with tires that meet the re- and rim selection requirements and quirements of § 571.109, New pneumatic rim marking requirements. tires, or § 571.119, New pneumatic tires S2. Purpose. The purpose of this for vehicles other than passenger cars, standard is to provide safe operational and rims that are listed by the manu- performance by ensuring that vehicles facturer of the tires as suitable for use to which it applies are equipped with with those tires, in accordance with tires of adequate size and load rating S4.4 of § 571.109 or S5.1 of § 571.119, as ap- and with rims of appropriate size and plicable, except that vehicles may be type designation. equipped with a non-pneumatic spare S3. Application. This standard ap- tire assembly that meets the require- plies to multipurpose passenger vehi- ments of § 571.129, New non-pneumatic cles, trucks, buses, trailers, and motor tires for passenger cars, and S8 of this cycles, to rims for use on those vehi- standard. Vehicles equipped with such cles, and to non-pneumatic spare tire an assembly shall meet the require- assemblies for use on those vehicles. ments of S5.3.3, S7, and S9 of this standard. S4. Definitions. All terms defined in S5.1.2 Except in the case of a vehicle the Act and the rules and standards which has a speed attainable in 3.2 kil- issued under its authority are used as ometers of 80 kilometers per hour or defined therein. less, the sum of the maximum load rat- Rim base means the portion of a rim ings of the tires fitted to an axle shall remaining after removal of all split or be not less than the gross axle weight continuous rim flanges, side rings, and rating (GAWR) of the axle system as locking rings that can be detached specified on the vehicle’s certification from the rim. label required by 49 CFR part 567. Ex- Rim size designation means rim diame- cept in the case of a vehicle which has ter and width. a speed attainable in 2 miles of 50 mph Rim diameter means nominal diameter or less, the sum of the maximum load of the bead seat. ratings of the tires fitted to an axle Rim width means nominal distance shall be not less than the gross axle between rim flanges. weight rating (GAWR) of the axle sys- Rim type designation means the indus- tem as specified on the vehicle’s cer- try or manufacturer’s designation for a tification label required by 49 CFR part rim by style or code. 567. If the certification label shows Weather side means the surface area more than one GAWR for the axle sys- of the rim not covered by the inflated tem, the sum shall be not less than the tire. GAWR corresponding to the size des- S5. Requirements. ignation of the tires fitted to the axle. S5.1 Tire and rim selection. If the size designation of the tires

384

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00384 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.120

fitted to the axle does not appear on (5) ‘‘B’’ indicates British Standards In- the certification label, the sum shall be stitution. not less than the lowest GAWR appear- (6) ‘‘S’’ indicates Scandinavian Tire ing on the label. When a tire subject to and Rim Organization. FMVSS No. 109 is installed on a multi- (7) ‘‘A’’ indicates The Tyre and Rim purpose passenger vehicle, truck, bus, Association of Australia. or trailer, the tire’s load rating shall (8) ‘‘N’’ indicates an independent list- be reduced by dividing by 1.10 before ing pursuant to S4.4.1(a) of Standard calculating the sum (i.e., the sum of No. 109 or S5.1(a) of Standard No. 119. the load ratings of the tires on each (b) The rim size designation, and in axle, when the tires’ load carrying ca- case of multipiece rims, the rim type pacity at the recommended tire cold designation. For example: 20×5.50, or inflation pressure is reduced by divid- 20×5.5. ing by 1.10, must be appropriate for the (c) The symbol DOT, constituting a GAWR). certification by the manufacturer of S5.1.3 In place of tires that meet the the rim that the rim complies with all requirements of Standard No. 119, a applicable motor vehicle safety stand- truck, bus, or trailer may at the re- ards. quest of a purchaser be equipped at the (d) A designation that identifies the place of manufacture of the vehicle manufacturer of the rim by name, with retreaded or used tires owned or trademark, or symbol. leased by the purchaser, if the sum of (e) The month, day and year or the the maximum load ratings meets the month and year of manufacture, ex- requirements of S5.1.2. Used tires em- pressed either numerically or by use of ployed under this provision must have a symbol, at the option of the manufac- been originally manufactured to com- turer. For example: ply with Standard No. 119, as evidenced by the DOT symbol. ‘‘September 4, 1976’’ may be expressed nu- merically as: S5.2 Rim marking. Each rim or, at the option of the manufacturer in the 90476, 904, or 76 76 904 case of a single-piece wheel, wheel disc shall be marked with the information ‘‘September 1976’’ may be expressed as: listed in paragraphs (a) through (e) of 976, 9, or 76 this paragraph, in lettering not less 76 9 than 3 millimeters high, impressed to a (1) Any manufacturer that elects to depth or, at the option of the manufac- express the date of manufacture by turer, embossed to a height of not less means of a symbol shall notify NHTSA than 0.125 millimeters. The informa- in writing of the full names and ad- tion listed in paragraphs (a) through dresses of all manufacturers and brand (c) of this paragraph shall appear on name owners utilizing that symbol and the weather side. In the case of rims of the name and address of the trademark multi piece construction, the informa- owner of that symbol, if any. The noti- tion listed in paragraphs (a) through fication shall describe in narrative (e) of this paragraph shall appear on form and in detail how the month, day, the rim base and the information listed and year or the month and year are de- in paragraphs (b) and (d) of this para- picted by the symbol. Such description graph shall also appear on each other shall include an actual size graphic de- part of the rim. piction of the symbol, showing and/or (a) A designation which indicates the explaining the interrelationship of the source of the rim’s published nominal component parts of the symbol as they dimensions, as follows: will appear on the rim or single piece (1) ‘‘T’’ indicates The Tire and Rim wheel disc, including dimensional spec- Association. ifications, and where the symbol will (2) ‘‘E’’ indicates The European Tyre be located on the rim or single piece and Rim Technical Organisation wheel disc. The notification shall be re- (3) ‘‘J’’ indicates Japan Automobile ceived by NHTSA at least 60 calendar Tire Manufacturers’ Association, Inc. days prior to first use of the symbol. (4) ‘‘D’’ indicates Deutsche Industrie The notification shall be mailed to the Norm. Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance,

385

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00385 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.120 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

National Highway Traffic Safety Ad- GAWR: FRONT—4,826 KG (10,640 LB) WITH ministration, 400 Seventh Street SW., 10.00–20(F) TIRES, 20×7.50 RIMS, AT 620 Washington, DC 20590. All information KPA (90 PSI) COLD SINGLE provided to NHTSA under this para- GAWR: REAR—8,454 KG (18,639 LB) WITH 10.00–20(F) TIRES, 20×2.70 RIMS, AT 550 graph will be placed in the public dock- KPA (80 PSI) COLD DUAL et. (2) Each manufacturer of wheels shall S5.3.3 The non-pneumatic tire identi- provide an explanation of its date of fication code, with which that assem- manufacture symbol to any person bly is labeled pursuant to S4.3(a) of upon request. § 571.129. S5.3 Each vehicle with a gross vehi- S6. Load Limits for Non-Pneumatic cle weight rating (GVWR) of more than Spare Tires. The highest vehicle max- 10,000 pounds, and motorcycles, shall imum load on the tire for the vehicle show the information specified in S5.3.1 shall not be greater than the load rat- and S5.3.2 and, in the case of a vehicle ing for the non-pneumatic spare tire. equipped with a non-pneumatic spare S7 Labeling Requirements for Non- tire, the information specified in S5.3.3, Pneumatic Spare Tires or Tire Assemblies. in the English language, lettered in Each non-pneumatic tire or, in the case block capitals and numerals not less of a non-pneumatic tire assembly in than 2.4 millimeters high and in the which the non-pneumatic tire is an in- format set forth following this para- tegral part of the assembly, each non- graph. This information shall appear pneumatic tire assembly shall include, either— in letters or numerals not less than 4 (a) After each GAWR listed on the millimeters high, the information spec- certification label required by § 567.4 or ified in paragraphs S7 (a) and (b). The § 567.5 of this chapter; or at the option information shall be permanently of the manufacturer, molded, stamped, or otherwise perma- (b) On the tire information label af- nently marked into or onto the non- fixed to the vehicle in the manner, lo- pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire cation, and form described in § 567.4 (b) assembly, or shall appear on a label through (f) of this chapter as appro- that is permanently attached to the priate of each GVWR-GAWR combina- tire or tire assembly. If a label is used, tion listed on the certification label. it shall be subsurface printed, made of S5.3.1 Tires. The size designation (not material that is resistant to fade, heat, necessarily for the tires on the vehicle) moisture and abrasion, and attached in and the recommended cold inflation such a manner that it cannot be re- pressure for those tires such that the moved without destroying or defacing sum of the load ratings of the tires on the label on the non-pneumatic tire or each axle (when the tires’ load carrying tire assembly. The information speci- capacity at the specified pressure is re- fied in paragraphs S7 (a) and (b) shall duced by dividing by 1.10, in the case of appear on both sides of the non-pneu- a tire subject to FMVSS No. 109) is ap- matic tire or tire assembly, except, in propriate for the GAWR as calculated the case of a non-pneumatic tire as- in accordance with S5.1.2. sembly which has a particular side that S5.3.2. Rims. The size designation must always face outward when and, if applicable, the type designation mounted on a vehicle, in which case of Rims (not necessarily those on the the information specified in paragraphs vehicle) appropriate for those tires. S7 (a) and (b) shall only be required on the outward facing side. The informa- TRUCK EXAMPLE—SUITABLE TIRE– tion shall be positioned on the tire or RIM CHOICE tire assembly such that it is not placed on the tread or the outermost edge of GVWR: 7,840 KG (17,289 LB) the tire and is not obstructed by any GAWR: FRONT—2,850 KG (6,280 LB) WITH portion of any non-pneumatic rim or × 7.50–20(D) TIRES, 20 6.00 RIMS AT 520 KPA wheel center member designated for (75 PSI) COLD SINGLE GAWR: REAR—4,990 KG (11,000 LB) WITH use with that tire in this standard or in 7.50–20(D) TIRES, 20×6.00 RIMS, AT 450 Standard No. 129. KPA (65 PSI) COLD DUAL (a) FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY; GVWR: 13,280 KG (29,279 LB) and

386

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00386 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.120, Nt.

(b) MAXIMUM 80 KM/H (50 M.P.H.). pneumatic tire, designated by its non- S8. Requirements for Vehicles pneumatic tire identification code, Equipped with Non-Pneumatic Spare Tire with which the vehicle is equipped. Assemblies (Authority: Secs. 102, 119, and 202, Pub. L. 89– S8.1 Vehicle Placarding Requirements. 563, 80 Stat. 718 (15 U.S.C. 1392, 1407, and 1422); A placard, permanently affixed to the delegation of authority at 49 CFR 1.50) inside of the spare tire stowage area or [42 FR 7144, Feb. 7, 1977, as amended at 49 FR equally accessible location adjacent to 20824, May 17, 1984; 54 FR 38386, Sept. 18, 1989; the non-pneumatic spare tire assembly, 55 FR 29589, July 20, 1990; 56 FR 19311, Apr. 26, shall display the information set forth 1991; 58 FR 13426, Mar. 11, 1993; 59 FR 25578, in S7 in block capitals and numerals May 17, 1994; 60 FR 13644, Mar. 14, 1995; 61 FR not less than 6 millimeters high pre- 29495, June 11, 1996; 63 FR 28922, May 27, 1998; ceded by the words ‘‘IMPORTANT— 68 FR 37982, June 26, 2004] USE OF SPARE TIRE’’ in letters not EFFECTIVE DATE NOTES: 1. At 67 FR 69627, less than 9 millimeters high. Nov. 18, 2002, § 571.120 was amended by revis- S8.2 Supplementary Information. The ing the heading, and S3, effective Sept. 1, owner’s manual of the vehicle shall 2003. At 68 FR 33655, June 5, 2003, the effec- contain, in writing in the English lan- tive date was delayed until Sept. 1, 2004. At guage and in not less than 10 point 69 FR 31306, June 3, 2004, the effective date was further delayed until Sept. 1, 2005. For type, the following information under the convenience of the user, the revised text the heading ‘‘IMPORTANT—USE OF is set forth as follows: SPARE TIRE’’: (a) A statement indicating the infor- § 571.120 Standard No. 120; Tire selection and rims for motor vehicles with a GVWR mation related to appropriate use for of more than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 the non-pneumatic spare tire including pounds). at a minimum the information set forth in S8 (a) and (b) and either the in- * * * * * formation set forth in S5.3.6 or a state- ment that the information set forth in S3. Application. This standard applies to motor vehicles with a gross vehicle weight S5.3.6 is located on the vehicle placard rating (GVWR) of more than 10,000 pounds and on the non-pneumatic tire; and motorcycles, to rims for use on those ve- (b) An instruction to drive carefully hicles, and to non-pneumatic spare tire as- when the non-pneumatic spare tire is semblies for use on those vehicles. in use, and to install the proper pneu- matic tire and rim at the first reason- * * * * * able opportunity; and (c) A statement that operation of the 2. At 68 FR 38149, June 26, 2003, § 571.120 was amended by revising its heading, S3, S5.1.1, vehicle is not recommended with more S5.1.2, and S5.3, effective June 1, 2007. For than one non-pneumatic spare tire in the convenience of the user, the revised text use at the same time. is set forth as follows: S9 Non-Pneumatic Rims and Wheel Center Members § 571.120 Standard No. 120; Tire selection and rims for motor vehicles with a GVWR S9.1 Non-Pneumatic Rim Require- of more than 4,536 kilograms (10,000 ments. Each non-pneumatic rim that is pounds). part of a separable non-pneumatic spare tire assembly shall be con- * * * * * structed to the dimensions of a non- S3. Application. This standard applies to pneumatic rim that is listed pursuant motor vehicles with a gross vehicle weight to S4.4 of § 571.129 for use with the non- rating (GVWR) of more than 4,536 kilograms pneumatic tire, designated by its non- (10,000 pounds and motorcycles, to rims for pneumatic tire identification code, use on those vehicles, and to non-pneumatic with which the vehicle is equipped. spare tire assemblies for use on those vehi- S9.2 Wheel Center Member Require- cles. ments. Each wheel center member that S5.1.1 Except as specified in S5.1.3, each is part of a separable non-pneumatic vehicle equipped with pneumatic tires for highway service shall be equipped with tires spare tire assembly shall be con- that meet the requirements of § 571.119, New structed to the dimensions of a wheel pneumatic tires for motor vehicles with a center member that is listed pursuant GVWR of more than 10,000 pounds, and rims to S4.4 of § 571.129 for use with the non- that are listed by the manufacturer of the

387

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00387 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.121 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

tires as suitable for use with those tires, in § 571.121 Standard No. 121; Air brake accordance with S5.1 of § 571.119, except that systems. vehicles may be equipped with a non-pneu- matic spare tire assembly that meets the re- S1. Scope. This standard establishes quirements of § 571.129, New non-pneumatic performance and equipment require- tires for passenger cars, and S8 of this stand- ments for braking systems on vehicles ard. Vehicles equipped with such an assem- equipped with air brake systems. bly shall meet the requirements of S5.3.3, S7, S2. Purpose. The purpose of this and S9 of this standard. standard is to insure safe braking per- S5.1.2 Except in the case of a vehicle formance under normal and emergency which has a speed attainable in 3.2 kilo- conditions. meters of 80 kilometers per hour or less, the S3. Application. This standard applies sum of the maximum load ratings of the to trucks, buses, and trailers equipped tires fitted to an axle shall be not less than the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) of the with air brake systems. However, it axle system as specified on the vehicle’s cer- does not apply to: tification label required by 49 CFR part 567. (a) Any trailer that has a width of Except in the case of a vehicle which has a more than 102.36 inches with extend- speed attainable in 2 miles of 50 mph or less, able equipment in the fully retracted the sum of the maximum load ratings of the position and is equipped with two short tires fitted to an axle shall be not less than track axles in a line across the width of the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) of the the trailer. axle system as specified on the vehicle’s cer- (b) Any vehicle equipped with an axle tification label required by 49 CFR part 567. If the certification label shows more than that has a gross axle weight rating one GAWR for the axle system, the sum shall (GAWR) of 29,000 pounds or more; be not less than the GAWR corresponding to (c) Any truck or bus that has a speed the size designation of the tires fitted to the attainable in 2 miles of not more than axle. If the size designation of the tires fitted 33 mph; to the axle does not appear on the certifi- (d) Any truck that has a speed at- cation label, the sum shall be not less than tainable in 2 miles of not more than 45 the lowest GAWR appearing on the label. mph, an unloaded vehicle weight that When a tire subject to FMVSS No. 109 or 139 is not less than 95 percent of its gross is installed on a multipurpose passenger ve- hicle, truck, bus, or trailer, the tire’s load vehicle weight rating (GVWR), and no rating shall be reduced by dividing by 1.10 capacity to carry occupants other than before calculating the sum (i.e., the sum of the driver and operating crew; the load ratings of the tires on each axle, (e) Any trailer that has a GVWR of when the tires’ load carrying capacity at the more than 120,000 pounds and whose recommended tire cold inflation pressure is body conforms to that described in the reduced by dividing by 1.10, must be appro- definition of heavy hauler trailer set priate for the GAWR). forth in S4; (f) Any trailer that has an unloaded * * * * * vehicle weight which is not less than 95 S5.3 Each vehicle shall show the informa- percent of its GVWR; and tion specified in S5.3.1 and S5.3.2 and, in the (g) Any load divider dolly. case of a vehicle equipped with a non-pneu- S4. Definitions. matic spare tire, the information specified in Agricultural commodity trailer means a S5.3.3, in the English language, lettered in trailer that is designed to transport block capitals and numerals not less than 2.4 bulk agricultural commodities in off- millimeters high and in the format set forth road harvesting sites and to a proc- following this paragraph. This information essing plant or storage location, as evi- shall appear either— denced by skeletal construction that (a) After each GAWR listed on the certifi- cation label required by § 567.4 or § 567.5 of accommodates harvest containers, a this chapter; or at the option of the manu- maximum length of 28 feet, and an ar- facturer, rangement of air control lines and res- (b) On the tire information label affixed to ervoirs that minimizes damage in field the vehicle in the manner, location, and operations. form described in § 567.4 (b) through (f) of this Air brake system means a system that chapter as appropriate of each GVWR–GAWR uses air as a medium for transmitting combination listed on the certification label. pressure or force from the driver con- trol to the service brake, including an * * * * * air-over-hydraulic brake subsystem,

388

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00388 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.121

but does not include a system that uses axle or in the same axle set in response compressed air or vacuum only to as- to the same signal or signals. sist the driver in applying muscular Effective projected luminous lens area force to hydraulic or mechanical com- means that area of the projection on a ponents. plane perpendicular to the lamp axis of Air-over-hydraulic brake subsystem that portion of the light-emitting sur- means a subsystem of the air brake face that directs light to the photo- system that uses compressed air to metric test pattern, and does not in- transmit a force from the driver con- clude mounting hole bosses, reflex re- trol to a hydraulic brake system to ac- flector area, beads or rims that may tuate the service brakes. glow or produce small areas of in- Antilock brake system or ABS means a creased intensity as a result of uncon- portion of a service brake system that trolled light from small areas (1⁄2 de- automatically controls the degree of gree radius around the test point). rotational wheel slip during braking Full-treadle brake application means a by: brake application in which the treadle (1) Sensing the rate of angular rota- valve pressure in any of the valve’s tion of the wheels; output circuits reaches 85 pounds per (2) Transmitting signals regarding square inch (psi) within 0.2 seconds the rate of wheel angular rotation to after the application is initiated, or in one or more controlling devices which which maximum treadle travel is interpret those signals and generate re- achieved within 0.2 seconds after the sponsive controlling output signals; application is initiated. and Heavy hauler trailer means a trailer (3) Transmitting those controlling which has one or more of the following signals to one or more modulators characteristics, but which is not a con- which adjust brake actuating forces in tainer chassis trailer: response to those signals. (1) Its brake lines are designed to Auto transporter means a truck and a adapt to separation or extension of the trailer designed for use in combination ; or to transport motor vehicles, in that (2) Its body consists only of a plat- the towing vehicle is designed to carry form whose primary cargo-carrying cargo at a location other than the fifth surface is not more than 40 inches wheel and to load this cargo only by above the ground in an unloaded condi- means of the towed vehicle. tion, except that it may include sides Common diaphragm means a single that are designed to be easily remov- brake chamber diaphragm which is a able and a permanent ‘‘front end struc- component of the parking, emergency, ture’’ as that term is used in § 393.106 of and service brake systems. this title. Container chassis trailer means a Independently controlled wheel means semitrailer of skeleton construction a directly controlled wheel for which limited to a bottom frame, one or more the modulator does not adjust the axles, specially built and fitted with brake actuating forces at any other locking devices for the transport of wheel on the same axle. intermodal shipping containers, so that Indirectly controlled wheel means a when the chassis and container are as- wheel at which the degree of rotational sembled, the units serve the same func- wheel slip is not sensed, but at which tion as an over the road trailer. the modulator of an antilock braking Directly controlled wheel means a system adjusts its brake actuating wheel for which the degree of rota- forces in response to signals from one tional wheel slip is sensed, either at or more sensed wheel(s). that wheel or on the axle shaft for that Initial brake temperature means the wheel and corresponding signals are average temperature of the service transmitted to one or more modulators brakes on the hottest axle of the vehi- that adjust the brake actuating forces cle 0.2 mile before any brake applica- at that wheel. Each modulator may tion in the case of road tests, or 18 sec- also adjust the brake actuating forces onds before any brake application in at other wheels that are on the same the case of dynamometer testing.

389

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00389 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.121 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Intermodal shipping container means a S5. Requirements. Each vehicle shall reusable, transportable enclosure that meet the following requirements under is especially designed with integral the conditions specified in S6. locking devices for securing the con- S5.1 Required equipment for trucks tainer to the trailer to facilitate the and buses. Each truck and bus shall efficient and bulk shipping and transfer have the following equipment: of goods by, or between various modes S5.1.1 Air compressor. An air com- of transport, such as highway, rail, sea pressor of sufficient capacity to in- and air. crease air pressure in the supply and Load divider dolly means a trailer service reservoirs from 85 psi to 100 psi composed of a trailer chassis and one when the engine is operating at the ve- or more axles, with no solid bed, body, hicle manufacturer’s maximum rec- or container attached, and which is de- ommended r.p.m. within a time, in sec- signed exclusively to support a portion onds, determined by the quotient (Ac- of the load on a trailer or truck ex- tual reservoir capacity×25)/Required cluded from all the requirements of reservoir capacity. this standard. S5.1.1.1 Air compressor cut-in pres- Maximum drive-through speed means sure. The air compressor governor cut- the highest possible constant speed at in pressure for each bus shall be 85 which the vehicle can be driven p.s.i. or greater. The air compressor through 200 feet of a 500-foot radius governor cut-in pressure for each truck curve arc without leaving the 12-foot shall be 100 p.s.i. or greater. lane. S5.1.2 Reservoirs. One or more serv- Maximum treadle travel means the dis- ice reservoir systems, from which air is tance that the treadle moves from its delivered to the brake chambers, and position when no force is applied to its either an automatic condensate drain position when the treadle reaches a full valve for each service reservoir or a stop. supply reservoir between the service Peak friction coefficient or PFC means reservoir system and the source of air the ratio of the maximum value of pressure. braking test wheel longitudinal force S5.1.2.1 The combined volume of all to the simultaneous vertical force oc- service reservoirs and supply reservoirs curring prior to wheel lockup, as the shall be at least 12 times the combined braking torque is progressively in- volume of all service brake chambers. creased. For each brake chamber type having a Pulpwood trailer means a trailer that full stroke at least as great as the first is designed exclusively for harvesting number in Column 1 of Table V, but no logs or pulpwood and constructed with more than the second number in Col- a skeletal frame with no means for at- umn 1 of Table V, the volume of each tachment of a solid bed, body, or con- brake chamber for purposes of calcu- tainer, and with an arrangement of air lating the required combined service control lines and reservoirs designed to and supply reservoir volume shall be minimize damage in off-road oper- either that specified in Column 2 of ations. Table V or the actual volume of the Tandem axle means a group or set of brake chamber at maximum travel of two or more axles placed in a close ar- the brake piston or pushrod, whichever rangement, one behind the other, with is lower. The volume of a brake cham- the centerlines of adjacent axles not ber not listed in Table V is the volume more than 72 inches apart. of the brake chamber at maximum Straddle trailer means a trailer that is travel of the brake piston or pushrod. designed to transport bulk agricultural The reservoirs of the truck portion of commodities from the harvesting loca- an auto transporter need not meet this tion as evidenced by a framework that requirement for reservoir volume. is driven over the cargo and lifting S5.1.2.2 Each reservoir shall be capa- arms that suspend the cargo for tran- ble of withstanding an internal hydro- sit. static pressure of five times the com- Wheel lockup means 100 percent wheel pressor cutout pressure or 500 psi, slip. whichever is greater, for 10 minutes.

390

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00390 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.121

S5.1.2.3 Each service reservoir sys- shall have no more than three wheels tem shall be protected against loss of controlled by one modulator. air pressure due to failure or leakage in S5.1.6.2 Antilock malfunction signal the system between the service res- and circuit. ervoir and the source of air pressure, (a) Each truck tractor manufactured by check valves or equivalent devices on or after March 1, 1997, and each sin- whose proper functioning can be gle unit vehicle manufactured on or checked without disconnecting any air after March 1, 1998, shall be equipped line or fitting. with an indicator lamp, mounted in S5.1.2.4 Each reservoir shall have a front of and in clear view of the driver, condensate drain valve that can be which is activated whenever there is a manually operated. malfunction that affects the genera- S5.1.3 Towing vehicle protection sys- tion or transmission of response or tem. If the vehicle is intended to tow control signals in the vehicle’s another vehicle equipped with air antilock brake system. The indicator brakes, a system to protect the air lamp shall remain activated as long as pressure in the towing vehicle from the such a malfunction exists, whenever effects of a loss of air pressure in the the ignition (start) switch is in the ‘‘on’’ towed vehicle. (‘‘run’’) position, whether or not the en- S5.1.4 Pressure gauge. A pressure gine is running. Each message about gauge in each service brake system, the existence of such a malfunction readily visible to a person seated in the shall be stored in the antilock brake normal driving position, that indicates system after the ignition switch is the service reservoir system air pres- turned to the ‘‘off’’ position and auto- sure. The accuracy of the gauge shall matically reactivated when the igni- be within plus or minus 7 percent of tion switch is again turned to the ‘‘on’’ the compressor cut-out pressure. (‘‘run’’) position. The indicator lamp S5.1.5 Warning signal. A signal, shall also be activated as a check of other than a pressure gauge, that gives lamp function whenever the ignition is a continuous warning to a person in turned to the ‘‘on’’ (‘‘run’’) position. The the normal driving position when the indicator lamp shall be deactivated at ignition is in the ‘‘on’’ (‘‘run’’) position the end of the check of lamp function and the air pressure in the service res- unless there is a malfunction or a mes- ervoir system is below 60 psi. The sig- sage about a malfunction that existed nal shall be either visible within the when the key switch was last turned to driver’s forward field of view, or both the ‘‘off’’ position. audible and visible. (b) Each truck tractor manufactured S5.1.6 Antilock brake system. on or after March 1, 2001, and each sin- S5.1.6.1(a) Each single-unit vehicle gle unit vehicle manufactured on or manufactured on or after March 1, 1998, after March 1, 2001, that is equipped to shall be equipped with an antilock tow another air-braked vehicle, shall brake system that directly controls the be equipped with an electrical circuit wheels of at least one front axle and that is capable of transmitting a mal- the wheels of at least one rear axle of function signal from the antilock the vehicle. Wheels on other axles of brake system(s) on one or more towed the vehicle may be indirectly con- vehicle(s) (e.g., trailer(s) and dolly(ies)) trolled by the antilock brake system. to the trailer ABS malfunction lamp in (b) Each truck tractor manufactured the cab of the towing vehicle, and shall on or after March 1, 1997, shall be have the means for connection of this equipped with an antilock brake sys- electrical circuit to the towed vehicle. tem that directly controls the wheels Each such truck tractor and single of at least one front axle and the unit vehicle shall also be equipped with wheels of at least one rear axle of the an indicator lamp, separate from the vehicle, with the wheels of at least one lamp required in S5.1.6.2(a), mounted in axle being independently controlled. front of and in clear view of the driver, Wheels on other axles of the vehicle which is activated whenever the mal- may be indirectly controlled by the function signal circuit described above antilock brake system. A truck tractor receives a signal indicating an ABS

391

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00391 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.121 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

malfunction on one or more towed ve- S5.2 Required equipment for trailers. hicle(s). The indicator lamp shall re- Each trailer shall have the following main activated as long as an ABS mal- equipment: function signal from one or more towed S5.2.1 Reservoirs. One or more res- vehicle(s) is present, whenever the ig- ervoirs to which the air is delivered nition (start) switch is in the ‘‘on’’ from the towing vehicle. (‘‘run’’) position, whether or not the en- S5.2.1.1 The total volume of each gine is running. The indicator lamp service reservoir shall be at least eight shall also be activated as a check of times the combined volume of all serv- lamp function whenever the ignition is ice brake chambers serviced by that turned to the ‘‘on’’ (‘‘run’’) position. The reservoir. For each brake chamber type indicator lamp shall be deactivated at having a full stroke at least as great as the end of the check of lamp function the first number in Column 1 of Table unless a trailer ABS malfunction sig- V, but no more than the second number nal is present. in column 1, the volume of each brake (c) [Reserved] chamber for purposes of calculating the S5.1.6.3 Antilock power circuit for required total service reservoir volume towed vehicles. Each truck tractor man- shall be either the number specified in ufactured on or after March 1, 1997, and Column 2 of Table V or the actual vol- each single unit vehicle manufactured ume of the brake chamber at maximum on or after March 1, 1998, that is travel of the brake piston or pushrod, equipped to tow another air-braked ve- whichever is lower. The volume of a hicle shall be equipped with one or brake chamber not listed in Table V is more electrical circuits that provide the volume of the brake chamber at continuous power to the antilock sys- maximum travel of the brake piston or tem on the towed vehicle or vehicles pushrod. The reservoirs on a heavy whenever the ignition (start) switch is hauler trailer and the trailer portion of in the on ( run ) position. Such a cir- ‘‘ ’’ ‘‘ ’’ an auto transporter need not meet this cuit shall be adequate to enable the requirement for reservoir volume. antilock system on each towed vehicle to be fully operable. S5.2.1.2 Each reservoir shall be capa- ble of withstanding an internal hydro- S5.1.7 Service brake stop lamp switch. A switch that lights the stop lamps static pressure of 500 psi for 10 minutes. when the service brake control is stati- S5.2.1.3 Each reservoir shall have a cally depressed to a point that pro- condensate drain valve that can be duces a pressure of 6 psi or less in the manually operated. service brake chambers. S5.2.1.4 Each service reservoir shall S5.1.8 Brake distribution and auto- be protected against loss of air pres- matic adjustment. Each vehicle shall be sure due to failure or leakage in the equipped with a service brake system system between the service reservoir acting on all wheels. and its source of air pressure by check (a) Brake adjuster. Wear of the service valves or equivalent devices. brakes shall be compensated for by S5.2.2 Brake distribution and auto- means of a system of automatic adjust- matic adjustment. Each vehicle shall be ment. When inspected pursuant to S5.9, equipped with a service brake system the adjustment of the service brakes acting on all wheels. shall be within the limits rec- (a) Brake adjuster. Wear of the service ommended by the vehicle manufac- brakes shall be compensated for by turer. means of a system of automatic adjust- (b) Brake indicator. For each brake ment. When inspected pursuant to S5.9, equipped with an external automatic the adjustment of the service brakes adjustment mechanism and having an shall be within the limits rec- exposed pushrod, the condition of serv- ommended by the vehicle manufac- ice brake under-adjustment shall be turer. displayed by a brake adjustment indi- (b) Brake indicator. For each brake cator that is discernible when viewed equipped with an external automatic with 20/40 vision from a location adja- adjustment mechanism and having an cent to or underneath the vehicle, exposed pushrod, the condition of serv- when inspected pursuant to S5.9. ice brake under-adjustment shall be

392

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00392 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.121

displayed by a brake adjustment indi- tion signal from the antilock brake cator in a manner that is discernible systems of additional trailers it tows when viewed with 20/40 vision from a to the vehicle towing it. location adjacent to or underneath the S5.2.3.3 Antilock malfunction indi- vehicle, when inspected pursuant to cator. S5.9. (a) In addition to the requirements of S5.2.3 Antilock brake system. S5.2.3.2, each trailer and trailer con- S5.2.3.1(a) Each semitrailer (includ- verter dolly manufactured on or after ing a trailer converter dolly) manufac- March 1, 1998, and before March 1, 2009, tured on or after March 1, 1998, shall be shall be equipped with an external equipped with an antilock brake sys- antilock malfunction indicator lamp tem that directly controls the wheels that meets the requirements of S5.2.3.3 of at least one axle of the vehicle. (b) through (d). Wheels on other axles of the vehicle (b)(1) The lamp shall be designed to may be indirectly controlled by the conform to the performance require- antilock brake system. ments of Society of Automotive Engi- (b) Each full trailer manufactured on neers (SAE) Recommended Practice or after March 1, 1998, shall be equipped J592 JUN92, or J592e, July 1972, Clear- with an antilock brake system that di- ance, Side Marker, and Identification rectly controls the wheels of at least Lamps, for combination, clearance, and one front axle of the vehicle and at side marker lamps, which are marked least one rear axle of the vehicle. with a ‘‘PC’’ or ‘‘P2’’ on the lens or hous- Wheels on other axles of the vehicle ing, in accordance with SAE J759 Jan may be indirectly controlled by the 95, Lighting Identification Code. SAE antilock brake system. J592 June 92, SAE J592e July 1972, and S5.2.3.2 Antilock malfunction signal. SAE J759 January 1995, are incor- Each trailer (including a trailer con- porated by reference and thereby are verter dolly) manufactured on or after made part of this standard. The Direc- March 1, 2001, that is equipped with an tor of the Federal Register approved antilock brake system shall be equipped with an electrical circuit that the material incorporated by reference is capable of signaling a malfunction in in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 the trailer’s antilock brake system, CFR part 51. Copies of the material and shall have the means for connec- may be inspected at NHTSA’s Docket tion of this antilock brake system mal- Section, 400 Seventh Street, SW., room function signal circuit to the towing 5109, Washington, DC, or at the Na- vehicle. The electrical circuit need not tional Archives and Records Adminis- be separate or dedicated exclusively to tration (NARA). For information on this malfunction signaling function. the availability of this material at The signal shall be present whenever NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go to: http:// there is a malfunction that affects the www.archives.gov/federallregister/ generation or transmission of response codeloflfederallregulations/ or control signals in the trailer’s ibrllocations.html. antilock brake system. The signal shall (2) The color of the lamp shall be yel- remain present as long as the malfunc- low. tion exists, whenever power is supplied (3) The letters ‘‘ABS’’ shall be perma- to the antilock brake system. Each nently molded, stamped, or otherwise message about the existence of such a marked or labeled in letters not less malfunction shall be stored in the than 10 mm (0.4 inches) high on the antilock brake system whenever power lamp lens or its housing to identify the is no longer supplied to the system, function of the lamp. Alternatively, and the malfunction signal shall be the letters ‘‘ABS’’ may be painted on automatically reactivated whenever the trailer body or dolly or a plaque power is again supplied to the trailer’s with the letters ‘‘ABS’’ may be affixed antilock brake system. In addition, to the trailer body or converter dolly; each trailer manufactured on or after the letters ‘‘ABS’’ shall be not less than March 1, 2001, that is designed to tow 25 mm (1 inch) high. A portion of one of other air-brake equipped trailers shall the letters in the alternative identi- be capable of transmitting a malfunc- fication shall be not more than 150 mm

393

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00393 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.121 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(5.9 inches) from the edge of the lamp end of the check of lamp function, un- lens. less there is a malfunction or a mes- (c) Location requirements. (1) Each sage about a malfunction that existed trailer that is not a trailer converter when power was last supplied to the dolly shall be equipped with a lamp antilock brake system. mounted on a permanent structure on S5.3 Service brakes—road tests. The the left side of the trailer as viewed service brake system on each truck from the rear, no closer than 150 mm tractor shall, under the conditions of (5.9 inches), and no farther than 600 S6, meet the requirements of S5.3.1, mm (23.6 inches) from the red rear side S5.3.3, S5.3.4, and S5.3.6, when tested marker lamp, when measured between without adjustments other than those the closest edge of the effective pro- specified in this standard. The service jected luminous lens area of each lamp. brake system on each bus and truck (2) Each trailer converter dolly shall (other than a truck tractor shall) man- be equipped with a lamp mounted on a ufactured before July 1, 2005 and each permanent structure of the dolly so bus and truck (other than a truck trac- that the lamp is not less than 375 mm tor) manufactured in two or more (14.8 inches) above the road surface stages shall, under the conditions of when measured from the center of the S6, meet the requirements of S5.3.1, lamp with the dolly at curb weight. S5.3.3, and S5.3.4 when tested without When a person, standing 3 meters (9.8 adjustments other than those specified feet) from the lamp, views the lamp in this standard. The service brake sys- from a perspective perpendicular to the tem on each bus and truck (other than vehicle’s centerline, no portion of the a truck tractor) manufactured on or lamp shall be obscured by any struc- after July 1, 2005 and each bus and ture on the dolly. (3) Each trailer that is not a trailer truck (other than a truck tractor) converter dolly and on which the mal- manufactured in two or more stages on function indicator lamp cannot be or after July 1, 2006 shall, under the placed within the location specified in conditions of S6, meet the require- S5.2.3.3(c)(1) shall be equipped with a ments of S5.3.1, S5.3.3, S5.3.4, and lamp mounted on a permanent struc- S5.3.6, when tested without adjust- ture on the left side of the trailer as ments other than those specified in viewed from the rear, near the red rear this standard. The service brake sys- side marker lamp or on the front face tem on each trailer shall, under the of the left rear fender of a trailer conditions of S6, meet the require- equipped with fenders. ments of S5.3.3, S5.3.4, and S5.3.5 when (d) The lamp shall be illuminated tested without adjustments other than whenever power is supplied to the those specified in this standard. How- antilock brake system and there is a ever, a heavy hauler trailer and the malfunction that affects the genera- truck and trailer portions of an auto tion or transmission of response or transporter need not met the require- control signals in the trailer’s antilock ments of S5.3. brake system. The lamp shall remain S5.3.1 Stopping distance—trucks and illuminated as long as such a malfunc- buses. When stopped six times for each tion exists and power is supplied to the combination of vehicle type, weight, antilock brake system. Each message and speed specified in S5.3.1.1, in the about the existence of such a malfunc- sequence specified in Table I, each tion shall be stored in the antilock truck tractor manufactured on or after brake system whenever power is no March 1, 1997, and each single unit ve- longer supplied to the system. The hicle manufactured on or after March lamp shall be automatically reac- 1, 1998, shall stop at least once in not tivated when power is again supplied to more than the distance specified in the trailer’s antilock brake system. Table II, measured from the point at The lamp shall also be activated as a which movement of the service brake check of lamp function whenever power control begins, without any part of the is first supplied to the antilock brake vehicle leaving the roadway, and with system and the vehicle is stationary. wheel lockup permitted only as fol- The lamp shall be deactivated at the lows:

394

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00394 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.121

(a) At vehicle speeds above 20 mph, movement of the service brake control, any wheel on a nonsteerable axle other reach 60 psi in not more than 0.45 sec- than the two rearmost nonliftable, ond in the case of trucks and buses, 0.50 nonsteerable axles may lock up, for second in the case of trailers, other any duration. The wheels on the two than trailer converter dollies, designed rearmost nonliftable, nonsteerable to tow another vehicle equipped with axles may lock up according to air brakes, 0.55 second in the case of S5.3.1(b). trailer converter dollies, and 0.60 sec- (b) At vehicle speeds above 20 mph, ond in the case of trailers other than one wheel on any axle or two wheels on trailers designed to tow another vehi- any tandem may lock up for any dura- cle equipped with air brakes. A vehicle tion. designed to tow another vehicle (c) At vehicle speeds above 20 mph, equipped with air brakes shall meet the any wheel not permitted to lock in above actuation time requirement with S5.3.1 (a) or (b) may lock up repeatedly, a 50-cubic-inch test reservoir connected with each lockup occurring for a dura- to the control line output coupling. A tion of one second or less. trailer, including a trailer converter (d) At vehicle speeds of 20 mph or dolly, shall meet the above actuation less, any wheel may lock up for any du- time requirement with its control line ration. input coupling connected to the test S5.3.1.1 Stop the vehicle from 60 rig shown in Figure 1. mph on a surface with a peak friction (b) For a vehicle that is designed to coefficient of 0.9 with the vehicle load- tow another vehicle equipped with air ed as follows: brakes, the pressure in the 50-cubic- (a) Loaded to its GVWR so that the inch test reservoir referred to in load on each axle, measured at the tire- S5.3.3.1(a) shall, when measured from ground interface, is most nearly pro- the first movement of the service portional to the axles’ respective brake control, reach 60 psi not later GAWRs, without exceeding the GAWR than the time the fastest brake cham- of any axle. ber on the vehicle reaches 60 psi or, at (b) In the truck tractor only configu- the option of the manufacturer, in not ration plus up to 500 lbs. or, at the more than 0.35 second in the case of manufacturer’s option, at its unloaded trucks and buses, 0.55 second in the weight plus up to 500 lbs. (including case of trailer converter dollies, and driver and instrumentation) and plus 0.50 second in the case of trailers other not more than an additional 1,000 lbs. than trailer converter dollies. for a roll bar structure on the vehicle, S5.3.4 Brake release time. Each serv- and ice brake system shall meet the re- (c) At its unloaded vehicle weight quirements of S5.3.4.1 (a) and (b). (except for truck tractors) plus up to S5.3.4.1(a) With an initial service 500 lbs. (including driver and instru- brake chamber air pressure of 95 psi, mentation) or, at the manufacturer’s the air pressure in each brake chamber option, at its unloaded weight plus up shall, when measured from the first to 500 lbs. (including driver and instru- movement of the service brake control, mentation) plus not more than an addi- fall to 5 psi in not more than 0.55 sec- tional 1,000 lbs. for a roll bar structure ond in the case of trucks and buses; 1.00 on the vehicle. If the speed attainable second in the case of trailers, other in two miles is less than 60 mph, the than trailer converter dollies, designed vehicle shall stop from a speed in Table to tow another vehicle equipped with II that is four to eight mph less than air brakes; 1.10 seconds in the case of the speed attainable in two miles. trailer converter dollies; and 1.20 sec- S5.3.2 [Reserved] onds in the case of trailers other than S5.3.3 Brake actuation time. Each trailers designed to tow another vehi- service brake system shall meet the re- cle equipped with air brakes. A vehicle quirements of S5.3.3.1 (a) and (b). designated to tow another vehicle S5.3.3.1(a) With an initial service res- equipped with air brakes shall meet the ervoir system air pressure of 100 psi, above release time requirement with a the air pressure in each brake chamber 50-cubic-inch test reservoir connected shall, when measured from the first to the control line output coupling. A

395

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00395 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.121 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

trailer, including a trailer converter lease times, as specified in S5.3.3 and dolly, shall meet the above release S5.3.4, except for the installation of the time requirement with its control line orifice in the control line to restrict input coupling connected to the test airflow rate. rig shown in Figure 1. S5.3.6 Stability and control during (b) For vehicles designed to tow an- braking—trucks and buses. When other vehicle equipped with air brakes, stopped four consecutive times for each the pressure in the 50-cubic-inch test combination of weight, speed, and road reservoir referred to in S5.3.4.1(a) shall, conditions specified in S5.3.6.1 and when measured from the first move- S5.3.6.2, each truck tractor shall stop ment of the service brake control, fall at least three times within the 12-foot to 5 psi in not more than 0.75 seconds in lane, without any part of the vehicle the case of trucks and buses, 1.10 sec- leaving the roadway. When stopped onds in the case of trailer converter four consecutive times for each com- dollies, and 1.00 seconds in the case of bination of weight, speed, and road trailers other than trailer converter conditions specified in S5.3.6.1 and dollies. S5.3.6.2, each bus and truck (other than S5.3.5 Control signal pressure differen- a truck tractor) manufactured on or tial—converter dollies and trailers de- after July 1, 2005, and each bus and signed to tow another vehicle equipped truck (other than a truck tractor) with air brakes. manufactured in two or more stages on (a) For a trailer designed to tow an- or after July 1, 2006, shall stop at least other vehicle equipped with air brakes, three times within the 12-foot lane, the pressure differential between the without any part of the vehicle leaving control line input coupling and a 50- the roadway. cubic-inch test reservoir attached to S5.3.6.1 Using a full-treadle brake the control line output coupling shall application for the duration of the not exceed the values specified in stop, stop the vehicle from 30 mph or 75 S5.3.5(a) (1), (2), and (3) under the con- percent of the maximum drive-through ditions specified in S5.3.5(b) (1) through speed, whichever is less, on a 500-foot (4): radius curved roadway with a wet level (1) 1 psi at all input pressures equal surface having a peak friction coeffi- to or greater than 5 psi, but not greater cient of 0.5 when measured on a than 20 psi; straight or curved section of the curved (2) 2 psi at all input pressures equal roadway using an American Society for to or greater than 20 psi but not great- Testing and Materials (ASTM) E1136 er than 40 psi; and standard reference tire, in accordance (3) Not more than a 5-percent dif- with ASTM Method E1337–90, at a speed ferential at any input pressure equal to of 40 mph, with water delivery. or greater than 40 psi. S5.3.6.2 Stop the vehicle, with the (b) The requirements in S5.3.5(a) vehicle: shall be met— (a) Loaded to its GVWR, for a truck (1) When the pressure at the input tractor, and coupling is steady, increasing or de- (b) At its unloaded weight plus up to creasing; 500 pounds (including driver and instru- (2) When air is applied to or released mentation), or at the manufacturer’s from the control line input coupling option, at its unloaded weight plus up using the trailer test rig shown in Fig- to 500 pounds (including driver and in- ure 1; strumentation) and plus not more than (3) With a fixed orifice consisting of a an additional 1000 pounds for a roll bar 0.0180 inch diameter hole (no. 77 drill structure on the vehicle, for a truck, bit) in a 0.032 inch thick disc installed bus, or truck tractor. in the control line between the trailer S5.4 Service brake system—dynamom- test rig coupling and the vehicle’s con- eter tests. When tested without prior trol line input coupling; and road testing, under the conditions of (4) Operating the trailer test rig in S6.2, each brake assembly shall meet the same manner and under the same the requirements of S5.4.1, S5.4.2, and conditions as it is operated during test- S5.4.3 when tested in sequence and ing to measure brake actuation and re- without adjustments other than those

396

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00396 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.121

specified in the standard. For purposes first application. Repeat the cycle of the requirements of S5.4.2 and S5.4.3, until 10 decelerations have been made. an average deceleration rate is the The service line air pressure shall not change in velocity divided by the decel- exceed 100 psi during any deceleration. eration time measured from the onset S5.4.2.2 One minute after the end of of deceleration. the last deceleration required by S5.4.1 Brake retardation force. The S5.4.2.1 and with the drum or disc ro- sum of the retardation forces exerted tating at a speed of 20 m.p.h., decel- by the brakes on each vehicle designed erate to a stop at an average decelera- to be towed by another vehicle tion rate of 14 f.p.s.p.s. equipped with air brakes shall be such S5.4.3 Brake recovery. Except as pro- that the quotient sum of the brake re- vided in S5.4.3(a) and (b), starting two tardation forces / sum of GAWR’s rel- minutes after completing the tests re- ative to brake chamber air pressure, quired by S5.4.2, a vehicle’s brake shall and shall have values not less than be capable of making 20 consecutive those shown in Column 1 of Table III. stops from 30 mph at an average decel- Retardation force shall be determined eration rate of 12 f.p.s.p.s., at equal in- as follows: tervals of one minute measured from S5.4.1.1 After burnishing the brake the start of each brake application. pursuant to S6.2.6, retain the brake as- The service line air pressure needed to sembly on the inertia dynamometer. attain a rate of 12 f.p.s.p.s. shall be not With an initial brake temperature be- more than 85 lb/in2, and not less than tween 125 °F. and 200 °F., conduct a 20lb/in2 for a brake not subject to the stop from 50 m.p.h., maintaining brake control of an antilock system, or 12 lb/ chamber air pressure at a constant 20 in2 for a brake subject to the control of psi. Measure the average torque ex- an antilock system. erted by the brake from the time the (a) Notwithstanding S5.4.3, neither specified air pressure is reached until front axle brake of a truck-tractor is the brake stops and divide by the static subject to the requirements set forth in loaded tire radius specified by the tire S5.4.3. manufacturer to determine the retar- (b) Notwithstanding S5.4.3, neither dation force. Repeat the procedure six front axle brake of a bus or a truck times, increasing the brake chamber other than a truck-tractor is subject to air pressure by 10 psi each time. After the requirement set forth in S5.4.3 pro- each stop, rotate the brake drum or hibiting the service line air pressure disc until the temperature of the brake from being less than 20 lb/in2 for a falls to between 125 °F. and 200 °F. brake not subject to the control of an S5.4.2 Brake power. When mounted antilock system or 12 lb/in2 for a brake on an inertia dynamometer, each brake subject to the control of an antilock shall be capable of making 10 consecu- system. tive decelerations at an average rate of S5.5 Antilock system. 9 f.p.s.p.s. from 50 m.p.h. to 15 m.p.h., S5.5.1 Antilock system malfunction. at equal intervals of 72 seconds, and On a truck tractor manufactured on or shall be capable of decelerating to a after March 1, 1997, that is equipped stop from 20 m.p.h. at an average decel- with an antilock brake system and a eration rate of 14 f.p.s.p.s. 1 minute single unit vehicle manufactured on or after the 10th deceleration. The series after March 1, 1998, that is equipped of decelerations shall be conducted as with an antilock brake system, a mal- follows: function that affects the generation or S5.4.2.1 With an initial brake tem- transmission of response or control sig- perature between 150 °F. and 200 °F. for nals of any part of the antilock system the first brake application, and the shall not increase the actuation and re- drum or disc rotating at a speed equiv- lease times of the service brakes. alent to 50 m.p.h., apply the brake and S5.5.2 Antilock system power—trailers. decelerate at an average deceleration On a trailer (including a trailer con- rate of 9 f.p.s.p.s. to 15 m.p.h. Upon verter dolly) manufactured on or after reaching 15 m.p.h., accelerate to 50 March 1, 1998, that is equipped with an m.p.h. and apply the brake for a second antilock system that requires elec- time 72 seconds after the start of the trical power for operation, the power

397

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00397 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.121 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

shall be obtained from the towing vehi- GAWR is not less than 0.28 for any axle cle through one or more electrical cir- other than a steerable front axle; and cuits which provide continuous power (b) In the case of a truck-tractor that whenever the powered vehicle’s igni- is equipped with more than two axles, tion (start) switch is in the ‘‘on’’ (‘‘run’’) such that the quotient static retarda- position. The antilock system shall tion force/GVWR is not less than 0.14. automatically receive power from the S5.6.2 Grade holding. With all parking stoplamp circuit, if the primary circuit brakes applied, the vehicle shall re- or circuits are not functioning. Each main stationary facing uphill and fac- trailer (including a trailer converter ing downhill on a smooth, dry portland dolly) manufactured on or after March cement concrete roadway with a 20-per- 1, 1998, that is equipped to tow another cent grade, both air-braked vehicle shall be equipped (a) When loaded to its GVWR, and with one or more circuits which pro- (b) At its unloaded vehicle weight vide continuous power to the antilock plus 1500 pounds (including driver and system on the vehicle(s) it tows. Such instrumentation and roll bar). circuits shall be adequate to enable the S5.6.3 Application and holding. Each antilock system on each towed vehicle parking brake system shall meet the to be fully operable. requirements of S5.6.3.1 through S5.6 Parking brakes. S5.6.3.4. (a) Except as provided in S5.6(b) and S5.6.3.1 The parking brake system S5.6(c), each vehicle other than a trail- shall be capable of achieving the min- er converter dolly shall have a parking imum performance specified either in brake system that under the conditions S5.6.1 or S5.6.2 with any single leakage- of S6.1 meets the requirements of: type failure, in any other brake sys- (1) S5.6.1 or S5.6.2, at the manufactur- tem, of a part designed to contain com- er’s option, and pressed air or brake fluid (excluding (2) S5.6.3, S5.6.4, S5.6.5, and S5.6.6. failure of a component of a brake (b) At the option of the manufac- chamber housing but including failure turer, for vehicles equipped with brake of any brake chamber diaphragm that systems which incorporate a common is part of any other brake system in- diaphragm, the performance require- cluding a diaphragm which is common ments specified in S5.6(a) which must to the parking brake system and any be met with any single leakage-type other brake system), when the pres- failure in a common diaphragm may sures in the vehicle’s parking brake instead be met with the level of leak- chambers are at the levels determined age-type failure determined in S5.6.7. in S5.6.3.4. The election of this option does not af- S5.6.3.2 A mechanical means shall fect the performance requirements be provided that, after a parking brake specified in S5.6(a) which apply with application is made with the pressures single leakage-type failures other than in the vehicle’s parking brake cham- failures in a common diaphragm. bers at the levels determined in (c) At the option of the manufac- S5.6.3.4, and all air and fluid pressures turer, the trailer portion of any agri- in the vehicle’s braking systems are cultural commodity trailer, heavy then bled down to zero, and without hauler trailer, or pulpwood trailer may using electrical power, holds the park- meet the requirements of § 393.43 of this ing brake application with sufficient title instead of the requirements of parking retardation force to meet the S5.6(a). minimum performance specified in S5.6.1 Static retardation force. With S5.6.3.1 and in either S5.6.1 or S5.6.2. all other brakes made inoperative, dur- S5.6.3.3 For trucks and buses, with ing a static drawbar pull in a forward an initial reservoir system pressure of or rearward direction, the static retar- 100 psi and, if designed to tow a vehicle dation force produced by the applica- equipped with air brakes, with a 50 tion of the parking brakes shall be: cubic inch test reservoir connected to (a) In the case of a vehicle other than the supply line coupling, no later than a truck-tractor that is equipped with three seconds from the time of actu- more than two axles, such that the ation of the parking brake control, the quotient static retardation force/ mechanical means referred to in

398

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00398 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.121

S5.6.3.2 shall be actuated. For trailers, brake control. It shall be operable by a with the supply line initially pressur- person seated in the normal driving po- ized to 100 psi using the supply line sition. The control shall be identified portion of the trailer test rig (Figure 1) in a manner that specifies the method and, if designed to tow a vehicle of control operation. The parking equipped with air brakes, with a 50 brake control shall control the parking cubic inch test reservoir connected to brakes of the vehicle and of any air the rear supply line coupling, no later braked vehicle that it is designed to than three seconds from the time vent- tow. ing to the atmosphere of the front sup- S5.6.5 Release Performance. Each ply line coupling is initiated, the me- parking brake system shall meet the chanical means referred to in S5.6.3.2 requirements specified in S5.6.5.1 shall be actuated. This requirement through S5.6.5.4. shall be met for trucks, buses and trail- S5.6.5.1 For trucks and buses, with ers both with and without any single initial conditions as specified in leakage-type failure, in any other S5.6.5.2, at all times after an applica- brake system, of a part designed to tion actuation of the parking brake contain compressed air or brake fluid control, and with any subsequent level (consistent with the parenthetical of pressure, or combination of levels of phrase specified in S5.6.3.1). pressure, in the reservoirs of any of the S5.6.3.4 The parking brake chamber vehicle’s brake systems, no reduction pressures for S5.6.3.1 and S5.6.3.2 are de- in parking brake retardation force termined as follows. For trucks and shall result from a release actuation of buses, with an initial reservoir system the parking brake control unless the pressure of 100 psi and, if designed to parking brakes are capable, after such tow a vehicle equipped with air brakes, release, of being reapplied at a level with a 50 cubic inch test reservoir con- meeting the minimum performance nected to the supply line coupling, any specified either in S5.6.1 or S5.6.2. This single leakage type failure, in any requirement shall be met both with other brake system, of a part designed and without the engine on, and with to contain compressed air or brake and without single leakage-type fail- fluid (consistent with the parenthetical ure, in any other brake system, of a phrase specified in S5.6.3.1), is intro- part designed to contain compressed duced in the brake system. The park- air or brake fluid (consistent with the ing brake control is actuated and the parenthetical phrase specified in pressures in the vehicle’s parking S5.6.3.1). brake chambers are measured three S5.6.5.2 The initial conditions for seconds after that actuation is initi- S5.6.5.1 are as follows: The reservoir ated. For trailers, with the supply line system pressure is 100 psi. If the vehi- initially pressurized to 100 psi using cle is designed to tow a vehicle the supply line portion of the trailer equipped with air brakes, a 50 cubic test rig (Figure 1) and, if designed to inch test reservoir is connected to the tow a vehicle equipped with air brakes, supply line coupling. with a 50 cubic inch test reservoir con- S5.6.5.3 For trailers, with initial nected to the rear supply line coupling, conditions as specified in S5.6.5.4, at all any single leakage type failure, in any times after actuation of the parking other brake system, of a part designed brakes by venting the front supply line to contain compressed air or brake coupling to the atmosphere, and with fluid (consistent with the parenthetical any subsequent level of pressure, or phrase specified in S5.6.3.1), is intro- combination of levels of pressure, in duced in the brake system. The front the reservoirs of any of the vehicle’s supply line coupling is vented to the brake systems, the parking brakes atmosphere and the pressures in the shall not be releasable by repressur- vehicle’s parking brake chambers are izing the supply line using the supply measured three seconds after that line portion of the trailer test rig (Fig- venting is initiated. ure 1) to any pressure above 70 psi, un- S5.6.4 Parking brake control—trucks less the parking brakes are capable, and buses. The parking brake control after such release, of reapplication by shall be separate from the service subsequent venting of the front supply

399

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00399 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.121 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

line coupling to the atmosphere, at a S5.6.6.4 For trailers, with initial level meeting the minimum perform- conditions as specified in S5.6.6.5, the ance specified either in S5.6.1 or S5.6.2. parking brake system shall be capable This requirement shall be met both of meeting the minimum performance with and without any single leakage- specified either in S5.6.1 or S5.6.2, with type failure, in any other brake sys- any single leakage-type failure, in any tem, of a part designed to contain com- other brake system, of a part designed pressed air or brake fluid (consistent to contain compressed air or brake with the parenthetical phrase specified fluid (consistent with the parenthetical in S5.6.3.1). phrase specified in S5.6.3.1), at the con- S5.6.5.4 The initial conditions for clusion of the test sequence specified in S5.6.5.3 are as follows: The reservoir S5.6.6.6. system and supply line are pressurized S5.6.6.5 The initial conditions for to 100 psi, using the supply line portion S5.6.6.4 are as follows: The reservoir of the trailer test rig (Figure 1). If the system and supply line are pressurized vehicle is designed to tow a vehicle to 100 psi, using the supply line portion equipped with air brakes, a 50 cubic of the trailer test rig (Figure 1). If the inch test reservoir is connected to the vehicle is designed to tow a vehicle rear supply line coupling. equipped with air brakes, a 50 cubic S5.6.6 Accumulation of actuation en- inch test reservoir is connected to the ergy. Each parking brake system shall rear supply line coupling. meet the requirements specified in S5.6.6.6 The test sequence for S5.6.6.1 through S5.6.6.6. S5.6.6.4 is as follows. Any single leak- age type failure, in any other brake S5.6.6.1 For trucks and buses, with system, of a part designed to contain initial conditions as specified in compressed air or brake fluid (con- S5.6.6.2, the parking brake system shall sistent with the parenthetical phrase be capable of meeting the minimum specified in S5.6.3.1), is introduced in performance specified either in S5.6.1 the brake system. The front supply line or S5.6.2, with any single leakage-type coupling is vented to the atmosphere. failure, in any other brake system, of a Thirty seconds after the initiation of part designed to contain compressed such venting, the supply line is re- air or brake fluid (consistent with the pressurized with the trailer test rig parenthetical phrase specified in (Figure 1). Thirty seconds after the ini- S5.6.3.1) at the conclusion of the test tiation of such repressurizing of the sequence specified in S5.6.6.3. supply line, the front supply line is S5.6.6.2 The initial conditions for vented to the atmosphere. This proce- S5.6.6.1 are as follows: The engine is on. dure is conducted either by connection The reservoir system pressure is 100 and disconnection of the supply line psi. If the vehicle is designed to tow a coupling or by use of a valve installed vehicle equipped with air brakes, a 50 in the supply line portion of the trailer cubic inch test reservoir is connected test rig near the supply line coupling. to the supply line coupling. S5.6.7 Maximum level of common dia- S5.6.6.3 The test sequence for phragm leakage-type failure/ Equivalent S5.6.6.1 is as follows: The engine is level of leakage from the air chamber con- turned off. Any single leakage type taining that diaphragm. In the case of failure, in any other brake system, of a vehicles for which the option in S5.6(b) part designed to contain compressed has been elected, determine the max- air or brake fluid (consistent with the imum level of common diaphragm parenthetical phrase specified in leakage-type failure (or equivalent S5.6.3.1), is then introduced in the level of leakage from the air chamber brake system. An application actu- containing that diaphragm) according ation of the parking brake control is to the procedures set forth in S5.6.7.1 then made. Thirty seconds after such through S5.6.7.2.3. actuation, a release actuation of the S5.6.7.1 Trucks and buses. parking brake control is made. Thirty S5.6.7.1.1 According to the following seconds after the release actuation, a procedure, determine the threshold final application actuation of the park- level of common diaphragm leakage- ing brake control is made. type failure (or equivalent level of

400

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00400 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.121

leakage from the air chamber con- inch test reservoir connected to the taining that diaphragm) at which the supply line coupling, make an applica- vehicle’s parking brakes become tion actuation of the parking brake unreleasable. With an initial reservoir control. Determine the maximum res- system pressure of 100 psi, the engine ervoir leakage rate (in psi per minute), turned off, no application of any of the which is the maximum rate of decrease vehicle’s brakes, and, if the vehicle is in air pressure of any of the vehicle’s designed to tow a vehicle equipped with reservoirs that results after that park- air brakes, a 50 cubic inch test res- ing brake application. ervoir connected to the supply line S5.6.7.1.3 Using the following proce- coupling, introduce a leakage-type fail- dure, introduce a leakage-type failure ure of the common diaphragm (or of the common diaphragm (or equiva- equivalent leakage from the air cham- lent leakage from the air chamber con- ber containing that diaphragm). Apply taining that diaphragm) that results in the parking brakes by making an appli- a maximum reservoir leakage rate that cation actuation of the parking brake is three times the threshold maximum control. Reduce the pressures in all of reservoir leakage rate determined in the vehicle’s reservoirs to zero, turn on S5.6.7.1.2. With an initial reservoir sys- the engine and allow it to idle, and tem pressure of 100 psi, the engine allow the pressures in the vehicle’s res- turned off, no application of any of the ervoirs to rise until they stabilize or vehicle’s brakes and, if the vehicle is until the compressor shut-off point is designed to tow a vehicle equipped with reached. At that time, make a release air brakes, a 50 cubic inch test res- actuation of the parking brake control, ervoir connected to the supply line and determine whether all of the me- coupling, make an application actu- chanical means referred to in S5.6.3.2 ation of the parking brake control. De- continue to be actuated and hold the termine the maximum reservoir leak- parking brake applications with suffi- age rate (in psi per minute), which is cient parking retardation force to meet the maximum rate of decrease in air the minimum performance specified in pressure of any of the vehicle’s res- either S5.6.1 or S5.6.2. Repeat this pro- ervoirs that results after that parking cedure with progressively decreasing or brake application. The level of com- increasing levels (whichever is applica- mon diaphragm leakage-type failure ble) of leakage-type diaphragm failures (or equivalent level of leakage from the or equivalent leakages, to determine air chamber containing that dia- the minimum level of common dia- phragm) associated with this reservoir phragm leakage-type failure (or equiv- leakage rate is the level that is to be alent level of leakage from the air used under the option set forth in chamber containing that diaphragm) at S5.6(b). which all of the mechanical means re- S5.6.7.2 Trailers. ferred to in S5.6.3.2 continue to be ac- S5.6.7.2.1 According to the following tuated and hold the parking brake ap- procedure, determine the threshold plications with sufficient parking re- level of common diaphragm leakage- tardation forces to meet the minimum type failure (or equivalent level of performance specified in either S5.6.1 leakage from the air chamber con- or S5.6.2. taining that diaphragm) at which the S5.6.7.1.2 At the level of common di- vehicle’s parking brakes become aphragm leakage-type failure (or unreleasable. With an initial reservoir equivalent level of leakage from the air system and supply line pressure of 100 chamber containing that diaphragm) psi, no application of any of the vehi- determined in S5.6.7.1.1, and using the cle’s brakes, and, if the vehicle is de- following procedure, determine the signed to tow a vehicle equipped with threshold maximum reservoir rate (in air brakes, a 50 cubic inch test res- psi per minute). With an initial res- ervoir connected to the supply line ervoir system pressure of 100 psi, the coupling, introduce a leakage-type fail- engine turned off, no application of any ure of the common diaphragm (or of the vehicle’s brakes and, if the vehi- equivalent leakage from the air cham- cle is designed to tow a vehicle ber containing that diaphragm). Make equipped with air brakes, a 50 cubic a parking brake application by venting

401

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00401 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.121 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

the front supply line coupling to the times the threshold maximum res- atmosphere, and reduce the pressures ervoir leakage rate determined in in all of the vehicle’s reservoirs to zero. S5.6.7.2.2. With an initial reservoir sys- Pressurize the supply line by con- tem and supply line pressure of 100 psi, necting the trailer’s front supply line no application of any of the vehicle’s coupling to the supply line portion of brakes and, if the vehicle is designed to the trailer test rig (Figure 1) with the tow a vehicle equipped with air brakes, regulator of the trailer test rig set at a 50 cubic inch test reservoir connected 100 psi, and determine whether all of to the rear supply line coupling, make the mechanical means referred to in a parking brake application by venting S5.6.3.2 continue to be actuated and the front supply line coupling to the hold the parking brake applications atmosphere. Determine the maximum with sufficient parking retardation reservoir leakage rate (in psi per forces to meet the minimum perform- minute), which is the maximum rate of ance specified in either S5.6.1 or S5.6.2. decrease in air pressure of any of the Repeat this procedure with progres- vehicle’s reservoirs that results after sively decreasing or increasing levels that parking brake application. The (whichever is applicable) of leakage- level of common diaphragm leakage- type diaphragm failures or equivalent type failure (or equivalent level of leakages, to determine the minimum leakage from the air chamber con- level of common diaphragm leakage- taining that diaphragm) associated type failure (or equivalent level of with this reservoir leakage rate is the leakage from the air chamber con- level that is to be used under the op- taining that diaphragm) at which all of tion set forth in S5.6(b). the mechanical means referred to in S5.7 S5.6.3.2 continue to be actuated and Emergency brake system for hold the parking brake applications trucks and buses. Each vehicle shall be with sufficient parking retardation equipped with an emergency brake sys- forces to meet the minimum perform- tem which, under the conditions of ance specified in either S5.6.1 or S5.6.2. S6.1, conforms to the requirements of S5.6.7.2.2 At the level of common di- S5.7.1 through S5.7.3. However, the aphragm leakage-type failure (or truck portion of an auto transporter equivalent level of leakage from the air need not meet the road test require- chamber containing that diaphragm) ments of S5.7.1 and S5.7.3. determined in S5.6.7.2.1, and using the S5.7.1 Emergency brake system perform- following procedure, determine the ance. When stopped six times for each threshold maximum reservoir leakage combination of weight and speed speci- rate (in psi per minute). With an initial fied in S5.3.1.1, except for a loaded reservoir system and supply line pres- truck tractor with an unbraked control sure of 100 psi, no application of any of trailer, on a road surface having a PFC the vehicle’s brakes and, if the vehicle of 0.9, with a single failure in the serv- is designed to tow a vehicle equipped ice brake system of a part designed to with air brakes, a 50 cubic inch test contain compressed air or brake fluid reservoir connected to the rear supply (except failure of a common valve, line coupling, make a parking brake manifold, brake fluid housing, or brake application by venting the front supply chamber housing), the vehicle shall line coupling to the atmosphere. Deter- stop at least once in not more than the mine the maximum reservoir leakage distance specified in Column 5 of Table rate (in psi per minute), which is the II, measured from the point at which maximum rate of decrease in air pres- movement of the service brake control sure of any of the vehicle’s reservoirs begins, except that a truck-tractor that results after that parking brake tested at its unloaded vehicle weight application. plus up to 1500 pounds shall stop at S5.6.7.2.3 Using the following proce- least once in not more than the dis- dure, a leakage-type failure of the com- tance specified in Column 6 of Table II. mon diaphragm (or equivalent leakage The stop shall be made without any from the air chamber containing that part of the vehicle leaving the road- diaphragm) that results in a maximum way, and with unlimited wheel lockup reservoir leakage rate that is three permitted at any speed.

402

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00402 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.121

S5.7.2 Emergency brake system oper- ure of the supply line, a valve directly ation. The emergency brake system connected to the supply line or a com- shall be applied and released, and be ponent of a brake chamber housing) capable of modulation, by means of the shall not result in the pressure in the service brake control. supply line falling below 70 psi, meas- S5.7.3 Towing vehicle emergency brake ured at the forward trailer supply cou- requirements. In addition to meeting the pling. A trailer shall meet the above other requirements of S5.7, a vehicle supply line pressure retention require- designed to tow another vehicle ment with its brake system connected equipped with air brakes shall— to the trailer test rig shown in Figure (a) In the case of a truck-tractor in 1, with the reservoirs of the trailer and the unloaded condition and a single test rig initially pressurized to 100 psi unit truck which is capable of towing and the regulator of the trailer test rig an airbrake equipped vehicle and is set at 100 psi; except that a trailer loaded to GVWR, be capable of meeting equipped with an air-applied, mechani- the requirements of S5.7.1 by operation cally-held parking brake system and of the service brake control only, with not designed to tow a vehicle equipped the trailer air supply line and air con- trol line from the towing vehicle vent- with air brakes, at the manufacturer’s ed to the atmosphere in accordance option, may meet the requirements of with S6.1.14; S5.8.4 rather than those of S5.8.2 and (b) Be capable of modulating the air S5.8.3. in the supply or control line to the S5.8.3 Automatic application of park- trailer by means of the service brake ing brakes. With an initial reservoir control with a single failure in the tow- system pressure of 100 psi and initial ing vehicle service brake system as supply line pressure of 100 psi, and if specified in S5.7.1. designed to tow a vehicle equipped with (c) [Reserved] air brakes, with a 50 cubic inch test S5.8 Emergency brakes for trailers. reservoir connected to the rear supply Each trailer shall meet the require- line coupling, and with any subsequent ments of S5.8.1 through S5.8.3. single leakage type failure in any other S5.8.1 Emergency braking capability. brake system, of a part designed to Each trailer other than a trailer con- contain compressed air or brake fluid verter dolly shall have a parking brake (consistent with the parenthetical system that conforms to S5.6 and that phrase specified in S5.6.3.1), whenever applies with the force specified in S5.6.1 the air pressure in the supply line is 70 or S5.6.2 when the air pressure in the psi or higher, the parking brakes shall supply line is at atmospheric pressure. not provide any brake retardation as a A trailer converter dolly shall have, at result of complete or partial automatic the manufacturer’s option— application of the parking brakes. (a) A parking brake system that con- S5.8.4 Automatic application of air-ap- forms to S5.6 and that applies with the plied, mechanically held parking brakes. force specified in S5.6.1 or S5.6.2 when With its brake system connected to the the air pressure in the supply line is at supply line portion of the trailer test atmospheric pressure, or rig (Figure 1) and the regulator of the (b) An emergency system that auto- matically applies the service brakes trailer test rig set at 100 psi, and with when the service reservoir is at any any single leakage type failure in the pressure above 20 lb/in2 and the supply service brake system (except for a fail- line is at atmospheric pressure. How- ure of the supply line, a valve directly ever, any agricultural commodity connected to the supply line or a com- trailer, heavy hauler trailer, or pulp- ponent of a brake chamber, but includ- wood trailer shall meet the require- ing failure of any common diaphragm), ments of S5.8.1 or, at the option of the the parking brakes shall not provide manufacturer, the requirements of any brake retardation as a result of § 393.43 of this title. complete or partial automatic applica- S5.8.2 Supply line pressure retention. tion of the parking brakes. Any single leakage type failure in the S5.9 Final inspection. Inspect the service brake system (except for a fail- service brake system for the condition

403

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00403 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.121 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

of adjustment and for the brake indi- ing a peak friction coefficient of 0.9. cator display in accordance with S5.1.8 For road tests in S5.3, the vehicle is and S5.2.2. aligned in the center of the roadway at S6. Conditions. The requirements of the beginning of a stop. Peak friction S5 shall be met by a vehicle when it is coefficient is measured using an ASTM tested according to the conditions set E1136 standard reference test tire in ac- in this S6, without replacing any brake cordance with ASTM method E1337–90, system part or making any adjust- at a speed of 40 mph, without water de- ments to the brake system except as livery for the surface with PFC of 0.9, specified. Unless otherwise specified, and with water delivery for the surface where a range of conditions is speci- with PFC of 0.5. fied, the vehicle must be capable of S6.1.8 For vehicles with parking meeting the requirements at all points brake systems not utilizing the service within the range. On vehicles equipped brake friction elements, burnish the with automatic brake adjusters, the friction elements of such systems prior automatic brake adjusters must re- to the parking brake test according to main activated at all times. Compli- the manufacturer’s recommendations. ance of vehicles manufactured in two For vehicles with parking brake sys- or more stages may, at the option of tems utilizing the service brake fric- the final-stage manufacturer, be dem- tion elements, burnish the brakes as onstrated to comply with this standard follows: With the transmission in the by adherence to the instructions of the highest gear appropriate for a speed of incomplete vehicle manufacturer pro- 40 mph, make 500 snubs between 40 mph vided with the vehicle in accordance and 20 mph at a deceleration rate of 10 with § 568.4(a)(7)(ii) and § 568.5 of title 49 f.p.s.p.s., or at the vehicle’s maximum of the Code of Federal Regulations. deceleration rate if less than 10 S6.1 Road test conditions. f.p.s.p.s. Except where an adjustment is S6.1.1 Except as otherwise specified, specified, after each brake application the vehicle is loaded to its GVWR, dis- accelerate to 40 mph and maintain that tributed proportionally to its GAWRs. speed until making the next brake ap- During the burnish procedure specified plication at a point 1 mile from the ini- in S6.1.8, truck tractors shall be loaded tial point of the previous brake appli- to their GVWR, by coupling them to an cation. If the vehicle cannot attain a unbraked flatbed semitrailer, which speed of 40 mph in 1 mile, continue to semitrailer shall be loaded so that the accelerate until the vehicle reaches 40 weight of the tractor-trailer combina- mph or until the vehicle has traveled tion equals the GVWR of the truck 1.5 miles from the initial point of the tractor. The load on the unbraked flat- previous brake application, whichever bed semitrailer shall be located so that occurs first. Any automatic pressure the truck tractor’s wheels do not lock limiting valve is in use to limit pres- during burnish. sure as designed. The brakes may be S6.1.2 The inflation pressure is as adjusted up to three times during the specified by the vehicle manufacturer burnish procedure, at intervals speci- for the GVWR. fied by the vehicle manufacturer, and S6.1.3 Unless otherwise specified, may be adjusted at the conclusion of the transmission selector control is in the burnishing, in accordance with the neutral or the clutch is disengaged dur- vehicle manufacturer’s recommenda- ing all decelerations and during static tion. parking brake tests. S6.1.9 Static parking brake tests for S6.1.4 All vehicle openings (doors, a semitrailer are conducted with the windows, hood, trunk, cargo doors, front-end supported by an unbraked etc.) are in a closed position except as dolly. The weight of the dolly is in- required for instrumentation purposes. cluded as part of the trailer load. S6.1.5 The ambient temperature is S6.1.10 In a test other than a static between 32 °F. and 100 °F. parking test, a truck tractor is tested S6.1.6 The wind velocity is zero. at its GVWR by coupling it to an S6.1.7 Unless otherwise specified, unbraked flatbed semi-trailer (here- stopping tests are conducted on a 12- after, control trailer) as specified in foot wide level, straight roadway hav- S6.1.10.2 to S6.1.10.4.

404

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00404 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.121

S6.1.10.1 [Reserved] system or towing vehicle protection S6.1.10.2 The center of gravity system occurs from the time the line(s) height of the ballast on the loaded con- is vented until the stop is completed. trol trailer shall be less than 24 inches S6.1.15 Initial brake temperature. Un- above the top of the tractor’s fifth less otherwise specified, the initial wheel. brake temperature is not less than S6.1.10.3 The control trailer has a 150° F and not more than 200° F. single axle with a GAWR of 18,000 S6.1.16 Thermocouples. pounds and a length, measured from The brake temperature is measured the transverse centerline of the axle to by plug-type thermocouples installed the centerline of the kingpin, of 258 ±6 in the approximate center of the facing inches. length and width of the most heavily S6.1.10.4 The control trailer is load- loaded shoe or disc pad, one per brake, ed so that its axle is loaded at 4,500 as shown in Figure 2. A second thermo- pounds and the tractor is loaded to its couple may be installed at the begin- GVWR, loaded above the kingpin only, ning of the test sequence if the lining with the tractor’s fifth wheel adjusted wear is expected to reach a point caus- so that the load on each axle measured ing the first thermocouple to contact at the tire-ground interface is most the rubbing surface of a drum or rotor. nearly proportional to the axles’ re- The second thermocouple shall be in- spective GAWRs, without exceeding stalled at a depth of .080 inch and lo- the GAWR of the tractor’s axle or axles cated within 1 inch circumferentially or control trailer’s axle. of the thermocouple installed at .040 S6.1.11 Special drive conditions. A ve- inch depth. For centergrooved shoes or hicle equipped with an interlocking pads, thermocouples are installed with- axle system or a front wheel drive sys- in one-eighth of an inch to one-quarter tem that is engaged and disengaged by of an inch of the groove and as close to the driver is tested with the system the center as possible. disengaged. S6.1.17 Selection of compliance op- S6.1.12 Liftable axles. A vehicle with tions. Where manufacturer options are a liftable axle is tested at GVWR with specified, the manufacturer shall select the liftable axle down and at unloaded the option by the time it certifies the vehicle weight with the liftable axle vehicle and may not thereafter select a up. different option for the vehicle. Each S6.1.13 Trailer test rig. manufacturer shall, upon request from The trailer test rig shown in Figure 1 the National Highway Traffic Safety is calibrated in accordance with the Administration, provide information calibration curves shown in Figure 3. regarding which of the compliance op- For the requirements of S5.3.3.1 and tions it has selected for a particular ve- S5.3.4.1, the pressure in the trailer test hicle or make/model. rig reservoir is initially set at 100 psi S6.2 Dynamometer test conditions. for actuation tests and 95 psi for re- S6.2.1 The dynamometer inertia for lease tests. each wheel is equivalent to the load on S6.1.14 In testing the emergency the wheel with the axle loaded to its braking system of towing vehicles GAWR. For a vehicle having additional under S5.7.3(a), the hose(s) is vented to GAWRs specified for operation at re- the atmosphere at any time not less duced speeds, the GAWR used is that than 1 second and not more than 1 specified for a speed of 50 mph, or, at minute before the emergency stop be- the option of the manufacturer, any gins, while the vehicle is moving at the speed greater than 50 mph. speed from which the stop is to be S6.2.2 The ambient temperature is made and any manual control for the between 75° F. and 100° F. towing vehicle protection system is in S6.2.3 Air at ambient temperature is the position to supply air and brake directed uniformly and continuously control signals to the vehicle being over the brake drum or disc at a veloc- towed. No brake application is made ity of 2,200 feet per minute. from the time the line(s) is vented S6.2.4 The temperature of each until the emergency stop begins and no brake is measured by a single plug-type manual operation of the parking brake thermocouple installed in the center of

405

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00405 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.121 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

the lining surface of the most heavily 315° F and not more than 385° F. Make loaded shoe or pad as shown in Figure 200 additional stops from 40 mph at a 2. The thermocouple is outside any cen- deceleration of 10 f.p.s.p.s. with an ini- ter groove. tial brake temperature on each stop of S6.2.5 The rate of brake drum or not less than 450° F and not more than disc rotation on a dynamometer cor- 550° F. The brakes may be adjusted up responding to the rate of rotation on a to three times during the burnish pro- vehicle at a given speed is calculated cedure, at intervals specified by the ve- by assuming a tire radius equal to the hicle manufacturer, and may be ad- static loaded radius specified by the justed at the conclusion of the bur- tire manufacturer. nishing, in accordance with the vehicle S6.2.6 Brakes are burnished before manufacturer’s recommendation. testing as follows: place the brake as- S6.2.7 The brake temperature is in- sembly on an inertia dynamometer and creased to a specified level by con- adjust the brake as recommended by ducting one or more stops from 40 the vehicle manufacturer. Make 200 m.p.h. at a deceleration of 10 f.p.s.p.s. stops from 40 mph at a deceleration of The brake temperature is decreased to 10 f.p.s.p.s., with an initial brake tem- a specified level by rotating the drum perature on each stop of not less than or disc at a constant 30 m.p.h.

406

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00406 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.121

407

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00407 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.051 § 571.121 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

408

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00408 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.053 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.121

409

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00409 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.054 § 571.122 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

TABLE I.—STOPPING SEQUENCE TABLE I.—STOPPING SEQUENCE—Continued

Single Single unit Truck Truck unit tractors trucks trucks and tractors and buses buses

Burnish ...... 1 1 Parking Brake Test at GVWR ...... 6 4 Stability and Control at GVWR (PFC Manual Adjustment of Brakes ...... 7 6 0.5) ...... 2 N/A 60 mph Service Brake Stops at Stability and Control at LLVW (PFC LLVW (PFC 0.9) ...... 8 7 0.5) ...... 3 5 Manual Adjustment of Brakes ...... 4 N/A 60 mph Emergency Service Brake 60 mph Service Brake Stops at Stops at LLVW (PFC 0.9) ...... 9 8 GVWR (PFC 0.9) ...... 5 2 Parking Brake Test at LLVW ...... 10 9 60 mph Emergency Service Brake Final Inspection ...... 11 10 Stops at GVWR (PFC 0.9) ...... N/A 3

TABLE II—STOPPING DISTANCE IN FEET

Service brake Emergency brake Vehicle speed in miles per hour PFC PFC PFC PFC PFC PFC 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

20 ...... 32 35 38 40 83 85 25 ...... 49 54 59 62 123 131 30 ...... 70 78 84 89 170 186 35 ...... 96 106 114 121 225 250 40 ...... 125 138 149 158 288 325 45 ...... 158 175 189 200 358 409 50 ...... 195 216 233 247 435 504 55 ...... 236 261 281 299 520 608 60 ...... 280 310 335 355 613 720 Note: (1) Loaded and unloaded buses; (2) Loaded single unit trucks; (3) Unloaded truck tractors and single unit trucks; (4) Loaded truck tractors tested with an unbraked control trailer; (5) All vehicles except truck tractors; (6) Unloaded truck tractors.

TABLE III—BRAKE RETARDATION FORCE [61 FR 27290, May 31, 1996, as amended at 61 FR 49695, Sept. 23, 1996; 61 FR 60636, Nov. 29, Column 2 1996; 63 FR 7727, Feb. 17, 1998; 66 FR 64158, brake Column 1 brake retardation force/GAWR chamber Dec. 12, 2001; 67 FR 36820, May 28, 2002; 68 FR pressure, 47497, Aug. 11, 2003] PSI

0.05 ...... 20 § 571.122 Standard No. 122; Motorcycle 0.12 ...... 30 brake systems. 0.18 ...... 40 0.25 ...... 50 S1. Scope. This standard specifies per- 0.31 ...... 60 formance requirements for motorcycle 0.37 ...... 70 brake systems. 0.41 ...... 80 S2. Purpose. The purpose of the stand- ard is to insure safe motorcycle brak- TABLE IV [RESERVED] ing performance under normal and emergency conditions. TABLE V—BRAKE CHAMBER RATED VOLUMES S3. Application. This standard applies Column 2 to motorcycles. Brake Chamber type Column 1 rated vol- (nominal area of piston or dia- full stroke ume S4. Definitions. phragm in square inches) (inches) (cubic Braking interval means the distance inches) measured from the start of one brake Type 9 ...... 1.75/2.10 25 application to the start of the next Type 12 ...... 1.75/2.10 30 Type 14 ...... 2.25/2.70 40 brake application. Type 16 ...... 2.25/2.70 46 Initial brake temperature means the Type 18 ...... 2.25/2.70 50 temperature of the hottest service Type 20 ...... 2.25/2.70 54 Type 24 ...... 2.50/3.20 67 brake of the vehicle 0.2 mile before any Type 30 ...... 2.50/3.20 89 brake application. Type 36 ...... 3.00/3.60 135

410

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00410 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.122

Skid number means the frictional re- ing its own cover, seal, and cover re- sistance of a pavement measured in ac- tention device. Each reservoir shall cordance with American Society for have a minimum capacity equivalent Testing and Materials (ASTM) Method to one and one-half times the total E–274–70 (as revised July, 1974) at 40 fluid displacement resulting when all mph, omitting water delivery as speci- the wheel cylinders or caliper pistons fied in paragraphs 7.1 and 7.2 of that serviced by the reservoir move from a method. new lining, fully retracted position to a Stopping distance means the distance fully worn, fully applied position. traveled by a vehicle from the start of Where adjustment is a factor, the the brake application to the point worst condition of adjustment shall be where the vehicle stops. used for this measurement. Split service brake system means a S5.1.2.2 Reservoir labeling. Each mo- brake system consisting of two or more torcycle shall have a brake fluid warn- subsystems actuated by a single con- ing statement that reads as follows, in trol designed so that a leakage-type letters at least three thirty-seconds of failure of a pressure component in a an inch high: single subsystem (except structural Warning: Clean filler cap before re- failure of a housing that is common to moving. Use only lll fluid from a all subsystems) shall not impair the sealed container. (Inserting the rec- operation of the other subsystem(s). ommended type of brake fluid as speci- S5. Requirements. Each motorcycle fied in 49 CFR 571.116, e.g., DOT 3.) shall meet the following requirements The lettering shall be:— under the conditions specified in S6, (a) Permanently affixed, engraved, or when tested according to the proce- embossed; dures and in the sequence specified in (b) Located so as to be visible by di- S7. Corresponding test procedures of S7 rect view, either on or within 4 inches are indicated in parentheses. If a mo- of the brake-fluid reservoir filler plug torcycle is incapable of attaining a or cap; and specified speed, its service brakes shall be capable of stopping the vehicle from (c) Of a color that contrasts with its the multiple of 5 m.p.h. that is 4 m.p.h. background, if it is not engraved or to 8 m.p.h. less than the speed attain- embossed. able in 1 mile, within stopping dis- S5.1.3 Split service brake system. In tances that do not exceed the stopping addition to the equipment required by distances specified in Table 1. S5.1.2 each motorcycle equipped with a S5.1 Required equipment—split service split service brake system shall have a brake system. Each motorcycle shall failure indicator lamp as specified in have either a split service brake sys- S5.1.3.1. tem or two independently actuated S5.1.3.1 Failure indicator lamp. service brake systems. (a) One or more electrically operated S5.1.1 Mechanical service brake sys- service brake system failure indicator tem. Failure of any component in a me- lamps that is mounted in front of and chanical service brake system shall not in clear view of the driver, and that is result in a loss of braking ability in the activated— other service brake system on the vehi- (1) In the event of pressure failure in cle. any part of the service brake system, S5.1.2 Hydraulic service brake system. other than a structural failure of ei- A leakage failure in a hydraulic service ther a brake master cylinder body in a brake system shall not result in a loss split integral body type master cyl- of braking ability in the other service inder system or a service brake system brake system on the vehicle. Each mo- failure indicator body, before or upon torcycle equipped with a hydraulic application of not more than 20 pounds brake system shall have the equipment of pedal force upon the service brake. specified in S5.1.2.1 and S5.1.2.2. (2) Without the application of pedal S5.1.2.1 Master cylinder reservoirs. force, when the level of brake fluid in a Each master cylinder shall have a sepa- master cylinder reservoir drops to less rate reservoir for each brake circuit, than the recommended safe level speci- with each reservoir filler opening hav- fied by the manufacturer or to less

411

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00411 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.122 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

than one-half the fluid reservoir capac- able in 1 mile if this speed is 95 m.p.h. ity, whichever is the greater. or greater, within stopping distances (b) All failure indicator lamps shall that do not exceed the stopping dis- be activated when the ignition switch tances specified in Column III of Table is turned from the ‘‘off’’ to the ‘‘on’’ or I (S7.5). to the ‘‘start’’ position. S5.4 Service brake system—fade and (c) Except for the momentary activa- recovery. These requirements do not tion required by S5.1.3.1(b), each indi- apply to a motor-driven cycle whose cator lamp, once activated, shall re- speed attainable in 1 mile is 30 m.p.h. main activated as long as the condition or less. exists, whenever the ignition switch is S5.4.1 Baseline check—minimum and in the ‘‘on’’ position. An indicator lamp maximum pedal forces. The pedal and activated when the ignition is turned lever forces used in establishing the to the ‘‘start’’ position shall be deacti- fade baseline check average shall be vated upon return of the switch to the within the limits specified in S6.10 ‘‘on’’ position unless a failure exists in (S7.6.1). the service brake system. S5.4.2 Fade. Each motorcycle shall (d) Each indicator lamp shall have a be capable of making 10 fade stops from red lens with the legend ‘‘Brake Fail- 60 m.p.h. at not less than 15 f.p.s.p.s. ure’’ on or adjacent to it in letters not for each stop (S7.6.2). less than three thirty-seconds of an S5.4.3 Fade recovery. Each motor- inch high that shall be legible to the cycle shall be capable of making five driver in daylight when lighted. recovery stops with a pedal force that S5.1.4 Parking brake. Each three- does not exceed 400 Newtons (90 wheeled motorcycle shall be equipped pounds), and a hand lever force that with a parking brake of a friction type does not exceed 245 Newtons (55 with a solely mechanical means to re- pounds) for any of the first four recov- tain engagement. ery stops and that for the fifth recov- S5.1.5 Other requirements. The brake ery stop, is within, plus 89 Newtons (20 system shall be installed so that the pounds) and minus 44 Newtons (10 lining thickness of shoes pounds) of the fade test baseline check may be visually inspected, either di- average force (S7.6.3), but not less than rectly or by use of a mirror without re- 0 Newtons (0 pounds). moving the drums, and so that disc S5.5 Service brake system—final effec- brake friction lining thickness may be tiveness. These requirements do not visually inspected without removing apply to a motor-driven cycle whose the pads. speed attainable in 1 mile is 30 mph or S5.2 Service brake system—first less. (preburnish) effectiveness. S5.5.1 Service brake system. The serv- S5.2.1 Service brake system. The serv- ice brakes shall be capable of stopping ice brakes shall be capable of stopping the motorcycle in a manner that com- the motorcycle from 30 m.p.h. and 60 plies with S5.3 (S7.8.1). m.p.h. within stopping distances which S5.5.2 Hydraulic service brake sys- do not exceed the stopping distances tem—partial failure. In the event of a specified in Column I of Table I (S7.3.1). pressure component leakage failure, S5.2.2 Partial service brake system. other than a structural failure of ei- Each independently actuated service ther a brake master cylinder body in a brake system on each motorcycle shall split integral body type master cyl- be capable of stopping the motorcycle inder system or a service brake system from 30 m.p.h. and 60 m.p.h. within failure indicator body, the remaining stopping distances which do not exceed portion of the service brake system the stopping distances specified in Col- shall continue to operate and shall be umn II of Table I (S7.3.2). capable of stopping the motorcycle S5.3 Service brake system—second ef- from 30 m.p.h. and 60 m.p.h. within fectiveness. The service brakes shall be stopping distances that do not exceed capable of stopping the motorcycle the stopping distances specified in Col- from 30 m.p.h., 60 m.p.h., 80 m.p.h., and umn IV of Table I (S7.8.2). the multiple of 5 m.p.h. that is 4 m.p.h. S5.6 Parking brake system. The park- to 8 m.p.h. less than the speed attain- ing brake system shall be capable of

412

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00412 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.122

holding the motorcycle stationary (to S6.4 Engine. Engine idle speed and the limits of traction of the braked ignition timing settings are according wheels), for 5 minutes, in both forward to the manufacturer’s recommenda- and reverse directions, on a 30 percent tions. If the vehicle is equipped with an grade, with an applied force of not adjustable engine speed governor, it is more than 90 pounds for a foot-oper- adjusted according to the manufactur- ated system and 55 pounds for a hand- er’s recommendation. operated system (S7.9). S6.5 Ambient temperature. The ambi- S5.7 Service brake system—water re- ent temperature is between 32 °F. and covery. 100 °F. S5.7.1 Baseline check. The pedal and S6.6 Wind velocity. The wind velocity lever forces used in establishing the is zero. water recovery baseline check average S6.7 Road surface. Road tests are shall be within the limits specified in conducted on level roadway having a S6.10 (S7.10.1). skid number of 81. The roadway is 8 S5.7.2 Water recovery test. Each mo- feet wide for two-wheeled motorcycles, torcycle shall be capable of making and overall vehicle width plus 5 feet for five recovery stops with a pedal force three-wheeled motorcycles. The park- that does not exceed 400 Newtons (90 ing brake test surface is clean, dry, pounds), and hand lever force that does smooth portland cement concrete. S6.8 Vehicle position. The motorcycle not exceed 245 Newtons (55 pounds), for is aligned in the center of the roadway any of the first four recovery stops, at the start of each brake application. and that for the fifth recovery stop, is Stops are made without any part of the within, plus 89 Newtons (20 pounds) and motorcycle leaving the roadway and minus 44 Newtons (10 pounds) of the without lockup of any wheel. water recovery baseline check average S6.9 Thermocouples. The brake tem- force (S7.10.2), but not less than 0 New- perature is measured by plug-type tons (0 pounds). thermocouples installed in the approxi- S5.8 Service brake system design dura- mate center of the facing length and bility. Each motorcycle shall be capable width of the most heavily loaded shoe of completing all braking requirements or disc pad, one per brake, as shown in of S5 without detachment of brake lin- Figure 1. ings from the shoes or pad, detachment S6.10 Brake actuation forces. Except or fracture of any brake system compo- for the requirements of the fifth recov- nents, or leakage of fluid or lubricant ery stop in S5.4.3 and S5.7.2 (S7.6.3 and at the wheel cylinder, and master cyl- S7.10.2), the hand lever force is not less inder reservoir cover, seal, or retention than 10 Newtons (2.3 pounds) and not device (S7.11). more than 245 Newtons (55 pounds) and S6 Test conditions. The requirements the foot pedal force is not less than 25 of S5 shall be met under the following Newtons (5.6 pounds) and not more conditions. Where a range of conditions than 400 Newtons (90 pounds). The is specified, the motorcycle shall be ca- point of initial application of the lever pable of meeting the requirements at forces is 1.2 inches from the end of the all points within the range. brake lever grip. The direction of the S6.1 Vehicle weight. Motorcycle force is perpendicular to the handle weight is unloaded vehicle weight plus grip on the plane along which the 200 pounds (including driver and instru- brake lever rotates, and the point of mentation), with the added weight dis- application of the pedal force is the tributed in the saddle or carrier if so center of the foot contact pad of the equipped. brake pedal. The direction of the force S6.2 Tire inflation pressure. Tire in- is perpendicular to the foot contact pad flation pressure is the pressure rec- on the plane along which the brake ommended by the manufacturer for the pedal rotates, as shown in Figure 2. vehicle weight specified in paragraph S7. Test procedures and sequence. Each S6.1. motorcycle shall be capable of meeting S6.3 Transmission. Unless otherwise all the requirements of this standard specified, all stops are made with the when tested according to the proce- clutch disengaged. dures and in the sequence set forth

413

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00413 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.122 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

below without replacing any brake sys- speed attainable in 1 mile if that speed tem part, or making any adjustments is 95 m.p.h. or greater. to the brake system other than as per- S7.6 Service brake system—fade and mitted in S7.4. A motorcycle shall be recovery test. These requirements do not deemed to comply with S5.2, S5.3 and apply to a motor-driven cycle whose S5.5 if at least one of the stops speci- speed attainable in 1 mile is 30 m.p.h. fied in S7.3, S7.5 and S7.8 is made with- or less. in the stopping distances specified in S7.6.1 Baseline check stops. Make Table I. three stops from 30 m.p.h. at 10 to 11 S7.1 Braking warming. If the initial f.p.s.p.s. for each stop. Compute the av- brake temperature for the first stop in erage of the maximum brake pedal a test procedure (other than S7.10) has forces and the maximum brake lever not been reached, heat the brakes to forces required for the three stops. the initial brake temperature by mak- S7.6.2 Fade stops. Make 10 stops from ing up to 10 stops from 30 m.p.h. at a 60 m.p.h. at not less than 15 f.p.s.p.s. deceleration of not more than 10 for each stop. The initial brake tem- f.p.s.p.s. On independently operated perature before the first brake applica- brake systems, the coldest brake shall tion shall be between 130 °F. and 150 °F. be within 10 °F. of the hottest brake. Initial brake temperatures before S7.2 Pretest instrumentation check. brake applications for subsequent stops Conduct a general check of test instru- shall be those occurring at the distance mentation by making not more than 10 intervals. Attain the required decelera- stops from a speed of not more than 30 tion as quickly as possible and main- m.p.h. at a deceleration of not more tain at least this rate for not less than than 10 f.p.s.p.s. If test instrument re- three-fourths of the total stopping dis- pair, replacement, or adjustment is tance for each stop. The interval be- necessary, make not more than 10 addi- tween the starts of service brake appli- tional stops after such repair, replace- cations shall be 0.4 mile. Drive 1 mile ment or adjustment. at 30 m.p.h. after the last fade stop and S7.3 Service brake system—first immediately conduct the recovery test (preburnished) effectiveness test. specified in S7.6.3. S7.3.1 Service brake system. Make six S7.6.3 Recovery test. Make five stops stops from 30 m.p.h. and then six stops from 30 m.p.h. at 10 to 11 f.p.s.p.s. for from 60 m.p.h. with an initial brake each stop. The braking interval shall temperature between 130 °F. and 150 °F. not be more than 1 mile. Immediately S7.3.2 Partial service brake system. after each stop accelerate at maximum For a motorcycle with two independ- rate to 30 m.p.h. and maintain that ently actuated service brake systems, speed until making the next stop. repeat S7.3.1 using each service brake S7.7 Service brake system—reburnish. system individually. Repeat S7.4 except make 35 burnish S7.4 Service brake system—burnish stops instead of 200 stops. Brakes may procedure. Burnish the brakes by mak- be adjusted after reburnish if no tools ing 200 stops from 30 m.p.h. at 12 are used. These requirements do not f.p.s.p.s. The braking interval shall be apply to a motor-driven cycle whose either the distance necessary to reduce speed attainable in 1 mile is 30 m.p.h. the initial brake temperature to be- or less. tween 130 °F. and 150 °F. or 1 mile, S7.8 Service brake system—final effec- whichever occurs first. Accelerate at tiveness test. These requirements do not maximum rate to 30 m.p.h. imme- apply to a motor-driven cycle whose diately after each stop and maintain speed attainable in 1 mile is 30 m.p.h. that speed until making the next stop. or less. After burnishing adjust the brakes in S7.8.1 Service brake system. Repeat accordance with the manufacturer’s S7.5 including S7.3.1. recommendation. S7.8.2 Partial service brake system S7.5 Service brake system—second ef- test. Alter the service brake system on fectiveness test. Repeat S7.3.1. Then, three-wheeled motorcycles to induce a make four stops from 80 m.p.h. and complete loss of braking in any one four stops from the multiple of 5 m.p.h. subsystem. Determine the line pressure that is 4 m.p.h. to 8 m.p.h. less than the or pedal force necessary to cause the

414

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00414 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.122

brake system failure indicator to oper- forces and of the maximum brake lever ate. Make six stops from 30 m.p.h. and forces required for the three stops. then six stops from 60 m.p.h. with an S7.10.2 Wet brake recovery stops. initial brake temperature between 130 Completely immerse the rear brake as- °F. and 150 °F. Repeat for each sub- sembly of the motorcycle in water for system. Determine that the brake fail- 2 minutes with the brake fully re- ure indicator is operating when the leased. Next completely immerse the master cylinder fluid level is less than front brake assembly of the motorcycle the level specified in S5.1.3.1(a)(2), and in water for 2 minutes with the brake that it complies with S5.1.3.1(c). Check fully released. Perform the entire wet- for proper operation with each res- ting procedure in not more than 7 min- ervoir in turn at a low level. Restore utes. Immediately after removal of the the service brake system to normal at front brake from water, accelerate at a completion of this test. maximum rate to 30 mi/h without a S7.9 Parking brake test. Starting brake application. Immediately upon with an initial brake temperature of reaching that speed make five stops, 2 not more than 150 °F., drive the motor- each from 30 mi/h at 10 to 11 ft/s for cycle downhill on the 30 percent grade each stop. After each stop (except the last) accelerate the motorcycle imme- with the longitudinal axis of the mo- diately at a maximum rate to 30 mi/h torcycle in the direction of the grade. and begin the next stop. Apply the service brakes with a force S7.11 Final inspection. Upon comple- not exceeding 90 pounds to stop the tion of all the tests inspect the brake motorcycle and place the transmission system in an assembled condition, for in neutral. Apply the parking brake by compliance with the brake lining in- exerting a force not exceeding those spection requirements. Disassemble all specified in S5.6. Release the service brakes and inspect: brake and allow the motorcycle to re- (a) The entire brake system for de- main at rest (to the limit of traction of tachment or fracture of any compo- the braked wheels) for 5 minutes. Re- nent. peat the test with the motorcycle (b) Brake linings for detachment parked in the reversed (uphill) position from the shoe or pad. on the grade. (c) Wheel cylinder, master cylinder, S7.10 Service brake system—water re- and axle seals for fluid or lubricant covery test. leakage. S7.10.1 Baseline check stops. Make (d) Master cylinder for reservoir ca- three stops from 30 m.p.h. at 10 to 11 pacity and retention device. f.p.s.p.s. for each stop. Compute the av- (e) Master cylinder label for compli- erage of the maximum brake pedal ance with S5.1.2.2.

TABLE I—STOPPING DISTANCES FOR EFFECTIVENESS, FADE AND PARTIAL SYSTEM TESTS

Stopping distance, feet—Effectiveness tests Preburnish effec- Vehicle test speed, m.p.h. Preburnish effec- tiveness partial Effectiveness total Effectiveness par- tiveness total sys- mechanical sys- system (S5.4) tial hydraulic sys- tem (S5.2.1)—I tems (S5.2.2)—II (SS5.7.1)—III tems (S5.7.2)—IV

15 ...... 13 30 11 25 20 ...... 24 54 19 44 25 ...... 37 84 30 68 30 ...... 54 121 43 97 35 ...... 74 165 58 132 40 ...... 96 216 75 173 45 ...... 121 273 95 218 50 ...... 150 337 128 264 55 ...... 181 407 155 326 60 ...... 216 484 185 388 65 ...... 217 455 70 ...... 264 527 75 ...... 303 606 80 ...... 345 689 85 ...... 389 778 90 ...... 484 872

415

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00415 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.122 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

TABLE I—STOPPING DISTANCES FOR EFFECTIVENESS, FADE AND PARTIAL SYSTEM TESTS— Continued

Stopping distance, feet—Effectiveness tests Preburnish effec- Vehicle test speed, m.p.h. Preburnish effec- tiveness partial Effectiveness total Effectiveness par- tiveness total sys- mechanical sys- system (S5.4) tial hydraulic sys- tem (S5.2.1)—I tems (S5.2.2)—II (SS5.7.1)—III tems (S5.7.2)—IV

95 ...... 540 971 100 ...... 598 1076 105 ...... 659 1188 110 ...... 723 1302 115 ...... 791 1423 120 ...... 861 1549

TABLE II—BRAKE TEST SEQUENCE AND REQUIREMENTS

Sequence L.C. Test procedure Requirements

1. Instrumentation check ...... S7.2 ...... 2. First (Preburnish) effectiveness test: (a) Service brake system ...... S7.3.1 S5.2.1 (b) Partial service brake system ...... S7.3.2 S5.2.2 3. Burnish procedure ...... S7.4 ...... 4. Second effectiveness test ...... S7.5 S5.3 5. First fade and recovery test ...... S7.6 S5.4 6. Reburnish ...... S7.7 ...... 7. Final effectiveness test: (a) Service brake system ...... S7.8.1 S5.5.1 (b) Partial service brake system ...... S7.8.2 S5.5.2 8. Parking brake test (three-wheeled motorcycles only) ...... S7.9 S5.6 9. Water recovery test ...... S7.10 S5.7 10. Design durability ...... S7.11 S5.8

416

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00416 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.122

(Authority: Delegation of authority at 38 FR 12147; secs. 102, 103, 119, Pub. L. 89–563, 80 Stat. 718 (15 U.S.C. 1391, 1392, 1407); delegations of authority at 49 CFR 1.50 and 49 CFR 501.8) [37 FR 5034, Mar. 9, 1972, as amended at 37 FR 11974, June 16, 1972; 38 FR 14753, June 5, 1973; 39 FR 32914, Sept. 12, 1974; 39 FR 43075, Dec. 10, 1974; 41 FR 24593, June 17, 1976; 43 FR 9606, Mar. 9, 1978; 43 FR 46548, Oct. 10, 1978; 66 FR 42617, Aug. 14, 2001]

417

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00417 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.059 § 571.123 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

§ 571.123 Standard No. 123; Motorcycle the operator’s left hand throughout its controls and displays. full range without removal of the oper- S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- ator’s left hand from the handgrip. If a quirements for the location, operation, motorcycle with an automatic clutch identification, and illumination of mo- is equipped with a supplemental rear torcycle controls and displays, and re- brake control, the control shall be lo- quirements for motorcycle stands and cated on the left handlebar. If a motor- footrests. cycle is equipped with self-propor- S2. Purpose. The purpose of this tioning or antilock braking devices standard is to minimize accidents utilizing a single control for front and caused by operator error in responding rear brakes, the control shall be lo- to the motoring environment, by cated and operable in the same manner standardizing certain motorcycle con- as a rear brake control. trols and displays. S5.2.2 Display illumination and oper- S3. Application. This standard applies ation. If an item of equipment listed in to motorcycles equipped with handle- Table 2, Column 1, is provided, the dis- bars, except for motorcycles that are play for such item shall be visible to a designed, and sold exclusively for use seated operator under daylight condi- by law enforcement agencies. tions, shall illuminate as specified in S4. Definitions. Clockwise and counter- Column 2, and shall operate as speci- clockwise mean opposing directions of fied in Column 3. rotation around the following axes, as S5.2.3 Control and display identifica- applicable. tion. If an item of equipment in Table 3, (a) The operational axis of the igni- Column 1, is provided, the item and its tion control, viewed from in front of operational function shall be identified the ignition lock opening; by: (b) The axis of the right handlebar on (a) A symbol substantially in the which the twist-grip throttle is lo- form shown in Column 3; or cated, viewed from the end of that han- (b) Wording shown in both Column 2 dlebar; and Column 4; or (c) The axis perpendicular to the cen- (c) A symbol substantially in the ter of the speedometer, viewed from form shown in Column 3 and wording the operator’s normal eye position. shown in both Column 2 and Column 4. S5. Requirements. (d) The abbreviations ‘‘M.P.H.’’, ‘‘km/ S5.1. Each motorcycle shall be h’’, ‘‘r/min’’, ‘‘Hi’’, ‘‘Lo’’, ‘‘L’’, ‘‘R’’, and equipped with a supplemental engine ‘‘Res’’ appearing in Column 2 and Col- stop control, located and operable as umn 4 may be spelled in full. Symbols specified in Table 1. and words may be provided for equip- S5.2 Each motorcycle to which this ment items where none are shown in standard applies shall meet the fol- Column 2, Column 3, and Column 4. lowing requirements: Any identification provided shall be S5.2.1 Control location and operation. placed on or adjacent to the control or If any item of equipment listed in display position, and shall appear up- Table 1, Column 1, is provided, the con- right to the operator. trol for such item shall be located as S5.2.4 Stands. A stand shall fold specified in Column 2, and operable as rearward and upward if it contacts the specified in Column 3. Each control lo- ground when the motorcycle is moving cated on a right handlebar shall be op- forward. erable by the operator’s right hand S5.2.5 Footrests. Footrests shall be throughout its full range without re- provided for each designated seating moval of the operator’s right hand position. Each footrests for a passenger from the throttle. Each control located other than an operator shall fold rear- on a left handlebar shall be operable by ward and upward when not in use.

TABLE 1—MOTORCYCLE CONTROL LOCATION AND OPERATION REQUIREMENTS

Equipment control—Column 1 Location—Column 2 Operation—Column 3

1. Manual clutch or integrated clutch Left handlebar ...... Squeeze to disengage clutch. and gear change.

418

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00418 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.123

TABLE 1—MOTORCYCLE CONTROL LOCATION AND OPERATION REQUIREMENTS—Continued

Equipment control—Column 1 Location—Column 2 Operation—Column 3

2. Foot operated gear change ...... Left foot control ...... An upward motion of the operator’s toe shifts transmission toward lower numerical gear ratios (commonly referred to as ‘‘higher gears’’), and a downward motion toward higher numerical gear ratios (commonly referred to as ‘‘lower gears’’). If three or more gears are provided it shall not be possible to shift from the highest gear di- rectly to the lowest gear, or vice versa. 3. Headlamp upper-lower beam control Left handlebar ...... Up for upper beam, down for lower beam. If combined with the headlight on-off switch, means shall be provided to prevent inadvertent actuation of the ‘‘off’’ function. 4. Horn ...... do ...... Push to activate. 5. Turn signal lamps ...... Handlebars. 6. Ignition ...... ‘‘Off’’—counterclockwise from other positions. 7. Manual fuel shutoff control ...... Rotate to operate. ‘‘On’’ and ‘‘Off’’ are separated by 90 de- grees of rotation. ‘‘Off’’ and ‘‘Reserve’’ (if provided) are separated by 90 degrees of rotation. Sequence order: ‘‘On’’—‘‘Off’’—‘‘Reserve’’. 8. Twist-grip throttle ...... Right handlebar ...... Self-closing to idle in a clockwise direction after release of hand. 9. Supplemental engine stop ...... do. 10. Front wheel brake ...... do ...... Squeeze to engage. 11. Rear wheel brakes ...... Right foot control 1 ...... Depress to engage. Left handlebar permis- sible for motor-driven cycles.

1 See S5.2.1 for requirements for vehicles with a single control for front and rear brakes, and with a supplemental rear brake control.

TABLE 2—MOTORCYCLE DISPLAY ILLUMINATION AND OPERATION REQUIREMENTS

Display—Column 1 Illumination—Column 2 Operation—Column 3

1. Speedometer ...... Yes ...... The display is illuminated whenever the headlamp is acti- vated. 2. Neutral indication ...... Green display lamp ...... The display lamp illuminates when the gear selector is in neutral position.

419

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00419 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.123 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

[37 FR 7207, Apr. 12, 1972, as amended at 37 FR 17475, Aug. 29, 1972; 39 FR 32915, Sept. 12, 1974; 48 FR 42819, Sept. 20, 1983; 49 FR 35381, Sept. 7, 1984; 49 FR 35504, Sept. 10, 1984; 56 FR 61387, Dec. 3, 1991; 63 FR 28933, May 27, 1998; 63 FR 51001, Sept. 24, 1998]

420

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00420 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER24SE98.035 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.125

§ 571.124 Standard No. 124; Accel- condition, and at any ambient tem- erator control systems. perature between ¥40 degrees Celsius S1. Scope. This standard establishes and +52 degrees Celsius after 12 hours requirements for the return of a vehi- of conditioning at any temperature cle’s throttle to the idle position when within that range. the driver removes the actuating force S5.1 There shall be at least two from the accelerator control, or in the sources of energy capable of returning event of a severance or disconnection the throttle to the idle position within in the accelerator control system. the time limit specified by S5.3 from S2. Purpose. The purpose of this any accelerator position or speed when- standard is to reduce deaths and inju- ever the driver removes the opposing ries resulting from engine overspeed actuating force. In the event of failure caused by malfunctions in the accel- of one source of energy by a single sev- erator control system. erance or disconnection, the throttle S3. Application. This standard applies shall return to the idle position within to passenger cars, multi-purpose pas- the time limits specified by S5.3, from senger vehicles, trucks, and buses. S4. Definitions. any accelerator position or speed when- S4.1 Driver-operated accelerator con- ever the driver removes the opposing trol system means all vehicle compo- actuating force. nents, except the fuel metering device, S5.2 The throttle shall return to the that regulate engine speed in direct re- idle position from any accelerator posi- sponse to movement of the driver-oper- tion or any speed of which the engine is ated control and that return the throt- capable whenever any one component tle to the idle position upon release of of the accelerator control system is the actuating force. disconnected or severed at a single Fuel metering device means the carbu- point. The return to idle shall occur retor, or in the case of certain engines within the time limit specified by S5.3, the fuel injector, fuel distributor or measured either from the time of sev- fuel injection pump. erance or disconnection or from the Throttle means the component of the first removal of the opposing actuating fuel metering device that connects to force by the driver. the driver-operated accelerator control S5.3 Except as provided below, max- system and that by input from the imum time to return to idle position driver-operated accelerator control shall be 1 second for vehicles of 4536 system controls the engine speed. Idle position means the position of the kilograms or less GVWR, and 2 seconds throttle at which it first comes in con- for vehicles of more than 4536 kilo- tact with an engine idle speed control grams GVWR. Maximum time to re- appropriate for existing conditions ac- turn to idle position shall be 3 seconds cording to the manufacturers’ rec- for any vehicle that is exposed to ambi- ommendations. These conditions in- ent air at ¥18 degrees Celsius to ¥40 clude, but are not limited to, engine degrees Celsius during the test or for speed adjustments for cold engine, air any portion of the 12-hour conditioning conditioning, and emission control, and period. the use of throttle setting devices. [38 FR 2980, Jan. 31, 1973; as amended at 60 Ambient temperature means the sur- FR 13645, Mar. 14, 1995] rounding air temperature, at a distance such that it is not significantly af- § 571.125 Standard No. 125; Warning fected by heat from the vehicle under devices. test. S4.2 In the case of vehicles powered S1. Scope. This standard establishes by electric motors, the words throttle requirements for devices, without self- and idle refer to the motor speed con- contained energy sources, that are de- troller and motor shutdown, respec- signed to be carried in motor vehicles tively. and used to warn approaching traffic of S5. Requirements. The vehicle shall the presence of a stopped vehicle, ex- meet the following requirements when cept for devices designed to be perma- the engine is running under any load nently affixed to the vehicle.

421

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00421 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.125 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S2. Purpose. The purpose of this (b) By secure attachment to any standard is to reduce deaths and inju- light-tight, enclosed, and easily acces- ries due to rear end collisions between sible compartment of a new motor ve- moving traffic and disabled vehicles. hicle with which it is supplied by the S3. Application. This standard applies vehicle manufacturer. to devices, without self-contained en- S5.1.3 The warning device shall be ergy sources, that are designed to be designed to be erected, and replaced in carried in buses and trucks that have a its container, without the use of tools. gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) S5.1.4 The warning device shall be greater than 10,000 pounds. These de- permanently and legibly marked with: vices are used to warn approaching (a) Name of manufacturer; traffic of the presence of a stopped ve- (b) Month and year of manufacture, hicle, except for devices designed to be which may be expressed numerically, permanently affixed to the vehicle. as ‘‘6/72’’; and S4. Definitions. Entrance angle means (c) The symbol DOT, or the state- the angle having as its sides the line ment that the warning device complies through the center, and normal to the with all applicable Federal motor vehi- face, of the object to be tested, and the cle safety standards. line from the center of the object to S5.1.5 Each warning device shall the center of the source of illumination have instructions for its erection and (Figure 2). display. Fluorescent means the property of (a) The instructions shall be either emitting visible light due to the ab- indelibly printed on the warning device sorption of radiation of a shorter wave- or attached in such a manner that they length which may be outside the visi- cannot be easily removed. ble spectrum. (b) Instructions for each warning de- Observation angle means the angle vice shall include a recommendation having as its sides the line from the ob- that the driver activate the vehicular servation point to the center of the ob- hazard warning signal lamps before ject to be tested and the line from the leaving the vehicle to erect the warn- center of that object to the center of ing device. the source of illumination (Figure 2). (c) Instructions shall include the il- Reflex reflective means reflective of lustration depicted in Figure 3 indi- light in directions close to the direc- cating recommended positioning. tion of incident light, over a wide S5.2 Configuration. range of variations in the direction of S5.2.1 When the warning device is incident light. erected on level ground: S5. Requirements. (a) Part of the warning device shall S5.1 Equipment. form an equilateral triangle that S5.1.1 Reflex reflective material and stands in a plane not more than 10° fluorescent material that meet the re- from the vertical, with the lower edge quirements of this standard shall be af- of the base of the triangle horizontal fixed to both faces of the warning de- and not less than 1 inch above the vice. Alternatively, a dual purpose or- ground. ange fluorescent and red reflective ma- (b) None of the required portion of terial that meets the requirements of the reflective material and fluorescent this standard (hereafter referred to as material shall be obscured by any ‘‘dual purpose material’’) may be affixed other part of the warning device except to both faces in places of the reflective for any portion of the material over and fluorescent materials. which it is necessary to provide fas- S5.1.2 Each warning device shall be teners, pivoting beads or other means protected from damage and deteriora- to allow collapsibility or support of the tion— device. In any event, sufficient reflec- (a) By enclosure in an opaque protec- tive and fluorescent material shall be tive reusable container, except that used on the triangle to meet the re- two or three warning devices intended quirements of S5.4 and S5.5. to be sold for use as a set with a single S5.2.2 Each of the three sides of the vehicle may be enclosed in a single triangular portion of the warning de- container; or vice shall not be less than 17 and not

422

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00422 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.125

more than 22 inches long, and not less xenon compact arc lamp. Expressed in than 2 and not more than 3 inches wide terms of the International Commission (Figure 1). on Illumination (CIE) 1931 standard S5.2.3 Each face of the triangular colorimetric observer system, the chro- portion of the warning device shall maticity coordinates of the orange flu- have an outer border of red reflex re- orescent material shall lie within the flective material of uniform width and region bounded by the spectrum locus not less than 0.75 and not more than and the lines on the diagram defined by 1.75 inches wide, and an inner border of the following equations: orange fluorescent material of uniform width and not less than 1.25 and not Boundary Equations more than 1.30 inches wide (Figure 1). Yellow ...... y=0.49 x+0.17 However, this requirement shall not White ...... x+y=0.93 apply if the dual purpose material is Red ...... y=0.35 used. S5.2.4 Each vertex of the triangular The 150-watt high pressure xenon portion of the warning device shall compact arc lamp shall illuminate the have a radius of not less than 0.25 inch sample using the unmodified spectrum and not more than 0.50 inch. at an angle of incidence of 45° and an ° S5.2.5 All edges shall be rounded or angle of observation of 90 . If dual pur- chamfered, as necessary, to reduce the pose material is being tested, it shall possibility of cutting or harm to the be illuminated by a 150-watt high pres- user. sure xenon compact arc lamp, whose S5.2.6 The device shall consist en- light is diffused by an integrating tirely of the triangular portion and at- sphere. tachments necessary for its support S5.4 Reflectivity. When the red reflex and enclosure, without additional visi- reflective material on the warning de- ble shapes or attachments. vice is tested in accordance with S6.2, S5.3 Color. both before and after the warning de- S5.3.1 The color of the red reflex re- vice has been conditioned in accord- flective material on the warning device ance with S6.1, its total candlepower shall have the following characteris- per incident foot candle shall be not tics, both before and after the warning less than the values specified in Table device has been conditioned in accord- I for each of the listed entrance angles. ance with S6.1, when the source of illu- S5.5 Luminance. When the orange mination is a lamp with a tungsten fluorescent material on the warning filament operating at 2856° Kelvin color device is tested in accordance with temperature. Expressed in terms of the S6.3, both before and after the warning International Commission on Illumina- device has been conditioned in accord- tion (CIE) 1931 standard colorimetric ance with S6.1, it shall have a min- observer system (CIE chromaticity dia- imum relative luminance of 25 percent gram, Figure 4), the chromaticity co- of a flat magnesium oxide surface and ordinates of the red reflex reflective a minimum product of that relative lu- material shall lie within the region minance and width in inches of 44. bounded by the spectrum locus and the S5.6 Stability. When the warning de- lines on the diagram defined by the fol- vice is erected on a horizontal brushed lowing equations: concrete surface both with and against the brush marks and subjected to a Boundary Equations horizontal wind of 40 miles per hour in any direction for 3 minutes— Yellow ...... y=0.33 White ...... x+y=0.98 (a) No part of it shall slide more than 3 inches from its initial position; S5.3.2 The color of the orange fluo- (b) Its triangular portion shall not rescent material on the warning device tilt to a position that is more than 10° shall have the following characteris- from the vertical; and tics, both before and after the warning (c) Its triangular position shall not device has been conditioned in accord- turn through a horizontal angle of ance with S6.1, when the source of illu- more than 10° in either direction from mination is a 150-watt high pressure the initial position.

423

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00423 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.125 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S5.7 Durability. When the warning (e) Calculate the total candlepower device is conditioned in accordance per incident foot candle of the red re- with S6.1, no part of the warning device flex reflective material at each of the shall become warped or separated from entrance and observation angles speci- the rest of the warning device. fied in Table 1. S6. Test Procedures. S6.3 Luminance Test. Test the orange S6.1 Conditions. fluorescent material as follows: S6.1.1 Submit the warning device to (a) Unless dual purpose material is the following conditioning sequence, used, prevent the red reflex reflective returning the device after each step in material from affecting the photo- the sequence to ambient air at 68 °F. metric measurement of the luminance for at least 2 hours. of the orange fluorescent material. ° (a) Minus 40 F. for 16 hours in a cir- (b) Using a 150-watt high pressure culating air chamber using ambient air xenon compact arc lamp as the light which would have not less than 30 per- source, illuminate the test sample at cent and not more than 70 percent rel- ° ° an angle of incidence of 45 and an ative humidity at 70 F.; angle of observation of 90°. If dual pur- (b) 150 °F. for 16 hours in a circu- pose material is being tested, illu- lating air oven using ambient air which minate the sample diffusely through an would have not less than 30 percent and integrating sphere. not more than 70 percent relative hu- (c) Measure the luminance of the ma- midity at 70 °F.; terial at a perpendicular viewing angle, (c) 100 °F. and 90 percent relative hu- with no ray of the viewing beam more midity for 16 hours; ° (d) Salt spray (fog) test in accordance than 5 from the perpendicular to the with American Society of Testing and specimen. Materials Standard B–117, Standard (d) Repeat the procedure for a flat Method of Salt Spray (fog) testing, Au- magnesium oxide surface, and compute gust 1964, except that the test shall be the quotient (percentage) of the lumi- for 4 hours rather than 40 hours; and nance of the material relative to that (e) Immersion for 2 hours in water at of the magnesium oxide surface. a temperature of 100 °F. S6.2 Reflectivity Test. Test the red re- flex reflective materials as follows: (a) Unless dual purpose material is used, prevent the orange fluorescent material from affecting the photo- metric measurement of the reflectivity of the red reflex reflective material, ei- ther by separation or masking. (b) Use a lamp with a tungsten fila- ment operating at 2856° Kelvin color temperature as the source of illumina- tion. (c) Place the source of illumination 100 feet from the red reflex reflective material (Figure 2). (d) Place the observation point di- rectly above the source of illumination FIG. 1—DIMENSIONS OF WARNING DEVICE (Figure 2). (INCHES)

424

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00424 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.061 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.125

425

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00425 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.062 §§ 571.126–571.128 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

[39 FR 28636, Aug. 9, 1974, as amended at 40 FR 4, Jan. 2, 1975; 59 FR 49591, Sept. 29, 1994]

§§ 571.126–571.128 [Reserved] ing; and specifies labeling require- ments for non-pneumatic spare tires. § 571.129 Standard No. 129; New non- S2 Application. This standard applies pneumatic tires for passenger cars. to new temporary spare non-pneumatic S1 Scope. This standard specifies tires for use on passenger cars. tire dimensions and laboratory test re- S3 Definitions. quirements for lateral strength, Carcass means the tire structure ex- strength, endurance, and high speed cept for the tread which provides the performance; defines the tire load rat- major portion of the tire’s capability

426

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00426 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.063 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.129

to deflect in response to the vertical Non-pneumatic tire identification code loads and tractive forces that the tire means an alphanumeric code that is as- transmits from the roadway to the signed by the manufacturer to identify non-pneumatic rim, the wheel center the tire with regard to its size, applica- member, or the vehicle and which at- tion to a specific non-pneumatic rim or taches to the vehicle or attaches, ei- wheel center member or application to ther integrally or separably, to the a specific vehicle. wheel center member or non-pneu- Test wheel center member means with matic rim. reference to a tire to be tested, any Carcass separation means the pulling wheel center member that is listed as away of the carcass from the non-pneu- appropriate for use with that tire in ac- matic rim or wheel center member. cordance with S4.4. Chunking means the breaking away Tread means that portion of the tire of pieces of the carcass or tread. that comes in contact with the road. Cracking means any parting within Tread separation means pulling away the carcass, tread, or any components of the tread from the carcass. that connect the tire to the non-pneu- Wheel means a mechanical device matic rim or wheel center member and, which consists of a non-pneumatic rim if the non-pneumatic tire is integral and wheel center member and which, in with the non-pneumatic rim or wheel the case of a non-pneumatic tire as- sembly incorporating a wheel, provides center member, any parting within the the connection between the tire and non-pneumatic rim, or wheel center the vehicle. member. Wheel center member means, in the means the maximum load Load rating case of a non-pneumatic tire assembly a tire is rated to carry. incorporating a wheel, a mechanical Maximum tire width means the greater device which attaches, either inte- of either the linear distance between grally or separably, to the non-pneu- the exterior edges of the carcass or the matic rim and provides the connection linear distance between the exterior between the non-pneumatic rim and edges of the tread, both being measured the vehicle; or in the case of a non- parallel to the rolling axis of the tire. pneumatic tire assembly not incor- Non-pneumatic rim means a mechan- porating a wheel, a mechanical device ical device which, when a non-pneu- which attaches, either integrally or matic tire assembly incorporates a separably, to the non-pneumatic tire wheel, supports the tire, and attaches, and provides the connection between either integrally or separably, to the the tire and the vehicle. wheel center member and upon which S4 Requirements. the tire is attached. S4.1 Size and Construction. Each tire Non-pneumatic test rim means with shall be designed to fit each non-pneu- reference to a tire to be tested, any matic rim or wheel center member non-pneumatic rim that is listed as ap- specified for its non-pneumatic tire propriate for use with that tire in ac- identification code designation in a cordance with S4.4. listing in accordance with section S4.4. Non-pneumatic tire means a mechan- S4.2 Performance Requirements ical device which transmits, either di- S4.2.1 General. Each tire shall con- rectly or through a wheel or wheel cen- form to the following: ter member, the vertical load and (a) Its load rating shall be that speci- tractive forces from the roadway to the fied in a submission made by a manu- vehicle, generates the tractive forces facturer, pursuant to S4.4(a), or in one that provide the directional control of of the publications described in S4.4(b) the vehicle and does not rely on the for its non-pneumatic tire identifica- containment of any gas or fluid for pro- tion code designation. viding those functions. (b) It shall incorporate a tread wear Non-pneumatic tire assembly means a indicator that will provide a visual in- non-pneumatic tire, alone or in com- dication that the tire has worn to a bination with a wheel or wheel center tread depth of 1⁄16 inch. member, which can be mounted on a (c) It shall, before being subjected to vehicle. either the endurance test procedure

427

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00427 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.129 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

specified in S5.4 or the high speed per- S4.2.2.5 Tire Endurance. When the formance procedure specified in S5.5, tire has been subjected to the labora- exhibit no visual evidence of tread or tory endurance test specified in S5.4, carcass separation, chunking or crack- using, if applicable, a non-pneumatic ing. test rim or test wheel center member (d) It shall meet the requirements of that undergoes no permanent deforma- S4.2.2.5 and S4.2.2.6 when tested on a tion, there shall be no visual evidence test wheel described in S5.4.2.1 either of tread or carcass separation, cracking alone or simultaneously with up to 5 or chunking. In the case of a non-pneu- tires. matic tire assembly in which the non- S4.2.2 Test Requirements. pneumatic tire is an integral part of S.4.2.2.1 Test Sample. For each test the assembly, the assembly shall un- sample use: dergo no permanent deformation with (a) One tire for physical dimensions, the exception of wear of the tread. lateral strength, and strength in se- S4.2.2.6 High Speed Performance. quence; When the tire has been subjected to the (b) A second tire for tire endurance; laboratory high speed performance test and specified in S5.5, using if applicable, a (c) A third tire for high speed per- non-pneumatic test rim or test wheel formance. center member that undergoes no per- S4.2.2.2 Physical Dimensions. For a manent deformation, there shall be no non-pneumatic tire assembly in which visual evidence of tread or carcass sep- the tire is separable from the non- aration, cracking or chunking. In the pneumatic rim or wheel center mem- case of a non-pneumatic tire assembly ber, the dimensions, measured in ac- in which the non-pneumatic tire is an cordance with S5.1, for that portion of integral part of the assembly, the as- the tire that attaches to that non- sembly shall undergo no permanent de- pneumatic rim or wheel center member formation with the exception of wear shall satisfy the dimensional specifica- of the tread. tions contained in the submission made S4.3 Labeling Requirements. Each by an individual manufacturer, pursu- non-pneumatic tire or, in the case of a ant to S4.4(a), or in one of the publica- non-pneumatic tire assembly in which tions described in S4.4(b) for that tire’s the non-pneumatic tire is an integral non-pneumatic tire identification code part of the assembly, each non-pneu- designation. matic tire assembly shall include, in S4.2.2.3 Lateral Strength. There shall letters or numerals not less than 0.078 be no visual evidence of tread or car- inches high, the information specified cass separation, cracking or chunking, in paragraphs S4.3 (a) through (f). The when a tire is tested in accordance information shall be permanently with S5.2 to a load of: molded, stamped or otherwise perma- (a) 1,500 pounds for tires with a load nently marked into or onto the non- rating less than 880 pounds; pneumatic tire or non-pneumatic tire (b) 2,000 pounds for tires with a load assembly, except that the information rating of 880 pounds or more but less specified in S4.3(d) and S4.3(g) may ap- than 1,400 pounds. pear on a label that is permanently at- tached to the tire or tire assembly. If a (c) 2,500 pounds for tires with a load label is used, it shall be subsurface rating of 1,400 pounds or more, using printed, made of a material that is re- the load rating marked on the tire or sistant to fade, heat, moisture, and ab- tire assembly. rasion, and attached in such a manner S4.2.2.4 Tire Strength. There shall be that it cannot be removed without de- no visual evidence of tread carcass sep- stroying or defacing the label on the aration, cracking or chunking, when a non-pneumatic tire or tire assembly. tire is tested in accordance with S5.3 to The information shall appear on both a minimum energy level of: sides of the non-pneumatic tire or non- Load rating Minimum energy level pneumatic tire assembly, except, in the case of a non-pneumatic tire assembly Below 880 pounds ...... 1950 inch pounds. which has a particular side that must 880 pounds and above ...... 2600 inch pounds. always face outward when mounted on

428

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00428 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.129

a vehicle, in which case the informa- non-pneumatic rim or wheel center tion shown in paragraphs S4.3 (a) member, and a list of the non-pneu- through (g) shall only be required on matic rims or wheel center members the outward facing side. The informa- that may be used with that tire. For tion shall be positioned on the tire or each non-pneumatic rim or wheel cen- tire assembly such that it is not placed ter member included in such a listing, on the tread or the outermost edge of the information provided shall include the tire and is not obstructed by any a size and type designation for the non- portion of any non-pneumatic rim or pneumatic rim or wheel center mem- wheel center member designated for ber, and dimensional specifications and use with that tire in S4.4 of this stand- a diagram of the non-pneumatic rim or ard or in 49 CFR 571.110 or 49 CFR portion of the wheel center member 571.120. that attaches to the tire. A listing (a) The non-pneumatic tire identi- compiled in accordance with paragraph fication code (‘‘NPTIC’’); (a) of this section need not include di- (b) Load rating, which, if expressed in mensional specifications or a diagram kilograms, shall be followed in paren- of the non-pneumatic rim or portion of thesis by the equivalent load rating in the wheel center member that attaches pounds, rounded to the nearest whole to the tire if the non-pneumatic rim’s pound; or portion of the wheel center mem- (c) For a non-pneumatic tire that is ber’s dimensional specifications and not an integral part of a non-pneu- diagram are contained in each listing matic tire assembly, the size and type published in accordance with para- designation of the non-pneumatic rim graph (b) of this section. The listing or wheel center member that is con- shall be in one of the following forms: tained in the submission made by a (a) Listed by manufacturer name or manufacturer, pursuant to S4.4(a), or brand name in a document furnished to in one of the publications described in dealers of the manufacturer’s tires or, S4.4(b) for that tire’s non-pneumatic in the case of non-pneumatic tires sup- tire identification code designation; plied only as a temporary spare tire on (d) The name of the manufacturer or a vehicle, in a document furnished to brand name; dealers of vehicles equipped with the (e) The symbol DOT in the manner tires, to any person upon request, and specified in part 574 of this chapter, in duplicate to the Office of Vehicle which shall constitute a certification Safety Standards, Crash Avoidance Di- that the tire conforms to applicable vision, National Highway Traffic Safe- Federal motor vehicle safety stand- ty Administration, U.S. Department of ards; Transportation, Washington, DC 20590; (f) The tire identification number re- or quired by § 574.5 of this chapter; (b) Contained in publications, current (g) The labeling requirements set at the date of manufacture of the tire forth in S6 of Standard No. 110 or any later date, of at least one of the (§ 571.110), or S8 of Standard No. 120 following organizations: (§ 571.120). The Tire and Rim Association S4.4 Non-Pneumatic Tire Identifica- The European Tyre and Rim Technical Orga- tion Code and Non-Pneumatic Rim/Wheel nization Center Member Matching Information. Japan Automobile Tire Manufacturers’ Asso- For purposes of this standard, S8 of 49 ciation, Inc. CFR 571.110 and S10 of 49 CFR 571.120, Deutche Industrie Norm each manufacturer of a non-pneumatic British Standards Institute tire that is not an integral part of a Scandinavian Tire and Rim Organization non-pneumatic tire assembly shall en- Tyre and Rim Association of Australia sure that it provides a listing to the S5. Test Procedures. public for each non-pneumatic tire that S5.1 Physical Dimensions. After con- it produces. The listing shall include ditioning the tire at room temperature the non-pneumatic tire identification for at least 24 hours, using equipment code, tire load rating, dimensional with minimum measurement capabili- specifications and a diagram of the ties of one-half the smallest tolerance portion of the tire that attaches to the specified in the listing contained in the

429

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00429 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.129 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

submission made by a manufacturer ues of B greater than that for which pursuant to S4.4(a), or in one of the contact between the non-pneumatic publications described in S4.4(b) for test rim or test wheel center member that tire’s non-pneumatic tire identi- and the test block is made, shall con- fication code designation, measure the stitute compliance to the requirements portion of the tire that attaches to the set forth in S4.2.2.3. non-pneumatic rim or the wheel center S5.3 Tire Strength. member. For any inner diameter di- S5.3.1 Preparation of the Tire. mensional specifications, or other di- S5.3.1.1 If applicable, mount the tire mensional specifications that are uni- on a non-pneumatic test rim or test form or uniformly spaced around some wheel center member. circumference of the tire, these meas- S5.3.1.2 Condition the tire assembly urements shall be taken at least six at room temperature for at least three points around the tire, or, if specified, hours. at the points specified in the listing S5.3.2 Test Procedures. contained in the submission made by S5.3.2.1 Force the test cleat, as de- an individual manufacturer, pursuant fined in S5.3.2.2, with its length axis to S4.4(a), or in one of the publications (see S5.3.2.2(a)) parallel to the rolling described in S4.4(b) for that tire’s non- axis of the non-pneumatic tire assem- pneumatic tire identification code des- bly, and its height axis (see S5.3.2.2(c)), ignation. S5.2 Lateral Strength. coinciding with a radius of the non- S5.2.1 Preparation of the tire. pneumatic tire assembly, into the S5.2.1.1 If applicable, mount a new tread of the tire at five test points tire on a non-pneumatic test rim or equally spaced around the circum- test wheel center member. ference of the tire. At each test point, S5.2.1.2 Mount the tire assembly in the test cleat is forced into the tire at a fixture as shown in Figure 1 with the a rate of two inches per minute until surface of the tire assembly that would the applicable minimum energy level, face outward when mounted on a vehi- as shown in S4.2.2.4, calculated using cle facing toward the lateral strength the formula contained in S5.3.2.3, is test block shown in Figure 2 and force reached. the lateral strength test block against S5.3.2.2 The test cleat is made of steel the tire. and has the following dimensions; S5.2.2 Test Procedure. (a) Minimum length of one inch S5.2.2.1 Apply a load through the greater than the maximum tire width block to the tire at a rate of 2 inches of the tire, per minute, with the load arm parallel (b) Width of one-half inch with the to the tire assembly at the time of en- surface which contacts the tire’s tread gagement and the first point of contact having one-quarter inch radius, and with the test block being the test block (c) Minimum height of one inch centerline shown in Figure 2, at the greater than the difference between the following distances, B, in sequence, as unloaded radius of the non-pneumatic shown in Figure 1: tire assembly and the maximum radius of the non-pneumatic rim or wheel cen- B=A—1 inch B=A—2 inches ter member, if used with the non-pneu- B=A—3 inches matic tire assembly being tested. B=A—4 inches S5.3.2.3 The energy level is cal- B=A—5 inches, and culated by the following formula: B=A—6 inches. FP× However, if at any time during the con- E = duct of the test, the test block comes 2 in contact with the non-pneumatic test where rim or test wheel center member, the test shall be suspended and no further E=Energy level, inch-pounds; testing at smaller values of the dis- F=Force, pounds; and P=Penetration, inches tance B shall be conducted. When test- ed to the above procedure, satisfying S5.4 Tire Endurance. the requirements of S4.2.2.3 for all val- S5.4.1 Preparation of the tire.

430

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00430 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.066 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.129

S5.4.1.1 If applicable, mount a new matic test rim or test wheel center tire on a non-pneumatic test rim or member, and inspect it for the condi- test wheel center member. tions specified in S4.2.2.5. S5.4.1.2 Condition the tire assembly S5.5 High Speed Endurance. to 100 ±5 °F. for at least three hours. S5.5.1 After preparing the tire in ac- S5.4.2 Test Procedure. cordance with S5.4.1, if applicable, S5.4.2.1 Mount the tire assembly on mount the tire assembly in accordance a test axle and press it against a flat- with S5.4.2.1, and press it against the faced steel test wheel 67.23 inches in di- test wheel with a load of 88 percent of ameter and at least as wide as the max- the tire’s load rating as marked on the imum tire width of the tire to be tested tire or tire assembly. or an approved equivalent test wheel, S5.5.2 Break in the tire by running with the applicable test load specified it for 2 hours at 50 m.p.h. in the table in S5.4.2.3 for the tire’s ± ° non-pneumatic tire identification code S5.5.3 Allow to cool to 100 5 F. designation. S5.5.4 Test at 75 m.p.h. for 30 min- S5.4.2.2 During the test, the air sur- utes, 80 m.p.h. for 30 minutes and 85 rounding the test area shall be 100 ±5 m.p.h. for 30 minutes. °F. S5.5.5 Immediately after running S5.4.2.3 Conduct the test at 50 miles the tire for the required time, allow per hour (m.p.h.) in accordance with the tire to cool for one hour, then, if the following schedule without inter- applicable, detach it from the non- ruption: The loads for the following pe- pneumatic test rim or test wheel cen- riods are the specified percentage of ter member, and inspect it for the con- the load rating marked on the tire or ditions specified in S4.2.2.6. tire assembly: S6. Nonconforming tires. Any non- pneumatic tire that is designed for use Percent 4 hours ...... 85 on passenger cars that does not con- 86 hours...... 90 form to all the requirements of this 24 hours ...... 100 standard, shall not be sold, offered for S5.4.2.4 Immediately after running sale, introduced or delivered for intro- the tire the required time, allow the duction into interstate commerce, or tire to cool for one hour, then, if appli- imported into the United States, for cable, detach it from the non-pneu- any purpose.

431

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00431 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.129 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

432

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00432 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.067 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.129, Nt.

[55 FR 29590, July 20, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 19312, Apr. 26, 1991]

EFFECTIVE DATE NOTES: 1. At 67 FR 69627, effective Sept. 1, 2003. At 68 FR 33655, June 5, Nov. 18, 2002, § 571.129 was amended by revis- 2003, the effective date was delayed until ing S4.3 and adding S7, S7.1, S7.2, and S7.3, Sept. 1, 2004. At 69 FR 31306, June 3, 2004, the

433

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00433 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.068 § 571.131 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

effective date was further delayed until Sept. standard, with the requirements of S5.5 and 1, 2005. For the convenience of the user, the S5.5.1 of § 571.139. added and revised text is set forth as follows:

§ 571.129 Standard No. 129; New non-pneu- * * * * * matic tires for passenger cars. S7.1. Tires manufactured on or after Sep- tember 1, 2005 and before September 1, 2006. For * * * * * tires manufactured on or after September 1, 2005 and before September 1, 2006, the num- S4. * * * ber of tires complying with S4.3 of this S4.3. Labeling Requirements. Each new non- standard must be equal to not less than 40% pneumatic tire shall comply, according to of the manufacturer’s production during that the phase-in schedule specified in S7 of this period. standard, with the requirements of S5.5 of S7.2. Tires manufactured on or after Sep- § 571.139. tember 1, 2006 and before September 1, 2007. For tires manufactured on or after September 1, * * * * * 2006 and before September 1, 2007, the num- ber of tires complying with S4.3 of this S7. Phase-In Schedule for labeling require- standard must be equal to not less than 70% ments. of the manufacturer’s production during that S7.1 Tires manufactured on or after Sep- period. tember 1, 2004 and before September 1, 2005. For S7.3. Tires manufactured on or after Sep- tires manufactured on or after September 1, tember 1, 2007. Each tire must comply with 2004 and before September 1, 2005, the num- S6.3 of this standard. ber of tires complying with S4.3 of this standard must be equal to not less than 40% § 571.131 Standard No. 131; School bus of the manufacturer’s production during that pedestrian safety devices. period. S7.2 Tires manufactured on or after Sep- S1. Scope. This standard establishes tember 1, 2005 and before September 1, 2006. For requirements for devices that can be tires manufactured on or after September 1, installed on school buses to improve 2005 and before September 1, 2006, the num- the safety of pedestrians in the vicinity ber of tires complying with S4.3 of this of stopped school buses. standard must be equal to not less than 70% S2. Purpose. The purpose of this of the manufacturer’s production during that standard is to reduce deaths and inju- period. S7.3 Tires manufactured on or after September ries by minimizing the likelihood of ve- 1, 2006. Each tire must comply with S6.3 of hicles passing a stopped school bus and this standard. striking pedestrians in the vicinity of the bus. * * * * * S3. Application. This standard applies to school buses other than multi- 2. At 69 FR 31319, June 3, 2004, § 571.129 was function school activity buses. amended by revising paragraphs S4.3, S7.1, S4. Definitions. S7.2 and S7.3, effective Sept. 1, 2005. For the Stop signal arm means a device that convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as follows: can be extended outward from the side of a school bus to provide a signal to § 571.129 Standard No. 129; New non-pneu- other motorists not to pass the bus be- matic tires for passenger cars. cause it has stopped to load or dis- charge passengers. * * * * * S5. Requirements. Each school bus S4.3. Labeling requirements. Each new non- shall be equipped with a stop signal pneumatic tire shall comply, according to arm meeting the requirements of S5.1 the phase-in schedule specified in S7 of this through S5.5 as depicted in Figure 1.

434

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00434 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.131

S5.1 The stop signal arm shall be a stop signal arm shall not contain any regular octagon which is at least 450 lettering, symbols, or markings on the mm×450 mm (17.72 inches×17.72 inches) forward side. in diameter. S5.3 Conspicuity. The stop signal arm S5.2 The stop signal arm shall be red shall comply with either S5.3.1 or on both sides, except as provided in S5.3.2, or both. S5.2.1 and S5.2.2, and S5.2.3. S5.3.1 Except as provided in S5.3.1.1, S5.2.1 The stop signal arm shall S5.3.1.2, or S5.3.1.3, the entire surface of have a white border at least 12 mm both sides of each stop signal arm shall (0.47 inches) wide on both sides, except be reflectorized with Type III as provided in S5.2.3. Mounting brack- retroreflectorized material that meets ets, clips, bolts, or other components the minimum specific intensity re- necessary to the mechanical or elec- quirements of S6.1 and Table I. trical operation of the stop signal arm S.5.3.1.1 The legend of the may not obscure more than 15 percent retroreflective stop arm may be illumi- of the border on each side of the stop nated in a manner such that light is arm. The portion of the border that emitted from the surface of each letter may be obscured is in addition to that or from the area immediately sur- portion which may be obscured by the rounding each letter. Only red lamps two red lamps specified in S5.3.2. may be used. They shall form the com- S.5.2.2 The stop signal arm shall plete shape of each letter of the legend, have the word ‘‘STOP’’ displayed in and shall be affixed to all letters (or to white upper-case letters on both sides, the areas immediately surrounding all except as provided in S5.2.3. The letters letters) in the legend. The shape of shall be at least 150 mm (5.9 inches) in each letter shall remain constant and, height. The letters shall have a stroke if the lamps are contained within each width of at least 20 mm (0.79 inches), letter, the net stroke width (stroke except as provided in S.5.3.1.1. width minus the width of the lamp(s)) S5.2.3 When two stop signal arms are of each letter of the legend, specified in installed on a school bus, the rearmost S5.2.2, shall not be less than 15 mm

435

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00435 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.069 § 571.131 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(0.59 inch). When the stop arm is ex- device shall be within the reach of the tended, the lamps shall flash at the driver. While the device is activated, a rate specified in S6.2.2, with a current continuous or intermittent signal audi- ‘‘on’’ time specified in S6.2.2.1. All ble to the driver shall sound. The audi- lamps shall be positioned in one of the ble signal may be equipped with a tim- two following ways: ing device requiring the signal to sound (1) centered within the stroke of each for at least 60 seconds. If a timing de- letter of the legend, or vice is used, it shall automatically re- (2) outlining each letter of the leg- cycle every time the service entry door end. is opened while the engine is running S5.3.1.2 Nonreflectorized mounting and the manual override is engaged. brackets, clips, bolts, or other compo- S6 Test Procedures. nents necessary to the mechanical or S6.1 Reflectivity Test. When tested electrical operation of the stop signal under the conditions specified in S6.2 arm shall not obscure more than 7.5 (b), (c), and (d) of Federal motor vehi- percent of the total surface area of ei- cle safety standard 125, Warning De- ther side of the stop signal arm. vices, (49 CFR 571.125), the S5.3.1.3 When two stop signal arms retroreflective materials shall meet are installed on a school bus, the for- the criteria specified in table 1. ward side of the rearmost stop signal arm shall not be reflectorized. TABLE 1—MINIMUM SPECIFIC INTENSITY PER S5.3.2 Each side of the stop signal UNIT AREA (SIA) arm shall have at least two red lamps (Candelas per Footcandle Per Square Foot) that meet the requirements of S6.2. ° Entrance The lamps shall be centered on the Observation Angle ( ) Angle (°) White Red vertical centerline of the stop arm. One of the lamps shall be located at the ex- Type III Retroreflective Element Material treme top of the stop arm and the A—Glass Bead Retroreflective Element Material other at its extreme bottom. S5.4 The stop signal arm shall be in- 0.2 ...... ¥4 250 45 stalled on the left side of the bus. 0.2 ...... +30 150 25 ¥ S5.4.1 The stop signal arm shall be 0.5 ...... 4 95 15 0.5 ...... +30 65 10 located such that, when in the ex- tended position: B—Prismatic Retroreflective Element Material (a) The stop signal arm is perpen- 0.2 ...... ¥4 250 45 dicular to the side of the bus, plus or 0.2 ...... +30 95 13.3 minus five degrees; 0.5 ...... ¥4 200 28 (b) The top edge of the stop signal 0.5 ...... +30 65 10 arm is parallel to and not more than 6 inches from a horizontal plane tangent S6.2 Lighting Tests. to the lower edge of the frame of the S6.2.1 Color. The procedure shall be passenger window immediately behind done in accordance with the Society of the driver’s window; and Automotive Engineers (SAE) J578, (c) The vertical centerline of the stop Color Specification (May 1988), 1990 signal arm is not less than 9 inches SAE Handbook, Society of Automotive away from the side of the school bus. Engineers, Inc. Along with the incorpo- S5.4.2 A second stop signal arm may ration by reference in S6.2.3, this incor- be installed on a school bus. That stop poration by reference was approved by signal arm shall comply with S5.4 and the Director of the Federal Register in S5.4.1. accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 S5.5 The stop signal arm shall be CFR part 51. Copies may be obtained automatically extended in such a man- from the Society of Automotive Engi- ner that it complies with S5.4.1, at a neers, 400 Commonwealth Drive, minimum whenever the red signal Warrendale, PA 15096–0001. Copies may lamps required by S5.1.4 of Standard be inspected at Docket Room, National No. 108 are activated; except that a de- Highway Traffic Safety Administra- vice may be installed that prevents the tion, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash- automatic extension of a stop signal ington, DC 20590 or at the National Ar- arm. The mechanism for activating the chives and Records Administration

436

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00436 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.135

(NARA). For information on the avail- (April 1984) under the test conditions ability of this material at NARA, call specified herein. 202–741–6030, or go to: http:// [56 FR 20370, May 3, 1991, as amended at 57 www.archives.gov/federallregister/ FR 40134, Sept. 2, 1992; 59 FR 26761, May 24, codeloflfederallregulations/ 1994; 63 FR 29143, May 28, 1998; 68 FR 44901, ibrllocations.html. When visually com- July 31, 2003] pared to the light emitted from a filter/ source with a combination of chroma- § 571.135 Standard No. 135; Passenger ticity coordinates as explained in SAE car brake systems. J578, Color Specification (May 1988), S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- within specific boundaries [y=0.33 (yel- quirements for service brake and asso- low boundary) and y=0.98—×(purple ciated parking brake systems. boundary)] the color of light emitted S2. Purpose. The purpose of this from the test object shall not be less standard is to ensure safe braking per- saturated (paler), yellower, or purpler. formance under normal and emergency The test object shall be placed perpen- driving conditions. dicular to the light source to simulate S3. Application. This standard ap- lamps on stop signal arms. In making plies to passenger cars manufactured visual comparisons, the light from the on or after September 1, 2000 and to test object shall light one portion of a multi-purpose passenger vehicles, comparison field and the light from the trucks and buses with a gross vehicle filter/source standard shall light an ad- weight rating (GVWR) of 3,500 kilo- jacent area. To make a valid visual grams (7,716 pounds) or less, manufac- comparison, the two fields to be viewed tured on or after September 1, 2002. In shall be of near equal luminance. addition, at the option of the manufac- S6.2.2. Flash rate. The lamps on each turer, passenger cars manufactured be- side of the stop signal arm, when oper- fore September 1, 2000, and multi-pur- ated at the manufacturer’s design load, pose passenger vehicles, trucks and shall flash alternately at a rate of 60 to buses with a GVWR of 3,500 kilograms 120 flashes per minute. (7,716 pounds) or less, manufactured be- fore September 1, 2002, may meet the S6.2.2.1 Lamps, except those subject requirements of this standard instead to S6.2.2.2, shall have a current ‘‘on’’ of Federal Motor Vehicle No. 105, Hy- time of 30 to 75 percent of the total draulic Brake Systems. flash cycle. The total current on time ‘‘ ’’ S4. Definitions. for the two terminals shall be between Adhesion utilization curves means 90 and 110 percent of the total flash curves showing, for specified load con- cycle. ditions, the adhesion utilized by each S6.2.2.2 Xenon short-arc gaseous dis- axle of a vehicle plotted against the charge lamps shall have an ‘‘off’’ time braking ratio of the vehicle. before each flash of at least 50 percent Antilock brake system or ABS means a of the total flash cycle. portion of a service brake system that S6.2.3 Vibration, Moisture, Dust, Corro- automatically controls the degree of sion, Photometry, and Warpage Tests. rotational wheel slip during braking The procedure shall be done in accord- by: ance with the Society of Automotive (1) Sensing the rate of angular rota- Engineers (SAE) J575, Tests for Motor tion of the wheels; Vehicle Lighting Devices and Compo- (2) Transmitting signals regarding nents, (July 1983) and Society of Auto- the rate of wheel angular rotation to motive Engineers (SAE) J1133, School one or more controlling devices which Bus Stop Arm, (April 1984), 1990 SAE interpret those signals and generate re- Handbook, Society of Automotive En- sponsive controlling output signals; gineers, Inc. Lamps and lighting com- and ponents shall meet the criteria for vi- (3) Transmitting those controlling bration, moisture, dust, corrosion, pho- signals to one or more modulator de- tometry, and warpage in SAE J575, vices which adjust brake actuating Tests for Motor Vehicle Lighting De- forces in response to those signals. vices and Components, (July 1983) and Backup system means a portion of a SAE J1133, School Bus Stop Arm, service brake system, such as a pump,

437

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00437 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.135 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

that automatically supplies energy in Hydraulic brake system means a sys- the event of a primary brake power tem that uses hydraulic fluid as a me- source failure. dium for transmitting force from a Brake factor means the slope of the service brake control to the service linear least squares regression equa- brake and that may incorporate a tion best representing the measured brake power assist unit, or a brake torque output of a brake as a function power unit. of the measured applied line pressure Initial brake temperature or IBT means during a given brake application for the average temperature of the service which no wheel lockup occurs. brakes on the hottest axle of the vehi- Brake hold-off pressure means the cle 0.32 km (0.2 miles) before any brake maximum applied line pressure for application. which no brake torque is developed, as Lightly loaded vehicle weight or LLVW predicted by the pressure axis intercept means unloaded vehicle weight plus the of the linear least squares regression weight of a mass of 180 kg (396 pounds), equation best representing the meas- including driver and instrumentation. ured torque output of a brake as a Maximum speed of a vehicle or VMax function of the measured applied line means the highest speed attainable by pressure during a given brake applica- accelerating at a maximum rate from a tion. standing start for a distance of 3.2 km Brake power assist unit means a device (2 miles) on a level surface, with the installed in a hydraulic brake system vehicle at its lightly loaded vehicle that reduces the amount of muscular weight, and, if an EV, with the propul- force that a driver must apply to actu- sion batteries at a state of charge of ate the system, and that, if inoper- not less than 95 percent at the begin- ative, does not prevent the driver from ning of the run. braking the vehicle by a continued ap- Objective brake factor means the arith- plication of muscular force on the serv- metic average of all the brake factors ice brake control. measured over the twenty brake appli- Brake power unit means a device in- cations defined in S7.4, for all wheel po- stalled in a brake system that provides sitions having a given brake configura- the energy required to actuate the tion. brakes, either directly or indirectly Peak friction coefficient or PFC means through an auxiliary device, with driv- the ratio of the maximum value of er action consisting only of modulating braking test wheel longitudinal force the energy application level. to the simultaneous vertical force oc- Braking ratio means the deceleration curring prior to wheel lockup, as the of the vehicle divided by the gravita- braking torque is progressively in- tional acceleration constant. creased. Electric vehicle or EV means a motor Pressure component means a brake vehicle that is powered by an electric system component that contains the motor drawing current from recharge- brake system fluid and controls or able storage batteries, fuel cells, or senses the fluid pressure. other portable sources of electrical Regenerative braking system or RBS current, and which may include a non- means an electrical energy system that electrical source of power designed to is installed in an EV for recovering or charge batteries and components there- dissipating kinetic energy, and which of. uses the propulsion motor(s) as a re- Electrically-actuated service brakes tarder for partial braking of the EV means service brakes that utilize elec- while returning electrical energy to trical energy to actuate the foundation the propulsion battery(s) or dissipating brakes. electrical energy. Functional failure means a failure of a Snub means the braking deceleration component (either electrical or me- of a vehicle from a higher reference chanical in nature) which renders the speed to a lower reference speed that is system totally or partially inoperative greater than zero. yet the structural integrity of the sys- Split service brake system means a tem is maintained. brake system consisting of two or more

438

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00438 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.135

subsystems actuated by a single con- (b) For an EV that is equipped with trol, designed so that a single failure in both ABS and RBS that is part of the any subsystem (such as a leakage-type service brake system, the ABS must failure of a pressure component of a control the RBS. hydraulic subsystem except structural S5.2. Parking brake system. Each vehi- failure of a housing that is common to cle shall be equipped with a parking two or more subsystems, or an elec- brake system of a friction type with trical failure in an electric subsystem) solely mechanical means to retain en- does not impair the operation of any gagement. other subsystem. S5.3. Controls. Stopping distance means the distance S5.3.1. The service brakes shall be ac- traveled by a vehicle from the point of tivated by means of a foot control. The application of force to the brake con- control of the parking brake shall be trol to the point at which the vehicle independent of the service brake con- reaches a full stop. trol, and may be either a hand or foot Variable brake proportioning system control. means a system that has one or more S5.3.2. For vehicles equipped with proportioning devices which automati- ABS, a control to manually disable the cally change the brake pressure ratio ABS, either fully or partially, is pro- between any two or more wheels to hibited. compensate for changes in wheel load- S5.4. Reservoirs. ing due to static load changes and/or S5.4.1. Master cylinder reservoirs. A dynamic weight transfer, or due to de- master cylinder shall have a reservoir celeration. compartment for each service brake Wheel lockup means 100 percent wheel subsystem serviced by the master cyl- slip. inder. Loss of fluid from one compart- ment shall not result in a complete S5. Equipment requirements. loss of brake fluid from another com- S5.1. Each vehi- Service brake system. partment. cle shall be equipped with a service S5.4.2. Reservoir capacity. Reservoirs, brake system acting on all wheels. whether for master cylinders or other S5.1.1. Wear adjustment. Wear of the type systems, shall have a total min- service brakes shall be compensated for imum capacity equivalent to the fluid by means of a system of automatic ad- displacement resulting when all the justment. wheel cylinders or caliper pistons serv- S5.1.2. Wear status. The wear condi- iced by the reservoirs move from a new tion of all service brakes shall be indi- lining, fully retracted position (as ad- cated by either: justed initially to the manufacturer’s (a) Acoustic or optical devices warn- recommended setting) to a fully worn, ing the driver at his or her driving po- fully applied position, as determined in sition when lining replacement is nec- accordance with S7.17(c) of this stand- essary, or ard. Reservoirs shall have completely (b) A means of visually checking the separate compartments for each sub- degree of brake lining wear, from the system except that in reservoir sys- outside or underside of the vehicle, uti- tems utilizing a portion of the res- lizing only the tools or equipment nor- ervoir for a common supply to two or mally supplied with the vehicle. The more subsystems, individual partial removal of wheels is permitted for this compartments shall each have a min- purpose. imum volume of fluid equal to at least S5.1.3 Regenerative braking system. (a) the volume displaced by the master For an EV equipped with RBS, the RBS cylinder piston servicing the sub- is considered to be part of the service system, during a full stroke of the pis- brake system if it is automatically ac- ton. Each brake power unit reservoir tivated by an application of the service servicing only the brake system shall brake control, if there is no means pro- have a minimum capacity equivalent vided for the driver to disconnect or to the fluid displacement required to otherwise deactivate it, and if it is ac- charge the system piston(s) or accumu- tivated in all transmission positions, lator(s) to normal operating pressure including neutral. plus the displacement resulting when

439

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00439 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.135 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

all the wheel cylinders or caliper pis- one of the following conditions (chosen tons serviced by the reservoir or accu- at the option of the manufacturer): mulator(s) move from a new lining, (1) A drop in the level of the brake fully retracted position (as adjusted fluid in any master cylinder reservoir initially to the manufacturer’s rec- compartment to less than the rec- ommended setting) to a fully worn, ommended safe level specified by the fully applied position. manufacturer or to one-fourth of the S5.4.3. Reservoir labeling. Each vehicle fluid capacity of that reservoir com- equipped with hydraulic brakes shall partment, whichever is greater. have a brake fluid warning statement (2) For vehicles equipped with a split that reads as follows, in letters at least service brake system, a differential 3.2 mm (1⁄8 inch) high: ‘‘WARNING: pressure of 1.5 MPa (218 psi) between Clean filler cap before removing. Use the intact and failed brake subsystems only lll fluid from a sealed con- measured at a master cylinder outlet tainer.’’ (Inserting the recommended or a slave cylinder outlet. type of brake fluid as specified in 49 (3) A drop in the supply pressure in a CFR 571.116, e.g., ‘‘DOT 3.’’) The let- brake power unit to one-half of the tering shall be: normal system pressure. (a) Permanently affixed, engraved or (b) Any electrical functional failure embossed; in an antilock or variable brake pro- portioning system. (b) Located so as to be visible by di- (c) Application of the parking brake. rect view, either on or within 100 mm (d) Brake lining wear-out, if the man- (3.94 inches) of the brake fluid reservoir ufacturer has elected to use an elec- filler plug or cap; and trical device to provide an optical (c) Of a color that contrasts with its warning to meet the requirements of background, if it is not engraved or S5.1.2(a). embossed. (e) For a vehicle with electrically-ac- S5.4.4. Fluid level indication. Brake tuated service brakes, failure of the fluid reservoirs shall be so constructed source of electric power to those that the level of fluid can be checked brakes, or diminution of state of without need for the reservoir to be charge of the batteries to less than a opened. This requirement is deemed to level specified by the manufacturer for have been met if the vehicle is the purpose of warning a driver of de- equipped with a transparent brake graded brake performance. fluid reservoir or a brake fluid level in- (f) For a vehicle with electric trans- dicator meeting the requirements of mission of the service brake control S5.5.1(a)(1). signal, failure of a brake control cir- S5.5. Brake system warning indicator. cuit. Each vehicle shall have one or more (g) For an EV with a regenerative visual brake system warning indica- braking system that is part of the serv- tors, mounted in front of and in clear ice brake system, failure of the RBS. view of the driver, which meet the re- S5.5.2. Function check. (a) All indica- quirements of S5.5.1 through S5.5.5. In tors shall be activated as a check func- addition, a vehicle manufactured with- tion by either: out a split service brake system shall (1) Automatic activation when the ig- be equipped with an audible warning nition (start) switch is turned to the signal that activates under the condi- ‘‘on’’ (‘‘run’’) position when the engine is tions specified in S5.5.1(a). not running, or when the ignition S5.5.1. Activation. An indicator shall (‘‘start’’) switch is in a position between be activated when the ignition (start) ‘‘on’’ (‘‘run’’) and ‘‘start’’ that is des- switch is in the ‘‘on’’ (‘‘run’’) position ignated by the manufacturer as a and whenever any of conditions (a) check position, or through (g) occur: (2) A single manual action by the (a) A gross loss of fluid or fluid pres- driver, such as momentary activation sure (such as caused by rupture of a of a test button or switch mounted on brake line but not by a structural fail- the instrument panel in front of and in ure of a housing that is common to two clear view of the driver, or, in the case or more subsystems) as indicated by of an indicator for application of the

440

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00440 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.135

parking brake, by applying the parking ters not less than 6.4 mm (1⁄4 inch) in brake when the ignition is in the ‘‘on’’ height. (‘‘run’’) position. (d) If separate indicators are used for (b) In the case of a vehicle that has one or more of the conditions described an interlock device that prevents the in S5.5.1(a) through S5.5.1(g), the indi- engine from being started under one or cators shall display the following word- more conditions, check functions meet- ing: ing the requirements of S5.5.2(a) need (1) If a separate indicator is provided not be operational under any condition for the low brake fluid condition in in which the engine cannot be started. S5.5.1(a)(1), the words ‘‘Brake Fluid’’ (c) The manufacturer shall explain shall be used except for vehicles using the brake check function test proce- hydraulic system mineral oil. dure in the owner’s manual. (2) If a separate indicator is provided S5.5.3. Duration. Each indicator acti- for the gross loss of pressure condition vated due to a condition specified in in S5.5.1(a)(2), the words ‘‘Brake Pres- S5.5.1 shall remain activated as long as sure’’ shall be used. the condition exists, whenever the igni- (3) If a separate indicator is provided for the condition specified in S5.5.1(b), tion (‘‘start’’) switch is in the ‘‘on’’ the letters and background shall be of (‘‘run’’) position, whether or not the en- contrasting colors, one of which is yel- gine is running. low. The indicator shall be labeled with S5.5.4. Function. When a visual warn- the words ‘‘Antilock’’ or ‘‘Anti-lock’’ or ing indicator is activated, it may be ‘‘ABS’’; or ‘‘Brake Proportioning,’’ in ac- continuous or flashing, except that the cordance with Table 2 of Standard No. visual warning indicator on a vehicle 101. not equipped with a split service brake (4) If a separate indicator is provided system shall be flashing. The audible for application of the parking brake as warning required for a vehicle manu- specified for S5.5.1(c), the single word factured without a split service brake ‘‘Park’’ or the words ‘‘Parking Brake’’ system may be continuous or intermit- may be used. tent. (5) If a separate indicator is provided S5.5.5. Labeling. (a) Each visual indi- to indicate brake lining wear-out as cator shall display a word or words in specified in S5.5.1(d), the words ‘‘Brake accordance with the requirements of Wear’’ shall be used. Standard No. 101 (49 CFR 571.101) and (6) If a separate indicator is provided this section, which shall be legible to for the condition specified in S5.5.1(g), the driver under all daytime and night- the letters and background shall be of time conditions when activated. Unless contrasting colors, one of which is yel- otherwise specified, the words shall low. The indicator shall be labeled with have letters not less than 3.2 mm (1⁄8 the symbol ‘‘RBS.’’ RBS failure in a sys- inch) high and the letters and back- tem that is part of the service brake ground shall be of contrasting colors, system may also be indicated by a yel- one of which is red. Words or symbols low lamp that also indicates ‘‘ABS’’ in addition to those required by Stand- failure and displays the symbol ‘‘ABS/ ard No. 101 and this section may be RBS.’’ provided for purposes of clarity. (7) If a separate indicator is provided (b) Vehicles manufactured with a for any other function, the display split service brake system may use a shall include the word ‘‘Brake’’ and the common brake warning indicator to in- appropriate additional labeling. dicate two or more of the functions de- S5.6. Brake system integrity. Each ve- scribed in S5.5.1(a) through S5.5.1(d). If hicle shall meet the complete perform- a common indicator is used, it shall ance requirements of this standard display the word ‘‘Brake.’’ without: (c) A vehicle manufactured without a (a) Detachment or fracture of any split service brake system shall use a component of the braking system, such separate indicator to indicate the fail- as brake springs and brake shoes or ure condition in S5.5.1(a). This indi- disc pad facings other than minor cator shall display the words ‘‘STOP— cracks that do not impair attachment BRAKE FAILURE’’ in block capital let- of the friction facings. All mechanical 441

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00441 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.135 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

components of the braking system that the weight on that axle remains shall be intact and functional. Friction the same as at LLVW. facing tearout (complete detachment S6.3.1.2. For the test at LLVW, the of lining) shall not exceed 10 percent of vehicle is loaded to its LLVW such that the lining on any single frictional ele- the added weight is distributed in the ment. front passenger seat area. (b) Any visible brake fluid or lubri- S6.3.2. Fuel tank loading. The fuel cant on the friction surface of the tank is filled to 100% of capacity at the brake, or leakage at the master cyl- beginning of testing and may not be inder or brake power unit reservoir less than 75% of capacity during any cover, seal, and filler openings. part of the testing. S6. General test conditions. Each vehi- S6.3.3. Lining preparation. At the be- cle must meet the performance re- ginning of preparation for the road quirements specified in S7 under the tests, the brakes of the vehicle are in following test conditions and in accord- the same condition as when the vehicle ance with the test procedures and test was manufactured. No burnishing or sequence specified. Where a range of other special preparation is allowed, conditions is specified, the vehicle must meet the requirements at all unless all vehicles sold to the public points within the range. are similarly prepared as a part of the manufacturing process. S6.1. Ambient conditions. S6.3.4. Adjustments and repairs. These S6.1.1. Ambient temperature. The ambi- requirements must be met without re- ent temperature is any temperature be- tween 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F). placing any brake system parts or making any adjustments to the brake S6.1.2. Wind speed. The wind speed is system except as specified in this not greater than 5 m/s (11.2 mph). standard. Where brake adjustments are S6.2. Road test surface. specified (S7.1.3), adjust the brakes, in- S6.2.1. Pavement friction. Unless oth- cluding the parking brakes, in accord- erwise specified, the road test surface ance with the manufacturer’s rec- produces a peak friction coefficient ommendation. No brake adjustments (PFC) of 0.9 when measured using an are allowed during or between subse- American Society for Testing and Ma- quent tests in the test sequence. terials (ASTM) E1136 standard ref- erence test tire, in accordance with S6.3.5. Automatic brake adjusters. ASTM Method E 1337–90, at a speed of Automatic adjusters are operational 64.4 km/h (40 mph), without water de- throughout the entire test sequence. livery. They may be adjusted either manually S6.2.2. Gradient. Except for the park- or by other means, as recommended by ing brake gradient holding test, the the manufacturer, only prior to the be- test surface has no more than a 1% gra- ginning of the road test sequence. dient in the direction of testing and no S6.3.6. Antilock brake system (ABS). If more than a 2% gradient perpendicular a car is equipped with an ABS, the ABS to the direction of testing. is fully operational for all tests, except S6.2.3. Lane width. Road tests are where specified in the following sec- conducted on a test lane 3.5 m (11.5 ft) tions. wide. S6.3.7. Variable brake proportioning S6.3. Vehicle conditions. valve. If a car is equipped with a vari- S6.3.1. Vehicle weight. able brake proportioning system, the S6.3.1.1. For the tests at GVWR, the proportioning valve is fully operational vehicle is loaded to its GVWR such for all tests except the test for failed that the weight on each axle as meas- variable brake proportioning system. ured at the tire-ground interface is in S6.3.8. Tire inflation pressure. Tires proportion to its GAWR, with the fuel are inflated to the pressure rec- tank filled to 100% of capacity. How- ommended by the vehicle manufac- ever, if the weight on any axle of a ve- turer for the GVWR of the vehicle. hicle at LLVW exceeds the axle’s pro- S6.3.9. Engine. Engine idle speed and portional share of the GVWR, the load ignition timing are set according to required to reach GVWR is placed so the manufacturer’s recommendations.

442

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00442 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.135

If the vehicle is equipped with an ad- facturer has made no recommendation, justable engine speed governor, it is ad- at a state of charge of not less than 95 justed according to the manufacturer’s percent. No further charging of any recommendations. propulsion battery occurs during any S6.3.10. Vehicle openings. All vehicle of the performance tests in the test se- openings (doors, windows, hood, trunk, quence of this standard. If the propul- convertible top, cargo doors, etc.) are sion batteries are depleted during a closed except as required for instru- test sequence such that the vehicle mentation purposes. reaches automatic shut-down, will not S6.3.11 State of charge of batteries for accelerate, or the low state of charge EVs. brake warning lamp is illuminated, the S6.3.11.1 The state of charge of the vehicle is to be accelerated to brake propulsion batteries is determined in test speed by auxiliary means. If a bat- accordance with SAE Recommended tery is replaced rather than recharged, Practice J227a, Electric Vehicle Test Pro- the replacement battery shall be cedure, February 1976. The applicable charged and measured for state of sections of J227a are 3.2.1 through 3.2.4, charge in accordance with these proce- 3.3.1 through 3.3.2.2, 3.4.1 and 3.4.2, 4.2.1, dures. 5.2, 5.2.1 and 5.3. S6.3.12 State of charge of batteries for S6.3.11.2 At the beginning of the bur- electrically-actuated service brakes. A ve- nish procedure (S7.1 of this standard) hicle equipped with electrically-actu- in the test sequence, each propulsion ated service brakes also performs the battery is at the maximum state of following test series. Conduct 10 stop- charge recommended by the manufac- ping tests from a speed of 100 kph or turer, as stated in the vehicle opera- the maximum vehicle speed, whichever tor’s manual or on a label that is per- is less. At least two of the 10 stopping manently attached to the vehicle, of, if distances must be less than or equal to the manufacturer has made no rec- 70 meters. The vehicle is loaded to ommendation, not less than 95 percent. GVWR and the transmission is in the During the 200-stop burnish procedure, neutral position when the service the propulsion batteries are restored to brake control is actuated and through- the maximum state of charge deter- out the remainder of the test. Each mined as above, after each increment battery providing power to the elec- of 40 burnish stops until the burnish trically-actuated service brakes, shall procedure is complete. The batteries be in a depleted state of charge for con- may be charged at a more frequent in- ditions (a), (b), or (c) of this paragraph terval during a particular 40-stop incre- as appropriate. An auxiliary means ment only if the EV is incapable of may be used to accelerate an EV to achieving the initial burnish test speed test speed. during that increment. During the bur- (a) For an EV equipped with elec- nish procedure, the propulsion bat- trically-actuated service brakes deriv- teries may be charged by external ing power from the propulsion bat- means or replaced by batteries that are teries and with automatic shut-down at a state of charge of not less than 95 capability of the propulsion motor(s), percent. For an EV having a manual the propulsion batteries are at not control for setting the level of regen- more than five percent above the EV erative braking, the manual control, at actual automatic shut-down critical the beginning of the burnish procedure, value. The critical value is determined is set to provide maximum regenera- by measuring the state-of-charge of tive braking throughout the burnish. each propulsion battery at the instant S6.3.11.3 At the beginning of each per- that automatic shut-down occurs. formance test in the test sequence (S7.2 (b) For an EV equipped with elec- through S7.17 of this standard), unless trically-actuated service brakes deriv- otherwise specified, an EV’s propulsion ing power from the propulsion bat- batteries are at the state of charge rec- teries and with no automatic shut- ommended by the manufacturer, as down capability of the propulsion stated in the vehicle operator’s manual motor(s), the propulsion batteries are or on a label that is permanently at- at an average of not more than five tached to the vehicle, or, if the manu- percent above the actual state of

443

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00443 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.135 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

charge at which the brake failure tromotive force that is applied to the warning signal, required by S5.5.1(e) of propulsion motor(s) automatically re- this standard, is illuminated. mains in effect unless otherwise speci- (c) For a vehicle which has one or fied by the test procedure. more auxiliary batteries that provides S6.4. Instrumentation. electrical energy to operate the elec- S6.4.1. Brake temperature measurement. trically-actuated service brakes, each The brake temperature is measured by auxiliary battery is at not more than plug-type thermocouples installed in five percent above the actual state of the approximate center of the facing charge at which the brake failure length and width of the most heavily warning signal, required by S5.5.1(e) of loaded shoe or disc pad, one per brake, this standard, is illuminated. as shown in Figure 1. A second thermo- S6.3.13 Electric vehicles. couple may be installed at the begin- S6.3.13.1 (a) For an EV equipped with ning of the test sequence if the lining an RBS that is part of the service wear is expected to reach a point caus- brake system, the RBS is operational ing the first thermocouple to contact during the burnish and all tests, except the metal rubbing surface of a drum or for the test of a failed RBS. rotor. For center-grooved shoes or (b) For an EV equipped with an RBS pads, thermocouples are installed with- that is not part of the service brake in 3 mm (.12 in) to 6 mm (.24 in) of the system, the RBS is operational and set groove and as close to the center as to produce the maximum regenerative possible. braking effect during the burnish, and S6.4.2. Brake line pressure measurement is disabled during the test procedures. for the torque wheel test. The vehicle If the vehicle is equipped with a neu- shall be fitted with pressure trans- tral gear that automatically disables ducers in each hydraulic circuit. On the RBS, the test procedures which are hydraulically proportioned circuits, designated to be conducted in gear may the pressure transducer shall be down- be conducted in neutral. stream of the operative proportioning S6.3.13.2 For tests conducted ‘‘in neu- valve. tral’’, the operator of an EV with no S6.4.3. Brake torque measurement for ‘‘neutral’’ position (or other means such the torque wheel test. The vehicle shall as a clutch for disconnecting the drive be fitted with torque wheels at each train from the propulsion motor(s)) wheel position, including slip ring as- does not apply any electromotive force semblies and wheel speed indicators to to the propulsion motor(s). Any elec- permit wheel lock to be detected.

444

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00444 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.135

S6.5. Procedural conditions. S6.5.3. Stopping distance. S6.5.1. Brake control. All service brake S6.5.3.1. The braking performance of system performance requirements, in- a vehicle is determined by measuring cluding the partial system require- the stopping distance from a given ini- ments of S7.7, S7.10 and S7.11, must be tial speed. met solely by use of the service brake S6.5.3.2. Unless otherwise specified, control. the vehicle is stopped in the shortest S6.5.2. Test speeds. If a vehicle is in- distance achievable (best effort) on all capable of attaining the specified nor- stops. Where more than one stop is re- mal test speed, it is tested at a speed quired for a given set of test condi- that is a multiple of 5 km/h (3.1 mph) tions, a vehicle is deemed to comply that is 4 to 8 km/h (2.5 to 5.0 mph) less with the corresponding stopping dis- than its maximum speed and its per- tance requirements if at least one of formance must be within a stopping the stops is made within the prescribed distance given by the formula provided for the specific requirement. distance.

445

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00445 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.070 § 571.135 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S6.5.3.3. In the stopping distance for- the conditions and procedures set forth mulas given for each applicable test below and in S6, in the sequence speci- (such as S≤0.10V+0.0060V2), S is the fied in Table 1: maximum stopping distance in meters, and V is the test speed in km/h. TABLE 1—ROAD TEST SEQUENCE S6.5.4. Vehicle position and attitude. Section S6.5.4.1. The vehicle is aligned in the Testing order No. center of the lane at the start of each brake application. Steering corrections Vehicle loaded to GVWR: are permitted during each stop. 1 Burnish ...... S7.1 2 Wheel lock sequence ...... S7.2 S6.5.4.2. Stops are made without any Vehicle loaded to LLVW: part of the vehicle leaving the lane and 3 Wheel lock sequence ...... S7.2 without rotation of the vehicle about 4 ABS performance ...... S7.3 its vertical axis of more than ±15° from 5 Torque wheel ...... S7.4 the center line of the test lane at any Vehicle loaded to GVWR: time during any stop. 6 Torque wheel ...... S7.4 7 Cold effectiveness ...... S7.5 S6.5.5. Transmission selector control. 8 High speed effectiveness ...... S7.6 S6.5.5.1. For tests in neutral, a stop 9 Stops with engine off ...... S7.7 or snub is made in accordance with the Vehicle loaded to LLVW: following procedures: 10 Cold effectiveness ...... S7.5 (a) Exceed the test speed by 6 to 12 11 High speed effectiveness ...... S7.6 12 Failed antilock ...... S7.8 km/h (3.7 to 7.5 mph); 13 Failed proportioning valve ...... S7.9 (b) Close the throttle and coast in 14 Hydraulic circuit failure ...... S7.10 gear to approximately 3 km/h (1.9 mph) Vehicle loaded to GVWR: above the test speed; 15 Hydraulic circuit failure ...... S7.10 (c) Shift to neutral; and 16 Failed antilock ...... S7.8 (d) When the test speed is reached, 17 Failed proportioning valve ...... S7.9 18 Power brake unit failure ...... S7.11 apply the brakes. 19 Parking brake ...... S7 .12 S6.5.5.2. For tests in gear, a stop or 20 Heating Snubs ...... S7.13 snub is made in accordance with the 21 Hot Performance ...... S7 .14 following procedures: 22 Brake cooling ...... S7 .15 (a) With the transmission selector in 23 Recovery Performance ...... S7.16 the control position recommended by 24 Final Inspection ...... S7 .17 the manufacturer for driving on a level S7.1. Burnish. surface at the applicable test speed, ex- S7.1.1. General information. Any pre- ceed the test speed by 6 to 12 km/h (3.7 test instrumentation checks are con- to 7.5 mph); ducted as part of the burnish proce- (b) Close the throttle and coast in dure, including any necessary rechecks gear; and after instrumentation repair, replace- (c) When the test speed is reached ment or adjustment. Instrumentation apply the brakes. check test conditions must be in ac- (d) To avoid engine stall, a manual cordance with the burnish test proce- transmission may be shifted to neutral dure specified in S7.1.2 and S7.1.3. (or the clutch disengaged) when the ve- hicle speed is below 30 km/h (18.6 mph). S7.1.2. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle S6.5.6. Initial brake temperature (IBT). load: GVWR only. If the lower limit of the specified IBT (b) Transmission position: In gear. for the first stop in a test sequence S7.1.3. Test conditions and procedures. (other than a parking brake grade The road test surface conditions speci- holding test) has not been reached, the fied in S6.2 do not apply to the burnish brakes are heated to the IBT by mak- procedure. ing one or more brake applications (a) IBT: ≤100 °C (212 °F). from a speed of 50 km/h (31.1 mph), at (b) Test speed: 80 km/h (49.7 mph). a deceleration rate not greater than 3 (c) Pedal force: Adjust as necessary m/s2 (9.8 fps2). to maintain specified constant decel- S7. Road test procedures and perform- eration rate. ance requirements. Each vehicle shall (d) Deceleration rate: Maintain a meet all the applicable requirements of constant deceleration rate of 3.0 m/s2 this section, when tested according to (9.8 fps2).

446

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00446 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.135

(e) Wheel lockup: No lockup of any quirements shall be based on torque wheel allowed for longer than 0.1 sec- wheel test results. onds at speeds greater than 15 km/h (9.3 S7.2.2 Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle mph). load: GVWR and LLVW. (f) Number of runs: 200 stops. (b) Transmission position: In neutral. (g) Interval between runs: The inter- S7.2.3. Test Conditions and Procedures. val from the start of one service brake (a) IBT: ≤65 °C (149 °F), ≤100 °C (212 °F). application to the start of the next is (b) Test speed: 65 km/h (40.4 mph) for either the time necessary to reduce the a braking ratio ≤ 0.50; 100 km/h (62.1 IBT to 100 °C (212 °F) or less, or the dis- mph) for a braking ratio > 0.50. tance of 2 km (1.24 miles), whichever (c) Pedal force: occurs first. (1) Pedal force is applied and con- (h) Accelerate to 80 km/h (49.7 mph) trolled by the vehicle driver or by a after each stop and maintain that mechanical brake pedal actuator. speed until making the next stop. (2) Pedal force is increased at a linear (i) After burnishing, adjust the rate such that the first axle lockup oc- brakes as specified in S6.3.4. curs no less than one-half (0.5) second S7.2 Wheel lockup sequence. and no more than one and one-half (1.5) S7.2.1 General information. (a) The seconds after the initial application of purpose of this test is to ensure that the pedal. lockup of both front wheels occurs ei- (3) The pedal is released when the ther simultaneously with, or at a lower second axle locks, or when the pedal deceleration rate than, the lockup of force reaches 1kN (225 lbs), or 0.1 sec- both rear wheels, when tested on road onds after first axle lockup, whichever surfaces affording adhesion such that occurs first. wheel lockup of the first axle occurs at (d) Wheel lockup: Only wheel lockups a braking ratio of between 0.15 and 0.80, above a vehicle speed of 15 km/h (9.3 inclusive. mph) are considered in determining the (b) This test is for vehicles without results of this test. antilock brake systems. (e) Test surfaces: This test is con- (c) This wheel lock sequence test is ducted, for each loading condition, on to be used as a screening test to evalu- two different test surfaces that will re- ate a vehicle’s axle lockup sequence sult in a braking ratio of between 0.15 and to determine whether the torque and 0.80, inclusive. NHTSA reserves the wheel test in S7.4 must be conducted. right to choose the test surfaces to be (d) For this test, a simultaneous used based on adhesion utilization lockup of the front and rear wheels re- curves or any other method of deter- fers to the conditions when the time mining ‘‘worst case’’ conditions. interval between the first occurrence of (f) The data recording equipment lockup of the last (second) wheel on the shall have a minimum sampling rate of rear axle and the first occurrence of 40 Hz. lockup of the last (second) wheel on the (g) Data to be recorded. The fol- front axle is ≤ 0.1 second for vehicle lowing information must be automati- speeds > 15 km/h (9.3 mph). cally recorded in phase continuously (e) A front or rear axle lockup is de- throughout each test run such that val- fined as the point in time when the last ues of the variables can be cross ref- (second) wheel on an axle locks up. erenced in real time. (f) Vehicles that lock their front axle (1) Vehicle speed. simultaneously or at lower decelera- (2) Brake pedal force. tion rates than their rear axle need not (3) Angular velocity at each wheel. be tested to the torque wheel proce- (4) Actual instantaneous vehicle de- dure. celeration or the deceleration cal- (g) Vehicles which lock their rear culated by differentiation of the vehi- axle at deceleration rates lower than cle speed. the front axle shall also be tested in ac- (h) Speed channel filtration. For ana- cordance with the torque wheel proce- log instrumentation, the speed channel dure in S7.4. shall be filtered by using a low-pass fil- (h) Any determination of noncompli- ter having a cut-off frequency of less ance for failing adhesion utilization re- than one fourth the sampling rate.

447

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00447 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.135 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(i) Test procedure. For each test sur- purpose of the test is to determine the face, three runs meeting the pedal adhesion utilization of a vehicle. force application and time for wheel S7.4.2. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle lockup requirements shall be made. Up load: GVWR and LLVW. to a total of six runs will be allowed to (b) Transmission position: In neutral. obtain three valid runs. Only the first (c) Tires: For this test, a separate set three valid runs obtained shall be used of tires, identical to those used for all for data analysis purposes. other tests under Section 7.0, may be S7.2.4. Performance requirements. (a) In used. order to pass this test a vehicle shall S7.4.3. Test conditions and procedures. be capable of meeting the test require- (a) IBT: ≤65 °C (149 °F), ≤100 °C (212 °F). ments on all test surfaces that will re- (b) Test speeds: 100 km/h (62.1 mph), sult in a braking ratio of between 0.15 and 50 km/h (31.1 mph). and 0.80, inclusive. (c) Pedal force: Pedal force is in- (b) If all three valid runs on each sur- creased at a linear rate between 100 and face result in the front axle locking be- 150 N/sec (22.5 and 33.7 lbs/sec) for the fore or simultaneously with the rear 100 km/h test speed, or between 100 and axle, or the front axle locks up with 200 N/sec (22.5 and 45.0 lbs/sec) for the 50 only one or no wheels locking on the km/h test speed, until the first axle rear axle, the torque wheel procedure locks or until a pedal force of 1 kN (225 need not be run, and the vehicle is con- lbs) is reached, whichever occurs first. sidered to meet the adhesion utiliza- (d) Cooling: Between brake applica- tion requirements of this Standard. tions, the vehicle is driven at speeds up This performance requirement shall be to 100 km/h (62.1 mph) until the IBT met for all vehicle braking ratios be- specified in S7.4.3(a) is reached. tween 0.15 and 0.80. (e) Number of runs: With the vehicle at LLVW, run five stops from a speed (c) If any one of the three valid runs of 100 km/h (62.1 mph) and five stops on any surface results in the rear axle from a speed of 50 km/h (31.1 mph), locking before the front axle or the while alternating between the two test rear axle locks up with only one or no speeds after each stop. With the vehicle wheels locking on the front axle the at GVWR, repeat the five stops at each torque wheel procedure shall be per- test speed while alternating between formed. This performance requirement the two test speeds. shall be met for all vehicle braking ra- (f) Test surface: PFC of at least 0.9. tios between 0.15 and 0.80. (g) Data to be recorded. The fol- (d) If any one of the three valid runs lowing information must be automati- on any surface results in neither axle cally recorded in phase continuously locking (i.e., only one or no wheels throughout each test run such that val- locked on each axle) before a pedal ues of the variables can be cross ref- force of 1kN (225 lbs) is reached, the ve- erenced in real time: hicle shall be tested to the torque (1) Vehicle speed. wheel procedure. (2) Brake pedal force. (e) If the conditions listed in para- (3) Angular velocity at each wheel. graph (c) or (d) of this section occur, (4) Brake torque at each wheel. vehicle compliance shall be determined (5) Hydraulic brake line pressure in from the results of a torquesults of a each brake circuit. Hydraulically pro- torque wheel test performed in accord- portioned circuits shall be fitted with ance with S7.4. transducers on at least one front wheel (f) An EV with RBS that is part of and one rear wheel downstream of the the service brake system shall meet operative proportioning or pressure the performance requirements over the limiting valve(s). entire normal operating range of the (6) Vehicle deceleration. RBS. (h) Sample rate: All data acquisition S7.3. ABS performance. [Reserved] and recording equipment shall support S7.4. Adhesion utilization (Torque a minimum sample rate of 40 Hz on all Wheel Method). channels. S7.4.1. General information. This test (i) Determination of front versus rear is for vehicles without any ABS. The brake pressure. Determine the front

448

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00448 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.135

versus rear brake pressure relationship ing radius, calculate the braking force over the entire range of line pressures. at each axle as a function of front Unless the vehicle has a variable brake brake line pressure. proportioning system, this determina- (f) Calculate the braking ratio of the tion is made by static test. If the vehi- vehicle as a function of the front brake cle has a variable brake proportioning line pressure using the following equa- system, dynamic tests are run with the tion: vehicle both empty and loaded. 15 + snubs from 50 km/h (31.1 mph) are made TT12 for each of the two load conditions, z = using the same initial conditions speci- P fied in this section. where z = braking ratio at a given front line S7.4.4. Data reduction. (a) The data pressure; from each brake application under T1, T2 = Braking forces at the front and rear axles, respectively, corresponding to the S7.4.3 is filtered using a five-point, on- same front brake line pressure, and center moving average for each data P = total vehicle weight. channel. (b) For each brake application under (g) Calculate the adhesion utilized at S7.4.3 determine the slope (brake fac- each axle as a function of braking ratio tor) and pressure axis intercept (brake using the following equations: hold-off pressure) of the linear least T squares equation best describing the f = 1 measured torque output at each braked 1 + wheel as a function of measured line P1 zhP/ E pressure applied at the same wheel. T Only torque output values obtained f = 2 from data collected when the vehicle 2 − deceleration is within the range of P2 zhP/ E

0.15g to 0.80g are used in the regression where fi = adhesion utilized by axle i analysis. Ti = braking force at axle i (from (e)) (c) Average the results of paragraph Pi = static weight on axle i (b) of this section to calculate the aver- i = 1 for the front axle, or 2 for the rear axle age brake factor and brake hold-off z = braking ratio (from (f)) pressure for all brake applications for h = height of center of gravity of the vehicle the front axle. P = total vehicle weight E = wheelbase (d) Average the results of paragraph (b) of this section to calculate the aver- (h) Plot f1 and f2 obtained in (g) as a age brake factor and brake hold-off function of z, for both GVWR and pressure for all brake applications for LLVW load conditions. These are the the rear axle. adhesion utilization curves for the ve- (e) Using the relationship between hicle, which are compared to the per- front and rear brake line pressure de- formance requirements in S7.4.5. shown termined in S7.4.3(i) and the tire roll- graphically in Figure 2:

449

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00449 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.071 ER02FE95.014 § 571.135 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S7.4.5. Performance requirements. For S7.5.2. Test conditions and procedures. all braking ratios between 0.15 and 0.80, (a) IBT: ≤65 °C (149 °F), ≤100 °C (212 °F). each adhesion utilization curve for a (b) Test speed: 100 km/h (62.1 mph). rear axle shall be situated below a line (c) Pedal force: ≤65N (14.6 lbs), ≤500N defined by z=0.9k where z is the brak- (112.4 lbs). ing ratio and k is the PFC. (d) Wheel lockup: No lockup of any S7.4.5.1 An EV with RBS that is part wheel for longer than 0.1 seconds al- of the service brake system shall meet lowed at speeds greater than 15 km/h the performance requirement over the (9.3 mph). entire normal operating range of the (e) Number of runs: 6 stops. RBS. (f) Test surface: PFC of 0.9. S7.5. Cold effectiveness. (g) For each stop, bring the vehicle to S7.5.1. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle test speed and then stop the vehicle in load: GVWR and LLVW. the shortest possible distance under (b) Transmission position: In neutral. the specified conditions.

450

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00450 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.072 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.135

S7.5.3. Performance requirements. (a) (h) For an EV, this test is conducted Stopping distance for 100 km/h test with no electrical power supplied to speed: ≤70m (230 ft). the vehicle’s propulsion motor(s), but (b) Stopping distance for reduced test with the RBS and brake power or speed: S≤0.10V+0.0060V2. power assist still operating, unless cut- S7.6. High speed effectiveness. This test ting off the supply of electrical power is not run if vehicle maximum speed is to the propulsion motor(s) also disables less than or equal to 125 km/h (77.7 those systems. mph). S7.7.4. Performance requirements. (a) S7.6.1. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle Stopping distance for 100 km/h test load: GVWR and LLVW. speed: ≤70m (230 ft.) (b) Transmission position: In gear. (b) Stopping distance for reduced test S7.6.2. Test conditions and procedures. speed: S ≤ 0.10V + 0.0060V2. (a) IBT: ≤65 °C (149 °F), ≤100 °C (212 °F). S7.8. Antilock functional failure. (b) Test speed: 80% of vehicle max- S7.8.1. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle imum speed if 125 km/h (77.7 mph) < ve- loading: LLVW and GVWR. hicle maximum speed < 200 km/h (124.3 (b) Transmission position: In neutral. mph), or 160 km/h (99.4 mph) if vehicle S7.8.2. Test conditions and procedures. maximum speed ≤ 200 km/h (124.3 mph). (a) IBT: ≤65 °C (149 °F), ≤100 °C (212 °F). (c) Pedal force: ≤65N (14.6 lbs), ≤500N (b) Test speed: 100 km/h (62.1 mph). (112.4 lbs). (c) Pedal force: ≤ 65 N (14.6 lbs), ≤ 500 (d) Wheel lockup: No lockup of any N (112.4 lbs). wheel for longer than 0.1 seconds al- (d) Wheel lockup: No lockup of any lowed at speeds greater than 15 km/h wheel for more than 0.1 seconds al- (9.3 mph). lowed at speeds greater than 15 km/h (e) Number of runs: 6 stops. (9.3 mph). (f) Test surface: PFC of 0.9. (e) Number of runs: 6 stops. S7.6.3. Performance requirements. (f) Test surface: PFC of 0.9. Stopping distance: S≤0.10V+0.0067V2. (g) Functional failure simulation: S7.7. Stops with Engine Off. (1) Disconnect the functional power S7.7.1. General information. This test source, or any other electrical con- is for vehicles equipped with one or nector that creates a functional fail- more brake power units or brake power ure. assist units. This test is also for EVs. (2) Determine whether the brake sys- S7.7.2. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle tem indicator is activated when any load: GVWR only. electrical functional failure of the (b) Transmission position: In neutral. antilock system is created. (c) Vehicle engine: Off (not running). (3) Restore the system to normal at (d) Ignition key position: May be re- the completion of this test. turned to ‘‘on’’ position after turning (h) If more than one antilock brake engine off, or a device may be used to subsystem is provided, repeat test for ‘‘kill’’ the engine while leaving the igni- each subsystem. tion key in the ‘‘on’’ position. S7.8.3. Performance requirements. For S7.7.3. Test conditions and procedures. service brakes on a vehicle equipped (a) IBT: ≤65 °C (149 °F), ≤100 °C (212 °F). with one or more antilock systems, in (b) Test speed: 100 km/h (62.1 mph). the event of any single functional fail- (c) Pedal force: ≤65N (14.6 lbs), ≤500N ure in any such system, the service (112.4 lbs). brake system shall continue to operate (d) Wheel lockup: No lockup of any and shall stop the vehicle as specified wheel allowed for longer than 0.1 sec- in S7.8.3(a) or S7.8.3(b). onds at speeds greater than 15 km/h (9.3 (a) Stopping distance for 100 km/h mph). test speed: ≤ 85 m (279 ft). (e) Number of runs: 6 stops. (b) Stopping distance for reduced test (f) Test surface: PFC of 0.9. speed: S ≤ 0.10V + 0.0075V2. (g) All system reservoirs (brake S7.9. Variable brake proportioning sys- power and/or assist units) are fully tem functional failure. charged and the vehicle’s engine is off S7.9.1. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle (not running) at the beginning of each load: LLVW and GVWR. stop. (b) Transmission position: In neutral.

451

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00451 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.135 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S7.9.2. Test conditions and procedures. rupture or leakage type failure, other (a) IBT: ≤65 °C (149 °F), ≤100 °C (212 °F). than a structural failure of a housing (b) Test speed: 100 km/h (62.1 mph). that is common to two or more sub- (c) Pedal force: ≤ 65 N (14.6 lbs), ≤ 500 systems. For a vehicle in which the N (112.4 lbs). brake signal is transmitted electrically (d) Wheel lockup: No lockup of any between the brake pedal and some or wheel for longer than 0.1 seconds al- all of the foundation brakes, regardless lowed at speeds greater than 15 km/h of the means of actuation of the foun- (9.3 mph). dation brakes, this may be any single (e) Number of runs: 6 stops. failure in any circuit that electrically (f) Test surface: PFC of 0.9. transmits the brake signal. For an EV (g) Functional failure simulation: with RBS that is part of the service (1) Disconnect the functional power brake system, this may be any single source or mechanical linkage to render failure in the RBS. the variable brake proportioning sys- (g) Determine the control force pres- tem inoperative. sure level or fluid level (as appropriate (2) If the system utilizes electrical for the indicator being tested) nec- components, determine whether the essary to activate the brake warning brake system indicator is activated indicator. when any electrical functional failure (h) Number of runs: After the brake of the variable proportioning system is warning indicator has been activated, created. make the following stops depending on (3) Restore the system to normal at the type of brake system: the completion of this test. (1) 4 stops for a split service brake (h) If more than one variable brake system. proportioning subsystem is provided, repeat the test for each subsystem. (2) 10 consecutive stops for a non- split service brake system. S7.9.3. Performance requirements. The service brakes on a vehicle equipped (i) Each stop is made by a continuous with one or more variable brake pro- application of the service brake con- portioning systems, in the event of any trol. single functional failure in any such (j) Restore the service brake system system, shall continue to operate and to normal at the completion of this shall stop the vehicle as specified in test. S7.9.3(a) or S7.9.3(b). (k) Repeat the entire sequence for (a) Stopping distance for 100 km/h each of the other subsystems. test speed: ≤ 110 m (361 ft). S7.10.4 Performance requirements. For (b) Stopping distance for reduced test vehicles manufactured with a split speed: S ≤0.10V + 0.0100V2. service brake system, in the event of S7.10. Hydraulic circuit failure. any failure in a single subsystem, as S7.10.1. General information. This test specified in S7.10.3(f) of this standard, is for vehicles manufactured with or and after activation of the brake sys- without a split service brake system. tem indicator as specified in S5.5.1, the S7.10.2. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle remaining portions of the service brake load: LLVW and GVWR. system shall continue to operate and (b) Transmission position: In neutral. shall stop the vehicle as specified in S7.10.3. Test conditions and procedures. S7.10.4(a) or S7.10.4(b). For vehicles not (a) IBT: ≤65 °C (149 °F), ≤100 °C (212 °F). manufactured with a split service (b) Test speed: 100 km/h (62.1 mph). brake system, in the event of any fail- (c) Pedal force: ≤65N (14.6 lbs), ≤500 N ure in any component of the service (112.4 lbs). brake system, as specified in S7.10.3(f), (d) Wheel lockup: No lockup of any and after activation of the brake sys- wheel for longer than 0.1 seconds al- tem indicator as specified in S5.5.1 of lowed at speeds greater than 15 km/h this standard, the vehicle shall, by op- (9.3 mph). eration of the service brake control, (e) Test surface: PFC of 0.9. stop 10 times consecutively as specified (f) Alter the service brake system to in S7.10.4(a) or S7.10.4(b). produce any single failure. For a hy- (a) Stopping distance from 100 km/h draulic circuit, this may be any single test speed: ≤ 168 m (551 ft).

452

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00452 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.135

(b) Stopping distance for reduced test units or brake power units, with one speed: S ≤ 0.10V + 0.0158V2. such unit inoperative and depleted of S7.11. Brake power unit or brake power all reserve capability, shall stop the assist unit inoperative (System depleted). vehicle as specified in S7.11.4(a) or S7.11.1. General information. This test S7.11.4(b). is for vehicles equipped with one or (a) Stopping distance from 100 km/h more brake power units or brake power test speed: ≤ 168 m (551 ft). assist units. (b) Stopping distance for reduced test S7.11.2. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle speed: S ≤ 0.10V + 0.0158V2. load: GVWR only. S7.12. Parking brake. (b) Transmission position: In neutral. S7.12.1. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle S7.11.3. Test conditions and procedures. load: GVWR only. ≤ ° ° ≤ ° ° (a) IBT: 65 C (149 F), 100 C (212 F). (b) Transmission position: In neutral. (b) Test speed: 100 km/h (62.1 mph). (c) Parking brake burnish: (c) Pedal force: ≤ 65 N (14.6 lbs), ≤ 500 (1) For vehicles with parking brake N (112.4 lbs). systems not utilizing the service fric- (d) Wheel lockup: No lockup of any tion elements, the friction elements of wheel for longer than 0.1 seconds al- such a system are burnished prior to lowed at speeds greater than 15 km/h the parking brake test according to the (9.3 mph). published recommendations furnished (e) Number of runs: 6 stops. (f) Test surface: PFC of 0.9. to the purchaser by the manufacturer. (g) Disconnect the primary source of (2) If no recommendations are fur- power for one brake power assist unit nished, the vehicle’s parking brake sys- or brake power unit, or one of the tem is tested in an unburnished condi- brake power unit or brake power assist tion. unit subsystems if two or more sub- (d) Parking brake applications: 1 ap- systems are provided. plication and up to 2 reapplications, if (h) If the brake power unit or power necessary. assist unit operates in conjunction S7.12.2. Test conditions and procedures. with a backup system and the backup (a) IBT: system is automatically activated in (1) Parking brake systems utilizing the event of a primary power service service brake friction materials shall failure, the backup system is operative be tested with the IBT ≤ 100 °C (212 °F) during this test. and shall have no additional burnishing (i) Exhaust any residual brake power or artificial heating prior to the start reserve capability of the disconnected of the parking brake test. system. (2) Parking brake systems utilizing (j) Make each of the 6 stops by a con- non-service brake friction materials tinuous application of the service shall be tested with the friction mate- brake control. rials at ambient temperature at the (k) Restore the system to normal at start of the test. The friction materials completion of this test. shall have no additional burnishing or (l) For vehicles equipped with more artificial heating prior to or during the than one brake power unit or brake parking brake test. power assist unit, conduct tests for (b) Parking brake control force: Hand each in turn. control ≤ 400 N (89.9 lbs); foot control ≤ (m) For vehicles with electrically-ac- 500 N (112.4 lbs). tuated service brakes (brake power (c) Hand force measurement loca- unit), this test is conducted with any tions: The force required for actuation single electrical failure in the elec- of a hand-operated brake system is trically-actuated service brakes in- measured at the center of the hand grip stead of a failure of any other brake area or at a distance of 40 mm (1.57 in) power or brake power assist unit, and from the end of the actuation lever as all other systems intact. illustrated in Figure 3. S7.11.4. Performance requirements. The (d) Parking brake applications: 1 ap- service brakes on a vehicle equipped plication and up to 2 reapplications, if with one or more brake power assist necessary.

453

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00453 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.135 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(e) Test surface gradient: 20% grade. the specified force in a single applica- (f) Drive the vehicle onto the grade tion, a series of applications may be with the longitudinal axis of the vehi- made to achieve the specified force. cle in the direction of the slope of the (k) Following the application of the grade. parking brakes, release all force on the (g) Stop the vehicle and hold it sta- service brake control and, if the vehi- tionary by applying the service brake cle remains stationary, start the meas- control and place the transmission in urement of time. neutral. (l) If the vehicle does not remain sta- (h) With the service brake applied tionary, reapplication of a force to the sufficiently to just keep the vehicle parking brake control at the level from rolling, apply the parking brake specified in S7.12.2(b) as appropriate for as specified in S7.12.2(i) or S7.12.2(j). the vehicle being tested (without re- (i) For a vehicle equipped with me- chanically-applied parking brakes, lease of the ratcheting or other holding make a single application of the park- mechanism of the parking brake) is ing brake control with a force not ex- used up to two times to attain a sta- ceeding the limits specified in tionary position. S7.12.2(b). For a vehicle using an elec- (m) Verify the operation of the park- trically-activated parking brake, apply ing brake application indicator. the parking brake by activating the (n) Following observation of the vehi- parking brake control. cle in a stationary condition for the (j) In the case of a parking brake sys- specified time in one direction, repeat tem that does not allow application of

454

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00454 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.073 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.135

the same test procedure with the vehi- S7.14.3. Test conditions and procedures. cle orientation in the opposite direc- (a) IBT: Temperature achieved at com- tion on the same grade. pletion of heating snubs. S7.12.3. Performance requirement. The (b) Test speed: 100 km/h (62.1 mph). parking brake system shall hold the (c) Pedal force: vehicle stationary for 5 minutes in (1) The first stop is done with an av- both a forward and reverse direction on erage pedal force not greater than the the grade. average pedal force recorded during the S7.13. Heating Snubs. shortest GVWR cold effectiveness stop. S7.13.1. General information. The pur- (2) The second stop is done with a pose of the snubs is to heat up the pedal force not greater than 500 N (112.4 brakes in preparation for the hot per- lbs). formance test which follows imme- (d) Wheel lockup: No lockup of any diately. wheel for longer than 0.1 seconds al- S7.13.2. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle lowed at speeds greater than 15 km/h load: GVWR only. (9.3 mph). (b) Transmission position: In gear. (e) Number of runs: 2 stops. S7.13.3. Test conditions and procedures. (f) Immediately after the 15th heat- (a) IBT: ing snub, accelerate to 100 km/h (62.1 (1) Establish an IBT before the first mph) and commence the first stop of brake application (snub) of ≤55 °C (131 the hot performance test. °F), ≤65 °C (149 °F). (g) If the vehicle is incapable of at- taining 100 km/h, it is tested at the (2) IBT before subsequent snubs are same speed used for the GVWR cold ef- those occurring at the distance inter- fectiveness test. vals. (h) Immediately after completion of (b) Number of snubs: 15. the first hot performance stop, accel- (c) Test speeds: The initial speed for erate as rapidly as possible to the spec- each snub is 120 km/h (74.6 mph) or 80% ified test speed and conduct the second of Vmax, whichever is slower. Each hot performance stop. snub is terminated at one-half the ini- (i) Immediately after completion of tial speed. the second hot performance stop, drive (d) Deceleration rate: 1.5 km (0.93 mi) at 50 km/h (31.1 mph) (1) Maintain a constant deceleration before the first cooling stop. rate of 3.0 m/s2 (9.8 fps2). S7.14.4. Performance requirements. (a) (2) Attain the specified deceleration For the first hot stop, the stopping dis- within one second and maintain it for tance must be less than or equal to a the remainder of the snub. calculated distance which is based on (e) Pedal force: Adjust as necessary 60 percent of the deceleration actually to maintain the specified constant de- achieved on the shortest GVWR cold ef- celeration rate. fectiveness stop. The following equa- (f) Time interval: Maintain an inter- tions shall be used in calculating the val of 45 seconds between the start of performance requirement: brake applications (snubs). (g) Accelerate as rapidly as possible 0. 0386V2 to the initial test speed immediately = dc after each snub. − SVc 010. (h) Immediately after the 15th snub, accelerate to 100 km/h (62.1 mph) and 0. 0386V2 commence the hot performance test. SV=+010. S7.14. Hot performance. 060. ()d S7.14.1. General information. The hot c performance test is conducted imme- where dc = the average deceleration actually diately after completion of the 15th achieved during the shortest cold effective- 2 heating snub. ness stop at GVWR (m/s ), Sc = actual stopping distance measured on S7.14.2. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle the shortest cold effectiveness stop at load: GVWR only. GVWR (m), and (b) Transmission position: In neutral. V = cold effectiveness test speed (km/h).

455

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00455 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER02FE95.015 § 571.135 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(b) In addition to the requirement in (b) Transmission position: In neutral. S7.14.4(a), the stopping distance for at S7.16.3. Test conditions and procedures. least one of the two hot stops must be (a) IBT: Temperature achieved at com- S ≤ 89 m (292 ft) from a test speed of 100 pletion of cooling stops. km/h (62.1 mph) or, for reduced test (b) Test speed: 100 km/h (62.1 mph). speed, S ≤ 0.10V + 0.0079V2. The results (c) Pedal force: The average pedal of the second stop may not be used to force shall not be greater than the av- meet the requirements of S7.14.4(a). erage pedal force recorded during the S7.15. Brake cooling stops. shortest GVWR cold effectiveness stop. S7.15.1. General information. The cool- (d) Wheel lockup: No lockup of any ing stops are conducted immediately wheel for longer than 0.1 seconds al- after completion of the hot perform- lowed at speeds greater than 15 km/h ance test. (9.3 mph). S7.15.2. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle (e) Number of runs: 2 stops. load: GVWR only. (f) Immediately after the fourth cool- (b) Transmission position: In gear. ing stop, accelerate at the maximum S7.15.3. Test conditions and procedures. rate to 100 km/h (62.1 mph). (a) IBT: Temperature achieved at com- (g) Maintain that speed until begin- pletion of hot performance. ning the first recovery performance (b) Test speed: 50 km/h (31.1 mph). stop at a distance of 1.5 km (0.93 mi) (c) Pedal force: Adjust as necessary after the beginning of the fourth cool- to maintain specified constant decel- ing stop. eration rate. (h) If the vehicle is incapable of at- (d) Deceleration rate: Maintain a taining 100 km/h, it is tested at the constant deceleration rate of 3.0 m/s2 same speed used for the GVWR cold ef- (9.8 fps2). fectiveness test. (e) Wheel lockup: No lockup of any (i) Immediately after completion of wheel for longer than 0.1 seconds al- the first recovery performance stop ac- lowed at speeds greater than 15 celerate as rapidly as possible to the km/h (9.3 mph). specified test speed and conduct the (f) Number of runs: 4 stops. second recovery performance stop. (g) Immediately after the hot per- S7.16.4. Performance requirements. formance stops drive 1.5 km (0.93 mi) at The stopping distance, S, for at least 50 km/h (31.1 mph) before the first cool- one of the two stops must be within the ing stop. following limits: (h) For the first through the third cooling stops: 0. 0386V220. 0386V (1) After each stop, immediately ac- ≤−SV010. ≤ celerate at the maximum rate to 50 150. dcc070. d km/h (31.1 mph). where d and V are defined in S7.14.4(a). (2) Maintain that speed until begin- c ning the next stop at a distance of 1.5 S7.17. Final Inspection. Inspect: km (0.93 mi) from the beginning of the (a) The service brake system for de- previous stop. tachment or fracture of any compo- (i) For the fourth cooling stop: nents, such as brake springs and brake (1) Immediately after the fourth stop, shoes or disc pad facings. accelerate at the maximum rate to 100 (b) The friction surface of the brake, km/h (62.1 mph). the master cylinder or brake power (2) Maintain that speed until begin- unit reservoir cover, and seal and filler ning the recovery performance stops at openings, for leakage of brake fluid or a distance of 1.5 km (0.93 mi) after the lubricant. beginning of the fourth cooling stop. (c) The master cylinder or brake S7.16. Recovery performance. power unit reservoir for compliance S7.16.1. General information. The re- with the volume and labeling require- covery performance test is conducted ments of S5.4.2 and S5.4.3. In deter- immediately after completion of the mining the fully applied worn condi- brake cooling stops. tion, assume that the lining is worn to S7.16.2. Vehicle conditions. (a) Vehicle (1) rivet or bolt heads on riveted or load: GVWR only. bolted linings or (2) within 0.8 mm (1/32

456

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00456 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER02FE95.016 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.139

inch) of shoe or pad mounting surface any person upon request, and in dupli- on bonded linings or (3) the limit rec- cate to: Docket Section, National ommended by the manufacturer, Highway Traffic Safety Administra- whichever is larger relative to the tion, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash- total possible shoe or pad movement. ington, DC 20590; or Drums or rotors are assumed to be at (b) Contained in publications, current nominal design drum diameter or rotor at the date of manufacture of the tire thickness. Linings are assumed ad- or any later date, of at least one of the justed for normal operating clearance following organizations: in the released position. (1) The Tire and Rim Association. (d) The brake system indicators, for (2) The European Tyre and Rim Tech- compliance with operation in various nical Organization. key positions, lens color, labeling, and (3) Japan Automobile Tire Manufac- location, in accordance with S5.5. turers’ Association, Inc. (4) Tyre & Rim Association of Aus- [60 FR 6434, Feb. 2, 1995; as amended at 60 FR 37847, July 24, 1995; 60 FR 44548, Aug. 28, 1995; tralia. 62 FR 46917, Sept. 5, 1997; 62 FR 51070, Sept. (5) Associacao Latino Americana de 30, 1997; 65 FR 6332, Feb. 9, 2000] Pneus e Aros (Brazil). (6) South African Bureau of Stand- § 571.138 [Reserved] ards. S4.1.2 A listing compiled in accord- § 571.139 Standard No. 139; New pneu- ance with paragraph (a) of S4.1.1 need matic tires for light vehicles. not include dimensional specifications S1. Scope and purpose. This standard or a diagram of a rim whose dimen- specifies tire dimensions, test require- sional specifications and diagram are ments, labeling requirements, and de- contained in a listing published in ac- fines tire load ratings. cordance with paragraph (b) of S4.1.1. S2. Application. This standard applies S4.2. Information contained in a pub- to new pneumatic tires for use on lication specified in S4.1.1(b) that lists motor vehicles (other than motorcycles general categories of tires and rims by and low speed vehicles) that have a size designation, type of construction, gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of and/or intended use, is considered to be 10,000 pounds or less and that were manufacturer’s information required manufactured after 1975. by S4.1 for the listed tires, unless the S3. Definitions. publication itself or specific informa- Intended outboard sidewall means: tion provided according to S4.1(a) indi- (1) The sidewall that contains a cates otherwise. whitewall, bears white lettering or S5. General requirements. [Reserved] bears manufacturer, brand, and/or S5.5 Tire Markings. Except as speci- model name molding that is higher or fied in paragraphs (a) through (h) of deeper than the same molding on the S5.5, each tire must be marked on each other sidewall of the tire, or sidewall with the information specified (2) The outward facing sidewall of an in S5.5 (a) through (d) and on one side- asymmetrical tire that has a particular wall with the information specified in side that must always face outward S5.5 (e) through (h) according to the when mounted on a vehicle. phase-in schedule specified in S7 of this S4. Tire and rim matching information. standard. The markings must be placed S4.1. Each manufacturer of tires between the maximum section width must ensure that a listing of the rims and the bead on at least one sidewall, that may be used with each tire that it unless the maximum section width of produces is provided to the public in the tire is located in an area that is accordance with S4.1.1 and S4.1.2. not more than one-fourth of the dis- S4.1.1 Each rim listing for a tire tance from the bead to the shoulder of must include dimensional specifica- the tire. If the maximum section width tions and a diagram of the rim and falls within that area, those markings must be in one of the following forms: must appear between the bead and a (a) Listed by manufacturer name or point one-half the distance from the brand name in a document furnished to bead to the shoulder of the tire, on at dealers of the manufacturer’s tires, to least one sidewall. The markings must

457

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00457 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.139 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

be in letters and numerals not less lent psi, rounded to the next higher than 0.078 inches high and raised above whole number; and or sunk below the tire surface not less (b) Each marking of the tire’s max- than 0.015 inch. The tire identification imum load rating pursuant to S5.5(d) in and DOT symbol labeling must comply kilograms must be followed in paren- with part 574 of this chapter. thesis by the equivalent load rating in (a) The symbol DOT, which con- pounds, rounded to the nearest whole stitutes a certification that the tire number. conforms to applicable Federal motor S5.5.5 If the maximum inflation vehicle safety standards; pressure of a tire is 420 kPa (60 psi), the (b) The tire size designation as listed tire must have permanently molded in the documents and publications into or onto both sidewalls, in letters specified in S4.1.1; and numerals not less than 1⁄2 inch (c) The maximum permissible infla- high, the words ‘‘Inflate to 60 psi’’ or tion pressure, subject to the limita- ‘‘Inflate to 420 kPa (60 psi).’’ On both tions of S5.5.4 through S5.5.6; sidewalls, the words must be positioned (d) The maximum load rating; in an area between the tire shoulder (e) The generic name of each cord and the bead of the tire. However, the material used in the plies (both side- words must be also positioned on the wall and tread area) of the tire; tire so that they are not obstructed by (f) The actual number of plies in the the flange of any rim designated for sidewall, and the actual number of use with that tire in this standard or in plies in the tread area, if different; Standard No. 110 (§ 571.110 of this part). (g) The term ‘‘tubeless’’ or ‘‘tube type,’’ as applicable; and S5.5.6 For LT tires, the maximum permissible inflation pressure shown (h) The word ‘‘radial,’’ if the tire is a radial ply tire. must be the inflation pressure that cor- S5.5.1 Each tire must be labeled responds to the maximum load of the with the tire identification number re- tire for the tire size as specified in one quired by 49 CFR part 574 on the in- of the publications described in tended outboard sidewall of the tire. S4.1.1.(b) of § 571.139. At the manufac- Either the tire identification number turer’s option, the shown inflation or a partial tire identification number, pressure may be as much as 10 psi (69 containing all characters in the tire kPa) greater than the inflation pres- identification number, except for the sure corresponding to the specified date code, must be labeled on the other maximum load. sidewall of the tire. If a tire does not S6. Test procedures, conditions and per- have an intended outboard sidewall, formance requirements. [Reserved] the tire must be labeled with the tire S7. Phase-in schedule for tire markings. identification number required by 49 S7.1 Tires manufactured on or after CFR part 574 on one sidewall and with September 1, 2004 and before September 1, either the tire identification number or 2005. For tires manufactured on or a partial tire identification number, after September 1, 2004 and before Sep- containing all characters in the tire tember 1, 2005, the number of tires identification number except for the complying with S4 and S5.5 of this date code, on the other sidewall. standard must be equal to not less than S5.5.2 [Reserved] 40% of the manufacturer’s production S5.5.3 Each tire must be labeled during that period. with the name of the manufacturer, or S7.2 Tires manufactured on or after brand name and number assigned to the manufacturer in the manner speci- September 1, 2005 and before September 1, fied in 49 CFR part 574. 2006. For tires manufactured on or S5.5.4 If the maximum inflation after September 1, 2005 and before Sep- pressure of a tire is 240, 280, 290, 300, tember 1, 2006, the number of tires 330, 340, 350 or 390 kPa, then: complying with S4 and S5.5 of this (a) Each marking of that inflation standard must be equal to not less than pressure pursuant to S5.5(c) must be 70% of the manufacturer’s production followed in parenthesis by the equiva- during that period.

458

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00458 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.139

S7.3 Tires manufactured on or after tended for use on lightweight trucks or mul- September 1, 2006. Each tire must com- tipurpose passenger vehicles. ply with S6.3 of this standard. Load rating means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation [67 FR 69627, Nov. 18, 2002] pressure. Maximum load rating means the load rating EFFECTIVE DATE NOTES: 1. At 67 FR 69627, Nov. 18, 2002, § 571.139 was added, effective for a tire at the maximum permissible infla- Sept. 1, 2003. At 68 FR 33655, June 5, 2003, the tion pressure for that tire. effective date was delayed until Sept. 1, 2004. Maximum permissible inflation pressure At 69 FR 31306, June 3, 2004 the effective date means the maximum cold inflation pressure was further delayed until Sept. 1, 2005. to which a tire may be inflated. 2. At 68 FR 38150, June 26, 2003, § 571.139 was Measuring rim means the rim on which a amended by revising S3 and S5, adding S5.1 tire is fitted for physical dimension require- through S5.4, adding the text of S6, and add- ments. ing S6.1 through S6.6, effective June 1, 2007. Open splice means any parting at any junc- For the convenience of the user, the revised tion of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that ex- and added text is set forth as follows: tends to cord material. Outer diameter means the overall diameter § 571.139 Standard No. 139; New pneumatic of an inflated new tire. radial tires for light vehicles. Overall width means the linear distance be- tween the exteriors of the sidewalls of an in- * * * * * flated tire, including elevations due to label- ing, decorations, or protective bands or ribs. S3. Definitions Ply means a layer of rubber-coated parallel Bead means the part of the tire that is cords. made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by Ply separation means a parting of rubber ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim. compound between adjacent plies. Bead separation means a breakdown of the Pneumatic tire means a mechanical device bond between components in the bead. made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel Bias ply tire means a pneumatic tire in or other materials, that, when mounted on which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially an automotive wheel, provides the traction less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the and contains the gas or fluid that sustains tread. the load. Carcass means the tire structure, except Radial ply tire means a pneumatic tire in tread and sidewall rubber which, when in- which the ply cords that extend to the beads flated, bears the load. are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the Chunking means the breaking away of centerline of the tread. pieces of the tread or sidewall. Reinforced tire means a tire designed to op- Cord means the strands forming the plies erate at higher loads and at higher inflation in the tire. pressures than the corresponding standard Cord separation means the parting of cords tire. from adjacent rubber compounds. Rim means a metal support for a tire or a Cracking means any parting within the tire and tube assembly upon which the tire tread, sidewall, or inner liner of the tire ex- beads are seated. tending to cord material. Section width means the linear distance be- CT means a pneumatic tire with an in- tween the exteriors of the sidewalls of an in- verted flange tire and rim system in which flated tire, excluding elevations due to label- the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed ing, decoration, or protective bands. radially inward and the tire is designed to fit Sidewall means that portion of a tire be- on the underside of the rim in a manner that tween the tread and bead. encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity Sidewall separation means the parting of of the tire. the rubber compound from the cord material Extra load tire means a tire designed to op- in the sidewall. erate at higher loads and at higher inflation Test rim means the rim on which a tire is pressures than the corresponding standard fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed tire. as appropriate for use with that tire. Groove means the space between two adja- Tread means that portion of a tire that cent tread ribs. comes into contact with the road. Innerliner means the layer(s) forming the Tread rib means a tread section running inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains circumferentially around a tire. the inflating medium within the tire. Tread separation means pulling away of the Innerliner separation means the parting of tread from the tire carcass. the innerliner from cord material in the car- Treadwear indicators (TWI) means the pro- cass. jections within the principal grooves de- Light truck (LT) tire means a tire des- signed to give a visual indication of the de- ignated by its manufacturer as primarily in- grees of wear of the tread.

459

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00459 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.139 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Wheel-holding fixture means the fixture S5.3. Test sample. For the tests specified in used to hold the wheel and tire assembly se- S6, use: curely during testing. (a) One tire for high speed; (b) Another tire for endurance and low in- * * * * * flation pressure performance; and (c) A third tire for physical dimensions, re- S5. General requirements sistance to bead unseating, and strength, in S5.1. Size and construction. Each tire shall sequence. fit each rim specified for its size designation S5.4. Treadwear indicators. Except in the in accordance with S4.1. case of tires with a 12-inch or smaller rim di- S5.2. Performance requirements. Each tire ameter, each tire shall have not less than six shall conform to each of the following: treadwear indicators spaced approximately (a) It shall meet the requirements specified equally around the circumference of the tire in S6 for its tire size designation, type, and that enable a person inspecting the tire to maximum permissible inflation pressure. determine visually whether the tire has worn (b) It shall meet each of the applicable re- to a tread depth of one sixteenth of an inch. quirements set forth in paragraphs (c) and Tires with 12-inch or smaller rim diameter (d) of this S5.2, when mounted on a model shall have not less than three such rim assembly corresponding to any rim des- treadwear indicators. ignated by the tire manufacturer for use with the tire in accordance with S4. (c) Except in the case of a CT tire, its max- * * * * * imum permissible inflation pressure shall be 240, 280, 300, 340, or 350 kPa. For a CT tire, S6. Test procedures, conditions and perform- the maximum permissible inflation pressure ance requirements. Each tire shall meet all of shall be 290, 330, 350, or 390 kPa. the applicable requirements of this section (d) Its load rating shall be that specified ei- when tested according to the conditions and ther in a submission made by an individual procedures set forth in S5 and S6.1 through manufacturer, pursuant to S4, or in one of S6.7. the publications described in S4 for its size designation, type and each appropriate infla- S6.1. Tire dimensions tion pressure. If the maximum load rating S6.1.1 Test conditions and procedures. for a particular tire size is shown in more than one of the publications described in S4, S6.1.1.1 Tire Preparation. each tire of that size designation shall have S6.1.1.1.1 Mount the tire on the measuring a maximum load rating that is not less than rim specified by the tire manufacturer or in the published maximum load rating, or if one of the publications listed in S4.1.1 there are differing maximum load ratings for S6.1.1.1.2 In the case of a P-metric tire, the same tire size designation, not less then inflate it to the pressure specified in the fol- the lowest published maximum load rating. lowing table:

Inflation pressure T-type temporary use CT Tires (kPa) spare inflation pressure (kPa) Standard Reinforced (kPa) Standard Reinforced

180 220 420 230 270

S6.1.1.1.3 In the case of a LT tire, inflate S6.1.1.2.2 Determine the outer diameter it to the pressure at maximum load as la- by measuring the maximum circumference beled on sidewall. of the tire and dividing the figure so ob- S6.1.1.1.4 Condition the assembly at an tained by Pi (3.14). ambient room temperature of 38 °C for not S6.1.2 Performance Requirements. The ac- less than 24 hours. tual section width and overall width for each S6.1.1.1.5 Readjust the tire pressure to tire measured in accordance with S6.1.1.2, that specified in S6.1.1.2. shall not exceed the section width specified S6.1.1.2 Test Procedure. in a submission made by an individual manu- S6.1.1.2.1 Measure the section width and overall width by caliper at six points ap- facturer, pursuant to S4.1.1(a) or in one of proximately equally spaced around the cir- the publications described in S4.1.1(b) for its cumference of the tire, avoiding measure- size designation and type by more than: ment of the additional thickness of the spe- (a) (For tires with a maximum permissible cial protective ribs or bands. The average of inflation pressure of 32, 36, or 40 psi) 7 per- the measurements so obtained are taken as cent, or the section width and overall width, respec- (b) (For tires with a maximum permissible tively. inflation pressure of 240, 280, 290, 300, 330, 350

460

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00460 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.139

or 390 kPa, or 60 psi) 7 percent or 10 mm (0.4 not be less than the initial pressure specified inches), whichever is larger. in S6.2.1.

S6.2 High Speed Performance S6.3 Tire Endurance S6.2.1 Test conditions and procedures. S6.3.1 Test conditions and procedures. S6.2.1.1 Preparation of tire. S6.3.1.1 Preparation of Tire. S6.2.1.1.1 Mount the tire on a test rim and S6.3.1.1.1 Mount the tire on a test rim and inflate it to the pressure specified for the inflate it to the pressure specified for the tire in the following table: tire in the following table:

Tire application Test pressure Test Pressure (kPa) Tire application (kPa)

P-metric: P-metric: Standard load ...... 220 Standard load ...... 180 Extra load ...... 260 Extra load ...... 220 Load Range C ...... 320 LT: Load Range D ...... 410 Load Range C ...... 260 Load Range E ...... 500 Load Range D ...... 340 CT: Load Range E ...... 410 Standard load ...... 270 CT: Extra load ...... 310 Standard load ...... 230 Extra load ...... 270 S6.2.1.1.2 Condition the assembly at 38 °C for not less than three hours. S6.3.1.1.2 Condition the assembly at 38 °C S6.2.1.1.3 Before or after mounting the as- for not less than three hours. sembly on a test axle, readjust the tire pres- S6.3.1.1.3 Readjust the pressure to the sure to that specified in S6.2.1.1.1. value specified in S6.3.1.1.1 immediately be- S6.2.1.2 Test procedure. fore testing. S6.2.1.2.1 Press the assembly against the S6.3.1.2 Test Procedure. outer face of a test drum with a diameter of S6.3.1.2.1 Mount the assembly on a test 1.70 m ± 1%. axle and press it against the outer face of a S6.2.1.2.2 Apply to the test axle a load smooth wheel having a diameter of 1.70 m ± equal to 85% of the tire’s maximum load car- 1%. rying capacity. S6.3.1.2.2 During the test, the ambient S6.2.1.2.3 Break-in the tire by running it temperature, measured at a distance of not for 2 hours at 80 km/h. less than 150 mm and not more than 1 m S6.2.1.2.4 Allow tire to cool to 38 °C and from the tire, shall not be less than 38 °C. readjust inflation pressure to applicable S6.3.1.2.3 Conduct the test, without inter- pressure in 6.2.1.1.1 immediately before the ruptions, at not less than 120 km/h test speed test. with loads and test periods not less than S6.2.1.2.5 Throughout the test, the infla- those shown in the following table: tion pressure is not corrected and the test load is maintained at the value applied in Test period Duration Load as a percentage of S6.2.1.2.2. (hours) tire maximum load rating S6.2.1.2.6 During the test, the ambient 1 4 85 % temperature, measured at a distance of not 2 6 90 less than 150 mm and not more than 1 m 3 24 100 from the tire, shall be maintained at not less than 38 °C. S6.3.1.2.4 Throughout the test, the infla- S6.2.1.2.7 The test is conducted, continu- tion pressure is not corrected and the test ously and uninterrupted, for ninety minutes loads are maintained at the value cor- through three thirty-minute consecutive responding to each test period, as shown in test stages at the following speeds: 140, 150, the table in S6.3.1.2.3. and 160 km/h. S6.3.1.2.5 Allow the tire to cool for one S6.2.1.2.8 Allow the tire to cool for one hour after running the tire for the time spec- hour. Measure its inflation pressure. Then, ified in the table in S6.3.1.2.3, measure its in- deflate the tire, remove it from the test rim, flation pressure. Inspect the tire externally and inspect it for the conditions specified in on the test rim for the conditions specified S6.2.2(a). in S6.3.2(a). S6.2.2 Performance requirements. When the S6.3.2 Performance requirements. When the tire is tested in accordance with S6.2.1: tire is tested in accordance with S6.3.1: (a) There shall be no visual evidence of (a) There shall be no visual evidence of tread, sidewall, ply, cord, innerliner, belt or tread, sidewall, ply, cord, belt or bead sepa- bead separation, chunking, open splices, ration, chunking, open splices, cracking or cracking, or broken cords. broken cords. (b) The tire pressure, when measured at (b) The tire pressure, when measured at least 1 hour after the end of the test, shall least one hour after the end of the test, shall

461

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00461 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.139 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

not be less than the initial pressure specified S6.5.2 Tire strength for LT tires. Each tire in S6.3.1. shall comply with the requirements of S7.3 of § 571.119. S6.4 Low Inflation Pressure Performance S6.6 Tubeless tire bead unseating resistance. S6.4.1 Test conditions and procedures. Each tire shall comply with the require- S6.4.1.1 Preparation of tire. ments of S5.2 of § 571.109. S6.4.1.1.1 This test is conducted following completion of the tire endurance test using * * * * * the same tire and rim assembly tested in ac- cordance with S6.3 with the tire deflated to 3. At 69 FR 31319, June 3, 2004, § 571.139 was the following appropriate pressure: amended by revising its heading, S2, S5.5, S5.5.1, 5.5.4, S7.1, S7.2 and S7.3, effective Sept. 1, 2005. For the convenience of the user Tire application Test pressure (kPa) the revised text is set forth as follows:

P-metric: § 571.139 Standard No. 139; New pneumatic Standard load ...... 140 radial tires for light vehicles. Extra load ...... 160 LT: Load Range C ...... 200 * * * * * Load Range D ...... 260 Load Range E ...... 320 S2. Application. This standard applies to CT: new pneumatic radial tires for use on motor Standard load ...... 170 vehicles (other than motorcycles and low Extra load ...... 180 speed vehicles) that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or S6.4.1.1.2 The assembly is conditioned at less and that were manufactured after 1975. not less than 38 °C. This standard does not apply to special tires S6.4.1.1.3 Before or after mounting the as- (ST) for trailers in highway service, tires for sembly on a test axle, readjust the tire pres- use on farm implements (FI) in agricultural sure to that specified in S6.4.1.1.1. service with intermittent highway use, and S6.4.1.2 Test procedure. tires with rim diameters of 8 inches and S6.4.1.2.1 The test is conducted for ninety below. minutes at the end of the test specified in S6.3, continuous and uninterrupted, at a speed of 120 km/h (75 mph). * * * * * S6.4.1.2.2 Press the assembly against the S5.5 Tire Markings. Except as specified in outer face of a test drum with a diameter of paragraphs (a) through (h) of S5.5, each tire 1.70 m + 1%. must be marked on each sidewall with the S6.4.1.2.3 Apply to the test axle a load information specified in S5.5 (a) through (d) equal to 100% of the tire’s maximum load and on one sidewall with the information carrying capacity. specified in S5.5 (e) through (h) according to S6.4.1.2.4 Throughout the test, the infla- the phase-in schedule specified in S7 of this tion pressure is not corrected and the test standard. The markings must be placed be- load is maintained at the initial level. tween the maximum section width and the S6.4.1.2.5 During the test, the ambient bead on at least one sidewall, unless the temperature, at a distance of not less than maximum section width of the tire is located 150 mm and not more than 1 m from the tire, in an area that is not more than one-fourth is maintained at not less than 38 °C. of the distance from the bead to the shoulder S6.4.1.2.6 Allow the tire to cool for one of the tire. If the maximum section width hour. Measure its inflation pressure. Then, falls within that area, those markings must deflate the tire, remove it from the test rim, appear between the bead and a point one-half and inspect it for the conditions specified in the distance from the bead to the shoulder of S6.4.2(a). the tire, on at least one sidewall. The mark- S6.4.2 Performance requirements. When the ings must be in letters and numerals not less tire is tested in accordance with S6.4.1: than 0.078 inches high and raised above or (a) There shall be no visual evidence of sunk below the tire surface not less than tread, sidewall, ply, cord, innerliner, belt or 0.015 inch. bead separation, chunking, open splices, (a) The symbol DOT, which constitutes a cracking, or broken cords, and certification that the tire conforms to appli- (b) The tire pressure, when measured at cable Federal motor vehicle safety stand- least one hour after the end of the test, shall ards; not be less than the initial pressure specified (b) The tire size designation as listed in the in S6.4.1. documents and publications specified in S6.5 Tire strength. S4.1.1 of this standard; S6.5.1 Tire strength for P-metric tires. Each (c) The maximum permissible inflation tire shall comply with the requirements of pressure, subject to the limitations of S5.5.4 S5.3 of § 571.109. through S5.5.6 of this standard;

462

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00462 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.201

(d) The maximum load rating; ber of tires complying with S4, S5.5, S5.5.1, (e) The generic name of each cord material S5.5.2, S5.5.3, S5.5.4, S5.5.5, and S5.5.6 of this used in the plies (both sidewall and tread standard must be equal to not less than 40% area) of the tire; of the manufacturer’s production during that (f) The actual number of plies in the side- period. wall, and the actual number of plies in the S7.2 Tires manufactured on or after Sep- tread area, if different; tember 1, 2006 and before September 1, 2007. For (g) The term ‘‘tubeless’’ or ‘‘tube type,’’ as tires manufactured on or after September 1, applicable; and 2006 and before September 1, 2007, the num- (h) The word ‘‘radial,’’ if the tire is a radial ber of tires complying with S4, S5.5, S5.5.1, ply tire. S5.5.2, S5.5.3, S5.5.4, S5.5.5, and S5.5.6 of this S5.5.1 Tire identification number. standard must be equal to not less than 70% (a) Tires manufactured before September 1, of the manufacturer’s production during that 2009. Each tire must be labeled with the tire period. identification number required by 49 CFR S7.3 Tires manufactured on or after Sep- part 574 on a sidewall of the tire. Except for tember 1, 2007. Each tire must comply with retreaded tires, either the tire identification S4, S5.5, S5.5.1, S5.5.2, S5.5.3, S5.5.4, S5.5.5, number or a partial tire identification num- and S5.5.6 of this standard. ber, containing all characters in the tire identification number, except for the date code and, at the discretion of the manufac- § 571.201 Standard No. 201; Occupant turer, any optional code, must be labeled on protection in interior impact. the other sidewall of the tire. S1. Purpose and scope. This standard (b) Tires manufactured on or after September specifies requirements to afford impact 1, 2009. Each tire must be labeled with the tire identification number required by 49 protection for occupants. CFR part 574 on the intended outboard side- S2. Application. This standard applies wall of the tire. Except for retreaded tires, to passenger cars and to multipurpose either the tire identification number or a passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses partial tire identification number, con- with a GVWR of 4,536 kilograms or less, taining all characters in the tire identifica- except that the requirements of S6 do tion number, except for the date code and, at not apply to buses with a GVWR of the discretion of the manufacturer, any op- tional code, must be labeled on the other more than 3,860 kilograms. sidewall of the tire. Except for retreaded S3. Definitions. tires, if a tire does not have an intended out- A-pillar means any pillar that is en- board sidewall, the tire must be labeled with tirely forward of a transverse vertical the tire identification number required by 49 plane passing through the seating ref- CFR part 574 on one sidewall and with either erence point of the driver’s seat. the tire identification number or a partial tire identification number, containing all Ambulance means a motor vehicle de- characters in the tire identification number signed exclusively for the purpose of except for the date code and, at the discre- emergency medical care, as evidenced tion of the manufacturer, any optional code, by the presence of a passenger com- on the other sidewall. partment to accommodate emergency medical personnel, one or more pa- * * * * * tients on litters or cots, and equipment S5.5.4 For passenger car tires, if the max- and supplies for emergency care at a imum inflation pressure of a tire is 240, 280, location or during transport. 290, 300, 330, 340, 350 or 390 kPa, then: B-pillar means the forwardmost pillar (a) Each marking of that inflation pressure on each side of the vehicle that is, in pursuant to S5.5(c) must be followed in pa- whole or in part, rearward of a trans- renthesis by the equivalent psi, rounded to verse vertical plane passing through the next higher whole number; and the seating reference point of the driv- (b) Each marking of the tire’s maximum load rating pursuant to S5.5(d) in kilograms er’s seat, unless: must be followed in parenthesis by the equiv- (1) There is only one pillar rearward alent load rating in pounds, rounded to the of that plane and it is also a rearmost nearest whole number. pillar; or (2) There is a door frame rearward of * * * * * the A-pillar and forward of any other pillar or rearmost pillar. S7.1 Tires manufactured on or after Sep- tember 1, 2005 and before September 1, 2006. For Brace means a fixed diagonal struc- tires manufactured on or after September 1, tural member in an open body vehicle 2005 and before September 1, 2006, the num- that is used to brace the roll-bar and

463

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00463 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.201 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

that connects the roll-bar to the main Dynamically deployed upper interior body of the vehicle structure. head protection system means a protec- Convertible means a vehicle whose A- tive device or devices which are inte- pillars are not joined with the B-pillars grated into a vehicle and which, when (or rearmost pillars) by a fixed, rigid activated by an impact, provide, structural member. through means requiring no action Convertible roof frame means the from occupants, protection against frame of a convertible roof. head impacts with upper interior struc- Convertible roof linkage mechanism tures and components of the vehicle in means any anchorage, fastener, or de- crashes. vice necessary to deploy a convertible Forehead impact zone means the part roof frame. of the free motion headform surface Daylight opening means, for openings area that is determined in accordance on the side of the vehicle, other than a with the procedure set forth in S8.10. door opening, the locus of all points Free motion headform means a test de- where a horizontal line, perpendicular vice which conforms to the specifica- to the vehicle longitudinal centerline, tions of part 572, subpart L of this is tangent to the periphery of the open- chapter. ing. For openings on the front and rear Mid-sagittal plane of a dummy means a of the vehicle, other than a door open- longitudinal vertical plane passing ing, daylight opening means the locus of through the seating reference point of all points where a horizontal line, par- a designated seating position. allel to the vehicle longitudinal center- Motor Home means a motor vehicle line, is tangent to the periphery of the with motive power that is designed to opening. If the horizontal line is tan- provide temporary residential accom- gent to the periphery at more than one modations, as evidenced by the pres- point at any location, the most inboard ence of at least four of the following fa- point is used to determine the daylight cilities: Cooking; refrigeration or ice opening. box; self-contained toilet; heating and/ Door frame means the rearmost pe- or air conditioning; a potable water rimeter structure, including trim but supply system including a faucet and a excluding glass, of the forward door sink; and a separate 110–125 volt elec- and the forwardmost perimeter struc- trical power supply and/or an LP gas ture, including trim but excluding supply. glass, of the rear door of a pair of adja- Other door frame means the rearmost cent side doors that: perimeter structure, including trim but (1) Have opposing hinges; excluding glass, of the forward door (2) Latch together without engaging and the forwardmost perimeter struc- or contacting an intervening pillar; ture, including trim but excluding (3) Are forward of any pillar other glass, of the rear door of a pair of adja- than the A-pillar on the same side of cent side doors that: the vehicle; and (4) Are rearward of the A-pillar. (1) Have opposing hinges; Door opening means, for door open- (2) Latch together without engaging ings on the side of the vehicle, the or contacting an intervening pillar; locus of all points where a horizontal and line, perpendicular to the vehicle longi- (3) Are rearward of the B-pillar. tudinal centerline, is tangent to the pe- Other pillar means any pillar which is riphery of the side door opening. For not an A-pillar, a B-pillar, or a rear- door openings on the back end of the most pillar. vehicle, door opening means the locus Pillar means any structure, excluding of all points where a horizontal line, glazing and the vertical portion of door parallel to the vehicle longitudinal window frames, but including accom- centerline, is tangent to the periphery panying moldings, attached compo- of the back door opening. If the hori- nents such as safety belt anchorages zontal line is tangent to the periphery and coat hooks, which: at more than one point at any location, (1) Supports either a roof or any the most inboard point is the door other structure (such as a roll-bar) opening. that is above the driver’s head, or

464

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00464 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.201

(2) Is located along the side edge of a S4.2 Vehicles manufactured on or window. after September 1, 1998 shall comply Roll-bar means a fixed overhead with the requirements of S5 and S6. structural member, including its S5 Requirements for instrument pan- vertical support structure, that ex- els, seat backs, interior compartment tends from the left to the right side of doors, sun visors, and armrests. Each ve- the passenger compartment of any hicle shall comply with the require- open body vehicles and convertibles. It ments specified in S5.1 through S5.5.2. does not include a header. S5.1 Instrument panels. Except as Seat belt anchorage means any compo- provided in S5.1.1, when that area of nent involved in transferring seat belt the instrument panel that is within the loads to the vehicle structure, includ- head impact area is impacted in ac- ing, but not limited to, the attachment cordance with S5.1.2 by a 6.8 kilogram, hardware, but excluding webbing or 165 mm diameter head form at— straps, seat frames, seat pedestals, and (a) A relative velocity of 24 kilo- the vehicle structure itself, whose fail- meters per hour for all vehicles except ure causes separation of the belt from those specified in paragraph (b) of this the vehicle structure. section, Seat belt mounting structure means a (b) A relative velocity of 19 kilo- component of the vehicle body or meters per hour for vehicles that meet frame, including trim, extending above the occupant crash protection require- a horizontal plane 460 mm above the ments of S5.1 of 49 CFR 571.208 by seating reference point, SgRP, of the means of inflatable restraint systems closest outboard designated seating po- and meet the requirements of sition, with an upper seat belt anchor- S4.1.5.1(a)(3) by means of a Type 2 seat age conforming to the requirements of belt assembly at the right front des- S4.2.1. and S4.3.2 of Standard No. 210 (49 ignated seating position, the decelera- CFR 571.210) attached to it, and is not tion of the head form shall not exceed a pillar, roll bar, brace or stiffener, side 80 g continuously for more than 3 milli- rail, seat, or part of the roof. seconds. track means a track S5.1.1 The requirements of S5.1 do structure along the upper edge of a side not apply to: door opening that secures the door in (a) Console assemblies; the closed position and guides the door (b) Areas less than 125 mm inboard when moving to and from the open po- from the juncture of the instrument sition. panel attachment to the body side inner structure; Stiffener means a fixed overhead (c) Areas closer to the windshield structural member that connects one juncture than those statically roll-bar to another roll-bar or to a contactable by the head form with the header of any open body vehicle or con- windshield in place; vertible. (d) Areas outboard of any point of means the area of the ve- Upper roof tangency on the instrument panel of a hicle interior that is determined in ac- 165 mm diameter head form tangent to cordance with the procedure set forth and inboard of a vertical longitudinal in S8.15. plane tangent to the inboard edge of Windshield trim means molding of any the steering wheel; or material between the windshield glaz- (e) Areas below any point at which a ing and the exterior roof surface, in- vertical line is tangent to the rearmost cluding material that covers a part of surface of the panel. either the windshield glazing or exte- S5.1.2 Demonstration procedures. rior roof surface. Tests shall be performed as described S4 Requirements in Society of Automotive Engineers S4.1 Except as provided in S4.2, each Recommended Practice J921, ‘‘Instru- vehicle shall comply with either: ment Panel Laboratory Impact Test (a) The requirements specified in S5, Procedure,’’ June 1965, using the speci- or, fied instrumentation or instrumenta- (b) The requirements specified in S5 tion that meets the performance re- and S6. quirements specified in Society of

465

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00465 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.201 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Automotive Engineers Recommended forward seat backs in their nominal de- Practice J977, ‘‘Instrumentation for sign driving position; Laboratory Impact Tests,’’ November (b) Direction of impact shall be ei- 1966, except that: ther: (a) The origin of the line tangent to (1) In a vertical plane parallel to the the instrument panel surface shall be a vehicle longitudinal axis; or point on a transverse horizontal line (2) In a plane normal to the surface through a point 125 mm horizontally at the point of contact. forward of the seating reference point (c) For seats without head restraints of the front outboard passenger des- installed, tests shall be performed for ignated seating position, displaced each individual split or bucket seat vertically an amount equal to the rise back at points within 100 mm left and which results from a 125 mm forward right of its centerline, and for each adjustment of the seat or 19 mm; and bench seat back between points 100 mm (b) Direction of impact shall be ei- outboard of the centerline of each out- ther: board designated seating position; (1) In a vertical plane parallel to the vehicle longitudinal axis; or (d) For seats having head restraints (2) In a plane normal to the surface installed, each test shall be conducted at the point of contact. with the head restraints in place at its lowest adjusted position, at a point on S5.2 Seat Backs. Except as provided in S5.2.1, when that area of the seat the head restraint centerline; and back that is within the head impact (e) For a seat that is installed in area is impacted in accordance with more than one body style, tests con- S5.2.2 by a 6.8 kilogram, 165 mm diame- ducted at the fore and aft extremes ter head form at a relative velocity of identified by application of subpara- 24 kilometers per hour, the decelera- graph (a) shall be deemed to have dem- tion of the head form shall not exceed onstrated all intermediate conditions. 80g continuously for more than 3 milli- S5.3 Interior compartment doors. Each seconds. interior compartment door assembly S5.2.1 The requirements of S5.2 do located in an instrument panel, console not apply to seats installed in school assembly, seat back, or side panel adja- buses which comply with the require- cent to a designated seating position ments of Standard No. 222, School Bus shall remain closed when tested in ac- Passenger Seating and Occupant Protec- cordance with either S5.3.1(a) and tion (49 CFR 571.222) or to rearmost S5.3.1(b) or S5.3.1(a) and S5.3.1(c). Addi- side-facing, back-to-back, folding aux- tionally, any interior compartment iliary jump, and temporary seats. door located in an instrument panel or S5.2.2 Demonstration procedures. seat back shall remain closed when the Tests shall be performed as described instrument panel or seat back is tested in Society of Automotive Engineers in accordance with S5.1 and S5.2. All Recommended Practice J921, ‘‘Instru- interior compartment door assemblies ment Panel Laboratory Impact Test with a locking device must be tested Procedure,’’ June 1965, using the speci- with the locking device in an unlocked fied instrumentation or instrumenta- position. tion that meets the performance re- S5.3.1 Demonstration procedures. quirements specified in Society of (a) Subject the interior compartment Automotive Engineers Recommended door latch system to an inertia load of Practice J977, ‘‘Instrumentation for 10g in a horizontal transverse direction Laboratory Impact Tests,’’ November and an inertia load of 10g in a vertical 1966, except that: direction in accordance with the proce- (a) The origin of the line tangent to dure described in section 5 of SAE Rec- the uppermost seat back frame compo- ommended Practice J839b, ‘‘Passenger nent shall be a point on a transverse Car Side Door Latch Systems,’’ May horizontal line through the seating ref- 1965, or an approved equivalent. erence point of the right rear des- (b) Impact the vehicle perpendicu- ignated seating position, with adjust- larly into a fixed collision barrier at a able forward seats in their rearmost de- forward longitudinal velocity of 48 kil- sign driving position and reclinable ometers per hour.

466

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00466 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.201

(c) Subject the interior compartment to either S6.1(a) or S6.1(b). For vehicles door latch system to a horizontal iner- manufactured by final stage manufac- tia load of 30g in a longitudinal direc- turers on or after September 1, 1998 and tion in accordance with the procedure before September 1, 2006, a percentage described in section 5 of SAE Rec- of the manufacturer’s production as ommended Practice J839b, ‘‘Passenger specified in S6.1.4 shall, except as pro- Car Side Door Latch Systems,’’ May vided in S6.3, conform, to either S6.1(a) 1965, or an approved equivalent. or S6.1(b). The manufacturer shall se- S5.4 Sun visors. lect the option by the time it certifies S5.4.1 A sun visor that is con- the vehicle and may not thereafter se- structed of or covered with energy-ab- lect a different option for the vehicle. sorbing material shall be provided for (a) When tested under the conditions each front outboard designated seating of S8, comply with the requirements position. specified in S7 at the target locations S5.4.2 Each sun visor mounting specified in S10 when impacted by the shall present no rigid material edge ra- free motion headform specified in S8.9 dius of less than 3.2 mm that is stati- at any speed up to and including 24 km/ cally contactable by a spherical 165 h (15 mph). The requirements do not mm diameter head form. apply to any target that cannot be lo- S5.5 Armrests. cated using the procedures of S10. S5.5.1 General. Each installed arm- (b) When equipped with a dynami- rest shall conform to at least one of cally deployed upper interior head pro- the following: tection system and tested under the (a) It shall be constructed with en- conditions of S8, comply with the re- ergy-absorbing material and shall de- quirements specified in S7 at the target flect or collapse laterally at least 50 locations specified in S10 as follows: mm without permitting contact with any underlying rigid material. (1) Targets that are not located over (b) It shall be constructed with en- any point inside the area measured ergy-absorbing material that deflects along the contour of the vehicle sur- or collapses to within 32 mm of a rigid face within 50 mm (2.0 inch) of the pe- test panel surface without permitting riphery of the stowed system projected contact with any rigid material. Any perpendicularly onto the vehicle inte- rigid material between 13 and 32 mm rior surface, including mounting and from the panel surface shall have a inflation components but exclusive of minimum vertical height of not less any cover or covers, shall be impacted than 25 mm. by the free motion headform specified (c) Along not less than 50 continuous in S8.9 at any speed up to and including mm of its length, the armrest shall, 24 km/h (15 mph). The requirements do when measured vertically in side ele- not apply to any targets that can not vation, provide at least 50 mm of cov- be located by using the procedures of erage within the pelvic impact area. S10. S5.5.2 Folding armrests. Each armrest (2) Targets that are over any point that folds into the seat back or be- inside the area measured along the tween two seat backs shall either: contour of the vehicle interior within (a) Meet the requirements of S5.5.1; 50 mm (2.0 inch) of the periphery of the or stowed system projected perpendicu- (b) Be constructed of or covered with larly onto the vehicle interior surface, energy-absorbing material. including mounting and inflation com- S6 Requirements for upper interior ponents but exclusive of any cover or components. covers, when the dynamically deployed S6.1 Vehicles manufactured on or after upper interior head protection system September 1, 1998. Except as provided in is not deployed, shall be impacted by S6.3 and S6.1.4, for vehicles manufac- the free motion headform specified in tured on or after September 1, 1998 and S8.9 at any speed up to and including 19 before September 1, 2002, a percentage km/h (12 mph) with the system of the manufacturer’s production, as undeployed. The requirements do not specified in S6.1.1, S6.1.2, or S6.1.3 shall apply to any target that can not be lo- conform, at the manufacturer’s option, cated using the procedures of S10.

467

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00467 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.201 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(3) Each vehicle shall, when equipped turer on or after September 1, 2001 and with a dummy test device specified in before September 1, 2002, the amount of Part 572, Subpart M, and tested as vehicles complying with S7 shall be not specified in S8.16 through S8.28, comply less than 70 percent of: with the requirements specified in S7 (a) The manufacturer’s average an- when crashed into a fixed, rigid pole of nual production of vehicles manufac- 254 mm in diameter, at any velocity be- tured on or after September 1, 1999 and tween 24 kilometers per hour (15 mph) before September 1, 2002, or and 29 kilometers per hour (18 mph). (b) The manufacturer’s production on S6.1.1 Phase-in Schedule #1 or after September 1, 2001 and before S6.1.1.1 Vehicles manufactured on or September 1, 2002. after September 1, 1998 and before Sep- S6.1.2 Phase-in Schedule #2 tember 1, 1999. Subject to S6.1.5(a), for S6.1.2.1 Vehicles manufactured on or vehicles manufactured by a manufac- turer on or after September 1, 1998 and after September 1, 1998 and before Sep- before September 1, 1999, the amount of tember 1, 1999. Subject to S6.1.5(a), for vehicles complying with S7 shall be not vehicles manufactured by a manufac- less than 10 percent of: turer on or after September 1, 1998 and (a) The manufacturer’s average an- before September 1, 1999, the amount of nual production of vehicles manufac- vehicles complying with S7 shall be not tured on or after September 1, 1996 and less than seven percent of: before September 1, 1999, or (a) The manufacturer’s average an- (b) The manufacturer’s production on nual production of vehicles manufac- or after September 1, 1998 and before tured on or after September 1, 1996 and September 1, 1999. before September 1, 1999, or S6.1.1.2 Vehicles manufactured on or (b) The manufacturer’s production on after September 1, 1999 and before Sep- or after September 1, 1998 and before tember 1, 2000. Subject to S6.1.5(b), for September 1, 1999. vehicles manufactured by a manufac- S6.1.2.2 Vehicles manufactured on or turer on or after September 1, 1999 and after September 1, 1999 and before Sep- before September 1, 2000, the amount of tember 1, 2000. Subject to S6.1.5(b), for vehicles complying with S7 shall be not vehicles manufactured by a manufac- less than 25 percent of: turer on or after September 1, 1999 and (a) The manufacturer’s average an- before September 1, 2000, the amount of nual production of vehicles manufac- vehicles complying with S7 shall be not tured on or after September 1, 1997 and less than 31 percent of: before September 1, 2000, or (a) The manufacturer’s average an- (b) The manufacturer’s production on nual production of vehicles manufac- or after September 1, 1999 and before tured on or after September 1, 1997 and September 1, 2000. before September 1, 2000, or S6.1.1.3 Vehicles manufactured on or (b) The manufacturer’s production on after September 1, 2000 and before Sep- or after September 1, 1999 and before tember 1, 2001. Subject to S6.1.5(c), for September 1, 2000. vehicles manufactured by a manufac- turer on or after September 1, 2000 and S6.1.2.3 Vehicles manufactured on or before September 1, 2001, the amount of after September 1, 2000 and before Sep- vehicles complying with S7 shall be not tember 1, 2001. Subject to S6.1.5(c), for less than 40 percent of: vehicles manufactured by a manufac- (a) The manufacturer’s average an- turer on or after September 1, 2000 and nual production of vehicles manufac- before September 1, 2001, the amount of tured on or after September 1, 1998 and vehicles complying with S7 shall be not before September 1, 2001, or less than 40 percent of: (b) The manufacturer’s production on (a) The manufacturer’s average an- or after September 1, 2000 and before nual production of vehicles manufac- September 1, 2001. tured on or after September 1, 1998 and S6.1.1.4 Vehicles manufactured on or before September 1, 2001, or after September 1, 2001 and before Sep- (b) The manufacturer’s production on tember 1, 2002. Subject to S6.1.5(d), for or after September 1, 2000 and before vehicles manufactured by a manufac- September 1, 2001.

468

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00468 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.201

S6.1.2.4 Vehicles manufactured on or (2) Is not counted toward compliance after September 1, 2001 and before Sep- with S6.1.1.1, S6.1.1.2, S6.1.2.1, or tember 1, 2002. Subject to S6.1.5(d), for S6.1.2.2, as appropriate. vehicles manufactured by a manufac- (d) For the purposes of complying turer on or after September 1, 2001 and with S6.1.1.4 or S6.1.2.4, a manufacturer before September 1, 2002, the amount of may count a vehicle if it: vehicles complying with S7 shall be not (1) Is manufactured on or after May less than 70 percent of: 8, 1997, but before September 1, 2002, (a) The manufacturer’s average an- and nual production of vehicles manufac- (2) Is not counted toward compliance tured on or after September 1, 1999 and with S6.1.1.1, S6.1.1.2, S6.1.1.3, S6.1.2.1, before September 1, 2002, or S6.1.2.2, or S6.1.2.3, as appropriate. (b) The manufacturer’s production on S6.1.6 Vehicles produced by more than or after September 1, 2001 and before one manufacturer. September 1, 2002. S6.1.6.1 For the purpose of calcu- lating average annual production of ve- S6.1.3 Phase-in Schedule #3 hicles for each manufacturer and the S6.1.3.1 Vehicles manufactured on or number of vehicles manufactured by after September 1, 1998 and before Sep- each manufacturer under S6.1.1 tember 1, 1999 are not required to com- through S6.1.4, a vehicle produced by ply with the requirements specified in more than one manufacturer shall be S7. attributed to a single manufacturer as S6.1.3.2 Vehicles manufactured on or follows, subject to S6.1.6.2. after September 1, 1999 shall comply (a) A vehicle which is imported shall with the requirements specified in S7. be attributed to the importer. S6.1.4 Phase-in Schedule #4 A final (b) A vehicle manufactured in the stage manufacturer or alterer may, at United States by more than one manu- its option, comply with the require- facturer, one of which also markets the ments set forth in S6.1.4.1 and S6.1.4.2. vehicle, shall be attributed to the man- S6.1.4.1 Vehicles manufactured on or ufacturer which markets the vehicle. after September 1, 1998 and before Sep- S6.1.6.2 A vehicle produced by more tember 1, 2006 are not required to com- than one manufacturer shall be attrib- ply with the requirements specified in uted to any one of the vehicle’s manu- S7. facturers specified by an express writ- S6.1.4.2 Vehicles manufactured on or ten contract, reported to the National after September 1, 2006 shall comply Highway Traffic Safety Administration with the requirements specified in S7. under 49 CFR part 589, between the S6.1.5 Calculation of complying vehi- manufacturer so specified and the man- cles. ufacturer to which the vehicle would (a) For the purposes of complying otherwise be attributed under S6.1.6.1. with S6.1.1.1 or S6.1.2.1, a manufacturer S6.2 Vehicles manufactured on or after may count a vehicle if it is manufac- September 1, 2002 and vehicles built in two tured on or after May 8, 1997, but before or more stages manufactured after Sep- tember 1, 2006. Except as provided in September 1, 1999. S6.1.4 and S6.3, vehicles manufactured (b) For the purposes of complying on or after September 1, 2002 shall, with S6.1.1.2 or S6.1.2.2, a manufacturer when tested under the conditions of S8, may count a vehicle if it: conform, at the manufacturer’s option, (1) Is manufactured on or after May to either S6.2(a) or S6.2(b). Vehicles 8, 1997, but before September 1, 2000, manufactured by final stage manufac- and turers on or after September 1, 2006 (2) Is not counted toward compliance shall, except as provided in S6.3, when with S6.1.1.1 or S6.1.2.1, as appropriate. tested under the conditions of S8, con- (c) For the purposes of complying form, at the manufacturer’s option, to with S6.1.1.3 or S6.1.2.3, a manufacturer either S6.2(a) or S6.2(b). The manufac- may count a vehicle if it: turer shall select the option by the (1) Is manufactured on or after May time it certifies the vehicle and may 8, 1997, but before September 1, 2001, not thereafter select a different option and for the vehicle.

469

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00469 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.201 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(a) When tested under the conditions (a) Any target located on a convert- of S8, comply with the requirements ible roof frame or a convertible roof specified in S7 at the target locations linkage mechanism. specified in S10 when impacted by the (b) Any target located rearward of a free motion headform specified in S8.9 vertical plane 600 mm behind the seat- at any speed up to and including 24 km/ ing reference point of the rearmost des- h (15 mph). The requirements do not ignated seating position. apply to any target that cannot be lo- (c) Any target located rearward of a cated using the procedures of S10. vertical plane 600 mm behind the seat- ing reference point of the driver’s seat- (b) When equipped with a dynami- ing position in an ambulance or a cally deployed upper interior head pro- motor home. tection system and tested under the (d) Any target in a walk-in van-type conditions of S8, comply with the re- vehicles. quirements specified in S7 at the target (e) Any target located on the seat locations specified in S10 as follows: belt mounting structures, door frames (1) Targets that are not located over and other door frames before Sep- any point inside the area measured tember 1, 2005. along the contour of the vehicle sur- S7 Performance Criterion. The HIC(d) face within 50 mm (2.0 inch) of the pe- shall not exceed 1000 when calculated riphery of the stowed system projected in accordance with the following for- perpendicularly onto the vehicle inte- mula: rior surface, including mounting and 25. inflation components but exclusive of  t  1 2 any cover or covers, shall be impacted HIC =  adt () t− t by the free motion headform specified − ∫ 21 ()tt21  in S8.9 at any speed up to and including  t1  24 km/h (15 mph). The requirements do Where the term a is the resultant head not apply to any targets that cannot be acceleration expressed as a multiple of located by using the procedures of S10. g (the acceleration of gravity), and t1 (2) Targets that are over any point and t2 are any two points in time dur- inside the area measured along the ing the impact which are separated by contour of the vehicle interior within not more than a 36 millisecond time in- 50 mm (2.0 inch) of the periphery of the terval. stowed system projected perpendicu- (a) For the free motion headform; larly onto the vehicle interior surface, HIC(d)=0.75446 (free motion headform including mounting and inflation com- HIC)+166.4. ponents but exclusive of any cover or (b) For the part 572, subpart M, covers, when the dynamically deployed anthropomorphic test dummy; upper interior head protection system HIC(d)=HIC. is not deployed, shall be impacted by S8 Target location and test conditions. the free motion headform specified in The vehicle shall be tested and the tar- gets specified in S10 located under the S8.9 at any speed up to and including 19 following conditions. km/h (12 mph) with the system S8.1 Vehicle test attitude. undeployed. The requirements do not (a) The vehicle is supported off its apply to any target that cannot be lo- suspension at an attitude determined cated using the procedures of S10. in accordance with S8.1(b). (3) Each vehicle shall, when equipped (b) Directly above each wheel open- with a dummy test device specified in ing, determine the vertical distance be- Part 572, Subpart M, and tested as tween a level surface and a standard specified in S8.16 through S8.28, comply reference point on the test vehicle’s with the requirements specified in S7 body under the conditions of S8.1(b)(1) when crashed into a fixed, rigid pole of through S8.1(b)(3). 254 mm in diameter, at any velocity be- (1) The vehicle is loaded to its un- tween 24 kilometers per hour (15 mph) loaded vehicle weight, plus its rated and 29 kilometers per hour (18 mph). cargo and luggage capacity or 136 kg, S6.3 A vehicle need not meet the re- whichever is less, secured in the lug- quirements of S6.1 through S6.2 for: gage area. The load placed in the cargo

470

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00470 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER04AU98.002 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.201

area is centered over the longitudinal justed to the nearest position above centerline of the vehicle. the midpoint of the two extreme posi- (2) The vehicle is filled to 100 percent tions. of all fluid capacities. S8.8 Temperature and humidity. (3) All tires are inflated to the manu- (a) The ambient temperature is be- facturer’s specifications listed on the tween 19 degrees C. and 26 degrees C., vehicle’s tire placard. at any relative humidity between 10 S8.2 Windows and Sunroofs. percent and 70 percent. (a) Movable vehicle windows are (b) Tests are not conducted unless placed in the fully open position. the headform specified in S8.9 is ex- (b) For testing, any window on the posed to the conditions specified in opposite side of the longitudinal cen- S8.8(a) for a period not less than four terline of the vehicle from the target hours. to be impacted may be removed. S8.9 Headform. The headform used (c) For testing, movable sunroofs are for testing conforms to the specifica- placed in the fully open position. tions of part 572, subpart L of this S8.3 Convertible tops. The top, if any, chapter. of convertibles and open-body type ve- S8.10 Forehead impact zone. The fore- hicles is in the closed passenger com- head impact zone of the headform is de- partment configuration. termined according to the procedure S8.4 Doors. specified in (a) through (f). (a) Except as provided in S8.4(b) or (a) Position the headform so that the S8.4(c), doors, including any rear baseplate of the skull is horizontal. hatchback or tailgate, are fully closed The midsagittal plane of the headform and latched but not locked. is designated as Plane S. (b) During testing, any side door on (b) From the center of the threaded the opposite side of the longitudinal hole on top of the headform, draw a 69 centerline of the vehicle from the tar- mm line forward toward the forehead, get to be impacted may be open or re- coincident with Plane S, along the con- moved. tour of the outer skin of the headform. (c) During testing, any rear The front end of the line is designated hatchback or tailgate may be open or as Point P. From Point P, draw a 100 removed for testing any target except mm line forward toward the forehead, targets on the rear header, rearmost coincident with Plane S, along the con- pillars, or the rearmost other side rail tour of the outer skin of the headform. on either side of the vehicle. The front end of the line is designated S8.5 Sun visors. Each sun visor shall as Point O. be placed in any position where one (c) Draw a 125 mm line which is coin- side of the visor is in contact with the cident with a horizontal plane along vehicle interior surface (windshield, the contour of the outer skin of the side rail, front header, roof, etc.). forehead from left to right through S8.6 Steering wheel and seats. Point O so that the line is bisected at (a) During targeting, the steering Point O. The end of the line on the left wheel and seats may be placed in any side of the headform is designated as position intended for use while the ve- Point a and the end on the right as hicle is in motion. Point b. (b) During testing, the steering wheel (d) Draw another 125 mm line which and seats may be removed from the ve- is coincident with a vertical plane hicle. along the contour of the outer skin of S8.7 Seat belt anchorages. If a target the forehead through Point P so that is on a seat belt anchorage, and if the the line is bisected at Point P. The end seat belt anchorage is adjustable, tests of the line on the left side of the are conducted with the anchorage ad- headform is designated as Point c and justed to a point midway between the the end on the right as Point d. two extreme adjustment positions. If (e) Draw a line from Point a to Point the anchorage has distinct adjustment c along the contour of the outer skin of positions, none of which is midway be- the headform using a flexible steel tween the two extreme positions, tests tape. Using the same method, draw a are conducted with the anchorage ad- line from Point b to Point d.

471

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00471 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.201 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(f) The forehead impact zone is the tions (CG–R). For rear outboard des- surface area on the FMH forehead ignated seating positions, the head cen- bounded by lines a-O-b and c-P-d, and ter of gravity (CG–R) is located 160 mm a-c and b-d. rearward, relative to the seat orienta- S8.11 Target circle. The area of the tion, and 660 mm upward from the seat- vehicle to be impacted by the headform ing reference point. is marked with a solid circle 12.7 mm in S8.13 Impact configuration. diameter, centered on the targets spec- S8.13.1 The headform is launched ified in S10, using any transferable from any location inside the vehicle opaque coloring medium. which meets the conditions of S8.13.4. S8.12 Location of head center of grav- At the time of launch, the midsagittal ity. plane of the headform is vertical and (a) Location of head center of gravity the headform is upright. for front outboard designated seating po- S8.13.2 The headform travels freely sitions (CG–F). For determination of through the air, along a velocity vector head center of gravity, all directions that is perpendicular to the headform’s are in reference to the seat orientation. skull cap plate, not less than 25 mm be- (1) Location of rearmost CG–F (CG–F2). fore making any contact with the vehi- For front outboard designated seating cle. positions, the head center of gravity S8.13.3 At the time of initial contact with the seat in its rearmost normal between the headform and the vehicle design driving or riding position (CG– interior surface, some portion of the F2) is located 160 mm rearward and 660 forehead impact zone of the headform mm upward from the seating reference must contact some portion of the tar- point. get circle. (2) Location of forwardmost CG–F (CG– S8.13.4 Approach angles. The headform F1). For front outboard designated launching angle is as specified in Table seating positions, the head center of 1. For components for which Table 1 gravity with the seat in its specifies a range of angles, the forwardmost adjustment position (CG– headform launching angle is within the F1) is located horizontally forward of limits determined using the procedures CG–F2 by the distance equal to the specified in S8.13.4.1 and S8.13.4.2, and fore-aft distance of the seat track. within the range specified in Table 1, (b) Location of head center of gravity using the orthogonal reference system for rear outboard designated seating posi- specified in S9.

TABLE 1—APPROACH ANGLE LIMITS (IN DEGREES)

Target component Horizontal Angle Vertical angle

Front Header ...... 180 ...... 0–50 Rear Header ...... 0 or 360 ...... 0–50 Left Side Rail ...... 270 ...... 0–50 Right Side Rail ...... 90 ...... 0–50 Left Sliding Door Track ...... 270 ...... 0–50 Right Sliding Door Track ...... 90 ...... 0–50 Left A-Pillar ...... 195–255 ...... ¥5–50 Right A-Pillar ...... 105–165 ...... ¥5–50 Left B-Pillar ...... 195–345 ...... ¥10–50 Right B-Pillar ...... 15–165 ...... ¥10–50 Left Door Frame ...... 195–345 ...... ¥10–50 Right Door Frame ...... 15—165 ...... ¥10–50 Other Left Pillars ...... 270 ...... ¥10–50 Other Right Pillars ...... 90 ...... ¥10–50 Other Left Door Frame ...... 270 ...... ¥10–50 Other Right Door Frame ...... 90 ...... ¥10–50 Left Rearmost Pillar ...... 270–345 ...... ¥10–50 Right Rearmost Pillar ...... 15–90 ...... ¥10–50 Upper Roof ...... Any ...... 0–50 Overhead Rollbar ...... 0 or 180 ...... 0–50 Brace or Stiffener ...... 90 or 270 ...... 0–50 Left Seat Belt Mounting Structure ...... 195–345 ...... ¥10–50 Right Seat Belt Mounting Structure ...... 15–165 ...... ¥10–50 Seat Belt Anchorages ...... Any ...... 0–50

472

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00472 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.201

S8.13.4.1 Horizontal Approach Angles (1) Locate a line formed by the short- for Headform Impacts. est horizontal distance between CG–F2 (a) Left A-Pillar Horizontal Approach for the right seat and the right B-pil- Angles. lar. The minimum horizontal approach (1) Locate a line formed by the short- angle for the right B-pillar equals the est horizontal distance between CG–F1 angle formed by that line and the X- for the left seat and the right A-pillar. axis of the vehicle measured counter- The maximum horizontal approach clockwise, or 90 degrees, whichever is angle for the left A-pillar equals 360 de- less. grees minus the angle formed by that (2) Locate a line formed by the short- line and the X-axis of the vehicle, est horizontal distance between CG–R measured counterclockwise. for the right seat and the right B-pil- (2) Locate a line formed by the short- lar. The maximum horizontal approach est horizontal distance between CG–F2 angle for the right B-pillar equals the for the left seat and the left A-pillar. angle between that line and the X-axis The minimum horizontal approach of the vehicle measured counter- angle for the left A-pillar impact clockwise. equals the angle formed by that line (e) Left door frame horizontal approach and the X-axis of the vehicle, measured angles. counterclockwise. (1) Locate a line formed by the short- (b) Right A-Pillar Horizontal Approach est horizontal distance between CG–F2 Angles. for the left seat and the left door (1) Locate a line formed by the short- frame. The maximum horizontal ap- est horizontal distance between CG–F1 proach angle for the left door frame for the right seat and the left A-pillar. equals the angle formed by that line The minimum horizontal approach and the X-axis of the vehicle measured angle for the right A-pillar equals 360 counterclockwise, or 270 degrees, degrees minus the angle formed by that whichever is greater. line and the X-axis of the vehicle, (2) Locate a line formed by the short- measured counterclockwise. est horizontal distance between CG–R (2) Locate a line formed by the short- for the left seat and the left door est horizontal distance between CG–F2 frame. The minimum horizontal ap- for the right seat and the right A-pil- proach angle for the left door frame lar. The maximum horizontal approach equals the angle formed by that line angle for the right A-pillar impact and the X-axis of the vehicle measured equals the angle formed by that line counterclockwise. and the X-axis of the vehicle measured (f) Right door frame horizontal ap- counterclockwise. proach angles. (c) Left B-Pillar Horizontal Approach (1) Locate a line formed by the short- Angles. est horizontal distance between CG–F2 (1) Locate a line formed by the short- for the right seat and the right door est horizontal distance between CG–F2 frame. The minimum horizontal ap- for the left seat and the left B-pillar. proach angle for the right door frame The maximum horizontal approach equals the angle formed by that line angle for the left B-pillar equals the and the X-axis of the vehicle measured angle formed by that line and the X- counterclockwise, or 90 degrees, which- axis of the vehicle measured counter- ever is less. clockwise, or 270 degrees, whichever is (2) Locate a line formed by the short- greater. est horizontal distance between CG–R (2) Locate a line formed by the short- for the right seat and the right door est horizontal distance between CG–R frame. The maximum horizontal ap- for the left seat and the left B-pillar. proach angle for the right door frame The minimum horizontal approach equals the angle formed by that line angle for the left B-pillar equals the and the X-axis of the vehicle measured angle formed by that line and the X- counterclockwise axis of the vehicle measured counter- (g) Left seat belt mounting structure clockwise. horizontal approach angles. (d) Right B-Pillar Horizontal Approach (1) Locate a line formed by the short- Angles. est horizontal distance between CG–F2

473

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00473 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.201 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

for the left seat and the left seat belt cate the point 200 mm directly below mounting structure. If the seat belt CG–R and locate a line formed by the mounting structure is below a hori- shortest horizontal distance between zontal plane passing through CG–F2 for that point and the right seat belt the left seat, locate the point 200 mm mounting structure. The maximum directly below CG–F2 and locate a line horizontal approach angle for the right formed by the shortest horizontal dis- seat belt mounting structure equals tance between that point and the left the angle formed by that line and the seat belt mounting structure. The max- X-axis of the vehicle measured coun- imum horizontal approach angle for terclockwise. If the CG–R does not the left seat belt mounting structure exist, or is forward of the seat belt equals the angle formed by that line mounting structure, the maximum hor- and the X-axis of the vehicle measured izontal approach angle is 90 degrees. counterclockwise, or 270 degrees, S8.13.4.2 Vertical Approach Angles whichever is greater. (a) Position the forehead impact zone (2) Locate a line formed by the short- in contact with the selected target at est horizontal distance between CG–R the prescribed horizontal approach for the left seat and the left seat belt angle. If a range of horizontal approach mounting structure. If the seat belt angles is prescribed, position the fore- mounting structure is below a hori- head impact zone in contact with the zontal plane passing through CG–R for selected target at any horizontal ap- the left seat, locate the point 200 mm proach angle within the range which directly below CG–R and locate a line may be used for testing. formed by the shortest horizontal dis- (b) Keeping the forehead impact zone tance between that point and the left in contact with the target, rotate the seat belt mounting structure. The min- FMH upward until the lip, chin or imum horizontal approach angle for other part of the FMH contacts the the left seat belt mounting structure component or other portion of the ve- equals the angle formed by that line hicle interior. and the X-axis of the vehicle measured (1) Except as provided in counterclockwise. If the CG–R does not S8.13.4.2(b)(2), keeping the forehead im- exist, or is forward of the seat belt pact zone in contact with the target, mounting structure, the maximum hor- rotate the FMH downward by 5 degrees izontal approach angle is 270 degrees. for each target to determine the max- (h) Right seat belt mounting structure imum vertical angle. horizontal approach angles. (1) Locate a line formed by the short- (2) For all pillars, except A-pillars, est horizontal distance between CG–F2 and all door frames and seat belt for the right seat and the right seat mounting structures, keeping the fore- belt mounting structure. If the seat head impact zone in contact with the belt mounting structure is below a hor- target, rotate the FMH downward by 10 izontal plane passing through CG–F2 degrees for each target to determine for the right seat, locate the point 200 the maximum vertical angle. mm directly below that CG–F2 and lo- S8.14 Multiple impacts. cate a line formed by the shortest hori- (a) A vehicle being tested may be im- zontal distance between that point and pacted multiple times, subject to the the right seat belt mounting structure. limitations in S8.14(b), (c), (d) and (e). The minimum horizontal approach (b) As measured as provided in angle for the right seat belt mounting S8.14(d), impacts within 300 mm of each structure equals the angle formed by other may not occur less than 30 min- that line and the X-axis of the vehicle utes apart. measured counterclockwise, or 90 de- (c) As measured as provided in grees, whichever is less. S8.14(d), no impact may occur within (2) Locate a line formed by the short- 150 mm of any other impact. est horizontal distance between CG–R (d) For S8.14(b) and S8.14(c), the dis- for the right seat and the right seat tance between impacts is the distance belt mounting structure. If the seat between the center of the target circle belt mounting structure is below a hor- specified in S8.11 for each impact, izontal plane passing through CG–R, lo- measured along the vehicle interior.

474

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00474 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.201

(e) No impact may occur within the (b) Locate the transverse vertical ‘‘exclusion zone’’ of any pillar target plane B at the rearmost point where it specified in S10.1 through S10.4, door contacts the interior roof (including frame target specified in S10.14 and trim) at the vehicle centerline. S10.15, upper roof target specified in (c) Measure the horizontal distance S10.9, or seat belt mounting structure (D1) between Plane A and Plane B. target specified in S10.16. The ‘‘exclu- (d) Locate the vertical longitudinal sion zone’’ is determined according to plane C at the leftmost point at which the procedure in S8.14(f) through a vertical transverse plane, located 300 S8.14(k). mm rearward of the A-pillar reference (f) Locate the point, Point X, at the point described in S10.1(a), contacts the center of the target circle specified in S8.11 for the tested target. interior roof (including trim). (g) Determine two spheres centered (e) Locate the vertical longitudinal on Point X. Radii of these spheres are plane D at the rightmost point at 150 mm and 200 mm, respectively. which a vertical transverse plane, lo- (h) Locate a horizontal plane passing cated 300 mm rearward of the A-pillar through Point X. Determine the inter- reference point described in S10.1(a), section points, if they exist, of the contacts the interior roof (including small sphere surface, the horizontal trim). plane, and the vehicle interior surface. (f) Measure the horizontal distance Relative to Point X, the point on the (D2) between Plane C and Plane D. left is Point L and the point on the (g) Locate a point (Point M) on the right is Point R. interior roof surface, midway between (i) Locate a vertical plane, Plane Z, Plane A and Plane B along the vehicle passing through Point X and coinci- longitudinal centerline. ± ° dent (within 5 ) with the horizontal (h) The upper roof zone is the area of approach angle used or intended for use the vehicle upper interior surface in testing the target centered on Point bounded by the four planes described in X. S8.15(h)(1) and S8.15(h)(2): (j) If either Point L or Point R does not exist, extend Line LX and/or Line (1) A transverse vertical plane E lo- RX, as appropriate, perpendicular to cated at a distance of (.35 D1) forward Plane Z beyond Point X by 150 mm. of Point M and a transverse vertical The end of the line is designated as plane F located at a distance of (.35 D1) Point L or Point R, as appropriate. rearward of Point M, measured hori- (k) Locate a vertical plane, Plane ZL, zontally. passing through Point L and parallel to (2) A longitudinal vertical plane G lo- Plane Z. Locate another vertical plane, cated at a distance of (.35 D2) to the Plane ZR, passing through Point R and left of Point M and a longitudinal parallel to Plane Z. The ‘‘exclusion vertical plane H located at a distance zone’’ is the vehicle interior surface of (.35 D2) to the right of Point M, area between Plane ZL and Plane ZR measured horizontally. below the upper boundary of the small- S8.16 Test weight—vehicle to pole test. er sphere and above the lower boundary Each vehicle shall be loaded to its un- of the larger sphere. Points on the loaded vehicle weight, plus 136 kilo- intersection of the vehicle interior sur- grams (300 pounds) or its rated cargo face and the large sphere below the tar- and luggage capacity (whichever is get, the small sphere above the target, less), secured in the luggage or load- Plane ZL and Plane ZR are not in- carrying area, plus the weight of the cluded in the ‘‘exclusion zone.’’ necessary anthropomorphic test S8.15 Upper Roof. The upper roof of a vehicle is determined according to the dummy. Any added test equipment procedure specified in S8.15 (a) through shall be located away from impact (h). areas in secure places in the vehicle. (a) Locate the transverse vertical S8.17 Vehicle test attitude—vehicle to plane A at the forwardmost point pole test. Determine the distance be- where it contacts the interior roof (in- tween a level surface and a standard cluding trim) at the vehicle centerline. reference point on the test vehicle’s

475

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00475 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.201 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

body, directly above each wheel open- and a transverse vertical plane passing ing, when the vehicle is in its ‘‘as deliv- through the center of gravity of the ered’’ condition. The ‘‘as delivered’’ con- head of the dummy seated in accord- dition is the vehicle as received at the ance with S8.28, in the front outboard test site, filled to 100 percent of all designated seating position. fluid capacities and with all tires in- S8.25 Rigid Pole—vehicle to pole test. flated to the manufacturer’s specifica- The rigid pole is a vertical metal struc- tions listed on the vehicle’s tire ture beginning no more than 102 milli- placard. Determine the distance be- meters (4 inches) above the lowest tween the same level surface and the point of the tires on the striking side same standard reference points in the of the test vehicle when the vehicle is vehicle’s ‘‘fully loaded condition.’’ The loaded as specified in S8.16 and extend- ‘‘fully loaded condition’’ is the test ve- ing above the highest point of the roof hicle loaded in accordance with S8.16. of the test vehicle. The pole is 254 mm The load placed in the cargo area shall ±3 mm (10 inches) in diameter and set be centered over the longitudinal cen- off from any mounting surface, such as terline of the vehicle. The pretest vehi- a barrier or other structure, so that the cle attitude shall be the same as either test vehicle will not contact such a the ‘‘as delivered’’ or ‘‘fully loaded’’ atti- mount or support at any time within tude or is between the ‘‘as delivered’’ at- 100 milliseconds of the initiation of ve- titude and the ‘‘fully loaded’’ attitude. hicle to pole contact. If the test configuration requires that S8.26 Impact configuration—vehicle to the vehicle be elevated off the ground, pole test. The rigid pole shall be sta- the pretest vehicle attitude must be tionary. The test vehicle shall be pro- maintained. pelled sideways so that its line of for- S8.18 Adjustable seats—vehicle to pole ward motion forms an angle of 90 de- test. Initially, adjustable seats shall be grees ( ±3 degrees) with the vehicle’s adjusted as specified in S6.3 of Stand- longitudinal center line. The impact ard 214 (49 CFR 571.214). reference line shall be aligned with the S8.19 Adjustable seat back place- center line of the rigid pole so that, ment—vehicle to pole test. Initially, posi- when the vehicle-to-pole contact oc- tion adjustable seat backs in the man- curs, the center line of the pole con- ner specified in S6.4 of Standard 214 (49 tacts the vehicle area bounded by two CFR 571.214). transverse vertical planes 38 mm (1.5 S8.20 Adjustable steering wheels—ve- inches) forward and aft of the impact hicle to pole test. Adjustable steering reference line. controls shall be adjusted so that the S8.27 Anthropomorphic test dummy— steering wheel hub is at the geometric vehicle to pole test. center of the locus it describes when it S8.27.1 The anthropomorphic test is moved through its full range of driv- dummy used for evaluation of a vehi- ing positions. cle’s head impact protection shall con- S8.21 Windows and —vehicle form to the requirements of subpart M to pole test. Movable windows and vents of part 572 of this chapter (49 CFR part shall be placed in the fully open posi- 572, subpart M). In a test in which the tion. Any sunroof shall be placed in the test vehicle is striking its left side, the fully closed position. dummy is to be configured and instru- S8.22 Convertible tops—vehicle to pole mented to strike on its left side, in ac- test. The top, if any, of convertibles and cordance with subpart M of part 572. In open-body type vehicles shall be in the a test in which the test vehicle is strik- closed passenger compartment configu- ing its right side, the dummy is to be ration. configured and instrumented to strike S8.23 Doors—vehicle to pole test. its right side, in accordance with sub- Doors, including any rear hatchback or part M of part 572. tailgate, shall be fully closed and S8.27.2 The part 572, subpart M, test latched but not locked. dummy specified is clothed in form fit- S8.24 Impact reference line—vehicle to ting cotton stretch garments with pole test. On the striking side of the ve- short sleeves and midcalf length pants. hicle, place an impact reference line at Each foot of the test dummy is the intersection of the vehicle exterior equipped with a size 11EEE shoe, which

476

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00476 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.201

meets the configuration size, sole, and justed even further forward until the heel thickness specifications of MIL–S– 50mm (2 inches) distance is obtained or 13192 (1976) and weighs 0.57 ±0.09 kilo- until the seat back is in its full upright grams (1.25 ±0.2 pounds). locking position. S8.27.3 Limb joints shall be set at S9. Orthogonal Reference System. The between 1 and 2 g’s. Leg joints are ad- approach angles specified in S8.13.4 are justed with the torso in the supine po- determined using the reference system sition. specified in S9.1 through S9.4. S8.27.4 The stabilized temperature of S9.1 An orthogonal reference system the test dummy at the time of the side consisting of a longitudinal X axis and impact test shall be at any tempera- a transverse Y axis in the same hori- ture between 20.6 degrees C. and 22.2 de- zontal plane and a vertical Z axis grees C. through the intersection of X and Y is S8.27.5 The acceleration data from used to define the horizontal direction the accelerometers installed inside the of approach of the headform. The X–Z skull cavity of the test dummy are plane is the vertical longitudinal zero processed according to the practices plane and is parallel to the longitu- set forth in SAE Recommended Prac- dinal centerline of the vehicle. The X– tice J211, March 1995, ‘‘Instrumentation Y plane is the horizontal zero plane for Impact Tests,’’ Class 1000. parallel to the ground. The Y–Z plane S8.28 Positioning procedure for the is the vertical transverse zero plane Part 572 Subpart M Test Dummy—vehicle that is perpendicular to the X–Y and X– to pole test. The part 572, subpart M, Z planes. The X coordinate is negative test dummy shall be initially posi- forward of the Y–Z plane and positive tioned in the front outboard seating to the rear. The Y coordinate is nega- position on the struck side of the vehi- tive to the left of the X–Z plane and cle in accordance with the provisions of positive to the right. The Z coordinate S7 of Standard 214, 49 CFR 571.214, and is negative below the X–Y plane and the vehicle seat shall be positioned as positive above it. (See Figure 1.) specified in S6.3 and S6.4 of that stand- S9.2 The origin of the reference sys- ard. The position of the dummy shall tem is the center of gravity of the then be measured as follows. Locate headform at the time immediately the horizontal plane passing through prior to launch for each test. the dummy head center of gravity. S9.3 The horizontal approach angle Identify the rearmost point on the is the angle between the X axis and the dummy head in that plane. Construct a headform impact velocity vector pro- line in the plane that contains the jected onto the horizontal zero plane, rearward point of the front door day- measured in the horizontal zero plane light opening and is perpendicular to in the counter-clockwise direction. A 0 the longitudinal vehicle centerline. degree horizontal vector and a 360 de- Measure the longitudinal distance be- gree horizontal vector point in the tween the rearmost point on the positive X direction; a 90 degree hori- dummy head and this line. If this dis- zontal vector points in the positive Y tance is less than 50 mm (2 inches) or direction; a 180 degree horizontal vec- the point is not forward of the line, tor points in the negative X direction; then the seat and/or dummy positions and a 270 horizontal degree vector shall be adjusted as follows. First, the points in the negative Y direction. (See seat back angle is adjusted, a max- Figure 2.) imum of 5 degrees, until a 50 mm (2 S9.4 The vertical approach angle is inches) distance is achieved. If this is the angle between the horizontal plane not sufficient to produce the 50 mm (2 and the velocity vector, measured in inches) distance, the seat is moved for- the midsagittal plane of the headform. ward until the 50 mm (2 inches) dis- A 0 degree vertical vector in Table I co- tance is achieved or until the knees of incides with the horizontal plane and a the dummy contact the dashboard or vertical vector of greater than 0 de- knee bolster, whichever comes first. If grees in Table I makes a upward angle the required distance cannot be of the same number of degrees with achieved through movement of the that plane. seat, the seat back angle shall be ad- S10 Target Locations.

477

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00477 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.201 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(a) The target locations specified in on the A-pillar which is closest to CG– S10.1 through S10.16 are located on F2 for the nearest seating position. both sides of the vehicle and, except as (c) Target AP3. Locate the horizontal specified in S10(b), are determined plane (Plane 5) containing the highest using the procedures specified in those point at the intersection of the dash- paragraphs. board and the A-pillar. Locate a hori- (b) Except as specified in S10(c), if zontal plane (Plane 6) half-way between there is no combination of horizontal Plane 3 and Plane 5. Target AP3 is the and vertical angles specified in S8.13.4 point on Plane 6 and the A-pillar which at which the forehead impact zone of is closest to CG–F1 for the nearest the free motion headform can contact seating position. one of the targets located using the S10.2 B-pillar targets. procedures in S10.1 through S10.16, the (a) B-pillar reference point and target center of that target is moved to any BP1. Locate the point (Point 3) on the location within a sphere with a radius vehicle interior at the intersection of of 25 mm, centered on the center of the the horizontal plane passing through original target, which the forehead im- the highest point of the forwardmost pact zone can contact at one or more door opening and the centerline of the combination of angles. width of the B-pillar, as viewed lat- (c) If there is no point within the erally. Locate a transverse vertical sphere specified in S10(b) which the plane (Plane 7) which passes through forehead impact zone of the free mo- Point 3. Locate the point (Point 4) at tion headform can contact at one or the intersection of the interior roof more combination of horizontal and surface, Plane 7, and the plane, de- vertical angles specified in S8.13.4, the scribed in S8.15(h), defining the nearest radius of the sphere is increased by 25 edge of the upper roof. The B-pillar ref- mm increments until the sphere con- erence point (Point BPR) is the point tains at least one point that can be located at the middle of the line from contacted at one or more combination Point 3 to Point 4 in Plane 7, measured of angles. along the vehicle interior surface. Tar- S10.1 A-pillar targets get BP1 is located at Point BPR. (a) A-pillar reference point and target (b) Target BP2. If a seat belt anchor- AP1. On the vehicle exterior, locate a age is located on the B-pillar, Target transverse vertical plane (Plane 1) BP2 is located at any point on the an- which contacts the rearmost point of chorage. the windshield trim. The intersection (c) Target BP3. Target BP3 is located of Plane 1 and the vehicle exterior sur- in accordance with this paragraph. Lo- face is Line 1. Measuring along the ve- cate a horizontal plane (Plane 8) which hicle exterior surface, locate a point intersects Point BPR. Locate a hori- (Point 1) on Line 1 that is 125 mm in- zontal plane (Plane 9) which passes board of the intersection of Line 1 and through the lowest point of the day- a vertical plane tangent to the vehicle light opening forward of the pillar. Lo- at the outboardmost point on Line 1 cate a horizontal plane (Plane 10) half- with the vehicle side door open. Meas- way between Plane 8 and Plane 9. Tar- uring along the vehicle exterior surface get BP3 is the point located in Plane 10 in a longitudinal vertical plane (Plane and on the interior surface of the B-pil- 2) passing through Point 1, locate a lar, which is closest to CG–F(2) for the point (Point 2) 50 mm rearward of nearest seating position. Point 1. Locate the A-pillar reference (d) Target BP4. Locate a horizontal point (Point APR) at the intersection plane (Plane 11) half-way between of the interior roof surface and a line Plane 9 and Plane 10. Target BP4 is the that is perpendicular to the vehicle ex- point located in Plane 11 and on the in- terior surface at Point 2. Target AP1 is terior surface of the B-pillar which is located at point APR. closest to CG–R for the nearest seating (b) Target AP2. Locate the horizontal position. plane (Plane 3) which intersects point S10.3 Other pillar targets. APR. Locate the horizontal plane (a) Target OP1. (Plane 4) which is 88 mm below Plane 3. (1) Except as provided in S10.3(a)(2), Target AP2 is the point in Plane 4 and target OP1 is located in accordance

478

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00478 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.201

with this paragraph. Locate the point (Plane 17) 150 mm below Plane 16. Tar- (Point 5), on the vehicle interior, at the get RP2 is located in Plane 17 and on intersection of the horizontal plane the pillar at the location closest to CG– through the highest point of the high- R for the nearest designated seating est adjacent door opening or daylight position. opening (if no adjacent door opening) (2) If a seat belt anchorage is located and the centerline of the width of the on the pillar, Target RP2 is any point other pillar, as viewed laterally. Lo- on the anchorage. cate a transverse vertical plane (Plane S10.5 Front header targets. 12) passing through Point 5. Locate the (a) Target FH1. Locate the contour point (Point 6) at the intersection of line (Line 2) on the vehicle interior the interior roof surface, Plane 12 and trim which passes through the APR the plane, described in S8.15(h), defin- and is parallel to the contour line (Line ing the nearest edge of the upper roof. 3) at the upper edge of the windshield The other pillar reference point (Point on the vehicle interior. Locate the OPR) is the point located at the middle point (Point 9) on Line 2 that is 125 mm of the line between Point 5 and Point 6 inboard of the APR, measured along in Plane 12, measured along the vehicle that line. Locate a longitudinal interior surface. Target OP1 is located vertical plane (Plane 18) that passes at Point OPR. through Point 9. Target FH1 is located (2) If a seat belt anchorage is located at the intersection of Plane 18 and the on the pillar, Target OP1 is any point upper vehicle interior, halfway be- on the anchorage. tween a transverse vertical plane (b) Target OP2. Locate the horizontal (Plane 19) through Point 9 and a trans- plane (Plane 13) intersecting Point verse vertical plane (Plane 20) through OPR. Locate a horizontal plane (Plane the intersection of Plane 18 and Line 3. 14) passing through the lowest point of (b) Target FH2. the daylight opening forward of the pil- (1) Except as provided in S10.5(b)(2), lar. Locate a horizontal plane (Plane target FH2 is located in accordance 15) half-way between Plane 13 and with this paragraph. Locate a point Plane 14. Target OP2 is the point lo- (Point 10) 275 mm inboard of Point cated on the interior surface of the pil- APR, along Line 2. Locate a longitu- lar at the intersection of Plane 15 and dinal vertical plane (Plane 21) that the centerline of the width of the pil- passes through Point 10. Target FH2 is lar, as viewed laterally. located at the intersection of Plane 21 S10.4 Rearmost pillar targets and the upper vehicle interior, halfway (a) Rearmost pillar reference point and between a transverse vertical plane target RP1. Locate the point (Point 7) (Plane 22) through Point 10 and a trans- at the corner of the upper roof nearest verse vertical plane (Plane 23) through to the pillar. The distance between the intersection of Plane 21 and Line 3. Point M, as described in S8.15(g), and (2) If a sun roof opening is located Point 7, as measured along the vehicle forward of the front edge of the upper interior surface, is D. Extend the line roof and intersects the mid-sagittal from Point M to Point 7 along the vehi- plane of a dummy seated in either cle interior surface in the same front outboard seating position, target vertical plane by (3*D/7) beyond Point 7 FH2 is the nearest point that is forward or until the edge of a daylight opening, of a transverse vertical plane (Plane 24) whichever comes first, to locate Point through CG–F(2) and on the intersec- 8. The rearmost pillar reference point tion of the mid-sagittal plane and the (Point RPR) is at the midpoint of the interior sunroof opening. line between Point 7 and Point 8, meas- S10.6 Targets on the side rail between ured along the vehicle interior. Target the A-pillar and the B-pillar or rearmost RP1 is located at Point RPR. pillar in vehicles with only two pillars on (b) Target RP2. each side of the vehicle. (1) Except as provided in S10.4(b)(2), (a) Target SR1. Locate a transverse target RP2 is located in accordance vertical plane (Plane 25) 150 mm rear- with this paragraph. Locate the hori- ward of Point APR. Locate the point zontal plane (Plane 16) through Point (Point 11) at the intersection of Plane RPR. Locate the horizontal plane 25 and the upper edge of the

479

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00479 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.201 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

forwardmost door opening. Locate the through the highest point of each door point (Point 12) at the intersection of or daylight opening. the interior roof surface, Plane 25 and (b) Except as provided in S10.7(c), if a the plane, described in S8.15(h), defin- grab handle is located on the side rail, ing the nearest edge of the upper roof. target SR3 is located at any point on Target SR1 is located at the middle of the anchorage of the grab-handle. Fold- the line between Point 11 and Point 12 ing grab-handles are in their stowed in Plane 25, measured along the vehicle position for testing. interior. (c) If a seat belt anchorage is located (b) Target SR2. Locate a transverse on the side rail, target SR3 is located vertical plane (Plane 26) 300 mm rear- at any point on the anchorage. ward of the APR or 300 mm forward of S10.8 Rear header target (target RH). the BPR (or the RPR in vehicles with Locate the point (Point 17) at the no B-pillar). Locate the point (Point 13) intersection of the surface of the upper at the intersection of Plane 26 and the vehicle interior, the mid-sagittal plane upper edge of the forwardmost door (Plane 28) of the outboard rearmost opening. Locate the point (Point 14) at dummy and the plane, described in the intersection of the interior roof S8.15(h), defining the rear edge of the surface, Plane 26 and the plane, de- upper roof. Locate the point (Point 18) scribed in S8.15(h), defining the nearest as provided in S10.8(a) or S10.8(b), as edge of the upper roof. Target SR2 is appropriate. Except as provided in located at the middle of the line be- S10.8(c), Target RH is located at the tween Point 13 and Point 14 in Plane 26, mid-point of the line that is between measured along the vehicle interior. Point 17 and Point 18 and is in Plane 28, S10.7 Other side rail target (target as measured along the surface of the SR3). vehicle interior. (a) If Plane 28 intersects a rear door (a) Except as provided in S10.7(b), opening or daylight opening, then target SR3 is located in accordance Point 18 is located at the intersection with this paragraph. Locate a trans- of Plane 28 and the upper edge of the verse vertical plane (Plane 27) 150 mm door opening or the daylight opening rearward of either Point BPR or Point (if no door opening). OPR. Locate the point (Point 15) as (b) If Plane 28 does not intersect a provided in either S10.7(a)(1) or rear door opening or daylight opening, S10.7(a)(2), as appropriate. Locate the then Point 18 is located on the vehicle point (Point 16) at the intersection of interior at the intersection of Plane 28 the interior roof surface, Plane 27 and and a horizontal plane through the the plane, described in S8.15(h), defin- highest point of the door or daylight ing the nearest edge of the upper roof. opening nearest to Plane 28. If the ad- Target SR3 is located at the middle of jacent door(s) or daylight opening(s) the line between Point 15 and Point 16 are equidistant to Plane 28, Point 18 is in Plane 27, measured along the vehicle located on the vehicle interior at the interior surface. intersection of Plane 28 and either hor- (1) If Plane 27 intersects a door or izontal plane through the highest point daylight opening, the Point 15 is lo- of each door or daylight opening. cated at the intersection of Plane 27 (c) If Target RH is more than 112 mm and the upper edge of the door opening from Point 18 on the line that is be- or daylight opening. tween Point 17 and Point 18 and is in (2) If Plane 27 does not intersect a Plane 28, as measured along the surface door or daylight opening, the Point 15 of the vehicle interior, then Target RH is located on the vehicle interior at the is the point on that line which is 112 intersection of Plane 27 and the hori- mm from Point 18. zontal plane through the highest point S10.9 Upper roof target (target UR). of the door or daylight opening nearest Target UR is any point on the upper Plane 27. If the adjacent door(s) or day- roof. light opening(s) are equidistant to S10.10 Sliding door track target (target Plane 27, Point 15 is located on the ve- SD). Locate the transverse vertical hicle interior at the intersection of plane (Plane 29) passing through the Plane 27 and either horizontal plane middle of the widest opening of the

480

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00480 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.201

sliding door, measured horizontally closest to either CG–F2 or CG–R, as ap- and parallel to the vehicle longitudinal propriate, for the same dummy. centerline. Locate the point (Point 19) (b) Target RB2. If a seat belt anchor- at the intersection of the surface of the age is located on the roll-bar, Target upper vehicle interior, Plane 29 and the RB2 is any point on the anchorage. plane, described in S8.15(h), defining S10.12 Stiffener targets. the nearest edge of the upper roof. Lo- (a) Target ST1. Locate a transverse cate the point (Point 20) at the inter- vertical plane (Plane 31) containing ei- section of Plane 29 and the upper edge ther CG–F2 or CG–R, as appropriate, for of the sliding door opening. Target SD any outboard designated seating posi- is located at the middle of the line be- tion. Target ST1 is located on the stiff- ener and in Plane 31 at the location tween Point 19 and Point 20 in Plane 29, closest to either CG–F2 or CG–R, as ap- measured along the vehicle interior. propriate. S10.11 Roll-bar targets. (b) Target ST2. If a seat belt anchor- (a) Target RB1. Locate a longitudinal age is located on the stiffener, Target vertical plane (Plane 30) at the mid- ST2 is any point on the anchorage. sagittal plane of a dummy seated in S10.13 Brace target (target BT) Target any outboard designated seating posi- BT is any point on the width of the tion. Target RB1 is located on the roll- brace as viewed laterally from inside bar and in Plane 30 at the location the passenger compartment.

481

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00481 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER08AP97.008 § 571.201 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S10.14 Door frame targets. est edge of the upper roof. The door (a) Target DF 1. Locate the point frame reference point (Point DFR) is (Point 21) on the vehicle interior at the the point located at the middle of the intersection of the horizontal plane line from Point 21 to Point 22 in Plane passing through the highest point of 32, measured along the vehicle interior the forward door opening and a trans- surface. Target DF1 is located at Point verse vertical plane (Plane 32 ) tangent DFR. to the rearmost edge of the forward (b) Target DF2. If a seat belt anchor- door, as viewed laterally with the adja- age is located on the door frame, Tar- cent door open. Locate the point (Point get DF2 is located at any point on the 22) at the intersection of the interior anchorage. roof surface, Plane 32, and the plane, (c) Target DF3. Locate a horizontal described in S8.15(h), defining the near- plane (Plane 33) which intersects Point

482

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00482 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER08AP97.009 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.202

DFR. Locate a horizontal plane (Plane (b) Target OD2. Locate the horizontal 34) that passes through the lowest plane (Plane 38) intersecting Point point of the adjacent daylight opening ODR. Locate a horizontal plane (Plane forward of the door frame. Locate a 39) passing through the lowest point of horizontal plane (Plane 35) half-way be- the daylight opening forward of the tween Plane 33 and Plane 34. Target door frame. Locate a horizontal plane DF3 is the point located in Plane 35 (Plane 40) half-way between Plane 38 and on the interior surface of the door and Plane 39. Target OD2 is the point frame, which is closest to CG–F2 for located on the interior surface of the the nearest seating position. door frame at the intersection of Plane (d) Target DF4. Locate a horizontal 40 and the center line of the width of plane (Plane 36) half-way between the door frames, as viewed laterally, Plane 34 and Plane 35. Target DF4 is with the doors in the closed position. the point located in Plane 36 and on S10.16 Seat belt mounting structure the interior surface of the door frame targets. that is closest to CG–R for the nearest (a) Target SB1. Target SB1 is located seating position. at any point on the seat belt anchorage S10.15 Other door frame targets. mounted on the seat belt mounting (a) Target OD1. structure. (1) Except as provided in S10.15(a)(2), (b) Target SB2. Locate a horizontal target OD1 is located in accordance plane (Plane 41), containing either CG– with this paragraph. Locate the point F2 or CG–R, as appropriate, for any (Point 23) on the vehicle interior, at outboard designated seating position the intersection of the horizontal plane whose seating reference point, SgRP, is through the highest point of the high- forward of and closest to, the vertical est adjacent door opening or daylight center line of the width of the seat belt opening (if there is no adjacent door mounting structure as viewed lat- opening) and the center line of the erally. Target SB2 is located on the width of the other door frame, as seat belt mounting structure and in viewed laterally with the doors in the Plane 41 at the location closest to ei- closed position. Locate a transverse ther CG–F2 or CG–R, as appropriate. vertical plane (Plane 37) passing (c) Target SB3. Locate a horizontal through Point 23. Locate the point plane (Plane 42), containing CG–R for (Point 24) at the intersection of the in- any outboard designated seating posi- terior roof surface, Plane 37 and the tion rearward of the forwardmost des- plane, described in S8.15(h), defining ignated seating position or positions the nearest edge of the upper roof. The whose seating reference point, SgRP, is other door frame reference point (Point rearward of and closest to, the vertical ODR) is the point located at the middle center line of the width of the seat belt of the line between Point 23 and Point mounting structure, as viewed lat- 24 in Plane 37, measured along the ve- erally. Locate a horizontal plane hicle interior surface. Target OD1 is lo- (Plane 43) 200 mm below Plane 42. Tar- cated at Point ODR. get SB3 is located on the seat belt (2) If a seat belt anchorage is located mounting structure and in Plane 43 at on the door frame, Target OD1 is any the location closest to CG–R, as appro- point on the anchorage. priate.

[62 FR 16725, Apr. 8, 1997; 63 FR 28, Jan. 2, 1998; 63 FR 41464, Aug. 4, 1998; 63 FR 45965, Aug. 28, 1998; 64 FR 7140, Feb. 12, 1999; 64 FR 69671, Dec. 14, 1999; 67 FR 41354, June 18, 2002; 68 FR 51711, Aug. 28, 2003; 69 FR 9226, Feb. 27, 2004; 69 FR 54249, Sept. 8, 2004]

EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 67 FR 79439, Dec. 23, 2002, § 571.201 was amended by removing the definition of motor home in S3, Definitions, effective Dec. 27, 2004.

§ 571.202 Standard No. 202; Head re- straints to reduce the frequency and straints. severity of neck injury in rear-end and S1. Purpose and scope. This standard other collisions. specifies requirements for head re-

483

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00483 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.202 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S2. Application. This standard ap- S5.1 Compliance with S4.3(a) shall plies to passenger cars, and to multi- be demonstrated in accordance with purpose passenger vehicles, trucks and the following with the head restraint buses with a GVWR of 4,536 kg or less. in its fully extended design position: S3. Definitions. Head restraint means a (a) On the exterior profile of the head device that limits rearward angular and torso of a dummy having the displacement of the occupant’s head weight and seated height of a 95th per- relative to his torso line. centile adult male with an approved S4. Requirements. representation of a human, articulated S4.1 Each passenger car shall com- neck structure, or an approved equiva- ply with S4.3. lent test device, establish reference S4.2 Each truck, multipurpose pas- lines by the following method: senger vehicle and bus with a GVWR of (1) Position the dummy’s back on a 4,536 kg or less, shall comply with S4.3. horizontal flat surface with the lumbar S4.3 Performance levels. Except for joints in a straight line. school buses, a head restraint that con- (2) Rotate the head of the dummy forms to either (a) or (b) shall be pro- rearward until the back of the head vided at each outboard front des- contacts the same flat horizontal sur- ignated seating position. For school face in paragraph (1). buses, a head restraint that conforms (3) Position the SAE J–826 two-di- to either (a) or (b) shall be provided for mensional manikin’s back against the the driver’s seating position. flat surface in S5.1(a)(1), alongside the (a) It shall, when tested in accord- dummy with the h-point of the man- ance with S5.1, during a forward accel- ikin aligned with the h-point of the eration of at least 78 m/s2 on the seat dummy. supporting structure, limit rearward (4) Establish the torso line of the angular displacement of the head ref- manikin as defined in SAE Aerospace- erence line to 45° from the torso ref- Automotive Drawing Standards, sec. erence line; or 2.3.6, P.E1.01, September 1963. (b) It shall, when adjusted to its fully (5) Establish the dummy torso ref- extended design position, conform to erence line by superimposing the torso each of the following— line of the manikin on the torso of the (1) When measured parallel to torso dummy. line, the top of the head restraint shall (6) Establish the head reference line not be less than 700 mm above the seat- by extending the dummy torso ref- ing reference point; erence line onto the head. (2) When measured either 64 mm (b) At each designated seating posi- below the top of the head restraint or tion having a head restraint, place the 635 mm above the seating reference dummy, snugly restrained by a Type 1 point, the lateral width of the head re- seat belt, in the manufacturer’s rec- straint shall be not less than— ommended design seated position. (i) 254 mm for use with bench-type (c) During forward acceleration ap- seats; and plied to the structure supporting the (ii) 171 mm for use with individual seat as described in this paragraph, seats: measure the maximum rearward angu- (3) When tested in accordance with lar displacement between the dummy S5.2, the rearmost portion of the head torso reference line and head reference form shall not be displaced to more line. When graphically depicted, the than 102 mm perpendicularly rearward magnitude of the acceleration curve of the displaced extended torso ref- shall not be less than that of a half- erence line during the application of sine wave having the amplitude of 78 the load specified in S5.2(c); and m/s2 and a duration of 80 milliseconds (4) When tested in accordance with and not more than that of a half-sine S5.2, the head restraint shall withstand wave curve having an amplitude of 94 an increasing load until one of the fol- m/s2 and a duration of 96 milliseconds. lowing occurs: S5.2 Compliance with S4.3(b) shall (i) Failure of the seat or seat back; or be demonstrated in accordance with (ii) Application of a load of 890 N. the following with the head restraint S5. Demonstration procedures. in its fully extended design position:

484

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00484 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.204

(a) Place a test device, having the factured on or after September 1, 1981 back plan dimensions and torso line shall meet the requirements of S5.1 and (centerline of the head room probe in S5.2. full back position), of the three dimen- S5. Impact protection requirements. sional SAE J826 manikin, at the manu- S5.1 Except as provided in this para- facturer’s recommended design seated graph, the steering control system of position. any vehicle to which this standard ap- (b) Establish the displaced torso ref- plies shall be impacted in accordance erence line by applying a rearward mo- with S5.1(a). However, the steering con- ment of 373 Nm moment about the trol system of any such vehicle manu- seating reference point to the seat factured on or before August 31, 1996, back through the test device back pan may be impacted in accordance with located in (a). S5.1(b). (c) After removing the back pan, (a) When the steering control system using a 165 mm diameter spherical head is impacted by a body block in accord- form or cylindrical head form having a ance with SAE Recommended Practice 165 mm diameter in plan view and a 152 J944 JUN80 Steering Control System— mm height in profile view, apply, per- Passenger Car—Laboratory Test Proce- pendicular to the displaced torso ref- dure, at a relative velocity of 24 km/h, erence line, a rearward initial load 64 the impact force developed on the mm below the top of the head restraint chest of the body block transmitted to that will produce a 373 Nm moment the steering control system shall not about the seating reference point. exceed 11,120 N, except for intervals (d) Gradually increase this initial whose cumulative duration is not more load to 890 N or until the seat or seat than 3 milliseconds. back fails, whichever occurs first. (b) When the steering control system [36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 54 is impacted in accordance with Society FR 39187, Sept. 25, 1989; 61 FR 27025, May 30, of Automotive Engineers Rec- 1996; 63 FR 28935, May 27, 1998] ommended Practice J944, ‘‘Steering Wheel Assembly Laboratory Test Pro- § 571.203 Standard No. 203; Impact cedure,’’ December 1965, or an approved protection for the driver from the equivalent, at a relative velocity of 24 steering control system. km/h, the impact force developed on S1. Purpose and scope. This standard the chest of the body block trans- specifies requirements for steering con- mitted to the steering control system trol systems that will minimize chest, shall not exceed 11,120 N, except for in- neck, and facial injuries to the driver tervals whose cumulative duration is as a result of impact. not more than 3 milliseconds. S2. Application. This standard applies S5.2 The steering control system to passenger cars and to multipurpose shall be so constructed that no compo- passenger vehicles, trucks and buses nents or attachments, including horn with a gross vehicle weight rating of actuating mechanisms and trim hard- 4,536 kg or less. However, it does not ware, can catch the driver’s clothing or apply to vehicles that conform to the jewelry during normal driving maneu- frontal barrier crash requirements vers. (S5.1) of Standard No. 208 (49 CFR NOTE: The term jewelry refers to watches, 571.208) by means of other than seat rings, and bracelets without loosely attached belt assemblies. It also does not apply or dangling members. to walk-in vans. [36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 44 S3. Definitions. Steering control system FR 68475, Nov. 29, 1979; 47 FR 47842, Oct. 28, means the basic steering mechanism 1982; 58 FR 26527, May 4, 1993; 58 FR 63304, and its associated trim hardware, in- Dec. 1, 1993; 63 FR 28935, May 27, 1998; 63 FR cluding any portion of a steering col- 51003, Sept. 24, 1998] umn assembly that provides energy ab- sorption upon impact. § 571.204 Standard No. 204; Steering S4. Requirements. Each passenger car control rearward displacement. and each multipurpose passenger vehi- S1. Purpose and scope. This standard cle, truck and bus with a gross vehicle specifies requirements limiting the weight rating of 4,536 kg or less manu- rearward displacement of the steering

485

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00485 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.205 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

control into the passenger compart- hicle is tested in accordance with the ment to reduce the likelihood of chest, following conditions. neck, or head injury. S5.1 The vehicle, including test de- S2. Application. This standard applies vices and instrumentation, is loaded to to passenger cars and to multipurpose its unloaded vehicle weight. passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses. S5.2 Adjustable steering controls However, it does not apply to walk-in are adjusted so that a tilting steering vans. wheel hub is at the geometric center of S3. Definitions. the locus it describes when it is moved Steering column means a structural through its full range of driving posi- housing that surrounds a steering tions. A telescoping steering control is shaft. set at the adjustment position midway Steering shaft means a component between the forwardmost and that transmits steering torque from rearwardmost position. the steering wheel to the steering gear. S5.3 Convertibles and open-body S4 Requirements. type vehicles have the top, if any, in S4.1 Vehicles manufactured before place in the closed passenger compart- September 1, 1991. When a passenger car ment configuration. or a truck, bus, or multipurpose pas- S5.4 Doors are fully closed and senger vehicle with a gross vehicle latched but not locked. weight rating of 10,000 pounds or less S5.5 The fuel tank is filled to any and an unloaded vehicle weight of 4,000 level from 90 to 95 percent of capacity. pounds or less is tested under the con- S5.6 The parking brake is dis- ditions of S5 in a 30 mile per hour per- engaged and the transmission is in neu- pendicular impact into a fixed collision tral. barrier, the upper end of the steering S5.7 Tires are inflated to the vehicle column and shaft in the vehicle shall manufacturer’s specifications. not be displaced more than 5 inches in [52 FR 44897, Nov. 23, 1987, as amended at 63 a horizontal rearward direction par- FR 28935, May 27, 1998; 63 FR 51003, Sept. 24, allel to the longitudinal axis of the ve- 1998] hicle. The amount of displacement shall be measured relative to an undis- § 571.205 Standard No. 205, Glazing turbed point on the vehicle and shall materials. represent the maximum dynamic S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- movement of the upper end of the quirements for glazing materials for steering column and shaft during the use in motor vehicles and motor vehi- crash test. cle equipment. S4.2 Vehicles manufactured on or after S2. Purpose. The purpose of this September 1, 1991. When a passenger car standard is to reduce injuries resulting or a truck, bus or multipurpose pas- from impact to glazing surfaces, to en- senger vehicle with a gross vehicle sure a necessary degree of trans- weight rating of 4,536 kg or less and an parency in motor vehicle windows for unloaded vehicle weight of 2,495 kg or driver visibility, and to minimize the less is tested under the conditions of S5 possibility of occupants being thrown in a 48 km/h perpendicular impact into through the vehicle windows in colli- a fixed collision barrier, the upper end sions. of the steering column and shaft in the S3. Application and Incorporation by vehicle shall not be displaced more Reference. than 127 mm in a horizontal rearward S3.1 Application. This standard ap- direction parallel to the longitudinal plies to passenger cars, multipurpose axis of the vehicle. The amount of dis- passenger vehicles, trucks, buses, mo- placement shall be measured relative torcycles, slide-in campers, pickup cov- to an undisturbed point on the vehicle ers designed to carry persons while in and shall represent the maximum dy- motion, and low speed vehicles, and to namic movement of the upper end of glazing materials for use in those vehi- the steering column and shaft during cles. For motor vehicles and glazing the crash test. equipment manufactured before Sep- S5. Test conditions. The require- tember 1, 2006, the manufacturer may, ments of S4 shall be met when the ve- at its option, comply with 49 CFR

486

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00486 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.205

571.205 revised as of October 1, 2003 in- in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 stead of this version. CFR part 51 (see § 571.5 of this part). A S3.2 Incorporation by Reference. copy of SAE J100, rev. June 95 may be (a) ‘‘American National Standard for obtained from SAE at the Society of Safety Glazing Materials for Glazing Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Com- Motor Vehicles and Motor Vehicle monwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA Equipment Operating on Land High- 15096. A copy of SAE J100, rev. 95 may ways-Safety Standard’’ ANSI/SAE be inspected at NHTSA’s technical ref- Z26.1–1996, Approved by American Na- erence library, 400 Seventh Street, SW., tional Standards Institute August 11, Room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the 1997 (ANSI/SAE Z26.1–1996) is incor- Office of the Federal Register, 900 porated by reference in Section 5.1 and North Capitol Street, NW., Suite 700, is hereby made part of this Standard. Washington, DC. The Director of the Federal Register S4. Definitions. approved the material incorporated by Bullet resistant shield means a shield reference in accordance with 5 U.S.C. or barrier that is installed completely 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51 (see § 571.5 of inside a motor vehicle behind and sepa- this part). A copy of ANSI/SAE Z26.1– rate from glazing materials that inde- 1996 may be obtained from the Society pendently comply with the require- of Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 ments of this standard. Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA Camper means a structure designed to 15096–0007. A copy of ANSI/SAE Z26.1– be mounted in the cargo area of a 1996 may be inspected at NHTSA’s truck, or attached to an incomplete ve- technical reference library, 400 Seventh hicle with motive power, for the pur- Street, SW., Room 5109, Washington, pose of providing shelter for persons. DC or at the Office of the Federal Reg- Glass-plastic glazing material means a ister, 900 North Capitol Street, NW., laminate of one or more layers of glass Suite 700, Washington, DC. and one or more layers of plastic in (b) The Society of Automotive Engi- which a plastic surface of the glazing neers (SAE) Recommended Practice faces inward when the glazing is in- J673, revised April 1993, ‘‘Automotive stalled in a vehicle. Safety Glasses’’ (SAE J673, rev. April Motor home means a multipurpose 93) is incorporated by reference in Sec- passenger vehicle that provides living tion S5.1, and is hereby made part of accommodations for persons. this Standard. The Director of the Fed- Pickup cover means a camper having eral Register approved the material in- a roof and sides but without a floor, de- corporated by reference in accordance signed to be mounted on and removable with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51 from the cargo area of a truck by the (see § 571.5 of this part). A copy of SAE user. J673, rev. April 93 may be obtained Prime glazing manufacturer means a from SAE at the Society of Auto- manufacturer that fabricates, lami- motive Engineers, Inc., 400 Common- nates, or tempers glazing materials. wealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096. A Slide-in camper means a camper hav- copy of SAE J673, rev. April 93 may be ing a roof, floor, and sides, designed to inspected at NHTSA’s technical ref- be mounted on and removable from the erence library, 400 Seventh Street, SW., cargo area of a truck by the user. Room 5109, Washington, DC, or at the S5. Requirements. Office of the Federal Register, 900 S5.1 Glazing materials for use in North Capitol Street, NW., Suite 700, motor vehicles must conform to ANSI/ Washington, DC. SAE Z26.1–1996 unless this standard (c) The Society of Automotive Engi- provides otherwise. neers (SAE) Recommended Practice S5.2 NHTSA may test any portion of J100, revised June 1995, ‘‘Class ‘A’ Vehi- the glazing when doing the fracture cle Glazing Shade Bands’’ (SAE J100, test (Test No. 7) described in section 5.7 rev. June 95) is incorporated by ref- of ANSI/SAE Z26.1–1996. erence in Section S5.3, and is hereby S5.3 Shade bands. Shade band areas made part of this Standard. The Direc- for shall comply with SAE tor of the Federal Register approved J100, rev. June 95 except that the value the material incorporated by reference of 7 degrees must be used in place of

487

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00487 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.206 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

the value of 5 degrees specified in Sec- (b) Certify that its product complies tion 4, Shade Band Boundary Require- with this standard in accordance with ments, of SAE J100, rev. June 95. 49 U.S.C. 30115. S5.4 Low speed vehicles. Windshields [37 FR 12239, June 21, 1972, as amended at 37 of low speed vehicles must meet the FR 13097, July 1, 1972; 37 FR 24036, Nov. 11, ANSI/SAE Z26.1–1996 specifications for 1972; 37 FR 24826, Nov. 22, 1972; 42 FR 61466, either AS–1 or AS–4 glazing. Dec. 5, 1977; 45 FR 47151, July 14, 1980; 46 FR S5.5 Item 4A Glazing. Item 4A glaz- 43690, Aug. 31, 1981; 48 FR 52065, Nov. 16, 1983; ing, as specified in ANSI/SAE Z26.1– 49 FR 6734, Feb. 23, 1984; 56 FR 12674, Mar. 27, 1991; 56 FR 18531, Apr. 23, 1991; 56 FR 49149, 1996, may only be used in side windows Sept. 27, 1991; 57 FR 1654, Jan. 15, 1992; 57 FR rearward of the ‘‘C’’ pillar. 13656, Apr. 17, 1992; 57 FR 30164, July 8, 1992; S6. Certification and marking. 57 FR 58150, Dec. 9, 1992; 60 FR 13646, Mar. 14, S6.1 A prime glazing material man- 1995; 61 FR 41743, Aug. 12, 1996; 68 FR 43971, ufacturer must certify, in accordance July 25, 2003; 68 FR 55545, Sept. 26, 2003; 69 FR 51191, Aug. 18, 2004] with 49 U.S.C. 30115, each piece of glaz- ing material to which this standard ap- EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 67 FR 79439, Dec. plies that is designed— 27, 2002, § 571.205 was amended by removing the definition of motor home in S4, Defini- (a) As a component of any specific tions, effective Dec. 27, 2004. motor vehicle or camper; or (b) To be cut into components for use § 571.206 Standard No. 206; Door locks in motor vehicles or items of motor ve- and door retention components. hicle equipment. S1. Purpose and Scope. This standard S6.2 A prime glazing manufacturer specifies requirements for door locks certifies its glazing by adding to the and door retention components includ- marks required by section 7 of ANSI/ ing latches, hinges, and other sup- SAE Z26.1–1996, in letters and numerals porting means, to minimize the likeli- of the same size, the symbol ‘‘DOT’’ and hood of occupants being thrown from a manufacturer’s code mark that the vehicle as a result of impact. NHTSA assigns to the manufacturer. S2. Application. This standard applies NHTSA will assign a code mark to a to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- manufacturer after the manufacturer senger vehicles, and trucks. submits a written request to the Office S3. Definitions. of Vehicle Safety Compliance, National Auxiliary door latch means a latch or Highway Traffic Safety Administra- latches, other than the primary latch tion, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash- or latches, fitted to a back door or ington, DC 20590. The request must in- back door system that is equipped with clude the company name, address, and more than one latch. a statement from the manufacturer Back door means a door or door sys- certifying its status as a prime glazing tem on the back end of a motor vehicle manufacturer as defined in S4. through which passengers can enter or S6.3 A manufacturer or distributor depart the vehicle, or cargo can be loaded or unloaded; but does not in- who cuts a section of glazing material clude: to which this standard applies, for use (a) A trunk lid; or in a motor vehicle or camper, must— (b) A door or window that is com- (a) Mark that material in accordance posed entirely of glazing material and with section 7 of ANSI/SAE Z26.1–1996; whose latches and/or hinges are at- and tached directly onto the glazing mate- rial. Cargo-Type Door means a door de- signed primarily to accommodate cargo loading including, but not lim- ited to, a two-part door that latches to itself. Fork-bolt means the part of the door latch that engages the striker when in a latched position.

488

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00488 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.206

Fork-bolt opening means the direction (ii) For calculating average annual opposite to that in which the striker production of affected passenger cars enters to engage the fork-bolt. and multipurpose passenger vehicles Primary door latch means, with re- for each manufacturer and the number spect to a back door or back door sys- of such vehicles manufactured by each tem, the latch or latches equipped with manufacturer, a vehicle produced by both the fully latched position and the more than one manufacturer shall be secondary latched position. attributed to a single manufacturer as Side front door means a door that in a follows: side view, has 50 percent or more of its (A) A vehicle that is imported shall opening area forward of the rearmost be attributed to the importer; point on the driver’s seatback, when (B) A vehicle manufactured in the the driver’s seat is adjusted to its most United States by more than one manu- vertical and rearward position. facturer, one of which also markets the Side rear door means a door that, in a vehicle, shall be attributed to the man- side view, has more than 50 percent of ufacturer that markets the vehicle. its opening area to the rear of the rear- (C) A vehicle produced by more than most point on the driver’s seatback, one manufacturer shall be attributed when the driver’s seat is adjusted to its to any one of the vehicle’s manufactur- most vertical and rearward position. ers specified by an express written con- Trunk lid means a movable body tract between the manufacturer so panel that provides access from outside specified and the manufacturer to the vehicle to a space wholly parti- which the vehicle would otherwise be tioned from the occupant compartment attributed under paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(A) by a permanently attached partition or or (B) of this section. a fixed or fold-down seat back. (2) Components on the back doors of S4. Requirments. affected passenger cars and multipur- (a) Components on side doors. Compo- pose passenger vehicles manufactured nents on any side door that leads di- on and after September 1, 1998 shall rectly into a compartment that con- conform to all applicable requirements tains one or more seating accommoda- of this standard. tions shall conform to this standard. (c) Components on folding doors, roll- (b) Components on back doors. Compo- up doors, doors that are designed to be nents on any back door of a passenger easily attached to or detached from car or multipurpose passenger vehicle motor vehicles manufactured for oper- with a gross vehicle weight rating ation without doors, and doors that are (GVWR) of 4,536 kilograms (10,000 equipped with the wheelchair lifts and pounds) or less that leads directly into that are linked to an alarm system a compartment that contains one or consisting of either a flashing visible more seating accommodations shall signal located in the driver’s compart- conform to this standard, subject to ment or an alarm audible to the driver the following compliance schedule: that is activated when the door is open, (1)(i) For those affected passenger need not conform to this standard. cars and multipurpose passenger vehi- (d) A particular latch or hinge assem- cles manufactured on or after Sep- bly utilized as a test specimen need not tember 1, 1997, and before September 1, meet further requirements after having 1998, the amount of such vehicles com- been subjected to and having met any plying with this standard shall be not one of the requirements of S4 or S5.1 less than 60 percent of the combined through S5.4. total production of passenger cars and S4.1 Hinged Side Doors, Except Cargo- multipurpose passenger vehicles, based Type Doors. on: S4.1.1 Door Latches. Each door latch (A) The manufacturer’s average an- and striker assembly shall be provided nual production of such vehicles manu- with two positions consisting of— factured on or after September 1, 1996 (a) A fully latched position; and and before September 1, 1998; or (b) A secondary latched position. (B) The manufacturer’s production of S4.1.1.1 Longitudinal Load. The door such vehicles on or after September 1, latch and striker assembly, when in 1997 and before September 1, 1998. the fully latched position, shall not

489

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00489 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.206 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

separate when a longitudinal load of tem is used on a single door, the load 11,000 Newtons (2,500 pounds) is applied. requirement may be divided among the When in the secondary latched posi- total number of latch systems. tion, the door latch and striker assem- S4.2.2 Door Hinges. Each door hinge bly shall not separate when a longitu- system shall support the door and shall dinal load of 4,450 Newtons (1,000 not separate when a longitudinal load pounds) is applied. of 11,000 Newtons (2,500 pounds) is ap- S4.1.1.2 Transverse Load. The door plied, and when a transverse load of latch and striker assembly, when in 8,900 Newtons (2,000 pounds) is applied. the fully latched position, shall not S4.3 Sliding Side Doors. The track separate when a transverse load of 8,900 and slide combination or other sup- Newtons (2,000 pounds) is applied. When porting means for each sliding door in the secondary latched position, the shall not separate when a total trans- door latch and striker assembly shall verse load of 17,800 Newtons (4,000 not separate when a transverse load of pounds) is applied, with the door in the 4,450 Newtons (1,000 pounds) is applied. closed position. S4.1.1.3 Inertia Load. The door latch S4.4. Hinged Back Doors. shall not disengage from the fully S4.4.1 Door Latches. Each back door latched position when a longitudinal or system shall be equipped with at least transverse inertia load of 30g is applied one primary latch and striker assem- to the door latch system (including the bly. latch and its actuating mechanism S4.4.1.1 Load Test One. The primary with the locking mechanism dis- door latch and striker assembly, when engaged). in the fully latched position, shall not S4.1.2 Door Hinges. Each door hinge separate when a load of 11,000 Newtons system shall support the door and shall (2,500 pounds) is applied in the direc- not separate when a longitudinal load tion perpendicular to the face of the of 11,000 Newtons (2,500 pounds) is ap- latch (corresponding to the longitu- plied. Similarly, each door hinge sys- dinal load test for side door latches) tem shall not separate when a trans- such that the latch and the striker an- verse load of 8,900 Newtons (2,000 chorage are not compressed against pounds) is applied. each other. When in the secondary S4.1.3 Door Locks. Each door shall be latched position, the primary latch and equipped with a locking mechanism striker assembly shall not separate with an operating means in the inte- when a load of 4,450 Newtons (1,000 rior of the vehicle. pounds) is applied in the same direc- S4.1.3.1 Side Front Door Locks. When tion. the locking mechanism is engaged, the S4.4.1.2 Load Test Two. The primary outside door handle or other outside door latch and striker assembly, when latch release control shall be inoper- in the fully latched position, shall not ative. separate when a load of 8,900 Newtons S4.1.3.2 Side Rear Door Locks. In pas- (2,000 pounds) is applied in the direc- senger cars and multipurpose passenger tion of the fork-bolt opening and par- vehicles, when the locking mechanism allel to the face of the latch (cor- is engaged both the outside and inside responding to the transverse load test). door handles or other latch release con- Figure 1 depicts the loading direction trols shall be inoperative. for this test. When in the secondary S4.2 Hinged Cargo-Type Side Doors. latched position, the primary latch and S4.2.1 Door Latches. striker assembly shall not separate S4.2.1.1 Longitudinal Load. Each when a load of 4,450 Newtons (1,000 latch system, when in the latched posi- pounds) is applied in the same direc- tion, shall not separate when a longitu- tion. dinal load of 11,000 Newtons (2,500 S4.4.1.3 Load Test Three. The pri- pounds) is applied. mary door latch and striker assembly S4.2.1.2 Transverse Load. Each latch on back doors equipped with a latch system, when in the latched position, and striker assembly at the bottom of shall not separate when a transverse the door and that open upward shall load of 8,900 Newtons (2,000 pounds) is not disengage from the fully latched applied. When more than one latch sys- position when a load of 8,900 Newtons

490

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00490 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.206

(2,000 pounds) is applied in a direction S5.1 Hinged Side Doors, Except Cargo- orthogonal to the directions specified Type Doors. in S4.4.1.1 and S4.4.1.2 above. S5.1.1 Door Latches. S4.4.1.4 Inertia Load. The primary S5.1.1.1 Longitudinal and Transverse door latch shall not disengage from the Loads. Compliance with paragraphs fully latched position when an inertia S4.1.1.1 and S4.1.1.2 shall be dem- load of 30g is applied to the door latch onstrated in accordance with para- system, including the latch and its ac- graph 5 of Society of Automotive Engi- tivation mechanism with the locking neers Recommended Practice J839, Pas- mechanism disengaged, in the direc- senger Car Side Door Latch Systems, tions specified in S4.4.1.1, S4.4.1.2, and June 1991. S4.4.1.3. S5.1.1.2 Inertia Load. Compliance S4.4.1.5 Auxiliary Door Latches. Each with S4.1.1.3 shall be demonstrated by auxiliary back door latch and striker approved tests or in accordance with assembly shall be provided with a fully paragraph 6 of Society of Automotive latched position and shall comply with Engineers Recommended Practice J839, the requirements specified in S4.4.1.1, Passenger Car Side Door Latch Systems, S4.4.1.2, and S4.4.1.4. June 1991. S4.4.2 Door Locks. Each back door S5.1.2 Door Hinges. Compliance with system equipped with interior door S4.1.2 shall be demonstrated in accord- handles or that leads directly into a ance with paragraph 4 or 5, as appro- compartment that contains one or priate, of Society of Automotive Engi- more seating accommodations shall be neers Recommended Practice J934, Ve- equipped with a locking mechanism hicle Passenger Door Hinge Systems, July with operating means in both the inte- 1982. For piano-type hinges, the hinge rior and exterior of the vehicle. When spacing requirements of SAE J934 shall the locking mechanism is engaged, not be applicable and arrangement of both the inside and outside door han- the test fixture shall be altered as re- dles or other latch release controls quired so that the test load will be ap- shall be inoperative. plied to the complete hinge. S4.4.3 Door Hinges. S5.2 Hinged Cargo-Type Side Doors. S4.4.3.1 Load Test One. Each back S5.2.1 Door Latches. Compliance door hinge system shall support the with S4.2.1 shall be demonstrated in ac- door and shall not separate when a load cordance with paragraphs 5.1 and 5.3, of 11,000 Newtons (2,500 pounds) is ap- SAE Recommended Practice J839, Pas- plied perpendicular to the hinge face senger Car Side Door Latch Systems, plate (longitudinal load test) such that June 1991. An equivalent static test fix- the hinge plates are not compressed ture may be substituted for that shown against each other. in Figure 2 of SAE J839, if required. S4.4.3.2 Load Test Two. Each back S5.2.2 Door Hinges. Compliance with door hinge system shall not separate S4.2.2 shall be demonstrated in accord- when a load of 8,900 Newtons (2,000 ance with paragraph 4 or 5, as appro- pounds) is applied perpendicular to the priate, of SAE Recommended Practice axis of the hinge pin and parallel to the J934, Vehicle Passenger Door Hinge Sys- hinge face plate (transverse load test) tems, July 1982. For piano-type hinges, such that the hinge plates are not com- the hinge spacing requirement of SAE pressed against each other. J934 shall not be applicable and ar- S4.4.3.3 Load Test Three. Each hinge rangement of the test fixture shall be system on back doors that open upward altered as required so that the test shall not separate when a load of 8,900 load will be applied to the complete Newtons (2,000 pounds) is applied in the hinge. direction of the axis of the hinge pin. S5.3 Sliding Side Doors. Compliance S4.5 Sliding Back Doors. The track with S4.3 shall be demonstrated by ap- and slide combination or other sup- plying an outward transverse load of porting means for each sliding door 8,900 Newtons (2,000 pounds) to the shall not separate when a total longi- load-bearing members at the opposite tudinal load of 17,800 Newtons (4,000 edges of the door (17,800 Newtons (4,000 pounds) is applied, with the door in the pounds) total). The demonstration may closed position. be performed either in the vehicle or

491

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00491 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.206 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

with the door retention components in demonstrated in the same manner as a bench test fixture. specified in S5.1.2, except that the S5.4 Hinged Back Doors. loads shall be in the directions speci- S5.4.1.1 Load Tests One, Two, and fied in S4.4.3.1, S4.4.3.2, and S4.4.3.3. Three. Compliance with S4.4.1.1, The same test device may be used for S4.4.1.2, and S4.4.1.3 shall be dem- Load Tests Two and Three. onstrated in the same manner as speci- S5.5 Sliding Back Doors. Compliance fied in S5.1.1.1, except that the loads with S4.5 shall be demonstrated by ap- shall be in the directions specified in plying an outward longitudinal load of S4.4.1.1, S4.4.1.2, and S4.4.1.3. The same test device may be used for Load Tests 8,900 Newtons (2,000 pounds) to the load Two and Three. bearing members at the opposite edges S5.4.1.2 Inertia Load. Compliance of the door (17,000 Newtons (4,000 with S4.4.1.4 shall be demonstrated in pounds) total). The demonstration may the same manner as specified in be performed either in the vehicle or S5.1.1.2. with the door retention components in S5.4.2 Door Hinges. Compliance with a bench test fixture. S4.4.3.1, S4.4.3.2, and S4.4.3.3 shall be

492

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00492 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.206

[36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 37 FR 284, Jan. 8, 1972; 50 FR 12031, Mar. 27, 1985; 60 FR 13646, Mar. 14, 1995; 60 FR 50134, Sept. 28, 1995; 61 FR 39907, July 31, 1996]

493

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00493 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.077 § 571.207 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

§ 571.207 Standard No. 207; Seating S4.2.1 Seat adjustment. Except for systems. vertical movement of nonlocking sus- S1. Purpose and scope. This standard pension type occupant seats in trucks establishes requirements for seats, or buses, each seat shall remain in its their attachment assemblies, and their adjusted position when tested in ac- installation to minimize the possibility cordance with the test procedures spec- of their failure by forces acting on ified in S5. them as a result of vehicle impact. S4.3. Restraining device for hinged or S2. Application. This standard applies folding seats or seat backs. Except for a to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- passenger seat in a bus or a seat having senger vehicles, trucks and buses. a back that is adjustable only for the S3. Definitions. Occupant seat means a comfort of its occupants, a hinged or seat that provides at least one des- folding occupant seat or occupant seat ignated seating position. back shall— Seat adjuster means the part of the (a) Be equipped with a self-locking seat that provides forward and rear- device for restraining the hinged or ward positioning of the seat bench and folding seat or seat back, and back, and/or rotation around a vertical axis, including any fixed portion, such (b) If there are any designated seat- as a seat track. In the case of a seat ing positions or auxiliary seating ac- equipped with seat adjusters at dif- commodations behind the seat, either ferent levels, the term means the up- immediately to the rear or to the sides, permost seat adjuster. be equipped with a control for releasing S4. Requirements. that restraining device. S4.1 Driver’s seat. Each vehicle shall S4.3.1 Accessibility of release control. have an occupant seat for the driver. If there is a designated seating position S.4.2 General performance require- immediately behind a seat equipped ments. When tested in accordance with with a restraining device, the control S5., each occupant seat, other than a for releasing the device shall be readily side-facing seat or a passenger seat on accessible to the occupant of the seat a bus, shall withstand the following equipped with the device and, if access forces, in newtons. to the control is required in order to (a) In any position to which it can be exit from the vehicle, to the occupant adjusted—20 times the mass of the seat of the designated seating position im- in kilograms multiplied by 9.8 applied mediately behind the seat. in a forward longitudinal direction; S4.3.2 Performance of restraining de- (b) In any position to which it can be vice. adjusted—20 times the mass of the seat S4.3.2.1 Static force. (a) Once en- in kilograms multiplied by 9.8 applied gaged, the restraining device for a for- in a rearward longitudinal direction; ward-facing seat shall not release or (c) For a seat belt assembly attached fail when a forward longitudinal force, to the seat—the force specified in para- in newtons, equal to 20 times the mass graph (a), if it is a forward facing seat, of the hinged or folding portion of the or paragraph (b), if it is a rearward fac- seat in kilograms multiplied by 9.8 is ing seat, in each case applied simulta- neously with the forces imposed on the applied through the center of gravity seat by the seat belt assembly when it of that portion of the seat. is loaded in accordance with S4.2 of (b) Once engaged, the restraining de- § 571.210; and vice for a rearward-facing seat shall (d) In its rearmost position—a force not release or fail when a rearward lon- that produces a 373 newton meters mo- gitudinal force, in newtons, equal to 8 ment about the seating reference point times the mass of the hinged or folding for each designated seating position portion of the seat in kilograms multi- that the seat provides, applied to the plied by 9.8 is applied through the cen- upper cross-member of the seat back or ter of gravity of that portion of the the upper seat back, in a rearward lon- seat. gitudinal direction for forward-facing S4.3.2.2 Acceleration. Once engaged, seats and in a forward longitudinal di- the restraining device shall not release rection for rearward-facing seats. or fail when the device is subjected to

494

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00494 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.207

an acceleration of 20 g., in the longitu- rigid cross-member as shown in Figure dinal direction opposite to that in 1.

which the seat folds. (c) Find ‘‘cg1,’’ the center of gravity of S4.4 Labeling. Seats not designated the portion of the seat that is above for occupancy while the vehicle is in the lowest surface of the seat adjuster. motion shall be conspicuously labeled On each side of the seat, secure a strut to that effect. from a point on the outside of the seat S5. Test procedures. frame in the horizontal plane of cg1 to S5.1 Apply the forces specified in a point on the frame as far forward as S4.2(a) and S4.2(b) as follows: possible of the seat adjusted position. S5.1.1 For a seat whose seat back and Between the upper ends of the struts seat bench are attached to the vehicle by attach a rigid cross-member, in front of the same attachments. (a) For a seat the seat back frame for rearward load- whose seat back and seat bench are at- ing and behind the seat back frame for tached to the vehicle by the same at- forward loading. Find ‘‘cg2,’’ the center tachments and whose height is adjust- of gravity of the portion of the seat able, the loads are applied when the that is below the seat adjuster. Apply a seat is in its highest adjustment posi- force horizontally through cg1 equal to tion in accordance with the procedure 20 times the weight of the portion of or procedures specified in S5.1.1(a)(1), the seat represented by cg1, and simul- S5.1.1(a)(2), or S5.1.1(a)(3), as appro- taneously apply a force horizontally priate. through cg equal to 20 times the (1) For a seat whose center of gravity 2 weight of the portion of the seat rep- is in a horizontal plane that is above resented by cg . the seat adjuster or that passes 2 through any part of the adjuster, use, S5.1.2 If the seat back and the seat at the manufacturer’s option, either bench are attached to the vehicle by S5.1.1(b) or, if physically possible, different attachments, attach to each S5.1.1(c). component a fixture capable of trans- (2) For a seat specified in S5.1.1(a)(1) mitting a force to that component. for which it is not physically possible Apply forces, in newtons, equal to 20 to follow the procedure in S5.1.1(c), use times the mass of the seat back in kilo- 2 S5.1.1(b). grams multiplied by 9.8 m/s hori- (3) For a seat whose center of gravity zontally through the center of gravity is in a horizontal plane that is below of the seat back, as shown in Figure 2 the seat adjuster, use S5.1.1(c). and apply forces, in newtons, equal to (4) For all other seats whose seat 20 times the mass of the seat bench in back and seat bench are attached to kilograms multiplied by 9.8 m/s2 hori- the vehicle by the same attachments, zontally through the center of gravity use S5.1.1(b). of the seat bench, as shown in Figure 3. (b) Secure a strut on each side of the S5.2 Develop the moment specified seat from a point on the outside of the in S4.2(d) as shown in Figure 4. seat frame in the horizontal plane of S5.3 Apply the forces specified in the seat’s center of gravity to a point S4.3.2.1(a) and (b) to a hinged or folding on the frame as far forward as possible seat as shown in Figure 1 and to a of the seat anchorages. Between the hinged or folding seat back as shown in upper ends of the struts attach a rigid Figure 5. cross-member, in front of the seat back S5.4 Determine the center of gravity frame for rearward loading and behind of a seat or seat component with all the seat back frame for forward load- cushions and upholstery in place and ing. Apply the force specified by S4.2(a) with the head restraint in its fully ex- or S4.2(b) horizontally through the tended design position.

495

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00495 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.207 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

496

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00496 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.078 EC01AU91.079 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

[36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 52 FR 7868, Mar. 13, 1987; 53 FR 30434, Aug. 12, 1988; 59 FR 37167, July 21, 1994; 60 FR 13647, Mar. 14, 1995; 63 FR 28935, May 27, 1998]

§ 571.208 Standard No. 208; Occupant S2. Purpose. The purpose of this crash protection. standard is to reduce the number of S1. Scope. This standard specifies per- deaths of vehicle occupants, and the se- formance requirements for the protec- verity of injuries, by specifying vehicle tion of vehicle occupants in crashes. crashworthiness requirements in terms

497

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00497 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.080 EC01AU91.081 § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

of forces and accelerations measured (a) At each designated seating posi- on anthropomorphic dummies in test tion have a Type 1 seatbelt assembly or crashes, and by specifying equipment a Type 2 seatbelt assembly with a de- requirements for active and passive re- tachable upper torso portion that con- straint systems. forms to S7.1 and S7.2 of this standard; S3. Application. (a) This standard ap- (b) At each front outboard designated plies to passenger cars, multipurpose seating position, have a seat belt warn- passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses. ing system that conforms to S7.3; and In addition, S9, Pressure vessels and ex- (c) Meet the frontal crash protection plosive devices, applies to vessels de- requirements of S5.1, in a perpen- signed to contain a pressurized fluid or dicular impact, with respect to gas, and to explosive devices, for use in anthropomorphic test devices in each the above types of motor vehicles as front outboard designated seating posi- part of a system designed to provide tion restrained only by Type 1 seat belt protection to occupants in the event of assemblies. a crash. S4.1.1.3 Third option—lap and shoul- (b) Notwithstanding any language to der belt protection system with belt warn- the contrary, any vehicle manufac- ing. tured after March 19, 1997, and before S4.1.1.3.1 Except for convertibles September 1, 2006, that is subject to a and open-body vehicles, the vehicle dynamic crash test requirement con- shall— ducted with unbelted dummies may (a) At each front outboard designated meet the requirements specified in seating position have a Type 2 seatbelt S5.1.2(a)(1), S5.1.2(a)(2), or S13 instead assembly that conforms to § 571.209 and of the applicable unbelted requirement, S7.1 and S7.2 of this standard, with ei- unless the vehicle is certified to meet ther an integral or detachable upper the requirements specified in S14.5, torso portion, and a seatbelt warning S15, S17, S19, S21, S23, and S25. system that conforms to S7.3; (c) For vehicles which are certified to (b) At each designated seating posi- meet the requirements specified in S13 tion other than the front outboard po- instead of the otherwise applicable dy- sitions, have a Type 1 or Type 2 seat namic crash test requirement con- belt assembly that conforms to § 571.209 ducted with unbelted dummies, compli- and to S7.1 and S7.2 of this standard; ance with S13 shall, for purposes of and Standards No. 201, 203 and 209, be (c) When it perpendicularly impacts a deemed as compliance with the fixed collision barrier, while moving unbelted frontal barrier requirements longitudinally forward at any speed up of S5.1.2. to and including 30 m.p.h., under the S4. General requirements. test conditions of S8.1 with S4.1 Passenger cars. anthropomorphic test devices at each S4.1.1 Passenger cars manufactured front outboard position restrained by from January 1, 1972, to August 31, 1973. Type 2 seatbelt assemblies, experience Each passenger car manufactured from no complete separation of any load- January 1, 1972, to August 31, 1973, in- bearing element of a seatbelt assembly clusive, shall meet the requirements of or anchorage. S4.1.1.1, S4.1.1.2, or S4.1.1.3. A protec- S4.1.1.3.2 Convertibles and open- tion system that meets the require- body type vehicles shall at each des- ments of S4.1.1.1, or S4.1.1.2 may be in- ignated seating position have a Type 1 stalled at one or more designated seat- or Type 2 seatbelt assembly that con- ing positions of a vehicle that other- forms to § 571.209 and to S7.1 and S7.2 of wise meets the requirements of S4.1.1.3. this standard, and at each front out- S4.1.1.1 First option—complete passive board designated seating position have protection system. The vehicle shall a seatbelt warning system that con- meet the crash protection require- forms to S7.3. ments of S5. by means that require no S4.1.2 Passenger cars manufactured on action by vehicle occupants. or after September 1, 1973, and before Sep- S4.1.1.2 Second option—lap belt pro- tember 1, 1986. Each passenger car man- tection system with belt warning. The ve- ufactured on or after September 1, 1973, hicle shall— and before September 1, 1986, shall

498

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00498 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

meet the requirements of S4.1.2.1, (d) At each front outboard designated S4.1.2.2 or S4.1.2.3. A protection system seating position, have a seat belt warn- that meets the requirements of S4.1.2.1 ing system that conforms to S7.3. or S4.1.2.2 may be installed at one or S4.1.2.3 Third option—lap and shoul- more designated seating positions of a der belt protection system with belt warn- vehicle that otherwise meets the re- ing. quirements of S4.1.2.3. S4.1.2.3.1 Except for convertibles S4.1.2.1 First option—frontal/angular and open-body vehicles, the vehicle automatic protection system. The vehicle shall— shall: (a) At each front outboard designated (a) At each front outboard designated seating position have a seat belt as- seating position meet the frontal crash sembly that conforms to S7.1 and S7.2 protection requirements of S5.1 by of this standard, and a seat belt warn- means that require no action by vehi- ing system that conforms to S7.3. The cle occupants; belt assembly shall be either a Type 2 (b) At the front center designated seat belt assembly with a nondetach- seating position and at each rear des- able shoulder belt that conforms to ignated seating position have a Type 1 Standard No. 209 (§ 571.209), or a Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt assembly that con- seat belt assembly such that with a forms to Standard No. 209 and to S7.1 test device restrained by the assembly and S7.2; and the vehicle meets the frontal crash pro- (c) Either. (1) Meet the lateral crash tection requirements of S5.1 in a per- protection requirements of S5.2 and the pendicular impact. rollover crash protection requirements (b) At any center front designated of S5.3 by means that require no action seating position, have a Type 1 or Type by vehicle occupants; or 2 seat belt assembly that conforms to (2) At each front outboard designated Standard No. 209 (§ 571.209) and to S7.1 seating position have a Type 1 or Type and S7.2 of this standard, and a seat 2 seat belt assembly that conforms to belt warning system that conforms to Standard No. 209 and S7.1 through S7.3, S7.3; and and that meets the requirements of (c) At each other designated seating S5.1 with front test dummies as re- position, have a Type 1 or Type 2 seat quired by S5.1, restrained by the Type belt assembly that conforms to Stand- 1 or Type 2 seat belt assembly (or the ard No. 209 (§ 571.209) and S7.1 and S7.2 pelvic portion of any Type 2 seat belt of this standard. assembly which has a detachable upper S4.1.2.3.2 Convertibles and open- torso belt) in addition to the means body type vehicles shall at each des- that require no action by the vehicle ignated seating position have a Type 1 occupant. or Type 2 seat belt assembly that con- S4.1.2.2 Second option—head-on auto- forms to Standard No. 209 (§ 571.209) and matic protection system. The vehicle to S7.1 and S7.2 of this standard, and at shall— each front designated seating position (a) At each designated seating posi- have a seat belt warning system that tion have a Type 1 seat belt assembly conforms to S7.3. or Type 2 seat belt assembly with a de- S4.1.3 Passenger cars manufactured on tachable upper torso portion that con- or after September 1, 1986, and before Sep- forms to S7.1 and S7.2 of this standard. tember 1, 1989. (b) At each front outboard designated S4.1.3.1 Passenger cars manufactured seating position, meet the frontal on or after September 1, 1986, and before crash protecton requirements of S5.1, September 1, 1987. in a perpendicular impact, by means S4.1.3.1.1 Subject to S4.1.3.1.2 and that require no action by vehicle occu- S4.1.3.4, each passenger car manufac- pants; tured on or after September 1, 1986, and (c) At each front outboard designated before September 1, 1987, shall comply seating position, meet the frontal with the requirements of S4.1.2.1, crash protection requirements of S5.1, S4.1.2.2 or S4.1.2.3. A vehicle shall not in a perpendicular impact, with a test be deemed to be in noncompliance with device restrained by a Type 1 seat belt this standard if its manufacturer estab- assembly; and lishes that it did not have reason to

499

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00499 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

know in the exercise of due care that S4.1.3.3.1 Subject to S4.1.3.3.2 and such vehicle is not in conformity with S4.1.3.4, each passenger car manufac- the requirement of this standard. tured on or after September 1, 1988, and S4.1.3.1.2 Subject to S4.1.3.4 and before September 1, 1989, shall comply S4.1.5, the amount of passenger cars, with the requirements of S4.1.2.1, specified in S4.1.3.1.1 complying with S4.1.2.2 or S4.1.2.3. A vehicle shall not the requirements of S4.1.2.1 shall be be deemed to be in noncompliance with not less than 10 percent of: this standard if its manufacturer estab- (a) The average annual production of lishes that it did not have reason to passenger cars manufactured on or know in the exercise of due care that after September 1, 1983, and before Sep- such vehicle is not in conformity with tember 1, 1986, by each manufacturer, the requirement of this standard. or S4.1.3.3.2 Subject to S4.1.3.4 and (b) The manufacturer’s annual pro- S4.1.5, the amount of passenger cars duction of passenger cars during the specified in S4.1.3.3.1 complying with period specified in S4.1.3.1.1. the requirements of S4.1.2.1 shall be S4.1.3.1.3 A manufacturer may ex- not less than 40 percent of: clude convertibles which do not comply with the requirements of S4.1.2.1, when (a) The average annual production of it is calculating its average annual pro- passenger cars manufactured on or duction under S4.1.3.1.2(a) or its annual after September 1, 1985, and before Sep- production under S4.1.3.1.2(b). tember 1, 1988, by each manufacturer or S4.1.3.2 Passenger cars manufactured (b) The manufacturer’s annual pro- on or after September 1, 1987, and before duction of passenger cars during the September 1, 1988. period specified in S4.1.3.3.1. S4.1.3.2.1 Subject to S4.1.3.2.2 and S4.1.3.3.3 A manufacturer may ex- S4.1.3.4, each passenger car manufac- clude convertibles which do not comply tured on or after September 1, 1987, and with the requirements of S4.1.2.1, when before September 1, 1988, shall comply it is calculating its average annual pro- with the requirements of S4.1.2.1, duction under S4.1.3.3.2(a) or its annual S4.1.2.2 or S4.1.2.3. A vehicle shall not production under S4.1.3.3.2(b). be deemed to be in noncompliance with S4.1.3.4 Calculation of complying pas- this standard if its manufacturer estab- senger cars. (a) For the purposes of cal- lishes that it did not have reason to culating the numbers of cars manufac- know in the exercise of due care that tured under S4.1.3.1.2, S4.1.3.2.2, or such vehicle is not in conformity with S4.1.3.3.2 to comply with S4.1.2.1: the requirement of this standard. (1) Each car whose driver’s seating S4.1.3.2.2 Subject to S4.1.3.4 and position complies with the require- S4.1.5, the amount of passenger cars ments of S4.1.2.1(a) by means not in- specified in S4.1.3.2.1 complying with cluding any type of seat belt and whose the requirements of S4.1.2.1. shall be front right seating position will com- not less than 25 percent of: ply with the requirements of S4.1.2.1(a) (a) The average annual production of by any means is counted as 1.5 vehi- passenger cars manufactured on or cles, and after September 1, 1984, and before Sep- (2) Each car whose driver’s seating tember 1, 1987, by each manufacturer, position complies with the require- or ments of S4.1.2.1(a) by means not in- (b) The manufacturer’s annual pro- duction of passenger cars during the cluding any type of seat belt and whose period specified in S4.1.3.2.1. right front seat seating position is S4.1.3.2.3 A manufacturer may ex- equipped with a manual Type 2 seat clude convertibles which do not comply belt is counted as one vehicle. with the requirements of S4.1.2.1, when (b) For the purposes of complying it is calculating its average annual pro- with S4.1.3.1.2, a passenger car may be duction under S4.1.3.2.2(a) or its annual counted if it: production under S4.1.3.2.2(b). (1) Is manufactured on or after Sep- S4.1.3.3 Passenger cars manufactured tember 1, 1985, but before September 1, on or after September 1, 1988, and before 1986, and September 1, 1989. (2) Complies with S4.1.2.1.

500

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00500 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

(c) For the purposes of complying designated seating position complies with S4.1.3.2.2, a passenger car may be with the requirements of S4.1.2.1(a) by counted if it: means not including any type of seat (1) Is manufactured on or after Sep- belt and whose right front designated tember 1, 1985, but before September 1, seating position is equipped with a 1987, manual Type 2 seat belt so that the (2) Complies with S4.1.2.1, and seating position complies with the oc- (3) Is not counted toward compliance cupant crash protection requirements with S4.1.3.1.2 of S5.1, with the Type 2 seat belt as- (d) For the purposes of complying sembly adjusted in accordance with with S4.1.3.3.2, a passenger car may be S7.4.2, shall be counted as a vehicle counted if it: complying with S4.1.2.1. A vehicle shall (1) Is manufactured on or after Sep- not be deemed to be in noncompliance tember 1, 1985, but before September 1, with this standard if its manufacturer 1988, establishes that it did not know in the (2) Complies with S4.1.2.1, and exercise of due care that such vehicle is (3) Is not counted toward compliance not in conformity with this standard. with S4.1.3.1.2 or S4.1.3.2.2. S4.1.4.2 (a) Each passenger car, S4.1.3.5 Passenger cars produced by other than a convertible, manufactured more than one manufacturer. before December 11, 1989 may be S4.1.3.5.1 For the purposes of calcu- equipped with, and each passenger car, lating average annual production of other than a convertible, manufactured passenger cars for each manufacturer on or after December 11, 1989 and before and the amount of passenger cars man- September 1, 1990 shall be equipped ufactured by each manufacturer under with a Type 2 seat belt assembly at S4.1.3.1.2, S4.1.3.2.2 or S4.1.3.3.2, a pas- every forward-facing rear outboard des- senger car produced by more than one ignated seating position. Type 2 seat manufacturer shall be attributed to a belt assemblies installed pursuant to single manufacturer as follows, subject this provision shall comply with Stand- to S4.1.3.5.2: ard No. 209 (49 CFR 571.209) and with (a) A passenger car which is imported S7.1.1 of this standard. shall be attributed to the importer. (b) Except as provided in S4.1.4.2.1 (b) A passenger car manufactured in and S4.1.4.2.2, each passenger car, other the United States by more than one than a convertible, manufactured on or manufacturer, one of which also mar- after September 1, 1990 and each con- kets the vehicle, shall be attributed to vertible passenger car manufactured on the manufacturer which markets the or after September 1, 1991 shall be vehicle. equipped with an integral Type 2 seat S4.1.3.5.2 A passenger car produced belt assembly at every forward-facing by more than one manufacturer shall rear outboard designated seating posi- be attributed to any one of the vehi- tion. Type 2 seat belt assemblies in- cle’s manufacturers specified by an ex- stalled in compliance with this require- press written contract, reported to the ment shall comply with Standard No. National Highway Traffic Safety Ad- 209 (49 CFR 571.209) and with S7.1 an ministration under 49 CFR part 585, be- S7.2 of this standard. If a Type 2 seat tween the manufacturer so specified belt assembly installed in compliance and the manufacturer to which the ve- with this requirement incorporates any hicle would otherwise be attributed webbing tension-relieving device, the under S4.1.3.5.1. vehicle owner’s manual shall include S4.1.4 Passenger cars manufactured the information specified in S7.4.2(b) of on or after September 1, 1989, but be- this standard for the tension relieving fore September 1, 1996. device, and the vehicle shall comply S4.1.4.1 Except as provided in with S7.4.2(c) of this standard. S4.1.4.2, each passenger car manufac- (c) As used in this section, ‘‘rear out- tured on or after September 1, 1989 board designated seating position’’ shall comply with the requirements of means any ‘‘outboard designated seat- S4.1.2.1. Any passenger car manufac- ing position’’ (as that term is defined at tured on or after September 1, 1989 and 49 CFR 571.3) that is rearward of the before September 1, 1993 whose driver’s front seat(s), except any designated

501

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00501 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

seating position adjacent to a walkway rear designated seating positions that that is located between the seat and are not ‘‘rear outboard designated seat- the near side of the vehicle and is de- ing positions,’’ as that term is defined signed to allow access to more rear- at S4.1.4.2(c) of this standard, have a ward seating positions. Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt assembly S4.1.4.2.1 Any rear outboard des- that conforms to Standard No. 209 and ignated seating position with a seat S7.1 and S7.2 of this standard; and that can be adjusted to be forward-fac- (3) At each front designated seating ing and to face some other direction position that is an ‘‘outboard des- shall either: ignated seating position,’’ as that term (i) Meet the requirements of S4.1.4.2 is defined at 49 CFR 571.3, and at each with the seat in any position in which forward-facing rear designated seating it can be occupied while the vehicle is position that is a ‘‘rear outboard des- in motion; or ignated seating positions,’’ as that term (ii) When the seat is in its forward- is defined at S4.1.4.2(c) of this standard, facing position, have a Type 2 seat belt have a Type 2 seat belt assembly that assembly with an upper torso restraint conforms to Standard No. 209 and S7.1 that conforms to S7.1 and S7.2 of this through S7.3 of this standard, and, in standard and that adjusts by means of the case of the Type 2 seat belt assem- an emergency locking retractor that blies installed at the front outboard conforms with Standard No. 209 (49 designated seating positions, meet the CFR 571.209), which upper torso re- frontal crash protection requirements straint may be detachable at the buck- with the appropriate anthropomorphic le, and, when the seat is in any posi- test dummy restrained by the Type 2 tion in which it can be occupied while seat belt assembly in addition to the the vehicle is in motion, have a Type 1 means that requires no action by the seat belt or the pelvic portion of a vehicle occupant. Type 2 seat belt assembly that con- (b) For the purposes of sections S4.1.5 forms to S7.1 and S7.2 of this standard. through S4.1.5.3 and S4.2.6 through S4.1.4.2.2 Any rear outboard des- S4.2.6.2 of this standard, an inflatable ignated seating position on a readily restraint system means an air bag that is removable seat (that is, a seat designed activated in a crash. to be easily removed and replaced by S4.1.5.2 Passenger cars manufactured means installed by the manufacturer on or after September 1, 1996 and before for that purpose) in a vehicle manufac- September 1, 1997. tured on or after September 1, 1992 S4.1.5.2.1 The amount of passenger shall meet the requirements of S4.1.4.2 cars complying with the requirement and may use an upper torso belt that of S4.1.5.1(a)(1) by means of an inflat- detaches at either its upper or lower able restraint system at the driver’s anchorage points, but not both anchor- and right front passenger’s position age points, to meet those require- shall be not less than 95 percent of the ments. The means for detaching the manufacturer’s total production of pas- upper torso belt may use a pushbutton senger cars manufactured on or after action. September 1, 1996, and before Sep- S4.1.5 Passenger cars manufactured on tember 1, 1997. A vehicle shall not be or after September 1, 1996. deemed to be in noncompliance with S4.1.5.1 Frontal/angular automatic this standard if its manufacturer estab- protection system. (a) Each passenger lishes that it did not have reason to car manufactured on or after Sep- know in the exercise of due care that tember 1, 1996 shall: such vehicle is not in conformity with (1) At each front outboard designated the requirement of this standard. seating position meet the frontal crash S4.1.5.2.2 Passenger cars produced by protection requirements of S5.1 by more than one manufacturer. means that require no action by vehi- S4.1.5.2.2.1 For the purpose of calcu- cle occupants; lating the production of passenger cars (2) At any front designated seating by each manufacturer during the pe- positions that are not ‘‘outboard des- riod specified in S4.1.5.2, a passenger ignated seating positions,’’ as that term car produced by more than one manu- is defined at 49 CFR 571.3, and at any facturer shall be attributed to a single

502

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00502 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

manufacturer as follows, subject to ing accommodation to enable persons S4.1.5.2.2.2: who have limited use of their arms or (a) A passenger car that is imported legs to operate a vehicle. For purposes into the United States shall be attrib- of this definition, special driver seating uted to the importer. accommodations include a driver’s seat (b) A passenger car manufactured easily removable with means installed within the United States by more than for that purpose or with simple tools, one manufacturer, one of which also or a driver’s seat with extended adjust- markets the vehicle, shall be attrib- ment capability to allow a person to uted to the manufacturer that markets easily transfer from a wheelchair to the vehicle. the driver’s seat. S4.1.5.2.2.2 A passenger car produced S4.2.1 Trucks and multipurpose pas- by more than one manufacturer shall senger vehicles with a GVWR of 10,000 be attributed to any one of the vehi- pounds or less, manufactured on or after cle’s manufacturers, as specified in an January 1, 1976 and before September 1, express written contract, reported to 1991. Each truck and multipurpose pas- the National Highway Traffic Safety senger vehicle, with a gross vehicle Administration pursuant to part 585 of weight rating of 10,000 pounds or less, this chapter, between the manufac- manufactured before September 1, 1991, turer so specified and the manufacturer shall meet the requirements of S4.1.2.1, to which the vehicle otherwise would or at the option of the manufacturer, be attributed, pursuant to S4.1.5.2.2.1. S4.1.2.2 or S4.1.2.3 (as specified for pas- S4.1.5.3 Passenger cars manufactured senger cars), except that forward con- on or after September 1, 1997. Each pas- trol vehicles manufactured prior to senger car manufactured on or after September 1, 1981, convertibles, open- September 1, 1997 shall comply with body type vehicles, walk-in van-type the requirement of S4.1.5.1(a)(1) by trucks, motor homes, vehicles designed means of an inflatable restraint system to be exclusively sold to the U.S. Post- at the driver’s and right front pas- al Service, and vehicles carrying chas- senger’s position. A vehicle shall not be sis-mount campers may instead meet deemed to be in noncompliance with the requirements of S4.2.1.1 or S4.2.1.2. this standard if its manufacturer estab- S4.2.1.1 First option—complete auto- lishes that it did not have reason to matic protection system. The vehicle know in the exercise of due care that shall meet the crash protection re- such vehicle is not in conformity with quirements of S5 by means that require the requirement of this standard. no action by vehicle occupants. S4.1.5.4 Passenger cars certified to S14. S4.2.1.2 Second option—belt system. Each passenger car certified to S14 The vehicle shall have seat belt assem- shall, at each front outboard des- blies that conform to Standard 209 (49 ignated seating position, meet the ap- CFR 571.209) installed as follows: plicable frontal crash protection re- (a) A Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt as- quirements of S5.1.2(b) by means of an sembly shall be installed for each des- inflatable restraint system that re- ignated seating position in quires no action by vehicle occupants. convertibles, open-body type vehicles, S4.2 Trucks and multipurpose pas- and walk-in van-type trucks. senger vehicles with a GVWR of 10,000 (b) In vehicles manufactured for op- pounds or less. As used in this section, eration by persons with disabilities, a vehicles manufactured for operation by Type 2 or Type 2A seat belt assembly persons with disabilities means vehicles shall be installed for the driver’s seat- that incorporate a level change device ing position, a Type 2 seat belt assem- (e.g., a wheelchair lift or a ramp) for bly shall be installed for each other onloading or offloading an occupant in outboard designated seating position a wheelchair, an interior element of de- that includes the windshield header sign intended to provide the vertical within the head impact area, and a clearance necessary to permit a person Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt assembly in a wheelchair to move between the shall be installed for each other des- lift or ramp and the driver’s position or ignated seating position. to occupy that position, and either an (c) In all vehicles except those for adaptive control or special driver seat- which requirements are specified in

503

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00503 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S4.2.1.2 (a) or (b), a Type 2 seat belt as- signed to be exclusively sold to the sembly shall be installed for each out- U.S. Postal Service, and vehicles car- board designated seating position that rying chassis-mount campers may in- includes the windshield header within stead meet the requirements of S4.2.1.1 the head impact area, and a Type 1 or or S4.2.1.2. Type 2 seat belt assembly shall be in- S4.2.4 Rear outboard seating positions stalled for each other designated seat- in trucks and multipurpose passenger ve- ing position. hicles manufactured on or after September S4.2.2 Trucks and multipurpose pas- 1, 1991 with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or senger vehicles with a GVWR of 8,500 less. Except as provided in S4.2.4.2 and pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle S4.2.4.3, each truck and each multipur- weight of 5,500 pounds or less, manufac- pose passenger vehicle, other than a tured on or after September 1, 1991 and motor home, manufactured on or after before September 1, 1997. Except as pro- September 1, 1991 that has a gross vehi- vided in S4.2.4, each truck and multi- cle weight rating of 10,000 pounds or purpose passenger vehicle, with a gross vehicle weight rating of 8,500 pounds or less shall be equipped with an integral less and an unloaded vehicle weight of Type 2 seat belt assembly at every for- 5,500 pounds or less, manufactured on ward-facing rear outboard designated or after September 1, 1991 and before seating position. Type 2 seat belt as- September 1, 1997, shall meet the re- semblies installed in compliance with quirements of S4.1.2.1, or at the option this requirement shall comply with of the manufacturer, S4.1.2.2 or S4.1.2.3 Standard No. 209 (49 CFR 571.209) and (as specified for passenger cars), except with S7.1 and S7.2 of this standard. If a that convertibles, open-body type vehi- Type 2 seat belt assembly installed in cles, walk-in van-type trucks, motor compliance with this requirement in- homes, vehicles designed to be exclu- corporates any webbing tension-reliev- sively sold to the U.S. Postal Service, ing device, the vehicle owner’s manual vehicles carrying chassis-mount camp- shall include the information specified ers, and vehicles manufactured for op- in S7.4.2(b) of this standard for the ten- eration by persons with disabilities sion relieving device, and the vehicle may instead meet the requirements of shall comply with S7.4.2(c) of this S4.2.1.1 or S4.2.1.2. Each Type 2 seat standard. belt assembly installed in a front out- S4.2.4.1 As used in this section— board designated seating position in (a) Motor home means a motor vehicle accordance with S4.1.2.3 shall meet the with motive power that is designed to requirements of S4.6. provide temporary residential accom- S4.2.3 Trucks and multipurpose pas- modations, as evidenced by the pres- senger vehicles manufactured on or after ence of at least four of the following fa- September 1, 1991 with either a GVWR or cilities: cooking; refrigeration or ice more than 8,500 pounds but not greater box; self-contained toilet; heating and/ than 10,000 pounds or with an unloaded or air conditioning; a potable water vehicle weight greater than 5,500 pounds supply system including a faucet and a and a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less. Ex- cept as provided in S4.2.4, each truck sink; and a separate 110–125 volt elec- and multipurpose passenger vehicle trical power supply and/or an LP gas manufactured on or after September 1, supply. 1991, that has either a gross vehicle (b) Rear outboard designated seating weight rating which is greater than position means any ‘‘outboard des- 8,500 pounds, but not greater than ignated seating position’’ (as that term 10,000 pounds, or has an unloaded vehi- is defined at 49 CFR 571.3) that is rear- cle weight greater than 5,500 pounds ward of the front seat(s), except any and a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, designated seating positions adjacent shall meet the requirements of S4.1.2.1, to a walkway located between the seat or at the option of the manufacturer, and the side of the vehicle, which walk- S4.1.2.2 or S4.1.2.3 (as specified for pas- way is designed to allow access to more senger cars), except that convertibles, rearward seating positions. open-body type vehicles, walk-in van- S4.2.4.2 Any rear outboard des- type trucks, motor homes, vehicles de- ignated seating position with a seat

504

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00504 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

that can be adjusted to be forward-fac- or after September 1, 1994 and before ing and to face some other direction September 1, 1995, shall comply with shall either: the requirements of S4.1.2.1, S4.1.2.2, or (i) Meet the requirements of S4.2.4 S4.1.2.3 (as specified for passenger with the seat in any position in which cars). A vehicle shall not be deemed to it can be occupied while the vehicle is be in noncompliance with this standard in motion; or if its manufacturer establishes that it (ii) When the seat is in its forward- did not have reason to know in the ex- facing position, have a Type 2 seat belt ercise of due care that such vehicle is assembly with an upper torso restraint not in conformity with the require- that conforms to S7.1 and S7.2 of this ment of standard. standard and that adjusts by means of S4.2.5.1.2 Subject to S4.2.5.5, the an emergency locking retractor that amount of trucks, buses, and multipur- conforms with Standard No. 209 (49 pose passenger vehicles specified in CFR 571.209), which upper torso re- S4.2.5.1.1 complying with S4.1.2.1 (as straint may be detachable at the buck- specified for passenger cars) shall be le, and, when the seat is in any posi- not less than 20 percent of: tion in which it can be occupied while (a) The average annual production of the vehicle is in motion, have a Type 1 trucks, buses, and multipurpose pas- seat belt or the pelvic portion of a senger vehicles with a GVWR of 8,500 Type 2 seat belt assembly that con- pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle forms to S7.1 and S7.2 of this standard. weight of 5,500 pounds or less manufac- S4.2.4.3 Any rear outboard designated tured on or after September 1, 1991, and seating position on a readily removable before September 1, 1994, by each man- seat (that is, a seat designed to be eas- ufacturer that produced such vehicles ily removed and replaced by means in- during each of those annual production stalled by the manufacturer for that periods, or purpose) in a vehicle manufactured on (b) The manufacturer’s total produc- or after September 1, 1992 shall meet tion of trucks, buses, and multipurpose the requirements of S4.2.4 and may use passenger vehicle with a GVWR of 8,500 an upper torso belt that detaches at ei- pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle ther its upper or lower anchorage weight of 5,500 pounds or less during point, but not both anchorage points, the period specified in S4.2.5.1.1. to meet those requirements. The means S4.2.5.2 Trucks, buses, and multipur- for detaching the upper torso belt may pose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of use a pushbutton action. 8,500 pounds or less and an unloaded ve- S4.2.5 Trucks, buses, and multipurpose hicle weight of 5,500 pounds or less manu- passenger vehicles with a GVWR of 8,500 factured on or after September 1, 1995 and pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle before September 1, 1996. weight of 5,500 pounds or less manufac- S4.2.5.2.1 Subject to S4.2.5.2.2 and tured on or after September 1, 1994, and S4.2.5.5 and except as provided in S4.2.4, before September 1, 1997. each truck, bus, and multipurpose pas- S4.2.5.1 Trucks, buses, and multipur- senger vehicle, other than walk-in van- pose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of type trucks, vehicles designed to be ex- 8,500 pounds or less and an unloaded ve- clusively sold to the U.S. Postal Serv- hicle weight of 5,500 pounds or less manu- ice, and vehicles manufactured for op- factured on or after September 1, 1994, eration by persons with disabilities, and before September 1, 1995. with a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or less S4.2.5.1.1 Subject to S4.2.5.1.2 and and an unloaded vehicle weight of 5,500 S4.2.5.5 and except as provided in S4.2.4, pounds or less that is manufactured on each truck, bus and multipurpose pas- or after September 1, 1995 and before senger vehicle, other than walk-in van- September 1, 1996, shall comply with type trucks, vehicles designed to be ex- the requirements of S4.1.2.1, S4.1.2.2, or clusively sold to the U.S. Postal Serv- S4.1.2.3 (as specified for passenger ice, and vehicles manufactured for op- cars). A vehicle shall not be deemed to eration by persons with disabilities, be in noncompliance with this standard with a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or less if its manufacturer establishes that it and an unloaded vehicle weight of 5,500 did not have reason to know in the ex- pounds or less that is manufactured on ercise of due care that such vehicle is

505

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00505 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

not in conformity with the require- (a) The average annual production of ment of this standard. trucks, buses, and multipurpose pas- S4.2.5.2.2 Subject to S4.2.5.5, the senger vehicles with a GVWR of 8,500 amount of trucks, buses, and multipur- pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle pose passenger vehicles specified in weight of 5,500 pounds or less manufac- S4.2.5.2.1 complying with S4.1.2.1 (as tured on or after September 1, 1993, and specified for passenger cars) shall be before September 1, 1996, by each man- not less than 50 percent of: ufacturer that produced such vehicles (a) The average annual production of during each of those annual production trucks, buses, and multipurpose pas- periods, or senger vehicles with a GVWR of 8,500 (b) The manufacturer’s total produc- pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle tion of trucks, buses, and multipurpose weight of 5,500 pounds or less manufac- passenger vehicles with a GVWR of tured on or after September 1, 1992, and 8,500 pounds or less and an unloaded ve- before September 1, 1995, by each man- hicle weight of 5,500 pounds or less dur- ufacturer that produced such vehicles ing the period specified in S4.2.5.3.1. during each of those annual production S4.2.5.4 Alternative phase-in schedule. periods, or A manufacturer may, at its option, (b) The manufacturer’s total produc- comply with the requirements of this tion of trucks, buses, and multipurpose section instead of complying with the requirements set forth in S4.2.5.1, passenger vehicles with a GVWR of S4.2.5.2, and S4.2.5.3. 8,500 pounds or less and an unloaded ve- (a) Except as provided in S4.2.4, each hicle weight of 5,500 pounds or less dur- truck, bus, and multipurpose passenger ing the period specified in S4.2.5.2.1. vehicle, other than walk-in van-type S4.2.5.3 Trucks, buses, and multipur- trucks, vehicles designed to be exclu- pose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of sively sold to the U.S. Postal Service, 8,500 pounds or less and an unloaded ve- and vehicles manufactured for oper- hicle weight of 5,500 pounds or less manu- ation by persons with disabilities, with factured on or after September 1, 1996 and a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or less and an before September 1, 1997. unloaded vehicle weight of 5,500 pounds S4.2.5.3.1 Subject to S4.2.5.3.2 and or less that is manufactured on or after S4.2.5.5 and except as provided in S4.2.4, September 1, 1994 and before September each truck, bus, and multipurpose pas- 1, 1995 shall comply with the require- senger vehicle, other than walk-in van- ments of S4.1.2.1, S4.1.2.2, or S4.1.2.3 (as type trucks, vehicles designed to be ex- specified for passenger cars). clusively sold to the U.S. Postal Serv- (b) Except as provided in S4.2.4, each ice, and vehicles manufactured for op- truck, bus, and multipurpose passenger eration by persons with disabilities, vehicle, other than walk-in van-tape with a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or less trucks, vehicles designed to be exclu- and an unloaded vehicle weight of 5,500 sively sold to the U.S. Postal Service, pounds or less that is manufactured on and vehicles manufactured for oper- or after September 1, 1996 and before ation by persons with disabilities, with September 1, 1997, shall comply with a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or less and an the requirements of S4.1.2.1, S4.1.2.2, or unloaded vehicle weight of 5,500 pounds S4.1.2.3 (as specified for passenger or less that is manufactured on or after cars). A vehicle shall not be deemed to September 1, 1995 shall comply with be in noncompliance with this standard the requirements of S4.1.2.1 (as speci- if its manufacturer establishes that it fied for passenger cars) of this stand- did not have reason to know in the ex- ard. A vehicle shall not be deemed to ercise of due care that such vehicle is be in noncompliance with this standard not in conformity with the require- if its manufacturer establishes that it ment of this standard. did not have reason to know in the ex- S4.2.5.3.2 Subject to S4.2.5.5, the ercise of due care that such vehicle is amount of trucks, buses, and multipur- not in conformity with the require- pose passenger vehicles specified in ment of this standard. S4.2.5.3.1 complying with S4.1.2.1 (as (c) Each truck, bus, and multipurpose specified for passenger cars) shall be passenger vehicle with a GVWR of 8,500 not less than 90 percent of: pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle

506

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00506 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

weight of 5,500 pounds or less manufac- viously been certified in accordance tured on or after September 1, 1995, but with part 567 of this chapter is not sub- before September 1, 1998, whose driver’s ject to the requirements of S4.2.5.1.2, seating position complies with the re- S4.2.5.2.2, and S4.2.5.3.2. Such vehicles quirements of S4.1.2.1(a) of this stand- may be excluded from all calculations ard by means not including any type of of compliance with S4.2.5.1.2, S4.2.5.2.2, seat belt and whose right front pas- and S4.2.5.3.2. senger’s seating position is equipped (b) For the purposes of complying with a manual Type 2 seat belt that with S4.2.5.1.2, a truck, bus, or multi- complies with S5.1 of this standard, purpose passenger vehicle with a with the seat belt assembly adjusted in GVWR of 8,500 pounds or less and an accordance with S7.4.2, shall be count- unloaded vehicle weight of 5,500 pounds ed as a vehicle complying with S4.1.2.1. or less may be counted if it: S4.2.5.5 Calculation of complying (1) Is manufactured on or after Sep- trucks, buses, and multipurpose passenger tember 1, 1992, but before September 1, vehicles with a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or 1994, and less and an unloaded vehicle weight of (2) Is certified as complying with 5,500 pounds or less. S4.1.2.1 (as specified for passenger (a) For the purposes of the calcula- cars). tions required in S4.2.5.1.2, S4.2.5.2.2, (c) For the purposes of complying and S4.2.5.3.2 of the number of trucks, with S4.2.5.2.2, a truck, bus, or multi- buses, and multipurpose passenger ve- purpose passenger vehicle with a hicles with a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or GVWR of 8,500 pounds or less and an less and an unloaded vehicle weight of unloaded vehicle weight of 5,500 pounds 5,500 pounds or less that comply with or less may be counted if it: S4.1.2.1 (as specified for passenger (1) Is manufactured on or after Sep- cars): tember 1, 1992, but before September 1, (1) Each truck, bus, and multipurpose 1995, passenger vehicle with a GVWR of 8,500 (2) Is certified as complying with pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle S4.1.2.1 (as specified for passenger weight of 5,500 pounds or less whose cars), and driver’s seating position complies with (3) Is not counted toward compliance the requirements of S4.1.2.1(a) by with S4.2.5.1.2. means not including any type of seat (d) For the purposes of complying belt and whose front right seating posi- with S4.2.5.3.2, a truck, bus, or multi- tion complies with the requirements of purpose passenger vehicle with a S4.1.2.1(a) by any means is counted as GVWR of 8,500 pounds or less and an 1.5 vehicles, and unloaded vehicle weight of 5,500 pounds (2) Each truck, bus, and multipurpose or less may be counted if it: passenger vehicle with a GVWR of 8,500 (1) Is manufactured on or after Sep- pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle tember 1, 1992, but before September 1, weight of 5,500 pounds or less whose 1996, driver’s seating position complies with (2) Is certified as complying with the requirements of S4.1.2.1(a) by S4.1.2.1 (as specified for passenger means not including any type of seat cars), and belt and whose right front passenger’s (3) Is not counted toward compliance seating position is equipped with a with S4.2.5.1.2 or S4.2.5.2.2. manual Type 2 seat belt that complies S4.2.5.6 Trucks, buses, and multipur- with S5.1 of this standard, with the pose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of seat belt assembly adjusted in accord- 8,500 pounds or less and an unloaded ve- ance with S7.4.2, is counted as one ve- hicle weight of 5,500 pounds or less pro- hicle. duced by more than one manufacturer. (3) Each truck, bus, and multipurpose S4.2.5.6.1 For the purposes of calcu- passenger vehicle with a GVWR of 8,500 lating average annual production for pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle each manufacturer and the amount of weight of 5,500 pounds or less that is vehicles manufactured by each manu- manufactured in two or more stages or facturer under S4.2.5.1.2, S4.2.5.2.2, or that is altered (within the meaning of S4.2.5.3.2, a truck, bus, or multipurpose § 567.7 of this chapter) after having pre- passenger vehicle with a GVWR of 8,500

507

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00507 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle tured on or after September 1, 1997 and weight of 5,500 pounds or less produced before September 1, 1998. Each truck, by more than one manufacturer shall bus, or multipurpose passenger vehicle be attributed to a single manufacturer with a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or less as follows, subject to S4.2.5.6.2: and an unloaded vehicle weight of 5,500 (a) A vehicle that is imported shall pounds or less manufactured on or be attributed to the importer. after September 1, 1997 and before Sep- (b) A vehicle that is manufactured in tember 1, 1998, whose driver’s seating the United States by more than one position complies with S4.1.5.1(a)(1) by manufacturer, one of which also mar- means of an inflatable restraint system kets the vehicle, shall be attributed to and whose right front passenger’s seat- the manufacturer that markets the ve- ing position is equipped with a manual hicle. Type 2 seat belt assembly that com- S4.2.5.6.2 A truck, bus, or multipur- plies with S5.1 of this standard, with pose passenger vehicle with, GVWR of the seat belt assembly adjusted in ac- 8,500 pounds or less and an unloaded ve- cordance with S7.4.2 of this standard, hicle weight of 5,500 pounds or less pro- shall be counted as a vehicle complying duced by more than one manufacturer with S4.1.5.1(a)(1) by means of an in- shall be attributed to any one of the flatable restraint system. A vehicle vehicle’s manufacturers specified in an shall not be deemed to be in non- express written contract, reported to compliance with this standard if its the National Highway Traffic Safety manufacturer establishes that it did Administration under 49 CFR part 585, not have reason to know in the exer- between the manufacturer so specified cise of due care that such vehicle is not and the manufacturer to which the ve- in conformity with the requirement of hicle would otherwise be attributed this standard. under S4.2.5.6.1 of this standard. S4.2.6.1.2 Trucks, buses, and multipur- S4.2.6 Trucks, buses, and multipurpose pose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of passenger vehicles with a GVWR of 8,500 8,500 pounds or less and an unloaded ve- pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle hicle weight of 5,500 pounds or less pro- weight of 5,500 pounds or less manufac- duced by more than one manufacturer. tured on or after September 1, 1997. Each S4.2.6.1.2.1 For the purpose of calcu- truck, bus, and multipurpose passenger lating the production by each manufac- vehicle with a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or turer during the period specified in less and an unloaded vehicle weight of S4.2.6.1.1, a truck, bus, or multipurpose 5,500 pounds or less, which is manufac- passenger vehicle with a GVWR of 8,500 tured on or after September 1, 1997, shall comply with the requirements of pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle S4.1.5.1 of this standard (as specified weight of 5,500 pounds or less produced for passenger cars), except that walk-in by more than one manufacturer shall van-type trucks and vehicles designed be attributed to a single manufacturer to be sold exclusively to the U.S. Post- as follows, subject to S4.2.6.1.2.2: al Service may meet the requirements (a) A vehicle that is imported into of S4.2.1.1 or S4.2.1.2 of this standard the United States shall be attributed instead of the requirements of S4.1.5.1. to the importer. S4.2.6.1 Trucks, buses, and multipur- (b) A vehicle manufactured within pose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of the United States by more than one 8,500 pounds or less and an unloaded ve- manufacturer, one of which also mar- hicle weight of 5,500 pounds or less manu- kets the vehicle, shall be attributed to factured on or after September 1, 1997 and the manufacturer that markets the ve- before September 1, 1998. hicle. S4.2.6.1.1 The amount of trucks, S4.2.6.1.2.2 A truck, bus, or multi- buses, and multipurpose passenger ve- purpose passenger vehicle produced by hicles complying with the require- more than one manufacturer shall be ments of S4.1.5.1(a)(1) of this standard attributed to any one of the vehicle’s by means of an inflatable restraint sys- manufacturers, as specified in an ex- tem shall be not less than 80 percent of press written contract, reported to the the manufacturer’s total combined pro- National Highway Traffic Safety Ad- duction of subject vehicles manufac- ministration pursuant to part 585 of

508

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00508 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

this chapter, between the manufac- quirements of S5 by means that require turer so specified and the manufacturer no action by vehicle occupants. to which the vehicle otherwise would S4.3.1.2 Second option—belt system. be attributed, pursuant to S4.2.6.1.2.1. The vehicle shall, at each designated S4.2.6.2 Trucks, buses, and multipur- seating position, have either a Type 1 pose passenger vehicles with a GVWR of or a Type 2 seat belt assembly that 8,500 pounds or less and an unloaded ve- conforms to S571.209. hicle weight of 5,500 pounds or less manu- S4.3.2 Trucks and multipurpose pas- factured on or after September 1, 1998. senger vehicles with a GVWR of more Each truck, bus, or multipurpose vehi- than 10,000 pounds, manufactured on or cle with a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or less after September 1, 1990. Each truck and and an unloaded vehicle weight of 5,500 multipurpose passenger vehicle with a pounds or less manufactured on or gross vehicle weight rating of more after September 1, 1998 shall comply than 10,000 pounds, manufactured on or with the requirement of S4.1.5.1(a)(1) after September 1, 1990, shall meet the by means of an inflatable restraint sys- requirements of S4.3.2.1 or S4.3.2.2. A tem at the driver’s and right front pas- protection system that meets the re- senger’s position. A vehicle shall not be quirements of S4.3.2.1 may be installed deemed to be in noncompliance with at one or more designated seating posi- this standard if its manufacturer estab- tions of a vehicle that otherwise meets lishes that it did not have reason to the requirements of S4.3.2.2. know in the exercise of due care that S4.3.2.1 First option—complete pas- such vehicle is not in conformity with senger protection system. The vehicle the requirement of this standard. shall meet the crash protection re- S4.2.6.3 Trucks, buses, and multipur- quirements of S5 by means that require pose passenger vehicles certified to S14. no action by vehicle occupants. Each truck, bus, or multipurpose pas- S4.3.2.2 Second option—belt system. senger vehicle with a GVWR of 3,855 kg The vehicle shall, at each designated (8,500 lb) or less and an unloaded vehi- seating position, have either a Type 1 cle weight of 2,495 kg (5,500 lb) or less or a Type 2 seat belt assembly that certified to S14 shall, at each front out- conforms to § 571.209 of this part and board designated seating position, S7.2 of this Standard. A Type 1 belt as- meet the applicable frontal crash pro- sembly or the pelvic portion of a dual tection requirements of S5.1.2(b) by retractor Type 2 belt assembly in- means of an inflatable restraint system stalled at a front outboard seating po- that requires no action by vehicle oc- sition shall include either an emer- cupants. gency locking retractor or an auto- S4.3 Trucks and multipurpose pas- matic locking retractor. If a seat belt senger vehicles, with GVWR of more than assembly installed at a front outboard 10,000 pounds. seating position includes an automatic S4.3.1 Trucks and multipurpose pas- locking retractor for the lap belt or the senger vehicles with a GVWR of more lap belt portion, that seat belt assem- than 10,000 pounds, manufactured in or bly shall comply with the following: after January 1, 1972 and before Sep- (a) An automatic locking retractor tember 1, 1990. Each truck and multi- used at a front outboard seating posi- purpose passenger vehicle with a gross tion that has some type of suspension vehicle weight rating of more than system for the seat shall be attached to 10,000 pounds, manufactured on or after the seat structure that moves as the January 1, 1972 and before September 1, suspension system functions. 1990, shall meet the requirements of (b) The lap belt or lap belt portion of S4.3.1.1 or S4.3.1.2. A protection system a seat belt assembly equipped with an that meets the requirements of S4.3.1.1 automatic locking retractor that is in- may be installed at one or more des- stalled at a front outboard seating po- ignated seating positions of a vehicle sition must allow at least 3⁄4 inch, but that otherwise meets the requirements less than 3 inches, of webbing move- of S4.3.1.2. ment before retracting webbing to the S4.3.1.1 First option—complete pas- next locking position. senger protection system. The vehicle (c) Compliance with S4.3.2.2(b) of this shall meet the crash protection re- standard is determined as follows:

509

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00509 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(1) The seat belt assembly is buckled ing position, by means that require no and the retractor end of the seat belt action by vehicle occupants. assembly is anchored to a horizontal S4.4.2.2 Second option—belt system— surface. The webbing for the lap belt or driver only. The vehicle shall, at the lap belt portion of the seat belt assem- driver’s designated seating position, bly is extended to 75 percent of its have either a Type 1 or a Type 2 seat length and the retractor is locked after belt assembly that conforms to § 571.209 the initial adjustment. of this part and S7.2 of this Standard. A (2) A load of 20 pounds is applied to Type 1 belt assembly or the pelvic por- the free end of the lap belt or the lap tion of a dual retractor Type 2 belt as- belt portion of the belt assembly (i.e., sembly installed at the driver’s seating the end that is not anchored to the hor- position shall include either an emer- izontal surface) in the direction away gency locking retractor or an auto- from the retractor. The position of the matic locking retractor. If a seat belt free end of the belt assembly is re- assembly installed at the driver’s seat- corded. ing position includes an automatic (3) Within a 30 second period, the 20 locking retractor for the lap belt or the pound load is slowly decreased, until lap belt portion, that seat belt assem- the retractor moves to the next lock- bly shall comply with the following: ing position. The position of the free (a) An automatic locking retractor end of the belt assembly is recorded used at a driver’s seating position that again. has some type of suspension system for the seat shall be attached to the seat (4) The difference between the two structure that moves as the suspension positions recorded for the free end of system functions. the belt assembly shall be at least 3⁄4 (b) The lap belt or lap belt portion of inch but less than 3 inches. a seat belt assembly equipped with an S4.4 Buses. automatic locking retractor that is in- S4.4.1 Buses manufactured on or after stalled at the driver’s seating position January 1, 1972 and before September 1, must allow at least 3⁄4 inch, but less 1990. Each bus manufactured on or than 3 inches, of webbing movement after January 1, 1972 and before Sep- before retracting webbing to the next tember 1, 1990, shall meet the require- locking position. ments of S4.4.1.1 or S4.4.1.2. (c) Compliance with S4.4.2.2(b) of this S4.4.1.1 First option—complete pas- standard is determined as follows: senger protection system—driver only. (1) The seat belt assembly is buckled The vehicle shall meet the crash pro- and the retractor end of the seat belt tection requirements of S5, with re- assembly is anchored to a horizontal spect to an anthropomorphic test surface. The webbing for the lap belt or dummy in the driver’s designated seat- lap belt portion of the seat belt assem- ing position, by means that require no bly is extended to 75 percent of its action by vehicle occupants. length and the retractor is locked after S4.4.1.2 Second option—belt system— the initial adjustment. driver only. The vehicle shall, at the (2) A load of 20 pounds is applied to driver’s designated seating position, the free end of the lap belt or the lap have either a Type 1 or a Type 2 seat belt portion of the belt assembly (i.e., belt assembly that conforms to the end that is not anchored to the hor- S571.209. izontal surface) in the direction away S4.4.2 Buses manufactured on or after from the retractor. The position of the September 1, 1990. Each bus manufac- free end of the belt assembly is re- tured on or after September 1, 1990, corded. shall meet the requirements of S4.4.2.1 (3) Within a 30 second period, the 20 or S4.4.2.2. pound load is slowly decreased, until S4.4.2.1 First option—complete pas- the retractor moves to the next lock- senger protection system—driver only. ing position. The position of the free The vehicle shall meet the crash pro- end of the belt assembly is recorded tection requirements of S5, with re- again. spect to an anthropomorphic test (4) The difference between the two dummy in the driver’s designated seat- positions recorded for the free end of

510

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00510 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

the belt assembly shall be at least 3⁄4 conforms with Standard No. 209 (49 inch but less than 3 inches. CFR 571.209), which upper torso re- S4.4.3 Buses manufactured on or after straint may be detachable at the buck- September 1, 1991. le, and, when the seat is in any posi- S4.4.3.1 Each bus with a gross vehi- tion in which it can be occupied while cle weight rating of more than 10,000 the vehicle is in motion, have a Type 1 pounds shall comply with the require- seat belt or the pelvic portion of a ments S4.4.2.1 or S4.4.2.2. Type 2 seat belt assembly that con- S4.4.3.2 Except as provided in forms to S7.1 and S7.2 of this standard. S4.4.3.2.2 and S4.4.3.2.3, each bus with a S4.4.3.2.3 Any rear outboard des- gross vehicle weight rating of 10,000 ignated seating position on a readily pounds or less, except a school bus, removable seat (that is, a seat designed shall be equipped with an integral Type to be easily removed and replaced by 2 seat belt assembly at the driver’s des- means installed by the manufacturer ignated seating position and at the for that purpose) in a vehicle manufac- front and every rear forward-facing tured on or after September 1, 1992 outboard designated seating position, shall meet the requirements of S4.4.3.2 and with a Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt and may use an upper torso belt that assembly at all other designated seat- detaches at either its upper or lower ing positions. Type 2 seat belt anchorage point, but not both anchor- asemblies installed in compliance with age points, to meet those require- this requirement shall comply with ments. The means for detaching the Standard No. 209 (49 CFR 571.209) and upper torso belt may use a pushbutton with S7.1 and S7.2 of this standard. If a action. Type 2 seat belt assembly installed in S4.4.3.3 Each school bus with a gross compliance with this requirement in- vehicle weight rating of 10,000 pounds corporates any webbing tension-reliev- or less shall be equipped with an inte- ing device, the vehicle owner’s manual gral Type 2 seat belt assembly at the shall include the information specified driver’s designated seating position in S7.4.2(b) of this standard for the ten- and at the right front passenger’s des- sion relieving device, and the vehicle ignated seating position (if any), and shall comply with S7.4.2(c) of this with a Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt as- standard. sembly at all other designated seating S4.4.3.2.1 As used in this section, a positions. Type 2 seat belt assemblies ‘‘rear outboard designated position’’ installed in compliance with this re- means any ‘‘outboard designated seat- quirement shall comply with Standard ing position’’ (as that term is defined at No. 209 (49 CFR 571.209) and with S7.1 49 CFR 571.3) that is rearward of the and S7.2 of this standard. The lap belt front seat(s), except any designated portion of a Type 2 seat belt assembly seating positions adjacent to a walk- installed at the driver’s designated way located between the seat and the seating position and at the right front side of the vehicle, which walkway is passenger’s designated seating position designed to allow access to more rear- (if any) shall include either an emer- ward seating positions. gency locking retractor or an auto- S4.4.3.2.2 Any rear outboard des- matic locking retractor, which retrac- ignated seating position with a seat tor shall not retract webbing to the that can be adjusted to be forward-fac- next locking position until at least 3⁄4 ing and to face some other direction inch of webbing has moved into the re- shall either: tractor. In determining whether an (i) Meet the requirements of S4.4.3.2 automatic locking retractor complies with the seat in any position in which with this requirement, the webbing is it can be occupied while the vehicle is extended to 75 percent of its length and in motion; or the retractor is locked after the initial (ii) When the seat is in its forward- adjustment. If a Type 2 seat belt as- facing position, have a Type 2 seat belt sembly installed in compliance with assembly with an upper torso restraint this requirement incorporates any web- that conforms to S7.1 and S7.2 of this bing tension-relieving device, the vehi- standard and that adjusts by means of cle owner’s manual shall include the an emergency locking retractor that information specified in S7.4.2(b) of

511

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00511 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

this standard for the tension-relieving shall comply with the requirements of device, and the vehicle shall comply S4.5.1(b)(1)(i) through S4.5.1(b)(1)(iv). with S7.4.2(c) of this standard. (i) The heading area shall be yellow S4.4.4 Buses with a GVWR of 8,500 with the word ‘‘WARNING’’ and the pounds or less and an unloaded vehicle alert symbol in black. weight of 5,500 pounds or less manufac- (ii) The message area shall be white tured on or after September 1, 1994. Each with black text. The message area bus with a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or shall be no less than 30 cm2 (4.7 in2). less and an unloaded vehicle weight of (iii) The pictogram shall be black 5,500 pounds or less manufactured on or with a red circle and slash on a white after September 1, 1984 shall comply background. The pictogram shall be no with the requirements of S4.2.5 and less than 30 mm (1.2 in) in diameter. S4.2.6 of this standard, as applicable, (iv) If the vehicle does not have a for front seating positions, and with back seat, the label shown in Figure 6a the requirements of S4.4.3.2 or S4.4.3.3 or 6b may be modified by omitting the of this standard, as applicable, for all statements: ‘‘The BACK SEAT is the rear seating positions. SAFEST place for children.’’ S4.5 Other general requirements. (2) Vehicles certified to meet the re- S4.5.1 Labeling and owner’s manual quirements specified in S19, S21, or S23 information. before September 1, 2003 shall have a (a) Air bag maintenance or replacement label permanently affixed to either side information. If the vehicle manufac- of the sun visor, at the manufacturer’s turer recommends periodic mainte- option, at each front outboard seating nance or replacement of an inflatable position that is equipped with an in- restraint system, as that term is de- flatable restraint. The label shall con- fined in S4.1.5.1(b) of this standard, in- form in content to the label shown ei- stalled in a vehicle, that vehicle shall ther in Figure 8 or Figure 11 of this be labeled with the recommended standard, at the manufacturer’s option, schedule for maintenance or replace- and shall comply with the require- ment. The schedule shall be specified ments of S4.5.1(b)(2)(i) through by month and year, or in terms of vehi- S4.5.1(b)(2)(iv). cle mileage, or by intervals measured from the date appearing on the vehicle (i) The heading area shall be yellow certification label provided pursuant to with the word ‘‘WARNING’’ and the 49 CFR Part 567. The label shall be per- alert symbol in black. manently affixed to the vehicle within (ii) The message area shall be white the passenger compartment and let- with black text. The message area tered in English in block capital and shall be no less than 30 cm2 (4.7 in2). numerals not less than three thirty- (iii) The pictogram shall be black on seconds of an inch high. This label may a white background. The pictogram be combined with the label required by shall be no less than 30 mm (1.2 in) in S4.5.1(b) of this standard to appear on length. the sun visor. If some regular mainte- (iv) If the vehicle does not have a nance or replacement of the inflatable back seat, the label shown in the figure restraint system(s) in a vehicle is rec- may be modified by omitting the state- ommended by the vehicle manufac- ment: ‘‘The BACK SEAT is the turer, the owner’s manual shall also SAFEST place for CHILDREN.’’ set forth the recommended schedule for (v) If the vehicle does not have a maintenance or replacement. back seat or the back seat is too small (b) Sun visor air bag warning label. (1) to accommodate a rear-facing child re- Except as provided in S4.5.1(b)(2), each straint consistent with S4.5.4.1, the vehicle shall have a label permanently label shown in the figure may be modi- affixed to either side of the sun visor, fied by omitting the statement: ‘‘Never at the manufacturer’s option, at each put a rear-facing child seat in the front outboard seating position that is front.’’ equipped with an inflatable restraint. (3) Vehicles certified to meet the re- The label shall conform in content to quirements specified in S19, S21, or S23 the label shown in either Figure 6a or on or after September 1, 2003 shall have 6b of this standard, as appropriate, and a label permanently affixed to either

512

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00512 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

side of the sun visor, at the manufac- (C) The additional information con- turer’s option, at each front outboard veyed by the requested label must ad- seating position that is equipped with dress a situation in which foreseeable an inflatable restraint. The label shall occupant behavior can affect air bag conform in content to the label shown performance. in Figure 11 of this standard and shall (iii) The Administrator shall author- comply with the requirements of ize or reject a request by a manufac- S4.5.1(b)(3)(i) through S4.5.1(b)(3)(iv). turer submitted under S4.5.1(b)(4)(i) on (i) The heading area shall be yellow the basis of whether the additional in- with the word ‘‘WARNING’’ and the formation could result in information alert symbol in black. overload or would otherwise make the (ii) The message area shall be white label confusing or misleading. No de- with black text. The message area termination will be made as to wheth- shall be no less than 30 cm2 (4.7 in2). er, in light of the above criteria, the (iii) The pictogram shall be black on particular information best prevents a white background. The pictogram shall be no less than 30 mm (1.2 in) in information overload or whether the length. information best addresses a particular (iv) If the vehicle does not have a air bag risk. Moreover, the Adminis- back seat, the label shown in the figure trator will not verify or vouch for the may be modified by omitting the state- accuracy of the information. ment: ‘‘The BACK SEAT is the (5) Limitations on additional labels. SAFEST place for CHILDREN.’’ (i) Except for the information on an (v) If the vehicle does not have a air bag maintenance label placed on back seat or the back seat is too small the sun visor pursuant to S4.5.1(a) of to accommodate a rear-facing child re- this standard, or on a utility vehicle straint consistent with S4.5.4.1, the warning label placed on the sun visor label shown in the figure may be modi- that conforms in content, form, and se- fied by omitting the statement: ‘‘Never quence to the label shown in Figure 1 put a rear-facing child seat in the of 49 CFR 575.105, no other information front.’’ shall appear on the same side of the (4) Design-specific information. sun visor to which the sun visor air bag (i) A manufacturer may request in warning label is affixed. writing that the Administrator author- (ii) Except for the information in an ize additional design-specific informa- air bag alert label placed on the sun tion to be placed on the air bag sun visor pursuant to S4.5.1(c) of this visor label for vehicles certified to standard, or on a utility vehicle warn- meet the requirements specified in S19, ing label placed on the sun visor that S21, or S23. The label shall conform in conforms in content, form, and se- content to the label shown in Figure 11 quence to the label shown in Figure 1 of this standard and shall comply with of 49 CFR 575.105, no other information the requirements of S4.5.1(b)(3)(i) about air bags or the need to wear seat through S4.5.1(b)(3)(iv), except that the belts shall appear anywhere on the sun label may contain additional, design- specific information, if authorized by visor. the Administrator. (c) Air bag alert label. If the label re- (ii) The request must meet the fol- quired by S4.5.1(b) is not visible when lowing criteria: the sun visor is in the stowed position, (A) The request must provide a an air bag alert label shall be perma- mock-up of the label with the specific nently affixed to that visor so that the language or pictogram the manufac- label is visible when the visor is in that turer requests permission to add to the position. The label shall conform in label. content to the sun visor label shown in (B) The additional information con- Figure 6(c) of this standard, and shall veyed by the requested label must be comply with the requirements of specific to the design or technology of S4.5.1(c)(1) through S4.5.1(c)(3). the air bag system in the vehicle and (1) The message area shall be black not applicable to all or most air bag with yellow text. The message area systems. shall be no less than 20 square cm.

513

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00513 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(2) The pictogram shall be black with (ii) The message area shall be white a red circle and slash on a white back- with black text. The message area ground. The pictogram shall be no less shall be no less than 30 cm2 (4.7 in2). than 20 mm in diameter. (iii) If the vehicle does not have a (3) If a vehicle does not have an in- back seat, the labels shown in Figures flatable restraint at any front seating 9 and 12 may be modified by omitting position other than that for the driver, the statement: ‘‘The back seat is the the pictogram may be omitted from safest place for children.’’ the label shown in Figure 6c. (iv) If the vehicle does not have a (d) At the option of the manufac- back seat or the back seat is too small turer, the requirements in S4.5.1(b) and to accommodate a rear-facing child re- S4.5.1(c) for labels that are perma- straint consistent with S4.5.4.1, the nently affixed to specified parts of the label shown in Figure 12 may be modi- vehicle may instead be met by perma- fied by omitting the statement: ‘‘Never nent marking or molding of the re- put a rear-facing child seat in the quired information. front.’’ (e) Label on the dashboard. (1) Except (3) Vehicles certified to meet the re- as provided in S4.5.1(e)(2), each vehicle quirements specified in S19, S21, and that is equipped with an inflatable re- S23 on or after December 1, 2003, that straint for the passenger position shall are equipped with an inflatable re- have a label attached to a location on straint for the passenger position shall the dashboard or the steering wheel have a label attached to a location on hub that is clearly visible from all the dashboard or the steering wheel front seating positions. The label need hub that is clearly visible from all not be permanently affixed to the vehi- front seating positions. The label need cle. This label shall conform in content not be permanently affixed to the vehi- to the label shown in Figure 7 of this cle. This label shall conform in content standard, and shall comply with the re- to the label shown in Figure 12 of this quirements of S4.5.1(e)(1)(i) through standard and shall comply with the re- S4.5.1(e)(1)(iii). quirements of S4.5.1(e)(3)(i) through (i) The heading area shall be yellow S4.5.1(e)(3)(iv). with the word ‘‘WARNING’’ and the (i) The heading area shall be yellow alert symbol in black. with black text. (ii) The message area shall be white (ii) The message area shall be white with black text. The message area with black text. The message area shall be no less than 30 cm2 (4.7 in2). shall be no less than 30 cm2 (4.7 in2). (iii) If the vehicle does not have a (iii) If the vehicle does not have a back seat, the label shown in Figure 7 back seat, the label shown in Figure 12 may be modified by omitting the state- may be modified by omitting the state- ment: ‘‘The back seat is the safest place ment: ‘‘The back seat is the safest place for children 12 and under.’’ for children.’’ (2) Vehicles certified to meet the re- (iv) If the vehicle does not have a quirements specified in S19, S21, and back seat or the back seat is too small S23 before December 1, 2003, that are to accommodate a rear-facing child re- equipped with an inflatable restraint straint consistent with S4.5.4.1, the for the passenger position shall have a label shown in Figure 12 may be modi- label attached to a location on the fied by omitting the statement: ‘‘Never dashboard or the steering wheel hub put a rear-facing child seat in the that is clearly visible from all front front.’’ seating positions. The label need not be (f) Information to appear in owner’s permanently affixed to the vehicle. manual. (1) The owner’s manual for any This label shall conform in content to vehicle equipped with an inflatable re- the label shown in either Figure 9 or straint system shall include an accu- Figure 12 of this standard, at manufac- rate description of the vehicle’s air bag turer’s option, and shall comply with system in an easily understandable for- the requirements of S4.5.1(e)(2)(i) mat. The owner’s manual shall include through S4.5.1(e)(2)(iv). a statement to the effect that the vehi- (i) The heading area shall be yellow cle is equipped with an air bag and lap/ with black text. shoulder belt at both front outboard

514

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00514 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

seating positions, and that the air bag children and small teenagers or adults is a supplemental restraint at those are both properly and improperly posi- seating positions. The information tioned in the passenger seat, including shall emphasize that all occupants, in- cautionary advice against improper cluding the driver, should always wear placement of child restraint systems. their seat belts whether or not an air (vii) For vehicles certified to meet bag is also provided at their seating po- the requirements of S19.2, S21.2 or sition to minimize the risk of severe S23.2, a discussion of the telltale light, injury or death in the event of a crash. specifying its location in the vehicle The owner’s manual shall also provide and explaining when the light is illu- any necessary precautions regarding minated. the proper positioning of occupants, in- (viii) Information on how to contact cluding children, at seating positions the vehicle manufacturer concerning equipped with air bags to ensure max- modifications for persons with disabil- imum safety protection for those occu- ities that may affect the advanced air pants. The owner’s manual shall also bag system. explain that no objects should be (g) Additional labels placed elsewhere in placed over or near the air bag on the the vehicle interior. The language on ad- instrument panel, because any such ob- ditional air bag warning labels placed jects could cause harm if the vehicle is elsewhere in the vehicle interior shall in a crash severe enough to cause the not cause confusion or contradiction of air bag to inflate. any of the statements required in the (2) For any vehicle certified to meet air bag sun visor label, and shall be ex- the requirements specified in S14.5, pressed in symbols, words and abbre- S15, S17, S19, S21, S23, and S25, the viations required by this standard. manufacturer shall also include in the S4.5.2 Readiness indicator. An occu- vehicle owner’s manual a discussion of pant protection system that deploys in the advanced passenger air bag system the event of a crash shall have a moni- installed in the vehicle. The discussion toring system with a readiness indi- shall explain the proper functioning of cator. The indicator shall monitor its the advanced air bag system and shall own readiness and shall be clearly visi- provide a summary of the actions that ble from the driver’s designated seating may affect the proper functioning of position. If the vehicle is equipped with the system. The discussion shall in- a single readiness indicator for both a clude, at a minimum, accurate infor- driver and passenger air bag, and if the mation on the following topics: vehicle is equipped with an on-off (i) A presentation and explanation of switch permitted by S4.5.4 of this the main components of the advanced standard, the readiness indicator shall passenger air bag system. monitor the readiness of the driver air (ii) An explanation of how the compo- bag when the passenger air bag has nents function together as part of the been deactivated by means of the on- advanced passenger air bag system. off switch, and shall not illuminate (iii) The basic requirements for prop- solely because the passenger air bag er operation, including an explanation has been deactivated by the manual on- of the actions that may affect the prop- off switch. A list of the elements of the er functioning of the system. system being monitored by the indi- (iv) For vehicles certified to meet the cator shall be included with the infor- requirements of S19.2, S21.2 or S23.2, a mation furnished in accordance with complete description of the passenger S4.5.1 but need not be included on the air bag suppression system installed in label. the vehicle, including a discussion of S4.5.3 Automatic belts. Except as pro- any suppression zone. vided in S4.5.3.1, a seat belt assembly (v) An explanation of the interaction that requires no action by vehicle oc- of the advanced passenger air bag sys- cupants (hereinafter referred to as an tem with other vehicle components, ‘‘automatic belt’’) may be used to meet such as seat belts, seats or other com- the crash protection requirements of ponents. any option under S4. and in place of (vi) A summary of the expected out- any seat belt assembly otherwise re- comes when child restraint systems, quired by that option.

515

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00515 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S4.5.3.1. An automatic belt that pro- by the emergency release mechanism vides only pelvic restraint may not be being in the released position. In the used pursuant to S4.5.3 to meet the re- case of motorized automatic belts, the quirements of an option that requires a determination of use shall be made Type 2 seat belt assembly. An auto- once the belt webbing is in its locked matic belt may not be used pursuant to protective mode at the anchorage S4.5.3 to meet the requirements of point. S4.1.5.1(a)(3) for a Type 2 seat belt as- (C) The belt webbing of a motorized sembly at any seating position automatic belt system is not in its equipped with an inflatable restraint locked, protective mode at the anchor- system pursuant to S4.1.5.2, S4.1.5.3, age point. S4.2.6.1, or S4.2.6.2 of this standard. S4.5.3.4 An automatic belt furnished S4.5.3.2 An automatic belt, fur- pursuant to S4.5.3 that is not required nished pursuant to S4.5.3, that provides to meet the perpendicular frontal crash both pelvic and upper torso restraint protection requirements of S5.1 shall may have either a detachable or non- conform to the webbing, attachment detachable upper torso portion, not- hardware, and assembly performance withstanding provisions of the option requirements of Standard No. 209. under which it is furnished. S4.5.3.5 A replacement automatic S4.5.3.3 An automatic belt furnished belt shall meet the requirements of pursuant to S4.5.3 shall: S4.1(k) of Standard No. 209. (a) Conform to S7.1 and have a single S4.5.4 Passenger air bag manual cut-off emergency release mechanism whose device. Passenger cars, trucks, buses, components are readily accessible to a and multipurpose passenger vehicles seated occupant. manufactured before September 1, 2012 (b) In place of a warning system that may be equipped with a device that de- conforms to S7.3 of this standard, be activates the air bag installed at the equipped with the following warning right front outboard seating position in system: At the left front designated the vehicle, if all the conditions in seating position (driver’s position), a S4.5.4.1 through S4.5.4.4 are satisfied. warning system that activates a con- tinuous or intermittent audible signal S4.5.4.1 The vehicle complies with for a period of not less than 4 seconds either S4.5.4.1(a) or S4.5.4.1(b). and not more than 8 seconds and that (a) The vehicle has no forward-facing activates a continuous or flashing designated seating positions to the rear warning light visible to the driver for of the front seating positions. not less than 60 seconds (beginning (b) With the seats and seat backs ad- when the vehicle ignition switch is justed as specified in S8.1.2 and S8.1.3, moved to the ‘‘on’’ or the ‘‘start’’ posi- the distance, measured along a longitu- tion) when condition (A) exists simul- dinal horizontal line tangent to the taneously with condition (B), and that highest point of the rear seat bottom activates a continuous or flashing in the longitudinal vertical plane de- warning light, visible to the driver, dis- scribed in either S4.5.4.1(b)(1) or playing the identifying symbol for the S4.5.4.1(b)(2), between the rearward sur- seat belt telltale shown in Table 2 of face of the front seat back and the for- Standard No. 101 (49 CFR 571.101), or, at ward surface of the rear seat back is the option of the manufacturer if per- less than 720 millimeters. mitted by Standard No. 101, displaying (1) In a vehicle equipped with front the words ‘‘Fasten Seat Belts’’ or ‘‘Fas- bucket seats, the vertical plane at the ten Belts,’’ for as long as condition (A) centerline of the driver’s seat cushion. exists simultaneously with condition (2) In a vehicle equipped with front (C). bench seating, the vertical plane which (A) The vehicle’s ignition switch is passes through the center of the steer- moved to the ‘‘on’’ position or to the ing wheel rim. ‘‘start’’ position. S4.5.4.2 The device is operable by (B) The driver’s automatic belt is not means of the ignition key for the vehi- in use, as determined by the belt latch cle. The device shall be separate from mechanism not being fastened, or, if the ignition switch for the vehicle, so the automatic belt is non-detachable, that the driver must take some action

516

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00516 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

with the ignition key other than in- justed in accordance with S7.4.2. A ve- serting it or turning it in the ignition hicle shall not be deemed to be in non- switch to deactivate the passenger air compliance with this standard if its bag. Once deactivated, the passenger manufacturer establishes that it did air bag shall remain deactivated until not have reason to know in the exer- it is reactivated by means of the de- cise of due care that such vehicle is not vice. in conformity with the requirement of S4.5.4.3 A telltale light in the inte- this standard. rior of the vehicle shall be illuminated S4.6.2 Any manual seat belt assem- whenever the passenger air bag is bly subject to the requirements of S5.1 turned off by means of the on-off of this standard by virtue of any provi- switch. The telltale shall be clearly sion of this standard other than visible to occupants of all front seating S4.1.2.1(c)(2) does not have to meet the positions. ‘‘Clearly visible’’ means with- requirements of S4.2(a)–(f) and S4.4 of in the normal range of vision through- Standard No. 209 (§ 571.209). out normal driving operations. The S4.6.3 Any manual seat belt assem- telltale: bly subject to the requirements of S5.1 (a) Shall be yellow; of this standard by virtue of (b) Shall have the identifying words S4.1.2.1(c)(2) does not have to meet the ‘‘PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF’’ or elongation requirements of S4.2(c), ‘‘PASS AIR BAG OFF’’ on the telltale S4.4(a)(2), S4.4(b)(4), and S4.4(b)(5) of or within 25 millimeters of the telltale; Standard No. 209 (§ 571.209). (c) Shall remain illuminated for the S4.7 Incorporation by reference. Soci- entire time that the air bag is ‘‘off’’; ety of Automotive Engineers (SAE) (d) Shall not be illuminated at any Recommended Practice J211/1 rev. Mar time when the air bag is ‘‘on’’; and, 95, ‘‘Instrumentation for Impact Test— (e) Shall not be combined with the Part 1—Electronic Instrumentation,’’ readiness indicator required by S4.5.2 (SAE J211/1 rev. Mar 95) is incorporated of this standard. by reference in sections S4.13, S6.6, S4.5.4.4 The vehicle owner’s manual S13.1, S15.3.6, S19.4.4, S21.5.5, S23.5.5, shall provide, in a readily understand- and S25.4, Department of Defense MIL– able format: S–13192P, 1988, ‘‘Military Specification, (a) Complete instructions on the op- Shoes, Men’s, Dress, Oxford’’, Amend- eration of the on-off switch; ment 1, October 14, 1994 (MIL–S–13192P) (b) A statement that the on-off is incorporated by reference in section switch should only be used when a S8.1.8, and Department of Defense MIL– member of a passenger risk group iden- S–21711E, 1982, ‘‘Military Specification, tified in the request form in Appendix Shoes, Women’s’’, Amendment 2, Octo- B to part 595 of this chapter is occu- ber 14, 1994 (MIL–S–21711E) is incor- pying the right front passenger seating porated by reference in section S16.2.5, position; and, and are thereby made part of this (c) A warning about the safety con- standard. The Director of the Federal sequences of using the on-off switch at Register approved the material incor- other times. porated by reference in accordance S4.6 Dynamic testing of manual belt with 5 U.S.C. 552 (a) and 1 CFR Part 51. systems. A copy of SAE J211/1 rev. Mar 95 may S4.6.1 Each truck and multipurpose be obtained from SAE at the Society of passenger vehicle with a GVWR of 8,500 Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Com- pounds or less and an unloaded weight monwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA of less than 5,500 pounds that is manu- 15096. A copy of SAE J211/1 rev. Mar 95 factured on or after September 1, 1991, and copies of MIL–S–13192P and MIL–S– and is equipped with a Type 2 seat belt 21711E may be inspected at NHTSA’s assembly at a front outboard des- technical reference library, 400 Seventh ignated seating position pursuant to Street, S.W., Room 5109, Washington, S4.1.2.3 shall meet the frontal crash DC, or at the National Archives and protection requirements of S5.1 at Records Administration (NARA). For those designated seating positions with information on the availability of this a test dummy restrained by a Type 2 material at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or seat belt assembly that has been ad- go to: http://www.archives.gov/

517

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00517 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

federallregister/ deployment designed to deploy in any codeloflfederallregulations/ full frontal rigid barrier crash up to 26 ibrllocations.html. km/h (16 mph). S4.8 Selection of compliance options. (e) The requirements for dummy con- Where manufacturer options are speci- tainment shall continue until both the fied, the manufacturer shall select the vehicle and the dummies have ceased option by the time it certifies the vehi- moving. cle and may not thereafter select a dif- S4.12 Suppression systems that do not ferent option for the vehicle. Each detect dummies. For vehicles with occu- manufacturer shall, upon request from pant sensing systems that recognize the National Highway Traffic Safety humans and not dummies, such that Administration, provide information the air bag or bags would not function regarding which of the compliance op- in crash tests, the manufacturer shall tions it has selected for a particular ve- provide NHTSA with information and hicle or make/model. equipment necessary to circumvent the S4.9 Values and tolerances. Wherever a suppression system for the crash test range of values or tolerances are speci- such that the restraint system oper- fied, requirements shall be met at all ates as if 5th percentile adult female values within the range of values or humans and 50th percentile adult male tolerances. With respect to the posi- humans are seated in the vehicle. tioning of anthropomorphic dummies, S4.13 Data channels. For vehicles torso and spine angle tolerances shall manufactured on or after September 1, be ±2 degrees unless otherwise stated, 2001, all data channels used in injury and leg, thigh, foot, and arm angle tol- criteria calculations shall be filtered erances shall be ±5 degrees unless oth- using a phaseless digital filter, such as erwise stated. the Butterworth four-pole phaseless S4.10 Metric values. Specifications and digital filter specified in Appendix C of requirements are given in metric units SAE J211/1, rev. Mar 95, incorporated with English units provided for ref- by reference in S4.7. erence. The metric values are control- S5 Occupant crash protection require- ling. ments for the 50th percentile adult male S4.11 Test duration for purpose of dummy. measuring injury criteria. S5.1 Frontal barrier crash test. (a) For all barrier crashes, the injury S5.1.1 Belted test. (a) Vehicles not cer- criteria specified in this standard shall tified to S14. Impact a vehicle traveling be met when calculated based on data longitudinally forward at any speed, up recorded for 300 milliseconds after the to and including 48 km/h (30 mph), into vehicle strikes the barrier. a fixed rigid barrier that is perpen- (b) For the 3-year-old and 6-year-old dicular to the line of travel of the vehi- child dummy low risk deployment cle, and at any angle up to 30 degrees tests, the injury criteria specified in in either direction from the perpen- this standard shall be met when cal- dicular to the line of travel of the vehi- culated on data recorded for 100 milli- cle, under the applicable conditions of seconds after the initial deployment of S8 and S10. The test dummy specified the air bag. in S8.1.8 placed in each front outboard (c) For 12-month-old infant dummy designated seating position shall meet low risk deployment tests, the injury the injury criteria of S6.1, S6.2(a), S6.3, criteria specified in the standard shall S6.4(a), and S6.5 of this standard. be met when calculated on data re- (b) Vehicles certified to S14. (1) Vehicles corded for 125 milliseconds after the certified to S14.1 or S14.2. Impact a vehi- initiation of the final stage of air bag cle traveling longitudinally forward at deployment designed to deploy in any any speed, up to and including 48 km/h full frontal rigid barrier crash up to 64 (30 mph), into a fixed rigid barrier that km/h (40 mph). is perpendicular to the line of travel of (d) For driver-side low risk deploy- the vehicle under the applicable condi- ment tests, the injury criteria shall be tions of S8 and S10. The test dummy met when calculated based on data re- specified in S8.1.8 placed in each front corded for 125 milliseconds after the outboard designated seating position initiation of the final stage of air bag shall meet the injury criteria of S6.1,

518

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00518 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

S6.2(b), S6.3, S6.4(b), S6.5, and S6.6 of the vehicle, under the applicable condi- this standard. tions of S8 and S10, excluding S10.7, (2) Vehicles certified to S14.3 or S14.4. S10.8, and S10.9. The test dummy speci- Impact a vehicle traveling longitu- fied in S8.1.8 placed in each front out- dinally forward at any speed, up to and board designated seating position shall including 56 km/h (35 mph), into a fixed meet the injury criteria of S6.1, S6.2(b), rigid barrier that is perpendicular to S6.3, S6.4(b), S6.5, and S6.6 of this the line of travel of the vehicle under standard. the applicable conditions of S8 and S10. S5.2 Lateral moving barrier crash test. The test dummy specified in S8.1.8 Impact a vehicle laterally on either placed in each front outboard des- side by a barrier moving at 20 mph ignated seating position shall meet the under the applicable conditions of S8. injury criteria of S6.1, S6.2(b), S6.3, The test dummy specified in S8.1.8 po- S6.4(b), S6.5, and S6.6 of this standard. sitioned in the front outboard des- S5.1.2 Unbelted test. (a) Vehicles not ignated seating position adjacent to certified to the requirements of S13 or S14. the impacted side shall meet the injury At the manufacturer’s option, either criteria of S6.2 and S6.3 of this stand- one of the following unbelted tests ard. shall be met: S5.3 Rollover. Subject a vehicle to a (1) Impact a vehicle traveling longi- rollover test in either lateral direction tudinally forward at any speed up to at 30 mph under the applicable condi- and including 48 km/h (30 mph), into a tions of S8 of this standard with a test fixed rigid barrier that is perpendicular dummy specified in S8.1.8 placed in the to the line of travel of the vehicle, and front outboard designated seating posi- at any angle up to 30 degrees in either tion on the vehicle’s lower side as direction from the perpendicular to the mounted on the test platform. The test line of travel of the vehicle, under the dummy shall meet the injury criteria applicable conditions of S8 and S10, ex- of S6.1 of this standard. cluding S10.7, S10.8, and S10.9. The test S6 Injury criteria for the part 572, sub- dummy specified in S8.1.8 placed in part E, Hybrid III test dummy. each front outboard designated seating S6.1 All portions of the test dummy position shall meet the injury criteria shall be contained within the outer of S6.1, S6.2(a), S6.3, S6.4(a), and S6.5 of surfaces of the vehicle passenger com- this standard. partment. (2) Impact a vehicle traveling longi- S6.2 Head injury criteria. (a)(1) For tudinally forward at any speed between any two points in time, t1 and t2, dur- 32 km/h (20 mph) and 40 km/h (25 mph), ing the event which are separated by inclusive, into a fixed rigid barrier that not more than a 36 millisecond time in- is perpendicular to the line of travel of terval and where t1 is less than t2, the the vehicle, and at any angle up to 30 head injury criterion (HIC36) shall be degrees in either direction from the determined using the resultant head perpendicular to the line of travel of acceleration at the center of gravity of the vehicle, under the applicable condi- the dummy head, ar, expressed as a tions of S8 and S10, excluding S10.7, multiple of g (the acceleration of grav- S10.8, and S10.9. The test dummy speci- ity) and shall be calculated using the fied in S8.1.8 placed in each front out- expression: board designated seating position shall meet the injury criteria of S6.1, S6.2(b),   25. S6.3, S6.4(b), S6.5, and S6.6 of this 1 t2 −  ∫ adtr  () t21 t standard. ()tt− t1  (b) Vehicles certified to the requirements 21 of S14. Impact a vehicle traveling longi- (2) The maximum calculated HIC36 tudinally forward at any speed between value shall not exceed 1,000. 32 km/h (20 mph) and 40 km/h (25 mph), (b)(1) For any two points in time, t1 inclusive, into a fixed rigid barrier that and t2, during the event which are sep- is perpendicular to the line of travel of arated by not more than a 15 milli- the vehicle, and at any angle up to 30 second time interval and where t1 is degrees in either direction from the less than t2, the head injury criterion perpendicular to the line of travel of (HIC15) shall be determined using the 519

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00519 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER12MY00.003 § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

resultant head acceleration at the cen- (iii) Myc = 310 Nm (229 lbf-ft) when a ter of gravity of the dummy head, ar, flexion moment exists at the occipital expressed as a multiple of g (the accel- condyle eration of gravity) and shall be cal- (iv) Myc = 135 Nm (100 lbf-ft) when an culated using the expression: extension moment exists at the occipi- tal condyle.   25. (4) At each point in time, only one of 1 t2  ∫ adt () t− t the four loading conditions occurs and − t r 21 ()tt211  the Nij value corresponding to that loading condition is computed and the (2) The maximum calculated HIC15 three remaining loading modes shall be value shall not exceed 700. considered a value of zero. The expres- S6.3 The resultant acceleration cal- sion for calculating each Nij loading culated from the output of the thoracic condition is given by: instrumentation shown in drawing 78051.218, revision R incorporated by Nij = (Fz/Fzc) + (Mocy/Myc) reference in part 572, subpart E of this (5) None of the four Nij values shall chapter shall not exceed 60 g’s, except exceed 1.0 at any time during the for intervals whose cumulative dura- event. tion is not more than 3 milliseconds. (b) Peak tension. Tension force (Fz), S6.4 Chest deflection. (a) Compressive measured at the upper neck load cell, deflection of the sternum relative to shall not exceed 4170 N (937 lbf) at any the spine shall not exceed 76 mm (3.0 time. in). (c) Peak compression. Compression (b) Compressive deflection of the force (Fz), measured at the upper neck sternum relative to the spine shall not load cell, shall not exceed 4000 N (899 exceed 63 mm (2.5 in). lbf) at any time. S6.5 The force transmitted axially S6.7 Unless otherwise indicated, in- through each upper leg shall not exceed strumentation for data acquisition, 2250 pounds. data channel frequency class, and mo- S6.6 Neck injury. When measuring ment calculations are the same as neck injury, each of the following in- given for the 49 CFR Part 572, Subpart jury criteria shall be met. E Hybrid III test dummy. (a) Nij. S7. Seat belt assembly requirements. As (1) The shear force (Fx), axial force used in this section, a law enforcement (Fz), and bending moment (My) shall be vehicle means any vehicle manufac- measured by the dummy upper neck tured primarily for use by the United load cell for the duration of the crash States or by a State or local govern- event as specified in S4.11. Shear force, ment for police or other law enforce- axial force, and bending moment shall ment purposes. be filtered for Nij purposes at SAE S7.1 Adjustment. J211/1 rev. Mar 95 Channel Frequency S7.1.1 Except as specified in S7.1.1.1 Class 600 (see S4.7). and S7.1.1.2, the lap belt of any seat (2) During the event, the axial force belt assembly furnished in accordance (Fz) can be either in tension or com- with S4.1.2 shall adjust by means of pression while the occipital condyle any emergency-locking or automatic- bending moment (Mocy) can be in ei- locking retractor that conforms to ther flexion or extension. This results § 571.209 to fit persons whose dimen- in four possible loading conditions for sions range from those of a 50th per- Nij: tension-extension (Nte), tension- centile 6-year-old child to those of a flexion (Ntf), compression-extension 95th percentile adult male and the (Nce), or compression-flexion (Ncf). upper torso restraint shall adjust by (3) When calculating Nij using equa- means of an emergency-locking retrac- tion S6.6(a)(4), the critical values, Fzc tor or a manual adjusting device that and Myc, are: conforms to § 571.209 to fit persons (i) Fzc = 6806 N (1530 lbf) when Fz is whose dimensions range from those of in tension a 5th percentile adult female to those (ii) Fzc = 6160 N (1385 lbf) when Fz is of a 95th percentile adult male, with in compression the seat in any position, the seat back

520

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00520 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER12MY00.004 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

in the manufacturer’s nominal design causing the retractor that adjusts the riding position, and any adjustable an- lap belt to lock when the belt is buck- chorages adjusted to the manufactur- led. er’s nominal design position for a 50th S7.1.1.5 Passenger cars, and trucks, percentile adult male occupant. How- buses, and multipurpose passenger ve- ever, an upper torso restraint furnished hicles with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or in accordance with S4.1.2.3.1(a) shall less manufactured on or after Sep- adjust by means of an emergency-lock- tember 1, 1995 shall meet the require- ing retractor that conforms to § 571.209. ments of S7.1.1.5(a), S7.1.1.5(b) and S7.1.1.1 A seat belt assembly in- S7.1.1.5(c), subject to S7.1.1.5(d). stalled at the driver’s seating position (a) Each designated seating position, shall adjust to fit persons whose di- except the driver’s position, and except mensions range from those of a 5th-per- any right front seating position that is centile adult female to those of a 95th- equipped with an automatic belt, that percentile adult male. S7.1.1.2 (a) A seat belt assembly in- is in any motor vehicle, except walk-in stalled in a motor vehicle other than a van-type vehicles and vehicles manu- forward control vehicle at any des- factured to be sold exclusively to the ignated seating position other than the U.S. Postal Service, and that is for- outboard positions of the front and sec- ward-facing or can be adjusted to be ond seats shall adjust either by a re- forward-facing, shall have a seat belt tractor as specified in S7.1.1 or by a assembly whose lap belt portion is manual adjusting device that conforms lockable so that the seat belt assembly to § 571.209. can be used to tightly secure a child re- (b) A seat belt assembly installed in straint system. The means provided to a forward control vehicle at any des- lock the lap belt or lap belt portion of ignated seating position other than the the seat belt assembly shall not consist front outboard seating positions shall of any device that must be attached by adjust either by a retractor as specified the vehicle user to the seat belt web- in S7.1.1 or by a manual adjusting de- bing, retractor, or any other part of the vice that conforms to § 571.209. vehicle. Additionally, the means pro- (c) A seat belt assembly installed in a vided to lock the lap belt or lap belt forward-facing rear outboard seating portion of the seat belt assembly shall position in a law enforcement vehicle not require any inverting, twisting or shall adjust either by a retractor as otherwise deforming of the belt web- specified in S7.1.1 or by a manual ad- bing. justing device that conforms to (b) If the means provided pursuant to § 571.209. S7.1.1.5(a) to lock the lap belt or lap S7.1.1.3 A Type 1 lap belt or the lap belt portion of any seat belt assembly belt portion of any Type 2 seat belt as- makes it necessary for the vehicle user sembly installed at any forward-facing to take some action to activate the outboard designated seating position of locking feature, the vehicle owner’s a vehicle with a gross vehicle weight manual shall include a description in rating of 10,000 pounds or less to com- ply with a requirement of this stand- words and/or diagrams describing how ard, except walk-in van-type vehicles to activate the locking feature so that and school buses, and except in rear the seat belt assembly can tightly se- seating positions in law enforcement cure a child restraint system and how vehicles, shall meet the requirements to deactivate the locking feature to re- of S7.1 by means of an emergency lock- move the child restraint system. ing retractor that conforms to Stand- (c) Except for seat belt assemblies ard No. 209 (49 CFR 571.209). that have no retractor or that are S7.1.1.4 Notwithstanding the other equipped with an automatic locking re- provisions of S7.1—S7.1.1.3, emergency- tractor, compliance with S7.1.1.5(a) is locking retractors on belt assemblies demonstrated by the following proce- located in positions other than front dure: outboard designated seating postions (1) With the seat in any adjustment may be equipped with a manual web- position, buckle the seat belt assembly. bing adjustment device capable of Complete any procedures recommended

521

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00521 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

in the vehicle owner’s manual, pursu- than 50 pounds per second. Attain the ant to S7.1.1.5(b), to activate any lock- 50 pound load in not more than 5 sec- ing feature for the seat belt assembly. onds. If webbing sensitive emergency (2) Locate a reference point A on the locking retroactive are installed as safety belt buckle. Locate a reference part of the lap belt assembly or lap belt point B on the attachment hardware or portion of the seat belt assembly, apply retractor assembly at the other end of the load at a rate less than the thresh- the lap belt or lap belt portion of the old value for lock-up specified by the seat belt assembly. Adjust the lap belt manufacturer. Maintain the 50 pound or lap belt portion of the seat belt as- load for at least 5 seconds before the sembly pursuant to S7.1.1.5(c)(1) as nec- measurements specified in S7.1.1.5(c)(6) essary so that the webbing between are obtained and recorded. points A and B is at the maximum (6) Measure and record the length of length allowed by the belt system. belt between points A and B along the Measure and record the distance be- longitudinal centerline of the webbing tween points A and B along the longi- for the lap belt or lap belt portion of tudinal centerline of the webbing for the seat belt assembly. the lap belt or lap belt portion of the (7) The difference between the meas- seat belt assembly. urements recorded under S7.1.1.5(c) (6) (3) Readjust the belt system so that and (4) shall not exceed 2 inches. the webbing between points A and B is (8) The difference between the meas- at any length that is 5 inches or more urements recorded under S7.1.1.5(c) (6) shorter than the maximum length of and (2) shall be 3 inches or more. the webbing. (d) For passenger cars, and trucks (4) Apply a pre-load of 10 pounds, and multipurpose passenger vehicles using the webbing tension pull device with a GVWR of 8,500 pounds or less, described in Figure 5 of this standard, and buses with a GVWR of 10,000 lb or to the lap belt or lap belt portion of the less manufactured on or after Sep- seat belt assembly in a vertical plane tember 1, 2012, each designated seating parallel to the longitudinal axis of the position that is equipped with a child vehicle and passing through the seat- restraint anchorage system meeting ing reference point of the designated the requirements of § 571.225 need not seating position whose belt system is meet the requirements of this S7.1.1.5. being tested. Apply the pre-load in a S7.1.2 Except as provided in S7.1.2.1, horizontal direction toward the front S7.1.2.2, and S7.1.2.3, for each Type 2 of the vehicle with a force application seat belt assembly which is required by angle of not less than 5 degrees nor Standard No. 208 (49 CFR 571.208), the more than 15 degrees above the hori- upper anchorage, or the lower anchor- zontal. Measure and record the length age nearest the intersection of the of belt between points A and B along torso belt and the lap belt, shall in- the longitudinal centerline of the web- clude a movable component which has bing for the lap belt or lap belt portion a minimum of two adjustment posi- of the seat belt assembly while the pre- tions. The distance between the geo- load is being applied. metric center of the movable compo- (5) Apply a load of 50 pounds, using nent at the two extreme adjustment the webbing tension pull device de- positions shall be not less than five scribed in Figure 5 of this standard, to centimeters, measured linearly. If the the lap belt or lap belt portion of the component required by this paragraph seat belt assembly in a vertical plane must be manually moved between ad- parallel to the longitudinal axis of the justment positions, information shall vehicle and passing through the seat- be provided in the owner’s manual to ing reference point of the designated explain how to adjust the seat belt and seating position whose belt system is warn that misadjustment could reduce being tested. The load is applied in a the effectiveness of the safety belt in a horizontal direction toward the front crash. of the vehicle with a force application S7.1.2.1 As an alternative to meet- angle of not less than 5 degrees nor ing the requirement of S7.1.2, a Type 2 more than 15 degrees above the hori- seat belt assembly shall provide a zontal at an onset rate of not more means of automatically moving the

522

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00522 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

webbing in relation to either the upper S7.1.2.3 The requirements of S7.1.2 anchorage, or the lower anchorage do not apply to any truck with a gross nearest the intersection of the torso vehicle weight rating of more than belt and the lap belt. The distance be- 8,500 pounds manufactured before Janu- tween the midpoint of the webbing at ary 1, 1998. the contact point of the webbing and S7.1.3 The intersection of the upper the anchorage at the extreme adjust- torso belt with the lap belt in any Type ment positions shall be not less than 2 seat belt assembly furnished in ac- five centimeters, measured linearly. cordance with S4.1.1 or S4.1.2, with the S7.1.2.2 The requirements of S7.1.2 upper torso manual adjusting device, if provided, adjusted in accordance with do not apply the anchorages of a Type the manufacturer’s instructions, shall 2 seat belt assembly installed: be at least 6 inches from the front (a) At a seat which is adjustable fore vertical centerline of a 50th-percentile and aft while the vehicle is in motion adult male occupant, measured along and whose seat frame above the fore- the centerline of the lap belt, with the and-aft adjuster is part of each of the seat in its rearmost and lowest adjust- assembly’s seat belt anchorages, as de- able position and with the seat back in fined in S3 of Standard No. 210 (49 CFR the manufacturer’s nominal design 571.210). riding position. (b) At a seat that is not adjustable S7.1.4 The weights and dimensions fore and aft while the vehicle is in mo- of the vehicle occupants referred to in tion. this standard are as follows:

50th-percentile 6- 5th-percentile adult 95th-percentile year old child female 50th-percentile adult male adult male

Weight ...... 47.3 pounds ...... 102 pounds ...... 164 pounds ±3 ...... 215 pounds. Erect sitting height ...... 25.4 inches ...... 30.9 inches ...... 35.7 inches ±.1 ...... 38 inches. Hip breadth (sitting) ...... 8.4 inches ...... 12.8 inches ...... 14.7 inches ±.7 ...... 16.5 inches. Hip circumference (sitting) ...... 23.9 inches ...... 36.4 inches ...... 42 inches ...... 47.2 inches. Waist circumference (sitting) ...... 20.8 inches ...... 23.6 inches ...... 32 inches ±.6 ...... 42.5 inches. Chest depth ...... 7.5 inches ...... 9.3 inches ±.2 ...... 10.5 inches. Chest circumference: (nipple) ...... 30.5 inches ...... (upper) ...... 29.8 inches ...... 37.4 inches ±.6 ...... 44.5 inches. (lower) ...... 26.6 inches ......

S7.2 Latch mechanism. Except as pro- through (c) do not apply to any safety vided in S7.2(e), each seat belt assem- belt assembly installed at a forward- bly installed in any vehicle shall have facing rear outboard seating position a latch mechanism that complies with in a law enforcement vehicle. the requirements specified in S7.2(a) S7.3 (a) A seat belt assembly provided through (d). at the driver’s seating position shall be (a) The components of the latch equipped with a warning system that, mechanism shall be accessible to a at the option of the manufacturer, ei- seated occupant in both the stowed and ther— operational positions; (1) Activates a continuous or inter- (b) The latch mechanism shall re- mittent audible signal for a period of lease both the upper torso restraint not less than 4 seconds and not more and the lap belt simultaneously, if the than 8 seconds and that activates a assembly has a lap belt and an upper continuous or flashing warning light torso restraint that require unlatching visible to the driver displaying the for release of the occupant; identifying symbol for the seat belt (c) The latch mechanism shall re- telltale shown in Table 2 of FMVSS 101 lease at a single point; and; or, at the option of the manufacturer if (d) The latch mechanism shall re- permitted by FMVSS 101, displaying lease by a pushbutton action. the words ‘‘Fasten Seat Belts’’ or ‘‘Fas- (e) The requirements of S7.2 do not ten Belts’’, for not less than 60 seconds apply to any automatic belt assembly. (beginning when the vehicle ignition The requirements specified in S7.2(a) switch is moved to the ‘‘on’’ or the 523

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00523 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

‘‘start’’ position) when condition (b) ex- and truck with a gross vehicle weight ists simultaneously with condition (c), rating of 10,000 pounds or less, except or that for walk-in van-type vehicles, shall (2) Activates, for a period of not less meet the requirements of S7.4.3, S7.4.4, than 4 seconds and not more than 8 sec- S7.4.5, and S7.4.6. onds (beginning when the vehicle igni- S7.4.1 Convenience hooks. Any man- tion switch is moved to the ‘‘on’’ or the ual convenience hook or other device ‘‘start’’ position), a continuous or flash- that is provided to stow seat belt web- ing warning light visible to the driver, bing to facilitate entering or exiting displaying the identifying symbol of the vehicle shall automatically release the seat belt telltale shown in Table 2 the webbing when the automatic belt of FMVSS 101 or, at the option of the system is otherwise operational and manufacturer if permitted by FMVSS shall remain in the released mode for 101, displaying the words ‘‘Fasten Seat as long as (a) exists simultaneously Belts’’ or ‘‘Fasten Belts’’, when condi- with (b), or, at the manufacturer’s op- tion (b) exists, and a continuous or tion, for as long as (a) exists simulta- intermittent audible signal when con- neously with (c)— dition (b) exists simultaneously with (a) The vehicle ignition switch is condition (c). moved to the ‘‘on’’ or ‘‘start’’ position; (b) The vehicle’s ignition switch is (b) The vehicle’s drive train is en- moved to the ‘‘on’’ position or to the gaged; ‘‘start’’ position. (c) The vehicle’s parking brake is in (c) The driver’s lap belt is not in use, the released mode (nonengaged). as determined, at the option of the S7.4.2 Webbing tension-relieving de- manufacturer, either by the belt latch vice. Each vehicle with an automatic mechanism not being fastened, or by seat belt assembly or with a Type 2 the belt not being extended at least 4 manual seat belt assembly that must inches from its stowed position. meet the occupant crash protection re- S7.4 Seat belt comfort and conven- quirements of S5.1 of this standard in- ience. stalled at a front outboard designated (a) Automatic seat belts. Automatic seating position, and each vehicle with seat belts installed in any vehicle, a Type 2 manual seat belt assembly in- other than walk-in van-type vehicles, stalled at a rear outboard designated which has a gross vehicle weight rating seating position in compliance with a of 10,000 pounds or less, and which is requirement of this standard, that has manufactured on or after September 1, either automatic or manual tension-re- 1986, shall meet the requirements of lieving devices permitting the intro- S7.4.1, S7.4.2, and S7.4.3. duction of slack in the webbing of the (b) Manual seat belts. shoulder belt (e.g., ‘‘comfort clips’’ or (1) Vehicles manufactured after Sep- ‘‘window-shade’’ devices) shall: tember 1, 1986. Manual seat belts in- (a) Comply with the requirements of stalled in any vehicle, other than man- S5.1 with the shoulder belt webbing ad- ual Type 2 belt systems installed in the justed to introduce the maximum front outboard seating positions in pas- amount of slack recommended by the senger cars or manual belts in walk-in vehicle manufacturer pursuant to van-type vehicles, which have a gross S7.4.2(b). vehicle weight rating of 10,000 pounds (b) Have a section in the vehicle own- or less, shall meet the requirements of er’s manual that explains how the ten- S7.4.3, S7.4.4, S7.4.5, and S7.4.6. sion-relieving device works and speci- (2) Vehicles manufactured after Sep- fies the maximum amount of slack (in tember 1, 1989. inches) recommended by the vehicle (i) If the automatic restraint require- manufacturer to be introduced into the ment of S4.1.4 is rescinded pursuant to shoulder belt under normal use condi- S4.1.5, then manual seat belts installed tions. The explanation shall also warn in a passenger car shall meet the re- that introducing slack beyond the quirements of S7.1.1.3(a), S7.4.2, S7.4.3, amount specified by the manufacturer S7.4.4, S7.4.5, and S7.4.6. could significantly reduce the effec- (ii) Manual seat belts installed in a tiveness of the shoulder belt in a crash; bus, multipurpose passenger vehicle and

524

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00524 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

(c) Have, except for open-body vehi- the side of the vehicle interior to allow cles with no doors, an automatic means the test block defined in Figure 4 of to cancel any shoulder belt slack intro- this standard unhindered transit to the duced into the belt system by a ten- latchplate or buckle. sion-relieving device. In the case of an S7.4.5 Retraction. When tested under automatic safety belt system, cancella- the conditions of S8.1.2 and S8.1.3, with tion of the tension-relieving device anthropomorphic dummies whose arms shall occur each time the adjacent ve- have been removed and which are posi- hicle door is opened. In the case of a tioned in accordance with S10 of this manual seat belt required to meet S5.1, standard in the front outboard seating cancellation of the tension-relieving positions and restrained by the belt device shall occur, at the manufactur- systems for those positions, the torso er’s option, either each time the adja- and lap belt webbing of any of those cent door is opened or each time the seat belt systems shall automatically latchplate is released from the buckle. retract to a stowed position either In the case of a Type 2 manual seat when the adjacent vehicle door is in belt assembly installed at a rear out- the open position and the seat belt board designated seating position, can- latchplate is released, or, at the option cellation of the tension-relieving de- of the manufacturer, when the vice shall occur, at the manufacturer’s latchplate is released. That stowed po- option either each time the door de- sition shall prevent any part of the signed to allow the occupant of that webbing or hardware from being seating position entry and egress of the pinched when the adjacent vehicle door vehicle is opened or each time the is closed. A belt system with a tension- latchplate is released from the buckle. relieving device in an open-bodied vehi- In the case of open-body vehicles with cle with no doors shall fully retract no doors, cancellation of the tension- when the tension-relieving device is de- relieving device may be done by a man- activated. For the purposes of these re- ual means. traction requirements, outboard arm- S7.4.3 Belt contact force. Except for rests, which are capable of being manual or automatic seat belt assem- stowed, on vehicle seats shall be placed blies that incorporate a webbing ten- in their stowed position. sion-relieving device, the upper torso S7.4.6 Seat belt guides and hardware. webbing of any seat belt assembly shall S7.4.6.1 (a) Any manual seat belt as- not exert more than 0.7 pounds of con- sembly whose webbing is designed to tact force when measured normal to pass through the seat cushion or be- and one inch from the chest of an tween the seat cushion and seat back anthropomorphic test dummy, posi- shall be designed to maintain one of tioned in accordance with S10 of this the following three seat belt parts (the standard in the seating position for seat belt latchplate, the buckle, or the which that seat belt assembly is pro- seat belt webbing) on top of or above vided, at the point where the centerline the seat cushion under normal condi- of the torso belt crosses the tions (i.e., conditions other than when midsagittal line on the dummy’s chest. belt hardware is intentionally pushed S7.4.4 Latchplate access. Any seat behind the seat by a vehicle occupant). belt assembly latchplate that is lo- In addition, the remaining two seat cated outboard of a front outboard belt parts must be accessible under seating position in accordance with normal conditions. S4.1.2 shall also be located within the (b) The requirements of S7.4.6.1(a) do outboard reach envelope of either the not apply to: (1) seats whose seat cush- outboard arm or the inboard arm de- ions are movable so that the seat back scribed in S10.7 and Figure 3 of this serves a function other than seating, standard, when the latchplate is in its (2) seats which are removable, or (3) normal stowed position and any adjust- seats which are movable so that the able anchorages are adjusted to the space formerly occupied by the seat manufacturer’s nominal design posi- can be used for a secondary function. tion for a 50th percentile adult male S7.4.6.2 The buckle and latchplate of occupant. There shall be sufficient a manual seat belt assembly subject to clearance between the vehicle seat and S7.4.6.1 shall not pass through the

525

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00525 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

guides or conduits provided for in more than 94 percent of the fuel tank’s S7.4.6.1 and fall behind the seat when usable capacity stated by the vehicle’s the events listed below occur in the manufacturer. In addition, add the order specified: (a) The belt is com- amount of Stoddard solvent needed to pletely retracted or, if the belt is non- fill the entire fuel system from the fuel retractable, the belt is unlatched; (b) tank through the engine’s induction the seat is moved to any position to system. which it is designed to be adjusted; and (d) Vehicle test attitude. Determine the (c) the seat back, if foldable, is folded distance between a level surface and a forward as far as possible and then standard reference point on the test ve- moved backward into position. The in- hicle’s body, directly above each wheel board receptacle end of a seat belt as- opening, when the vehicle is in its ‘‘as sembly installed at a front outboard delivered’’ condition. The ‘‘as delivered’’ designated seating position shall be ac- condition is the vehicle as received at cessible with the center arm rest in the test site, with 100 percent of all any position to which it can be ad- fluid capacities and all tires inflated to justed (without having to move the the manufacturer’s specifications as armrest). listed on the vehicle’s tire placard. De- S8. Test conditions. termine the distance between the same S8.1 General conditions. The fol- level surface and the same standard lowing conditions apply to the frontal, reference points in the vehicle’s ‘‘fully lateral, and rollover tests. Except for loaded condition.’’ The ‘‘fully loaded S8.1.1(d), the following conditions condition’’ is the test vehicle loaded in apply to the alternative unbelted sled accordance with S8.1.1 (a) or (b), as ap- test set forth in S13 from March 19, 1997 plicable. The load placed in the cargo until September 1, 2001. area shall be center over the longitu- S8.1.1 Except as provided in para- dinal centerline of the vehicle. The pre- graph (c) of S8.1.1, the vehicle, includ- test vehicle attitude shall be equal to ing test devices and instrumentation, either the as delivered or fully loaded is loaded as follows: attitude or between the as delivered at- (a) Passenger cars. A passenger car is titude and the fully loaded attitude. loaded to its unloaded vehicle weight S8.1.2 Adjustable seats are in the plus its rated cargo and luggage capac- adjustment position midway between ity weight, secured in the luggage area, the forwardmost and rearmost posi- plus the weight of the necessary tions, and if separately adjustable in a anthropomorphic test devices. vertical direction, are at the lowest po- (b) Multipurpose passenger vehicles, sition. If an adjustment position does trucks, and buses. A multipurpose pas- not exist midway between the senger vehicle, truck, or bus is loaded forwardmost and rearmost positions, to its unloaded vehicle weight plus 300 the closest adjustment position to the pounds or its rated cargo and luggage rear of the midpoint is used. capacity weight, whichever is less, se- S8.1.3 Place adjustable seat backs in cured in the load carrying area and dis- the manufacturer’s nominal design tributed as nearly as possible in pro- riding position in the manner specified portion to its gross axle weight rat- by the manufacturer. Place any adjust- ings, plus the weight of the necessary able anchorages at the manufacturer’s anthropomorphic test devices. For the nominal design position for a 50th per- purposes of § 8.1.1, unloaded vehicle centile adult male occupant. Place weight does not include the weight of each adjustable head restraint in its work-performing accessories. Vehicles highest adjustment position. Adjust- are tested to a maximum unloaded ve- able lumbar supports are positioned so hicle weight of 5,500 pounds. that the lumbar support is in its lowest (c) Fuel system capacity. With the test adjustment position. vehicle on a level surface, pump the S8.1.4 Adjustable steering controls fuel from the vehicle’s fuel tank and are adjusted so that the steering wheel then operate the engine until it stops. hub is at the geometric center of the Then, add Stoddard solvent to the test locus it describes when it is moved vehicle’s fuel tank in an amount which through its full range of driving posi- is equal to not less than 92 and not tions.

526

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00526 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

S8.1.5 Movable vehicle windows and nificant amount of dynamic or static vents are placed in the fully closed po- deformation, and absorbs no significant sition, unless the vehicle manufacturer portion of the energy resulting from chooses to specify a different adjust- the impact, except for energy that re- ment position prior to the time it cer- sults in translational rebound move- tifies the vehicle. ment of the barrier. S8.1.6 Convertibles and open-body S8.2.4 During the entire impact se- type vehicles have the top, if any, in quence the barrier is guided so that it place in the closed passenger compart- travels in a straight line, with no sig- ment configuration. nificant lateral, vertical or rotational S8.1.7 Doors are fully closed and movement. latched but not locked. S8.2.5 The concrete surface upon S8.1.8 Anthropomorphic test dummies. which the vehicle is tested is level, S8.1.8.1 The anthropomorphic test rigid and of uniform construction, with dummies used for evaluation of occu- a skidnumber of 75 when measured in pant protection systems manufactured accordance with American Society for pursuant to applicable portions of Testing and Materials Method E–274– S4.1.2, S4.1.3, and S4.1.4 of this standard 65T at 40 m.p.h., omitting water deliv- shall conform to the requirements of ery as specified in paragraph 7.1 of that subpart E of part 572 of this chapter. method. S8.1.8.2 Each test dummy is clothed S8.2.6 The tested vehicle’s brakes in a form fitting cotton stretch short are disengaged and the transmission is sleeve shirt with above-the-elbow in neutral. sleeves and above-the-knee length S8.2.7 The barrier and the test vehi- pants. The weight of the shirt or pants cle are positioned so that at impact— shall not exceed 0.25 pounds each. Each (a) The vehicle is at rest in its nor- foot of the test dummy is equipped mal attitude; with a size 11XW shoe which meets the (b) The barrier is traveling in a direc- configuration size, sole, and heel thick- tion perpendicular to the longitudinal ness specifications of MIL–S 13192 axis of the vehicle at 20 m.p.h.; and change ‘‘P’’ and whose weight is 1.25 ±0.2 (c) A vertical plane through the geo- pounds. metric center of the barrier impact S8.1.8.3 Limb joints are set at 1g, surface and perpendicular to that sur- barely restraining the weight of the face passes through the driver’s seating limb when extended horizontally. Leg reference point in the tested vehicle. joints are adjusted with the torso in S8.3 Rollover test conditions. The fol- the supine position. lowing conditions apply to the rollover S8.1.8.4 Instrumentation does not test. affect the motion of the dummies dur- S8.3.1 The tested vehicle’s brakes ing impact or rollover. are disengaged and the transmission is S8.1.8.5 The stabilized test tempera- in neutral. ture of the test dummy is at any tem- S8.3.2 The concrete surface on which perature level between 69 degrees F and the test is conducted is level, rigid, of 72 degrees F, inclusive. uniform construction, and of a suffi- S8.2 Lateral moving barrier crash test cient size that the vehicle remains on conditions. The following conditions it throughout the entire rollover cycle. apply to the lateral moving barrier It has a skid number of 75 when meas- crash test. ured in accordance with American So- S8.2.1 The moving barrier, including ciety for Testing and Materials Method the impact surface, supporting struc- E–274–65T at 40 m.p.h. omitting water ture, and carriage, weighs 4,000 pounds. delivery as specified in paragraph 7.1 of S8.2.2 The impact surface of the bar- that method. rier is a vertical, rigid, flat rectangle, S8.3.3 The vehicle is placed on a de- 78 inches wide and 60 inches high, per- vice, similar to that illustrated in Fig- pendicular to its direction of move- ure 2, having a platform in the form of ment, with its lower edge horizontal a flat, rigid plane at an angle of 23° and 5 inches above the ground surface. from the horizontal. At the lower edge S8.2.3 During the entire impact se- of the platform is an unyielding flange, quence the barrier undergoes no sig- perpendicular to the platform with a

527

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00527 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

height of 4 inches and a length suffi- vices or parts designed to release the cient to hold in place the tires that pressure during actuation. rest against it. The intersection of the S10. Test dummy positioning proce- inner face of the flange with the upper dures. face of the platform is 9 inches above S10.1 Head. The transverse instru- the rollover surface. No other re- mentation platform of the head shall straints are used to hold the vehicle in be level within 1⁄2 degree. To level the position during the deceleration of the head of the test dummy, the following platform and the departure of the vehi- sequences must be followed. First, ad- cle. just the position of the H point within S8.3.4 With the vehicle on the test the limits set forth in S10.4.2.1 to level platform, the test devices remain as the transverse instrumentation plat- nearly as possible in the posture speci- form of the head of the test dummy. If fied in S8.1. the transverse instrumentation plat- S8.3.5 Before the deceleration pulse, form of the head is still not level, then the platform is moving horizontally, adjust the pelvic angle of the test and perpendicularly to the longitudinal dummy within the limits specified in axis of the vehicle, at a constant speed S10.4.2.2 of this standard. If the trans- of 30 m.p.h. for a sufficient period of verse instrumentation platform of the time for the vehicle to become motion- head is still not level, then adjust the less relative to the platform. neck bracket of the dummy the min- S8.3.6 The platform is decelerated imum amount necessary from the non- from 30 to 0 m.p.h. in a distance of not adjusted ‘‘0’’ setting to ensure that the more than 3 feet, without change of di- transverse instrumentation platform of rection and without transverse or rota- the head is horizontal within 1⁄2 degree. tional movement during the decelera- The test dummy shall remain within tion of the platform and the departure the limits specified in S10.4.2.1 and of the vehicle. The deceleration rate is S10.4.2.2. after any adjustment of the at least 20g for a minimum of 0.04 sec- neck bracket. onds. S10.2 Upper Arms. S8.4 Frontal test condition. If the ve- S10.2.1 The driver’s upper arms shall hicle is equipped with a cutoff device be adjacent to the torso with the permitted by S4.5.4 of this standard, centerlines as close to a vertical plane the device is deactivated. as possible. S9. Pressure vessels and explosive de- S10.2.2 The passenger’s upper arms vices. shall be in contact with the seat back S9.1 Pressure vessels. A pressure ves- and the sides of the torso. sel that is continuously pressurized S10.3 Hands. shall conform to the requirements of S10.3.1 The palms of the drivers test §§ 178.65–2, 178.65–6(b), 178.65–7, 178.65–9 dummy shall be in contact with the (a) and (b), and 178.65–10 of this title. It outer part of the steering wheel rim at shall not leak or evidence visible dis- the rim’s horizontal centerline. The tortion when tested in accordance with thumbs shall be over the steering § 178.65–11(a) of this title and shall not wheel rim and shall be lightly taped to fail in any of the ways enumerated in the steering wheel rim so that if the § 178.65–11(b) of this title when hand of the test dummy is pushed up- hydrostatically tested to destruction. ward by a force of not less than 2 It shall not crack when flattened in ac- pounds and not more than 5 pounds, cordance with § 178.65–12(a) of this title the tape shall release the hand from to the limit specified in § 178.65–12(a)(4) the steering wheel rim. of this title. S10.3.2 The palms of the passenger S9.2 Explosive devices. An explosive test dummy shall be in contact with device shall not exhibit any of the the outside of the thigh. The little fin- characteristics prohibited by § 173.51 of ger shall be in contact with the seat this title. All explosive material shall cushion. be enclosed in a structure that is capa- S10.4 Torso. ble of containing the explosive energy S10.4.1 Upper Torso. without sudden release of pressure ex- S10.4.1.1 In vehicles equipped with cept through overpressure relief de- bench seats, the upper torso of the

528

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00528 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

driver and passenger test dummies ment to accommodate the placement shall rest against the seat back. The of feet in accordance with S10.6 for var- midsagittal plane of the driver dummy ious passenger compartment configura- shall be vertical and parallel to the ve- tions is permitted. hicle’s longitudinal centerline, and S10.6 Feet. pass through the center of the steering S10.6.1 Driver’s position. wheel rim. The midsagittal plane of the S10.6.1.1 If the vehicle has an adjust- passenger dummy shall be vertical and able accelerator pedal, adjust it to the parallel to the vehicle’s longitudinal full forward position. Rest the right centerline and the same distance from foot of the test dummy on the the vehicle’s longitudinal centerline as undepressed accelerator pedal with the the midsagittal plane of the driver rearmost point of the heel on the floor dummy. pan in the plane of the pedal. If the S10.4.1.2 In vehicles equipped with foot cannot be placed on the accel- bucket seats, the upper torso of the erator pedal, set it initially perpen- driver and passenger test dummies dicular to the lower leg and then place shall rest against the seat back. The it as far forward as possible in the di- midsagittal plane of the driver and the rection of the pedal centerline with the passenger dummy shall be vertical and rearmost point of the heel resting on shall coincide with the longitudinal the floor pan. If the vehicle has an ad- centerline of the bucket seat. justable accelerator pedal and the right S10.4.2 Lower Torso. foot is not touching the accelerator S10.4.2.1 H-point. The H-points of the pedal when positioned as above, move driver and passenger test dummies the pedal rearward until it touches the shall coincide within 1⁄2 inch in the right foot. If the accelerator pedal still vertical dimension and 1⁄2 inch in the does not touch the foot in the full rear- horizontal dimension of a point 1⁄4 inch ward position, leave the pedal in that below the position of the H-point deter- position. mined by using the equipment and pro- S10.6.1.2 Place the left foot on the cedures specified in SAE J826 (APR toeboard with the rearmost point of 1980) except that the length of the the heel resting on the floor pan as lower leg and thigh segments of the H- close as possible to the point of inter- point machine shall be adjusted to 16.3 section of the planes described by the and 15.8 inches, respectively, instead of toeboard and the floor pan and not on the 50th percentile values specified in the wheelwell projection. If the foot Table 1 of SAE J826. cannot be positioned on the toeboard, S10.4.2.2 Pelvic angle. As determined set it initially perpendicular to the using the pelvic angle gage (GM draw- lower leg and place it as far forward as ing 78051–532, incorporated by reference possible with the heel resting on the in part 572, subpart E of this chapter) floor pan. If necessary to avoid contact which is inserted into the H-point with the vehicle’s brake or clutch gaging hole of the dummy, the angle pedal, rotate the test dummy’s left foot measured from the horizontal on the about the lower leg. If there is still three inch flat surface of the gage shall pedal interference, rotate the left leg be 221⁄2 degrees plus or minus 21⁄2 de- outboard about the hip the minimum grees. distance necessary to avoid the pedal S10.5 Legs. The upper legs of the interference. For vehicles with a foot driver and passenger test dummies rest that does not elevate the left foot shall rest against the seat cushion to above the level of the right foot, place the extent permitted by placement of the left foot on the foot rest so that the feet. The initial distance between the upper and lower leg centerlines fall the outboard knee clevis flange sur- in a vertical plane. faces shall be 10.6 inches. To the extent S10.6.2 Passenger’s position. practicable, the left leg of the driver S10.6.2.1 Vehicles with a flat floor pan/ dummy and both legs of the passenger toeboard. Place the right and left feet dummy shall be in vertical longitu- on the vehicle’s toeboard with the dinal planes. To the extent practicable, heels resting on the floor pan as close the right leg of the driver dummy shall as possible to the intersection point be in a vertical plane. Final adjust- with the toeboard. If the feet cannot be

529

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00529 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

placed flat on the toeboard, set them by the vehicle manufacturer in the ve- perpendicular to the lower leg hicle’s owner’s manual. If the belt sys- centerlines and place them as far for- tem is not equipped with a tension-re- ward as possible with the heels resting lieving device, allow the excess web- on the floor pan. bing in the upper torso belt to be re- S10.6.2.2 Vehicles with wheelhouse tracted by the retractive force of the projections in passenger compartment. retractor. Place the right and left feet in the well S11. [Reserved] of the floor pan/toeboard and not on S12. Temporary Exemption from Re- the wheelhouse projection. If the feet quirement for Inflatable Restraint System. cannot be placed flat on the toeboard, S12.1 Scope. This section establishes initially set them perpendicular to the procedures for filing and processing ap- lower leg centerlines and then place plications for temporary exemption them as far forward as possible with from the requirements in this standard the heels resting on the floor pan. that vehicles be equipped with inflat- S10.7 Test dummy positioning for able restraint systems. latchplate access. The reach envelopes S12.2 Definitions. specified in S7.4.4 of this standard are Line means a name that a manufac- obtained by positioning a test dummy turer applies to a group of motor vehi- in the driver’s or passenger’s seating cles of the same make which have the position and adjusting that seating po- same body or chassis, or otherwise are sition to its forwardmost adjustment similar in construction or design. A position. Attach the lines for the in- line may, for example, include 2-door, 4- board and outboard arms to the test door, station wagon, and hatchback ve- dummy as described in Figure 3 of this hicles of the same make. standard. Extend each line backward S12.3 Standard of review. In order to and outboard to generate the compli- receive a temporary exemption from ance arcs of the outboard reach enve- the inflatable restraint requirement, a lope of the test dummy’s arms. vehicle manufacturer must dem- S10.8 Test dummy positioning for belt onstrate in its application that there contact force. To determine compliance has been a disruption in the supply of with S7.4.3 of this standard, position one or more inflatable restraint system the test dummy in the vehicle in ac- components, or a disruption in the use cordance with S10.1 through S10.6 of and installation by the manufacturer this standard and adjust the seating of any such component due to unavoid- position in accordance with S8.1.2 and able events not under the control of S8.1.3 of this standard. Pull the belt the manufacturer, which will prevent a webbing three inches from the test manufacturer from meeting its antici- dummy’s chest and release until the pated production volume of vehicles webbing is within one inch of the test with inflatable restraint systems. dummy’s chest and measure the belt S12.4 Exemption applications—General contact force. requirements. Each application for a S10.9 Manual belt adjustment for dy- temporary exemption from the inflat- namic testing. With the test dummy po- able restraint requirements must— sitioned in accordance with S10.1 (a) Be written in the English lan- through S10.6 of this standard and the guage; seating position adjusted in accordance (b) Be submitted in three copies to: with S8.1.2 and S8.1.3 of this standard, Administrator, National Highway Traf- place the Type 2 manual belt around fic Safety Administration, 400 Seventh the test dummy and fasten the latch. Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590; Remove all slack from the lap belt por- (c) State the full name and address of tion. Pull the upper torso webbing out the manufacturer, the nature of its or- of the retractor and allow it to retract; ganization (individual, partnership, repeat this four times. Apply a 2 to 4 corporation, etc.), and the name of the pound tension load to the lap belt. If State or country under the laws of the belt system is equipped with a ten- which it is organized; sion-relieving device, introduce the (d) Identify the motor vehicle line or maximum amount of slack into the lines for which the temporary exemp- upper torso belt that is recommended tion is being sought;

530

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00530 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

(e) Set forth in full the data, views, tion, so that the vehicle manufacturer and arguments of the manufacturer can recall those vehicles for which a that would support granting the tem- temporary exemption is requested and porary exemption, including the spe- install inflatable restraint systems in cific information required by S12.5; and them, together with a demonstration (f) Specify and segregate any part of of why the manufacturer believes this the information and data submitted in proposed period of time is reasonable the application that should be withheld for completing this recall, or an expla- from public disclosure in accordance nation of why it is not possible to pro- with part 512 of this chapter. vide such an estimate; S12.5 Exemption applications—Specific (h) A proposed date for termination content requirements. Each application of the exemption; for a temporary exemption from the in- (i) A proposed date by which all ex- flatable restraint requirement must in- empted vehicles will have been recalled clude: and had inflatable restraints installed (a) A clear and specific identification (assuming owners returned their vehi- of any component in the inflatable re- cles in a timely matter in response to straint system that has become un- a first notice by the manufacturer), or available due to circumstances beyond an explanation of why it is not possible the manufacturer’s control, and a dia- to provide such an estimate. gram showing the location of such S12.6 Processing an application for a component within the restraint system temporary exemption. (a) NHTSA will and within the vehicle; process any application for temporary (b) A clear and specific explanation exemption that contains the informa- of the cause or causes of the disruption tion specified in S12.4 and S12.5. If an in the supply of the component, and a application fails to provide the infor- showing that such disruption is beyond mation specified in S12.4 and S12.5, the control of the manufacturer; NHTSA will not process the applica- (c) An estimate of the length of time tion, but will advise the manufacturer that will be needed to correct the dis- of the information that must be pro- ruption and again incorporate the sub- vided if the agency is to process the ap- ject components into current produc- plication. tion, or an explanation of why it is not (b) Notice of each application for possible to provide such an estimate; temporary exemption shall be pub- (d) A complete statement of the bases lished in the FEDERAL REGISTER. for the manufacturer’s belief that (c) NHTSA will issue its decision to NHTSA should grant a temporary ex- grant or deny the requested temporary emption in response to this applica- exemption not later than 15 days after tion; the agency receives a complete peti- (e) An unconditional statement by tion, as defined in paragraph (a). How- the manufacturer that it will recall ever, a failure to issue a decision with- every vehicle for which a temporary in this time does not result in a grant exemption is requested in the applica- of the petition. tion, to install all missing inflatable (d) Notice of each decision to grant restraint systems; or deny a temporary exemption, and (f) A plan setting forth steps the the reasons for granting or denying it, manufacturer will take to ensure that will be published in the FEDERAL REG- as many exempted vehicles as possible ISTER. will be returned for installation of (e) The Administrator may attach missing inflatable restraint systems; such conditions as he or she deems ap- (g) A proposed reasonable period of propriate to a temporary exemption, time after the disruption in the supply including but not limited to requiring of inflatable restraint system compo- manufacturers to provide progress re- nents is corrected that the manufac- ports at specified times (including, as turer estimates will ensure a sufficient appropriate and to the extent possible, quantity of components for both an- estimate of dates and times concerning ticipated production and retrofit of when a supply disruption will be cor- those vehicles for which a temporary rected and when recall will take place) exemption is requested in the applica- and requiring manufacturers to take

531

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00531 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

specific steps to ensure that as many No. 208, because it is not equipped with exempted vehicles as possible will be an inflatable restraint at (insert the af- returned for installation of missing in- fected seating positions). flatable restraint systems. (b) The vehicle was allowed to be sold (f) Unless a later effective date is pursuant to NHTSA Exemption No. (in- specified in a notice announcing an sert appropriate exemption number). agency decision to grant a temporary (c) The reason this vehicle was ex- exemption, a temporary exemption empted from the requirement for an in- from the inflatable restraint require- flatable restraint was because of fac- ment will become effective upon the tors beyond the manufacturer’s con- date the decision is issued. trol. S12.7 Labels and written notice an- (d) The manufacturer will recall this nouncing temporary exemption. vehicle not later than (insert the time S12.7.1 It shall be a condition of set forth in the exemption) and install every temporary exemption from the the missing inflatable restraint at no inflatable restraint requirement that charge. the manufacturer of exempted vehicles comply with the provisions of S12.7.2 (e) If the reader has any questions or and S12.7.3. would like some further information, S12.7.2 (a) The manufacturer of any he or she may contact the manufac- vehicle granted a temporary exemption turer at (insert an address and tele- from the inflatable restraint require- phone number). ment shall affix a label within the pas- S13 Alternative unbelted test available, senger compartment of such vehicle. under S3(b) of this standard, for certain The label shall set forth the following vehicles manufactured before September 1, information in block capital letters 2006. and numerals not less than three thir- S13.1 Instrumentation for Impact Test— ty-seconds of an inch high: Part 1—Electronic Instrumentation. Under the applicable conditions of S8, THIS VEHICLE DOES NOT CONTAIN AN AIR BAG IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE mount the vehicle on a dynamic test FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY platform at the vehicle attitude set STANDARD FOR OCCUPANT CRASH PRO- forth in S13.3, so that the longitudinal TECTION. IT WAS EXEMPTED PURSUANT center line of the vehicle is parallel to TO NHTSA EXEMPTION NO. (insert number the direction of the test platform trav- assigned by NHTSA). el and so that movement between the (b) This label shall not be removed base of the vehicle and the test plat- until after the vehicle manufacturer form is prevented. The test platform is has recalled the vehicle and installed instrumented with an accelerometer an inflatable restraint system at those and data processing system having a seating positions for which it was frequency response of 60 channel class granted an exemption. as specified in SAE J211/1 rev. Mar 95 S12.7.3 The manufacturer of any ve- (see S4.7). The accelerometer sensitive hicle that is delivered without an in- axis is parallel to the direction of test flatable restraint system, pursuant to platform travel. The test is conducted a temporary exemption granted under at a velocity change approximating 48 this section, shall, at the time of deliv- km/h (30 mph) with acceleration of the ery of the vehicle, provide a written test platform such that all points on notice to the dealer to whom the vehi- the crash pulse curve within the cor- cle is delivered. The manufacturer ridor identified in Figure 6 are covered. shall also provide a written notice by An inflatable restraint is to be acti- registered mail to the first purchaser vated at 20 ms ±2 ms from the time of the vehicle for purposes other than that 0.5 g is measured on the dynamic resale, within two weeks after pur- test platform. The test dummy speci- chase. Unless otherwise provided for by fied in S8.1.8, placed in each front out- the Administrator in the exemption, board designated seating position as such notice shall provide the following specified in S10, excluding S10.7, S10.8, information: and S10.9, shall meet the injury cri- (a) This vehicle does not conform to teria of S6.1, S6.2(a), S6.3, S6.4(a), S6.5, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard and S13.2 of this standard.

532

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00532 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

S13.2 Neck injury criteria. A vehicle to assure that all points on the crash certified to this alternative test re- pulse curve are within the corridor de- quirement shall, in addition to meeting fined in Figure 6. the criteria specified in S13.1, meet the S14 Advanced air bag requirements for following injury criteria for the neck, passenger cars and for trucks, buses, and measured with the six axis load cell multipurpose passenger vehicles with a (ref. Denton drawing C–1709) that is GVWR of 3,855 kg (8500 pounds) or less mounted between the bottom of the and an unloaded vehicle weight of 2,495 skull and the top of the neck as shown kg (5500 pounds) or less, except for walk- in Drawing 78051–218, in the unbelted in van-type trucks or vehicles designed to sled test: be sold exclusively to the U.S. Postal Serv- (a) Flexion Bending Moment (cal- ice. culated at the occipital condyle)—190 S14.1 Vehicles manufactured on or after Nm. SAE Class 600. September 1, 2003, and before September 1, (b) Extension Bending Moment (cal- 2006. (a) For vehicles manufactured for culated at the occipital condyle)—57 sale in the United States on or after Nm. SAE Class 600. September 1, 2003, and before Sep- (c) Axial Tension—3300 peak N. SAE tember 1, 2006, a percentage of the Class 1000. manufacturer’s production, as specified (d) Axial Compression—4000 peak N. in S14.1.1, shall meet the requirements SAE Class 1000. specified in S14.5.1(a), S14.5.2, S15.1, (e) Fore-and-Aft Shear—3100 peak N. S15.2, S17, S19, S21, S23, and S25 (in ad- SAE Class 1000. dition to the other requirements speci- S13.3 Vehicle test attitude. When the fied in this standard). vehicle is in its ‘‘as delivered’’ condi- (b) Manufacturers that sell three or tion, measure the angle between the fewer carlines, as that term is defined driver’s door sill and the horizontal. at 49 CFR 583.4, in the United States Mark where the angle is taken on the may, at the option of the manufac- door sill. The ‘‘as delivered’’ condition turer, meet the requirements of this is the vehicle as received at the test paragraph instead of paragraph (a) of site, with 100 percent of all fluid capac- this section. Each vehicle manufac- ities and all tires inflated to the manu- tured on or after September 1, 2005 facturer’s specifications as listed on shall meet the requirement specified in the vehicle’s tire placard. When the ve- S14.5.1(a), S14.5.2, S15.1, S15.2, S17, S19, hicle is in its ‘‘fully loaded’’ condition, S21, S23, and S25 (in addition to the measure the angle between the driver’s other requirements specified in this door sill and the horizontal, at the standard). same place the ‘‘as delivered’’ angle was (c) Vehicles that are manufactured in measured. The ‘‘fully loaded’’ condition two or more stages or that are altered is the test vehicle loaded in accordance (within the meaning of 49 CFR 567.7) with S8.1.1(a) or (b) of Standard No. after having previously been certified 208, as applicable. The load placed in in accordance with Part 567 of this the cargo area shall be centered over chapter are not subject to the require- the longitudinal centerline of the vehi- ments of S14.1. cle. The pretest door sill angle, when (d) Vehicles that are manufactured the vehicle is on the sled, (measured at by an original vehicle manufacturer the same location as the as delivered that produces or assembles fewer than and fully loaded condition) shall be 5,000 vehicles annually for sale in the equal to or between the as delivered United States are not subject to the re- and fully loaded door sill angle meas- quirements of S14.1. urements. S14.1.1 Phase-in schedule. S13.4 Tires and wheels. Remove the S14.1.1.1 Vehicles manufactured on or tires and wheels. after September 1, 2003, and before Sep- S13.5. Vehicle Securing. The engine, tember 1, 2004. Subject to S14.1.2(a), for transmissions, axles, exhaust, vehicle vehicles manufactured by a manufac- frame, and vehicle body may be rigidly turer on or after September 1, 2003, and secured to the vehicle and/or the sled, before September 1, 2004, the amount of and fluids, batteries and unsecured vehicles complying with S14.5.1(a), components may be removed, in order S14.5.2, S15.1, S15.2, S17, S19, S21, S23,

533

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00533 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

and S25, shall be not less than 20 per- (2) Is not counted toward compliance cent of: with S14.1.1.1. (a) If the manufacturer has manufac- (c) For purposes of complying with tured vehicles for sale in the United S14.1.1.3, a manufacturer may count a States during both of the two produc- vehicle if it: tion years prior to September 1, 2003, (1) Is manufactured on or after June the manufacturer’s average annual pro- 12, 2000, but before September 1, 2006, duction of vehicles manufactured on or and (2) Is not counted toward compli- after September 1, 2001, and before Sep- ance with S14.1.1.1 or S14.1.1.2. tember 1, 2004, or S14.1.3 Vehicles produced by more than (b) The manufacturer’s production on one manufacturer. or after September 1, 2003, and before S14.1.3.1 For the purpose of calcu- September 1, 2004. lating average annual production of ve- S14.1.1.2 Vehicles manufactured on or hicles for each manufacturer and the after September 1, 2004, and before Sep- number of vehicles manufactured by tember 1, 2005. Subject to S14.1.2(b), for each manufacturer under S14.1.1, a ve- vehicles manufactured by a manufac- hicle produced by more than one manu- turer on or after September 1, 2004, and facturer shall be attributed to a single before September 1, 2005, the amount of manufacturer as follows, subject to vehicles complying with S14.5.1(a), S14.1.3.2. S14.5.2, S15.1, S15.2, S17, S19, S21, S23, (a) A vehicle that is imported shall and S25 shall be not less than 65 per- be attributed to the importer. cent of: (b) A vehicle manufactured in the United States by more than one manu- (a) If the manufacturer has manufac- facturer, one of which also markets the tured vehicles for sale in the United vehicle, shall be attributed to the man- States during both of the two produc- ufacturer that markets the vehicle. tion years prior to September 1, 2004, S14.1.3.2 A vehicle produced by more the manufacturer’s average annual pro- than one manufacturer shall be attrib- duction of vehicles manufactured on or uted to any one of the vehicle’s manu- after September 1, 2002, and before Sep- facturers specified by an express writ- tember 1, 2005, or ten contract, reported to the National (b) The manufacturer’s production on Highway Traffic Safety Administration or after September 1, 2004, and before under 49 CFR Part 585, between the September 1, 2005. manufacturer so specified and the man- S14.1.1.3 Vehicles manufactured on or ufacturer to which the vehicle would after September 1, 2005, and before Sep- otherwise be attributed under S14.1.3.1. tember 1, 2006. Subject to S14.1.2(c), for S14.2 Vehicles manufactured on or after vehicles manufactured by a manufac- September 1, 2006. Each vehicle shall turer on or after September 1, 2005, and meet the requirements specified in before September 1, 2006, the amount of S14.5.1(a), S14.5.2, S15.1, S15.2, S17, S19, vehicles complying with S14.5.1(a), S21, S23, and S25 (in addition to the S14.5.2, S15.1, S15.2, S17, S19, S21, S23, other requirements specified in this and S25 shall be 100 percent of the man- standard). ufacturer’s production during that pe- S14.3 Vehicles manufactured on or after riod. September 1, 2007, and before September 1, S14.1.2 Calculation of complying ve- 2010. hicles. (a) For vehicles manufactured for (a) For the purposes of complying sale in the United States on or after with S14.1.1.1, a manufacturer may September 1, 2007, and before Sep- count a vehicle if it is manufactured on tember 1, 2010, a percentage of the or after June 12, 2000, but before Sep- manufacturer’s production, as specified tember 1, 2004. in S14.3.1, shall meet the requirements (b) For purposes of complying with specified in S14.5.1(b) (in addition to S14.1.1.2, a manufacturer may count a the other requirements of this stand- vehicle if it: ard). (1) Is manufactured on or after June (b) Manufacturers that sell two or 12, 2000, but before September 1, 2005, fewer carlines, as that term is defined and at 49 CFR 583.4, in the United States

534

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00534 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

may, at the option of the manufac- duction of vehicles manufactured on or turer, meet the requirements of this after September 1, 2006 and before Sep- paragraph instead of paragraph (a) of tember 1, 2009, or this section. Each vehicle manufac- (b) The manufacturer’s production on tured on or after September 1, 2008, and or after September 1, 2008, and before before September 1, 2010, shall meet the September 1, 2009. requirements specified in S14.5.1(b) (in S14.3.1.3 Vehicles manufactured on or addition to the other requirements after September 1, 2009, and before Sep- specified in this standard). tember 1, 2010. Subject to S14.3.2(c), for (c) Vehicles that are manufactured in vehicles manufactured by a manufac- two or more stages or that are altered turer on or after September 1, 2009, and (within the meaning of 49 CFR 567.7) before September 1, 2010, the amount of after having been previously certified vehicles complying with S14.5.1(b), in accordance with Part 567 of this S14.5.2, S15.1, S15.2, S17, S19, S21, S23, chapter are not subject to the require- and S25 shall be 100 percent of the man- ments of S14.3. ufacturer’s production during that pe- (d) Vehicles that are manufactured riod. by an original vehicle manufacturer S14.3.2 Calculation of complying vehi- that produces or assembles fewer than cles. 5,000 vehicles annually for sale in the (a) For the purposes of complying United States are not subject to the re- with S14.3.1.1, a manufacturer may quirements of S14.3. count a vehicle if it is manufactured on S14.3.1 Phase-in schedule. or after September 1, 2006, but before S14.3.1.1 Vehicles manufactured on or September 1, 2008. after September 1, 2007, and before Sep- (b) For purposes of complying with tember 1, 2008. Subject to S14.3.2(a), for S14.3.1.2, a manufacturer may count a vehicles manufactured by a manufac- vehicle if it: turer on or after September 1, 2007, and (1) Is manufactured on or after Sep- before September 1, 2008, the amount of tember 1, 2006, but before September 1, vehicles complying with S14.5.1(b), 2009, and S14.5.2, S15.1, S15.2, S17, S19, S21, S23, (2) Is not counted toward compliance and S25, shall be not less than 35 per- with S14.3.1.1. cent of: (a) If the manufacturer has manufac- (c) For purposes of complying with tured vehicles for sale in the United S14.3.1.3, a manufacturer may count a States during both of the two produc- vehicle if it: tion years prior to September 1, 2007, (1) Is manufactured on or after Sep- the manufacturer’s average annual pro- tember 1, 2006, but before September 1, duction of vehicles manufactured on or 2010, and after September 1, 2005, and before Sep- (2) Is not counted toward compliance tember 1, 2008, or with S14.3.1.1 or S14.3.1.2. (b) The manufacturer’s production on S14.3.3 Vehicles produced by more or after September 1, 2007, and before than one manufacturer. September 1, 2008. S14.3.3.1 For the purpose of calcu- S14.3.1.2 Vehicles manufactured on or lating average annual production of ve- after September 1, 2008, and before Sep- hicles for each manufacturer and the tember 1, 2009. Subject to S14.3.2(b), for number of vehicles manufactured by vehicles manufactured by a manufac- each manufacturer under S14.3.1, a ve- turer on or after September 1, 2008, and hicle produced by more than one manu- before September 1, 2009, the amount of facturer shall be attributed to a single vehicles complying with S14.5.1(b), manufacturer as follows, subject to S14.5.2, S15.1, S15.2, S17, S19, S21, S23, S14.3.3.2. and S25 shall be not less than 65 per- (a) A vehicle that is imported shall cent of: be attributed to the importer. (a) If the manufacturer has manufac- (b) A vehicle manufactured in the tured vehicles for sale in the United United States by more than one manu- States during both of the two produc- facturer, one of which also markets the tion years prior to September 1, 2008, vehicle, shall be attributed to the man- the manufacturer’s average annual pro- ufacturer that markets the vehicle.

535

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00535 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S14.3.3.2 A vehicle produced by more tested in accordance with the proce- than one manufacturer shall be attrib- dures specified in S16.1(b) of this stand- uted to any one of the vehicle’s manu- ard with the anthropomorphic test de- facturers specified by an express writ- vices unbelted. ten contract, reported to the National S15.3 Injury criteria for the 49 CFR Highway Traffic Safety Administration Part 572, Subpart O Hybrid III 5th per- under 49 CFR Part 585, between the centile female test dummy. manufacturer so specified and the man- S15.3.1 All portions of the test ufacturer to which the vehicle would dummy shall be contained within the otherwise be attributed under S14.3.3.1. outer surfaces of the vehicle passenger S14.4 Vehicles manufactured on or after compartment. September 1, 2010. Each vehicle shall S15.3.2 Head injury criteria. (a) For meet the requirements specified in any two points in time, t1 and t2, dur- S14.5.1(b), S14.5.2, S15.1, S15.2, S17, S19, ing the event which are separated by S21, S23, and S25 (in addition to the not more than a 15 millisecond time in- other requirements specified in this terval and where t1 is less than t2, the standard). head injury criterion (HIC15) shall be S14.5 Barrier test requirements using determined using the resultant head 50th percentile adult male dummies. acceleration at the center of gravity of S14.5.1 Rigid barrier belted test. (a) the dummy head, ar, expressed as a Each vehicle that is certified as com- multiple of g (the acceleration of grav- plying with S14.1 or S14.2 shall, at each ity) and shall be calculated using the front outboard designated seating posi- expression: tion, meet the injury criteria specified in S6.1, S6.2(b), S6.3, S6.4(b), S6.5, and   25. 1 t2 S6.6 when tested under S5.1.1(b)(1).  ∫ adt () t− t (b) Each vehicle that is certified as − t r 21 ()tt211  complying with S14.3 or S14.4 shall, at each front outboard designated seating (b) The maximum calculated HIC15 position, meet the injury criteria spec- value shall not exceed 700. ified in S6.1, S6.2(b), S6.3, S6.4(b), S6.5, S15.3.3 The resultant acceleration and S6.6 when tested under S5.1.1(b)(2). calculated from the output of the tho- S14.5.2 Rigid barrier unbelted test. Each racic instrumentation shall not exceed vehicle that is certified as complying 60 g’s, except for intervals whose cumu- with S14 shall, at each front outboard lative duration is not more than 3 mil- designated seating position, meet the liseconds. injury criteria specified in S6.1, S6.2(b), S15.3.4 Compression deflection of the S6.3, S6.4(b), S6.5, and S6.6 when tested sternum relative to the spine, as deter- under S5.1.2(b). mined by instrumentation, shown shall S15 Rigid barrier test requirements not exceed 52 mm (2.0 in). using 5th percentile adult female dum- S15.3.5 The force transmitted axially mies. through each femur shall not exceed S15.1 Belted test. Each vehicle that is 6805 N (1530 lb). certified as complying with S14 shall, S15.3.6 Neck injury. When measuring at each front outboard designated seat- neck injury, each of the following in- ing position, meet the injury criteria jury criteria shall be met. specified in S15.3 of this standard when (a) Nij. the vehicle is crash tested in accord- (1) The shear force (Fx), axial force ance with the procedures specified in (Fz), and bending moment (My) shall be S16.1(a) of this standard with the measured by the dummy upper neck anthropomorphic test devices re- load cell for the duration of the crash strained by a Type 2 seat belt assem- event as specified in S4.11. Shear force, bly. axial force, and bending moment shall S15.2 Unbelted test. Each vehicle that be filtered for Nij purposes at SAE is certified as complying with S14 J211/1 rev. Mar 95 Channel Frequency shall, at each front outboard des- Class 600 (see S4.7). ignated seating position, meet the in- (2) During the event, the axial force jury criteria specified in S15.3 of this (Fz) can be either in tension or com- standard when the vehicle is crash pression while the occipital condyle

536

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00536 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER12my00.005 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

bending moment (Mocy) can be in ei- accordance with the procedures speci- ther flexion or extension. This results fied in S16.3 of this standard. Impact in four possible loading conditions for the vehicle traveling longitudinally Nij: Tension-extension (Nte), tension- forward at any speed, up to and includ- flexion (Ntf), compression-extension ing 48 km/h (30 mph), into a fixed rigid (Nce), or compression-flexion (Ncf). barrier that is perpendicular within a (3) When calculating Nij using equa- tolerance of ±5 degrees to the line of tion S15.3.6(a)(4), the critical values, travel of the vehicle under the applica- Fzc and Myc, are: ble conditions of S16.2 of this standard. (i) Fzc = 4287 N (964 lbf) when Fz is in (b) Unbelted test. Place a 49 CFR Part tension 572 Subpart O 5th percentile adult fe- (ii) Fzc = 3880 N (872 lbf) when Fz is in male test dummy at each front out- compression board seating position of a vehicle, in (iii) Myc = 155 Nm (114 lbf-ft) when a accordance with the procedures speci- flexion moment exists at the occipital fied in S16.3 of this standard, except condyle S16.3.5. Impact the vehicle traveling (iv) Myc = 67 Nm (49 lbf-ft) when an longitudinally forward at any speed, extension moment exists at the occipi- from 32 km/h (20 mph) to 40 km/h (25 tal condyle. mph), inclusive, into a fixed rigid bar- (4) At each point in time, only one of rier that is perpendicular within a tol- the four loading conditions occurs and erance of ±5 degrees to the line of trav- the Nij value corresponding to that el of the vehicle under the applicable loading condition is computed and the conditions of S16.2 of this standard. three remaining loading modes shall be S16.2 Test conditions. considered a value of zero. The expres- S16.2.1 The vehicle, including test de- sion for calculating each Nij loading vices and instrumentation, is loaded as condition is given by: in S8.1.1. S16.2.2 Movable vehicle windows and Nij = (Fz/Fzc) + (Mocy/Myc) vents are placed in the fully closed po- (5) None of the four Nij values shall sition, unless the vehicle manufacturer exceed 1.0 at any time during the chooses to specify a different adjust- event. ment position prior to the time the ve- (b) Peak tension. Tension force (Fz), hicle is certified. measured at the upper neck load cell, S16.2.3 Convertibles and open-body shall not exceed 2620 N (589 lbf) at any type vehicles have the top, if any, in time. place in the closed passenger compart- (c) Peak compression. Compression ment configuration. force (Fz), measured at the upper neck S16.2.4 Doors are fully closed and load cell, shall not exceed 2520 N (566 latched but not locked. lbf) at any time. S16.2.5 The dummy is clothed in form S15.3.7 Unless otherwise indicated, fitting cotton stretch garments with instrumentation for data acquisition, short sleeves and above the knee data channel frequency class, and mo- length pants. A size 7 1/2W shoe which ment calculations are the same as meets the configuration and size speci- given for the 49 CFR Part 572, Subpart fications of MIL–S–21711E (see S4.7) or O Hybrid III 5th percentile female test its equivalent is placed on each foot of dummy. the test dummy. S16. Test procedures for rigid barrier S16.2.6 Limb joints are set at one g, test requirements using 5th percentile barely restraining the weight of the adult female dummies. limb when extended horizontally. Leg S16.1 General provisions. Crash testing joints are adjusted with the torso in to determine compliance with the re- the supine position. quirements of S15 of this standard is S16.2.7 Instrumentation shall not af- conducted as specified in the following fect the motion of dummies during im- paragraphs (a) and (b). pact. (a) Belted test. Place a 49 CFR Part S16.2.8 The stabilized temperature of 572 Subpart O 5th percentile adult fe- the dummy is at any level between 20.6 male test dummy at each front out- °C and 22.2 °C ( 69 °F to 72 °F). board seating position of a vehicle, in S16.2.9 Steering wheel adjustment.

537

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00537 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S16.2.9.1 Adjust a tiltable steering ing, as closely as possible, the angle de- wheel, if possible, so that the steering termined in S16.2.10.3.1. Set the SCRP wheel hub is at the geometric center of at the midpoint height with the seat its full range of driving positions. cushion reference line angle set as S16.2.9.2 If there is no setting detent closely as possible to the angle deter- at the mid-position, lower the steering mined in S16.2.10.3.1. Mark location of wheel to the detent just below the mid- the seat for future reference. position. S16.3 Dummy seating positioning proce- S16.2.9.3 If the steering column is dures. The 49 CFR Part 572 Subpart O telescoping, place the steering column 5th percentile adult female test in the mid-position. If there is no mid- dummy is positioned as follows: position, move the steering wheel rear- S16.3.1 General provisions and defini- ward one position from the mid-posi- tions. tion. S16.3.1.1 All angles are measured with S16.2.10 Driver and passenger seat set- respect to the horizontal plane unless up. otherwise stated. S16.2.10.1 Lumbar support adjustment. S16.3.1.2 The dummy’s neck bracket Position adjustable lumbar supports so is adjusted to align the zero degree that the lumbar support is in its low- index marks. est, retracted or deflated adjustment S16.3.1.3 The term ‘‘midsagittal plane’’ position. refers to the vertical plane that sepa- S16.2.10.2 Other seat adjustments. Po- rates the dummy into equal left and sition any adjustable parts of the seat right halves. that provide additional support so that S16.3.1.4 The term ‘‘vertical longitu- they are in the lowest or most open ad- dinal plane’’ refers to a vertical plane justment position. Position any adjust- parallel to the vehicle’s longitudinal able head restraint in the lowest and centerline. most forward position. S16.3.1.5 The term ‘‘vertical plane’’ re- S16.2.10.3 Seat position adjustment. If fers to a vertical plane, not necessarily the passenger seat does not adjust parallel to the vehicle’s longitudinal independently of the driver seat, the centerline. driver seat shall control the final posi- S16.3.1.6 The term ‘‘transverse instru- tion of the passenger seat. mentation platform’’ refers to the S16.2.10.3.1 Using only the controls transverse instrumentation surface in- that primarily move the seat and seat side the dummy’s skull casting to cushion independent of the seat back in which the neck load cell mounts. This the fore and aft directions, move the surface is perpendicular to the skull seat cushion reference point (SCRP) to cap’s machined inferior-superior the rearmost position. Using any part mounting surface. of any control, other than those just S16.3.1.7 The term ‘‘thigh’’ refers to used, determine the full range of angles the femur between, but not including, of the seat cushion reference line and the knee and the pelvis. set the seat cushion reference line to S16.3.1.8 The term ‘‘leg’’ refers to the the middle of the range. Using any part lower part of the entire leg, including of any control other than those that the knee. primarily move the seat or seat cush- S16.3.1.9 The term ‘‘foot’’ refers to the ion fore and aft, while maintaining the foot, including the ankle. seat cushion reference line angle, place S16.3.1.10 The longitudinal centerline the SCRP to its lowest position. of a bucket seat cushion is defined by a S16.2.10.3.2 Using only the control vertical plane that passes through the that primarily moves the seat fore and SgRP and is parallel to the longitu- aft, move the SCRP to the full forward dinal centerline of the vehicle. position. S16.3.1.11 For leg and thigh angles, S16.2.10.3.3 If the seat or seat cush- use the following references: ion height is adjustable, other than by S16.3.1.11.1 Thigh—a straight line on the controls that primarily move the the thigh skin between the center of seat or seat cushion fore and aft, deter- the 1/2–13 UNC–2B tapped hole in the mine the maximum and minimum upper leg femur clamp (see drawings heights of the SCRP, while maintain- 880105–504 (left thigh) and 880105–505

538

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00538 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

(right thigh), upper leg femur clamp) plane through the center of the seat and the knee pivot shoulder bolt (part cushion, within ±10 mm (±0.4 in). 880105–527 in drawing 880105–528R & S16.3.2.1.4 Bench seats. Position the 528L, sliding knee assembly without midsagittal plane of the dummy potentiometer). vertical and parallel to the vehicle’s S16.3.1.11.2 Leg—a straight line on the longitudinal centerline and aligned leg skin between the center of the within ±10 mm (±0.4 in) of the center of ankle shell (parts 880105–609 & 633 in the steering wheel rim. drawing 880105–660, ankle assembly) S16.3.2.1.5 Hold the dummy’s thighs and the knee pivot shoulder bolt (part down and push rearward on the upper 880105–527 in drawing 880105–528R & torso to maximize the dummy’s pelvic 528L, sliding knee assembly without angle. potentiometer). S16.3.2.1.6 Place the legs at 120 de- S16.3.1.12 The term ‘‘seat cushion ref- grees to the thighs. Set the initial erence point’’ (SCRP) means a point transverse distance between the longi- placed on the outboard side of the seat tudinal centerlines at the front of the cushion at a horizontal distance be- dummy’s knees at 160 to 170 mm (6.3 to tween 150 mm (5.9 in) and 250 mm (9.8 6.7 in), with the thighs and legs of the in) from the front edge of the seat used dummy in vertical planes. Push rear- as a guide in positioning the seat. ward on the dummy’s knees to force S16.3.1.13 The term ‘‘seat cushion ref- the pelvis into the seat so there is no erence line’’ means a line on the side of gap between the pelvis and the seat the seat cushion, passing through the back or until contact occurs between seat cushion reference point, whose the back of the dummy’s calves and the projection in the vehicle vertical longi- front of the seat cushion. tudinal plane is straight and has a S16.3.2.1.7 Gently rock the upper known angle with respect to the hori- torso laterally in a side to side motion zontal. three times through a ±5 degree arc S16.3.2 Driver dummy positioning. (approximately 51 mm (2 in) side to S16.3.2.1 Driver torso/head/seat back side). angle positioning. S16.3.2.1.8 If needed, extend the legs S16.3.2.1.1 With the seat in the posi- slightly so that the feet are not in con- tion determined in S16.2.10.3.3, use only tact with the floor pan. Let the thighs the control that primarily moves the rest on the seat cushion to the extent seat fore and aft to place the seat in permitted by the foot movement. Keep- the rearmost position. If the seat cush- ing the leg and the thigh in a vertical ion reference line angle automatically plane, place the foot in the vertical changes as the seat is moved from the longitudinal plane that passes through full forward position, maintain, as the centerline of the accelerator pedal. closely as possible, the seat cushion Rotate the left thigh outboard about reference line angle determined in the hip until the center of the knee is S16.2.10.3.1, for the final forward posi- the same distance from the midsagittal tion when measuring the pelvic angle plane of the dummy as the right knee as specified in S16.3.2.1.11. The seat ±5 mm (±0.2 in). Using only the control cushion reference angle position may that primarily moves the seat fore and be achieved through the use of any seat aft, attempt to return the seat to the or seat cushion adjustments other than full forward position. If either of the that which primarily moves the seat or dummy’s legs first contacts the steer- seat cushion fore-aft. ing wheel, then adjust the steering S16.3.2.1.2 Fully recline the seat wheel, if adjustable, upward until con- back, if adjustable. Install the dummy tact with the steering wheel is avoided. into the driver’s seat, such that when If the steering wheel is not adjustable, the legs are positioned 120 degrees to separate the knees enough to avoid the thighs, the calves of the legs are steering wheel contact. Proceed with not touching the seat cushion. moving the seat forward until either S16.3.2.1.3 Bucket seats. Place the the leg contacts the vehicle interior or dummy on the seat cushion so that its the seat reaches the full forward posi- midsagittal plane is vertical and coin- tion. (The right foot may contact and cides with the vertical longitudinal depress the accelerator and/or change

539

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00539 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

the angle of the foot with respect to S16.3.2.1.10 If it is not possible to the leg during seat movement.) If nec- achieve the head level within ±0.5 de- essary to avoid contact with the vehi- grees, minimize the angle. cles brake or clutch pedal, rotate the S16.3.2.1.11 Measure and set the test dummy’s left foot about the leg. If dummy’s pelvic angle using the pelvic there is still interference, rotate the angle gauge (drawing TE–2504, incor- left thigh outboard about the hip the porated by reference in 49 CFR Part minimum distance necessary to avoid 572, Subpart O of this chapter). The ± pedal interference. If a dummy leg con- angle shall be set to 20.0 degrees 2.5 tacts the vehicle interior before the degrees. If this is not possible, adjust full forward position is attained, posi- the pelvic angle as close to 20.0 degrees tion the seat at the next detent where as possible while keeping the trans- verse instrumentation platform of the there is no contact. If the seat is a head as level as possible by adjust- power seat, move the seat fore and aft ments specified in S16.3.2.1.9 and to avoid contact while assuring that S16.3.2.1.10. there is a maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) S16.3.2.1.12 If the dummy is con- distance between the vehicle interior tacting the vehicle interior after these and the point on the dummy that adjustments, using only the control would first contact the vehicle inte- that primarily moves the seat fore and rior. If the steering wheel was moved, aft, move the seat rearward until there return it to the position described in is a maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) between S16.2.9. If the steering wheel contacts the contact point of the dummy and the dummy’s leg(s) prior to attaining the interior of the vehicle or if it has a this position, adjust it to the next manual seat adjustment, to the next higher detent, or if infinitely adjust- rearward detent position. If after these able, until there is 5 mm (0.2 in) clear- adjustments, the dummy contact point ance between the wheel and the dum- is more than 5 mm (0.2 in) from the ve- my’s leg(s). hicle interior and the seat is still not S16.3.2.1.9 For vehicles without ad- in its forwardmost position, move the justable seat backs, adjust the lower seat forward until the contact point is neck bracket to level the head as much a maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) from the as possible. For vehicles with adjust- vehicle interior, or if it has a manual able seat backs, while holding the seat adjustment, move the seat to the thighs in place, rotate the seat back closest detent position that causes no forward until the transverse instru- contact, or until the seat reaches its mentation platform of the head is level forwardmost position, whichever oc- to within ±0.5 degree, making sure that curs first. the pelvis does not interfere with the S16.3.2.2 Driver foot positioning. seat bight. Inspect the abdomen to en- S16.3.2.2.1 If the vehicle has an ad- sure that it is properly installed. If the justable accelerator pedal, adjust it to the full forward position. If the heel of torso contacts the steering wheel, ad- the right foot can contact the floor just the steering wheel in the following pan, follow the positioning procedure order until there is no contact: tele- in (a). If not, follow the positioning scoping adjustment, lowering adjust- procedure in (b). ment, raising adjustment. If the vehi- (a) Rest the right foot of the test cle has no adjustments, or contact with dummy on the undepressed accelerator the steering wheel cannot be elimi- pedal with the rearmost point of the nated by adjustment, position the seat heel on the floor pan in the plane of the at the next detent where there is no pedal. If the foot cannot be placed on contact with the steering wheel as ad- the accelerator pedal, set it initially justed in S16.2.9. If the seat is a power perpendicular to the leg and then place seat, position the seat to avoid contact it as far forward as possible in the di- while assuring that there is a max- rection of the pedal centerline with the imum of 5 mm (0.2 in) distance between rearmost point of the heel resting on the steering wheel as adjusted in the floor pan. If the vehicle has an ad- S16.2.9 and the point of contact on the justable accelerator pedal and the right dummy. foot is not touching the accelerator

540

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00540 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

pedal when positioned as above, move cle’s brake pedal, clutch pedal, wheel the pedal rearward until it touches the well projection, and foot rest. To avoid right foot. If the accelerator pedal in this contact, use the three foot posi- the full rearward position still does not tion adjustments listed in paragraphs touch the foot, leave the pedal in that (a) through (c). The adjustment options position. Extend the foot and lower leg are listed in priority order, with each by decreasing the knee flexion angle subsequent option incorporating the until any part of the foot contacts the previous. In making each adjustment, undepressed accelerator pedal. If the move the foot the minimum distance foot does not contact the pedal, place necessary to avoid contact. If it is not the highest part of the foot at the same possible to avoid all prohibited foot height as the highest part of the pedal. contact, give priority to avoiding (b) Extend the foot and lower leg by brake or clutch pedal contact. decreasing the knee flexion angle until (a) Rotate (abduction/adduction) the any part of the foot contacts the test dummy’s left foot about the lower undepressed accelerator pedal or the leg, highest part of the foot is at the same (b) Plantar flex the foot, height as the highest part of the pedal. (c) Rotate the left leg about the hip If the vehicle has an adjustable accel- in either an outboard or inboard direc- erator pedal and the right foot is not tion. touching the accelerator pedal when S16.3.2.3 Driver arm/hand positioning. positioned as above, move the pedal S16.3.2.3.1 Place the dummy’s upper rearward until it touches the right arms adjacent to the torso with the foot. arm centerlines as close to a vertical S16.3.2.2.2 If the ball of the right foot longitudinal plane as possible. does not contact the pedal, increase S16.3.2.3.2 Place the palms of the the ankle plantar flexion angle such dummy in contact with the outer part that the toe of the foot contacts or is of the steering wheel rim at its hori- as close as possible to contact with the zontal centerline with the thumbs over undepressed accelerator pedal. the steering wheel rim. S16.3.2.2.3 If, in its final position, the S16.3.2.3.3 If it is not possible to posi- heel is off of the vehicle floor, a spacer tion the thumbs inside the steering block must be used under the heel to wheel rim at its horizontal centerline, support the final foot position (see fig- then position them above and as close ure 13). The surface of the block in con- to the horizontal centerline of the tact with the heel must have an incli- steering wheel rim as possible. nation of 30 degrees, measured from the S16.3.2.3.4 Lightly tape the hands to horizontal, with the highest surface to- the steering wheel rim so that if the wards the rear of the vehicle. hand of the test dummy is pushed up- S16.3.2.2.4 Place the left foot on the ward by a force of not less than 9 N (2 toe-board with the rearmost point of lb) and not more than 22 N (5 lb), the the heel resting on the floor pan as tape releases the hand from the steer- close as possible to the point of inter- ing wheel rim. section of the planes described by the S16.3.3 Passenger dummy positioning. toe-board and floor pan. S16.3.3.1 Passenger torso/head/seat back S16.3.2.2.5 If the left foot cannot be angle positioning. positioned on the toe board, place the S16.3.3.1.1 With the seat at the mid- foot perpendicular to the lower leg cen- height in the full forward position de- terline as far forward as possible with termined in S16.2.10.3.3, use only the the heel resting on the floor pan. control that primarily moves the seat S16.3.2.2.6 If the left foot does not fore and aft to place the seat in the contact the floor pan, place the foot rearmost position, without adjusting parallel to the floor and place the independent height controls. If the seat lower leg as perpendicular to the thigh cushion reference line angle automati- as possible. cally changes as the seat is moved from S16.3.2.2.7 When positioning the test the full forward position, maintain as dummy under S16.3.2.2.4, S16.3.2.2.5, and closely as possible the seat cushion ref- S16.2.2.6, avoid contact between the left erence line angle in S16.2.10.3.1, for the foot of the test dummy and the vehi- final forward position when measuring

541

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00541 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

the pelvic angle as specified in tempt to return the seat to the full for- S16.3.3.1.11. The seat cushion reference ward position. If a dummy leg contacts line angle position may be achieved the vehicle interior before the full for- through the use of any seat or seat ward position is attained, position the cushion adjustments other than that seat at the next detent where there is which primarily moves the seat or seat no contact. If the seats are power cushion fore-aft. seats, position the seat to avoid con- S16.3.3.1.2 Fully recline the seat tact while assuring that there is a back, if adjustable. Install the dummy maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) distance be- into the passenger seat, such that when tween the vehicle interior and the the legs are 120 degrees to the thighs, point on the dummy that would first the calves of the legs are not touching contact the vehicle interior. the seat cushion. S16.3.3.1.9 For vehicles without ad- S16.3.3.1.3 Bucket seats. Place the justable seat backs, adjust the lower dummy on the seat cushion so that its neck bracket to level the head as much midsagittal plane is vertical and coin- as possible. For vehicles with adjust- cides with the vertical longitudinal able seat backs, while holding the plane through the center of the seat thighs in place, rotate the seat back cushion, within ±10 mm (±0.4 mm). forward until the transverse instru- S16.3.3.1.4 Bench seats. Position the mentation platform of the head is level midsagittal plane of the dummy to within ±0.5 degrees, making sure vertical and parallel to the vehicle’s that the pelvis does not interfere with longitudinal centerline and the same the seat bight. Inspect the abdomen to distance from the vehicle’s longitu- insure that it is properly installed. dinal centerline, within ±10 mm (±0.4 S16.3.3.1.10 If it is not possible to ori- in), as the midsagittal plane of the ent the head level within ±0.5 degrees, driver dummy. minimize the angle. S16.3.3.1.5 Hold the dummy’s thighs S16.3.3.1.11 Measure and set the dum- down and push rearward on the upper my’s pelvic angle using the pelvic torso to maximize the dummy’s pelvic angle gauge (drawing TE–2504, incor- angle. porated by reference in 49 CFR Part S16.3.3.1.6 Place the legs at 120 de- 572, Subpart O, of this chapter). The grees to the thighs. Set the initial angle shall be set to 20.0 degrees ±2.5 transverse distance between the longi- degrees. If this is not possible, adjust tudinal centerlines at the front of the the pelvic angle as close to 20.0 degrees dummy’s knees at 160 to 170 mm (6.3 to as possible while keeping the trans- 6.7 in), with the thighs and legs of the verse instrumentation platform of the dummy in vertical planes. Push rear- head as level as possible, as specified in ward on the dummy’s knees to force S16.3.3.1.9 and S16.3.3.1.10. the pelvis into the seat so there is no S16.3.3.1.12 If the dummy is con- gap between the pelvis and the seat tacting the vehicle interior after these back or until contact occurs between adjustments, using only the control the back of the dummy’s calves and the that primarily moves the seat fore and front of the seat cushion. aft, move the seat rearward until there S16.3.3.1.7 Gently rock the upper is a maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) between torso laterally side to side three times the contact point of the dummy and through a ±5 degree arc (approximately the interior of the vehicle or if it has a 51 mm (2 in) side to side). manual seat adjustment, to the next S16.3.3.1.8 If needed, extend the legs rearward detent position. If after these slightly so that the feet are not in con- adjustments, the dummy contact point tact with the floor pan. Let the thighs is more than 5 mm (0.2 in) from the ve- rest on the seat cushion to the extent hicle interior and the seat is still not permitted by the foot movement. With in its forwardmost position, move the the feet perpendicular to the legs, seat forward until the contact point is place the heels on the floor pan. If a a maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) from the heel will not contact the floor pan, vehicle interior, or if it has a manual place it as close to the floor pan as pos- seat adjustment, move the seat to the sible. Using only the control that pri- closest detent position that causes no marily moves the seat fore and aft, at- contact, or until the seat reaches its

542

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00542 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

forwardmost position, whichever oc- S16.3.5.2 Place the Type 2 manual curs first. belt around the test dummy and fasten S16.3.3.2 Passenger foot positioning. the latch. S16.3.3.2.1 Place the passenger’s feet S16.3.5.3 Ensure that the dummy’s flat on the toe board. head remains as level as possible, as S16.3.3.2.2 If the feet cannot be placed specified in S16.3.2.1.9 and S16.3.2.1.10 flat on the toe board, set them perpen- and S16.3.3.1.9 and S16.3.3.1.10. dicular to the leg centerlines and place S16.3.5.4 Remove all slack from the them as far forward as possible with lap belt. Pull the upper torso webbing the heels resting on the floor pan. If ei- out of the retractor and allow it to re- ther foot does not contact the floor tract; repeat this operation four times. pan, place the foot parallel to the floor Apply a 9 N (2 lbf) to 18 N (4 lbf) tension pan and place the lower leg as perpen- load to the lap belt. If the belt system dicular to the thigh as possible. is equipped with a tension-relieving de- S16.3.3.3 Passenger arm/hand posi- tioning. vice, introduce the maximum amount S16.3.3.3.1 Place the dummy’s upper of slack into the upper torso belt that arms in contact with the seat back and is recommended by the manufacturer. the torso. If the belt system is not equipped with S16.3.3.3.2 Place the palms of the a tension-relieving device, allow the dummy in contact with the outside of excess webbing in the shoulder belt to the thighs. be retracted by the retractive force of S16.3.3.3.3 Place the little fingers in the retractor. contact with the seat cushion. S17 Offset frontal deformable barrier re- S16.3.4 Driver and passenger adjustable quirements using 5th percentile adult fe- head restraints. male test dummies. Each vehicle that is S16.3.4.1 If the head restraint has an certified as complying with S14 shall, automatic adjustment, leave it where at each front outboard designated seat- the system positions the restraint after ing position, meet the injury criteria the dummy is placed in the seat. specified in S15.3 of this standard when S16.3.4.2 Adjust each head restraint the vehicle is crash tested in accord- to its lowest position. ance with the procedures specified in S16.3.4.3 Measure the vertical dis- S18 of this standard with the tance from the top most point of the anthropomorphic test devices re- head restraint to the bottom most strained by a Type 2 seat belt assem- point. Locate a horizontal plane bly. through the midpoint of this distance. S18 Test procedure for offset frontal de- Adjust each head restraint vertically formable barrier requirements using 5th so that this horizontal plane is aligned percentile adult female dummies. with the center of gravity (CG) of the S18.1 General provisions. Place a 49 dummy head. CFR Part 572 Subpart O 5th percentile S16.3.4.3 If the above position is not adult female test dummy at each front attainable, move the vertical center of outboard seating position of a vehicle, the head restraint to the closest detent below the center of the head CG. in accordance with the procedures S16.3.4.4 If the head restraint has a specified in S16.3 of this standard. Im- fore and aft adjustment, place the re- pact the vehicle traveling longitu- straint in the forwardmost position or dinally forward at any speed, up to and until contact with the head is made, including 40 km/h (25 mph), into a fixed whichever occurs first. offset deformable barrier under the S16.3.5 Driver and passenger manual conditions and procedures specified in belt adjustment (for tests conducted with S18.2 of this standard, impacting only a belted dummy) the left side of the vehicle. S16.3.5.1 If an adjustable seat belt D- S18.2 Test conditions. ring anchorage exists, place it in the S18.2.1 Offset frontal deformable bar- manufacturer’s design position for a rier. The offset frontal deformable bar- 5th percentile adult female with the rier shall conform to the specifications seat in the position specified in set forth in Subpart C of Part 587 of S16.2.10.3. this chapter.

543

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00543 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S18.2.2 General test conditions. All of S19.2.2 The vehicle shall be equipped the test conditions specified in S16.2 of with at least one telltale which emits this standard apply. light whenever the passenger air bag S18.2.3 Dummy seating procedures. Po- system is deactivated and does not sition the anthropomorphic test dum- emit light whenever the passenger air mies as specified in S16.3 of this stand- bag system is activated, except that ard. the telltale(s) need not illuminate S18.2.4 Impact configuration. The test when the passenger seat is unoccupied. vehicle shall impact the barrier with Each telltale: the longitudinal centerline of the vehi- (a) Shall emit yellow light; cle parallel to the line of travel and (b) Shall have the identifying words perpendicular to the barrier face with- ‘‘PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF’’ or ± in a tolerance of 5 degrees. The test ‘‘PASS AIR BAG OFF’’ on the telltale vehicle shall be aligned so that the ve- or within 25 mm (1.0 in) of the telltale; hicle strikes the barrier with 40 per- and cent overlap on the left side of the ve- (c) Shall not be combined with the hicle, with the vehicle’s front engaging readiness indicator required by S4.5.2 the barrier face such that the vehicle’s of this standard. longitudinal centerline is offset out- (d) Shall be located within the inte- board of the edge of the barrier face by rior of the vehicle and forward of and 10 percent of the vehicle’s width ±50 above the design H-point of both the mm (2.0 in) as illustrated in Figure 10. driver’s and the right front passenger’s The vehicle width is defined as the maximum dimension measured across seat in their forwardmost seating posi- the widest part of the vehicle, includ- tions and shall not be located on or ad- ing bumpers and molding but excluding jacent to a surface that can be used for such components as exterior mirrors, temporary or permanent storage of ob- flexible mud flaps, marker lamps, and jects that could obscure the telltale dual rear wheel configurations. from either the driver’s or right front passenger’s view, or located where the S19 Requirements to provide protection telltale would be obscured from the for infants in rear facing and convertible driver’s view if a rear-facing child re- child restraints and car beds. S19.1 Each vehicle certified as com- straint listed in Appendix A is installed plying with S14 shall, at the option of in the right front passenger’s seat. the manufacturer, meet the require- (e) Shall be visible and recognizable ments specified in S19.2 or S19.3, under to a driver and right front passenger the test procedures specified in S20. during night and day when the occu- S19.2 Option 1—Automatic suppression pants have adapted to the ambient feature. Each vehicle shall meet the re- light roadway conditions. quirements specified in S19.2.1 through (f) Telltales need not be visible or S19.2.3. recognizable when not activated. S19.2.1 The vehicle shall be equipped (g) Means shall be provided for mak- with an automatic suppression feature ing telltales visible and recognizable to for the passenger air bag which results the driver and right front passenger in deactivation of the air bag during under all driving conditions. The each of the static tests specified in means for providing the required visi- S20.2 (using the 49 CFR Part 572 Sub- bility may be adjustable manually or part R 12-month-old CRABI child automatically, except that the dummy in any of the child restraints telltales may not be adjustable under identified in sections B and C of appen- any driving conditions to a level that dix A of this standard and the 49 CFR they become invisible or not recogniz- part 572 subpart K Newborn Infant able to the driver and right front pas- dummy in any of the car beds identi- senger. fied in section A of appendix A, as ap- (h) The telltale must not emit light propriate), and activation of the air except when the passenger air bag is bag system during each of the static turned off or during a bulb check upon tests specified in S20.3 (using the 49 vehicle starting. CFR Part 572 Subpart O 5th percentile S19.2.3 The vehicle shall be equipped adult female dummy). with a mechanism that indicates

544

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00544 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

whether the air bag system is sup- pression while the occipital condyle pressed, regardless of whether the pas- bending moment (Mocy) can be in ei- senger seat is occupied. The mecha- ther flexion or extension. This results nism need not be located in the occu- in four possible loading conditions for pant compartment unless it is the tell- Nij: tension-extension (Nte), tension- tale described in S19.2.2. flexion (Ntf), compression-extension S19.3 Option 2—Low risk deployment. (Nce), or compression-flexion (Ncf). Each vehicle shall meet the injury cri- (3) When calculating Nij using equa- teria specified in S19.4 of this standard tion S19.4.4(a)(4), the critical values, when the passenger air bag is deployed Fzc and Myc, are: in accordance with the procedures (i) Fzc = 1460 N (328 lbf) when Fz is in specified in S20.4. tension S19.4 Injury criteria for the 49 CFR (ii) Fzc = 1460 N (328 lbf) when Fz is in Part 572, Subpart R 12-month-old CRABI compression test dummy. (iii) Myc = 43 Nm (32 lbf-ft) when a S19.4.1 All portions of the test flexion moment exists at the occipital dummy and child restraint shall be condyle contained within the outer surfaces of (iv) Myc = 17 Nm (13 lbf-ft) when an the vehicle passenger compartment. extension moment exists at the occipi- S19.4.2 Head injury criteria. tal condyle. (a) For any two points in time, t1 and (4) At each point in time, only one of t2, during the event which are sepa- the four loading conditions occurs and rated by not more than a 15 milli- the Nij value corresponding to that second time interval and where t1 is loading condition is computed and the less than t2, the head injury criterion three remaining loading modes shall be (HIC15) shall be determined using the considered a value of zero. The expres- resultant head acceleration at the cen- sion for calculating each Nij loading ter of gravity of the dummy head, ar, condition is given by: expressed as a multiple of g (the accel- Nij ’ (Fz / Fzc) + (Mocy / Myc) eration of gravity) and shall be cal- culated using the expression: (5) None of the four Nij values shall exceed 1.0 at any time during the  2.5 event. 1 t2  adt () tt (b) Peak tension. Tension force (Fz), ∫ r 21 measured at the upper neck load cell, ()tt t1  21 shall not exceed 780 N (175 lbf) at any (b) The maximum calculated HIC15 time. value shall not exceed 390. (c) Peak compression. Compression S19.4.3 The resultant acceleration force (Fz), measured at the upper neck calculated from the output of the tho- load cell, shall not exceed 960 N (216 lbf) racic instrumentation shall not exceed at any time. 50 g’s, except for intervals whose cumu- S19.4.5 Unless otherwise indicated, lative duration is not more than 3 mil- instrumentation for data acquisition, liseconds. data channel frequency class, and mo- S19.4.4 Neck injury. When measuring ment calculations are the same as neck injury, each of the following in- given for the 49 CFR Part 572 Subpart jury criteria shall be met. R 12-month-old CRABI test dummy. (a) Nij. S20 Test procedure for S19. (1) The shear force (Fx), axial force S20.1 General provisions. (Fz), and bending moment (My) shall be S20.1.1 Tests specifying the use of a measured by the dummy upper neck car bed, a rear facing child restraint, or load cell for the duration of the crash a convertible child restraint may be event as specified in S4.11. Shear force, conducted using any such restraint axial force, and bending moment shall listed in sections A, B, and C of Appen- be filtered for Nij purposes at SAE dix A of this standard respectively. The J211/1 rev. Mar95 Channel Frequency car bed, rear facing child restraint, or Class 600 (see S4.7). convertible child restraint may be un- (2) During the event, the axial force used or have been previously used only (Fz) can be either in tension or com- for automatic suppression tests. If it

545

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00545 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER18DE01.000 § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

has been used, there shall not be any restraint anchorage system unattached visible damage prior to the test. to the vehicle seat anchorage system S20.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, and the vehicle seat belt attached. The each vehicle certified to this option vehicle shall comply in the unbelted shall comply in tests conducted with tests with the restraint anchorage sys- the front outboard passenger seating tem unattached to the vehicle seat an- position, if adjustable fore and aft, at chorage system. full rearward, middle, and full forward S20.1.7 If the car bed, rear facing positions. If the child restraint or child restraint, or convertible child re- dummy contacts the vehicle interior, straint comes equipped with a detach- move the seat rearward to the next de- able base, the vehicle shall comply in tent that provides clearance, or if the tests conducted with the detachable seat is a power seat, using only the base attached to the child restraint control that primarily moves the seat and with the detachable base unat- fore and aft, move the seat rearward tached to the child restraint. while assuring that there is a max- S20.1.8 Do not attach any tethers. imum of 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance be- S20.1.9 Seat set-up. Unless otherwise tween the dummy or child restraint stated. and the vehicle interior. S20.1.9.1 Lumbar support adjustment. S20.1.3 If the car bed, rear facing Position adjustable lumbar supports so child restraint, or convertible child re- that the lumbar support is in its low- straint is equipped with a handle, the est, retracted or deflated adjustment vehicle shall comply in tests conducted position. with the handle at both the child re- straint manufacturer’s recommended S20.1.9.2 Other seat adjustments. Posi- position for use in vehicles and in the tion any adjustable parts of the seat upright position. that provide additional support so that S20.1.4 If the car bed, rear facing they are in the lowest or most open ad- child restraint, or convertible child re- justment position. straint is equipped with a sunshield, S20.1.9.3 Set the seat and seat cush- the vehicle shall comply in tests con- ion in the position determined in ducted with the sunshield both fully S16.2.10.3.1. open and fully closed. S20.1.9.4 Using only the control that S20.1.5 The vehicle shall comply in primarily moves the seat in the fore tests with the car bed, rear facing child and aft direction, determine the full restraint, or convertible child restraint rearward, middle, and full forward posi- uncovered and in tests with a towel or tions of the SCRP. Using any part of blanket weighing up to 1.0 kg (2.2 lb) any seat or seat cushion adjustments, placed on or over the restraint in any other than that which primarily moves of the following positions: the seat or seat cushion fore-aft, deter- (a) with the blanket covering the top mine the SCRP mid-point height for and sides of the restraint, and each of the three fore-aft test posi- (b) with the blanket placed from the tions, while maintaining, as closely as top of the vehicle’s seat back to the possible, the seat cushion reference forwardmost edge of the restraint. line middle angle determined in S20.1.6 Except as otherwise specified, S16.2.10.3.1. if the car bed, rear facing child re- S20.1.9.5 The seat back angle, if ad- straint, or convertible child restraint justable, is set at the manufacturer’s has an anchorage system as specified in nominal design seat back angle for a S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213 and is tested in 50th percentile adult male as specified a vehicle with a front outboard pas- in S8.1.3. senger vehicle seat that has an anchor- S20.1.9.6 If adjustable, set the head age system as specified in FMVSS No. restraint at the full down and full for- 225, the vehicle shall comply in the ward position. belted tests with the restraint anchor- S20.1.10 The longitudinal centerline age system attached to the vehicle seat of a bucket seat cushion is defined by a anchorage system and the vehicle seat vertical plane that passes through the belt unattached. It shall also comply in SgRP and is parallel to the longitu- the belted test requirements with the dinal centerline of the vehicle.

546

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00546 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

S20.2 Static tests of automatic suppres- up to 134 N (30 lb) to secure the child sion feature which shall result in deacti- restraint. Measure belt tension in a vation of the passenger air bag. Each ve- flat, straight section of the lap belt be- hicle that is certified as complying tween the child restraint belt path and with S19.2 shall meet the following test the contact point with the belt anchor requirements. or vehicle seat, on the side away from S20.2.1 Belted rear facing and convert- the buckle (to avoid interference from ible child restraints. the shoulder portion of the belt). S20.2.1.1 The vehicle shall comply in (d) Position the 49 CFR Part 572 Sub- tests using any child restraint specified part R 12-month-old CRABI dummy in in section B and section C of Appendix the child restraint by following, to the A of this standard. extent possible, the manufacturer’s in- S20.2.1.2 Locate a vertical plane structions provided with the child re- through the longitudinal centerline of straint for seating infants. the child restraint. This will be re- (e) Start the vehicle engine or place ferred to as ‘‘Plane’’. the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, S20.2.1.3 For bucket seats, ‘‘Plane B’’ whichever will turn on the suppression refers to a vertical plane parallel to system, and close all vehicle doors. the vehicle longitudinal centerline Wait 10 seconds, then check whether through the longitudinal centerline of the air bag is deactivated. the front outboard passenger vehicle S20.2.1.5 Facing forward (convertible re- seat cushion. For bench seats, ‘‘Plane straints only). B’’ refers to a vertical plane through (a) The vehicle shall comply in both the front outboard passenger vehicle of the following positions, if applicable: seat parallel to the vehicle longitu- (1) Without attaching the child re- dinal centerline the same distance straint anchorage system as specified from the longitudinal centerline of the in S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213 to a vehicle vehicle as the center of the steering seat anchorage system specified in wheel. FMVSS No. 225, align the child re- S20.2.1.4 Facing rear. straint system facing forward such (a) The vehicle shall comply in both that Plane A is aligned with Plane B. of the following positions, if applicable: (2) If the child restraint is certified (1) Without attaching the child re- to S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213, and the vehi- straint anchorage system as specified cle seat has an anchorage system as in S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213 to a vehicle specified in FMVSS No. 225, attach the seat anchorage system specified in child restraint to the vehicle seat an- FMVSS No. 225, align the child re- chorage instead of aligning the planes. straint system facing rearward such Do not attach the vehicle safety belt. that Plane A is aligned with Plane B. (b) While maintaining the child re- (2) If the child restraint is certified straint positions achieved in to S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213, and the vehi- S20.2.1.5(a), secure the child restraint cle seat has an anchorage system as by following, to the extent possible, specified in FMVSS No. 225, attach the the child restraint manufacturer’s di- child restraint to the vehicle seat an- rections regarding proper installation chorage instead of aligning the planes. of the restraint in the forward facing Do not attach the vehicle safety belt. mode. (b) While maintaining the child re- (c) Place any adjustable seat belt an- straint positions achieved in chorages at the vehicle manufacturer’s S20.2.1.4(a), secure the child restraint nominal design position for a 50th per- by following, to the extent possible, centile adult male occupant. Cinch the the child restraint manufacturer’s di- vehicle belts to any tension from zero rections regarding proper installation up to 134 N (30 lb) to secure the child of the restraint in the rear facing restraint. Measure belt tension in a mode. flat, straight section of the lap belt be- (c) Place any adjustable seat belt an- tween the child restraint belt path and chorages at the vehicle manufacturer’s the contact point with the belt anchor nominal design position for a 50th per- or vehicle seat, on the side away from centile adult male occupant. Cinch the the buckle (to avoid interference from vehicle belts to any tension from zero the shoulder portion of the belt).

547

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00547 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(d) Position the 49 CFR Part 572 Sub- (b) Position the 49 CFR Part 572 Sub- part R 12-month-old CRABI dummy in part R 12-month-old CRABI dummy in the child restraint by following, to the the child restraint by following, to the extent possible, the manufacturer’s in- extent possible, the manufacturer’s in- structions provided with the child re- structions provided with the child re- straint for seating infants. straint for seating infants. (e) Start the vehicle engine or place (c) Start the vehicle engine or place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, whichever will turn on the suppression whichever will turn on the suppression system, and close all vehicle doors. system, and close all vehicle doors. Wait 10 seconds, then check whether Wait 10 seconds, then check whether the air bag is deactivated. the air bag is deactivated. S20.2.2 Unbelted rear facing and con- S20.2.3 Tests with a belted car bed. vertible child restraints. S20.2.3.1 The vehicle shall comply in S20.2.2.1 The vehicle shall comply in tests using any car bed specified in sec- tests using any child restraint specified tion A of Appendix A of this standard. in section B and section C of appendix S20.2.3.2 (a) Install the car bed by fol- A of this standard. lowing, to the extent possible, the car S20.2.2.2 Locate a vertical plane bed manufacturer’s directions regard- through the longitudinal centerline of ing proper installation of the car bed. the child restraint. This will be re- (b) Place any adjustable seat belt an- ferred to as ‘‘Plane A’’. chorages at the vehicle manufacturer’s nominal design position for a 50th per- S20.2.2.3 For bucket seats, ‘‘Plane B’’ centile adult male occupant. Cinch the refers to a vertical plane parallel to vehicle belts to secure the car bed. the vehicle longitudinal centerline (c) Position the 49 CFR Part 572 Sub- through the longitudinal centerline of part K Newborn Infant dummy in the the front outboard passenger vehicle car bed by following, to the extent pos- seat cushion. For bench seats, ‘‘Plane sible, the car bed manufacturer’s in- B’’ refers to a vertical plane through structions provided with the car bed the front outboard passenger seat par- for positioning infants. allel to the vehicle longitudinal center- (d) Start the vehicle engine or place line the same distance from the longi- the ignition in the on position, tudinal centerline of the vehicle as the ‘‘ ’’ whichever will turn on the suppression center of the steering wheel. system, and close all vehicle doors. S20.2.2.4 Facing rear. Wait 10 seconds, then check whether (a) Align the child restraint system the air bag is deactivated. facing rearward such that Plane A is S20.3 Static tests of automatic suppres- aligned with Plane B and the child re- sion feature which shall result in activa- straint is in contact with the seat tion of the passenger air bag system. back. S20.3.1 Each vehicle certified to this (b) Position the 49 CFR Part 572 Sub- option shall comply in tests conducted part R 12-month-old CRABI dummy in with the front outboard passenger seat- the child restraint by following, to the ing position, if adjustable fore and aft, extent possible, the manufacturer’s in- at the mid-height, in the full rearward structions provided with the child re- and middle positions determined in straint for seating infants. S20.1.9.4, and the forward position de- (c) Start the vehicle engine or place termined in S16.3.3.1.8. the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, S20.3.2 Place a 49 CFR part 572 sub- whichever will turn on the suppression part O 5th percentile adult female test system, and close all vehicle doors. dummy at the front outboard pas- Wait 10 seconds, then check whether senger seating position of the vehicle, the air bag is deactivated. in accordance with procedures specified S20.2.2.5 Facing forward. in S16.3.3 of this standard, except as (a) Align the child restraint system specified in S20.3.1, subject to the fore- facing forward such that Plane A is aft seat positions in S20.3.1. Do not fas- aligned with Plane B and the child re- ten the seat belt. straint is in contact with the seat S20.3.3 Start the vehicle engine or back. place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, 548

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00548 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

whichever will turn on the suppression S20.4.6 If the child restraint is cer- system, and then close all vehicle tified to S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213, and doors. the vehicle seat has an anchorage sys- S20.3.4 Wait 10 seconds, then check tem as specified in FMVSS No. 225, at- whether the air bag system is acti- tach the child restraint to the vehicle vated. seat anchorage instead of aligning the S20.4 Low risk deployment test. Each planes. Do not attach the vehicle safe- vehicle that is certified as complying ty belt. with S19.3 shall meet the following test S20.4.7 While maintaining the child requirements. restraint position achieved in S20.4.5, S20.4.1 Position the front outboard secure the child restraint by following, passenger vehicle seat at the mid- to the extent possible, the child re- height in the full forward position de- straint manufacturer’s directions re- termined in S20.1.9.4, and adjust the garding proper installation of the re- seat back (if adjustable independent of straint in the rear facing mode. Place the seat) to the nominal design posi- any adjustable seat belt anchorages at tion for a 50th percentile adult male as the manufacturer’s nominal design po- specified in S8.1.3. Position adjustable sition for a 50th percentile adult male lumbar supports so that the lumbar occupant. Cinch the vehicle belts to support is in its lowest, retracted or any tension from zero up to 134 N (30 deflated adjustment position. Position lb) to secure the child restraint. Meas- any adjustable parts of the seat that ure belt tension in a flat, straight sec- provide additional support so that they tion of the lap belt between the child are in the lowest or most open adjust- restraint belt path and the contact ment position. If adjustable, set the point with the belt anchor or vehicle head restraint at the full down and seat, on the side away from the buckle most forward position. If the child re- (to avoid interference from the shoul- straint or dummy contacts the vehicle der portion of the belt). interior, do the following: using only S20.4.8 Position the 49 CFR Part 572 the control that primarily moves the Subpart R 12-month-old CRABI dummy seat in the fore and aft direction, move in the child restraint by following, to the seat rearward to the next detent the extent possible, the manufacturer’s that provides clearance; or if the seat instructions provided with the child re- is a power seat, move the seat rearward straint for seating infants. while assuring that there is a max- imum of 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance. S20.4.9 Deploy the front outboard S20.4.2 The vehicle shall comply in passenger frontal air bag system. If the tests using any child restraint specified air bag system contains a multistage in section B and section C of appendix inflator, the vehicle shall be able to A to this standard. comply at any stage or combination of S20.4.3 Locate a vertical plane stages or time delay between succes- through the longitudinal centerline of sive stages that could occur in the the child restraint. This will be re- presence of an infant in a rear facing ferred to as ‘‘Plane A’’. child restraint and a 49 CFR Part 572, S20.4.4 For bucket seats, ‘‘Plane B’’ re- Subpart R 12-month-old CRABI dummy fers to a vertical plane parallel to the positioned according to S20.4, and also vehicle longitudinal centerline through with the seat at the mid-height, in the the longitudinal centerline of the front middle and full rearward positions de- outboard passenger seat cushion. For termined in S20.1.9.4, in a rigid barrier bench seats, ‘‘Plane B’’ refers to a crash test at speeds up to 64 km/h (40 vertical plane through the front out- mph). board passenger seat parallel to the ve- S21 Requirements using 3-year-old child hicle longitudinal centerline that is dummies. the same distance from the longitu- S21.1 Each vehicle that is certified as dinal centerline of the vehicle as the complying with S14 shall, at the option center of the steering wheel. of the manufacturer, meet the require- S20.4.5 Align the child restraint sys- ments specified in S21.2, S21.3, S21.4 or tem facing rearward such that Plane A S21.5, under the test procedures speci- is aligned with Plane B. fied in S22 or S28, as applicable.

549

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00549 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S21.2 Option 1—Automatic suppression resultant head acceleration at the cen- feature. Each vehicle shall meet the re- ter of gravity of the dummy head, ar, quirements specified in S21.2.1 through expressed as a multiple of g (the accel- S21.2.3. eration of gravity) and shall be cal- S21.2.1 The vehicle shall be equipped culated using the expression: with an automatic suppression feature for the passenger air bag which results  2.5 in deactivation of the air bag during 1 t2  ∫ adtr  () tt21 each of the static tests specified in ()tt t1  S22.2 (using a 49 CFR Part 572 Subpart 21 P 3-year-old child dummy and, as appli- (b) The maximum calculated HIC15 cable, any child restraint specified in value shall not exceed 570. section C and section D of appendix A S21.5.3 The resultant acceleration to this standard), and activation of the calculated from the output of the tho- air bag system during each of the stat- racic instrumentation shall not exceed ic tests specified in S22.3 (using a 49 55 g’s, except for intervals whose cumu- CFR Part 572 Subpart O 5th percentile lative duration is not more than 3 mil- adult female dummy). liseconds. S21.2.2 The vehicle shall be equipped S21.5.4 Compression deflection of the with a telltale light meeting the re- sternum relative to the spine, as deter- quirements specified in S19.2.2. mined by instrumentation, shall not S21.2.3 The vehicle shall be equipped exceed 34 millimeters (1.3 in). with a mechanism that indicates S21.5.5 Neck injury. When measuring whether the air bag is suppressed, re- neck injury, each of the following in- gardless of whether the passenger seat jury criteria shall be met. is occupied. The mechanism need not (a) Nij. be located in the occupant compart- (1) The shear force (Fx), axial force ment unless it is the telltale described (Fz), and bending moment (My) shall be in S21.2.2. measured by the dummy upper neck S21.3 Option 2—Dynamic automatic load cell for the duration of the crash suppression system that suppresses the air event as specified in S4.11. Shear force, bag when an occupant is out of position. axial force, and bending moment shall (This option is available under the con- be filtered for Nij purposes at SAE ditions set forth in S27.1.) The vehicle J211/1 rev. Mar95 Channel Frequency shall be equipped with a dynamic auto- Class 600 (see S4.7). matic suppression system for the pas- (2) During the event, the axial force senger air bag system which meets the (Fz) can be either in tension or com- requirements specified in S27. pression while the occipital condyle S21.4 Option 3—Low risk deployment. bending moment (Mocy) can be in ei- Each vehicle shall meet the injury cri- ther flexion or extension. This results teria specified in S21.5 of this standard in four possible loading conditions for when the passenger air bag is deployed Nij: Tension-extension (Nte), tension- in accordance with both of the low risk flexion (Ntf), compression-extension deployment test procedures specified in (Nce), or compression-flexion (Ncf). S22.4. (3) When calculating Nij using equa- S21.5 Injury criteria for the 49 CFR tion S21.5.5(a)(4), the critical values, Part 572, Subpart P 3-year-old child test Fzc and Myc, are: dummy. (i) Fzc = 2120 N (477 lbf) when Fz is in S21.5.1 All portions of the test tension dummy shall be contained within the (ii) Fzc = 2120 N (477 lbf) when Fz is in outer surfaces of the vehicle passenger compression compartment. (iii) Myc = 68 Nm (50 lbf-ft) when a S21.5.2 Head injury criteria. flexion moment exists at the occipital (a) For any two points in time, t1 and condyle t2, during the event which are sepa- (iv) Myc = 27 Nm (20 lbf-ft) when an rated by not more than a 15 milli- extension moment exists at the occipi- second time interval and where t1 is tal condyle. less than t2, the head injury criterion (4) At each point in time, only one of (HIC15) shall be determined using the the four loading conditions occurs and 550

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00550 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER18DE01.001 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

the Nij value corresponding to that S22.1.3 Except as otherwise specified, loading condition is computed and the if the child restraint has an anchorage three remaining loading modes shall be system as specified in S5.9 of FMVSS considered a value of zero. The expres- No. 213 and is tested in a vehicle with sion for calculating each Nij loading a front outboard passenger vehicle seat condition is given by: that has an anchorage system as speci- fied in FMVSS No. 225, the vehicle Nij = (Fz / Fzc) + (Mocy / Myc) shall comply with the belted test con- (5) None of the four Nij values shall ditions with the restraint anchorage exceed 1.0 at any time during the system attached to the vehicle seat an- event. chorage system and the vehicle seat (b) Peak tension. Tension force (Fz), belt unattached. It shall also comply measured at the upper neck load cell, with the belted test conditions with shall not exceed 1130 N (254 lbf) at any the restraint anchorage system unat- time. tached to the vehicle seat anchorage (c) Peak compression. Compression system and the vehicle seat belt at- force (Fz), measured at the upper neck tached. load cell, shall not exceed 1380 N (310 S22.1.4 Do not attach any tethers. lbf) at any time. S22.1.5 The definitions provided in S21.5.6 Unless otherwise indicated, S16.3.1 through S16.3.10 apply to the instrumentation for data acquisition, tests specified in S22. data channel frequency class, and mo- S22.1.6 For leg and thigh angles use ment calculations are the same as the following references: given in 49 CFR Part 572 Subpart P 3- (a) Thigh—a straight line on the year-old child test dummy. thigh skin between the center of the 5⁄16 S22 Test procedure for S21. × 1⁄2 in. screw (part 9001024, item 10 in S22.1 General provisions and defini- drawing 210–0000 sheet 2 of 7, complete tions. assembly (HYB III 3 YR OLD)) and the S22.1.1 Tests specifying the use of a knee bolt (part 210–5301 in drawing 210– forward facing child restraint, includ- 5000–1 & –1, leg assembly). ing a booster seat where applicable, (b) Leg—a straight line on the leg may be conducted using any such re- skin between the center of the ankle straint listed in section C and section bolt (part 210–5701 in drawing 210–5000– D of Appendix A of this standard, re- 1 & –2, leg assembly) and the knee bolt spectively. The child restraint may be (part 210–5301 in drawing 210–5000–1 & unused or have been previously used –2, leg assembly). only for automatic suppression tests. If S22.1.7 Seat set-up. Unless otherwise it has been used, there shall not be any stated, visible damage prior to the test. Boost- S22.1.7.1 Lumbar support adjustment. er seats are to be used in the manner Position adjustable lumbar supports so appropriate for a 3-year-old child of the that the lumbar support is in its low- same height and weight as the 3-year- est, retracted or deflated adjustment old child dummy. position. S22.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, S22.1.7.2 Other seat adjustments. Posi- each vehicle certified to this option tion any adjustable parts of the seat shall comply in tests conducted with that provide additional support so that the front outboard passenger seating they are in the lowest or most open ad- position at the mid-height, in the full justment position. rearward, middle, and the full forward S22.1.7.3 Set the seat and seat cush- positions determined in S22.1.7.4. If the ion in the position determined in dummy contacts the vehicle interior, S16.2.10.3.1. using only the control that primarily S22.1.7.4 Using only the control that moves the seat fore and aft, move the primarily moves the seat in the fore seat rearward to the next detent that and aft direction, determine the full provides clearance. If the seat is a rearward, middle, and full forward posi- power seat, move the seat rearward tions of the SCRP. Using any part of while assuring that there is a max- any seat or seat cushion adjustments imum of 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance. other than that which primarily moves

551

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00551 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

the seat or seat cushion fore-aft, deter- cle seat has an anchorage system as mine the SCRP mid-point height for specified in FMVSS No. 225, attach the each of the three fore-aft test posi- child restraint to the vehicle seat an- tions, while maintaining, as closely as chorage instead of aligning the planes. possible, the seat cushion reference Do not attach the vehicle safety belt. line angle determined in S16.2.10.3.1. S22.2.1.5 Forward facing child restraint S22.1.7.5 The seat back angle, if ad- S22.2.1.5.1 Place any adjustable seat justable, is set at the manufacturer’s belt anchorages at the vehicle manu- nominal design seat back angle for a facturer’s nominal design position for a 50th percentile adult male as specified 50th percentile adult male occupant. in S8.1.3. Cinch the vehicle belts to any tension S22.1.7.6 If adjustable, set the head from zero up to 134 N (30 lb) to secure restraint at the full down and full for- the child restraint. Measure belt ten- ward position. sion in a flat, straight section of the S22.2 Static tests of automatic suppres- lap belt between the child restraint sion feature which shall result in deacti- belt path and the contact point with vation of the passenger air bag. Each ve- the belt anchor or vehicle seat, on the hicle that is certified as complying side away from the buckle (to avoid in- with S21.2 shall meet the following test terference from the shoulder portion of requirements: the belt). S22.2.1 Belted test with forward facing S22.2.1.5.2 Position the 49 CFR Part child restraints or booster seats. 572 Subpart P 3-year-old child dummy S22.2.1.1 Install the restraint in the in the child restraint such that the front outboard passenger vehicle seat dummy’s lower torso is centered on the in accordance, to the extent possible, child restraint and the dummy’s spine with the child restraint manufacturer’s is against the seat back of the child re- instructions provided with the seat for straint. Place the arms at the dummy’s use by children with the same height sides. and weight as the 3-year-old child S22.2.1.5.3 Attach all belts that come dummy. with the child restraint that are appro- S22.2.1.2 Locate a vertical plane priate for a child of the same height through the longitudinal centerline of and weight as the 3-year-old child the child restraint. This will be re- dummy, if any, by following, to the ex- ferred to as ‘‘Plane A’’. tent possible, the manufacturer’s in- S22.2.1.3 For bucket seats, ‘‘Plane B’’ structions provided with the child re- refers to a vertical longitudinal plane straint for seating children. through the longitudinal centerline of S22.2.1.6 Booster seat the seat cushion of the front outboard S22.2.1.6.1 Place any adjustable seat passenger vehicle seat. For bench belt anchorages at the vehicle manu- seats, ‘‘Plane B’’ refers to a vertical facturer’s nominal design position for a plane through the front outboard pas- 50th percentile adult male occupant. senger vehicle seat parallel to the vehi- For booster seats designed to be se- cle longitudinal centerline the same cured to the vehicle seat even when distance from the longitudinal center- empty, cinch the vehicle belts to any line of the vehicle as the center of the tension from zero up to 134 N (30 lb) to steering wheel. secure the booster seat. Measure belt 22.2.1.4 The vehicle shall comply in tension in a flat, straight section of the both of the following positions, if appli- lap belt between the child restraint cable: belt path and the contact point with (a) Without attaching the child re- the belt anchor or vehicle seat, on the straint anchorage system as specified side away from the buckle (to avoid in- in S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213 to a vehicle terference from the shoulder portion of seat anchorage system specified in the belt). FMVSS No. 225 and without attaching S22.2.1.6.2 Position the 49 CFR Part any tethers, align the child restraint 572 Subpart P 3-year-old child dummy system facing forward such that Plane in the booster seat such that the dum- A is aligned with Plane B. my’s lower torso is centered on the (b) If the child restraint is certified booster seat cushion and the dummy’s to S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213, and the vehi- back is parallel to and in contact with

552

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00552 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

the booster seat back or, if there is no (c) Allow the legs of the dummy to booster seat back, the vehicle seat extend off the surface of the seat. back. Place the arms at the dummy’s (d) Rotate the dummy’s upper arms sides. down until they contact the seat back. S22.2.1.6.3 If applicable, attach all (e) Rotate the dummy’s lower arms belts that come with the child re- until the dummy’s hands contact the straint that are appropriate for a child seat cushion. of the same height and weight as the 3- (f) Start the vehicle engine or place year-old child dummy, if any, by fol- the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, lowing, to the extent possible, the whichever will turn on the suppression manufacturer’s instructions provided system, and then close all vehicle with the child restraint for seating doors. children. (g) Wait 10 seconds, then check S22.2.1.6.4 If applicable, place the whether the air bag is deactivated. Type 2 manual belt around the test S22.2.2.2 Sitting on seat with back dummy and fasten the latch. Remove against reclined seat back. Repeat the all slack from the lap belt portion. Pull test sequence in S22.2.2.1 with the seat the upper torso webbing out of the re- back angle 25 degrees rearward of the tractor and allow it to retract; repeat manufacturer’s nominal design posi- this four times. Apply a 9 to 18 N (2 to tion for the 50th percentile adult male. 4 lb) tension load to the lap belt. Allow If the seat will not recline 25 degrees the excess webbing in the upper torso rearward of the nominal design posi- belt to be retracted by the retractive tion, use the closest position that does force of the retractor. not exceed 25 degrees. S22.2.1.7 Start the vehicle engine or S22.2.2.3 Sitting on seat with back not place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, whichever will turn on the suppression against seat back. system, and then close all vehicle (a) Place the dummy on the front doors. outboard passenger seat. S22.2.1.8 Wait 10 seconds, then check (b) In the case of vehicles equipped whether the air bag is deactivated. with bench seats, position the S22.2.2 Unbelted tests with dummies. midsagittal plane of the dummy Place the 49 CFR part 572 subpart P 3- vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s year-old child dummy on the front out- longitudinal centerline and the same board passenger vehicle seat in any of distance from the vehicle’s longitu- the following positions (without using dinal centerline, within ±10 mm (±0.4 a child restraint or booster seat or the in), as the center of the steering wheel. vehicle’s seat belts): In the case of vehicles equipped with S22.2.2.1 Sitting on seat with back bucket seats, position the midsagittal against seat back. plane of the dummy vertically such (a) Place the dummy on the front that it coincides with the longitudinal outboard passenger seat. centerline of the seat cushion, within (b) In the case of vehicles equipped ±10 mm (±0.4 in). Position the dummy with bench seats, position the with the spine vertical so that the hor- midsagittal plane of the dummy izontal distance from the dummy’s vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s back to the seat back is no less than 25 longitudinal centerline and the same mm (1.0 in) and no more than 150 mm distance from the vehicle’s longitu- (6.0 in), as measured along the dum- dinal centerline, within ±10 mm (±0.4 my’s midsagittal plane at the mid-ster- in), as the center of the steering wheel. num level. To keep the dummy in posi- In the case of vehicles equipped with tion, a material with a maximum bucket seats, position the midsagittal breaking strength of 311 N (70 lb) may plane of the dummy vertically such be used to hold the dummy. that it coincides with the longitudinal (c) Position the dummy’s thighs centerline of the seat cushion, within against the seat cushion. ±10 mm (±0.4 in). Position the torso of (d) Allow the legs of the dummy to the dummy against the seat back. Po- extend off the surface of the seat. sition the dummy’s thighs against the (e) Position the upper arms parallel seat cushion. to the spine and rotate the dummy’s

553

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00553 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

lower arms until the dummy’s hands in), as the center of the steering wheel contact the seat cushion. rim. In the case of vehicles equipped (f) Start the vehicle engine or place with bucket seats, position the the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, midsagittal plane of the dummy whichever will turn on the suppression vertically such that it coincides with system, and then close all vehicle the longitudinal centerline of the seat doors. cushion, within ±10 mm (±0.4 in). Posi- (g) Wait 10 seconds, then check tion the dummy in a standing position whether the air bag is deactivated. on the front outboard passenger seat S22.2.2.4 Sitting on seat edge, spine cushion facing the front of the vehicle vertical, hands by the dummy’s sides. while placing the heels of the dummy’s (a) In the case of vehicles equipped feet in contact with the seat back. with bench seats, position the (b) Rest the dummy against the seat midsagittal plane of the dummy back, with the arms parallel to the vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s spine. longitudinal centerline and the same (c) If the head contacts the vehicle distance from the vehicle’s longitu- roof, recline the seat so that the head dinal centerline, within ±10 mm (±0.4 is no longer in contact with the vehicle in), as the center of the steering wheel. roof, but allow no more than 5 mm (0.2 In the case of vehicles equipped with in) distance between the head and the bucket seats, position the midsagittal roof. If the seat does not sufficiently plane of the dummy vertically such recline to allow clearance, omit the that it coincides with the longitudinal test. centerline of the seat cushion, within (d) If necessary use a material with a ±10 mm (±0.4 in). maximum breaking strength of 311 N (b) Position the dummy in the seated (70 lb) or spacer blocks to keep the position forward in the seat such that dummy in position. the legs are vertical and the back of (e) Start the vehicle engine or place the legs rest against the front of the the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, seat with the spine vertical. If the whichever will turn on the suppression dummy’s feet contact the floor pan, ro- system, and then close all vehicle tate the legs forward until the dummy doors. is resting on the seat with the feet po- (f) Wait 10 seconds, then check sitioned flat on the floor pan and the whether the air bag is deactivated. dummy spine vertical. To keep the S22.2.2.6 Kneeling on seat, facing for- dummy in position, a material with a ward. maximum breaking strength of 311 N (a) In the case of vehicles equipped (70 lb) may be used to hold the dummy. with bench seats, position the (c) Place the upper arms parallel to midsagittal plane of the dummy the spine. vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s (d) Lower the dummy’s lower arms longitudinal centerline and the same such that they contact the seat cush- distance from the vehicle’s longitu- ion. dinal centerline, within ±10 mm (±0.4 (e) Start the vehicle engine or place in), as the center of the steering wheel. the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, In the case of vehicles equipped with whichever will turn on the suppression bucket seats, position the midsagittal system, and then close all vehicle plane of the dummy vertically such doors. that it coincides with the longitudinal (f) Wait 10 seconds, then check centerline of the seat cushion, within whether the air bag is deactivated. ±10 mm (±0.4 in). S22.2.2.5 Standing on seat, facing for- (b) Position the dummy in a kneeling ward. position in the front outboard pas- (a) In the case of vehicles equipped senger vehicle seat with the dummy with bench seats, position the facing the front of the vehicle with its midsagittal plane of the dummy toes at the intersection of the seat vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s back and seat cushion. Position the longitudinal centerline and the same dummy so that the spine is vertical. distance from the vehicle’s longitu- Push down on the legs so that they dinal centerline, within ±10 mm (±0.4 contact the seat as much as possible

554

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00554 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

and then release. Place the arms par- (4) A plane passing through the two allel to the spine. shoulder joints of the dummy is (c) If necessary use a material with a vertical, maximum breaking strength of 311 N (5) The anterior of the dummy is fac- (70 lb) or spacer blocks to keep the ing the vehicle front, dummy in position. (6) The head of the dummy is posi- (d) Start the vehicle engine or place tioned towards the passenger door, and the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, (7) The horizontal distance from the whichever will turn on the suppression topmost point of the dummy’s head to system, and then close all vehicle the vehicle door is 50 to 100 mm (2–4 doors. in). (e) Wait 10 seconds, then check (8) The dummy is as far back in the whether the air bag is deactivated. seat as possible. S22.2.2.7 Kneeling on seat, facing rear- (b) Rotate the thighs as much as pos- ward. sible toward the chest of the dummy (a) In the case of vehicles equipped and rotate the legs as much as possible with bench seats, position the against the thighs. midsagittal plane of the dummy (c) Move the dummy’s upper left arm vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s parallel to the vehicle’s transverse longitudinal centerline and the same plane and the lower left arm 90 degrees distance from the vehicle’s longitu- to the upper arm. Rotate the lower left dinal centerline, within ±10 mm (±0.4 arm about the elbow joint and toward in), as the center of the steering wheel. the dummy’s head until movement is In the case of vehicles equipped with obstructed. bucket seats, position the midsagittal (d) Start the vehicle engine or place plane of the dummy vertically such the ignition in the on position, that it coincides with the longitudinal ‘‘ ’’ whichever will turn on the suppression centerline of the seat cushion, within system, and then close all vehicle ±10 mm (±0.4 in). doors. (b) Position the dummy in a kneeling position in the front outboard pas- (e) Wait 10 seconds, then check senger vehicle seat with the dummy whether the air bag is deactivated. facing the rear of the vehicle. Position S22.3 Static tests of automatic suppres- the dummy such that the dummy’s sion feature which shall result in activa- head and torso are in contact with the tion of the passenger air bag system. seat back. Push down on the legs so S22.3.1 Each vehicle certified to this that they contact the seat as much as option shall comply in tests conducted possible and then release. Place the with the front outboard passenger seat- arms parallel to the spine. ing position at the mid-height, in the (c) Start the vehicle engine or place full rearward, and middle positions de- the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, termined in S22.1.7.4, and the forward whichever will turn on the suppression position determined in S16.3.3.1.8. system, and then close all vehicle S22.3.2 Place a 49 CFR part 572 sub- doors. part O 5th percentile adult female test (d) Wait 10 seconds, then check dummy at the front outboard pas- whether the air bag is deactivated. senger seating position of the vehicle, S22.2.2.8 Lying on seat. This test is in accordance with procedures specified performed only in vehicles with 3 des- in S16.3.3 of this standard, except as ignated front seating positions. specified in S22.3.1. Do not fasten the (a) Lay the dummy on the front out- seat belt. board passenger vehicle seat such that S22.3.3 Start the vehicle engine or the following criteria are met: place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, (1) The midsagittal plane of the whichever will turn on the suppression dummy is horizontal, system, and then close all vehicle (2) The dummy’s spine is perpen- doors. dicular to the vehicle’s longitudinal S22.3.4 Wait 10 seconds, then check axis, whether the air bag system is acti- (3) The dummy’s arms are parallel to vated. its spine, S22.4 Low risk deployment tests.

555

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00555 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S22.4.1 Each vehicle that is certified the instrument panel as specified in as complying with S21.4 shall meet the S22.4.2.3. following test requirements with the 49 S22.4.2.2.3 The upper arms are par- CFR Part 572, Subpart P 3-year-old allel to the torso and the hands are in child dummy in both of the following contact with the thighs. positions: Position 1 (S22.4.2) and Posi- S22.4.2.3 Without changing the seat tion 2 (S22.4.3). position and with the dummy’s thorax S22.4.1.1 Locate and mark a point on instrument cavity rear face vertical, the front of the dummy’s chest jacket move the dummy forward until the on the midsagittal plane that is 114 dummy head/torso contacts the instru- mm (4.5 in) ±3 mm (±0.1 in) along the ment panel. If the dummy loses con- surface of the skin from the top of the tact with the seat cushion because of skin at the neck line. This is referred the forward movement, maintain the to as ‘‘Point 1.’’ height of the dummy and the angle of S22.4.1.2 Mark a point on the instru- the thigh with respect to the torso. ment panel that is longitudinally and Once contact is made, raise the dummy transversely, as measured along the vertically until Point 1 lies in Plane C surface of the instrument panel, within within ±10 mm (±0.4 in). If the dummy’s ± ± 6 mm ( 0.2 in) of the point that is de- head contacts the windshield and keeps fined by the intersection of the instru- Point 1 from reaching Plane C, lower ment panel and a line between the vol- the dummy until there is no more than umetric center of the smallest volume 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance between the that can encompass the folded head and the windshield. (The dummy undeployed air bag and the volumetric shall remain in contact with the in- center of the static fully inflated air strument panel while being raised or bag. lowered, which may change the dum- S22.4.1.3 Locate the vertical plane my’s fore-aft position.) parallel to the vehicle longitudinal S22.4.2.4 If possible, position the legs centerline through the point located in of the dummy so that the legs are S22.4.1.2. This is referred to as ‘‘Plane vertical and the feet rest flat on the D.’’ S22.4.1.4 Locate the horizontal plane floor pan of the vehicle. If the posi- through the point located in S22.4.1.2. tioning against the instrument panel does not allow the feet to be on the This is referred to as ‘‘Plane C.’’ S22.4.2 Position 1 (chest on instrument floor pan, the feet shall be parallel to panel). the floor pan. S22.4.2.1 Set the seat and seat cush- S22.4.2.5 If necessary, material with a ion in the positions determined in maximum breaking strength of 311 N S16.2.10.3.1. If the seat back is adjust- (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used able independent of the seat, place the to support the dummy in position. The seat back at the manufacturer’s nomi- material should support the torso rath- nal design seat back angle for a 50th er than the head. Support the dummy percentile adult male as specified in so that there is minimum interference S8.1.3. Position any adjustable parts of with the full rotational and the seat that provide additional sup- translational freedom for the upper port so that they are in the lowest or torso of the dummy and the material most open adjustment position. If ad- does not interfere with the air bag. justable, set the head restraint in the S22.4.3 Position 2 (head on instrument lowest and most forward position. panel). S22.4.2.2 Place the dummy in the S22.4.3.1 Place the front outboard front outboard passenger seat such passenger seat at the mid-height, in that: full rearward seating position deter- S22.4.2.2.1 The midsagittal plane is mined in S22.1.7.4. Place the seat back, coincident with Plane D within ±10 mm if adjustable independent of the seat, (±0.4 in). at the manufacturer’s nominal design S22.4.2.2.2 The legs are initially seat back angle for a 50th percentile vertical to the floor pan. The legs and adult male as specified in S8.1.3. Posi- thighs shall be adjusted to the extent tion any adjustable parts of the seat necessary for the head/torso to contact that provide additional support so that

556

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00556 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

they are in the lowest or most open ad- instrument panel or until a maximum justment position. If adjustable, set force of 222 N (50 lb) is achieved. If the the head restraint in the lowest and head/torso is still not in contact with most forward position. the instrument panel, hold the femurs S22.4.3.2 Place the dummy in the and release the 222 N (50 lb) force. front outboard passenger seat such While maintaining the relative angle that: between the torso and the femurs, roll S22.4.3.2.1 The midsagittal plane is the dummy forward on the seat cush- coincident with Plane D within ±10 mm ion, without sliding, until head/torso (±0.4 in). contact with the instrument panel is S22.4.3.2.2 The legs are vertical to the achieved. If seat contact is lost prior to floor pan, the back of the legs are in or during femur rotation out of the contact with the seat cushion, and the horizontal plane, constrain the dummy dummy’s thorax instrument cavity to rotate about the dummy H-point. If rear face is vertical. If it is not possible the dummy cannot be rolled forward on to position the dummy with the legs in the seat due to contact of the dummy the prescribed position, rotate the legs feet with the floor pan, extend the forward until the dummy is resting on lower legs forward, at the knees, until the seat with the feet positioned flat floor pan contact is avoided. on the floor pan, and the back of the S22.4.3.6 If necessary, material with a legs are in contact with the front of maximum breaking strength of 311 N the seat cushion. Set the transverse (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used distance between the longitudinal to support the dummy in position. The centerlines at the front of the dummy’s material should support the torso rath- knees at 86 to 91 mm (3.4 to 3.6 in), with er than the head. Support the dummy the thighs and the legs of the dummy so that there is minimum interference in vertical planes. with the full rotational and S22.4.3.2.3 The upper arms are par- translational freedom for the upper allel to the torso and the hands are in torso of the dummy and the material contact with the thighs. does not interfere with the air bag. S22.4.3.3 Using only the control that S22.4.4 Deploy the front outboard primarily moves the seat in the fore passenger frontal air bag system. If the and aft direction, move the seat for- frontal air bag system contains a ward, while maintaining the thorax in- multistage inflator, the vehicle shall strument cavity rear face orientation be able to comply with the injury cri- until any part of the dummy contacts teria at any stage or combination of the vehicle’s instrument panel. stages or time delay between succes- S22.4.3.4 If dummy contact has not sive stages that could occur in a rigid been made with the vehicle’s instru- barrier crash test at or below 26 km/h ment panel at the full forward seating (16 mph), under the test procedure position of the seat, slide the dummy specified in S22.5. forward until contact is made. Main- S22.5 Test procedure for determining tain the thorax instrument cavity rear stages of air bag systems subject to low face vertical orientation. If the dummy risk deployment (low speed crashes) test loses contact with the seat, from that requirement. point forward, maintain the height of S22.5.1 The test described in S22.5.2 the dummy. Except as provided in shall be conducted with an unbelted S22.4.3.5, maintain the angle of the 50th percentile adult male test dummy thigh with respect to the horizontal. in the driver seating position according S22.4.3.5 If head/torso contact with to S8 as it applies to that seating posi- the instrument panel has not been tion and an unbelted 5th percentile made, maintain the angle of the thighs adult female test dummy either in the with respect to the horizontal while ap- front outboard passenger vehicle seat- plying a force towards the front of the ing position according to S16 as it ap- vehicle on the spine of the dummy be- plies to that seating position or at any tween the shoulder joints, perpen- fore-aft seat position on the passenger dicular to the thorax instrument cav- side. ity rear face, until the head or torso S22.5.2 Impact the vehicle traveling comes into contact with the vehicle’s longitudinally forward at any speed, up

557

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00557 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

to and including 26 km/h (16 mph) into S23.3 Option 2—Dynamic automatic a fixed rigid barrier that is perpen- suppression system that suppresses the air dicular ±5 degrees to the line of travel bag when an occupant is out of position. of the vehicle under the applicable con- (This option is available under the con- ditions of S8, S10, and S16 excluding ditions set forth in S27.1.) The vehicle S10.7, S10.8, S10.9, and S16.3.5. shall be equipped with a dynamic auto- S22.5.3 Determine which inflation matic suppression system for the pas- stage or combination of stages are fired senger frontal air bag system which and determine the time delay between meets the requirements specified in successive stages. That stage or com- S27. bination of stages, with time delay be- S23.4 Option 3—Low risk deployment. tween successive stages, shall be used Each vehicle shall meet the injury cri- in deploying the air bag when con- teria specified in S23.5 of this standard ducting the low risk deployment tests when the passenger air bag is statically described in S22.4, S24.4, and S26. deployed in accordance with both of S22.5.4 If the air bag does not deploy the low risk deployment test proce- in the impact described in S22.5.2, the dures specified in S24.4. low risk deployment tests described in S23.5 Injury criteria for the 49 CFR S22.4, S24.4, and S26 shall be conducted Part 572 Subpart N 6-year-old child with all stages using the maximum dummy. time delay between stages. S23.5.1 All portions of the test S23 Requirements using 6-year-old child dummy shall be contained within the outer surfaces of the vehicle passenger dummies. compartment. S23.1 Each vehicle that is certified as S23.5.2 Head injury criteria. complying with S14 shall, at the option (a) For any two points in time, t and of the manufacturer, meet the require- 1 t , during the event which are sepa- ments specified in S23.2, S23.3, or S23.4, 2 rated by not more than a 15 milli- under the test procedures specified in second time interval and where t1 is S24 or S28, as applicable. less than t , the head injury criterion S23.2 Option 1—Automatic suppression 2 (HIC15) shall be determined using the feature. Each vehicle shall meet the re- resultant head acceleration at the cen- quirements specified in S23.2.1 through ter of gravity of the dummy head, ar, S23.2.3. expressed as a multiple of g (the accel- S23.2.1 The vehicle shall be equipped eration of gravity) and shall be cal- with an automatic suppression feature culated using the expression: for the passenger frontal air bag sys- tem which results in deactivation of  2.5 the air bag during each of the static 1 t2 () tests specified in S24.2 (using a 49 CFR  ∫ adtr  tt21 ()tt t1  Part 572 Subpart N 6-year-old child  21 

dummy in any of the child restraints (b) The maximum calculated HIC15 specified in section D of Appendix A of value shall not exceed 700. this standard), and activation of the S23.5.3 The resultant acceleration air bag system during each of the stat- calculated from the output of the tho- ic tests specified in S24.3 (using a 49 racic instrumentation shall not exceed CFR Part 572 Subpart O 5th percentile 60 g’s, except for intervals whose cumu- adult female dummy). lative duration is not more than 3 mil- S23.2.2 The vehicle shall be equipped liseconds. with a telltale light meeting the re- S23.5.4 Compression deflection of the quirements specified in S19.2.2. sternum relative to the spine, as deter- S23.2.3 The vehicle shall be equipped mined by instrumentation, shall not with a mechanism that indicates exceed 40 mm (l.6 in). whether the air bag is suppressed, re- S23.5.5 Neck injury. When measuring gardless of whether the passenger seat neck injury, each of the following in- is occupied. The mechanism need not jury criteria shall be met. be located in the occupant compart- (a) Nij. ment unless it is the telltale described (1) The shear force (Fx), axial force in S23.2.2. (Fz), and bending moment (My) shall be

558

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00558 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER18de01.001 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

measured by the dummy upper neck S24.1.1 Tests specifying the use of a load cell for the duration of the crash booster seat may be conducted using event as specified in S4.11. Shear force, any such restraint listed in section D axial force, and bending moment shall of Appendix A of this standard. The be filtered for Nij purposes at SAE booster seat may be unused or have J211/1 rev. Mar95 Channel Frequency been previously used only for auto- Class 600 (see S4.7). matic suppression. If it has been used, (2) During the event, the axial force there shall not be any visible damage (Fz) can be either in tension or com- prior to the test. Booster seats are to pression while the occipital condyle be used in the manner appropriate for a bending moment (Mocy) can be in ei- 6-year-old child of the same height and ther flexion or extension. This results weight as the 6-year-old child dummy. in four possible loading conditions for S24.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, Nij: tension-extension (Nte), tension- each vehicle certified to this option flexion (Ntf), compression-extension shall comply in tests conducted with (Nce), or compression-flexion (Ncf). the front outboard passenger seating (3) When calculating Nij using equa- position at the mid-height, in the full tion S23.5.5(a)(4), the critical values, rearward seat track position, the mid- Fzc and Myc, are: dle seat track position, and the full for- (i) Fzc = 2800 N (629 lbf) when Fz is in ward seat track position as determined tension in this section. Using only the control (ii) Fzc = 2800 N (629 lbf) when Fz is in that primarily moves the seat in the compression fore and aft direction, determine the (iii) Myc = 93 Nm (69 lbf-ft) when a full rearward, middle, and full forward flexion moment exists at the occipital positions of the SCRP. Using any seat condyle or seat cushion adjustments other than (iv) Myc = 37 Nm (27 lbf-ft) when an that which primarily moves the seat extension moment exists at the occipi- fore-aft, determine the SCRP mid- tal condyle. point height for each of the three fore- (4) At each point in time, only one of aft test positions, while maintaining as the four loading conditions occurs and closely as possible, the seat cushion the Nij value corresponding to that loading condition is computed and the angle determined in S16.2.10.3.1. Set the three remaining loading modes shall be seat back angle, if adjustable inde- considered a value of zero. The expres- pendent of the seat, at the manufactur- sion for calculating each Nij loading er’s nominal design seat back angle for condition is given by: a 50th percentile adult male as speci- fied in S8.1.3. If the dummy contacts Nij = (Fz / Fzc) + (Mocy / Myc) the vehicle interior, move the seat (5) None of the four Nij values shall rearward to the next detent that pro- exceed 1.0 at any time during the vides clearance. If the seat is a power event. seat, move the seat rearward while as- (b) Peak tension. Tension force (Fz), suring that there is a maximum of 5 measured at the upper neck load cell, mm (0.2 in) distance between the vehi- shall not exceed 1490 N (335 lbf) at any cle interior and the point on the time. dummy that would first contact the ve- (c) Peak compression. Compression hicle interior. force (Fz), measured at the upper neck S24.1.3 Except as otherwise specified, load cell, shall not exceed 1820 N (409 if the booster seat has an anchorage lbf) at any time. system as specified in S5.9 of FMVSS S23.5.6 Unless otherwise indicated, No. 213 and is used under this standard instrumentation for data acquisition, in testing a vehicle with a front out- data channel frequency class, and mo- board passenger vehicle seat that has ment calculations are the same as an anchorage system as specified in given for the 49 CFR Part 572 Subpart FMVSS No. 225, the vehicle shall com- N 6-year-old child test dummy. ply with the belted test conditions S24 Test procedure for S23. with the restraint anchorage system S24.1 General provisions and defini- attached to the FMVSS No. 225 vehicle tions. seat anchorage system and the vehicle

559

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00559 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

seat belt unattached. It shall also com- distance from the longitudinal center- ply with the belted test conditions line of the vehicle, within ±10 mm (±0.4 with the restraint anchorage system in), as the center of the steering wheel. unattached to the FMVSS No. 225 vehi- (b) Place the dummy’s back against cle seat anchorage system and the ve- the seat back and rest the dummy’s hicle seat belt attached. The vehicle thighs on the seat cushion. shall comply with the unbelted test (c) Allow the legs and feet of the conditions with the restraint anchor- dummy to extend off the surface of the age system unattached to the FMVSS seat. If this positioning of the dummy’s No. 225 vehicle seat anchorage system. legs is prevented by contact with the S24.1.4 Do not attach any tethers. instrument panel, using only the con- S24.1.5 The definitions provided in trol that primarily moves the seat fore S16.3.1 through S16.3.10 apply to the and aft, move the seat rearward to the tests specified in S24. next detent that provides clearance. If S24.1.6 For leg and thigh angles, use the seat is a power seat, move the seat the following references: rearward, while assuring that there is a S24.1.6.1 Thigh—a straight line on the maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) distance be- thigh skin between the center of the 5/ tween the vehicle interior and the part 16–18 UNC–2B threaded access hole in of the dummy that was in contact with the upper leg clamp (drawing 127–4004, 6 the vehicle interior. YR H3—upper leg clamp) and the knee (d) Rotate the dummy’s upper arms screw (part 9000248 in drawing 127–4000– toward the seat back until they make 1 & –2, leg assembly). contact. S24.1.6.2 Leg—a straight line on the (e) Rotate the dummy’s lower arms leg skin between the center of the down until they contact the seat. lower leg screw (part 9001170 in drawing (f) Close the vehicle’s passenger-side 127–4000–1 & –2, leg assembly) and the door and then start the vehicle engine knee screw (part 9000248 in drawing 127– or place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ posi- 4000–1 & –2, leg assembly). tion, whichever will turn on the sup- S24.2 Static tests of automatic suppres- pression system. sion feature which shall result in deacti- (g) Push against the dummy’s left vation of the passenger air bag. Each ve- hicle that is certified as complying shoulder to lean the dummy against with S23.2 shall meet the following test the door; close all remaining doors. requirements. (h) Wait ten seconds, then check S24.2.1 Except as provided in S24.2.2, whether the air bag is deactivated. conduct all tests as specified in S22.2, S24.3 Static tests of automatic suppres- except that the 49 CFR Part 572 Sub- sion feature which shall result in activa- part N 6-year-old child dummy shall be tion of the passenger air bag system. used. S24.3.1 Each vehicle certified to this S24.2.2 Exceptions. The tests specified option shall comply in tests conducted in the following paragraphs of S22.2 with the front outboard passenger seat- need not be conducted: S22.2.1.5, ing position at the mid-height, in the S22.2.2.3, S22.2.2.5, S22.2.2.6, S22.2.2.7, full rearward and middle positions de- and S22.2.2.8. termined in S24.1.2, and the forward po- S24.2.3 Sitting back in the seat and sition determined in S16.3.3.1.8. leaning on the front outboard passenger S24.3.2 Place a 49 CFR part 572 sub- door. part O 5th percentile adult female test (a) Place the dummy in the seated dummy at the front outboard pas- position in the front outboard pas- senger seating position of the vehicle, senger vehicle seat. For bucket seats, in accordance with procedures specified position the midsagittal plane of the in S16.3.3 of this standard, except as dummy vertically such that it coin- specified in S24.3.1. Do not fasten the cides with the longitudinal centerline seat belt. of the seat cushion, within ±10 mm (±0.4 S24.3.3 Start the vehicle engine or in). For bench seats, position the place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, midsagittal plane of the dummy whichever will turn on the suppression vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s system, and then close all vehicle longitudinal centerline and the same doors.

560

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00560 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

S24.3.4 Wait 10 seconds, then check (a) The midsagittal plane is coinci- whether the air bag system is acti- dent with Plane D within ±10 mm (±0.4 vated. in). S24.4 Low risk deployment tests. (b) The upper arms are parallel to the S24.4.1 Each vehicle that is certified torso and the hands are next to where as complying with S23.4 shall meet the the thighs would be. following test requirements with the 49 (c) Without changing the seat posi- CFR Part 572, Subpart N 6-year-old tion and with the dummy’s thorax in- child dummy in both of the following strument cavity rear face 6 degrees for- positions: Position 1 (S24.4.2) or Posi- ward of the vertical, move the dummy tion 2 (S24.4.3). forward until the dummy head/torso S24.4.1.1 Locate and mark a point on contacts the instrument panel. If the the front of the dummy’s chest jacket dummy loses contact with the seat on the midsagittal plane that is 139 cushion because of the forward move- mm (5.5 in) ±3 mm (±0.1in) along the ment, maintain the height of the surface of the skin from the top of the dummy while moving the dummy for- skin at the neckline. This is referred to ward. If the head contacts the wind- as ‘‘Point 1.’’ shield before head/torso contact with the instrument panel, maintain the S24.4.1.2 Mark a point on the instru- thorax instrument cavity angle and ment panel that is longitudinally and move the dummy forward such that the transversely, as measured along the head is following the angle of the wind- surface of the instrument panel, within shield until there is head/torso contact ±6 mm (±0.2 in) of the point that is de- with the instrument panel. Once con- fined by the intersection of the instru- tact is made, raise or lower the dummy ment panel and a line between the vol- vertically until Point 1 lies in Plane C umetric center of the smallest volume within ±10 mm (±0.4 in). If the dummy’s that can encompass the folded head contacts the windshield and keeps undeployed air bag and the volumetric Point 1 from reaching Plane C, lower center of the static fully inflated air the dummy until there is no more than bag. 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance between the S22.4.1.3 Locate the vertical plane head and the windshield. (The dummy parallel to the vehicle longitudinal shall remain in contact with the in- centerline through the point located in strument panel while being raised or S24.4.1.2. This is referred to as Plane ‘‘ lowered which may change the dum- D. ’’ my’s fore-aft position.) S24.4.1.4 Locate the horizontal plane S24.4.2.4 If necessary, material with through the point located in S24.4.1.2. a maximum breaking strength of 311 N This is referred to as ‘‘Plane C.’’ (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used S24.4.2 Position 1 (chest on instrument to support the dummy in position. The panel). material should support the torso rath- S24.4.2.1 Set the seat and seat cush- er than the head. Support the dummy ion in the positions determined in so that there is minimum interference S16.2.10.3.1. If the seat back is adjust- with the full rotational and able independent of the seat, place the translational freedom for the upper seat back at the manufacturer’s nomi- torso of the dummy and the material nal design seat back angle for a 50th does not interfere with the air bag. percentile adult male as specified in S24.4.3 Position 2 (head on instrument S8.1.3. Position any adjustable parts of panel). the seat that provide additional sup- S24.4.3.1 Place the front outboard port so that they are in the lowest or passenger seat at the mid-height full most open adjustment position. If ad- rearward seating position determined justable, set the head restraint in the in S24.1.2. Place the seat back, if ad- lowest and most forward position. justable independent of the seat, at the S24.4.2.2 Remove the legs of the manufacturer’s nominal design seat dummy at the pelvic interface. back angle for a 50th percentile adult S24.4.2.3 Place the dummy in the male as specified in S8.1.3. Position any front outboard passenger seat such adjustable parts of the seat that pro- that: vide additional support so that they

561

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00561 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

are in the lowest or most open adjust- ity rear face, until the head or torso ment position. Position an adjustable comes into contact with the vehicle’s head restraint in the lowest and most instrument panel or until a maximum forward position. force of 222 N (50 lb) is achieved. If the S24.4.3.2 Place the dummy in the head/torso is still not in contact with front outboard passenger seat such the instrument panel, hold the femurs that: and release the 222 N (50 lb) force. (a) The midsagittal plane is coinci- While maintaining the relative angle dent with Plane D within ±10 mm (±0.4 between the torso and the femurs, roll in). the dummy forward on the seat cush- (b) The legs are perpendicular to the ion, without sliding, until head/torso floor pan, the back of the legs are in contact with the instrument panel is contact with the seat cushion, and the achieved. If seat contact is lost prior to dummy’s thorax instrument cavity or during femur rotation out of the rear face is 6 degrees forward of horizontal plane, constrain the dummy vertical. If it is not possible to position to rotate about the dummy H-point. If the dummy with the legs in the pre- the dummy cannot be rolled forward on scribed position, rotate the legs for- ward until the dummy is resting on the the seat due to contact of the dummy seat with the feet positioned flat on feet with the floor pan, extend the the floor pan and the back of the legs lower legs forward, at the knees, until are in contact with the front of the floor pan contact is avoided. seat cushion. Set the transverse dis- S24.4.3.6 If necessary, material with a tance between the longitudinal maximum breaking strength of 311 N centerlines at the front of the dummy’s (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used knees at 112 to 117 mm (4.4 to 4.6 in), to support the dummy in position. The with the thighs and the legs of the material should support the torso rath- dummy in vertical planes. er than the head. Support the dummy (c) The upper arms are parallel to the so that there is minimum interference torso and the hands are in contact with with the full rotational and the thighs. translational freedom for the upper S24.4.3.3 Using only the control that torso of the dummy and the material primarily moves the seat in the fore does not interfere with the air bag. and aft direction, move the seat for- S24.4.4 Deploy the front outboard ward, while maintaining the thorax in- passenger frontal air bag system. If the strument cavity rear face orientation frontal air bag system contains a until any part of the dummy contacts multistage inflator, the vehicle shall the vehicle’s instrument panel. be able to comply with the injury cri- S24.4.3.4 If dummy contact has not teria at any stage or combination of been made with the vehicle’s instru- stages or time delay between succes- ment panel at the full forward seating sive stages that could occur in a rigid position of the seat, slide the dummy barrier crash test at or below 26 km/h forward on the seat until contact is (16 mph), under the test procedure made. Maintain the thorax instrument specified in S22.5. cavity rear face orientation. If the dummy loses contact with the seat, S25 Requirements using an out-of-posi- from that point forward maintain the tion 5th percentile adult female dummy at height of the dummy. Except as pro- the driver position. vided in S24.4.3.5, maintain the angle of S25.1 Each vehicle certified as com- the thigh with respect to the hori- plying with S14 shall, at the option of zontal. the manufacturer, meet the require- S24.4.3.5 If head/torso contact with ments specified in S25.2 or S25.3 under the instrument panel has not been the test procedures specified in S26 or made, maintain the angle of the thighs S28, as appropriate. with respect to the horizontal while ap- S25.2 Option 1—Dynamic automatic plying a force towards the front of the suppression system that suppresses the air vehicle on the spine of the dummy be- bag when the driver is out of position. tween the shoulder joints, perpen- (This option is available under the con- dicular to the thorax instrument cav- ditions set forth in S27.1.) The vehicle

562

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00562 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

shall be equipped with a dynamic auto- (5) None of the four Nij values shall matic suppression system for the driv- exceed 1.0 at any time during the er air bag which meets the require- event. ments specified in S27. (b) Peak tension. Tension force (Fz), S25.3 Option 2—Low risk deployment. measured at the upper neck load cell, Each vehicle shall meet the injury cri- shall not exceed 2070 N (465 lbf) at any teria specified by S15.3 of this stand- time. ard, except as modified in S25.4, when (c) Peak compression. Compression the driver air bag is statically deployed force (Fz), measured at the upper neck in accordance with both of the low risk load cell, shall not exceed 2520 N (566 deployment test procedures specified in lbf) at any time. S26. (d) Unless otherwise indicated, in- S25.4 Neck injury criteria driver low strumentation for data acquisition, risk deployment tests. When measuring data channel frequency class, and mo- neck injury in low risk deployment ment calculations are the same as tests for the driver position, each of given in 49 CFR Part 572 Subpart O 5th the following neck injury criteria shall percentile female test dummy. be met. S26 Procedure for low risk deployment (a) Nij. tests of driver air bag. (1) The shear force (Fx), axial force S26.1 Each vehicle that is certified as (Fz), and bending moment (My) shall be complying with S25.3 shall meet the re- measured by the dummy upper neck quirements of S25.3 and S25.4 with the load cell for the duration of the crash 49 CFR Part 572 Subpart O 5th per- event as specified in S4.11. Shear force, centile adult female dummy in both of axial force, and bending moment shall the following positions: Driver position be filtered for Nij purposes at SAE 1 (S26.2) and Driver position 2 (S26.3). J211/1 rev. Mar 95 Channel Frequency S26.2 Driver position 1 (chin on mod- Class 600 (see S4.7). ule). (2) During the event, the axial force S26.2.1 Adjust the steering controls (Fz) can be either in tension or com- so that the steering wheel hub is at the pression while the occipital condyle geometric center of the locus it de- bending moment (Mocy) can be in ei- scribes when it is moved through its ther flexion or extension. This results full range of driving positions. If there in four possible loading conditions for is no setting at the geometric center, Nij: tension-extension (Nte), tension- position it one setting lower than the flexion (Ntf), compression-extension geometric center. Set the rotation of (Nce), or compression-flexion (Ncf). the steering wheel so that the vehicle (3) When calculating Nij using equa- wheels are pointed straight ahead. tion S25.4(a)(4), the critical values, Fzc S26.2.2 Mark a point on the steering and Myc, are: wheel cover that is longitudinally and (i) Fzc = 3880 N (872 lbf) when Fz is in transversely, as measured along the tension surface of the steering wheel cover, (ii) Fzc = 3880 N (872 lbf) when Fz is in within ±6 mm (±0.2 in) of the point that compression is defined by the intersection of the (iii) Myc = 155 Nm (114 lbf-ft) when a steering wheel cover and a line between flexion moment exists at the occipital the volumetric center of the smallest condyle volume that can encompass the folded (iv) Myc = 61 Nm (45 lbf-ft) when an undeployed air bag and the volumetric extension moment exists at the occipi- center of the static fully inflated air tal condyle. bag. Locate the vertical plane parallel (4) At each point in time, only one of to the vehicle longitudinal centerline the four loading conditions occurs and through the point located on the steer- the Nij value corresponding to that ing wheel cover. This is referred to as loading condition is computed and the ‘‘Plane E.’’ three remaining loading modes shall be S26.2.3 Place the seat and seat cush- considered a value of zero. The expres- ion in the position achieved in sion for calculating each Nij loading S16.2.10.3.1. If the seat or seat cushion condition is given by: is adjustable in the vertical direction Nij = (Fz / Fzc) + (Mocy / Myc) by adjustments other than that which

563

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00563 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

primarily moves the seat or seat cush- close to the prescribed position as pos- ion fore-aft, determine the maximum sible. and minimum heights of the SCRP at S26.2.7 If necessary, material with a this position, while maintaining the maximum breaking strength of 311 N seat cushion reference line angle as (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used closely as possible. Place the SCRP in to support the dummy in position. The the mid-height position. If the seat material should support the torso rath- back is adjustable independent of the er than the head. Support the dummy seat, place the seat back at the manu- so that there is minimum interference facturer’s nominal design seat back with the full rotational and angle for a 50th percentile adult male translational freedom for the upper as specified in S8.1.3. Position any ad- torso of the dummy and the material justable parts of the seat that provide does not interfere with the air bag. additional support so that they are in S26.3 Driver position 2 (chin on rim). the lowest or most open adjustment po- S26.3.1 Place the seat and seat cush- sition. Position an adjustable head re- ion in the position achieved in straint in the lowest and most forward S16.2.10.3.1. If the seat or seat cushion position. is adjustable in the vertical direction S26.2.4 Place the dummy in the driv- by adjustments other than that which er’s seat such that: primarily moves the seat or seat cush- S26.2.4.1 The midsagittal plane is co- ion fore-aft, determine the maximum incident with Plane E within ±10 mm and minimum heights of the SCRP at (±0.4 in). this position, while maintaining the S26.2.4.2 The legs are perpendicular seat cushion reference line angle as to the floor pan and the back of the closely as possible. Place the SCRP in legs are in contact with the seat cush- the mid-height position. If the seat ion. The legs may be adjusted if nec- back is adjustable independent of the essary to achieve the final head posi- seat, place the seat back at the manu- tion. facturer’s nominal design seat back S26.2.4.3 The dummy’s thorax instru- angle for a 50th percentile adult male ment cavity rear face is 6 degrees for- as specified in S8.1.3. Position any ad- ward (toward the front of the vehicle) justable parts of the seat that provide of the steering wheel angle (i.e., if the additional support so that they are in steering wheel angle is 25 degrees from the lowest or most open adjustment po- vertical, the thorax instrument cavity sition. Position an adjustable head re- rear face angle is 31 degrees). straint in the lowest position. S26.2.4.4 The initial transverse dis- S26.3.2 Adjust the steering controls tance between the longitudinal so that the steering wheel hub is at the centerlines at the front of the dummy’s geometric center of the locus it de- knees is 160 to 170 mm (6.3 to 6.7 in), scribes when it is moved through its with the thighs and legs of the dummy full range of driving positions. If there in vertical planes. is no setting at the geometric center, S26.2.4.5 The upper arms are parallel position it one setting lower than the to the torso and the hands are in con- geometric center. Set the rotation of tact with the thighs. the steering wheel so that the vehicle S26.2.5 Maintaining the spine angle, wheels are pointed straight ahead. slide the dummy forward until the S26.3.3 Mark a point on the steering head/torso contacts the steering wheel. wheel cover that is longitudinally and S26.2.6 While maintaining the spine transversely, as measured along the angle, adjust the height of the dummy surface of the steering wheel cover, so that the bottom of the chin is in the within ±6 mm (±0.2 in) of the point that same horizontal plane as the highest is defined by the intersection of the point of the air bag module cover steering wheel cover and a line between (dummy height can be adjusted using the volumetric center of the smallest the seat height adjustments and/or volume that can encompass the folded spacer blocks). If the seat prevents the undeployed air bag and the volumetric bottom of the chin from being in the center of the static fully inflated air same horizontal plane as the module bag. Locate the vertical plane parallel cover, adjust the dummy height to as to the vehicle longitudinal centerline

564

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00564 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

through the point located on the steer- clearance between the wheel and the ing wheel cover. This is referred to as dummy’s leg(s). Readjust the dummy’s ‘‘Plane E.’’ torso such that the thorax instrument S26.3.4 Place the dummy in the driv- cavity rear face is 6 degrees forward of er’s seat position such that: the steering wheel angle. Position the S26.3.4.1 The midsagittal plane is co- dummy so that the chin point is in incident with Plane E within ±10 mm contact, or if contact is not achieved, (±0.4 in). as close as possible to contact with the S26.3.4.2 The legs are perpendicular rim of the uppermost portion of the to the floor pan and the back of the steering wheel. legs are in contact with the seat cush- S26.3.8 If necessary, material with a ion. The legs may be adjusted if nec- maximum breaking strength of 311 N essary to achieve the final head posi- (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used tion. to support the dummy in position. The S26.3.4.3 The dummy’s thorax instru- material should support the torso rath- ment cavity rear face is 6 degrees for- er than the head. Support the dummy ward (toward the front of the vehicle) so that there is minimum interference of the steering wheel angle (i.e., if the with the full rotational and steering wheel angle is 25 degrees from translational freedom for the upper vertical, the thorax instrument cavity torso of the dummy and the material rear face angle is 31 degrees). does not interfere with the air bag. S26.3.4.4 The initial transverse dis- S26.4 Deploy the driver frontal air tance between the longitudinal bag system. If the frontal air bag sys- centerlines at the front of the dummy’s tem contains a multistage inflator, the knees is 160 to 170 mm (6.3 to 6.7 in), vehicle shall be able to comply with with the thighs and legs of the dummy the injury criteria at any stage or com- in vertical planes. bination of stages or time delay be- S26.3.4.5 The upper arms are parallel tween successive stages that could to the torso and the hands are in con- occur in a rigid barrier crash test at or tact with the thighs. below 26 km/h (16 mph), under the test S26.3.5 Maintaining the spine angle, procedure specified in S22.5. slide the dummy forward until the head/torso contacts the steering wheel. S27 Option for dynamic automatic sup- S26.3.6 While maintaining the spine pression system that suppresses the air angle, position the dummy so that a bag when an occupant is out-of-position. point on the chin 40 mm (1.6 in) ±3 mm S27.1 Availability of option. This op- (±0.1 in) below the center of the mouth tion is available for either air bag, sin- (chin point) is, within ±10 mm (±0.4 in), gly or in conjunction, subject to the re- in contact with a point on the steering quirements of S27, if: wheel rim surface closest to the (a) A petition for rulemaking to es- dummy that is 10 mm (0.4 in) vertically tablish dynamic automatic suppression below the highest point on the rim in system test procedures is submitted Plane E. If the dummy’s head contacts pursuant to Subpart B of Part 552 and the vehicle windshield or upper interior a test procedure applicable to the vehi- before the prescribed position can be cle is added to S28 pursuant to the pro- obtained, lower the dummy until there cedures specified by that subpart, or is no more than 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance (b) A test procedure applicable to the between the vehicle’s windshield or vehicle is otherwise added to S28. upper interior, as applicable. S27.2 Definitions. For purposes of S27 S26.3.7 If the steering wheel can be and S28, the following definitions adjusted so that the chin point can be apply: in contact with the rim of the upper- Automatic suppression zone or ASZ most portion of the steering wheel, ad- means a three-dimensional zone adja- just the steering wheel to that posi- cent to the air bag cover, specified by tion. If the steering wheel contacts the the vehicle manufacturer, where the dummy’s leg(s) prior to attaining this deployment of the air bag will be sup- position, adjust it to the next highest pressed by the DASS if a vehicle occu- detent, or if infinitely adjustable, until pant enters the zone under specified there is a maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) conditions.

565

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00565 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Dynamic automatic suppression system S28 Test procedure for S27 of this stand- or DASS means a portion of an air bag ard. [Reserved] system that automatically controls S28.1 Driver suppression zone whether or not the air bag deploys dur- verification test (49 CFR Part 572 Subpart ing a crash by: O 5th percentile female dummy). [Re- (1) Sensing the location of an occu- served] pant, moving or still, in relation to the S28.2 Passenger suppression zone air bag; verification test (49 CFR Part 572 Subpart (2) Interpreting the occupant charac- P 3-year-old child dummy and 49 CFR teristics and location information to Part 572 Subpart N 6-year-old child dum- determine whether or not the air bag mies). [Reserved] should deploy; and S28.3 Driver dynamic test procedure for (3) Activating or suppressing the air DASS requirements. [Reserved] bag system based on the interpretation S28.4 Passenger dynamic test procedure of occupant characteristics and loca- for DASS requirements. [Reserved] tion information. S29 Manufacturer option to certify ve- S27.3 Requirements. Each vehicle hicles to certain static suppression test re- shall, at each applicable front outboard quirements using human beings rather designated seating position, when test- than test dummies. ed under the conditions of S28 of this S29.1 At the option of the manufac- standard, comply with the require- turer, instead of using test dummies in ments specified in S27.4 through S27.6. conducting the tests for the following automatic suppression and occupant S27.4 Each vehicle shall be equipped recognition parts of the low risk de- with a DASS. ployment test requirements, human S27.5 Static test requirement (low risk beings may be used as specified. If deployment for occupants outside the human beings are used, they shall as- ASZ). sume, to the extent possible, the final S27.5.1 Driver (49 CFR Part 572 Subpart physical position specified for the cor- O 5th percentile female dummy). Each ve- responding dummies for each test. hicle shall meet the injury criteria (a) If a manufacturer decides to cer- specified in S15.3 of this standard when tify a vehicle using a human being for the driver air bag is deployed in ac- a test of the passenger automatic sup- cordance with the procedures specified pression, it shall use humans for the in S28.1. entire series of tests, e.g., 3-year-old S27.5.2 Passenger (49 CFR Part 572 Sub- children for each test of the system in- part P 3-year-old child dummy and 49 volving 3-year-old test dummies. If a CFR Part 572 Subpart N 6-year-old child manufacturer decides to certify a vehi- dummy). Each vehicle shall meet the cle using a test dummy for a test of the injury criteria specified in S21.5 and system, it shall use test dummies for S23.5, as appropriate, when the pas- the entire series of tests, e.g., a Hybrid senger air bag is deployed in accord- III 3-year-old child dummy for each ance with the procedures specified in test of the system involving 3-year-old S28.2. child test dummies. S27.6 Dynamic test requirement (sup- (b) For S19.2, instead of using the 49 pression of air bag for occupants inside CFR Part 572 Subpart R 12-month-old the ASZ). child dummy, a human child who S27.6.1 Driver. The DASS shall sup- weighs between 8.2 and 9.1 kg (18 and 20 press the driver air bag before the lb), and who is between 61 and 66 cm (24 head, neck, or torso of the specified and 26 in) tall may be used. test device enters the ASZ when the (c) For S19.2, instead of using the 49 vehicle is tested under the procedures CFR Part 572 Subpart K newborn infant specified in S28.3. dummy, a human child who weighs be- S27.6.2 Passenger. The DASS shall tween 8.2 and 9.1 kg (18 and 20 lb), and suppress the passenger air bag before who is between 61 and 66 cm (24 and 26 head, neck, or torso of the specified in) tall may be used. test device enters the ASZ when the (d) For S21.2 and S21.5.1, instead of vehicle is tested under the procedures using the 49 CFR Part 572 Subpart P 3- specified in S28.4. year-old child dummy, a human child

566

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00566 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

who weighs between 13.4 and 18 kg (29.5 trousers, and sneakers. Specified and 39.5 lb), and who is between 89 and weights and heights include clothing. 99 cm (35 and 39 in) tall may be used. S29.3 A manufacturer exercising (e) For S23.2 and S23.5.1, instead of this option shall upon request: using the 49 CFR Part 572 Subpart N 6- (a) Provide NHTSA with a method to year-old child dummy, a human child deactivate the air bag during compli- who weighs between 21 and 25.6 kg (46.5 ance testing under S20.2, S20.3, S22.2, and 56.5 lb), and who is between 114 and S22.3, S24.2, and S24.3, and identify any 124.5 cm (45 and 49 in) tall may be used. parts or equipment necessary for deac- (f) For S19.2, S21.2, and S23.2, instead tivation; such assurance may be made of using the 49 CFR Part 572 Subpart O by removing the air bag; and 5th percentile adult female test (b) Provide NHTSA with a method to dummy, a female who weighs between assure that the same test results would 46.7 and 51.25 kg (103 and 113 lb), and be obtained if the air bag were not de- who is between 139.7 and 150 cm (55 and activated. 59 in) tall may be used. FIGURES TO § 571.208 S29.2 Human beings shall be dressed in a cotton T-shirt, full length cotton Figure 1. [Reserved]

567

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00567 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.084 § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

568

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00568 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.089 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

569

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00569 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.087 § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

570

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00570 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.088 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

571

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00571 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER28DE98.000 § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

572

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00572 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER11JN03.006 ER11JN03.007 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

573

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00573 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27NO96.012 § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

574

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00574 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER11JN03.008 ER11JN03.009 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

575

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00575 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER11JN03.010 § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

576

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00576 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER12my00.011 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

577

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00577 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER06JA03.001 § 571.208 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

APPENDIX A TO § 571.208—SELECTION OF fic Safety Administration to test the CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS suppression system of a vehicle that is manufactured on or after the effective A. The following car bed, manufac- date specified in the table below and tured on or after December 1, 1999, may that has been certified as being in com- be used by the National Highway Traf- pliance with 49 CFR 571.208 S19:

578

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00578 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER20AU03.019 ER19NO03.000 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208

Effective and termination dates January 17, 2002 September 1, 2004.

Cosco Dream Ride 02–719 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective.

B. Any of the following rear facing specified in the table below and that child restraint systems, manufactured has been certified as being in compli- on or after December 1, 1999, may be ance with 49 CFR 571.208 S19. When the used by the National Highway Traffic restraint system comes equipped with Safety Administration to test the sup- a removable base, the test may be run pression system of a vehicle that is either with the base attached or with- manufactured on or after the effective out the base. date and prior to the termination date

Effective and termination dates January 17, 2002 September 1, 2004

Britax Handle with Care 191 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Century Assura 4553 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Century Avanta SE 41530 ...... Effective ...... Terminated. Century Smart Fit 4543 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Cosco Arriva 02727 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Cosco Opus 35 02603 ...... Effective ...... Terminated. Evenflo Discovery Adjust Right 212 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Evenflo First Choice 204 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Evenflo On My Way Position Right V 282 ...... Effective ...... Terminated. Graco Infant 8457 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective.

C. Any of the following forward fac- specified in the table below and that ing toddler and forward-facing convert- has been certified as being in compli- ible child restraint systems, manufac- ance with 49 CFR 571.208 S19, or S21. tured on or after December 1, 1999, may (NOTE: Any child restraint listed in be used by the National Highway Traf- this subpart that is not recommended fic Safety Administration to test the for use in a rear-facing position by its suppression system of a vehicle that is manufacturer is excluded from use in manufactured on or after the effective S20.2.1.4): date and prior to the termination date

Effective and termination dates January 17, 2002 September 1, 2006

Britax Roundabout 161 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Britax Expressway ...... Effective. Century Encore 4612 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Century STE 1000 4416 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Cosco Olympian 02803 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Cosco Touriva 02519 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Evenflo Horizon V 425 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Evenflo Medallion 254 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Safety 1st Comfort Ride 22–400 ...... Effective.

D. Any of the following forward-fac- suppression system of a vehicle that is ing toddler/belt positioning booster manufactured on or after the effective systems and belt positioning booster date and prior to the termination date systems, manufactured on or after De- specified in the table below and that cember 1, 1999, may be used by the Na- has been certified as being in compli- tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- ance with 49 CFR 571.208 S21 or S23: istration as test devices to test the

579

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00579 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208a 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Effective and termination dates January 17, 2002 September 1, 2004

Britax Roadster 9004 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Century Next Step 4920 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Cosco High Back Booster 02–442 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective. Evenflo Right Fit 245 ...... Effective ...... Remains Effective.

[36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971]

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting § 571.208, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 67 FR 79439, Dec. 27, 2002, § 571.208 was amended by removing and reserving paragraph S4.2.4.1(a), effective Dec. 27, 2004.

§ 571.208a Optional test procedures for from 32 km/h (20 mph) to 40 km/h (25 vehicles manufactured between mph), inclusive, into a fixed rigid bar- January 27, 2004 and August 31, rier that is perpendicular within a tol- 2004. erance of ± 5 degrees to the line of trav- For vehicles manufactured between el of the vehicle under the applicable January 27, 2004 and August 31, 2004, a conditions of S16.2 of this standard. manufacturer may, at its option, com- S16.2 Test conditions. ply with certain requirements of S16.2.1 The vehicle, including test de- Standard No. 208 in accordance with vices and instrumentation, is loaded as the test procedures set forth in this in S8.1.1 of FMVSS No. 208. § 571.208a instead of the corresponding S16.2.2 Movable vehicle windows and test procedures in § 571.208. vents are placed in the fully closed po- S1 through S15 [Reserved] See sition, unless the vehicle manufacturer § 571.208, S1 through S15. chooses to specify a different adjust- S16. Test procedures for rigid barrier ment position prior to the time the ve- test requirements using 5th percentile hicle is certified. adult female dummies. S16.2.3 Convertibles and open-body S16.1 General provisions. Crash testing type vehicles have the top, if any, in to determine compliance with the re- place in the closed passenger compart- quirements of S15 of this standard is ment configuration. conducted as specified in the following S16.2.4 Doors are fully closed and paragraphs (a) and (b). latched but not locked. (a) Belted test. Place a 49 CFR part 572 S16.2.5 The dummy is clothed in form subpart O 5th percentile adult female fitting cotton stretch garments with test dummy at each front outboard short sleeves and above the knee seating position of a vehicle, in accord- length pants. A size 71⁄2W shoe which ance with the procedures specified in meets the configuration and size speci- S16.3 of this standard. Impact the vehi- cle traveling longitudinally forward at fications of MIL–S–21711E (see S4.7) or any speed, up to and including 48 km/h its equivalent is placed on each foot of (30 mph), into a fixed rigid barrier that the test dummy. is perpendicular within a tolerance of ± S16.2.6 Limb joints are set at one g, 5 degrees to the line of travel of the ve- barely restraining the weight of the hicle under the applicable conditions of limb when extended horizontally. Leg S16.2 of this standard. joints are adjusted with the torso in (b) Unbelted test. Place a 49 CFR part the supine position. 572 subpart O 5th percentile adult fe- S16.2.7 Instrumentation shall not af- male test dummy at each front out- fect the motion of dummies during im- board seating position of a vehicle, in pact. accordance with the procedures speci- S16.2.8 The stabilized temperature of fied in S16.3 of this standard, except the dummy is at any level between 20.6 S16.3.5. Impact the vehicle traveling °C and 22.2 °C (69 °F to 72 °F). longitudinally forward at any speed, S16.2.9 Steering wheel adjustment.

580

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00580 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208a

S16.2.9.1 Adjust a tiltable steering set as closely as possible to the angle wheel, if possible, so that the steering recorded in S16.2.10.3.1. Mark location wheel hub is at the geometric center of of the seat for future reference. its full range of driving positions. S16.3 Dummy seating positioning proce- S16.2.9.2 If there is no setting detent dures. The 49 CFR part 572 subpart O at the mid-position, lower the steering 5th percentile adult female test wheel to the detent just below the mid- dummy is positioned as follows: position. S16.3.1 General provisions and defini- S16.2.9.3 If the steering column is tions. telescoping, place the steering column S16.3.1.1 All angles are measured with in the mid-position. If there is no mid- respect to the horizontal plane unless position, move the steering wheel rear- otherwise stated. ward one position from the mid-posi- S16.3.1.2 The dummy’s neck bracket tion. is adjusted to align the zero degree S16.2.10 Driver and passenger seat set- index marks. up. S16.3.1.3 The term ‘‘midsagittal plane’’ S16.2.10.1 Lumbar support adjustment. refers to the vertical plane that sepa- Position adjustable lumbar supports so rates the dummy into equal left and that the lumbar support is in its low- right halves. est, retracted or deflated adjustment S16.3.1.4 The term ‘‘vertical longitu- position. dinal plane’’ refers to a vertical plane S16.2.10.2 Other seat adjustments. Posi- parallel to the vehicle’s longitudinal tion any adjustable parts of the seat centerline. that provide additional support so that S16.3.1.5 The term ‘‘vertical plane’’ re- they are in the lowest or most open ad- fers to a vertical plane, not necessarily justment position. parallel to the vehicle’s longitudinal S16.2.10.3 Seat position adjustment. If centerline. the passenger seat does not adjust S16.3.1.6 The term ‘‘transverse instru- independently of the driver seat, the mentation platform’’ refers to the driver seat shall control the final posi- transverse instrumentation surface in- tion of the passenger seat. side the dummy’s skull casting to S16.2.10.3.1 If the seat is adjustable in which the neck load cell mounts. This the fore and aft and/or vertical direc- surface is perpendicular to the skull tions, move the seat to the rearmost cap’s machined inferior-superior position at the full down height adjust- mounting surface. ment. If the seat cushion adjusts fore S16.3.1.7 The term ‘‘thigh’’ refers to and aft, independent of the seat back, the femur between, but not including, set this adjustment to the full rear- the knee and the pelvis. ward position. If the seat cushion con- S16.3.1.8 The term ‘‘leg’’ refers to the tains a height adjustment, independent lower part of the entire leg including of the seat back, set this adjustment to the knee. the full down position. Record a seat S16.3.1.9 The term ‘‘foot’’ refers to the cushion reference angle. foot including the ankle. S16.2.10.3.2 Using only controls which S16.3.1.10 The longitudinal centerline move the seat fore and aft, move the of a bucket seat cushion is determined seat to the full forward position. If seat at the widest part of the seat cushion. adjustments other than fore-aft are Measure perpendicular to the longitu- present and the seat cushion reference dinal centerline of the vehicle. angle changes from that measured in S16.3.1.11 For leg and thigh angles use S16.2.10.3.1, use those adjustments to the following references: maintain as closely as possible the S16.3.1.11.1 Thigh—a straight line on angle recorded in S16.2.10.3.1. the thigh skin between the center of S16.2.10.3.3 If the seat height is ad- the 1⁄2–13 UNC–2B tapped hole in the justable, determine the maximum and upper leg femur clamp (see drawings minimum heights at this position, 880105–504 (left thigh) and 880105–505 while maintaining, as closely as pos- (right thigh), upper leg femur clamp) sible, the angle recorded in S16.2.10.3.1. and the knee pivot shoulder bolt (part Set the seat at the midpoint height 880105–527 in drawing 880105–528R & with the seat cushion reference angle 528L, sliding knee assy. w/o pot).

581

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00581 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208a 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S16.3.1.11.2 Leg—a straight line on the S16.3.2.1.7 Gently rock the upper leg skin between the center of the torso relative to the lower torso lat- ankle shell (parts 880105–609 & 633 in erally in a side to side motion three drawing 880105–660, ankle assembly) times through a ± 5 degree arc (ap- and the knee pivot shoulder bolt (part proximately 51 mm (2 in) side to side) 880105–527 in drawing 880105–528R & to reduce friction between the dummy 528L, sliding knee assy. w/o pot). and the seat. S16.3.2 Driver dummy positioning. S16.3.2.1.8 If needed, extend the legs S16.3.2.1 Driver torso/head/seat back slightly so that the feet are not in con- angle positioning. tact with the floor pan. Let the thighs S16.3.2.1.1 With the seat in the posi- rest on the seat cushion to the extent tion determined in S16.2.10, use only permitted by the foot movement. Keep- the controls which move the seat fore ing the leg and the thigh in a vertical and aft to place the seat in the rear- plane, place the foot in the vertical most position, without adjusting inde- longitudinal plane that passes through pendent height controls. If the seat the centerline of the accelerator pedal. cushion reference angle automatically Rotate the left thigh outboard about changes as the seat is moved from the the hip until the center of the knee is full forward position, maintain, as the same distance from the midsagittal closely as possible, the seat cushion plane of the dummy as the right knee reference angle in S16.2.10.3.1, for the ± 5 mm (± 0.2 in). Using only controls final forward position when measuring which move the seat fore and aft, at- the pelvic angle as specified in tempt to return the seat to the full for- S16.3.2.1.11. ward position. If either of the dummy’s S16.3.2.1.2 Fully recline the seat legs first contacts the steering wheel, back, if adjustable. Install the dummy then adjust the steering wheel, if ad- into the driver’s seat, such that when justable, upward until contact with the the legs are positioned 120 degrees to steering wheel is avoided. If the steer- the thighs, the calves of the legs are ing wheel is not adjustable, separate not touching the seat cushion. the knees enough to avoid steering S16.3.2.1.3 Bucket seats. Center the wheel contact. Proceed with moving dummy on the seat cushion so that its the seat forward until either the leg midsagittal plane is vertical and coin- contacts the vehicle interior or the cides with the vertical longitudinal seat reaches the full forward position. plane through the center of the seat (The right foot may contact and de- cushion. press the accelerator and/or change the S16.3.2.1.4 Bench seats. Position the angle of the foot with respect to the leg midsagittal plane of the dummy during seat movement.) If necessary to vertical and parallel to the vehicle’s avoid contact with the vehicles brake longitudinal centerline and aligned or clutch pedal, rotate the test dum- with the center of the steering wheel my’s left foot about the leg. If there is rim. still interference, rotate the left thigh S16.3.2.1.5 Hold the dummy’s thighs outboard about the hip the minimum down and push rearward on the upper distance necessary to avoid pedal inter- torso to maximize the dummy’s pelvic ference. If a dummy leg contacts the angle. vehicle interior before the full forward S16.3.2.1.6 Place the legs at 120 de- position is attained, position the seat grees to the thighs. Set the initial at the next detent where there is no transverse distance between the longi- contact. If the seat is a power seat, tudinal centerlines at the front of the move the seat fore and aft to avoid dummy’s knees at 160 to 170 mm (6.3 to contact while assuring that there is a 6.7 in), with the thighs and legs of the maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) distance be- dummy in vertical planes. Push rear- tween the vehicle interior and the ward on the dummy’s knees to force point on the dummy that would first the pelvis into the seat so there is no contact the vehicle interior. If the gap between the pelvis and the seat steering wheel was moved, return it to back or until contact occurs between the position described in S16.2.9. If the the back of the dummy’s calves and the steering wheel contacts the dummy’s front of the seat cushion. leg(s) prior to attaining this position,

582

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00582 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208a

adjust it to the next higher detent, or seat is still not in its forwardmost po- if infinitely adjustable, until there is 5 sition, move the seat forward until the mm (0.2 in) clearance between the contact point is 5 mm (0.2 in) or less wheel and the dummy’s leg(s). from the vehicle interior, or if it has a S16.3.2.1.9 For vehicles without ad- manual seat adjustment, move the seat justable seat backs, adjust the lower to the closest detent position without neck bracket to level the head as much making contact, or until the seat as possible. For vehicles with adjust- reaches its forwardmost position, able seat backs, while holding the whichever occurs first. thighs in place, rotate the seat back S16.3.2.2 Driver foot positioning. forward until the transverse instru- S16.3.2.2.1 If the vehicle has an ad- mentation platform of the head is level justable accelerator pedal, adjust it to to within ± 0.5 degree, making sure the full forward position. Rest the that the pelvis does not interfere with right foot of the test dummy on the the seat bight. Inspect the abdomen to undepressed accelerator pedal with the ensure that it is properly installed. If rearmost point of the heel on the floor the torso contacts the steering wheel, pan in the plane of the pedal. If the adjust the steering wheel in the fol- foot cannot be placed on the accel- lowing order until there is no contact: erator pedal, set it initially perpen- Telescoping adjustment, lowering ad- dicular to the leg and then place it as justment, raising adjustment. If the ve- far forward as possible in the direction hicle has no adjustments or contact of the pedal centerline with the rear- with the steering wheel cannot be most point of the heel resting on the eliminated by adjustment, position the floor pan. If the vehicle has an adjust- seat at the next detent where there is able accelerator pedal and the right no contact with the steering wheel as foot is not touching the accelerator adjusted in S16.2.9. If the seat is a pedal when positioned as above, move power seat, position the seat to avoid the pedal rearward until it touches the contact while assuring that there is a right foot. If the accelerator pedal in maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) distance be- the full rearward position still does not tween the steering wheel as adjusted in touch the foot, leave the pedal in that S16.2.9 and the point of contact on the position. dummy. S16.3.2.2.2 If the ball of the foot does S16.3.2.1.10 If it is not possible to not contact the pedal, change the angle achieve the head level within ± 0.5 de- of the foot relative to the leg such that grees, minimize the angle. the toe of the foot contacts the S16.3.2.1.11 Measure and set the dum- undepressed accelerator pedal. my’s pelvic angle using the pelvic S16.3.2.2.3 Place the left foot on the angle gage (drawing TE–2504, incor- toe-board with the rearmost point of porated by reference in 49 CFR part 572, the heel resting on the floor pan as subpart O, of this chapter). The angle close as possible to the point of inter- shall be set to 20.0 degrees ± 2.5 degrees. section of the planes described by the If this is not possible, adjust the pelvic toe-board and floor pan, and not on the angle as close to 20.0 degrees as pos- wheel-well projection or foot rest. sible while keeping the transverse in- S16.3.2.2.4 If the left foot cannot be strumentation platform of the head as positioned on the toe board, place the level as possible by adjustments speci- foot perpendicular to the lower leg cen- fied in S16.3.2.1.9 and S16.3.2.1.10. terline as far forward as possible with S16.3.2.1.12 If the dummy is con- the heel resting on the floor pan. tacting the vehicle interior after these S16.3.2.2.5 If necessary to avoid con- adjustments, move the seat rearward tact with the vehicle’s brake or clutch until there is a maximum of 5 mm (0.2 pedal, rotate the test dummy’s left foot in) between the contact point of the about the lower leg. If there is still dummy and the interior of the vehicle pedal interference, rotate the left leg or if it has a manual seat adjustment, outboard about the hip the minimum to the next rearward detent position. If distance necessary to avoid the pedal after these adjustments, the dummy interference. If the left foot does not contact point is more than 5 mm (0.2 contact the floor pan, place the foot in) from the vehicle interior and the parallel to the floor and place the leg

583

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00583 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208a 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

as perpendicular to the thigh as pos- dinal centerline as the midsagittal sible. plane of the driver dummy. S16.3.2.3 Driver arm/hand positioning. S16.3.3.1.5 Hold the dummy’s thighs S16.3.2.3.1 Place the dummy’s upper down and push rearward on the upper arms adjacent to the torso with the torso to maximize the dummy’s pelvic arm centerlines as close to a vertical angle. longitudinal plane as possible. S16.3.3.1.6 Place the legs at 120 de- S16.3.2.3.2 Place the palms of the grees to the thighs. Set the initial dummy in contact with the outer part transverse distance between the longi- of the steering wheel rim at its hori- tudinal centerlines at the front of the zontal centerline with the thumbs over dummy’s knees at 160 to 170 mm (6.3 to the steering wheel rim. 6.7 in), with the thighs and legs of the S16.3.2.3.3 If it is not possible to posi- dummy in vertical planes. Push rear- tion the thumbs inside the steering ward on the dummy’s knees to force wheel rim at its horizontal centerline, the pelvis into the seat so there is no then position them above and as close gap between the pelvis and the seat to the horizontal centerline of the back or until contact occurs between steering wheel rim as possible. the back of the dummy’s calves and the front of the seat cushion. S16.3.2.3.4 Lightly tape the hands to S16.3.3.1.7 Gently rock the upper the steering wheel rim so that if the torso relative to the lower torso lat- hand of the test dummy is pushed up- erally side to side three times through ward by a force of not less than 9 N (2 a ± 5 degree arc (approximately 51 mm lb) and not more than 22 N (5 lb), the (2 in) side to side). tape releases the hand from the steer- S16.3.3.1.8 If needed, extend the legs ing wheel rim. slightly so that the feet are not in con- S16.3.3 . Passenger dummy positioning tact with the floor pan. Let the thighs S16.3.3.1 Passenger torso/head/seat back rest on the seat cushion to the extent angle positioning. permitted by the foot movement. With S16.3.3.1.1 With the seat in the posi- the feet perpendicular to the legs, tion determined in S16.2.10, use only place the heels on the floor pan. If a the controls which move the seat fore heel will not contact the floor pan, and aft to place the seat in the rear- place it as close to the floor pan as pos- most position, without adjusting inde- sible. Using only controls which move pendent height controls. If the seat the seat fore and aft, attempt to return cushion reference angle automatically the seat to the full forward position. If changes as the seat is moved from the a dummy leg contacts the vehicle inte- full forward position, maintain as rior before the full forward position is closely as possible the seat cushion ref- attained, position the seat at the next erence angle in S16.2.10.3.1, for the final detent where there is no contact. If the forward position when measuring the seats are power seats, position the seat pelvic angle as specified in S16.3.3.1.11. to avoid contact while assuring that S16.3.3.1.2 Fully recline the seat there is a maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) back, if adjustable. Install the dummy distance between the vehicle interior into the passenger’s seat, such that and the point on the dummy that when the legs are 120 degrees to the would first contact the vehicle inte- thighs, the calves of the legs are not rior. touching the seat cushion. S16.3.3.1.9 For vehicles without ad- S16.3.3.1.3 Bucket seats. Center the justable seat backs, adjust the lower dummy on the seat cushion so that its neck bracket to level the head as much midsagittal plane is vertical and coin- as possible. For vehicles with adjust- cides with the vertical longitudinal able seat backs, while holding the plane through the center of the seat thighs in place, rotate the seat back cushion. forward until the transverse instru- S16.3.3.1.4 Bench seats. Position the mentation platform of the head is level midsagittal plane of the dummy to within ± 0.5 degrees, making sure vertical and parallel to the vehicle’s that the pelvis does not interfere with longitudinal centerline and the same the seat bight. Inspect the abdomen to distance from the vehicle’s longitu- insure that it is properly installed.

584

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00584 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208a

S16.3.3.1.10 If it is not possible to ori- S16.3.4.2 Adjust each head restraint ent the head level within ± 0.5 degrees, to its lowest position. minimize the angle. S16.3.4.3 Measure the vertical dis- S16.3.3.1.11 Measure and set the dum- tance from the top most point of the my’s pelvic angle using the pelvic head restraint to the bottom most angle gage (drawing TE–2504, incor- point. Locate a horizontal plane porated by reference in 49 CFR part 572, through the midpoint of this distance. subpart O, of this chapter). The angle Adjust each head restraint vertically shall be set to 20.0 degrees ± 2.5 degrees. so that this horizontal plane is aligned If this is not possible, adjust the pelvic with the center of gravity (CG) of the angle as close to 20.0 degrees as pos- dummy head. sible while keeping the transverse in- S16.3.4.4 If the above position is not strumentation platform of the head as attainable, move the vertical center of level as possible as specified in the head restraint to the closest detent S16.3.3.1.9 and S16.3.3.1.10. below the center of the head CG. S16.3.3.1.12 If the dummy is con- S16.3.4.5 If the head restraint has a tacting the vehicle interior after these fore and aft adjustment, place the re- adjustments, move the seat rearward straint in the forwardmost position or until there is a maximum of 5 mm (0.2 until contact with the head is made, in) between the contact point of the whichever occurs first. dummy and the interior of the vehicle S16.3.5 Driver and passenger manual or if it has a manual seat adjustment, belt adjustment (for tests conducted with to the next rearward detent position. If a belted dummy) after these adjustments the dummy S16.3.5.1 If an adjustable seat belt D- contact point is more than 5 mm (0.2 ring anchorage exists, place it in the in) from the vehicle interior and the manufacturer’s design position for a seat is still not in its forward most po- 5th percentile adult female with the sition, move the seat forward until the seat in the position specified in contact point is 5 mm (0.2 in) or less S16.2.10.3. from the vehicle interior, or if it has a S16.3.5.2 Place the Type 2 manual manual seat adjustment, move the seat belt around the test dummy and fasten to the closest detent position without the latch. making contact, or until the seat S16.3.5.3 Ensure that the dummy’s reaches its forward most position, head remains as level as possible, as whichever occurs first. specified in S16.3.2.1.9 and S16.3.2.1.10 S16.3.3.2 Passenger foot positioning. and S16.3.3.1.9 and S16.3.3.1.10. S16.3.3.2.1 Place the passenger’s feet S16.3.5.4 Remove all slack from the flat on the toe board. lap belt. Pull the upper torso webbing S16.3.3.2.2 If the feet cannot be placed out of the retractor and allow it to re- flat on the toe board, set them perpen- tract; repeat this operation four times. dicular to the leg center lines and place Apply a 9 N (2 lbf) to 18 N (4 lbf) tension them as far forward as possible with load to the lap belt. If the belt system the heels resting on the floor pan. is equipped with a tension-relieving de- S16.3.3.3 Passenger arm/hand posi- vice, introduce the maximum amount tioning. of slack into the upper torso belt that S16.3.3.3.1 Place the dummy’s upper is recommended by the manufacturer. arms in contact with the seat back and If the belt system is not equipped with the torso. a tension-relieving device, allow the S16.3.3.3.2 Place the palms of the excess webbing in the shoulder belt to dummy in contact with the outside of be retracted by the retractive force of the thighs. the retractor. S16.3.3.3.3 Place the little fingers in S17 through S19 [Reserved] See contact with the seat cushion. § 571.208, S17 through S19. S16.3.4 Driver and passenger adjustable S20 Test procedure for S19 of FMVSS head restraints. No. 208. S16.3.4.1 If the head restraint has an S20.1 General provisions. automatic adjustment, leave it where S20.1.1 Tests specifying the use of a the system positions the restraint after car bed, a rear facing child restraint, or the dummy is placed in the seat. a convertible child restraint may be

585

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00585 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208a 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

conducted using any such restraint seat belt unattached. It shall also com- listed in sections A, B, and C of Appen- ply with the belted test conditions dix A of FMVSS No. 208 respectively. with the restraint anchorage system The car bed, rear facing child restraint, unattached to the vehicle seat anchor- or convertible child restraint may be age system and the vehicle seat belt at- unused or have been previously used tached. The vehicle shall comply with only for automatic suppression tests. If the unbelted test conditions with the it has been used, there shall not be any restraint anchorage system unattached visible damage prior to the test. to the vehicle seat anchorage system. S20.1.2 Each vehicle certified to this S20.1.7 If the car bed, rear facing option shall comply in tests conducted child restraint, or convertible child re- with the right front outboard seating straint comes equipped with a detach- position, if adjustable fore and aft, at able base, the vehicle shall comply in full rearward, middle, and full forward tests conducted with the detachable positions. If the child restraint or base attached to the child restraint dummy contacts the vehicle interior, and with the detachable base unat- move the seat rearward to the next de- tached to the child restraint. tent that provides clearance. If the S20.1.8 Do not attach any tethers. seat is a power seat, move the seat S20.1.9 Seat set-up. Unless otherwise rearward while assuring that there is a stated, maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance. S20.1.9.1 Lumbar support adjustment. S20.1.3 If the car bed, rear facing Position adjustable lumbar supports so child restraint, or convertible child re- that the lumbar support is in its low- straint is equipped with a handle, the est, retracted or deflated adjustment vehicle shall comply in tests conducted position. with the handle at both the child re- S20.1.9.2 Other seat adjustments. Posi- straint manufacturer’s recommended tion any adjustable parts of the seat position for use in vehicles and in the that provide additional support so that upright position. they are in the lowest or most open ad- S20.1.4 If the car bed, rear facing justment position. child restraint, or convertible child re- straint is equipped with a sunshield, S20.1.9.3 If the seat cushion adjusts the vehicle shall comply in tests con- fore and aft, independent of the seat ducted with the sunshield both fully back, set this adjustment to the full open and fully closed. rearward position. S20.1.5 The vehicle shall comply in S20.1.9.4 If the seat height is adjust- tests with the car bed, rear facing child able, determine the maximum and min- restraint, or convertible child restraint imum heights at the full rearward, uncovered and in tests with a towel or middle, and full forward positions. Set blanket weighing up to 1.0 kg (2.2 lb) the seat at the mid-point height for placed on or over the restraint in any each of the three fore-aft test posi- of the following positions: tions. (a) with the blanket covering the top S20.1.9.5 The seat back angle, if ad- and sides of the restraint, and justable, is set at the manufacturer’s (b) with the blanket placed from the nominal design seat back angle for a top of the vehicle’s seat back to the 50th percentile adult male as specified forwardmost edge of the restraint. in S8.1.3 of FMVSS No. 208. S20.1.6 Except as otherwise specified, S20.1.9.6 If adjustable, set the head if the car bed, rear facing child re- restraint at the full down and full for- straint, or convertible child restraint ward position. has an anchorage system as specified in S20.1.10 The longitudinal centerline S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213 and is tested in of a bucket seat cushion is determined a vehicle with a right front outboard at the widest part of the seat cushion. vehicle seat that has an anchorage sys- Measure perpendicular to the longitu- tem as specified in FMVSS No. 225, the dinal centerline of the vehicle. vehicle shall comply with the belted S20.2 Static tests of automatic suppres- test conditions with the restraint an- sion feature which shall result in deacti- chorage system attached to the vehicle vation of the passenger air bag. Each ve- seat anchorage system and the vehicle hicle that is certified as complying

586

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00586 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208a

with S19.2 of FMVSS No. 208 shall meet or vehicle seat, on the side away from the following test requirements. the buckle (to avoid interference from S20.2.1 Belted rear facing and convert- the shoulder portion of the belt). ible child restraints. (d) Position the 49 CFR part 572 sub- S20.2.1.1 The vehicle shall comply in part R 12-month-old CRABI dummy in tests using any child restraint specified the child restraint by following, to the in section B and section C of Appendix extent possible, the manufacturer’s in- A of FMVSS No. 208. structions provided with the child re- S20.2.1.2 Locate a vertical plane straint for seating infants. through the longitudinal centerline of (e) Start the vehicle engine or place the child restraint. This will be re- the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, ferred to as Plane. ‘‘ ’’ whichever will turn on the suppression S20.2.1.3 For bucket seats, ‘‘Plane B’’ system, and close all vehicle doors. refers to a vertical plane parallel to Wait 10 seconds, then check whether the vehicle longitudinal centerline through the longitudinal centerline of the air bag is deactivated. the right front outboard vehicle seat S20.2.1.5 Facing forward (convertible re- cushion. For bench seats, ‘‘Plane B’’ re- straints only). fers to a vertical plane through the (a) The vehicle shall comply in both right front outboard vehicle seat par- of the following positions, if applicable: allel to the vehicle longitudinal center- (1) Without attaching the child re- line the same distance from the longi- straint anchorage system as specified tudinal centerline of the vehicle as the in S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213 to a vehicle center of the steering wheel. seat anchorage system specified in S20.2.1.4 Facing rear. FMVSS No. 225, align the child re- (a) The vehicle shall comply in both straint system facing forward such of the following positions, if applicable: that Plane A is aligned with Plane B. (1) Without attaching the child re- (2) If the child restraint is certified straint anchorage system as specified to S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213, and the vehi- in S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213 to a vehicle cle seat has an anchorage system as seat anchorage system specified in specified in FMVSS No. 225, attach the FMVSS No. 225, align the child re- child restraint to the vehicle seat an- straint system facing rearward such chorage instead of aligning the planes. that Plane A is aligned with Plane B. Do not attach the vehicle safety belt. (2) If the child restraint is certified (b) While maintaining the child re- to S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213, and the vehi- straint positions achieved in cle seat has an anchorage system as S20.2.1.5(a), secure the child restraint specified in FMVSS No. 225, attach the by following, to the extent possible, child restraint to the vehicle seat an- the child restraint manufacturer’s di- chorage instead of aligning the planes. rections regarding proper installation Do not attach the vehicle safety belt. of the restraint in the forward facing (b) While maintaining the child re- mode. straint positions achieved in S20.2.1.4(a), secure the child restraint (c) Place any adjustable seat belt an- by following, to the extent possible, chorages at the vehicle manufacturer’s the child restraint manufacturer’s di- nominal design position for a 50th per- rections regarding proper installation centile adult male occupant. Cinch the of the restraint in the rear facing vehicle belts to any tension from zero mode. up to 134 N (30 lb) to secure the child (c) Place any adjustable seat belt an- restraint. Measure belt tension in a chorages at the vehicle manufacturer’s flat, straight section of the lap belt be- nominal design position for a 50th per- tween the child restraint belt path and centile adult male occupant. Cinch the the contact point with the belt anchor vehicle belts to any tension from zero or vehicle seat, on the side away from up to 134 N (30 lb) to secure the child the buckle (to avoid interference from restraint. Measure belt tension in a the shoulder portion of the belt). flat, straight section of the lap belt be- (d) Position the 49 CFR part 572 sub- tween the child restraint belt path and part R 12-month-old CRABI dummy in the contact point with the belt anchor the child restraint by following, to the

587

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00587 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208a 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

extent possible, the manufacturer’s in- structions provided with the child re- structions provided with the child re- straint for seating infants. straint for seating infants. (c) Start the vehicle engine or place (e) Start the vehicle engine or place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, whichever will turn on the suppression whichever will turn on the suppression system, and close all vehicle doors. system, and close all vehicle doors. Wait 10 seconds, then check whether Wait 10 seconds, then check whether the air bag is deactivated. the air bag is deactivated. S20.2.3 Tests with a belted car bed. S20.2.2 Unbelted rear facing and con- S20.2.3.1 The vehicle shall comply in vertible child restraints. tests using any car bed specified in sec- S20.2.2.1 The vehicle shall comply in tion A of Appendix A of FMVSS No. tests using any child restraint specified 208. in section B and section C of Appendix S20.2.3.2(a) Install the car bed by fol- A of FMVSS No. 208. lowing, to the extent possible, the car S20.2.2.2 Locate a vertical plane bed manufacturer’s directions regard- through the longitudinal centerline of ing proper installation of the car bed. the child restraint. This will be re- (b) Place any adjustable seat belt an- ferred to as Plane A . ‘‘ ’’ chorages at the vehicle manufacturer’s S20.2.2.3 For bucket seats, Plane B ‘‘ ’’ nominal design position for a 50th per- refers to a vertical plane parallel to centile adult male occupant. Cinch the the vehicle longitudinal centerline vehicle belts to secure the car bed. through the longitudinal centerline of the right front outboard vehicle seat (c) Position the 49 CFR part 572 sub- part K Newborn Infant dummy in the cushion. For bench seats, ‘‘Plane B’’ re- fers to a vertical plane through the car bed by following, to the extent pos- right front outboard seat parallel to sible, the car bed manufacturer’s in- the vehicle longitudinal centerline the structions provided with the car bed same distance from the longitudinal for positioning infants. centerline of the vehicle as the center (d) Start the vehicle engine or place of the steering wheel. the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, S20.2.2.4 Facing rear. whichever will turn on the suppression (a) Align the child restraint system system, and close all vehicle doors. facing rearward such that Plane A is Wait 10 seconds, then check whether aligned with Plane B and the child re- the air bag is deactivated. straint is in contact with the seat S20.3 Static tests of automatic suppres- back. sion feature which shall result in activa- (b) Position the 49 CFR part 572 sub- tion of the passenger air bag system. part R 12-month-old CRABI dummy in S20.3.1 Each vehicle certified to this the child restraint by following, to the option shall comply in tests conducted extent possible, the manufacturer’s in- with the right front outboard seating structions provided with the child re- position, if adjustable fore and aft, at straint for seating infants. the full rearward, middle, and, subject (c) Start the vehicle engine or place to S16.3.3.1.8, full forward positions. All the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, tests are conducted with the seat whichever will turn on the suppression height, if adjustable, in the mid-height system, and close all vehicle doors. position. Wait 10 seconds, then check whether S20.3.2 Place a 49 CFR part 572 sub- the air bag is deactivated. part O 5th percentile adult female test S20.2.2.5 Facing forward. dummy at the right front outboard (a) Align the child restraint system seating position of the vehicle, in ac- facing forward such that Plane A is cordance with procedures specified in aligned with Plane B and the child re- S16.3.3 of this standard, except as speci- straint is in contact with the seat fied in S20.3.1, subject to the fore-aft back. seat positions in S20.3.1. Do not fasten (b) Position the 49 CFR part 572 sub- the seat belt. part R 12-month-old CRABI dummy in S20.3.3 Start the vehicle engine or the child restraint by following, to the place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, extent possible, the manufacturer’s in- whichever will turn on the suppression

588

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00588 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208a

system, and then close all vehicle S20.4.6 If the child restraint is cer- doors. tified to S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213, and S20.3.4 Wait 10 seconds, then check the vehicle seat has an anchorage sys- whether the air bag system is acti- tem as specified in FMVSS No. 225, at- vated. tach the child restraint to the vehicle S20.4 Low risk deployment test. Each seat anchorage instead of aligning the vehicle that is certified as complying planes. Do not attach the vehicle safe- with S19.3 of FMVSS No. 208 shall meet ty belt. the following test requirements. S20.4.7 While maintaining the child S20.4.1 Position the right front out- restraint position achieved in S20.4.5, board vehicle seat in the full forward secure the child restraint by following, seat track position, adjust the seat to the extent possible, the child re- height (if adjustable) to the mid-height straint manufacturer’s directions re- position, and adjust the seat back (if garding proper installation of the re- adjustable) to the nominal design posi- straint in the rear facing mode. Place tion for a 50th percentile adult male as any adjustable seat belt anchorages at specified in S8.1.3 of FMVSS No. 208. the manufacturer’s nominal design po- Position adjustable lumbar supports so sition for a 50th percentile adult male that the lumbar support is in its low- occupant. Cinch the vehicle belts to est, retracted or deflated adjustment any tension from zero up to 134 N (30 lb) to secure the child restraint. Meas- position. Position any adjustable parts ure belt tension in a flat, straight sec- of the seat that provide additional sup- tion of the lap belt between the child port so that they are in the lowest or restraint belt path and the contact most open adjustment position. If the point with the belt anchor or vehicle seat cushion adjusts fore and aft, inde- seat, on the side away from the buckle pendent of the seat back, set this ad- (to avoid interference from the shoul- justment to the full rearward position. der portion of the belt). If adjustable, set the head restraint at S20.4.8 Position the 49 CFR part 572 the full down position. If the child re- subpart R 12-month-old CRABI dummy straint or dummy contacts the vehicle in the child restraint by following, to interior, move the seat rearward to the the extent possible, the manufacturer’s next detent that provides clearance. If instructions provided with the child re- the seat is a power seat, move the seat straint for seating infants. rearward while assuring that there is a S20.4.9 Deploy the right front out- maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance. board frontal air bag system. If the air S20.4.2 The vehicle shall comply in bag system contains a multistage infla- tests using any child restraint specified tor, the vehicle shall be able to comply in section B and section C of Appendix at any stage or combination of stages A to FMVSS No. 208. or time delay between successive S20.4.3 Locate a vertical plane stages that could occur in the presence through the longitudinal centerline of of an infant in a rear facing child re- the child restraint. This will be re- straint and a 49 CFR part 572, subpart ferred to as ‘‘Plane A’’. R 12-month-old CRABI dummy posi- S20.4.4 For bucket seats, ‘‘Plane B’’ re- tioned according to S20.4 in a rigid bar- fers to a vertical plane parallel to the rier crash test at speeds up to 64 km/h vehicle longitudinal centerline through (40 mph). the geometric center of the right front S21 [Reserved] See § 571.208, S21. outboard seat cushion. For bench seats, S22 Test procedure for S21 of FMVSS ‘‘Plane B’’ refers to a vertical plane No. 208. through the right front outboard seat S22.1 General provisions and defini- parallel to the vehicle longitudinal tions. centerline that is the same distance S22.1.1 Tests specifying the use of a from the longitudinal centerline of the forward facing child restraint, includ- vehicle as the center of the steering ing a booster seat where applicable, wheel. may be conducted using any such re- S20.4.5 Align the child restraint sys- straint listed in section C and section tem facing rearward such that Plane A D of Appendix A of FMVSS No. 208, re- is aligned with Plane B. spectively. The child restraint may be

589

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00589 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208a 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

unused or have been previously used that the lumbar support is in its low- only for automatic suppression tests. If est, retracted or deflated adjustment it has been used, there shall not be any position. visible damage prior to the test. Boost- S22.1.7.2 Other seat adjustments. Posi- er seats are to be used in the manner tion any adjustable parts of the seat appropriate for a 3-year-old child of the that provide additional support so that same height and weight as the 3-year- they are in the lowest or most open ad- old child dummy. justment position. S22.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, S22.1.7.3 If the seat cushion adjusts each vehicle certified to this option fore and aft, independent of the seat shall comply in tests conducted with back, set this adjustment to the full the right front outboard seating posi- rearward position. tion at the full rearward, middle, and S22.1.7.4 If the seat height is adjust- the full forward positions. If the able, determine the maximum and min- dummy contacts the vehicle interior, imum heights at the full rearward seat move the seat rearward to the next de- track position, the middle seat track tent that provides clearance. If the position, and the full forward seat seat is a power seat, move the seat track position. Set the seat at the mid- rearward while assuring that there is a point height for each of the three fore- maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance. aft test positions. S22.1.3 Except as otherwise specified, S22.1.7.5 The seat back angle, if ad- if the child restraint has an anchorage justable, is set at the manufacturer’s system as specified in S5.9 of FMVSS nominal design seat back angle for a No. 213 and is tested in a vehicle with 50th percentile adult male as specified a right front outboard vehicle seat that in S8.1.3 of FMVSS No. 208. has an anchorage system as specified in S22.1.7.6 If adjustable, set the head FMVSS No. 225, the vehicle shall com- restraint at the full down and full for- ply with the belted test conditions ward position. with the restraint anchorage system S22.2 Static tests of automatic suppres- attached to the vehicle seat anchorage sion feature which shall result in deacti- system and the vehicle seat belt unat- vation of the passenger air bag. Each ve- tached. It shall also comply with the hicle that is certified as complying belted test conditions with the re- with S21.2 of FMVSS No. 208 shall meet straint anchorage system unattached the following test requirements: to the vehicle seat anchorage system S22.2.1 Belted test with forward facing and the vehicle seat belt attached. child restraints or booster seats. S22.1.4 Do not attach any tethers. S22.2.1.1 Install the restraint in the S22.1.5 The definitions provided in right front outboard seat in accord- S16.3.1 through S16.3.10 apply to the ance, to the extent possible, with the tests specified in S22. child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- S22.1.6 For leg and thigh angles use tions provided with the seat for use by the following references: children with the same height and (a) Thigh—a straight line on the weight as the 3-year-old child dummy. thigh skin between the center of the 5⁄16 S22.2.1.2 Locate a vertical plane × 1⁄2 in. screw (part 9001024, item 10 in through the longitudinal centerline of drawing 210–0000 sheet 2 of 7, complete the child restraint. This will be re- assembly (HYB III 3 YR OLD)) and the ferred to as ‘‘Plane A’’. knee bolt (part 210–5301 in drawing 210– S22.2.1.3 For bucket seats, ‘‘Plane B’’ 5000–1 & –1, leg assembly). refers to a vertical longitudinal plane (b) Leg—a straight line on the leg through the longitudinal centerline of skin between the center of the ankle the seat cushion of the right front out- bolt (part 210–5701 in drawing 210–5000– board vehicle seat. For bench seats, 1 & –2, leg assembly) and the knee bolt ‘‘Plane B’’ refers to a vertical plane (part 210–5301 in drawing 210–5000–1 & through the right front outboard vehi- –2, leg assembly). cle seat parallel to the vehicle longitu- S22.1.7 Seat set-up. Unless otherwise dinal centerline the same distance stated, from the longitudinal centerline of the S22.1.7.1 Lumbar support adjustment. vehicle as the center of the steering Position adjustable lumbar supports so wheel.

590

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00590 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208a

22.2.1.4 The vehicle shall comply in tension in a flat, straight section of the both of the following positions, if appli- lap belt between the child restraint cable: belt path and the contact point with (a) Without attaching the child re- the belt anchor or vehicle seat, on the straint anchorage system as specified side away from the buckle (to avoid in- in S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213 to a vehicle terference from the shoulder portion of seat anchorage system specified in the belt). FMVSS No. 225 and without attaching S22.2.1.6.2 Position the 49 CFR part any tethers, align the child restraint 572 subpart P 3-year-old child dummy system facing forward such that Plane in the booster seat such that the dum- A is aligned with Plane B. my’s lower torso is centered on the (b) If the child restraint is certified booster seat cushion and the dummy’s to S5.9 of FMVSS No. 213, and the vehi- back is parallel to and in contact with cle seat has an anchorage system as the booster seat back or, if there is no specified in FMVSS No. 225, attach the booster seat back, the vehicle seat child restraint to the vehicle seat an- back. Place the arms at the dummy’s chorage instead of aligning the planes. sides. Do not attach the vehicle safety belt. S22.2.1.6.3 If applicable, attach all S22.2.1.5 Forward facing child restraint. belts that come with the child re- S22.2.1.5.1 Place any adjustable seat straint that are appropriate for a child belt anchorages at the vehicle manu- of the same height and weight as the 3- facturer’s nominal design position for a year-old child dummy, if any, by fol- 50th percentile adult male occupant. lowing, to the extent possible, the Cinch the vehicle belts to any tension manufacturer’s instructions provided from zero up to 134 N (30 lb) to secure with the child restraint for seating the child restraint. Measure belt ten- children. sion in a flat, straight section of the S22.2.1.6.4 If applicable, place the lap belt between the child restraint Type 2 manual belt around the test belt path and the contact point with dummy and fasten the latch. Remove the belt anchor or vehicle seat, on the all slack from the lap belt portion. Pull side away from the buckle (to avoid in- the upper torso webbing out of the re- terference from the shoulder portion of tractor and allow it to retract; repeat the belt). this four times. Apply a 9 to 18 N (2 to S22.2.1.5.2 Position the 49 CFR part 4 lb) tension load to the lap belt. Allow 572 subpart P 3-year-old child dummy the excess webbing in the upper torso in the child restraint such that the belt to be retracted by the retractive dummy’s lower torso is centered on the force of the retractor. child restraint and the dummy’s spine S22.2.1.7 Start the vehicle engine or is against the seat back of the child re- place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, straint. Place the arms at the dummy’s whichever will turn on the suppression sides. system, and then close all vehicle S22.2.1.5.3 Attach all belts that come doors. with the child restraint that are appro- S22.2.1.8 Wait 10 seconds, then check priate for a child of the same height whether the air bag is deactivated. and weight as the 3-year-old child S22.2.2 Unbelted tests with dummies. dummy, if any, by following, to the ex- Place the 49 CFR part 572 subpart P 3- tent possible, the manufacturer’s in- year-old child dummy on the right structions provided with the child re- front outboard seat in any of the fol- straint for seating children. lowing positions (without using a child S22.2.1.6 Booster seat. restraint or booster seat or the vehi- S22.2.1.6.1 Place any adjustable seat cle’s seat belts): belt anchorages at the vehicle manu- S22.2.2.1 Sitting on seat with back facturer’s nominal design position for a against seat back 50th percentile adult male occupant. (a) Position the dummy in the seated For booster seats designed to be se- position and place it on the right front cured to the vehicle seat even when outboard seat. empty, cinch the vehicle belts to any (b) In the case of vehicles equipped tension from zero up to 134 N (30 lb) to with bench seats, position the secure the booster seat. Measure belt midsagittal plane of the dummy

591

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00591 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208a 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s measured along the dummy’s longitudinal centerline and the same midsagittal plane at the mid-sternum distance from the vehicle’s longitu- level. To keep the dummy in position, dinal centerline as the center of the a material with a maximum breaking steering wheel. In the case of vehicles strength of 311 N (70 lb) may be used to equipped with bucket seats, position hold the dummy. the midsagittal plane of the dummy (c) Position the dummy’s thighs vertically such that it coincides with against the seat cushion. the longitudinal centerline of the seat (d) Allow the legs of the dummy to cushion. Position the torso of the extend off the surface of the seat. dummy against the seat back. Position (e) Position the upper arms parallel the dummy’s thighs against the seat to the spine and rotate the dummy’s cushion. lower arms until the dummy’s hands (c) Allow the legs of the dummy to contact the seat cushion. extend off the surface of the seat. (f) Start the vehicle engine or place (d) Rotate the dummy’s upper arms the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, down until they contact the seat back. whichever will turn on the suppression (e) Rotate the dummy’s lower arms system, and then close all vehicle until the dummy’s hands contact the doors. seat cushion. (g) Wait 10 seconds, then check (f) Start the vehicle engine or place whether the air bag is deactivated. the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, S22.2.2.4 Sitting on seat edge, spine whichever will turn on the suppression vertical, hands by the dummy’s sides. system, and then close all vehicle (a) In the case of vehicles equipped doors. with bench seats, position the (g) Wait 10 seconds, then check midsagittal plane of the dummy whether the air bag is deactivated. vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s S22.2.2.2 Sitting on seat with back longitudinal centerline and the same against reclined seat back. Repeat the distance from the vehicle’s longitu- test sequence in S22.2.2.1 with the seat dinal centerline as the center of the back angle 25 degrees rearward of the steering wheel. In the case of vehicles manufacturer’s nominal design posi- equipped with bucket seats, position tion for the 50th percentile adult male. the midsagittal plane of the dummy If the seat will not recline 25 degrees vertically such that it coincides with rearward of the nominal design posi- the longitudinal centerline of the seat tion, use the closest position that does cushion. not exceed 25 degrees. (b) Position the dummy in the seated S22.2.2.3 Sitting on seat with back not position forward in the seat such that against seat back. the legs are vertical and the back of (a) Position the dummy in the seated the legs rest against the front of the position and place it on the right front seat with the spine vertical. If the outboard seat. dummy’s feet contact the floor pan, ro- (b) In the case of vehicles equipped tate the legs forward until the dummy with bench seats, position the is resting on the seat with the feet po- midsagittal plane of the dummy sitioned flat on the floor pan and the vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s dummy spine vertical. To keep the longitudinal centerline and the same dummy in position, a material with a distance from the vehicle’s longitu- maximum breaking strength of 311 N dinal centerline as the center of the (70 lb) may be used to hold the dummy. steering wheel. In the case of vehicles (c) Place the upper arms parallel to equipped with bucket seats, position the spine. the midsagittal plane of the dummy (d) Lower the dummy’s lower arms vertically such that it coincides with such that they contact the seat cush- the longitudinal centerline of the seat ion. cushion. Position the dummy with the (e) Start the vehicle engine or place spine vertical so that the horizontal the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, distance from the dummy’s back to the whichever will turn on the suppression seat back is no less than 25 mm (1.0 in) system, and then close all vehicle and no more than 150 mm (6.0 in), as doors.

592

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00592 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208a

(f) Wait 10 seconds, then check (b) Position the dummy in a kneeling whether the air bag is deactivated. position in the right front outboard S22.2.2.5 Standing on seat, facing for- seat with the dummy facing the front ward. of the vehicle with its toes at the inter- (a) In the case of vehicles equipped section of the seat back and seat cush- with bench seats, position the ion. Position the dummy so that the midsagittal plane of the dummy spine is vertical. Push down on the legs vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s so that they contact the seat as much longitudinal centerline and the same as possible and then release. Place the distance from the vehicle’s longitu- arms parallel to the spine. dinal centerline as the center of the (c) If necessary use a material with a steering wheel rim. In the case of vehi- maximum breaking strength of 311 N cles equipped with bucket seats, posi- (70 lb) or spacer blocks to keep the tion the midsagittal plane of the dummy in position. dummy vertically such that it coin- (d) Start the vehicle engine or place cides with the longitudinal centerline the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, of the seat cushion. Position the whichever will turn on the suppression dummy in a standing position on the system, and then close all vehicle right front outboard seat cushion fac- doors. ing the front of the vehicle while plac- (e) Wait 10 seconds, then check ing the heels of the dummy’s feet in whether the air bag is deactivated. contact with the seat back. S22.2.2.7 Kneeling on seat, facing rear- (b) Rest the dummy against the seat ward. back, with the arms parallel to the (a) In the case of vehicles equipped spine. with bench seats, position the (c) If the head contacts the vehicle midsagittal plane of the dummy roof, recline the seat so that the head vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s is no longer in contact with the vehicle longitudinal centerline and the same roof, but allow no more than 5 mm (0.2 distance from the vehicle’s longitu- in) distance between the head and the dinal centerline as the center of the roof. If the seat does not sufficiently steering wheel. In the case of vehicles recline to allow clearance, omit the equipped with bucket seats, position test. the midsagittal plane of the dummy (d) If necessary use a material with a vertically such that it coincides with maximum breaking strength of 311 N the longitudinal centerline of the seat (70 lb) or spacer blocks to keep the cushion. dummy in position. (b) Position the dummy in a kneeling (e) Start the vehicle engine or place position in the right front outboard the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, seat with the dummy facing the rear of whichever will turn on the suppression the vehicle. Position the dummy such system, and then close all vehicle that the dummy’s head and torso are in doors. contact with the seat back. Push down (f) Wait 10 seconds, then check on the legs so that they contact the whether the air bag is deactivated. seat as much as possible and then re- S22.2.2.6 Kneeling on seat, facing for- lease. Place the arms parallel to the ward. spine. (a) In the case of vehicles equipped (c) Start the vehicle engine or place with bench seats, position the the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, midsagittal plane of the dummy whichever will turn on the suppression vertically and parallel to the vehicle’s system, and then close all vehicle longitudinal centerline and the same doors. distance from the vehicle’s longitu- (d) Wait 10 seconds, then check dinal centerline as the center of the whether the air bag is deactivated. steering wheel. In the case of vehicles S22.2.2.8 Lying on seat. This test is equipped with bucket seats, position performed only in vehicles with 3 des- the midsagittal plane of the dummy ignated front seating positions. vertically such that it coincides with (a) Lay the dummy on the right front the longitudinal centerline of the seat outboard seat such that the following cushion. criteria are met:

593

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00593 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208a 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(1) The midsagittal plane of the whichever will turn on the suppression dummy is horizontal, system, and then close all vehicle (2) The dummy’s spine is perpen- doors. dicular to the vehicle’s longitudinal S22.3.4 Wait 10 seconds, then check axis, whether the air bag system is acti- (3) The dummy’s arms are parallel to vated. its spine, S22.4 Low risk deployment tests. (4) A plane passing through the two S22.4.1 Each vehicle that is certified shoulder joints of the dummy is as complying with S21.4 shall meet the vertical, following test requirements with the 49 (5) The anterior of the dummy is fac- CFR part 572, subpart P 3-year-old ing the vehicle front, child dummy in both of the following (6) The head of the dummy is posi- positions: Position 1 (S22.4.2) and Posi- tioned towards the passenger door, and tion 2 (S22.4.3). (7) The horizontal distance from the S22.4.1.1 Locate and mark a point on topmost point of the dummy’s head to the front of the dummy’s chest jacket the vehicle door is 50 to 100 mm (2–4 on the midsaggital plane which is 114 in). mm (4.5 in) ± 3 mm (± 0.1 in) along the (8) The dummy is as far back in the surface of the skin from the top of the seat as possible. skin at the neck line. This is referred (b) Rotate the thighs as much as pos- to as ‘‘Point 1.’’ sible toward the chest of the dummy and rotate the legs as much as possible S22.4.1.2 Locate the vertical plane against the thighs. parallel to the vehicle longitudinal (c) Move the dummy’s upper left arm centerline through the geometric cen- parallel to the vehicle’s transverse ter of the opening through which the plane and the lower left arm 90 degrees right front air bag deploys into the oc- to the upper arm. Rotate the lower left cupant compartment. This is referred arm about the elbow joint and toward to as ‘‘Plane D.’’ the dummy’s head until movement is S22.4.1.3 Locate the horizontal plane obstructed. through the geometric center of the (d) Start the vehicle engine or place opening through which the right front the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, air bag deploys into the occupant com- whichever will turn on the suppression partment. This is referred to as ‘‘Plane system, and then close all vehicle C.’’ doors. S22.4.2 Position 1 (chest on instrument (e) Wait 10 seconds, then check panel). whether the air bag is deactivated. S22.4.2.1 If a seat is adjustable in the S22.3 Static tests of automatic suppres- fore and aft and/or vertical directions, sion feature which shall result in activa- move the seat to the rear-most seating tion of the passenger air bag system. position and full-down height adjust- S22.3.1 Each vehicle certified to this ment. If the seat cushion adjusts fore option shall comply in tests conducted and aft, independent of the entire seat, with the right front outboard seating adjust the seat cushion to the full-rear- position at the full rearward, middle, ward position. If the seat back is ad- and, subject to S16.3.3.1.8, full forward justable, place the seat back at the positions. All tests are conducted with manufacturer’s nominal design seat the seat height, if adjustable, in the back angle for a 50th percentile adult mid-height position. male as specified in S8.1.3 of FMVSS S22.3.2 Place a 49 CFR part 572 sub- No. 208. Position any adjustable parts part O 5th percentile adult female test of the seat that provide additional sup- dummy at the right front outboard port so that they are in the lowest or seating position of the vehicle, in ac- most open adjustment position. If ad- cordance with procedures specified in justable, set the head restraint in the S16.3.3 of this standard, except as speci- lowest position. fied in S22.3.1. Do not fasten the seat S22.4.2.2 Place the dummy in the belt. front passenger seat such that: S22.3.3 Start the vehicle engine or S22.4.2.2.1 The midsagittal plane is place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, coincident with Plane D. 594

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00594 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208a

S22.4.2.2.2 The legs are initially the seat cushion adjusts fore and aft, vertical to the floor pan. The legs and independent of the entire seat, adjust thighs shall be adjusted to the extent the seat cushion to the full rearward necessary for the head/torso to contact position. Position any adjustable parts the instrument panel as specified in of the seat that provide additional sup- S22.4.2.3. port so that they are in the lowest or S22.4.2.2.3 The upper arms are par- most open adjustment position. If ad- allel to the torso and the hands are in justable, set the head restraint in the contact with the thighs. lowest position. S22.4.2.3 Without changing the seat S22.4.3.2 Place the dummy in the position and with the dummy’s thorax front passenger seat such that: instrument cavity rear face vertical, S22.4.3.2.1 The midsagittal plane is move the dummy forward until the coincident with Plane D. dummy head/torso contacts the instru- S22.4.3.2.2 The legs are vertical to the ment panel. If the dummy loses con- floor pan, the back of the legs are in tact with the seat cushion because of contact with the seat cushion, and the the forward movement, maintain the dummy’s thorax instrument cavity height of the dummy and the angle of rear face is vertical. If it is not possible the thigh with respect to the torso. to position the dummy with the legs in Once contact is made, raise the dummy the prescribed position, rotate the legs vertically until Point 1 lies in Plane C. forward until the dummy is resting on If the dummy’s head contacts the wind- the seat with the feet positioned flat shield and keeps Point 1 from reaching on the floor pan, and the back of the Plane C, lower the dummy until there legs are in contact with the front of is no more than 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance the seat cushion. Set the transverse between the head and the windshield. distance between the longitudinal (The dummy shall remain in contact centerlines at the front of the dummy’s with the instrument panel while being knees at 86 to 91 mm (3.4 to 3.6 in), with raised or lowered, which may change the thighs and the legs of the dummy the dummy’s fore-aft position.) in vertical planes. S22.4.2.4 If possible, position the legs S22.4.3.2.3 The upper arms are par- of the dummy so that the legs are allel to the torso and the hands are in vertical and the feet rest flat on the contact with the thighs. floor pan of the vehicle. If the posi- S22.4.3.3 Move the seat forward, while tioning against the instrument panel maintaining the thorax instrument does not allow the feet to be on the cavity rear face orientation until any floor pan, the feet shall be parallel to part of the dummy contacts the vehi- the floor pan. cle’s instrument panel. S22.4.2.5 If necessary, material with a S22.4.3.4 If dummy contact has not maximum breaking strength of 311 N been made with the vehicle’s instru- (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used ment panel at the full forward seating to support the dummy in position. The position of the seat, slide the dummy material should support the torso rath- forward until contact is made. Main- er than the head. Support the dummy tain the thorax instrument cavity rear so that there is minimum interference face vertical orientation, the height of with the full rotational and the dummy, and the angle of the thigh translational freedom for the upper with respect to the horizontal. torso of the dummy and the material S22.4.3.5 If head/torso contact with does not interfere with the air bag. the instrument panel has not been S22.4.3 Position 2 (head on instrument made, maintain the angle of the thighs panel). with respect to the horizontal while ap- S22.4.3.1 Place the passenger seat in plying a force towards the front of the the full rearward seating position. vehicle on the spine of the dummy be- Place the seat back at the manufactur- tween the shoulder joints until the er’s nominal design seat back angle for head or torso comes into contact with a 50th percentile adult male as speci- the vehicle’s instrument panel. fied in S8.1.3 of FMVSS No. 208. If ad- S22.4.3.6 If necessary, material with a justable in the vertical direction, place maximum breaking strength of 311 N the seat in the mid-height position. If (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used

595

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00595 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208a 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

to support the dummy in position. The with all stages using the maximum material should support the torso rath- time delay between stages. er than the head. Support the dummy S23 [Reserved] See § 571.208, S23. so that there is minimum interference S24 Test procedure for S23 of FMVSS with the full rotational and No. 208. translational freedom for the upper S24.1 General provisions and defini- torso of the dummy and the material tions. does not interfere with the air bag. S24.1.1 Tests specifying the use of a S22.4.4 Deploy the right front out- booster seat may be conducted using board frontal air bag system. If the any such restraint listed in section D frontal air bag system contains a of Appendix A of FMVSS No. 208. The multistage inflator, the vehicle shall booster seat may be unused or have be able to comply with the injury cri- been previously used only for auto- teria at any stage or combination of matic suppression. If it has been used, stages or time delay between succes- there shall not be any visible damage sive stages that could occur in a rigid prior to the test. Booster seats are to barrier crash test at or below 26 km/h be used in the manner appropriate for a (16 mph), under the test procedure 6-year-old child of the same height and specified in S22.5. weight as the 6-year-old child dummy. S22.5 Test procedure for determining S24.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, stages of air bag systems subject to low each vehicle certified to this option risk deployment (low speed crashes) test shall comply in tests conducted with requirement. the right front outboard seating posi- tion at the full rearward seat track po- S22.5.1 The test described in S22.5.2 sition, the middle seat track position, shall be conducted with an unbelted and the full forward seat track posi- 50th percentile adult male test dummy tion. If the dummy contacts the vehi- in the driver seating position according cle interior, move the seat rearward to to S8 of FMVSS No. 208 as it applies to the next detent that provides clear- that seating position and an unbelted ance. If the seat is a power seat, move 5th percentile adult female test the seat rearward while assuring that dummy either in the right front seat- there is a maximum of 5 mm (0.2 in) ing position according to S16 as it ap- distance between the vehicle interior plies to that seating position or at any and the point on the dummy that fore-aft seat position on the passenger would first contact the vehicle inte- side. rior. All tests are conducted with the S22.5.2 Impact the vehicle traveling seat height, if adjustable, in the mid- longitudinally forward at any speed, up height position, and with the seat back to and including 26 km/h (16 mph) into angle, if adjustable, at the manufactur- a fixed rigid barrier that is perpen- er’s nominal design seat back angle for dicular ± 5 degrees to the line of travel a 50th percentile adult male as speci- of the vehicle under the applicable con- fied in S8.1.3 of FMVSS No. 208. ditions of S8 and S10 of FMVSS No. 208, S24.1.3 Except as otherwise specified, and S16 of this standard excluding if the booster seat has an anchorage S10.7, S10.8 and S10.9 of FMVSS No. 208 system as specified in S5.9 of FMVSS and S16.3.5 of this standard. No. 213 and is tested in a vehicle with S22.5.3 Determine which inflation a right front outboard vehicle seat that stage or combination of stages are fired has an anchorage system as specified in and determine the time delay between FMVSS No. 225, the vehicle shall com- successive stages. That stage or com- ply with the belted test conditions bination of stages, with time delay be- with the restraint anchorage system tween successive stages, shall be used attached to the vehicle seat anchorage in deploying the air bag when con- system and the vehicle seat belt unat- ducting the low risk deployment tests tached. It shall also comply with the described in S22.4, S24.4, and S26. belted test conditions with the re- S22.5.4 If the air bag does not deploy straint anchorage system unattached in the impact described in S22.5.2, the to the vehicle seat anchorage system low risk deployment tests described in and the vehicle seat belt attached. The S22.4, S24.4, and S26 shall be conducted vehicle shall comply with the unbelted

596

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00596 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208a

test conditions with the restraint an- legs is prevented by contact with the chorage system unattached to the vehi- instrument panel, move the seat rear- cle seat anchorage system. ward to the next detent that provides S24.1.4 Do not attach any tethers. clearance. If the seat is a power seat, S24.1.5 The definitions provided in move the seat rearward, while assuring S16.3.1 through S16.3.10 apply to the that there is a maximum of 5 mm (0.2 tests specified in S24. in) distance between the vehicle inte- S24.1.6 For leg and thigh angles, use rior and the part of the dummy that the following references: was in contact with the vehicle inte- S24.1.6.1 Thigh—a straight line on the rior. thigh skin between the center of the 5/ (d) Rotate the dummy’s upper arms 16–18 UNC–2B threaded access hole in toward the seat back until they make the upper leg clamp (drawing 127–4004, 6 contact. YR H3—upper leg clamp) and the knee (e) Rotate the dummy’s lower arms screw (part 9000248 in drawing 127–4000– down until they contact the seat. 1 & –2, leg assembly). (f) Close the vehicle’s passenger-side S24.1.6.2 Leg—a straight line on the door and then start the vehicle engine leg skin between the center of the or place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ posi- lower leg screw (part 9001170 in drawing tion, whichever will turn on the sup- 127–4000–1 & –2, leg assembly) and the pression system. knee screw (part 9000248 in drawing 127– (g) Push against the dummy’s left 4000–1 & –2, leg assembly). shoulder to lean the dummy against S24.2 Static tests of automatic suppres- the door; close all remaining doors. sion feature which shall result in deacti- (h) Wait 10 seconds, then check vation of the passenger air bag. Each ve- whether the air bag is deactivated. hicle that is certified as complying S24.3 Static tests of automatic sup- with S23.2 of FMVSS No. 208 shall meet pression feature which shall result in the following test requirements. activation of the passenger air bag sys- S24.2.1 Except as provided in S24.2.2, tem. conduct all tests as specified in S22.2, S24.3.1 Each vehicle certified to this except that the 49 CFR part 572 subpart option shall comply in tests conducted N 6-year-old child dummy shall be with the right front outboard seating used. position at the full rearward seat track S24.2.2 Exceptions. The tests specified position, the middle seat track posi- in the following paragraphs of S22.2 tion, and, subject to S16.3.3.1.8, the full need not be conducted: S22.2.1.5, forward seat track position. All tests S22.2.2.3, S22.2.2.5, S22.2.2.6, S22.2.2.7, are conducted with the seat height, if and S22.2.2.8. adjustable, in the mid-height position. S24.2.3 Sitting back in the seat and S24.3.2 Place a 49 CFR part 572 sub- leaning on the right front passenger door. part O 5th percentile adult female test (a) Position the dummy in the seated dummy at the right front outboard position and place the dummy in the seating position of the vehicle, in ac- right front outboard seat. For bucket cordance with procedures specified in seats, position the midsagittal plane of S16.3.3 of this standard, except as speci- the dummy vertically such that it co- fied in S24.3.1. Do not fasten the seat incides with the longitudinal center belt. line of the seat cushion. For bench S24.3.3 Start the vehicle engine or seats, position the midsagittal plane of place the ignition in the ‘‘on’’ position, the dummy vertically and parallel to whichever will turn on the suppression the vehicle’s longitudinal centerline system, and then close all vehicle and the same distance from the longi- doors. tudinal centerline of the vehicle as the S24.3.4 Wait 10 seconds, then check center of the steering wheel. whether the air bag system is acti- (b) Place the dummy’s back against vated. the seat back and rest the dummy’s S24.4 Low risk deployment tests. thighs on the seat cushion. S24.4.1 Each vehicle that is certified (c) Allow the legs and feet of the as complying with S23.4 of FMVSS No. dummy to extend off the surface of the 208 shall meet the following test re- seat. If this positioning of the dummy’s quirements with the 49 CFR part 572

597

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00597 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208a 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

subpart N 6-year-old child dummy in ment, maintain the height of the both of the following positions: Posi- dummy while moving the dummy for- tion 1 (S24.4.2) or Position 2 (S24.4.3). ward. If the head contacts the wind- S24.4.1.1 Locate and mark a point on shield before head/torso contact with the front of the dummy’s chest jacket the instrument panel, maintain the on the midsagittal plane which is 139 thorax instrument cavity angle and mm (5.5 in) ± 3 mm (± 0.1 in) along the move the dummy forward such that the surface of the skin from the top of the head is following the angle of the wind- skin at the neckline. This is referred to shield until there is head/torso contact as ‘‘Point 1.’’ with the instrument panel. Once con- S24.4.1.2 Locate the vertical plane tact is made, raise or lower the dummy parallel to the vehicle longitudinal vertically until Point 1 lies in Plane C. centerline through the geometric cen- If the dummy’s head contacts the wind- ter of the opening through which the shield and keeps Point 1 from reaching right front air bag deploys into the oc- Plane C, lower the dummy until there cupant compartment. This is referred is no more than 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance to as ‘‘Plane D.’’ between the head and the windshield. S24.4.1.3 Locate the horizontal plane (The dummy shall remain in contact through the geometric center of the with the instrument panel while being opening through which the right front raised or lowered which may change air bag deploys into the occupant com- the dummy’s fore-aft position.) partment. This is referred to as ‘‘Plane S24.4.2.4 If necessary, material with a C.’’ maximum breaking strength of 311 N S24.4.2 Position 1 (chest on instrument (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used panel). to support the dummy in position. The S24.4.2.1 If a seat is adjustable in the material should support the torso rath- fore and aft and/or vertical directions, er than the head. Support the dummy move the seat to the rearmost seating so that there is minimum interference position and full down height adjust- with the full rotational and ment. If the seat cushion adjusts fore translational freedom for the upper and aft, independent of the entire seat, torso of the dummy and the material adjust the seat cushion to the full rear- does not interfere with the air bag. ward position. If the seat back is ad- S24.4.3 Position 2 (head on instrument justable, place the seat back at the panel). manufacturer’s nominal design seat S24.4.3.1 Place the passenger seat in back angle for a 50th percentile adult the full rearward seating position. male as specified in S8.1.3. Position any Place the seat back at the manufactur- adjustable parts of the seat that pro- er’s nominal design seat back angle for vide additional support so that they a 50th percentile adult male as speci- are in the lowest or most open adjust- fied in S8.1.3 of FMVSS No. 208. If ad- ment position. Position an adjustable justable in the vertical direction, place head restraint in the lowest position. the seat in the mid-height position. If S24.4.2.2 Remove the legs of the the seat cushion adjusts fore and aft, dummy at the pelvic interface. independent of the entire seat, adjust S24.4.2.3 Place the dummy in the the seat cushion to the full rearward front passenger seat such that: position. Position any adjustable parts (a) The midsagittal plane is coinci- of the seat that provide additional sup- dent with Plane D. port so that they are in the lowest or (b) The upper arms are parallel to the most open adjustment position. Posi- torso and the hands are next to where tion an adjustable head restraint in the the thighs would be. lowest position. (c) Without changing the seat posi- S24.4.3.2 Place the dummy in the tion and with the dummy’s thorax in- front passenger seat such that: strument cavity rear face 6 degrees for- (a) The midsagittal plane is coinci- ward of the vertical, move the dummy dent with Plane D. forward until the dummy head/torso (b) The legs are perpendicular to the contacts the instrument panel. If the floor pan, the back of the legs are in dummy loses contact with the seat contact with the seat cushion, and the cushion because of the forward move- dummy’s thorax instrument cavity

598

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00598 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.208a

rear face is 6 degrees forward of km/h (16 mph) under the test procedure vertical. If it is not possible to position specified in S22.5. the dummy with the legs in the pre- S25 [Reserved] See § 571.208, S25. scribed position, rotate the legs for- S26 Procedure for low risk deployment ward until the dummy is resting on the tests of driver air bag. seat with the feet positioned flat on S26.1 Each vehicle that is certified as the floor pan and the back of the legs complying with S25.3 of FMVSS No. 208 are in contact with the front of the shall meet the requirements of S25.3 seat cushion. Set the transverse dis- and S25.4 with the 49 CFR part 572 sub- tance between the longitudinal part O 5th percentile adult female centerlines at the front of the dummy’s dummy in both of the following posi- knees at 112 to 117 mm (4.4. to 4.6 in), tions: Driver position 1 (S26.2) and with the thighs and the legs of the Driver position 2 (S26.3). dummy in vertical planes. S26.2 Driver position 1 (chin on mod- (c) The upper arms are parallel to the ule). torso and the hands are in contact with the thighs. S24.4.3.3 Move the seat for- S26.2.1 Adjust the steering controls ward, while maintaining the thorax in- so that the steering wheel hub is at the strument cavity rear face orientation geometric center of the locus it de- until any part of the dummy contacts scribes when it is moved through its the vehicle’s instrument panel. full range of driving positions. If there S24.4.3.4 If dummy contact has not is no setting at the geometric center, been made with the vehicle’s instru- position it one setting lower than the ment panel at the full forward seating geometric center. Set the rotation of position of the seat, slide the dummy the steering wheel so that the vehicle forward on the seat until contact is wheels are pointed straight ahead. made. Maintain the thorax instrument S26.2.2 Locate the vertical plane par- cavity rear face orientation, the height allel to the vehicle longitudinal axis of the dummy, and the angle of the which passes through the geometric thigh with respect to the horizontal. center of the opening through which S24.4.3.5 If head/torso contact has not the driver air bag deploys into the oc- been made with the instrument panel, cupant compartment. This is referred maintain the angle of the thighs with to as ‘‘Plane E.’’ respect to the horizontal while apply- S26.2.3 Place the seat in the full rear- ing a force towards the front of the ve- ward seating position. If adjustable in hicle on the spine of the dummy be- the vertical direction, place the seat in tween the shoulder joints until the the mid-height position. If the seat head/torso comes into contact with the cushion adjusts fore and aft, inde- vehicle’s instrument panel. pendent of the entire seat, adjust the S24.4.3.6 If necessary, material with a seat cushion to the full rearward posi- maximum breaking strength of 311 N tion. If the seat back is adjustable, (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used place the seat back at the manufactur- to support the dummy in position. Ma- er’s nominal design seat back angle for terial should support the torso rather a 50th percentile adult male as speci- than the head. Support the dummy so fied in S8.1.3 of FMVSS No. 208. If the that there is minimum interference seat cushion contains an independent with the full rotational and seat cushion angle adjustment mecha- translational freedom for the upper nism, adjust the seat cushion angle to torso of the dummy and the material the middle of the range of seat cushion does not interfere with the air bag. angles. Position any adjustable parts of S24.4.4 Deploy the right front out- the seat that provide additional sup- board frontal air bag system. If the port so that they are in the lowest or frontal air bag system contains a most open adjustment position. Posi- multistage inflator, the vehicle shall tion an adjustable head restraint in the be able to comply with the injury cri- lowest position. teria at any stage or combination of S26.2.4 Place the dummy in the driv- stages and at any time delay between er’s seat such that: successive stages that could occur in a S26.2.4.1 The midsagittal plane is co- rigid barrier crash at speeds up to 26 incident with Plane E.

599

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00599 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.208a 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S26.2.4.2 The legs are perpendicular er’s nominal design seat back angle for to the floor pan and the back of the a 50th percentile adult male as speci- legs are in contact with the seat cush- fied in S8.1.3 of FMVSS No. 208. If the ion. The legs may be adjusted if nec- seat cushion contains an independent essary to achieve the final head posi- seat cushion angle adjustment mecha- tion. nism, adjust the seat cushion angle to S26.2.4.3 The dummy’s thorax instru- the middle of the range of seat cushion ment cavity rear face is 6 degrees for- angles. Position any adjustable parts of ward (toward the front of the vehicle) the seat that provide additional sup- of the steering wheel angle (i.e., if the port so that they are in the lowest or steering wheel angle is 25 degrees from most open adjustment position. Posi- vertical, the thorax instrument cavity tion an adjustable head restraint in the rear face angle is 31 degrees). lowest position. S26.2.4.4 The initial transverse dis- S26.3.2 Adjust the steering controls tance between the longitudinal so that the steering wheel hub is at the centerlines at the front of the dummy’s geometric center of the locus it de- knees is 160 to 170 mm (6.3 to 6.7 in), scribes when it is moved through its with the thighs and legs of the dummy full range of driving positions. If there in vertical planes. is no setting at the geometric center, S26.2.4.5 The upper arms are parallel position it one setting lower than the to the torso and the hands are in con- geometric center. Set the rotation of tact with the thighs. the steering wheel so that the vehicle S26.2.5 Maintaining the spine angle, wheels are pointed straight ahead. slide the dummy forward until the S26.3.3 Locate the vertical plane par- head/torso contacts the steering wheel. allel to the vehicle longitudinal axis S26.2.6 While maintaining the spine which passes through the geometric angle, adjust the height of the dummy center of the opening through which so that the bottom of the chin is in the the driver air bag deploys into the oc- same horizontal plane as the highest cupant compartment. This is referred point of the air bag module cover to as ‘‘Plane E.’’ (dummy height can be adjusted using S26.3.4 Place the dummy in the driv- the seat height adjustments and/or er’s seat position such that: spacer blocks). If the seat prevents the S26.3.4.1 The midsagittal plane is co- bottom of the chin from being in the incident with Plane E. same horizontal plane as the module S26.3.4.2 The legs are perpendicular cover, adjust the dummy height to as to the floor pan and the back of the close to the prescribed position as pos- legs are in contact with the seat cush- sible. ion. The legs may be adjusted if nec- S26.2.7 If necessary, material with a essary to achieve the final head posi- maximum breaking strength of 311 N tion. (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used S26.3.4.3 The dummy’s thorax instru- to support the dummy in position. The ment cavity rear face is 6 degrees for- material should support the torso rath- ward (toward the front of the vehicle) er than the head. Support the dummy of the steering wheel angle (i.e., if the so that there is minimum interference steering wheel angle is 25 degrees from with the full rotational and vertical, the thorax instrument cavity translational freedom for the upper rear face angle is 31 degrees). torso of the dummy and the material S26.3.4.4 The initial transverse dis- does not interfere with the air bag. tance between the longitudinal S26.3 Driver position 2 (chin on rim). centerlines at the front of the dummy’s S26.3.1 Place the seat in the full rear- knees is 160 to 170 mm (6.3 to 6.7 in), ward seating position. If adjustable in with the thighs and legs of the dummy the vertical direction, place the seat in in vertical planes. the mid-height position. If the seat S26.3.4.5 The upper arms are parallel cushion adjusts fore and aft, inde- to the torso and the hands are in con- pendent of the entire seat, adjust the tact with the thighs. seat cushion to the full rearward posi- S26.3.5 Maintaining the spine angle, tion. If the seatback is adjustable, slide the dummy forward until the place the seat back at the manufactur- head/torso contacts the steering wheel.

600

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00600 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.209

S26.3.6 While maintaining the spine S3. Definitions. Adjustment hardware angle, position the dummy so that a means any or all hardware designed for point on the chin 40 mm below the cen- adjusting the size of a seat belt assem- ter of the mouth (chin point) is in con- bly to fit the user, including such hard- tact with the rim of the uppermost por- ware that may be integral with a buck- tion of the steering wheel. If the dum- le, attachment hardware, or retractor. my’s head contacts the vehicle wind- Attachment hardware means any or all shield or upper interior before the pre- hardware designed for securing the scribed position can be obtained, lower webbing of a seat belt assembly to a the dummy until there is no more than motor vehicle. 5 mm (0.2 in) clearance between the ve- Automatic-locking retractor means a hicle’s windshield or upper interior, as retractor incorporating adjustment applicable. hardware by means of a positive self- S26.3.7 If the steering wheel can be locking mechanism which is capable adjusted so that the chin point can be when locked of withstanding restraint in contact with the rim of the upper- forces. most portion of the steering wheel, ad- Buckle means a quick release con- just the steering wheel to that position nector which fastens a person in a seat and readjust the spine angle to coin- belt assembly. cide with the steering wheel angle. Po- Emergency-locking retractor means a sition the dummy so that the chin retractor incorporating adjustment point is in contact with the rim of the hardware by means of a locking mecha- uppermost portion of the steering nism that is activated by vehicle accel- wheel. eration, webbing movement relative to S26.3.8 If necessary, material with a the vehicle, or other automatic action maximum breaking strength of 311 N during an emergency and is capable (70 lb) and spacer blocks may be used when locked of withstanding restraint to support the dummy in position. The forces. material should support the torso rath- Hardware means any metal or rigid er than the head. Support the dummy plastic part of a seat belt assembly. so that there is minimum interference Load-limiter means a seat belt assem- with the full rotational and bly component or feature that controls translational freedom for the upper tension on the seat belt to modulate torso of the dummy and the material the forces that are imparted to occu- does not interfere with the air bag. pants restrained by the belt assembly S26.4 Deploy the left front outboard during a crash. frontal air bag system. If the air bag Nonlocking retractor means a retrac- system contains a multistage inflator, tor from which the webbing is extended the vehicle shall be able to comply to essentially its full length by a small with the injury criteria at any stage or external force, which provides no ad- combination of stages or time delay be- justment for assembly length, and tween successive stages that could which may or may not be capable of occur in a rigid barrier crash at speeds sustaining restraint forces at max- up to 26 km/h (16 mph) under the test imum webbing extension. procedure specified in S22.5. Pelvic restraint means a seat belt as- S27 through S29 [Reserved] See sembly or portion thereof intended to § 571.208, S27 through S29. restrain movement of the pelvis. Retractor means a device for storing [69 FR 3840, Jan. 27, 2004] part or all of the webbing in a seat belt assembly. § 571.209 Standard No. 209; Seat belt Seat back retainer means the portion assemblies. of some seat belt assemblies designed S1. Purpose and scope. This standard to restrict forward movement of a seat specifies requirements for seat belt as- back. semblies. Seat belt assembly means any strap, S2. Application. This standard applies webbing, or similar device designed to to seat belt assemblies for use in pas- secure a person in a motor vehicle in senger cars, multipurpose passenger ve- order to mitigate the results of any ac- hicles, trucks, and buses. cident, including all necessary buckles

601

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00601 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.209 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

and other fasteners, and all hardware the end of the buckle designed to re- designed for installing such seat belt ceive and latch the tongue. assembly in a motor vehicle. (f) Attachment hardware. A seat belt Strap means a narrow nonwoven ma- assembly shall include all hardware terial used in a seat belt assembly in necessary for installation in a motor place of webbing. vehicle in accordance with Society of Type 1 seat belt assembly is a lap belt Automotive Engineers Recommended for pelvic restraint. Practice J800c, ‘‘Motor Vehicle Seat Type 2 seat belt assembly is a combina- Belt Installation,’’ November 1973. How- tion of pelvic and upper torso re- ever, seat belt assemblies designed for straints. installation in motor vehicles equipped Type 2a shoulder belt is an upper torso with seat belt assembly anchorages restraint for use only in conjunction that do not require anchorage nuts, with a lap belt as a Type 2 seat belt as- plates, or washers, need not have such sembly. hardware, but shall have 7⁄16–20 UNF–2A Upper torso restraint means a portion or 1⁄2–13UNC–2A attachment bolts or of a seat belt assembly intended to re- equivalent metric hardware. The hard- strain movement of the chest and ware shall be designed to prevent at- shoulder regions. tachment bolts and other parts from Webbing means a narrow fabric woven becoming disengaged from the vehicle with continuous filling yarns and fin- while in service. Reinforcing plates or ished selvages. washers furnished for universal floor, S4. Requirements. installations shall be of steel, free from S4.1 (a) Single occupancy. A seat belt burrs and sharp edges on the peripheral assembly shall be designed for use by edges adjacent to the vehicle, at least one, and only one, person at any one 1.5 mm in thickness and at least 2580 time. mm2 in projected area. The distance (b) [Reserved] between any edge of the plate and the (c) Upper torso restraint. A Type 2 seat edge of the bolt hole shall be at least 15 belt assembly shall provide upper torso mm. Any corner shall be rounded to a restraint without shifting the pelvic radius of not less than 6 mm or cut so restraint into the abdominal region. that no corner angle is less than 135° An upper torso restraint shall be de- and no side is less than 6 mm in length. signed to minimize vertical forces on (g) Adjustment. (1) A Type 1 or Type 2 the shoulders and spine. Hardware for seat belt assembly shall be capable of upper torso restraint shall be so de- adjustment to fit occupants whose di- signed and located in the seat belt as- mensions and weight range from those sembly that the possibility of injury to the occupant is minimized. of a 5th-percentile adult female to those of a 95th-percentile adult male. A Type 2a shoulder belt shall comply with applicable requirements for a The seat belt assembly shall have ei- Type 2 seat belt assembly in S4.1 to ther an automatic-locking retractor, S4.4, inclusive. an emergency-locking retractor, or an (d) Hardware. All hardware parts adjusting device that is within the which contact under normal usage a reach of the occupant. person, clothing, or webbing shall be (2) A Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt as- free from burrs and sharp edges. sembly for use in a vehicle having seats (e) Release. A Type 1 or Type 2 seat that are adjustable shall conform to belt assembly shall be provided with a the requirements of S4.1(g)(1) regard- buckle or buckles readily accessible to less of seat position. However, if a seat the occupant to permit his easy and has a back that is separately adjust- rapid removal from the assembly. able, the requirements of S4.1(g)(1) Buckle release mechanism shall be de- need be met only with the seat back in signed to minimize the possibility of the manufacturer’s nominal design accidental release. A buckle with re- riding position. lease mechanism in the latched posi- (3) The adult occupants referred to in tion shall have only one opening in S4.1(g)(1) shall have the following which the tongue can be inserted on measurements:

602

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00602 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.209

5th percen- tile 95th percentile items specified in SAE Recommended adult female adult male Practice J800c, ‘‘Motor Vehicle Seat Weight ...... 46.3 kg ...... 97.5 kg. Belt Installations,’’ November 1973. If Erect sitting height ...... 785 mm ...... 965 mm. the assembly is for use only in specifi- Hip breadth (sitting) ...... 325 mm ...... 419 mm. cally stated motor vehicles, the assem- Hip circumference (sit- 925 mm ...... 1199 mm. ting). bly shall either be permanently and Waist circumference 599 mm ...... 1080 mm. legibly marked or labeled with the fol- (sitting). lowing statement, or the instruction Chest depth ...... 190 mm ...... 267 mm. Chest circumference: sheet shall include the following state- Nipple ...... 775 mm ...... 1130 mm. ment: Upper ...... 757 mm ...... 1130 mm. Lower ...... 676 mm ...... 1130 mm. This seat belt assembly is for use only in [insert specific seating position(s), e.g., (h) Webbing. The ends of webbing in a ‘‘front right’’] in [insert specific vehicle seat belt assembly shall be protected or make(s) and model(s)]. treated to prevent raveling. The end of (l) Usage and maintenance instructions. webbing in a seat belt assembly having A seat belt assembly or retractor shall a metal-to-metal buckle that is used by be accompanied by written instruc- the occupant to adjust the size of the tions for the proper use of the assem- assembly shall not pull out of the ad- bly, stressing particularly the impor- justment hardware at maximum size tance of wearing the assembly snugly adjustment. Provision shall be made and properly located on the body, and for essentially unimpeded movement of on the maintenance f the assembly and webbing routed between a seat back periodic inspection of all components. and seat cushion and attached to a re- The instructions shall show the proper tractor located behind the seat. manner of threading webbing in the (i) Strap. A strap used in a seat belt hardware of seat belt assemblies in assembly to sustain restraint forces which the webbing is not permanently shall comply with the requirements for fastened. Instructions for a nonlocking webbing in S4.2, and if the strap is retractor shall include a caution that made from a rigid material, it shall the webbing must be fully extended comply with applicable requirements from the retractor during use of the in S4.2, S4.3, and S4.4. seat belt assembly unless the retractor (j) Marking. Each seat belt assembly is attached to the free end of webbing shall be permanently and legibly which is not subjected to any tension marked or labeled with year of manu- during restraint of an occupant by the facture, model, and name or trademark assembly. Instructions for Type 2a of manufacturer or distributor, or of shoulder belt shall include a warning importer if manufactured outside the that the shoulder belt is not to be used United States. A model shall consist of without a lap belt. a single combination of webbing having (m) Workmanship. Seat belt assem- a specific type of fiber weave and con- blies shall have good workmanship in struction, and hardware having a spe- accordance with good commercial prac- cific design. Webbings of various colors tice. may be included under the same model, S4.2 Requirements for webbing. but webbing of each color shall comply (a) Width. The width of the webbing with the requirements for webbing in in a seat belt assembly shall be not less S4.2. than 46 mm, except for portions that do (k) Installation instructions. A seat not touch a 95th percentile adult male belt assembly, other than a seat belt with the seat in any adjustment posi- assembly installed in a motor vehicle tion and the seat back in the manufac- by an automobile manufacturer, shall turer’s nominal design riding position be accompanied by an instruction sheet when measured under the conditions providing sufficient information for in- prescribed in S5.1(a). stalling the assembly in a motor vehi- (b) Breaking strength. The webbing in cle. The installation instructions shall a seat belt assembly shall have not less state whether the assembly is for uni- than the following breaking strength versal installation or for installation when tested by the procedures specified only in specifically stated motor vehi- in S5.1(b): Type 1 seat belt assembly— cles, and shall include at least those 26,689 N; Type 2 seat belt assembly—

603

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00603 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.209 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

22,241 N for webbing in pelvic restraint service condition number of SC1, in ac- and 17,793 N for webbing in upper torso cordance with American Society for restraint. Testing and Materials B456–79, ‘‘Stand- (c) Elongation. Except as provided in ard Specification for Electrodeposited S4.5, the webbing in a seat belt assem- Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus bly shall not extend to more than the Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium,’’ following elongation when subjected to but such hardware shall not be racked the specified forces in accordance with for electroplating in locations sub- the procedure specified in S5.1(c): Type jected to maximum stress. 1 seat belt assembly—20 percent at (2) Surfaces of buckles, retractors 11,120 N; Type 2 seat belt assembly 30 and metallic parts, other than attach- percent at 11,120 N for webbing in pel- ment hardware, of a seat belt assembly vic restraint and 40 percent at 11,120 N after subjection to the conditions spec- for webbing in upper torso restraint. ified in S5.2(a) shall be free of ferrous (d) Resistance to abrasion. The web- or nonferrous corrosion which may be bing of a seat belt assembly, after transferred, either directly or by being subjected to abrasion as specified means of the webbing, to the occupant in S5.1(d) or S5.3(c), shall have a break- or his clothing when the assembly is ing strength of not less than 75 percent worn. After test, buckles shall conform of the breaking strength listed in to applicable requirements in para- S4.2(b) for that type of belt assembly. graphs (d) to (g) of this section. (e) Resistance to light. The webbing in (b) Temperature resistance. Plastic or a seat belt assembly after exposure to other nonmetallic hardware parts of a the light of a carbon arc and tested by seat belt assembly when subjected to the procedure specified in S5.1(e) shall the conditions specified in S5.2(b) shall have a breaking strength not less than not warp or otherwise deteriorate to 60 percent of the strength before expo- cause the assembly to operate improp- sure to the carbon arc and shall have a erly or fail to comply with applicable color retention not less than No. 2 on requirements in this section and S4.4. the Geometric Gray Scale published by the American Association of Textile (c) Attachment hardware. (1) Eye Chemists and Colorists, Post Office Box bolts, shoulder bolts, or other bolt used 886, Durham, NC. to secure the pelvic restraint of seat (f) Resistance to micro-organisms. The belt assembly to a motor vehicle shall webbing in a seat belt assembly after withstand a force of 40,034 N when test- being subjected to micro-organisms ed by the procedure specified in and tested by the procedures specified S5.2(c)(1), except that attachment bolts in S5.1(f) shall have a breaking of a seat belt assembly designed for in- strength not less than 85 percent of the stallation in specific models of motor strength before subjection to micro-or- vehicles in which the ends of two or ganisms. more seat belt assemblies cannot be at- S4.3 Requirements for hardware. tached to the vehicle by a single bolt (a) Corrosion resistance. (1) Attach- shall have breaking strength of not less ment hardware of a seat belt assembly than 22,241 N. after being subjected to the conditions (2) Other attachment hardware de- specified in S5.2(a) shall be free of fer- signed to receive the ends of two seat rous corrosion on significant surfaces belt assemblies shall withstand a ten- except for permissible ferrous corro- sile force of at least 26,689 N without sion at peripheral edges or edges of fracture of a section when tested by holes on underfloor reinforcing plates the procedure specified in S5.2(c)(2). and washers. Alternatively, such hard- (3) A seat belt assembly having single ware at or near the floor shall be pro- attachment hooks of the quick-dis- tected against corrosion by at least an connect type for connecting webbing to electrodeposited coating of nickel, or an eye bolt shall be provided with a re- copper and nickel with at least a serv- taining latch or keeper which shall not ice condition number of SC2, and other move more than 2 mm in either the attachment hardware shall be pro- vertical or horizontal direction when tected by an electrodeposited coating tested by the procedure specified in of nickel, or copper and nickel with a S5.2(c)(3).

604

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00604 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.209

(d) Buckle release. (1) The buckle of a force shall not exceed 5 N in any strap Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt assembly or webbing that contacts the shoulder shall release when a force of not more when measured by the procedure speci- than 133 N is applied. fied in S5.2(h), unless the retractor is (2) A buckle designed for pushbutton attached to the free end of webbing application of buckle release force which is not subjected to any tension shall have a minimum area of 452 mm2 during restraint of an occupant by the with a minimum linear dimension of 10 assembly. mm for applying the release force, or a (i) Automatic-locking retractor. The buckle designed for lever application of webbing of a seat belt assembly buckle release force shall permit the equipped with an automatic locking re- insertion of a cylinder 10 mm in diame- tractor, when tested by the procedure ter and 38 mm in length to at least the specified in S5.2(i), shall not move midpoint of the cylinder along the cyl- more than 25 mm between locking posi- inder’s entire length in the actuation tions of the retractor, and shall be re- portion of the buckle release. A buckle having other design for release shall tracted with a force under zero accel- have adequate access for two or more eration of not less than 3 N when at- fingers to actuate release. tached to pelvic restraint, and not less (3) The buckle of a Type 1 or Type 2 that 2 N nor more than 5 N in any strap seat belt assembly shall not release or webbing that contacts the shoulders under a compressive force of 1779 N ap- of an occupant when the retractor is plied as prescribed in paragraph attached to upper torso restraint. An S5.2(d)(3). The buckle shall be operable automatic locking retractor attached and shall meet the applicable require- to upper torso restraint shall not in- ment of paragraph S4.4 after the com- crease the restraint on the occupant of pressive force has been removed. the seat belt assembly during use in a (e) Adjustment force. The force re- vehicle traveling over rough roads as quired to decrease the size of a seat prescribed in S5.2(i). belt assembly shall not exceed 49 N (j) Emergency-locking retractor. An when measured by the procedure speci- emergency-locking retractor of a Type fied in S5.2(e). 1 or Type 2 seat belt assembly, when (f) Tilt-lock adjustment. The buckle of tested in accordance with the proce- a seat belt assembly having tilt-lock dures specified in paragraph S5.2(j)— adjustment shall lock the webbing (1) Shall lock before the webbing ex- when tested by the procedure specified tends 25 mm when the retractor is sub- in S5.2(f) at an angle of not less than 30 jected to an acceleration of 7 m/s2 (0.7 degrees between the base of the buckle g); and the anchor webbing. (2) Shall not lock, if the retractor is (g) Buckle latch. The buckle latch of a sensitive to webbing withdrawal, before seat belt assembly when tested by the the webbing extends 51 mm when the procedure specified in S5.2(g) shall not retractor is subjected to an accelera- fail, nor gall or wear to an extent that tion of 3 m/s2 (0.3 g) or less. normal latching and unlatching is im- (3) Shall not lock, if the retractor is paired, and a metal-to-metal buckle sensitive to vehicle acceleration, when shall separate when in any position of the retractor is rotated in any direc- partial engagement by a force of not tion to any angle of 15° or less from its more than 22 N. (h) Nonlocking retractor. The webbing orientation in the vehicle; of a seat belt assembly shall extend (4) Shall exert a retractive force of at from a nonlocking retractor within 6 least 3 N under zero acceleration when mm of maximum length when a tension attached only to the pelvic restraint; is applied as prescribed in S5.2(h). A (5) Shall exert a retractive force of nonlocking retractor on upper torso re- not less than 1 N and not more than 5 straint shall be attached to the non- N under zero acceleration when at- adjustable end of the assembly, the reel tached only to an upper torso re- of the retractor shall be easily visible straint; to an occupant while wearing the as- (6) Shall exert a retractive force of sembly, and the maximum retraction not less than 1 N and not more than 7

605

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00605 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.209 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

N under zero acceleration when at- (4) The length of the pelvic restraint tached to a strap or webbing that re- between anchorages shall not increase strains both the upper torso and the more than 508 mm when subjected to a pelvis. force of 11,120 N. (k) Performance of retractor. A retrac- (5) The length of the upper torso re- tor used on a seat belt assembly after straint between anchorages shall not subjection to the tests specified in increase more than 508 mm when sub- S5.2(k) shall comply with applicable re- jected to a force of 6,672 N. quirements in paragraphs (h) to (j) of (6) Any webbing cut by the hardware this section and S4.4, except that the during test shall have a breaking retraction force shall be not less than strength of not less than 15,569 N at a 50 percent of its original retraction cut in webbing of the pelvic restraint, force. or not less than 12,455 N at a cut in S4.4 Requirements for assembly per- webbing of the upper torso restraint. formance. (7) Complete fracture through any (a) Type I seat belt assembly. Except as solid section of metal attachment provided in S4.5, the complete seat belt hardware shall not occur during test. assembly including webbing, straps, S4.5 Load-limiter. (a) A Type 1 or Type buckles, adjustment and attachment 2 seat belt assembly that includes a hardware, and retractors shall comply load-limiter is not required to comply with the following requirements when with the elongation requirements of tested by the procedures specified in S4.2(c), S4.4(a)(2), S4.4(b)(4) or S5.3(a): S4.4(b)(5). (1) The assembly loop shall withstand (b) A seat belt assembly that includes a force of not less than 22,241 N; that is, a load limiter and that does not com- each structural component of the as- ply with the elongation requirements sembly shall withstand a force of not of this standard may be installed in less than 11,120 N. motor vehicles at any designated seat- (2) The assembly loop shall extend ing position that is subject to the re- not more than 7 inches or 178 mm when quirements of S5.1 of Standard No. 208 subjected to a force of 22,241 N; that is, (§ 571.208). the length of the assembly between an- S4.6 Manual belts subject to crash pro- chorages shall not increase more than tection requirements of Standard No. 208. 356 mm. (a)(1) A manual seat belt assembly, (3) Any webbing cut by the hardware which is subject to the requirements of during test shall have a breaking S5.1 of Standard No. 208 (49 CFR 571.208) strength at the cut of not less than by virtue of any provision of Standard 18,683 N. No. 208 other than S4.1.2.1(c)(2) of that (4) Complete fracture through any standard, does not have to meet the re- solid section of metal attachment quirements of S4.2(a)–(f) and S4.4 of hardware shall not occur during test. this standard. (b) Type 2 seat belt assembly. Except as (2) A manual seat belt assembly sub- provided in S4.5, the components of a ject to the requirements of S5.1 of Type 2 seat belt assembly including Standard No. 208 (49 CFR 571.208) by webbing, straps, buckles, adjustment virtue of S4.1.2.1(c)(2) of Standard No. and attachment hardware, and retrac- 208 does not have to meet the elon- tors shall comply with the following gation requirements of S4.2(c), requirements when tested by the proce- S4.4(a)(2), S4.4(b)(4), and S4.4(b)(5) of dure specified in S5.3(b): this standard. (1) The structural components in the S5. Demonstration procedures. pelvic restraint shall withstand a force S5.1 Webbing—(a) Width. The width of not less than 11,120 N. of webbing from three seat belt assem- (2) The structural components in the blies shall be measured after condi- upper torso restraint shall withstand a tioning for at least 24 hours in an at- force of not less than 6,672 N. mosphere having relative humidity be- (3) The structural components in the tween 48 and 67 percent and a tempera- assembly that are common to pelvic ture of 23° ±2 °C. The tension during and upper torso restraints shall with- measurement of width shall be not stand a force of not less than 13,345 N. more than 22 N on webbing from a Type

606

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00606 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.209

1 seat belt assembly, and 9786 N ±450 N shall be tested for resistance to abra- on webbing from a Type 2 seat belt as- sion by rubbing over the hexagon bar sembly. The width of webbing from a prescribed in Figure 2 in the following Type 2 seat belt assembly may be manner: The webbing shall be mounted measured during the breaking strength in the apparatus shown schematically test described in paragraph (b) of this in Figure 2. One end of the webbing (A) section. shall be attached to a mass (B) of 2.35 (b) Breaking strength. Webbing from kg ±.05 kg, except that a mass of 1.5 kg three seat belt assemblies shall be con- ±.05 kg shall be used for webbing in pel- ditioned in accordance with paragraph vic and upper torso restraints of a belt (a) of this section and tested for break- assembly used in a child restraint sys- ing strength in a testing machine of ca- tem. The webbing shall be passed over pacity verified to have an error of not the two new abrading edges of the hex- more than one percent in the range of agon bar (C) and the other end at- the breaking strength of the webbing tached to an oscillating drum (D) in accordance with American Society which has a stroke of 330 mm. Suitable for Testing and Materials E4–79 guides shall be used to prevent move- ‘‘Standard Methods of Load ment of the webbing along the axis of Verification of Testing Machines.’’ The hexagonal bar C. Drum D shall be oscil- machine shall be equipped with split lated for 5,000 strokes or 2,500 cycles at drum grips illustrated in Figure 1, hav- a rate of 60 ±2 strokes per minute or 30 ing a diameter between 51 and 102 mm. ±1 cycles per minute. The abraded web- The rate of grip separation shall be be- bing shall be conditioned as prescribed tween 51 and 102 mm per minute. The in paragraph (a) of this section and distance between the centers of the tested for breaking strength by the grips at the start of the test shall be procedure described in paragraph (b) of between 102 and 254 mm. After placing this section. The median values for the the specimen in the grips, the webbing breaking strengths determined on ab- shall be stretched continuously at a raded and unabraded specimens shall uniform rate to failure. Each value be used to calculate the percentage of shall be not less than the applicable breaking strength retained. breaking strength requirement in (e) Resistance to light. Webbing at S4.2(b), but the median value shall be least 508 mm in length from three seat used for determining the retention of belt assemblies shall be suspended breaking strength in paragraphs (d), (e) vertically on the inside of the specimen and (f) of this section. track in a Type E carbon-arc light ex- (c) Elongation. Elongation shall be posure apparatus described in Standard measured during the breaking strength Practice for Generating Light-Expo- test described in paragraph (b) of this sure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) section by the following procedure: A With and Without Water for Exposure preload between 196 N and 245 N shall of Nonmetallic Materials, ASTM Des- be placed on the webbing mounted in ignation: G23 81, published by the the grips of the testing machine and American Society for Testing and Ma- the needle points of an extensometer, terials, except that the filter used for in which the points remain parallel 100 percent polyester yarns shall be during test, are inserted in the center chemically strengthened soda-lime of the specimen. Initially the points glass with a transmittance of less than shall be set at a known distance apart 5 percent for wave lengths equal to or between 102 and 203 mm. When the less than 305 nanometers and 90 percent force on the webbing reaches the value or greater transmittance for wave specified in S4.2(c), the increase in sep- lengths of 375 to 800 nanometers. The aration of the points of the exten- apparatus shall be operated without someter shall be measured and the per- water spray at an air temperature of cent elongation shall be calculated to 60° ±2 °Celsius ( °C) measured at a point the nearest 0.5 percent. Each value 25 ±5 mm outside the specimen rack shall be not more than the appropriate and midway in height. The tempera- elongation requirement in S4.2(c). ture sensing element shall be shielded (d) Resistance to abrasion. The web- from radiation. The specimens shall be bing from three seat belt assemblies exposed to light from the carbon-arc

607

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00607 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.209 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

for 100 hours and then conditioned as followed by 1 hour drying. In the salt prescribed in paragraph (a) of this sec- spray test chamber, the parts from the tion. The colorfastness of the exposed three assemblies shall be oriented dif- and conditioned specimens shall be de- ferently, selecting those orientations termined on the Geometric Gray Scale most likely to develop corrosion on the issued by the American Association of larger areas. At the end of test, the Textile Chemists and Colorists. The seat belt assembly shall be washed breaking strength of the specimens thoroughly with water to remove the shall be determined by the procedure salt. After drying for at least 24 hours prescribed in paragraph (b) of this sec- under standard laboratory conditions tion. The median values for the break- specified in S5.1(a) attachment hard- ing strengths determined on exposed ware shall be examined for ferrous cor- and unexposed specimens shall be used rosion on significant surfaces, that is, to calculate the percentage of breaking all surfaces that can be contacted by a strength retained. sphere 19 mm in diameter, and other (f) Resistance to micro-organisms. Web- hardware shall be examined for ferrous bing at least 508 millimeters (mm) in and nonferrous corrosion which may be length from three seat belt assemblies transferred, either directly or by shall first be preconditioned in accord- means of the webbing, to a person or ance with Appendix A(1) and (2) of his clothing during use of a seat belt American Association of Textile Chem- assembly incorporating the hardware. ists and Colorists Test Method 381, NOTE: When attachment and other hard- ‘‘Fungicides Evaluation on Textiles; ware are permanently fastened, by sewing or Mildew and Rot Resistance of Tex- other means, to the same piece of webbing, tiles,’’ and then subjected to Test I, separate assemblies shall be used to test the ‘‘Soil Burial Test’’ of that test method. two types of hardware. The test for corrosion After soil-burial for a period of 2 resistance shall not be required for attach- weeks, the specimen shall be washed in ment hardware made from corrosion-resist- water, dried and conditioned as pre- ant steel containing at least 11.5 percent chromium or for attachment hardware pro- scribed in paragraph (a) of this section. tected with an electrodeposited coating of The breaking strengths of the speci- nickel, or copper and nickel, as prescribed in mens shall be determined by the proce- S4.3(a). The assembly that has been used to dure prescribed in paragraph (b) of this test the corrosion resistance of the buckle section. The median values for the shall be used to measure adjustment force, breaking strengths determined on ex- tilt-lock adjustment, and buckle latch in posed and unexposed specimens shall be paragraphs (e), (f), and (g), respectively, of used to calculate the percentage of this section, assembly performance in S5.3 breaking strength retained. and buckle release force in paragraph (d) of this section. NOTE: This test shall not be required on (b) Temperature resistance. Three seat webbing made from material which is inher- belt assemblies having plastic or non- ently resistant to micro-organisms. metallic hardware or having retractors S5.2 Hardware. shall be subjected to the conditions (a) Corrosion resistance. Three seat prescribed in Procedure D of American belt assemblies shall be tested in ac- Society for Testing and Materials cordance with American Society for D756–78, ‘‘Standard Practice for Deter- Testing and Materials B11773, ‘‘Stand- mination of Weight and Shape Changes ard Method of Salt Spray (Fog) Test- of Plastics under Accelerated Service ing.’’ Any surface coating or material Conditions.’’ The dimension and weight not intended for permanent retention measurement shall be omitted. Buckles on the metal parts during service life shall be unlatched and retractors shall shall be removed prior to preparation be fully retracted during conditioning. of the test specimens for testing. The The hardware parts after conditioning period of test shall be 50 hours for all shall be used for all applicable tests in attachment hardware at or near the S4.3 and S4.4. floor, consisting of two periods of 24 (c) Attachment hardware. (1) Attach- hours exposure to salt spray followed ment bolts used to secure the pelvic re- by 1 hour drying and 25 hours for all straint of a seat belt assembly to a other hardware, consisting of one pe- motor vehicle shall be tested in a man- riod of 24 hours exposure to salt spray ner similar to that shown in Figure 3.

608

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00608 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.209

The load shall be applied at an angle of sembly being tested, the force shall be 45° to the axis of the bolt through at- reduced and maintained at 667 N on the tachment hardware from the seat belt assembly loop of a Type 1 seat belt as- assembly, or through a special fixture sembly, 334 N on the components of a which simulates the loading applied by Type 2 seat belt assembly. The buckle the attachment hardware. The attach- release force shall be measured by ap- ment hardware or simulated fixture plying a force on the buckle in a man- shall be fastened by the bolt to the an- ner and direction typical of those chorage shown in Figure 3, which has a which would be employed by a seat belt standard 7⁄16–20UNF–2B or 1⁄2-UNF–2B or occupant. For push button-release metric equivalent threaded hole in a buckles, the force shall be applied at hardened steel plate at least 10 mm in least 3 mm from the edge of the push thickness. The bolt shall be installed button access opening of the buckle in with two full threads exposed from the a direction that produces maximum re- fully seated position. The appropriate leasing effect. For lever-release buck- force required by S4.3(c) shall be ap- les, the force shall be applied on the plied. A bolt from each of three seat centerline of the buckle lever or finger belt assemblies shall be tested. tab in a direction that produces max- (2) Attachment hardware, other than imum releasing effect. bolts, designed to receive the ends of (2) The area for application of release two seat belt assemblies shall be sub- force on pushbutton actuated buckle jected to a tensile force of 26,689 N in a shall be measured to the nearest 30 manner simulating use. The hardware mm2. The cylinder specified in S4.3(d) shall be examined for fracture after the shall be inserted in the actuation por- force is released. Attachment hardware tion of a lever released buckle for de- from three seat belt assemblies shall be termination of compliance with the re- tested. quirement. A buckle with other release (3) Single attachment hook for con- actuation shall be examined for access necting webbing to any eye bolt shall of release by fingers. be tested in the following manner: The (3) The buckle of a Type 1 or Type 2 hook shall be held rigidly so that the seat belt assembly shall be subjected to retainer latch or keeper, with cotter a compressive force of 1779 N applied pin or other locking device in place, is anywhere on a test line that is coinci- in a horizontal position as shown in dent with the center line of the belt ex- Figure 4. A force of 667 N ±9 N shall be tended through the buckle or on any applied vertically as near as possible to line that extends over the center of the the free end of the retainer latch, and release mechanism and intersects the the movement of the latch by this extended centerline of the belt at an force at the point of application shall angle of 60°. The load shall be applied be measured. The vertical force shall by using a curved cylindrical bar hav- be released, and a force of 667 N ±9 N ing a cross section diameter of 19 mm shall be applied horizontally as near as and a radius of curvature of 152 mm, possible to the free end of the retainer placed with its longitudinal center line latch. The movement of the latch by along the test line and its center di- this force at the point of load applica- rectly above the point or the buckle to tion shall be measured. Alternatively, which the load will be applied. The the hook may be held in other posi- buckle shall be latched, and a tensile tions, provided the forces are applied force of 334 N shall be applied to the and the movements of the latch are connected webbing during the applica- measured at the points indicated in tion of the compressive force. Buckles Figure 4. A single attachment hook from three seat belt assemblies shall be from each of three seat belt assemblies tested to determine compliance with shall be tested. paragraph S4.3(d)(3). (d) Buckle release. (1) Three seat belt (e) Adjustment Force. Three seat belt assemblies shall be tested to determine assemblies shall be tested for adjust- compliance with the maximum buckle ment force on the webbing at the buck- release force requirements, following le, or other manual adjusting device the assembly test in S5.3. After subjec- normally used to adjust the size of the tion to the force applicable for the as- assembly. With no load on the anchor

609

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00609 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.209 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

end, the webbing shall be drawn sion and retraction of the webbing, the through the adjusting device at a rate retractor and webbing shall be sus- of 508 mm ±50 mm per minute and the pended vertically and a force of 18 N maximum force shall be measured to shall be applied to extend the webbing the nearest 1 N after the first 25 mm of from the retractor. The force shall be webbing movement. The webbing shall reduced to 13 N when attached to a pel- be precycled 10 times prior to measure- vic restraint, or to 5 N per strap or ment. webbing that contacts the shoulder of (f) Tilt-lock adjustment. This test shall an occupant when retractor is attached be made on buckles or other manual to an upper torso restraint. The resid- adjusting devices having tilt-lock ad- ual extension of the webbing shall be justment normally used to adjust the measured by manual rotation of the re- size of the assembly. Three buckles or tractor drum or by disengaging the re- devices shall be tested. The base of the traction mechanism. Measurements adjustment mechanism and the anchor shall be made on three retractors. The end of the webbing shall be oriented in location of the retractor attached to planes normal to each other. The web- upper torso restraint shall be examined bing shall be drawn through the adjust- for visibility of reel during use of seat ment mechanism in a direction to in- belt assembly in a vehicle. crease belt length at a rate of 508 mm ±50 mm per minute while the plane of NOTE: This test shall not be required on a the base is slowly rotated in a direc- nonlocking retractor attached to the free tion to lock the webbing. Rotation end of webbing which is not subjected to any tension during restraint of an occupant by shall be stopped when the webbing the assembly. locks, but the pull on the webbing shall be continued until there is a resistance (i) Automatic-locking retractor. Three of at least 89 N. The locking angle be- retractors shall be tested in a manner tween the anchor end of the webbing to permit the retraction force to be de- and the base of the adjustment mecha- termined exclusive of the gravitational nism shall be measured to the nearest forces on hardware or webbing being degree. The webbing shall be precycled retracted. The webbing shall be fully 10 times prior to measurement. extended from the retractor. While the (g) Buckle latch. The buckles from webbing is being retracted, the average three seat belt assemblies shall be force or retraction within plus or opened fully and closed at least 10 minus 51 mm of 75 percent extension times. Then the buckles shall be (25 percent retraction) shall be deter- clamped or firmly held against a flat mined and the webbing movement be- surface so as to permit normal move- tween adjacent locking segments shall ment of buckle part, but with the be measured in the same region of ex- metal mating plate (metal-to-metal tension. A seat belt assembly with buckles) or of webbing end (metal-to- automatic locking retractor in upper webbing buckles) withdrawn from the torso restraint shall be tested in a ve- buckle. The release mechanism shall be hicle in a manner prescribed by the in- moved 200 times through the maximum stallation and usage instructions. The possible travel against its stop with a retraction force on the occupant of the force of 133 N ±13 N at a rate not to ex- seat belt assembly shall be determined ceed 30 cycles per minute. The buckle before and after traveling for 10 min- shall be examined to determine compli- utes at a speed of 24 kilometers per ance with the performance require- hour (km/h) or more over a rough road ments of S4.3(g). A metal-to-metal (e.g., Belgian block road) where the oc- buckle shall be examined to determine cupant is subjected to displacement whether partial engagement is possible with respect to the vehicle in both hor- by means of any technique representa- izontal and vertical directions. Meas- tive of actual use. If partial engage- urements shall be made with the vehi- ment is possible, the maximum force of cle stopped and the occupant in the separation when in such partial en- normal seated position. gagement shall be determined. (j) Emergency-locking retractor. A re- (h) Nonlocking retractor. After the re- tractor shall be tested in a manner tractor is cycled 10 times by full exten- that permits the retraction force to be

610

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00610 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.209

determined exclusive of the gravita- assembly incorporating the retractor, tional forces on hardware or webbing and for ferrous corrosion on significant being retracted. The webbing shall be surfaces if the retractor is part of the fully extended from the retractor, pass- attachment hardware. The webbing ing over or through any hardware or shall be withdrawn manually and al- other material specified in the installa- lowed to retract for 25 cycles. The re- tion instructions. While the webbing is tractor shall be mounted in an appa- being retracted, the lowest force of re- ratus capable of extending the webbing traction within plus or minus 51 mm of fully, applying a force of 89 N at full 75 percent extension shall be deter- extension, and allowing the webbing to mined. A retractor that is sensitive to retract freely and completely. The webbing withdrawal shall be subjected webbing shall be withdrawn from the to an acceleration of 3 m/s2 (0.3 g) with- retractor and allowed to retract re- in a period of 50 milliseconds (ms) peatedly in this apparatus until 2,500 while the webbing is at 75 percent ex- cycles are completed. The retractor tension, to determine compliance with and webbing shall then be subjected to S4.3(j)(2). The retractor shall be sub- the temperature resistance test pre- jected to an acceleration of 7 m/s2 (0.7 scribed in paragraph (b) of this section. g) within a period of 50 milliseconds The retractor shall be subjected to (ms), while the webbing is at 75 percent 2,500 additional cycles of webbing with- extension, and the webbing movement drawal and retraction. Then, the re- before locking shall be measured under tractor and webbing shall be subjected the following conditions: For a retrac- to dust in a chamber similar to one il- tor sensitive to webbing withdrawal, lustrated in Figure 8 containing about the retractor shall be accelerated in 0.9 kg of coarse grade dust conforming the direction of webbing retraction to the specification given in Society of while the retractor drum’s central axis Automotive Engineering Rec- is oriented horizontally and at angles ommended Practice J726, ‘‘Air Cleaner of 45°, 90°, 135°, and 180° to the hori- Test Code’’ Sept. 1979. The dust shall be zontal plane. For a retractor sensitive agitated every 20 minutes for 5 seconds to vehicle acceleration, the retractor by compressed air, free of oil and mois- shall be: ture, at a gage pressure of 550 ±55 kPa (1) Accelerated in the horizontal entering through an orifice 1.5 ±0.1 mm plane in two directions normal to each in diameter. The webbing shall be ex- other, while the retractor drum’s cen- tended to the top of the chamber and tral axis is oriented at the angle at kept extended at all times except that which it is installed in the vehicle; and, the webbing shall be subjected to 10 cy- (2) Accelerated in three directions cles of complete retraction and exten- normal to each other while the retrac- sion within 1 to 2 minutes after each tor drum’s central axis is oriented at agitation of the dust. At the end of 5 angles of 45°, 90°, 135°, and 180° from the hours, the assembly shall be removed angle at which it is installed in the ve- from the chamber. The webbing shall hicle, unless the retractor locks by be fully withdrawn from the retractor gravitational force when tilted in any manually and allowed to retract com- direction to any angle greater than 45° pletely for 25 cycles. An automatic- from the angle at which it is installed locking retractor or a nonlocking re- in the vehicle. tractor attached to pelvic restraint (k) Performance of retractor. After shall be subjected to 5,000 additional completion of the corrosion-resistance cycles of webbing withdrawal and re- test described in paragraph (a) of this traction. An emergency locking retrac- section, the webbing shall be fully ex- tor or a nonlocking retractor attached tended and allowed to dry for at least to upper torso restraint shall be sub- 24 hours under standard laboratory jected to 45,000 additional cycles of conditions specified in S5.1(a). The re- webbing withdrawal and retraction be- tractor shall be examined for ferrous tween 50 and 100 per cent extension. and nonferrous corrosion which may be The locking mechanism of an emer- transferred, either directly or by gency locking retractor shall be actu- means of the webbing, to a person or ated at least 10,000 times within 50 to his clothing during use of a seat belt 100 percent extension of webbing during

611

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00611 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.209 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

the 50,000 cycles. At the end of test, hardware connected to the webbing. If compliance of the retractors with ap- necessary, a washer shall be used under plicable requirements in S4.3 (h), (i), a swivel plate or other attachment and (j) shall be determined. Three re- hardware to prevent the webbing from tractors shall be tested for perform- being damaged as the attaching bolt is ance. tightened. S5.3 Assembly performance—(a) Type (3) The length of the assembly loop 1 seat belt assembly. Three complete seat from attaching bolt to attaching bolt belt assemblies, including webbing, shall be adjusted to about 1295 mm, or straps, buckles, adjustment and at- as near thereto as possible. A force of tachment hardware, and retractors, ar- 245 N shall be applied to the loop to re- ranged in the form of a loop as shown move any slack in webbing at hard- in Figure 5, shall be tested in the fol- ware. The force shall be removed and lowing manner: the heads of the testing machine shall (1) The testing machine shall con- be adjusted for an assembly loop be- form to the requirements specified in S5.1(b). A double-roller block shall be tween 1220 and 1270 mm in length. The attached to one head of the testing ma- length of the assembly loop shall then chine. This block shall consist of two be adjusted by applying a force be- rollers 102 mm in diameter and suffi- tween 89 and 98 N to the free end of the ciently long so that no part of the seat webbing at the buckle, or by the re- belt assembly touches parts of the traction force of an automatic-locking block other than the rollers during or emergency-locking retractor. A seat test. The rollers shall be mounted on belt assembly that cannot be adjusted antifriction bearings and spaced 305 to this length shall be adjusted as mm between centers, and shall have closely as possible. An automatic-lock- sufficient capacity so that there is no ing or emergency locking retractor brinelling, bending or other distortion when included in a seat belt assembly of parts which may affect the results. shall be locked at the start of the test An anchorage bar shall be fastened to with a tension on the webbing slightly the other head of the testing machine. in excess of the retractive force in (2) The attachment hardware fur- order to keep the retractor locked. The nished with the seat belt assembly buckle shall be in a location so that it shall be attached to the anchorage bar. does not touch the rollers during test, The anchor points shall be spaced so but to facilitate making the buckle re- that the webbing is parallel in the two lease test in S5.2(d) the buckle should sides of the loop. The attaching bolts be between the rollers or near a roller shall be parallel to, or at an angle of in one leg. ° ° 45 or 90 to the webbing, whichever re- (4) The heads of the testing machine ° sults in an angle nearest to 90 between shall be separated at a rate between 51 webbing and attachment hardware ex- and 102 mm per minute until a force of cept that eye bolts shall be vertical, 22,241 ±222 N is applied to the assembly and attaching bolts or nonthreaded an- loop. The extension of the loop shall be chorages of a seat belt assembly de- determined from measurements of head signed for use in specific models of separation before and after the force is motor vehicles shall be installed to produce the maximum angle in use in- applied. The force shall be decreased to ± dicated by the installation instruc- 667 45 N and the buckle release force tions, utilizing special fixtures if nec- measured as prescribed in S5.2(d). essary to simulate installation in the (5) After the buckle is released, the motor vehicle. Rigid adapters between webbing shall be examined for cutting anchorage bar and attachment hard- by the hardware. If the yarns are par- ware shall be used if necessary to lo- tially or completely severed in a line cate and orient the adjustment hard- for a distance of 10 percent or more of ware. The adapters shall have a flat the webbing width, the cut webbing support face perpendicular to the shall be tested for breaking strength as threaded hole for the attaching bolt specified in S5.1(b) locating the cut in and adequate in area to provide full the free length between grips. If there support for the base of the attachment is insufficient webbing on either side of

612

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00612 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.209

the cut to make such a test for break- and the buckle release force measured ing strength, another seat belt assem- as prescribed in S5.2(d). bly shall be used with the webbing (3) Any component of the seat belt repositioned in the hardware. A tensile assembly common to both pelvic and force of 11,120 ±111 N shall be applied to upper torso restraint shall be subjected the components or a force of 22,241 ±222 to a tensile force of 13,344 ±134 N. N shall be applied to the assembly loop. (4) After the buckle is released in After the force is removed, the break- tests of pelvic and upper torso re- ing strength of the cut webbing shall straints, the webbing shall be examined be determined as prescribed above. for cutting by the hardware. If the (6) If a Type 1 seat belt assembly in- yarns are partially or completely sev- cludes an automatic-locking retractor ered in a line for a distance of 10 per- or an emergency-locking retractor, the cent or more of the webbing width, the webbing and retractor shall be sub- cut webbing shall be tested for break- jected to a tensile force of 11,120 ±111 N ing strength as specified in S5.1(b) lo- with the webbing fully extended from cating the cut in the free length be- the retractor. tween grips. If there is insufficient (7) If a seat belt assembly has a buck- webbing on either side of the cut to le in which the tongue is capable of in- make such a test for breaking verted insertion, one of the three as- strength, another seat belt assembly semblies shall be tested with the shall be used with the webbing reposi- tongue inverted. tioned in the hardware. The force ap- (b) Type 2 seat belt assembly. Compo- plied shall be 11,120 ±111 N for compo- nents of three seat belt assemblies nents of pelvic restraint, and 6,672 ±67 shall be tested in the following man- N for components of upper torso re- ner: straint. After the force is removed, the (1) The pelvic restraint between an- breaking strength of the cut webbing chorages shall be adjusted to a length shall be determined as prescribed between 1220 and 1270 mm, or as near above. this length as possible if the design of (5) If a Type 2 seat belt assembly in- the pelvic restraint does not permit its cludes an automatic-locking retractor adjustment to this length. An auto- or an emergency-locking retractor the matic-locking or emergency-locking webbing and retractor shall be sub- retractor when included in a seat belt jected to a tensile force of 11,120 ±111 N assembly shall be locked at the start of with the webbing fully extended from the test with a tension on the webbing the retractor, or to a tensile force of slightly in excess of the retractive 6,672 ±67 N with the webbing fully ex- force in order to keep the retractor tended from the retractor if the design locked. The attachment hardware shall of the assembly permits only upper be oriented to the webbing as specified torso restraint forces on the retractor. in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and (6) If a seat belt assembly has a buck- illustrated in Figure 5. A tensile force le in which the tongue is capable of in- 11,120 ±111 N shall be applied on the verted insertion, one of the three as- components in any convenient manner semblies shall be tested with the and the extension between anchorages tongue inverted. under this force shall be measured. The (c) Resistance to buckle abrasion. Seat force shall be reduced to 334 ±22 N and belt assemblies shall be tested for re- the buckle release force measured as sistance to abrasion by each buckle or prescribed in S5.2(d). manual adjusting device normally used (2) The components of the upper to adjust the size of the assembly. The torso restraint shall be subjected to a webbing of the assembly to be used in tensile force of 6,672 ±67 N following the this test shall be exposed for 4 hours to procedure prescribed above for testing an atmosphere having relative humid- pelvic restraint and the extension be- ity of 65 per cent and temperature of 18 tween anchorages under this force shall °C. The webbing shall be pulled back be measured. If the testing apparatus and forth through the buckle or man- permits, the pelvic and upper torso re- ual adjusting device as shown sche- straints may be tested simultaneously. matically in Figure 7. The anchor end The force shall be reduced to 334 ±22 N of the webbing (A) shall be attached to

613

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00613 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.209 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

a mass (B) of 1.4 kg. The webbing shall operated for 2,500 cycles at a rate of 18 pass through the buckle (C), and the cycles per minute with a stroke length other end (D) shall be attached to a re- of 203 mm. The abraded webbing shall ciprocating device so that the webbing be tested for breaking strength by the forms an angle of 8° with the hinge stop procedure described in paragraph (E). The reciprocating device shall be S5.1(b).

614

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00614 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.209

615

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00615 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.090 § 571.209 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

616

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00616 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.091 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.209

617

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00617 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.092 § 571.210 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

[44 FR 72139, Dec. 13, 1979, as amended at 45 FR 29048, May 1, 1980; 46 FR 2620, Jan. 12, 1981; 48 FR 30140, June 30, 1983; 49 FR 36508, Sept. 18, 1984; 51 FR 9813, Mar. 21, 1986; 51 FR 31774, Sept. 5, 1986; 52 FR 44912, Nov. 23, 1987; 56 FR 15299, Apr. 16, 1991; 56 FR 56325, Nov. 4, 1991; 59 FR 17994, Apr. 15, 1994; 61 FR 20171, May 6, 1996; 63 FR 28936, May 27, 1998; 63 FR 51003, Sept. 24, 1998; 64 FR 27206, May 19, 1999]

§ 571.210 Standard No. 210; Seat belt a Type 2 seat belt assembly is required assembly anchorages. by Standard No. 208 (49 CFR 571.208). S1. Purpose and scope. This standard Seat belt anchorages for a Type 2 seat establishes requirements for seat belt belt assembly shall be installed for assembly anchorages to insure their each designated seating position for proper location for effective occupant which a Type 2 seat belt assembly is re- restraint and to reduce the likelihood quired by Standard No. 208 (49 CFR of their failure. 571.208). S2. Application. This standard applies S4.1.2 (a) Notwithstanding the re- to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- quirement of S4.1.1, each vehicle manu- senger vehicles, trucks, and buses. factured on or after September 1, 1987 S3. Definition. Seat belt anchorage that is equipped with an automatic re- means any component, other than the straint at the front right outboard des- webbing or straps, involved in transfer- ignated seating position, which auto- ring seat belt loads to the vehicle matic restraint cannot be used for se- structure, including, but not limited curing a child restraint system or can- to, the attachment hardware, seat not be adjusted by the vehicle owner to frames, seat pedestals, the vehicle secure a child restraint system solely structure itself, and any part of the ve- through the use of attachment hard- hicle whose failure causes separation of ware installed as an item of original the belt from the vehicle structure. equipment by the vehicle manufac- S4. Requirements. turer, shall have, at the manufactur- S4.1 Type. er’s option, either anchorages for a S4.1.1 Seat belt anchorages for a Type 1 seat belt assembly installed Type 1 or a Type 2 seat belt assembly at that position or a Type 1 or Type 2 shall be installed for each designated seating position for which a Type 1 or

618

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00618 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.093 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.210

seat belt assembly installed at that po- be tested by simultaneously loading sition. If a manufacturer elects to in- them in accordance with the applicable stall anchorages for a Type 1 seat belt procedures set forth in S5 of this stand- assembly to comply with this require- ard if the anchorages are either: ment, those anchorages shall consist (a) For designated seating positions of, at a minimum, holes threaded to ac- that are common to the same occupant cept bolts that comply with S4.1(f) of seat and that face in the same direc- Standard No. 209 (49 CFR 571.209). tion, or (b) The requirement in S4.1.1 of this (b) For laterally adjacent designated standard that seat belt anchorages for seating positions that are not common a Type 1 or a Type 2 seat belt assembly to the same occupant seat, but that shall be installed for certain des- face in the same direction, if the ignated seating positions does not vertical centerline of the bolt hole for apply to any such seating positions at least one of the anchorages for one that are equipped with a seat belt as- of those designated seating positions is sembly that meets the frontal crash within 305 mm of the vertical center protection requirements of S5.1 of line of the bolt hole for an anchorage Standard No. 208 (49 CFR 571.208). for one of the adjacent seating posi- S4.2 Strength. tions. S4.2.1 Except as provided in S4.2.5, S4.2.5 The attachment hardware of a and except for side-facing seats, the an- seat belt assembly, which is subject to chorages, attachment hardware, and the requirements of S5.1 of Standard attachment bolts for any of the fol- No. 208 (49 CFR 571.208) by virtue of any lowing seat belt assemblies shall with- provision of Standard No. 208 other stand a 5,000 pound force when tested in than S4.1.2.1(c)(2) of that standard, accordance with S5.1 of this standard: does not have to meet the require- (a) Type 1 seat belt assembly; and ments of S4.2.1 and S4.2.2 of this stand- (b) Lap belt portion of either a Type ard. 2 or automatic seat belt assembly, if S4.3 Location. As used in this section, such seat belt assembly is equipped ‘‘forward’’ means the direction in which with a detachable upper torso belt. the seat faces, and other directional S4.2.2 Except as provided in S4.2.5, references are to be interpreted accord- and except for side facing seats, the an- ingly. Anchorages for seat belt assem- chorages, attachment hardware, and blies that meet the frontal crash pro- attachment bolts for any of the fol- tection requirements of S5.1 of Stand- lowing seat belt assemblies shall with- ard No. 208 (49 CFR 571.208) are exempt stand a 3,000 pound force applied to the from the location requirements of this lap belt portion of the seat belt assem- section. bly simultaneously with a 3,000 pound S4.3.1 Seat belt anchorages for Type 1 force applied to the shoulder belt por- seat belt assemblies and the pelvic portion tion of the seat belt assembly, when of Type 2 seat belt assemblies. tested in accordance with S5.2 of this S4.3.1.1 In an installation in which standard: the seat belt does not bear upon the (a) Type 2 and automatic seat belt as- seat frame: semblies that are installed to comply (a) If the seat is a nonadjustable seat, with Standard No. 208 (49 CFR 571.208); then a line from the seating reference and point to the nearest contact point of (b) Type 2 and automatic seat belt as- the belt with the anchorage shall ex- semblies that are installed at a seating tend forward from the anchorage at an position required to have a Type 1 or angle with the horizontal of not less Type 2 seat belt assembly by Standard than 30 degrees and not more than 75 No. 208 (49 CFR 571.208). degrees. S4.2.3 Permanent deformation or (b) If the seat is an adjustable seat, rupture of a seat belt anchorage or its then a line from a point 64 mm forward surrounding area is not considered to of and 10 mm above the seating ref- be a failure, if the required force is sus- erence point to the nearest contact tained for the specified time. point of the belt with the anchorage S4.2.4 Anchorages, attachment shall extend forward from the anchor- hardware, and attachment bolts shall age at an angle with the horizontal of

619

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00619 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.210 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

not less than 30 degrees and not more means of attachment to the vehicle than 75 degrees. structure, at the centroid of such S4.3.1.2 In an installation in which means. the belt bears upon the seat frame, the (b) For adjustable anchorages, com- seat belt anchorage, if not on the seat pliance with this section shall be deter- structure, shall be aft of the rearmost mined at the midpoint of the range of belt contact point on the seat frame all adjustment positions. with the seat in the rearmost position. S5. Test procedures. Each vehicle shall The line from the seating reference meet the requirements of S4.2 of this point to the nearest belt contact point standard when tested according to the on the seat frame, with the seat posi- following procedures. Where a range of tioned at the seating reference point, values is specified, the vehicle shall be shall extend forward from that contact able to meet the requirements at all point at an angle with the horizontal of points within the range. For the test- not less than 30 degrees and not more ing specified in these procedures, the than 75 degrees. anchorage shall be connected to mate- S4.3.1.3 In an installation in which rial whose breaking strength is equal the seat belt attaches to the seat struc- to or greater than the breaking ture, the line from the seating ref- strength of the webbing for the seat erence point to the nearest contact belt assembly installed as original point of the belt with the hardware at- equipment at that seating position. taching it to the seat structure shall The geometry of the attachment dupli- extend forward from that contact point cates the geometry, at the initiation of at an angle with the horizontal of not the test, of the attachment of the less than 30 degrees and not more than originally installed seat belt assembly. 75 degrees. S5.1 Seats with Type 1 or Type 2 seat S4.3.1.4 Anchorages for an indi- belt anchorages. With the seat in its vidual seat belt assembly shall be lo- rearmost position, apply a force of cated at least 165 mm apart laterally, 22,241 N in the direction in which the measured between the vertical center seat faces to a pelvic body block as de- line of the bolt holes or, for designs scribed in Figure 2A, in a plane parallel using other means of attachment to to the longitudinal centerline of the the vehicle structure, between the cen- vehicle, with an initial force applica- troid of such means. tion angle of not less than 5 degrees or S4.3.2 Seat belt anchorages for the more than 15 degrees above the hori- upper torso portion of Type 2 seat belt as- zontal. Apply the force at the onset semblies. Adjust the seat to its full rear- rate of not more than 222,411 N per sec- ward and downward position and adjust ond. Attain the 22,241 N force in not the seat back to its most upright posi- more than 30 seconds and maintain it tion. With the seat and seat back so po- for 10 seconds. At the manufacturer’s sitioned, as specified by subsection (a) option, the pelvic body block described or (b) of this section, the upper end of in Figure 2B may be substituted for the the upper torso restraint shall be lo- pelvic body block described in Figure cated within the acceptable range 2A to apply the specified force to the shown in Figure 1, with reference to a center set(s) of anchorages for any two-dimensional drafting template de- group of three or more sets of anchor- scribed in SAE Recommended Practice ages that are simultaneously loaded in J826 (May 1987). The template’s ‘‘H’’ accordance with S4.2.4 of this standard. point shall be at the design ‘‘H’’ point of S5.2 Seats with Type 2 or automatic the seat for its full rearward and full seat belt anchorages. With the seat in its downward position, as defined in SAE rearmost position, apply forces of 13,345 Recommended Practice J1100 (June N in the direction in which the seat 1984), and the template’s torso line faces simultaneously to a pelvic body shall be at the same angle from the block, as described in Figure 2A, and vertical as the seat back. an upper torso body block, as described (a) For fixed anchorages, compliance in Figure 3, in a plane parallel to the with this section shall be determined longitudinal centerline of the vehicle, at the vertical centerline of the bolt with an initial force application angle holes or, for designs using another of not less than 5 degrees nor more

620

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00620 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.210

than 15 degrees above the horizontal. ure 2B may be substituted for the pel- Apply the forces at the onset rate of vic body block described in Figure 2A not more than 133,447 N per second. At- to apply the specified force to the cen- tain the 13,345 N force in not more than ter set(s) of anchorages for any group 30 seconds and maintain it for 10 sec- of three or more sets of anchorages onds. At the manufacturer’s option, that are simultaneously loaded in ac- the pelvic body block described in Fig- cordance with S4.2.4 of this standard.

621

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00621 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.210 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

622

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00622 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.094 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.210

623

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00623 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.004 ER27MY98.005 § 571.211 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S6. Owner’s Manual Information. The § 571.211 [Reserved] owner’s manual in each vehicle with a gross vehicle weight rating of 4,536 kg § 571.212 Standard No. 212; Windshield or less manufactured after September mounting. 1, 1987 shall include: S1. Scope. This standard establishes (a) A section explaining that all child windshield retention requirements for restraint systems are designed to be se- motor vehicles during crashes. cured in vehicle seats by lap belts or S2. Purpose. The purpose of this the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder standard is to reduce crash injuries and belt. The section shall also explain fatalities by providing for retention of that children could be endangered in a the vehicle windshield during a crash, crash if their child restraints are not thereby utilizing fully the penetration- properly secured in the vehicle. resistance and injury-avoidance prop- (b) In a vehicle with rear designated erties of the windshield glazing mate- rial and preventing the ejection of oc- seating positions, a statement alerting cupants from the vehicle. vehicle owners that, according to acci- S3. Application. This standard applies dent statistics, children are safer when to passenger cars, and to multipurpose properly restrained in the rear seating passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses positions than in the front seating po- having a gross vehicle weight rating of sitions. 4536 kilograms or less. However, it does [36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 37 not apply to forward control vehicles, FR 9323, May 9, 1972; 43 FR 21892, May 22, walk-in van-type vehicles, or to open- 1978; 43 FR 53442, Nov. 16, 1978; 50 FR 41359, body type vehicles with fold-down or Oct. 10, 1985; 51 FR 9813, Mar. 21, 1986; 51 FR removable windshields. 29555, Aug. 19, 1986; 54 FR 25278, June 14, 1989; S4. Definition. Passive restraint system 54 FR 46268, Nov. 2, 1989; 55 FR 17983, Apr. 30, means a system meeting the occupant 1990; 55 FR 24241, June 15, 1990; 56 FR 63681, crash protection requirements of S5. of 63685, Dec. 5, 1991; 57 FR 32904, July 24, 1992; Standard No. 208 by means that require 60 FR 3775, Jan. 19, 1995; 61 FR 19561, May 2, no action by vehicle occupants. 1996; 63 FR 28941, 28942, May 27, 1998; 63 FR S5. Requirements. When the vehicle 32143, June 12, 1998] travelling longitudinally forward at any speed up to and including 48 kilo- meters per hour impacts a fixed colli- sion barrier that is perpendicular to the line of travel of the vehicle, under the conditions of S6, the windshield

624

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00624 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.006 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

mounting of the vehicle shall retain that axle remains the same. For the not less than the minimum portion of purposes of this section, unloaded vehi- the windshield periphery specified in cle weight does not include the weight S5.1 and S5.2. of work-performing accessories. Vehi- S5.1 Vehicles equipped with passive re- cles are tested to a maximum unloaded straints. Vehicles equipped with passive vehicle weight of 2,495 kilograms. restraint systems shall retain not less S6.2 The fuel tank is filled to any than 50 percent of the portion of the level from 90 to 95 percent of capacity. windshield periphery on each side of S6.3 The parking brake is dis- the vehicle longitudinal centerline. engaged and the transmission is in neu- S5.2 Vehicles not equipped with pas- tral. sive restraints. Vehicles not equipped S6.4 Tires are inflated to the vehicle with passive restraint systems shall re- manufacturer’s specifications. tain not less than 75 percent of the S6.5 The windshield mounting mate- windshield periphery. S6. Test conditions. The requirements rial and all vehicle components in di- of S5. shall be met under the following rect contact with the mounting mate- conditions: rial are at any temperature between ¥ S6.1 The vehicle, including test de- 9 degrees Celsius and +43 degrees Cel- vices and instrumentation, is loaded as sius. follows: [41 FR 36494, Aug. 30, 1976, as amended at 42 (a) Except as specified in S6.2, a pas- FR 34289, July 5, 1977; 45 FR 22046, Apr. 3, senger car is loaded to its unloaded ve- 1980; 60 FR 13647, Mar. 14, 1995] hicle weight plus its cargo and luggage capacity weight, secured in the luggage § 571.213 Standard No. 213; Child re- area, plus a 50th-percentile test dummy straint systems. as specified in part 572 of this chapter S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- at each front outboard designated seat- quirements for child restraint systems ing position and at any other position used in motor vehicles and aircraft. whose protection system is required to S2. Purpose. The purpose of this be tested by a dummy under the provi- standard is to reduce the number of sions of Standard No. 208. Each dummy children killed or injured in motor ve- is restrained only by means that are hicle crashes and in aircraft. installed for protection at its seating S3. Application. This standard applies position. to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- (b) Except as specified in S6.2, a mul- senger vehicles, trucks and buses, and tipurpose passenger vehicle, truck or to child restraint systems for use in bus is loaded to its unloaded vehicle motor vehicles and aircraft. weight, plus 136 kilograms or its rated S4. cargo and luggage capacity, whichever Definitions. is less, secured to the vehicle, plus a Add-on child restraint system means 50th-percentile test dummy as specified any portable child restraint system. in part 572 of this chapter at each front Backless child restraint system means a outboard designated seating position child restraint, other than a belt-posi- and at any other position whose pro- tioning seat, that consists of a seating tection system is required to be tested platform that does not extend up to by a dummy under the provisions of provide a cushion for the child’s back Standard No. 208. Each dummy is re- or head and has a structural element strained only by means that are in- designed to restrain forward motion of stalled for protection at its seating po- the child’s torso in a forward impact. sition. The load is distributed so that Belt-positioning seat means a child re- the weight on each axle as measured at straint system that positions a child the tire-ground interface is in propor- on a vehicle seat to improve the fit of tion to its GAWR. If the weight on any a vehicle Type II belt system on the axle when the vehicle is loaded to its child and that lacks any component, unloaded vehicle weight plus dummy such as a belt system or a structural weight exceeds the axle’s proportional element, designed to restrain forward share of the test weight, the remaining movement of the child’s torso in a for- weight is placed so that the weight on ward impact.

625

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00625 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Booster seat means either a backless complete surroundings of the built-in child restraint system or a belt-posi- system. If the built-in child restraint tioning seat. system is or is intended to be fab- Built-in child restraint system means a ricated as part of any seat other than a child restraint system that is designed front seat, these surroundings include to be an integral part of and perma- the back of the seat in front, the inte- nently installed in a motor vehicle. rior rear side door panels and trim, the Car bed means a child restraint sys- floor pan, adjacent pillars (e.g., the B tem designed to restrain or position a and C pillars), and the ceiling. If the child in the supine or prone position on built-in system is or is intended to be a continuous flat surface. fabricated as part of the front seat, Child restraint anchorage system is de- these surroundings include the dash- fined in S3 of FMVSS No. 225 (§ 571.225). board, the steering mechanism and its Child restraint system means any de- associated trim hardware, any levers vice, except Type I or Type II seat and knobs installed on the floor or on belts, designed for use in a motor vehi- a console, the interior front side door cle or aircraft to restrain, seat, or posi- panels and trim, the front seat, the tion children who weigh 30 kilograms floor pan, the A pillars and the ceiling. (kg) or less. Tether anchorage is defined in S3 of Contactable surface means any child FMVSS No. 225 (§ 571.225). restraint system surface (other than Tether strap is defined in S3 of that of a belt, belt buckle, or belt ad- FMVSS No. 225 (§ 571.225). justment hardware) that may contact Tether hook is defined in S3 of any part of the head or torso of the ap- FMVSS No. 225 (§ 571.225). propriate test dummy, specified in S7, Torso means the portion of the body when a child restraint system is tested of a seated anthropomorphic test in accordance with S6.1. dummy, excluding the thighs, that lies Factory-installed built-in child restraint between the top of the child restraint system means a built-in child restraint system seating surface and the top of system that has been or will be perma- the shoulders of the test dummy. nently installed in a motor vehicle be- S5. Requirements. (a) Each motor ve- fore that vehicle is certified as a com- hicle with a built-in child restraint pleted or altered vehicle in accordance system shall meet the requirements in with part 567 of this chapter. this section when, as specified, tested Harness means a combination pelvic in accordance with S6.1 and this para- and upper torso child restraint system graph. that consists primarily of flexible ma- (b) Each child restraint system man- terial, such as straps, webbing or simi- ufactured for use in motor vehicles lar material, and that does not include shall meet the requirements in this a rigid seating structure for the child. section when, as specified, tested in ac- Rear-facing child restraint system cordance with S6.1 and this paragraph. means a child restraint system, except Each add-on system shall meet the re- a car bed, that positions a child to face quirements at each of the restraint’s in the direction opposite to the normal seat back angle adjustment positions direction of travel of the motor vehi- and restraint belt routing positions, cle. when the restraint is oriented in the Representative aircraft passenger seat direction recommended by the manu- means either a Federal Aviation Ad- facturer (e.g., forward, rearward or lat- ministration approved production air- erally) pursuant to S5.6, and tested craft passenger seat or a simulated air- with the test dummy specified in S7. craft passenger seat conforming to Fig- (c) Each child restraint system man- ure 6. ufactured for use in aircraft shall meet Seat orientation reference line or SORL the requirements in this section and means the horizontal line through the additional requirements in S8. Point Z as illustrated in Figure 1A. (d) Each child restraint tested with a Specific vehicle shell means the actual part 572 subpart N dummy that is vehicle model part into which the weighted to weigh 28.2 kg need not built-in child restraint system is or is meet S5.1.2 and S5.1.3. intended to be fabricated, including the S5.1 Dynamic performance.

626

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00626 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

S5.1.1 Child restraint system integrity. shall not exceed 1,000, where a is the re- When tested in accordance with S6.1, sultant acceleration expressed as a each child restraint system shall meet multiple of g (the acceleration of grav- the requirements of paragraphs (a) ity), and t1 and t2 are any two moments through (c) of this section. during the impacts. (a) Exhibit no complete separation of (b) Limit the resultant acceleration any load bearing structural element at the location of the accelerometer and no partial separation exposing ei- mounted in the test dummy upper tho- ther surfaces with a radius of less than rax as specified in part 572 to not more 1⁄4 inch or surfaces with protrusions than 60 g’s, except for intervals whose greater than 3⁄8 inch above the imme- cumulative duration is not more than 3 diate adjacent surrounding contactable milliseconds. surface of any structural element of S5.1.2.1 When tested in accordance the system. with S6.1 and with the test dummies (b)(1) If adjustable to different posi- specified in S7, each child restraint tions, remain in the same adjustment system manufactured on or after Au- position during the testing that it was gust 1, 2005 shall’ (a) Limit the resultant acceleration in immediately before the testing, ex- at the location of the accelerometer cept as otherwise specified in para- mounted in the test dummy head such graph (b)(2). that, for any two points in time, t1 and (2)(i) Subject to paragraph (b)(2)(ii), a t2, during the event which are sepa- rear-facing child restraint system may rated by not more than a 36 milli- have a means for repositioning the second time interval and where t1 is seating surface of the system that al- less than t2, the maximum calculated lows the system’s occupant to move head injury criterion (HIC36) shall not from a reclined position to an upright exceed 1,000, determined using the re- position and back to a reclined position sultant head acceleration at the center during testing. of gravity of the dummy head, ar, ex- (ii) No opening that is exposed and is pressed as a multiple of g (the accelera- larger than 1⁄4 inch before the testing tion of gravity), calculated using the shall become smaller during the test- expression: ing as a result of the movement of the seating surface relative to the re- 25.  t  straint system as a whole. 1 2 HIC =  adt ()t − t (c) If a front facing child restraint − ∫ 2 1 ()tt21  system, not allow the angle between  t1  the system’s back support surfaces for (b) The resultant acceleration cal- the child and the system’s seating sur- culated from the output of the thoracic face to be less than 45 degrees at the instrumentation shall not exceed 60 completion of the test. g’s, except for intervals whose cumu- S5.1.2 Injury criteria. When tested in lative duration is not more than 3 mil- accordance with S6.1 and with the test liseconds. dummies specified in S7, each child re- S5.1.2.2 At the manufacturer’s op- straint system manufactured before tion (with said option irrevocably se- August 1, 2005, that, in accordance with lected prior to, or at the time of, cer- S5.5.2, is recommended for use by chil- tification of the restraint), child re- dren whose mass is more than 10 kg straint systems manufactured before shall— August 1, 2005 may be tested to the re- (a) Limit the resultant acceleration quirements of S5 while using the test at the location of the accelerometer dummies specified in S7.1.2 of this mounted in the test dummy head as standard according to the criteria for specified in part 572 such that the ex- selecting test dummies specified in pression: that paragraph. That paragraph speci- fies the dummies used to test child re- 25.   straint systems manufactured on or 1 t2 − after August 1, 2005. If a manufacturer  ∫ adt () t21 t ()tt− t1  selects the dummies specified in S7.1.2 21 to test its product, the injury criteria

627

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00627 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.097 ER18jn03.018 § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

specified by S5.1.2.1 of this standard (a) For each add-on child restraint must be met. Child restraints manufac- system: tured on or after August 1, 2005 must be (1) No portion of the test dummy’s tested using the test dummies specified head shall pass through a vertical in S7.1.2. transverse plane that is 720 mm or 813 S5.1.3 Occupant excursion. When mm (as specified in the table in this tested in accordance with S6.1 and the S5.1.3.1) forward of point Z on the requirements specified in this section, standard seat assembly, measured each child restraint system shall meet along the center SORL (as illustrated the applicable excursion limit require- ments specified in S5.1.3.1–S5.1.3.3. in figure 1B of this standard); and S5.1.3.1 Child restraint systems other (2) Neither knee pivot point shall than rear-facing ones and car beds. Each pass through a vertical transverse child restraint system, other than a plane that is 915 mm forward of point Z rear-facing child restraint system or a on the standard seat assembly, meas- car bed, shall retain the test dummy’s ured along the center SORL. torso within the system.

TABLE TO S5.1.3.1(a)—ADD-ON FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINTS

Explanatory note: In the test speci- fied in 2nd column, the child restraint When this type of child restraint is tested in accord- these excursion limits is attached to the test seat assembly ance with— apply in the manner described below, sub- ject to certain conditions

Harnesses, backless booster seats and S6.1.2(a)(1)(i)(A) ...... Head 813 mm; ...... Attached with lap belt; in addition, if a restraints designed for use by phys- Knee 915 mm ...... tether is provided, it is attached. ically handicapped children. Harnesses labeled per S5.3.1(b)(i) S6.1.2(a)(1)(i)(A) ...... Head 813 mm; ...... Attached with seat back mount. through S5.3.1(b)(iii) and Figure 12. Knee 915 mm ...... Belt-positioning seats ...... S6.1.2(a)(1)(ii) ...... Head 813 mm; ...... Attached with lap and shoulder belt; Knee 915 mm ...... no tether is attached. All other child restraints, manufactured S6.1.2(a)(1)(i)(B) ...... Head 813 mm; ...... Attached with lap belt; no tether is at- before September 1, 1999. Knee 915 mm ...... tached. All other child restraints, manufactured S6.1.2(a)(1)(i)(B) ...... Head 813 mm; ...... Attached with lap belt; no tether is at- on or after September 1, 1999. Knee 915 mm ...... tached. S6.1.2(a)(1)(i)(D) (be- Attached to lower anchorages of child ginning September restraint anchorage system; no teth- 1, 2002). er is attached. S6.1.2(a)(1)(i)(A) ...... Head 720 mm; ...... Attached with lap belt; in addition, if a Knee 915 mm ...... tether is provided, it is attached. S6.1.2(a)(1)(i)(C) (be- Attached to lower anchorages of child ginning September restraint anchorage system; in addi- 1, 2002). tion, if a tether is provided, it is at- tached.

(b) In the case of a built-in child re- of the target points on either side of straint system, neither knee pivot the dummy’s head and on the trans- point shall, at any time during the dy- verse axis passing through the center namic test, pass through a vertical of mass of the dummy’s head and per- transverse plane that is 305 mm for- pendicular to the head’s midsagittal ward of the initial pre-test position of plane, shall pass through the trans- the respective knee pivot point, meas- verse orthogonal planes whose inter- ured along a horizontal line that passes section contains the forward-most and through the knee pivot point and is top-most points on the child restraint parallel to the vertical longitudinal system surfaces (illustrated in Figure plane that passes through the vehicle’s 1C). longitudinal centerline. S5.1.3.3 Car beds. In the case of car S5.1.3.2 Rear-facing child restraint beds, all portions of the test dummy’s systems. In the case of each rear-facing head and torso shall be retained within child restraint system, all portions of the confines of the car bed. the test dummy’s torso shall be re- S5.1.4 Back support angle. When a tained within the system and neither rear-facing child restraint system is

628

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00628 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

tested in accordance with S6.1, the any child restraint other than a car angle between the system’s back sup- bed to those requirements, is deter- port surface for the child and the mined using the largest of the test vertical shall not exceed 70 degrees. dummies specified in S7 for use in test- S5.2 Force distribution. ing that restraint, provided that the 6- S5.2.1 Minimum head support surface— year-old dummy described in subpart I child restraints other than car beds. or subpart N of part 572 of this title is S5.2.1.1 Except as provided in S5.2.1.2, not used to determine the applicability each child restraint system other than of or compliance with S5.2.1.1. A front- a car bed shall provide restraint facing child restraint system is not re- against rearward movement of the quired to comply with S5.2.1.1 if the head of the child (rearward in relation target point on either side of the dum- to the child) by means of a continuous my’s head is below a horizontal plane seat back which is an integral part of tangent to the top of— the system and which— (a) The standard seat assembly, in (a) Has a height, measured along the the case of an add-on child restraint system seat back surface for the child system, when the dummy is positioned in the vertical longitudinal plane pass- in the system and the system is in- ing through the longitudinal centerline stalled on the assembly in accordance of the child restraint systems from the with S6.1.2. lowest point on the system seating sur- (b) The vehicle seat, in the case of a face that is contacted by the buttocks built-in child restraint system, when of the seated dummy, as follows: the system is activated and the dummy TABLE TO S5.2.1.1(A) is positioned in the system in accord- ance with S6.1.2. Weight 1 Height 2(mm) S5.2.2 Torso impact protection. Each Not more than 18 kg ...... 500 child restraint system other than a car More than 18 kg ...... 560 bed shall comply with the applicable 1 When a child restraint system is recommended under S5.5 requirements of S5.2.2.1 and S5.2.2.2. for use by children of the above weights. S5.2.2.1(a) The system surface pro- 2 The height of the portion of the system seat back pro- viding head restraint shall not be less than the above. vided for the support of the child’s back shall be flat or concave and have (b) Has a width of not less than 8 a continuous surface area of not less inches, measured in the horizontal than 85 square inches. plane at the height specified in para- graph (a) of this section. Except that a (b) Each system surface provided for child restraint system with side sup- support of the side of the child’s torso ports extending at least 4 inches for- shall be flat or concave and have a con- ward from the padded surface of the tinuous surface of not less than 24 portion of the restraint system pro- square inches for systems rec- vided for support of the child’s head ommended for children weighing 20 may have a width of not less than 6 pounds or more, or 48 square inches for inches, measured in the horizontal systems recommended for children plane at the height specified in para- weighing less than 20 pounds. graph (a) of this section. (c) Each horizontal cross section of (c) Limits the rearward rotation of each system surface designed to re- the test dummy head so that the angle strain forward movement of the child’s between the head and torso of the torso shall be flat or concave and each dummy specified in S7. when tested in vertical longitudinal cross section accordance with S6.1 is not more than shall be flat or convex with a radius of 45 degrees greater than the angle be- curvature of the underlying structure tween the head and torso after the of not less than 2 inches. dummy has been placed in the system S5.2.2.2 Each forward-facing child in accordance with S6.1.2.3 and before restraint system shall have no fixed or the system is tested in accordance with movable surface— S6.1. (a) Directly forward of the dummy S5.2.1.2 The applicability of the re- and intersected by a horizontal line— quirements of S5.2.1.1 to a front-facing (1) Parallel to the SORL, in the case child restraint, and the conformance of of the add-on child restraint system, or

629

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00629 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(2) Parallel to a vertical plane padding or other flexible overlay mate- through the longitudinal center line of rial removed, have a height above any the vehicle seat, in the case of a built- immediately adjacent restraint system in child restraint system, and, surface of not more than 3⁄8 inch and no (b) Passing through any portion of exposed edge with a radius of less than the dummy, except for surfaces which 1⁄4 inch. restrain the dummy when the system S5.3 Installation. is tested in accordance with S5.3.1 Add-on child restraints shall S6.1.2(a)(2), so that the child restraint meet either (a) or (b), as appropriate. system shall conform to the require- (a) Except for components designed ments of S5.1.2 and S5.1.3.1. to attach to a child restraint anchor- S5.2.3 Head impact protection. age system, each add-on child restraint S5.2.3.1 Each child restraint system system must not have any means de- other than a child harness, manufac- signed for attaching the system to a tured before August 1, 2005, that is rec- vehicle seat cushion or vehicle seat ommended under S5.5.2 for a child back and any component (except belts) whose mass is less than 10 kg and that that is designed to be inserted between is not tested with the Part 572 Subpart the vehicle seat cushion and vehicle R dummy, shall comply with S5.2.3. seat back. S5.2.3.2 Each system surface, except (b) Harnesses manufactured for use for protrusions that comply with on school bus seats must meet S5.3.1(a) S5.2.4, which is contactable by the dummy head when the system is tested of this standard, unless a label that in accordance with S6.1 shall be cov- conforms in content to Figure 12 and to ered with slow recovery, energy absorb- the requirements of S5.3.1(b)(1) through ing material with the following charac- S5.3.1(b)(3) of this standard is perma- teristics: nently affixed to the part of the har- (a) A 25 percent compression-deflec- ness that attaches the system to a ve- tion resistance of not less than 0.5 and hicle seat back. Harnesses that are not not more than 10 pounds per square labeled as required by this paragraph inch when tested in accordance with must meet S5.3.1(a). S6.3. (1) The label must be plainly visible (b) A thickness of not less than 1⁄2 when installed and easily readable. inch for materials having a 25 percent (2) The message area must be white compression-deflection resistance of with black text. The message area not less than 1.8 and not more than 10 must be no less than 20 square centi- pounds per square inch when tested in meters. accordance with S6.3. Materials having (3) The pictogram shall be gray and a 25 percent compression-deflection re- black with a red circle and slash on a sistance of less than 1.8 pounds per white background. The pictogram shall square inch shall have a thickness of be no less than 20 mm in diameter. not less than 3⁄4 inch. S5.3.2 Each add-on child restraint S5.2.4 Protrusion limitation. Any por- system shall be capable of meeting the tion of a rigid structural component requirements of this standard when in- within or underlying a contactable sur- stalled solely by each of the means in- face, or any portion of a child restraint dicated in the following table for the system surface that is subject to the particular type of child restraint sys- requirements of S5.2.3 shall, with any tem:

TABLE FOR S5.3.2

Means of installation Child re- Type 1 seat straint an- Type of add-on child restraint system Type 1 seat belt assem- chorage Type II seat Seat belt assem- bly plus a system (ef- belt assem- back bly tether an- fective Sep- bly mount chorage, if tember 1, needed 2002)

Harnesses labeled per S5.3.1(b)(1) through S5.3.1(b)(3) and Figure 12 ...... X Other harnesses ...... X

630

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00630 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

TABLE FOR S5.3.2—Continued

Means of installation Child re- Type 1 seat straint an- Type of add-on child restraint system Type 1 seat belt assem- chorage Type II seat Seat belt assem- bly plus a system (ef- belt assem- back bly tether an- fective Sep- bly mount chorage, if tember 1, needed 2002)

Car beds ...... X Rear-facing restraints ...... X ...... X Belt-positioning seats ...... X ...... All other child restraints ...... X X X

S5.3.3 Car beds. Each car bed shall be snugly fit any child whose height and designed to be installed on a vehicle weight are within the ranges rec- seat so that the car bed’s longitudinal ommended in accordance with S5.5.2(f) axis is perpendicular to a vertical lon- and who is positioned in the system in gitudinal plane through the longitu- accordance with the instructions re- dinal axis of the vehicle. quired by S5.6. S5.4 Belts, belt buckles, and belt web- S5.4.3.2 Direct restraint. Except for a bing. child restraint system whose mass is S5.4.1 Performance requirements. The less than 4.4 kg, each belt that is part webbing of belts provided with a child of a child restraint system and that is restrain system and used to attach the designed to restrain a child using the system to the vehicle or to restrain the system and to attach the system to the child within the system shall— vehicle, and each Type I and lap por- (a) After being subjected to abrasion tion of a Type II vehicle belt that is as specified in S5.1(d) or S5.3(c) of used to attach the system to the vehi- FMVSS 209 (§ 571.209), have a breaking cle shall, when tested in accordance strength of not less than 75 percent of with S6.1, impose no loads on the child the strength of the unabraded webbing that result from the mass of the sys- when tested in accordance with S5.1(b) tem, or of FMVSS 209. (a) In the case of an add-on child re- (b) Meet the requirements of S4.2 (e) straint system, from the mass of the and (f) of FMVSS No. 209 (§ 571.209); and seat back of the standard seat assem- (c) If contactable by the test dummy bly specified in S6.1, or torso when the system is tested in ac- (b) In the case of a built-in child re- cordance with S6.1, have a width of not straint system, from the mass of any less than 11⁄2 inches when measured in part of the vehicle into which the child accordance with S5.4.1.1. restraint system is built. S5.4.1.1 Width test procedure. Condi- tion the webbing for 24 hours in an at- S5.4.3.3 Seating systems. Except for mosphere of any relative humidity be- child restraint systems subject to tween 48 and 67 percent, and any ambi- S5.4.3.4, each child restraint system ent temperature between 70° and 77 °F. that is designed for use by a child in a Measure belt webbing width under a seated position and that has belts de- tension of 5 pounds applied lengthwise. signed to restrain the child, shall, with S5.4.2 Belt buckles and belt adjust- the test dummy specified in S7 posi- ment hardware. Each belt buckle and tioned in the system in accordance item of belt adjustment hardware used with S10 provide: in a child restraint system shall con- (a) Upper torso restraint in the form form to the requirements of S4.3(a) and of: S4.3(b) of FMVSS No. 209 (§ 571.209). (i) Belts passing over each shoulder S5.4.3 Belt Restraint. of the child, or S5.4.3.1 General. Each belt that is (ii) A fixed or movable surface that part of a child restraint system and complies with S5.2.2.1(c), and that is designed to restrain a child (b) Lower torso restraint in the form using the system shall be adjustable to of:

631

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00631 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(i) A lap belt assembly making an ed in accordance with S5.2(g) of angle between 45° and 90° with the child FMVSS No. 209; and restraint seating surface at the lap belt (e) Not release during the testing attachment points, or specified in S6.1. (ii) A fixed or movable surface that S5.5 Labeling. Any labels or written complies with S5.2.2.1(c), and instructions provided in addition to (c) In the case of each seating system those required by this section shall not recommended for children whose obscure or confuse the meaning of the masses are more than 10 kg, crotch re- required information or be otherwise straint in the form of: misleading to the consumer. Any labels (i) A crotch belt connectable to the or written instructions other than in lap belt or other device used to restrain the English language shall be an accu- the lower torso, or rate translation of English labels or (ii) A fixed or movable surface that written instructions. complies with S5.2.2.1(c). S5.5.1 Each add-on child restraint S5.4.3.4 Harnesses. Each child har- system shall be permanently labeled ness shall: with the information specified in S5.5.2 (a) through (m). (a) Provide upper torso restraint, in- S5.5.2 The information specified in cluding belts passing over each shoul- paragraphs (a) through (m) of this sec- der of the child; tion shall be stated in the English lan- (b) Provide lower torso restraint by guage and lettered in letters and num- means of lap and crotch belt; and bers that are not smaller than 10 point (c) Prevent a child of any height for type. Unless otherwise specified, the which the restraint is recommended for information shall be labeled on a white use pursuant to S5.5.2(f) from standing background with black text. Unless upright on the vehicle seat when the written in all capitals, the information child is placed in the device in accord- shall be stated in sentence capitaliza- ance with the instructions required by tion. S5.6. (a) The model name or number of the S5.4.3.5 Buckle release. Any buckle in system. a child restraint system belt assembly (b) The manufacturer’s name. A dis- designed to restrain a child using the tributor’s name may be used instead if system shall: the distributor assumes responsibility (a) When tested in accordance with for all duties and liabilities imposed on S6.2.1 prior to the dynamic test of S6.1, the manufacturer with respect to the not release when a force of less than 40 system by the National Traffic and newtons (N) is applied and shall release Motor Vehicle Safety Act, as amended. when a force of not more than 62 N is (c) The statement: ‘‘Manufactured in applied; ll,’’ inserting the month and year of (b) After the dynamic test of S6.1, manufacture. when tested in accordance with the ap- (d) The place of manufacture (city propriate sections of S6.2, release when and State, or foreign country). How- a force of not more than 71 N is ap- ever, if the manufacturer uses the plied, provided, however, that the con- name of the distributor, then it shall formance of any child restraint to this state the location (city and State, or requirement is determined using the foreign country) of the principal offices largest of the test dummies specified in of the distributor. S7 for use in testing that restraint (e) The statement: ‘‘This child re- when the restraint is facing forward, straint system conforms to all applica- rearward, and/or laterally; ble Federal motor vehicle safety stand- (c) Meet the requirements of ards.’’ S4.3(d)(2) of FMVSS No. 209 (§ 571.209), (f) One of the following statements, except that the minimum surface area as appropriate, inserting the manufac- for child restraint buckles designed for turer’s recommendations for the max- push button application shall be 0.6 imum mass of children who can safely square inch; occupy the system, except that booster (d) Meet the requirements of S4.3(g) seats shall not be recommended for of FMVSS No. 209 (§ 571.209) when test- children whose masses are less than

632

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00632 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

13.6 kg. For seats that can only be used (iv) Register your child restraint as belt-positioning seats, manufactur- with the manufacturer. ers must include the maximum and (2) At the manufacturer’s option, the minimum recommended height, but phrase ‘‘DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY may delete the reference to weight: can occur’’ in the heading can be on ei- (1) Use only with children who weigh ther a white or yellow background. ll pounds (ll kg) or less and whose (3) More than one label may be used height is (insert values in English and for the required bulleted statements. metric units; use of word ‘‘mass’’ in label is Multiple labels shall be placed one optional) or less; or above the other unless that arrange- (2) Use only with children who weigh ment is precluded by insufficient space between ll and ll pounds (insert ap- or shape of the child restraint. In that propriate English and metric values; use case, multiple labels shall be placed of word ‘‘mass’’ is optional) and whose side by side. When using multiple la- height is (insert appropriate values in bels, the mandated warnings must be English and metric units) or less and who in the correct order when read from top are capable of sitting upright alone; or to bottom. If the labels are side-by- (3) Use only with children who weigh side, then the mandated warnings must appear top to bottom of the leftmost between ll and ll pounds (insert ap- label, then top to bottom of the next propriate English and metric values; use label to its right, and so on. There of word ‘‘mass’’ is optional) and whose shall be no intervening labels and the height is (insert appropriate values in required heading shall only appear on English and metric units) or less. the first label in the sequence. (4) Use only with children who weigh (h) In the case of each child restraint between and pounds ( ll ll insert ap- system that has belts designed to re- propriate English and metric values; use strain children using them and which ) and whose of word ‘‘mass’’ is optional do not adjust automatically to fit the height is between and ( ll ll insert child: Snugly adjust the belts provided appropriate values in English and metric with this child restraint around your ). units child. (g) The statements specified in para- (i)(1) For a booster seat that is rec- graphs (1) and (2): ommended for use with either a vehi- (1) A heading as specified in cle’s Type I or Type II seat belt assem- S5.5.2(k)(3)(i), with the statement bly, one of the following statements, as ‘‘WARNING! DEATH or SERIOUS IN- appropriate: JURY can occur,’’ capitalized as writ- (i) Use only the vehicle’s lap and ten and followed by bulleted state- shoulder belt system when restraining ments in the following order: the child in this booster seat; or, (i) As appropriate, the statements re- (ii) Use only the vehicle’s lap belt quired by the following sections will be system, or the lap belt part of a lap/ bulleted and placed after the statement shoulder belt system with the shoulder required by 5.5.2(g)(1) in the following belt placed behind the child, when re- order: 5.5.2(k)(1) or 5.5.2(k)(2), 5.5.2(f), straining the child in this seat. 5.5.2(h), 5.5.2(j), and 5.5.2(i). (2)(i) Except as provided in paragraph (ii) Secure this child restraint with (i)(2)(ii) of this section, for a booster the vehicle’s child restraint anchorage seat which is recommended for use system if available or with a vehicle with both a vehicle’s Type I and Type belt. [For car beds, harnesses, and belt II seat belt assemblies, the following positioning boosters, the first part of statement: Use only the vehicle’s lap the statement regarding attachment belt system, or the lap belt part of a by the child restraint anchorage sys- lap/shoulder belt system with the tem is optional.] shoulder belt placed behind the child, (iii) Follow all instructions on this when restraining the child with the child restraint and in the written in- (insert description of the system element structions located (insert storage loca- provided to restrain forward movement of tion on the restraint for the manufactur- the child’s torso when used with a lap belt er’s installation instruction booklet or (e.g., shield)), and only the vehicle’s lap sheet). and shoulder belt system when using

633

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00633 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

the booster without the (insert above the passenger-side air bag in a vehicle description). when and only when the child restraint (ii) A booster seat which is rec- is installed in the vehicle and provides ommended for use with both a vehicle’s a signal, for at least 60 seconds after Type I and Type II seat belt assemblies deactivation, that the air bag is deacti- is not subject to S5.5.2(i)(2)(i) if, when vated, the label specified in Figure 10 the booster is used with the shield or may include the phrase ‘‘unless air bag similar component, the booster will is off’’ after ‘‘on front seat with air bag.’’ cause the shoulder belt to be located in (l) An installation diagram showing a position other than in front of the the child restraint system installed in: child when the booster is installed. (1) A seating position equipped with a However, such a booster shall be la- beled with a warning to use the booster continuous-loop lap/shoulder belt; with the vehicle’s lap and shoulder belt (2) A seating position equipped with system when using the booster without only a lap belt, as specified in the man- a shield. ufacturer’s instructions; and (j) In the case of each child restraint (3) A seating position equipped with a system equipped with a top anchorage child restraint anchorage system. strap, the statement: Secure the top (m) The following statement, insert- anchorage strap provided with this ing an address and telephone number: child restraint. ‘‘Child restraints could be recalled for (k) (1) In the case of each rear-facing safety reasons. You must register this child restraint system that is designed restraint to be reached in a recall. for infants only, the statement: Use Send your name, address and the re- only in a rear-facing position when straint’s model number and manufac- using it in the vehicle. turing date to (insert address) or call (2) In the case of a child restraint (insert telephone number). For recall in- system that is designed to be used rear- formation, call the U.S. Government’s ward-facing for infants and forward- Auto Safety Hotline at 1–800–424–9393 facing for older children, the state- (202–366–0123 in DC area).’’ ment: Use only in a rear-facing posi- (n) Child restraint systems, other tion when using it with an infant weighing less than (insert a rec- than belt-positioning seats, harnesses ommended weight that is not less than 20 and backless child restraint systems, pounds). may be certified as complying with the (3) Except as provided in (k)(4) of this provisions of S8. Child restraints that section, each child restraint system are so certified shall be labeled with that can be used in a rear-facing posi- the statement ‘‘This Restraint is Cer- tion shall have a label that conforms in tified for Use in Motor Vehicles and content to Figure 10 and to the require- Aircraft.’’ Belt-positioning seats, har- ments of S5.5.2(k)(3)(i) through nesses and backless child restraint sys- S5.5.2(k)(3)(iii) of this standard perma- tems shall be labeled with the state- nently affixed to the outer surface of ment ‘‘This Restraint is Not Certified the cushion or padding in or adjacent for Use in Aircraft.’’ The statement re- to the area where a child’s head would quired by this paragraph shall be in red rest, so that the label is plainly visible lettering and shall be placed after the and easily readable. certification statement required by (i) The heading area shall be yellow S5.5.2(e). with the word ‘‘warning’’ and the alert S5.5.3 The information specified in symbol in black. S5.5.2(f) through (l) shall be located on (ii) The message area shall be white the add-on child restraint system so with black text. The message area that it is visible when the system is in- shall be no less than 30 square cm. stalled as specified in S5.6.1, except (iii) The pictogram shall be black with a red circle and slash on a white that for child restraints with a detach- background. The pictogram shall be no able base, the installation diagrams less than 30 mm in diameter. specified in S5.5.2(l) are required to be (4) If a child restraint system is visible only when the base alone is in- equipped with a device that deactivates stalled.

634

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00634 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

S5.5.4 (a) Each built-in child re- masses are less than 13.6 kg. For seats straint system other than a factory-in- that can only be used as belt-posi- stalled built-in restraint shall be per- tioning seats, manufacturers must in- manently labeled with the information clude the maximum and minimum rec- specified in S5.5.5 (a) through (l). The ommended height, but may delete the information specified in S5.5.5(a) reference to weight: through (j) and in S5.5.5(l) shall be visi- (1) Use only with children who weigh ble when the system is activated for ll pounds (ll kg) or less and whose use. height is (insert values in English and (b) Each factory-installed built-in metric units; use of word ‘‘mass’’ in label is child restraint shall be permanently la- optional) or less; or beled with the information specified in (2) Use only with children who weigh S5.5.5(f) through (j) and S5.5.5(l), so between ll and ll pounds (ll and that the information is visible when ll kg) and whose height is (insert ap- the restraint is activated for use. The propriate values in English and metric information shall also be included in units; use of word ‘‘mass’’ in label is op- the vehicle owner’s manual. tional) or less and who are capable of S5.5.5 The information specified in sitting upright alone; or paragraphs (a) through (l) of this sec- (3) Use only with children who weigh tion that is required by S5.5.4 shall be between ll and ll pounds ( ll and in English and lettered in letters and ll kg) and whose height is (insert ap- numbers using a not smaller than 10 propriate values in English and metric point type. Unless specified otherwise, units; use of word ‘‘mass’’ in label is op- the information shall be labeled on a tional) or less. white background with black text. Un- (4) Use only with children who weigh less written in all capitals, the infor- between ll and ll pounds (insert ap- mation shall be stated in sentence cap- propriate English and metric values; use italization. of word ‘‘mass’’ is optional) and whose (a) The model name or number of the height is between ll and ll (insert system. appropriate values in English and metric (b) The manufacturer’s name. A dis- units). tributor’s or dealer’s name may be used (g) The heading and statement speci- instead if the distributor or dealer as- fied in paragraph (1), and if appro- sumes responsibility for all duties and priate, the statements in paragraph (2) liabilities imposed on the manufac- and (3). If used, the statements in para- turer with respect to the system by the graphs (2) and (3) shall be bulleted and National Traffic and Motor Vehicle precede the bulleted statement re- Safety Act, as amended. quired by paragraph (1) after the head- (c) The statement: ‘‘Manufactured in ing. lll,’’ inserting the month and year of (1) A heading as specified in manufacture. S5.5.2(k)(3)(i), with the statement (d) The place of manufacture (city ‘‘WARNING! DEATH or SERIOUS IN- and State, or foreign country). How- JURY can occur,’’ capitalized as writ- ever, if the manufacturer uses the ten and followed by the bulleted state- name of the distributor or dealer, then ment: Follow all instructions on the it shall state the location (city and child restraint and in the vehicle’s State, or foreign country) of the prin- owner’s manual. At the manufacturer’s cipal offices of the distributor or deal- option, the phrase ‘‘DEATH or SERI- er. OUS INJURY can occur’’ in the heading (e) The statement: ‘‘This child re- can be on either a white or yellow straint system conforms to all applica- background. ble Federal motor vehicle safety stand- (2) In the case of each built-in child ards.’’ restraint system which is not intended (f) One of the following statements, for use in motor vehicles in certain ad- inserting the manufacturer’s rec- justment positions or under certain ommendations for the maximum mass circumstances, an appropriate state- of children who can safely occupy the ment of the manufacturers restrictions system, except that booster seats shall regarding those positions or cir- not be recommended for children whose cumstances.

635

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00635 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(3) As appropriate, the statements re- S5.6.1 Add-on child restraint systems. quired by the following sections will be Each add-on child restraint system bulleted and placed after the statement shall be accompanied by printed instal- required by 5.5.5(g)(1) in the following lation instructions in English that pro- order: 5.5.5(g)(2), 5.5.5(f), S5.5.5(h) and vide a step-by-step procedure, includ- S5.5.5(i). ing diagrams, for installing the system (h) In the case of each built-in child in motor vehicles, securing the system restraint system that has belts de- in the vehicles, positioning a child in signed to restrain children using them the system, and adjusting the system and which do not adjust automatically to fit the child. For each child re- to fit the child: Snugly adjust the belts straint system that has components for provided with this child restraint attaching to a tether anchorage or a around your child. child restraint anchorage system, the (i) In the case of each built-in child installation instructions shall include restraint which can be used in a rear- a step-by-step procedure, including dia- facing position, the following state- grams, for properly attaching to that ment: Place an infant in a rear-facing anchorage or system. position in this child restraint. S5.6.1.1 In a vehicle with rear des- (j) A diagram or diagrams showing ignated seating positions, the instruc- the fully activated child restraint sys- tions shall alert vehicle owners that, tem in infant and/or child configura- according to accident statistics, chil- tions. dren are safer when properly restrained (k) The following statement, insert- in the rear seating positions than in ing an address and telephone number: the front seating positions. ‘‘Child restraints could be recalled for S5.6.1.2 The instructions shall speci- safety reasons. You must register this fy in general terms the types of vehi- restraint to be reached in a recall. cles, the types of seating positions, and Send your name, address and the re- the types of vehicle safety belts with straint’s model number and manufac- which the add-on child restraint sys- turing date to (insert address) or call tem can or cannot be used. (insert telephone number). For recall in- S5.6.1.3 The instructions shall ex- formation, call the U.S. Government’s plain the primary consequences of not Auto Safety Hotline at 1–800–424–9393 following the warnings required to be (202–366–0123 in DC area).’’ labeled on the child restraint system in (l) In the case of a built-in belt-posi- accordance with S5.5.2 (g) through (k). tioning seat that uses either the vehi- S5.6.1.4 The instructions for each cle’s Type I or Type II belt systems or both, a statement describing the manu- car bed shall explain that the car bed facturer’s recommendations for the should position in such a way that the maximum height and weight of chil- child’s head is near the center of the dren who can safely occupy the system vehicle. and how the booster should be used S5.6.1.5 The instructions shall state (e.g., with or without shield) with the that add-on child restraint systems different vehicle belt systems. should be securely belted to the vehi- S5.6 Printed Instructions for Proper cle, even when they are not occupied, Use. Any labels or written instructions since in a crash an unsecured child re- provided in addition to those required straint system may injure other occu- by this section shall not obscure or pants. confuse the meaning of the required in- S5.6.1.6 Each add-on child restraint formation or be otherwise misleading system shall have a location on the re- to the consumer. Any labels or written straint for storing the manufacturer’s instructions other than in the English instructions. language shall be an accurate trans- S5.6.1.7 The instructions shall in- lation of English labels or written in- clude the following statement, insert- structions. Unless written in all cap- ing an address and telephone number: itals, the information required by ‘‘Child restraints could be recalled for S5.6.1 through S5.6.3 shall be stated in safety reasons. You must register this sentence capitalization. restraint to be reached in a recall.

636

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00636 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

Send your name, address and the re- element provided to restrain forward straint’s model number and manufac- movement of the child’s torso when used turing date to (insert address) or call with a lap belt (e.g., shield)), and only (insert telephone number). For recall in- the vehicle’s lap and shoulder belt sys- formation, call the U.S. Government’s tem when using this booster without Auto Safety Hotline at 1–800–424–9393 the (insert above description). (202–366–0123 in DC area).’’ (2) A booster seat which is rec- S5.6.1.8 In the case of each child re- ommended for use with both a vehicle’s straint system that can be used in a Type I and Type II seat belt assemblies position so that it is facing the rear of is not subject to S5.6.1.10(b)(1) if, when the vehicle, the instructions shall pro- the booster is used with the shield or vide a warning against using rear-fac- similar component, the booster will ing restraints at seating positions cause the shoulder belt to be located in equipped with air bags, and shall ex- a position other than in front of the plain the reasons for, and consequences child when the booster is installed. of not following the warning. The in- However, the instructions for such a structions shall also include a state- booster shall include a warning to use ment that owners of vehicles with the booster with the vehicle’s lap and front passenger side air bags should shoulder belt system when using the refer to their vehicle owner’s manual booster without a shield. for child restraint installation instruc- (c) The instructions for belt-posi- tions. tioning seats shall include the state- S5.6.1.9 In the case of each rear-fac- ment, ‘‘This restraint is not certified ing child restraint system that has a for aircraft use,’’ and the reasons for means for repositioning the seating this statement. surface of the system that allows the S5.6.1.11 For harnesses that are system’s occupant to move from a re- manufactured for use on school bus clined position to an upright position seats, the instructions must include during testing, the instructions shall the following statements: include a warning against impeding the ‘‘WARNING! This restraint must only ability of the restraint to change ad- be used on school bus seats. Entire seat justment position. directly behind must be unoccupied or S5.6.1.10(a) For instructions for a have restrained occupants.’’ The label- booster seat that is recommended for ing requirement refers to a restrained use with either a vehicle’s Type I or occupant as: an occupant restrained by Type II seat belt assembly, one of the any user appropriate vehicle restraint following statements, as appropriate, or child restraint system (e.g. lap belt, and the reasons for the statement: lap and shoulder belt, booster, child (1) Warning! Use only the vehicle’s seat, harness . . .). lap and shoulder belt system when re- S5.6.2 Built-in child restraint systems. straining the child in this booster seat; (a) Each built-in child restraint system or, shall be accompanied by printed in- (2) Warning! Use only the vehicle’s structions in English that provide a lap belt system, or the lap belt part of step-by-step procedure, including dia- a lap/shoulder belt system with the grams, for activating the restraint sys- shoulder belt placed behind the child, tem, positioning a child in the system, when restraining the child in this seat. adjusting the restraint and, if provided, (b)(1) Except as provided in the restraint harness to fit the child. S5.6.1.10(b)(2), the instructions for a The instructions for each built-in car booster seat that is recommended for bed shall explain that the child should use with both a vehicle’s Type I and be positioned in the bed in such a way Type II seat belt assemblies shall in- that the child’s head is near the center clude the following statement and the of the vehicle. reasons therefor: Warning! Use only (b) Each motor vehicle equipped with the vehicle’s lap belt system, or the lap a factory-installed built-in child re- belt part of a lap/shoulder belt system straint shall have the information with the shoulder belt placed behind specified in paragraph (a) of this sec- the child, when restraining the child tion included in its vehicle owner’s with the (insert description of the system manual.

637

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00637 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S5.6.2.1 The instructions shall ex- shoulder belt portion of the assembly plain the primary consequences of not must be placed behind the child. following the manufacturer’s warnings S5.6.3 Add-on and built-in child re- for proper use of the child restraint straint systems. In the case of each child system in accordance with S5.5.5 (f) restraint system that has belts de- through (i). signed to restrain children using them S5.6.2.2 The instructions for each and which do not adjust automatically built-in child restraint system other to fit the child, the printed instruc- than a factory-installed restraint, shall tions shall include the following state- include the following statement, in- ment: A snug strap should not allow serting an address and telephone num- any slack. It lies in a relatively ber: ‘‘Child restraints could be recalled straight line without sagging. It does for safety reasons. You must register not press on the child’s flesh or push this restraint to be reached in a recall. the child’s body into an unnatural posi- Send your name, address and the re- tion. straint’s model number and manufac- S5.7 Flammability. Each material used turing date to (insert address) or call in a child restraint system shall con- (insert telephone number). For recall in- form to the requirements of S4 of formation, call the U.S. Government’s FMVSS No. 302 (571.302). In the case of Auto Safety Hotline at 1–800–424–9393 a built-in child restraint system, the (202–366–0123 in DC area).’’ requirements of S4 of FMVSS No. 302 S5.6.2.3. Each built-in child re- shall be met in both the ‘‘in-use’’ and straint system other than a factory-in- ‘‘stowed’’ positions. stalled built-in restraint, shall have a S5.8 Information requirements—reg- location on the restraint for storing istration form. the instructions. (a) Each child restraint system, ex- S5.6.2.4 Each built-in child restraint cept a factory-installed built-in re- system, other than a system that has straint system, shall have a registra- been installed in a vehicle or a factory- tion form attached to any surface of installed built-in system that is de- the restraint that contacts the dummy signed for a specific vehicle model and when the dummy is positioned in the seating position, shall be accompanied system in accordance with S6.1.2 of by instructions in English that provide Standard 213. a step-by-step procedure for installing (b) Each form shall: the system in a motor vehicle. The in- (1) Consist of a postcard that is at- structions shall specify the types of ve- tached at a perforation to an informa- hicles and the seating positions into tional card; which the restraint can or cannot be (2) Conform in size, content and for- installed. The instructions for each car mat to Figures 9a and 9b of this sec- bed shall explain that the bed should be tion; and installed so that the child’s head will (3) Have a thickness of at least 0.007 be near the center of the vehicle. inches and not more than 0.0095 inches. S5.6.2.5 In the case of a built-in belt- (c) Each postcard shall provide the positioning seat that uses either the model name or number and date of vehicle’s Type I or Type II belt systems manufacture (month, year) of the child or both, the instructions shall include restraint system to which the form is a statement describing the manufac- attached, shall contain space for the turer’s recommendations for the max- purchaser to record his or her name imum height and weight of children and mailing address, shall be addressed who can safely occupy the system and to the manufacturer, and shall be post- how the booster must be used with the age paid. No other information shall vehicle belt systems appropriate for appear on the postcard, except identi- the booster seat. The instructions shall fying information that distinguishes a explain the consequences of not fol- particular child restraint system from lowing the directions. The instructions other systems of that model name or shall specify that, if the booster seat is number may be preprinted in the recommended for use with only the lap- shaded area of the postcard, as shown belt part of a Type II assembly, the in figure 9a.

638

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00638 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

S5.9 Attachment to child restraint an- cations shall be detectable under nor- chorage system. mal daylight lighting conditions. (a) Each add-on child restraint an- S6. Test conditions and procedures. chorage system manufactured on or S6.1 Dynamic systems test for child re- after September 1, 2002, other than a straint systems. car bed, harness and belt-positioning The test conditions described in seat, shall have components perma- S6.1.1 apply to the dynamic systems nently attached to the system that en- test. The test procedure for the dy- able the restraint to be securely fas- namic systems test is specified in tened to the lower anchorages of the S6.1.2. The test dummy specified in S7 child restraint anchorage system speci- fied in Standard No. 225 (§ 571.213) and is placed in the test specimen (child re- depicted in Drawing Package SAS–100– straint), clothed as described in S9 and 1000 with Addendum A: Seat Base positioned according to S10. Weldment (consisting of drawings and S6.1.1 Test conditions. a bill of materials), dated October 23, (a) Test devices. 1998, or in Drawing Package, ‘‘NHTSA (1) Add-on child restraints. Standard Seat Assembly; FMVSS No. (i) The test device for add-on re- 213, No. NHTSA–213–2003,’’ (consisting straint systems manufactured before of drawings and a bill of materials) August 1, 2005 is a standard seat assem- dated June 3, 2003 (incorporated by ref- bly consisting of a simulated vehicle erence; see § 571.5). The components bench seat, with three seating posi- must be attached by use of a tool, such tions, which is described in Drawing as a screwdriver. In the case of rear- Package SAS–100–1000 with Addendum facing child restraints with detachable A: Seat Base Weldment (consisting of bases, only the base is required to have drawings and a bill of materials), dated the components. October 23, 1998 (incorporated by ref- (b) In the case of each child restraint erence in § 571.5). The assembly is system that is manufactured on or mounted on a dynamic test platform so after September 1, 1999 and that has that the center SORL of the seat is components for attaching the system to a tether anchorage, those compo- parallel to the direction of the test nents shall include a tether hook that platform travel and so that movement conforms to the configuration and ge- between the base of the assembly and ometry specified in Figure 11 of this the platform is prevented. standard. (ii) The test device for add-on re- (c) In the case of each child restraint straint systems manufactured on or system that is manufactured on or after August 1, 2005 is a standard seat after September 1, 1999 and that has assembly consisting of a simulated ve- components, including belt webbing, hicle bench seat, with three seating po- for attaching the system to a tether sitions, which is depicted in Drawing anchorage or to a child restraint an- Package, ‘‘NHTSA Standard Seat As- chorage system, the belt webbing shall sembly; FMVSS No. 213, No. NHTSA– be adjustable so that the child re- 213–2003,’’ (consisting of drawings and a straint can be tightly attached to the bill of materials) dated June 3, 2003 (in- vehicle. corporated by reference; see § 571.5). (d) Beginning September 1, 1999, each The assembly is mounted on a dynamic child restraint system with compo- test platform so that the center SORL nents that enable the restraint to be of the seat is parallel to the direction securely fastened to the lower anchor- of the test platform travel and so that ages of a child restraint anchorage sys- movement between the base of the as- tem, other than a system with hooks sembly and the platform is prevented. for attaching to the lower anchorages, shall provide either an indication when (2) The test device for built-in child each attachment to the lower anchor- restraint systems is either the specific ages becomes fully latched or attached, vehicle shell or the specific vehicle. or a visual indication that all attach- (i) Specific vehicle shell. ments to the lower anchorages are fully latched or attached. Visual indi-

639

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00639 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(A) The specific vehicle shell, if se- the seating positions otherwise requir- lected for testing, is mounted on a dy- ing the placement of a part 572 test namic test platform so that the longi- dummy, then in the frontal barrier tudinal center line of the shell is par- crash specified in (c), the appropriate allel to the direction of the test plat- child test dummy shall be substituted form travel and so that movement be- for the part 572 adult dummy, but only tween the base of the shell and the at that seating position. The fuel tank platform is prevented. Adjustable seats is filled to any level from 90 to 95 per- are in the adjustment position midway cent of capacity. between the forwardmost and rearmost (B) Adjustable seats are in the ad- positions, and if separately adjustable justment position midway between the in a vertical direction, are at the low- forward-most and rearmost positions, est position. If an adjustment position and if separately adjustable in a vehi- does not exist midway between the cle direction, are at the lowest posi- forwardmost and rearmost position, tion. If an adjustment position does the closest adjustment position to the not exist midway between the forward- rear of the midpoint is used. Adjustable most and rearmost positions, the clos- seat backs are in the manufacturer’s est adjustment position to the rear of nominal design riding position. If such the midpoint is used. a position is not specified, the seat (C) Adjustable seat backs are in the back is positioned so that the longitu- manufacturer’s nominal design riding dinal center line of the child test dum- position. If a nominal position is not my’s neck is vertical, and if an instru- specified, the seat back is positioned so mented test dummy is used, the accel- that the longitudinal center line of the erometer surfaces in the dummy’s head child test dummy’s neck is vertical, and thorax, as positioned in the vehi- and if an anthropomorphic test dummy cle, are horizontal. If the vehicle seat is used, the accelerometer surfaces in is equipped with adjustable head re- the test dummy’s head and thorax, as straints, each is adjusted to its highest positioned in the vehicle, are hori- adjustment position. zontal. If the vehicle is equipped with (B) The platform is instrumented adjustable head restraints, each is ad- with an accelerometer and data proc- justed to its highest adjustment posi- essing system having a frequency re- tion. sponse of 60 Hz channel class as speci- (D) Movable vehicle windows and fied in Society of Automotive Engi- vents are, at the manufacturer’s op- neers Recommended Practice J211 tion, placed in the fully closed posi- JUN80 ‘‘Instrumentation for Impact tion. Tests.’’ The accelerometer sensitive (E) Convertibles and open-body type axis is parallel to the direction of test vehicles have the top, if any, in place platform travel. in the closed passenger compartment (ii) Specific vehicle. For built-in child configuration. restraint systems, an alternate test de- (F) Doors are fully closed and latched vice is the specific vehicle into which but not locked. the built-in system is fabricated. The (G) All instrumentation and data re- following test conditions apply to this duction is in conformance with SAE alternate test device. J211 JUN80. (A) The vehicle is loaded to its un- (b) The tests are frontal barrier im- loaded vehicle weight plus its rated pact simulations of the test platform cargo and luggage capacity weight, se- or frontal barrier crashes of the spe- cured in the luggage area, plus the ap- cific vehicles as specified in S5.1 of propriate child test dummy and, at the § 571.208 and for: vehicle manufacturer’s option, an (1) Test Configuration I, are at a ve- anthropomorphic test dummy which locity change of 48 km/h with the ac- conforms to the requirements of sub- celeration of the test platform entirely part B or subpart E of part 572 of this within the curve shown in Figure 2 (for title for a 50th percentile adult male child restraints manufactured before dummy placed in the front outboard August 1, 2005) or in Figure 2A (for seating position. If the built-in child child restraints manufactured on or restraint system is installed at one of after August 1, 2005), or for the specific

640

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00640 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

vehicle test with the deceleration pro- straint to the seat assembly as de- duced in a 48 km/h frontal barrier scribed below: crash. (1) Test configuration I. (2) Test Configuration II, are set at a (i) Child restraints other than belt-posi- velocity change of 32 km/h with the ac- tioning seats. Attach the child restraint celeration of the test platform entirely in any of the following manners speci- within the curve shown in Figure 3, or fied in S6.1.2(a)(1)(i)(A) through (D), for the specific vehicle test, with the unless otherwise specified in this deceleration produced in a 32 km/h standard. frontal barrier crash. (A) Install the child restraint system (c) As illustrated in Figures 1A and at the center seating position of the 1B of this standard, attached to the standard seat assembly, in accordance seat belt anchorage points provided on with the manufacturer’s instructions the standard seat assembly are Type 1 provided with the system pursuant to seat belt assemblies in the case of add- S5.6.1, except that the standard lap belt on child restraint systems other than is used and, if provided, a tether strap belt-positioning seats, or Type 2 seat may be used. For harnesses that bear belt assemblies in the case of belt-posi- the label shown in Figure 12 and that tioning seats. These seat belt assem- meet S5.3.1(b)(1) through S5.3.1(b)(3), blies meet the requirements of Stand- attach the harness in accordance with ard No. 209 (§ 571.209) and have webbing the manufacturer’s instructions pro- with a width of not more than 2 inches, vided with the system pursuant to and are attached to the anchorage S5.6.1, i.e., the seat back mount is used. points without the use of retractors or reels of any kind. As illustrated in Fig- (B) Except for a child harness, a backless child restraint system with a ures 1A’’ and 1B’’ of this standard, at- tached to the standard seat assembly is tether strap, and a restraint designed a child restraint anchorage system for use by physically handicapped chil- conforming to the specifications of dren, install the child restraint system Standard No. 225 (§ 571.225), in the case at the center seating position of the of add-on child restraint systems other standard seat assembly as in than belt-positioning booster seats. S6.1.2(a)(1)(i)(A), except that no tether (d)(1) When using the test dummies strap (or any other supplemental de- specified in 49 CFR Part 572, subparts vice) is used. C, I, J, or K, performance tests under (C) Install the child restraint system S6.1 are conducted at any ambient tem- using the child restraint anchorage perature from 19° C to 26° C and at any system at the center seating position relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 of the standard seat assembly in ac- percent. cordance with the manufacturer’s in- (2) When using the test dummies structions provided with the system specified in 49 CFR Part 572, subparts pursuant to S5.6.1. The tether strap, if N, P or R, performance tests under S6.1 one is provided, is attached to the teth- are conducted at any ambient tempera- er anchorage. ture from 20.6° C to 22.2° C and at any (D) Install the child restraint system relative humidity from 10 percent to 70 using only the lower anchorages of the percent. child restraint anchorage system as in (e) In the case of add-on child re- S6.1.2(a)(1)(i)(C). No tether strap (or straint systems, the restraint shall any other supplemental device) is used. meet the requirements of S5 at each of (ii) Belt-positioning seats. A belt-posi- its seat back angle adjustment posi- tioning seat is attached to either out- tions and restraint belt routing posi- board seating position of the standard tions, when the restraint is oriented in seat assembly in accordance with the the direction recommended by the manufacturer’s instructions provided manufacturer (e.g., forward, rearward with the system pursuant to S5.6.1 or laterally) pursuant to S5.6, and test- using only the standard vehicle lap and ed with the test dummy specified in S7. shoulder belt and no tether (or any S6.1.2 Dynamic test procedure. other supplemental device). (a) Activate the built-in child re- (iii) In the case of each built-in child straint or attach the add-on child re- restraint system, activate the restraint

641

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00641 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

in the specific vehicle shell or the spe- that bears the label shown in Figure 12 cific vehicle, in accordance with the and that meets S5.3.1(b)(i) through manufacturer’s instructions provided S5.3.1(b)(iii) are also tightened to a in accordance with S5.6.2. tension of not less than 53.5 N and not (2) Test configuration II. (i) In the case more than 67 N, by measurement of each add-on child restraint system means specified in this paragraph. which is equipped with a fixed or mov- (iii) When attaching a child restraint able surface described in S5.2.2.2, or a system to the tether anchorage and the backless child restraint system with a child restraint anchorage system on top anchorage strap, install the add-on the standard seat assembly, tighten all child restraint system at the center belt systems used to attach the re- seating position of the standard seat straint to the standard seat assembly assembly using only the standard seat to a tension of not less than 53.5 N and lap belt to secure the system to the not more than 67 N, as measured by a standard seat. load cell or other suitable means used (ii) In the case of each built-in child on the webbing portion of the belt. restraint system which is equipped (2) Add-on belt-positioning seats. with a fixed or movable surface de- (i) The lap portion of Type II belt scribed in S5.2.2.2, or a built-in booster systems used to attach the child re- seat with a top anchorage strap, acti- straint to the standard seat assembly vate the system in the specific vehicle is tightened to a tension of not less shell or the specific vehicle in accord- than 53.5 N and not more than 67 N, as ance with the manufacturer’s instruc- measured by a load cell used on the tions provided in accordance with webbing portion of the belt. S5.6.2. (ii) The shoulder portion of Type II (b) Select any dummy specified in S7 belt systems used to restrain the for testing systems for use by children dummy is tightened to a tension of not of the heights and weights for which less than 9 N and not more than 18 N, the system is recommended in accord- as measured by a load cell used on the ance with S5.5. The dummy is assem- webbing portion of the belt. bled, clothed and prepared as specified (3) Built-in child restraint systems. in S7 and S9 and Part 572 of this chap- (i) The lap portion of Type II belt ter, as appropriate. systems used to secure a dummy to the (c) Place the dummy in the child re- built-in child restraint system is tight- straint. Position it, and attach the ened to a tension of not less than 53.5 child restraint belts, if appropriate, as N and not more than 67 N, as measured specified in S10. by a load cell used on the webbing por- (d) Belt adjustment. tion of the belt. (1) Add-on systems other than belt-posi- (ii) The shoulder portion of Type II tioning seats. belt systems used to secure a child is (i) If appropriate, shoulder and pelvic tightened to a tension of not less than belts that directly restrain the dummy 9 N and not more than 18 N, as meas- shall be adjusted as follows: Tighten ured by a load cell used on the webbing the belts until a 9 N force applied (as il- portion of the belt. lustrated in figure 5) to the webbing at (iii) If provided, and if appropriate to the top of each dummy shoulder and to attach the child restraint belts under the pelvic webbing 50 mm on either S10, shoulder (other than the shoulder side of the torso midsagittal plane portion of a Type II vehicle belt sys- pulls the webbing 7 mm from the tem) and pelvic belts that directly re- dummy. strain the dummy shall be adjusted as (ii) All Type I belt systems used to follows: Tighten the belts until a 9 N attach an add-on child restraint sys- force applied (as illustrated in figure 5) tem to the standard seat assembly, and to the webbing at the top of each any provided additional anchorage belt dummy shoulder and to the pelvic web- (tether), are tightened to a tension of bing 50 mm on either side of the torso not less than 53.5 N and not more than midsagittal plane pulls the webbing 7 67 N, as measured by a load cell used on mm from the dummy. the webbing portion of the belt. All (e) Accelerate the test platform to belt systems used to attach a harness simulate frontal impact in accordance

642

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00642 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

with Test Configuration I or II, as ap- sling to each wrist and ankle of the propriate. test dummy in the manner illustrated (f) Determine conformance with the in Figure 4, without disturbing the requirements in S5.1. belted dummy and the child restraint S6.2 Buckle release test procedure. system. The belt assembly buckles used in S6.2.3 Pull the sling tied to the any child restraint system shall be dummy restrained in the child re- tested in accordance with S6.2.1 straint system and apply the following through S6.2.4 inclusive. force: 50 N for a system tested with a S6.2.1 Before conducting the testing newborn dummy; 90 N for a system specified in S6.1, place the loaded buck- tested with a 9-month-old dummy; 90 N le on a hard, flat, horizontal surface. for a system tested with a 12-month-old Each belt end of the buckle shall be dummy; 200 N for a system tested with pre-loaded in the following manner. a 3-year-old dummy; or 270 N for a sys- The anchor end of the buckle shall be tem tested with a 6-year-old dummy; or loaded with a 9 N force in the direction 350 N for a system tested with a away from the buckle. In the case of weighted 6-year-old dummy. The force buckles designed to secure a single is applied in the manner illustrated in latch plate, the belt latch plate end of Figure 4 and as follows: the buckle shall be pre-loaded with a 9 (a) Add-on Child Restraints. For an N force in the direction away from the add-on child restraint other than a car buckle. In the case of buckles designed bed, apply the specified force by pull- to secure two or more latch plates, the ing the sling horizontally and parallel belt latch plate ends of the buckle shall to the SORL of the standard seat as- be loaded equally so that the total load sembly. For a car bed, apply the force is 9 N, in the direction away from the by pulling the sling vertically. buckle. For pushbutton-release buck- (b) Built-in Child Restraints. For a les, the release force shall be applied built-in child restraint other than a car by a conical surface (cone angle not ex- bed, apply the force by pulling the ceeding 90 degrees). For pushbutton-re- sling parallel to the longitudinal cen- lease mechanisms with a fixed edge (re- ter line of the specific vehicle shell or ferred to in Figure 7 as ‘‘hinged but- the specific vehicle. In the case of a car ton’’), the release force shall be applied bed, apply the force by pulling the at the centerline of the button, 3 mm sling vertically. away from the movable edge directly S6.2.4 While applying the force spec- opposite the fixed edge, and in the di- ified in S6.2.3, and using the device rection that produces maximum releas- shown in Figure 8 for pushbutton-re- ing effect. For pushbutton-release lease buckles, apply the release force mechanisms with no fixed edge (re- in the manner and location specified in ferred to in Figure 7 as ‘‘floating but- S6.2.1, for that type of buckle. Measure ton’’), the release force shall be applied the force required to release the buck- at the center of the release mechanism le. in the direction that produces the max- S6.3 Head impact protection—energy imum releasing effect. For all other absorbing material test procedure. buckle release mechanisms, the force S6.3.1 Prepare and test specimens of shall be applied on the centerline of the energy absorbing material used to the buckle lever or finger tab in the di- comply with S5.2.3 in accordance with rection that produces the maximum re- the applicable 25 percent compression- leasing effect. Measure the force re- deflection test described in the Amer- quired to release the buckle. Figure 7 ican Society for Testing and Materials illustrates the loading for the different (ASTM) Standard D1056–73, ‘‘Standard buckles and the point where the release Specification for Flexible Cellular Ma- force should be applied, and Figure 8 il- terials—Sponge or Expanded Rubber,’’ lustrates the conical surface used to or D1564–71 ‘‘Standard Method of Test- apply the release force to pushbutton- ing Flexible Cellular Materials—Slab release buckles. Urethane Foam’’ or D1565–76 ‘‘Standard S6.2.2 After completion of the test- Specification for Flexible Cellular Ma- ing specified in S6.1 and before the terials—Vinyl Chloride Polymer and buckle is unlatched, tie a self-adjusting Copolymer open-cell foams.’’ 643

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00643 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S7 Test dummies. (Subparts ref- cordance with S5.5 for use either by erenced in this section are of part 572 children in a specified mass range that of this chapter.) S7.1 Dummy selection. includes any children having a mass Select any dummy specified in S7.1.1, greater than 18 kg, or by children in a S7.1.2 or S7.1.3, as appropriate, for test- specified height range that includes ing systems for use by children of the any children whose height is greater height and mass for which the system than 1100 mm, is tested with a 6-year- is recommended in accordance with old child dummy conforming to part S5.5. A child restraint that meets the 572 subpart I. criteria in two or more of the following S7.1.2 Child restraints that are man- paragraphs in S7 may be tested with ufactured on or after August 1, 2005, are any of the test dummies specified in subject to the following provisions. those paragraphs. (a) A child restraint that is rec- S7.1.1 Child restraints that are man- ommended by its manufacturer in ac- ufactured before August 1, 2005, are cordance with S5.5 for use either by subject to the following provisions: children in a specified mass range that (a) A child restraint that is rec- includes any children having a mass of ommended by its manufacturer in ac- not greater than 5 kg, or by children in cordance with S5.5 for use either by a specified height range that includes children in a specified mass range that any children whose height is not great- includes any children having a mass of er than 650 mm, is tested with a new- not greater than 5 kg, or by children in born test dummy conforming to part a specified height range that includes 572 subpart K. any children whose height is not great- (b) A child restraint that is rec- er than 650 mm, is tested with a new- ommended by its manufacturer in ac- born test dummy conforming to part cordance with S5.5 for use either by 572 subpart K. children in a specified mass range that (b) A child restraint that is rec- includes any children having a mass ommended by its manufacturer in ac- greater than 5 but not greater than 10 cordance with S5.5 for use either by kg, or by children in a specified height children in a specified mass range that range that includes any children whose includes any children having a mass height is greater than 650 mm but not greater than 5 but not greater than 10 greater than 850 mm, is tested with a kg, or by children in a specified height newborn test dummy conforming to range that includes any children whose part 572 subpart K, and a 12-month-old height is greater than 650 mm but not test dummy conforming to part 572 greater than 850 mm, is tested with a subpart R. newborn test dummy conforming to (c) A child restraint that is rec- part 572 subpart K, and a 9-month-old ommended by its manufacturer in ac- test dummy conforming to part 572 cordance with S5.5 for use either by subpart J. children in a specified mass range that (c) A child restraint that is rec- includes any children having a mass ommended by its manufacturer in ac- greater than 10 kg but not greater than cordance with S5.5 for use either by 18 kg, or by children in a specified children in a specified mass range that height range that includes any children includes any children having a mass whose height is greater than 850 mm greater than 10 kg but not greater than but not greater than 1100 mm, is tested 18 kg, or by children in a specified with a 12-month-old test dummy con- height range that includes any children forming to part 572 subpart R, and a 3- whose height is greater than 850 mm year-old test dummy conforming to but not greater than 1100 mm, is tested part 572 subpart P and S7.2, provided, with a 9-month-old test dummy con- however, that the 12-month-old dummy forming to part 572 subpart J, and a 3- is not used to test a booster seat. year-old test dummy conforming to (d) A child restraint that is rec- part 572 subpart C and S7.2, provided, ommended by its manufacturer in ac- however, that the 9-month-old dummy cordance with S5.5 for use either by is not used to test a booster seat. children in a specified mass range that (d) A child restraint that is rec- includes any children having a mass ommended by its manufacturer in ac- greater than 18 kg, or by children in a

644

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00644 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

specified height range that includes the requirements at each of the re- any children whose height is greater straint’s seat back angle adjustment than 1100 mm, is tested with a 6-year- positions and restraint belt routing po- old child dummy conforming to part sitions, when the restraint is oriented 572 subpart N. in the direction recommended by the (e) A child restraint that is manufac- manufacturer (e.g., facing forward, tured on or August 1, 2005, that is rec- rearward or laterally) pursuant to S8.1, ommended by its manufacturer in ac- and tested with the test dummy speci- cordance with S5.5 for use either by fied in S7. If the manufacturer rec- children in a specified mass range that ommendations do not include instruc- includes any children having a mass tions for orienting the restraint in air- greater than 22.7 kg or by children in a craft when the restraint seat back specified height range that includes angle is adjusted to any position, posi- any children whose height is greater tion the restraint on the aircraft seat than 1100 mm is tested with a part 572 by following the instructions (provided subpart N dummy that is weighted to in accordance with S5.6) for orienting weigh 28.2 kg. the restraint in motor vehicles. S7.1.3 Voluntary use of alternative S8.2.1 A standard seat assembly con- dummies. At the manufacturer’s option sisting of a representative aircraft pas- (with said option irrevocably selected senger seat shall be positioned and ad- prior to, or at the time of, certification justed so that its horizontal and of the restraint), child restraint sys- vertical orientation and its seat back tems manufactured before August 1, angle are the same as shown in Figure 2005 may be tested to the requirements 6. of S5 while using the test dummies S8.2.2 The child restraint system specified in S7.1.2 according to the cri- shall be attached to the representative teria for selecting test dummies speci- aircraft passenger seat using, at the fied in that paragraph. Child restraints manufacturer’s option, any Federal manufactured on or after August 1, Aviation Administration approved air- 2005, must be tested using the test craft safety belt, according to the re- dummies specified in S7.1.2. straint manufacturer’s instructions for S8 Requirements, test conditions, and attaching the restraint to an aircraft procedures for child restraint systems seat. No supplementary anchorage manufactured for use in aircraft. Each belts or tether straps may be attached; child restraint system manufactured however, Federal Aviation Administra- for use in both motor vehicles and air- tion approved safety belt extensions craft must comply with all of the appli- may be used. cable requirements specified in Section S8.2.3 In accordance with S10, place S5 and with the additional require- in the child restraint any dummy spec- ments specified in S8.1 and S8.2. ified in S7 for testing systems for use S8.1 Installation instructions. Each by children of the heights and weights child restraint system manufactured for which the system is recommended for use in aircraft shall be accompanied in accordance with S5.5 and S8.1. by printed instructions in English that S8.2.4 If provided, shoulder and pel- provide a step-by-step procedure, in- vic belts that directly restrain the cluding diagrams, for installing the dummy shall be adjusted in accordance system in aircraft passenger seats, se- with S6.1.2. curing a child in the system when it is S8.2.5 The combination of represent- installed in aircraft, and adjusting the ative aircraft passenger seat, child re- system to fit the child. straint, and test dummy shall be ro- S8.2 Inversion test. When tested in tated forward around a horizontal axis accordance with S8.2.1 through S8.2.5, which is contained in the median each child restraint system manufac- transverse vertical plane of the seating tured for use in aircraft shall meet the surface portion of the aircraft seat and requirements of S8.2.1 through S8.2.6. is located 25 mm below the bottom of The manufacturer may, at its option, the seat frame, at a speed of 35 to 45 de- use any seat which is a representative grees per second, to an angle of 180 de- aircraft passenger seat within the grees. The rotation shall be stopped meaning of S4. Each system shall meet when it reaches that angle and the seat

645

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00645 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

shall be held in this position for three combined weight is not more than 0.25 seconds. The child restraint shall not kg. fall out of the aircraft safety belt nor (d) Hybrid II three-year-old and Hybrid shall the test dummy fall out of the II six-year-old dummies (49 CFR part 572, child restraint at any time during the subparts C and I). When used in testing rotation or the three second period. under this standard, the dummies spec- The specified rate of rotation shall be ified in 49 CFR part 572, subparts C and attained in not less than one half sec- I, are clothed in thermal knit, waffle- ond and not more than one second, and weave polyester and cotton underwear the rotating combination shall be or equivalent, a size 4 long-sleeved brought to a stop in not less than one shirt (3-year-old dummy) or a size 5 half second and not more than one sec- long-sleeved shirt (6-year-old dummy) ond. having a mass of 0.090 kg, a size 4 pair S8.2.6 Repeat the procedures set of long pants having a mass of 0.090 kg, forth in S8.2.1 through S8.2.4. The com- and cut off just far enough above the bination of the representative aircraft knee to allow the knee target to be passenger seat, child restraint, and test visible, and size 7M sneakers (3-year- dummy shall be rotated sideways old dummy) or size 121⁄2M sneakers (6- around a horizontal axis which is con- year-old dummy) with rubber toe caps, tained in the median longitudinal uppers of dacron and cotton or nylon vertical plane of the seating surface and a total mass of 0.453 kg. portion of the aircraft seat and is lo- (e) Hybrid III 3-year-old dummy (49 cated 25 mm below the bottom of the CFR Part 572, Subpart P). When used in seat frame, at a speed of 35 to 45 de- testing under this standard, the grees per second, to an angle of 180 de- dummy specified in 49 CFR part 572, grees. The rotation shall be stopped subpart P, is clothed in thermal knit, when it reaches that angle and the seat waffle-weave polyester and cotton un- shall be held in this position for three derwear or equivalent, a size 4 long- seconds. The child restraint shall not sleeved shirt (3-year-old dummy) or a fall out of the aircraft safety belt nor size 5 long-sleeved shirt (6-year-old shall the test dummy fall out of the dummy) having a mass of 0.090 kg, a child restraint at any time during the size 4 pair of long pants having a mass rotation or the three second period. of 0.090 kg, and cut off just far enough above the knee to allow the knee tar- The specified rate of rotation shall be get to be visible, and size 7M sneakers attained in not less than one half sec- with rubber toe caps, uppers of dacron ond and not more than one second, and and cotton or nylon and a total mass of the rotating combination shall be 0.453 kg. brought to a stop in not less than one (f) Hybrid III 6-year-old dummy (49 half second and not more than one sec- CFR Part 572, Subpart N) and Hybrid III ond. weighted 6-year-old dummy. When used S9 Dummy clothing and preparation. in testing under this standard, the S9.1 Type of clothing. dummy specified in 49 CFR part 572, (a) Newborn dummy. When used in subpart N, weighted and unweighted, is testing under this standard, the clothed in a light-weight cotton dummy is unclothed. stretch short-sleeve shirt and above- (b) Nine-month-old dummy. When used the-knee pants, and size 121⁄2 M sneak- in testing under this standard, the ers with rubber toe caps, uppers of da- dummy is clothed in terry cloth poly- cron and cotton or nylon and a total ester and cotton size 1 long sleeve shirt mass of 0.453 kg. and size 1 long pants, with a total mass S9.2 Preparing clothing. Clothing of 0.136 kg. other than the shoes is machined- (c) 12-month-old dummy (49 CFR Part washed in 71 °C to 82 °C and machine- 572, Subpart R). When used in testing dried at 49 °C to 60 °C for 30 minutes. under this standard, the dummy speci- S9.3 Preparing dummies. (Subparts fied in 49 CFR part 572, subparts R, is referenced in this section are of Part clothed in a cotton-polyester based 572 of this chapter.) tight fitting sweat shirt with long S9.3.1 When using the test dummies sleeves and ankle long pants whose conforming to Part 572 Subpart C, I, J,

646

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00646 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

or K, prepare the dummies as specified (i) Coincident with the center SORL in this paragraph. Before being used in of the standard seating assembly, in testing under this standard, dummies the case of the add-on child restraint must be conditioned at any ambient system, or temperature from 19 °C to 25.5 °C and at (ii) Vertical and parallel to the longi- any relative humidity from 10 percent tudinal center line of the specific vehi- to 70 percent, for at least 4 hours. cle shell or the specific vehicle, in the S9.3.2 When using the test dummies case of a built-in child restraint sys- conforming to Part 572 Subparts N tem. (weighted and unweighted), P, or R, (2) When testing rear-facing child re- prepare the dummies as specified in straint systems, place the newborn, 9- this paragraph. Before being used in month-old or 12-month-old dummy in testing under this standard, dummies the child restraint system so that the must be conditioned at any ambient back of the dummy torso contacts the temperature from 20.6 °C to 22.2 °C and back support surface of the system. at any relative humidity from 10 per- For a child restraint system which is cent to 70 percent, for at least 4 hours. equipped with a fixed or movable sur- S10 Positioning the dummy and at- face described in S5.2.2.2 which is being taching the system belts. tested under the conditions of test con- S10.1 Car beds. Place the test figuration II, do not attach any of the dummy in the car bed in the supine po- child restraint belts unless they are an sition with its midsagittal plane per- integral part of the fixed or movable pendicular to the center SORL of the surface. For all other child restraint standard seat assembly, in the case of systems and for a child restraint sys- an add-on car bed, or perpendicular to tem with a fixed or movable surface the longitudinal axis of the specific ve- which is being tested under the condi- hicle shell or the specific vehicle, in tions of test configuration I, attach all the case of a built-in car bed. Position appropriate child restraint belts and the dummy within the car bed in ac- tighten them as specified in S6.1.2. At- cordance with the instructions for tach all appropriate vehicle belts and child positioning that the bed manufac- tighten them as specified in S6.1.2. Po- turer provided with the bed in accord- sition each movable surface in accord- ance with S5.6. ance with the instructions that the S10.2 Restraints other than car beds. manufacturer provided under S5.6.1 or S10.2.1 Newborn dummy and nine- S5.6.2. If the dummy’s head does not re- month-old dummy. Position the test main in the proper position, tape it dummy according to the instructions against the front of the seat back sur- for child positioning that the manufac- face of the system by means of a single turer provided with the system under thickness of 6 mm-wide paper masking S5.6.1 or S5.6.2, while conforming to the tape placed across the center of the following: dummy’s face. (a) Prior to placing the 9-month-old (c)(1)(i) When testing forward-facing test dummy in the child restraint sys- child restraint systems, extend the tem, place the dummy in the supine po- arms of the 9-month-old or 12-month- sition on a horizontal surface. While old test dummy as far as possible in placing a hand on the center of the the upward vertical direction. Extend torso to prevent movement of the the legs of the 9-month-old or 12- dummy torso, rotate the dummy legs month-old test dummy as far as pos- upward by lifting the feet 90 degrees. sible in the forward horizontal direc- Slowly release the legs but do not re- tion, with the dummy feet perpen- turn them to the flat surface. dicular to the centerline of the lower (b)(1) When testing forward-facing legs. Using a flat square surface with child restraint systems, holding the 9- an area of 2,580 square mm, apply a month-old test dummy torso upright force of 178 N, perpendicular to: until it contacts the system’s design (A) The plane of the back of the seating surface, place the 9-month-old standard seat assembly, in the case of test dummy in the seated position an add-on system, or within the system with the mid-sag- (B) The back of the vehicle seat in ittal plane of the dummy head— the specific vehicle shell or the specific

647

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00647 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

vehicle, in the case of a built-in sys- in accordance with S5.6.1 or S5.6.2, tem, first against the dummy crotch while conforming to the following: and then at the dummy thorax in the (a) Holding the test dummy torso up- midsagittal plane of the dummy. For a right until it contacts the system’s de- child restraint system with a fixed or sign seating surface, place the test movable surface described in S5.2.2.2, dummy in the seated position within which is being tested under the condi- the system with the midsagittal plane tions of test configuration II, do not of the test dummy head— attach any of the child restraint belts (1) Coincident with the center SORL unless they are an integral part of the of the standard seating assembly, in fixed or movable surface. For all other the case of the add-on child restraint child restraint systems and for a child system, or restraint system with a fixed or mov- (2) Vertical and parallel to the longi- able surface which is being tested tudinal center line of the specific vehi- under the conditions of test configura- cle, in the case of a built-in child re- tion I, attach all appropriate child re- straint system. straint belts and tighten them as speci- (b) Extend the arms of the test fied in S6.1.2. Attach all appropriate dummy as far as possible in the upward vehicle belts and tighten them as spec- vertical direction. Extend the legs of ified in S6.1.2. Position each movable the dummy as far as possible in the for- surface in accordance with the instruc- ward horizontal direction, with the tions that the manufacturer provided dummy feet perpendicular to the cen- under S5.6.1 or S5.6.2. ter line of the lower legs. (ii) After the steps specified in para- (c) Using a flat square surface with graph (c)(1)(i) of this section, rotate an area of 2580 square millimeters, each dummy limb downwards in the apply a force of 178 N, perpendicular to: plane parallel to the dummy’s (1) The plane of the back of the midsagittal plane until the limb con- standard seat assembly, in the case of tacts a surface of the child restraint an add-on system, or system or the standard seat assembly, (2) The back of the vehicle seat in the in the case of an add-on system, or the specific vehicle shell or the specific ve- specific vehicle shell or specific vehi- hicle, in the case of a built-in system, cle, in the case of a built-in system, as first against the dummy crotch and appropriate. Position the limbs, if nec- then at the dummy thorax in the essary, so that limb placement does midsagittal plane of the dummy. For a not inhibit torso or head movement in child restraint system with a fixed or tests conducted under S6. movable surface described in S5.2.2.2, (2) When testing rear-facing child re- which is being tested under the condi- straint systems, extend the dummy’s tions of test configuration II, do not arms vertically upwards and then ro- attach any of the child restraint belts tate each arm downward toward the unless they are an integral part of the dummy’s lower body until the arm con- fixed or movable surface. For all other tacts a surface of the child restraint child restraint systems and for a child system or the standard seat assembly restraint system with a fixed or mov- in the case of an add-on child restraint able surface which is being tested system, or the specific vehicle shell or under the conditions of test configura- the specific vehicle, in the case of a tion I, attach all appropriate child re- built-in child restraint system. Ensure straint belts and tighten them as speci- that no arm is restrained from move- fied in S6.1.2. Attach all appropriate ment in other than the downward di- vehicle belts and tighten them as spec- rection, by any part of the system or ified in S6.1.2. Position each movable the belts used to anchor the system to surface in accordance with the instruc- the standard seat assembly, the spe- tions that the manufacturer provided cific shell, or the specific vehicle. under S5.6.1 or S5.6.2. S10.2.2 Three-year-old and six-year- (d) After the steps specified in para- old test dummy. Position the test graph (c) of this section, rotate each dummy according to the instructions dummy limb downwards in the plane for child positioning that the restraint parallel to the dummy’s midsagittal manufacturer provided with the system plane until the limb contacts a surface

648

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00648 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

of the child restraint system or the Position the limbs, if necessary, so standard seat assembly, in the case of that limb placement does not inhibit an add-on system, or the specific vehi- torso or head movement in tests con- cle shell or specific vehicle, in the case ducted under S6. of a built-in system, as appropriate.

649

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00649 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER18jn03.012 § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

650

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00650 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER05MR99.001 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

651

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00651 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.012 § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

652

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00652 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.013 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

653

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00653 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.100 § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

654

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00654 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.101 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

655

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00655 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER18jn03.013 § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

656

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00656 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.102 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

657

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00657 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.103 § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

658

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00658 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.104 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

659

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00659 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.105 § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

660

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00660 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.106 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

661

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00661 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.107 § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

662

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00662 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.108 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

663

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00663 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.109 § 571.213 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

664

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00664 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27NO96.014 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.213

665

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00665 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER05MR99.004 § 571.214 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

[44 FR 72147, Dec. 13, 1979]

EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER citations affecting § 571.213, see the List of CFR Sections Affected in the Finding Aids section of this volume.

EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 69 FR 42601, July S9.1 * * * 16, 2004, § 571.213 was amended by revising (f) Hybrid III 6-year-old dummy (49 CFR Part S5(d), S7.1.2(e), S9.1(f) and S9.3.2, and remov- 572, Subpart N) and Hybrid III 6-year-old ing S7.1.1(e), effective Jan. 12, 2005. For the weighted dummy (49 CFR Part 572, Subpart S). convenience of the user, the revised text is When used in testing under this standard, set forth as follows: the dummies specified in 49 CFR Part 572, Subpart N and Subpart S, are clothed in a § 571.213 Standard No. 213; Child restraint light-weight cotton stretch short-sleeve systems. shirt and above-the-knee pants, and size 121⁄2 M sneakers with rubber toe caps, uppers of * * * * * dacron and cotton or nylon and a total mass S5*** of 0.453 kg. (d) Each child restraint tested with a Part 572 Subpart S dummy need not meet S5.1.2 * * * * * and S5.1.3. S9.3.2 When using the test dummies con- forming to Part 572 Subparts N, P, R, or S, * * * * * prepare the dummies as specified in this S7.1.2 * * * paragraph. Before being used in testing (e) A child restraint that is manufactured under this standard, dummies must be condi- on or after August 1, 2005, that is rec- tioned at any ambient temperature from ommended by its manufacturer in accord- 20.6° to 22.2 °C and at any relative humidity ance with S5.5 for use either by children in a from 10 percent to 70 percent, for at least 4 specified mass range that includes any chil- hours. dren having a mass greater than 22.7 kg or by children in a specified height range that in- * * * * * cludes any children whose erect standing height is greater than 1100 mm is tested with a part 572 subpart S dummy. § 571.214 Standard No. 214; Side im- pact protection. * * * * * S1. Scope and purpose.

666

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00666 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER09MR04.023 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.214

(a) Scope. This standard specifies per- hicle, truck and bus manufactured on formance requirements for protection or after September 1, 1994 shall be able of occupants in side impact crashes. to meet the requirements of either, at (b) Purpose. The purpose of this the manufacturer’s option, S3.1 or S3.2, standard is to reduce the risk of seri- when any of its side doors that can be ous and fatal injury to occupants of used for occupant egress is tested ac- passenger cars, multipurpose passenger cording to S4. vehicles, trucks and buses in side im- (b) When tested under the conditions pact crashes by specifying vehicle of S6, each passenger car manufactured crashworthiness requirements in terms on or after September 1, 1996, shall of accelerations measured on meet the requirements of S5.1, S5.2, anthropomorphic dummies in test and S5.3 in a 53 ± 1.0 km/h impact in crashes, by specifying strength require- which the car is struck on either side ments for side doors, and by other by a moving deformable barrier. 49 means. CFR part 572, subpart F test dummies S2. This standard applies to— are placed in front and rear outboard (a) Passenger cars; seating position on the struck side of (b) Effective September 1, 1993, sec- the car. However, the rear seat require- tions S3(a), S3(e), S3.1 through S3.2.3, ments do not apply to passenger cars and S4 of the standard apply to multi- with a wheelbase greater than 3,300 purpose passenger vehicles, trucks, and mm, or to passenger cars that have buses with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or rear seating areas that are so small less, except for walk-in vans; and that 49 CFR part 572, subpart F test (c) Effective September 1, 1998, sec- dummies cannot be accommodated ac- tions S3(f) and S5 of the standard apply cording to the positioning procedure to multipurpose passenger vehicles, specified in S7. trucks and buses with a GVWR of 6,000 (c)–(d) [Reserved] pounds or less, except for walk-in vans, (e) A vehicle need not meet the re- motor homes, tow trucks, dump quirements of sections S3.1 or S3.2 trucks, ambulances and other emer- for— gency rescue/medical vehicles (includ- (1) Any side door located so that no ing vehicles with fire-fighting equip- point on a ten-inch horizontal longitu- ment), vehicles equipped with wheel- dinal line passing through and bisected chair lifts, and vehicles which have no by the H-point of a manikin placed in doors or exclusively have doors that any seat, with the seat adjusted to any are designed to be easily attached or position and the seat back adjusted as removed so the vehicle can be operated specified in Section S6.4, falls within without doors. the transverse, horizontal projection of S2.1 Definitions. the door’s opening, Contoured means, with respect to a (2) Any side door located so that no door, that the lower portion of its front point on a ten-inch horizontal longitu- or rear edge is curved upward, typi- dinal line passing through and bisected cally to conform to a wheel well. by the H-point of a manikin placed in Double side doors means a pair of any seat recommended by the manufac- hinged doors with the lock and latch turer for installation in a location for mechanisms located where the door which seat anchorage hardware is pro- lips overlap. vided, with the seat adjusted to any po- Walk-in van means a van in which a sition and the seat back adjusted as person can enter the occupant com- specified in section S6.4, falls within partment in an upright position. the transverse, horizontal projection of S3. Requirements. (a)(1) Except as pro- the door’s opening, vided in section S3(e), each passenger (3) Any side door located so that a car shall be able to meet the require- portion of a seat, with the seat ad- ments of either, at the manufacturer’s justed to any position and the seat option, S3.1 or S3.2, when any of its back adjusted as specified in section side doors that can be used for occu- S6.4, falls within the transverse, hori- pant egress is tested according to S4. zontal protection of the door’s opening, (2) Except as provided in section but a longitudinal vertical plane tan- S3(e), each multipurpose passenger ve- gent to the outboard side of the seat

667

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00667 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.214 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

cushion is more than 10 inches from vertical position to which they can be the innermost point on the inside sur- adjusted and at any seat back angle to face of the door at a height between which they can be adjusted, each vehi- the H-point and shoulder reference cle must be able to meet the require- point (as shown in figure 1 of the Fed- ments of S3.2.1 through S3.2.3. eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard S3.2.1 Initial crush resistance. The No. 210) and longitudinally between the initial crush resistance shall not be front edge of the cushion with the seat less than 2,250 pounds. adjusted to its forwardmost position S3.2.2 Intermediate crush resistance. and the rear edge of the cushion with The intermediate crush resistance the seat adjusted to its rearmost posi- shall not be less than 4,375 pounds. tion. S3.2.3 Peak crush resistance. The (4) Any side door that is designed to peak crush resistance shall not be less be easily attached to or removed (e.g., than three and one half times the curb using simple hand tools such as pliers weight of the vehicle or 12,000 pounds, and/or a screw driver) from a motor ve- whichever is less. hicle manufactured for operation with- S4. Test procedures. The following pro- out doors. cedures apply to determining compli- (f) When tested according to the con- ance with paragraph S3: ditions of S6, each multipurpose pas- (a) Place side windows in their upper- senger vehicle, truck, and bus manu- most position and all doors in locked factured on or after September 1, 1998, position. Place the sill of the side of shall meet the requirements of S5.1, the vehicle opposite to the side being S5.2, and S5.3 in a 53 ± 1.0 km/h impact tested against a rigid unyielding in which the vehicle is struck on either vertical surface. Fix the vehicle rigidly side by a moving deformable barrier. A in position by means of tiedown at- 49 CFR part 572, subpart F test dummy tachments located at or forward of the is placed in the front outboard seating front wheel centerline and at or rear- position on the struck side of the vehi- ward of the rear wheel centerline. cle, and if the vehicle is equipped with (b) Prepare a loading device con- rear seats, then another 49 CFR part sisting of a rigid steel cylinder or 572, subpart F test dummy is placed in semicylinder 305 mm (12 inches) in di- the outboard seating position of the ameter with an edge radius of 13 mm second seat on the struck side of the (1⁄2 inch). The length of the loading de- vehicle. However, the second seat re- vice shall be such that— quirements do not apply to side-facing (1) For doors with windows, the top seats or to vehicles that are so small surface of the loading device is at least that the 49 CFR part 572, subpart F test 13 mm (1⁄2 inch) above the bottom edge dummy cannot be accommodated ac- of the door window opening but not of cording to the procedure specified in a length that will cause contact with S7. any structure above the bottom edge of S3.1 With any seats that may affect the door window opening during the load upon or deflection of the side of test. the vehicle removed from the vehicle, (2) For doors without windows, the each vehicle must be able to meet the top surface of the loading device is at requirements of S3.1.1 through S3.1.3. the same height above the ground as S3.1.1 Initial crush resistance. The when the loading device is positioned initial crush resistance shall not be in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of less than 2,250 pounds. this section for purposes of testing a S3.1.2 Intermediate crush resistance. front door with windows on the same The intermediate crush resistance vehicle. shall not be less than 3,500 pounds. (c) Locate the loading device as S3.1.3 Peak crush resistance. The shown in Figure 1 (side view) of this peak crush resistance shall not be less section so that— than two times the curb weight of the (1) Its longitudinal axis is vertical. vehicle or 7,000 pounds, whichever is (2) Except as provided in paragraphs less. (c)(2) (i) and (ii) of this section, its lon- S3.2 With seats installed in the vehi- gitudinal axis is laterally opposite the cle, and located in any horizontal or midpoint of a horizontal line drawn

668

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00668 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.214

across the outer surface of the door 127 (ii) For double side doors, its bottom mm (5 inches) above the lowest point of surface is in the same horizontal plane the door, exclusive of any decorative or as a horizontal line drawn across the protective molding that is not perma- outer surface of the double door span, nently affixed to the door panel. 127 mm (5 inches) above the lowest (i) For contoured doors on trucks, point of the doors, exclusive of any dec- buses, and multipurpose passenger ve- orative or protective molding that is hicles with a GVWR of 4,545 kg (10,000 not permanently affixed to the door pounds) or less, if the length of the hor- panel. izontal line specified in (c)(2) is not (d) Using the loading device, apply a equal to or greater than 559 mm (22 load to the outer surface of the door in inches), the line is moved vertically up an inboard direction normal to a the side of the door to the point at vertical plane along the vehicle’s longi- which the line is 559 mm (22 inches) tudinal centerline. Apply the load con- long. The longitudinal axis of the load- tinuously such that the loading device ing device is then located laterally op- travel rate does not exceed one-half posite the midpoint of that line. inch per second until the loading de- vice travels 18 inches. Guide the load- (ii) For double side doors on trucks, ing device to prevent it from being ro- buses, and multipurpose passenger ve- tated or displaced from its direction of hicles with a GVWR of 4,545 kg (10,000 travel. The test must be completed pounds) or less, its longitudinal axis is within 120 seconds. laterally opposite the midpoint of a (e) Record applied load versus dis- horizontal line drawn across the outer placement of the loading device, either surface of the double door span, 127 mm continuously or in increments of not (5 inches) above the lowest point on the more than 1 inch or 200 pounds for the doors, exclusive of any decorative or entire crush distance of 18 inches. protective molding that is not perma- (f) Determine the initial crush resist- nently affixed to the door panel. ance, intermediate crush resistance, (3) Except as provided in paragraphs and peak crush resistance as follows: (c)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section, its bot- (1) From the results recorded in para- tom surface is in the same horizontal graph (e) of this section, plot a curve of plane as the horizontal line drawn load versus displacement and obtain across the outer surface of the door 127 the integral of the applied load with re- mm (5 inches) above the lowest point of spect to the crush distances specified the door, exclusive of any decorative or in paragraphs (f) (2) and (3) of this sec- protective molding that is not perma- tion. These quantities, expressed in nently affixed to the door panel. inch-pounds and divided by the speci- (i) For contoured doors on trucks, fied crush distances, represent the av- buses, and multipurpose passenger ve- erage forces in pounds required to de- hicles with a GVWR of 4,545 kg (10,000 flect the door those distances. pounds) or less, its bottom surface is in (2) The initial crush resistance is the the lowest horizontal plane such that average force required to deform the every point on the lateral projection of door over the initial 6 inches of crush. the bottom surface of the device on the (3) The intermediate crush resistance door is at least 127 mm (5 inches), hori- is the average force required to deform zontally and vertically, from any edge the door over the initial 12 inches of of the door panel, exclusive of any dec- crush. orative or protective molding that is (4) The peak crush resistance is the not permanently affixed to the door largest force recorded over the entire panel. 18-inch crush distance.

669

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00669 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.214 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S5. Dynamic performance requirements. or lower rib, expressed in g’s and the S5.1 Thorax. The Thoracic Trauma term ‘‘GLS’’ is the lower spine (T12) peak Index (TTI(d)) shall not exceed: acceleration, expressed in g’s. The peak (a) 85 g for a passenger car with four acceleration values are obtained in ac- side doors, and for any multipurpose cordance with the procedure specified passenger vehicle, truck, or bus; and, in S6.13.5. S5.2 Pelvis. The peak lateral accel- (b) 90 g for a passenger car with two eration of the pelvis, as measured in side doors, when calculated in accord- accordance with S6.13.5, shall not ex- ance with the following formula: ceed 130 g’s.

TTI(d) = 1/2 (GR + GLS) S5.3 Door opening. S5.3.1 Any side door, which is struck The term ‘‘GR’’ is the greater of the by the moving deformable barrier, peak accelerations of either the upper shall not separate totally from the car.

670

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00670 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.110 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.214

S5.3.2 Any door (including a rear centered over the longitudinal center- hatchback or tailgate), which is not line of the vehicle. The pretest vehicle struck by the moving deformable bar- attitude is equal to either the as deliv- rier, shall meet the following require- ered or fully loaded attitude or be- ments: tween the as delivered attitude and the S5.3.2.1 The door shall not disengage fully loaded attitude. from the latched position; S6.3 Adjustable seats. Adjustable S5.3.2.2 The latch shall not separate seats are placed in the adjustment po- from the striker, and the hinge compo- sition midway between the forward nents shall not separate from each most and rearmost positions, and if other or from their attachment to the separately adjustable in a vertical di- vehicle. rection, are at the lowest position. If S5.3.2.3 Neither the latch nor the an adjustment position does not exist hinge systems of the door shall pull out midway between the forwardmost and of their anchorages. rearmost positions, the closest adjust- S6. Test conditions. ment position to the rear of the mid- S6.1 Test weight. Each vehicle is point is used. loaded to its unloaded vehicle weight, S6.4 Adjustable seat back placement. plus 300 pounds or its rated cargo and Place adjustable seat backs in the luggage capacity (whichever is less), manufacturer’s nominal design riding secured in the luggage or load-carrying position in the manner specified by the area, plus the weight of the necessary manufacturer. If the position is not anthropomorphic test dummies. Any specified, set the seat back at the first added test equipment is located away detent rearward of 25° from the from impact areas in secure places in vertical. Place each adjustable head re- the vehicle. The vehicle’s fuel system straint in its highest adjustment posi- is filled in accordance with the fol- tion. Position adjustable lumbar sup- lowing procedure. With the test vehicle ports so that they are set in their re- on a level surface, pump the fuel from leased, i.e., full back position. the vehicle’s fuel tank and then oper- ate the engine until it stops. Then, add S6.5 Adjustable steering wheels. Ad- Stoddard solvent to the test vehicle’s justable steering controls are adjusted fuel tank in an amount which is equal so that the steering wheel hub is at the to not less than 92 percent and not geometric center of the locus it de- more than 94 percent of the fuel tank’s scribes when it is moved through its usable capacity stated by the vehicle’s full range of driving positions. manufacturer. In addition, add the S6.6 Windows. Movable vehicle win- amount of Stoddard solvent needed to dows and vents are placed in the fully fill the entire fuel system from the fuel closed position on the struck side of tank through the engine’s induction the vehicle. system. S6.7 Convertible tops. Convertibles S6.2 Vehicle test attitude. Determine and open-body type vehicles have the the distance between a level surface top, if any, in place in the closed pas- and a standard reference point on the senger compartment configuration. test vehicle’s body, directly above each S6.8 Doors. Doors, including any wheel opening, when the vehicle is in rear hatchback or tailgate, are fully its ‘‘as delivered’’ condition. The ‘‘as de- closed and latched but not locked. livered’’ condition is the vehicle as re- S6.9 Transmission and brake engage- ceived at the test site, filled to 100 per- ment. For a vehicle equipped with a cent of all fluid capacities and with all manual transmission, the transmission tires inflated to the manufacturer’s is placed in second gear. For a vehicle specifications listed on the vehicle’s equipped with an automatic trans- tire placard. Determine the distance mission, the transmission is placed in between the same level surface and the neutral. For all vehicles, the parking same standard reference points in the brake is engaged. vehicle’s ‘‘fully loaded condition.’’ The S6.10 Moving deformable barrier. The ‘‘fully loaded condition’’ is the test ve- moving deformable barrier conforms to hicle loaded in accordance with S6.1. the dimensions shown in Figure 2 and The load placed in the cargo area is specified in part 587.

671

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00671 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.214 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S6.11 Impact reference line. Place a procedure when asked by the agency, vertical reference line at the location the agency may locate the impact ref- described below on the side of the vehi- erence line using either procedure. cle that will be struck by the moving S6.12 Impact configuration. The test deformable barrier: vehicle (vehicle A in Figure 3) is sta- S6.11.1 Passenger cars. tionary. The line of forward motion of (a) For vehicles with a wheelbase of the moving deformable barrier (vehicle 114 inches or less, 37 inches forward of B in Figure 3) forms an angle of 63 de- the center of the vehicle’s wheelbase. grees with the centerline of the test ve- (b) For vehicles with a wheelbase hicle. The longitudinal centerline of greater than 114 inches, 20 inches rear- the moving deformable barrier is per- ward of the centerline of the vehicle’s pendicular to the longitudinal center- front axle. line of the test vehicle when the bar- S6.11.2 Multipurpose passenger vehi- rier strikes the test vehicle. In a test cles, trucks and buses. in which the test vehicle is to be (a) For vehicles with a wheelbase of struck on its left (right) side: All 98 inches or less, 12 inches rearward of wheels of the moving deformable bar- the centerline of the vehicle’s front rier are positioned at an angle of 27 ±1 axle, except as otherwise specified in degrees to the right (left) of the center- paragraph (d) of this section. line of the moving deformable barrier; (b) For vehicles with a wheelbase of and the left (right) forward edge of the greater than 98 inches but not greater moving deformable barrier is aligned than 114 inches, 37 inches forward of so that a longitudinal plane tangent to the center of the vehicle’s wheelbase, that side passes through the impact except as otherwise specified in para- reference line within a tolerance of ±2 graph (d) of this section. inches when the barrier strikes the test (c) For vehicles with a wheelbase vehicle. greater than 114 inches, 20 inches rear- S6.13 Anthropomorphic test dummies. ward of the centerline of the vehicle’s S6.13.1 The anthropomorphic test front axle, except as otherwise speci- fied in paragraph (d) of this section. dummies used for evaluation of a vehi- (d) At the manufacturer’s option, for cle’s side impact protection conform to different wheelbase versions of the the requirements of subpart F of part same model vehicle, the impact ref- 572 of this chapter. In a test in which erence line may be located by the fol- the test vehicle is to be struck on its lowing: left side, each dummy is to be config- (1) Select the shortest wheelbase ve- ured and instrumented to be struck on hicle of the different wheelbase its left side, in accordance with subpart versions of the same model and locate F of part 572. In a test in which the test on it the impact reference line at the vehicle is to be struck on its right side, location described in (a), (b) or (c) of each dummy is to be configured and in- this section, as appropriate; strumented to be struck on its right (2) Measure the distance between the side, in accordance with subpart F of seating reference point (SgRP) and the part 572. impact reference line; S6.13.2 Each part 572, subpart F test (3) Maintain the same distance be- dummy specified is clothed in formfit- tween the SgRP and the impact ref- ting cotton stretch garments with erence line for the version being tested short sleeves and midcalf length pants. as that between the SgRP and the im- Each foot of the test dummy is pact reference line for the shortest equipped with a size 11EEE shoe, which wheelbase version of the model. meets the configuration size, sole, and (e) For the compliance test, the im- heel thickness specifications of MIL–S– pact reference line will be located 13192 (1976) and weighs 1.25 ±0.2 pounds. using the procedure used by the manu- S6.13.3 Limb joints are set at be- facturer as the basis for its certifi- tween 1 and 2 g’s. Leg joints are ad- cation of compliance with the require- justed with the torso in the supine po- ments of this standard. If the manufac- sition. turer did not use any of the procedures S6.13.4 The stabilized temperature in this section, or does not specify a of the test dummy at the time of the

672

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00672 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.214

side impact test shall be at any tem- S6.13.5.3 Remove the bias from the perature between 66 degrees F. and 78 subsampled data, and degrees F. S6.13.5.4 Filter the data with the S6.13.5 The acceleration data from FIR100 software specified in 49 CFR the accelerometers mounted on the 572.44(d), which has the following char- ribs, spine and pelvis of the test acteristics— dummy are processed with the FIR100 S6.13.5.4.1 Passband frequency 100 software specified in 49 CFR 572.44(d). Hz. The data are processed in the following manner: S6.13.5.4.2 Stopband frequency 189 S6.13.5.1 Filter the data with a 300 Hz. Hz, SAE Class 180 filter; S6.13.5.4.3 Stopband gain ¥50 db. S6.13.5.2 Subsample the data to a S6.13.5.4.4 Passband ripple 0.0225 db. 1600 Hz sampling rate;

673

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00673 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.214 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

674

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00674 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.111 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.214

S7. Positioning procedure for the part chapter, in the front outboard seating 572 subpart F test dummy. Position a position on the side of the test vehicle correctly configured test dummy, con- to be struck by the moving deformable forming to subpart F of part 572 of this barrier and, if the vehicle has a second

675

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00675 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.112 § 571.214 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

seat, position another conforming test the midsagittal plane of a test dummy dummy in the second seat outboard po- positioned in the driver position under sition on the same side of the vehicle, S7.1.1. If it is not possible to position as specified in S7.1 through S7.4. Each the test dummy so that its midsagittal test dummy is restrained using all plane is parallel to the vehicle longitu- available belt systems in all seating dinal centerline and is at this distance positions where such belt restraints are from the vehicle’s longitudinal center- provided. In addition, any folding arm- line, the test dummy is positioned so rest is retracted. that some portion of the test dummy S7.1 Torso. For a test dummy in any just touches, at or above the seat level, seating position, hold the dummy’s the side surface of the vehicle, such as head in place and push laterally on the the upper , an armrest, or non-impacted side of the upper torso in any interior trim (i.e., either the broad a single stroke with a force of 15–20 lb. trim panel surface or a smaller, local- towards the impacted side. ized trim feature). S7.1.1 For a test dummy in the driver (b) For a bucket or contoured seat. The position. upper torso of the test dummy rests (a) For a bench seat. The upper torso against the seat back. The midsagittal of the test dummy rests against the plane of the test dummy is vertical and seat back. The midsagittal plane of the parallel to the vehicle’s longitudinal test dummy is vertical and parallel to centerline, and coincides with the lon- the vehicle’s longitudinal centerline, gitudinal centerline of the bucket or and passes through the center of the contoured seat. steering wheel. S7.2 Pelvis. (b) For a bucket seat. The upper torso S7.2.1 H-point. The H-points of each of the test dummy rests against the test dummy coincide within 1⁄2 inch in seat back. The midsagittal plane of the the vertical dimension and 1⁄2 inch in test dummy is vertical and parallel to the horizontal dimension of a point 1⁄4 the vehicle’s longitudinal centerline, inch below the position of the H-point and coincides with the longitudinal centerline of the bucket seat. determined by using the equipment for S7.1.2 For a test dummy in the front the 50th percentile and procedures outboard passenger position. specified in SAE J826 (1980) (incor- (a) For a bench seat. The upper torso porated by reference; see § 571.5), except of the test dummy rests against the that Table 1 of SAE J826 is not applica- seat back. The midsagittal plane of the ble. The length of the lower leg and test dummy is vertical and parallel to thigh segments of the H-point machine the vehicle’s longitudinal centerline, are adjusted to 16.3 and 15.8 inches, re- and the same distance from the vehi- spectively. cle’s longitudinal centerline as would S7.2.2 Pelvic angle. As determined be the midsagittal plane of a test using the pelvic angle gauge (GM draw- dummy positioned in the driver posi- ing 78051–532 incorporated by reference tion under S7.1.1. in part 572, subpart E of this chapter) (b) For a bucket seat. The upper torso which is inserted into the H-point of the test dummy rests against the gauging hole of the dummy, the angle seat back. The midsagittal plane of the of the plane of the surface on the lum- test dummy is vertical and parallel to bar-pelvic adaptor on which the lumbar the vehicle’s longitudinal centerline, spine attaches is 23 to 25 degrees from and coincides with the longitudinal the horizontal, sloping upward toward centerline of the bucket seat. the front of the vehicle. S7.1.3 For a test dummy in either of S7.3 Legs. the rear outboard passenger positions. S7.3.1 For a test dummy in the driver (a) For a bench seat. The upper torso position. The upper legs of each test of the test dummy rests against the dummy rest against the seat cushion seat back. The midsagittal plane of the to the extent permitted by placement test dummy is vertical and parallel to of the feet. The left knee of the dummy the vehicle’s longitudinal centerline, is positioned such that the distance and, if possible, the same distance from from the outer surface of the knee the vehicle’s longitudinal centerline as pivot bolt to the dummy’s midsagittal

676

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00676 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.216

plane is six inches. To the extent prac- after September 1, 1992, and before Sep- ticable, the left leg of the test dummy tember 1, 1995, by each manufacturer, is in a vertical longitudinal plane. or S7.3.2 For a test dummy in the out- (b) The manufacturer’s annual pro- board passenger positions. The upper legs duction of passenger cars during the of each test dummy rest against the period specified in S8.3. seat cushion to the extent permitted S8.4 Passenger cars produced by more by placement of the feet. The initial than one manufacturer. distance between the outboard knee S8.4.1 For the purposes of calcu- clevis flange surfaces is 11.5 inches. To lating average annual production of the extent practicable, both legs of the passenger cars for each manufacturer test dummies in outboard passenger and the number of passenger cars man- positions are in vertical longitudinal ufactured by each manufacturer under planes. Final adjustment to accommo- S8.1, S8.2, and S8.3, a passenger car pro- date placement of feet in accordance duced by more than one manufacturer with S7.4 for various passenger com- shall be attributed to a single manufac- partment configurations is permitted. turer as follows, subject to S8.4.2: S7.4 Feet. (a) A passenger car which is imported S7.4.1 For a test dummy in the driver shall be attributed to the importer. position. The right foot of the test (b) A passenger car manufactured in dummy rests on the undepressed accel- the United States by more than one erator with the heel resting as far for- manufacturer, one of which also mar- ward as possible on the floorpan. The kets the vehicle, shall be attributed to left foot is set perpendicular to the the manufacturer which markets the lower leg with the heel resting on the vehicle. floorpan in the same lateral line as the S8.4.2 A passenger car produced by right heel. more than one manufacturer shall be S7.4.2 For a test dummy in the front attributed to any one of the vehicle’s outboard passenger position. The feet of manufacturers specified by an express the test dummy are placed on the vehi- written contract, reported to the Na- cle’s toeboard with the heels resting on tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- the floorpan as close as possible to the istration under 49 CFR part 586, be- intersection of the toeboard and tween the manufacturer so specified floorpan. If the feet cannot be placed and the manufacturer to which the ve- flat on the toeboard, they are set per- hicle would otherwise be attributed pendicular to the lower legs and placed under S8.4.1. as far forward as possible so that the [36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 45 heels rest on the floorpan. FR 17018, Mar. 17, 1980; 55 FR 45752, Oct. 30, S7.4.3 For a test dummy in either of 1990; 56 FR 27437, June 14, 1991; 56 FR 47011, the rear outboard passenger positions. Sept. 17, 1991; 57 FR 21615, May 21, 1992; 57 FR The feet of the test dummy are placed 30921 and 30922, July 13, 1992; 58 FR 14169, flat on the floorpan and beneath the Mar. 16, 1993; 60 FR 38761, July 28, 1995; 60 FR 57839, Nov. 22, 1995; 63 FR 16140, Apr. 2, 1998; front seat as far as possible without 68 FR 67083, Dec. 1, 2003] front seat interference. If necessary, the distance between the knees can be § 571.215 [Reserved] changed in order to place the feet be- neath the seat. § 571.216 Standard No. 216; Roof crush S8. Phase-in of dynamic test and per- resistance. formance requirements. S1. Scope. This standard establishes S8.1–S8.2 [Reserved] strength requirements for the pas- S8.3 Passenger cars manufactured on senger compartment roof. or after September 1, 1995 and before Sep- S2. Purpose. The purpose of this tember 1, 1996. standard is to reduce deaths and inju- S8.3.1 The number of passenger cars ries due to the crushing of the roof into complying with the requirements of the occupant compartment in rollover S3(c) shall be not less than 40 percent crashes. of: S3. Application. This standard applies (a) The average annual production of to passenger cars, and to multipurpose passenger cars manufactured on or passenger vehicles, trucks and buses

677

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00677 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.216 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

with a GVWR of 2722 kilograms or less. need not meet further requirements However, it does not apply to— after being tested at one location. (a) School buses; S5.1 For multipurpose passenger ve- (b) Vehicles that conform to the roll- hicles, trucks and buses that have a over test requirements (S5.3) of Stand- raised roof or altered roof, manufactur- ard No. 208 (§ 571.208) by means that re- ers have the option of using the test quire no action by vehicle occupants; procedures of S8 instead of the proce- or dures of S7 until October 25, 2000. The (c) Convertibles, except for optional option of using the test procedures of compliance with the standard as an al- S8 ceases to be available on that date. ternative to the rollover test require- S6. Test device. The test device is a ments in S5.3 of Standard No. 208. rigid unyielding block whose lower sur- S4. Definitions. face is a flat rectangle measuring 762 Altered roof means the replacement millimeters by 1,829 millimeters. roof on a motor vehicle whose original S7. Test procedure. Each vehicle must roof has been removed, in part or in be capable of meeting the requirements total, and replaced by a roof that is of S5 when tested in accordance with higher than the original roof. The re- the procedure in S7.1 through 7.6. placement roof on a motor vehicle S7.1 Place the sills or the chassis whose original roof has been replaced, frame of the vehicle on a rigid hori- in whole or in part, by a roof that con- zontal surface, fix the vehicle rigidly in sists of glazing materials, such as those position, close all windows, close and in T-tops and sunroofs, and is located lock all doors, and secure any convert- at the level of the original roof, is not ible top or removable roof structure in considered to be an altered roof. place over the occupant compartment. Raised roof means, with respect to a Remove roof racks or other non-struc- roof which includes an area that pro- tural components. trudes above the surrounding exterior S7.2 Orient the test device as shown roof structure, that protruding area of in Figure 1 of this section, so that— the roof. (a) Its longitudinal axis is at a for- Roof over the front seat area means the ward angle (in side view) of 5 degrees portion of the roof, including wind- below the horizontal, and is parallel to shield trim, forward of a transverse the vertical plane through the vehicle’s vertical plane passing through a point longitudinal centerline; 162 mm rearward of the SgRP of the (b) Its transverse axis is at an out- rearmost front outboard seating posi- board angle, in the front view projec- tion. tion, of 25 degrees below the horizontal. Windshield trim means molding of any S7.3 Maintaining the orientation material between the windshield glaz- specified in S7.2— ing and the exterior roof surface, in- (a) Lower the test device until it ini- cluding material that covers a part of tially makes contact with the roof of either the windshield glazing or exte- the vehicle. rior roof surface. (b) Position the test device so that— S5. Requirements. Subject to S5.1, (1) The longitudinal centerline on its when the test device described in S6 is lower surface is on the initial point of used to apply a force to either side of contact, or on the center of the initial the forward edge of a vehicle’s roof in contact area, with the roof; and accordance with the procedures of S7, (2) Except as specified in S7.4, the the lower surface of the test device midpoint of the forward edge of the must not move more than 127 millime- lower surface of the test device is with- ters. The applied force in Newtons is in 10 mm of the transverse vertical equal to 1.5 times the unloaded vehicle plane 254 mm forward of the weight of the vehicle, measured in forwardmost point on the exterior sur- kilograms and multiplied by 9.8, but face of the roof, including windshield does not exceed 22,240 Newtons for pas- trim, that lies in the longitudinal senger cars. Both the left and right vertical plane passing through the ve- front portions of the vehicle’s roof hicle’s longitudinal centerline. structure must be capable of meeting S7.4 If the vehicle being tested is a the requirements. A particular vehicle multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck,

678

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00678 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.216

or bus that has a raised roof or altered lock all doors, and secure any convert- roof, and the initial contact point of ible top or removable roof structure in the test device is on the raised roof or place over the passenger compartment. altered roof to the rear of the roof over S8.2 Orient the test device as shown the front seat area, the plate is posi- in Figure 2, so that— tioned so that the midpoint of the rear- (a) Its longitudinal axis is at a for- ward edge of the lower surface of the ward angle (side view) of 5° below the test device is within 10 mm of the horizontal, and is parallel to the transverse vertical plane located at the vertical plane through the vehicle’s rear of the roof over the front seat longitudinal centerline; area. (b) Its lateral axis is at a lateral out- S7.5 Apply force so that the test de- board angle, in the front view projec- vice moves in a downward direction tion, of 25° below the horizontal; perpendicular to the lower surface of (c) Its lower surface is tangent to the the test device at a rate of not more surface of the vehicle; and than 13 millimeters per second until (d) The initial contact point, or cen- reaching the force level specified in S5. ter of the initial contact area, is on the Guide the test device so that through- longitudinal centerline of the lower out the test it moves, without rotation, surface of the test device and 254 milli- in a straight line with its lower surface meters from the forwardmost point of oriented as specified in S7.2(a) and that centerline. S7.2(b). Complete the test within 120 S8.3 Apply force in a downward di- seconds. rection perpendicular to the lower sur- S7.6 Measure the distance that the face of the test device at a rate of not test device moved, i.e., the distance be- more than 13 millimeters per second tween the original location of the until reaching a force in Newtons of 11⁄2 lower surface of the test device and its times the unloaded vehicle weight of location as the force level specified in the tested vehicle, measured in kilo- S5 is reached. grams and multiplied by 9.8. Complete S8 Alternate test procedure for multi- the test within 120 seconds. Guide the purpose passenger vehicles, trucks and test device so that throughout the test buses that have a raised roof or altered it moves, without rotation, in a roof manufactured until October 25, 2000 straight line with its lower surface ori- (see S5.1). Each vehicle shall be capable ented as specified in S8.2(a) through of meeting the requirements of S5 S8.2(d). when tested in accordance with the fol- S8.4 Measure the distance that the lowing procedure. test device moves, i.e., the distance be- S8.1 Place the sills or the chassis tween the original location of the frame of the vehicle on a rigid hori- lower surface of the test device and its zontal surface, fix the vehicle rigidly in location as the force level specified in position, close all windows, close and S8.3 is reached.

679

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00679 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.216 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

FIGURE 1 TO § 571.216

680

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00680 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27AP99.032 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.217

FIGURE 2 TO § 571.216

[36 FR 23300, Dec. 8, 1971, as amended at 38 FR 21930, Aug. 14, 1973; 56 FR 15517, Apr. 17, 1991; 58 FR 5633, Jan. 22, 1993; 60 FR 13647, Mar. 14, 1995; 64 FR 22578, Apr. 27, 1999; 65 FR 4581, Jan. 31, 2000]

§ 571.217 Standard No. 217; Bus emer- exit when viewed from a direction per- gency exits and window retention pendicular to the plane of the opening. and release. Mid-point of the passenger compartment S1. Scope. This standard establishes means any point on a vertical trans- requirements for the retention of win- verse plane bisecting the vehicle longi- dows other than windshields in buses, tudinal centerline that extends be- and establishes operating forces, open- tween the two vertical transverse ing dimensions, and markings for bus planes which define the foremost and emergency exits. rearmost limits of the passenger com- partment. S2. Purpose. The purpose of this Occupant space means the space di- standard is to minimize the likelihood rectly above the seat and footwell, of occupants being thrown from the bus bounded vertically by the ceiling and and to provide a means of readily ac- horizontally by the normally posi- cessible emergency egress. tioned seat back and the nearest ob- S3. Application. This standard applies struction of occupant motion in the di- to buses, except buses manufactured rection the seat faces. for the purpose of transporting persons Passenger compartment means space under physical restraint. within the school bus interior that is S4. Definitions. Adjacent seat means a between a vertical transverse plane lo- designated seating position located so cated 76 centimeters in front of the that some portion of its occupant space forwardmost passenger seating ref- is not more than 10 inches from an erence point and a vertical transverse emergency exit, for a distance of at plane tangent to the rear interior wall least 15 inches measured horizontally of the bus at the vehicle centerline. and parallel to the exit. Post and roof bow panel space means Daylight opening means the maximum the area between two adjacent post and unobstructed opening of an emergency roof bows.

681

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00681 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31JA00.089 § 571.217 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Push-out window means a vehicle each three passenger seating positions window designed to open outward to in the vehicle. provide for emergency egress. S5.2.2 Buses other than school buses. Sliding window means a bus window S5.2.2.1 Buses other than school designed to open by moving vertically buses shall provide unobstructed open- or horizontally to provide emergency ings for emergency exit which collec- egress. tively amount, in total square centi- S5. Requirements. meters, to at least 432 times the num- S5.1 Window retention. Except as ber of designated seating positions on provided in S5.1.2, each piece of window the bus. At least 40 percent of the total glazing and each surrounding window required area of unobstructed openings, frame when tested in accordance with computed in the above manner, shall the procedure in S5.1.1 under the condi- be provided on each side of a bus. How- tions of S6.1 through S6.3, shall be re- ever, in determining the total unob- tained by its surrounding structure in structed openings provided by a bus, no a manner that prevents the formation emergency exit, regardless of its area, of any opening large enough to admit shall be credited with more than 3,458 the passage of a 4-inch diameter sphere square centimeters of the total area re- under a force, including the weight of quirement. the sphere, of 5 pounds until any one of S5.2.2.2 Buses with GVWR of more the following events occurs: than 10,000 pounds. Buses with a GVWR (a) A force of 1,200 pounds is reached. of more than 10,000 pounds shall meet (b) At least 80 percent of the glazing the unobstructed openings require- thickness has developed cracks running ments in S5.2.2.1 by providing side exits from the load contact region to the pe- and at least one rear exit that con- riphery at two or more points, or shat- forms to S5.3 through S5.5. The rear tering of the glazing occurs. exit shall meet the requirements of (c) The inner surface of the glazing at S5.3 through S5.5 when the bus is up- the center of force application has right and when the bus is overturned moved relative to the window frame, on either side, with the occupant along a line perpendicular to the undis- standing facing the exit. When the bus turbed inner surface, a distance equal configuration precludes installation of to one-half of the square root of the an accessible rear exit, a roof exit that minimum surface dimension measured meets the requirements of S5.3 through through the center of the area of the S5.5 when the bus is overturned on ei- entire sheet of window glazing. ther side, with the occupant standing S5.1.1 An increasing force shall be facing the exit, shall be provided in the applied to the window glazing through rear half of the bus. the head form specified in Figure 4, S5.2.2.3 Buses with GVWR of 10,000 outward and perpendicular to the un- pounds or less. Buses other than school disturbed inside surface at the center buses with GVWR of 10,000 pounds or of the area of each sheet of window less may meet the unobstructed open- glazing, with a head form travel of 2 ings requirement in S5.2.2.1 by pro- inches per minute. viding: S5.1.2 The requirements of this (a) Devices that meet the require- standard do not apply to a window ments of S5.3 through S5.5 without whose minimum surface dimension using remote controls or central power measured through the center of its systems; area is less than 8 inches. (b) Windows that can be opened S5.2 Provision of emergency exits. manually to a position that provides S5.2.1 Buses other than school buses an opening large enough to admit un- shall meet the requirements of either obstructed passage, keeping a major S5.2.2 or S5.2.3. School buses shall meet axis horizontal at all times, of an ellip- the requirements of S5.2.3. soid generated by rotating about its S5.2.1.1 A bus with GVWR of more minor axis an ellipse having a major than 10,000 pounds may satisfy the un- axis of 50 centimeters and a minor axis obstructed openings requirement by of 33 centimeters; or providing at least one side door for (c) Doors.

682

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00682 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.217

S5.2.3 School buses. Except as pro- TABLE 3 vided in S5.2.3.4, each school bus shall Capac- comply with S5.2.3.1 through S5.2.3.3. Exit Type ity S5.2.3.1. Each school bus shall be Credit equipped with the exits specified in ei- Side Door ...... 16 ther S5.2.3.1(a) or S5.2.3.1(b), chosen at Window ...... 8 the option of the manufacturer. Roof Exit ...... 8 (a) One rear emergency door that (c) The area of an opening equipped opens outward and is hinged on the with a wheelchair lift may be credited right side (either side in the case of a toward the required additional exits if bus with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or it meets the requirements of para- less), and the additional exits, if any, graphs (a) or (b) of S5.2.3.1 and if the specified by Table 1. lift folds or stows in such a manner (b) One emergency door on the vehi- that the area is available for use by cle’s left side that is hinged on its for- persons not needing the lift. With the ward side and meets the requirements lift in the folded or stowed position, of S5.2.3.2(a), and a push-out rear win- such opening is considered a side emer- dow that provides a minimum opening gency exit door. clearance 41 centimeters high and 122 S5.2.3.2 All emergency exits re- centimeters wide and meets the re- quired by S5.2.3.1(a) and S5.2.3.1(b) quirements of S5.2.3.2(c), and the addi- shall meet the following criteria: tional exits, if any, specified by Table (a) Side emergency exit doors. 2. (1) Each side emergency exit door shall be hinged on its forward side. TABLE 1 (2) The first side emergency exit door installed pursuant to Table 1, shall be Seating ca- located on the left side of the bus and pacity Additional exits required * as near as practicable to the mid-point 1–45 ...... None. of the passenger compartment. A sec- 46–62 ...... 1 left side exit door or 2 exit windows. ond side emergency exit door installed 63–70 ...... 1 left side exit door or 2 exit windows, and 1 pursuant to Table 1 shall be located on roof exit. 71 and 1 left side exit door or 2 exit windows, and 1 the right side of the bus. In the case of above. roof exit, and any combination of door, roof, a bus equipped with three side emer- or windows such that the total capacity credit gency door exits pursuant to Table 1, specified in Table 3 for these exits, plus 70, the third shall be located on the left is greater than the seating capacity of the bus. side of the bus. (3) The first side emergency exit door * Side emergency exit doors must meet the requirements of S5.2.3.2(a), emergency roof exits must meet the requirements installed pursuant to Table 2 shall be of S5.2.3.2(b), emergency window exits must meet the re- located on the right side of the bus. A quirements of S5.2.3.2(c). second side emergency door exit in- stalled pursuant to Table 2 shall be lo- TABLE 2 cated on the left side of the bus. In the case of a bus equipped with three side Seating ca- Additional exits required * pacity emergency door exits pursuant to 1–57 ...... None. Table 2, the third shall be located on 58–74 ...... 1 right side exit door or 2 exit windows. the right side of the bus. 75–82 ...... 1 right side exit door or 2 exit windows, and 1 (4) No two side emergency exit doors roof exit. shall be located, in whole or in part, 83 and 1 right side exit door or 2 windows, and 1 roof within the same post and roof bow above. exit, and any combination of door, roof, or windows such that the total capacity credit panel space. specified in Table 3 for these exits plus 82 is (b) Emergency roof exit. (1) Each emer- greater than the capacity of the bus. gency roof exit shall be hinged on its * Side emergency exit doors must meet the requirements of forward side, and shall be operable S5.2.3.2(a), emergency roof exits must meet the requirements from both inside and outside the vehi- of S5.2.3.2(b), emergency window exits must meet the re- quirements of S5.2.3.2(c). cle. (2) In a bus equipped with a single emergency roof exit, the exit shall be located as near as practicable to the

683

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00683 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.217 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

midpoint of the passenger compart- requirement, ‘‘locked’’ means that the ment. release mechanism cannot be activated (3) In a bus equipped with two emer- and the exit opened by a person at the gency roof exits, one shall be located as exit without a special device such as a near as practicable to a point equi- key or special information such as a distant between the midpoint of the combination. passenger compartment and the fore- S5.2.3.4 Each school bus manufac- most limit of the passenger compart- tured before September 1, 1994 may, at ment and the other shall be located as the manufacturer’s option, comply near as practicable to a point equi- with either S5.2.3.4(a) or S5.2.3.4(b) in- distant between the midpoint of the stead of S5.2.3.1 through S5.2.3.3. passenger compartment and the rear- (a) Each bus shall be equipped with most point of the passenger compart- one rear emergency door that opens ment. outward and is hinged on the right side (4) In a bus equipped with three or (either side in the case of a bus with a more emergency roof exits, the roof GVWR of 4,536 kilograms or less); or exits shall be installed so that, to the (b) Each bus shall be equipped with extent practicable, the longitudinal one emergency door on the vehicle’s distance between each pair of adjacent left side that is hinged on its forward roof exits is the same and equal to the side and meets the requirements of distance from the foremost point of the S5.2.3.2(a), and a push-out rear window passenger compartment to the fore- that provides a minimum opening most roof exit and to the distance from clearance 41 centimeters high and 122 the rearmost point of that compart- centimeters wide and meets the re- ment to the rearmost roof exit. quirements of S5.2.3.2(c). (5) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section, each emergency S5.3 Emergency exit release. roof exit shall be installed with its lon- S5.3.1 Each emergency exit not re- gitudinal centerline coinciding with a quired by S5.2.3 shall be releasable by longitudinal vertical plane passing operating one or two mechanisms lo- through the longitudinal centerline of cated within the regions specified in the school bus. Figure 1, Figure 2, or Figure 3. The (6) In a bus equipped with two or lower edge of the region in Figure 1, more emergency roof exits, for each and Region B in Figure 2, shall be lo- roof exit offset from the longitudinal cated 13 centimeters above the adja- vertical plane specified in paragraph cent seat, or 5 centimeters above the (b)(5) of this section, there shall be an- arm rest, if any, whichever is higher. other roof exit offset from that plane S5.3.2 When tested under the condi- an equal distance to the other side. tions of S6., both before and after the (c) Emergency exit windows. A bus window retention test required by S5.1, equipped with emergency exit windows each emergency exit not required by shall have an even number of such win- S5.2.3 shall allow manual release of the dows, not counting the push-out rear exit by a single occupant using force window required by S5.2.3.1(b). Any applications each of which conforms, at side emergency exit windows shall be the option of the manufacturer, either evenly divided between the right and to S5.3.2 (a) or (b) of this section. Each left sides of the bus. School buses shall exit shall have not more than two re- not be equipped with horizontally-slid- lease mechanisms. In the case of exits ing emergency exit windows. Further, with one release mechanism, the mech- except for buses equipped with rear anism shall require two force applica- push-out emergency exit windows in tions to release the exit. In the case of accordance with S5.2.3.1(b), school exits with two release mechanisms, buses shall not be equipped with both each mechanism shall require one force sliding and push-out emergency exit application to release the exit. At least windows. one of the force applications for each S5.2.3.3 The engine starting system of exit shall differ from the direction of a bus shall not operate if any emer- the initial motion to open the exit by gency exit is locked from either inside not less than 90° and no more than 180°. or outside the bus. For purposes of this (a) Low-force application.

684

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00684 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.217

(1) Location. As shown in Figure 1 or window retention test required by S5.1, Figure 3. each school bus emergency exit window (2) Type of motion. Rotary or straight. shall allow manual release of the exit (3) Magnitude. Not more than 20 by a single person, from inside the pas- pounds. senger compartment, using not more (b) High force application. than two release mechanisms located (1) Location. As shown in Figure 2 or in specified low-force or high-force re- Figure 3. gions (at the option of the manufac- (2) Type of motion. Straight, perpen- turer) with force applications and dicular to the undisturbed exit surface. types of motions that conform to ei- (3) Magnitude. Not more than 60 ther S5.3.3.2 (a) or (b) of this section. In pounds. the case of windows with one release S5.3.3 School bus emergency exit re- mechanism, the mechanism shall re- lease. quire two force applications to release S5.3.3.1 When tested under the con- the exit. In the case of windows with ditions of S6., both before and after the two release mechanisms, each mecha- window retention test required by S5.1, nism shall require one application to each school bus emergency exit door release the exit. At least one of the shall allow manual release of the door force applications for each window by a single person, from both inside shall differ from the direction of the and outside the passenger compart- initial motion to open the exit by no ment, using a force application that less than 90° and no more than 180°. conforms to S5.3.3.1 (a) through (c) of Each release mechanism shall operate this section, except a school bus with a without the use of remote controls or GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less is not re- tools, and notwithstanding any failure quired to conform to S5.3.3.1 (a). The of the vehicle’s power system. When a release mechanism shall operate with- release mechanism is open and the ve- out the use of remote controls or tools, hicle’s ignition is in the ‘‘on’’ position, and notwithstanding any failure of the a continuous warning shall be audible vehicle’s power system. When the re- at the drivers seating position and in lease mechanism is not in the position the vicinity of that emergency exit. that causes an emergency exit door to (a) Emergency exit windows—Low- be closed and the vehicle’s ignition is force application. in the ‘‘on’’ position, a continuous warn- (1) Location: Within the low-force ac- ing sound shall be audible at the driv- cess regions shown in Figures 1 and 3 er’s seating position and in the vicinity for an emergency exit window. of the emergency exit door. (2) Type of motion: Rotary or straight. (a) Location: Within the high force ac- (3) Magnitude: Not more than 89 new- cess region shown in Figure 3A for a tons. side emergency exit door, and in figure (b) Emergency exit windows—High- 3D for a rear emergency exit door. force application. (b) Type of motion: Upward from in- (1) Location: Within the high-force ac- side the bus and, at the discretion of cess regions shown in Figures 2 and 3 the manufacturer, from outside the for an emergency exit window. bus. Buses with a GVWR of 10,000 (2) Type of motion: Straight and per- pounds or less shall provide interior re- pendicular to the undisturbed exit sur- lease mechanisms that operate by ei- face. ther an upward or pull-type motion. (3) Magnitude: Not more than 178 The pull-type motion shall be used newtons. only when the release mechanism is re- S5.3.3.3 When tested under the con- cessed in such a manner that the han- ditions of S6., both before and after the dle, level, or other activating device, window retention test required by S5.1, before being activated, does not pro- each school bus emergency roof exit trude beyond the rim of the recessed shall allow manual release of the exit receptacle. by a single person from both inside and (c) Magnitude of force: Not more than outside the passenger compartment, 178 newtons. using not more than two release mech- S5.3.3.2 When tested under the con- anisms located at specified low-force or ditions of S6., both before and after the high-force regions (at the option of the

685

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00685 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.217 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

manufacturer) with force applications soid generated by rotating about its and types of motions that conform ei- minor axis an ellipse having a major ther to S5.3.3.3 (a) or (b) of this section. axis of 50 centimeters and a minor axis In the case of roof exits with one re- of 33 centimeters. lease mechanism, the mechanism shall S5.4.2 School bus emergency exit open- require two force applications to re- ing. lease the exit. In the case of roof exits S5.4.2.1 School buses with a GVWR of with two release mechanisms, each more than 10,000 pounds. mechanism shall require one applica- (a) Emergency exit doors. After the re- tion to release the exit. At least one of lease mechanism has been operated, the force applications for each roof exit each emergency exit door of a school shall differ from the direction of the bus shall, under the conditions of S6., initial push-out motion of the exit by before and after the window retention no less than 90° and no more than 180°. test required by S5.1, using the force (a) Emergency roof exits—Low-force levels specified in S5.3.3, be manually application. extendable by a single person to a posi- (1) Location: Within the low force ac- tion that permits: cess regions shown in Figure 3B, in the (1) In the case of a rear emergency case of buses whose roof exits are not exit door, an opening large enough to offset from the plane specified in permit unobstructed passage of a rec- S5.2.3.2(b)(5). In the case of buses which tangular parallelepiped 114 centimeters have roof exits offset from the plane high, 61 centimeters wide, and 30 centi- specified in S5.2.3.2(b)(5), the amount of meters deep, keeping the 114 centi- offset shall be used to recalculate the meter dimension vertical, the 61 centi- dimensions in Figure 3B for the offset meter dimension parallel to the open- exits. ing, and the lower surface in contact (2) Type of motion: Rotary or straight. with the floor of the bus at all times; (3) Magnitude: Not more than 89 new- and tons. (2) In the case of a side emergency (b) Emergency roof exits—High-force exit door, an opening at least 114 centi- application. meters high and 61 centimeters wide. (1) Location: Within the high force ac- (i) Except as provided in paragraph cess regions shown in Figure 3B, in the (a)(2)(ii) of this section, no portion of a case of buses whose roof exits are not seat or a restraining barrier shall be offset from the plane specified in installed within the area bounded by S5.2.3.2(b)(5). In the case of buses which the opening of a side emergency exit have roof exits offset from the plane door, a vertical transverse plane tan- specified in S5.2.3.2(b)(5), the amount of gent to the rearward edge of the door offset shall be used to recalculate the opening frame, a vertical transverse dimensions in Figure 3B for the offset plane parallel to that plane at a dis- exits. tance of 30 centimeters forward of that (2) Type of motion: Straight and per- plane, and a longitudinal vertical plane pendicular to the undisturbed exit sur- passing through the longitudinal cen- face. terline of the bus. (See Figure 5A). (3) Magnitude: Not more than 178 (ii) A seat bottom may be located newtons. within the area described in paragraph S5.4 Emergency exit opening. (a)(2)(i) of this section if the seat bot- S5.4.1 After the release mechanism tom pivots and automatically assumes has been operated, each emergency exit and retains a vertical position when not required by S5.2.3 shall, under the not in use, so that no portion of the conditions of S6., both before and after seat bottom is within the area de- the window retention test required by scribed in paragraph (i) when the seat S5.1, using the reach distances and cor- bottom is vertical. (See Figure 5B). responding force levels specified in (iii) No portion of a seat or restrain- S5.3.2, allow manual opening by a sin- ing barrier located forward of the area gle occupant to a position that pro- described in paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this vides an opening large enough to admit section and between the door opening unobstructed passage, keeping a major and a longitudinal vertical plane pass- axis horizontal at all times, of an ellip- ing through the longitudinal centerline

686

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00686 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.217

of the bus shall extend rearward of a high, 22 inches wide, and six inches vertical transverse plane tangent to deep. the forwardmost portion of a latch S5.5 Emergency exit identification. mechanism on the door. (See Figures S5.5.1 In buses other than school 5B and 5C.) buses, and except for windows serving (3)(i) Each emergency exit door of a as emergency exits in accordance with school bus shall be equipped with a S5.2.2.3(b) and doors in buses with a positive door opening device that, after GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less, each the release mechanism has been oper- emergency exit door shall have the des- ated, under the conditions of S6, before ignation ‘‘Emergency Door’’ or ‘‘Emer- and after the window retention test re- gency Exit,’’ and every other emer- quired by S5.1— gency exit shall have the designation (A) Bears the weight of the door; ‘‘Emergency Exit’’ followed by concise (B) Keeps the door from closing past operating instructions describing each the point at which the door is perpen- motion necessary to unlatch and open dicular to the side of the bus body, re- the exit, located within 16 centimeters gardless of the body’s orientation; and of the release mechanism. (C) Provides a means for release or override. EXAMPLES: (ii) The positive door opening device (1) Lift to Unlatch, Push to Open shall perform the functions specified in (2) Lift Handle and Push out to Open paragraph (a)(3)(i) (A) and (B) of this section without the need for additional When a release mechanism is not lo- action beyond opening the door past cated within an occupant space of an the point at which the door is perpen- adjacent seat, a label meeting the re- dicular to the side of the bus body. quirements of S5.5.2 that indicates the (b) Emergency roof exits. After the re- location of the nearest release mecha- lease mechanism has been operated, nism shall be placed within the occu- each emergency roof exit of a school pant space. bus shall, under the conditions of S6, Example: ‘‘Emergency Exit Instructions Lo- before and after the window retention cated Next to Seat Ahead’’ test required by S5.1, using the force levels specified in S5.3.3, be manually S5.5.2 In buses other than school extendable by a single person to a posi- buses. Except as provided in S5.5.2.1, tion that permits an opening at least 41 each marking shall be legible, when centimeters high and 41 centimeters the only source of light is the normal wide. nighttime illumination of the bus inte- (c) Emergency exit windows. After the rior, to occupants having corrected vis- release mechanism has been operated, ual acuity of 20/40 (Snellen ratio) seat- each emergency exit window of a ed in the adjacent seat, seated in the school bus shall, under the conditions seat directly adjoining the adjacent of S6., both before and after the win- seat, and standing in the aisle location dow retention test of S5.1, using force that is closest to that adjacent seat. levels specified in S5.3.3.2, be manually The marking shall be legible from each extendable by a single occupant to a of these locations when the other two position that provides an opening large corresponding locations are occupied. enough to admit unobstructed passage, S5.5.2.1 If the exit has no adjacent keeping a major axis horizontal at all seat, the marking must meet the leg- times, of an ellipsoid generated by ro- ibility requirements of S5.5.2 for occu- tating about its minor axis an ellipse pants standing in the aisle location having a major axis of 50 centimeters nearest to the emergency exit, except and a minor axis of 33 centimeters. for a roof exit, which must meet the S5.4.2.2 School buses with a GVWR of legibility requirements for occupants 10,000 pounds or less. A school bus with positioned with their backs against the a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less shall floor opposite the roof exit. conform to all the provisions of S5.4.2, S5.5.3 School Bus. except that the parallelepiped dimen- (a) Each school bus emergency exit sion for the opening of the rear emer- provided in accordance with S5.2.3.1 gency door or doors shall be 45 inches shall have the designation ‘‘Emergency 687

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00687 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.217 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Door’’ or ‘‘Emergency Exit,’’ as appro- (c) Each opening for a required emer- priate, in letters at least 5 centimeters gency exit shall be outlined around its high, of a color that contrasts with its outside perimeter with a background. For emergency exit doors, retroreflective tape with a minimum the designation shall be located at the width of 2.5 centimeters and either red, top of, or directly above, the emer- white, or yellow in color, that when gency exit door on both the inside and tested under the conditions specified in outside surfaces of the bus. The des- S6.1 of Standard No. 131 (49 CFR ignation for roof exits shall be located 571.131), meets the criteria specified in on an inside surface of the exit, or Table 1 of that section. within 30 centimeters of the roof exit S6. Test conditions. opening. For emergency window exits, S6.1 The vehicle is on a flat, hori- the designation shall be located at the zontal surface. top of, or directly above, or at the bot- S6.2 The inside of the vehicle and tom of the emergency window exit on the outside environment are kept at both the inside and outside surfaces of any temperature from 70° to 85 the bus. °Fahrenheit for 4 hours immediately (b) Concise operating instructions de- preceding the tests, and during the scribing the motions necessary to tests. unlatch and open the emergency exit S6.3 For the window retention test, shall be located within 15 centimeters windows are installed, closed, and of the release mechanism on the inside latched (where latches are provided) in surface of the bus. These instructions the condition intended for normal bus shall be in letters at least 1 centimeter operation. high and of a color that contrasts with S6.4 For the emergency exit release its background. and extension tests, windows are in- stalled as in S6.3, seats, armrests, and EXAMPLES: interior objects near the windows are (1) Lift to Unlatch, Push to Open installed as for normal use, and seats (2) Turn Handle, Push Out to Open are in the upright position.

688

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00688 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.217

689

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00689 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.114 § 571.217 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

690

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00690 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.115 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.217

691

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00691 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.116 § 571.217 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

692

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00692 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.117 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.217

693

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00693 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.118 § 571.217 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

694

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00694 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.119 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.217

695

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00695 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.120 § 571.217 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

696

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00696 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.121 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.217, Nt.

[37 FR 9395, May 10, 1972, as amended at 37 FR 18035, Sept. 6, 1972; 38 FR 6070, Mar. 6, 1973; 38 FR 7562, Mar. 28, 1973; 39 FR 15274, May 2, 1974; 40 FR 48512, Oct. 16, 1975; 41 FR 3872, Jan. 27, 1976; 41 FR 22357, June 3, 1976; 41 FR 24592, June 17, 1976; 41 FR 36027, Aug. 26, 1976; 47 FR 7256, Feb. 18, 1982; 47 FR 37555, Aug. 26, 1982; 57 FR 49423, Nov. 2, 1992; 57 FR 57020, Dec. 2, 1992; 59 FR 22999, May 4, 1994; 60 FR 24570, May 9, 1995]

EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 67 FR 19351, Apr. layed until Apr. 21, 2006. For the convenience 19, 2002, § 571.217 was amended by adding in of the user, the revised and added text is set S4, in alphabetical order, the definitions of forth as follows: ‘‘wheelchair,’’ ‘‘wheelchair securement an- chorage’’, and ‘‘wheelchair securement de- § 571.217 Standard No. 217; Bus emergency vice’’, by revising S5.4.2.1(a)(1) by adding exits and window retention and release. S5.4.3 and S5.5.3(d) and by adding after Fig- ure 5C, Figure 6A, Figure 6B, Figure 6C, and * * * * * Figure 6D, effective Apr. 21, 2003. At 68 FR 19752, Apr. 22, 2003, the effective date was de- S4. * * * layed until Apr. 21, 2004. At 69 FR 11815, Mar. Wheelchair means a wheeled seat frame for 12, 2004, the effective date was further de- the support and conveyance of a physically

697

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00697 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.122 § 571.217, Nt. 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

disabled person, comprising at least a frame, (b) In the case of rear emergency exit doors seat, and wheels. in school buses with a gross vehicle weight Wheelchair securement anchorage means the rating greater than 4,536 kg (10,000 lb), any provision for transferring wheelchair secure- portion of the wheelchair securement an- ment device loads to the vehicle structure. chorage is within the space bounded by lon- Wheelchair securement device means a strap, gitudinal vertical planes tangent to the left webbing or other device used for securing a and right sides of the door opening, a trans- wheelchair to the school bus, including all verse vertical plane 305 mm (12 inches) for- necessary buckles and other fasteners. ward of the bottom edge of the door opening, and a horizontal plane 1,145 mm (45 inches) above the floor of the bus, as shown in Fig- * * * * * ure 6C and Figure 6D. S5.4.2.1 * * * (c) In the case of rear emergency exit doors (a) * * * in school buses with a gross vehicle weight (1) In the case of a rear emergency exit rating of 4,536 kg (10,000 lb) or less, any por- door, an opening large enough to permit un- tion of the wheelchair securement anchorage obstructed passage into the bus of a rectan- is within the space bounded by longitudinal gular parallelepiped 1,145 millimeters (45 vertical planes tangent to the left and right inches) high, 610 millimeters (24 inches) sides of the door opening, a transverse wide, and 305 millimeters (12 inches) deep, vertical plane 150 mm (6 inches) forward of keeping the 1,145 millimeter (45 inch) dimen- the bottom edge of the door opening, and a sion vertical, the 610 (24 inch) millimeter di- horizontal plane 1,145 mm (45 inches) above mension parallel to the opening, and the the floor of the bus, as shown in Figure 6C lower surface in contact with the floor of the and Figure 6D. bus at all times, until the bottom edge of the S5.4.3.2 The restriction in S5.4.3.1(a) of this rearmost surface of the parallelepiped is tan- section does not apply to tracks or track- gent to the plane of the door opening; and type devices that are used for mounting seats and/or for wheelchair securement de- vices. * * * * * S5.4.3 Restriction on wheelchair anchorage * * * * * location. S5.5.3 School Bus. S5.4.3.1 Except as provided in paragraph S5.4.3.2 of this section, no portion of a wheel- chair securement anchorage shall be located * * * * * in a school bus such that: (d) On the inside surface of each school (a) In the case of side emergency exit bus, there shall be a label directly beneath or doors, any portion of the wheelchair secure- above each ‘‘Emergency Door’’ or ‘‘Emergency ment anchorage is within the space bounded Exit’’ designation required by paragraph (a) by the interior side wall and emergency exit of S5.5.3 of this standard for an emergency door opening, transverse vertical planes 305 exit door or window. The label shall state, in mm (12 inches) forward and rearward of the letters at least 25 mm (one inch) high, the center of any side emergency exit door re- words ‘‘DO NOT BLOCK’’ in a color that con- stricted area, and a longitudinal vertical trasts with the background of the label. plane through the longitudinal centerline of the school bus, as shown in Figure 6A and Figure 6B. * * * * *

698

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00698 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.217, Nt.

699

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00699 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER19AP02.000 § 571.217, Nt. 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

700

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00700 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER19AP02.001 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.217, Nt.

701

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00701 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER19AP02.002 § 571.218 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

§ 571.218 Standard No. 218; Motorcycle vehicle users resulting from head im- helmets. pacts. S1. Scope. This standard establishes S3. Application. This standard applies minimum performance requirements to all helmets designed for use by mo- for helmets designed for use by motor- torcyclists and other motor vehicle cyclists and other motor vehicle users. users. S2. Purpose. The purpose of this S4. Definitions. standard is to reduce deaths and inju- Basic plane means a plane through ries to motorcyclists and other motor the centers of the right and left exter- nal ear openings and the lower edge of

702

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00702 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER19AP02.003 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.218

the eye sockets (Figure 1) of a ref- S5.2 Penetration. When a penetration erence headform (Figure 2) or test test is conducted in accordance with headform. S7.2, the striker shall not contact the Helmet positioning index means the surface of the test headform. distance in inches, as specified by the S5.3 Retention system. manufacturer, from the lowest point of S5.3.1 When tested in accordance the brow opening at the lateral mid- with S7.3: point of the helmet to the basic plane (a) The retention system or its com- of a reference headform, when the hel- ponents shall attain the loads specified met is firmly and properly positioned without separation; and on the reference headform. (b) The adjustable portion of the re- Midsagittal plane means a longitu- tention system test device shall not dinal plane through the apex of a ref- move more than 1 inch (2.5 cm) meas- erence headform or test headform that ured between preliminary and test load is perpendicular to the basic plane positions. (Figure 3). S5.3.2 Where the retention system Reference headform means a meas- consists of components which can be uring device contoured to the dimen- independently fastened without secur- sions of one of the three headforms de- ing the complete assembly, each such scribed in Table 2 and Figures 5 component shall independently meet through 8 with surface markings indi- the requirements of S5.3.1. cating the locations of the basic, mid- S5.4 Configuration. Each helmet shall sagittal, and reference planes, and the have a protective surface of continuous centers of the external ear openings. contour at all points on or above the Reference plane means a plane above test line described in S6.2.3. The helmet and parallel to the basic plane on a ref- shall provide peripheral vision clear- erence headform or test headform (Fig- ance of at least 105° to each side of the ure 2) at the distance indicated in mid-sagittal plane, when the helmet is Table 2. adjusted as specified in S6.3. The vertex Retention system means the complete of these angles, shown in Figure 3, assembly by which the helmet is re- shall be at the point on the anterior tained in position on the head during surface of the reference headform at use. the intersection of the mid-sagittal and Test headform means a test device basic planes. The brow opening of the contoured to the dimensions of one of helmet shall be at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) the three headforms described in Table above all points in the basic plane that 2 and Figures 5 through 8 with surface are within the angles of peripheral vi- markings indicating the locations of sion (see Figure 3). the basic, mid-sagittal, and reference S5.5 Projections. A helmet shall not planes. have any rigid projections inside its S5. Requirements. Each helmet shall shell. Rigid projections outside any meet the requirements of S5.1, S5.2, helmet’s shell shall be limited to those and S5.3 when subjected to any condi- required for operation of essential ac- tioning procedure specified in S6.4, and cessories, and shall not protrude more tested in accordance with S7.1, S7.2, than 0.20 inch (5 mm). and S7.3. S5.6 Labeling. S5.1 Impact attenuation. When an im- S5.6.1 Each helmet shall be labeled pact attenuation test is conducted in permanently and legibly, in a manner accordance with S7.1, all of the fol- such that the label(s) can be read eas- lowing requirements shall be met: ily without removing padding or any (a) Peak accelerations shall not ex- other permanent part, with the fol- ceed 400g; lowing: (b) Accelerations in excess of 200g (a) Manufacturer’s name or identi- shall not exceed a cumulative duration fication. of 2.0 milliseconds; and (b) Precise model designation. (c) Accelerations in excess of 150g (c) Size. shall not exceed a cumulative duration (d) Month and year of manufacture. of 4.0 milliseconds. This may be spelled out (for example,

703

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00703 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.218 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

June 1988), or expressed in numerals crete size or size range which exceeds (for example, 6/88). 71⁄2 is tested on the large headform. (e) The symbol DOT, constituting the S6.1.2 A helmet with a manufactur- manufacturer’s certification that the er’s designated size range which in- helmet conforms to the applicable Fed- cludes sizes falling into two or all three eral motor vehicle safety standards. size ranges described in S6.1.1 is tested This symbol shall appear on the outer on each headform specified for each surface, in a color that contrasts with size range. the background, in letters at least 3⁄8 S6.2 Reference marking. inch (1 cm) high, centered laterally S6.2.1 Use a reference headform that with the horizontal centerline of the is firmly seated with the basic and ref- 1 symbol located a minimum of 1 ⁄8 erence planes horizontal. Place the inches (2.9 cm) and a maximum of 13⁄8 complete helmet to be tested on the ap- inches (3.5 cm) from the bottom edge of propriate reference headform, as speci- the posterior portion of the helmet. fied in S6.1.1 and S6.1.2. (f) Instructions to the purchaser as follows: S6.2.2 Apply a 10-pound (4.5 kg) static (1) ‘‘Shell and liner constructed of vertical load through the helmet’s (identify type(s) of materials). apex. Center the helmet laterally and (2) ‘‘Helmet can be seriously damaged seat it firmly on the reference by some common substances without headform according to its helmet posi- damage being visible to the user. Apply tioning index. only the following: (Recommended S6.2.3 Maintaining the load and posi- cleaning agents, paints, adhesives, etc., tion described in S6.2.2, draw a line as appropriate). (hereinafter referred to as ‘‘test line’’) (3) ‘‘Make no modifications. Fasten on the outer surface of the helmet co- helmet securely. If helmet experiences inciding with portions of the intersec- a severe blow, return it to the manu- tion of that service with the following facturer for inspection, or destroy it planes, as shown in Figure 2: and replace it.’’ (a) A plane 1 inch (2.5 cm) above and (4) Any additional relevant safety in- parallel to the reference plane in the formation should be applied at the anterior portion of the reference time of purchase by means of an at- headform; tached tag, brochure, or other suitable (b) A vertical transverse plane 2.5 means. inches (6.4 cm) behind the point on the S5.7 Helmet positioning index. Each anterior surface of the reference manufacturer of helmets shall estab- headform at the intersection of the lish a positioning index for each hel- mid-sagittal and reference planes; met he manufactures. This index shall (c) The reference plane of the ref- be furnished immediately to any per- erence headform; son who requests the information, with (d) A vertical transverse plane 2.5 respect to a helmet identified by manu- inches (6.4. cm) behind the center of facturer, model designation, and size. the external ear opening in a side view; S6. Preliminary test procedures. Before and subjecting a helmet to the testing se- quence specified in S7., prepare it ac- (e) A plane 1 inch (2.5 cm) below and cording to the procedures in S6.1, S6.2, parallel to the reference plane in the and S6.3. posterior portion of the reference S6.1 Selection of appropriate headform. headform. S6.1.1 A helmet with a manufactur- S6.3 Helmet positioning. er’s designated discrete size or size S6.3.1 Before each test, fix the helmet range which does not exceed 63⁄4 (Euro- on a test headform in the position that pean size: 54) is tested on the small conforms to its helmet positioning headform. A helmet with a manufac- index. Secure the helmet so that it turer’s designated discrete size or size does not shift position before impact or range which exceeds 63⁄4, but does not before application of force during test- exceed 71⁄2 (European size: 60) is tested ing. on the medium headform. A helmet S6.3.2 In testing as specified in S7.1 with a manufacturer’s designated dis- and S7.2, place the retention system in

704

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00704 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.218

a position such that it does not inter- S7.1.3 Impact testing at each of the fere with free fall, impact or penetra- four sites, as specified in S7.1.2, shall tion. start at two minutes, and be completed S6.4 Conditioning. by four minutes, after removal of the S6.4.1 Immediately before conducting helmet from the conditioning environ- the testing sequence specified in S7, ment. condition each test helmet in accord- S7.1.4 (a) The guided free fall drop ance with any one of the following pro- height for the helmet and test cedures: headform combination onto the hemi- (a) Ambient conditions. Expose to a spherical anvil shall be such that the temperature of 70 °F(21 °C) and a rel- minimum impact speed is 17.1 feet/sec- ative humidity of 50 percent for 12 ond (5.2 m/sec). The minimum drop hours. height is 54.5 inches (138.4 cm). The (b) Low temperature. Expose to a tem- drop height is adjusted upward from perature of 14 °F(¥10 °C) for 12 hours. the minimum to the extent necessary (c) High temperature. Expose to a tem- to compensate for friction losses. perature of 122 °F(50 °C) for 12 hours. (b) The guided free fall drop height (d) Water immersion. Immerse in water for the helmet and test headform com- at a temperature of 77 °F(25 °C) for 12 bination onto the flat anvil shall be hours. such that the minimum impact speed is S6.4.2 If during testing, as specified 19.7 ft./sec (6.0 m/sec). The minimum in S7.1.3 and S7.2.3, a helmet is re- drop height is 72 inches (182.9 cm). The turned to the conditioning environ- drop height is adjusted upward from ment before the time out of that envi- the minimum to the extent necessary ronment exceeds 4 minutes, the helmet to compensate for friction losses. is kept in the environment for a min- S7.1.5 Test headforms for impact at- imum of 3 minutes before resumption tenuation testing are constructed of of testing with that helmet. If the time magnesium alloy (K–1A), and exhibit out of the environment exceeds 4 min- no resonant frequencies below 2,000 Hz. utes, the helmet is returned to the en- S7.1.6 The monorail drop test system vironment for a minimum of 3 minutes is used for impact attenuation testing. for each minute or portion of a minute S7.1.7 The weight of the drop assem- that the helmet remained out of the bly, as specified in Table 1, is the com- environment in excess of 4 minutes or bined weight of the test headform and for a maximum of 12 hours, whichever the supporting assembly for the drop is less, before the resumption of testing test. The weight of the supporting as- with that helmet. sembly is not less than 2.0 lbs. and not S7. Test conditions. more than 2.4 lbs. (0.9 to 1.1 kg). The S7.1 Impact attenuation test. supporting assembly weight for the S7.1.1 Impact attenuation is meas- monorail system is the drop assembly ured by determining acceleration im- weight minus the combined weight of parted to an instrumented test the test headform, the headform’s headform on which a complete helmet clamp down ring, and its tie down is mounted as specified in S6.3, when it screws. is dropped in guided free fall upon a S7.1.8 The center of gravity of the fixed hemispherical anvil and a fixed test headform is located at the center flat steel anvil. of the mounting ball on the supporting S7.1.2 Each helmet is impacted at assembly and lies within a cone with four sites with two successive identical its axis vertical and forming a 10° in- impacts at each site. Two of these sites cluded angle with the vertex at the are impacted upon a flat steel anvil point of impact. The center of gravity and two upon a hemispherical steel of the drop assembly lies within the anvil as specified in S7.1.10 and S7.1.11. rectangular volume bounded by x = The impact sites are at any point on ¥0.25 inch (¥0.64 cm), x = 0.85 inch (2.16 the area above the test line described cm), y = 0.25 inch (0.64 cm), and y = in paragraph S6.2.3, and separated by a ¥0.25 inch (¥0.64 cm) with the origin distance not less than one-sixth of the located at the center of gravity of the maximum circumference of the helmet test headform. The rectangular volume in the test area. has no boundary along the z-axis. The

705

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00705 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.218 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

x-y-z axes are mutually perpendicular S6.2.3, except on a fastener or other and have positive or negative designa- rigid projection. tions in accordance with the right- S7.2.2 Two penetration blows are ap- hand rule (See Figure 5). The origin of plied at least 3 inches (7.6 cm) apart, the coordinate axes also is located at and at least 3 inches (7.6 cm) from the the center of the mounting ball on the centers of any impacts applied during supporting assembly (See Figures 6, 7, the impact attenuation test. and 8). The x-y-z axes of the test S7.2.3 The application of the two pen- headform assembly on a monorail drop etration blows, specified in S7.2.2, test equipment are oriented as follows: starts at two minutes and is completed From the origin, the x-axis is hori- by four minutes, after removal of the zontal with its positive direction going helmet from the conditioning environ- toward and passing through the ment. vertical centerline of the monorail. S7.2.4 The height of the guided free The positive z-axis is downward. The y- fall is 118.1 inches (3 m), as measured axis also is horizontal and its direction from the striker point to the impact can be decided by the z- and x-axes, point on the outer surface of the test using the right-hand rule. helmet. S7.1.9 The acceleration transducer is S7.2.5 The contactable surface of the mounted at the center of gravity of the penetration test headform is con- test headform with the sensitive axis structed of a metal or metallic alloy aligned to within 5° of vertical when having a Brinell hardness number no the test headform assembly is in the greater than 55, which will permit impact position. The acceleration data ready detection should contact by the channel complies with SAE Rec- striker occur. The surface is refinished ommended Practice J211 JUN 80, In- if necessary before each penetration strumentation for Impact Tests, re- test blow to permit detection of con- quirements for channel class 1,000. tact by the striker. S7.2.6 The weight of the penetration S7.1.10 The flat anvil is constructed striker is 6 pounds, 10 ounces (3 kg). of steel with a 5-inch (12.7 cm) min- S7.2.7 The point of the striker has an imum diameter impact face, and the included angle of 60°, a cone height of hemispherical anvil is constructed of 1.5 inches (3.8 cm), a tip radius of 0.02 steel with a 1.9 inch (4.8 cm) radius im- inch (standard 0.5 millimeter radius) pact face. and a minimum hardness of 60 Rock- S7.1.11 The rigid mount for both of well, C-scale. the anvils consists of a solid mass of at S7.2.8 The rigid mount for the pene- least 300 pounds (136.1 kg), the outer tration test headform is as described in surface of which consists of a steel S7.1.11. plate with minimum thickness of 1 S7.3 Retention system test. inch (2.5 cm) and minimum surface S7.3.1 The retention system test is 2 2 area of 1 ft (929 cm ). conducted by applying a static tensile S7.1.12 The drop system restricts side load to the retention assembly of a movement during the impact attenu- complete helmet, which is mounted, as ation test so that the sum of the areas described in S6.3, on a stationary test bounded by the acceleration-time re- headform as shown in Figure 4, and by sponse curves for both the x- and y- measuring the movement of the adjust- axes (horizontal axes) is less than five able portion of the retention system percent of the area bounded by the ac- test device under tension. celeration-time response curve for the S7.3.2 The retention system test de- vertical axis. vice consists of both an adjustable S7.2 Penetration test. loading mechanism by which a static S7.2.1 The penetration test is con- tensile load is applied to the helmet re- ducted by dropping the penetration tention assembly and a means for hold- test striker in guided free fall, with its ing the test headform and helmet sta- axis aligned vertically, onto the outer tionary. The retention assembly is fas- surface of the complete helmet, when tened around two freely moving rollers, mounted as specified in S6.3, at any both of which have a 0.5 inch (1.3 cm) point above the test line, described in diameter and a 3-inch (7.6 cm) center-

706

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00706 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.218

to-center separation, and which are assembly, in the same manner and at mounted on the adjustable portion of the same location as described in the tensile loading device (Figure 4). S7.3.3, for 120 seconds, and the max- The helmet is fixed on the test imum distance from the extremity of headform as necessary to ensure that it the adjustable portion of the retention does not move during the application system test device to the apex of the of the test loads to the retention as- helmet is measured. sembly. S7.3.3 A 50–pound (22.7 kg) prelimi- APPENDIX TO § 571.218 nary test load is applied to the reten- tion assembly, normal to the basic TABLE 1—WEIGHTS FOR IMPACT ATTENUATION TEST plane of the test headform and sym- DROP ASSEMBLY metrical with respect to the center of Test headform 1 the retention assembly for 30 seconds, size Weight —1b(kg) and the maximum distance from the Small ...... 7.8 (3.5 kg). extremity of the adjustable portion of Medium ...... 11.0 (5.0 kg). the retention system test device to the Large ...... 13.4 (6.1 kg). apex of the helmet is measured. 1 Combined weight of instrumented test headform and sup- S7.3.4 An additional 250–pound (113.4 porting assembly for drop test. kg) test load is applied to the retention

707

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00707 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.123 § 571.218 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

708

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00708 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.124 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.218

709

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00709 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.125 § 571.218 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

710

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00710 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.126 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.218

711

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00711 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.127 § 571.218 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

712

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00712 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.128 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.218

713

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00713 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.129 § 571.218 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

714

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00714 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.130 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.218

715

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00715 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.131 § 571.218 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

716

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00716 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.132 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.218

717

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00717 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.133 § 571.219 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

[38 FR 22391, Aug. 20, 1973, as amended at 39 FR 3554, Jan. 28, 1974; 45 FR 15181, Mar. 10, 1980; 53 FR 11288, Apr. 6, 1988; 53 FR 12529, Apr. 15, 1988]

§ 571.219 Standard No. 219; Windshield fatalities that result from occupants zone intrusion. contacting vehicle components dis- placed near or through the windshield. S1. Scope. This standard specifies lim- its for the displacement into the wind- S3. Application. This standard applies shield area of motor vehicle compo- to passenger cars and to multipurpose passenger vehicles, trucks and buses of nents during a crash. 4,536 kilograms or less gross vehicle S2. Purpose. The purpose of this weight rating. However, it does not standard is to reduce crash injuries and apply to forward control vehicles,

718

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00718 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.134 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.219

walk-in van-type vehicles, or to open- (a) The outer surface of the wind- body-type vehicles with fold-down or shield in its precrash configuration. removable windshields. (b) The locus of points 76 mm out- S4. Definitions. Daylight Opening ward along perpendiculars drawn to (DLO) means the maximum unob- each point on the outer surface of the structed opening through the glazing windshield. surface, including reveal or garnish (c) The locus of lines forming a 45° moldings adjoining the surface, as angle with the outer surface of the measured parallel to the outer surface windshield at each point along the top of the glazing material. and side edges of the outer surface of S5. Requirement. When the vehicle the windshield and the lower edge of travelling longitudinally forward at the protected zone determined in S6.1, any speed up to and including 48 km/h in the plane perpendicular to the edge impacts a fixed collision barrier that is at that point. perpendicular to the line of travel of S6.3 A template is cut or formed the vehicle, under the conditions of S7, from Styrofoam, type DB, cut cell, to no part of the vehicle outside the occu- the dimensions of the zone as deter- pant compartment, except windshield mined in S6.2. The template is affixed molding and other components de- to the windshield so that it delineates signed to be normally in contact with the protected zone and remains affixed the windshield, shall penetrate the pro- throughout the crash test. tected zone template, affixed according S7. Test conditions. The requirement to S6, to a depth of more than 6 mm, of S5. shall be met under the following and no such part of a vehicle shall pen- conditions: etrate the inner surface of that portion S7.1 The protected zone template is of the windshield, within the DLO, affixed to the windshield in the manner below the protected zone defined in S6. described in S6. S6. Protected zone template. S7.2 The hood, hood latches, and S6.1 The lower edge of the protected any other hood retention components zone is determined by the following are engaged prior to the barrier crash. procedure (See Figure 1). S7.3 Adjustable cowl tops or other (a) Place a 165 mm diameter rigid adjustable panels in front of the wind- sphere, with a mass of 6.8 kg in a posi- shield are in the position used under tion such that it simultaneously con- normal operating conditions when tacts the inner surface of the wind- windshield wiping systems are not in shield glazing and the surface of the in- use. strument panel, including padding. If S7.4 The parking brake is dis- any accessories or equipment such as engaged and the transmission is in neu- the steering control system obstruct tral. positioning of the sphere, remove them S7.5 Tires are inflated to the vehicle for the purposes of this procedure. manufacturer’s specifications. (b) Draw the locus of points on the S7.6 The fuel tank is filled to any inner surface of the windshield level from 90 to 95 per cent of capacity. contactable by the sphere across the S7.7 The vehicle, including test de- width of the instrument panel. From vices and instrumentation, is loaded as the outermost contactable points, ex- follows: tend the locus line horizontally to the (a) Except as specified in S7.6, a pas- edges of the glazing material. senger car is loaded to its unloaded ve- (c) Draw a line on the inner surface hicle weight plus its rated cargo and of the windshield below and 13 mm dis- luggage capacity weight, secured in the tant from the locus line. luggage area, plus a 50th-percentile (d) The lower edge of the protected test dummy as specified in part 572 of zone is the longitudinal projection onto this chapter at each front outboard the outer surface of the windshield of designated seating position and at any the line determined in S6.1(c). other position whose protection system S6.2 The protected zone is the space is required to be tested by a dummy enclosed by the following surfaces, as under the provisions of Standard No. shown in Figure 1: 208. Each dummy is restrained only by

719

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00719 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.220 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

means that are installed for protection stalled for protection at its seating po- at its seating position. sition. The load is distributed so that (b) Except as specified in S7.6, a mul- the mass on each axle as measured at tipurpose passenger vehicle, truck or the tire-ground interface is in propor- bus is loaded to its unloaded vehicle tion to its GAWR. If the mass on any weight, plus 136 kg or its rated cargo axle when the vehicle is loaded to its and luggage capacity, whichever is unloaded vehicle weight plus dummy less, secured to the vehicle, plus a 50th- mass exceeds the axle’s proportional percentile test dummy as specified in share of the test mass, the remaining part 572 of this chapter at each front mass is placed so that the mass on that outboard designated seating postion axle remains the same. For the pur- and at any other position whose pro- poses of this section, unloaded vehicle tection system is required to be tested weight does not include the mass of by a dummy under the provisions of work-performing accessories. Vehicles Standard No. 208. Each dummy is re- are tested to a maximum unloaded ve- strained only by means that are in- hicle weight of 2,495 kg.

[40 FR 25462, June 16, 1975, as amended at 40 FR 53033, Nov. 14, 1975; 41 FR 54946, Dec. 16, 1976; 45 FR 22046, Apr. 3, 1980; 63 FR 28946, May 27, 1998]

§ 571.220 Standard No. 220; School bus S2. Purpose. The purpose of this rollover protection. standard is to reduce the number of S1. Scope. This standard establishes deaths and the severity of injuries that performance requirements for school result from failure of the school bus bus rollover protection. body structure to withstand forces en- countered in rollover crashes.

720

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00720 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.007 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.220

S3. Applicability. This standard ap- S5.3 Position the force application plies to school buses. plate on the vehicle roof so that its S4. Requirements. When a force in rigid surface is perpendicular to a Newtons equal to 11⁄2 times the un- vertical longitudinal plane and it con- loaded vehicle weight in kilograms tacts the roof at not less than two multiplied by 9.8 m/sec 2 is applied to points, and so that, in the top pro- the roof of the vehicle’s body structure jected view, its longitudinal centerline through a force application plate as coincides with the longitudinal center- specified in S5, Test procedures— line of the vehicle, and its front and (a) The downward vertical movement rear edges are an equal distance inside at any point on the application plate the front and rear edges of the vehicle shall not exceed 130 mm and roof at the centerline. (b) Each emergency exit of the vehi- S5.4 Apply an evenly-distributed cle provided in accordance with Stand- vertical force in the downward direc- ard No. 217 (§ 571.217) shall be capable of tion to the force application plate at opening as specified in that standard any rate not more than 13 mm per sec- during the full application of the force ond, until a force of 2,224 N has been and after release of the force, except applied. that an emergency exit located in the S5.5 Apply additional vertical force roof of the vehicle is not required to be in the downward direction to the force capable of being opened during the ap- application plate at a rate of not more plication of the force. A particular ve- than 13 mm per second until the force hicle (i.e., test specimen) need not meet the emergency exit opening re- specified in S4. has been applied, and quirement after release of force if it is maintain this application of force. subjected to the emergency exit open- S5.6 Measure the downward move- ing requirements during the full appli- ment of any point on the force applica- cation of the force. tion plate which occurred during the S5. Test procedures. Each vehicle shall application of force in accordance with be capable of meeting the requirements S5.5. of S4. when tested in accordance with S5.7 To test the capability of the ve- the procedures set forth below. hicle’s emergency exits to open in ac- S5.1 With any non-rigid chassis-to- cordance with S4.(b)— body mounts replaced with equivalent (a) In the case of testing under the rigid mounts, place the vehicle on a full application of force, open the rigid horizontal surface so that the ve- emergency exits as specified in S4.(b) hicle is entirely supported by means of while maintaining the force applied in the vehicle frame. If the vehicle is con- accordance with S5.4 and S5.5; and structed without a frame, place the ve- (b) In the case of testing after the re- hicle on its body sills. Remove any lease of all force, release all downward components which extend upward from force applied to the force application the vehicle roof. plate and open the emergency exits as S5.2 Use a flat, rigid, rectangular specified in S4.(b). force application plate that is meas- S6. Test conditions. The following con- ured with respect to the vehicle roof ditions apply to the requirements spec- longitudinal and lateral centerlines, ified in S4. (a) In the case of a vehicle with a S6.1 Temperature. The ambient tem- GVWR of more than 4,536 kg, 305 mm perature is any level between 0 °C and shorter than the vehicle roof and 914 32 °C. mm wide; and S6.2 Windows and doors. Vehicle win- (b) In the case of a vehicle with a GVWR of 4,536 kg or less, 127 mm dows, doors, and emergency exits are in longer and 127 mm wider than the vehi- the fully-closed position, and latched cle roof. For purposes of these meas- but not locked. urements, the vehicle roof is that [41 FR 3875, Jan. 27, 1976, as amended at 41 structure, seen in the top projected FR 36026, 36027, Aug. 26, 1976; 63 FR 28948, view, that coincides with the passenger May 27, 1998] and driver compartment of the vehicle.

721

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00721 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.221 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

§ 571.221 Standard No. 221; School bus intervals of one year or less. Tubing, body joint strength. wires and harnesses are considered to S1. Scope. This standard establishes be serviceable components only at requirements for the strength of the their attachments. body panel joints in school bus bodies. S5 Requirements. S2. Purpose. The purpose of this S5.1 Except as provided in S5.2, each standard is to reduce deaths and inju- body panel joint, including small, ries resulting from the structural col- curved, and complex joints, when test- lapse of school bus bodies during crash- ed in accordance with the procedure of es. S6, shall hold the body panel to the S3. Application. This standard ap- member to which it is joined when sub- plies to school buses. jected to a force of 60 percent of the S4. Definitions. Body component means tensile strength of the weakest joined a part of a bus body made from a single body panel determined pursuant to piece of homogeneous material or from S6.2. a single piece of composite material S5.1.1 Body panels attached to each such as plywood. other shall have no unattached seg- Body panel means a body component ment at the joint longer than 203 mm. used on the exterior or interior surface S5.2 Exclusions to enclose the bus’ occupant space. S5.2.1 The requirements of S5.1 do Body panel joint means the area of not apply to— contact or close proximity between the (a) Any interior maintenance access edges of a body panel and another body panel or joint which lies forward of the component, including but not limited passenger compartment. to floor panels, and body panels made of composite materials such as plastic (b) Any interior maintenance access or plywood, excluding trim and decora- panel within the passenger compart- tive parts which do not contribute to ment that does not exceed 305 mm the strength of the bus body, members when measured across any two points such as rub rails which are entirely diametrically on opposite sides of the outside of body panels, ventilation pan- opening. els, components provided for functional (c) Trim and decorative parts which purposes, and engine access covers. do not contribute to the strength of the Bus body means that portion of a bus joint, support members such as rub that encloses the bus occupant space, rails which are entirely outside of body including the floor, but excluding the panels, doors and windows, ventilation bumpers and chassis frame and any panels, and engine access covers. structure forward of the passenger S6 Procedure compartment. S6.1 Preparation of the test speci- Maintenance access panel means a men. body panel which must be moved or re- S6.1.1 If a body panel joint is 203 moved to provide access to one or more mm or longer, cut a test specimen that serviceable component(s). consists of any 203 mm segment of the Passenger compartment means space joint, together with a portion of the within the school bus interior that is bus body whose dimensions are those between a vertical transverse plane lo- specified in Figure 1, so that the speci- cated 762 mm in front of the men’s centerline is perpendicular to forwardmost passenger seating ref- the joint at the midpoint of the joint erence point and including a vertical segment. Where the body panel joint is transverse plane tangent to the rear in- not fastened continuously, select the terior wall of the bus at the vehicle segment so that it does not bisect a centerline. spot weld or a discrete fastener. Sup- Serviceable component means any part port members which contribute to the of the bus, of either a mechanical or strength of a body panel joint, such as electrical nature, which is explicitly rub rails on the outside of body panels identified by the bus chassis and/or or underlying structure attached to body manufacturer in the owner’s man- joint members, shall remain attached ual or factory service manual as re- to the test specimen, except that mate- quiring routine maintenance actions at rial may be removed from the support

722

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00722 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.221

members as necessary to clear the grip- from outside the joint region of the bus ping areas of the joint members being body in accordance with Figure 1 of E tested. 8–89 Standard Test Methods of Tension S6.1.2 If a joint is less than 203 mm Testing of Metallic Materials, in Vol- long, cut a test specimen with enough ume 03.01 of the 1989 Annual Book of of the adjacent material to permit it to ASTM Standards, and by testing it in be held in the tension testing machine accordance with S6.3. specified in S6.3. (c) The cross sectional area of mate- S6.1.3 Prepare the test specimen in rial removed to facilitate the installa- accordance with the preparation proce- tion of fasteners shall be subtracted dures specified in the 1989 edition of from the cross-sectional area of the the Annual Book of American Society panel in the determination of the ten- for Testing and Materials (ASTM) sile strength of the weakest joined Standards. body panel. S6.2 Determination of minimum allow- S6.3 Strength Test. able strength. For purposes of deter- mining the minimum allowable joint S6.3.1 The joint specimen is gripped strength, determine the tensile on opposite sides of the joint in a ten- strengths of the joined body compo- sion testing machine in accordance nents as follows: with the 1989 Annual Book of ASTM (a) If the mechanical properties of a Standards. joint component material are specified S6.3.2 Adjust the testing machine by the ASTM in the 1989 Annual Book grips so that the applied force on the of ASTM Standards, the lowest value joint is at 90 degrees plus or minus 3 of that material’s thickness and tensile degrees from the joint centerline, as strength per unit of area shown in that shown in Figure 1. source shall be used. S6.3.3 A tensile force is applied to (b) If the mechanical properties of a the specimen by separating the heads material are not specified by the ASTM of the testing machine at any uniform in the 1989 Annual Book of ASTM rate not less than 3 mm and not more Standards, determine its tensile than 10 mm per minute until the speci- strength by cutting a sheet specimen men separates.

[41 FR 3872, Jan. 27, 1976, as amended at 41 FR 36027, Aug. 26, 1976; 67 FR 64366, 64367, Dec. 13, 2002; 68 FR 6360, Feb. 7, 2003]

723

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00723 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER13DE01.236 § 571.222 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

EDITORIAL NOTE: At 65 FR 11754, Mar. 6, Wheelchair securement device means a 2000, § 571.221 was amended by revising strap, webbing or other device used for S5.2.1(a), effective Apr. 5, 2000. However, securing a wheelchair to the school paragraph S5.2.1(a) does not exist in the text in effect at that time. The revised text reads bus, including allnecessary buckles and as follows: other fasteners. S4.1 The number of seating posi- § 571.221 Standard No. 221, School bus body tions considered to be in a bench seat joint strength. is expressed by the symbol W, and cal- culated as the bench width in millime- * * * * * ters divided by 381 and rounded to the S5.2.1 The requirements of S5.1.1 and S5.1.2 nearest whole number. do not apply to— S5. Requirements. (a) Each vehicle (a) Any interior maintenance access panel with a gross vehicle weight rating of which lies forward of the passenger compart- more than 4,536 kg shall be capable of ment, or which is less than 305 mm when meeting any of the requirements set measured across any two points diamet- rically on opposite sides of the opening. forth under this heading when tested under the conditions of S6. However, a particular school bus passenger seat * * * * * (i.e., test specimen) in that weight § 571.222 Standard No. 222; School bus class need not meet further require- passenger seating and crash protec- ments after having met S5.1.2 and tion. S5.1.5, or having been subjected to ei- S1. Scope. This standard establishes ther S5.1.3, S5.1.4, or S5.3. occupant protection requirements for (b) Each vehicle with a gross vehicle school bus passenger seating and re- weight rating of 4,536 kg or less shall straining barriers. be capable of meeting the following re- S2. Purpose. The purpose of this quirements at all seating positions standard is to reduce the number of other than the driver’s seat: deaths and the severity of injuries that (1)(A) In the case of vehicles manu- result from the impact of school bus factured before September 1, 1991, the occupants against structures within requirements of §§ 571.208, 571.209, and the vehicle during crashes and sudden 571.210 as they apply to multipurpose driving maneuvers. passenger vehicles; or S3. Application. This standard applies (B) In the case of vehicles manufac- to school buses. tured on or after September 1, 1991, the S4. Definitions. Contactable surface requirements of S4.4.3.3 of § 571.208 and means any surface within the zone the requirements of §§ 571.209 and specified in S5.3.1.1 that is contactable 571.210 as they apply to school buses from any direction by the test device with a gross vehicle weight rating of described in S6.6, except any surface on 4,536 kg or less; and the front of a seat back or restraining (2) The requirements of S5.1.2, S5.1.3, barrier 76 mm or more below the top of S5.1.4, S5.1.5, S5.3, and S5.4 of this the seat back or restraining barrier. standard. However, the requirements of School bus passenger seat means a seat §§ 571.208 and 571.210 shall be met at W in a school bus, other than the driver’s seating positions in a bench seat using seat. a body block as specified in Figure 2 of Wheelchair means a wheeled seat this standard, and a particular school frame for the support and conveyance bus passenger seat (i.e., a test speci- of a physically disabled person, com- men) in that weight class need not prised of at least a frame, seat, and meet further requirements after having wheels. met S5.1.2 and S5.1.5, or after having Wheelchair occupant restraint anchor- been subjected to either S5.1.3, S5.1.4, age means the provision for transfer- or S5.3 of this standard or § 571.210. ring wheelchair occupant restraint sys- S5.1 Seating requirements. School bus tem loads to the vehicle structure. passenger seats shall be forward facing. Wheelchair securement anchorage S5.1.1 [Reserved] means the provision for transferring S5.1.2 Seat back height and surface wheelchair securement device loads to area. Each school bus passenger seat the vehicle structure. shall be equipped with a seat back

724

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00724 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.222

that, in the front projected view, has a tion of the first loading bar at the posi- front surface area above the horizontal tion where the 1,557W newtons is at- plane that passes through the seating tained, position a second loading bar reference point, and below the hori- described in S6.5 so that it is laterally zontal plane 508 mm above the seating centered behind the seat back with the reference point, of not less than 90 per- bar’s longitudinal axis in a transverse cent of the seat bench width in milli- plane of the vehicle and in the hori- meters multiplied by 508. zontal plane 406 mm above the seating S5.1.3 Seat performance forward. reference point of the school bus pas- When a school bus passenger seat that senger seat behind the test specimen, has another seat behind it is subjected and move the bar forward against the to the application of force as specified seat back until a force of 44 N has been in S5.1.3.1 and S5.1.3.2, and subse- applied. quently, the application of additional S5.1.3.4 Apply additional force hori- force to the seat back as specified in zontally in the forward direction S5.1.3.3 and S5.1.3.4: through the upper bar until 452W joules (a) The seat back force/deflection of energy have been absorbed in de- curve shall fall within the zone speci- flecting the seat back (or restraining fied in Figure 1; barrier). Apply the additional load in (b) Seat back deflection shall not ex- not less than 5 seconds nor more than ceed 356 mm; (for determination of (a) 30 seconds. Maintain the pivot attach- and (b) the force/deflection curve de- ment point in the maximum forward scribes only the force applied through travel position for not less than 5 sec- the upper loading bar, and only the for- onds nor more than 10 seconds and re- ward travel of the pivot attachment lease the load in not less than 5 nor point of the upper loading bar, meas- more than 30 seconds. (For the deter- ured from the point at which the ini- mination of S5.1.3.4 the force/deflection tial application of 44 N of force is at- curve describes only the force applied tained.) through the upper loading bar, and the (c) The seat shall not deflect by an forward and rearward travel distance of amount such that any part of the seat the upper loading bar pivot attachment moves to within 102 mm of any part of point measured from the position at another school bus passenger seat or which the initial application of 44 N of restraining barrier in its originally in- force is attained.) stalled position; S5.1.4 Seat performance rearward. (d) The seat shall not separate from When a school bus passenger seat that the vehicle at any attachment point; and has another seat behind it is subjected (e) Seat components shall not sepa- to the application of force as specified rate at any attachment point. in S5.1.4.1 and S5.1.4.2: S5.1.3.1 Position the loading bar (a) Seat back force shall not exceed specified in S6.5 so that it is laterally 9,786 N; centered behind the seat back with the (b) Seat back deflection shall not ex- bar’s longitudinal axis in a transverse ceed 254 mm; (for determination of (a) plane of the vehicle and in any hori- and (b) the force/deflection curve de- zontal plane between 102 mm above and scribes only the force applied through 102 mm below the seating reference the loading bar, and only the rearward point of the school bus passenger seat travel of the pivot attachment point of behind the test specimen. the loading bar, measured from the S5.1.3.2 Apply a force of 3,114W new- point at which the initial application tons horizontally in the forward direc- of 222 N is attained. tion through the loading bar at the (c) The seat shall not deflect by an pivot attachment point. Reach the amount such that any part of the seat specified load in not less than 5 nor moves to within 102 mm of any part of more than 30 seconds. another passenger seat in its originally S5.1.3.3 No sooner than 1.0 second installed position; after attaining the required force, re- (d) The seat shall not separate from duce that force to 1,557W newtons and, the vehicle at any attachment point; while maintaining the pivot point posi- and

725

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00725 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.222 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(e) Seat components shall not sepa- straining barrier’s rear surface and the rate at any attachment point. seating reference point of the seat in S5.1.4.1 Position the loading bar de- front of which the barrier is required scribed in S6.5 so that it is laterally shall not be more than 610 mm meas- centered forward of the seat back with ured along a horizontal longitudinal the bar’s longitudinal axis in a trans- line through the seating reference verse plane of the vehicle and in the point in the forward direction. horizontal plane 343 mm above the S5.2.2 Barrier position and rear sur- seating reference point of the test spec- face area. The position and rear surface imen, and move the loading bar rear- area of the restraining barrier shall be ward against the seat back until a such that, in a front projected view of force of 222 N has been applied. the bus, each point of the barrier’s pe- S5.1.4.2 Apply additional force hori- rimeter coincides with or lies outside zontally rearward through the loading of the perimeter of the seat back of the bar until 316W joules (J) of energy has seat for which it is required. been absorbed in deflecting the seat S5.2.3 Barrier performance forward. back. Apply the additional load in not When force is applied to the restraining less than 5 seconds nor more than 30 barrier in the same manner as specified seconds. Maintain the pivot attach- in S5.1.3.1 through S5.1.3.4 for seating ment point in the maximum rearward performance tests: travel position for not less than 5 sec- (a) The restraining barrier force/de- onds nor more than 10 seconds and re- flection curve shall fall within the zone lease the load in not less than 5 sec- specified in Figure 1; onds nor more than 30 seconds. (For de- (b) Restraining barrier deflection termination of S5.1.4.2 the force deflec- shall not exceed 356 mm; (for computa- tion curve describes the force applied tion of (a) and (b) the force/deflection through the loading bar and the rear- curve describes only the force applied ward and forward travel distance of the through the upper loading bar, and loading bar pivot attachment point only the forward travel of the pivot at- measured from the position at which tachment point of the loading bar, the initial application of 222 N of force measured from the point at which the is attained.) initial application of 44 N of force is at- S5.1.5 Seat cushion retention. In the tained.) case of school bus passenger seats (c) Restraining barrier deflection equipped with seat cushions, with all shall not interfere with normal door manual attachment devices between operation; the seat and the seat cushion in the (d) The restraining barrier shall not manufacturer’s designated position for separate from the vehicle at any at- attachment, the seat cushion shall not tachment point; and separate from the seat at any attach- (e) Restraining barrier components ment point when subjected to an up- shall not separate at any attachment ward force in newtons of 5 times the point. mass of the seat cushion in kilograms S5.3 Impact zone requirements. and multiplied by 9.8 m/s 2, applied in S5.3.1 Head protection zone. Any any period of not less than 1 nor more contactable surface of the vehicle with- than 5 seconds, and maintained for 5 in any zone specified in S5.3.1.1 shall seconds. meet the requirements of S5.3.1.2 and S5.2 Restraining barrier requirements. S5.3.1.3. However, a surface area that Each vehicle shall be equipped with a has been contacted pursuant to an im- restraining barrier forward of any des- pact test need not meet further re- ignated seating position that does not quirements contained in S5.3. have the rear surface of another school S5.3.1.1 The head protection zones in bus passenger seat within 610 mm of its each vehicle are the spaces in front of seating reference point, measured each school bus passenger seat which along a horizontal longitudinal line are not occupied by bus sidewall, win- through the seating reference point in dow, or door structure and which, in re- the forward direction. lation to that seat and its seating ref- S5.2.1 Barrier-seat separation. The erence point, are enclosed by the fol- horizontal distance between the re- lowing planes;

726

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00726 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.222

(a) Horizontal planes 305 mm and 1016 restraining barrier within any zone mm above the seating reference point; specified in S5.3.2.1 is impacted from (b) A vertical longitudinal plane tan- any direction at 4.9 m/s by the knee gent to the inboard (aisle side) edge of form specified in S6.7, the resisting the seat; and force of the impacted material shall (c) A vertical longitudinal plane 83 not exceed 2,669 N and the contact area mm inboard of the outboard edge of the on the knee form surface shall not be seat; less than 1,935 mm 2. (d) Vertical transverse planes S5.4 Each school bus having one or through and 762 mm forward of the ref- more locations designed for carrying a erence point. person seated in a wheelchair shall S5.3.1.2 Head form impact requirement. comply with S5.4.1 through S5.4.4 at When any contactable surface of the each such wheelchair location. vehicle within the zones specified in S5.4.1 Wheelchair securement anchor- S5.3.1.1 is impacted from any direction ages. Each wheelchair location shall at 6.7 m/s by the head form described in have not less than four wheelchair se- S6.6, the axial acceleration at the cen- curement anchorages complying with ter of gravity of the head form shall be S5.4.1.1 through S5.4.1.3. such that the expression S5.4.1.1 Each wheelchair securement anchorage shall have a wheelchair se- 25.  1 t2  curement device complying with S5.4.2  ∫ adt () t12− t attached to it. tt12−  S5.4.1.2 The wheelchair securement t1 anchorages at each wheelchair location shall not exceed 1,000 where ‘‘a’’ is the shall be situated so that— axial acceleration expressed as a mul- (a) A wheelchair can be secured in a tiple of ‘‘g’’ (the acceleration due to forward-facing position. gravity), and ‘‘t1’’ and ‘‘t2’’ are any two (b) The wheelchair can be secured by points in time during the impact. wheelchair securement devices at two S5.3.1.3 Head form force distribution. locations in the front and two loca- When any contactable surface of the tions in the rear. vehicle within the zones specified in (c) The front wheel of a three- S5.3.1.1 is impacted from any direction wheeled wheelchair can be secured. at 6.7 m/s by the head form described in S5.4.1.3 Each wheelchair securement S6.6, the energy necessary to deflect anchorage shall be capable of with- the impacted material shall be not less standing a force of 13,344 Newtons ap- than 4.5 joules before the force level on plied as specified in paragraphs (a) the head form exceeds 667 N. When any through (d) of this section. When more contactable surface within such zones than one securement device share a is impacted by the head form from any common anchorage, the anchorage direction at 1.5 m/s the contact area on shall be capable of withstanding a force the head form surface shall be not less of 13,344 Newtons multiplied by the than 1,935 mm 2. number of securement devices sharing S5.3.2 Leg protection zone. Any part that anchorage. of the seat backs or restraining bar- (a) The initial application force shall riers in the vehicle within any zone be applied at an angle of not less than specified in S5.3.2.1 shall meet the re- 30 degrees, but not more than 60 de- quirements of S5.3.2.2. grees, measured from the horizontal. S5.3.2.1 The leg protection zones of (See Figure 4.) each vehicle are those parts of the (b) The horizontal projection of the school bus passenger seat backs and re- force direction shall be within a hori- straining barriers bounded by hori- zontal arc of ±45 degrees relative to a zontal planes 305 mm above and 102 mm longitudinal line which has its origin below the seating reference point of the at the anchorage location and projects school bus passenger seat immediately rearward for an anchorage whose behind the seat back or restraining wheelchair securement device is in- barrier. tended to secure the front of the wheel- S5.3.2.2 When any point on the rear chair and forward for an anchorage surface of that part of a seat back or whose wheelchair securement device is

727

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00727 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.016 § 571.222 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

intended to secure the rear of the (d) The 13,344 Newton force shall be wheelchair. (See Figure 4.) attained in not more than 30 seconds, (c) The force shall be applied at the and shall be maintained for 10 seconds. onset rate of not more than 133,440 (e) When a wheelchair securement de- Newtons per second. vice and an occupant restraint share a (d) The 13,344 Newton force shall be common anchorage, including occu- attained in not more than 30 seconds, pant restraint designs that attach the and shall be maintained for 10 seconds. occupant restraint to the securement S5.4.2 Wheelchair securement devices. device or the wheelchair, the loads Each wheelchair securement device specified by S5.4.1.3 and S5.4.3.2 shall be shall— applied simultaneously, under the con- (a) If incorporating webbing or a ditions specified in S5.4.3.2 (a) and (b). strap— (See Figure 6.) (1) Comply with the requirements for S5.4.3.3 Each anchorage for a wheel- Type 1 safety belt systems in S4.2, S4.3, chair occupant upper torso restraint and S4.4(a) of FMVSS No. 209, Seat Belt shall be capable of withstanding a force Assemblies; and of 6,672 Newtons applied as specified in (2) Provide a means of adjustment to paragraphs (a) through (d). remove slack from the device. (a) The initial application force shall (b) If not incorporating webbing or a be applied at a vertical angle of not strap, limit movement of the wheel- less than zero degrees, but not more chair through either the equipment de- than 40 degrees, below a horizontal sign or a means of adjustment. plane which passes through the anchor- S5.4.3 Wheelchair occupant restraint age. (See Figure 7.) anchorages. (b) The projection of the force direc- S5.4.3.1 Each wheelchair location tion onto the horizontal plane shall be shall have: within zero degrees and 45 degrees as (a) Not less than one anchorage for measured from a longitudinal line with the upper end of the upper torso re- its origin at the anchorage and pro- straint; and jecting forward. (See Figure 7.) (b) Not less than two floor anchor- (c) The force shall be applied at the ages for wheelchair occupant pelvic onset rate of not more than 66,720 New- and upper torso restraint. tons per second. S5.4.3.2 Each wheelchair occupant (d) The 6,672 Newton force shall be at- restraint floor anchorage shall be capa- tained in not more than 30 seconds, and ble of withstanding a force of 13,344 shall be maintained for 10 seconds. Newtons applied as specified in para- S5.4.4 Wheelchair occupant restraints. graphs (a) through (d). When more than (a) Each wheelchair location shall one wheelchair occupant restraint share a common anchorage, the an- have wheelchair occupant pelvic and chorage shall be capable of with- upper torso restraints attached to the standing a force of 13,344 Newtons mul- anchorages required by S5.4.3. tiplied by the number of occupant re- (b) Each wheelchair occupant re- straints sharing that anchorage. straint shall comply with the require- (a) The initial application force shall ments for Type 2 safety belt systems in be applied at a angle of not less than 45 S4.2, S4.3, and S4.4(b) of FMVSS No. degrees, but not more than 80 degrees, 209, Seat Belt Assemblies. measured from the horizontal. (See S6. Test conditions. The following con- Figure 5.) ditions apply to the requirements spec- (b) The horizontal projection of the ified in S5. force direction shall be within a hori- S6.1 Test surface. The bus is at rest zontal arc of ±45 degrees relative to a on a level surface. longitudinal line which has its origin S6.2 Tires. Tires are inflated to the at the anchorage and projects forward. pressure specified by the manufacturer (See Figure 5.) for the gross vehicle weight rating. (c) The force shall be applied at an S6.3 Temperature. The ambient tem- onset rate of not more than 133,440 perature is any level between 0 degrees Newtons per second. C and 32 degrees C.

728

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00728 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.222

S6.4 Seat back position. If adjustable, Practice J211a, December 1971. The a seat back is adjusted to its most up- head form exhibits no resonant fre- right position. quency below three times the fre- S6.5 Loading bar. The loading bar is quency of the channel class. The axis of a rigid cylinder with an outside diame- the acceleration sensing device coin- ter of 152 mm that has hemispherical cides with the straight line connecting ends with radii of 76 mm and with a the centerpoints of the two hemi- surface roughness that does not exceed spherical outer surfaces which con- 1.6 µm, root mean square. The length of stitute the head form shape. the loading bar is 102 mm less than the S6.6.3 The head form is guided by a width of the seat back in each test. The stroking device so that the direction of stroking mechanism applies force travel of the head form is not affected through a pivot attachment at the cen- by impact with the surface being tested ter point of the loading bar which al- at the levels called for in the standard. lows the loading bar to rotate in a hor- S6.7 Knee form. The knee form for izontal plane 30 degrees in either direc- measurement of force is a rigid 76 mil- tion from the transverse position. limeter-diameter cylinder, with an S6.5.1 A vertical or lateral force of equivalent weight of 44 N that has one 17,792 N applied externally through the hemispherical end with a 38 mm radius pivot attachment point of the loading forming a contact surface of the knee bar at any position reached during a form. The hemispherical surface rough- test specified in this standard shall not ness does not exceed 1.6 µm, root mean deflect that point more than 25 mm. square. S6.6 Head form. The head form for the measurement of acceleration is a S6.7.1 The direction of travel of the rigid surface comprised of two hemi- knee form is coincidental with the cen- spherical shapes, with total equivalent terline of the rigid cylinder. mass of 5.2 kg. The first of the two S6.7.2 The knee form is instru- hemispherical shapes has a diameter of mented with an acceleration sensing 166 mm. The second of the two hemi- device whose output is recorded in a spherical shapes has a 50 mm diameter data channel that conforms to the re- and is centered as shown in Figure 3 to quirements of a 600 Hz channel class as protrude from the outer surface of the specified in the SAE Recommended first hemispherical shape. The surface Practice J211a, December 1971. The roughness of the hemispherical shapes knee form exhibits no resonant fre- does not exceed 1.6 µm, root mean quency below three times the fre- square. quency of the channel class. The axis of S6.6.1 The direction of travel of the the acceleration sensing device is head form is coincidental with the aligned to measure acceleration along straight line connecting the the centerline of the cylindrical knee centerpoints of the two spherical outer form. surfaces which constitute the head S6.7.3 The knee form is guided by a form shape. stroking device so that the direction of S6.6.2 The head form is instru- travel of the knee form is not affected mented with an acceleration sensing by impact with the surface being tested device whose output is recorded in a at the levels called for in the standard. data channel that conforms to the re- S6.8 The head form, knee form, and quirements for a 1,000 Hz channel class contactable surfaces are clean and dry as specified in SAE Recommended during impact testing.

729

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00729 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.222 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

730

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00730 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.008 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.222

731

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00731 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.009 § 571.222 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

732

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00732 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.010 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.222

733

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00733 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.141 § 571.222 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

734

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00734 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.142 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.222

735

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00735 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.143 § 571.223 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

[41 FR 4018, Jan. 28, 1976, as amended at 41 FR 28528, July 12, 1976; 41 FR 36027, Aug. 26, 1976; 41 FR 54945, Dec. 16, 1976; 42 FR 64120, Dec. 22, 1977; 43 FR 9150, Mar. 6, 1978; 44 FR 18675, Mar. 29, 1979; 48 FR 12386, Mar. 24, 1983; 54 FR 46268, Nov. 2, 1989; 58 FR 4593, Jan. 15, 1993; 58 FR 46876, Sept. 3, 1993; 63 FR 28948, 28950, May 27, 1998]

§ 571.223 Standard No. 223; Rear im- S2. Purpose. The purpose of this pact guards. standard is to reduce the number of S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- deaths and serious injuries that occur quirements for rear impact guards for when light duty vehicles collide with trailers and semitrailers. the rear end of trailers and semitrailers.

736

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00736 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.144 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.223

S3. Application. This standard applies required by S5.5 of this standard, shall to rear impact guards for trailers and have a vertical height of at least 100 semitrailers subject to Federal Motor mm at each point across the guard Safety Standard No. 224, Rear Impact width, when projected horizontally on Protection (§ 571.224). a transverse vertical plane. Those in- S4. Definitions. stallation instructions or procedures In this standard, directional terms shall specify that the guard is to be such as bottom, center, height, hori- mounted so that all portions of the zontal, longitudinal, transverse, and rear horizontal member necessary to refer to directions relative to the vehi- achieve a 100 mm high projected cle orientation when the guard is ori- vertical height are located not more ented as if it were installed on a vehi- than 305 mm forward of the vehicle’s cle according to the installation in- rear extremity, as defined in S4 of 49 structions in S5.5 of this section. CFR 571.224, Rear Impact Protection. Chassis means the load supporting See Figure 1 of this section. frame structure of a motor vehicle. S5.2 Strength and Energy Absorption. Guard width means the maximum When tested under the procedures of S6 horizontal guard dimension that is per- of this section, each guard shall com- pendicular to the longitudinal vertical ply with the strength requirements of plane passing through the longitudinal S5.2.1 of this section at each test loca- centerline of the vehicle when the tion and the energy absorption require- guard is installed on the vehicle ac- ments of S5.2.2 of this section at test cording to the installation instructions location P3, as specified in S6.4 of this in S5.5 of this section. section. However, a particular guard Horizontal member means the struc- (i.e., test specimen) need not be tested tural member of the guard that meets at more than one location. the configuration requirements of S5.2.1 Guard Strength. The guard must S5.1.1 through 5.1.3 of § 571.224, Rear Im- resist the force levels specified in S5.2.1 pact Protection, when the guard is in- (a) through (c) of this section without stalled on a vehicle according to the deflecting by more than 125 mm. guard manufacturer’s installation in- structions. (a) A force of 50,000 N at test location P1 on either the left or the right side of Hydraulic guard means a guard de- signed to use fluid properties to pro- the guard as defined in S6.4(a) of this vide resistance force to deformation. section. Rear impact guard means a device in- (b) A force of 50,000 N at test location stalled on or near the rear of a vehicle P2 as defined in S6.4(b) of this section. so that when the vehicle is struck from (c) A force of 100,000 N at test loca- the rear, the device limits the distance tion P3 on either the left or the right that the striking vehicle’s front end side of the guard as defined in S6.4(c) of slides under the rear end of the im- this section. pacted vehicle. S5.2.2 Guard Energy Absorption. A Rigid test fixture means a supporting guard, other than a hydraulic guard, structure on which a rear impact guard shall absorb by plastic deformation can be mounted in the same manner it within the first 125 mm of deflection at is mounted to a vehicle. The rigid test least 5,650 J of energy at each test loca- fixture is designed to resist the forces tion P3. See Figure 2 of this section. applied to the rear impact guard with- S5.3 Labeling. Each guard shall be out significant deformation, such that permanently labeled with the informa- a performance requirement of this tion specified in S5.3 (a) through (c) of standard must be met no matter how this section. The information shall be small an amount of energy is absorbed in English and in letters that are at by the rigid test fixture. least 2.5 mm high. The label shall be S5. Requirements. placed on the forward-facing surface of S5.1 Projected Vertical Height. The the horizontal member of the guard, horizontal member of each guard, when 305 mm inboard of the right end of the viewed from the rear as it would be in- guard. stalled on a trailer pursuant to the in- (a) The guard manufacturer’s name stallation instructions or procedures and address.

737

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00737 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.223 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(b) The statement: ‘‘Manufactured in equate for the guard design, the in- llll’’ (inserting the month and year structions or procedures shall specify of guard manufacture). methods for adequately reinforcing the (c) The letters ‘‘DOT’’, constituting a vehicle chassis. Procedures for properly certification by the guard manufac- installing any guard attachment hard- turer that the guard conforms to all re- ware shall be provided. quirements of this standard. S6. Guard Test Procedures. The proce- S5.4 Guard Attachment Hardware. dures for determining compliance with Each guard, other than a guard that is S5.2 of this section are specified in S6.1 to be installed on a vehicle manufac- through S6.6 of this section. tured by the manufacturer of the S6.1 Preparation of Hydraulic Guards. guard, shall be accompanied by all at- For hydraulic guards, the horizontal tachment hardware necessary for in- member of the guard is deflected in a stallation of the guard on the chassis forward direction until the hydraulic of the motor vehicle for which it is in- unit(s) have reached the full extent of tended. their designed travel or 610 mm, which- S5.5 Installation Instructions. The ever occurs first. The hydraulic units manufacturer of rear impact guards for are compressed before the application sale to vehicle manufacturers shall in- of force to the guard in accordance clude with each guard printed instruc- with S6.6 of this section and main- tions in English for installing the tained in this condition throughout the guard, as well as a diagram or sche- testing under S6.6 of this section. matic depicting proper guard installa- S6.2 Guard Installation for Strength tion. The manufacturer of a rear im- and Energy Absorption Tests. pact guard for one of its own vehicles shall prepare and keep a copy of instal- (a) The rear impact guard is attached lation procedures applicable to each to a test device. vehicle/guard combination for a period (b) The test device for the compli- of one year from the date of vehicle ance test will be whichever of the fol- manufacture and provide them to lowing devices, if either was used, the NHTSA on request. The instructions or manufacturer used as a basis for its procedures shall specify: certification of the guard in S5.3(c) of (a) Vehicles on which the guard can this section. If the manufacturer did be installed. Vehicles may be des- not use one of these devices or does not ignated by listing the make and model specify a device when asked by the of the vehicles for which the guard is agency, the agency may choose either suitable, or by specifying the design of the following devices— elements that would make any vehicle (1) A rigid test fixture. In the case of an appropriate host for the particular testing on a rigid test fixture NHTSA guard (e.g., vehicles with frame rails of will consult the installation instruc- certain spacing and gauge of steel). tions or procedures to determine the (b) A description of the chassis sur- surface or structure that the guard is face to which the guard will be at- supposed to be mounted to and mount tached, including frame design types it to the rigid test fixture in the same with dimensions, material thickness, way. and tire track width. This description (2) A complete trailer for which in- shall be detailed enough to permit the stallation of the guard is suitable, as agency to locate and duplicate the provided in the manufacturer’s instal- chassis surface during compliance test- lation instructions or procedures re- ing. quired by S5.5 of this section. The (c) An explanation of the method of trailer chassis is secured so that it be- attaching the guard to the chassis of haves essentially as a fixed object dur- each vehicle make and model listed or ing the test, such that the test must be to the design elements specified in the passed no matter how little it moves instructions or procedures. The prin- during the test. cipal aspects of vehicle chassis configu- (c) The guard is attached in accord- ration that are necessary to the proper ance with the instructions or proce- functioning of the guard shall be speci- dures for guard attachment provided fied. If the chassis strength is inad- by the guard manufacturer for that

738

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00738 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.223

guard as required by S5.5 of this sec- is aligned with and touching the guard tion. test location, as defined by the speci- S6.3 Force Application Device. The fications of S6.4 of this section. force application device employed in (b) The longitudinal axis of the force S6.6 of this section consists of a rectan- application device passes through the gular solid made of rigid steel. The test location and is perpendicular to steel solid is 203 mm in height, 203 mm the transverse vertical plane that is in width, and 25 mm in thickness. The tangent to the rearmost surface of the 203 mm by 203 mm face of the block is guard’s horizontal member. used as the contact surface for applica- S6.6 Force Application. After the force tion of the forces specified in S5.2.1 (a) application device has been positioned through (c) of this section. Each edge according to S6.5 of this section, apply of the contact surface of the block has the loads specified in S5.2.1 of this sec- a radius of curvature of 5 mm plus or tion. Load application procedures are minus 1 mm. specified in the S6.6 (a) through (d) of S6.4 Test Locations. With the guard this section. mounted to the rigid test fixture or to (a) Using the force application de- a complete trailer, determine the test vice, apply force to the guard in a for- locations P1, P2, and P3 in accordance ward direction such that the displace- with the procedure set forth in S6.4 (a) ment rate of the force application de- through (c) of this section. See Figure vice is the rate, plus or minus 10 per- 1 of this section. cent, designated by the guard manufac- (a) Test location P1 is the point on turer within the range of 2.0 cm per the rearmost surface of the horizontal minute to 9.0 cm per minute. If the member of the guard that: guard manufacturer does not designate (1) Is located at a distance of 3⁄8 of the a rate, any rate within that range may guard width from the vertical longitu- be chosen. dinal plane passing through center of the guard; (b) If conducting a strength test to (2) Lies on either side of the center of satisfy the requirement of S5.2.1 of this the guard’s horizontal member; and section, the force is applied until the (3) Is 50 mm above the bottom of the forces specified in S5.2.1 of this section guard. have been exceeded, or until the dis- (b) Test location P2 is the point on placement of the force application de- the rearmost surface of the horizontal vice has reached at least 125 mm, member of the guard that: whichever occurs first. (1) Lies in the longitudinal vertical (c) If conducting a test to be used for plane passing through the center of the the calculation of energy absorption guard’s horizontal member; and levels to satisfy the requirement of (2) Is 50 mm above the bottom of the S5.2.2 of this section, apply the force to guard. the guard until displacement of the (c) Test location P3 is any point on force application device has reached 125 the rearmost surface of the horizontal mm. For calculation of guard energy member of the guard that: absorption, the value of force is re- (1) Is not less than 355 mm and not corded at least ten times per 25 mm of more than 635 mm from the vertical displacement of the contact surface of longitudinal plane passing through the loading device. Reduce the force center of the guard; until the guard no longer offers resist- (2) Lies on either the right or left ance to the force application device. side of the horizontal member of the Produce a force vs. deflection diagram guard; and of the type shown in Figure 2 of this (3) Is 50 mm above the bottom of the section using this information. Deter- guard. mine the energy absorbed by the guard S6.5 Positioning of Force Application by calculating the shaded area bounded Device. Before applying any force to the by the curve in the force vs. deflection guard, locate the force application de- diagram and the abscissa (X-axis). vice such that: (d) During each force application, the (a) The center point of the contact force application device is guided so surface of the force application device that it does not rotate. At all times

739

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00739 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.223 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

during the application of force, the lo- force application device remains con- cation of the longitudinal axis of the stant.

740

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00740 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.145 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.224

[61 FR 2030, Jan. 24, 1996, as amended at 63 FR 3662, Jan. 26, 1998]

§ 571.224 Standard No. 224; Rear im- porary living quarters as defined in 49 pact protection. CFR 529.2. If a cargo tank motor vehi- S1. Scope. This standard establishes cle, as defined in 49 CFR 171.8, is cer- requirements for the installation of tified to carry hazardous materials and rear impact guards on trailers and has a rear bumper or rear end protec- semitrailers with a gross vehicle tion device conforming with 49 CFR weight rating (GVWR) of 4,536 kg or part 178 located in the area of the hori- more. zontal member of the rear underride S2. Purpose. The purpose of this guard required by this standard, the standard is to reduce the number of guard need not comply with the energy deaths and serious injuries occurring absorption requirement (S5.2.2) of 49 when light duty vehicles impact the CFR 571.223. rear of trailers and semitrailers with a S4. Definitions. GVWR of 4,536 kg or more. Chassis means the load supporting S3. Application. This standard applies frame structure of a motor vehicle. to trailers and semitrailers with a Horizontal member means the struc- GVWR of 4,536 kg or more. The stand- tural member of the guard that meets ard does not apply to pole trailers, the configuration requirements of S5.1 pulpwood trailers, special purpose vehi- of this section when the guard is in- cles, wheels back vehicles, or tem- stalled on the vehicle according to the

741

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00741 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.146 § 571.224 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

installation instructions or procedures underride guard, as defined by S5.1.1 required by S5.5 of § 571.223, Rear Im- through S5.1.3. pact Guards. Wheels back vehicle means a trailer or Low chassis vehicle means a trailer or semitrailer whose rearmost axle is per- semitrailer having a chassis that ex- manently fixed and is located such that tends behind the rearmost point of the the rearmost surface of tires of the size rearmost tires and a lower rear surface recommended by the vehicle manufac- that meets the configuration require- turer for the vehicle on that axle is not ments of S5.1.1 through 5.1.3 of this sec- more than 305 mm forward of the trans- tion. verse vertical plane tangent to the rear Outer or Outboard means away from extremity of the vehicle. the trailer centerline and toward the S5. Requirements. side extremities of the trailer. S5.1 Installation; vehicle configuration. Pulpwood trailer means a trailer that Each vehicle shall be equipped with a is designed exclusively for harvesting rear impact guard certified as meeting logs or pulpwood and constructed with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard a skeletal frame with no means for at- No. 223, Rear Impact Guards (§ 571.223). tachment of a solid bed, body, or con- When the vehicle to which the guard is tainer. attached is resting on level ground, un- means the rearmost Rear extremity loaded, with its full capacity of fuel, point on a vehicle that is above a hori- and with its tires inflated and air sus- zontal plane located 560 mm above the pension, if so equipped, pressurized in ground and below a horizontal plane lo- accordance with the manufacturer’s cated 1,900 mm above the ground when recommendations, the guard shall com- the vehicle is configured as specified in ply with the requirements of S5.1.1 S5.1 of this section and when the vehi- through S5.1.3 of this section. See Fig- cle’s cargo doors, tailgate, or other per- ure 1 of this section. manent structures are positioned as they normally are when the vehicle is S5.1.1 Guard width. The outermost in motion. Nonstructural protrusions surfaces of the horizontal member of such as taillights, rubber bumpers, the guard shall extend outboard to hinges and latches are excluded from within 100 mm of the longitudinal the determination of the rearmost vertical planes that are tangent to the point. side extremities of the vehicle, but Rounded corner means a guard’s out- shall not extend outboard of those ermost end that curves upward or for- planes. See Figure 1 of this section. ward toward the front of the vehicle, or S5.1.2 Guard height. The vertical dis- both. tance between the bottom edge of the Side extremity means the outermost horizontal member of the guard and point on a vehicle’s side that is located the ground shall not exceed 560 mm at above a horizontal plane 560 mm above any point across the full width of the the ground, below a horizontal plane member. Notwithstanding this require- located 190 cm above the ground, and ment, guards with rounded corners between a transverse vertical plane may curve upward within 255 mm of tangent to the rear extremity of the the longitudinal vertical planes that vehicle and a transverse vertical plane are tangent to the side extremities of located 305 mm forward of that plane the vehicle. See Figure 1 of this sec- when the vehicle is configured as speci- tion. fied in S5.1 of this section. Non-struc- S5.1.3 Guard rear surface. At any tural protrusions such as taillights, height 560 mm or more above the hinges, rubber bumpers, and latches ground, the rearmost surface of the are excluded from the determination of horizontal member of the guard shall the outermost point. be located as close as practical to a Special purpose vehicle means a trailer transverse vertical plane tangent to or semitrailer having work-performing the rear extremity of the vehicle, but equipment that, while the vehicle is in no more than 305 mm forward of that transit, resides in or moves through plane. Notwithstanding this require- the area that could be occupied by the ment, the horizontal member may ex- horizontal member of the rear tend rearward of the plane, and guards

742

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00742 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.224

with rounded corners may curve for- cordance with the installation instruc- ward within 255 mm of the longitudinal tions or procedures provided pursuant vertical planes that are tangent to the to S5.5 of Standard No. 223, Rear Impact side extremities of the vehicle. Guards (§ 571.223). The vehicle must be S5.2 Installation Requirements. Guards of a type identified in the installation shall be attached to the vehicle’s chas- instructions as appropriate for the sis by the vehicle manufacturer in ac- guard.

[61 FR 2035, Jan. 24, 1996, as amended at 63 FR 3662, Jan. 26, 1998]

743

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00743 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.147 § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

§ 571.225 Standard No. 225; Child re- that term is defined at § 571.3) that is straint anchorage systems. rearward of the front seats(s). S1. Purpose and scope. This standard Seat bight means the area close to and establishes requirements for child re- including the intersection of the sur- straint anchorage systems to ensure faces of the vehicle seat cushion and their proper location and strength for the seat back. the effective securing of child re- SFAD 1 means Static Force Applica- straints, to reduce the likelihood of the tion Device 1 shown in Figures 12 to 16 anchorage systems’ failure, and to in- of this standard. crease the likelihood that child re- SFAD 2 means Static Force Applica- straints are properly secured and thus tion Device 2 shown in Figures 17 and more fully achieve their potential ef- 18 of this standard. fectiveness in motor vehicles. Shuttle bus means a bus with only one row of forward-facing seating positions S2. Application. This standard applies rearward of the driver’s seat. to passenger cars; to trucks and multi- Tether anchorage means a user-ready, purpose passenger vehicles with a gross permanently installed vehicle system vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 3,855 that transfers loads from a tether strap kilograms (8,500 pounds) or less; and to through the tether hook to the vehicle buses (including school buses) with a structure and that accepts a tether GVWR of 4,536 kg (10,000 lb) or less. hook. This standard does not apply to walk- Tether strap means a strap that is se- in van-type vehicles, vehicles manufac- cured to the rigid structure of the seat tured to be sold exclusively to the U.S. back of a child restraint system, and is Postal Service, shuttle buses, and fu- connected to a tether hook that trans- neral coaches. fers the load from that system to the S3. Definitions. tether anchorage. Child restraint anchorage means any Tether hook means a device, illus- vehicle component, other than Type I trated in Figure 11 of Standard No. 213 or Type II seat belts, that is involved (§ 571.213), used to attach a tether strap in transferring loads generated by a to a tether anchorage. child restraint system to the vehicle S4. General vehicle requirements. structure. S4.1 Each tether anchorage and Child restraint anchorage system means each child restraint anchorage system a vehicle system that is designed for installed, either voluntarily or pursu- attaching a child restraint system to a ant to this standard, in any new vehi- vehicle at a particular designated seat- cle manufactured on or after Sep- ing position, consisting of: tember 1, 1999, shall comply with the (a) Two lower anchorages meeting configuration, location, marking and the requirements of S9; and strength requirements of this standard. (b) A tether anchorage meeting the The vehicle shall be delivered with requirements of S6. written information, in English, on Child restraint fixture (CRF) means the how to appropriately use those anchor- fixture depicted in Figures 1 and 2 of ages and systems. this standard that simulates the di- S4.2 For passenger cars manufac- mensions of a child restraint system, tured on or after September 1, 1999 and and that is used to determine the space before September 1, 2000, not less than required by the child restraint system 80 percent of the manufacturer’s aver- and the location and accessibility of age annual production of vehicles (not the lower anchorages. including convertibles), as set forth in Funeral coach means a vehicle that S13, shall be equipped with a tether an- contains only a front row of occupant chorage as specified in paragraphs (a), seats, is designed exclusively for trans- (b) and (c) of S4.2, except as provided in porting a body and casket and that is S5. equipped with features to secure a cas- (a) Each vehicle with three or more ket in place during operation of the ve- forward-facing rear designated seating hicle. positions shall be equipped with a teth- Rear designated seating position means er anchorage conforming to the re- any designated seating position (as quirements of S6 at no fewer than

744

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00744 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

three forward-facing rear designated (2) Each vehicle with not more than seating positions. The tether anchor- two forward-facing rear designated age of a child restraint anchorage sys- seating positions shall be equipped tem may count towards the three re- with a child restraint anchorage sys- quired tether anchorages. In each vehi- tem conforming to the requirements of cle with a forward-facing rear des- S9 at each forward-facing rear des- ignated seating position other than an ignated seating position. outboard designated seating position, (b) Each vehicle, including a vehicle at least one tether anchorage (with or that is counted toward the percentage without the lower anchorages of a child of a manufacturer’s yearly production restraint anchorage system) shall be at required to be equipped with child re- such a designated seating position. In a straint anchorage systems, shall be vehicle with three or more rows of equipped as described in S4.3(b)(1), (2) seating positions, at least one of the or (3), subject to S13. tether anchorages (with or without the (1) Each vehicle with three or more lower anchorages of a child restraint forward-facing rear designated seating anchorage system) shall be installed at positions shall be equipped with a teth- a forward-facing seating position in the er anchorage conforming to the re- second row if such a forward-facing quirements of S6 at no fewer than seating position is available in that three forward-facing rear designated row. seating positions. The tether anchor- (b) Each vehicle with not more than age of a child restraint anchorage sys- two forward-facing rear designated tem may count towards the three re- seating positions shall be equipped quired tether anchorages. In each vehi- with a tether anchorage conforming to cle with a forward-facing rear des- the requirements of S6 at each forward- ignated seating position other than an facing rear designated seating position. outboard designated seating position, The tether anchorage of a child re- at least one tether anchorage (with or straint anchorage system may count without the lower anchorages of a child toward the required tether anchorages. restraint anchorage system) shall be at (c) Each vehicle without any forward- such a designated seating position. In a facing rear designated seating position vehicle with three or more rows of shall be equipped with a tether anchor- seating positions, at least one of the age conforming to the requirements of tether anchorages (with or without the S6 at each front forward-facing pas- lower anchorages of a child restraint senger seating position. anchorage system) shall be installed at S4.3 Each vehicle manufactured on or after September 1, 2000 and before a forward-facing seating position in the September 1, 2002, shall be equipped as second row if such a forward-facing specified in paragraphs (a) and (b) of seating position is available in that S4.3, except as provided in S5. row. (a) A specified percentage of each (2) Each vehicle with not more than manufacturer’s yearly production, as two forward-facing rear designated set forth in S14, shall be equipped as seating positions shall be equipped follows: with a tether anchorage conforming to (1) Each vehicle with three or more the requirements of S6 at each forward- forward-facing rear designated seating facing rear designated seating position. positions shall be equipped with a child The tether anchorage of a child re- restraint anchorage system conforming straint anchorage system may count to the requirements of S9 at not fewer toward the required tether anchorages. than two forward-facing rear des- (3) Each vehicle without any forward- ignated seating positions. In a vehicle facing rear designated seating position with three or more rows of seating po- shall be equipped with a tether anchor- sitions, at least one of the child re- age conforming to the requirements of straint anchorage systems shall be at a S6 at each front passenger seating posi- forward-facing seating position in the tion. second row if such a forward-facing S4.4 Vehicles manufactured on or seating position is available in that after September 1, 2002 shall be row. equipped as specified in paragraphs (a)

745

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00745 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

through (c) of S4.4, except as provided be available on and after September 1, in S5. 2004. A tether anchorage conforming to (a) Each vehicle with three or more the requirements of S6 must be in- forward-facing rear designated seating stalled— positions shall be equipped as specified (a) For each designated seating posi- in S4.4(a)(1) and (2). tion, other than that of the driver, in a (1) Each vehicle shall be equipped vehicle that has only one row of des- with a child restraint anchorage sys- ignated seating positions; tem conforming to the requirements of (b) For each forward-facing des- S9 at not fewer than two forward-fac- ignated seating position in the second ing rear designated seating positions. row of seating positions in a passenger At least one of the child restraint an- car or truck; chorage systems shall be installed at a (c) For each of any two forward-fac- forward-facing seating position in the ing designated seating positions in the second row in each vehicle that has second row of seating positions in a three or more rows, if such a forward- multipurpose passenger vehicle that facing seating position is available in has five or fewer designated seating po- that row. sitions; and, (2) Each vehicle shall be equipped (d) For each of any three forward-fac- with a tether anchorage conforming to ing designated seating positions that the requirements of S6 at a third for- are located to the rear of the first row ward-facing rear designated seating po- of designated seating positions in a sition. The tether anchorage of a child multipurpose passenger vehicle that restraint anchorage system may count has six or more designated seating po- towards the third required tether an- sitions. chorage. In each vehicle with a for- ward-facing rear designated seating po- S4.6 Adjustable seats. (a) A vehicle sition other than an outboard des- that is equipped with a forward-facing ignated seating position, at least one rear designated seating position that tether anchorage (with or without the can be relocated such that it is capable lower anchorages of a child restraint of being used at either an outboard or anchorage system) shall be at such a non-outboard forward-facing seating designated seating position. position shall be considered as having a (b) Each vehicle with not more than forward-facing non-outboard seating two forward-facing rear designated position. Such an adjustable seat must seating positions shall be equipped be equipped with a tether anchorage with a child restraint anchorage sys- (with or without the lower anchorages tem conforming to the requirements of of a child restraint anchorage system) S9 at each forward-facing rear des- if the vehicle does not have another ignated seating position. forward-facing non-outboard seating (c) Each vehicle without any forward- position that is so equipped. facing rear designated seating position (b) Tether and lower anchorages shall shall be equipped with a tether anchor- be available for use at all times, except age conforming to the requirements of when the seating position for which it S6 at each front forward-facing pas- is installed is not available for use be- senger seating position. cause the vehicle seat has been re- S4.5 As an alternative to complying moved or converted to an alternate use with the requirements of S4.2 through such as the carrying of cargo. S4.4 that specify the number of tether S5. General exceptions. anchorages that are required in a vehi- (a) Convertibles and school buses are cle and the designated seating posi- excluded from the requirements to be tions for which tether anchorages must equipped with tether anchorages. be provided, a vehicle manufactured (b) A vehicle may be equipped with a from September 1, 1999 to August 31, built-in child restraint system con- 2004 may, at the manufacturer’s option forming to the requirements of Stand- (with said option irrevocably selected ard No. 213 (49 CFR 571.213) instead of prior to, or at the time of, certification one of the required tether anchorages of the vehicle), meet the requirements or child restraint anchorage systems. of this S4.5. This alternative ceases to (c)(1) Each vehicle that—

746

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00746 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

(i) Does not have a rear designated seating position in place of one of the seating position and that thus meets child restraint anchorage systems that the conditions in S4.5.4.1(a) of Standard is required for the rear seat. In the case No. 208 (§ 571.208); and of convertibles, the front designated (ii) Has an air bag on-off switch passenger seating position need have meeting the requirements of S4.5.4 of only the two lower anchorages meeting Standard No. 208 (§ 571.208), shall have a the requirements of S9 of this stand- child restraint anchorage system for a ard. designated passenger seating position (d) A vehicle that does not have an in the front seat, instead of only a air bag on-off switch meeting the re- tether anchorage. In the case of quirements of S4.5.4 of Standard No. convertibles, the front designated pas- 208 (§ 571.208), shall not have any child senger seating position need have only restraint anchorage system installed at the two lower anchorages meeting the a front designated seating position. requirements of S9 of this standard. (e) A vehicle with a rear designated (iii) For vehicles manufactured on or seating position for which interference after September 1, 2002, each vehicle with transmission and/or suspension that does not have a rear designated components prevents the location of seating position, and does not have an the lower bars of a child restraint an- air bag installed at front passenger des- chorage system anywhere within the ignated seating positions pursuant to a zone described by S9.2 or S15.1.2.2(b) temporary exemption granted by such that the attitude angles of NHTSA under 49 CFR Part 555, must S15.1.2.2(a) could be met, is excluded have a child restraint anchorage sys- from the requirement to provide a tem installed at a front passenger des- child restraint anchorage system at ignated seating position. In the case of that position. However, except as pro- convertibles, the front designated pas- vided elsewhere in S5 of this standard, senger seating position need have only for vehicles manufactured on or after the two lower anchorages meeting the September 1, 2001, such a vehicle must requirements of S9 of this standard. have a tether anchorage at a front pas- (2) Each vehicle that— senger designated seating position. (i) Has a rear designated seating posi- S6. Requirements for tether anchorages. tion and meets the conditions in S4.5.4.1(b) of Standard No. 208 S6.1 Configuration of the tether an- (§ 571.208); and, chorage. Each tether anchorage shall: (ii) Has an air bag on-off switch (a) Permit the attachment of a tether meeting the requirements of S4.5.4 of hook of a child restraint system meet- Standard 208 (§ 571.208), shall have a ing the configuration and geometry child restraint anchorage system for a specified in Figure 11 of Standard No. designated passenger seating position 213 (§ 571.213); in the front seat, instead of a child re- (b) Be accessible without the need for straint anchorage system that is re- any tools other than a screwdriver or quired for the rear seat. In the case of coin; convertibles, the front designated pas- (c) Once accessed, be ready for use senger seating position need have only without the need for any tools; and the two lower anchorages meeting the (d) Be sealed to prevent the entry of requirements of S9 of this standard. exhaust fumes into the passenger com- (iii) For vehicles manufactured on or partment. after September 1, 2002, each vehicle S6.2 Location of the tether anchorage. that has a rear designated seating posi- A vehicle manufactured on or after tion and meets the conditions in September 1, 1999 and before September S4.5.4.1(b) of Standard No. 208 1, 2004 may, at the manufacturer’s op- (§ 571.208), and does not have an air bag tion (with said option irrevocably se- installed at front passenger designated lected prior to, or at the time of, cer- seating positions pursuant to a tem- tification of the vehicle), meet the re- porary exemption granted by NHTSA quirements of S6.2.1 or S6.2.2. Vehicles under 49 CFR Part 555, must have a manufactured on or after September 1, child restraint anchorage system in- 2004 must meet the requirements of stalled at a front passenger designated S6.2.1 of this standard.

747

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00747 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S6.2.1 Subject to S6.2.1.1 and S6.2.1.2 In the case of a vehicle S6.2.1.2, the part of each tether anchor- that— age that attaches to a tether hook (a) Has a user-ready tether anchorage must be located within the shaded zone for which no part of the shaded zone shown in Figures 3 to 7 of this standard shown in Figures 3 to 7 of this standard of the designated seating position for of the designated seating position for which it is installed. The zone is de- which the anchorage is installed is ac- fined with reference to the seating ref- cessible without removing a seating erence point (see § 571.3). (For purposes component of the vehicle; and of the figures, ‘‘H Point’’ is defined to (b) Has a tether strap routing device mean seating reference point.) A tether that is— anchorage may be recessed in the seat (1) Not less than 65 mm behind the back, provided that it is not in the torso line for that seating position, in strap wrap-around area at the top of the case of a flexible routing device or the vehicle seat back. For the area a deployable routing device, measured under the vehicle seat, the horizontally and in a vertical longitu- forwardmost edge of the shaded zone is dinal plane; or defined by the torso line reference (2) Not less than 100 mm behind the plane. torso line for that seating position, in S6.2.1.1 In the case of passenger cars the case of a fixed rigid routing device, and multipurpose passenger vehicles measured horizontally and in a vertical manufactured before September 1, 2004, longitudinal plane, the part of that an- the part of each user-ready tether an- chorage that attaches to a tether hook chorage that attaches to a tether hook may, at the manufacturer’s option may, at the manufacturer’s option (with said option selected prior to, or (with said option selected prior to, or at the time of, certification of the ve- at the time of, certification of the ve- hicle) be located outside that zone. hicle), instead of complying with S6.2.1, (c) The measurement of the location be located within the shaded zone of the flexible or deployable routing de- shown in Figures 8 to 11 of this stand- vice described in S6.2.1.2(b)(1) is made ard of the designated seating position with SFAD 2 properly attached to the for which it is installed, relative to the lower anchorages. A 40 mm wide nylon shoulder reference point of the three tether strap is routed through the rout- dimensional H-point machine described ing device and attached to the tether anchorage in accordance with the writ- in section 3.1 of SAE Standard J826 ten instructions required by S12 of this (June 1992), (incorporation by ref- standard. The forwardmost contact erence; see § 571.5), such that— point between the strap and the rout- (a) The H-point of the three dimen- ing device must be within the stated sional H-point machine is located— limit when the tether strap is flat (1) At the actual H-point of the seat, against the top surface of the SFAD as defined in section 2.2.11.3 of SAE and tensioned to 55 to 65 N. In seating Recommended Practice J1100 (June positions without lower anchorages of 1993), (incorporation by reference; see a child restraint anchorage system, the § 571.5), at the full rearward and down- SFAD 2 is held with its central lateral ward position of the seat; or plane in the central vertical longitu- (2) In the case of a designated seating dinal plane of the seating position. The position that has a child restraint an- adjustable anchor attaching bars of the chorage system, midway between SFAD 2 are replaced by spacers that vertical longitudinal planes passing end flush with the back surface of the through the lateral center of the bar in SFAD. each of the two lower anchorages of S6.2.2 Subject to S6.2.2.1 and that system; and S6.2.2.2, the portion of each user-ready (b) The back pan of the H-point ma- tether anchorage that is designed to chine is at the same angle to the bind with a tether strap hook shall be vertical as the vehicle seat back with located within the shaded zone shown the seat adjusted to its full rearward in Figures 3 to 7 of this standard of the and full downward position and the designated seating position for which it seat back in its most upright position. is installed, with reference to the H-

748

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00748 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

point of a template described in section as the vehicle seat back with the seat 3.1 of SAE Standard J826 (June 1992) adjusted to its full rearward and full (incorporation by reference; see § 571.5), downward position and the seat back in if: its most upright position; and (a) The H-point of the template is lo- (c) The template is positioned in the cated— vertical longitudinal plane that con- (1) At the unique Design H-point of tains the H-point of the template. the designated seating position, as de- S6.2.2.2 The portion of a user-ready fined in section 2.2.11.1 of SAE Rec- tether anchorage in a vehicle that is ommended Practice J1100 (June 1993) designed to bind with the tether strap (incorporation by reference; see § 571.5), hook may be located outside the at the full downward and full rearward shaded zone referred to in S6.2.2, if no position of the seat, or— part of the shaded zone is accessible (2) In the case of a designated seating without removing a seating component position that has a means of affixing of the vehicle and the vehicle is the lower portion of a child restraint equipped with a routing device that— system to the vehicle, other than a ve- (a) Ensures that the tether strap hicle seat belt, midway between the functions as if the portion of the an- two lower restraint system anchorages; chorage designed to bind with the teth- (b) The torso line of the template is er strap hook were located within the at the same angle to the transverse shaded zone; vertical plane as the vehicle seat back (b) Is at least 65 mm behind the torso with the seat adjusted to its full rear- line, in the case of a non-rigid-webbing- ward and full downward position and type routing device or a deployable the seat back in its most upright posi- routing device, or at least 100 mm be- tion; and hind the torso line, in the case of a (c) The template is positioned in the fixed rigid routing device; and vertical longitudinal plane that con- (c) When tested after being installed tains the H-point of the template. as it is intended to be used, is of suffi- S6.2.2.1 In passenger cars and multi- cient strength to withstand, with the purpose passenger vehicles manufac- user-ready tether anchorage, the load tured before September 1, 2004, the por- referred to in S6.3.4 or S6.3.4.1, as appli- tion of each user-ready tether anchor- cable. age to which a tether strap hook at- S6.3 Strength requirements for tether taches may be located within the anchorages. Subject to S6.3.2, a vehicle shaded zone shown in Figures 8 to 11 of manufactured on or after September 1, the designated seating position for 1999, and before September 1, 2004 may, which it is installed, with reference to at the manufacturer’s option (with said the shoulder reference point of a tem- option irrevocably selected prior to, or plate described in section 3.1 of SAE at the time of, certification of the ve- Standard J826 (June 1992) (incorpora- hicle), meet the requirements of S6.3.1 tion by reference; see § 571.5), if: or S6.3.4. Vehicles manufactured on or (a) The H-point of the template is lo- after September 1, 2004 and before Sep- cated— tember 1, 2005 must meet the require- (1) At the unique Design H-point of ments of S6.3.1 of this standard, except the designated seating position, as de- as provided in S16 of this standard. Ve- fined in section 2.2.11.1 of SAE Rec- hicles manufactured on or after Sep- ommended Practice J1100 (June 1993) tember 1, 2005 must meet the require- (incorporation by reference; see § 571.5), ments of S6.3.1. at the full downward and full rearward S6.3.1 Subject to S6.3.2, when tested position of the seat, or— in accordance with S8, after preloading (2) In the case of a designated seating the device with a force of 500 N, the position that has a means of affixing tether anchorage must not separate the lower portion of a child restraint completely from the vehicle seat or system to the vehicle, other than a ve- seat anchorage or the structure of the hicle seat belt, midway between the vehicle. two lower restraint system anchorages; S6.3.2 In vehicles manufactured be- (b) The torso line of the template is fore September 1, 2004, each user-ready at the same angle to the vertical plane tether anchorage in a row of designated

749

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00749 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

seating positions in a passenger car the manufacturer’s installation in- may, at the manufacturer’s option structions, namely, (with said option selected prior to, or (1) SFAD 1, to test a tether anchor- at the time of, certification of the ve- age at a designated seating position hicle), instead of complying with S6.3.1, that does not have a child restraint an- withstand the application of a force of chorage system; or 5,300 N, when tested in accordance with (2) SFAD 2, to test a tether anchor- S8.2, such that the anchorage does not age at a designated seating position release the belt strap specified in S8.2 that has a child restraint anchorage or allow any point on the tether an- system; chorage to be displaced more than 125 (b) Applied— mm. (1) In a forward direction parallel to S6.3.3 Provisions for simultaneous and the vehicle’s vertical longitudinal sequential testing. (a) In the case of ve- plane through the X point on the test hicle seat assemblies equipped with device, and, more than one tether anchorage sys- (2) Initially, along a horizontal line tem, the force referred to in S6.3.1 and or along any line below or above that S6.3.2 may, at the agency’s option, be line that is at an angle to that line of applied simultaneously to each of those not more than 5 degrees; tether anchorages. However, that force (c) Approximately linearly over a may not be applied simultaneously to time, at the option of the vehicle man- tether anchorages for any two adjacent ufacturer, of not more than 30 seconds, seating positions whose midpoints are at any onset force rate of not more less than 400 mm apart, as measured in than 135 000 N/s; and accordance with S6.3.3(a)(1) and (2) and (d) Maintained at a 10,000 N level for Figure 20. one second. (1) The midpoint of the seating posi- S6.3.4.1 In a passenger car manufac- tion lies in the vertical longitudinal tured before September 1, 2004, every plane that is equidistant from vertical user-ready tether anchorage in a row of longitudinal planes through the geo- designated seating positions must, metric center of each of the two lower when tested, subject to subsection anchorages at the seating position. For S6.3.4.2, withstand the application of a those seating positions that do not pro- force of 5,300 N, which force must be— vide lower anchorages, the midpoint of the seating position lies in the vertical (a) Applied by means of a belt strap longitudinal plane that passes through that— the SgRP of the seating position. (1) Extends not less than 250 mm for- (2) Measure the distance between the ward from the vertical plane touching vertical longitudinal planes passing the rear top edge of the vehicle seat through the midpoints of the adjacent back, seating positions, as measured along a (2) Is fitted at one end with suitable line perpendicular to the planes. hardware for applying the force and at (b) A tether anchorage of a particular the other end with a bracket for the at- child restraint anchorage system will tachment of the user-ready tether an- not be tested with the lower anchor- chorage, and ages of that anchorage system if one or (3) Passes over the top of the vehicle both of those lower anchorages have seat back as shown in Figure 19 of this been previously tested under this standard; standard. (b) Applied— S6.3.4 Subject to subsections S6.3.4.1 (1) In a forward direction parallel to and S6.3.4.2, every user-ready tether the vehicle’s longitudinal vertical anchorage in a row of designated seat- plane, and ing positions shall, when tested, with- (2) Initially, along a horizontal line stand the application of a force of or along any line below that line that 10,000 N— is at an angle to that line of not more (a) Applied by means of one of the than 20 degrees; following types of test devices, in- (c) Attained within 30 seconds, at any stalled as a child restraint system onset force rate of not more than would be installed in accordance with 135,000 N/s; and

750

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00750 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

(d) Maintained at a 5,300 N level for sition, adjust the seat back as rec- one second. ommended by the manufacturer in its S6.3.4.2 If the zones in which tether instructions for attaching child re- anchorages are located overlap and if, straints. If no instructions are pro- in the overlap area, a user-ready tether vided, adjust the seat back to the posi- anchorage is installed that is designed tion that enables SFAD 2 to attach to to accept the tether strap hooks of two the lower anchorages that is the clos- restraint systems simultaneously, both est to the most upright position. portions of the tether anchorage that S7. Test conditions for testing tether an- are designed to bind with a tether strap chorages. hook shall withstand the force referred The test conditions described in para- to in subsection S6.3.4 or S6.3.4.1, as the graphs (a) and (b) of S7 apply to the case may be, applied to both portions test procedures in S8. simultaneously. (a) Vehicle seats are adjusted to their S6.3.4.3 Provisions for simultaneous full rearward and full downward posi- and sequential testing. (a) In the case of tion and the seat back is placed in its vehicle seat assemblies equipped with most upright position. When SFAD 2 is more than one tether anchorage sys- used in testing and cannot be attached tem, the force referred to in S6.3.4, to the lower anchorages with the seat 6.3.4.1 or S6.3.4.2 may, at the agency’s back in this position, adjust the seat option, be applied simultaneously to back as recommended by the manufac- each of those tether anchorages. How- turer in its instructions for attaching ever, that force may not be applied si- child restraints. If no instructions are multaneously to tether anchorages for provided, adjust the seat back to the any two adjacent seating positions position that enables SFAD 2 to attach whose midpoints are less than 400 mm to the lower anchorages that is the apart, as measured in accordance with closest to the most upright position. S6.3.4.3(a)(1) and (2) and Figure 20. (b) Head restraints are adjusted in (1) The midpoint of the seating posi- accordance with the manufacturer’s in- tion lies in the vertical longitudinal structions, provided pursuant to S12, as plane that is equidistant from vertical to how the head restraints should be longitudinal planes through the geo- adjusted when using the child restraint metric center of each of the two lower anchorage system. If instructions with anchorages at the seating position. For regard to head restraint adjustment those seating positions that do not pro- are not provided pursuant to S12, the vide lower anchorages, the midpoint of head restraints are adjusted to any po- the seating position lies in the vertical sition. longitudinal plane that passes through S8 Test procedures. Each vehicle the SgRP of the seating position. shall meet the requirements of S6.3.1 (2) Measure the distance between the and S6.3.3 when tested according to the vertical longitudinal planes passing following procedures. Where a range of through the midpoints of the adjacent values is specified, the vehicle shall be seating positions, as measured along a able to meet the requirements at all line perpendicular to the planes. points within the range. For the test- (b) A tether anchorage of a particular ing specified in these procedures, the child restraint anchorage system will SFAD used in the test has a tether not be tested with the lower anchor- strap consisting of webbing material ages of that anchorage system if one or with an elongation limit of 4 percent at both of those lower anchorages have a tensile load of 65,000 N (14,612 lb). Pre- been previously tested under this tension the tether strap with 53.5 N to standard. 67 N of preload prior to the test. The S6.3.4.4 The strength requirement strap is fitted at one end with a high tests shall be conducted with the vehi- strength steel tether hook for attach- cle seat adjusted to its full rearward ment to the tether anchorage. The and full downward position and the tether hook meets the specifications in seat back in its most upright position. Standard No. 213 (49 CFR § 571.213) as to When SFAD 2 is used in testing and the configuration and geometry of cannot be attached to the lower an- tether hooks required by the standard. chorages with the seat back in this po- A steel cable is connected to the X

751

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00751 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

point through which the test force is (1) Initially, in a forward direction in applied. a vertical longitudinal plane and S8.1 Apply the force specified in through the Point X on the test device; S6.3.1 as follows— and (a) Use the following specified test (2) Initially, along a line through the device, as appropriate: X point and at an angle of 10 ±5 degrees (1) SFAD 1, to test a tether anchor- above the horizontal. Apply a preload age at a designated seating position force of 500 N to measure the angle; and that does not have a child restraint an- then chorage system; or, (3) Increase the pull force as linearly (2) SFAD 2, to test a tether anchor- as practicable to a full force applica- age at a designated seating position tion of 15,000 N in not less than 24 sec- that has a child restraint anchorage onds and not more than 30 seconds, and system. maintain at a 15,000 N level for 1 sec- (b) Attach the SFAD 1 to the vehicle ond. seat using the vehicle belts or the S8.2 Apply the force specified in SFAD 2 to the lower anchorages of the S6.3.2 as follows: child restraint anchorage system, as (a) Attach a belt strap, and tether appropriate, and attach the test device hook, to the user-ready tether anchor- to the tether anchorage, in accordance age. The belt strap extends not less with the manufacturer’s instructions than 250 mm forward from the vertical provided pursuant to S12 of this stand- transverse plane touching the rear top ard. For the testing specified in this edge of the vehicle seat back, and procedure, if SFAD 1 cannot be at- passes over the top of the vehicle seat tached using the vehicle belts because back as shown in Figure 19 of this of the location of the vehicle belt buck- standard; le, the test device is attached by mate- rial whose breaking strength is equal (b) Apply the force at the end of the to or greater than the breaking belt strap— strength of the webbing for the seat (1) Initially, in a forward direction in belt assembly installed as original a vertical longitudinal plane that is equipment at that seating position. parallel to the vehicle’s longitudinal The geometry of the attachment dupli- centerline; cates the geometry, at the pre-load (2) Initially, along a horizontal line point, of the attachment of the origi- or along any line below or above that nally installed seat belt assembly. All line that is at an angle to that line of belt systems (including the tether) not more than 20 degrees; used to attach the test device are (3) So that the force is attained with- tightened to a tension of not less than in 30 seconds, at any onset rate of not 53.5 N and not more than 67 N on the more than 135,000 N/s; and webbing portion of the belt. For SFAD (4) Maintained at a 5,300 N level for a 1, apply a rearward force of 135 N ± 15 minimum of 1 second. N, in a horizontal plane through point S9 Requirements for the lower anchor- ‘‘X’’ of SFAD 1. While maintaining the ages of the child restraint anchorage sys- force, tighten the vehicle seat belt to a tem. As an alternative to complying tension of not less than 53.5 N and not with the requirements of S9, a vehicle more than 67 N measured at the lap manufactured on or after September 1, portion of the seat belt and maintain 1999 and before September 1, 2004 may, the tension during the preload, lock at the manufacturer’s option (with said the seat belt retractor, and tighten the option irrevocably selected prior to, or tether belt strap to remove all slack. A at the time of, certification of the ve- rearward force of 135 N ± 15 N is applied hicle), meet the requirements in S15 of to the center of the lower front cross- this standard. Vehicles manufactured member of SFAD 2 to press the device on or after September 1, 2004 and before against the seat back as the fore-aft September 1, 2005 must meet all of the position of the rearward extensions of requirements of S9 of this standard, ex- the SFAD is adjusted to remove any cept as provided in S16 of this standard slack or tension. with regard to S9.4. Vehicles manufac- (c) Apply the force— tured on or after September 1, 2005

752

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00752 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

must meet all the requirements of S9 (a) Not more than 70 mm behind the of this standard. corresponding point Z of the CRF, S9.1 Configuration of the lower an- measured parallel to the bottom sur- chorages face of the CRF and in a vertical longi- S9.1.1 The lower anchorages shall tudinal plane, while the CRF is pressed consist of two bars that— against the seat back by the rearward (a) Are 6 mm ±.1 mm in diameter; application of a horizontal force of 100 (b) Are straight, horizontal and N at point A on the CRF; and transverse; (b) Not less than 120 mm behind the (c) As shown in Figure 21, are: vehicle seating reference point, meas- (i) Not less than 25 mm in length, and ured horizontally and in a vertical lon- (ii) Are not more than 60 mm in gitudinal plane. length between the anchor bar supports S9.2.3 Adjustable seats are adjusted or other structural members of the ve- as follows: hicle that restrict lateral movement of (a) Place adjustable seat backs in the the components of a child restraint manufacturer’s nominal design riding that are designed to attach to the bars, position in the manner specified by the measured in a vertical plane 7 mm manufacturer; and rearward of the vertical plane that is (b) Place adjustable seats in the full tangent of the rearward face of the an- rearward and full downward position. chor bar. (d) For bars installed in vehicles S9.3 Adequate fit of the lower anchor- manufactured on or after March 1, 2005, ages. Each vehicle and each child re- the bars must not be capable of being straint anchorage system in that vehi- stowable (foldable or otherwise cle shall be designed such that the CRF stowable). can be placed inside the vehicle and at- (e) [Reserved] tached to the lower anchorages of each (f) Are part of the vehicle, such that child restraint anchorage system, with they can only be removed by use of a adjustable seats adjusted as described tool, such as a screwdriver or wrench; in S9.3(a) and (b). and (a) Place adjustable seat backs in the (g) Are rigidly attached to the vehi- manufacturer’s nominal design riding cle such that they will not deform position in the manner specified by the more than 5 mm when subjected to a manufacturer; and 100 N force in any direction. (b) Place adjustable seats in the full S9.2 Location of the lower anchorages. rearward and full downward position. S9.2.1 The anchorage bars are lo- (c) To facilitate installation of the cated at the vehicle seating position by CRF in a vehicle seat, the side, back using the CRF rearward extensions, and top frames of the CRF may be re- with the CRF placed against or near moved for installation in the vehicle, the vehicle seat back. With the CRF at- as indicated in Figure 1A of this stand- tached to the anchorages and resting ard. If necessary, the height of the CRF on the seat cushion, the bottom surface may be 560 mm. shall have attitude angles within the S9.4 Strength of the lower anchorages. limits in the following table, angles S9.4.1 When tested in accordance measured relative to the vehicle hori- with S11, the lower anchorages shall zontal, longitudinal and transverse ref- not allow point X on SFAD 2 to be dis- erence planes. placed horizontally more than the dis- tances specified below, after preloading TABLE TO S9.2.1 the device— Pitch ...... 15° ± 10° (a) 175 mm, when a force of 11,000 N is Roll ...... 0° ± 5° Yaw ...... 0° ± 10° applied in a forward direction in a Note: An explanation of the above angles is given in Figure vertical longitudinal plane; and 1. (b) 150 mm, for lower anchorages S9.2.2 With adjustable seats ad- when a force of 5,000 N is applied in a justed as described in S9.2.3, each lower lateral direction in a vertical longitu- anchorage bar shall be located so that dinal plane that is 75 ± 5 degrees to ei- a vertical transverse plane tangent to ther side of a vertical longitudinal the front surface of the bar is: plane.

753

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00753 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S9.4.1.1 Forces described in S9.4.1(a), at the horizontal centerline of each forward direction, shall be applied with lower anchorage, as illustrated in Fig- an initial force application angle of 10 ure 22. The center of the circle must be ±5 degrees above the horizontal. Forces in the vertical longitudinal plane that described in S9.4.1(b), lateral direction, passes through the center of the bar shall be applied horizontally (0 ±5 de- (±25 mm). grees). (4) The circle may be on a tag. S9.4.1.2 The amount of displacement (b) The vehicle shall be configured is measured relative to an undisturbed such that the following is visible: Each point on the vehicle body. of the bars installed pursuant to S4, or S9.4.2 Provisions for simultaneous and a permanently attached guide device sequential testing. (a) In the case of ve- for each bar. The bar or guide device hicle seat assemblies equipped with must be visible without the compres- more than one child restraint anchor- sion of the seat cushion or seat back, age system, the lower anchorages may, when the bar or device is viewed, in a at the agency’s option, be tested simul- vertical longitudinal plane passing taneously. However, forces may not be through the center of the bar or guide applied simultaneously for any two ad- device, along a line making an upward jacent seating positions whose 30 degree angle with a horizontal plane. midpoints are less than 400 mm apart, Seat backs are in the nominal design as measured in accordance with riding position. The bars may be cov- S9.4.2(a)(1) and (2) and Figure 20. ered by a removable cap or cover, pro- (1) The midpoint of the seating posi- vided that the cap or cover is perma- tion lies in the vertical longitudinal nently marked with words, symbols or plane that is equidistant from vertical pictograms whose meaning is explained longitudinal planes through the geo- to the consumer in written form as metric center of each of the two lower part of the owner’s manual. anchorages at the seating position. S10. Test conditions for testing the (2) Measure the distance between the lower anchorages. The test conditions vertical longitudinal planes passing described in this paragraph apply to through the midpoints of the adjacent the test procedures in S11. seating positions, as measured along a (a) Adjust vehicle seats to their full line perpendicular to the planes. rearward and full downward position (b) The lower anchorages of a par- and place the seat backs in their most ticular child restraint anchorage sys- upright position. When SFAD 2 is used tem will not be tested if one or both of in testing and cannot be attached to the anchorages have been previously the lower anchorages with the seat tested under this standard. back in this position, adjust the seat S9.5 Marking and conspicuity of the back as recommended by the manufac- lower anchorages. Each vehicle shall turer in its instructions for attaching comply with S9.5(a) or (b). child restraints. If no instructions are (a) Above each bar installed pursuant provided, adjust the seat back to the to S4, the vehicle shall be permanently position closest to the upright position marked with a circle: that enables SFAD 2 to attach to the (1) That is not less than 13 mm in di- lower anchorages. ameter; (b) Head restraints are adjusted in (2) That is either solid or open, with accordance with the manufacturer’s in- or without words, symbols or picto- structions, provided pursuant to S12, as grams, provided that if words, symbols to how the head restraints should be or pictograms are used, their meaning adjusted when using the child restraint is explained to the consumer in writ- anchorage system. If instructions with ing, such as in the vehicle’s owners regard to head restraint adjustment manual; and are not provided pursuant to S12, the (3) That is located such that its cen- head restraints are adjusted to any po- ter is on each seat back between 50 and sition. 100 mm above or on the seat cushion S11. Test procedure. Each vehicle shall 100 ± 25 mm forward of the intersection meet the requirements of S9.4 when of the vertical transverse and hori- tested according to the following pro- zontal longitudinal planes intersecting cedures. Where a range of values is

754

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00754 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

specified, the vehicle shall be able to (c) Include instructions that provide meet the requirements at all points a step-by-step procedure, including dia- within the range. grams, for properly attaching a child (a) Forward force direction. Place restraint system’s tether strap to the SFAD 2 in the vehicle seating position tether anchorages. and attach it to the two lower anchor- S13. Tether anchorage phase-in require- ages of the child restraint anchorage ments. system. Do not attach the tether an- S13.1 Passenger cars manufactured chorage. A rearward force of 135 ± 15 N on or after September 1, 1999 and before is applied to the center of the lower September 1, 2000 shall comply with front crossbar of SFAD 2 to press the S13.1.1 through S13.2. At anytime dur- device against the seat back as the ing the production year ending August fore-aft position of the rearward exten- 31, 2000, each manufacturer shall, upon sions of the SFAD is adjusted to re- request from the Office of Vehicle Safe- move any slack or tension. Apply a ty Compliance, provide information preload force of 500 N at point X of the identifying the passenger cars (by test device. Increase the pull force as make, model and vehicle identification linearly as practicable to a full force number) that have been certified as application of 11,000 N in not less than complying with the tether anchorage 24 seconds and not more than 30 sec- requirements of this standard. The onds, and maintain at an 11,000 N level manufacturer’s designation of a pas- for 1 second. senger car as a certified vehicle is ir- (b) Lateral force direction. Place SFAD revocable. 2 in the vehicle seating position and at- S13.1.1 Subject to S13.2, for pas- tach it to the two lower anchorages of senger cars manufactured on or after the child restraint anchorage system. September 1, 1999 and before September Do not attach the tether anchorage. A 1, 2000, the number of vehicles com- plying with S4.2 shall be not less than rearward force of 135 ± 15 N is applied 80 percent of: to the center of the lower front cross- (a) The manufacturer’s average an- bar of SFAD 2 to press the device nual production of passenger cars man- against the seat back as the fore-aft ufactured on or after September 1, 1996 position of the rearward extensions of and before September 1, 1999; or the SFAD is adjusted to remove any (b) The manufacturer’s production of slack or tension. Apply a preload force passenger cars manufactured on or of 500 N at point X of the test device. after September 1, 1999 and before Sep- Increase the pull force as linearly as tember 1, 2000. practicable to a full force application S13.1.2 For the purpose of calcu- of 5,000 N in not less than 24 seconds lating average annual production of ve- and not more than 30 seconds, and hicles for each manufacturer and the maintain at a 5,000 N level for 1 second. number of vehicles manufactured by S12. Written instructions. The vehicle each manufacturer under S13.1.1, a ve- must provide written instructions, in hicle produced by more than one manu- English, for using the tether anchor- facturer shall be attributed to a single ages and the child restraint anchorage manufacturer as provided in S13.1.2(a) system in the vehicle. If the vehicle through (c), subject to S13.2. has an owner’s manual, the instruc- (a) A vehicle which is imported shall tions must be in that manual. The in- be attributed to the importer. structions shall: (b) A vehicle manufactured in the (a) Indicate which seating positions United States by more than one manu- in the vehicle are equipped with tether facturer, one of which also markets the anchorages and child restraint anchor- vehicle, shall be attributed to the man- age systems; ufacturer which markets the vehicle. (b) In the case of vehicles required to (c) A vehicle produced by more than be marked as specified in paragraphs one manufacturer shall be attributed S4.1, S9.5(a), or S15.4, explain the to any one of the vehicle’s manufactur- meaning of markings provided to lo- ers specified by an express written con- cate the lower anchorages of child re- tract, reported to the National High- straint anchorage systems; and way Traffic Safety Administration

755

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00755 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

under 49 CFR part 596, between the tember 1, 2002. Subject to S14.4, for vehi- manufacturer so specified and the man- cles manufactured on or after Sep- ufacturer to which the vehicle would tember 1, 2001 and before September 1, otherwise be attributed under S13.1.2(a) 2002, the number of vehicles complying or (b). with S4.3 shall be not less than 50 per- S13.2 For the purposes of calcu- cent of: lating average annual production of (a) The manufacturer’s average an- passenger cars for each manufacturer nual production of vehicles manufac- and the number of passenger cars man- tured on or after September 1, 1998 and ufactured by each manufacturer under before September 1, 2001; or S13.1, each passenger car that is ex- (b) The manufacturer’s production on cluded from the requirement to provide or after September 1, 2001 and before tether anchorages is not counted. September 1, 2002. S13.3 Until May 1, 2001, vehicles man- ufactured by a final-stage manufac- S14.2 Vehicles produced by more than turer or alterer need not be equipped one manufacturer. with the tether anchorages required by S14.2.1 For the purpose of calcu- S4.3 of this standard. Vehicles manu- lating average annual production of ve- factured by a final-stage manufacturer hicles for each manufacturer and the or alterer on or after May 1, 2001 must number of vehicles manufactured by be equipped with the tether anchorages each manufacturer under S14.1.1 specified in S4.3. through S14.1.2, a vehicle produced by S14. Lower anchorages phase-in re- more than one manufacturer shall be quirements for vehicles manufactured on attributed to a single manufacturer as or after September 1, 2000 and before Sep- follows, subject to S14.2.2. tember 1, 2002. (a) A vehicle which is imported shall S14.1 Vehicles manufactured on or be attributed to the importer. after September 1, 2000 and before Sep- (b) A vehicle manufactured in the tember 1, 2002 shall comply with S14.1.1 United States by more than one manu- through S14.1.2. At anytime during the facturer, one of which also markets the production years ending August 31, vehicle, shall be attributed to the man- 2001, and August 31, 2002, each manufac- ufacturer which markets the vehicle. turer shall, upon request from the Of- S14.2.2 A vehicle produced by more fice of Vehicle Safety Compliance, pro- than one manufacturer shall be attrib- vide information identifying the vehi- uted to any one of the vehicle’s manu- cles (by make, model and vehicle iden- facturers specified by an express writ- tification number) that have been cer- ten contract, reported to the National tified as complying with the child re- Highway Traffic Safety Administration straint anchorage requirements of this under 49 CFR part 596, between the standard. The manufacturer’s designa- manufacturer so specified and the man- tion of a vehicle as a certified vehicle ufacturer to which the vehicle would is irrevocable. otherwise be attributed under S14.2.1. S14.1.1 Vehicles manufactured on or S14.3 Alternative phase-in schedules. after September 1, 2000 and before Sep- (a) Final-stage manufacturers and tember 1, 2001. Subject to S14.4, for vehi- cles manufactured on or after Sep- alterers. A final-stage manufacturer or tember 1, 2000 and before September 1, alterer may, at its option, comply with 2001, the number of vehicles complying the requirements set forth in S14.3(a)(1) with S4.3 shall be not less than 20 per- and (2), instead of the requirements set cent of: forth in S14.1.1 through S14.1.2. (a) The manufacturer’s average an- (1) Vehicles manufactured on or after nual production of vehicles manufac- September 1, 2000 and before September tured on or after September 1, 1997 and 1, 2002 are not required to be equipped before September 1, 2000; or with the lower anchorages specified in (b) The manufacturer’s production on this standard. or after September 1, 2000 and before (2) Vehicles manufactured on or after September 1, 2001. September 1, 2002 must be equipped S14.1.2 Vehicles manufactured on or with the lower anchorages specified in after September 1, 2001 and before Sep- this standard.

756

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00756 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

(b) Small volume manufacturers. Vehi- the anchorages and resting on the seat cles manufactured on or after Sep- cushion, the bottom surface shall have tember 1, 2000 and before September 1, attitude angles within the limits in the 2002 that are manufactured by a manu- following table, angles measured rel- facturer that produces fewer than 5,000 ative to the vehicle horizontal, longitu- vehicles worldwide annually are not re- dinal and transverse reference planes. quired to provide the lower anchorages specified in this standard. TABLE TO S15.1.2.2(A) S14.4 For the purposes of calcu- lating average annual production of ve- Pitch ...... 15° ±10° ° ± ° hicles for each manufacturer and the Roll ...... 0 5 ° ± ° number of vehicles manufactured by Yaw ...... 0 10 each manufacturer under S14.1.1 and Note: An explanation of the above angles is given in Fig- S14.1.2, each vehicle that is excluded ure 1. from the requirement to provide child (b) With adjustable seats adjusted as restraint anchorage systems is not described in S15.1.2.2(c), each lower an- counted. chorage bar shall be located so that a S15 Alternative to complying with the vertical transverse plane intersecting requirements of S9. As an alternative to the center of the bar is: complying with the requirements of S9, (1) Not more than 70 mm behind a vehicle manufactured on or after point Z of the CRF, measured parallel September 1, 1999 and before September to the bottom surface of the CRF and 1, 2004 may, at the manufacturer’s op- to the center of the bar, with the CRF tion (with said option irrevocably se- rear surface against the seat back; and lected prior to, or at the time of, cer- (2) Not less than 120 mm behind the tification of the vehicle), meet the re- vehicle seating reference point, meas- quirements in S15 of this standard. Ve- ured horizontally and to the center of hicles manufactured on or after Sep- the bar. (NOTE: To facilitate installa- tember 1, 2004 must meet the require- tion of the CRF in a vehicle seat, the ments of S9 of this standard. CRF may be constructed of smaller S15.1 Dimensions and installation re- separable parts and assembled in the quirements. vehicle seat. Alternatively, vehicle S15.1.1 General. The vehicle anchor- components may be removed to allow ages are positioned near the seat bight. access.) The location of the anchorages is de- (c) Adjustable seats are adjusted as fined with respect to the CRF. If the recommended by the vehicle manufac- vehicle seat is adjustable, it is adjusted turer for use with child restraint sys- as recommended by the vehicle manu- tems. facturer for use with child restraint S15.2 Static Strength Requirements. systems. S15.2.1 The strength of the anchor- S15.1.2 Anchorage dimensions and lo- ages shall be determined using the pro- cation. cedure of S15.3 to apply forces to the S15.1.2.1 The lower anchorages shall SFAD 2, installed in the vehicle seat- consist of two bars that— ing position and engaged with the an- (a) Are 6 mm ±.1 mm in diameter; chorages. The vehicle seat shall be in- (b) Are straight, horizontal and stalled in the vehicle, or in sufficient transverse; parts of the vehicle so as to be rep- (c) Are not less than 25 mm in length; resentative of the strength and rigidity (d)–(e) [Reserved] of the vehicle structure. If the seat is (f) Are permanently attached to the adjustable, it shall be placed in the po- vehicle or vehicle seat such that they sition recommended by the vehicle can only be removed by use of a tool, manufacturer for use with child re- such as a screwdriver or wrench. straint systems. If no adjusted position S15.1.2.2 (a) The anchorage bars are is recommended, the seat shall be located at the vehicle seating position placed in any position, at the agency’s with the aid of and with respect to the option. CRF rearward extensions, with the S15.2.2 Horizontal excursion of point CRF placed against or near the vehicle X during application of the 8 kN and 5 seat back. With the CRF attached to kN forces must be not more than 125

757

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00757 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

mm, after preloading the device. The through the midpoints of the adjacent amount of displacement is measured seating positions, as measured along a relative to an undisturbed point on the line perpendicular to the planes. vehicle body. (b) The lower anchorages of a par- S15.3 Forces and directions. ticular child restraint anchorage sys- S15.3.1 A rearward force of 135 N ±15 tem will not be tested if one or both of N shall be applied to the center of the the anchorages have been previously lower front crossbar of SFAD 2 to press tested under this standard. the device against the seat back as the S15.4 Marking and conspicuity of the fore-aft position of the rearward exten- lower anchorages. At least one anchor- sions of the SFAD is adjusted to re- age bar (when deployed for use), one move any slack or tension. Forces shall guidance fixture, or one seat marking be applied to SFAD 2 in forward and feature shall be readily visible to the lateral directions according to the fol- person installing the CRF. If guidance lowing table. fixtures are used to meet this require- ment, the fixture(s) (although remov- TABLE TO S15.3.1—DIRECTIONS OF TEST able) must be installed. Storable an- FORCES chorages shall be provided with a tell- Forward ... 0° ±5° ...... 8 kN ±0.25 kN tale or label that is visible when the Lateral ..... 75° ±5° (to both sides of 5 kN ±0.25 kN anchorage is stored. straight forward). S16. Phase-in of strength requirements S15.3.2 Forces in the forward direc- for vehicles manufactured on or after Sep- tion shall be applied with an initial tember 1, 2004 and before September 1, force application angle of 10 ±5 degrees 2005. At anytime during the production above the horizontal. Lateral forces year ending August 31, 2005, each man- shall be applied horizontally (0° ±5°). A ufacturer shall, upon request from the pre-load force of 500 N ±25 N shall be Office of Vehicle Safety Compliance, applied at the prescribed loading point provide information identifying the ve- (point X) in Figure 17. The force shall hicles (by make, model and vehicle be increased to 8 kN ±0.25 kN for for- identification number) that have been ward tests, or to 5 kN ±0.25 kN for lat- certified as complying with S6.3.1 or eral tests. Full application of the force S6.3.4, and with S9.4 or S15.2 and S15.3. shall be achieved within a time period The manufacturer’s designation of a of 2 seconds or less. The force shall be vehicle as meeting the particular re- maintained for a period of 0.25 seconds quirement is irrevocable. ±0.05 seconds. S16.1 Tether anchorage phase-in of S15.3.3 Provisions for simultaneous strength requirements. For vehicles man- and sequential testing. (a) If anchorages ufactured on or after September 1, 2004 for more than one child restraint an- and before September 1, 2005, the num- chorage system are installed in the ve- ber of vehicles complying with S6.3.1 hicle seat assembly and not directly shall be not less than 90 percent of: into the vehicle structure, the forces (a) the manufacturer’s average an- described in S15.3 may, at the agency’s nual production of vehicle manufac- option, be applied simultaneously to tured on or after September 1, 2001 and SFADs engaged with the anchorages. before September 1, 2004; or However, that force may not be applied (b) The manufacturer’s production on simultaneously to SFADs engaged at or after September 1, 2004 and before any two adjacent seating positions September 1, 2005. whose midpoints are less than 400 mm S16.2 Lower anchorages phase-in of apart, as measured in accordance with strength requirements. S15.3.3(a)(1) and (2) and Figure 20. For vehicles manufactured on or (1) The midpoint of the seating posi- after September 1, 2004 and before Sep- tion lies in the vertical longitudinal tember 1, 2005, the number of vehicles plane that is equidistant from vertical complying with S9.4 shall be not less longitudinal planes through the geo- than 90 percent of: metric center of each of the two lower (a) The manufacturer’s average an- anchorages at the seating position. nual production of vehicle manufac- (2) Measure the distance between the tured on or after September 1, 2001 and vertical longitudinal planes passing before September 1, 2004; or

758

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00758 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

(b) The manufacturer’s production on ufacturer to which the vehicle would or after September 1, 2003 and before otherwise be attributed under S16.3.1. September 1, 2004. S16.4 Alternative phase-in schedules. S16.3 Vehicles produced by more than (a) Final-stage manufacturers and one manufacturer. alterers. A final-stage manufacturer or S16.3.1 For the purpose of calcu- alterer may, at its option, comply with lating average annual production of ve- the requirements set forth in S16.4(a)(1) hicles for each manufacturer and the and (2), instead of the requirements set number of vehicles manufactured by forth in S16.1 through S16.2. each manufacturer under S16.1 and (1) Vehicles manufactured on or after S16.2, a vehicle produced by more than September 1, 2004 and before September one manufacturer shall be attributed 1, 2005 may meet the requirements of S6.3.4 instead of S6.3.1, and may meet to a single manufacturer as follows, the requirements of S15.2 and S15.3 in- subject to S16.3.2. stead of S9.4. (a) A vehicle which is imported shall (2) Vehicles manufactured on or after be attributed to the importer. September 1, 2005 must meet the re- (b) A vehicle manufactured in the quirements of S6.3.4 and S9.4. United States by more than one manu- (b) Small volume manufacturers. Vehi- facturer, one of which also markets the cles manufactured on or after Sep- vehicle, shall be attributed to the man- tember 1, 2004 and before September 1, ufacturer that markets the vehicle. 2005 that are manufactured by a manu- S16.3.2 A vehicle produced by more facturer that produces fewer than 5,000 than one manufacturer shall be attrib- vehicles worldwide annually may meet uted to any one of the vehicle’s manu- the requirements of S6.3.4 instead of facturers specified by an express writ- S6.3.1, and may meet the requirements ten contract, reported to the National of S15.2 and S15.3 instead of S9.4. Vehi- Highway Traffic Safety Administration cles manufactured on or after Sep- under 49 CFR Part 596, between the tember 1, 2005 must meet the require- manufacturer so specified and the man- ments of S6.3.4 and S9.4.

759

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00759 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

FIGURES TO § 571.225

760

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00760 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.014 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

761

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00761 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.015 § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

762

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00762 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.016 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

763

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00763 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.017 § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

764

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00764 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.018 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

765

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00765 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.019 § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

766

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00766 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.020 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

767

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00767 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.021 § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

768

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00768 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.022 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

769

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00769 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.023 § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

770

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00770 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.024 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

771

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00771 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.025 § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

772

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00772 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER05MR99.016 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

773

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00773 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER05MR99.017 § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

774

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00774 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER05MR99.018 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

775

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00775 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.026 § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

776

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00776 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.027 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

777

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00777 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27JN03.000 § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

778

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00778 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.029 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.225

779

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00779 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER31AU99.030 ER11AU04.551 § 571.225 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

[64 FR 10823, Mar. 5, 1999, as amended at 64 FR 47587, Aug. 31, 1999; 65 FR 46640, July 31, 2000; 68 FR 24667, May 8, 2003; 68 FR 38226, June 27, 2003; 69 FR 48823, Aug. 11, 2004; 69 FR 60565, Oct. 12, 2004]

780

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00780 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER11AU04.552 ER11AU04.553 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.301

§ 571.301 Standard No. 301; Fuel sys- total of 142 g for the first 5 minutes of tem integrity. testing at each successive 90° incre- S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- ment. For the remaining test period, at quirements for the integrity of motor each increment of 90° fuel spillage dur- vehicle fuel systems. ing any 1 minute interval shall not ex- S2. Purpose. The purpose of this ceed 28 g. standard is to reduce deaths and inju- S5.7. Alcohol fuel vehicles. Each vehi- ries occurring from fires that result cle manufactured to operate on an al- from fuel spillage during and after cohol fuel (e.g., methanol, ethanol) or a motor vehicle crashes, and resulting fuel blend containing at least 20 per- from ingestion of fuels during siphon- cent alcohol fuel shall meet the re- ing. quirements of S6.6. S3. Application. This standard applies S6. Test requirements. Each vehicle to passenger cars, and to multipurpose with a GVWR of 4,536 kg or less shall be passenger vehicles, trucks and buses capable of meeting the requirements of that have a GVWR of 4,536 kg or less any applicable barrier crash test fol- and use fuel with a boiling point above lowed by a static rollover, without al- 0 °C, and to school buses that have a teration of the vehicle during the test GVWR greater than 4,536 kg and use sequence. A particular vehicle need not fuel with a boiling point above 0 °C. meet further requirements after having S4. Definition. Fuel spillage means the been subjected to a single barrier crash fall, flow, or run of fuel from the vehi- test and a static rollover test. Where cle but does not include wetness result- manufacturer options are specified in ing from capillary action. this standard, the manufacturer must S5. General requirements. select an option not later than the S5.1 Passenger cars, and multipurpose time it certifies the vehicle and may passenger vehicles, trucks, and buses with not thereafter select a different option a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less. Each for that vehicle. Each manufacturer passenger car and each multipurpose must, upon request from the National passenger vehicle, truck, and bus with Highway Traffic Safety Administra- a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or less shall tion, provide information regarding meet the requirements of S6.1 through which of the compliance options it has S6.4. Each of these types of vehicles selected for a particular vehicle or that is manufactured to use alcohol make/model. fuels shall also meet the requirements S6.1 Frontal barrier crash. When the of S6.6. vehicle travelling longitudinally for- S5.2 [Reserved] ward at any speed up to and including S5.3 [Reserved] 48 km/h impacts a fixed collision bar- S5.4 Schoolbuses with a GVWR greater rier that is perpendicular to the line of than 10,000 pounds. Each schoolbus with travel of the vehicle, or at any angle up a GVWR greater than 10,000 pounds to 30° in either direction from the per- shall meet the requirements of S6.5. pendicular to the line of travel of the Each schoolbus with a GVWR greater vehicle, with 50th-percentile test dum- than 10,000 pounds that is manufac- mies as specified in part 572 of this tured to use alcohol fuels shall meet chapter at each front outboard des- the requirements of S6.6. ignated seating position and at any S5.5 Fuel spillage; Barrier crash. Fuel other position whose protection system spillage in any fixed or moving barrier is required to be tested by a dummy crash test shall not exceed 28 g from under the provisions of Standard No. impact until motion of the vehicle has 208, under the applicable conditions of ceased, and shall not exceed a total of S7., fuel spillage shall not exceed the 142 g in the 5-minute period following limits of S5.5. cessation of motion. For the subse- S6.2 Rear moving barrier crash. (a) quent 25-minute period, fuel spillage Vehicles manufactured before September during any 1 minute interval shall not 1, 2006. When the vehicle is impacted exceed 28 g. from the rear by the barrier specified S5.6 Fuel spillage; rollover. Fuel spill- in S7.3(a) of this standard moving at 48 age in any rollover test, from the onset km/h, with 50th percentile test dum- of rotational motion, shall not exceed a mies as specified in part 572 of this

781

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00781 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.301 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

chapter at each front outboard des- factured in two or more stages or al- ignated seating position, under the ap- tered (within the meaning of 49 CFR plicable conditions of S7, fuel spillage 567.7) after having been previously cer- must not exceed the limits of S5.5. tified in accordance with Part 567 of (b) Vehicles manufactured on or after this chapter may meet S6.3(a) of this September 1, 2006. When the vehicle is standard until September 1, 2005. Vehi- impacted from the rear by a moving de- cles with a GVWR of 6,000 lb (2,722 kg) formable barrier 80 ± 1.0 km/h with a 70 or less that are manufactured in two or percent overlap, with 50th percentile more stages or altered (within the test dummies as specified in part 572 of meaning of 49 CFR 567.7) after having this chapter at each front outboard been previously certified in accordance designated seating position, under the with Part 567 of this chapter and that applicable conditions of S7, fuel spill- are manufactured on or after Sep- age must not exceed the limits of S5.5. tember 1, 2005 must meet the require- (c) Small volume manufacturers. Not- ments of S6.3(b) withstanding S6.2(b) of this standard, (e) Notwithstanding S6.3(b) and (c) of vehicles manufactured on or after Sep- this standard, vehicles with a GVWR tember 1, 2004 and before September 1, greater than 6,000 lb (2,722 kg) that are 2008 by a manufacturer that produces manufactured in two or more stages or fewer than 5,000 vehicles worldwide an- altered (within the meaning of 49 CFR nually may meet the requirements of 567.7) after having been previously cer- S6.2(a). Vehicles manufactured on or tified in accordance with Part 567 of after September 1, 2008 by small vol- this chapter may meet S6.3(a) of this ume manufacturers must meet the re- standard until September 1, 2006. Vehi- quirements of S6.2(b). cles with a GVWR greater than 6,000 lb S6.3 Side moving barrier crash. (a) Ve- (2,722 kg) that are manufactured in two hicles manufactured before September 1, or more stages or altered (within the 2004. When the vehicle is impacted lat- meaning of 49 CFR 567.7) after having erally on either side by a barrier mov- been previously certified in accordance ing at 32 km/h with 50th percentile test with Part 567 of this chapter and that dummies as specified in part 572 of this are manufactured on or after Sep- chapter at positions required for test- tember 1, 2006 must meet the require- ing to Standard No. 208 (49 CFR ments of S6.3(b). 571.208), under the applicable condi- tions of S7, fuel spillage must not ex- S6.4 Static rollover. When the vehicle ceed the limits of S5.5. is rotated on its longitudinal axis to ° (b) Vehicles manufactured on or after each successive increment of 90 , fol- September 1, 2004. When the vehicle is lowing an impact crash of S6.1, S6.2, or impacted laterally on either side by a S6.3, fuel spillage shall not exceed the moving deformable barrier at 53 ± 1.0 limits of S5.6. km/h with 49 CFR part 572, subpart F S6.5 Moving contoured barrier crash. test dummies at positions required for When the moving contoured barrier as- testing by S3(b) of Standard No. 214, sembly traveling longitudinally for- under the applicable conditions of S7 of ward at any speed up to and including this standard, fuel spillage shall not 48 km/h impacts the test vehicle exceed the limits of S5.5 of this stand- (school bus with a GVWR exceeding ard. 4,536 kg) at any point and angle, under (c) Notwithstanding S6.3(b) of this the applicable conditions of S7.1 and standard, vehicles having a GVWR S7.5, fuel spillage shall not exceed the greater than 6,000 lb (2,722 kg) may limits of S5.5. meet S6.3(a) of this standard until Sep- S6.6 Anti-siphoning test for alcohol tember 1, 2005. Vehicles that have a fuel vehicles. Each vehicle shall have GVWR greater than 6,000 lb (2,722 kg) means that prevent any hose made of and that are manufactured on or after vinyl plastic or rubber, with a length of September 1, 2005 must meet the re- not less than 1200 millimeters (mm) quirements of S6.3(b). and an outside diameter of not less (d) Notwithstanding S6.3(b) of this than 5.2 mm, from contacting the level standard, vehicles with a GVWR of surface of the liquid fuel in the vehi- 6,000 lb (2,722 kg) or less that are manu- cle’s fuel tank or fuel system, when the

782

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00782 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.301

hose is inserted into the filler neck at- standard, unloaded vehicle weight does tached to the fuel tank with the fuel not include the weight of work-per- tank filled to any level from 90 to 95 forming accessories. Each dummy is percent of capacity. restrained only by means that are in- S7. Test conditions. The requirements stalled in the vehicle for protection at of S5.1 through S5.6 and S6.1 through its seating position. S6.5 shall be met under the following (c) Except as specified in S7.1.1, a conditions. Where a range is specified, school bus with a GVWR greater than the vehicle must be capable of meeting 4,536 kg is loaded to its unloaded vehi- the requirements at all points within cle weight, plus 54 kg of unsecured the range. mass at each designated seating posi- S7.1 General test conditions. The fol- tion. lowing conditions apply to all tests. S7.2 Side moving barrier test condi- S7.1.1 The fuel tank is filled to any tions. (a) Vehicles manufactured before level from 90 to 95 percent of capacity September 1, 2004. The side moving bar- with Stoddard solvent, having the rier crash test conditions are those physical and chemical properties of specified in S8.2 of Standard No. 208 (49 type 1 solvent, Table I ASTM Standard CFR 571.208). D484–71, ‘‘Standard Specifications for (b) Vehicles manufactured on or after Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvents.’’ September 1, 2004. The side moving de- S7.1.2 The fuel system other than formable barrier crash test conditions the fuel tank is filled with Stoddard are those specified in S6 and S7 of solvent to its normal operating level. Standard No. 214 (49 CFR 571.214). S7.1.3 In meeting the requirements S7.3 Rear moving barrier test condi- of S6.1 through S6.3, if the vehicle has tions. (a) Vehicles manufactured before an electrically driven fuel pump that September 1, 2006. The rear moving bar- normally runs when the vehicle’s elec- rier test conditions are those specified trical system is activated, it is oper- in S8.2 of Standard No. 208 (49 CFR ating at the time of the barrier crash. 571.208), except for the positioning of S7.1.4 The parking brake is dis- the barrier and the vehicle. The barrier engaged and the transmission is in neu- and test vehicle are positioned so that tral, except that in meeting the re- at impact— quirements of S6.5 the parking brake is (1) The vehicle is at rest in its nor- set. mal attitude; S7.1.5 Tires are inflated to manufac- (2) The barrier is traveling at 48 km/ turer’s specifications. h with its face perpendicular to the S7.1.6 The vehicle, including test de- longitudinal centerline of the vehicle; vices and instrumentation, is loaded as and follows: (3) A vertical plane through the geo- (a) Except as specified in S7.1.1, a metric center of the barrier impact passenger car is loaded to its unloaded surface and perpendicular to that sur- vehicle weight plus its rated cargo and face coincides with the longitudinal luggage capacity weight, secured in the centerline of the vehicle. luggage area, plus the necessary test (b) Vehicles manufactured on or after dummies as specified in S6., restrained September 1, 2006. The rear moving de- only by means that are installed in the formable barrier is the same as that vehicle for protection at its seating po- shown in Figure 2 of Standard No. 214 sition. (49 CFR 571.214) and specified in 49 CFR (b) Except as specified in S7.1.1, a part 587, except as otherwise specified multipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, in paragraph S7.3 (b). The barrier and or bus with a GVWR of 4,536 kg or less test vehicle are positioned so that at is loaded to its unloaded vehicle impact— weight, plus the necessary test dum- (1) The vehicle is stationary; mies as specified in S6, plus 136 kg or (2) The deformable face of the barrier its rated cargo and luggage capacity is mounted on the barrier 50 mm (2 weight, whichever is less, secured in inches) lower than the height from the the load carrying area and distributed ground specified in Figure 2 of Stand- as nearly as possible in proportion to ard No. 214 (49 CFR 571.214) (All dimen- its GAWR. For the purpose of this sions from the ground in Figure 2,

783

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00783 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.301 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Front View should be reduced by 50 distributed so that 408 kg ± 11 kg is at mm (2 inches.)); each rear wheel and 499 kg ± 11 kg is at (3) The barrier is traveling 80 ± 1.0 each front wheel. The center of gravity km/h; and is located 1,372 mm ± 38 mm rearward (4) The barrier impacts the test vehi- of the front wheel axis, in the vertical cle with the longitudinal centerline of longitudinal plane of symmetry, 401 the vehicle parallel to the line of travel mm ±13 mm above the ground. and perpendicular to the barrier face S7.5.3 The moving contoured barrier within a tolerance of ± 5 degrees. The has a solid nonsteerable front axle and test vehicle and barrier face are fixed rear axle attached directly to the aligned so that the barrier strikes the frame rails with no spring or other rear of the vehicle with 70 percent type of suspension system on any overlap toward either side of the vehi- wheel. (The moving barrier assembly is cle. So aligned, the barrier face fully equipped with a braking device capable engages one half of the rear of the vehi- of stopping its motion.) cle and partially engages the other S7.5.4 The concrete surface upon half. At impact, the vehicle’s longitu- which the vehicle is tested is level, dinal centerline is located inboard ei- rigid, and of uniform construction, ther of the side edges of the barrier by with a skid number of 75 when meas- a distance equal to 20 percent of the ve- ured in accordance with American So- hicle’s width ± 50 mm (see Figure 3). ciety of Testing and Materials Method The vehicle’s width is the maximum di- E: 274–65T at 64 km/h, omitting water mension measured across the widest delivery as specified in paragraph 7.1 of part of the vehicle, including bumpers that method. and molding, but excluding such com- S7.5.5 The barrier assembly is re- ponents as exterior mirrors, flexible leased from the guidance mechanism mud flaps, marker lamps, and dual rear immediately prior to impact with the wheel configurations. vehicle. S7.4 Static rollover test conditions. S7.6 The moving barrier assemblies The vehicle is rotated about its longi- specified in S7.2, S7.3 and S7.5 are tudinal axis, with the axis kept hori- equipped with P205/75R15 pneumatic zontal, to each successive increment of tires inflated to 200 kPa ±21 kPa. 90°, 180°, and 270° at a uniform rate, S8 Phase-In schedule. with 90° of rotation taking place in any S8.1 Rear impact test upgrade. (a) Ve- time interval from 1 to 3 minutes. hicles manufactured on or after September After reaching each 90° increment the 1, 2006 and before September 1, 2007. For vehicle is held in that position for 5 vehicles manufactured on or after Sep- minutes. tember 1, 2006, and before September 1, S7.5 Moving contoured barrier test 2007, the number of vehicles complying conditions. The following conditions with S6.2(b) of this standard must not apply to the moving contoured barrier be less than 40 percent of: crash test. (1) The manufacturer’s average an- S7.5.1 The moving barrier, which is nual production of vehicles manufac- mounted on a carriage as specified in tured on or after September 1, 2004, and Figure 1, is of rigid construction, sym- before September 1, 2007; or metrical about a vertical longitudinal (2) The manufacturer’s production on plane. The contoured impact surface, or after September 1, 2006, and before which is 629 mm high and 1,981 mm September 1, 2007. wide, conforms to the dimensions (b) Vehicles manufactured on or after shown in Figure 2, and is attached to September 1, 2007 and before September 1, the carriage as shown in that figure. 2008. For vehicles manufactured on or The ground clearance to the lower edge after September 1, 2007 and before Sep- of the impact surface is 133 mm ±13 tember 1, 2008, the number of vehicles mm. The wheelbase is 3,048 mm ±50 complying with S6.2(b) of this standard mm. must not be less than 70 percent of: S7.5.2 The moving contoured bar- (1) The manufacturer’s average an- rier, including the impact surface, sup- nual production of vehicles manufac- porting structure, and carriage, has a tured on or after September 1, 2005, and mass of 1,814 kg ± 23 kg with the mass before September 1, 2008; or

784

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00784 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.301

(2) The manufacturer’s production on S8.3.1 For the purpose of calculating or after September 1, 2007, and before average annual production of vehicles September 1, 2008. for each manufacturer and the number (c) Vehicles manufactured on or after of vehicles manufactured by each man- September 1, 2008. For vehicles manufac- ufacturer under S8.1, a vehicle pro- tured on or after September 1, 2008, the duced by more than one manufacturer number of vehicles complying with must be attributed to a single manu- S6.2(b) of this standard must be 100 per- facturer as follows, subject to S8.3.2: cent of the manufacturer’s production (a) A vehicle that is imported must during that period. be attributed to the importer. S8.2 Vehicles manufactured in two or (b) A vehicle manufactured in the more stages. A final stage manufacturer United States by more than one manu- or alterer may, at its option, comply with the requirements set forth in facturer, one of which also markets the S8.2.1 and S8.2.2. vehicle, must be attributed to the man- S8.2.1 Vehicles manufactured on or ufacturer that markets the vehicle. after September 1, 2006 and before Sep- S8.3.2 A vehicle produced by more tember 1, 2009 are not required to com- than one manufacturer must be attrib- ply with the requirements specified in uted to any one of the vehicle’s manu- S6.2(b) of this standard. facturers specified by an express writ- S8.2.2 Vehicles manufactured on or ten contract, reported to the National after September 1, 2009 must comply Highway Traffic Safety Administration with the requirements specified in under 49 CFR part 586, between the S6.2(b) of this standard. manufacturer so specified and the man- S8.3 Vehicles produced by more than ufacturer to which the vehicle would one manufacturer. otherwise be attributed under S8.3.1.

785

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00785 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.301 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

786

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00786 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T EC01AU91.148 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.301

787

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00787 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER29JY03.002 § 571.301 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

[40 FR 48353, Oct. 15, 1975. Redesignated and amended at 41 FR 9350, Mar. 4, 1976; 41 FR 36026, 36027, Aug. 26, 1976; 53 FR 8204, Mar. 14, 1988; 53 FR 49990, Dec. 13, 1988; 58 FR 5638, Jan. 22, 1993; 61 FR 19202, May 1, 1996; 63 FR 28953, May 27, 1998; 68 FR 44471, 44472, July 29, 2003; 68 FR 67083, Dec. 1, 2003; 69 FR 6583, Feb. 11, 2004; 69 FR 51398, Aug. 19, 2004]

788

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00788 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8016 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER01DE03.015 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.302

§ 571.302 Standard No. 302; Flamma- vertible tops, arm rests, all trim panels bility of interior materials. including door, front, rear, and side S1. Scope. This standard specifies panels, compartment shelves, head re- burn resistance requirements for mate- straints, floor coverings, sun visors, rials used in the occupant compart- curtains, shades, wheel housing covers, ments of motor vehicles. engine compartment covers, mattress S2. Purpose. The purpose of this covers, and any other interior mate- standard is to reduce the deaths and in- rials, including padding and crash-de- juries to motor vehicle occupants ployed elements, that are designed to caused by vehicle fires, especially absorb energy on contact by occupants those originating in the interior of the in the event of a crash. vehicle from sources such as matches S4.1.1 [Reserved] or cigarettes. S4.2 Any portion of a single or com- S3. Application. This standard applies posite material which is within 13 mm to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- of the occupant compartment air space senger vehicles, trucks, and buses. shall meet the requirements of S4.3. S3A. Definitions. Occupant compart- ment air space means the space within S4.2.1 Any material that does not the occupant compartment that nor- adhere to other material(s) at every mally contains refreshable air. point of contact shall meet the require- S4. Requirements. ments of S4.3 when tested separately. S4.1 The portions described in S4.2 S4.2.2 Any material that adheres to of the following components of vehicle other materials at every point of con- occupant compartments shall meet the tact shall meet the requirements of requirements of S4.3: Seat cushions, S4.3 when tested as a composite with seat backs, seat belts, headlining, con- the other material(s).

Material A has a non-adhering inter- in material C as shown, to make a face with material B and is tested sepa- specimen 13 mm thick. rately. Part of material B is within 13 S4.3(a) When tested in accordance mm of the occupant compartment air with S5, material described in S4.1 and space, and materials B and C adhere at S4.2 shall not burn, nor transmit a every point of contact; therefore, B and flame front across its surface, at a rate C are tested as a composite. The cut is of more than 102 mm per minute. The requirement concerning transmission

789

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00789 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27MY98.011 § 571.302 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

of a flame front shall not apply to a specimens from drafts. The interior of surface created by cutting a test speci- the cabinet is 381 mm long, 203 mm men for purposes of testing pursuant to deep, and 356 mm high. It has a glass S5. observation window in the front, a (b) If a material stops burning before closable opening to permit insertion of it has burned for 60 seconds from the the specimen holder, and a hole to ac- start of timing, and has not burned commodate tubing for a gas burner. more than 51 mm from the point where For ventilation, it has a 13 mm clear- the timing was started, it shall be con- ance space around the top of the cabi- sidered to meet the burn-rate require- net, ten holes in the base of the cabi- ment of S4.3(a). net, each hole 19 mm in diameter and S5.1 Conditions. legs to elevate the bottom of the cabi- S5.1.1 The test is conducted in a net by 10 mm, all located as shown in metal cabinet for protecting the test Figure 1.

S5.1.2 Prior to testing, each speci- S5.1.3 The test specimen is inserted men is conditioned for 24 hours at a between two matching U-shaped frames temperature of 21 °C, and a relative hu- of metal stock 25 mm wide and 10 mm midity of 50 percent, and the test is high. The interior dimensions of the U- conducted under those ambient condi- shaped frames are 51 mm wide by 330 tions. mm long. A specimen that softens and bends at the flaming end so as to cause

790

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00790 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER24SE98.036 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.303

erratic burning is kept horizontal by maximum available width of a speci- supports consisting of thin, heat-resist- men is not more than 51 mm, so that ant wires, spanning the width of the U- the sides of the specimen cannot be shaped frame under the specimen at 25 held in the U-shaped frame, place the mm intervals. A device that may be specimen in position on wire supports used for supporting this type of mate- as described in S5.1.3, with one end held rial is an additional U-shaped frame, by the closed end of the U-shaped wider than the U-shaped frame con- frame. taining the specimen, spanned by 10- (b) Place the mounted specimen in a mil wires of heat-resistant composition horizontal position, in the center of the at 25 mm intervals, inserted over the cabinet. bottom U-shaped frame. (c) With the flame adjusted according S5.1.4 A bunsen burner with a tube to S5.1.4, position the bunsen burner of 10 mm inside diameter is used. The and specimen so that the center of the gas adjusting valve is set to provide a burner tip is 19 mm below the center of flame, with the tube vertical, of 38 mm the bottom edge of the open end of the in height. The air inlet to the burner is specimen. closed. (d) Expose the specimen to the flame S5.1.5 The gas supplied to the burn- for 15 seconds. er has a flame temperature equivalent (e) Begin timing (without reference to that of natural gas. to the period of application of the S5.2 Preparation of specimens. burner flame) when the flame from the S5.2.1 Each specimen of material to burning specimen reaches a point 38 be tested shall be a rectangle 102 mm mm from the open end of the specimen. wide by 356 mm long, wherever pos- (f) Measure the time that it takes the sible. The thickness of the specimen is flame to progress to a point 38 mm that of the single or composite mate- from the clamped end of the specimen. rial used in the vehicle, except that if If the flame does not reach the speci- the material’s thickness exceeds 13 fied end point, time its progress to the mm, the specimen is cut down to that point where flaming stops. thickness measured from the surface of (g) Calculate the burn rate from the the specimen closest to the occupant formula: compartment air space. Where it is not possible to obtain a flat specimen be- B = 60 × (D/T) cause of surface curvature, the speci- Where: men is cut to not more than 13 mm in B = Burn rate in millimeters per minute thickness at any point. The maximum D = Length the flame travels in millimeters, available length or width of a specimen and is used where either dimension is less T = Time in seconds for the flame to travel than 356 mm or 102 mm, respectively, D millimeters. unless surrogate testing is required [36 FR 22902, Dec. 2, 1971, as amended at 40 under S4.1.1. FR 14319, Mar. 31, 1975; 40 FR 42747, Sept. 16, S5.2.2 The specimen is produced by 1975; 40 FR 56667, Dec. 4, 1975; 63 FR 28954, cutting the material in the direction 28956, May 27, 1998; 63 FR 51003, Sept. 24, 1998] that provides the most adverse test re- sults. The specimen is oriented so that § 571.303 Standard No. 303; Fuel sys- the surface closest to the occupant tem integrity of compressed natural compartment air space faces downward gas vehicles. on the test frame. S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- S5.2.3 Material with a napped or quirements for the integrity of motor tufted surface is placed on a flat sur- vehicle fuel systems using compressed face and combed twice against the nap natural gas (CNG), including the CNG with a comb having seven to eight fuel systems of bi-fuel, dedicated, and smooth, rounded teeth per 25 mm. dual fuel CNG vehicles. S5.3 Procedure. S2. Purpose. The purpose of this (a) Mount the specimen so that both standard is to reduce deaths and inju- sides and one end are held by the U- ries occurring from fires that result shaped frame, and one end is even with from fuel leakage during and after the open end of the frame. Where the motor vehicle crashes.

791

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00791 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.303 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S3. Application. This standard applies from vehicle impact through the 60 to passenger cars, multipurpose pas- minute period following cessation of senger vehicles, trucks and buses that motion shall not exceed: have a gross vehicle weight rating (1) 1062 kPa (154 psi), or

(GVWR) of 10,000 pounds or less and use (2) 895 (T/VFS); whichever is higher CNG as a motor fuel. This standard where T is the average temperature of also applies to school buses regardless the test gas in degrees Kelvin, sta- of weight that use CNG as a motor fuel. bilized to ambient temperature before S4. Definitions. testing, where average temperature (T) Bi-fuel CNG vehicle means a vehicle is calculated by measuring ambient equipped with two independent fuel temperature at the start of the test systems, one of which is designed to time and then every 15 minutes until supply CNG and the second to supply a the test time of 60 minutes is com- fuel other than CNG. pleted; the sum of the ambient tem- CNG fuel container means a container peratures is then divided by five to designed to store CNG as motor fuel yield the average temperature (T); and onboard a motor vehicle. where V is the internal volume in li- CNG fuel system means all compo- FS ters of the fuel container and the fuel nents used to store or supply CNG to a lines up to the first pressure regulator. vehicle’s engine. Dedicated CNG vehicle means a vehicle (b) For bi-fuel or dual fuel CNG vehi- equipped with one fuel system and de- cles, the test requirement in S5.2(a) signed to operate on CNG. shall apply to the CNG fuel system, Dual-fuel CNG vehicle means a vehicle and the test requirement of Standard which is fueled by two fuels simulta- No. 301 shall apply to the other fuel neously, one of which is CNG and the system, if that standard is applicable. second is a fuel other than CNG. S5.3 Each CNG vehicle shall be per- High pressure portion of a fuel system manently labeled, near the vehicle re- means all the components from and in- fueling connection, with the informa- cluding each CNG fuel container up to, tion specified in S5.3.1 and S5.3.2 of this but not including, the first pressure section. The information shall be visi- regulator. ble to a person standing next to the ve- Service pressure means the internal hicle during refueling, in English, and pressure of a CNG fuel container when in letters and numbers that are not filled to design capacity with CNG at 20 less than 4.76 mm (3/16 inch) high. °Celsius (68 °Fahrenheit). S5.3.1 The statement: ‘‘Service pres- S5. General requirements. sure lllllllllllllll kPa S5.1 Vehicle requirements. (llllll psig).’’ S5.1.1 Vehicles with GVWR of 10,000 S5.3.2 The statement ‘‘See instruc- pounds or less. Each passenger car, mul- tions on fuel container for inspection tipurpose passenger vehicle, truck, and and service life.’’ bus with a GVWR of 10,000 pounds or S5.4 When a motor vehicle is deliv- less that uses CNG as a motor fuel and ered to the first purchaser for purposes that is manufactured on or after Sep- other than resale, the manufacturer tember 1, 1995 shall meet the require- shall provide the purchaser with a ments of S6, except S6.4. written statement of the information S5.1.2 Schoolbuses with a GVWR in S5.3.1 and S5.3.2 in the owner’s man- greater than 10,000 pounds. Each school- ual, or, if there is no owner’s manual, bus with a GVWR greater than 10,000 on a one-page document. The informa- pounds that uses CNG as a motor fuel tion shall be in English and in not less and that is manufactured on or after than 10 point type. September 1, 1995 shall meet the re- S6. Test requirements: fuel system in- quirements of S6.4. tegrity. Each vehicle with a GVWR of S5.2 Fuel system pressure drop: barrier 10,000 pounds or less shall meet the re- crash. quirements of any applicable barrier (a) For all vehicles, the pressure drop crash test. A particular vehicle need in the high pressure portion of the fuel not meet further requirements after system, expressed in kiloPascals (kPa), having been subjected to a single bar- in any fixed or moving barrier crash rier crash test.

792

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00792 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.303

S6.1 Frontal barrier crash. When the with nitrogen, N2. The gas pressure vehicle traveling longitudinally for- shall stabilize to ambient temperature ward at any speed up to and including before testing may be conducted. 30 mph impacts a fixed collision barrier S7.1.2 After each fuel storage con- that is perpendicular to the line of tainer is filled as specified in S7.1.1, the travel of the vehicle, or at any angle up fuel system other than each fuel stor- to 30 degrees in either direction from age container is filled with nitrogen, the perpendicular to the line of travel N2, to normal operating pressures. All of the vehicle, with 50th percentile test manual shutoff valves are to be in the dummies as specified in part 572 of this open position. chapter at each front outboard des- S7.1.3 In meeting the requirements ignated seating position and at any of S6.1 through S6.4, if the vehicle has other position whose protection system an electrically driven fuel pump that is required to be tested by a dummy normally runs when the vehicle’s elec- under the provisions of Standard No. trical system is activated, it is oper- 208, under the applicable conditions of ating at the time of the barrier crash. S7, the fuel pressure drop shall not ex- If the vehicle has any high pressure ceed the limits of S5.2. electric shutoff valve that is normally S6.2 Rear moving barrier crash. When open when the electrical system is ac- the vehicle is impacted from the rear tivated, it is open at the time of the by a barrier moving at any speed up to barrier crash. Furthermore, if any elec- and including 30 mph, with test dum- tric shutoff valve prevents sensing of mies as specified in part 572 of this system pressure by the pressure trans- chapter at each front outboard des- ducer when closed, it must be open for ignated seating position, under the ap- both the initial pressure measurement plicable conditions of S7, the fuel pres- and the pressure measurement 60 min- sure drop shall not exceed the limits of utes after the vehicle ceases motion S5.2. from impact. Any valve shall be open S6.3 Lateral moving barrier crash. for a period of one minute to equalize When the vehicle is impacted laterally the system pressure. on either side by a barrier moving at any speed up to and including 20 mph S7.1.4 The parking brake is dis- with 50th percentile test dummies as engaged and the transmission is in neu- specified in part 572 of this chapter at tral, except that in meeting the re- positions required for testing to Stand- quirements of S6.4, the parking brake ard No. 208, under the applicable condi- is set. tions of S7, the fuel pressure drop shall S7.1.5 Tires are inflated to manufac- not exceed the limits of S5.2. turer’s specifications. S6.4 Moving contoured barrier crash. S7.1.6 The vehicle, including test de- When the moving contoured barrier as- vices and instrumentation, is loaded as sembly traveling longitudinally for- follows: ward at any speed up to and including (a) A passenger car, with its fuel sys- 30 mph impacts the test vehicle tem filled as specified in S7.1.1 and (schoolbus with a GVWR exceeding S7.1.2, is loaded to its unloaded vehicle 10,000 pounds) at any point and angle, weight plus its rated cargo and luggage under the applicable conditions of S7, capacity weight, secured in the luggage the fuel pressure drop shall not exceed area, plus the necessary test dummies the limits of S5.2. as specified in S6, restrained only by S7. Test conditions. The require- means that are installed in the vehicle ments of S5 and S6 shall be met under for protection at its seating position. the following conditions. Where a (b) A multipurpose passenger vehicle, range of conditions is specified, the ve- truck, or bus with a GVWR of 10,000 hicle must be capable of meeting the pounds or less, whose fuel system is requirements at all points within the filled as specified in S7.1.1 and S7.1.2, is range. loaded to its unloaded vehicle weight, S7.1 General test conditions. The fol- plus the necessary test dummies as lowing conditions apply to all tests. specified in S6, plus 136.1 kilograms S7.1.1 Each fuel storage container is (kg.) (300 pounds (lb.)), or its rated filled to 100 percent of service pressure cargo and luggage capacity weight,

793

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00793 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.304 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

whichever is less, secured to the vehi- § 571.304 Standard No. 304; Com- cle and distributed so that the weight pressed natural gas fuel container on each axle as measured at the tire- integrity. ground interface is in proportion to its S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- GAWR. Each dummy shall be re- quirements for the integrity of com- strained only by means that are in- pressed natural gas (CNG), motor vehi- stalled in the vehicle for protection at cle fuel containers. its seating position. S2. Purpose. The purpose of this (c) A schoolbus with a GVWR greater standard is to reduce deaths and inju- than 10,000 pounds, whose fuel system ries occurring from fires that result is filled as specified in S7.1.1 and S7.1.2, from fuel leakage during and after is loaded to its unloaded vehicle motor vehicle crashes. weight, plus 54.4 kg. (120 lb.) of unse- S3. Application. This standard applies cured weight at each designated seat- to each passenger car, multipurpose ing position. passenger vehicle, truck, and bus that S7.1.7 The ambient temperature is uses CNG as a motor fuel and to each not to vary more than 5.6 °C (10 °F) dur- container designed to store CNG as ing the course of the test. motor fuel on-board any motor vehicle. S7.1.8 The pressure drop measure- S4. Definitions. ment specified in S5.2 is to be made Brazing means a group of welding using a location on the high pressure processes wherein coalescence is pro- side of the fuel system in accordance duced by heating to a suitable tem- with the vehicle manufacturer’s rec- perature above 800 °F and by using a ommendation. nonferrous filler metal, having a melt- S7.2 Lateral moving barrier crash test ing point below that to the base met- conditions. The lateral moving barrier als. The filler metal is distributed be- crash test conditions are those speci- tween the closely fitted surfaces of the fied in S8.2 of Standard No. 208, 49 CFR joint by capillary attraction. 571.208. Burst pressure means the highest in- S7.3 Rear moving barrier test condi- ternal pressure reached in a CNG fuel tions. The rear moving barrier test con- container during a burst test at a tem- ditions are those specified in S8.2 of perature of 21 °C (70 °F). Standard No. 208, 49 CFR 571.208, except CNG fuel container means a container for the positioning of the barrier and designed to store CNG as motor fuel the vehicle. The barrier and test vehi- on-board a motor vehicle. cle are positioned so that at impact— Fill pressure means the internal pres- (a) The vehicle is at rest in its nor- sure of a CNG fuel container attained mal attitude; at the time of filling. Fill pressure var- (b) The barrier is traveling at any ies according to the gas temperature in the container which is dependent on speed up to and including 30 mph with the charging parameters and the ambi- its face perpendicular to the longitu- ent conditions. dinal centerline of the vehicle; and Full wrapped means applying the re- (c) A vertical plane through the geo- inforcement of a filament or resin sys- metric center of the barrier impact tem over the entire liner, including the surface and perpendicular to that sur- domes. face coincides with the longitudinal Hoop wrapped means winding of fila- centerline of the vehicle. ment in a substantially circumferen- S7.4 Moving contoured barrier test tial pattern over the cylindrical por- conditions. The moving contoured bar- tion of the liner so that the filament rier crash test conditions are those does not transmit any significant specified in S7.5 of Standard No. 301, 49 stresses in a direction parallel to the CFR 571.301. cylinder longitudinal axis. [59 FR 19659, Apr. 25, 1994; as amended at 60 Hydrostatic pressure means the inter- FR 2543, Jan. 10, 1995; 60 FR 57948, Nov. 24, nal pressure to which a CNG fuel con- 1995] tainer is taken during testing set forth in S5.4.1.

794

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00794 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.304

Liner means the inner gas tight con- tested in accordance with S8.2. Burst tainer or gas cylinder to which the pressure shall be not less than 2.25 overwrap is applied. times the service pressure. Service pressure means the internal S7.3 Bonfire test. Each CNG fuel con- settled pressure of a CNG fuel con- tainer shall be equipped with a pres- tainer at a uniform gas temperature of sure relief device. Each CNG fuel con- 21 °C (70 °F) and full gas content. It is tainer shall completely vent its con- the pressure for which the container tents through a pressure relief device has been constructed under normal or shall not burst while retaining its conditions. entire contents when tested in accord- S5 Container and material require- ance with S8.3. ments. S7.4 Labeling. Each CNG fuel con- S5.1 Container designations. Con- tainer shall be permanently labeled tainer designations are as follows: with the information specified in para- S5.1.1 Type 1—Non-composite metallic graphs (a) through (h) of this section. container means a metal container. Any label affixed to the container in S5.1.2 Type 2—Composite metallic compliance with this section shall re- hoop wrapped container means a metal main in place and be legible for the liner reinforced with resin impregnated manufacturer’s recommended service continuous filament that is ‘‘hoop life of the container. The information wrapped.’’ shall be in English and in letters and S5.1.3 Type 3—Composite metallic full numbers that are at least 6.35 mm (1⁄4 wrapped container means a metal liner inch) high. reinforced with resin impregnated con- (a) The statement: ‘‘If there is a ques- tinuous filament that is ‘‘full wrapped.’’ tion about the proper use, installation, S5.1.4 Type 4—Composite non-metallic or maintenance of this container, full wrapped container means resin im- contactllllllllll,’’ inserting pregnated continuous filament with a the CNG fuel container manufacturer’s non-metallic liner ‘‘full wrapped.’’ name, address, and telephone number. S6 General requirements. (b) The statement: ‘‘Manufactured in S6.1 Each passenger car, multipur- llllll,’’ inserting the month and pose passenger vehicle, truck, and bus year of manufacture of the CNG fuel that uses CNG as a motor fuel shall be container. equipped with a CNG fuel container (c) The statement: ‘‘Service pressure that meets the requirements of S7 llllll kPa, (llllll psig).’’ through S7.4. (d) The symbol DOT, constituting a S6.2 Each CNG fuel container manu- certification by the CNG container factured on or after March 27, 1995 shall manufacturer that the container com- meet the requirements of S7 through plies with all requirements of this S7.4. standard. S7 Test requirements. Each CNG fuel (e) The container designation (e.g., container shall meet the applicable re- Type 1, 2, 3, 4). quirements of S7 through S7.4. (f) The statement: ‘‘CNG Only.’’ S7.1 Pressure cycling test at ambient (g) The statement: ‘‘This container temperature. Each CNG fuel container should be visually inspected after a shall not leak when tested in accord- motor vehicle accident or fire and at ance with S8.1. least every 36 months or 36,000 miles, S7.2 Hydrostatic burst test. whichever comes first, for damage and S7.2.1 Each Type 1 CNG fuel con- deterioration. tainer shall not leak when subjected to (h) The statement: ‘‘Do Not Use After burst pressure and tested in accordance llllll’’ inserting the month and with S8.2. Burst pressure shall not be year that mark the end of the manu- less than 2.25 times the service pres- facturer’s recommended service life for sure for non-welded containers and the container. shall not be less than 3.5 times the S8 Test conditions: fuel container in- service pressure for welded containers. tegrity. S7.2.2 Each Type 2, Type 3, or Type S8.1 Pressure cycling test. The re- 4 CNG fuel container shall not leak quirements of S7.1 shall be met under when subjected to burst pressure and the conditions of S8.1.1 through S8.1.4.

795

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00795 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.304 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S8.1.1 Hydrostatically pressurize the ured horizontally along a line parallel CNG container to the service pressure, to the longitudinal axis of the con- then to not more than 10 percent of the tainer. service pressure, for 13,000 cycles. (3) Position a CNG fuel container S8.1.2 After being pressurized as that is fitted with pressure relief de- specified in S8.1.1, hydrostatically pres- vices at more than one location along surize the CNG container to 125 percent its length so that the portion of con- of the service pressure, then to not tainer over the center of the fire source more than 10 percent of the service is the portion midway between the two pressure, for 5,000 cycles. pressure relief devices that are sepa- S8.1.3 The cycling rate for S8.1.1 and rated by the greatest distance, meas- S8.1.2 shall be any value up to and in- ured horizontally along a line parallel cluding 10 cycles per minute. to the longitudinal axis of the con- S8.1.4 The cycling is conducted at tainer. ambient temperature. (4) Test a CNG fuel container that is S8.2 Hydrostatic burst test. The re- greater than 1.65 meters (65 inches) in quirements of S7.2 shall be met under length, is protected by thermal insula- the conditions of S8.2.1 through S8.2.2. tion, and does not have pressure relief S8.2.1 Hydrostatically pressurize the devices, twice at 100 percent of service CNG fuel container, as follows: The pressure. In one test, position the cen- pressure is increased up to the min- ter of the container over the center of imum prescribed burst pressure deter- the fire source. In another test, posi- mined in S7.2.1 or S7.2.2, and held con- tion one end of the container so that stant at the minimum burst pressure the fire source is centered 0.825 meters for 10 seconds. (32.5 inches) from one end of the con- S8.2.2 The pressurization rate tainer, measured horizontally along a throughout the test shall be any value line parallel to the longitudinal axis of up to and including 1,379 kPa (200 psi) the container. per second. S8.3.3 Number and placement of S8.3 Bonfire test. The requirements thermocouples. To monitor flame tem- of S7.3 shall be met under the condi- perature, place three thermocouples so tions of S8.3.1 through S8.3.7. that they are suspended 25 mm (one S8.3.1 Fill the CNG fuel container inch) below the bottom of the CNG fuel with compressed natural gas and test it container. Position thermocouples so at: that they are equally spaced over the (a) 100 percent of service pressure; length of the fire source or length of and the container, whichever is shorter. (b) 25 percent of service pressure. S8.3.4 Shielding. S8.3.2 Container positioning. (a) Use shielding to prevent the flame (a) Position the CNG fuel container from directly contacting the CNG fuel in accordance with paragraphs (b) and container valves, fittings, or pressure (c) of S8.3.2. relief devices. (b) Position the CNG fuel container (b) To provide the shielding, use steel so that its longitudinal axis is hori- with 0.6 mm (.025 in) minimum nominal zontal and its bottom is 100 mm (4 thickness. inches) above the fire source. (c) Position the shielding so that it (c)(1) Position a CNG fuel container does not directly contact the CNG fuel that is 1.65 meters (65 inches) in length container valves, fittings, or pressure or less and is fitted with one pressure relief devices. relief device so that the center of the S8.3.5 Fire source. Use a uniform fire container is over the center of the fire source that is 1.65 meters long (65 source. inches). Beginning five minutes after (2) Position a CNG fuel container the fire is ignited, maintain an average that is greater than 1.65 meters (65 flame temperature of not less than 430 inches) in length and is fitted with one degrees Celsius (800 degrees Fahr- pressure relief device at one end of the enheit) as determined by the average of container so that the center of the fire the two thermocouples recording the source is 0.825 meters (32.5 inches) from highest temperatures over a 60 second the other end of the container, meas- interval:

796

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00796 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.305

  1  TT+   TT+   High 1 High 2 +  High 1 High 2   ≥ 430 oC     2  22@@ time 30 sec time 60 sec 

If the pressure relief device releases S3 Application. This standard applies before the end of the fifth minute after to passenger cars, and to multipurpose ignition, then the minimum tempera- passenger vehicles, trucks and buses ture requirement does not apply. with a GVWR of 4536 kg or less, that S8.3.6 Recording data. Record time, use more than 48 nominal volts of elec- temperature, and pressure readings at tricity as propulsion power and whose 30 second intervals, beginning when the speed attainable in 1.6 km on a paved fire is ignited and continuing until the level surface is more than 40 km/h. pressure release device releases. S4. Definition. S8.3.7 Duration of exposure to fire Battery system component means any source. The CNG fuel container is ex- part of a battery module, interconnect, posed to the fire source for 20 minutes venting system, battery restraint de- after ignition or until the pressure re- vice, and battery box or container lease device releases, whichever period which holds the individual battery is shorter. modules. S8.3.8 Number of tests per container. A Dummy means a 50th percentile male test dummy as specified in subpart F of single CNG fuel container is not sub- part 572 of this chapter. jected to more than one bonfire test. S5. General requirements. Each vehicle S8.3.9 Wind velocity. The average to which this standard applies, when ambient wind velocity at the CNG fuel tested according to S6 under the condi- container during the period specified in tions of S7, must meet the require- S8.3.6 of this standard is not to exceed ments of S5.1, S5.2, and S5.3. 2.24 meters/second (5 mph). S5.1 Electrolyte spillage from propulsion S8.3.10 The average wind velocity at batteries. Not more than 5.0 liters of the container is any velocity up to and electrolyte from propulsion batteries including 2.24 meters/second (5 mph). shall spill outside the passenger com- [59 FR 49021, Sept. 26, 1994; 59 FR 66776, Dec. partment, and no visible trace of elec- 28, 1994; 60 FR 37843, July 24, 1995; 60 FR 57948, trolyte shall spill into the passenger Nov. 24, 1995; 61 FR 19204, May 1, 1996; 61 FR compartment. Spillage is measured 47089, Sept. 6, 1996; 63 FR 66765, Dec. 3, 1998; from the time the vehicle ceases mo- 65 FR 51772, Aug. 25, 2000; 65 FR 64626, Oct. 30, tion after a barrier impact test until 30 2000] minutes thereafter, and throughout any static rollover after a barrier im- § 571.305 Standard No. 305; Electric- pact test. powered vehicles: electrolyte spill- S5.2 Battery Retention. Battery mod- age and electrical shock protection. ules located inside the passenger com- S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- partment must remain in the location quirements for limitation of electro- in which they are installed. No part of lyte spillage, retention of propulsion any battery system component that is batteries during a crash, and electrical located outside the passenger compart- isolation of the chassis from the high- ment shall enter the passenger com- voltage system, to be met by vehicles partment during the test procedures of that use electricity as propulsion S6 of this standard, as determined by power . visual inspection. S2.Purpose. The purpose of this stand- S5.3 Electrical isolation. Electrical iso- ard is to reduce deaths and injuries lation between the battery system and during a crash which occur because of the vehicle electricity-conducting electrolyte spillage from propulsion structure after each test must be not batteries, intrusion of propulsion bat- less than 500 ohms/volt. tery system components into the occu- S6. Test requirements. Each vehicle to pant compartment, and electrical which this standard applies, under the shock. conditions of S7, must be capable of

797

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00797 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER30OC00.009 § 571.305 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

meeting the requirements of any appli- quirements at all points within the cable single barrier crash/static roll- range. over test sequence, without alteration S7.1 Battery state of charge. The bat- of the vehicle during the test sequence. tery system is at the level specified in A particular vehicle need not meet fur- the following paragraph (a), (b), or (c), ther test requirements after having as appropriate: been subjected to a single barrier (a) At the maximum state of charge crash/static rollover test sequence. recommended by the manufacturer, as S6.1 Frontal barrier crash. The vehicle stated in the vehicle operator’s manual must meet the requirements of S5.1, or on a label that is permanently af- S5.2 and S5.3 when it is traveling longi- fixed to the vehicle; tudinally forward at any speed, up to (b) If the manufacturer has made no and including 48 km/h, and impacts a recommendation, at a state of charge fixed collision barrier that is perpen- of not less than 95 percent of the max- dicular to the line of travel of the vehi- imum capacity of the battery system; cle, or at any angle up to 30 degrees in or either direction from the perpendicular to the line of travel of the vehicle. (c) If the batteries are rechargeable S6.2 Rear moving barrier impact. The only by an energy source on the vehi- vehicle must meet the requirements of cle, at any state of charge within the S5.1, S5.2, and S5.3, when: normal operating voltage, as defined by (a) it is impacted from the rear by a the vehicle manufacturer. barrier moving at any speed up to and S7.2 Vehicle conditions. The switch or including 48 km/h, with a dummy at device that provides power from the each front outboard designated seating propulsion batteries to the propulsion position, or motor(s) is in the activated position or (b) at the manufacturer’s option the ready-to-drive position. (with said option irrevocably selected S7.2.1 The parking brake is dis- prior to, or at the time of, certification engaged and the transmission, if any, of the vehicle), it is impacted at 80 ± 1.0 is in the neutral position. In a test con- km/h with 50th percentile test dum- ducted under S6.3, the parking brake is mies as specified in part 572 of this set. chapter at each front outboard des- S7.2.2 Tires are inflated to the manu- ignated seating position under the con- facturer’s specifications. ditions specified in S7.3(b) of FMVSS S7.2.3 The vehicle, including test de- No. 301 and S7 of this section as appli- vices and instrumentation, is loaded as cable. follows: S6.3 Side moving deformable barrier im- (a) A passenger car is loaded to its pact. The vehicle must meet the re- unloaded vehicle weight plus its rated quirements of S5.1, S5.2, and S5.3 when cargo and luggage capacity weight, se- it is impacted from the side by a bar- cured in the luggage area, plus the nec- rier that conforms to part 587 of this essary test dummies as specified in S6, chapter that is moving at any speed up restrained only by means that are in- to and including 54 km/h, with dum- stalled in the vehicle for protection at mies positioned in accordance with S7 of Sec. 571.214 of this chapter. its seating position. S6.4 Post-impact test static rollover. (b) A multipurpose passenger vehicle, The vehicle must meet the require- truck, or bus with a GVWR of 4536 kg ments of S5.1, S5.2, and S5.3, after or less is loaded to its unloaded vehicle being rotated on its longitudinal axis weight plus the necessary dummies, as to each successive increment of 90 de- specified in S6, plus 136 kg or its rated grees after each impact test specified cargo and luggage capacity weight, in S6.1, S6.2, and S6.3. whichever is less. Each dummy is re- S7. Test conditions. When the vehicle strained only by means that are in- is tested according to S6, the require- stalled in the vehicle for protection at ments of S5 must be met under the its seating position. conditions in S7.1 through S7.6.7. S7.3 Static rollover test conditions. In Where a range is specified, the vehicle addition to the conditions of S7.1 and must be capable of meeting the re- S7.2, the conditions of S7.4 of Sec.

798

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00798 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.305

571.301 of this chapter apply to the con- battery pack system, the electrical iso- duct of static rollover tests specified in lation measurement after the impact is S6.4. made from the battery side of the auto- S7.4 Rear moving barrier impact test matic disconnect to the vehicle chas- conditions. In addition to the conditions sis. of S7.1 and S7.2, the rear moving bar- S7.6.2 The voltmeter used in this test rier test conditions for S6.2(a) are measures direct current values and has those specified in S8.2 of Standard No. an internal resistance of at least 10 MΩ 208 (49 CFR 571.208), except for the posi- S7.6.3 The voltage is measured as tioning of the barrier and the vehicle. shown in Figure 1 and the propulsion The rear moving barrier is described in battery voltage (Vb) is recorded. Before S8.2 of Standard No. 208 of this chapter. any vehicle impact test, Vb is equal to The barrier and test vehicle are posi- or greater than the nominal operating tioned so that at impact— voltage as specified by the vehicle (a) The vehicle is at rest in its nor- manufacturer. mal attitude; S7.6.4 The voltage is measured as (b) The barrier is traveling at 48 km/ shown in Figure 2, and the voltage (V1) h with its face perpendicular to the between the negative side of the pro- longitudinal centerline of the vehicle; pulsion battery and the vehicle chassis and is recorded. (c) A vertical plane through the geo- metric center of the barrier impact S7.6.5 The voltage is measured as surface and perpendicular to that sur- shown in Figure 3, and the voltage (V2) face coincides with the longitudinal between the positive side of the propul- centerline of the vehicle. sion battery and the vehicle chassis is S7.5 Side moving deformable barrier im- recorded. pact test conditions. In addition to the S7.6.6 If V1 is greater than or equal to conditions of S7.1 and S7.2, the condi- V2, insert a known resistance (Ro) be- tions of S6.10, S6.11, and S6.12 of Sec. tween the negative side of the propul- 571.214 of this chapter apply to the con- sion battery and the vehicle chassis. duct of the side moving deformable With the Ro installed, measure the barrier impact test specified in S6.3. voltage (V1’) as shown in Figure 4 be- S7.6 Electrical isolation test procedure. tween the negative side of the propul- In addition to the conditions of S7.1 sion battery and the vehicle chassis. and S7.2, the conditions in S7.6.1 Calculate the electrical isolation (Ri) through S7.6.7 apply to the measure- according to the formula shown. This ment of electrical isolation specified in electrical isolation value (in ohms) di- S5.3. vided by the nominal operating voltage S7.6.1 Prior to any barrier impact of the propulsion battery (in volts) test, the propulsion battery system is must be equal to or greater than 500. connected to the vehicle’s propulsion S7.6.7 If V2 is greater than V1, insert system, and the vehicle ignition is in a known resistance (Ro) between the the ‘‘on’’ (traction (propulsion) system positive side of the propulsion battery energized) position. If the vehicle uti- and the vehicle chassis. With the Ro in- lizes an automatic disconnect between stalled, measure the voltage and record the propulsion battery system and the the voltage (V2’) between the positive traction system that is physically con- side of the propulsion battery and the tained within the battery pack system, vehicle chassis as shown in Figure 5. the electrical isolation measurement Calculate the electrical isolation (Ri) after the impact is made from the trac- according to the formula shown. This tion side of the automatic disconnect electrical isolation value (in ohms) di- to the vehicle chassis. If the vehicle vided by the nominal operating voltage utilizes an automatic disconnect that of the propulsion battery (in volts) is not physically contained within the must be equal to or greater than 500.

799

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00799 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.305 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

800

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00800 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27SE00.000 ER27SE00.001 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.305

801

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00801 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27SE00.002 ER27SE00.003 § 571.401 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

[65 FR 57988, Sept. 27, 2000, as amended at 66 FR 60160, Dec. 3, 2001; 69 FR 51399, Aug. 19, 2004]

§ 571.401 Standard No. 401; Interior (1) Is intended to be used for carrying trunk release. luggage or cargo, (2) Is wholly separated from the occu- S1. Purpose and scope. This standard pant compartment of a passenger car establishes the requirement for pro- by a permanently attached partition or viding a trunk release mechanism that by a fixed or fold-down seat back and/ makes it possible for a person trapped or partition, inside the trunk compartment of a pas- (3) Has a trunk lid, and senger car to escape from the compart- (4) Is large enough so that the three- ment. year-old child dummy described in S2. Application. This standard applies Subpart C of Part 572 can be placed in- to passenger cars that have a trunk side the trunk compartment, and the compartment. This standard does not trunk lid can be closed and latched apply to passenger cars with a back with all removable equipment fur- door. nished by the passenger car manufac- S3. Definitions. turer stowed in accordance with Back door means a door or door sys- label(s) on the passenger car or infor- tem on the back end of a passenger car mation in the passenger car owner’s through which cargo can be loaded or manual, or, if no information is pro- unloaded. The term includes the hinged vided, as located when the passenger back door on a hatchback or a station car is delivered. (Note: For purposes of wagon. this standard, the Part 572 Subpart C Trunk compartment. (a) Means a space test dummy need not be equipped with that: the accelerometers specified in § 572.21.)

802

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00802 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27SE00.004 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

(b) Does not include a sub-compart- lease the trunk lid from all latching ment within the trunk compartment. positions or latch systems; Trunk lid means a moveable body (iii) When the passenger car is mov- panel that is not designed or intended ing forward at a speed of 5 km/h or as a passenger car entry point for pas- greater, the release mechanism must sengers and that provides access from release the trunk lid from the primary outside a passenger car to a trunk com- latching position or latch system, but partment. The term does not include a must not release the trunk lid from the back door or the lid of a storage com- secondary latching position or latch partment located inside the passenger system. compartment of a passenger car. (2) The passenger cars described in S4. Requirements. paragraph S4.3(b)(1) are excluded from S4.1 Each passenger car with a trunk the requirements of this standard until compartment must have an automatic September 1, 2002. or manual release mechanism inside the trunk compartment that unlatches [66 FR 43121, Aug. 17, 2001, as amended at 67 the trunk lid. Each trunk release shall FR 19523, Apr. 22, 2002] conform, at the manufacturer’s option, to either S4.2(a) and S4.3, or S4.2(b) and § 571.403 Standard No. 403; Platform S4.3. The manufacturer shall select the lift systems for motor vehicles. option by the time it certifies the vehi- S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- cle and may not thereafter select a dif- quirements for platform lifts used to ferent option for the vehicle. assist persons with limited mobility in S4.2(a) Each manual release mecha- entering or leaving a vehicle. nism installed pursuant to S4.1 of this S2. Purpose. The purpose of this standard must include a feature, like standard is to prevent injuries and fa- lighting or phosphorescence, that al- talities to passengers and bystanders lows the release mechanism to be eas- during the operation of platform lifts ily seen inside the closed trunk com- installed in motor vehicles. partment. S3. Application. This standard applies (b) Each automatic release mecha- to platform lifts designed to carry pas- nism installed pursuant to S4.1 of this sengers into and out of motor vehicles. section must unlatch the trunk lid S4. Definitions. within 5 minutes of when the trunk lid is closed with a person inside the trunk Bridging device means that portion of compartment. a platform lift that provides a transi- S4.3(a) Except as provided in para- tional surface between the platform graph S4.3(b), actuation of the release surface and the surface of the vehicle mechanism required by S4.1 of this floor within the platform threshold standard must completely release the area. trunk lid from all latching positions of Cycle means deploying a platform lift the trunk lid latch. from a stowed position, lowering the (b)(1) For passenger cars with a front lift to the ground level loading posi- trunk compartment that has a front tion, raising the lift to the vehicle opening trunk lid required to have a floor loading position, and stowing the secondary latching position or latch lift. The term includes operation of any system, actuation of the release mech- wheelchair retention device, bridging anism required by paragraph S4.1 of device, and inner roll stop. this standard must result in the fol- Deploy means with respect to a plat- lowing: form lift, its movement from a stowed (i) When the passenger car is sta- position to one of the two loading posi- tionary, the release mechanism must tions. With respect to a wheelchair re- release the trunk lid from all latching tention device or inner roll stop, the positions or latch systems; term means the movement of the de- (ii) When the passenger car is moving vice or stop to a fully functional posi- forward at a speed less than 5 km/h, the tion intended to prevent a passenger release mechanism must release the from disembarking the platform or trunk lid from the primary latching being pinched between the platform position or latch system, and may re- and vehicle.

803

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00803 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.403 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

Floor reference plane means the plane isting vehicle components, and exclud- perpendicular to the longitudinal vehi- ing a ramp, used to assist persons with cle reference plane for platform lifts limited mobility in entering or leaving that deploy from the side of the vehicle a vehicle. or perpendicular to the transverse ve- Platform reference plane means a plane hicle reference plane for platform lifts tangent to the platform surface at its that deploy from the rear of the vehi- geometric center. (See figure 1.) cle, and tangent to the outermost edge Platform surface means the passenger- of the vehicle floor surface adjacent to carrying surface of the lift platform. the lift platform. (See figure 1.) Platform threshold area means the rec- Gap means a discontinuity in a plane tangular area of the vehicle floor de- surface, or between two adjacent sur- fined by moving a line that lies on the faces. portion of the edge of the vehicle floor Inner roll-stop means a device that is directly adjacent to the platform, located at the edge of the platform through a distance of 457 mm (18 that a passenger or mobility aid must inches) across the vehicle floor in a di- traverse when entering and exiting the rection perpendicular to the edge. Any platform from the vehicle floor loading portion of a bridging device that lies on position and that is designed to retain this area must be considered part of mobility aids on the platform surface that area. during the range of passenger oper- Private use lift means a platform lift ation. certified to the requirements for pri- Lift reference plane means the plane vate use lifts and requirements in this that is defined by two orthogonal axes standard for all lifts. passing through the geometric center of the platform surface of a platform Public use lift means a platform lift lift. One axis is perpendicular to the certified to the requirements for public platform reference plane and the other use lifts and requirements in this is parallel to the direction of wheel- standard for all lifts. chair travel during loading of the lift. Range of passenger operation means (See figure 1.) the portion of the lift cycle during Loading position means, with respect which the platform is at or between the to a platform lift, a position at which vehicle floor and ground level loading a passenger can either embark or dis- positions excluding any stow and de- embark the lift. The two loading posi- ploy operations. tions are at vehicle floor and ground Standard test load means a static load level. or mass centered on the test pallet Longitudinal vehicle reference plane such that the total combined mass for means the plane that is perpendicular public-use lifts shall be 272 kg (600 lb), to the floor reference plane and con- and the total combined mass for pri- tains the longitudinal axis of the vehi- vate-use lifts shall be the lift manufac- cle when the vehicle body is level and turer’s stated rated load or 181 kg (400 moves along with the vehicle body in lb), whichever is greater. response to the loading of the vehicle Stow means with respect to a plat- suspension. (See figure 1.) form, its movement from a position Outer barrier is a particular wheel- within the range of passenger oper- chair retention device that is located ation to the position maintained dur- on the edge of the platform, is tra- ing normal vehicle travel; and, with re- versed during ground level loading and spect to a wheelchair retention device, unloading, and is designed to retain bridging device, or inner-roll stop, its wheelchairs on the platform surface movement from a fully functional posi- during the range of passenger oper- tion to a position intended to allow a ation. passenger to embark or disembark the Platform means that portion of a plat- platform. form lift on which the mobility aid or Test pallet means a platform on which passenger rests while being raised or required test loads are placed for han- lowered. dling and moving. Platform lift means a level change de- Transverse vehicle reference plane vice, including any integration of ex- means the plane that is perpendicular

804

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00804 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

to the floor reference plane and con- (NARA). For information on the avail- tains the transverse axis of the vehicle ability of this material at NARA, call when the vehicle body is level and that 202–741–6030, or go to: http:// moves along with the vehicle body in www.archives.gov/federallregister/ response to the loading of the vehicle codeloflfederallregulations/ suspension. (See figure 1.) ibrllocations.html. Wheelchair retention device means a S5.6.1 The SAE materials referred to device designed to prevent wheelchairs in S5.1 and S5.2 are available from the from leaving the edge of the platform Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc., used for ground level loading and un- 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, loading during the range of passenger PA. 15096. operation. S5.6.2 The ASTM materials referred S5. Incorporation by reference. to in S5.3 and S5.5 are available from S5.1 The Society of Automotive En- ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor gineers (SAE) Recommended Practice Drive, PO Box C700, West J578, revised June 1995, ‘‘Color Speci- Conshohocken, PA 19428–2959. fication’’ (SAE J578, rev. June 95) is S5.6.3 The ANSI/RESNA materials hereby incorporated into S6.1.4 by ref- referred to in S5.4 are available from erence. RESNA, 1700 North Moore St., Suite S5.2 The Society of Automotive En- 1540, Arlington, VA 22209–1903. gineers (SAE) Recommended Practice S6. Requirements. J211/1, revised March 1995 ‘‘Instrumen- (a) Each platform lift must comply tation for Impact Test—Part 1 with the requirements for private use —Electronic Instrumentation’’ (SAE lifts or public use lifts and with the re- J211/1, rev. Mar 95) is hereby incor- quirements for all lifts. porated into S6.2.3 by reference. (b) Each public use lift must S5.3 The American Society for Test- (1) Comply with the requirements for ing and Materials (ASTM) Rec- public use lifts and with the require- ommended Practice B456–95 ‘‘Standard ments for all lifts. Specification for Electrodeposited (2) Bear a label with the words Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus ‘‘DOT—Public Use Lift’’ as certification Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium’’ of compliance with the requirements (ASTM B456–95) is hereby incorporated specified in paragraph S6(b)(1). into S6.3.1 by reference. (c) Each private use lift must S5.4 The Rehabilitation Engineering (1) Comply with the requirements for and Assistive Technology Society of private use lifts and with the require- North America (ANSI/RESNA) Stand- ments for all lifts. ard WC/Vol.1–1998 Section 13, ‘‘Deter- (2) Bear a label with the words mination of Coefficient of Friction of ‘‘DOT—Private Use Lift’’ as certifi- Test Surfaces’’ (ANSI/RESNA WC/ cation of compliance with the require- Vol.1—1998, sec. 13) is hereby incor- ments specified in S6(c)(1). porated into S7.2.2 by reference. (d) Platform lifts suitable for instal- S5.5 The American Society for Test- lation on buses, school buses, and ing and Materials (ASTM) Rec- MPVs other than motor homes with a ommended Practice B117–97 ‘‘Standard GVWR greater than 4,536 kg (10,000 lb.), Practice for Operating Salt Spray except motor homes, must be certified (Fog) Apparatus’’ (ASTM B117–97) is by the manufacturer as meeting the re- hereby incorporated into S7.3.2 by ref- quirements for public use lifts. For erence. platform lifts suitable for installation S5.6 The Director of the Federal on all other vehicles, the manufacturer Register approved the materials incor- may select the option of certifying porated by reference in accordance compliance with either the public use with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51 lift requirements or the private use lift (See § 571.5 of this part). Copies of the requirements of this standard at the materials may be inspected at time it certifies the vehicle and may NHTSA’s Technical Reference Library, not thereafter select a different option 400 Seventh Street SW., Room 5109, for the vehicle. Washington, DC or at the National Ar- (e) For all lifts, where a range of val- chives and Records Administration ues is specified, the equipment must

805

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00805 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.403 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

meet the requirements at all points S6.2 Platform lift operational require- within the range. ments. (f) The test procedures in S7 are used S6.2.1 General. Throughout the to determine compliance with all re- range of passenger operation and dur- quirements, except S6.6, S6.7.5, S6.12 ing the lift operations specified in S7.6, and S6.13. the platform lift must meet the re- S6.1 Threshold warning signal. quirements of S6.2.2 through S6.2.4. S6.1.1 Except when the platform lift These requirements must be satisfied is operated manually in backup mode both with and without a standard load as required by S6.9, the lift must meet on the lift platform, except for S6.2.2.2, the requirements of S6.1.2 and S6.1.3. which must be satisfied without any The lift is tested in accordance with load. S7.4 to determine compliance with this S6.2.2 Maximum platform velocity. section. S6.2.2.1 Throughout the range of S6.1.2. Private-use lifts: Except for passenger operation specified in S7.9.4 platform lifts where platform loading through S7.9.7, both the vertical and takes place wholly over the vehicle horizontal velocity of the platform floor, a visual or audible warning must must be less than or equal to 152 mm (6 activate if the platform is more than 25 inches) per second when measured at mm (1 inch) below the platform thresh- the geometric center of the platform old area and portions of a passenger’s when the platform is unloaded and at body or mobility aid is on the platform the geometric center of the top, hori- threshold area defined in S4 when test- zontal surface of the standard load ed in accordance with S7.4. specified in S7.1.1 when the platform is S6.1.3 Public-use lifts: A visual and loaded. audible warning must activate if the S6.2.2.2 During the stow and deploy platform is more than 25 mm (1 inch) operations specified in S7.9.3 and S7.9.8, below the platform threshold area and both the vertical and horizontal veloc- portions of a passenger’s body or mo- ity of any portion of the platform must bility aid is on the platform threshold be less than or equal to 305 mm (12 area defined in S4 when tested in ac- inches) per second. cordance with S7.4. S6.2.3 Maximum platform acceleration. S6.1.4 The visual warning required Throughout the range of passenger op- by S6.1.2 and S6.1.3 must be a flashing eration specified in S7.9.4 through red beacon as defined in SAE J578, S7.9.7, both the horizontal and vertical June 95, must have a minimum inten- acceleration of the platform must be sity of 20 candela, a frequency from 1 less than or equal to 0.3 g after the ac- to 2 Hz, and must be installed such that celerometer output is filtered with a it does not require more than ± 15 de- channel frequency class (CFC) 3 filter. grees side-to-side head rotation as The filter must meet the requirements viewed by a passenger backing onto the of SAE Recommended Practice J211/1, platform from the interior of the vehi- rev. Mar 95, with FH = 3 Hz and FN = 5 cle. If a lift has only a visual alarm and Hz. The accelerometer is located at the the lift manufacturer specifies that the geometric center of the platform and is passenger must load onto the platform mounted directly on the platform when in a forward direction from the vehicle it is unloaded and on the geometric floor, the visual alarm must be located center of the top, horizontal surface of such that it does not require more than the standard load specified in S7.1.1 ± 15 degrees side-to-side head rotation when the platform is loaded. as viewed by a passenger traversing S6.2.4 Maximum noise level of public forward onto the platform. use lifts. Except as provided in S6.1.5, S6.1.5 The audible warning required throughout the range of passenger op- by S6.1.2 and S6.1.3 must be a minimum eration specified in S7.9.4 through of 85 dBA between 500 and 3000 Hz. S7.9.7, the noise level of a public use S6.1.6 The intensity of the visual or lift may not exceed 80 dBa as measured audible warnings required by S6.1.2 and at any lift operator’s position des- S6.1.3 is measured at the location 914 ignated by the platform lift manufac- mm (3 ft) above the center of the plat- turer for the intended vehicle and in form threshold area. (See figure 2.) the area on the lift defined in S6.4.2.1

806

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00806 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

and S6.4.2.2. Lift operator position companied by all attachment hardware measurements are taken at the necessary for its installation on a vehi- vertical centerline of the control panel cle. 30.5 cm (12 in) out from the face of the S6.4 Platform requirements. control panel. In the case of a lift with S6.4.1 General. Throughout the a pendant control, measurement is range of passenger operations and dur- taken at the vertical centerline of the ing the platform lift operations speci- control panel 30.5 cm (12 in) out from fied in S7.9.4 through S7.9.7, the plat- the face of the control panel while the form lift must meet the requirements control panel is in its stowed or stored of S6.4.2 through S6.4.12. The require- position. For the lift operator positions ments of S6.4.2 through S6.4.6, S6.4.7.4, outside of the vehicle, measurements S6.4.9.4, S6.4.9.5, S6.4.9.6, and S6.4.9.8 are taken at the intersection of a hori- must be satisfied both with and with- zontal plane 157 cm (62 in) above the out a standard load on the lift platform ground and the vertical centerline of the face of the control panel after it S6.4.2 Unobstructed platform oper- has been extended 30.5 cm (12 in) out ating volume. from the face of the control panel. S6.4.2.1 Public use lifts. For public S6.3 Environmental resistance. use lifts, the minimum platform oper- S6.3.1 Internally mounted platform ating volume is the sum of an upper lifts. On platform lifts and their compo- part and a lower part (see Figure 3). nents internal to the occupant com- The lower part is a rectangular solid partment of the vehicle when stowed, whose base is 725 mm (28.5 in) wide by attachment hardware must be free of the length of the platform surface, ferrous corrosion on significant sur- whose height is 50 mm (2 in), and which faces except for permissible ferrous is resting on the platform surface with corrosion, as defined in FMVSS No. 209, each side of the base parallel with the at peripheral surface edges or edges of nearest side of the platform surface. holes on under-floor reinforcing plates The width is perpendicular to the lift and washers after being subjected to reference plane and the length is par- the conditions specified in S7.3. Alter- allel to the lift reference plane (See natively, such hardware must be pro- Figure 1). The upper part is a rectan- tected against corrosion by an gular solid whose base is 760 mm (30 in) electrodeposited coating of nickel, or by 1,220 mm (48 in) long, whose height copper and nickel with at least a serv- is 711 mm (28 in), and whose base is ice condition number of SC2, and other tangent to the top surface of the lower attachment hardware must be pro- rectangular solid (see Figure 3). The tected by an electrodeposited coating centroids of both the upper and lower of nickel, or copper and nickel with a parts coincide with the vertical cen- service condition number of SC1, in ac- troidal axis of the platform reference cordance with ASTM B456–95, but such plane (see Figure 1). hardware may not be racked for elec- S6.4.2.2 Private use lifts. For private troplating in locations subjected to use lifts, the platform operating vol- maximum stress. The lift must be ac- companied by all attachment hardware ume is as specified by the lift manufac- necessary for its installation on a vehi- turer and identified in the lift insert to cle. the vehicle owner’s manual. S6.3.2 Externally mounted platform S6.4.3 Platform surface protrusions. lifts. On platform lifts and their compo- S6.4.3.1 Public use lifts. For public nents external to the occupant com- use lifts, except as required for deploy- partment of the vehicle when stowed, ment of the wheelchair retention de- the lift and its components must be vice and inner roll stop, throughout free of ferrous corrosion on significant the range of passenger operation, the surfaces except for permissible ferrous platform surface may not have protru- corrosion, as defined in FMVSS No. 209, sions which rise more than 6.5 mm (0.25 at peripheral surface edges and edges of in) above the platform surface, meas- holes and continue to function properly ured perpendicular to the platform sur- after being subjected to the conditions face by a device with its base centered specified in S7.3. The lift must be ac- between 50–100 mm (2–4 in) from the

807

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00807 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.403 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

protrusion. Any cross-sectional dimen- S6.4.4.3 When the inner roll stop or sion of the base of the protrusion meas- any outer barrier is deployed, any gap urement device must be greater than between the inner roll stop and lift or equal to 25mm (1 in) and less than or platform and any gap between the equal to 50 mm (2 in). outer barrier and lift platform must S6.4.3.2 Private use lifts. For private prevent passage of the clearance test use lifts, except as required for deploy- block specified in S7.1.3 when its long ment of the wheelchair retention de- axis is held perpendicular to the plat- vice and inner roll stop, the platform form reference plane. surface may not have protrusions S6.4.4.4 When the platform is at the which rise more than 13 mm (0.5 in) vehicle floor or ground level loading above the platform surface, measured position, any horizontal gap over which perpendicular to the platform surface a passenger may traverse to enter or by a device with its base centered be- exit the platform must prevent passage tween 50–100 mm (2–4 in) from the pro- of a 13 mm (0.5 inch) diameter sphere. trusion. All portions of the sides of a S6.4.4.5 Any opening in that portion protrusion that are between 6.5 mm of the platform surface that coincides (0.25 in) and 13 mm (0.5 in) above the with the unobstructed platform oper- platform must have a slope not greater ating volume described in S6.4.2 must than 1:2, measured with respect to the prevent passage of a 19 mm (0.75 inch) platform surface at the location of the diameter sphere. protrusion. Any cross-sectional dimen- S6.4.4.6 Any gap between the plat- sion of the base of the protrusion meas- form sides and edge guards which move urement device must be greater than with the platform must prevent pas- or equal to 25mm (1 in) and less than or sage of a 13 mm (0.5 inch) diameter equal to 50 mm (2 in). sphere. Where structures fixed to the S6.4.4 Gaps, transitions and openings. vehicle are used as edge guards, the S6.4.4.1 When the platform lift is at horizontal gap between the platform the ground level loading position, any side and vehicle structure must pre- vertical surface transition measured perpendicular to the ground over which vent passage of a 6.5 mm (0.25 inch) di- a passenger may traverse to enter or ameter sphere. exit the platform, may not be greater S6.4.5 Platform deflection. The angle than 6.5 mm (0.25 in). When the lift is of the platform, when stationary, rel- at the vehicle level loading position, ative to the vehicle floor reference any vertical surface transition meas- plane may not be more than 1.8 degrees ured perpendicular to the platform with no load on the platform. The threshold area over which a passenger angle of the platform loaded with a may traverse to enter or exit the plat- standard load, when stationary, may form, may not be greater than 6.5 mm not deflect more than 3 degrees from (0.25 in). its unloaded position. The angles are S6.4.4.2 When the platform lift is at measured between axes perpendicular the ground or vehicle level loading po- to the vehicle floor and platform ref- sition, the slope of any surface over erence planes. which a passenger may traverse to S6.4.6 Edge guards. enter or exit the platform must have a S6.4.6.1 The platform lift must have rise to run not greater than 1:2 on the edge guards that extend continuously portion of the rise between 6.5 mm (0.25 along each side of the lift platform to in) and 13 mm (0.5 in), and 1:8 on the within 75 mm (3 inches) of the edge of portion of the rise between 13 mm (0.5 the platform that is traversed while en- in) and 75 mm (3 in). The rise of any tering and exiting the platform from sloped surface may not be greater than the ground level loading position. The 75 mm (3 inches). When the lift is at edge guards must be parallel to the di- the ground level loading position, rection of wheelchair movement during measurements are made perpendicular loading and unloading. to the ground. When the lift is at the S6.4.6.2 Edge guards that move with vehicle level loading position, measure- the platform must have vertical sides ments are made perpendicular to the facing the platform surface and a min- platform threshold area. imum height of 38 mm (1.5 inches),

808

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00808 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

measured vertically from the platform (b) Have operating instructions near surface. the lift controls and in the vehicle S6.4.6.3 Except whenever any part owner’s manual, as specified in S6.7.8 of the platform surface is below a hori- and S6.12.4.3, that contain a warning zontal plane 75 mm (3 inches) above the that wheelchairs should back onto the ground, edge guards must be deployed platform when entering from the throughout the range of passenger op- ground. eration. S6.4.8.3 Requirements. When tested in S6.4.7 Wheelchair retention. accordance with S7.8, platform lifts S6.4.7.1 Impact I. Except for plat- must have an inner roll stop that pro- form lifts designed so that platform vides a means that prevents: loading takes place wholly over the ve- (a) The front wheels of the test de- hicle floor, the lift must have a means vice specified in S7.1.2 from passing of retaining the test device specified in over the edge of the platform where the S7.1.2. After impact, the test device roll stop is located, when the lift is at must remain upright with all of its the ground level loading position; and wheels on the platform surface (b) Any portion of the test device throughout its range of passenger oper- specified in S7.1.2 from being contacted ation, except as provided in S6.4.7.4. simultaneously with a portion of the The lift is tested in accordance with lift platform and any other structure, S7.7 to determine compliance with this throughout the lift’s range of pas- section. senger operation. S6.4.7.2 Impact II. For platform lifts S6.4.9 Handrails. designed so that platform loading S6.4.9.1 Public use lifts: Public use takes place wholly over the vehicle lifts must have a handrail located on floor, the lift must have a means of re- each side of the lift that meets the re- taining the test device specified in quirements of S6.4.9.3 through S6.4.9.9. S7.1.2. After impact, the test device must remain upright with all of its S6.4.9.2 Private use lifts: Private use wheels on the platform surface, lifts are not required to be equipped throughout the range of passenger op- with handrails. Private use lifts that eration, except as provided in S6.4.7.4. are equipped with handrails must meet The lift is tested in accordance with the requirement of S6.4.9.3 through S7.7 to determine compliance with this S6.4.9.9. section. S6.4.9.3 The graspable portion of S6.4.7.3 Overload. The deployed each handrail may not be less than 762 wheelchair retention device(s) must be mm (30 inches) and more than 965 mm capable of sustaining 7,117 N (1,600 lb (38 inches) above the platform surface, force) when tested in accordance with measured vertically. S7.13. No separation, fracture, or S6.4.9.4 The cross section of the breakage of the wheelchair retention graspable portion of each handrail may device may occur as a result of con- not be less than 31.5 mm (1.25 inches) ducting the test in S7.13. and more than 38 mm (1.5 inches) in di- S6.4.7.4 Deployment. Except when- ameter or width, and may not have less ever any part of the platform surface is than a 3.2 mm (0.125 inch) radii on any below a horizontal plane 75 mm (3 in) corner. above the ground, the wheelchair re- S6.4.9.5 The vertical projection of tention device(s) must be deployed the graspable portion of each handrail throughout the range of passenger op- must intersect two planes that are per- eration. pendicular to the platform reference S6.4.8 Inner roll stop. plane and to the direction of travel of S6.4.8.1 Public use lifts. Public use a wheelchair on the lift when entering lifts must have an inner roll stop that or exiting the platform, and are 203 mm meets the requirements of S6.4.8.3. (8 inches) apart. S6.4.8.2 Private use lifts. Private use S6.4.9.6 The handrails must move lifts must: such that the position of the handrails (a) Have an inner roll stop that meets relative to the platform surface does the requirements of S6.4.8.3; or not change.

809

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00809 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.403 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S6.4.9.7 When tested in accordance any part of a wet platform surface may with S7.12.1, each handrail must with- not be less than 0.65. stand 445 N (100 pounds force) applied S6.5 Structural integrity. at any point and in any direction on S6.5.1 Fatigue endurance. the handrail without more than 25 mm S6.5.1.1 Public use lifts. Public use (1 inch) of displacement relative to the lifts must remain operable when oper- platform surface. After removal of the ated through a total of 15,600 cycles: load, the handrail must exhibit no per- 7,800 unloaded Raise/Lower and Stow/ manent deformation. Deploy operations and 7,800 loaded S6.4.9.8 When tested in accordance with S7.12.1, there must be at least 38 Raise/Lower operations as specified in mm (1.5 inches) of clearance between S7.10. No separation, fracture, or each handrail and any portion of the breakage of any vehicle or lift compo- vehicle, throughout the range of pas- nent may occur as a result of con- senger operation. ducting the fatigue test in S7.10. S6.4.9.9 When tested in accordance S6.5.1.2 Private use lifts. Private use with S7.12.2, each handrail must with- lifts must remain operable when oper- stand 1,112 N (250 lb/f) applied at any ated through a total of 4,400 cycles: point and in any direction on the hand- 2,200 unloaded Raise/Lower and Stow/ rail without sustaining any failure, Deploy operations and 2,200 loaded such as cracking, separation, fracture, Raise/Lower operations as specified in or more than 102 mm (4 inches) of dis- S7.10. No separation, fracture, or placement of any point on the hand- breakage of any vehicle or lift compo- rails relative to the platform surface. nent may occur as a result of con- S6.4.10 Platform markings on public ducting the fatigue test in S7.10. use lifts. Throughout the range of pas- S6.5.2 Proof load. The platform lift senger operation, all edges of the plat- must be capable of holding three times form surface, the visible edge of the ve- the standard load, as specified in S7.11, hicle floor or bridging device adjacent without separation, fracture, or break- to the platform lift, and any designated age of any vehicle or lift component. standing area on a public use lift must After the test, the lift must pass Static be outlined. The outlines must be at Load Test I as specified in S7.9. least 25 mm (1 in) wide and of a color that contrasts with its background by S6.5.3 Ultimate load. The platform 60 percent, determined according to the lift must be capable of holding four following equation: times the standard load, as specified in S7.14, without separation, fracture, or × ¥ Contrast = 100 [(L1 L2)/L1] breakage of the platform, supporting Where: structure, or lifting mechanism. L1 = luminance of the lighter color or shade, S6.6 Platform free fall limits. In the and event of any single-point failure of sys- L2 = luminance of the darker color or shade. tems for raising, lowering or sup- L1 and L2 are measured perpendicular to the porting the platform, any portion of platform surface with illumination pro- vided by a diffuse light and a resulting lu- the platform, loaded as specified in minance of the platform surface of 323 lm/ S7.1.1, may not fall vertically faster m 2 (30 lumen/sqft). than 305 mm (12 in) per second or change angular orientation more than S6.4.11 Platform lighting on public use lifts. Public use lifts must have a light 2 degrees from the orientation prior to or a set of lights that provide at least the failure. This requirement applies 54 lm/m2 (5 lm/sqft) of luminance on all whenever the lift is under primary portions of the surface of the platform, power source operation or manual throughout the range of passenger op- backup operation. eration. The luminance measured on S6.7 Control systems. all portions of the surface of the pas- S6.7.1 The platform lift must meet senger unloading ramp at ground level the requirements of S6.7.2 through must be at least 11 lm/m2 (1 lm/sqft). S6.7.8 and, when operated by means of S6.4.12 Platform slip resistance. When the control system specified in S6.7.2, tested in accordance with S7.2, the co- must perform the lift operations speci- efficient of friction, in any direction, of fied in S7.9.

810

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00810 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

S6.7.2 The platform lift system must S6.7.6.2 Public use lifts: Public use have a control system that performs lifts must have characters that are il- not less than the following functions: luminated in accordance with S5.3 of S6.7.2.1 Enables and disables the lift Standard No. 101, when the vehicle’s control system. This function must be headlights are illuminated. identified as ‘‘Power’’ if located on the S6.7.7 Control location for public use control. The Power function must have lifts: In public use lifts, except for the two states: ‘‘On’’ and ‘‘Off’’. The ‘‘On’’ backup operation specified in S6.9, all state must allow platform lift oper- controls must be positioned together ation. When the Power function is in and in a location such that a person the ‘‘On’’ state, an indicator light on facing the controls has a direct, unob- the controls must illuminate. The ‘‘Off’’ structed view of the platform lift pas- state must prevent lift operation and senger and the passenger’s mobility must turn off the indicator light. aid, if applicable. Verification with Verification with this requirement is this requirement is made throughout made throughout the lift operations the lift operations specified in S7.9.3 specified in S7.9.3 through S7.9.8. through S7.9.8. Additional controls S6.7.2.2 Moves the lift from a stowed may be positioned in other locations. position to one of the two loading posi- S6.7.8 Operating instructions: Simple tions. This function must be identified instructions regarding the platform lift as ‘‘Deploy’’ or ‘‘Unfold’’ on the control. operating procedures, including backup S6.7.2.3 Lowers the lift platform. operations as specified by S6.9, must: This function must be identified as S6.7.8.1 Be located near the con- ‘‘Down’’ or ‘‘Lower’’ on the control. trols. S6.7.8.2 Have characters with a min- S6.7.2.4 Raises the lift platform. imum height of 2.5 mm (0.1 in) and This function must be identified as written in English. ‘‘Up’’ or ‘‘Raise’’ on the control. S6.7.8.3 Public use lifts: Include the S6.7.2.5 Moves the lift from a posi- statement ‘‘DOT—Public Use Lift’’. tion within the range of passenger op- S6.7.8.4 Private use lifts: Include the eration to a stowed position. This func- statement ‘‘DOT—Private Use Lift’’, the tion must be identified as Stow or ‘‘ ’’ manufacturer’s rated load for the lift, Fold on the control. ‘‘ ’’ and, if applicable, instructions indi- S6.7.3 Except for the Power function cating that the wheelchair occupant described in S6.7.2.1, the functions must back onto the lift when loading specified in S6.7.2 must activate in a from the ground. momentary fashion, by one switch or S6.8 Jacking prevention. by a combination of switches. S6.8.1 Except when the platform lift Verification with this requirement is is operated in backup mode as required made throughout the lift operations by S6.9, throughout the lift operations specified in S7.9.3 through S7.9.8. specified in S7.9.4 and S7.9.7, the lift S6.7.4 Except for the Power function system must meet the requirements of described in S6.7.2.1, the control sys- S6.8.2, both with and without a stand- tem specified in S6.7.2 must prevent ard load on the lift. the simultaneous performance of more S6.8.2 The control system or plat- than one function. Verification with form lift design must prevent the rais- this requirement is made throughout ing of any portion of the vehicle by the the lift operations specified in S7.9.3 lift system when lowering the lift is at- through S7.9.8. tempted while the lift is at the ground S6.7.5 Any single-point failure in level loading position. the control system may not prevent S6.9 Backup operation. the operation of any of the interlocks S6.9.1 The platform lift must be as specified in S6.10 equipped with a manual backup oper- S6.7.6 Identification of operating func- ating mode that can, in the event there tions. is a loss of the primary power source S6.7.6.1 Each operating function of for lift operation or a lift malfunction, each platform lift control must be deploy the lift, lower the loaded plat- identified with characters that are at form to the ground level loading posi- least 2.5 mm (0.1 in) in height. tion, raise the unloaded platform to

811

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00811 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.403 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

the vehicle floor loading position, and S6.10.2.4 Movement of the platform stow the lift. During backup operation up or down unless the inner roll stop of the lift, the wheelchair retention de- required to comply with S6.4.8 is de- vice and inner roll stop must be manu- ployed. When the platform reaches a ally deployable and stowable. The oper- level where the inner roll stop is de- ating instructions near the lift con- signed to deploy, the platform must trols and in the vehicle owner’s manual stop unless the inner roll stop has de- insert, as specified in S6.7.8 and S6.12.2, ployed. Verification with this require- must contain information on manual ment is made by performing the test backup operation which must include procedure specified in S7.6. manual operation of the wheelchair re- S6.10.2.5 Movement of the platform tention device and inner roll stop dur- up or down, throughout the range of ing backup operation of the lift. passenger operation, when the platform S6.10 Interlocks. surface is above a horizontal plane 75 S6.10.1 Except when the platform mm (3 in) above the ground level load- lift is operated in backup mode as re- quired by S6.9, the requirements of ing position, unless the wheelchair re- S6.10.2 must be met, both with and tention device required to comply with without a standard load on the lift. S6.4.7 is deployed throughout the range S6.10.2 The platform lift system of passenger operations. Verification of must have interlocks or operate in compliance is made using the test pro- such a way as to prevent: cedure specified in S 7.5. S6.10.2.1 Forward or rearward mobil- S6.10.2.6 In the case of a platform ity of the vehicle unless the platform lift that is equipped with an outer bar- lift is stowed. The design of this sys- rier, deployment of the outer barrier, tem must be such that it discourages when it is occupied by portions of a accidental release and does not affect passenger’s body or mobility aid vehicle movement when the lift is throughout the lift operations. stowed until the vehicle is stopped and Verification of compliance is made the lift deployed. Verification with this using the test procedure specified in S requirement is made throughout the 7.5. lift operations specified in S7.9.2 and S6.10.2.7 Deployment of any inner S7.9.3. roll stop required to comply with S6.10.2.2 Operation of the platform S6.4.8, when the inner roll stop is occu- lift from the stowed position until for- pied by portions of a passenger’s body ward and rearward mobility of the ve- or mobility aid throughout the lift op- hicle is inhibited, by means of placing erations. Verification of compliance the transmission in park or placing the with this requirement uses the test transmission in neutral and actuating procedure specified in S7.6. the parking brake or the vehicle serv- S6.11 Operations counter. The plat- ice brakes by means other than the op- form lift must have an operation or erator depressing the vehicle’s service cycle counter that records each com- brake pedal. Verification with this re- plete Up/Down (Raise/Lower) operation quirement is made throughout the lift operations specified in S7.9.2 and S7.9.3. throughout the range of passenger op- S6.10.2.3 Except for platform lifts eration. Determination of compliance designed to be occupied while stowed, with this requirement is made during stowing of the platform lift when occu- the lift operations specified in S7.9.4 pied by portions of a passenger’s body, and S7.9.5. and/or a mobility aid. Verification with S6.12 Vehicle owner’s manual insert. this requirement is made throughout The lift manufacturer must provide the lift operations specified in S7.9.7 with the lift, inserts for the vehicle and S7.9.8, and using the test device owner’s manual that provide specific specified in S7.1.4 when the device is information about the platform lift. placed on its narrowest side on any The vehicle owner’s manual insert portion of and within the boundaries of must be written in English and must the area of the platform that coincides include: with the unobstructed platform oper- S6.12.1 A maintenance schedule that ating volume described in S6.4.2. includes maintenance requirements

812

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00812 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

that have, at a minimum, some depend- S6.13.1 The vehicles on which the ency on the number of cycles on the lift is designed to be installed. Vehicles operations counter specified in S6.11. may be identified by listing the make, S6.12.2 Instructions regarding the model, and year of the vehicles for platform lift operating procedures, in- which the lift is suitable, or by speci- cluding backup operations, as specified fying the design elements that would by S6.9. make a vehicle an appropriate host for S6.12.3 Public use lifts: In addition to the particular lift, and for which the meeting the requirements of S6.12.1 platform lift manufacturer has cer- and S6.12.2, the owner’s manual insert tified compliance. for public use lifts must also include: S6.13.2 Procedures for operational S6.12.3.1 The statement ‘‘DOT—Pub- checks that the vehicle manufacturer lic Use Lift’’ on the front cover of the must perform to verify that the lift is vehicle owner’s manual insert; and fully operational. Such checks include, S6.12.3.2 The statement ‘‘DOT—Pub- but are not limited to, platform light- lic Use Lift’’ verifies that this platform ing, the threshold-warning signal, and lift meets the ‘‘public use lift ’’ require- interlocks, including those that inter- ments of FMVSS No. 403. This lift may face with vehicle systems. be installed on all vehicles appropriate S6.13.3 Any informational material for the size and weight of the lift, but or labels that must be placed on or in must be installed on buses, school the vehicle in order to comply with the buses, and multi-purpose passenger ve- requirements of this standard. Labels hicles other than motor homes with a must be of a permanent nature that gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) can withstand the elements of the out- that exceeds 4,536 kg (10,000 lb).’’ side environment. S6.12.4 Private use lifts: In addition S6.13.4 Public use lifts: In addition to meeting the requirements of S6.12.1 to meeting the requirements of S6.13.1 and S6.12.2, the owner’s manual insert through S6.13.3, the installation in- for private use lifts must also include: structions for public use lifts must also S6.12.4.1 The dimensions that con- include, on the front cover of the in- stitute the unobstructed platform oper- structions, the statement ‘‘DOT-Public ating volume; Use Lift’’. S6.12.4.2 The manufacturer’s rated S6.13.5 Private use lifts: In addition load for the lift; to meeting the requirements of S6.13.1 S6.12.4.3 Information on whether a through S6.13.3, the installation in- wheelchair user must back onto the structions for private use lifts must platform from the ground level loading also include, on the front cover of the position due to the absence of an inner instructions, the manufacturer’s rated roll stop; load for the lift and the statement S6.12.4.4 The statement ‘‘DOT-Pri- ‘‘DOT-Private Use Lift’’. vate Use Lift’’ on the front cover of the S7. Test conditions and procedures. vehicle owner’s manual insert; and Each platform lift must be capable of S6.12.4.5 The statement ‘‘DOT-Pri- meeting all of the tests specified in vate Use Lift verifies that this platform this standard, both separately, and in lift meets only the ‘‘private use lift’’ re- the sequence specified in this section. quirements of FMVSS No. 403. This lift The tests specified in S7.8 through may be installed on all vehicles appro- S7.11 are performed on a single lift and priate for the size and weight of the vehicle combination. The tests speci- lift, except for buses, school buses, and fied in S7.2 through S7.7, and S7.12 multi-purpose passenger vehicles other through S7.14 may be performed with than motor homes with a gross vehicle the same lift installed on a test jig weight rating (GVWR) that exceeds rather than on a vehicle. Certification (4,536 kg) 10,000 lb.’’ tests of requirements in S6.1 through S6.13 Installation instructions. The S6.11 may be performed on a single lift manufacturer of a platform lift must and vehicle combination, except for the include installation instructions with requirements of S6.5.3. Attachment each lift. Information must be included hardware may be replaced if damaged in the installation instructions that by removal and reinstallation of the identifies: lift between a test jig and vehicle.

813

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00813 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.403 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

S7.1 Test devices. test block is made of a rigid material S7.1.1 Test pallet and load. The sur- and is 16 x 16 x 100 mm (0.625 x 0.625 x face of the test pallet that rests on the 4.0 in) with all corners having a 1.6 mm platform used for the tests specified in (0.0625 inch) radius. S7.6 through S7.8 and S7.11 has sides S7.1.4 Test Device for detecting plat- that measure between 660 mm (26 in) form occupancy. Occupancy of the plat- and 686 mm (27 in). For the tests speci- form is detected using a 152 x 152 x 305 fied in S7.6 and S7.7, the test pallet is mm (6 x 6 x 12 inches) rigid box having made of a rectangular steel plate of a total weight of 22.7 kg (50 lb). uniform thickness and the load that S7.2 Slip resistance test. rests on the test pallet is made of rec- S7.2.1 To determine compliance tangular steel plate(s) of uniform with S6.4.12, clean any 450mm x 100mm thickness and sides that measure be- (17.5 in x 3.94 in) section of the plat- tween 533 mm (21 in) and 686 mm (27 form with household glass cleaner (am- in). The standard test load that rests monia hydroxide solution). Wet the on the pallet is defined in S4. cleaned section of the platform by S7.1.2 Wheelchair test device. The test evenly spraying 3 ml (0.10 oz) of dis- device is an unloaded power wheelchair tilled water per 100 cm\2\ (15.5 in\2\) of whose size is appropriate for a 95th per- surface area. Begin the test specified in centile male and that has the dimen- S7.2.2 within 30 seconds of completion sions, configuration and components of the wetting process. described in S7.1.2.1 through S7.1.2.10. S7.2.2 Use the test procedure defined If the dimension in S7.1.2.9 is measured in ANSI/RESNA WC/Vol. 1–1998, sec.13, for a particular wheelchair by deter- except for clauses 5.3, Force Gage and mining its tipping angle, the batteries 6, Test Procedure, on the wet section of are prevented from moving from their platform. In lieu of clauses 5.3 and 6, original position. implement the requirements of S7.2.2.1 S7.1.2.1 a cross-braced steel frame; and S7.2.2.2. S7.1.2.2 a sling seat integrated in S7.2.2.1 Force gage. The pulling force the frame; is measured, at a frequency of at least S7.1.2.3 a belt drive; 10 Hz, by a force gauge that has been S7.1.2.4 detachable footrests, with calibrated to an accuracy of ± 2 percent the lowest point of the footrest adjust- of the reading in the range of 25N to able in a range not less than 25 mm (1 100N. in) to 123 mm (5 in) from the ground; S7.2.2.2 Test procedure. Before the S7.1.2.5 two pneumatic rear wheels test, prepare the surface of the test with a diameter not less than 495 mm rubber by lightly abrading with water- (19.5 in) and not more than 521 mm (20.5 proof silicon carbide paper, grade P120, in); weight D (120 wet and dry). Then wipe S7.1.2.6 two pneumatic front wheels the surface clean with a dry cloth or with a diameter not less than 190 mm brush. No solvents or other cleaning (7.5 in) and not more than 216 mm (8.5 materials are used. To determine the in); coefficient of friction for the wet plat- S7.1.2.7 a distance between front and form section pull the test block, with rear axles not less than 457 mm (18 in) the test rubber attached, by machine and not more than 533 mm (21 in); at a rate of 20 ± 2mm/s. The machine S7.1.2.8 a horizontal distance be- and test block are rigidly linked by a tween rear axle and center of gravity device that exhibits a stiffness greater not less than 114 mm (4.5 in) and not than or equal to 1×105 N/m. Pull the more than 152 mm (6.0 in); test block for a minimum of 13 seconds. S7.1.2.9 a vertical distance between Record the pulling force over the final ground and center of gravity not less 10 seconds of the test at a minimum than 260 mm (10.25 in) and not more frequency of 10 Hz. Repeat the test at than 298 mm (11.75 in); least 5 times on any one area of the S7.1.2.10 a mass of not less than 72.5 platform surface, in a single direction. kg (160 lb) and not more than 86.0 kg Calculate the average pulling force for (190 lb). each trial, F1 through Fn, where n is S7.1.3 Clearance test block for gaps, the number of trials. Measure the transitions, and openings. The clearance weight of the test block with the force

814

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00814 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

gauge and call it Fb. Calculate the coef- the unloaded wheelchair test device on ficient of friction, µp, from the fol- any portion of the threshold area de- lowing equation: fined in S4. Move the platform down until the alarm is actuated. Remove +++ µ = F123 F F ...F n the test wheelchair wheel from the p nF× threshold area to deactivate the alarm. b Measure the vertical distance between S7.3 Environmental resistance test. the platform and the threshold area S7.3.1 Perform the procedures speci- and determine whether that distance is fied in S7.3.2 through S7.3.5 to deter- greater than 25 mm (1 in). mine compliance with S6.3. S7.5 Test to determine occupancy of S7.3.2 Attachment hardware, as outer barrier and interlock function. specified in S6.3.1, and externally S7.5.1 Determine compliance with mounted platform lifts or components, S6.10.2.5 and S6.10.2.6 using the test as specified in S6.3.2, are tested in ac- cordance with ASTM B117–97. Any sur- procedure in S7.5.2 and S7.5.3. face coating or material not intended S7.5.2 Maneuver the platform to the for permanent retention on the metal ground level loading position. Locate parts during service life are removed the wheelchair test device specified in prior to testing. Except as specified in S7.1.2 on the platform. Using the lift S7.3.3, the period of the test is 50 hours, control, move the lift up until the consisting of two periods of 24 hours outer barrier starts to deploy. Stop the exposure to salt spray followed by one platform and measure the distance be- hour drying. tween the ground and the upper plat- S7.3.3 For attachment hardware lo- form surface and determine whether cated within the occupant compart- the distance is greater than 75 mm (3 ment of the motor vehicle and not at in). or near the floor, the period of the test S7.5.3 Place one front wheel of the is 25 hours, consisting of one period of wheelchair test device on any portion 24 hours exposure to salt spray fol- of the outer barrier. If the platform is lowed by one hour drying. too small to maneuver one front wheel S7.3.4 For performance of this test, on the outer barrier, two front wheels externally mounted platform lifts or may be placed on the barrier. Using the components may be installed on test lift control, attempt to move the plat- jigs rather than on the vehicle. The lift form up. If further upward movement is in a stowed position. The configura- occurs, move the platform up until it tion of the test setup is such that areas stops and determine whether the outer of the lift that would be exposed to the barrier has deployed and caused up- outside environment during actual use ward movement of the wheelchair are not protected from the salt spray wheel(s) of more than 13 mm (0.5 in). by the test jig. S7.6 Test to determine occupancy of S7.3.5 At the end of the test, any inner roll stop and interlock function. surface exposed to the salt spray is S7.6.1 Determine compliance with washed thoroughly with water to re- move the salt. After drying for at least S6.10.2.4 and S6.10.2.7 using the test 24 hours under laboratory conditions, procedure in S7.6.2 and S7.6.3. the platform lift and components are S7.6.2 Maneuver the platform to the examined for ferrous corrosion on sig- vehicle floor level loading position, and nificant surfaces, i.e., all surfaces that position the wheelchair test device can be contacted by a sphere 2 cm (0.79 specified in S7.1.2 on the platform with in) in diameter. the rear wheels facing away from the S7.4 Threshold warning signal test. vehicle. Using the lift control, move S7.4.1 Determine compliance with the platform down until the inner roll S6.1.2 and S6.1.3 using the test proce- stop starts to deploy. Stop the lift and dure specified in S7.4.2. note that location. S7.4.2 Maneuver the lift platform to S7.6.3 Reposition the platform at the vehicle floor level loading position. the vehicle floor level loading position. Using the wheelchair test device speci- Place one front wheel of the wheelchair fied in S7.1.2, place one front wheel of test device on the inner roll stop, or

815

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00815 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27DE02.000 § 571.403 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

along the innermost edge of the plat- to the drive motors. Note the position form if the inner roll stop is not acces- of the wheelchair after its motion has sible. If the platform is too small to ceased following each impact to deter- maneuver one front wheel on the inner mine compliance with S6.4.7. If nec- roll stop, two front wheels may be essary, after each impact, adjust or re- placed on the inner roll stop. Using the place the footrests to restore them to lift control, move the platform down their original condition. until the inner roll stop starts to de- S7.7.2.5 The test device is operated ploy. Determine whether the platform at the following speeds, in the fol- has stopped and whether the inner roll lowing directions— stop has deployed, causing upward (a) At a speed of not less than 2.0 m/ movement of the wheelchair wheel(s) s (4.4 mph) and not more than 2.1 m/s of more than 13 mm (0.5 in). (4.7 mph), forward, with a load of 0 kg S7.7 Wheelchair retention device im- (0 lbs). pact test. (b) At a speed of not less than 1.75 m/ S7.7.1 Determine compliance with s (3.9 mph) and not more than 1.85 m/s S6.4.7.1 and S6.4.7.2 using the test de- (4.1 mph), rearward, with a load of 0 kg vice specified in S7.1.2, under the proce- (0 lbs). dures specified in S7.7.2 and S7.7.3. S7.7.3 Rotary platform lifts: For ro- S7.7.2 Conduct the test in accord- tary platform lifts, conduct the test ance with the procedures in S7.7.2.1 under the procedures in S7.7.3.3 through S7.7.2.5 to determine compli- through S7.7.3.7 to determine compli- ance with S6.4.7.1. In the case of pri- ance with S6.4.7.2. vate use lifts, perform both S7.7.2.5(a) S7.7.3.1 Public use lifts: For public and (b), unless the operating directions use lifts, perform the test in both pos- specify a required direction of wheel- sible test device orientations. chair movement onto the platform. S7.7.3.2 Private use lifts: For private When a direction is indicated in the op- use lifts, perform the test in both pos- erating instructions, perform the pro- sible test device orientations unless a cedure specified in S7.7.2.5(a) or (b) required direction of wheelchair move- with the test device oriented as re- ment onto the platform is indicated in quired by the operating instructions. the operating instructions. If a re- S7.7.2.1 Place the lift platform at quired direction is indicated in the op- the vehicle floor loading position. erating instructions, perform the test S7.7.2.2 If the wheelchair retention with the test device oriented as re- device is an outer barrier, the footrests quired by the operating instructions. are adjusted such that at their lowest S7.7.3.3 Adjust the footrests of the point they have a height 25 mm ± 2 mm test device to the shortest length. (1 in ± 0.08 in) less than the outer bar- Place the test device on the platform rier. If the wheelchair retention device with its plane of symmetry coincident is not an outer barrier, the footrests with the lift reference plane. are adjusted such that at their lowest S7.7.3.4 Position the platform sur- point they have a height 501 mm ± 2 face 90 mm ± 10 mm (3.5 inches ± 0.4 mm (2 in ± 0.08 in) above the platform. inches) above the ground level position. S7.7.2.3 Position the test device S7.7.3.5 Slowly move the test device with its plane of symmetry coincident in the forward direction until it con- with the lift reference plane and at a tacts a wheelchair retention device. distance from the platform sufficient Activate the controller of the test de- to achieve the impact velocities re- vice such that, if the test device were quired by S7.7.2.5. unloaded and unrestrained on a flat, S7.7.2.4 Accelerate the test device level surface, it would achieve a max- onto the platform under its own power imum forward velocity of not less than such that the test device impacts the 2.0 m/s (4.4 mph) and not more than 2.1 wheelchair retention device at each m/s (4.7 mph). speed, direction, and load condition S7.7.3.6 Realign the test device on combination specified in S7.7.2.5. Main- the platform so that its plane of sym- tain power to the drive motors until all metry is coincident with the lift ref- wheelchair motion has ceased except erence plane. Slowly move the test de- rotation of the drive wheels. Cut power vice in the rearward direction until it

816

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00816 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

contacts a wheelchair retention device. loading position. Determine compli- Activate the controller of the test de- ance with S6.4.8.3(b). vice such that, if the test device were S7.9 Static load test I—working load. unloaded and unrestrained on a flat, S7.9.1 By use of the lift controls level surface, it would achieve a max- specified in S6.7.2, perform the oper- imum rearward velocity of not less ations specified in S7.9.2 through S7.9.8 than 1.75 m/s (3.9 mph) and not more in the order they are specified. than 1.85 m/s (4.1 mph). S7.9.2 Place the platform in the S7.7.3.7 During the impacts specified stowed position. in S7.7.3.5 and S7.7.3.6, maintain power S7.9.3 Deploy the platform to the to the drive motors until all test device vehicle floor loading position. Center a motion has ceased except rotation of standard load, including the test pal- the drive wheels. Note the position of let, on the platform surface. the test device after its motion has S7.9.4 Lower the lift platform from ceased following each impact to deter- the vehicle floor loading position to mine compliance with S6.4.7.2. the ground level loading position, stop- S7.8 Inner roll stop test. Determine ping once between the two positions. compliance with S6.4.8 using the test Remove the test pallet from the lift device specified in S7.1.2 in accordance platform. with the procedures specified in S7.8.1 S7.9.5 Raise the lift platform from through S7.8.6. the ground level loading position to the S7.8.1 Place the platform at the vehicle floor level loading position, ground level loading position, such stopping once between the two posi- that the platform is level. tions. S7.8.2 Adjust the footrests of the S7.9.6 Lower the lift platform from test device to the shortest length. Posi- the vehicle floor level loading position tion the test device on the ground at a to the ground level loading position, distance from the platform sufficient stopping once between the two posi- to achieve the impact velocity required tions. by S7.8.3. The plane of symmetry of the S7.9.7 Center the loaded test pallet test device is coincident with the lift on the platform surface. Raise the lift reference plane and the forward direc- platform from the ground level loading tion of travel is onto the platform. position to the vehicle floor loading po- S7.8.3 Accelerate the test device sition, stopping once between the two onto the platform such that it impacts positions. the inner roll stop at a speed of not less S7.9.8 Remove the pallet from the than 1.5 m/s (3.4 mph) and not more lift platform. Stow the lift. than 1.6 m/s (3.6 mph). Determine com- S7.9.9 Turn power off to the lift and pliance with S6.4.8.3(a). repeat S7.9.3 through S7.9.5 and stow S7.8.4 If necessary, adjust or replace the lift using the backup operating the footrests to restore them to the mode as specified by S6.9 in accordance condition they were in prior to the im- with the manufacturer’s backup oper- pact. Reposition the test device on the ating instructions. platform with its plane of symmetry S7.10 Fatigue endurance test. coincident with the lift reference S7.10.1 Perform the test procedure plane. Slowly move the test device in specified in S7.10.2 through S7.10.6 and the forward direction until it contacts determine compliance with S6.5.1. the inner roll stop. S7.10.2 Put the unloaded lift plat- S7.8.5 Apply a static load to the form at the ground level loading posi- inner roll stop by activating the con- tion. Center a standard load, including troller of the test device such that, the test pallet, on the platform surface. with the test device were unrestrained S7.10.3 Each sequence of lift oper- on a flat and level surface, it achieves ations specified in S7.10.5.1, S7.10.5.2, a maximum forward velocity of not S7.10.6.1 and S7.10.6.2 are done in blocks less than 2.0 m/s and not more than 2.1 of 10 cycles with a 1 minute maximum m/s. rest period between each cycle in any S7.8.6 Maintain control activation block. The minimum rest period be- and raise the platform to the vehicle tween each block of 10 cycles is such

817

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00817 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.403 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

that the temperature of the lift compo- S7.11.4 After completing the static nents is maintained below the values load test specified in S7.11.2 through specified by the manufacturer or that S7.11.4, repeat Static Load Test I speci- degrade the lift function. fied in S7.9. S7.10.4 During the test sequence S7.12 Handrail test. specified in S7.10.2 through S7.10.6, per- S7.12.1 To determine compliance form any lift maintenance as specified with S6.4.9.7, apply 4.4 N (1 lbf) through in the vehicle owner’s manual. an area of 1290 mm 2 (2 in2) in any di- S7.10.5 Public use lifts: Using the lift rection at any point on the handrail in controls specified in S6.7.2, perform the order to remove any looseness or slack operations specified in S7.10.5.1 from the handrail structure. Use this through S7.10.5.3 in the order they are position of the handrail relative to the given. platform as the reference point for the S7.10.5.1 Raise and lower the plat- measurement of handrail displacement. form through the range of passenger Apply 445 N (100 lbf) through an area of operation 3,900 times. 1290 mm2 (2 in2) in a direction and loca- S7.10.5.2 Remove the test pallet tion opposite to that of the 4.4 N (1 lbf). from the platform. Raise the platform Attain the force within 1 minute after to the vehicle floor loading position, beginning to apply it. Five seconds stow the lift, deploy the lift and lower after attaining the force, measure the the platform to the ground level load- amount of displacement of the handrail ing position 3,900 times. relative to the reference point, and S7.10.5.3 Perform the test sequence measure the distance between the out- specified in S7.10.5.1 and S7.10.5.2 two side of the handrail and the nearest times. portion of the vehicle. Release the 445 N (100 lbf) and reapply the 4.4 N (1 lbf) S7.10.6 Private use lifts: Using the lift in the direction and location that it controls specified in S6.7.2, perform the was first applied. Five seconds after at- operation specified in S7.10.6.1 through taining the force, measure the position S7.10.6.3 in the order they are given. of the handrail with respect to the ref- S7.10.6.1 Raise and lower the plat- erence point to determine if there is form through the range of passenger any permanent deformation of the operation 1,100 times. handrail relative to the platform. S7.10.6.2 Remove the test pallet S7.12.2 To determine compliance from the platform. Raise the platform with S6.4.9.8, apply 4.4 N (1 lbf) through to the vehicle floor loading position, an area of 1,290 mm2 (2 in2) in any di- stow the lift, deploy the lift and lower rection at any point on the handrail in the platform to the ground level load- order to remove any looseness or slack ing position 1,100 times. from the handrail structure. Use this S7.10.6.3 Perform the test sequence position of the handrail relative to the specified in S7.10.6.1 and S7.10.6.2 two platform as the reference point for the times. measurement of handrail displacement. S7.11 Static load test II—proof load. Apply 1,112 N (250 lbf) through an area S7.11.1 Perform the test procedures of 1,290 mm2 (2 in2) in a direction and specified in S7.11.2 through S7.11.5 and location opposite to that of the 1 4.4 N determine compliance with S6.5.2. (1 lbf). Attain the force within 1 minute S7.11.2 Place the platform at the ve- after beginning to apply it. Five sec- hicle floor level loading position, cen- onds after attaining the force, measure ter three times the standard load, in- the amount of displacement of the cluding the test pallet, on the platform handrail relative to the reference surface. Fully place the pallet on the point. Maintain the force for two min- platform within 1 minute of beginning utes. Release the force and inspect the to place it. handrail for cracking, separations or S7.11.3 Two minutes after fully plac- fractures. ing the loaded test pallet on the plat- S7.13 Wheelchair retention device form surface, remove the loaded test overload test. pallet and examine the platform lift S7.13.1 Perform the test procedures and vehicle for separation, fracture or as specified in S7.13.2 through S7.13.5 to breakage. determine compliance with S6.4.7.3.

818

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00818 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

S7.13.2 Position the platform sur- made contact with the test device face 89 mm (3.5 in) above the ground when it was moved forward. Attain the level loading position. Apply 7,117 N force within 1 minute after beginning (1,600 lbf) to the wheelchair retention to apply it. device in a direction parallel to both S7.13.5 After maintaining the force the platform lift and platform ref- for two minutes, remove it and exam- erence planes. Attain the force within 1 ine the wheelchair retention device for minute after beginning to apply it. separation, fracture or breakage. S7.13.3 For a wheelchair retention S7.14 Static load test III—ultimate device that is in the form of an outer load. barrier, apply the force through a rec- S7.14.1 Perform the test procedures tangular area with a height of 25 mm (1 as specified in S7.14.2 through S7.14.5 to in) and a width spanning the entire determine compliance with S6.5.3. barrier. Distribute the force evenly S7.14.2 Reinforce the vehicle struc- about an axis 64 mm (2.5 in) above the ture where the lift is attached such platform reference plane. If the bottom that it is rigid and will not deform, edge of the outer barrier falls 50 mm (2 break or separate during application of in) or more above the platform ref- the load specified in S7.14.3 or remove erence plane, distribute the force about the platform lift from the vehicle and an axis 13 mm (0.5 in) above the bottom install it on a test jig that is rigid and edge of the barrier. will not deform, break or separate dur- S7.13.4 For a wheelchair retention ing application of the load specified in device other than an outer barrier, S7.14.3. place the test device specified in S7.1.2 S7.14.3 When the platform is at the on the lift platform with its plane of vehicle floor loading position, center symmetry coincident with the lift ref- four times the standard load, including erence plane and directed such that the test pallet, on the platform surface. forward motion is impeded by the Fully place the pallet on the platform wheelchair retention device. Move the within 1 minute of beginning to place test device forward until it contacts it. the wheelchair retention device. Re- S7.14.4 Two minutes after fully plac- move the test device from the plat- ing the loaded test pallet on the plat- form. Apply the force specified in form surface, remove the loaded test S7.13.2 distributed evenly at all areas pallet and examine the platform lift for of the wheelchair retention device that separation, fracture or breakage.

819

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00819 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.403 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

820

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00820 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27DE02.001 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

821

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00821 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27DE02.002 § 571.403 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

[67 FR 79439, Dec. 27, 2002] S4. Definitions. EFFECTIVE DATE NOTES: 1. At 67 FR 79439, Dec. 27, 2002, § 571.403 was added, effective * * * * * Dec. 27, 2004. 2. At 69 FR 58852, Oct. 1, 2004, § 571.403 was Deploy means with respect to a platform, amended by revising S3, the definitions of its movement from a stowed position to an ‘‘deploy’’ and ‘‘stow’’ in S4, S6.2.1, S6.2.2.2, extended position or, one of the two loading S6.2.4, S6.3.1, S6.3.2, S6.4.5, S6.4.6.1, S6.4.9.3, positions. With respect to a wheelchair re- S6.4.9.9, S6.4.11, S6.5.1.1, S6.5.1.2, S6.7 through tention device or inner roll stop, the term S6.7.2.2, S6.7.4, S6.7.5, S6.7.7, S6.10.2, S6.10.2.3, means the movement of the device or stop to S7, S7.1.1, S7.1.2, S7.1.2.5, S7.1.2.6, S7.3.3, S7.7, a fully functional position intended to pre- S7.7.2.2, S7.10.5, S7.10.6, S7.13.2 and S7.14.1; by vent a passenger from disembarking the adding S6.13.4.1, S7.1.2.11, S7.7.4 through platform or being pinched between the plat- S7.7.4.6; and by removing S6.4.12, effective form and vehicle. Dec. 27, 2004. For the convenience of the user, the revised and added text is set forth as fol- * * * * * lows: Stow means with respect to a platform, its § 571.403 Standard No. 403; Platform lift sys- movement from a position within the range tems for motor vehicles. of passenger operation to the position main- tained during normal vehicle travel; and, * * * * * with respect to a wheelchair retention de- vice, bridging device, or inner-roll stop, its S3. Application. This standard applies to movement from a fully functional position platform lifts designed to carry standing pas- to a position maintained during normal vehi- sengers, who may be aided by canes or walk- cle travel. ers, as well as, persons seated in wheelchairs, scooters and other mobility aids, into and out of motor vehicles. * * * * *

822

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00822 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T ER27DE02.003 Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

S6.2.1 General. Throughout the range of nickel, or copper and nickel with at least a passenger operation and during the lift oper- service condition number of SC2, and other ations specified in S7.9.3 through S7.9.8, the attachment hardware must be protected by platform lift must meet the requirements of an electrodeposited coating of nickel, or cop- S6.2.2 through S6.2.4. These requirements per and nickel with a service condition num- must be satisfied both with and without a ber of SC1, in accordance with ASTM B456– standard load on the lift platform, except for 95, but such hardware may not be racked for S6.2.2.2, which must be satisfied without any electroplating in locations subjected to max- load. imum stress. The manufacturer shall select the option by the time it certifies the lift * * * * * and may not thereafter select a different op- tion for the lift. The lift must be accom- S6.2.2.2 Except for platform lifts that panied by all attachment hardware nec- manually stow (fold) and deploy (unfold), essary for its installation on a vehicle. during the stow and deploy operations speci- S6.3.2 Externally mounted platform lifts. On fied in S7.9.3 through S7.9.8, both the vertical platform lifts and their components external and horizontal velocity of any portion of the to the occupant compartment of the vehicle platform must be less than or equal to 305 and external to other compartments that mm (12 inches) per second. provide protection from the elements when stowed, the lift and its components must be * * * * * free of ferrous corrosion on significant sur- faces except for permissible ferrous corro- S6.2.4 Maximum noise level of public use sion, as defined in FMVSS No. 209, at periph- lifts. Except as provided in S6.1.5, throughout eral surface edges and edges of holes and con- the range of passenger operation specified in tinue to function properly after being sub- S7.9.4 through S7.9.7, the noise level of a pub- jected to the conditions specified in S7.3. Al- lic use lift may not exceed 80 dBa as meas- ternatively, such lifts and all associated ured at any lift operator’s position des- hardware and components must be com- ignated by the platform lift manufacturer pletely made from corrosion-resistant steel for the intended vehicle and in the area on containing at least 11.5 percent chromium the lift defined in S6.4.2.1. Lift operator posi- per FMVSS 571.209, S5.2(a). The manufac- tion measurements are taken at the vertical turer shall select the option by the time it centerline of the control panel 30.5 cm (12 in) certifies the lift and may not thereafter se- out from the face of the control panel. In the lect a different option for the lift. The lift case of a lift with a pendant control (i.e., a must be accompanied by all attachment control tethered to the vehicle by connective hardware necessary for its installation on a wiring), measurement is taken at the vehicle. vertical centerline of the control panel 30.5 cm (12 in) out from the face of the control panel while the control panel is in its stowed * * * * * or stored position. For the lift operator posi- tions outside of the vehicle, measurements S6.4.5 Platform deflection. The angle of the are taken at the intersection of a horizontal deployed platform, when stationary, and plane 157 cm (62 in) above the ground and the loaded with a standard load, must not exceed vertical centerline of the face of the control 4.8 degrees with respect to the vehicle floor panel after it has been extended 30.5 cm (12 and must not exceed 3 degrees with respect in) out from the face of the control panel. to the platform’s unloaded position. The an- gles are measured between a vertical axis from the vehicle floor and an axis normal to * * * * * the platform center as shown in Figure 1. S6.3.1 Internally mounted platform lifts. On platform lifts and their components internal * * * * * to the occupant compartment of the vehicle or internal to other compartments that pro- S6.4.6.1 The platform lift must have edge vide protection from the elements when guards that extend continuously along each stowed, attachment hardware must be free of side of the lift platform to within 75 mm (3 ferrous corrosion on significant surfaces ex- inches) of the edges of the platform that are cept for permissible ferrous corrosion, as de- traversed while entering and exiting the fined in FMVSS No. 209, at peripheral sur- platform at both the ground and vehicle face edges or edges of holes on under-floor re- floor level loading positions. The edge guards inforcing plates and washers after being sub- must be parallel to the direction of wheel- jected to the conditions specified in S7.3. Al- chair movement during loading and unload- ternatively, such hardware must be made ing. Alternatively, when tested in accord- from corrosion-resistant steel containing at ance with S7.7.4, all portions of the wheels of least 11.5 percent chromium per FMVSS the wheelchair test device must remain 571.209, S5.2(a) or must be protected against above the platform surface and after the con- corrosion by an electrodeposited coating of trol is released to Neutral, at the end of each

823

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00823 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.403 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

attempt to steer the test device off the plat- lift component may occur as a result of con- form, all wheels of the wheelchair test device ducting the fatigue test in S7.10. must be in contact with the platform sur- face. The manufacturer shall select the op- * * * * * tion by the time it certifies the lift and may not thereafter select a different option for S6.7 Control panel switches. the lift. S6.7.1 The platform lift must meet the re- quirements of S6.7.2 through S6.7.8 and, when * * * * * operated by means of the control panel switches specified in S6.7.2, must perform the S6.4.9.3 The graspable portion of each lift operations specified in S7.9. handrail may not be less than 760 mm (30 S6.7.2 The platform lift system must have inches) and more than 965 mm (38 inches) control panel switches that perform not less above the platform surface, measured than the following functions: (platform lifts vertically. that manually stow (fold) and deploy (un- fold) are exempt from S6.7.2.2 and S6.7.2.5). S6.7.2.1 Enables and disables the lift con- * * * * * trol panel switches. This function must be S6.4.9.9 When tested in accordance with identified as ‘‘POWER’’ if located on the con- S7.12.2, each handrail must withstand 1,112 N trol. The POWER function must have two (250 lb/f) applied at any point and in any di- states: ‘‘ON’’ and ‘‘OFF’’. The ‘‘ON’’ state must rection on the handrail without sustaining allow platform lift operation. When the any failure, such as cracking, separation, POWER function is in the ‘‘ON’’ state, an in- fracture, or more than 100 mm (4 inches) of dicator light on the controls must illu- displacement of any point on the handrails minate. The ‘‘OFF’’ state must prevent lift relative to the platform surface. operation and must turn off the indicator light. Verification with this requirement is made throughout the lift operations speci- * * * * * fied in S7.9.3 through S7.9.8. S6.4.11 Platform slip resistance. When test- S6.7.2.2 Moves the lift from a stowed posi- ed in accordance with S7.2, the coefficient of tion to an extended position or, to one of the friction, in any direction, of any part of a two loading positions. This function must be wet platform surface may not be less than identified as ‘‘DEPLOY’’ or ‘‘UNFOLD’’ on the 0.65. control.

* * * * * * * * * * S6.7.4 Except for the POWER function de- S6.5.1.1 Public use lifts. Except for lifts scribed in S6.7.2.1, the control panel switches that manually stow (fold) and deploy (un- specified in S6.7.2 must prevent the simulta- fold), public use lifts must remain operable neous performance of more than one func- when operated through a total of 15,600 cy- tion. Verification with this requirement is cles: 7,800 unloaded Raise/Lower and Stow/ made throughout the lift operations speci- Deploy operations and 7,800 loaded Raise/ fied in S7.9.3 through S7.9.8. Lower operations as specified in S7.10. Public S6.7.5 Any single-point failure in the con- use lifts that manually stow (fold) and de- trol panel switches may not prevent the op- ploy (unfold) must remain operable when op- eration of any of the interlocks as specified erated through a total of 15,600 cycles: 7,800 in S6.10. unloaded Raise/Lower operations and 7,800 loaded Raise/Lower operations. No separa- tion, fracture, or breakage of any vehicle or * * * * * lift component may occur as a result of con- ducting the fatigue test in S7.10. S6.7.7 Control location for public use lifts: In public use lifts, except for the backup op- S6.5.1.2 Private use lifts. Except for lifts eration specified in S6.9, all control panel that manually stow (fold) and deploy (un- switches must be positioned together and in fold), private use lifts must remain operable a location such that the lift operator has a when operated through a total of 4,400 cy- direct, unobstructed view of the platform lift cles: 2,200 unloaded Raise/Lower and Stow/ passenger and the passenger’s mobility aid, Deploy operations and 2,200 loaded Raise/ if applicable. Verification with this require- Lower operations as specified in S7.10. Pri- ment is made throughout the lift operations vate use lifts that manually stow (fold) and specified in S7.9.3 through S7.9.8. Additional deploy (unfold) must remain operable when controls may be positioned in other loca- operated through a total of 4,400 cycles: 2,200 tions. unloaded Raise/Lower operations and 2,200 loaded Raise/Lower operations. No separa- tion, fracture, or breakage of any vehicle or * * * * *

824

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00824 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.403

S6.10.2 The platform lift system must the test pallet is made of rectangular steel have interlocks or operate in such a manner plate(s) of uniform thickness and sides that when installed according to the installation measure between 533 mm (21 in) and 686 mm instructions, as to prevent: (27 in). The standard test load that rests on the pallet is defined in S4. * * * * * S7.1.2 Wheelchair test device. The test de- vice is an unloaded power wheelchair whose S6.10.2.3 Stowing of the platform lift size is appropriate for a 95th percentile male when occupied by portions of a passenger’s and that has the dimensions, configuration body, and/or a mobility aid. Platform lifts and components described in S7.1.2.1 through designed to be occupied while stowed and S7.1.2.11. If the dimension in S7.1.2.9 is meas- platform lifts that manually stow (fold) are ured for a particular wheelchair by deter- excluded from this requirement. Verification mining its tipping angle, the batteries are with this requirement is made using the test prevented from moving from their original device specified in S7.1.4. Move the deployed position. platform lift to a position within the range of passenger operation where it will stow if the control specified in S6.7.2.5 is actuated. * * * * * Place the test device specified in S7.1.4 on its S7.1.2.5 Two pneumatic rear tires with a narrowest side on any portion of the plat- diameter not less than 495 mm (19.5 in) and form surface that coincides with the unob- not more than 521 mm (20.5 in) inflated to structed platform operating volume de- the wheelchair manufacturer’s recommended scribed in S6.4.2. Using the operator control pressure or if no recommendation exists, to specified in S7.7.2.5, attempt to stow the lift. the maximum pressure that appears on the The interlock must prevent the lift from sidewall of the tire; stowing. S7.1.2.6 Two pneumatic front tires with a diameter not less than 190 mm (7.5 in) and * * * * * not more than 216 mm (8.5 in) inflated to the wheelchair manufacturer’s recommended S6.13.4.1 Installation instructions for pub- pressure or if no recommendation exists, to lic use lifts must contain the statement the maximum pressure that appears on the ‘‘Public use vehicle manufacturers are re- sidewall of the tire; sponsible for complying with the lift lighting requirements in Federal Motor Vehicle Safe- ty Standard No. 404, Platform Lift Installa- * * * * * tions in Motor Vehicles (49 CFR 571.404).’’ S7.1.2.11 Batteries with a charge not less than 75 percent of their rated nominal capac- * * * * * ity (for tests that require use of the wheel- S7. Test conditions and procedures. Each chair’s propulsion system). platform lift must be capable of meeting all of the tests specified in this standard, both * * * * * separately, and in the sequence specified in this section. The tests specified in S7.4, S7.3.3 For attachment hardware located S7.7.4 and S7.8 through S7.11 are performed within the occupant compartment of the on a single lift and vehicle combination. The motor vehicle or internal to other compart- tests specified in S7.2, S7.3, S7.5, S7.6, S7.7.1 ments that provide protection from the ele- and S7.12 through S7.14 may be performed ments and not at or near the floor of the with the lift installed on a test jig rather compartment, the period of the test is 25 than on a vehicle. Tests of requirements in hours, consisting of one period of 24 hours S6.1 through S6.11 may be performed on a exposure to salt spray followed by one hour single lift and vehicle combination, except drying. for the requirements of S6.5.3. Attachment hardware may be replaced if damaged by re- * * * * * moval and reinstallation of the lift between a test jig and vehicle. S7.7 Wheelchair retention device impact test and edge guard test. * * * * * * * * * * S7.1.1 Test pallet and load. The surface of the test pallet that rests on the platform S7.7.2.2 If the wheelchair retention device used for the tests specified in S7.9 through is an outer barrier, the footrests are adjusted S7.11 and S7.14 has sides that measure be- such that at their lowest point they have a tween 660 mm (26 in) and 686 mm (27 in). For height 25 mm ± 2 mm (1 in ± 0.08 in) less than the tests specified in S7.9 and S7.10, the test the outer barrier. If the wheelchair retention pallet is made of a rectangular steel plate of device is not an outer barrier, the footrests uniform thickness and the load that rests on are adjusted such that at their lowest point

825

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00825 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8003 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T § 571.404 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

they have a height 50 mm ± 2 mm (2 in ± 0.08 S7.10.5 Public use lifts: Using the lift con- in) above the platform. trols specified in S6.7.2, perform the oper- ations specified in S7.10.5.1 through S7.10.5.3 * * * * * in the order they are given. Public use lifts that manually stow (fold) and deploy (un- S7.7.4 Edge Guard Test. Determine com- fold) are not required to perform the stow pliance with S6.4.6 using the test device spec- and deploy portions of the tests. ified in S7.1.2 by performing the test proce- dure specified in S7.7.4.1 through S7.7.4.6. During the edge guard tests, remove the * * * * * footrests from the wheelchair test device. S7.7.4.1 Position the platform surface 90 S7.10.6 Private use lifts: Using the lift mm ± 10 mm (3.5 in ± 0.4 in) above the ground controls specified in S6.7.2, perform the oper- level loading position. ation specified in S7.10.6.1 through S7.10.6.3 S7.7.4.2 Place the test device on the plat- in the order they are given. Private use lifts form surface with its plane of symmetry co- that manually stow (fold) and deploy (un- incident with the lift reference plane within fold) are not required to perform the stow ± 10 mm (± 0.4 in), its forward direction of and deploy portions of the tests. travel inboard toward the vehicle, and its po- sition on the platform as far rearward as the * * * * * wheelchair retention device or outer barrier will allow it to be placed. S7.13.2 Position the platform surface 90 S7.7.4.3 Adjust the control of the test de- mm ± 10 mm (3.5 in ± 0.4 in) above the ground vice to a setting that provides maximum ac- level loading position. Apply 7,117 N (1,600 celeration and steer the test device from lbf) to the wheelchair retention device in a side-to-side and corner-to-corner of the lift direction parallel to both the platform lift platform, attempting to steer the test device and platform reference planes. Attain the off the platform. After each attempt, when force within 1 minute after beginning to the wheelchair test device stalls due to con- apply it. tact with a barrier, release the control to Neutral and realign the test device to the starting position. Repeat this sequence at * * * * * any level that is greater than 90 mm ± 10 mm (3.5 in ± 0.4 in) above the ground level loading S7.14.1 Perform the test procedures as position and less than 38 mm ± 10 mm (1.5 in specified in S7.14.2 through S7.14.4 to deter- ± 0.4 in) below the vehicle floor level loading mine compliance with S6.5.3. position. Repeat this sequence at 38 mm ± 10 mm (1.5 in ± 0.4 in) below the vehicle floor * * * * * level loading position. S7.7.4.4 Next position the platform sur- face 38 mm ± 10 mm (1.5 in ± 0.4 in) below the § 571.404 Standard No. 404; Platform vehicle floor level loading position. lift installations in motor vehicles. S7.7.4.5 Reposition the test device on the S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- platform surface with its plane of symmetry quirements for vehicles equipped with coincident with the lift reference plane with- in ± 10 mm (± 0.4 in), its forward direction of platform lifts used to assist persons travel outboard away from the vehicle, and with limited mobility in entering or its position on the platform as far rearward leaving a vehicle. as the wheelchair inner roll-stop or vehicle S2. Purpose. The purpose of this body will allow it to be placed. standard is to prevent injuries and fa- S7.7.4.6 Adjust the control of the test de- talities to passengers and bystanders vice to a setting that provides maximum ac- celeration and steer the test device from during the operation of platform lifts side-to-side and corner-to-corner of the lift installed in motor vehicles. platform, attempting to steer the test device S3. Application. This standard applies off the platform. After each attempt, when to motor vehicles equipped with a plat- the wheelchair test device stalls due to con- form lift to carry passengers into and tact with a barrier, release the control to Neutral and realign the test device to the out of the vehicle. starting position. Repeat this sequence at S4. Requirements. any level that is greater than 90 mm ± 10 mm S4.1 Installation requirements. (3.5 in ± 0.4 in) above the ground level loading S4.1.1 Lift-equipped buses, school position and less than 38 mm ± 10 mm (1.5 in buses, and MPVs other than motor ± 0.4 in) below the vehicle floor level loading position. Repeat this sequence at 38 mm ± 10 homes with a GVWR greater than 4,536 mm (1.5 in ± 0.4 in) below the vehicle floor kg (10,000 lb) must be equipped with a level loading position. public use lift certified as meeting Fed- eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard * * * * * 826

VerDate Aug<04>2004 02:28 Nov 09, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00826 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Nat’l Highway Traffic Safety Admin., DOT § 571.500

No. 403, Lift Systems for Motor Vehi- 2. At 69 FR 58855, Oct. 1, 2004, § 571.404 was cles (49 CFR 571.403). amended by revising S3 and S4.3 and adding S4.1.2 Lift-equipped motor vehicles, S4.1.5, effective Dec. 27, 2004. For the conven- other than ones subject to paragraph ience of the user the revised and added text is set forth as follows: S4.1.1, must be equipped with a plat- form lift certified as meeting either § 571.404 Standard No. 404; Platform lift in- the public use lift or private use lift re- stallations in motor vehicles. quirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 403, Lift Systems * * * * * for Motor Vehicles (49 CFR 571.403). S3. Application. This standard applies to S4.1.3 Platform lifts must be in- motor vehicles equipped with a platform lift stalled in the vehicle in accordance designed to carry standing passengers who with the installation instructions or may be aided by canes or walkers, as well as, procedures provided pursuant to S6.13 persons seated in wheelchairs, scooters and of Standard 403. The vehicle must be of other mobility aids, into and out of the vehi- a type identified in the installation in- cle. structions as appropriate for the plat- form lift as certified by the platform * * * * * lift manufacturer. S4.1.5 Platform lighting on public use lifts. S4.1.4 The platform lift, as installed, Public use lifts must have a light or a set of must continue to comply with all the lights that provide at least 54 lm/m2 (5 lm/ applicable requirements of Federal sqft) of luminance on all portions of the sur- Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 403, face of the platform, throughout the range of Lift Systems for Motor Vehicles (49 passenger operation. The luminance on all CFR 571.403). portions of the surface of the passenger-un- S4.2 Vehicle owner’s manual insert re- loading ramp at ground level must be at 2 quirements. If the vehicle is equipped least 11 lm/m (1 lm/sqft). with an owner’s manual, the owner’s manual must contain the inserts pro- * * * * * vided by the lift manufacturer pursu- S4.3 Control panel switches. ant to S6.12 of 49 CFR 571.403. S4.3 Control system. * * * * * S4.3.1 Instructions regarding the platform lift operating procedures, in- § 571.500 Standard No. 500; Low-speed cluding backup operations, as specified vehicles. by S6.7.8 of 49 CFR 571.403, must be per- S1. Scope. This standard specifies re- manently affixed to a location adjacent quirements for low-speed vehicles. to the controls. S2. Purpose. The purpose of this S4.3.2 Public use lift: In addition to standard is to ensure that low-speed meeting the requirements of S4.3.1, for vehicles operated on the public streets, vehicles equipped with public use lifts, roads, and highways are equipped with as defined in 49 CFR 571.403, any and all the minimum motor vehicle equipment controls provided for the lift by the appropriate for motor vehicle safety. platform lift manufacturer other than S3. Applicability. This standard ap- those provided for back-up operation of plies to low-speed vehicles. the platform lift specified in S5.9 of 49 S4. [Reserved] CFR 571.403, must be located together S5. Requirements. and in a position such that the control (a) When tested in accordance with operator has a direct, unobstructed test conditions in S6 and test proce- view of the platform lift passenger and/ dures in S7, the maximum speed at- or their mobility aid throughout the tainable in 1.6 km (1 mile) by each low- lift’s range of passenger operation. Ad- speed vehicle shall not more than 40 ditional power controls and controls kilometers per hour (25 miles per hour). for back-up operation of the lift may be (b) Each low-speed vehicle shall be located in other positions. equipped with: [67 FR 79451, Dec. 27, 2002] (1) Headlamps, EFFECTIVE DATE NOTES: 1. At 67 FR 79451, (2) Front and rear turn signal lamps, Dec. 27, 2002, § 571.404 was added, effective (3) Taillamps, Dec. 27, 2004. (4) Stop lamps,

827

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00827 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T Pt. 572 49 CFR Ch. V (10–1–04 Edition)

(5) Reflex reflectors: one red on each mass of 78 kg (170 pounds), including side as far to the rear as practicable, driver and instrumentation. and one red on the rear, S6.3.2. No adjustment, repair or re- (6) An exterior mirror mounted on placement of any component is allowed the driver’s side of the vehicle and ei- after the start of the first performance ther an exterior mirror mounted on the test. passenger’s side of the vehicle or an in- S6.3.3. Tire inflation pressure. Cold in- terior mirror, flation pressure is not more than the (7) A parking brake, maximum permissible pressure molded (8) A windshield that conforms to the on the tire sidewall. Federal motor vehicle safety standard S6.3.4. Break-in. The vehicle com- on glazing materials (49 CFR 571.205). pletes the manufacturer’s rec- (9) A VIN that conforms to the re- ommended break-in agenda as a min- quirements of part 565 Vehicle Identi- imum condition prior to beginning the fication Number of this chapter, and performance tests. (10) A Type 1 or Type 2 seat belt as- S6.3.5. Vehicle openings. All vehicle sembly conforming to Sec. 571.209 of openings (doors, windows, hood, trunk, this part, Federal Motor Vehicle Safety convertible top, cargo doors, etc.) are Standard No. 209, Seat belt assemblies, closed except as required for instru- installed at each designated seating po- mentation purposes. sition. S6.3.6. Battery powered vehicles. Prior S6. General test conditions. Each vehi- to beginning the performance tests, cle must meet the performance limit propulsion batteries are at the state of specified in S5(a) under the following charge recommended by the manufac- test conditions. turer or, if the manufacturer has made S6.1. Ambient conditions. no recommendation, at a state of S6.1.1. Ambient temperature. The ambi- charge of not less than 95 percent. No ent temperature is any temperature be- further charging of any propulsion bat- tween 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F). tery is permissible. S6.1.2. Wind speed. The wind speed is S7. Test procedure. Each vehicle must not greater than 5 m/s (11.2 mph). meet the performance limit specified in S6.2. Road test surface. S5(a) under the following test proce- S6.2.1. Pavement friction. Unless oth- dure. The maximum speed performance erwise specified, the road test surface is determined by measuring the max- produces a peak friction coefficient imum attainable vehicle speed at any (PFC) of 0.9 when measured using a point in a distance of 1.6 km (1.0 mile) standard reference test tire that meets from a standing start and repeated in the specifications of American Society the opposite direction within 30 min- for Testing and Materials (ASTM) utes. E1136, ‘‘Standard Specification for A [63 FR 33216, June 17, 1998, as amended at 68 Radial Standard Reference Test Tire,’’ FR 43972, July 25, 2003] in accordance with ASTM Method E 1337–90, ‘‘Standard Test Method for De- PART 572—ANTHROPOMORPHIC termining Longitudinal Peak Braking TEST DEVICES Coefficient of Paved Surfaces Using a Standard Reference Test Tire,’’ at a Subpart A—General speed of 64.4 km/h (40.0 mph), without water delivery (incorporated by ref- Sec. erence; see 49 CFR 571.5). 572.1 Scope. S6.2.2. Gradient. The test surface has 572.2 Purpose. 572.3 Application. not more than a 1 percent gradient in 572.4 Terminology. the direction of testing and not more than a 2 percent gradient perpendicular Subpart B—50th Percentile Male to the direction of testing. S6.2.3. Lane width. The lane width is 572.5 General description. 572.6 Head. not less than 3.5 m (11.5 ft). 572.7 Neck. S6.3. Vehicle conditions. 572.8 Thorax. S6.3.1. The test weight for maximum 572.9 Lumbar spine, abdomen, and pelvis. speed is unloaded vehicle weight plus a 572.10 Limbs.

828

VerDate Aug<04>2004 06:57 Oct 20, 2004 Jkt 203209 PO 00000 Frm 00828 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\203209T.XXX 203209T